please help with accounting homework 495331

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

125000 210000 134000 240000 5000 90000 70000 430000 2000 11000 834000 Summerborn Manufacturing, Co., completed the following transactions during 2012: Jan 16 Declared a cash dividend on the 5%, $100 per preferred stock (900 shares outstanding). Declared a $0.30 per share dividend on the 80,000 shares of common stock outstanding. The date of record is January 31, and the payment due date is February 15. Feb 15 Paid the cash dividends. Jun 10 Split common stock 2 for 1. Before the split, Summerborn had 80,000 shares of $6 par common stock outstanding. Jul 30 Distributed a 50% stock dividend on the common stock. The market value of the common stock was $9 per share. Oct 26 Purchased 1,000 shares of treasury stock at $13 per share. Nov 8 Sold 500 shares of treasury stock for $15 per share. Nov 30 Sold 300 shares of treasury stock for $8 per share. The capital structure of Blacksmith, Inc., at December 31, 2011, included 18,000 shares of $1 preferred stock and 38,000 shares of common stock. Common stock outstanding during 2012 totaled 38,000 shares. Income from continuing operations during 2012 was $108,000. The company discontinued a segment of the business at a gain of $26,000 and also had an extraordinary gain of $12,000. The Blacksmith board of directors restricts $99,000 of retained earnings for contingencies. Retained earnings at December 31, 2011, were $99,000, and the company declared preferred dividends of $18,000 during 2012. 1. Record the transactions in Summerborn’s general journal. 1. Compute Blacksmith’s earnings per share for 2012. Start with income from continuing operations. All income and loss amounts are net of income tax. 2. Show two ways of reporting Blacksmith’s retained earnings restriction. The following information was taken from the records of Clarkson Motorsports, Inc., at November 30, 2012: Selling expenses General expenses Income from discontinued operations Retained earnings, beginning Cost of goods sold Net sales…

neel 495284

Fin Forum due Tuesday Discuss the relationship between bond prices and interest rates. What impact do changing interest rates have on the price of long-term bonds versus short-term bonds? Quiz due Saturday Bus Forum due Tuesday Identify one global marketing strategy and using a specific organization as an example, identify how they successfully implemented the strategy to market globally. Bus assignment due Saturday Create a global human resource strategy to recruit, select, and train an expatriate for a position of your choice.

Document Preview:

Fin Forum due Tuesday Discuss the relationship between bond prices and interest rates. What impact do changing interest rates have on the price of long-term bonds versus short-term bonds? Quiz due Saturday Bus Forum due Tuesday Identify one global marketing strategy and using a specific organization as an example, identify how they successfully implemented the strategy to market globally. Bus assignment due Saturday Create a global human resource strategy to recruit, select, and train an expatriate for a position of your choice.   Include (but not limited): recruitment, selection, interviewing, hiring, and training. Use a specific company/industry to focus your recruitment efforts?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

neel 495285

Find a company that has been in the news recently.  Using the material that you read in Appendix B of “The business guide to legal literacy: what every manager should know about the law” write a 200 – 300 word essay where you identify at least two legal issues that affect the company.  Clearly list each legal topic that you are discussing.   Incorporate the required readings and support your statements.  Citations for all material used should be in APA format. Post your essay in this discussions thread.  You do not need a title page. Please do not use attachments in the discussions.

Document Preview:

Find a company that has been in the news recently.  Using the material that you read in Appendix B of “The business guide to legal literacy: what every manager should know about the law” write a 200 – 300 word essay where you identify at least two legal issues that affect the company.  Clearly list each legal topic that you are discussing.   Incorporate the required readings and support your statements.  Citations for all material used should be in APA format. Post your essay in this discussions thread.  You do not need a title page. Please do not use attachments in the discussions.   Your initial reply to the discussion question should be posted no later than Wednesday.  Your discussions with your classmates should be posted throughout the week.  You should engage in discussions with a minimum of two classmates.  Replies to classmates must be substantive, at least 75 words and incorporate concepts and materials that you have learned this week.??????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

for neel 495286

2013 2012 1000000 1200000 450000 600000 550000 600000 600000 450000 -50000 150000 2013 2012 380000 376000 -20000 -16000 360000 360000 480000 440000 3400000 3080000 1600000 1440000 780000 680000 Problem 1 Problem 2 Sales Cost of goods sold Gross margin Operating expenses Net income % Sales Comments (25 points) Accounts receivable Inventory Allowance for doubtful accounts Net accounts receivable Required: Compute (1) accounts receivable turnover for 2013, (2) the inventory turnover for 2013, and (3) the net margin for 2012.

Document Preview:

2013 2012 1000000 1200000 450000 600000 550000 600000 600000 450000 -50000 150000 2013 2012 380000 376000 -20000 -16000 360000 360000 480000 440000 3400000 3080000 1600000 1440000 780000 680000 Problem 1 Problem 2 Sales Cost of goods sold Gross margin Operating expenses Net income % Sales Comments (25 points) Accounts receivable Inventory Allowance for doubtful accounts Net accounts receivable Required: Compute (1) accounts receivable turnover for 2013, (2) the inventory turnover for 2013, and (3) the net margin for 2012. Balance sheet items Income statement items Required: Express each income statement component as a percentage of sales, and comment on the trends in each line from 2012 to 2013. ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

for neel 495287

120000 148000 124000 24000 310000 -46000 306000 0 0 0 0 0 Problem 1 Problem 2 (25 points) Beginning inventory, raw materials Purchases of raw materials Plus: Purchases of raw materials Raw materials available for use Less: Ending raw materials inventory Cost of direct raw materials used Manufacturing overhead Total manufacturing costs Total work in process Cost of goods manufactured Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured Break-even point in units Fixed Costs Break-even point in dollars Break-even point in units * selling price Required: JZ is a musician who is conside

Document Preview:

120000 148000 124000 24000 310000 -46000 306000 0 0 0 0 0 Problem 1 Problem 2 (25 points) Beginning inventory, raw materials Purchases of raw materials Plus: Purchases of raw materials Raw materials available for use Less: Ending raw materials inventory Cost of direct raw materials used Manufacturing overhead Total manufacturing costs Total work in process Cost of goods manufactured Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured Break-even point in units Fixed Costs Break-even point in dollars Break-even point in units * selling price Required: JZ is a musician who is considering whether to independently produce and sell a CD. JZ estimates fixed costs of $10,000 and variable costs of $4.00 per unit. The expected selling price is $12 per CD. What is JZ’s break-even point in units and dollars? Required: Use the following information to complete the below schedule of cost of goods manufactured. Ending work-in-process inventory Direct labor Plus: Beginning work-in-process inventory Less: Ending work-in-process inventory Contribution margin per unit ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

for neel 495288

100000 -50000 50000 25000 30000 5000 8000 11000 9000 4500 4 4 36000 18000 Problem 1 Problem 2 Direct or Indirect? (20 points) (30 points) Salary of manufacturing supervisor Wages of manufacturing worker Telephone costs Rent Material used in production Old Machine Original cost Accumulated depreciation Market value (now) Book value Salvage value (in 5 years) Annual depreciation expense Times number of years New machine Required: GH Company is trying to decide whether to replace a current piece of machinery with a new machine.

Document Preview:

100000 -50000 50000 25000 30000 5000 8000 11000 9000 4500 4 4 36000 18000 Problem 1 Problem 2 Direct or Indirect? (20 points) (30 points) Salary of manufacturing supervisor Wages of manufacturing worker Telephone costs Rent Material used in production Old Machine Original cost Accumulated depreciation Market value (now) Book value Salvage value (in 5 years) Annual depreciation expense Times number of years New machine Required: GH Company is trying to decide whether to replace a current piece of machinery with a new machine. Using the below data, determine the relevant costs of the old machine and the new machine. Should GH Company purchase the new machine? Total operating expenses Per year Operating expenses Required: Identify each of the following as either a direct or indirect cost. ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

for neel only this assignmet plus quiz due by tomorrow midnight 495290

The Unit 5 Assignment includes the following textbook problems:

Exercise 14-56 found on page 629 in your textbook

Problem 15-58 found on page 690 in your textbook

Submit your assignment using a single Excel workbook. Place each exercise/problem on a separate tab (sheet).

You must properly format Excel for the Journal Entries. And, for any discussion component (as in Part 2 of Problem 15-58), Insert a Textbox and use that to present your discussion on the Excel spreadsheet.

When you have completed the assignment, upload your completed Excel spreadsheet to the Unit 5 Assignment Dropbox before Tuesday, 11:59 PM (ET) of Unit 5. Name your assignment filename using this format:

LastName_FirstName_Unit#_AssignmentName. For example, the Unit 5 assignment would be named:

Smith_John_Unit05_Assignment

Assignments submitted late will be subject to the Late Policy described in your Syllabus.

Attachments:

neel only due may 28th by midnight 495291

The presentation should include 10 12 slides. The first slide must be a Title Slide, and
the Final Slide must be your Reference List. Properly attributed sources are essential.

To look at CASE STUDY 1 go to my school site and go to dropbox and you will see Unit 2 Assignment 2: Case Study. This assignment is part 2 of that case study.

Document Preview:

Unit 4 – Assignment 2 [GB519 | Measurement and Decision Making] 1 Case Study | Part 2 Part Two of the Case Study Project (Part One was completed in Unit 02). Course Portfolio Project -Turn in Part 2 of the project The second and final part of this project is due at the end of Unit 04. Part Two of the Case Study Project is a PowerPoint (PPT) presentation with voiceover. The Voiceover will be the narrative you would be presenting as if this were a live presentation. You will, in essence, be making a presentation to the Board of Directors of your organization. Your Unit 02 Part One of the Case Study will be the basis for your PPT presentation. Begin with a brief introduction of the organization. Be sure to identify whether it is a manufacturing or a service organization. Detail briefly the products or services offered by your organization, the company’s market niche and/or customer base. Keep in mind that the members of the board may or may not have read the report you completed in Parts 1 of the project. Even though this will be a brief presentation, it should include all essential information and data. Continue with a discussion of the Balanced Scorecard (BSC). Present all 4 performance dimensions thoroughly. Discuss all Critical Success Factors CSF). You may want to include the charts, tables or graphs. Then, discuss the significant costs to your organization. Next, present and discuss the Strategy Map and how it relates to your BSC. A properly designed Strategy Map is essential to this presentation. Include a discussion of sustainability. Include a formal conclusion that discusses the key strengths and weaknesses of the organization. Also discuss your recommendations for the organizational strategy. The presentation should include 10 – 12 slides. The first slide must be a Title Slide, and the Final Slide must be your Reference List. Properly attributed sources are essential. The presentation itself (voiceover) should be 8-10 minutes long. In addition to recording…

Attachments:

for neel only due by tuesday midnight 495292

The Unit 6 Assignment includes the following textbook problems:

BRIEF Exercise 18-22 found on page 825 of your textbook

Problem 20-38 found on page 920-921 in the textbook

Submit your assignment using a single Excel workbook. Place each exercise/problem on a separate tab (sheet).

You must properly format Excel for the Journal Entries. And, for any discussion component (as in Part 2 of Problem 20-38), Insert a Textbox and use that to present your discussion on the Excel spreadsheet.

When you have completed the assignment, upload your completed Excel spreadsheet to the Unit 6 Assignment Dropbox before Tuesday, 11:59 PM (ET) of Unit 6. Name your assignment filename using this format:

LastName_FirstName_Unit#_AssignmentName. For example, the Unit 6 assignment would be named:

Smith_John_Unit06_Assignment

Document Preview:

Cost Management5 a s t r a t e g i c e m p h a s i s Fifth Edition Blocher | Stout | Cokins Cost Management A Strategic Emphasis Cost Management A Strategic Emphasis Fifth Edition Edward J. Blocher University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill Kenan-Flagler Business School David E. Stout Youngstown State University Williamson College of Business Administration Gary Cokins Strategist, Performance Management Solutions SAS/Worldwide Strategy COST MANAGEMENT: A STRATEGIC EMPHASIS Published by McGraw-Hill/Irwin, a business unit of The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc., 1221 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY, 10020. Copyright © 2010, 2008, 2005, 2002, 1999 by The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without the prior written consent of The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc., including, but not limited to, in any network or other electronic storage or transmission, or broadcast for distance learning. Some ancillaries, including electronic and print components, may not be available to customers outside the United States. This book is printed on acid-free paper. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 DOW/DOW 0 9 ISBN 978-0-07-352694-2 MHID 0-07-352694-0 Vice president and editor-in-chief: Brent Gordon Editorial director: Stewart Mattson Executive editor: Richard T. Hercher, Jr. Editorial coordinator: Rebecca Mann Marketing manager: Kathleen Klehr Senior project manager: Bruce Gin Production supervisor: Michael McCormick Designer: Matt Diamond Senior media project manager: Greg Bates Cover design: Jenny El-Shamy Interior design: Matt Diamond Typeface: 10/12 Times Roman Compositor: Laserwords Private Limited Printer: R. R. Donnelley Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Blocher, Edward. Cost management : a strategic emphasis /Edward J. Blocher, David E. Stout, Gary Cokins.—5th ed. p. cm. Includes index. ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352694-2 (alk. paper)…

Attachments:

neel only excel answers due at 8 00 p m 2 hrs from right now 495293

PUT MY NAME ON THE ASSIGNMENT at the top of the page.

Document Preview:

1 5/15/2012 60 7/14/2012 5/15/2012 94000 94000 7/14/2012 1880 94000 95880 94000 0.12 0.16666666666666666 1880 1 1700000 0.09 0.5 76500 2 2011 1700000 1700000 6/30/2012 76500 76500 76500 76500 3 2011 1666000 34000 1700000 1734000 34000 1700000 220000 400000 0.55000000000000004 720000 400000 1.8 2 1 144000 144000 2 144000 120000 24000 3 144000 48000 96000 1 166.6 10 16.66 2 90 9 10 3 84.5 6.5 13 4 240 40 6 2a. Cash 2b. Cash Repaid note plus interest. 60/360 Cash Notes Payable Interest Expense* Notes Payable Cash * Principal x Interest rate x Fraction of year Total interest Borrowed cash – issued note. Dr Cr Exercise 9-4 GB 518 Unit 5 Assignment Student: Part Start Date Term of Note Maturity Maturity date Computation = Description <–There is no Check Date for Part 1.. 1a. 1b. Exercise 10-16 Exercise 10-1 (15 minutes) Journal entries (a) Jan. 1 Bonds Payable Sold bonds at par. (b) Bond Interest Expense Paid semiannual interest on bonds. (c) Dec. 31 Jan. 1 Cash* Discount on Bonds Payable Sold bonds at 98. *($1,700,000 x 0.98) Premium on Bonds Payable Sold bonds at 102. *($1,700,000 x 1.02) GB 518 Unit 05 Assignments Part Value Par Semi- Annual Interest % Portion of Year Annual $ Semiannual cash interest payment = Feb. 20 Common Stock, No-Par Value Issued common stock for cash. Common Stock, $20 Par Value Contributed Capital in Excess of Par Value, Common Stock Common Stock, $8 Stated Value Contributed Capital in Excess of Stated Value, Common Stock GB 518 Unit 05 Assignment Exercise 11-2 Stock Divided by Price-Earnings Ratio ¸ = Market Value/Share EPS GB518 Unit 5 Assignment Total Liabilitites Assets Debt-to- Equity Current debt-to-equity ratio = Enter the analysis in text box. The Template is provided to help you complete your assignment successfully. Enter you Name here ======> There are hints and guidance within the…

for neel only excel document due at 8 00 p m 4hrs and 20mins from now today 495294

You have to put my name on it….and answer EVERY QUESTION!!!

Document Preview:

0 1 00:00:00 5/15/2012 7/14/2012 0.12 0 1 0 2 2011 6/30/2012 3 2011 0 2 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 2a. Cash 2b. Cash Repaid note plus interest. 60/360 Cash Notes Payable Interest Expense* Notes Payable Cash * Principal x Interest rate x Fraction of year Total interest Borrowed cash – issued note. Dr Cr Exercise 9-4 GB 518 Unit 5 Assignment Student: Part Start Date Term of Note Maturity Maturity date Computation = Description <–There is no Check Date for Part 1.. 1a. 1b. Exercise 10-16 Exercise 10-1 (15 minutes) Journal entries (a) Jan. 1 Bonds Payable Sold bonds at par. (b) Bond Interest Expense Paid semiannual interest on bonds. (c) Dec. 31 Jan. 1 Cash* Discount on Bonds Payable Sold bonds at 98. *($1,700,000 x 0.98) Premium on Bonds Payable Sold bonds at 102. *($1,700,000 x 1.02) GB 518 Unit 05 Assignments Part Value Par Semi- Annual Interest % Portion of Year Annual $ Semiannual cash interest payment = Feb. 20 Common Stock, No-Par Value Issued common stock for cash. Common Stock, $20 Par Value Contributed Capital in Excess of Par Value, Common Stock Common Stock, $8 Stated Value Contributed Capital in Excess of Stated Value, Common Stock GB 518 Unit 05 Assignment Exercise 11-2 Stock Divided by Price-Earnings Ratio ¸ = Market Value/Share EPS GB518 Unit 5 Assignment Total Liabilitites Assets Debt-to- Equity Current debt-to-equity ratio = Enter the analysis in text box. The Template is provided to help you complete your assignment successfully. Enter you Name here ======> There are hints and guidance within the templates. For Example, some fields will have a note attached – as designated by the red triangle in the upper right corner of the cell. Some final cell totals or answers will give you a notice if the answer is correct. For example, if you have gotten the right answer, you may see a note “Correct”, or “Good!” appear beneath or to the side of that cell. But, not all…

Attachments:

neel only pg 45 for map 495295

Document Preview:

33 C H A P T E R T W O Implementing Strategy: The Value Chain, the Balanced Scorecard, and the Strategy Map After studying this chapter, you should be able to . . . 1. Explain how to implement a competitive strategy by using Strengths-Weaknesses-Opportunities-Threats (SWOT) Analysis 2. Explain how to implement a competitive strategy by focusing on the execution of goals 3. Explain how to implement a competitive strategy using value-chain analysis 4. Explain how to implement a competitive strategy using the balanced scorecard 5. Explain how to expand the balanced scorecard by integrating sustainability Amazon.com typifies successful competition in the new economy far more than many firms. Some would say that Amazon invented the Internet retailing business model that all other dotcoms are struggling to copy. Amazon understands well the strategy (i.e., business model) of developing and maintaining customer loyalty, which is the key to success in retail e-business, and implements it effectively. Speaking of Jeff Bezos, the founder and CEO of Amazon.com , Robert Hof of Business-Week writes: “Jeff Bezos . . . was one of the few dot-com leaders to understand that sweating the details of Internet technologies would make all the difference. Amazon wasn’t the first store on the Web. But Bezos beat rivals in inventing or rolling out new Internet technologies that made shopping online faster, easier, and more personal than traditional retail. He offered customized recommendations based on other buyers’ purchases, let people buy an item with just one mouse click, and created personalized storefronts for each customer.” 1 The amazing thing about Amazon is that it created such a successful strategy for e-commerce at a time when there was no model to use as a guide. As Hof suggests, Amazon’s success appears to come from its ability to deliver excellent customer service with very low prices. It has differentiated itself through efficient and error-free operating systems that provide…

Attachments:

for neel only readings 495297

PLEASE ANSWER ALL OF THESE QUESTIONS AND DEFINITRLY SET UP THE FORMAT CORRECTLY…

The Unit 1 Assignment includes the following textbook problems:

Problem 1-32 found on page 28 in your textbook

Problem 2-55 found on page 60 in your textbook

Problem 3-50 found on page 86 in your textbook

Problem 3-51 (Case A ONLY) found on page 86 in your textbook

Your assignment must be submitted in a single Word document. APA formatting is required, including a Title Page with properly formatted running head. Several documents to help you create the proper APA formatting for the title page, running head and the reference list are located in Extra Extra. In addition, the Kaplan Library has a series of great tutorials to help with formal writing.

The individual problem questions should be used as headings to organize your analysis. Sub-headings may certainly be used within each question for additional organization of your analysis. A properly formatted Reference List is required, and all references in the list must appear within the body of your Assignment in properly formatted citations.

When you have completed the assignment, upload your completed Word document to the Unit 1 Assignment Dropbox before Tuesday, 11:59 PM (ET) of Unit 1. Name your assignment filename using this format: LastName_FirstName_Unit#_AssignmentName. For example, the Unit 1 assignment would be named:

Smith_John_Unit01_Assignment

Assignments submitted late will be subject to the Late Policy described in your Syllabus.

nissan usa guarantees automobiles against defects for 4 years or 50 000 miles whiche 495299

Nissan USA guarantees automobiles against defects for 4 years or 50,000 miles, whichever comes first. Suppose Nissan can expect warranty costs during the 4 year period to add up to 3% of sales.
Assume that Lakeland Nissan in Lakeland, florida, made sales of 500,000 during 2000. Lakeland Nissan received cash for 10% of the sales and took notes receivable for the remainder. Payments to satisfy customer warranty claims totaled 12,000 during 2000.
1) Record the sales, warranty expense, and warranty payments for Lakeland Nissan. Ignore any reimbursements that Lakeland Nissan may receive from Nissan USA.
2) Post to the Estimated Warranty Payable T-account. The Beginning balance was 10,000. At the end of 2000, how much in estimated warranty payable does Lakeland Nissan owe its customers?

Document Preview:

Req. 2 Req. 1 Name: Section: Date: Journal ACCOUNT TITLES AND EXPLANATION DEBIT CREDIT DATE Req. 1 Req. 2 S8-3 Req. 2 Req. 1 Name: Section: Date: Journal ACCOUNT TITLES AND EXPLANATION DEBIT CREDIT DATE Req. 1 Req. 2 S8-3 ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

only for accountingexpert4u 495300

Financial analysis project! check the uploaded documents.

Thanks.

Document Preview:

Last Name First Name Company Title of the financial position/balance sheet statement? Title of the financial performance/income statement? Fiscal year end of the statements? Name of the external auditors and date of the audit opinion? What makes you think your company is a retailer? Company Choice ACTG 201 Section ____??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

assume your company has 25 000 available to invest for 10 years the investment may b 495301

1. Assume your company has $25,000 available to invest for 10 years. The investment may be broken down into $5,000 increments. 2. Make an assumption about the company’s risk-return trade-off tolerance. Write a statement about your assumption. 3. Choose investments from the following list that meet the company’s risk tolerance: • Cash-on-hand checking account, 0% interest • Savings account at 1½% interest, compounded annually • CD’s at 3%, compounded bi-annually • Bonds at 7% interest, compounded bi-annually • Mutual funds at 10%, compounded quarterly • Stocks at 15%, compounded quarterly For example: you may choose $5,000 in Cash-on-hand; $10,000 invested in CD’s; and $10,000 invested in Bonds. 4. Using Table 12.1 “Future Value of $1 at Compound Interest” inPractical Business Math Procedures (text), calculate the value of the investment in each account after the 10 year time period for each investment chosen. Compute the total for the investment. 5. After you have organized your thoughts, post your recommendation for how the company should invest the $25,000 to the course Forum. Provide an argument for each investment you made, supporting your choices using the risk-return trade-off assumption you made for the company. Copy this information to the financial plan final report template.

Document Preview:

Assignment 4.1: The Value of Compound Interest for Investments In this course project assignment, you will research the value of compounding interest (or reinvesting all gains) for investments. Click on the “Project” tab on the top navigation bar for details on the course project. Procedure Assume your company has $25,000 available to invest for 10 years. The investment may be broken down into $5,000 increments. Make an assumption about the company’s risk-return trade-off tolerance. Write a statement about your assumption. Choose investments from the following list that meet the company’s risk tolerance: Cash-on-hand checking account, 0% interest Savings account at 1½% interest, compounded annually CD’s at 3%, compounded bi-annually Bonds at 7% interest, compounded bi-annually Mutual funds at 10%, compounded quarterly Stocks at 15%, compounded quarterly For example: you may choose $5,000 in Cash-on-hand; $10,000 invested in CD’s; and $10,000 invested in Bonds. Using Table 12.1 “Future Value of $1 at Compound Interest” inPractical Business Math Procedures (text), calculate the value of the investment in each account after the 10 year time period for each investment chosen. Compute the total for the investment. After you have organized your thoughts, post your recommendation for how the company should invest the $25,000 to the course Forum. Provide an argument for each investment you made, supporting your choices using the risk-return trade-off assumption you made for the company. Copy this information to the financial plan final report template. Assignment 4.3: Investment Strategy In this assignment you will create an investment plan for your project business, supporting your analysis using personal experience, website searches, and/or interviews. Click on the “Project” tab in the top navigation bar for details on the course project. Procedure Research the different types of investment strategies available to your company found online, in…

Attachments:

only for siddharth 495302

Week Three Assignment Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Overhead application: Working backward The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours.

Document Preview:

Week Three Assignment Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Overhead application: Working backward The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review: Division A Division B Actual machine hours 26,500 ? Estimated machine hours 20,000 ? Overhead application rate $5.00 $6.00 Actual overhead $120,000 ? Estimated overhead ? $90,000 Applied overhead ? $87,000 Over- (under-) applied overhead ? $8,500 Find the unknowns for each of the divisions. 2. Computations using a job order system Spencer Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger; Work in process $ 36,200 Finished goods 86,900 Cost of goods sold 130,700 Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($22,400) and no. 103 ($13,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $116,500. These figures are subdivided as follows: Direct Materials Direct Labor Job No. Amount Job No. Amount 101 $6,000 101 $7,800 117 18,500 103 20,800 116 34,200 117 44,000 Other 36,800 116 18,000 $95,500 Other 25,900 $116,500 Job no. 117 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $23,000 and $17,400, respectively. General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct…

Attachments:

only for siddharth 495303

Week Four Assignment Please complete the following 3 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Comprehensive budgeting The balance sheet of Williams Company as of December 31, 20X8, follows. WILLIAMS COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 12X8 Assets Cash $4,595 Accounts receivable 10,000 Finished goods (575 units x $7.

Document Preview:

Week Four Assignment Please complete the following 3 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Comprehensive budgeting The balance sheet of Williams Company as of December 31, 20X8, follows. WILLIAMS COMPANY ??Balance Sheet ??December 31, 12X8 ??Assets ????Cash ??$4,595 ??Accounts receivable ??10,000??Finished goods (575 units x $7.00) ??4,025??Direct materials (2,760 units x $0.50) ??1,380??Plant & equipment ?$50,000 ???Less: Accumulated depreciation ?10,000?40,000??Total assets ??$60,000 ??Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity ????Accounts payable to suppliers ??$14,000 ??Common stock ?$25,000 ???Retained earnings ?21,000?46,000??Total liabilities &. stockholders’ equity ??$60,000 ?? The following information has been extracted from the firm’s accounting records: All sales are made on account at $20 per unit. Sixty percent of the sales are collected in the month of sale; the remaining 40% are collected in the following month. Forecasted sales for the first five months of 20X9 are: January, 1,600 units,- February, 1,700 units; March, 1,900 units; April, 2,100 units; May, 2,200 units. Management wants to maintain the finished goods inventory at 30% of the following month’s sales. Williams uses four units of direct material in each finished unit. The direct material price has been stable and is expected to remain so over the next six months. Management wants to maintain the ending direct materials inventory at 60% of the following month’s production needs. Seventy percent of all purchases are paid in the month of purchase; the remaining 30% are paid in the subsequent month. Williams’ product requires 30 minutes of direct labor time. Each hour of direct labor costs $9. Instructions: Rounding computations to the nearest dollar,…

Attachments:

only for siddharth 495304

Week Five Assignment Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Basic present value calculations Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar: A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at an 11% rate of return.

Document Preview:

Week Five Assignment Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Basic present value calculations Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar: A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at an 11% rate of return. An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at an 11% rate of return. A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 12% rate of return. An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has an 11% rate of return. 2. Cash flow calculations and net present value On January 2, 20X7, Brian Rein invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.70 per share in 20X7 and 20X8; the dividend was raised to $3.30 per share in 20X9. On December 31, 20X9, Rein sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,100. Rein uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments. Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note: Rein is entitled to the 20X9 dividend. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar. Given the results of part (b), should Rein have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain. 3. Net present value The City of Brighton is studying a 550-acre site on Route 401 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows: Purchase cost: $400 per acre Site preparation: $180,000 The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Brighton, which shares a facility in…

Attachments:

only for solution guru he does excellent work 495306

You have to strictly follow the project template that I uploaded.Please acknowledge when you receive it .You can take some more time ,may be you can submit tomorrow.I want an excellent grade

Document Preview:

Your Course Project Financial Statement Analysis Project — A Comparative Analysis of Kohl’s Corporation and J.C. Penney Corporation Below is the link for the financial statements for Kohl’s Corporation for the 2010 fiscal year ending January 29, 2011. Under the term Groupings Filter, change the term All Forms to Annual Filings using the drop-down arrow and press Search. You should then scroll down and select the 10k dated 3/18/2011 and choose to download in Word or PDF format. http://www.kohlscorporation.com/InvestorRelations/sec-filings.htmhttp://www.kohlscorporation.com/InvestorRelations/sec-filings.htm Below is the link for the financial statements for J.C. Penney Corporation for the 2010 fiscal year ending January 29, 2011. Under the term Groupings Filter, change the term All Forms to Annual Filings using the drop-down arrow and press Search. You should then scroll down and select the 10k dated 3/29/2011 and choose to download in Word format. http://ir.jcpenney.com/phoenix.zhtml?c=70528&p=irol-sechttp://ir.jcpenney.com/phoenix.zhtml?c=70528&p=irol-sec A sample project template is available for download in Doc Sharing. The sample project compares the ratio performance of Tootsie Roll and Hershey using the 2009 financial statements of Tootsie Roll and Hershey provided in Appendix A and Appendix B of your textbook.     Description     This course contains a Course Project where you will be required to submit one draft of the project at the end of Week 5 and the final completed project at the end of Week 7. Using the financial statements for Kohl’s Corporation and J.C. Penney Corporation, respectively, you will calculate and compare the financial ratios listed further down this document for the fiscal year ending 2010 and prepare your comments about the liquidity, solvency, and profitability of the two companies based on your ratio calculations. The entire project will be graded by the instructor at the end of the final submission in Week 7 and…

need help 495261

ACC 206 Week 1 Assignment: Chapter One Problems Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.

Document Preview:

ACC 206 Week 1 Assignment: Chapter One Problems Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Ch 1 Critical Thinking Question 5: Answer the following questions: Why are noncash transactions, such as the exchange of common stock for a building for example, included on a statement of cash flows? How are these noncash transactions disclosed? Chapter 1 Exercise 1: 1. Classification of activities Classify each of the following transactions as arising from an operating (O), investing (I), financing (F), or noncash investing/financing (N) activity. ________ Received $80,000 from the sale of land. ________ Received $3,200 from cash sales. ________ Paid a $5,000 dividend. ________ Purchased $8,800 of merchandise for cash. ________ Received $100,000 from the issuance of common stock. ________ Paid $1,200 of interest on a note payable. ________ Acquired a new laser printer by paying $650. ________ Acquired a $400,000 building by signing a $400,000 mortgage note. Chapter 1 Exercise 4: 4. Overview of direct and indirect methods Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why. Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities. Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used. One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported. The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed. The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash…

Attachments:

need help with acc281 495262

The discussion question is due on the 17th but the assignment isn’t due until the 4th

Document Preview:

You will need access to book “Survey of Accounting 2nd Edition by Thomas Edmonds. Thanks Assignment Due Date Format Grading Percent Debit/Credit Day 3 (1st post) Discussion Forum 4 Historical Concept Day 3 (1st post) Discussion Forum 4 Understanding Real World Financial Reports Day 7 Written Assignment 10 Readings Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Discussions To participate in the following Discussion Forums, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation: Debit/Credit — Week 2 Read and respond to question #31 from page 156. You must respond to at least two of your classmates’ postings to receive full credit. Historical Concept — Week 2 From Chapter 6, read and answer question 8 on page 232. You must respond to at least two of your classmates’ postings to receive full credit. Assignments To complete this assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation: Understanding Real World Financial Reports In a 1-2 page paper, respond to question ATC 4-1 on page 166. DQ-1 Debit/Credit – Dq-1 Read and respond to question #31 from page 156. You must respond to at least two of your classmates’ postings to receive full credit. DQ-2 Historical Concept – Week 2 From Chapter 6, read and answer question 8 on page 232. You must respond to at least two of your classmates’ postings to receive full credit. Assignment Understanding Real World Financial Reports In a 1-2 page paper, respond to question ATC 4-1 on page 166.???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

need help on accounting chapter 9 test 495264

I need hand with this test assignment

Document Preview:

GLICKMAN – ACC111 End of Chapter 9 Test – (40 points) Name: _______________________________________ Please show all calculations!!! PROBLEM #1 – 25 points At the beginning of the year, Sonoran Park Equipment’s accounts receivable balance was $105,000 and the allowance for doubtful accounts had a $1,950 credit. Sonoran’s sales in the current year were $787,500, 80% of which were on credit. Collections on account during the year were $502,000. Additionally, Sonoran wrote off $3,000 of uncollectible accounts during the year. It is estimated that 6% of the year end accounts receivable are expected to be uncollectible. Using the allowance for bad debts based on accounts receivable aging method, determine the journal entry for the estimate of bad debts. What is Sonoran’s net realizable value of accounts at the end of the year? Journal Entry Show work here: B. Net Realizable Value PROBLEM #2 – 10 points Good Day Service Center received a 120 day, 6% note for $50,000, dated April 12, 20XX from a customer on account. Determine the (a) due date of the note, (b) the maturity value of the note, and (c) the journal entry to record the receipt of the payment of the note at maturity. Use a 360 day year. PROBLEM #3 – 5 points What is the difference between an account receivable and a note receivable?

Attachments:

need help with accounting homework 495265

This is the first time use of this site. Please forgive my ignorance.

Need homework done for this Monday.

Please advise.

Thank you,

John

email address: import.quality.north@gmail.com

Document Preview:

Name: _____________________________________ 1. Describe and explain the three major areas of accounting? 2. What types of people or organizations are interested in financial information about a firm, and why are they interested in this information? 3. What are the three types of business entities, and how do they differ? 4. What is the function of the Securities and Exchange Commission, and what is the purpose of the Financial Accounting Standards Board? 5. John Jones owns Acme Personnel Services. At the beginning of February, his firm’s financial records showed the following assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity: Cash $14,500 Accounts Payable $12,000 Accounts Receivable $ 9,000 John Jones, Capital $16,000 Supplies $ 1,600 Revenue $ 8,500 Office Furniture $ 7,500 Expenses $ 4,250 Set up an equation using the balances given above. Record the effects of the following transactions in the equation. (Use plus, minus, and equals signs.) Record new balances after each transaction has been entered. Prove the equality of the two sides of the final equation in the space provided below. 6. Sally McMillan is opening a tax preparation service on November 1, which will be called Sally’s Tax Service. Sally plan to open the business by depositing $6,000 cash into a business checking account. The following assets will also be owned by the business: Furniture (fair market value of $2,000), and a computer and printer (fair market value of $4,400). There are no outstanding debts of the business as it is formed. Prepare a balance sheet for November 1, 2003, for Sally’s Tax Service by entering the correct balances in the appropriate accounts. (You will need to use the accounting equation to compute owner’s equity.) ) Indicate whether each of the following accounts normally has a debit balance or a credit balance: (circle the correct answer) Accounts Payable Debit…

Attachments:

need help with accounting homework 495266

Have a look and see if the timeframe suits your fancy.

Document Preview:

1. Please choose and select any problem that you would like from chapter 10; the problems at the end of the chapter. Please identify and tell me which problem and complete all steps for the problem. Attach additional pages if needed. Cindy Brown works for Trinity Industries. Her pay rate is $12.70 per hour and she receives overtime pay at one and one-half times her regular hourly rate for any hours worked beyond 40 in a week. ?During the pay period that ended December 31, 2010, Cindy worked 48 hours. Cindy is married and claims three withholding allowances on her W-4 form. Cindy’s cumulative earnings prior to this pay period total $28,000. Cindy’s wages are subject to the following deductions: Social Security tax at 6.2 percent Medicare tax at 1.45 percent Federal income tax (use the withholding table shown below) Health and disability insurance premiums, $165 United Way contribution, $19 United States Savings Bond, $75 INSTRUCTIONS Compute Cindy’s regular, overtime, gross, and net pay. Journalize the payment of her wages for the week ended December 31,2010. Analyze: Based on Cindy’s cumulative earnings through December 31, how much overtime pay did she earn this year? 2. The payroll register of Acme Plumbing Repair showed total employee earnings of $4,660 for the week ended November 29, 2003. A. Compute the employer’s payroll taxes for the period. The tax rates are as follows: Social Security 6.2 percent Medicare 1.45 percent FUTA 0.8 percent SUTA 2.2 percent B. Prepare a general journal entry to record the employer’s payroll taxes for the period. C. If the FUTA tax rate had been 1.2 percent, what total employer payroll taxes would have been recorded? 3. Please choose and select any problem that you would like from chapter 12; the problems at the end of the chapter. Please identify and tell me which problem and complete all…

Attachments:

need help with accounting work 495268

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Although many small businesses might operate on a cash basis, most of the larger ones use the accrual basis to record business events in the general journal. In this assignment, you will apply your knowledge of various business events that require journal entries to be made. Instructions For this assignment, use the BUS3061 Assignment u04a1 Template (listed in Resources). Accounts to be used are given below: Cash. Prepaid insurance. Land. Buildings. Equipment. Accounts payable. Unearned service revenue. Owner’s capital. Owner’s drawings. Service revenue. Advertising expense. Salaries and wages expense. Each of the following business events for Magnolia Greens Frisbee Golf Course will require a journal entry: May 1: Invested $20,000 cash in the golf course business. May 3: Purchased Hampstead Golf Land for $15,000 cash. The price includes land $12,000, shed $2,000, and equipment $1,000. May 5: Paid advertising expenses of $700. May 6: Paid cash $600 for a 1-year insurance policy. May 10: Purchased golf discs and other equipment for $1,050 from Discs Are Us, payable in 30 days. May 18: Received $1,100 in cash for golf fees earned (service revenue). May 19: Sold 150 coupon books for $10 each. Each book contains four coupons that enable the holder to play one round of golf. May 25: Withdrew $800 cash for personal use. May 30: Pay salaries for part-time employees $250. May 30: Paid Discs Are Us the full amount due. May 31: Received $2,100 cash for fees earned. BUS3061 Fundamentals of Accounting Instructions Accounts to be used: Cash. Prepaid insurance. Land. Buildings. Equipment. Accounts payable. Unearned service revenue. Owner’s capital. Owner’s drawings. Service revenue. Advertising expense. Salaries and wages expense. Leave a space between each dated transaction. May 1?Invested $20,000 cash in the golf course business.??May 3?Purchased Hampstead Golf Land for $15,000 cash. The price includes land $12,000, shed $2,000, and equipment $1,000.??May 5?Paid…

Attachments:

need help with fnt task 1 and 2 including memo 495270

Hello need with these they are due by Aug 1st. Please let me know if you can help.

Document Preview:

SUBDOMAIN 319.1 – ACCOUNTING & FINANCE SUBDOMAIN 319.2 – INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY Competency 319.1.3 Capital Budgeting Analysis – The graduate correctly applies time value of money techniques and techniques that ignore present value for capital investment decisions. Competency 319.2.1 Technology Tools – The graduate uses information technology tools for specified business purposes. Competency 319.2.5 Information Management – The graduate selects appropriate technology applications to manage information and make decisions in given situations. Objectives: 319.1.3-01: Calculate net present value based on a given set of facts. 319.1.3-02: Apply the results of a net present value calculation to a given decision situation. 319.1.3-03: Calculate internal rate of return based on a given set of facts. 319.1.3-04: Apply the results of an internal rate of return calculation to a given decision situation. 319.1.3-05: Calculate the period of time required to recoup the money expended for new equipment in a given situation. 319.1.3-06: Calculate the accounting rate of return based on a given set of facts. 319.1.3-07: Explain the relationship of the accounting rate of return to the internal rate of return for the same capital investment alternative. 319.1.3-08: Calculate net cash flow in a given situation. 319.1.3-09: Explain the impact of depreciation on net cash flow. 319.1.3-10: Explain the role of the weighted average cost of capital in capital budgeting analysis. 319.2.1-04: Produce a computer-based presentation on a business topic. 319.2.5-05: Demonstrate the appropriate use of specified software application in a given situation. It is imperative that you enter your first initial and last name in the fields designated on the template. Your work and results will be based on an individualized dataset that will auto load in the template when you enter your first initial and last name. Your work will not be correctly graded if you fail to…

need help with managerial accounting quiz 495271

The quiz includes seven questions of which I only need assistance with questions 1 through 6.

Document Preview:

Test 3 Name _________________________ for ACC 232 with MA6e including App. A and Chap. 9, 10 and 11 Appendix A – Managerial Analysis of Financial Statements Question 1: Ratio Calculations and Interpretation (20 points) Required: Prepare a comprehensive analysis of Utica for 2014, including the following measures (round all calculations to two decimal places. Comment on the financial condition of Utica with respect to short-term solvency, long-term solvency, and performance. continued on the next two pages… Utica Company Comparative Income Statements For Years Ended December 31, 2014 and 2013 2014 2013 Sales $13,013,631 $11,016,668 Cost of goods sold 7,247,451 6,267,557 Gross profit 5,766,180 4,749,111 Selling and administrative expenses 3,937,065 3,296,448 Operating income 1,829,115 1,452,664 Other expenses (revenues): Interest revenue (95,915) (77,478) Interest expense 88,232 68,800 Total other expenses (revenues) (7,683) (8,678) Income before income taxes 1,836,798 1,461,342 Income taxes 819,775 609,517 Net income $ 1,017,023 $ 851,824 Utica Company Comparative Balance Sheets December 31, 2014 and 2013 2014 2013 Assets Cash $ 346,652 $ 254,183 Marketable securities 446,013 198,746 Accounts receivable 986,322 1,025,321 Inventory 1,631,467 1,588,061 Prepaid expenses 127,488 113,306 Total current assets 3,537,942 3,179,616 Investments and other assets 790,333 592,281 Property Plant and equipment, net 3,075,290 2,628,046 Trademarks and other intangibles 268,588 275,735 Total Assets $7,672,153 $6,675,678 Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity Notes payable $ 182,880 $ 171,671 Current maturities of long-term debt 10,230 14,755 Accounts payable and accrued expenses 1,858,773 1,894,271 Total current liabilities 2,051,883 2,080,697 Long-term debt 567,495 528,494 Total liabilities 2,619,378 2,609,191…

Attachments:

need help with ratio need nto understand the math for this 495272

Liquidity ratios

Current ratio

Acid-test, or quick, ratio

Receivables turnover

Inventory turnover

Profitability ratios

Asset turnover

Profit margin

Return on assets

Return on common stockholders equity

Solvency ratios

Debt to total assets

Times interest earned

Show your calculations for each ratio.

Create a horizontal and vertical analysis for the balance sheet and the income statement.

Document Preview:

Sheet3 Sheet2 BalSheet Current Assets Cash & Cash Equivalents Accounts Receivable Prepaid Expenses & Supplies Total Current Assets Carrier Operating Property (at cost) Less: Allowance for Depreciation Net Carrier Operating Property Assets of Discontinued Operations Goodwill (net) Other Assets Total Assets Current Liabilities Accounts Payable Salaries & Wages Current Portion of Long-Term Debt Freight & Casualty Claims Payable Total Current Liabilities Long-Term Liabilities Accrued Pension & Post Retirement Health Care Long-Term Debt Total Long Term Liabilities Shareholders’ Equity Common Stock ($1 par value Authorized: 20,000,000 shares) Treasury Shares Retained Earnings Total Shareholders’ Equity Total Liabilities and Shareholders’ Equity Huffman Trucking Balance Sheet (Unaudited) (In Thousands) Copyright 2007, 2012 © Apollo Group, Inc. All right…

need help with week 2 495273

ACC 206 Week 2 Assignment: Chapter Two and Three Problems Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Chapter 2 Exercise 3 1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X6.

Document Preview:

ACC 206 Week 2 Assignment: Chapter Two and Three Problems Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Chapter 2 Exercise 3 1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X6. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 20X6 and 20X5 follow: 20X6 20X5 Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10% $580,000 $500,000 Common stock, $10 par value 2,350,000 1,750,000 Paid-in capital in excess of par value Preferred 24,000 — Common 4,620,000 3,600,000 Retained earnings 8,470,000 6,920,000 Total stockholders’ equity $16,044,000 $12,770,000 Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X6. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X6. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 20X6? Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X6? By what amount? Chapter 2 Problem 1 2. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization Southlake Corporation issued $900,000 of 8% bonds on March 1, 20X1. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow. Case A—The bonds are issued at 100. Case B—The bonds are issued at 96. Case C—The bonds are issued at 105. Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization. Instructions: Complete the following table: Case A Case B Case C Cash inflow on the issuance date _______ _______ _______ Total cash outflow through maturity _______ _______ _______ Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue _______ _______ _______ Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X1…

Attachments:

need test completed by 5 16 at 6pm 495276

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Name ________________________  ?POINTS?POINTS??PROBLEM?POSSIBLE?RECEIVED??1?10? ??2?20? ??3?20???4?20???TOTAL?70? ?? Problem #1 (10 points) 1. Interest expense should be recorded in the period: a. that the expense is incurred b. a note payable is recorded c. when the note is paid d. on the date that the note is issued??? 2. Which of the following deductions is a required deduction? a. Charitable contributions b. Income taxes c. Insurance premiums d. Union dues 3. Which payroll tax is “shared” by both the employer and employer? a. State unemployment tax b. Federal income tax c. Social security tax d. Federal Unemployment ?? 4. Which of the following is a characteristic of a current liability? a. A current liability is a liability that is due within 30 days. b. A current liability is a liability that is due within one year or one operating cycle, whichever is longer. c. A current liability is a liability that is due within 10 days. d. A current liability is a liability that is due in longer than a one-year period, or one operating cycle. 5. Which of the following principles requires that warranty expense be recorded in the period that revenue is recorded? a. Consistency principle b. Matching principle c. Revenue principle d. Materiality concept ???PROBLEM #2 (20 Points) Marty’s German Restaurants incurred salary expense of $70,000 for 2012. The payroll expense includes employer FICA tax of 7.65%, in addition to state unemployment tax of 5.4% and federal unemployment tax of .8%. Of the total salaries, $15,000 is subject to unemployment tax. Also, the company provides the following benefits for employees health insurance (cost to the company $3050), life insurance (cost to the company, $400), and retirement benefits (cost to the company, 5% of salary expense.) Directions: Journalize Marty’s expenses for employee benefits and for payroll taxes. Explanations are not required….

Attachments:

need test completed by april 30th 495277

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Name: ______________________________ Date: _______________ Problem?Points Possible?Points Received??1?8 Points? ??2?3 Points? ??3?3 Points???4?2 Points? ??5?2 Points???6?4 Points???7?4 Points???8?4 Points???9?10 Points???10?4 Points???11?3 Points???12?3 Points???Total?50 Points? ?? Problem #1 (8 points) JarJar Company had the following series of transactions: 11/01/11 JarJar Company borrowed $18,000 by issuing a 12%, 1 year note. 12/1/11 JarJar Company borrowed $25,000 by issuing a 8%, 6 month note. 5/1/12 JarJar paid the full payment due of Note 2. 11/01/12 JarJar paid the full payment due of Note 1 Directions: 1) Record all necessary journal entries for JarJar Company for 2011 2) Record all necessary journal entries for JarJar Company for 2012 Explanations are not required. DATE?DESCRIPTION?REF?DEBIT?CREDIT????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? Problem #2 (3 points) Tarheel Services is holding a note receivable from one of its customers and wishes to collect the cash earlier than the maturity date of the note. The note is for $1,000 and carries a rate of 4%. Tarheel sells the note to a bank for $950. Please provide the journal entry which Tarheel makes to record this transaction. (Dates and Explanations are not required.) ?????????? ?? Problem #3 (3 points) Clockwise Services is holding a note receivable from one of its customers and wishes to collect the cash earlier than the maturity date of the note. The note is for $1,000 and carries a rate of 4%. Clockwise sells the note to a bank for $1,080. Please provide the journal entry with Clockwise makes to record this transaction. (Dates and Explanations are not required.) ??This document was truncated here because it was created in the Evaluation Mode.

Attachments:

need test finished with work showing 495278

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Name ________________________   POINTS POINTS PROBLEM POSSIBLE RECEIVED 1 5   2 15   3 50   4 30   TOTAL 100   Problem #1 (1 points each) Circle the correct answer. 1. Which of the following is not a plant asset? a. land b. furniture c. buildings d. supplies 2. Accumulated depreciation is classified as a(n) a. expense account. b. liability account. c. asset account. d. contra-asset account. 3. Book value is defined as a. depreciation expense plus accumulated depreciation. b. the cost of a plant asset less depreciation expense. c. the cost of a plant asset plus accumulated depreciation. d. the cost of a plant asset less accumulated depreciation. 4. Which statement below is false regarding the double-declining balance method of depreciation? a. Residual value is ignored entirely using the double-declining balance method. b. Many companies switch from the double-declining balance method to the straight-line method during the next-to-last year of the asset’s life c. The double-declining balance method uses a rate that is twice the straight-line rate. d. Final-year depreciation is the amount needed to bring the asset to its estimated residual value. 5. Interest expense should be recorded in the period: a. that the expense is incurred b. a note payable is recorded c. when the note is paid d. on the date that the note is issued Problem 2 Show All Calculations (15 Points) On July 1, Obi Wan Company pays $500,000 for a piece of real estate that contains Land, Building, and Equipment. The fair value of the Land is $200,000, the fair value of the Building is $250,000, and the fair value of the equipment is $150,000. Directions: Prepare the journal entry for Obi Wan to allocate the total cost of the purchase among the assets. Include an explanation. Land 200,000 200,000/600,000 =…

Attachments:

need urgent solution file by midnight act 640 case 3 performance llc regression anal 495279

Case #3 Final Project Managerial Accounting

See attached-Will pay for immediately for solution file

Regression Analysis

Contribution Margin Reporting

Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis

Differential Analysis

Capital Budgeting

Document Preview:

125000 120000 74250 93000 412250 40000 50000 31000 33000 154000 25000 20000 10000 18000 73000 11250 9000 4500 8100 32850 43750 35000 17500 31500 127750 120000 114000 63000 90600 387600 5000 6000 11250 2400 24650 0.04 0.05 0.15151515151515152 2.5806451612903226E-2 5.9793814432989693E-2 4500 5000 1500 11000 7000 3000 1500 1000 12500 23500 1150 2.7895694360218315E-3 100000 80000 45000 60000 285000 1.25 1.5 1.65 1.55 1.4464912280701754 1.2 1.425 1.4 1.51 1.36 55000 24750 5000 10000 10000 23000 127750 2011 101147 20200 121347 235000 14000 2011 115035 20099.999999999996 135135 238000 15000 2011 104787 19600 124387 240000 14400 2011 118541 19500 138041 265000 15680 2011 120031 20000 140031 266000 17000 2011 125487 20400 145887 274500 19500 2011 124555 20500 145055 275000 20000 2011 130412 20350 150762 285000 20100 2011 145030 20050 165080 287000 24000 2011 128115 19950 148065 278000 19801 2011 127150 20600 147750 275000 19999 2011 126225 20620 146845 271250 19850 2012 99450 20500 119950 232000 15000 2012 111999 20280 132279 234000 15500 2012 112568 20560 133128 233000 15500 2012 108787 20560 129347 231000 14850 2012 118050 20158 138208 266000 16500 2012 124532 20176 144708 269000 19500 2012 131254 20192 151446 284000 19999 2012 130555 20490 151045 286000 20000 2012 149001 20532 169533 290000 25000 2012 125633 20574 146207 274500 19850 2012 124131 20490 144621 273250 19787 2012 124665 20562 145227 271450 19899 REVENUE COSTS Direct Materials Direct Labor Fringe Benefits on Direct Labor TOTAL COST GROSS MARGIN Manufacturing Overhead Basic Hydration Intensity Post Workout Sales Total GROSS MARGIN RATIO Unit Price: Unit Cost: PERFORMANCE DRINKS – MONTHLY PROFIT REPORT Indirect Labor Fringe Benefits on Indirect Labor Utilities Processing Equipment – Depreciation Preventative Maintenance Information Technology Monthly Charge PERFORMANCE DRINKS – MONTHLY MFG OHD COST…

needed done asap 495280

6.1 1. Korman Company has the following securities in its portfolio of trading equity securities on December 31, 2010: Cost Fair Value 5,000 shares of Thomas Corp., Common $155,000 $139,000 10,000 shares of Gant, Common 182,000 190,000 $337,000 $329,000 All of the securities had been purchased in 2010. In 2011, Korman completed the following securities transactions: March 1 Sold 5,000 shares of Thomas Corp., Common @ $31 less fees of $1,500. April 1 Bought 600 shares of Werth Stores, Common @ $45 plus fees of $550.

Document Preview:

6.1 1. Korman Company has the following securities in its portfolio of trading equity securities on December 31, 2010: Cost Fair Value 5,000 shares of Thomas Corp., Common $155,000 $139,000 10,000 shares of Gant, Common 182,000 190,000 $337,000 $329,000 All of the securities had been purchased in 2010. In 2011, Korman completed the following securities transactions: March 1 Sold 5,000 shares of Thomas Corp., Common @ $31 less fees of $1,500. April 1 Bought 600 shares of Werth Stores, Common @ $45 plus fees of $550. The Korman Company portfolio of trading equity securities appeared as follows on December 31, 2011: Cost Fair Value 10,000 shares of Gant, Common $182,000 $195,500 600 shares of Werth Stores, Common 27,550 25,500 $209,550 $221,000 Instructions Prepare the general journal entries for Korman Company for: (a) the 2010 adjusting entry. (b) the sale of the Thomas Corp. stock. (c) the purchase of the Werth Stores’ stock. (d) the 2011 adjusting entry. 2. The following information is available for Irwin Company for 2010: Net Income $120,000 Realized gain on sale of available-for-sale securities 10,000 Unrealized holding gain arising during the period on available-for-sale securities 24,000 Reclassification adjustment for gains included in net income 8,000 Instructions (1) Determine other comprehensive income for 2010. (2) Compute comprehensive income for 2010. 3. Dobson Construction specializes in the construction of commercial and industrial buildings. The contractor is experienced in bidding long-term construction projects of this type, with the typical project lasting fifteen to twenty-four months. The contractor uses the percentage-of-completion method of revenue recognition since, given the characteristics of the contractor’s business and contracts, it is the most appropriate method. Progress toward completion is…

Attachments:

needed done asap 495281

Problem 1: Benton County voted to establish an internal service fund to account for printing and copying for all its departments and agencies. The County engaged in the following activities related to the new fund. REQUIRED: Prepare transactions to record these events in the internal service fund. If no entry is required, write “No Entry Required.” The County Commission voted to transfer $200,000 from the General Fund to the internal service fund to establish the new fund. The fund entered into a capital lease for equipment to be used in printing activities.

Document Preview:

Problem 1: Benton County voted to establish an internal service fund to account for printing and copying for all its departments and agencies. The County engaged in the following activities related to the new fund. REQUIRED: Prepare transactions to record these events in the internal service fund. If no entry is required, write “No Entry Required.” The County Commission voted to transfer $200,000 from the General Fund to the internal service fund to establish the new fund. The fund entered into a capital lease for equipment to be used in printing activities. The total present value of the lease obligation is $600,000. Issued $1 million in general obligation bonds at 101. The bonds were issued to acquire additional equipment. The bonds are to be serviced from the internal service fund. Purchased equipment at a cost of $980,000. The equipment has an estimated useful life of nine years and an estimated salvage value of $80,000. Billed the General Fund for copying and printing charges, $70,000. Paid salaries to printing employees, $50,000. Problem 2: Geneva City has prepared all of the elements of its CAFR. REQUIRED: Numbering from one to ten, indicate the order in which each of these elements should appear in the City’s CAFR. ____ Auditor’s report ____ Letter of transmittal ____ Required supplementary information other than MD&A ____ Government-wide financial statements ____ Notes to financial statements ____ Combining statements for nonmajor funds ____ Combining statements for major discretely presented component units ____ Management’s Discussion and Analysis (MD&A) ____ Statistical tables ____ Governmental fund statements Problem 3: Richards College is a not-for-profit college. Record the following transactions for Richards College. The College has a June 30, 2007 fiscal year. a. Tuition revenue for the Fall semester 2006(August – December) was $4 million; tuition for the Spring semester 2007 (January – May) was $3.8 million;…

Attachments:

needs to be done soon 495282

To prevent fraudulent shipments of merchandise, organizations should: Match every receiving slip to an approved purchase order. Match every outgoing shipment to a sales order. Make sure that all increases to perpetual inventory records are supported by proper source documents. All of the above Of the following, which is the best method for detecting the theft of inventory? Have the warehouse manager personally oversee bi-monthly inventory counts. Have someone from purchasing conduct inventory counts every quarter.

Document Preview:

To prevent fraudulent shipments of merchandise, organizations should: Match every receiving slip to an approved purchase order. Match every outgoing shipment to a sales order. Make sure that all increases to perpetual inventory records are supported by proper source documents. All of the above Of the following, which is the best method for detecting the theft of inventory? Have the warehouse manager personally oversee bi-monthly inventory counts. Have someone from purchasing conduct inventory counts every quarter. Have a designated person in customer service follow-up with customers who have complained about short shipments. Match vendor addresses against employee addresses. Which of the following procedures would be least helpful in preventing larceny of non-cash assets? Segregating the duties of sales and accounts payable Installing surveillance cameras in the warehouse and on sales floors Creating access logs to track employees that enter restricted areas Employing security guards at the entrance of the warehouse Unexplained increases in inventory shrinkage can be a red flag that signals which type of fraud scheme? Fictitious refunds Inventory larceny Sales skimming All of the above Which of the following computer audit tests can be used to detect purchasing and receiving schemes? Identifying dormant customer accounts for the past six months that show a sale in the last two months of the year Calculating the ratio of the largest sale to the next largest sale by customer Extracting all inventory coded as obsolete and possessing reorder points within the inventory system All of the above Andy Kaplan is a foreman for JCP Enterprises, a regional construction company. He recently ordered some plumbing supplies from the company warehouse for an office building project he is overseeing. When the supplies arrived at the job site, however, he loaded them in his truck and took them home to use in remodeling his master bathroom. What kind of inventory theft…

Attachments:

neel 495283

Forum due tuesday Compare and contrast Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) and other forms of International Business. Assignment due Saturday Offer an article summary that discusses how to enter a foreign market; what are the steps needed and the essential elements for success. Compare/contrast two different entries.  Minimum 500 words.

Document Preview:

Forum due tuesday Compare and contrast Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) and other forms of International Business. Assignment due Saturday Offer an article summary that discusses how to enter a foreign market; what are the steps needed and the essential elements for success. Compare/contrast two different entries.  Minimum 500 words.????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

moyivation action plan 495252

You are a manager for Riordan Manufacturing. You recently administered a series of assessments to your three employees to give you a better understanding of their different traits. You have begun putting together an Employee Portfolio for each employee. Now you must use the information from the assessments to create a Motivational Plan.

Resources: University of Phoenix Material: Employee Portfolio: Motivation Action Plan, Self Assessments from Week One and Week Two Individual Assignment

Determine the motivational strategy or strategies that would likely be most appropriate for each of your three employees based on their individual characteristics, and complete the Motivational Action Plan for each employee. How will you leverage employee evaluations to motivate each of the three employees?

Describe how the strategy selected connects to one or more of the motivational theories described in the text.

multiple choice 19 questions managerial accounting 495253

6. An example of a period cost is a(n):
Answer

A. selling cost

B. product cost

C. manufacturing cost

D. inventoriable cost

9. An example of a qualitative factor is:
Answer

A. an irrelevant cost

B. customer satisfaction

C. a relevant cost

D. increased income

13. Using ABC can help a firm:

A. reduce costs

B. increase the retail price of its products

C. decrease the wholesale prices of its products

D. reduce its workforce

14. The two methods for determining the cost of products are:

A. process and absorption costing

B. job order and consumer based costing

C. activity-based and process costing

D. job order and process costing

20. A typical example of a quantitative factor is:
Answer

A. the purchase price of a new machine

B. customer satisfaction

C. product quality

D. employee morale

21. Sunk costs:

A. can be changed by future actions only

B. can be changed by current actions only

C. can be changed by current or future actions depending on the situation

D. None of these answers is correct

22. Another term used for regression analysis is:

A. the least-squares method

B. the high-low metho

C. the engineering approach

D. scatter graphing

23. A method used to separate a mixed cost using experts or other professionals that are familiar with technical aspects of the activity and associated costs is the:

A. scatter graphing

B. high-low metho

C. engineering approach

D. regression analysis

24. Activity-based costing uses:

A. multiple cost pools to develop a single allocation rate

B. multiple cost pools to develop multiple allocation rates

C. a single cost pool to develop multiple allocation rates

D. a single cost pool to develop a single allocation rate

25. Manufacturing overhead allocated using ABC will:

A. be more accurate and representative of resources consumed than a traditional allocation method

B. always be lower than if a traditional allocation method is used

C. always be higher than if a traditional allocation method is used

D. generally be the same as when a traditional allocation method is used

27. Using another firm to make a product or part of a product, rather than making it internally, is an example of:

A. relevant costing

B. outsourcing

C. opportunity costing

D. special ordering

28. One benefit of using activity-based costing is that it:

A. views more costs as indirect costs and therefore they need to be allocated

B. is easier to use than more traditional methods

C. follows established GAAP guidelines and is therefore more accepted

D. reclassifies certain manufacturing overhead costs into direct components

29. There are several variations of the cost-volume-profit formula. One determines the required sales in dollars, while the other determines sales in units. The formula which determines required sales in dollars uses the:
Answer

A. break-even point in units

B. contribution margin ratio

C. contribution margin per unit

D. gross profit point

30. The break-even point is important to managers because it:

A. tells managers how far sales can decline before the company will incur a loss

B. determines the required sales in dollars to achieve a profit

C. is useful to owners and managers starting a business

D. Answers A and C are both correct

31. In a job order costing system the term “job” refers to a:

A. single unit

B. batch of units

C. process

D. Answers A and B are both correct

34. A product held for sale by a retailer is know as a(n):

A. common cost

B. liability

C. asset

D. indirect cost

35. The job order and process costing systems are:

A. not considered a part of management accounting

B. not interchangeable

C. based on GAAP

D. interchangeable

36. An appropriate cost allocation base should:

A. be correlated to the amount of administrative overhead incurred annually

B. be easy to identify, compute, and journalize

C. be correlated to the amount of overhead resources consumed

D. None of these answers is correct

38. Anita’s Art Gallery sells pictures for $50 each. She pays $20 for the print and frame, and pays the sales clerk 10% as a commission. She has $5,000 of monthly fixed costs as well. How many sales dollars in pictures does Anita need to sell to break even?

A. $12,500

B. $5,000

C. $20,000

D. $10,000

Attachments:

my helper 495256

Cody Macedo established an insurance agency on January 1 of the current year and completed the following transactions during January:
(a) Opened a business bank account with a deposit of $75,000 in exchange for capital stock.
(b) Purchased supplies on account, $3,000.
(c) Paid creditors for account, $1,000.
(d) Received cash from fees earned on insurance commissions, $11,800.
(e) Paid rent on office and equipment for the month, $4,000.
(f) Paid automobile expenses for month, $600, and miscellaneous expenses, $200.
(g) Paid office salaries, $2,500.
(h) Determined that the cost of supplies on hand was $1,900; therefore, the cost of supplies used during the month was $1,100.
(i) Billed insurance companies for sales commissions earned, $12,500.
(j) Paid dividends, $5,000.
To Do:
1 In tabular form, indicate the effect each transaction has on the accounts. Calculate the balance of each account after all the transactions have been entered.
2 Using the account balances at the end of the month, prove the accounting equation is in balance.

Attachments:

my part to an accounting group project 495257

have to figure out the quarterly numbers for direct materials purchases, cash purchases budget, and direct labor budget. I have members completed part to 3 parts before which need to be checked that numbers are acurate. Make sure to add onto excel sheet with completed part and do calculations on excell.

1-3 of project completed attached

template for project attached .. but do work by adding onto first attachment

attachment of example teacher gave yo understand what needed to be done

Document Preview:

20000 50000 30000 25000 15000 10 10 10 10 10 0.7 0.25 0.05 0.2 5 0.4 13000 0.1 0.5 0.5 0.05 10 20 50500 20500 0.5 70000 10000 0.16 0.04 30000 51000 0 0 0 143700 48800 Schedule 1: Sales Budget Schedule 3: Production Budget in Units Schedule 4: Direct Materials Purchases Schedule 2: Cash receipts Schedule 7: Overhead Budget Sales price per unit cost per lb Purchase on Credit Purchase on Cash cost per DLH Var Selling per unit Minimum Cash Beg Inv RM in lbs Schedule 5: Cash Purchases Budget Schedule 6: Direct Labor Budget April May June August April 1. All sales are on account. 25% are collected in the month following sale; and the remaining 5% are uncollectible. Uncollectible July 2. The accounts receivable balance on March 31 was $30,000. All of this balance was collectible. 3. The company collects 70% of these credit sales in the month of the sale; 1. The company desires to have inventory on hand at the end of each month equal to 20% of the following month’s budgeted unit sales. 2. On March 31, 4,000 units were on hand. 1. Five lbs. of material are required per unit of product 10% of the following month’s production needs. Each unit requires in lbs 2. The material costs $0.40 per lb. 3. Management desires to have materials on hand at the end of each month equal to 4. The beginning materials inventory was 13,000 lbs. 1. Half of a month’s purchases are paid for in the month of purchase; the other half is paid for in the following month. 2. There are no discounts for early payment. 3. The accounts payable balance on March 31 was $12,000. They are all collected in April. Each unit produced requires 0.05 hour of direct labor. Each hour of direct labor costs the company $10. Management fully adjusts the workforce to…

need accounting expert to finish this test by 11 30 pm central time tonight 495259

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Final Exam Accounting I Mrs. C. Castle – Instructor Web Class Spring 2013 April 26, 2013 Name________________________________________________ Directions: Please print your answers or write your answers legibly. Answers that require written explanation and are less than 300 words will be marked wrong. Answers that have to be transcribed will be marked wrong. These are directions and not suggestions!!!!! How does a company identify the management issues related to current liabilities? How does a company identify, compute, and record definitely determinable and estimated current liabilities? Define long-term assets and explain the management issues a company may have as related to these assets. How does a company distinguish between capital expenditures and revenue expenditures, and account for the cost of property, plant, and equipment? How does a company account for the issuance of stock for cash and other assets? How does a company account for treasury stock? How would a company describe the features of a bond issue and the major characteristics of bonds? How would a company amortize bond discounts and bond premiums using the straight-line and effective interest methods? How would a company describe the principal purposes and uses of the statement of cash flows, and identify its components? 10. How would a company use the indirect method to determine cash flows from operating activities? 1 How would a company describe the features of a bond issue and the major characteristics of bonds? How would a company amortize bond discounts and bond premiums using the straight-line and effective interest methods? How would a company describe the principal purposes and uses of the statement of cash flows, and identify its components? 10. How would a…

Attachments:

need assignment 1 fixed accounting 495260

Assignment 1: Client Letter

Due Week 2 and worth 150 points

Imagine that you are a Certified Public Accountant (CPA) with a new client who needs an opinion on the most advantageous capital structure of a new corporation. Your client formed the corporation in question to provide technology to the medical profession to facilitate compliance with the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA). Your client is very excited because of the ability to secure several significant contracts with sufficient capital.

Use the Internet and Strayer databases to research the advantages and disadvantages of debt for capital formation versus equity for capital formation of a corporation. Prepare a formal letter to the client using the six (6) step tax research process in Chapter 1 and demonstrated in Appendix A of your textbook as a guide.

Write a one to two (1-2) page letter in which you:

1. Compare the tax advantages of debt versus equity capital formation of the corporation for the client.

2. Recommend to the client whether he / she should use debt or equity for capital formation of the new corporation, based on your research. Provide a rationale for the response.

3. Use the six (6) step tax research process, located in Chapter 1 and demonstrated in Appendix A of the textbook, to record your research for communications to the client.

Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:

Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA or school-specific format. Check with your professor for any additional instructions.

Include a cover page containing the title of the assignment, the student s name, the professor s name, the course title, and the date. The cover page and the reference page are not included in the required assignment page length

mba 560 unit 3 problem 5 33 and 6 25 495237

mba-560 unit 1 problem 5-33 and 6-25

Document Preview:

150 90 13500 470 44540 27540 100 300 29200 170 15340 470 94.766000000000005 94.766000000000005 16110 55500 55500 55500 15000 15000 15000 12960 11300 12070 -5184 -4520 -4828 7776 6780 7242 55500 55500 55500 7776 6780 7242 15000 15000 15000 24276 23280 23742 39276 55500 55500 55500 31040 31040 31040 15000 15000 15000 5184 4520 4828 0 0 0 0 0 0 18000 18000 18000 200 200 4600 4300 Student Name: Class: Problem 05-33 Requirement a. CLEAR PHOTOGRAPHY, INC. Goods Available for Sale Cost Units per Unit Beginning Inventory @ = First Purchase Second Purchase Total Requirement a. (1) Cost of Goods Sold and Ending Inventory Cost FIFO – Cost of Goods Sold of Goods Sold From Beginning Inventory From First Purchase From Second Purchase Total Units Sold Ending FIFO – Ending Inventory Inventory Requirement a. (2) Cost of Goods Sold and Ending Inventory LIFO – Cost of Goods Sold of Goods sold LIFO – Ending Inventory Total Ending Inventory Requirement a. (3) Weighted Average ¸ Cost of Goods Sold Ending Inventory: Computation of Income Tax Expense and Net Income Weighted FIFO LIFO Average Sales Gross Margin Operating Expenses Net Income Before Tax Income Tax (40%) Net Income Requirement b. Financial Statements Income Statements For the Year Ended December 31, 2012 Weight. Av. Income Tax Expense Balance Sheets As of December 31, 2012 Assets Cash Merchandise Inventory Total Assets Stockholders’ Equity Common Stock Retained Earnings Total Stockholders’ Equity Statement of Cash Flows Weight Av. Cash Flows From Operating Activities: Cash Inflow from Customers Cash Outflow for Inventory Cash Outflow for Operating Expense Cash Outflow for Income Tax Net Cash Flow from Operating Activities Cash Flows from Investing Activities Cash Flows from Financing Activities Net Change in Cash Plus: Beginning Cash Balance Ending Cash Balance Problem 06-25 O’BRIAN SERVICE COMPANY Depreciation Requirement a: Straight Line Cost Delivery…

mba 560 unit 4 problems 495238

Problem 7-28 Crume Inc-Effective interest amortization for a bond premium

Please see the attachment for full problem description.

Effective interest amortization for a bond premium
On January 1, 2012, Crume Incorporated issued bonds with a face value of $100,000 a stated rate of interest of 9 percent, and a five year term to maturity. Interest is payable in cash on December 31 of each year. The effective rate of interest was 8 percent at the time the bonds were issued. The bonds sold for $103,993. Crume used the effective interest rate method to amortize bond discount.

Cash Payment Interest Expense Premium Amortization Carrying Value
January 1, 2012 103,993
December 31, 2012 9,000 8,319 681 103,312
December 31, 2013 ? ? ? ?
December 31, 2014 ? ? ? ?
December 31, 2015 ? ? ? ?
December 31, 2016 ? ? ? ?
Total 45,000 41,007 3,993

b. What time(s) in the table would appear on the 2014 balance sheet?

c. What time(s) in the table would appear on the 2014 income statement?

d. What time(s) in the table would appear on the 2014 statement of cash flows?

Problem 8-19

midwest corp completed the following tranactions in 2012 the first year or operation

1. issued 20,000 shares of 10$ par common stock at par.

2.issued 2,000 shares of 30$ stated value preferred stock at 32$ per share

3.purchased 500 shares of common stock as tresuary stock for 15$ per share.

4.declared a five percent dividend on preferrred stock.

5.sold 300 shares of tresuary stock for 18$ per share.

6.paid the cash dividend on preferred stock that was declared in event four

7. earned cash service revenue of 75,000 and incurred cash operating expenses of 42,000

8.appropriated 6,000 of retained earnings

required

a. organize the transaction in accounts under an accounting equation

b.prepare the stockholders equity section of the balance sheer as of december 31 2012

Attachments:

mgmt 501 dq 495241

Hello! I need help with answering a discussion question. It needs at least two scholary citations in APA format. I can give you access to my school online library if you need it. It needs to be 250 words minimum. I attached the article the question is pertaining to.

Read the article by Chapas and Friga and address/answer the following questions: 1. What role do hypotheses play in making better business decisions? 2. How could you integrate this information within your organization? Your post should contain at least two scholarly citations (you can even use Chapas & Friga if you like). Be sure to list the references for the in text citations at the bottom of your post.

250 words minimum. APA style writting.

Document Preview:

ONE POINT OF VIEW Paul N. Friga and Richard B. Chapas MAKE BETTER BUSINESS DECISIONS Decision-making in today’s environment is difficult, and Challenges Executives Face new managers in R&D and other technical positions are Three key macro-level elements that differentiate the often shocked at the lack of systematic decision-making daily decision-making of today include information they find in their interactions with upper management overload, shareholder pressure, and shortened business and their peers in other parts of the organization. cycle time: However, there is a well-tested source of insight into how to improve the decision-making in business: the scien-  The search tools in use for problem solving by execu- tific method. Although it has revolutionized our lives and tives at most companies today yield a quantity of infor- the ability to manipulate our material world, the scien- mation that can be overwhelming. This situation has tific method has not been widely adapted for business increased the importance of knowledge management executives. Nevertheless, we believe it can improve the skills to sort the data, identify what is truly relevant, and efficiency and effectiveness of decision-making for then to create value from it. executives, research managers, and business leaders in  Shareholder pressure, a result of the rise in worldwide general. capital markets, has led to a relentless drive to achieve short-term financial results, often at the expense of long- In this article, we first examine the typical decision- term considerations. A number of well-known corporate making environment in organizations, highlighting the failures may have resulted from the pressure to achieve challenges executives face in their quest for better per- consistent growth at any cost. formance. Next, we introduce some of the basic tenets from the scientific method and describe how they can  Finally, the time-to-market and overall business cycles play a role in overcoming…

Attachments:

mgmt640 section 1121 spring 2013 final exam 495242

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

MGMT640 Section 1121 Spring 2013 Final Exam 1.?A manufacturing company produces 80,000 units of product A at a total cost of $2.4 million. Total fixed costs are $1.4 million. If the company increases production by 25% and uses a 19% markup the price per unit will be:??A)?$31.54??B)?$30.80??C)?$51.80??D)?$37.10?? Use the following to answer questions 2-3: RNO Company’s market for the Model 55 has changed significantly, and RNO has had to drop the price per unit from $265 to $125. There are some units in the work in process inventory that have costs of $150 per unit associated with them. RNO could sell these units in their current state for $100 each. It will cost RNO $10 per unit to complete these units so that they can be sold for $125 each. 2.?A new employee looks at the analysis and exclaims, “We’ll lose money with either of these alternatives! Let’s just throw these units in the trash!” Suppose the alternative to trashing is choosing the more profitable of the two alternatives (that the new employee looked at and did not like). What effect will the trashing option (that the new employee wants) have on net income???A)?Net income will increase by $35 per unit for each unit discarded.??B)?Net income will decrease by $115 per unit for each unit discarded.??C)?It will have no effect on net income.??D)?Net income will decrease by $265 per unit for each unit discarded.?? 3.?When the incremental revenues and expenses are analyzed, the company is better off by??A)?$10 per unit if they sell the units in their current state.??B)?$25 per unit if they sell the units in their current state.??C)?$15 per unit if they complete the units.??D)?$125 per unit if they complete the units.?? 4.?A company using activity based pricing marks up the direct cost of goods by 43% plus charges customers for indirect costs based on the activities utilized by the customer. Indirect costs are charged as follows: $8.00 per order placed; $4.00 per separate item ordered; $30.00 per return….

Attachments:

mgt accts 495243

Given C08-29 C08-29 class name print_rep1 print_rep2 print_rep3 print_rep4 prob R_Names R_Nbr rep1 rep2 rep3 rep4 start_rep1 start_rep2 start_rep3 start_rep4 Student Name: Cash Budget Class: Budgeted Income Statement Budgeted Balance Sheet Assets Cash Accounts receivable Inventory Total assets Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity Accounts payable Capital stock Total liabilities and equity Cash balance, beginning Add receipts from customers Total cash available Less disbursements: Purchase of inventory Financing: Interest Cash balance, ending Sales

Document Preview:

Given C08-29 C08-29 class name print_rep1 print_rep2 print_rep3 print_rep4 prob R_Names R_Nbr rep1 rep2 rep3 rep4 start_rep1 start_rep2 start_rep3 start_rep4 Student Name: Cash Budget Class: Budgeted Income Statement Budgeted Balance Sheet Assets Cash Accounts receivable Inventory Total assets Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity Accounts payable Capital stock Total liabilities and equity Cash balance, beginning Add receipts from customers Total cash available Less disbursements: Purchase of inventory Financing: Interest Cash balance, ending Sales Cost of goods sold Net operating income Net income June 30 Capital stock, no par Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity June purchases Total cash payments Total financing Total cash collections Repayments Total disbursements Minimum ending cash balance Selling price January (actual) February (actual) March (actual) April May Budgets June July Quarter August September Budgeted sales in units Purchases paid as follows: February sales March sales April sales May sales June sales Total needs Less beginning inventory Unit cost April purchases May purchases Balance sheet at March 31: Accounts receivable Accounts payable, purchases Dividends payable Retained earnings For the Three Months Ending June 30 Utilities Dividends paid Excess (deficiency) of receipts over disbursements Sales in units Commissions Contribution margin Depreciation Less interest expense Accounts receivable at June 30: May sales June sales Total Retained earnings at June 30: Balance, March 31 Add net income Less dividends declared Balance, June 30 Desired ending inventories (percentage of next month’s sales) In month of purchase In following month Collection on sales: Sales collected current month Sales collected following month Sales collected 2nd month following Dividends declared each quarter Total…

Attachments:

mgt325 mod6 spreadsheet exam fall 495244

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

PART C PART B PART A WORKING CAPITAL NEEDS RENT CLEANING YEAR ONE YEAR TWO YEAR THREE YEAR FOUR YEAR FIVE YEAR SIX YEARS PROCEEDS LESS TAX BASIS OF EQUIPMENT: COST TAX BASIS GAIN ON SALVAGE TOTAL INITIAL INVESTMENT INTERNAL RATE OF RETURN TAX RATE COMPREHENSIVE CHAPTER 12 & 13 PROBLEMS COST OF THE EQUIPMENT NEEDED NEW WORKING CAPITAL NEEDS PROJECTED NEW REVENUES: WILL BE RECOVERED AT THE END OF THE THIRD YEAR SALES PROBABILITY COST OF GOOD SOLD OF SALES EQUIPMENT DISPOSAL PROCEEDS SALVAGE VALUE AT THE END OF YEAR 6 DEPRECIATION RATES FOR TAX PURPOSES: FIVE YEAR PROPERTY FOR TAX DEPRECIATION LESS COST OF GOODS SOLD GROSS PROFIT VARIABLE CASH COSTS ANNUAL FIXED CASH COSTS: LESS VARIABLE COSTS LESS FIXED COSTS TOTAL FIXED COSTS REQUIRED: NET PRESENT VALUE AT THE DATA FOR ANALYSIS IS PRESENTED BELOW: FIRM’S COST OF CAPITAL AND REDO THE COMPUTATIONS BY CHANGING THE ANNUAL SALES TO $250,000. AND REDO THE COMPUTATIONS BY CHANGING THE ANNUAL SALES TO $300,000. PART A AT BOTH THE FIRM’S DISCOUNT RATE AND 16%, WHICH IS A 4% PREMIUM ADDED TO THE RATE. ASSUMPTIONS: ALL CASH FLOWS IN YEARS 1-6 OCCUR AT THE END OF THE YEAR. ALL INITIAL CASH INFLOWS OR OUTFLOWS OCCUR TODAY. MGT 325 Module 6 Spreadsheet Exam Answer is in %-2 decimal places please. Answer is in $-round answer to nearest dollar. THREE METHODS OF EVALUATION: ANNUAL OPERATING RECEIPTS: B. COPY THE WHOLE WORKSHEET AND SOLUTIONS FOR PART A TO THE WORKSHEET NAMED PART B, C. COPY THE WHOLE WORKSHEET AND SOLUTIONS FOR PART A TO THE WORKSHEET NAMED PART C, MAINTENANCE & OTHER NOTE – WHEN COMPUTING TAX, A NET LOSS FOR THE YEAR MEANS A POSITIVE TAX SAVINGS IS CREATED SINCE THERE IS OTHER INCOME TAX ON OTHER INCOME TO OFFSET. A. ASSUMING SALES ARE $200,000 COMPUTE THE PAYBACK, IRR AND NPV. FOR THE NPV, COMPUTE You should place your answers in each of the boxes…

Attachments:

microsoft access 495245

DEPARTMENT OF ACCOUNTING, FINANCE & ECONOMICS 7150AFE Business Information Systems MS ACCESS PROJECT (DATABASES) (TOTAL MARKS = 10) This project requires you to demonstrate knowledge of databases using MS Access.

Document Preview:

DEPARTMENT OF ACCOUNTING, FINANCE & ECONOMICS 7150AFE Business Information Systems MS ACCESS PROJECT (DATABASES) (TOTAL MARKS = 10) This project requires you to demonstrate knowledge of databases using MS Access. It covers the following database concepts: ? Use of Primary and Foreign Keys ? Understanding and using cardinalities ? Understanding and defining relationships ? Developing queries using appropriate tools ? Creating forms for data entry ? Producing reports for use by management PREPARATION Review database lectures (weeks 9 and 10) and workshop materials (weeks 10 to 13) and complete any outstanding workshop activities prior to commencing with this project. Also review all supplementary videos and/or documents (available via the Course Activity Centre). PROJECT PART ONE (8 Marks) Task Activity Mark 1 Download the VideoRental_student database file from L@G Save your database file as lastname_student_id_project_3_videorental (NOTE: Regularly SAVE your database as you complete individual tasks). -2 Familiarize yourself with the tables and data provided. The following relationships apply to the Customers, VideoRentals and Movies tables: ? A customer can rent many movies ? A movie can be rented by many customers (Take note of the one-to-many relationships.) Using this information to establish appropriate relationships amongst the Customers, VideoRentals and Movies tables. Ensure that you Enforce 0.5 Task Activity Mark Referential Integrity for all relationships. 3 Create a query saved as Expired Credit Cards that shows the ID, Name, Address, Phone Number, and Credit Card Expiration date for all customers with credit cards expiring in January, February and March 2013. Sort by month in ascending order. (Hint: cc expiration field is text). 0.5 4 Create a query saved as Best of the Best New Movies that shows the ID, Title and IMDB Rating for all movies with an IMDB rating of 8.5 or higher, and were released after 2009. Sort by Year in descending order. 0.5 5 Create…

microsoft excel 495246

I can send as a document. I have this test due before midnight tomorrow for ACCT 100. I have to plug these numbers in to the balance sheet, income statement, general journal, general ledger, work sheet, statement of owners equity, adjusting entries and post closing trial balance. I have a lot of assignments like these and if you can help with this one I would greatly appreciate and continue to send work your way! If you can send me an email I can forward the documents to you to explain better.

Miller Design Studio Post-Closing Trial Balance July 31, 2011 Cash $22,480 Accounts Receivable 5,000 Offi ce Supplies 3,660 Prepaid Rent 1,600 Offi ce Equipment 16,320 Accumulated Depreciation Offi ce Equipment $ 300 Accounts Payable 6,280 Unearned Design Revenue 600 Wages Payable 720 J. Miller, Capital 41,160 $49,060 $49,060 During August, the studio engaged in these transactions: Aug. 1 Received an additional investment of cash from J. Miller, $20,000. 2 Purchased additional office equipment with cash, $4,700. 7 Purchased additional office supplies for cash, $540. 8 Completed the series of designs that began on July 31 and billed for the total design services performed, including the accrued revenues of $800 that had been recognized in an adjusting entry in July, $1,400. 12 Paid the amount due for the office equipment purchased last month, $3,000. 13 Accepted an advance in cash for design work to be done, $2,400. 15 Performed design services and received a cash fee, $2,900. 16 Received payment on account for design services performed last month, $2,800. 19 Made a partial payment on the utilities bill that was received and recorded at the end of July, $140. 20 Performed design services for Rave Department Stores and agreed to accept payment next month, $3,200. 21 Performed design services for cash, $1,160. 22 Received and paid the utilities bill for August, $900. 23 Paid the assistant for four weeks wages, $4,800. 26 Paid the rent for September in advance, $1,600. 30 Paid cash to J. Miller as a withdrawal for personal expenses, $2,800. Required 1. Record entries in journal form and post to the ledger accounts the optional reversing entries on August 1 for Wages Payable and Accounts Receivable (see adjustment for unrecorded wages on page 116 and adjustment for design revenue on page 119). (Begin the general journal on page 5.) 2. Record the transactions for August in journal form. 3. Post the August transactions to the ledger accounts. 4. Prepare the Trial Balance columns of a work sheet. Miller Design Studio Post-Closing Trial Balance July 31, 2011 Cash $22,480 Accounts Receivable 5,000 Offi ce Supplies 3,660 Prepaid Rent 1,600 Offi ce Equipment 16,320 Accumulated Depreciation Offi ce Equipment $ 300 Accounts Payable 6,280 Unearned Design Revenue 600 Wages Payable 720 J. Miller, Capital 41,160 $49,060 $49,060 Copyright 2010 Cengage Learning, Inc. All Rights Reserved. May not be copied, scanned, or duplicated, in whole or in part. 5. Prepare adjusting entries and complete the work sheet using the information below. a. One month s prepaid rent has expired, $1,600. b. An inventory of supplies reveals $2,020 still on hand on August 31. c. Depreciation on equipment for August is calculated to be $300. d. Services performed for which payment had been received in advance totaled $1,300. e. Services performed that will not be billed until September totaled $580. f. Wages accrued by the end of August, $720. 6. From the work sheet, prepare an income statement, a statement of owner s equity, and a balance sheet for August 31, 2011. 7. Record the adjusting entries on August 31, 2011, in journal form, and post them to the ledger accounts. 8. Record the closing entries on August 31, 2011, in journal form, and post them to the ledger accounts. 9. Prepare a post-closing trial balance at August 31, 2011.

Attachments:

mid term 495247

The Excel questions need to be done in the accompanying Excel file. You will
email this exam copy and the Excel file by due date. If you are unable to write the formulas
in MS Word then you will write them by hand and scan the exam and email the exam and
excel file by due date.
1. Classify the following financial instruments as money market securities or capital market
securities in a table:
a. Bankers Acceptance
b. Commercial papers c. Common Stock
d. Corporate Bonds
e. Mortgages
f. Negotiable Certificate of Deposits g. Repurchase Agreements
h. U.S. Treasury Bills
i. U.S. Treasury Notes
j. Federal Funds
2. Calculate the present value for the following: (Excel)
a. $5,000 received at the end of 5 years if your investments pay 6% compounded annually.
b. $5,000 received each year for 5 years on the last day of each year if your investments pay 6%
compounded annually.
c. $5,000 received each quarter for 5 years on the last day of each quarter if your investments pay
6% compounded annually.
d. $5,000 received each year for 5 years on the first day of each year if your investments pay 6%
compounded annually.
3. Go to Wall Street Journal Market Data Center and find the most active investment grade
bonds. Choose one bond from the list. Also, find the treasury yield of the 30 year bond on
August 01, 2013 from U.S. Treasury. Then, calculate the Default Risk Premium for your bond.
(Be clear in the name of the company you have chosen.)
4. If we observe a one-year Treasury security rate higher than the two-year Treasury security
rate, what can we infer about the one-year rate expected one year from now?
5. Calculate the following values in Excel.
a. A 10-year, 12 percent semiannual coupon bond, with a par value of $1,000 sells for $1,100.
What is the bond s yield to maturity?
b. A 8 percent semiannual coupon bond, with a par value of $1,000 sells for $895. If the bond s
yield to maturity is 5% then what is maturity of the bond in years?
c. A 10 year, 8 percent semiannual coupon bond, with a par value of $1,000 and yield to maturity
is 5%. What is price of the bond?

6. Calculate the fair present value of a bond that pay interest semiannually, has a face value of
$1,000, has 14 years remaining to maturity, has a required rate of return of 10 percent and 8
coupon rate. (Write down the formula and solve it either by calculator or excel)
7. A stock just paid an annual dividend of $2.50. Dividends are expected to grow at 1.5 percent.
If the required rate of return on the stock is 12 percent, what is the fair present value? How is
your answer change if the required rate of return is 15 percent?
(Write down the formula and solve it either by calculator or excel)
8. Why Fed cannot choose both interest rate targeting and money supply targeting? Explain
using graphs.
9. What is the difference between a discount yield and bond equivalent yield? Which yield is
used for Treasury bill quotes?
10. Write the differences between the following in a tabular form:
a. T-Bills, T-Notes and T-Bonds
b. General Obligation Bonds and Revenue Bonds
c. Bearer bonds and Registered bonds
d. Term bonds and Serial bonds
11. What is the bid price of a $10,000 face value T-bill with a bid rate of 2.35 percent if there are
50, 100, and 250 days to maturity? (Write down the formula and solve it either by calculator or
excel)
12. You plan to purchase a $ 100,000 house using a 30- year mortgage obtained from your local
credit union. The mortgage rate offered to you is 8.25 percent. You will make a down payment
of 20 percent of the purchase price. (Excel)
a. Calculate your monthly payments on this mortgage.
b. Calculate the amount of interest and principal paid for all payments.
c. Calculate the amount of share of interest and share of principal of the monthly
payments for all payments.
d. Calculate the amount of interest paid over the life of this mortgage.
13. At the beginning of the year, you purchased a share of stock for $40. Over the year the
dividends paid on the stock were $5.00 per share. Calculate the return on a stock if the price of
the stock at the end of the year is $30 and $50. (Write down the formula and solve it either by
calculator or excel)
14. Assume there are 5 stocks: A, B, C, D, E of 5 different firms. You are to calculate an index
using their prices and values. Say the prices of these stocks today are 25, 30, 50, 20, and 60

respectively. The firms have 100m, 80m, 120m, 200m and 250m shares outstanding,
respectively.
a. what is the price-weighted index for today?
b. what is value-weighted index for today?
Assume that the price changes to 20, 25, 55, 18, and 50 respectively next day.
c. What is the new price-weighted index for next day? Calculate the percentage change in
the price-weighted index?
d. What is the new value-weighted index for next day? Calculate the percentage change
in the value-weighted index?
Assume that firm E divides the stock using a two-for-one split formula. What will be the new
divisor for the price-weighted index?
(Write down the formula and solve it either by calculator or excel)
15. You have taken a long position in a call option on IBM common stock. The option has an
exercise price of $136 and IBM s stock is currently trading at $140. The option premium is $5
per contract.
a. What is your net profit on the option if IBM s stock price increases to $150 at expiration of the
option and you exercise the option?
b. What is your net profit on the option if IBM s stock price decreases to $130 at expiration of
the option?

Attachments:

missing figures 495248

Aquarius Libra Scorpio Taurus

Beginning of theyear:

Asset* $300,000 $500,000 $100,000 (d)

Liabilities 120,000 260,000 76,000 $120,000

End of the year:

Assets 420,000 700,000 90,000 248,000

Liabilities 110,000 220,000 30,000 136,000

During the year:

Additional issuance of capital stock (a) 100,000 10,000 40,000

Dividends 25,000 32,000 (c) 60,000

Revenue 190,000 (b) 115,000 112,000

Expenses 80,000 128,000 122,500 128,000

Attachments:

mngt 404 495249

Objectives – MS Project 2010 Change the working and non-working time on Standard Calendar Change the working and non-working time on a Resource Calendar Create new base calendars Assign different base calendars to resources With calendars, you can determine when resources on a project are working and when they are not working. If you do not indicate when resources are available, you may accidentally schedule tasks when resources are not actually available. Calendars are part of determining availability of resources.

Document Preview:

Objectives – MS Project 2010 Change the working and non-working time on Standard Calendar Change the working and non-working time on a Resource Calendar Create new base calendars Assign different base calendars to resources With calendars, you can determine when resources on a project are working and when they are not working. If you do not indicate when resources are available, you may accidentally schedule tasks when resources are not actually available. Calendars are part of determining availability of resources. In MS Project, calendars define the working and non-working time for the project and for each resource assigned to the task. As a change is made to a calendar, MS Project automatically reschedules all tasks affected by the change. Using Calendars There are two types of calendars in Project: base calendars and resource calendars. Base calendars define the working days and working hours for a project or a set of resources. Resource calendars define the working days and working hours for a specific resource. The default base calendar (also known as the project calendar) is called Standard. This standard calendar is usually set as an 8-hour day, 40-hour week, Monday through Friday, with no holidays. However, you can modify this standard calendar, but it is not recommended. MS Project also comes with two other base calendars: a 24-hour calendar and a night shift calendar. You can also create your own base calendars. You can manipulate such options as default start time and hours per day. Note: Resource calendars are updated automatically when the base calendar assigned to the resource changes. But changes to the default calendar options are not automatically displayed in the base calendar. When we first set up this project, MS Project assumed the Standard calendar. As we entered task duration, MS Project calculated the amount of work based upon 8 hours a day, 40 hours per week, Monday through Friday. So when we entered 2 days for the…

Attachments:

module 4 quiz 1 factor completely 9×2 30xy 25y2 a 3x 495250

1. Factor completely. 9×2 + 30xy + 25y2 a. (3x + 5y)2 b. (3x – 5y)(3x + 5y) c. (9x + 5y)(x + 5y) d. (3x + y)(3x + 25y) 2. During rush hour, Fernando can drive 25 miles using the side roads in the same time that it takes to travel 20 miles on the freeway. If Fernando’s rate on the side roads is 9 mi/h faster than his rate on the freeway, find his rate on the side roads. a. 36 b. 38 c. 45 d. 47 3. Factor the trinomial completely.. 6b4 – 18b3 – 60b2 a. 6b2(b + 2)(b – 5) b. 6b2(b – 2)(b + 5) c. 6(b2 + 2)(b2 – 5) d. b2(2b + 5)(3b + 10) 4. Solve for x. a. –2 b. 2 c. –4 d. No solution 5.

Document Preview:

2 2 Factor completely. 9x + 30xy + 25y 1. 2 a. (3x + 5y) b. (3x – 5y)(3x + 5y) c. (9x + 5y)(x + 5y) d. (3x + y)(3x + 25y) During rush hour, Fernando can drive 25 miles using the side roads in the same time that it takes to travel 20 miles on the freeway. If 2. Fernando’s rate on the side roads is 9 mi/h faster than his rate on the freeway, find his rate on the side roads. a. 36 b. 38 c. 45 d. 47 4 3 2 Factor the trinomial completely.. 6b – 18b – 60b 3. 2 a. 6b (b + 2)(b – 5) 2 b. 6b (b – 2)(b + 5) 2 2 c. 6(b + 2)(b – 5) 2 d. b (2b + 5)(3b + 10) 4. Solve for x. a. –2 b. 2 c. –4 d. No solution The directions on a concentrated cleaner state that 3 tablespoons of concentrate make 345 ounces of cleaning fluid. How many ounces of 5. cleaning fluid will 2 tablespoons of cleaner make? a. 190b. 210 c. 230 d. 250 2 The profit on a watch is given by P = x – 13x – 80, where x is the number of watches sold per day. How many watches were sold on a day when 6. there was a $50 loss? a. 13 b. 14 c. 15 d. 16 2 The area of a rectangle of length t is given by 12t – t . Find the width of the rectangle in terms of t. 7. a. 12 – t b. 12t c. t – 12 2 d. t 8. Write in simplest form. a. b. c. d. 2 State which method should be applied as the first step for factoring the polynomial. (x + 9y) – 1 9. a. Find the GCF. b. Group the terms. c. Factor the difference of squares.

Attachments:

more accounting 495251

Take a look at the attachment and let me know, thanks.

Document Preview:

Complete Exercises E11-15, E12-1, & E12-2. Complete Problem 11-6A. Submit as a Microsoft® Excel® or Word document. E11-15 On October 31, the stockholders’ equity section of Omar Company consists of common stock $600,000 and retained earnings $900,000. Omar is considering the following two courses of action: (1) declaring a 5% stock dividend on the 60,000, $10 par value shares outstanding, or (2) effecting a 2-for-1 stock split that will reduce par value to $5 per share. The current market price is $14 per share. Instructions Prepare a tabular summary of the effects of the alternative actions on the components of stockholders’ equity and outstanding shares. Use the following column headings: Before Action,After Stock Dividend, and After Stock Split. Format to APA GUIDELINES TIMES NEW ROMAN, 12 ______________________________________________________________________________ P11-6A Arnold Corporation has been authorized to issue 40,000 shares of $100 par value, 8%, noncumulative preferred stock and 2,000,000 shares of no-par common stock. The corporation assigned a $5 stated value to the common stock. At December 31, 2011, the ledger contained the following balances pertaining to stockholders’ equity. Preferred Stock $ 240,000 Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value—Preferred 56,000 Common Stock 2,000,000 Paid-in Capital in Excess of Stated Value—Common 5,700,000 Treasury Stock—Common (1,000 shares) 22,000 Paid-in Capital from Treasury Stock 3,000 Retained Earnings 560,000 The preferred stock was issued for land having a fair market value of $296,000.All common stock issued was for cash. In November, 1,500 shares of common stock were purchased for the treasury at a per share cost of $22. In December, 500 shares of treasury stock were sold for $28 per share. No dividends were declared in 2011. Instructions: (a) Prepare the journal entries for the: (1) Issuance of preferred stock for land. (2) Issuance of common stock for cash. (3) Purchase of common treasury stock…

Attachments:

m3a1 discussion absorption versus variable costing 495206

Must be fully orginal.

There are several ways a company can allocate overhead costs to products produced or services provided. Two of these methods are absorption costing and variable costing. This assignment will allow you to explore the two methods of costing and compare/contrast the different uses of each costing system.

Using the module readings and the Argosy University online library resources, research absorption and variable costing. Use your research and/or your experiences as a working professional to complete this assignment.

Respond to the following:

  • Explain the differences between absorption costing and variable costing.
  • Explain, with the help of an example, how a company could use a variable costing system, as well as an absorption costing system. You have the option of using the company you work for as an example.
  • Explain which method is better for the company being discussed.

Support your recommendation with references to your readings or scholarly articles.

Write your initial response in 4 5 paragraphs. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.

Do the following when responding to your peers:

  • Read all posts from your peers.
  • Explain how their experiences differ from yours.
  • Provide substantive comments by contributing new, relevant information or quotes from course readings, Web sites, or other sources; building on the remarks or questions of others; or sharing practical examples of key concepts from your experiences, professional or personal.
Assignment 1 Grading Criteria Maximum Points

Initial response:

  • Was insightful, original, accurate, and timely.
  • Was substantive and demonstrated advanced understanding of concepts.
  • Compiled/synthesized theories and concepts drawn from a variety of sources to support statements and conclusions.
16

Discussion response and participation:

  • Responded to a minimum of two peers in a timely manner.
  • Offered points of view supported by research.
  • Asked challenging questions that promoted the discussion.
  • Drew relationships between one or more points in the discussion.
16

Writing:

  • Wrote in a clear, concise, formal, and organized manner.
  • Responses were error free.
  • Information from sources, where applicable, was paraphrased appropriately and accurately cited.
8
Total: 40

m4 a1 discussion questions exclusively 4 quality answers 495207

Please see attached assignment instructions and requirements.

DUE BY: Thursday, 9/19 by 10 PM PST

PAYMENT METHOD: Full payment upon completion of work as I do not want to put small amount on my card.

Document Preview:

M4: Assignment 1: Case Analysis 2 Read Case Analysis, SEE ATTACHED READING DOCUMENT: Wilcox, J. (2004, June).  http://search.proquest.com.libproxy.edmc.edu/docview/194546618Risk management: Survival of the fittest. Journal of Asset Management, 5(1), 13-24 (AN 14174003) Due by: Thursday, September 19, 2013 Was the particular solution used in each case the best solution for the problem encountered? Give reasons for your answer. Submit your essay in Microsoft Word, double-spaced, in Times New Roman 12 pt. font. Cite all sources and be sure to use the current APA standards when formatting your paper. All written assignments and responses should follow APA rules for attributing sources. Grading Criteria Maximum Points Demonstrated an understanding of the topics being discussed. 4 Met the criteria for the correct responses to the assigned questions. 4 Participation Criteria Used vocabulary relevant to the topics under discussion. 4 Participated in the discussion by asking a question, providing a statement of clarification, providing a point of view with rationale, challenging a point of discussion, or making a relationship between one or more points of the discussion. 4 Justified ideas and responses by using appropriate examples and references from texts, websites, and other references or personal experience. 4 Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources, displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. 4 Total 24 PLEASE NOTE: Before you submit the essay for this assignment take a moment to re-read the assignment and take special note of each required item in the Grading Criteria. Be certain you have addressed in an appropriate, complete manner each assignment and Grading Criteria requirement. Also, be certain you have followed all instructions as to length, APA rules, etc stated in the assignment. DO NOT WAIT UNTIL THE LAST MINUTE BEFORE THE DUE…

m4 a2 due monday 9 23 by 10 pm pst 495208

See attached assignment instructions.and requirements

DUE DATE: Monday, 9/23 by 10 PM PST

PAYMENT METHOD: Full payment upon completion of assignment.

Document Preview:

M4: Assignment 2: Final Project Continue your research about Chipotle and determine its cost of capital. In your evaluation, be sure to address the following: Question: Describe how the weighted average cost of capital (WACC) is calculated in your selected organization. Evaluate the effectiveness of this approach. Answer: Question: Would it be appropriate to use WACC as a discount rate for capital budgeting analysis? Explain why or why not. Answer: Question: Keeping in mind Chipotle’s current operations, as well as trends in the national economy and the organization’s industry, what changes, if any, would you recommend in your selected organization’s approach towards determining its cost of capital? How would you adjust the discount rate for riskier projects? Justify your method. Answer: Submit your essay by Monday, September 23, 2013. It should be in Microsoft Word, double-spaced, in Times New Roman 12 pt. font. Cite all sources and be sure to use the current APA standards when formatting your paper. All written assignments and responses should follow APA rules for attributing sources. Grading Criteria Maximum Points Described how WACC is calculated in the selected organization. 4 Evaluated the effectiveness of the approach. 12 Evaluated the appropriateness of WACC as a discount rate for capital budgeting analysis. 8 Recommended changes in the organization’s approach to determining cost of capital in general and for riskier projects. 20 Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. 4 Total 48 PLEASE NOTE: Before you submit the essay for this assignment take a moment to re-read the assignment and take special note of each required item in the Grading Criteria. Be certain you have addressed in an appropriate, complete manner each assignment and Grading Criteria requirement. Also, be certain…

Attachments:

m4a 2 applying decision making skills 495209

Must be 100% origanial. It gets checked by TURN IT In system. Rubric is below.

As a manager, part of your role is to develop strategy, and share this strategy with various stakeholders within the organization. This assignment will allow you to take your findings as a manager and communicate these findings to those who are affected.

Your company has been presented with a decision on replacing a piece of equipment for a new computerized version that promotes efficiency for the upcoming year. As manager you will need to decide whether or not the purchase of the new equipment is a worthwhile investment and to communicate your recommendations to Executive Management for a final decision. To be convincing, sufficient support for your recommendations must be provided in order to be considered valid and accepted.

Existing Equipment
Original Cost 60,000
Present Book Value 30,000
Annual Cash Operating Costs 145,000
Current Market Value 15,000
Market Value in Ten Years 0
Remaining useful Life 10 years
Replacement Equipment
Cost 600,000
Annual Cash Operating Costs 50,000
Market Value in Ten Years 0
Useful Life 10 years
Other Information
Cost of Capital 10%
Payback requirement 6 years

In this assignment, use the information above to develop a comprehensive analysis using NPV, Payback Method, and IRR to develop a recommendation on replacing the existing equipment with a new computerized version. Develop an executive summary of your findings in a Microsoft PowerPoint presentation format to present to Executive Management.

Do the following in your presentation:

  • Include a statement of the problem or topic, a concise analysis of the findings, and a recapitulation of any main conclusions or recommendations.
  • Be sure to incorporate specific details to highlight or support the summary including calculations.
  • Using your knowledge of capital budgeting techniques, explain how principles of capital budgeting, such as the payback method, IRR, and NPV, can be used to assess the potential projects and assist in the decision-making process.

Develop a 10-12 slide presentation in PowerPoint format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M4_A2.ppt.

Assignment 2 Grading Criteria Maximum Points
Wrote a statement of the problem or topic, a concise analysis of the findings, and a recapitulation of any main conclusions or recommendations. 28
Explained the summary using specific details including calculations. 28
Explained how principles of capital budgeting, such as the payback method, IRR, and NPV, can be used to assess the potential projects and assist in the decision-making process displaying knowledge of capital budgeting techniques. 36
Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; and displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. 8
Total: 100

m4a1 discussion applying balanced scorecard 495210

In many cases, managers end up in trouble as they direct their focus exclusively on cost savings. Cost cutting is always emphasized, but other impacts, such as decreased quality, can be overlooked. These overlooked impacts can have a significant effect on the revenue and profitability of an organization. The balanced scorecard is a measure to assure that management is not exclusively driven by cost, but balanced with other measures that also can significantly influence the performance of an organization.

Using the module readings and the Argosy University online library resources, research balanced scorecard and its application.

Select a service industry organization of your choice. Complete the following for the selected organization:

  • Recommend at least two performance measures in each of the balanced scorecard categories.
  • Explain each of your recommendations.
  • Using these measures as examples, explain how use of the balanced scorecard can increase the economic value added within the organization.

Write your initial response in 4 5 paragraphs. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.

.

Do the following when responding to your peers:

  • Read all posts from your peers.
  • Explain how their experiences differ from yours.
  • Provide substantive comments by contributing new, relevant information or quotes from course readings, Web sites, or other sources; building on the remarks or questions of others; or sharing practical examples of key concepts from your experiences, professional or personal.
Assignment 1 Grading Criteria Maximum Points

Initial response:

  • Was insightful, original, accurate, and timely.
  • Was substantive and demonstrated advanced understanding of concepts.
  • Compiled/synthesized theories and concepts drawn from a variety of sources to support statements and conclusions.
16

Discussion response and participation:

  • Responded to a minimum of two peers in a timely manner.
  • Offered points of view supported by research.
  • Asked challenging questions that promoted the discussion.
  • Drew relationships between one or more points in the discussion.
16

Writing:

  • Wrote in a clear, concise, formal, and organized manner.
  • Responses were error free.
  • Information from sources, where applicable, was paraphrased appropriately and accurately cited.
8
Total: 40

m5 a1 495211

See attached for assignment instructions.

Due Date: Thursday, 9/26/2013

Payment Term: Full payment upon completion of assignmnet. This is because I do not want to put small amount on my card.

Thank you for your support.

Document Preview:

M5: Assignment 1: Problem Analysis Due Thursday, September 26, 2013. In this module, you have been introduced to the capital asset pricing model (CAPM). The required return can be determined by the application of the CAPM: Expected return = Risk-free rate + Beta (Expected market return – risk-free rate) In your discussion below, fully discuss each component and its relation to the expected return calculation. In other words, how does each component impact the expected return for an investment. Next, using an investing site such as Yahoo!Finance, locate the beta for 3 companies within the same industry and calculate the expected return. For example, Pfizer, GlaxoKlineSmith ,and Johnson & Johnson are companies within the drug manufacturers industry. Discuss the meaning of the calculation including which company you would invest and why. (NOTE: For the expected return calculation use 0.08% as the risk-free rate and 8.5% for the expected market return). Submit your essay in Microsoft Word, double-spaced, in Times New Roman 12 pt. font. Cite all sources and be sure to use the current APA standards when formatting your paper. All written assignments and responses should follow APA rules for attributing sources. Grading Criteria Maximum Points Demonstrated an understanding of the topics being discussed. 4 Met the criteria for the correct responses to the assigned questions. 4 Participation Criteria Used vocabulary relevant to the topics under discussion. 4 Participated in the discussion by asking a question, providing a statement of clarification, providing a point of view with rationale, challenging a point of discussion, or making a relationship between one or more points of the discussion. 4 Justified ideas and responses by using appropriate examples and references from texts, websites, and other references or personal experience. 4 Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and…

Attachments:

m5required assignment 2 manufacturing budget analysis 495214

Must be original. Giude lines below

Tom Emory and Jim Morris strolled back to their plant from the administrative offices of Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company. Tom is manager of the machine shop in the company’s factory; Jim is manager of the equipment maintenance department.

The men had just attended the monthly performance evaluation meeting for plant department heads. These meetings had been held on the third Tuesday of each month since Robert Ferguson, Jr., the president’s son, had become plant manager a year earlier.

As they were walking, Tom Emory spoke: Boy, I hate those meetings! I never know whether my department’s accounting reports will show good or bad performance. I’m beginning to expect the worst. If the accountants say I saved the company a dollar, I’m called Sir, but if I spend even a little too much boy, do I get in trouble. I don’t know if I can hold on until I retire.

Tom had just been given the worst evaluation he had ever received in his long career with Ferguson & Son. He was the most respected of the experienced machinists in the company. He had been with the company for many years and was promoted to supervisor of the machine shop when the company expanded and moved to its present location. The president (Robert Ferguson, Sr.) had often stated that the company’s success was due to the high-quality work of machinists like Tom. As supervisor, Tom stressed the importance of craftsmanship and told his workers that he wanted no sloppy work coming from his department.

When Robert Ferguson, Jr., became the plant manager, he directed that monthly performance comparisons be made between actual and budgeted costs for each department. The departmental budgets were intended to encourage the supervisors to reduce inefficiencies and to seek cost reduction opportunities. The company controller was instructed to have his staff tighten the budget slightly whenever a department attained its budget in a given month; this was done to reinforce the plant manager’s desire to reduce costs. The young plant manager often stressed the importance of continued progress toward attaining the budget; he also made it known that he kept a file of these performance reports for future reference when he succeeded his father.

Tom Emory’s conversation with Jim Morris continued as follows:

Emory: I really don’t understand. We’ve worked so hard to meet the budget, and the minute we do so they tighten it on us. We can’t work any faster and still maintain quality. I think my men are ready to quit trying. Besides, those reports don’t tell the whole story. We always seem to be interrupting the big jobs for all those small rush orders. All that setup and machine adjustment time is killing us. And quite frankly, Jim, you were no help. When our hydraulic press broke down last month, your people were nowhere to be found. We had to take it apart ourselves and got stuck with all that idle time.

Morris: I’m sorry about that, Tom, but you know my department has had trouble making budget, too. We were running well behind at the time of that problem, and if we had spent a day on that old machine, we would never have made it up. Instead, we made the scheduled inspections of the forklift trucks because we knew we could do those in less than the budgeted time.

Emory: Well, Jim, at least you have some options. I’m locked into what the scheduling department assigns to me and you know they’re being harassed by sales for those special orders. Incidentally, why didn’t your report show all the supplies you guys wasted last month when you were working in Bill’s department?

Morris: We’re not out of the woods on that deal yet. We charged the maximum we could to other work and haven’t even reported some of it yet.

Emory: Well, I’m glad you have a way of getting out of the pressure. The accountants seem to know everything that’s happening in my department, sometimes even before I do. I thought all that budget and accounting stuff was supposed to help, but it just gets me into trouble. It’s all a big pain. I’m trying to put out quality work; they’re trying to save pennies.

Review the case. Respond to the following:

  • Identify the problems that appear to exist in Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company’s budgetary control system and explain how the problems are likely to reduce the effectiveness of the system. (approximately 1 page)
  • Explain how Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company’s budgetary control system could be revised to improve its effectiveness. (approximately 1 2 pages)
  • Explain how the use of an activity-based costing system could change the results of the budget, if utilized. (approximately 1 page)
  • As stated in the case, many employees have quit trying and have altered behavior on the job. Provide specific ways for how you would use a budget to change employee behavior and align goals in the organization. Explain how goal alignment can improve profitability and overall return to the shareholders of the company. (approximately 1 page)
  • Synthesize data to explain the concept of ROI and describe how the use of an activity-based costing system can improve the company s ROI and the potential impact on free cash flow. (approximately 1 page)

Write a 5 6-page report in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M5_A2.doc.

.

Assignment 2 Grading Criteria Maximum Points
Identified the problems that appear to exist in the company s budgetary control system and explained how the problems are likely to reduce the effectiveness of the system. 64
Explained how the company’s budgetary control system could be revised to improve its effectiveness. 64
Explained how the use of an activity-based costing system could change the results of the budget if utilized. 44
Identified ways of how one can use a budget to change employee behavior and align goals in the organization and explained how goal alignment can improve profitability and overall return to shareholders of the company. 44
Synthesized data to explain the concept of ROI, how the use of an activity-based costing system can improve the company s ROI, and the potential impact on free cash flow. 56
Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; and displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. 28
Total: 300

man accounting questions 495215

#1 Milano Pizza is a small neighborhood pizzeria that has a small area for in-store dining as well as offering take-out and free home delivery services. The pizzeria’s owner has determined that the shop has two major cost drivers—the number of pizzas sold and the number of deliveries made. Data concerning the pizzeria’s costs appear below:     Fixed Cost Per Month Cost per Pizza Cost per Delivery   Pizza ingredients   $2.0     Kitchen staff $3,820       Utilities $540 $0.05     Delivery person     $2.5   Delivery vehicle $340   $1.

Document Preview:

#1 Milano Pizza is a small neighborhood pizzeria that has a small area for in-store dining as well as offering take-out and free home delivery services. The pizzeria’s owner has determined that the shop has two major cost drivers—the number of pizzas sold and the number of deliveries made. Data concerning the pizzeria’s costs appear below:??   ?Fixed Cost Per Month?Cost per Pizza?Cost per Delivery??  Pizza ingredients? ?$2.0? ??  Kitchen staff?$3,820? ? ??  Utilities?$540?$0.05? ??  Delivery person? ? ?$2.5??  Delivery vehicle?$340? ?$1.0??  Equipment depreciation?$190? ? ??  Rent?$1,780? ? ??  Miscellaneous?$810?$1? ???? In November, the pizzeria budgeted for 1,250 pizzas at an average selling price of $16 per pizza and for 190 deliveries.??Data concerning the pizzeria’s operations in November appear below:??   ?Actual Results??  Pizzas?1,320??  Deliveries?150??  Revenue?$18,500??  Pizza ingredients?$3,285??  Kitchen staff?$5,260??  Utilities?$1,000??  Delivery person?$375??  Delivery vehicle?$530??  Equipment depreciation?$190??  Rent?$1,780??  Miscellaneous?$910???? Required:??Prepare a flexible budget performance report that shows both activity variances and revenue and spending variances for the pizzeria for November. (Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)??  Milano Pizza Flexible Budget Performance Report For the Month Ended November 30?? ?Activity Variances?Revenue and Spending Variances??  Revenue?amount$      ?(Click to select)None Favorable Unfavorable      ?amount$      ?(Click to select)Favorable Unfavorable None      ?? ??????  Expenses:? ? ? ? ??     Pizza ingredients?     ?(Click to select)F U None      ?     ?(Click to select)FUNone      ??     Kitchen…

Attachments:

management help 495216

Notes from text One of the primary responsibilities of managers is to set goals for where the organization or department should go in the future and plan how to get it there. Walmart managers are facing a struggle that executives in every organization encounter as they try to decide what goals to pursue and how to achieve them. Lack of planning or poor planning can seriously hurt an organization. http://digitalbookshelf.southuniversity.edu/#/books/9781285696706/pages/68997339http://digitalbookshelf.southuniversity.

Document Preview:

Notes from text One of the primary responsibilities of managers is to set goals for where the organization or department should go in the future and plan how to get it there. Walmart managers are facing a struggle that executives in every organization encounter as they try to decide what goals to pursue and how to achieve them. Lack of planning or poor planning can seriously hurt an organization. ? HYPERLINK “http://digitalbookshelf.southuniversity.edu/#/books/9781285696706/pages/68997339” ?http://digitalbookshelf.southuniversity.edu/#/books/9781285696706/pages/68997339? Goal Setting and Planning Overview A ? HYPERLINK “http://digitalbookshelf.southuniversity.edu/books/9781285696706/content/id/goal” ?goal? is a desired future circumstance or condition that the organization attempts to realize. ? HYPERLINK “http://digitalbookshelf.southuniversity.edu/books/9781285696706/content/id/ch7-fn4” ?4? Goals are important because organizations exist for a purpose, and goals define and state that purpose. A ? HYPERLINK “http://digitalbookshelf.southuniversity.edu/books/9781285696706/content/id/plan” ?plan? is a blueprint for goal achievement and specifies the necessary resource allocations, schedules, tasks, and other actions. Goals specify future ends; plans specify today’s means. The concept of ? HYPERLINK “http://digitalbookshelf.southuniversity.edu/books/9781285696706/content/id/planning” ?planning? usually incorporates both ideas; it means determining the organization’s goals and defining the means for achieving them.? HYPERLINK “http://digitalbookshelf.southuniversity.edu/books/9781285696706/content/id/ch7-fn5” ?5? LEVELS OF GOALS AND PLANS ? HYPERLINK “http://digitalbookshelf.southuniversity.edu/books/9781285696706/content/id/ex7.1” ?Exhibit 7.1? illustrates the levels of goals and plans in an organization. The planning process starts with a formal mission that defines the basic purpose of the organization, especially for external audiences. The mission is the…

managerial accounting 495218

MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING Breakeven sales; sales to earn a target operating income, contribution margin income statement British Productions performs London shows. The average show sells 900 tickets at $65 per ticket. There are 155 shows a year. No additional shows can be held as the theater is also used by other production companies. The average show has a cast of 55, each earning a net average of $330 per show. The cast is paid after each show. The other variable cost is program-printing cost of $9 per guest. Annual fixed costs total $580,500.

Document Preview:

MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING Breakeven sales; sales to earn a target operating income, contribution margin income statement British Productions performs London shows. The average show sells 900 tickets at $65 per ticket. There are 155 shows a year. No additional shows can be held as the theater is also used by other production companies. The average show has a cast of 55, each earning a net average of $330 per show. The cast is paid after each show. The other variable cost is program-printing cost of $9 per guest. Annual fixed costs total $580,500. Requirements Compute revenue and variable costs for each show. Use the income statement and equation approach to compute the number of shows British Productions must perform each year to break even. Use the contribution margin approach to compute the number of shows needed each year to earn a profit of $4,128,000. Is this profit goal realistic? Give your reasoning. Prepare British Productions’ contribution margin income statement for 155 shows performed in 2012. Report only two categories of costs: variable and fixed. *PLEASE REVIEW AND ANSWER ALL REQUIREMENTS

Attachments:

managerial accounting 495220

Detailed answer to the questions please.

Document Preview:

Chapter 1 Assigned Questions 1–1?How does managerial accounting differ from financial accounting? Managerial accounting is different from financial accounting in that Managerial accounting deals more with planning, controlling, and decision making within an organized group or company. Whereas, financial accounting is data and information that is presented to a third-party or another company about that business. Also, managerial accounting deals with future decisions and timeliness. They do not comply with the GAAP/IFRS. On the other hand, financial accounting deals with past consequences and precision. Financial accounting does have to comply with GAAP/IFRS. ??1–3?If you had to decide whether to continue making a component part or to begin buying the part from an overseas supplier, what quantitative and qualitative factors would influence your decision? ??1–5?Why is managerial accounting relevant to business majors and their future careers? ??1–8?Why do management accountants need to understand their company’s strategy? ??1–13?Why do companies that implement Lean Production tend to have minimal inventories???? ??1–14?Why are leadership skills important to managers? ??1–15?Why is ethics important to business???

Attachments:

managerial accounting final 495224

Hello,

This final exam is 20 questions on managerial accouting for my business courses. It requires that all the math work be shown and entered into a microsoft word doc for each question. Please only serious tutors, I have recently been burned by another tutor and I’m very cautious. Please reveiw the exam first before taking on the assignment, thanks!

Document Preview:

Justin Deneff-GOL WebAssign NS 216, section XM1, Spring 2013 Unit 11 Final Exam (Test) Instructor: Beth Schivitz Current Score : 170 / 200 Due : Thursday, December 19 2013 11:59 PM CST 1. 10/10 points | Previous Answers aufcat7 0.4.004.nva Factor out the GCF from the polynomial. 2 -9y – 81y 2. –/10 points AufCAT7 5.4.027. Use a calculator to find an approximate value of the function. Round your answer to the nearest ten-thousandth. 11p tan 13 3. 10/10 points | Previous Answers aufcat7 6.2.053.nva Verify the identity. p tan ? + 1 tan ? + = 4 1 – tan ? Use the Sum Identity for tangent functions, evaluate all possible terms, and simplify. tan ? + p tan ? + = 4 = 4. 10/10 points | Previous Answers AufCAT7 6.6.016. Solve the equation for solutions in the interval 0 = x < 2p. Round approximate solutions to the nearest ten-thousandth. (Enter your answers as a comma-separated list. Enter all answers including repetitions.) 2 2 sin x – 1 = 0 x = 5. 10/10 points | Previous Answers AufCAT7 7.2.041. Round your answer to two significant digits. A plane leaves airport A and travels 560 miles to airport B at a bearing of N32°E. The plane leaves airport B and travels to airport C 280 miles away at a bearing of S72°E. Find the distance from airport A to airport C. mi 6846. 10/10 points | Previous Answers AufCAT7 7.3.067. Find the measure of the smallest nonnegative angle between the two vectors. Round approximate measures to the nearest tenth of a degree. v = 4i – 4j; w = 4i + 4j ? = ° 90 Is the pair of vectors orthogonal? Yes No 7. –/10 points AufCAT7 7.4.058. Perform the indicated operation in trigonometric form. Write the solution in standard form. Round approximate constants to the nearest ten-thousandth. (3 + 3i)( 3 – i) 8. 10/10 points | Previous Answers AufCAT7 8.6.018. Find a rectangular equation for the given polar equation. 6 r = 5 + 4 cos ? 9. 10/10 points | Previous Answers AufCAT7 8.2.001. Examine the following four…

Attachments:

managerial accounting homework 495226

Activity Cost Rates

P 3.Noir Company produces four versions of its model J17-21 bicycle seat. The

four versions have different shapes, but their processing operations and production

costs are identical. During July, these costs were incurred:

Direct materials

Leather $25,430

Metal frame 39,180

Bolts 3,010

Materials handling

Labor 8,232

Equipment depreciation 4,410

Electrical power 2,460

Maintenance 5,184

Assembly

Direct labor 13,230

Engineering design

Labor 4,116

Electrical power 1,176

Engineering overhead 7,644

Overhead

Equipment depreciation 7,056

Indirect labor 30,870

Supervision 17,640

Operating supplies 4,410

Electrical power 10,584

Repairs and maintenance 21,168

Building occupancy overhead 52,920

July s output totaled 29,400 units. Each unit requires three machine hours of

effort. Materials handling costs are allocated to the products based on direct

materials cost, engineering design costs are allocated based on units produced,

and overhead is allocated based on machine hours. Assembly costs are allocated

based on direct labor hours, which are estimated at 882 for July.

During July, Noir Company completed 520 bicycle seats for Job 142. The

activity usage for Job 142 was as follows: direct materials, $1,150; direct labor

hours, 15.

Required

1. Compute the following activity cost rates: (a) materials handling cost rate;

(b) assembly cost rate, (c) engineering design cost rate, and (d) overhead rate.

2. Prepare a bill of activities for Job 142.

3. Use activity-based costing to compute the job s total cost and product unit cost.

Breakeven Analysis

E 8.Techno Designs produces head covers for golf clubs. The company expects to

generate a profit next year. It anticipates fixed manufacturing costs of $126,500

and fixed general and administrative expenses of $82,030 for the year. Variable

manufacturing and selling costs per set of head covers will be $4.65 and $2.75,

respectively. Each set will sell for $13.40.

1. Compute the breakeven point in sales units.

2. Compute the breakeven point in sales dollars.

3. If the selling price is increased to $14 per unit and fixed general and administrative

expenses are cut by $33,465, what will the new breakeven point be

in units?

4. Prepare a graph to illustrate the breakeven point computed in2.

Attachments:

managerial accoutning discussion 2 495228

“Liquidity Ratios” Please respond to the following:

    • From the first e-Activity, evaluate the impact of not considering the current portion of long-term liabilities in the current ratio and working capital, and how this may impact day- to-day business decisions.
    • Determine the implications of a significant positive change in the ratio. Provide a rationale with your response.

Comprehensive Income” Please respond to the following:

From the second e-Activity, elaborate on the potential consequences of eliminating the option to present other comprehensive income within the statement of changes in equity on financial statement users and companies.

Evaluate the effect of the increased prominence of other comprehensive income on financial statement users and companies.

Attachments:

managment acc 495231

Standard Costs and variances

Differential Analysis:Relevant Costs for decision making

Document Preview:

A company has a standard cost system in which fixed and variable manufacturing overhead costs are applied to products on the basis of direct labor-hours. The company’s choice of the denominator level of activity affects the Variable component of the predetermined overhead rate. True False The budget variance represents the difference between the actual fixed manufacturing overhead cost incurred during a period and the budgeted fixed manufacturing overhead cost. True False A volume variance and an efficiency variance are computed for fixed manufacturing overhead costs. True False At the end of the year, actual manufacturing overhead costs were $210,000 and applied manufacturing overhead costs were $146,400. If the denominator activity for the year was 20,000 machine-hours, and if 24,000 standard machine-hours were allowed for the year’s production, the predetermined overhead rate per machine-hour was: (Round your answer to 2 decimal places.) $6.65 $6.10 $9.00 $9.50 Tidd Corporation makes a product with the following standard costs:  Inputs Standard Quantity or Hours Standard Price or Rate Standard Cost Per Unit  Direct materials 4.5 grams  $5.00 per gram $22.50  Direct labor 0.7 hours  $11.00 per hour $7.70  Variable overhead 0.7 hours  $5.00 per hour $3.50 The company reported the following results concerning this product in November.  Originally budgeted output 9,600    units  Actual output 9,700    units  Raw materials used in production 44,800    grams  Purchases of raw materials 47,290    grams  Actual direct labor-hours 7,860    hours  Actual cost of raw materials purchases $132,430      Actual direct labor cost $125,123      Actual variable overhead cost $29,896     The company applies variable overhead on the basis of direct labor-hours. The direct materials price variance is computed when the materials are purchased. The variable overhead efficiency variance for November is: $5,350 U $5,350 F…

Attachments:

for martin only 495232

I’ve uploaded every thing you need in the attachment below.

Document Preview:

Final Paper Focus of the Final Paper Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.   In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors.   Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions.  Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references. Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:   Company Overview Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most).   What industry is it in?   What are its main products or services?  Who are its competitors?   Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company.  Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis.  Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.   Ratio Analysis Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period.   Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated.  Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios.  Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios?  Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.   Recommendation Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company?  What strengths do you see?  What risks do you see?  It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.  Writing the Final Paper 1.   Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to…

Attachments:

materials amp conversion accounting 495233

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Given P04-AT P04-AT Given P04-17A P04-17A Given P04-15A P04-15A Student Name: Class: Materials Conversion Cost per equivalent unit Materials Conversion Total Cost to be accounted for: Total departmental costs Costs transferred in Materials cost Conversion costs Transferred Forming Department Production Report 1. Equivalent Units of Production Ending work in process: Equivalent units of production 2. Costs per Equivalent Unit Cost added during the period 4. Cost Reconciliation Costs accounted for as follows: Cost of ending work in process inventory Ending work in process inventory: Equivalent units of production Cost per equivalent unit Cost per equivalent unit 3. Cost of Ending Work in Process Inventory and Units Transferred Out Total cost Units completed and transferred out: Units transferred to the next department Cost of units completed and transferred out Pounds in process, May 1 ? Pounds in process, May 31 Cooking Department Production Report Transferred to next department Cost of beginning work in process Units Mixing Percentage Completed Mixing Cost of beginning work in process inventory Complete as to materials Complete as to conversion In Costs BRADY PRODUCTS Work in Process – Cracking Department Inventory, May 1 Inventory, May 31 Completed and transferred May 1 work in process inventory: Pounds started into production in May BOHEMIAN LINKS, INC. Work in process inventory, April 1 Work in process inventory, April 30 Cost added during April Batches completed and transferred to Packaging Department during April Units transferred to next department DURALL COMPANY Forming department costs: Work in process inventory, October 1 Conversion costs added during October Material added during October Costs transferred in from the Mixing Department In to the Blending Department 1. Equivalent Units of Production Cost per Equivalent Unit 2. …

Attachments:

mba 560 module 5 test 495234

Problem 1. The following information applies to Barnhart Company:

Additional information:

  • Net Credit Sales = $220,000
  • Beginning Accounts Receivable = $10,000

Required:

1) Compute Barnhart’s:

a) Quick ratio
b) Current ratio
c) Working capital
d) Accounts receivable turnover
e) Average days to collect receivables

Problem 2. The Jiffy Manufacturing Company started operations in 2012 when it acquired $100,000 from its owners. During the year, the company incurred the following costs:

The company placed 12,000 units into production, completed 10,000 units, and sold 8,000 units. The average selling price was $17 per unit.

Required:

1) Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured and sold for the year ended December 31, 2012.
2) Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012.

Document Preview:

Problem 1. The following information applies to Barnhart Company:??  ? ??Additional information: Net Credit Sales = $220,000 Beginning Accounts Receivable = $10,000 Required:??1) Compute Barnhart’s:??a) Quick ratio?b) Current ratio?c) Working capital?d) Accounts receivable turnover?e) Average days to collect receivables  Problem 2. The Jiffy Manufacturing Company started operations in 2012 when it acquired $100,000 from its owners. During the year, the company incurred the following costs:??  ??The company placed 12,000 units into production, completed 10,000 units, and sold 8,000 units. The average selling price was $17 per unit.??Required:??1) Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured and sold for the year ended December 31, 2012.?2) Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012.

Attachments:

mba 560 unit 2 problem 3 25 and 4 20 495235

mba-560 unit 2 problem 3-25 and 4-20

Document Preview:

4300 9000 10000 -110 2 3 -1980 -20 -2000 -1980 -710 6 -60 7 5390 -5500 -110 5390 8 0 -60 4680 -2090 -60 4/30/2012 3013 3054 3056 6605 5565 -160 Student Name: Class: Problem 03-25 Requirement a. and b. JEATER COMPANY Horizontal Statements Model – 2012 Balance Sheet Income Statement Statement of Event Accounts Merchandise Common Retained Net Cash Flows No. Type Cash + Receivable Inventory = Payable Stock Earnings Revenue – Expenses Income Bal. 1a 1b 4a 4b 5a 5b Requirement c. Financial Statements For the Year Ended December 31, 2012 Net Sales Cost of Goods Sold Gross Margin Operating Expenses Transportation-out Operating Income Statement of Changes in Stockholders’ Equity Beginning Common Stock Plus: Stock Issued Ending Common Stock Beginning Retained Earnings Plus: Net Income Ending Retained Earnings Total Stockholders’ Equity As of December 31, 2012 Assets Cash Merchandise Inventory Total Assets Liabilities Stockholders’ Equity Common Stock Retained Earnings Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity Statement of Cash Flows Cash Flow from Operating Activities: Inflow from Customers Outflow for Inventory Outflow for Expenses Net Cash Flow from Operating Activities: Cash Flow from Investing Activities Cash Flow from Financing Activities Net Change in Cash Plus: Beginning Cash Balance Ending Cash Balance Problem 04-20 SUPERIOR AUTO SUPPLY, INC. Bank Reconciliation Unadjusted Bank Balance, May 31, 2012 Add: Deposits in transit Bank Error Less: Outstanding Checks: True Cash Balance, May 31, 2012 Unadjusted Book Balance, May 31, 2012 Add: Note collected by bank Error in recording payment for utilities Less: Collection Fee Bank Service Charge NSF Checks AS AU OA Enter the appropriate amount or NA for not affected. Enter the appropriate amount or NA for not affected. Enter the appropriate amount or NA for not affected. Enter the appropriate amount or NA for not affected. Enter the appropriate amount or NA for not…

Attachments:

mba 560 unit 2 quiz 495236

1.During the month of March, Wang Company sold merchandise on account for $9,100. The merchandise had cost Wang $4,900. Which of the following represents the effects of this transaction on Wang s financial statements?

(Points : 2)

Row One
Row Two
Row Three
Row Four

2.What is the relationship between gross margin and net income? (Points : 2)

Gross Margin Merchandise Inventory at the end of the period = Net Income
Gross Margin Selling and Administrative Expenses = Net Income
Gross Margin + Selling and Administrative Expenses = Net income
Sales Revenue x Gross Margin Percentage= Net Income

3.Which of the following is not a period cost? (Points : 2)

Advertising Expense
Sales Commissions
Cost of Goods Sold
Interest Expense

4.Cost of Goods Sold is reported as a(n): (Points : 2)

asset on the balance sheet.
direct reduction of equity on the statement of changes in stockholders equity.
addition to Sales Revenue on the income statement.
expense on the income statement.

5.Whitney Company s Cost of Goods Available for Sale for 2010 was $610,000. Which of the following statements is true? (Points : 2)

If the merchandise inventory at the end of the year was $100,000, the Cost of Goods Sold was $510,000.
If the merchandise inventory at the end of the year was $100,000, the Cost of Goods
Sold was $710,000.
If the beginning inventory was $95,000, the Cost of Goods Sold was $515,000.
If the beginning inventory was $95,000, the Cost of Goods sold was $705,000.

6.Merchandising businesses: (Points : 2)

manufacture the goods they sell.
generate revenue primarily by providing services to customers.
buy the merchandise they sell from suppliers.
include dry cleaning companies and law firms.

7.Gruver Company maintains perpetual inventory records. The company’s inventory account had a $5,500 balance as of December 31, 2010. On that date, a physical count of inventory showed only $5,300 of merchandise in stock. The write-down to recognize the missing inventory will: (Points : 2)

decrease assets.
increase expense.
decrease equity.
all of the above.

8.Lemon Company sent goods to a customer FOB delivery. What effect will these freight costs have on Lemon company s financial statements?

(Points : 2)

Row One
Row Two
Row Three
Row Four

9.Gross margin is equal to: (Points : 2)

Sales Revenue divided by the balance in Merchandise Inventory at the end of the period.
the balance in Merchandise Inventory at the beginning of the period plus the amount of inventory purchased during the year.
Sales Revenue minus Cost of Goods Sold.
Sales Revenue minus Cost of Goods Available for Sale.

10.Which of the following statements accurately describes a fidelity bond? (Points : 2)

Insurance that the company buys to protect itself from loss due to employee dishonesty
Proper procedures for processing accounting transactions
Procedures to provide reasonable assurance that the objectives of a company are accomplished
Guidelines that limit the actions and authority of different levels of management

11.Which of the following is not a reason why a business needs strong internal controls over cash? (Points : 2)

A small volume of high-denomination currency represents a significant amount of value.
Ownership of cash is difficult to prove.
Cash has universal appeal.
Money is the common unit of measurement in business.

12.What documentation issued by a bank increases a company’s checking account balance at the bank? (Points : 2)

An account invoice
A debit memo
A credit memo
A certified check

13.What documentation issued by a bank increases a company’s checking account balance at the bank? (Points : 2)

An account invoice
A debit memo
A credit memo
A certified check

14.In preparing a bank reconciliation, typical adjustments to the bank balance include: (Points : 2)

NSF checks.
interest earned on the account.
accounts or notes receivable collected by the bank.
deposits in transit.

15.Wren Company accepted a check from Jay Company as payment for services rendered. Wren’s bank statement revealed that the Jay check was an NSF check. Wren has not decided to write off the account. Exclusive of any bank charges what will the entry to record the NSF check have on the accounting equation of Wren Company?

Row Total Assets Total Equity
One No effect No effect
Two Decrease Decrease
Three Decrease No effect
Four No effect Decrease

(Points : 2)

Row One
Row Two
Row Three
Row Four

16.Which of the following is not one of the purposes of an internal control system? (Points : 2)

Safeguarding the company’s assets
Ensuring that the company is using the most effective marketing plan
The assessment of the degree of compliance with company policies and public laws
The evaluation of performance

17.Unger Company uses the perpetual inventory method. Unger sold goods that cost $3,500 for $7,200. If the sale was made to a customer on account, the sale will: (Points : 2)

increase total assets by $3,700.
increase total liabilities by $7,200.
increase total liabilities by $3,500.
increase total assets by $7,200.

18.The most effective way to reduce opportunities for ethical or criminal misconduct is: (Points : 2)

to obtain fidelity bonds for all employees.
to perform random physical counts frequently.
to implement an effective system of internal controls.
to perform extensive background checks before hiring employees.

19.The following are strong control measures over cash receipts except for: (Points : 2)

a record of all cash collections should be prepared immediately upon receipt.
employees who receive cash should give customers a written receipt.
there should be a significant amount of cash on hand in order to avoid writing checks.
cash receipts should be deposited in a bank as soon as possible.

20.An entry to record the purchase of inventory on account under the perpetual inventory method: (Points : 2)

increases total assets.
decreases total liabilities.
decreases total assets.
increases total equity.

Attachments:

accounting question 495182

Inc Stmt Balance Sheet Ratio Answer Sheet Fiscal Year Ended $ ASSETS 1) What do the liquidity, profitability, and solvency ratios reveal about the financial position of the company? 2) Which users may be interested in each type of ratio? 3) What does the collected data reveal about the performance and position of the company? SOLVENCY: Asset turnover Numerator Denominator Answer Expression LIQUIDITY: Profit Margin Current Ratio Acid Quick Ratio Receivables turnover Inventory turnover Return on Assets Return on Equity Debt to Total Assets Times Interest Earned Ratio R

Document Preview:

Inc Stmt Balance Sheet Ratio Answer Sheet Fiscal Year Ended $ ASSETS 1) What do the liquidity, profitability, and solvency ratios reveal about the financial position of the company? 2) Which users may be interested in each type of ratio? 3) What does the collected data reveal about the performance and position of the company? SOLVENCY: Asset turnover Numerator Denominator Answer Expression LIQUIDITY: Profit Margin Current Ratio Acid Quick Ratio Receivables turnover Inventory turnover Return on Assets Return on Equity Debt to Total Assets Times Interest Earned Ratio Ratio PROFITABILITY: times % : 1 Complete the ten ratios below. Company C CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF FINANCIAL POSITION (in millions) February 3, January 28, Current assets: Cash and cash equivalents Short-term investments Accounts receivable, net Financing receivables, net Inventories Other Total current assets Property, plant, and equipment, net Investments Long-term financing receivables, net Other non-current assets Total assets LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS’ EQUITY Current liabilities: Accounts payable Accrued and other Total current liabilities Long-term debt Other non-current liabilities Total liabilities Stockholders’ equity: Preferred stock and capital in excess of $.01 par value; shares issued and outstanding: none Common stock and capital in excess of $.01 par value; shares authorized: 7,000; shares issued: 2,818 and 2,769, respectively Treasury stock, at cost; 488 and 284 shares, respectively Retained earnings Other comprehensive loss Total stockholders’ equity Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME (in millions, except per share amounts) January 30, Net revenue Cost of revenue Gross margin Operating expenses: Selling, general, and administrative Research, development, and engineering Total operating expenses Operating income Investment and…

Attachments:

accounting questions 495183

Eye Openers 1. Describe the stockholders’ liability to creditors of a corporation. 2. Why are most large businesses organized as corporations? 3. Of two corporations organized at approximately the same time and engaged in competing businesses, one issued $100 par common stock, and the other issued $0.01 par common stock. Do the par designations provide any indication as to which stock is preferable as an investment? Explain. 4. A stockbroker advises a client to “buy preferred stock. . . . With that type of stock, . . . [you] will never have to worry about losing the dividends.

Document Preview:

Eye Openers 1. Describe the stockholders’ liability to creditors of a corporation. 2. Why are most large businesses organized as corporations? 3. Of two corporations organized at approximately the same time and engaged in competing businesses, one issued $100 par common stock, and the other issued $0.01 par common stock. Do the par designations provide any indication as to which stock is preferable as an investment? Explain. 4. A stockbroker advises a client to “buy preferred stock. . . . With that type of stock, . . . [you] will never have to worry about losing the dividends.” Is the broker right? 5. What are some of the factors that influence the market price of a corporation’s stock? 6. When a corporation issues stock at a premium, is the premium income? Explain. 7. (a) What are the three conditions for the declaration and payment of a cash dividend? (b) The dates in connection with the declaration of a cash dividend are February 16, March 18, and April 17. Identify each date. 8. A corporation with both preferred stock and common stock outstanding has a substantial credit balance in its retained earnings account at the beginning of the current fiscal year. Although net income for the current year is sufficient to pay the preferred dividend of $125,000 each quarter and a common dividend of $300,000 each quarter, the board of directors declares dividends only on the preferred stock. Suggest possible reasons for passing the dividends on the common stock. 9. An owner of 500shares of Micro shop Company common stock receives a stock dividend of 5 shares. (a) What is the effect of the stock dividend on the stockholder’s proportionate interest (equity) in the corporation? (b) How does the total equity of 505 shares compare with the total equity of 500 shares before the stock dividend? 10. a. Where should a declared but unpaid cash dividend be reported on the balance sheet? b. Where should a declared but unissued stock dividend be reported on the balance sheet? 11. a….

Attachments:

accounting questions 495184

Eye Openers 1. What is the principal disadvantage of the direct method of reporting cash flows from operating activities? 2. What are the major advantages of the indirect method of reporting cash flows from operating activities? 3. A corporation issued $500,000 of common stock in exchange for $500,000 of fixed assets. Where would this transaction be reported on the statement of cash flows? 4. A retail business, using the accrual method of accounting, owed merchandise creditors (accounts payable) $300,000 at the beginning of the year and $340,000 at the end of the year.

Document Preview:

Eye Openers 1. What is the principal disadvantage of the direct method of reporting cash flows from operating activities? 2. What are the major advantages of the indirect method of reporting cash flows from operating activities? 3. A corporation issued $500,000 of common stock in exchange for $500,000 of fixed assets. Where would this transaction be reported on the statement of cash flows? 4. A retail business, using the accrual method of accounting, owed merchandise creditors (accounts payable) $300,000 at the beginning of the year and $340,000 at the end of the year. How would the $40,000 increase be used to adjust net income in determining the amount of cash flows from operating activities by the indirect method? Explain. 5. If salaries payable was $90,000 at the beginning of the year and $70,000 at the end of the year, should $20,000 be added to or deducted from income to determine the amount of cash flows from operating activities by the indirect method? Explain. 6. A long-term investment in bonds with a cost of $60,000 was sold for $72,000 cash. (a) What was the gain or loss on the sale? (b) What was the effect of the transaction on cash flows? (c) How should the transaction be reported in the statement of cash flows if cash flows from operating activities are reported by the indirect method? 7. A corporation issued $6,000,000 of 20-year bonds for cash at 104. How would the transaction be reported on the statement of cash flows? 8. Fully depreciated equipment costing $100,000was discarded. What was the effect of the transaction on cash flows if (a) $24,000 cash is received, (b) no cash is received? 9. For the current year, Bearings Company decided to switch from the indirect method to the direct method for reporting cash flows from operating activities on the statement of cash flows. Will the change cause the amount of net cash flow from operating activities to be (a) larger,(b) smaller, or (c) the same as if the indirect method had been used? Explain. 10….

Attachments:

accounting questions 495185

Chapter 7 introduces accounting systems. As described at the beginning of the chapter, most companies, even small businesses use accounting software to record business information instead of using the manual systems described in the bulk of Ch. 7. Below, I have posted a link to Sage Peachtree Accounting Software’s website. I want you to watch two short segments. On the home page, click on Videos (scroll down a little, and look on the right-hand side). Under “Choosing Accounting Software for the First Time”, click on Getting Around Sage 50 Accounting, under See How Easy it is to get started.

Document Preview:

Chapter 7 introduces accounting systems. As described at the beginning of the chapter, most companies, even small businesses use accounting software to record business information instead of using the manual systems described in the bulk of Ch. 7. Below, I have posted a link to Sage Peachtree Accounting Software’s website. I want you to watch two short segments. On the home page, click on Videos (scroll down a little, and look on the right-hand side). Under “Choosing Accounting Software for the First Time”, click on Getting Around Sage 50 Accounting, under See How Easy it is to get started.  This is a short video (under two minutes) that introduces some of the main features in the accounting software. You will hear many of the terms you have been learning about so far. Then click on any of the other four topics that you think would be interesting to you under See how easy it is to get started!, and watch that segment. Then simply comment on what you learned. This can include likes, dislikes, concerns, etc. If you are a budding entrepreneur and want to share, tell us how you might use Sage/Peachtree Accounting.  Link to Sage Peachtree Accounting Website Videos you are a budding entrepreneur and want to share, tell us how you might use Sage/Peachtree Accounting.  Link to Sage Peachtree Accounting Website Videos d business information instead of using the manual systems described in the bulk of Ch. 7. Below, I have posted a link to Sage Peachtree Accounting Software’s website. I want you to watch two short segments. On the home page, click on Videos (scroll down a little, and look on the right-hand side). Under “Choosing Accounting Software for the First Time”, click on Getting Around Sage 50 Accounting, under See How Easy it is to get started.  This is a short video (under two minutes) that introduces some of the main features in the accounting software. You will hear many of the terms you have been learning about so far. Then click on any of the other four…

accounting questions 495186

In your own words please explain. NO word minimum. Please cite all sources using APA format. 1) A statement of cash flows prepared on the direct method is prepared by converting every number on the income statement to its cash amount.

Document Preview:

In your own words please explain. NO word minimum. Please cite all sources using APA format. 1) A statement of cash flows prepared on the direct method is prepared by converting every number on the income statement to its cash amount.  How is a cash flow statement prepared using the indirect method? Which would be more useful to use if you had a choice between the annual report or the statement of cash flows? 2) Warning signs relating to cash flow issues would include not being able to pay payroll on time, continually using borrowed funds to operate, and not replacing fixed assets when sold or disposed of.  What are other examples??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting questions 495187

Please see attached. No word minimum. Original work only.

Document Preview:

1) A consulting company that provides software and services relating to business intelligence and analytics has a library of customer success stories on its website at http://www.sas.com/success/indexByTopic.html/http://www.sas.com/success/indexByTopic.html#1000.1001.0000. Select and read one of the success stories relating to Activity-Based Management. Summarize the success story, and relate the ideas of the article to what you have learned this week in this course. 2) The State of Rhode Island publishes its budget and the supporting information at http://www.budget.state.ri.us/index.htmwww.budget.state.ri.us/index.htm. Access the budget and answer the following: What are the duties of the budget office? (Hint: Use the Primer link.) What are the six governmental functions listed in the budget? What are the major sources of Rhode Island’s revenues? What is the accounting basis used in the preparation of the budget? (Hint: Use the Primer link and scroll down until you see the Budget Basis section.) The budget mentions four categories of program performance measures. List them, and briefly describe how they are used in Rhode Island. (Hint: Use the Primer link and scroll down until you see the Program Performance Measures section.) What did you learn from reviewing the most recent budget of the State of Rhode Island? What do you think the biggest challenges are when it comes to preparing their budget? Summary of notes from readings “activity based costing” Traditional cost accounting methods suffer from several defects that can result in distorted costs for decision-making purposes. All manufacturing costs—even those that are not caused by any specific product—are allocated to products. Nonmanufacturing costs that are caused by products are not assigned to products. And finally, traditional methods tend to place too much reliance on unit-level allocation bases such as direct labor and machine-hours. This results in overcosting high-volume products and…

Attachments:

accounting questions 495190

please see attached. Original and quality work only.

Document Preview:

Name two reasons why overhead might be under-applied in a given year and how this might be able to be prevented? What is a predetermined overhead rate and how is it computed?  What do you feel is the best allocation base to use for the denominator in the predetermined overhead rate calculation and why?  What factors would you consider in choosing the allocation base? Research the history of process costing in the United States. When did it begin to be used in manufacturing companies? What type of company would use a process costing system? Investigate process costing accounting in at least one country outside of the United States. What are the reporting requirements, if any? If possible, find a company that would use process costing.

Attachments:

accounting questions 495191

Please see attached. Original and quality work only. No word minimum.

Document Preview:

Please provide original work. Cite all sources using APA format. Name two reasons why overhead might be under-applied in a given year and how this might be able to be prevented? What is a predetermined overhead rate and how is it computed?  What do you feel is the best allocation base to use for the denominator in the predetermined overhead rate calculation and why?  What factors would you consider in choosing the allocation base????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting questions 495193

I ATTACHED A PDF

I ONLY NEED PART B DONE ITS 3 QUESTIONS

SCROOL TO PART B

Document Preview:

Print by: Sadu Singh FUNDAMENTALS OF ACCOUNTING II: 352923 / Project *Problem 13-4A The following financial information is for Cheaney Company. CHEANEY COMPANY Balance Sheets December 31 Assets 2012 2011 Cash $ 71,500 $ 65,100 Short-term investments 54,800 39,200 Receivables 103,400 89,200 Inventories 238,900 168,400 Prepaid expenses 29,800 27,500 Land 134,400 134,400 Building and equipment (net) 259,100 183,300 $891,900 $707,100 Total assets Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity Notes payable $170,600 $107,100 Accounts payable 68,600 54,100 Accrued liabilities 39,200 39,200 Bonds payable, due 2015 249,900 171,800 Common stock, $10 par 199,800 199,800 Retained earnings 163,800 135,100 $891,900 $707,100 Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity CHEANEY COMPANY Income Statements For the Years Ended December 31 2012 2011 Sales $893,300 $797,500 Cost of goods sold 644,900 575,600 Gross profit 248,400 221,900 Operating expenses 191,400 159,700 $ 57,000 $ 62,200 Net income Additional information: 1. Inventory at the beginning of 2011 was $115,500. 2. Receivables (net) at the beginning of 2011 were $89,100. 3. Total assets at the beginning of 2011 were $638,700. 4. No common stock transactions occurred during 2011 or 2012. 5. All sales were on account. *(a)Your answer is partially correct. Try again. Compute the liquidity and profitability ratios of Cheaney Company for 2011 and 2012. (Round all answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.83 or 12.61%. If % change is a decrease show the numbers as negative, e.g. -12.61% or (12.61%).) 2011 2012 % Change LIQUIDITY Current :1 :1 % 1.94 1.79 -7.73 Receivables turnover times times % 8.94 9.28 -3.80 Inventory turnover times times % 4.05 3.17 -21.73 2011 2012 % Change PROFITABILITY Profit margin % % % 7.80 6.38 17.95 Asset turnover times times % 1.19 1.12 -5.88 Return on assets % % % 9.24 7.13 -22.84 Earnings per share % 3.11 2.86 8.04 $ $ Attempts: 2 of 2 used *(b) Given below are three independent situations and a ratio that…

Attachments:

accounting questions 495194

please see attached. No word minimum. Due within 24hrs. Origninal and quality work only.

Document Preview:

1) The State of Rhode Island publishes its budget and the supporting information at ? HYPERLINK “http://www.budget.state.ri.us/index.htm” ?www.budget.state.ri.us/index.htm?. Access the budget and answer the following: What are the duties of the budget office? (Hint: Use the Primer link.) What are the six governmental functions listed in the budget? What are the major sources of Rhode Island’s revenues? What is the accounting basis used in the preparation of the budget? (Hint: Use the Primer link and scroll down until you see the Budget Basis section.) The budget mentions four categories of program performance measures. List them, and briefly describe how they are used in Rhode Island. (Hint: Use the Primer link and scroll down until you see the Program Performance Measures section.) What did you learn from reviewing the most recent budget of the State of Rhode Island? What do you think the biggest challenges are when it comes to preparing their budget?

Attachments:

accounting questions 495195

Please see attached for description. No word minimum. Please use APA format when citing sources. Original work only.

Document Preview:

Please see the paragraph “Reducing Overhead Costs” below to help answer the following questions 1 & 2. Question 3 is related to “variances”. 1) Going paperless can save companies a lot of money. It also is better for the environment and saves trees, which also helps the company’s image. Should there be any security concerns for people going paperless with important documents now though, or are consumers relatively safe? 2) Using technology is a key way to help reduce overhead costs.  Is that necessary for a business to survive in today’s world, or are there still businesses out there that don’t incorporate modern technology in managing their operations? 3) Incorrect interpretation of favorable variances cause’s problems for a business for example a business might attempt to create a favorable material price variance by using cheaper material. This although would create favorable material variance but might lead to a sub-standard product and loss of customers. What would be an example of a favorable variance leading to a substandard product? Variances Budget variance The difference between the actual fixed overhead costs and the budgeted fixed overhead costs for the period. Denominator activity The level of activity used to compute the predetermined overhead rate. Volume variance The variance that arises whenever the standard hours allowed for the actual output of a period are different from the denominator activity level that was used to compute the predetermined overhead rate. It is computed by multiplying the fixed component of the predetermined overhead rate by the difference between the denominator hours and the standard hours allowed for the actual “Reducing Overhead Costs” The article I read discussed several methods that allow a business to reduce overhead costs and began by explaining why it is necessary to reduce overhead costs and how costs that seem necessary may not be. The second part of the article discussed a number of the ways,…

Attachments:

long hand questions 495196

! ! ! ! DrSharonLevinACCT221FinalExamF13Ver137481 ‘! Problem 1: 10 points Caballero Manufacturing incurs unit costs of $15 ($10 variable and $5 fixed) in making a sub-assembly part for its finished product. A supplier offers to make 20,000 of the assembly part at $13.75 per unit. If the offer is accepted, Caballero will save all variable costs but no fixed costs. Instructions: Part A) Prepare an analysis showing the total cost savings, if any, Caballero will realize by buying the part.

Document Preview:

! ! ! ! DrSharonLevinACCT221FinalExamF13Ver137481 ‘! Problem 1: 10 points Caballero Manufacturing incurs unit costs of $15 ($10 variable and $5 fixed) in making a sub-assembly part for its finished product. A supplier offers to make 20,000 of the assembly part at $13.75 per unit. If the offer is accepted, Caballero will save all variable costs but no fixed costs. Instructions: Part A) Prepare an analysis showing the total cost savings, if any, Caballero will realize by buying the part. Part B) Caballero Company should _________ the part because total annual costs to make are _________ than total costs to buy. Problem 2: 10 points Ziray Corporation has the following cost records for November 2013. Indirect factory labor $ 5,107 Factory utilities $ 613 Direct materials used 24,826 Depreciation, factory equipment 1,499 Work in process, 11/1/13 3,267 Direct labor 33,052 Work in process, 11/30/13 3,633 Maintenance, factory equipment 1,958 Finished goods, 11/1/13 4,609 Indirect materials 2,749 Finished goods, 11/30/13 7,429 Factory manager’s salary 4,038 Instructions: Prepare a cost of goods manufactured schedule for November 2013. ! ! ! ! DrSharonLevinACCT221FinalExamF13Ver137481 (! Problem 3: 15 points Here are comparative balance sheets for Wilson Company. Wilson Company Comparative Balance Sheets December 31, 2013 Assets 2013 2012 Cash $ 44,550 $ 13,500 Accounts receivable 24,300 18,900 Inventories 33,750 24,300 Prepaid expenses 8,100 12,150 Long-term investments 0 24,300 Equipment 81,000 43,200 Accumulated depreciation—Equipment (27,000) (18,900) Total assets $ 164,700 $ 117,450 Liabilities and Stockholder’s Equity Accounts payable $ 22,950 $ 9,450 Bonds payable 49,950 63,450 Common stock ($1 par) 54,000 31,050 Retained earnings 37,800 13,500 Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity $ 164,700 $ 117,450 Additional information: 1. The 2013 Income Statement reported $8,100 in depreciation expense, a $5,400 loss on sale of investments and Net income of $48,600. 2….

Attachments:

long term liabilities and stockholders equity 495197

Exercise 1

Intel Inc. is the pioneer in the manufacture of microprocessor for computers. The company s fiscal year runs from April1 to March 31. On 1/1/2013, Intel Issued $5,000,000 of 11% Bonds due in 5 years. The interest is payable annually on April 1. The market rate of interest on that date for bonds of similar risk is 10%

Required:

1.1. 1. Prepare the journal entry for the issuance of the bonds and on the first interest payment date.

2.2. 2. Use the attached spreadsheet to prepare an amortization schedule for the bonds.

Exercise 2

Presented below is the stockholders equity section of Delta Inc.

All amounts are in million except for number of shares and par value

Current Year Prior Year

Preferred Stock 20,000,000 shares authorized, $0 $0

none issued

Common Stock – $1 par value, 750,000,000 shares 182 182

authorized, 182,350,259 issued

Additional Paid-in-capital 2,521 2,605

Treasury stock at cost: current year 21,194,312; prior

Year 22,768, 027 (1,308) (1,405)

Accumulated other comprehensive loss (664) (785)

Accumulated other deficit (1,312) (551)

———- ———-

(581) 46

———- ———-

Required:

1.1. 1. Explain why the common stock is classified as part of the stockholder’s equity.

2.2. 2. Explain why treasury stock is not classified as an asset.

3.3. 3. Explain what is meant by “Accumulated other comprehensive loss.”

4.4. 4. Why is the accumulated deficit larger in the current year than in the prior year

5.5. 5. Compute book value per share for Delta for the current year.

Attachments:

lyle and kaye james are married have two minor children jessica age 8 and jerron 495198

Lyle and Kaye James are married, have two minor children, Jessica age 8 and Jerron age 4, and are filing a joint

tax return in the current year. They are both employed. Lyle and Kaye, ages 38 and 37, respectively, have

combined salaries of $240,000, from which $42,000 of federal income tax and $10,000 of state income tax are

withheld. Lyle and Kaye own two homes. Their primary residence is located at 11620 N. Mount Ave., New Haven,

Connecticut 22222, and their vacation home is on the beach in Fort Lauderdale, Florida. They often rent their

vacation home to supplement their income. The following items are related to the James ownership of the two

homes:

Item New Haven Fort Lauderdale

Rental income $ $15,000

Qualified residence interest 7,200 5,000

Property taxes 1,400 1,000

Utilities 1,000 1,300

Repairs 200 300

Depreciation 0 3,500

Advertising 0 200

Insurance 1,500 1,500

The James family used their Fort Lauderdale home 20 days during the year. They rented the vacation home

60 days during the year. Lyle and Kaye jointly purchase stock in various corporations and make the following

transactions in the current year. (None of the stock qualifies as small business stock.)

Price

Date Transaction Paid/Sold

2/15 Bought 50 shares of Lake common stock (they own no other Lake $1,000

stock)

5/14 Bought 100 shares of Bass common stock (they own no other Bass 3,000

stock)

5/24 Sold 25 shares of Lake common stock 250

5/27 Bought 50 shares of Lake common stock 900

Sold 50 shares of Bass common stock 1,750

7/12 Bought 100 shares of Bass common stock 2,800

The James have no other income or expense items. Lyle and Kaye s Social Security numbers are 111-22-

3333 and 444-55-6666, respectively. Jessica and Jerron s Social Security numbers are 123-45-6789 and 888-99-

1010. The James use the IRS method of allocating all expenses between personal and rental use.

File the James income tax return Form 1040, Schedules A, D, and E using the

currently available forms and rates. Disregard any tax credits for which they may be

eligible.

Attachments:

m1a2 discussion cost accumulation system 495199

When companies accumulate costs, they generally use either a job-order or a process costing system. The type of system used often varies based on the type of product or service provided.

Using the module readings, Argosy University online library resources, and the Internet, locate an article on how a company utilized a cost accumulation system.

Respond to the following:

  • Identify and describe the type of cost accumulation system that was used.
  • Explain how the system was used and, specifically, how overhead was allocated.
  • Discuss how the use of cost accumulation enhanced the company s operations.

Support your responses with reasons and examples. Examples and reasoning must be included to demonstrate your understanding.

Write your initial response in 3 4 paragraphs. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.

review and comment on at least two peers responses.

Do the following when responding to your peers:

  • Read all posts from your peers.
  • Explain how their experiences differ from yours.
  • Provide substantive comments by contributing new, relevant information or quotes from course readings, Web sites, or other sources; building on the remarks or questions of others; or sharing practical examples of key concepts from your experiences, professional or personal.
Assignment 2 Grading Criteria Maximum Points

Initial response:

  • Was insightful, original, accurate, and timely.
  • Was substantive and demonstrated advanced understanding of concepts.
  • Compiled/synthesized theories and concepts drawn from a variety of sources to support statements and conclusions.
16

Discussion response and participation:

  • Responded to a minimum of two peers in a timely manner.
  • Offered points of view supported by research.
  • Asked challenging questions that promoted the discussion.
  • Drew relationships between one or more points in the discussion.
16

Writing:

  • Wrote in a clear, concise, formal, and organized manner.
  • Responses were error free.
  • Information from sources, where applicable, was paraphrased appropriately and accurately cited.
8
Total: 40

m1a3 calculating inventory 495200

I need for all articles to be used and critieria followed.

Finlon Upholstery Inc. uses a job-order costing system to accumulate manufacturing costs. The company’s work-in-process on December 31, 2001, consisted of one job (no. 2077), which was carried on the year-end balance sheet at $156,800. There was no finished-goods inventory on this date.

Finlon applies manufacturing overhead to production on the basis of direct-labor cost. (The budgeted direct-labor cost is the company’s practical capacity, in terms of direct-labor hours multiplied by the budgeted direct-labor rate.) Budgeted totals for 2002 for direct labor and manufacturing overhead are $4,200,000 and $5,460,000, respectively. Actual results for the year are as follows:

Actual Results
Direct Materials Used $5,600,000.00
Direct Labor $4,350,000.00
Indirect Material Used $65,000.00
Indirect Labor $2,860,000.00
Factory Depreciation $1,740,000.00
Factory Insurance $59,000.00
Factory Utilities $830,000.00
Selling and Administrative Expenses $2,160,000.00
Total $17,664,000.00

Job no. 2077 was completed in January 2002, and there was no work in process at year-end. All jobs produced during 2002 were sold with the exception of Job no. 2143, which contained direct-material costs of $156,000 and direct-labor charges of $85,000. The company charges any under- or over-applied overhead to the cost of goods sold category.

Using the above information, do the following:

  • Calculate the company s predetermined overhead application rate.
  • Calculate the additions to the work-in-process inventory account for the direct material used, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead.
  • Calculate the finished-goods inventory for the 12/31/01 balance sheet.
  • Calculate the over-applied or under-applied overhead at year-end.
  • Explain if it is appropriate to include selling and administrative expenses in the cost of goods sold category.

Perform your calculations in an Excel spreadsheet and copy the calculations into a Word document.

Write a 1-page paper in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M1_A3.doc. For example, if your name is John Smith, your document will be named SmithJ_M1_A3.doc.

deliver your assignment to the M1: Assignment 3 Dropbox.

Assignment 3 Grading Criteria Maximum Points
Calculated the company s predetermined overhead application rate. 24
Calculated the additions to the work-in-process inventory account for the direct material used, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead. 16
Calculated the finished-goods inventory for the balance sheet dated 12/31/02. 20
Calculated the over-applied or under-applied overhead at year-end. 20
Explained if it is appropriate to include the selling and administrative expenses in the cost of goods sold category. 12
Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; and displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. 8
Total: 100

m2a1 discussion activity based costing system 495201

Must use all attached document, 3 supported readings(referances) and other highlighted parts

Activity-based costing is one of the most accurate methods that can be used to allocate overhead. However, it is not often used in many smaller organizations due to the substantial cost involved with its implementation.

Using the module readings and the Argosy University online library resources, research the activity-based costing method. Use your research and/or your experiences as a working professional to complete this assignment.

Respond to the following:

  • If you have utilized an activity-based costing system in your former or current employment, describe how this system had been used. In your response, be sure to include your experience and position on the effectiveness of the activity-based costing system. Support your ideas by drawing on your readings and scholarly articles.
  • If you have not encountered this type of system in your work experience, assume a company needs to switch to an ABC system. Describe the common cost drivers that could be used.
  • How would the organization identify the cost drivers?
  • How would the organization use them in the implementation of this system? You may use your former or current company for the analysis.

Write your initial response in 3 4 paragraphs. Apply APA standards to citation of sources.

  • Read all posts from your peers.
  • Explain how their experiences differ from yours.
  • Provide substantive comments by contributing new, relevant information or quotes from course readings, Web sites, or other sources; building on the remarks or questions of others; or sharing practical examples of key concepts from your experiences, professional or personal.
Assignment 1 Grading Criteria Maximum Points

Initial response:

  • Was insightful, original, accurate, and timely.
  • Was substantive and demonstrated advanced understanding of concepts.
  • Compiled/synthesized theories and concepts drawn from a variety of sources to support statements and conclusions.
16

Discussion response and participation:

  • Responded to a minimum of two peers in a timely manner.
  • Offered points of view supported by research.
  • Asked challenging questions that promoted the discussion.
  • Drew relationships between one or more points in the discussion.
16

Writing:

  • Wrote in a clear, concise, formal, and organized manner.
  • Responses were error free.
  • Information from sources, where applicable, was paraphrased appropriately and accurately cited.
8
Total: 40

m2a2 manufacturing overhead 495202

Must use all attached document, 3 supported readings(referances) and other highlighted parts

Borealis Manufacturing has just completed a major change in its quality control (QC) process. Previously, products had been reviewed by QC inspectors at the end of each major process, and the company’s 10 QC inspectors were charged to the operation or job as direct labor. In an effort to improve efficiency and quality, a computerized video QC system was purchased for $250,000. The system consists of a minicomputer, fifteen video cameras, and other peripheral hardware and software. The new system uses cameras stationed by QC engineers at key points in the production process. Each time an operation changes or there is a new operation, the cameras are moved, and a new master picture is loaded into the computer by a QC engineer. The camera takes pictures of the units in process, and the computer compares them to the picture of a good unit. Any differences are sent to a QC engineer, who removes the bad units and discusses the flaws with the production supervisors. The new system has replaced the 10 QC inspectors with two QC engineers.

The operating costs of the new QC system, including the salaries of the QC engineers, have been included as factory overhead in calculating the company’s plant-wide manufacturing-overhead rate, which is based on direct-labor dollars. The company’s president is confused. His vice president of production has told him how efficient the new system is. Yet there is a large increase in the overhead rate. The computation of the rate before and after automation is as follows:

Before After
Budgeted Manufacturing Overhead 1,900,000 2,100,000
Budgeted Direct Labor Cost 1,000,000 700,000
Budgeted Overhead Rate 190% 300%

Three hundred percent, lamented the president. How can we compete with such a high overhead rate

Using the module readings and the Argosy University online library resources, research manufacturing overhead.

Review the situation. Complete the following:

  • Define manufacturing overhead, and:
    • Cite three examples of typical costs that would be included in manufacturing overhead.
    • Explain why companies develop predetermined overhead rates.
  • Explain why the increase in the overhead rate should not have a negative financial impact on Borealis Manufacturing.
  • Explain how Borealis Manufacturing could change its overhead application system to eliminate confusion over product costs.
  • Describe how an activity-based costing system might benefit Borealis Manufacturing.

Write a 3 4-pages paper in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M2_A2.doc.

Assignment 2 Grading Criteria Maximum Points
Defined manufacturing overhead giving three examples of typical costs that would be included in manufacturing overhead. 16
Explained why companies develop predetermined overhead rates. 16
Explained why the increase in the overhead rate should not have a negative financial impact on Borealis Manufacturing. 16
Explained how Borealis Manufacturing could change its overhead application system to eliminate confusion over product costs. 20
Explained how an activity-based costing system might benefit Borealis Manufacturing. 16
Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; and displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. 16
Total: 100

m3 a1 discussion questions 495203

Please see attached instructions on assignment and due date. Work must be in accordance with instructions and all requirements.

Due Date: Thursday, 9/12/2013 by 1o PM PST, no exception.

Document Preview:

Assignment 1: Discussion Questions Due by Thursday, September 12, 2013, read the discussion question for the week and post your responses to both of them. Responses should be submitted as a Microsoft Word document, formatted in Arial 10 point font, 1.5 spaced. Must use the current APA standards when formatting paper. All written assignments and responses should follow APA rules for attributing sources and Grading Criteria: Grading Criteria Maximum Points Demonstrated an understanding of the topics being discussed. 4 Met the criteria for the correct responses to the assigned questions. 4 Participation Criteria Used vocabulary relevant to the topics under discussion. 4 Participated in the discussion by asking a question, providing a statement of clarification, providing a point of view with rationale, challenging a point of discussion, or making a relationship between one or more points of the discussion. 4 Justified ideas and responses by using appropriate examples and references from texts, websites, and other references or personal experience. 4 Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources, displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. 4 Total 24 Essay Format – please use following format in your response and clearly identify each question separately in BOLD font. Discussion Question For a company with several subsidiaries, would it be easier to maximize shareholder value in the face of capital constraints by shifting capital among the affiliates? If in that same company 60% of the financial manager’s time is devoted to managing working capital, how will an increase in inventory costs affect the production capacity? (Should the financial manager devote more or less time to managing working capital in this instance?) ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

m3a 2 required assignment 1 cost and decision making analysis 495205

Must be orignal due to it be sent through Turn It in system

Cheryl Montoya picked up the phone and called her boss, Wes Chan, Vice President of Marketing at Piedmont Fasteners Corporation.

Cheryl: Wes, I’m not sure how to go about answering the questions that came up at the meeting with the President yesterday.

Wes: What’s the problem .

Cheryl: The president wanted to know the break-even point for each of the company’s products, but I am having trouble figuring them out.

Wes: I’m sure you can handle it, Cheryl. And, by the way, I need your analysis on my desk tomorrow morning at 8:00 sharp in time for the follow-up meeting at 9:00.

Piedmont Fasteners Corporation makes three different clothing fasteners at its manufacturing facility in North Carolina. Data concerning these products appear below:

Velcro Metal Nylon
Normal annual sales volume 100,000 units 200,000 units 400,000 units
Unit selling price $1.65 $1.50 $0.85
Variable cost per unit $1.25 $0.70 $0.25

Total fixed expenses are $400,000 per year.

All three products are sold in highly competitive markets, so the company is unable to raise its prices without losing unacceptably large numbers of customers.

The company has a very effective lean production system, so there is no beginning or ending work in process or finished-goods inventories.

Using the module readings, the Argosy University online library resources, and the Internet, research break-even point and costing systems. Analyze the case based on your research and what you have learned so far in the course.

Respond to the following:

  • Calculate the company’s overall break-even point in total sales dollars. Explain your methodology (approximately 2 pages).
  • Of the total fixed costs of $400,000: $20,000 could be avoided if the Velcro product were dropped, $80,000 if the Metal product were dropped, and $60,000 if the Nylon product were dropped. The remaining fixed costs of $240,000 consist of common fixed costs such as administrative salaries and rent on the factory building that could be avoided only by going out of business entirely (approximately 2 pages):
    • Calculate the break-even point in units for each product. Explain your methodology.
    • Determine the overall profit of the company if the company sells exactly the break-even quantity of each product. Present your results.
  • Evaluate costing systems for this company. Explain if this company should be using a job-order or process-costing system to accumulate costs (1 page).

Be sure to include your calculations in Microsoft Excel format.

Write a 5 6-page report in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M3_A2.doc.

Assignment 2 Grading Criteria Maximum Points
Calculated the company’s overall break-even point in total sales dollars and explained your methodology. 32
Calculated the break-even point in units for each product in the scenario and explained your methodology. 52
Explained what the overall profit of the company will be if the company sells exactly the break-even quantity of each product and showed your results. 16
Compared and explained if this company should be using a job-order or process-costing system to accumulate costs. 80
Wrote in a clear, concise, and organized manner; demonstrated ethical scholarship in accurate representation and attribution of sources; and displayed accurate spelling, grammar, and punctuation. 20
Total: 200

accounting for manager assignment 495152

I have uploaded two files. Please do not bid or respond without taking a look at it. ALSO, DO NOT PLAGIARISE.

I CAN EQUALLY COPY THE ANSWERS WORD-FOR WORD ON GOOGLE but I NEED ORIGINAL FROM THE SCRACTH WORK.

Once again, I am going to verify for plagiarism. I will use plagiarism software to check and if I found out the work is not original, I will dispute, request a refund, and … write a nasty review

Thanks

Document Preview:

Assignment 04 Accounting for Managers Directions: Unless otherwise stated, answer in complete sentences, and be sure to use correct English spelling and grammar.  Sources must be cited in APA format.  Your response should be a minimum of one (1) single-spaced page to a maximum of two (2) pages in length; refer to the “Assignment Format” page for specific format requirements. Return on Investment and Residual Income Portia Carter is the president of a company that owns six multiplex movie theaters. Carter has delegated decision-making authority to the theater managers for all decisions except those relating to capital expenditures and film selection. The theater managers’ compensation depends on the profitability of their theaters. Max Burgman, the manager of the Park Theater, had the following master budget and actual results for the month. ?Master?Actual???Budget?Results??Tickets sold?120,000?480,000???Revenue–tickets?$ 840,000?$ 880,000???Revenue–concessions?480,000?330,000??Total revenue?$1,320,000?$1,210,000??Controllable variable costs?????Concessions?120,000?99,000???Direct labor?420,000?330,000???Variable overhead?540,000?550,000??Contribution margin?$ 240,000?$ 231,000??Controllable fixed costs?????Rent?55,000?55,000???Other administrative expenses?45,000?50,000??Theater operating income?$ 140,000?$ 126,000?? 1. Assuming that the theaters are profit centers, prepare a performance report for the Park Theater using the chart below. Include a flexible budget. Determine the variances between actual results, the flexible budget, and the master budget. (25 points) ?Actual??Flexible??Master???Results?Variance?Budget?Variance?Budget??Tickets sold?110,000?????( )?120,000???Revenue–tickets?$ 880,000??( )???( )?$ 840,000???Revenue–concessions?330,000??( )???( )?480,000??Total revenue?$1,210,000?????( )?$1,320,000??Controllable variable costs??????????Concessions?99,000??( )???( )?120,000???Direct labor?330,000??( )???( …

Attachments:

accounting needs to be done in french language 495155

I am a college student and I have a assignment (of almost 10 pages) in accounting.The assignment is in french.

Here is the excel file(all pages are in it) and the zipped file is the bills/checks papers scanned from the papers I have.And I’ll provide the identification # that comes with bills.

Deadline: 4th Dec 10 Am EST.

Document Preview:

scanned papers-accounting.zip? scanned papers-accounting/CCF01122013_00000.jpg? scanned papers-accounting/CCF01122013_00001.jpg? scanned papers-accounting/CCF01122013_00002.jpg? scanned papers-accounting/CCF01122013_00003.jpg? scanned papers-accounting/CCF01122013_00004.jpg? scanned papers-accounting/CCF01122013_00005.jpg? scanned papers-accounting/CCF01122013_00006.jpg? scanned papers-accounting/CCF01122013_00007.jpg? scanned papers-accounting/CCF01122013_00008.jpg? scanned papers-accounting/CCF01122013_00009.jpg? scanned papers-accounting/CCF01122013_00010.jpg? scanned papers-accounting/CCF01122013_00011.jpg? scanned papers-accounting/CCF01122013_00012.jpg? scanned papers-accounting/CCF01122013_00013.jpg? scanned papers-accounting/CCF01122013_00014.jpg? scanned papers-accounting/CCF01122013_00015.jpg? scanned papers-accounting/CCF01122013_00016.jpg? Batoul-simulation.xlsx? 1 2 3 4 5 6 1000 27 1010 19055.46 1015 0 1100 1165.3800000000001 1180 5042.75 1190 459 1400 9000 1410 1333.33 1500 2973 1510 0 1700 5000 1710 375 1800 150000 1810 2500 1900 50000 2100 2674.34 2250 971 2260 1050.28 2350 532 2360 608.91 2410 458.05 2460 299.64999999999998 2470 1050.1600000000001 2500 12700 3100 220096.04 3300 0 3400 35000 4500 246092 4510 5634.81 4520 3042.76 5000 134745.60000000001 5300 32099.360000000001 5305 1283.97 5310 3231.52 5315 1310.6500000000001 5320 3711.48 5325 6759.87 5330 2870.76 5400 4000 5405 160 5410 263.64 5415 2200 5420 3600 5425 1980.65 5430 1300 5435 2238.2800000000002 5440 330 489599.85000000009 489599.85 23 78217 10/23/2004 1035.23 1035.23 11/15/2004 130.15 1165.3800000000001 78236 78249 78252 24 8750 11/27/2004 345.08 345.08 11/29/2005 86.27 258.81 124 11/22/2008 2415.5300000000002 2415.5300000000002 78694 674098 5503940685508 25 11/30/2004 32 126.5 4048 11/30/2004 23 43.25 994.75 …

Attachments:

accounting problem and solution set up an amortization schedule 495160

Set up an amortization schedule for a $25,000 loan to be repaid in equal installments at the end of the next 5 years. The interest rate is 10% compounded annually.

A. I need to set up an amortization schedule for a $25,000 loan to be repaid in equal installments at the end of the next 5 years. The interest rate is 10% compounded annually. b. How large must each annual payment be if the loan is for $50,000 Assume that the interst rate remains at 10%, compounded annually, and that the loan is paid off over 5 years. c. How large must each payment be if the loan is for $50,000, the interest rate is 10%, compounded annually, and the loan is paid off in equal installments at the end of each of the next 10 years This loan is for the same amount as the loan in part b, but the payments are spread out over twice as many periods. Why are these payments not half as large as the payments on the loan in part b?

Document Preview:

Set up an amortization schedule for a $25,000 loan to be repaid in equal installments at the end of the next 5 years. The interest rate is 10% compounded annually. A. I need to set up an amortization schedule for a $25,000 loan to be repaid in equal installments at the end of the next 5 years. The interest rate is 10% compounded annually. b. How large must each annual payment be if the loan is for $50,000? Assume that the interst rate remains at 10%, compounded annually, and that the loan is paid off over 5 years. c. How large must each payment be if the loan is for $50,000, the interest rate is 10%, compounded annually, and the loan is paid off in equal installments at the end of each of the next 10 years? This loan is for the same amount as the loan in part b, but the payments are spread out over twice as many periods. Why are these payments not half as large as the payments on the loan in part b????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting problem los lobos case study 495161

1.

Los Lobos Ledger Preparation

Review the following information:

12-31-2007

12-31-2006

Cash

$ 35,000

$ 32,000

Accounts receivable

33,000

30,000

Allowance for doubtful accounts

(1,300)

(1,100)

Inventory

31,000

47,000

Property, plant, & equipment

100,000

95,000

Accumulated depreciation

(16,500)

(15,000)

Trade accounts payable

(25,000)

(15,500)

Income taxes payable

(21,000)

(29,100)

Deferred income taxes

(5,300)

(4,600)

8% callable bonds payable

(45,000)

(20,000)

Unamortized bond discount

4,500

5,000

Common stock

(50,000)

(40,000)

Additional paid-in capital

(9,100)

(7,500)

Retained earnings

(25,200)

(64,600)

Sales

(558,300)

(778,700)

Cost of goods sold

250,000

380,000

Selling expenses

141,500

172,000

General and administrative expenses

137,000

151,300

Interest expense

4,300

2,600

Income tax expense

20,400

61,200

$ –

$ –

Additional information:

1.

Los Lobos purchased $5,000 in equipment during 2007.

2.

Los Lobos allocated one-third of its depreciation expense to selling expenses and the remainder to general and administrative expenses.

3.

Bad debt expense for 2007 was $5,000, and write-offs of uncollectible accounts totaled $4,800.

4.

$12,000 of the debt is current portion.

Cash Sales

$72,600

Collections on Receivables

477,900

Purchases

(219,500)

Purchase of Equipment

(5,000)

Wages

(150,700)

Payments to Suppliers

(126,300)

Tax Payments

(27,800)

Borrowing

30,000

Repayment of Debt

(5,000)

Interest Payments

(3,800)

Sale of Stock

11,600

Dividends

(51,000)

Prepare a statement of cash flows using the direct and indirect methods.

Prepare a classified balance sheet.

Attachments:

accounting problems 495163

Please find assignemnt in attachment. I want detailed and explained step by step solution of each problem. I want all solutions absolutely correct. I want it in both excel and word.

Document Preview:

Problems – 5 points each Greg and Justin are forming the GJ Partnership. Greg contributes $500,000 cash and Justin contributes nondepreciable property with an adjusted basis of $200,000 and a fair market value of $550,000. The property is subject to a $50,000 liability, which is also transferred into the partnership and is shared equally by the partners for basis purposes. Greg and Justin share in all partnership profits equally except for any precontribution gain, which must be allocated according to the statutory rules for built-in gain allocations. What is Justin’s adjusted tax basis for his partnership interest immediately after the partnership is formed? What is the partnership’s adjusted basis for the property contributed by Justin? If the partnership sells the property contributed by Justin for $600,000, how is the tax gain allocated between the partners? The LN partnership reported the following items of income and deduction during the current tax year: revenues, $200,000; cost of goods sold, $80,000; tax-exempt interest income, $5,000; salaries to employees, $50,000; and long-term capital gain, $5,000. In addition, the partnership distributed $10,000 of cash to 50% partner Nina and $20,000 of cash to 50% partner Len. What is Nina’s share of ordinary partnership income and separately stated items? In the current year, Derek formed an equal partnership with Cody. Derek contributed land with an adjusted basis of $110,000 and a fair market value of $200,000. Derek also contributed $50,000 cash to the partnership. Cody contributed land with an adjusted basis of $80,000 and a fair market value of $230,000. The land contributed by Derek was encumbered by a $60,000 nonrecourse debt. The land contributed by Cody was encumbered by $40,000 of nonrecourse debt. Assume the partners share debt equally. Immediately after the formation, what is the basis of Cody’s partnership interest? Janet Wang is a 50% owner of a calendar year S…

Attachments:

accounting problems 495165

this is due in 2 1/2 hours it is 9pm here and i need this by 1130p, no later I know it is late but my tutor forgot about it so they cannot do in short time I need a acconting please help I do not want too loose grade for turning in late I cannot pay more then 30.00 so please do not ask

Document Preview:

Revised Chapter 5 and 6 homework Chapter 6 homework??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting problems 495166

Proble 3-25

3 25 Comprehensive cycle problem: perpetual system

At the beginning of 2012, the jeater company had that following balances in its accounts:

Cash $ 4,300

Inventory 9,000

Common stock 10,000

Retained earnings 3,300

  1. Purchased inventory that cost $2,200 on account from Blue Company under terms 1/10, n/30. The merchandise was delivered FOB shipping point. Freight costs of $110 were paid in cash.
  2. Returned $200 of the inventory that it had purchase because the inventory was damaged in transit. The freight company agreed to pay the return freight cost.
  3. Paid the amount due on its account payable to Blue Company within the cash discount period.
  4. Sold inventory that had cost $3,000 for $5,500 on account, under terms 2/10, n/45.
  5. Received merchandise returned from a customer. The merchandise originally cost $400 and was sold to the customer for $710 cash during the previous accounting period. The customer was paid $710 cash for the returned merchandise.
  6. Delivered goods FOB destination in Event 4. Freight costs of $60 were paid in cash.
  7. Collected the amount due on the account receivable within the discount period.
  8. Took a physical count indicating that $7,970 of inventory was on hand at the end of the accounting period.

Required

  1. Identify these events as asset source (AS), asset use (AU), asset exchange (AE), or claims exchange (CE).
  2. Record each event in a statement model

Problem 4-20 The following data apply to superior auto supply inc. for may 2012

1. Balance per the bank on may 31, $8000

2. Deposits in transit not recorded by the bank, $975

3. Bank error, check written by allen auto supply was charged to superior auto sales account, $650

4. The following checks written and recorded by superior auto supply were not included in the bank statement: 3013-$385, 3054-$735, 3056-$1900

5. Not collected by the bank, $500

6. Service charge for the collection of note $10

7. The book keeper recorded a check written for $188 to pay for the may utilities expense as $888 in the cash disbursements journal

8. bank service charge in addition to the note collection fee $25

9. customer checks returned to the bank as NSF $125

Required: determine the amount of unadjusted cash balance per superior auto supply s books.

Attachments:

accounting problems and solutions 3 495167

Accounting Problems and Solutions 3

Document Preview:

6180 6000 180 2800 2500 300 1000 1000 0 570 500 70 11740 11250 490 31540 28750 2790 2 3 The St. Lucia Blood Bank, a private charity partly supported by government grants, is located on the Caribbean island of St. Lucia. The Blood Bank has just finished its operations for September, which was a particularly busy month due to a powerful hurricane that hit neighboring islands causing many injuries. The hurricane largely bypassed St. Lucia, but residents of St. Lucia willingly donated their blood to help people on other islands. As a consequence, the Blood Bank collected and processed over 20% more blood than had been originally planned for the month. A report prepared by a government official comparing actual costs to budgeted costs for the Blood Bank appears below. (The currency on St. Lucia is the East Caribbean dollar.) Continued support from the government depends on the Blood Bank’s ability to demonstrate control over their costs. St. Lucia Blood Bank Cost Control Report For the Month Ended September 30 Actual Budget Variance Liters of blood collected        620        500      120 Variable costs: The managing director of the Blood Bank was very unhappy with this report, claiming that his costs were higher than expected due to the emergency on the neighboring islands. He also pointed out that the additional costs had been fully covered by payments from grateful recipients on the other islands. The government official who prepared the report countered that all of the figures had been submitted by the Blood Bank to the government; he was just pointing out that actual costs were a lot higher than promised in the budget. Required: 1. Prepare a new performance report for September using the flexible budget approach. (Note: Even though some of these costs might be classified as direct costs rather than as overhead, the flexible budget approach can still be used to prepare a flexible budget performance report.) 2. Do you think any of the variances in the…

Attachments:

accounting problems please help i need this in 2 days but i want to get it done as s 495168

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Accounting Problems Problem 1:JOURNAL ENTRIES The ledger accounts given below, with an identification number for each, are used by Wynne Company. Instructions: Indicate the appropriate entries for the month of June by placing the appropriate identification number(s) in the debit and credit columns provided. Item 0 is given as an example. Write “none” if no entry is appropriate. 1. Cash 7. Salaries Payable 13. Service Revenue 2. Accounts Receivable 8. Accounts Payable 14. Equipment Expense 3. Supplies 9. Unearned Service Revenue 15. Advertising Expense 4. Prepaid Salaries 10. Notes Payable 16. Supplies Expense 5. Prepaid Advertising 11. H. Wynne, Capital 17. Rent Expense 6. Equipment 12. H. Wynne, Drawing 18. Salaries Expense ——————————————————————————————————————————— Entry Account(s) Account(s) No. Entry Information Debited Credited 0. June 1 H. Wynne invested $25,000 in the business. 1 11 ——————————————————————————————————————————— 1. June 4 Paid a supplier $2,000 cash on account. ——————————————————————————————————————————— 2. June 5 Equipment was purchased at a cost of $5,000; a three-month, 12% note payable was signed for this amount. ——————————————————————————————————————————— 3. June 8 Received $7,000 from customers for services rendered during the week. ——————————————————————————————————————————— 4. June 10 Purchased supplies for $3,500 cash. The supplies are expected to last through August. ——————————————————————————————————————————— 5. June 14 Paid $400 cash to the Daily News for advertisements run this past week. ——————————————————————————————————————————— 6. June 16 Billed customers $6,000 for services rendered. ——————————————————————————————————————————— 7. June 19 Paid $2,000 in cash to Santo Company for June rent. ——————————————————————————————————————————— 8. June 25 Additional supplies were purchased on account at a cost of $1,000 from Supply Company. These supplies will be used during…

Attachments:

accounting professional sanctions 495169

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Professional Sanctions Instructions Locate recent reports of sanctions imposed on accountants, including instances of at least one of each of the following: SEC, IRS, and AICPA. What were the nature of the offenses? What were the penalties imposed? Have any Arkansas CPAs been sanctioned recently? Limit the main body of your report to 3 pages (double spaced). Include a title page and cite sources of your information. Professional Sanctions Instructions Locate recent reports of sanctions imposed on accountants, including instances of at least one of each of the following: SEC, IRS, and AICPA. What were the nature of the offenses? What were the penalties imposed? Have any Arkansas CPAs been sanctioned recently? Limit the main body of your report to 3 pages (double spaced). Include a title page and cite sources of your information. ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting project 495170

I need help with parts 2 and 3 for this project.

Document Preview:

ACCT 2200 Part I?On January 1, 2011, a company sells a 3-year bond with a face value of $48,000 and a stated interest rate of 8%. Because the market interest rate is 6%, the company receives $50,566 for the bond. The company uses the effective interest method of amortization. Fill in Table A. Fill in Table B assuming the market interest rate is 10%, and the company received only $45,613 for the bond and the company uses the effective-interest method.?? Table A?? Period?ended?Cash?paid?Interest?expense?Amortized?premium?Bonds?payable?Premium on?bonds payable?Carrying?value??01/01/11????????12/31/11????????12/31/12????????12/31/13?????????? Table B?? Period?ended?Cash?paid?Interest?expense?Amortized?discount?Bonds?payable?Discount on?bonds payable?Carrying?value??01/01/11????????12/31/11????????12/31/12????????12/31/13???????????Part II?On January 1, 2010, ABC issues $40 million of 8% bonds, due in 15 years, with interest payable semi-annually on June 30 and December 31 each year. Requirement 1:??If the market rate is 7%, will the bonds issue at face amount, a discount, or a premium? Calculate the issue price.??Requirement 2:??If the market rate is 8%, will the bonds issue at face amount, a discount, or a premium? Calculate the issue price. ??Requirement 3:??If the market rate is 9%, will the bonds issue at face amount, a discount, or a premium? Calculate the issue price.???Part III??April 1, 2009—XYZ Corp. today announced that its Board of Directors has declared a cash dividend of $1.18 per share on its 505,500 outstanding preferred shares. The dividend will be paid on May 31, 2009, to preferred shareholders of record at the close of business on May 26, 2009. The Board of Directors also announced a 100% common stock dividend will occur on May 31, 2009, on its 1,010,000 outstanding $0.01 par common stock for stockholders of record on May 26, 2009.??Requirement 1:??Prepare any journal entries that XYZ Corp. should make as the result of information in the preceding…

Attachments:

accounting project 495171

Brooklyn College of the City University of New York Accounting Department Intermediate Financial Accounting II Professor G.

Document Preview:

Brooklyn College of the City University of New York Accounting Department Intermediate Financial Accounting II Professor G. Vasquez Spring 2012 Page 1 of 1 Income Statement Project Information as of 12/31/2011 (pretax basis): Sales $3,200,000 Cost of Goods Sold 1,650,000 Interest Revenue 10,000 Loss from Abandonment of Plant Assets 40,000 Selling Expenses 340,000 Administrative Expenses 280,000 Cumulative Effect on Prior Years of Change from FIFO to Average Cost for Inventory Costing Purposes 50,000 Loss from Earthquake 40,000 Gain on Disposal of a Component Business 90,000 Additional Information: 1. Name of Firm: Kaitlin Industries 2. Headquarters: San Juan, Puerto Rico 3. Business: Sells dolls and action figures 4. Divisions: Two 5. Operating Year: Calendar Year 6. Tax Rate: 30% 7. Common Stock: 100,000 shares outstanding during year Requirements: (1) Prepare income statement (to be audited) and notes (if necessary). Good luck! ? ***************************************?????????????

accounting project 495172

Document Preview:

Foundations of Accounting I Accounting Project Written by: Karen Pitsch David’s Entertainment is a merchandising business. Their account balances as of November 30, 2012 (unless otherwise indicated), are as follows: 110 Cash $ 73,920 112 Accounts Receivable 34,250 113 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 11,000 115 Merchandise Inventory 123,900 116 Prepaid Insurance 3,750 117 Store Supplies 2,850 123 Store Equipment 100,800 124 Accumulated Depreciation-Store Equipment 20,160 210 Accounts Payable 21,450 211 Salaries Payable 0 218 Interest Payable 0 220 Note Payable (Due 2017) 15,000 310 D. Williams, Capital (January 1, 2012) 73,260 311 D. Williams, Drawing 50,000 312 Income Summary 0 410 Sales 853,445 411 Sales Returns and Allowances 20,020 412 Sales Discounts 13,200 510 Cost of Merchandise Sold 414,575 520 Sales Salaries Expense 74,400 521 Advertising Expense 18,000 522 Depreciation Expense 0 523 Store Supplies Expense 0 529 Miscellaneous Selling Expense 2,800 530 Office Salaries Expense 40,500 531 Rent Expense 18,600 532 Insurance Expense 0 533 Bad Debt Expense 0 539 Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 1,650 550 Interest Expense 1,100 David’s Entertainment uses the perpetual inventory system and the First-in, First-out costing method. Transportation-in and purchase discounts should be added to the Inventory Control Sheet, but since this will complicate the computation of the First-in, First-out costing method, please ignore this step in the process. They also use the Allowance Method for bad debt. The Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary Ledgers along with the Inventory Control Sheet should be updated as each transaction affects them (daily). David’s…

Attachments:

accounting project 495173

i have this Accounting Project it has 45 questions

due on Fri, 2013-11-15 15:00

Document Preview:

Instructions The Objective of this Project is for you to learn to read, interpret and analyze the financial statements of a company. You will be given an opportunity to practice these skills during class and homework throughout the term. Where applicable, each answer you present should be referenced to your company’s Financial Statements, audit report and/or notes to the financial statements by page number. If your financial statements are not numbered, please number them yourself. You may use thousands or millions of dollars if that is the presentation on your Financial Statements. Student Name ________________ Student number _________________ Company name __________________________________ Selected Industry Averages for the assigned companies are as follows: Ratio Shoppers Drug Mart George Weston Groupe BMTC Inc Plaintree Systems Current ratio 1.28 to 1 1.02 to 1 1.15 to 1 0.87 to 1 Quick Ratio 0.84 to 1 0.88 to 1 0.97 to 1 0.45 to 1 Inventory Turnover 12.65 times 19.37 times 11.81 times 2.48 times Number of days sales in inventory 28.9 days 18.8 days 30.9 days 147.2 days Accounts receivable turnover 52.27 times 185.85 times 18.03 times 5.48 times Number of days sales in account receivable/average collection period 7 days 1.96 days 20.2 days 66.6 days Gross profit margin ratio 17.27% 35.54% 39.23% 32.68% Using the results for your company’s most recent year end (unless otherwise indicated), please answer the following questions: 1a. Most recent fiscal year end noted on the financial statements assigned to you (ie December 31, 2012)______________________________ 1b. What period does the company’s year end cover?/ On what dates does the company’s most recent fiscal year start and end? Start______________________________________ End ______________________________________ 1c. In your own words explain what permanent and temporary accounts are and give an example of each that is shown on your…

you need to research two corporations using the itt tech virtual library 495174

You need to research two corporations using the ITT Tech Virtual Library. Once you have
identified the two corporations, you will have to find the financial statements, income
statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows. You will then identify from the
statement of cash flows if the corporation uses the indirect or direct method. You will also
identify how much cash was generated from operations, financing, and investing. You should
also specify how much free cash flow each corporation has generated. You should then
calculate the current ratio, inventory turnover, gross profit percentage days’ sales in
receivables, and debt ratio. You must choose which corporation you would invest in and why

Document Preview:

AC1320: Project PROJECT DESCRIPTION In order to assess your knowledge of the fundamentals of financial and managerial accounting, two projects have been included in the course. These chapters will give you an opportunity to apply your knowledge and improve your proficiency in performing routine accounting procedures and managerial tasks. The project aims at simulating the main managerial accounting concepts, principles, and procedures covered in the prescribed text and encountered in practice. Project Part 1 Introduction: You need to research two corporations using the ITT Tech Virtual Library. Once you have identified the two corporations, you will have to find the financial statements, income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows. You will then identify from the statement of cash flows if the corporation uses the indirect or direct method. You will also identify how much cash was generated from operations, financing, and investing. You should also specify how much free cash flow each corporation has generated. You should then calculate the current ratio, inventory turnover, gross profit percentage days’ sales in receivables, and debt ratio. You must choose which corporation you would invest in and why. Project Part 2 Introduction: You will be given a set of transactions for a company, based on which you will have to prepare journal entries, open T-accounts, and post the journal entries to the accounts. You will then prepare a trial balance for the end of the month. Using the work-in-process T-account, you will prepare a schedule for cost of goods sold manufactured for the month. You will also prepare an income statement for the month and post any corrections that may be needed for under/over allocated manufacturing overhead. Course Objectives Tested: 1. Identify characteristics of a corporation, record issuance of stock, and illustrate retained earnings transactions. 2. Prepare and analyze the income statement,…

accounting project 495176

10-K report analysis project. Directions in the attached file for only part 2. Need by Saturday.

Document Preview:

Project 1 & 2 Instructions, ACCT 2200, SP13 Obtain the most recent 10-K for one of the following companies: Molson Coors Brewing Company: TAP Red Robin Gourmet Burgers: RRGB? Created with an evaluation copy of Aspose.Words. To discover the full versions of our APIs please visit: https://products.aspose.com/words/ ? PAGE * MERGEFORMAT ?1? Created with an evaluation copy of Aspose.Words. To discover the full versions of our APIs please visit: https://products.aspose.com/words/ You can obtain the 10-K by going to ? HYPERLINK “http://finance.yahoo.com” ?http://finance.yahoo.com? and searching for your company. Put the ticker symbol above in the search box. Once you find your company, click the “SEC filings” link on the left and you will see all filings listed. The most recent 10-K will have been filed during 2012 or 2013, depending on when you start the project. If you start after the end of February, the 10-K will be at the top of the list and will have a date of Feb 2012. (DO NOT USE A 10-Q) Click “Full Filing at EDGAR online.” Once you are taken to the Table of Contents, click on any subtitle. Once inside the document, click “View Entire Filing” in the upper right hand corner and you will be able to see the entire 10-K. (Note: it will ask you to “purchase” for certain document types, but you do not need to do this! Follow my instructions and you will be able to obtain the document for free.) You do not need to print the entire document but you will need the Management Discussion & Analysis, the Financial statements, and the Notes to the financial statements. You will also use the company website to obtain information for the project. (Scroll down to see screenshots of the SEC filing page.) You must use the same 10-K document and company for Project 1 & 2. If you use the 2012 document for part I, use the 2012 document for part II and vice versa. Do not use 2012 for part I and then use 2013 for part II. Your project must be typed using 1.5…

Attachments:

accounting putul only 495177

Helper ~ Pls correct my answer and some of question haven’t done yet.

Here attached lecture notes as Australia Accounting.

Pls kindly follow the instruction of my lecture notes

Document Preview:

ADVANCED FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING 260 SHAREHOLDERS’ EQUITY QUIZ QUESTIONS What is a share? (1 mark) Answer Shares are issued with specific rights attached. Shares are then given different names to signify differences in right. The two most common forms of shares are ordinary shares and preference shares. Identify two advantages of a private placement of shares as compared with a public issue. (1 mark) Answer Speed, price, direction and prospectus 3. The shareholders of Quinninup Ltd hold 25 000 A class ordinary shares, fully paid at $4.50 each. On 17 April 2012, the company directors voted to make a 1 for 5 rights offer to these shareholders. The additional shares were offered at $1.75 each, payable in full one month after acceptance. The offer closed on 31 May 2012 with 90% of the shareholders accepting. Shares were duly allotted on that date and all monies were received when due. Required Prepare journal entries to record these events, show all workings. (2 marks) Answer 17 Apr 2012 Dr Cash Trust ($25,000/5 * 4.5) 22,500 Cr Application 22,500 (application monies received) 4. Forrest Ltd has issued 10 000 5% cumulative preference shares. Explain the meaning of the term “cumulative”. (1 mark) Answer Cumulative gets all dividends (previous + current) 5. The share capital of Murdoch Ltd consists of: 52 000 Ordinary A shares @ $2.50, fully paid $130 000 15 000 Ordinary B shares @ $1.50, paid to 80c 11 000 On 28 June 2012, the directors declared a 7c per share final dividend. Shareholder approval is not required to pay dividends. Required Prepare the journal entries to record the dividend, show all workings. (2 marks) Answer 28 June 2012 Dr Dividend declared Ordinary A ($52,000 * 0.07) 3,640 Dr Dividend declared Ordinary B ($11,000 * 0.07) 770 Cr Dividend payable 4,410 (declaration of final dividend of the year) Dr Dividend payable 4,410 Cr Cash 4,410 (payment of final dividend declared in previous…

accounting question 495179

Please see attached. No word minimum. Original explanation only. Please use APA format when citing sources. Please complete this response as soon as possible. Thank you.

Document Preview:

1)Governments use fund accounting instead of the traditional methods. What are the key differences in that system? Systems Most organizations that use activity-based costing have two costing systems—the official costing system that is used for preparing external financial reports and the activity-based costing system that is used for internal decision making and for managing activities.???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting question 300 words 495180

See Attachments for instructions.

Word Count: 300 (+). Cite work. Use reference(s) (APA) Guidelines.

No plagiarism

Chapters included if needed

Document Preview:

Week Nine Capstone Discussion Question · Provide an example of a health care capital expenditure. Why is the capital expenditure budgeting process important? What concepts should be considered when evaluating a capital expenditure? What do you feel is the most important factor when considering a capital expenditure proposal??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

accounting question 495181

i need help with the third question, please.

Document Preview:

Ch. 6 – New Accounting Standards and LIFO An important change is coming to Accounting Standards in the United States – especially important to accounting majors  The U.S. is going through a major transition in terms of financial accounting standards. You learned in Chapter 1 that American companies follow accounting standards followed by the Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB). Virtually every other developed country follows standards set by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB), or a close variation of those standards. For about eight years, the FASB has been working with international standard-setters that will ultimately result in the U.S. adoption of International Financial Reporting Standards. By 2011, the United States will be the only country not using IFRS (Theobald, 2010). American companies are scheduled to be required to adopt IFRS by 2016 (Thacker, 2010). The reason these facts are relevant to the materials presented in Chapter 6 is that one of the inventory methods, LIFO, will be phased out. In fact, this is one of the issues that delayed the faster adoption of IFRS (White, 2008). Our discussion for this week will be based on a few articles on IFRS and LIFO phase-out. Those of you who plan to become CPAs should note that questions related to IFRS will begin to show up on the CPA exams, starting in 2011. Most financial accounting textbooks will need to be re-written or will need supplements to reflect changes in how standards will be applied based on the new standard-setting body’s requirements. Everyone will need to learn a little about this change in American Accounting standards. You will have some questions on your Final Exam related to IFRS.  REFERENCES   Thacker, Sam. Moving from GAAP to International Accounting Standards. 2010. Retrieved from http://www.allbusiness.com/company-activities-management/company-structures-ownership/13196001-1.htmlon 11/7/2010   Theobald, Paul. Transitioning to IFRS in SAP ERP…

Attachments:

accounting hw 495128

HW 1 (Computation of Net Income) Presented below are changes in all the account balances of Jackson Furniture Co. during the current year, except for retained earnings.

Document Preview:

HW 1 (Computation of Net Income) Presented below are changes in all the account balances of Jackson Furniture Co. during the current year, except for retained earnings. ??Increase (Decrease)???Increase (Decrease)???Cash?$83,310 ???Accounts Payable?$(59,290)????Accounts Receivable (net)?46,620 ???Bonds Payable?84,140 ????Inventory?133,170 ???Common Stock?125,350 ????Investments?(49,380)???Additional Paid-in Capital?15,800 ???Compute the net income for the current year, assuming that there were no entries in the Retained Earnings account except for net income and a dividend declaration of $24,640 which was paid in the current year. $ (Income Statement Items) Presented below are certain account balances of Paczki Products Co. ?Rental revenue?$6,810??Sales discounts?$7,980???Interest expense?12,910??Selling expenses?99,890???Beginning retained earnings?114,500??Sales?390,550???Ending retained earnings?134,230??Income tax?31,800???Dividend revenue?72,590??Cost of goods sold?185,470???Sales returns?12,550??Administrative expenses?82,980??From the foregoing, compute the following in a periodic inventory environment: (a) total net revenue, (b) net income, (c) dividends declared during the current year. (a)?Total net revenue?$?? (b)?Net income?$?? (c)?Dividends declared ?$?? (Multiple-step and Extraordinary Items) The following balances were taken from the books of Parnevik Corp. on December 31, 2012. ?Interest revenue?$92,800??Accumulated depreciation-building?28,000???Cash?51,000??Notes receivable?155,000???Sales?1,341,100??Selling expenses?201,400???Accounts receivable?150,000??Accounts payable?170,000???Prepaid insurance?20,000??Bonds payable?100,000???Sales returns and allowances?156,000??Administrative and general expenses?97,300???Allowance for doubtful accounts?7,000??Accrued liabilities?32,000???Sales discounts?52,500??Interest expense?73,100???Land?100,000??Notes payable?100,000???Equipment?200,000??Loss from earthquake damage…

Attachments:

accounting hw 1 3 495130

intHW3 (Computation of Net Income) Presented below are changes in all the account balances of Jackson Furniture Co. during the current year, except for retained earnings.

Document Preview:

intHW3 (Computation of Net Income) Presented below are changes in all the account balances of Jackson Furniture Co. during the current year, except for retained earnings. ??Increase (Decrease)???Increase (Decrease)???Cash?$85,280 ???Accounts Payable?$(59,160)????Accounts Receivable (net)?49,330 ???Bonds Payable?83,160 ????Inventory?128,180 ???Common Stock?131,870 ????Investments?(47,780)???Additional Paid-in Capital?14,610 ???Compute the net income for the current year, assuming that there were no entries in the Retained Earnings account except for net income and a dividend declaration of $22,300 which was paid in the current year. $ (Income Statement Items) Presented below are certain account balances of Paczki Products Co. ?Rental revenue?$6,540??Sales discounts?$7,870???Interest expense?12,940??Selling expenses?99,650???Beginning retained earnings?114,550??Sales?392,310???Ending retained earnings?134,450??Income tax?32,690???Dividend revenue?72,820??Cost of goods sold?184,560???Sales returns?12,990??Administrative expenses?83,500??From the foregoing, compute the following in a periodic inventory environment: (a) total net revenue, (b) net income, (c) dividends declared during the current year. (a)?Total net revenue?$?? (b)?Net income?$?? (c)?Dividends declared ?$?? (Multiple-step and Single-step) Two accountants for the firm of Allen and Wright are arguing about the merits of presenting an income statement in a multiple-step versus a single-step format. The discussion involves the following 2012 information related to Webster Company ($000 omitted). ?Administrative expense????Officer’s salaries?$ 5,580???Depreciation of office furniture and equipment?4,060???Cost of goods sold?63,100???Rental revenue?23,190???Selling expense????Transportation-out?2,690???Sales commissions?7,980???Depreciation of sales equipment?6,480???Sales?98,400???Income tax?9,070???Interest expense?1,860?? (a)?Prepare an income statement for the year 2012 using the multiple-step…

Attachments:

accounting hw 495131

USE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION TO ANSWER THE NEXT (3) QUESTIONS: On January 1, 2012, ABC borrowed $1,200,000 at 10% payable annually to finance the construction of a new building.  In 2012, the company began construction on March 1 and made the following expenditures throughout the year: March 31 $260,000 June 1 $750,000 July 1 $1,300,000 Nov 1 $1,200,000 The building was completed on December 31, 2012.  Additional information is provided below: 1.

Document Preview:

USE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION TO ANSWER THE NEXT (3) QUESTIONS: On January 1, 2012, ABC borrowed $1,200,000 at 10% payable annually to finance the construction of a new building.  In 2012, the company began construction on March 1 and made the following expenditures throughout the year: March 31 $260,000 June 1 $750,000 July 1 $1,300,000 Nov 1 $1,200,000 The building was completed on December 31, 2012.  Additional information is provided below: 1.  Other Debt consisted of a $4,000,000, 10-year, 12% bond with interest payable annually; and a $1,600,000, 6-year, 9% note  with interest due annually.  Both the Bond and Note were outstanding for all of 2012.  (Note:  When determining your average interest rate, round to two decimal places.  If your average interest is .14374, use 14.37%.) Required: a. Determine the original cost of the building (round your answer up to the nearest whole dollar):    $[BLANK_1] Answer 0.6667 points Question 2   Use the information presented in #1 above to answer the next question: b. Determine Interest Expense for 2012 (round your answer to the nearest whole dollar):  $[Blank_2] Answer 0.6667 points Question 3   Using the information presented in #1 above, answer the following question: c. If instead, ABC had only $200,000 of other debt outstanding inclurring interest at 12% APR, determine how much interest can be capitalized:  $[Blank_3] Answer 0.6666 points Question 4   USE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION TO ANSWER THE NEXT (3) QUESTIONS: Lambert Co. acquired a machine on June 30, 2013 and gave the seller $20,000 cash down and a two year non-interest bearing note calling for four semi-annual payments of $25,000 each, with the first payment beginning on December 31, 2013. The prevailing rate of interest was 12% APR. Lambert recorded the purchase as follows: Account Title Debit Credit Machine 120,000 Note Payable 100,000 Cash 20,000 Lambert uses the straight-line method to depreciate its equipment…

accounting hw 495132

8000000 320000 120000 0.05 1 12000 2400 2 9000 6000 3 60000 0 4 1200 640 Auditing Chapter 9 Account Balalnce Tolerable Misstatement Expected Misstatement Risk of Incorrect Acceptance Sample Size Sampling Interval Error Number Book Value Audit Value Statistical Problem Save this spreadsheet using the naming convention “yourfirst&lastname.xlsx” You will use the spreadsheet labled “Calculation” to complete the problem. All calculations must be done using the spreadsheet You will need the tables in chapter 8 of the text.

Document Preview:

8000000 320000 120000 0.05 1 12000 2400 2 9000 6000 3 60000 0 4 1200 640 Auditing Chapter 9 Account Balalnce Tolerable Misstatement Expected Misstatement Risk of Incorrect Acceptance Sample Size Sampling Interval Error Number Book Value Audit Value Statistical Problem Save this spreadsheet using the naming convention “yourfirst&lastname.xlsx” You will use the spreadsheet labled “Calculation” to complete the problem. All calculations must be done using the spreadsheet You will need the tables in chapter 8 of the text. Conclusion: Requirement (a) Requirement (b) Requirement (c) Daily and Johnson, CPAs were conducting the audit of Garner Tool Supply for the year ended December 31. Cindy Steward, senior-in-charge of the audit, plans to use MUS to audit Garner’s inventory account. The balance in the inventory account at December 31 was $8,000,000. Requirements: a) Based on the information in the spreadsheet, calculate the required MUS sample size b) Steve Brents, staff accountant, used the sample items selected in part (a) and performed the audit procedures listed in the inventory audit program. He noted the misstatements show in the spreadsheet in part (b). Using the information, calculate the upper misstatement limit. c) Based on the results in part (b) What is the conclusion that Steve Brents should make concerning the inventory account balance? NOTE THAT ALL CALCULATIONS SHOULD BE ACCOMPLISHED USING THE SPREADSHEET! I WILL CHECK THE FORMULAS AND THEY WILL ACCOUNT FOR 50% OF THE POINTS. ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting hw pending 495133

1) Lettman Corporation has provided the following partial listing of costs incurred during November:        Marketing salaries $ 52,100  Property taxes, factory $ 12,400  Administrative travel $ 100,800  Sales commissions $ 52,800  Indirect labor $ 38,400  Direct materials $ 173,900  Advertising $ 139,900  Depreciation of production equipment $ 39,100  Direct labor $ 87,400 Required: a. What is the total amount of product cost listed above? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)  Total product cost $   b.

Document Preview:

1) Lettman Corporation has provided the following partial listing of costs incurred during November:  ? ? ??  Marketing salaries?$?52,100   ??  Property taxes, factory?$?12,400   ??  Administrative travel?$?100,800   ??  Sales commissions?$?52,800   ??  Indirect labor?$?38,400   ??  Direct materials?$?173,900   ??  Advertising?$?139,900   ??  Depreciation of production equipment?$?39,100   ??  Direct labor?$?87,400   ?????Required: a.?What is the total amount of product cost listed above? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)??   Total product cost?$  ?? b.?What is the total amount of period cost listed above? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)??   Total period cost?$  ?? 2) Whitman Corporation, a merchandising company, reported sales of 10,600 units for May at a selling price of $750 per unit. The cost of goods sold (all variable) was $492 per unit and the variable selling expense was $55 per unit. The total fixed selling expense was $162,400. The variable administrative expense was $33 per unit and the total fixed administrative expense was $375,400.?? Required:??a.?Prepare a contribution format income statement for May. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)?? ?? Whitman Corporation?Income Statement??  ? ?$  ??  Variable expenses:? ? ??       ?$  ? ??       ? ? ??       ? ? ?? ????  ? ? ??  Fixed expenses:? ? ??       ? ? ??       ? ? ?? ? ???  ? ?$  ?? ? ? ???? b.?Prepare a traditional format income statement for May. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)??                                         Whitman Corporation?Income Statement??  ? ?$  ??  ? ? ?? ????  ? ? ??  Operating expenses:? ? ??       ?$  ? ??       ? ? ?? ? ???  ? ?$  ?? ? ? ????3) In October, Patnode Inc., a merchandising company, had sales of $373,000, selling expenses of $34,800, and administrative expenses of $42,400. The cost of merchandise purchased during the month was $268,600. The beginning balance in…

Attachments:

accounting hw1 4 495134

(Balance Sheet Classifications) Presented below are a number of balance sheet accounts of Cunningham, Inc. For each of the accounts below, indicate the proper balance sheet classification.

Document Preview:

(Balance Sheet Classifications) Presented below are a number of balance sheet accounts of Cunningham, Inc. For each of the accounts below, indicate the proper balance sheet classification. (a)?Investment in Preferred Stock (readily marketable)???(b) ?Treasury Stock???(c)?Common Stock ???(d) ?Cash Dividends Payable???(e)?Accumulated Depreciation???(f)?Warehouse in Process of Construction (for use by this company)???(g)?Petty Cash???(h) ?Accrued Interest on Notes Payable???(i) ?Deficit???(j)?Trading Securities???(k)?Income Taxes Payable???(l)?Unearned Subscription Revenue???(m)?Work in Process???(n)?Accrued Vacation Pay??? (Classification of Balance Sheet Accounts) Presented below are the captions of Nikos Company’s balance sheet. (a)?Current assets.?(f) ?Current liabilities. ??(b) ?Investments.?(g) ?Non-current liabilities.??(c) ?Property, plant, and equipment. ?(h) ?Capital stock. ??(d) ?Intangible assets. ?(i) ?Additional paid-in capital.??(e) ?Other assets.?(j) ?Retained earnings.??Indicate by letter where each of the following items would be classified. 1.?Preferred stock.???2.?Goodwill.???3.?Wages payable.???4.?Trade accounts payable.???5.?Buildings. ???6.?Trading securities.???7.?Current portion of long-term debt. ???8.?Premium on bonds payable.???9.?Allowance for doubtful accounts.???10.?Accounts receivable.???11.?Cash surrender value of life insurance. ???12.?Notes payable (due next year). ???13.?Office supplies.???14.?Common stock.???15.?Land.???16.?Bond sinking fund.???17.?Merchandise inventory.???18.?Prepaid insurance.???19.?Bonds payable.???20.?Taxes payable.??? (Preparation of a Corrected Balance Sheet) Presented below and on the next page is the balance sheet of Kishwaukee Corporation as of December 31, 2012. ?KISHWAUKEE CORPORATION???Balance Sheet???December 31, 2012???Assets???Goodwill (Note 2)?$121,700???Buildings (Note 1)?1,640,000???Inventories?312,100???Land?950,000???Accounts receivable?171,700???Treasury stock (50,000 shares, no…

Attachments:

accounting hw3 495135

HW 3 #1 Buttercup Corporation issued 310 shares of $9 par value common stock for $4,185. Prepare Buttercup’ journal entry. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.) Description/Account Debit Credit #2 Swarten Corporation issued 680 shares of no-par common stock for $8,580. Prepare Swarten’s journal entry if (a) the stock has no stated value, and (b) the stock has a stated value of $3 per share. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.

Document Preview:

HW 3 #1 Buttercup Corporation issued 310 shares of $9 par value common stock for $4,185. Prepare Buttercup’ journal entry. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.) Description/Account?Debit?Credit?????????????? #2 Swarten Corporation issued 680 shares of no-par common stock for $8,580. Prepare Swarten’s journal entry if (a) the stock has no stated value, and (b) the stock has a stated value of $3 per share. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.) (a)??Description/Account?Debit?Credit??????????(b)??Description/Account?Debit?Credit?????????????? #3 Hinges Corporation issued 522 shares of $105 par value preferred stock for $71,350. Prepare Hinges’s journal entry. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.) Description/Account?Debit?Credit?????????????? #4 Woolford Inc. declared a cash dividend of $1.29 per share on its 2.14 million outstanding shares. The dividend was declared on August 1, payable on September 9 to all stockholders of record on August 15. Prepare the journal entries necessary on those three dates. (If no entry is required, enter No Entry as the Description and 0 as the amount.) Date?Description/Account?Debit?Credit??Aug. 1??????????Aug. 15??????????Sep. 9??????????

Attachments:

accounting hw5 495136

HW5 #1 Garfield Company purchased, as a held-to-maturity investment, $92,700 of the 9%, 12-year bonds of Chester Corporation for $75,474, which provides an 12% return. Prepare Garfield’s journal entries for (a) the purchase of the investment and (b) the receipt of annual interest and discount amortization. Assume effective interest amortization is used. (Round answers to zero decimal places, e.g. 25,000. List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.

Document Preview:

HW5 #1 Garfield Company purchased, as a held-to-maturity investment, $92,700 of the 9%, 12-year bonds of Chester Corporation for $75,474, which provides an 12% return. Prepare Garfield’s journal entries for (a) the purchase of the investment and (b) the receipt of annual interest and discount amortization. Assume effective interest amortization is used. (Round answers to zero decimal places, e.g. 25,000. List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.) Description/Account Debit Credit (a) (b) #2 Garfield Company purchased, as an available-for-sale securities, $63,100 of the 9%, 10-year bonds of Chester Corporation for $55,667, which provides an 11% return. Prepare Garfield’s journal entries for (a) the purchase of the investment, (b) the receipt of annual interest and discount amortization, and (c) the year-end fair value adjustment. The bonds have a year-end fair value of $57,167. Assume effective interest amortization is used. (Round answers to zero decimal places, e.g. 12,510. List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.) Description/Account Debit Credit (a) (b) (c) #3 Fairbanks Corporation purchased 300 shares of Sherman Inc. common stock as an available-for-sale investment for $10,440. During the year, Sherman paid a cash dividend of $2.95 per share. At year-end, Sherman stock was selling for $36.40 per share. Prepare Fairbanks’s journal entries to record (a) the purchase of the investment, (b) the dividends received, and (c) the fair value adjustment. Description/Account Debit Credit (a) (b) (c) #4 Fairbanks Corporation purchased 300 shares of Sherman Inc. common stock as an investment in Equity Investments (Trading) for $8,100. During the year, Sherman paid a cash dividend of $2.85 per share. At year-end, Sherman stock was selling for $29.10 per share. Prepare Fairbanks’s journal entries to record (a) the purchase of the investment, (b) the dividends received,…

Attachments:

accounting hw6 495137

HW 6 Petrenko Corporation has outstanding 2,010 $1,000 bonds, each convertible into 50 shares of $13 par value common stock. The bonds are converted on December 31, 2012, when the unamortized discount is $30,000 and the market price of the stock is $21 per share. Record the conversion using the book value approach. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.) Description/Account Debit Credit #2 Pechstein Corporation issued 2,160 shares of $11 par value common stock upon conversion of 1,130 shares of $50 par value preferred stock.

Document Preview:

HW 6 Petrenko Corporation has outstanding 2,010 $1,000 bonds, each convertible into 50 shares of $13 par value common stock. The bonds are converted on December 31, 2012, when the unamortized discount is $30,000 and the market price of the stock is $21 per share. Record the conversion using the book value approach. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.) Description/Account?Debit?Credit?????????????????? #2 Pechstein Corporation issued 2,160 shares of $11 par value common stock upon conversion of 1,130 shares of $50 par value preferred stock. The preferred stock was originally issued at $60 per share. The common stock is trading at $26 per share at the time of conversion. Record the conversion of the preferred stock. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.) Description/Account?Debit?Credit?????????????????? #3 Rockland Corporation earned net income of $358,500 in 2012 and had 100,000 shares of common stock outstanding throughout the year. Also outstanding all year was $956,000 of 10% bonds, which are convertible into 19,120 shares of common. Rockland’s tax rate is 40 percent. Compute Rockland’s 2012 diluted earnings per share. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.13.) $ #4 DiCenta Corporation reported net income of $273,000 in 2012 and had 50,000 shares of common stock outstanding throughout the year. Also outstanding all year were 6,970 shares of cumulative preferred stock, each convertible into 2 shares of common. The preferred stock pays an annual dividend of $5 per share. DiCenta’ tax rate is 40%. Compute DiCenta’ 2012 diluted earnings per share. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 5.23.) $ #5 Bedard Corporation reported net income of $387,000 in 2012 and had 200,000 shares of common stock outstanding throughout the year. Also outstanding all year were 46,000 options to purchase common stock at $15 per share. The average market price of the stock during the year…

Attachments:

accounting hw7 495138

HW7 #1 In 2012, Amirante Corporation had pretax financial income of $177,200 and taxable income of $130,000. The difference is due to the use of different depreciation methods for tax and accounting purposes. The effective tax rate is 40%. Compute the amount to be reported as income taxes payable at December 31, 2012. $ #2 Oxford Corporation began operations in 2012 and reported pretax financial income of $227,500 for the year. Oxford’s tax depreciation exceeded its book depreciation by $41,400. Oxford’s tax rate for 2012 and years thereafter is 30%.

Document Preview:

HW7 #1 In 2012, Amirante Corporation had pretax financial income of $177,200 and taxable income of $130,000. The difference is due to the use of different depreciation methods for tax and accounting purposes. The effective tax rate is 40%. Compute the amount to be reported as income taxes payable at December 31, 2012. $ #2 Oxford Corporation began operations in 2012 and reported pretax financial income of $227,500 for the year. Oxford’s tax depreciation exceeded its book depreciation by $41,400. Oxford’s tax rate for 2012 and years thereafter is 30%. In its December 31, 2012 balance sheet, what amount of deferred tax liability should be reported? $ #3 At December 31, 2012, Percheron Inc. had a deferred tax asset of $32,120. At December 31, 2013, the deferred tax asset is $57,570. The corporation’s 2013 current tax expense is $63,630. What amount should Percheron report as total 2013 tax expense? $ #4 Conlin Corporation had the following tax information Year?Taxable Income?Tax Rate?Taxes Paid??2010?$300,000?35%?$105,000???2011?$325,000 ?30%?$97,500???2012?$400,000 ?30%?$120,000???In 2013 Conlin suffered a net operating loss of $460,100, which it elected to carry back. The 2013 enacted tax rate is 29%. Prepare Conlin’s entry to record the effect of the loss carryback. Description/Account?Debit?Credit?????????? #5 Rode Inc. incurred a net operating loss of $580,100 in 2012. Combined income for 2010 and 2011 was $396,100. The tax rate for all years is 40%. Rode elects the carryback option. Prepare the journal entries to record the benefits of the loss carryback and the loss carryforward. Description/Account?Debit?Credit??????????(To record carryback)????????????(To record carryforward)????

Attachments:

accounting information sys 495144

Using the written description of the DUB 5 process in the case, and the rough diagram at the bottom of the case, create your Level 0 DFD.

You can submit a DFD that is hand-drawn and scanned, use Excel or Visio, or another program.

3) Level 1 DFD for the Credit Review Process

Going down one level in the DFD, focus on the credit review process only and create a DFD for this process.

Again, you can submit a hand-drawn DFD or use an automated program. Your choice.

4) Observations About the Processes

Discuss your observations about the strengths and weaknesses of DUB 5’s order processing system.

Attachments:

accounting information system 495146

HA2042 Accounting Information Systems (T1, 2012) Group Assignment (20% of Final Mark) The assignment has two parts namely Part 1 (10 marks) & 2 (10 marks). Part 1 will require you to evaluate the payroll system for the Skip-Rope Manufacturing Company. Part 2 will involve a company called Kowal Manufacturing Company in which you are required to identify the weaknesses in their current system among others. The two (2) cases are selected form you textbook, Accounting Information Systems 12th edition by M.B. Romney and P.J. Steinbart.

Document Preview:

HA2042 Accounting Information Systems (T1, 2012) Group Assignment (20% of Final Mark) The assignment has two parts namely Part 1 (10 marks) & 2 (10 marks). Part 1 will require you to evaluate the payroll system for the Skip-Rope Manufacturing Company. Part 2 will involve a company called Kowal Manufacturing Company in which you are required to identify the weaknesses in their current system among others. The two (2) cases are selected form you textbook, Accounting Information Systems 12th edition by M.B. Romney and P.J. Steinbart. The assignment aims to develop the student’s understanding of an information system in the area of Human Resources Management and Payroll Cycle. The task also aims for the student to be able to analyse a case and identify the threats and weaknesses and give corresponding recommendations. This group project itself includes several assignments, each of which comprises a part of the students’ task. However, it is well encouraged to include any additional information that students may think will be useful in conducting financial statements analysis of the selected company. General Rules and Requirements: Reports must be confined to 2,000 words (+/- 5%). As a minimum, a title page, table of contents page (based on your report headings), introduction, conclusion and references should be included. Font type should be Arial (size 11), paragraph spacing should be 1.5. Note: Any additional material from external sources that you “copy and paste” into your report is NOT included in the word limit. Also, ensure it is appropriately referenced. Part 1 (5 marks) Part 2 (15 marks) Chapter 15? Skip-Rope manufacturing (page 475) Chapter 15? Kowal Manufacturing Company (page 475) Required: Identify weaknesses in current procedures, and explain the threats that they may allow to ?occur. Suggest ways to improve the Kowal Manufacturing Company’s internal control over ?hiring and payroll processing. (CPA examination, adapted.) Due Date: Friday…

accounting information systems 495147

The case draws primarily from textbook material presented in Part II Control and Audit of AIS. However, please bring in external reference source(s) when responding to the questions or discussing the case.

I suggest that you structure your paper as follows:

1) Summary of the Case (1-2 paragraphs)

2) Responses to the 4 questions

3) Concluding Remarks (1-2 paragraphs) – for example, if Rachel had not been a whistleblower, would Sandy have been caught? Would an improved computerized accounting system help prevent or catch this type of theft?

Document Preview:

MANAGER PERSUADES EMPLOYEES TO UNKNOWINGLY ALLOW EMBEZZLEMENT BY JONATHAN SPACKMAN, CPA Sandy’s initial success at embezzlement prompted him to try it again. What led Sandy to jeopardize his career and personal well-being, knowing full well that what he was doing was wrong? ABSTRACT Businesses today rely heavily on computers to cut costs, increase transaction speed, create competitive advantages and store vital information. This embrace of computer technology often means moving to large systems and networks. Although these systems and networks come with built-in controls, such as segregation of duties, they can never replace honest management. In this case, a manager under financial pressure used his influence over his employees to bypass the system controls. He was able to embezzle money until one employee courageously stood up to his questionable procedures. BACKGROUND Duarf, Inc. owned several media businesses, such as newspapers, radio stations and magazines. It operated in many of the largest markets in the United States and Canada. The company had grown primarily through acquisitions over the past ten years and still used several of the acquired business systems. Last year, the company decided to centralize all of its accounts payable processing, such as purchase orders, vendor maintenance, invoice processing and check printing. To accomplish this centralization plan, the company purchased the latest technology. Following the purchase, training sessions were held to ensure all processors and management could use all of the system’s functions. This technology included a robust database software package. The software provided internal controls, including matching invoices to purchase orders and receiving reports, signature dollar limits, segregation of processing duties and a controlled vendor list. All of the internal controls associated with the software were adequately designed. They were tested and found to be…

accounting for jan v only due by 9pm sunday 495148

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Assignment 1 Types of Cash Inflows and Outflows Resources Website icon Types of Cash Inflows and Outflows Scoring Guide. https://courserooma.capella.edu/bbcswebdav/institution/BUS/BUS3061/Version1013/Scoring_Guides/u03a1_scoring_guide.html Microsoft Excel icon BUS3061 Assignment u03a1 Templatehttps://courserooma.capella.edu/bbcswebdav/institution/BUS/BUS3061/Version1013/Course_Files/cf_BUS3061_assignment_u03a1_template.xls From your readings, you know that the cash flow statement classifies cash receipts and cash payments as operating, investing, and financing activities. Before preparing the cash flow statement, accounting data must be analyzed to locate transactions in both the cash account and other locations. After the transactions have been located, it should be determined whether each one affects operating, investing, or financing cash flow. Last, whether the transaction results in a cash inflow or outflow must be ascertained. Accountants consider this statement to be foundational for a business to continuously operate. In this assignment, you will classify cash inflows and outflows as one of these three activities. Instructions For this assignment, use the BUS3061 Assignment u03a1 Template (listed in Resources). Classify each of the following cash inflows and outflows as operating, investing, or financing activities: Sale of a piece of company equipment. Sale of common stock. Payment to suppliers for merchandise purchased. Payment to lenders for interest on note payable. Sale of investments in other companies. Purchase of land to expand plant size. Payment to stockholders as cash dividends. Sale of goods or services. Payment to employees for wages and salaries. Lending of money to other business entities. Payment to government for property and income taxes. Collection of principal on loans to other entities. Interest and dividends received. Issue of bonds to support company growth. Purchase of investments in debt or equity of other…

Attachments:

accounting journalizing and adjusting 495149

homework needed in a few hours. Parts 2&3

Document Preview:

ACCT 3220 Fall 2013 Group Exercise #1 PART I Select the assumption, principle, or constraint that most appropriately justifies these procedures and practices. (Do not use qualitative characteristics.) ?(a)  ?Fair value changes are not recognized in the accounting records.????(b)  ?Lower of cost or market is used to value inventories.????(c)  ?Financial information is presented so that investors will not be misled.????(d)  ?Intangible assets are capitalized and amortized over periods benefited.????(e)  ?Repair tools are expensed when purchased.????(f)  ?Agricultural companies use fair value for purposes of valuing crops.????(g)  ?Each enterprise is kept as a unit distinct from its owner or owners.????(h)  ?All significant post-balance sheet events are reported.????(i)  ?Revenue is recorded at point of sale.????(j)  ?All important aspects of bond liabilities are presented in financial statements.????(k)  ?Rationale for (example of) accrual accounting.????(l)  ?The use of consolidated statements is justified.????(m)  ?Reporting must be done at defined time intervals.????(n)  ?An allowance for doubtful accounts is established.????(o)  ?All payments out of petty cash are charged to Miscellaneous Expense. (Do not use conservatism.)????(p)  ?Goodwill is recorded only at time of purchase of substantially another company.????(q)  ?No profits are anticipated and all possible losses are recognized.????(r)  ?A company charges its sales commission costs to expense.???? PART II ??Green Fields Miniature Golf and Driving Range Inc. was opened on March 1 by Mickey Fields. The following selected events and transactions occurred during March. ????? Mar.?1?Invested $60,000 cash in the business in exchange for common stock.?? ?3?Purchased Melissa Wie’s Golf Land for $38,000 cash. The price consists of land $10,000; building $22,000; and equipment $6,000. (Make one compound entry.)?? ?5?Advertised the opening of the driving range and miniature golf course, paying advertising…

Attachments:

accounting journalizing and adjusting 495150

Accounting homework

Document Preview:

ACCT 3220 Fall 2013 Group Exercise #4 Sapienti Co. sells $400,000 of 12% bonds on June 1, 2014, the contract date. The bonds pay interest on December 1 and June 1. The due date of the bonds is June 1, 2018. The bonds yield 10%. After the second interest payment, Sapienti buys back the bonds when the market interest rate is 8%. Required: Record the journal entry for the issuance of the bond. Record the journal entry for the first interest payment. Record the journal entry on December 31, 2014. Record the journal entry for the second interest payment. Record the journal entry for the buy back of the bonds.

Attachments:

accounting licensure 495151

Document Preview:

CPA Licensure Instructions Compare and contrast the CPA licensure laws for Arkansas with those from two other states of your choice. Compare and contrast the CPA licensure laws and regulations for Arkansas with those from two other states of your choice. Arkansas law and Board Rules can be found online at http://www.arkansas.gov/asbpa/ Note: Board Rule 3.2 describes education requirements for taking the exam. State laws and regulations differ in many different aspects not limited to education requirements CPA Licensure Instructions Compare and contrast the CPA licensure laws for Arkansas with those from two other states of your choice. Compare and contrast the CPA licensure laws and regulations for Arkansas with those from two other states of your choice. Arkansas law and Board Rules can be found online at http://www.arkansas.gov/asbpa/ Note: Board Rule 3.2 describes education requirements for taking the exam. State laws and regulations differ in many different aspects not limited to education requirements ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting homework 495104

#1 Marvel Parts, Inc., manufactures auto accessories. One of the company’s products is a set of seat covers that can be adjusted to fit nearly any small car. The company has a standard cost system in use for all of its products. According to the standards that have been set for the seat covers, the factory should work 780 hours each month to produce 2,600 sets of covers. The standard costs associated with this level of production are:   Total Per Set of Covers   Direct materials $59,280 $22.80   Direct labor $7,332 2.

Document Preview:

#1 Marvel Parts, Inc., manufactures auto accessories. One of the company’s products is a set of seat covers that can be adjusted to fit nearly any small car. The company has a standard cost system in use for all of its products. According to the standards that have been set for the seat covers, the factory should work 780 hours each month to produce 2,600 sets of covers. The standard costs associated with this level of production are:?? ?Total?Per Set of Covers??  Direct materials?$59,280?$22.80??  Direct labor?$7,332?2.82??  Variable manufacturing overhead (based on direct labor-hours)?$1,560?0.60?? ? ?$26.22????  During August, the factory worked only 780 direct labor-hours and produced 2,700 sets of covers. The following actual costs were recorded during the month:??  ?Total?Per Set of Covers??  Direct materials (8,910 yards)?$62,370?$23.10??  Direct labor?$8,112?3.00??  Variable manufacturing overhead?$3,120?1.16?? ? ?27.26????  At standard, each set of covers should require 3 yards of material. All of the materials purchased during the month were used in production.?? Requirement 1:??Compute the direct materials price and quantity variances for August (Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.):?? ? ? ??  Materials price variance?$  $?  (Click to select)Favorable None Unfavorable??  Materials quantity variance?$ $   ?  (Click to select)NoneFU????Requirement 2:??Compute the direct labor rate and efficiency variances for August (Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Input all amounts as positive values. Round your answers to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.):?? ? ? ??  Labor rate variance? $ $ …

Attachments:

horowitz company is planning to produce 2 000 units of product in 2012 each unit req 495105

Problem 1:

Horowitz Company is planning to produce 2,000 units of product in 2012. Each unit requires 3 pounds of materials at $6 per pound and a half-hour of labor at $14 per hour. The overhead rate is 70$ of direct labor.

  1. Compute the budgeted amounts for 2012 for direct materials to be used, direct labor, and applied overhead.
  2. Compute the standard cost of one unit of product.
  3. What are the potential advantages to a cooperation of using standard costs?

Problem 2

Armand Company is considering a capital investment of $150,000 in additional productive facilities. The new machinery is expected to have a useful life of 5 years with no salvage value. Depreciation is by the straight-line method. During the life of the investment, annual net income and cash inflows are expected to be $18,000 and $48,000, respectively. Armando has a 12% cost of capital rate, which is the minimum acceptable rate of return on the investment.

  1. Compute (1) the annual rate of return and (2) the cash payback period on the proposed capital expenditure.
  2. Using the discounted cash flow technique, compute the net present value.
    • (Round to two decimals)

Attachments:

accounting homework 495107

Need it done in by 730pm eastern standard time

Document Preview:

Accounting conventions represent the principles, assumptions, and rules that guide an accountant as he or she analyzes the effects of business events on the accounting cycle and applies them to various cycle procedures. This assignment requires you to identify which of these conventions apply to a given business scenario to enhance your understanding of the foundation of accounting procedures and processes. Instructions For this assignment, use worksheet u01a3 on the BUS3061 Unit 1 Excel Workbook Template (listed in Resources). Identify the applicable accounting convention for each of the following business scenarios. More than one convention may apply to each scenario. Please explain your choices for each scenario. Scenario 1: The Acme Company is undergoing a reorganization to improve its financial structure. As part of this process, the company is considering lowering its expense calculations to improve the bottom line net income. Scenario 2: Regal Enterprises has purchased $45,000 worth new equipment for use in its manufacturing operations and would like to write off the cost of this equipment in just a couple of years, instead of the usual 10 years for this equipment type. The company’s president fears that the economic conditions in its industry will worsen and cause the company to sell the equipment sooner than expected. Scenario 3: Bozrah Industries, a small independent retailer, wants to change its accounting system from cash-based to accrual-based, and is concerned about how this change will affect the recording of sales and expenses. Scenario 4: Randolph, Inc. has experienced major turnover in its accounting department, and the new head of accounting has been going through the current records of transactions. A couple of those transactions appear problematic. The first contains an error of $10,000 that the previous accountant decided was not large enough to adjust before the financial statements were prepared. This error would understate income and…

Attachments:

accounting homework 495108

u03a1 Inflow Outflow Investing Financing & Operating 3. Payment to suppliers for merchandise purchased. 2. Sale of common stock. 1. Sale of a piece of company equipment. 4. Payment to lenders for interest on note payable. 5. Sale of investments in other companies. 6. Purchase of land to expand plant size. 7. Payment to stockholders as cash dividends. 8. Sale of goods or services. 9. Payment to employees for wages and salaries. 11. Payment to government for property and income taxes. 12. Collection of principal on loans to other entities.

Document Preview:

u03a1 Inflow Outflow Investing Financing & Operating 3. Payment to suppliers for merchandise purchased. 2. Sale of common stock. 1. Sale of a piece of company equipment. 4. Payment to lenders for interest on note payable. 5. Sale of investments in other companies. 6. Purchase of land to expand plant size. 7. Payment to stockholders as cash dividends. 8. Sale of goods or services. 9. Payment to employees for wages and salaries. 11. Payment to government for property and income taxes. 12. Collection of principal on loans to other entities. Column A BUS3061 Fundamentals of Accounting Assignment u03a1 Template 13. Interest and dividends received. 16. Payment to other entities to cover expenses incurred. Instructions: Classify each of the following cash inflows and outflows as operating, investing, or financing activities. For each item in Column A, place an “X” in the appropriate inflow/outflow cell and cash flow activitiy cell. 14. Issue of bonds to support company growth. 15. Purchase of investments in debt or equity of other entities. 17. Buyback of company stock from investors. 10. Lending of money to other business entities. u03a1 Inflow Outflow Investing Financing & Operating 3. Payment to suppliers for merchandise purchased. 2. Sale of common stock. 1. Sale of a piece of company equipment. 4. Payment to lenders for interest on note payable. 5. Sale of investments in other companies. 6. Purchase of land to expand plant size. 7. Payment to stockholders as cash dividends. 8. Sale of goods or services. 9. Payment to employees for wages and salaries. 11. Payment to government for property and income taxes. 12. Collection of principal on loans to other entities. Column A BUS3061 Fundamentals of Accounting Assignment u03a1 Template 13. Interest and dividends received. 16. Payment to other entities to cover expenses incurred. Instructions: Classify each of the following cash inflows and outflows as…

accounting homework 495109

Cash Flow Statement u03a2 Info BUS3061 Fundamentals of Accounting Assignment u03a2 Template Cash Flow from Operating Activities: Cash Flow from Investing Activities: Cash Flow from Financing Activities: Assets Cash Accounts receivable Inventory Land Equipment Accum. Depreciation – Equipment Total Liabilities and Equities Accounts payable Bonds payable Common stock Retained earnings Difference Skylar Enterprises, Inc. Comparative Balance Sheets Additional Information: 1. Net income for 2012 was $103,000. 2. Cash dividends of $45,000 were paid. 3.

Document Preview:

Cash Flow Statement u03a2 Info BUS3061 Fundamentals of Accounting Assignment u03a2 Template Cash Flow from Operating Activities: Cash Flow from Investing Activities: Cash Flow from Financing Activities: Assets Cash Accounts receivable Inventory Land Equipment Accum. Depreciation – Equipment Total Liabilities and Equities Accounts payable Bonds payable Common stock Retained earnings Difference Skylar Enterprises, Inc. Comparative Balance Sheets Additional Information: 1. Net income for 2012 was $103,000. 2. Cash dividends of $45,000 were paid. 3. Bonds payable amounting to $55,000 were redeemed. 4. Common stock was issued for $42,000 cash. 5. No equipment was sold during 2012. 6. Land was sold at cost during 2012. Skylar Enterprises, Inc. Statement of Cash Flows – Indirect Method For the Year Ended December 31, 2012 Instructions: Download and save a copy of this Excel file. Using the information from this worksheet and from Table 6.3 on page 77 in the McCrary textbook, Mastering Financial Accounting Essentials: The Critical Nuts and Bolts, prepare the cash flow statement on the next worksheet. ?1?/?1?/?2012 ?12?/?31?/?2012 $73,000.00 $22,000.00 $51,000.00 $85,000.00 $76,000.00 $9,000.00 $170,000.00 $189,000.00 $19,000.00 $75,000.00 $100,000.00 $25,000.00 $260,000.00 $200,000.00 $60,000.00 ($66,000.00) ($32,000.00) $34,000.00 $597,000.00 $555,000.00 $39,000.00 $47,000.00 $8,000.00 $150,000.00 $200,000.00 $50,000.00 $216,000.00 $174,000.00 $42,000.00 $192,000.00 $134,000.00 $58,000.00 $597,000.00 $555,000.00 Cash Flow Statement u03a2 Info BUS3061 Fundamentals of Accounting Assignment u03a2 Template Cash Flow from Operating Activities: Cash Flow from Investing Activities: Cash Flow from Financing Activities: Assets Cash Accounts receivable Inventory Land Equipment Accum. Depreciation – Equipment Total Liabilities and Equities Accounts payable Bonds payable Common stock Retained…

accounting homework 495110

Must be done either in a word format or excel format one or the other not both. I can only submit one format

Document Preview:

CASE #1: On May 5, 2013, Gina Ennabeortiz started a carpet cleaning business called Ennabeortiz Family Carpet Cleaning. She completed the following transactions during the month: Gina invested $16,500 cash and a small truck with a value of $8,000 to start her business. Prepaid $3,500 cash for 12 months’ rent on a small office. Purchased office supplies for cash, $575. Purchased equipment on account, $4,000. Received cash for services performed, $3,350. Performed services on credit, $2,350. Purchased truck supplies on account, $125. Received $15,350 cash in advance of providing cleaning services to a customer. Paid $2,500 cash for the premium on a 6-month insurance policy. Paid salary of employee, $1,550. Purchased $2,500 of additional equipment by paying $400 cash and signing a long-term note payable for $2,100. Paid for repairs to truck, $225. Received $1,350 for the services performed in transaction f. Paid utilities, $315. Completed cleaning services and immediately collected $10,500. Paid creditor $675 on the purchase in transaction g. Provided $2,000 of cleaning services from transaction h. Gina withdrew cash for personal use, $2,775. Paid $5,000 cash for advertisements on the local television station during May. Required: Prepare general journal entries to record these transactions (use the account titles listed in part 2). Open a set of T accounts with the following titles: Cash (101), Accounts Receivable (106); Office Supplies (124); Truck Supplies(128); Equipment (131); Prepaid Rent (140); Prepaid Insurance (150); Truck (163); Accounts Payable (201); Notes Payable (202); Unearned Cleaning Revenue (203); Gina Ennabeortiz, Capital (301); Gina Ennabeortiz, Drawing (302); Cleaning Revenue (403); Salaries Expense (620); Truck Expense (630); Utilities Expense (640) and Advertising Expense (650). Post journal entries from Part 1 to the T accounts and calculate the account balance for each account. Prepare a trial balance as of the end of this month’s…

Attachments:

accounting homework 495111

Please follow the same instructions mentioned inside homework file

Document Preview:

Arab Open University B321: TMA – 1st Semester 2013-2014 Cut-Off Date: 6th of December 2013 About TMA: The TMA covers the management accounting concepts and practices in the businesses. It is marked out of 100 and is worth 20% of the overall assessment component. It is intended to assess students’ understanding of some of the learning points within Sessions 1, 3, 6, 8, and 9 beside the supplementary material. This TMA requires you to apply the course concepts. The TMA is intended to: Assess students’ understanding of key learning points within Sessions 1, 3, 6, 8, and 9. Increase the students’ knowledge about the reality of the Managerial Accounting as a profession. Develop students’ communication skills, such as memo writing, essay writing, analysis and presentation of material. Develop the ability to understand and interact with the nature of the managerial accounting tools in reality. Develop basic ICT skills such as using the internet. The TMA: This TMA is based around two cases of “Capital budgeting” and “Transfer pricing”. Marks will be awarded for blending the context of each case and with relevant theory by means of your own interpretation. In addition to this, some research is required. The TMA requires you to: Review various study sessions beside the supplementary materials. Conduct a simple information search using the internet. Present your findings in not more than 1400 words ± 10% (630 words for part A and 770 for part B). You should use a Microsoft Office Word and Times New Roman Font of 12 points. You should read and follow the instructions below carefully. Each part of the process will carry marks for the assignment. Criteria for Grade Distribution: Criteria?Content?Referencing& e-library ?Structure and Presentation of ideas?Total marks???Part A?Part B?????Marks?40?60?(10)?(10)?100?? The TMA Questions PART A: Capital Budgeting – Zenobia Case Study Zenobia is a developing country situated on the coast of Africa. Its government, now…

accounting homework 495112

There are three business ownership types: (1) proprietorship, (2) partnership, and (3) corporation. Many of their accounting transactions are similar. However, there are some business events that require special transaction handling in accounting entries. In this assignment, you will identify and prepare entries for the corporate ownership business type. Instructions For this assignment, use the BUS3061 Assignment u04a3 Template (listed in Resources). Imagine you are an accountant for J. Malone’s Law Firm, Inc. The accounts and transactions of the firm are listed below.

Document Preview:

Although many small businesses might operate on a cash basis, most of the larger ones use the accrual basis to record business events in the general journal. In this assignment, you will apply your knowledge of various business events that require journal entries to be made. Instructions For this assignment, use the BUS3061 Assignment u04a1 Template (listed in Resources). Accounts to be used are given below: Cash. Prepaid insurance. Land. Buildings. Equipment. Accounts payable. Unearned service revenue. Owner’s capital. Owner’s drawings. Service revenue. Advertising expense. Salaries and wages expense. Each of the following business events for Magnolia Greens Frisbee Golf Course will require a journal entry: May 1: Invested $20,000 cash in the golf course business. May 3: Purchased Hampstead Golf Land for $15,000 cash. The price includes land $12,000, shed $2,000, and equipment $1,000. May 5: Paid advertising expenses of $700. May 6: Paid cash $600 for a 1-year insurance policy. May 10: Purchased golf discs and other equipment for $1,050 from Discs Are Us, payable in 30 days. May 18: Received $1,100 in cash for golf fees earned (service revenue). May 19: Sold 150 coupon books for $10 each. Each book contains four coupons that enable the holder to play one round of golf. May 25: Withdrew $800 cash for personal use. May 30: Pay salaries for part-time employees $250. May 30: Paid Discs Are Us the full amount due. May 31: Received $2,100 cash for fees earned. BUS3061 Fundamentals of Accounting Instructions Accounts to be used: Cash. Prepaid insurance. Land. Buildings. Equipment. Accounts payable. Unearned service revenue. Owner’s capital. Owner’s drawings. Service revenue. Advertising expense. Salaries and wages expense. Leave a space between each dated transaction. May 1?Invested $20,000 cash in the golf course business.??May 3?Purchased Hampstead Golf Land for $15,000 cash. The price includes land $12,000, shed $2,000, and equipment $1,000.??May 5?Paid…

Attachments:

accounting homework 495113

I ATTACHED ; THE QUESTIONS IN A FILE I NEED THE ANSWERS

Document Preview:

Print by: Sadu Singh FUNDAMENTALS OF ACCOUNTING II: 352923 /Project *Problem 13-2A The comparative statements of Lucille Company are presented here. LUCILLE COMPANY Income Statements For the Years Ended December 31 2012 2011 Net sales $1,893,173 $1,753,133 Cost of goods sold 1,061,173 1,008,633 Gross profit 832,000 744,500 Selling and administrative expenses 502,633 481,633 Income from operations 329,367 262,867 Other expenses and losses Interest expense 23,833 21,833 Income before income taxes 305,534 241,034 Income tax expense 93,833 74,833 Net income $ 211,701 $ 166,201 LUCILLE COMPANY Balance Sheets December 31 Assets 2012 2011 Current assets Cash $ 60,100 $ 64,200 Short-term investments 74,000 50,000 Accounts receivable 120,433 105,433 Inventory 127,833 117,333 Total current assets 382,366 336,966 Plant assets (net) 660,933 532,233 Total assets $1,043,299 $869,199 Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity Current liabilities Accounts payable $ 162,633 $148,033 Income taxes payable 45,333 43,833 Total current liabilities 207,966 191,866 Bonds payable 231,933 211,933 Total liabilities 439,899 403,799 Stockholders’ equity Common stock ($5 par) 290,000 300,000 Retained earnings 313,400 165,400 Total stockholders’ equity 603,400 465,400 Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $1,043,299 $869,199 All sales were on account. Net cash provided by operating activities for 2012 was $230,640. Capital expenditures Question Attempts: 0 of 2 used were $135,520, and cash dividends were $63,701. Compute the following ratios for 2012. (Round all answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.83 or 12.61%.) (a) Earnings per share $ (b) Return on common stockholders’ equity % (c) Return on assets % (d) Current ratio :1 (e) Receivables turnover times (f) Average collection period days (g) Inventory turnover times (h) Days in inventory days (i) Times interest earned times (j) Asset turnover times (k) Debt to total assets % (l) Current cash debt coverage times (m) Cash debt coverage times (n)…

accounting homework 495114

Resources: Ch. 11 & 12 of Financial Accounting

Complete Exercises E11-15, E12-1, & E12-2.

Complete Problem 11-6A.

Submit as a Microsoft Excel Document

needs an A

Document Preview:

568 Chapter Investments After studying this chapter, you should be able to: 1 Discuss why corporations invest in debt and stock securities. 2 Explain the accounting for debt investments. 3 Explain the accounting for stock investments. 4 Describe the use of consolidated financial statements. 5 Indicate how debt and stock investments are reported in financial statements. 6 Distinguish between short-term and long-term investments. S T U D Y O B J E C T I V E S Feature Story ?The Navigator 12“IS THERE ANYTHING ELSE WE CAN BUY?” In a rapidly changing world you must change rapidly or suffer the consequences. In business, change requires investment. A case in point is found in the entertainment industry. Technology is bringing about innovations so quickly that it is nearly impossible to guess which technologies will last and which will soon fade away. For example, will both satellite TV and cable TV survive, or will just one succeed, or will both be replaced by something else? Or consider the publishing industry. Will paper newspapers and magazines be replaced by online news via the World Wide Web? If you are a publisher, you have to make your best guess about what the future holds and invest accordingly. Time Warner, Inc. (www.timewarner.com) lives at the center of this arena. It is not an environment for the timid, and Time Warner’s philosophy is anything Scan Study Objectives ¦ Read Feature Story ¦ Read Preview ¦ Read text and answer p. 573 ¦ p. 578 ¦ p. 581 ¦ p. 584 ¦ Work Comprehensive p. 587 ¦ Review Summary of Study Objectives ¦ Answer Self-Study Questions ¦ Complete Assignments ¦ ?The Navigator Do it! Do it! JWCL165_c12_568-611.qxd 8/12/09 8:29 AM Page 568 569 but that. It might be characterized as, “If we can’t beat you, we will buy you.” Its mantra is “invest, invest, invest.” A list of Time Warner’s holdings gives an idea of its reach. Magazines: People, Time, Life, Sports Illustrated, and Fortune. Book publishers: Time-Life Books, Bookof-the-Month Club,…

accounting homework accountsguru 495115

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Homework Questions The following is a list of various cash payments and cash receipts: Cash paid to suppliers and employees $400,000 Dividends paid 18,000 Interest paid 12,000 Purchase of plant assets 45,000 Interest and dividends received 17,000 Payments to settle short-term debt 29,000 Income taxes paid 23,000 Cash received from customers 601,000 Based only on the above items, net cash flows from operating activities are: $138,000 $91,000 $183,000 $120,000 Where is the change in cash shown on the statement of cash flows? In the top part, before the operating activities section In one of the operating, investing, or financing activities sections In the bottom part, following the financing activities section None of the above On March 1, Jumper Products (a U.S. firm) purchased manufacturing inputs from a Mexican supplier for 20,000 pesos payable on June 1. The exchange rate for pesos on March 1 was $0.17. If the exchange rate increases to $0.19 on June 1, what amount of gain or loss would be reported by Jumper related to the currency exchange? $400 gain $200 loss $400 loss $200 gain Schoomer Corp. paid $200,000 to purchase 30 percent of the stock of Shape, Inc. this year. At the end of the year, Shape reported net income of $50,000 and declared and paid dividends of $20,000. If Schoomer uses the equity method to account for its investment in Shape, at what amount would the investment be reported at the end of the year? $200,000 $209,000 $215,000 $221,000 During the current year, Winter…

Attachments:

accounting homework assignment has to be done on excel or word on or the other not b 495117

CASE #1: Sophia Wise Computer Sales is a merchandiser and purchases its products directly from manufacturers. In turn, it sells those products to its various customers. One of its customers is Hillary Zabkar Electronics. The following transactions took place between Sophia Wise (seller) and its customer, Hillary Zabkar Electronics during the month of December:

Dec 1

Sold merchandise to Hillary Zabkar on credit for $5,000, terms 3/10, n/30. The items sold had a cost of $3,500

Dec 3

Purchased merchandise from a manufacturer for cash, $720.

Dec 4

Purchased merchandise from a manufacturer on credit for $2,600, terms 1/20, n/30.

Dec 5

Issued a credit memorandum for $300 to its customer Hillary Zabkar Electronics who returned merchandise purchased Nov 29th. The returned items had a cost of $210

Dec 11

Received payment for merchandise sold Dec 1

Dec 15

Received a credit memorandum from a manufacturer for the return of faulty merchandise purchased on Dec 4 for $600.

Dec 18

Paid freight charges of $200 for merchandise ordered last month (FOB shipping point)

Dec 23

Paid for the merchandise purchased Dec 4 less the portion that was returned

Dec 24

Sold merchandise to Hillary Zabkar on credit for $7,000, terms 2/10, n/30. The items had a cost of $4,900

Dec 31

Received payment for merchandise sold on Dec 24

Problem #1

Assuming a perpetual inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Sophia Wise Computer Sales must make to record these transactions:

Problem #2

Assuming a periodic inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Sophia Wise Computer Sales must make to record these transactions:

Problem #3

Assuming a perpetual inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Hillary Zabkar Electronics must make to record these transactions:

Problem #4

Assuming a periodic inventory system, prepare the required journal entries that Hillary Zabkar Electronics must make to record these transactions:

CASE #2::

Sarah Perreault Corp. sold 6,400 units of its product at $45 per unit in year 2013 and incurred operating expenses of $6 per unit in selling them. It began the year with 600 units in inventory and the following transactions took place during the fiscal year:

DATE

ACTIVITY

UNITS

PRICE

Jan 1

Beginning inventory

600

$18 per unit

Feb 20

Purchase

1,500

$19 per unit

May 16

Purchase

700

$20 per unit

Oct 3

Purchase

400

$21 per unit

Dec 11

Purchase

3,300

$22 per unit

Feb 22

Sale

750

$45 per unit

May 15

Sale

890

$45 per unit

Sep 11

Sale

775

$45 per unit

Dec 28

Sale

3,985

$45 per unit

Problem #1

Prepare comparative income statements similar to the ones found in your text at Exhibit 6.8 for the three inventory cost flow methods of FIFO, LIFO and weighted average. The company uses a perpetual inventory system and its income tax rate is 30%.

In calculating cost of sales, be sure to demonstrate the flow of inventory during the year and prove your ending inventory amount by using the inventory cost formula (BI + Purchases = GA EI = CGS).

Problem #2

Discuss in 500 words or less how the financial results from using the three alternative methods would change if Sarah Perreault had been experiencing declining costs in its purchases of inventory?

Problem #3

What advantages and disadvantages are offered by using LIFO and FIFO? Assume the continuing trend of increasing costs.

Attachments:

accounting homework attached need to show work 495118

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

BUS3061 – Fundamental Accounting Principles?U02a1 Template Instructions: Using the following designations for balance sheet categories, place the designator in the column next to the account title. (CA) – Current Asset (LTA) – Long-term Asset (CL) – Current Liability (LTL) – Long-term Liability (EQ) – Equity Account Title?Balance Sheet Category??Accounts Payable???Equipment???Prepaid rent???Short-term investments???Accounts receivable???Land???Common stock???Cash???Accumulated depreciation???Goodwill???Bonds payable???Retained earnings???Preferred stock???Mortgage payable???Salaries payable???Allowance for uncollectibles???Inventories???Patent???Income tax payable???Short-term security deposits???

Attachments:

accounting homework for best tutor 495119

Chapter 7 Assignment

Must be in Microsoft Word.

Please see attached.

Document Preview:

Your friend, Wendy Geiger, owns a small retail store that sells candies and nuts. Geiger acquires her goods from a few select vendors. She generally makes purchase orders by phone and on credit. Sales are primarily for cash. Geiger keeps her own manual accounting system using a general journal and a general ledger. At the end of each business day, she records one summary entry for cash sales. Geiger recently began offering items in creative gift packages. This has increased sales substantially, and she is now receiving orders from corporate and other clients who order large quantities and prefer to buy on credit. As a result of increased credit transactions in both purchases and sales, keeping the accounting records has become extremely time consuming. Geiger wants to continue to maintain her own manual system and calls you for advice. Required: In Microsoft Word write a memo to her advising how she might modify her current manual accounting system to accommodate the expanded business activities. Geiger is accustomed to checking her ledger by using a trial balance. Your memo should explain the advantages of what you propose and of any other verification techniques you recommend.

Attachments:

accounting homework for healthcare finance class 495121

Please answer all 3 questions fully!

Document Preview:

3.????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting homework help 495122

Department of Business Administration and Accounting BU 216 Finance – Fall 2013 Shareholder Equity Problem (5 “Assigned Work” points) Due Date and Time Assignments are to be turned in at my office (JEM 169A) by 11:00 am on Tuesday Sept 10th. No late assignments will be accepted. Requirements This assignment is to be done individually. No two student deliverables should be the same or even highly similar. This assignment is to be written out neatly by hand (not using a computer software program, not even Word or Excel).

Document Preview:

Department of Business Administration and Accounting BU 216 Finance – Fall 2013 Shareholder Equity Problem (5 “Assigned Work” points) Due Date and Time Assignments are to be turned in at my office (JEM 169A) by 11:00 am on Tuesday Sept 10th. No late assignments will be accepted. Requirements This assignment is to be done individually. No two student deliverables should be the same or even highly similar. This assignment is to be written out neatly by hand (not using a computer software program, not even Word or Excel). Points will be deducted for work that is not written out by hand or not easy to follow. Only hard copy deliverables will be accepted. Electronic submissions will not be accepted. Assignments are to be stapled. Points will be deducted for assignments in binders, having paper clips or folded corners, etc. Assignment Which of the following events are consistent with a change in Shareholder Equity from $50,000 in 2011 to $80,000 in 2012? Be sure to numerically justify your answers. Net income was $30,000 and $10,000 in dividends was paid. Net income was $50,000, stock was repurchased for $10,000, and $10,000 in dividends was paid. Net loss was ($20,000) and stock was sold for $50,000. Net income was $60,000, stock was sold for $10,000 and $40,000 in dividends was paid. Net income was $0, stock was issued for $45,000, and $10,000 in dividends was paid.

Attachments:

accounting homework help 495123

I will need this completed by 11/21/2013 please

Document Preview:

NT1310: Project PROJECT DESCRIPTION As the project manager for the Cable Planning team, you will manage the creation of the cable plan for the new building that will be built, with construction set to begin in six weeks. The deliverables for the entire Cable Plan will consist of an Executive Summary, a PowerPoint Presentation and an Excel Spreadsheet. You will develop different parts of each of these in three parts. The final organization should contain these elements: The Executive Summary: o Project Introduction o Standards and Codes ? Cable Standards and Codes ? Building Standards and Codes o Project Materials o Copper Cable, Tools, and Test Equipment o Fiber-Optic Cable, Tools, and Test Equipment o Fiber-Optic Design Considerations o Basement Server Complex Design o First Floor Design o Security and Safety o Component Cost, Picture, and source The Excel Spreadsheet: Component Names Component Descriptions Component Costs Total Project Costs The PowerPoint Presentation: Introductory Slide Component Slides with Component Name, Quantity Needed, Description, Price, Picture, and Reference (where to buy the component) Description of the Basement Telecommunications and Network Server Space Network Equipment Required for the Server Farm Cable Plant Design for the Basement Page 1NT1310: Project Standard Floor Design for Computers and Network Equipment Cable Plant for the Standard Floor Course Objectives Tested: 1. Distinguish between bandwidth, frequency, and data rate in a data network 2. Explain the importance of codes, standards, and specifications. 3. Compare and contrast network topologies 4. Describe the characteristics of different copper cables 5. Explain the purpose of network tools 6. Compare and contrast fiber-optic and copper transmission 7. Differentiate between twisted-pair cable connectors, coaxial cable connectors, and fiber-optic cable connectors 8. Construct a network based on…

accounting homework problem 495125

Part III
ABC company has the opportunity to accept one of two jobs; it cannot accept both because they must be performed at the same time and ABC does not have the necessary labor force for both jobs. Indeed, it will be necessary to hire a new supervisor if either job is accepted. Furthermore, additional insurance will be required if either job is accepted. The revenue and costs associated with each job follow.

Cost Category

Job A

Job B

Contract price

$

808,000

$

691,000

Unit-level materials

244,800

225,150

Unit-level labor

250,450

306,600

Unit-level overhead

18,100

14,400

Supervisor s salary

115,670

115,670

Rental equipment costs

25,800

28,400

Depreciation on tools (zero market value)

20,900

20,900

Allocated portion of companywide facility-sustaining costs

11,000

8,900

Insurance cost for job

17,600

17,600


Required:

a-1.

Calculate the contribution to profit from Job A and Job B.

a-2.

Assume that ABC has decided to accept one of the two jobs. Recommend which job to accept?

b-1.

Assume that Job A is no longer available. ABC s choice is to accept or reject Job B alone. Calculate the contribution to profit from Job B.

b-2.

Based on your answer to requirement b-1, recommend whether to accept or reject Job B.

Part IV
Seymour Chemical Company makes a variety of cosmetic products, one of which is a skin cream designed to reduce the signs of aging. Seymour produces a relatively small amount (14,000 units) of the cream and is considering the purchase of the product from an outside supplier for $5.70 each. If Seymour purchases from the outside supplier, it would continue to sell and distribute the cream under its own brand name. Seymour s accountant constructed the following profitability analysis.

Revenue (14,000 units $14.0)

$

196,000

Unit-level materials costs (14,000 units $1.70)

(23,800

)

Unit-level labor costs (14,000 units $.60)

(8,400

)

Unit-level overhead costs (14,000 $.40)

(5,600

)

Unit-level selling expenses (14,000 $.20)

(2,800

)




Contribution margin

155,400

Skin cream production supervisor s salary

(57,000

)

Allocated portion of facility-level costs

(13,900

)

Product-level advertising cost

(46,000

)




Contribution to companywide income

$

38,500








Required:

a.

Calculate the total avoidable costs.

b-1.

Calculate the total avoidable cost per unit.

b-2.

Should Seymour continue to make the product or buy it from the supplier?

c-1.

Suppose that Seymour is able to increase sales by 10,000 units (sales will increase to 24,000 units). Calculate the total avoidable costs.

c-2.

At this level of production, should Seymour make or buy the cream?

Attachments:

accounting help 495078

can someone do this same thing but in terms of another company. walmart as the company to be specific. Just look up the same things with this document but using walmart instead

24 hrs due time 🙂

Document Preview:

INDUSTRY: PHARMACEUTICAL AND MEDICAL EQUIPMENT COMPANY: JOHNSON AND JOHNSON GENERAL INFORMATION Johnson and Johnson (NYSE: JNJ) is an American multinational medical devices, pharmaceutical and consumer packaged goods manufacturer founded in 1886. Consistently ranks at the top of Harris interactive National Corporate reputation survey, ranking as the world’s most company. Headquarters is in New Brunswick, New Jersey with the consumer division being located in Skillman, New Jersey. It includes 250 subsidiary companies with operations in over 57 countries and products sold In over175 countries. Johnson and Johnson had worldwide pharmaceutical sales of $ 65 billion for the calendar of 2011. Johnson and Johnson brands include numerous household names of medications and first aid supplies. Among its well known consumer products are the Brand Aid, Brand line of bandages, Tylenol medications, Johnson baby products, Neutrogena skin and beauty products, clean and clear facial wash and Acuvue contact lenses. FINANCING AND LIQUIDITY Liabilities and shareholders Dec 30 2012 Dec 31 2011 Dec 31 2010 Dec 31 2009 Debt 32259 33753 23257 22363 Equity 64826 57080 56579 50588 The data shows that equity is the major source of financing since it has been twice the value of debt financing. Dec 30 2012 Dec 31 2011 Dec 31 2010 Dec 31 2009 Current ratio 1.90 2.38 2.05 1.82 Quick ratio 1.34 1.88 1.62 1.34 Cash ratio 0.87 1.41 1.20 0.89 Johnson and Johnson’s liquidity improved from 2010 to 2011 but then deteriorated significantly from 2011 to 2012. COMPANY’S PERFORMANCE AND PROFITABILITY Accounts receivable turnover Dec 30 2012 Dec 31 2011 Dec 31 2010 Dec 31 31 2009 Sales to customers 67224 65050 61587 61897 Accounts receivable Less allowances for bad 11309 10581 9774 9646 And doubtful debts accounts This measures how efficiently a company performs day-to-day tasks, such as the collection off receivables and management of inventory Over the past few years the…

Attachments:

accounting help 495081

question 2,3,4, 6 & 7. by Sunday 5pm 26th May 2013

Document Preview:

Week Two Exercise Assignment Revenue and Expenses 1. Recognition of concepts. Ron Carroll operates a small company that books entertainers for theaters, parties, conventions, and so forth. The company’s fiscal year ends on June 30. Consider the following items and classify each as either (1) prepaid expense, (2) unearned revenue, (3) accrued expense, (4) accrued revenue, or (5) none of the foregoing. a. Amounts paid on June 30 for a 1-year insurance policy. b. Professional fees earned but not billed as of June 30. c. Repairs to the firm’s copy machine, incurred and paid in June. d. An advance payment from a client for a performance next month at a convention. e. The payment in part (d) from the client’s point of view. f. Interest owed on the company’s bank loan, to be paid in early July. g. The bank loan payable in part (f). h. Office supplies on hand at year-end. 2. Understanding the closing process. Examine the following list of accounts: Interest Payable Accumulated Depreciation: Equipment Alex Kenzy, Drawing Accounts Payable Service Revenue Cash Accounts Receivable Supplies Expense Interest Expense Which of the preceding accounts a. appear on a post-closing trial balance? b. are commonly known as temporary, or nominal, accounts? c. generate a debit to Income Summary in the closing process? d. are closed to the capital account in the closing process? 3. Adjusting entries and financial statements. The following information pertains to Fixation Enterprises: The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one third of this amount had been earned. Fixation provided $2,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31. Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,650. The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period….

Attachments:

accounting help 495082

Hi

I need help with accounting. I you are good please contact me.

Thanks

Document Preview:

Chapter Introduction to Information Systems 1 [ LEARNING OBJECTIVES ] [ CHAPTER OUTLINE ] [ WEB RESOURCES ] 1. Begin the process of becoming an informed user of your organization’s information systems. 2. Defi ne the terms data, information, and knowledge, and give examples of each. 3. Defi ne the terms information technology, information system, computer-based information system, and application. 4. Identify three ways in which you depend on information technology in your daily life. 5. Discuss three ways in which information technology can impact managers and three ways in which it can impact nonmanagerial workers. 6. List three positive and three negative societal effects of the increased use of information technology. Student Companion Site wiley.com/college/rainer • Student PowerPoints for note taking • Interactive Case: Ruby’s Club Assignments • Complete glossary WileyPlus All of the above and • E-book • Mini-lecture by author for each chapter section • Practice quizzes • Flash Cards for vocabulary review • Additional “What’s in IT for Me?” cases • Video interviews with managers • Lab Manual for Microsoft Offi ce 2010 • How-to Animations for Microsoft Offi ce 2010 1.1 Why Should I Study Information Systems? 1.2 Overview of Computer-Based Information Systems 1.3 How Does IT Impact Organizations? 1.4 Importance of Information Systems to Society ACCT FIN MKT POM HR MIS Forecast revenues Determine best sources for funds Process customer orders Hire new employees Directly support all functional areas Develop new goods and services What’s In ITFor Me? T H I S C H A P T E R W I L L H E L P P R E PA R E YO U TO . . . 3 4 CHAPTER 1 Introduction to Information Systems [ Revolution!] The Problem In January 2011, the Arab world’s fi rst successful popular uprising, called the Jasmine Revolution (after the national fl ower of Tunisia), erupted in Tunisia when a small-town policewoman slapped a fruit seller named Mohammed Bouazizi and ordered him to pack up his street…

Attachments:

accounting help 495083

the assignment is attached I need it done in 24 hours, thank you.

Document Preview:

Cogg Hill Camping Equipment Company Practice Set For Use with Fundamental Accounting Principles 20th Edition Wild, Larson & Chiappetta Prepared by Leland Mansuetti Introduction The Cogg Hill Camping Equipment Company sells and rents camping equipment from its store in Denver, Colorado. It is a sole proprietorship and is owned and operated by Samuel Stephens. The company sells camping equipment and outdoor clothing. Cogg Hill maintains a perpetual inventory system. The company also rents tents and groups of assorted camping equipment (e.g., Type A, B, and C) to trail guides. The terms of all sales and all rentals are “net 30.” The company delivers the equipment to many of its customers. Some customers pick it up at the store. Mr. Stephens makes all deposits. He removes the cash from the cash register and lists all checks received on a deposit ticket. He then gives the duplicate deposit slip to you for recording. The company’s accounting system includes: Journals?Ledgers??Sales Journal?General Ledger??Purchases Journal?Accounts Receivable Subsidiary Ledger??Cash Receipts Journal?Accounts Payable Subsidiary Ledger??Cash Disbursements Journal???General Journal???The accounting files include: Name of File?Business Papers to be Filed??Sales and Rental Invoices?Bookkeeper’s copy of sales invoices Bookkeeper’s copy of rental invoices??Purchase Invoices?Purchase invoices and credit memorandums??Interoffice Memoranda?Interoffice memoranda received from Mr. Stephens??Checks to be signed?Checks prepared for Mr. Stephens??Duplicate Deposit Tickets?Bookkeeper’s copy of deposit tickets?? The post-closing trial balance of the Cogg Hill Camping Equipment Company, as of May 31, was as follows: ?Cash?$?21,567.81?????Accounts Receivable?11,492.00?????Allowance for Doubtful Accounts???$?379.35???Interest Receivable?56.00?????Notes Receivable – Emory Co.?9,870.40?????(6-month, 8%, due August 15)??????Merchandise Inventory?174,985.00?????Office Supplies?557.05?????Store…

Attachments:

accounting help 495084

Help with accounting, serious inquires, guarantee an A or money back and know Accounting very well. 24 hours to complete

Document Preview:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 11/12/2011 125 101 9500 9500 11/17/2011 126 102 22000 22000 11/21/2011 101 -400 400 11/24/2011 127 104 3800 3800 34900 400 35300 12/3/2011 128 104 11000 11000 12/9/2011 129 101 4000 4000 12/10/2012 130 102 2400 2400 17400 0 17400 11/23/2011 21560 440 102 22000 11/29/2011 9100 101 9100 30660 440 31100 12/5/2011 3800 103 3800 12/13/2011 10780 220 104 11000 14580 220 14800 0 0 11/19/2011 24556 6500 201 6500 11/28/2011 39778 2000 202 2000 8500 8500 12/7/2011 1123 40300 350 203 350 12/9/2012 24577 3500 210 3500 12/12/2012 39804 4100 202 4100 7600 350 7950 0 11/18/2011 1055 200 40800 200 11/21/2011 1056 500 40100 500 11/23/2011 1057 130 40900 130 11/25/2011 1058 250 40900 250 11/29/2011 1059 95 40900 95 11/30/2011 1175 1175 12/3/2011 1062 6500 201 6500 12/5/2011 1063 1960 40 202 2000 12/7/2011 1064 350 203 350 8810 40 8850 0 0 10/31/2011 35500 10/31/2011 950 10/31/2011 124250 10/31/2011 5000 11/30/2011 30660 66160 11/30/2011 8500 9450 11/30/2011 35300 159550 11/30/2011 500 5500 11/30/2011 1175 64985 64985 9450 159550 5500 10/31/2011 3500 10/31/2011 0 10/31/2011 4100 10/31/2011 7900 11/30/2011 34900 38400 11/30/2011 400 4500 11/30/2011 31100 7300 7300 0 4500 7900 10/31/2011 4300 10/31/2011 335 10/31/2011 6300 10/31/2011 7800 11/30/2011 11/30/2011 440 6740 4300 335 6740 7800 10/31/2011 69000 10/31/2011 289 10/31/2011 0 10/31/2011 0 11/30/2011 275 564 69000 564 0 0 10/31/2011 100000 10/31/2011 45000 10/31/2011 66000 10/31/2011 19900 11/30/2011 8500 74500 11/30/2011 16000 35900 100000 45000 74500 35900 10/31/2011 0 10/31/2011 0 10/31/2011 3300 10/31/2011 4400 0 3300 4400 10/31/2011 39326 10/31/2011 6600 10/31/2011 0 39326 6600 0 10/31/2011 2900 10/31/2011 2000 11/30/2011 200 2200 2900 2200 10/31/2011 4800 11/30/2011 475 5275 5275 201 10/31/2011 950 950 11/19/2012 6500 7450 12/9/2012 35…

Attachments:

accounting help accountingexpert only 495085

The first 60 questions are multiple choice. 1-20, 1-20 then again 1-20. Some scratch paper might be needed. A quick breeze likley for most with experience.

The last very 15 questions are more in depth questions to be awnsered.

Time Frame: around May 29th but can be extended to June 7th with out issue. I will be working on this as well. I just want to be sure I am right with my awnsers after I complete it. The last 15 will gurantee me that I am understanding what I am learning.

Attachments:

accounting help from accountsguru 495086

  • Check Figures for Accounting Project:

    Cash Receipts Journal; Cash Column: 90,411

    Unadjusted Trial Balance Total:1,075,455

    Net Income:254,829

    Post Closing Trial Balance:355,756

Document Preview:

Foundations of Accounting I Accounting Project Karen Pitsch Alli Co. is a merchandising business. The account balances for Alli Co. as of November 30, 2012 (unless otherwise indicated), are as follows: 110 Cash $ 73,920 112 Accounts Receivable 37,875 113 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 3,500 115 Merchandise Inventory 133,900 116 Prepaid Insurance 3,750 117 Store Supplies 2,850 123 Store Equipment 100,800 124 Accumulated Depreciation-Store Equipment 20,160 210 Accounts Payable 21,450 211 Salaries Payable 0 218 Interest Payable 0 220 Note Payable (Due 2017) 10,000 310 P. Williams, Capital (January 1, 2012) 89,510 311 P. Williams, Drawing 40,000 312 Income Summary 0 410 Sales 853,040 411 Sales Returns and Allowances 20,600 412 Sales Discounts 13,200 510 Cost of Merchandise Sold 414,575 520 Sales Salaries Expense 74,400 521 Advertising Expense 18,000 522 Depreciation Expense 0 523 Store Supplies Expense 0 529 Miscellaneous Selling Expense 2,800 530 Office Salaries Expense 40,500 531 Rent Expense 18,600 532 Insurance Expense 0 533 Bad Debt Expense 0 539 Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 1,650 550 Interest Expense 240 Alli Co. uses the perpetual inventory system and the last-in, first-out costing method. Transportation-in and purchase discounts should be added to the Inventory Control Sheet, but since this will complicate the computation of the Last-in, first-out costing method, please ignore this step in the process. They also use the Allowance Method for bad debt. The Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary Ledgers along with the Inventory Control Sheet should be updated as each transaction affects them (daily). Alli Co. sells four types of television…

accounting help with checkpoints and final paper 495088

I need help with a checkpoint for week 7 and discussion and final paper for week 9 .All required work is highlighted in the attached document.

Document Preview:

Course Syllabus Axia College/School of Business XACC/280 Version 2 Financial Accounting Concepts and Principles Copyright © 2010, 2009 by University of Phoenix. All rights reserved. Course Description This course covers the fundamentals of financial accounting as well as the identification, measurement, and reporting of the financial effects of economic events on the enterprise. Financial information is examined from the perspective of effective management decision making with special emphasis on the planning and controlling responsibilities of practicing managers. Policies Faculty and students/learners will be held responsible for understanding and adhering to all policies contained within the following two documents: University https://ecampus.phoenix.edu/secure/aapd/policies/policies: You must be logged into the student website to view this document. Instructor policies: This document is posted in the Course Materials forum. University policies are subject to change. Be sure to read the policies at the beginning of each class. Policies may be slightly different depending on the modality in which you attend class. If you have recently changed modalities, read the policies governing your current class modality. Course Materials Weygandt, J. J., Kimmel, P. D., & Kieso, D. E. (2008). Financial accounting (6th ed.). Hoboken, NJ: Wiley. All electronic materials are available on the student website. Week One: Basic Accounting Principles and Concepts Details Due Points Objectives Describe financial accounting and the users of accounting data. Identify the basic assumptions, principles, and constraints of accounting. Explain the purposes of the four types of financial statements. Explain the function of each element in the accounting equation. For all due dates see calendar at end of syllabus Course Preparation Read the course description and objectives. Read the instructor’s biography and post your own. Readings Read Appendix A regarding…

Attachments:

accounting help ethic cases 495089

WRITTEN ETHICS CASE ASSIGNMENT- 50 POINTS TOTAL

INSTRUCTIONS:

Each of your answers should be a paragraph, so you will have a total of six paragraphs for the two cases.

Chapter 1

OBJECTIVE OF THE ASSIGNMENT:

The purpose of this written assignment is to enable students to utilize their writing skills as good oral and written communication ability is a requirement for success in the business world. Technology is powerful but has often resulted in a societal deficiency in properly communicating in a written form. Leaders in the corporate world have told educators to emphasize writing throughout the curriculum so that students will get an opportunity to use this skill in all of their courses including those that are science and numbers oriented. Since ethical issues are of such importance to accountants your writing assignment is based on this topic. All of us have our own set of ethical standards so your paper will only be evaluated on its completeness and use of language, not whether or not I agree with you.

DUE DATE OF ASSIGNMENT:

This assignment must be turned in no later than the last day of class, Thursday December 12th, 2013. If you wish to E-mail the assignment, you may have until Friday December 13th 2013.

Attachments:

accounting help needed 495090

1. The cash budget is especially important to a firm when: ?A. there is not a lot of confidence in the sales forecast.?B. it has a relatively large amount of operating cash.?C. the P/E ratio has been trending downwards.?D. it may have to negotiate a short-term bank loan.   2. Which of the following costs are included in the cost classification that is based on the relationship between total cost and volume of activity? ?A. Variable cost and fixed cost.?B. Direct cost and indirect cost.?C. Product cost and period cost.?D. Committed cost and discretionary cost.   3.

Document Preview:

1. The cash budget is especially important to a firm when: ?A. there is not a lot of confidence in the sales forecast.?B. it has a relatively large amount of operating cash.?C. the P/E ratio has been trending downwards.?D. it may have to negotiate a short-term bank loan.   2. Which of the following costs are included in the cost classification that is based on the relationship between total cost and volume of activity? ?A. Variable cost and fixed cost.?B. Direct cost and indirect cost.?C. Product cost and period cost.?D. Committed cost and discretionary cost.   3. Which of the following costs are included in the cost classification that is based on the time frame perspective? ?A. Variable cost and fixed cost.?B. Direct cost and indirect cost.?C. Product cost and period cost.?D. Committed cost and discretionary cost.   4. A cost that is incurred because of a long-range policy decision is known as a: ?A. discretionary cost.?B. committed cost.?C. continuous cost.?D. standard cost.   ?5. Which of the following is not an important factor to consider when preparing a sales forecast? ?A. The state of the economy.?B. Seasonal demand variations.?C. A change in the management team.?D. Competitors’ actions.   ?6. Which of the following is a plan for acquiring the resources needed to complete the manufacturing activities that will satisfy the organization’s sales forecast? ?A. Sales budget?B. Raw materials budget?C. Production budget?D. Direct labor budget     7. Which of the following lists the components of the master budget in correct chronological order? ?A. Direct labor budget, production budget, cost of goods sold budget.?B. Sales budget, production budget, cash budget.?C. Sales budget, raw materials budget, production budget.?D. Cash budget, production budget, manufacturing overhead budget.   8. The raw materials budgeted to be purchased for the period is equal to: ?A. ending inventory + raw material used – beginning inventory.?B. ending inventory + ending inventory -…

Attachments:

accounting help urgently 495091

Can’t pay more than the mentioned amount pls..

Document Preview:

1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 000000 000000 1 1 2 2 3 12/31/2012 3 4 4 5 5 12/31/2012 6 6 7 7 41310 8 8 162457 9 9 8845 10 10 5578 11 11 208880 12 12 336870 13 13 84750 14 14 141000 15 15 40500 16 16 401250 17 17 241150 18 18 19860 19 19 150314 20 20 47754 21 21 93300 22 22 198600 23 23 488000 24 24 43920 25 25 170572 26 26 1442455 1442455 27 27 28 28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 33 33 34 34 35 35 36 36 37 37 38 38 39 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 43 43 44 44 45 45 46 46 47 47 48 48 49 49 50 50 51 51 000000 000000 1 1 2 2 2012 2011 3 3 4 4 28820 21310 5 5 74890 57740 6 6 220020 252520 7 7 8996 7006 8 8 332726 338576 9 9 10 10 598430 501650 11 11 12 12 152200 124780 13 13 446230 376870 14 14 778956 715446 15 15 16 16 123900 116000 17 17 46640 71650 18 18 27120 25990 19 19 197660 213640 20 20 21 21 70300 101650 22 22 267960 315290 23 23 24 24 370000 280000 25 25 140996 120156 510996 400156 778956 715446 1268450 715460 552990 251460 71450 27420 8824 359154 193836 48459 145377 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 000000 000000 Balance Sheet Assets Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity Statement of Cash Flows For the Year Ended May 31, 2012 Computations: Partial Statement of Cash Flows Income Statement (Partial) For the Year Ended December 31, 2012 Computation of income from cont. operations before taxes: Computation of income tax: Income Statement Debits Credits Cash Accounts Receivable Allowance for Doubtful Accounts Prepaid Insurance Inventory Equity Investments…

Attachments:

accounting home work nswer need to be corrected i need it within 15 hours 495092

Accounting home work nswer need to be corrected ( i need it within 15 hours)

Q in red color only needs to be corrected

i will pay 50 $ USD

Document Preview:

Arab Open University B321: TMA – 1st Semester 2013-2014 Cut-Off Date: 6th of December 2013 About TMA: .The TMA covers the management accounting concepts and practices in the businesses. It is marked out of 100 and is worth 20% of the overall assessment component. It is intended to assess students’ understanding of some of the learning points within Sessions 1, 3, 6, 8, and 9 beside the supplementary material. This TMA requires you to apply the course concepts. The TMA is intended to: Assess students’ understanding of key learning points within Sessions 1, 3, 6, 8, and 9. Increase the students’ knowledge about the reality of the Managerial Accounting as a profession. Develop students’ communication skills, such as memo writing, essay writing, analysis and presentation of material. Develop the ability to understand and interact with the nature of the managerial accounting tools in reality. Develop basic ICT skills such as using the internet. The TMA: This TMA is based around two cases of “Capital budgeting” and “Transfer pricing”. Marks will be awarded for blending the context of each case and with relevant theory by means of your own interpretation. In addition to this, some research is required. The TMA requires you to: Review various study sessions beside the supplementary materials. Conduct a simple information search using the internet. Present your findings in not more than 1400 words ± 10% (630 words for part A and 770 for part B). You should use a Microsoft Office Word and Times New Roman Font of 12 points. You should read and follow the instructions below carefully. Each part of the process will carry marks for the assignment. Criteria for Grade Distribution: Criteria?Content?Referencing& e-library ?Structure and Presentation of ideas?Total marks???Part A?Part B?????Marks?40?60?(10)?(10)?100?? The TMA Questions PART A: Capital Budgeting – Zenobia Case Study Zenobia is a developing country situated on the coast of Africa. Its government, now…

accounting homework 495093

I need help completing the entire attached documents please

Document Preview:

Project Part 1: The Accounting Cycle Karen Harris starts her own scooter retail business, City Rides, on December 1, 20×2. The business operates as a proprietorship from a rented space near a busy downtown area. Harris hires Jim Waters as the sales associate and assistant manager of the business. The following transactions take place during December 20×2. Transactions ??Dec. 1?Harris deposits $45,000 into the business bank account. In exchange, she receives capital in the proprietorship.?? FORMCHECKBOX ????1?Harris writes and mails check #001 for $2,400 for rent. The rent payment covers rent for the three months ended February 28, 20×2. ?? FORMCHECKBOX ????2?Harris purchases office equipment for $1,800 by check #002.?? FORMCHECKBOX ????2?Harris purchases office supplies for $420 by check #003. ?? FORMCHECKBOX ????2?Harris purchases 20 Model X mopeds at $500 each and 15 Model L mopeds at $800 each, costing a total of $22,000, on account from a supplier, Fun Brands: Harris elects to use the first-in-first-out (FIFO) method to account for inventory. Fun Brands provides an invoice with the following terms: 2/10 net 30.?? FORMCHECKBOX ????9?In the first week of operation, City Rides sells 16 Model X mopeds at $750 each: 10 are sold on account, and the rest are sold for cash.?? FORMCHECKBOX ????12?City Rides makes payment to Fun Brands in full settlement of accounts payable by check #004. Payment is net of the purchase discount. Hint: The terms are 2/10 net 30, and any purchase discount received reduces the cost of inventory.?? FORMCHECKBOX ????13?City Rides purchases 10 Model X mopeds from Fun Brands on account at a cost of $520 each.?? FORMCHECKBOX ????16?The sales for the week are as follows: 6 Model X mopeds sold on account for $750 each—inventory cost accounted using the FIFO method.?? FORMCHECKBOX ????18?Cash receipts from customers on accounts receivable are $7,100.?? FORMCHECKBOX ????30?Sales for the rest of December are as follows: 2 Model L mopeds sold for…

accounting homework 495094

This Bonus point project all you have to do is follow the steps in the Word Document.

Document Preview:

Assignment Shareholders’ Investment Cash Flows Financial Position Operations Instructions __PR1 __PR2 _1QFDEPS _1QPEPS _1QSTCKPRI _2QFDEPS _2QPEPS _2QSTCKPRI _3QFDEPS _3QPEPS _3QSTCKPRI _4QFDEPS _4QPEPS _4QSTCKPRI _PR1 _PR2 _PR3 _PR4 _PR5 _SCH3 _SCH5 _SCH6 _SCH7 _SO1 _SS1 Act_Tot ALLOC allocated_shares aprcs aprps augcs augps BORDER CFCST com_stk_equiv comments COVER_SHEET CSE deccs decps DET1Q DET2Q DET2QYTD DET3Q DET3QYTD DET4Q DET4QYTD EssLatest FEB EssOptions A1100000000131000000101100020_01000 fd_eps FDEPS febcs febps fut_grant_rec GOAL grant GRANTREC jan_cs jan_ps jancs janps julcs julps juncs junps LY marcs marps maycs mayps ni_adj novcs novps octcs octps Op_Exp PA_Depr PERFSHRS PFCST PR1_stamped PR1_stamped PR2_stamped PR2_stamped PR3_stamped PR4_stamped PR5_stamped QFRCOND QFRSUM SCH7_2Q schedule_3 sepcs sepps stock_opt_rec TRAIL12 VAR1Q VAR2Q VAR2QYTD VAR3Q VAR3QYTD VAR4Q VAR4QYTD wa_shrs wkly_prices 46. Compute the return on assets ratio (use net income rather than EBIT in the numerator) for fiscal years 2010 and 2009. 47. Compute the return on equity ratio for fiscal years 2010 and 2009. 49. What were Target’s basic earnings per share (EPS) for fiscal 2010 and 2009? Identify what caused the ratio to change. 50. What was your favorite lesson from ACCT 201? 48. For fiscal 2010, was the return on equity ratio greater than the return on assets ratio? 40. How many shares of treasury stock did the company have at the end of fiscal 2010 and 2009? Notes to the Financial Statements 41. How much is the estimated allowance for discounts and doubtful accounts for fiscal 2010? 42. What is the net realizable value of receivables at the end of fiscal 2010? 43. What inventory cost flow method does Target use? 44. What are the estimated useful lives of the company’s depreciable assets? 45. What method of depreciation does Target use? Performance…

accounting homework 495095

Instructions to Students: Please complete the 3 problems below in Excel Each question is worth 50 points. 1. Roadmaster Tire Co. manufactures automobile tires. Standard costs and actual costs for direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead incurred for the manufacture of 5,500 tires were as follows: Standard Costs Actual Costs Direct Materials 82,000 lbs. at $5.10 82,600 lbs. at $5.25 Direct Labor 1,650 hrs. at $17.50 1,620 hrs. at $17.40 Factory Overhead Rates per direct labor hr., based on 100% of normal capacity of 1,500 direct labor hrs.: Variable cost, $3.

Document Preview:

Instructions to Students: Please complete the 3 problems below in Excel Each question is worth 50 points. 1. Roadmaster Tire Co. manufactures automobile tires. Standard costs and actual costs for direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead incurred for the manufacture of 5,500 tires were as follows: Standard Costs Actual Costs Direct Materials 82,000 lbs. at $5.10 82,600 lbs. at $5.25 Direct Labor 1,650 hrs. at $17.50 1,620 hrs. at $17.40 Factory Overhead Rates per direct labor hr., based on 100% of normal capacity of 1,500 direct labor hrs.: Variable cost, $3.10 $5,000 variable cost Fixed cost, $4.90 $7,350 fixed cost Each tire requires 0.30 hours of direct labor. Determine a) The Direct materials price variance b) The Direct materials quantity variance c) Total direct materials cost variance d) The Direct Labor rate variance e) The Direct Labor time variance f) Total direct labor cost variance g) Variable Factory Overhead Controllable variance h) Fixed Factory Overhead volume variance i) Total Factory Overhead cost variance 2. The budget director of Hi Performance Athletic Co., with the assistance of the controller, treasurer, production manager, and sales manager, has gathered the following data for use in developing the budgeted income statement for January 2012: a. Estimated sales for January: Batting helmet 305 units at $70 per unit Football helmet 630 units at $135 per unit b. Estimated inventories at January 1: Direct Materials: Finished products: Plastic 80 lbs Batting helmet 35 units at $40 per unit Foam lining 60 lbs Football helmet 40 units at $60 per unit c. Desired inventories at January 31: Direct Materials: Finished products: Plastic 90 lbs Batting helmet 30 units at $40 per unit Foam lining 55 lbs Football helmet 50 units at $58 per unit d. Direct materials used in production: In manufacture of batting helmet: Plastic 1.20 lbs. per unit of product Foam lining 0.50 lb. per unit of product In manufacture of football helmet: …

Attachments:

determine the following measures for 2012 rounding to one decimal placc 495097

Determine the following measures for 2012, rounding to one decimal placc: 1. ‘Working capital 2. Current ratio 3. Quick ratio 4. Accounts receivable turnover 5. Number of days’ sales in receivables 6. Inventory turnover 7. Number of days’ sales in inventory 8. Ratio of fixed assets to long-term liabilities 9. Ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity 10. Number of times interest charges earned 11. Number of times preferred dividends earned 12. Ratio of net sales to assets 13. Rate earned on total assets 14. Rate earned on stockholders’ equity 15. Rate earned on common stockholders’ equity 16. Earnings per share on common stock 17. Price-earnings ratio 18. Dividends per share of common stock

Document Preview:

3008100 770000 2238100 3008100 770000 3.9 1843000 770000 2.4 9000000 572560 15.7 572560 24657.534246575342 23.2 4500000 961350 4.7 961350 12328.767123287671 78 6450020 2700000 2.4 3470000 6813120 0.5 1396000 309000 4.5 847000 30000 28.2 9000000 8346745 1.1000000000000001 1156000 9077995 0.127 847000 6479620 0.13100000000000001 817000 4979620 0.16400000000000001 817000 600000 1.36 25 1.36 18.399999999999999 150000 600000 0.25 0.25 25 0.01 Current Assets – Current Liabilities = Calculated Value 1. Working capital: Ratio Numerator ÷ Denominator 2. Current ratio 3. Quick ratio 4. Accounts receivable turnover 5. Number of days’ sales in receivables 6. Inventory turnover 7. sales in inventory 8. Ratio of fixed assets to long-term liabilities 9. Ratio of liabilities to stockholders’ equity 10. Number of times interest charges earned 11. preferred dividends earned 12. Ratio of net sales to assets 13. Rate earned on total 14. Rate earned on stock- holders’ equity 15. Rate earned on common 16. Earnings per share on common stock 17. Price-earnings ratio 18. Dividends per share of common stock 19. Dividend yield Enter a formula that averages the beginning and ending balances. Enter a formula that averages the beginning and ending balances. Enter a formula of net sales divided by 365 Enter a formula that averages the beginning and ending balances. Enter a formula that averages the beginning and ending balances. Enter a formula of cost of goods sold divided by 365 Enter a formula of income before income tax + interest charges. Enter a formula that determines average total assets (excluding long-term investments). Enter a formula of net income + interest charges. Enter a formula that determines average total assets. Enter a formula that determines average stockholders’ equity. Enter a formula of net income less preferred dividends. Enter a formula that determines average stockholders’ equity excluding preferred stock. Enter a…

accounting homework 495099

Accounting Basics for Managers Problem 1: Listed below are a number of financial statement captions. Indicate in the spaces to the right of each caption (1) the category of each item, and (2) the financial statement(s) on which the item can usually be found.       Problem 2: At the beginning of the current fiscal year, the balance sheet of Arches Co. showed liabilities of $380,000. During the year liabilities increased by $10,000, assets increased by $55,000, and paid-in capital increased $20,000 to $165,000. Dividends declared and paid during the year were $60,000.

Document Preview:

Accounting Basics for Managers Problem 1: Listed below are a number of financial statement captions. Indicate in the spaces to the right of each caption (1) the category of each item, and (2) the financial statement(s) on which the item can usually be found. ?    ?    Problem 2: At the beginning of the current fiscal year, the balance sheet of Arches Co. showed liabilities of $380,000. During the year liabilities increased by $10,000, assets increased by $55,000, and paid-in capital increased $20,000 to $165,000. Dividends declared and paid during the year were $60,000. At the end of the year, owners’ equity totaled $402,000. Calculate net income or loss for the year.    Problem 3: Using the column headings provided below, show the effect, if any, of the transaction entry or adjusting entry on the appropriate balance sheet category or on the income statement by entering the account name, amount, and indicating whether it is an addition (+) or subtraction (-). Column headings reflect the expanded balance sheet equation; items that affect net income should not be shown as affecting owners’ equity. ?(1.) The firm borrowed $2,000 from the bank; a short-term note was signed.?(2.) Merchandise inventory costing $750 was purchased; cash of $200 was paid and the balance is due in 30 days.?(3.) Employee wages of $1,000 were accrued at the end of the month.?(4.) Merchandise that cost $350 was sold for $450 in cash.?(5.) This month’s rent of $700 was paid.?(6.) Revenues from services during month totaled $6,500. Of this amount, $2,000 was received in cash and the balance is expected to be received within 30 days.?(7.) During the month, supplies were purchased at a cost of $520, and debited into the Supplies (asset) account. A total of $400 of supplies were used during the month.?(8.) Interest of $240 has been earned on a note receivable, but has not yet been received.     Problem 4: The following is a portion of the current assets section of the balance sheets…

Attachments:

accounting homework 495100

Case 2 – Financial Statement Analysis Case 20 points This case is designed to show you how the items we have discussed this semester would actually be reported in a company’s financial statements filed with the SEC. Use the 10-K Report for Hewlett Packard (you can locate the report at: http://h30261.www3.hp.com/phoenix.zhtml?c=71087&p=irol-irhome) to answer the questions below. You will need to use the entire report, including the Management Discussion and Analysis section as well as the footnotes and related disclosures. NOTE: DO NOT PRINT THE ENTIRE 10-K.

Document Preview:

Case 2 – Financial Statement Analysis Case 20 points This case is designed to show you how the items we have discussed this semester would actually be reported in a company’s financial statements filed with the SEC. Use the 10-K Report for Hewlett Packard (you can locate the report at: ? HYPERLINK “http://h30261.www3.hp.com/phoenix.zhtml?c=71087&p=irol-irhome” ?http://h30261.www3.hp.com/phoenix.zhtml?c=71087&p=irol-irhome?) to answer the questions below. You will need to use the entire report, including the Management Discussion and Analysis section as well as the footnotes and related disclosures. NOTE: DO NOT PRINT THE ENTIRE 10-K. The document is too big. Search through the document by reading in the appropriate locations for each question to be answered. Use the table of contents and associated links to help you access this information more quickly. (You can also use the search/find feature) Required: Copy and paste the 16 questions listed below into a word document. You can then answer the questions directly on the word document by simply adding lines in between each question. Your final paper should be typed and include a cover sheet (or you can use a memo format) that includes each of the names of your group participants. Only one member of your group needs to submit the final copy of your report. Questions: Who was the Auditor and what type of opinion did they render? Did HP have any changes in or disagreements with accountants on their accounting and financial disclosures? In accordance with Sarbanes-Oxley, to what did management attest in the Management Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting? In the section, “Qualitative and Quantitative Disclosure About Market Risk” of MD&A the company should discuss several risks they face. What risks does HP face? What could negatively impact your company? Does the company have any discontinued operations, change in accounting principles or extraordinary items? What caused…

Attachments:

accounting homework 495103

Take Test: Q9-CH10   https://myasucourses.asu.edu/webapps/assessment/take/launch.jsp?course_assessment_id=_511859_1&course_id=_262710_1&content_id=_8013066_1&step=nullSKIP TO COURSE MENU https://myasucourses.asu.edu/webapps/assessment/take/launch.jsp?course_assessment_id=_511859_1&course_id=_262710_1&content_id=_8013066_1&step=nullSKIP TO TOP FRAME TABS Content https://myasucourses.asu.edu/webapps/assessment/accessibility.jspAssistive Technology Tips [opens in new window] Instructions Description Non-Monetary Exchanges.  This quiz will close at 11:00 PM on Friday, June 21st.

Document Preview:

Take Test: Q9-CH10   https://myasucourses.asu.edu/webapps/assessment/take/launch.jsp?course_assessment_id=_511859_1&course_id=_262710_1&content_id=_8013066_1&step=nullSKIP TO COURSE MENU https://myasucourses.asu.edu/webapps/assessment/take/launch.jsp?course_assessment_id=_511859_1&course_id=_262710_1&content_id=_8013066_1&step=nullSKIP TO TOP FRAME TABS Content https://myasucourses.asu.edu/webapps/assessment/accessibility.jspAssistive Technology Tips [opens in new window] Instructions Description Non-Monetary Exchanges.  This quiz will close at 11:00 PM on Friday, June 21st.  You will be given (2) attempts to complete this quiz and your highest grade will be reported in the grade book.  The solutions will become available on Blackboard at 11:00 PM after the assessment closes. Instructions Multiple Attempts This Test allows 2 attempts. This is attempt number 1. Force Completion This Test can be saved and resumed later.  Question Completion Status:   Question 1   Use the following information to answer the next (6) questions: Turkey Inc. is trading a machine which had cost $70,000 and had accumulated depreciation of $40,000 for another fixed asset. For each of the following independent situations, determine the amount to be capitalized for the new fixed asset that Turkey is acquiring and the gain or loss to be recognized at the time of the exchange.  *If there is a gain record your answer as a positive number; if there is a loss, record your answer in parenthesis ().  If there is NO gain or loss, type in NE.   Capitalized Cost of New Asset $ Gain/Loss 1. Turkey traded the old machine for a newer machine with a fair value of $45,000 and received $5,000 on the exchange.  The exchange has commercial substance.  $_blank 1 __ $_blank_2__ 2.  Same as #1, except the exchange lacks commercial substance. $_blank_3__ $__blank_4_ 3.  Same as #1 except the exchange lacks commercial substance; and instead of receiving cash, Turkey paid $4,000…

accounting for formation splitting of income and liquidation 495051

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

20000 10000 5000 3000 50000 30000 10000 15000 25000 28000 7000 1 2 3 50000 4 127000 20000 6000 65000 40000 36000 5 6 Conway Asset Book value Market value Lawrence Book Value Cash Accounts receivable Note payable Inventory Equipmnet Accumulated Depreciation Accounts Payable Equipment Capital, Lawrence Conway Korman Net Income Capital, Conway Note Payable Capital,Korman The equipment is sold for $8,000 Debit Credit Requirements: Journalize the formation of the partnership. Accounts Journal Journalize Korman’s admission to the partnership. Half way through the first year of operations Conway and Lawrence admit Korman to the partnership. Korman buys a 1/2 share for $37,000 in cash. The net income for the first year of oprations was $50,000. After giving Conway a salary of $20,000, the rest of the net income is split evenly among the partners. Journalize the closing of the income summary accounts to the capital accounts. Prepare an income distribution worksheet. Income Distribution Complete the liquidating worksheet. Journalize each step of the closing. After 5 years of operation Conway, Korma, and Lawrence decide to dissolve their partnership. The following are the account balances before liquidation begins: Liquidation Conway and Lawrence form a partnership by combining the assets and liabilities of their respective sole proprietorships. The following are the assets and liabilities of each partner and their market values. Module 9 Assignment: ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting foryourbusinesstutor only 495052

Please see attachment, please do it on Microsoft word not excel.

Due tomorrow Thursday at 8a EST

Thank you.

Document Preview:

Accounting Basics for Managers Final Exam Problem 1: The balance sheet presents the following common stock information: Common stock, $10 par value, 7,000,000 shares authorized, 5,700,000 shares issued, 5,500,000 shares outstanding. (a.) Calculate the dollar amount that will be presented as Common stock. (b.) Calculate the total amount of a cash dividend of $1.00 per share. (c.) What accounts for the difference between issued shares and outstanding shares?  Problem 2: Presented below is the income statement for Smith Food Center for the month of July:    Based on an analysis of cost behavior patterns, it has been determined that the company’s contribution margin ratio is 15 percent. (a.) Rearrange the above income statement to the contribution margin format. Problem 2 (continued): (b.) If sales increase by 10 percent, what will be the firm’s operating income? (c.) Calculate the amount of revenue required for Smith’s Food Center to break even.  Problem 3: The cost formula for the maintenance department of the Eifel Co. is $6,500 per month plus $3.50 per machine hour used by the production department. a. Calculate the maintenance cost that would be budgeted for the month of May in which 5,700 machine hours are planned to be used. b. Prepare an appropriate performance report (contains columns for the original budget, flex budget, actual cost, variance) for the maintenance department assuming that 5,860 machine hours were actually used in the month of May, and the total maintenance cost incurred was $28,010.  Problem 4: Danzi, Inc., has budgeted sales for the month of July and estimated cost behavior patterns for a number of its expense items listed below. From this information prepare an operating expense budget for the month of July.  ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting help 495056

Please see attached. Show work that i may understand.

Document Preview:

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 8A)???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting help 495057

i need a discussion on these please..

two short paragraphs each..

thanks!

Document Preview:

Management Accounting Videos Please discuss on the following video: http://video.wileyaccountingupdates.com/ Management Accounting Videos Please discuss on the following video: http://video.wileyaccountingupdates.com/ ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

accounting help 495058

Please see attached. No word minimum. Original and quality work only.

Document Preview:

1) Select one of the following companies: Southwest Airlines?Delta Airlines?United Airlines?AirTran?Continental Airlines Go to ? HYPERLINK “http://money.com/” ?http://money.com? or ? HYPERLINK “http://finance.yahoo.com/” ?http://finance.yahoo.com? and enter the company symbol and then find the financial statements. For your company, analyze the liability section of the balance sheet. For each liability, write a short description. Use information from the notes to help you. Then, calculate the debt-to-equity ratio for the current year with the available information. What tentative conclusions can you draw about the debt position of your airline? Do owners or creditors have more claims on the company’s assets? How can you tell? What types of financial risks apply to your company? 2) When the stock market is going up over a long period of time, investors can become complacent about the risks of being a stockholder. After the significant decline of the stock market in 2008, people have begun to rethink the risk involved in owning stock. What kinds of risks do the owners of publicly-traded companies face? What could you do, as an investor, to continue to invest in the market but minimize your risk? Select two companies that you would invest in if you had the money. Find their financial statements on the Internet and examine the shareholders’ equity section of their balance sheets. What does your analysis tell you about each firm? Is this a good investment? Explain your findings and conclusion.

Attachments:

accounting help 495059

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Document Preview:

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting help 495060

In your own words please respond to the following. No word minimum. Please cite all sources using APA format. 1) To be successful, a company must anticipate its cash flows.

Document Preview:

In your own words please respond to the following. No word minimum. Please cite all sources using APA format. 1) To be successful, a company must anticipate its cash flows. What evidence would help you evaluate whether or not a company does adequate cash planning? Is there any information not available in the company’s annual report that would help you make this evaluation? 2) Upon studying its statement of cash flows, you note that over the last three years a firm has consistently reported negative cash flow from operating activities, positive cash flow from investing activities, and negative cash flow from financing activities. What does this combination of cash flows suggest to you about the firm? Is there any additional information that you would like to see? If so, what? Notes from class The statement of cash flows depicts how a company’s operating, investing, and financing activities have affected cash during an accounting period. It explains the net increase/decrease in cash during an accounting period. The main purpose of this statement is to provide information about a company’s cash receipts and cash payments during an accounting period. It also provides information about a company’s operating, investing, and financing activities during the period. While some information may be gathered from other financial statements, the statement of cash flows summarizes all transactions that affect cash. The statement of cash flows is a useful decision-making tool for managers, investors, and creditors. Managers can use this statement to determine the company’s liquidity and to assess the effects of major policy decisions, such as the dividend policy. Investors and creditors might use the statement to establish a company’s ability to manage cash flows, to generate positive future cash flows, to pay liabilities, dividends, and/or interest. There are two methods used for preparing the statement of cash flows: the direct method and the indirect method. The…

Attachments:

accounting help 495061

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14)????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Document Preview:

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14)???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting help 495062

Please see attached. No word minimum. Please cite any sources using apa format.

Document Preview:

1) how do you use financial ratios to analyze the performance of a company?  What do we mean when we refer to horizontal and vertical analysis? 2) Are CPA firms impacted in the way they deal with public and private companies?  Why or why not??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting help 495063

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Document Preview:

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting help 495064

I need attached spreadsheets done by Friday evening.

Document Preview:

600000 0 600000 Jennie April 23 Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 DEBIT CREDIT Journal DATE ACCOUNTS AND EXPLANATIONS E9-24 Acquisition of patent, amortization, and change in useful life LO 5 [10-15 minutes] Miracle Printers (MP) manufactures printers. Assume that MP recently paid $600,000 for a patent on a new laser printer. Although it gives legal protection for 20 years, the patent is expected to provide a competitive advantage for only eight years. Assuming the straight-line method of amortization, make journal entries to record (a) the purchase of the patent and (b) amortization for year 1. 2. After using the patent for four years, MP learns at an industry trade show that another company is designing a more efficient printer. On the basis of this new information, MP decides, starting with year 5, to amortize the remaining cost of the patent over two remaining years, giving the patent a total useful life of six years. Record amortization for year 5. (a) Purchase of patent (b) Amortization for one year: Req. 2 Amortization for year 5: Calculate book value Orginal cost Accm Depreciation: Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 4 Book value at beg of Yr 5 New estimated useful life remaining New annual amortization Accounting, 9e ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

accounting help 495068

please see atached. One question only. Please provide original explanation. Cite any references using APA format. NO word minimum.

Document Preview:

1) Do you feel that many companies are starting to use ABA now because technology has improved the software that handles it? I can see how important it can be for complex, large companies. Activity based costing (ABA) Notes from text This type of costing method has grown in popularity over the years and is believed to be a more accurate way to cost a product in many situations.  By having accurate costs, a company can better plan their strategy going forward. Under traditional costing, manufacturing overhead was assigned using usually one type of activity such as direct labor hours, machine hours, or direct labor costs. Under ABC costing, numerous cost pools are used and each pool will have its own measure of activity in order to get the assigned rate. An example of a cost pool could be purchasing costs and an activity measure could be number of purchase orders. Under ABC, we define five different levels of activities as follows: Unit-level activities – These activities occur each time a unit is produced so direct labor would be an example of this. Batch-level activities – These activities happen each time a group or batch is processed.  A machine setup is one of the most common examples of this because it won’t matter how many units pass through, we just set up 1 time per process. Product-level activities – These activities are unique to the specific product.  Research and development would be an example of this. Customer-level activities – These activities are customer driven and relate to specific customers in helping keep the customer satisfied and interested in our products. Organization-sustaining activities – These activities are done regardless of the number of products or customers a company has.  The janitor cleaning the building would be an example of this.?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting help 495069


I also need help with this excersize

Cost-Volume-Profit Elements and Relationships
Your best friend just received a gift of $7,000 from his favorite aunt. He wants to save the money to use as “starter” money after college. He can invest it (1) risk-free at 6%, (2) taking on moderate risk at 8%, or (3) taking on high risk at 14%.
Help your friend project the investment’s worth at the end of four years under each investment strategy and explain the results to him.

Submission Requirements:
Complete your work in an MS Excel worksheet

Document Preview:

960000 770000 132000 462000 162000 145000 220000 32000 93000 160000 11000 2.7 77 16 0.7 0.4 The budgets of four companies yield the following information: Sales revenue Fixed costs Operating income (loss) Units sold Contribution margin per unit Contribution margin ratio Blue Red Green Yellow Company Variable costs (1) (2) (3) $(5) $(6) $(7) (8) (9) (12) (11) $(10) Requirements: 1. Fill in the blanks for each missing value. (Round the contribution margin per unit to the nearest cent.) 2. Which company has the lowest break-even point in sales dollars? 3. What causes the low break-even point? $(4) Kincaid Company sells flags with team logos. Kincaid has fixed costs of $583,200 per year plus variable costs of $4.80 per flag. Each flag sells for $12.00. 1. Use the income statement equation approach to compute the number of flags Kincaid must sell each year to break even. 3. Prepare Kincaid’s contribution margin income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012, for sales of 72,000 flags. Cost of goods sold is 70% of variable costs. Operating costs make up the rest of variable costs and all of fixed costs. (Round your final answers to the nearest whole number.) 4. The company is considering an expansion that will increase fixed costs by 21% and variable costs by $0.60 per flag. Compute the new break-even point in units and in dollars. Should Kincaid undertake the expansion? Give your reasoning. Round your final answers to the nearest whole number. 2. Use the contribution margin ratio CVP formula to compute the dollar sales Kincaid needs to earn $33,000 in operating income for 2012. (Round the contribution margin to two decimal places.) ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

accounting help 495070

I havea sheet that I need you to fill. It’s not hard because I’ll give you two other sheets to take the answers from, it’s basically just getting the answers from the other sheets and putting them into the new sheet . I also think you’ll have to get some anwers from somewhere else, outside the sheets I have. The accuracy of the numbers and the due time are important.

Document Preview:

Template for Course Project Assignment #2-INDIVIDUAL due 12/10/13 Learning about your Company, its Financial Statements & tracking its Stock Price Your name Other team member(s) Section # Again, use your Company’s most recent SEC Form 10-K to answer the questions below in the space provided. You will need to complete one template for each company. [Search hint: every item you want may not be where you expect it type in what you are looking for (e.g., “preferred stock”) into the upper right hand search window in the 10-K pdf file.] Part 1: Basic data on your company Company name BRINKER INTERNATIONAL, INC Industry name Restaurant brands Part 2: Understanding the financial statements (continued from Assignment #1-IND) Part 2A: Inventories Using your Company’s financial statements, answer the questions below: Insert numbers and compute financial ratios Most recent year available 1st Prior Year Does the Company report Inventories on the balance sheet? (Yes or No) Yes Yes Do they appear to be manufacturing, retail or some other inventory accounts? Retail Retail What is the dollar amount of total inventories at yearend? 24,628 25,360 What is the major inventory method (cost-flow assumption), e.g., FIFO, LIFO, weighted-average? FIFO FIFO If they use LIFO, what would have been the ending balance under FIFO? n/a n/a Compute inventory turnover for the most recent year. (Inventory turnover = CGS ÷ Average Inventory) — see textbook p. 300 30.34 n/a Compute days in inventory for the most recent year. (Days in inventory = 365 ÷ Inventory turnover ratio) — see textbook p. 300 12 days n/a Part 2B: Accounts Receivable Using your Company’s financial statements, answer the questions below: Insert numbers and compute financial ratios Most recent year available 1st Prior Year Does the Company report Accounts Receivable? (Yes or No) Yes Yes What is the dollar amount of Accounts Receivable, net, at yearend? (i.e., net of Allowance…

accounting help 495071

ACC 206 Week Two Assignment Angel Katrice Jackson ACC 206 Principles of Accounting II?Instructor: Jennifer Bolden 12/7/2013 ACC 206 Week Two Assignment Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1.

Document Preview:

ACC 206 Week Two Assignment Angel Katrice Jackson ACC 206 Principles of Accounting II?Instructor: Jennifer Bolden 12/7/2013 ACC 206 Week Two Assignment Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X6. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 20X6 and 20X5 follow: 20X6 20X5 Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10% $580,000 $500,000 Common stock, $10 par value 2,350,000 1,750,000 Paid-in capital in excess of par value Preferred 24,000 — Common 4,620,000 3,600,000 Retained earnings 8,470,000 6,920,000 Total stockholders’ equity $16,044,000 $12,770,000 Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X6. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X6. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 20X6? Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X6? By what amount? 2. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization Southlake Corporation issued $900,000 of 8% bonds on March 1, 20X1. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow. Case A—The bonds are issued at 100. Case B—The bonds are issued at 96. Case C—The bonds are issued at 105. Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization. Instructions: Complete the following table: Case A Case B Case C Cash inflow on the issuance date _______ _______ _______ Total cash outflow through maturity _______ _______ _______ Total borrowing cost over the life of…

Attachments:

identify characteristics of a corporation record issuance of stock and illustrate re 495072

1. Identify characteristics of a corporation, record issuance of stock, and illustrate retained

earnings transactions.

2. Prepare and analyze the income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows.

Document Preview:

14000 155000 5700 39400 20400 200000 72000 127000 1700 142000 91800 434500 434500 Howie Stars produces starts for elementary teachers to reward their students. Howie Stars’ trial balance on June 1 follows: HOWIE STARS Trial Balance June 1, 2012 Account Title Balance Debit Credit Cash Accounts receivable Inventories: Materials Work in process Finished goods Plant assets Accumulated depreciation Accounts payable Wages payable Common stock Retained earnings Sales revenue Cost of goods sold Manufacturing overhead Marketing and general expenses Total — June 1 balances in the subsidiary ledgers were as follows: – Materials subledger: Paper, $4,700; indirect materials, $1,000 June transactions are summarized as follows: a. Collections on account, $152,000. b. Marketing and general expenses incurred and paid, $28,000. d. Materials purchases on credit: Paper, $22,900; indirect materials, $3,800. e. Materials used in production (requisitioned): – Job 120: paper , $850 – Job 121: paper, $7,650 – Indirect materials, $1,000 – Finished goods subledger: Large Stars, $9,400; Small Stars, $11,000 f. Wages incurred and assigned during June, $35,000. Labor time records for the month: Job 120, $3,500; Job 121, $16,600; indirect labor, $14,900. g. Wages paid in June include the balance in the Wages payable account at May 31 and $32,200 of wages incurred during June. i. Manufacturing overhead was allocated at the predetermined rate of 50% of direct labor cost. j. Jobs completed during the month: Job 120, 300,000 Large Stars at total cost of $45,500. k. Credit sales on account: all of Job 120 for $111,000. l. Closed the Manufacturing overhead account to Cost of goods sold. Requirements: 1. Journalize the transactions for the company. Howie uses a perpetual inventory system. 2. Open T-accounts for the general ledger, the Materials ledger, the Work in process ledger, and the Finished goods ledger. Insert each account balance as given, and use the reference…

accounting help 495073

ACC 206 Week Three Assignment Please complete the following five exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Overhead application: Working backward The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours.

Document Preview:

ACC 206 Week Three Assignment Please complete the following five exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Overhead application: Working backward The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review: Division A Division B Actual machine hours 22,500 ? Estimated machine hours 20,000 ? Overhead application rate $4.50 $5.00 Actual overhead $110,000 ? Estimated overhead ? $90,000 Applied overhead ? $86,000 Over- (under-) applied overhead ? $6,500 Find the unknowns for each of the divisions. Computations using a job order system General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger; Work in process $ 35,200 Finished goods 86,900 Cost of goods sold 128,700 Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows: Direct Materials Direct Labor Job No. Amount Job No. Amount 101 $5,000 101 $7,800 115 19,500 103 20,800 116 36,200 115 42,000 Other 35,800 116 18,000 $96,500 Other 25,900 $114,500 Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively. General applies overhead daily at the rate of…

Attachments:

accounting help 495076

Calculating Net Asset Value. Given the information below, calculate the net asset value for the Boston Equity mutual fund. Total assets $225,000,000 Total liabilities 5,000,000 Total number of shares 4,400,000 2. Calculating the Rate of Return of Investment Using Financial Leverage. Suppose Shaan invested just $10,000 of his own money and had a $90,000 mortgage with an interest rate of 8.5 percent. If after three years he sold the property for $120,000. a. What is his gross profit? b. What is his net profit/loss? c. What is the rate of return on investment? 3.

Document Preview:

Calculating Net Asset Value. Given the information below, calculate the net asset value for the Boston Equity mutual fund. Total assets $225,000,000 Total liabilities 5,000,000 Total number of shares 4,400,000 2. Calculating the Rate of Return of Investment Using Financial Leverage. Suppose Shaan invested just $10,000 of his own money and had a $90,000 mortgage with an interest rate of 8.5 percent. If after three years he sold the property for $120,000. a. What is his gross profit? b. What is his net profit/loss? c. What is the rate of return on investment? 3. Shelly’s assets include money in the checking and savings accounts, investments in stocks and mutual funds, personal property, such as furniture, appliances, an automobile, coin collection and jewelry. Shelly calculates that her total assets are $108,800. Her current unpaid bills, including an auto loan, credit card balances, and taxes total $16,300. Calculate Shelly’s net worth. 4. Barry and his wife Mary have accumulated over $4 million during their 45 years of marriage. They have three children and five grandchildren. A- How much money can Barry and Mary gift to their children in 2008 without any gift tax liability? B- How much money can Barry and Mary gift to their grandchildren? C- What is the total amount of estate removed from Barry and Mary’s estate? Amswer – 5. Dave bought a rental property for $200,000 cash. One year later, he sold it for $240,000. A- What was the return on his $200,000 investment? B- Suppose Dave invested only $20,000 of his own money and borrowed $180,000 (interest free from his rich father). What was his return on investment??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting easy 495028

Part 1 100-200 words Please respond to this Discussion question using the information from the personal budget you calculate using the http://threadcontent.next.ecollege.com/CurrentCourse/expense_dq.

Document Preview:

Part 1 100-200 words Please respond to this Discussion question using the information from the personal budget you calculate using the http://threadcontent.next.ecollege.com/CurrentCourse/expense_dq.xlsxcriteria provided Questions: What surprised you, if anything, in the budget(s) that you prepared? What changes, if any, would you make in the personal activities that are under your control, based on the budget(s) that you prepared? Do you think it is more important for a business to have a budget than it is for an individual to have a budget? Why or why not? Monthly Income: Income total (monthly) from all household members: Any Interest that can defray monthly expenses: Monthly loan/grant living expenses: Pension Income (if pertinent): All other sources of monthly income: Total Monthly Income 0 Monthly Fixed Expenses: Housing: Food: Transportation: (Car payments, car insurance, gas, average monthly maintenance) Education: Childcare/Daycare: Medical expenses: Additional: Total fixed expenses: 0 Monthly Extra Expenses: Entertainment: (average) Movies, events, etc. Vacations: Credit Cards: Childcare: Total monthly extra expenses: 0 Money Remaining 0 Part 2 Performance Evaluation Using Variances from Standard Costs Performance Evaluation Using Variances from Standard Costs Students’ scores on exams may be equated to financial measures used to evaluate employee performance in a business. Should college professors limit their evaluation of students to these “financial” measures? Do you see any potential benefits or disadvantages of including other measures of student performance in assigning course grades? (SITE References) ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting ethics assignment need in next 10 hours 495029

Hi,

Please find the attached accounting assignment. I need total of 1600 words including answers of all the questions.

Deadline in 10 hours from now.

I will pay $10 for this.


Need proper references and in-text citations.

Document Preview:

Calculating Tax Cost Microtech Software Corporation (MSC) was founded in 2001. The founder, Chan Li, studied at MIT and worked for a large software corporation before returning to his hometown, Centervale, to set up his own company. The corporate tax rate structure applicable in Centervale is as follows:   Taxable Income?Tax Rate??  Up to $50,000?15 percent??  From $50,001 through $150,000?22 percent??  Income in excess of $150,000?30 percent??MSC has an opportunity to invest in a project that is expected to generate an additional $55,000 of taxable income. Compute the tax cost of this additional income for the following three scenarios: MSC’s taxable income before the additional income is $45,000. MSC’s taxable income before the additional income is $300,000. MSC has a loss of $5,000 before considering the additional income. Show all the steps of the calculation and the final answer for each scenario. Compare the results for the three scenarios and comment on any differences. Write a one- to two-page paper in MS Word format. Apply APA standards for writing style to your work due on Wednesday 10/09/2013

Attachments:

accounting exam 495031

I need help with this accounting exam. The exam is given in attached word file. It is 48 questions multiple choice. I want all correct answers. I also want solution of all numerical type calculative questions along with correct answer and for theory type questions I want correct answers only.

Please let me know if you can meet my requirements.

Document Preview:

Multiple Choice, Question 83????Sierra Company allocates the estimated $200,000 of its accounting department costs to its production and sales departments since the accounting department supports the other two departments particularly with regard to payroll and accounts payable functions. The costs will be allocated based on the number of employees using the direct method. Information regarding costs and employees follows: Department?Employees??Accounting?4??Production?36??Sales?12??How much of the accounting department costs will be allocated to the production and sales departments?  ?Employees?Department?? ?$180,000?$60,000???? ?$1,800,000?$600,000???? ?$22,222?$66,667???? ?$150,000?$50,000???? Multiple Choice, Question 115????Velvet Company allocates costs from the payroll department (S1) and the maintenance department (S2) to the molding (P1), finishing (P2), and packaging (P3) departments. Payroll department costs are allocated based on the number of employees in the department and maintenance department costs are allocated based on the number of square feet which the production department occupies within the factory. ?Information about the departments is presented below:  ? ?Number of?Number of Square??Department?Costs?Employees?Feet Occupied??Payroll (S1)?$150,000?2?2,000??Maintenance (S2)?$220,000?8?64,000??Molding (P1)? ?75?100,000??Finishing (P2)? ?50?60,000??Packaging (P3)? ?25?40,000??Velvet uses the direct method to allocate costs. Round all answers to the nearest dollar. ??What amount of the payroll department costs will be allocated to the molding department? ?$185,000?? ?$132,353?? ?$70,313?? ?$75,000?? ?? ?? ?Multiple Choice, Question 126????Rand Company sells fine collectible statues and has implemented activity-based costing. Costs in the shipping department have been divided into three cost pools. The first cost pool contains costs that are related to packaging and shipping and Rand has determined that the number of boxes shipped is an…

Attachments:

accounting exam help 495033

UMUC – ACCT 220 EXAM 1 – Part 2 This is Part 2 of Exam 1. Part 1 is a multiple choice exam is located on WileyPlus. Part 1 is a timed exam. You should treat Part 2 (this part) like a Take-home Exam. You can open it, save the document with your filename, work through the problems, add your answers to your saved document and then submit it via the Webtycho Assignments location for Exam 1 Part 2. Part 2 of the Exam is worth 40 points. Each part is based on Chapters 2 and 3. Directions: Please complete the following 4 parts.

Document Preview:

UMUC – ACCT 220 EXAM 1 – Part 2 This is Part 2 of Exam 1. Part 1 is a multiple choice exam is located on WileyPlus. Part 1 is a timed exam. You should treat Part 2 (this part) like a Take-home Exam. You can open it, save the document with your filename, work through the problems, add your answers to your saved document and then submit it via the Webtycho Assignments location for Exam 1 Part 2. Part 2 of the Exam is worth 40 points. Each part is based on Chapters 2 and 3. Directions: Please complete the following 4 parts. You can use the answer sheets at the end of this document to complete this Exam. Part 1.Writing journal entries (Chapter 2).2 points per JE – 16 points. Please write a journal entry for the following 8 transactions, for Lillian’s Cooking School. All of the events listed below occurred in October, 2012. On the answer sheet, be sure to number your journal entries. Write the debit entry first and the credit entry second. Lillian purchased $700 in cooking supplies for Cash Lillian’s accountant paid $550 of the balance due in Accounts Payable Lillian sent out bills to three new clients who signed up for cooking class. The customers owe $1,200 for classes they took last week. After getting an unexpected check from her favorite aunt, Lillian invested $5,000 in her business. A new industrial-quality stove (Cooking Equipment) was purchased for the business, for $3,200. Lillian signed a promissory note for the stove. Employees were paid $2,800 for work done during October. Payday was October 14th. Maxwell paid for his wife to attend cooking classes in November. On October 16th, he paid the Cooking School $1,000, for classes that were scheduled to begin on November 7th. Lillian pays for her liability insurance 6 months in advance. On October 20th, she paid $3,000 for October through March of the following year. Part 2. Prepare 6 adjusting journal entries (Chapter 3)2 points per JE – 12 points. Use the below answer sheets to prepare 6 adjusting journal…

Attachments:

accounting exam help 495034

I have an exam due in 1 1/12 hours!! I need help! It’s 20 questions long. I am willing to pay for the first few answers posted. I will post the exam in a little bit but I do need help! No handshakes on this one since I will purchase multiple answers. Thanks!

Document Preview:

1) Nic Saybin Enterprises Accounting Department collects all pertinent monthly operating data. Selected data are presented below for the current month. From the data provided, please provide Saybin Enterprises Management with a flexible budget analysis to see how costs were controlled. ?Actual Costs Incurred Static Budget ?Activity level (in units) 754,009 746,500 ?Variable Costs: ?Indirect materials $328,897 $325,640 ?Utilities $174,332 $171,890 ?Fixed Costs: ?General and administrative $237,985 $244,908 ?Rent $135,500 $135,000?? 2) (TCO D) McMullen Co. manufactures automatic door openers. The company uses 15,000 electronic hinges per year as a component in the assembly of the openers. You have been engaged by McMullen to assist with an evaluation of whether the company should continue producing the hinges or purchase them from an outside vendor. ??The Accounting Department provided the following detail regarding the annual cost to produce electronic hinges: ??Direct materials $54,000 ?Direct labor 60,000 ?Variable manufacturing overhead 36,000 ?Fixed manufacturing overhead 90,000 ?Total costs $240,000 ???The Procurement Department provided the following supplier pricing: ?Supplier A price per hinge $11.00 ?Supplier B price per hinge $10.75 ?Supplier C price per hinge $10.50 ??The supplier pricing was obtained in response to a formal request for proposal (RFP). Procurement has determined these suppliers meet McMullen’s technical specifications and quality requirements.??If McMullen stops producing the part internally, 10% of the fixed manufacturing overhead would be eliminated.??Required: Prepare a make-or-buy analysis showing the annual advantage or disadvantage of accepting an outside supplier’s offer. ? 3) (TCO E) Topple Company produces a single product. Operating data for the company and its absorption costing income statement for the last year are presented below: ???Units in beginning inventory 2,000 ?Units produced 9,000 ?Units sold 10,000 ?Sales…

accounting excel 495036

800000 900000 100000 90000 80000 80000 100000 113000 20000 23000 20000 20500 520000 614500 700000 1100000 520000 614500 120000 120000 1100000 1594500 225000 648000 200000 284500 75000 92000 900000 900000 900000 820000 600000 600000 2900000 3344500 900000 850000 900000 900000 1100000 1594500 2900000 3344500 Cost of Goods Sold Depreciation Expense Investment Income Net Income Dividends Paid Land Total Assets Liabilities Common Stock Retained Earnings Foxx Corporation Financial Statements Income Statement Statement of Changes in Retained Earnings For Y

Document Preview:

800000 900000 100000 90000 80000 80000 100000 113000 20000 23000 20000 20500 520000 614500 700000 1100000 520000 614500 120000 120000 1100000 1594500 225000 648000 200000 284500 75000 92000 900000 900000 900000 820000 600000 600000 2900000 3344500 900000 850000 900000 900000 1100000 1594500 2900000 3344500 Cost of Goods Sold Depreciation Expense Investment Income Net Income Dividends Paid Land Total Assets Liabilities Common Stock Retained Earnings Foxx Corporation Financial Statements Income Statement Statement of Changes in Retained Earnings For Year Ended December 31, 2011 and 2012 Balance Sheet Total Liabilities and Stockholder’s Equity Common Size Sales Expected Cash Accounts Receivable Buildings and Equipment (net) Investments Administrative Expenses Miscellaneous Expenses Retained Earnings, Beginning Retained Earnings, Ending Prior Yr. Current Yr. Actual Inventory Actual/Expected $ Difference Between (a) (b) Requirement: ( c ) Requirement d: Name: You should name this spreadsheet using the naming convention “yourname.xlsx” This Assignment requires that you prepare an Excel Spreadsheet – similar to one that would be used in practice in the planning phase of the audit. The auditor must first develop an expectation, usually based on the performance in the prior period (taking into consideration any unusual circumstances in the current period). We will assume no unusual circumstances in the current period. This company is a new and growing company, and we would expect sales to increase in the current period (compared to the previous period). Requirements: (a) Prepare common size Income Statements and Balance Sheets for the prior and current periods. (b) Based on the relationships in the prior period Income Statements and assuming Sales of $900,000, calculate the expected amounts (dollar amounts) for the various expense accounts (including COGS). All calculations should be completed in the Excel…

Attachments:

accounting with excel 495037

The assignment is the attach file. Please, read the attachment for complete directions.

DeTazz

Document Preview:

Twelve months ago, David opened a coffee shop, The the first year of operations. Fringe benefits for David, Daily Grind, in Mercy Hospital’s former gift shop. including health insurance and payroll taxes, accounted David was confident that he had the knowledge ro for an additional -“k. $10,000 of cosrs for th. company. a success of this new business. He produced a quality Part-time employees work an average of 24 hours product that people needed, had priced the product each week and are paid payroll per $9 hour. taxes and to be very competitive, and had a gteat location in a other costs average about pu, $1.00 Lorr for part_ high-traffic area of the hospital. time employees. As shown in the following table, part_ time employees worked from 656 ho.r., to 727 hours each month: Material Gosts Part-time Employee t3-n. Month Labor Hours o”il, *i;; ;;;;;; ;;”;;-l A January coffee beans costing l22hours $B per pound. Each pound I of coffee beans produces February 256 ounces of coffee. boff”” I 656 hours is soid in three sizes: g j a small cup holding March ourl…, 727 hours medium ” cup holding 12 ounces, and a large .,rp hoid_ l April 705 hours ing 16 ounces. I -/27 May hours The cups needed to serve the coffee cost $.0-5 for I June the small 705 hours cup, $.06 for the g.07 j medium cup, and for the large July cup. Lids cost 727 hours per $.03 cup-and are the i same regardless of cup size. August Sleeves cost an additional 727 I hours per $.04 cup. On average, sugar and cream cost September $.02 oer I 705 hours cup for small cups, $.03 for medium j cups, and fo. $.0+ October , 721 hours large j cups. November 705 hours I _l December lll nours lahor Gosts ” -t j he Daily Grind is open 12 hours each d,ay,7 days : 0uerhead a week (365 days per Gosts year), and is staffed with , !,’i.il-“- three i1:l employees during the morning shift…

Attachments:

accounting excel document due today at 3 30 pm ms time 495038

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

P08-01A Given P08-01A Problem 7-4A Instructions Student Name: Class: Cash price for all assets purchased Estimated market values: Building Land Land improvements Schedule Appraised Percentage Apportioned Useful life in years Value of Total Cost Salvage value Building Land Land Improvements Vehicles Totals General Journal Trans. Date Account Titles no. Debit Credit Cash Straight-line depreciation on building = Double-declining-balance depreciation on land improvements = Building: Land improvements useful life in years Part 2: Part 3: Vehicles (4) Check figures: (2) (3) Part 4: Defend or refute this statement: Accelerated depreciation results in payment of less taxes of the asset’s life. Jan. 1 XAVIER CONSTRUCTION To record asset purchases. Given Data P08-01A: Problem 08-01A Part 1 Calculation of the estimated balance of the allowance for uncollectibles Not due: 1 to 30: 31 to 60: 61 to 90: Over 90: Part 2 Dec. 31 Part 3 To record estimated bad debts.* Bad Debts Expense Allowance for Doubtful Accounts Unadjusted balance Required adjustment Problem 7-4A Category A/R Amount Uncollectible GB 518 Unit 04 Assignment Student: Estimated balance * Computations –> The Template is provided to help you complete your assignment successfully. Enter you Name here ======> There are hints and guidance within the templates. For Example, some fields will have a note attached – as designated by the red triangle in the upper right corner of the cell. Some final cell totals or answers will give you a notice if the answer is correct. For example, if you have gotten the right answer, you may see a note “Correct”, or “Good!” appear beneath or to the side of that cell. But, not all exercises or problems will provide feedback. So, be sure you do your best on all of the assignments. And, if you have any questions, please do not hesitate to bring your questions to…

Attachments:

accounting excel document due today at 3 30 pm ms time 495039

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

P08-01A Given P08-01A Problem 7-4A Instructions Student Name: Class: Cash price for all assets purchased Estimated market values: Building Land Land improvements Schedule Appraised Percentage Apportioned Useful life in years Value of Total Cost Salvage value Building Land Land Improvements Vehicles Totals General Journal Trans. Date Account Titles no. Debit Credit Cash Straight-line depreciation on building = Double-declining-balance depreciation on land improvements = Building: Land improvements useful life in years Part 2: Part 3: Vehicles (4) Check figures: (2) (3) Part 4: Defend or refute this statement: Accelerated depreciation results in payment of less taxes of the asset’s life. Jan. 1 XAVIER CONSTRUCTION To record asset purchases. Given Data P08-01A: Problem 08-01A Part 1 Calculation of the estimated balance of the allowance for uncollectibles Not due: 1 to 30: 31 to 60: 61 to 90: Over 90: Part 2 Dec. 31 Part 3 To record estimated bad debts.* Bad Debts Expense Allowance for Doubtful Accounts Unadjusted balance Required adjustment Problem 7-4A Category A/R Amount Uncollectible GB 518 Unit 04 Assignment Student: Estimated balance * Computations –> The Template is provided to help you complete your assignment successfully. Enter you Name here ======> There are hints and guidance within the templates. For Example, some fields will have a note attached – as designated by the red triangle in the upper right corner of the cell. Some final cell totals or answers will give you a notice if the answer is correct. For example, if you have gotten the right answer, you may see a note “Correct”, or “Good!” appear beneath or to the side of that cell. But, not all exercises or problems will provide feedback. So, be sure you do your best on all of the assignments. And, if you have any questions, please do not hesitate to bring your questions to…

Attachments:

accounting for excellent 495040

Maga Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:        Selling price $ 173          Units in beginning inventory   0    Units produced   3,510    Units sold   3,240    Units in ending inventory   270          Variable cost per unit:      Direct materials $ 47    Direct labor $ 56    Variable manufacturing overhead $ 12    Variable selling and administrative $ 14    Fixed costs:      Fixed manufacturing overhead $ 108,810    Fixed selling and administrative $ 9,720   Requi

Document Preview:

Maga Company, which has only one product, has provided the following data concerning its most recent month of operations:??  ? ? ??  Selling price?$?173  ?? ? ? ??  Units in beginning inventory? ?0  ??  Units produced? ?3,510  ??  Units sold? ?3,240  ??  Units in ending inventory? ?270  ?? ? ? ??  Variable cost per unit:? ? ??  Direct materials?$?47  ??  Direct labor?$?56  ??  Variable manufacturing overhead?$?12  ??  Variable selling and administrative?$?14  ??  Fixed costs:? ? ??  Fixed manufacturing overhead?$?108,810  ??  Fixed selling and administrative?$?9,720  ???? Required:?? a.?What is the unit product cost for the month under variable costing? (Do not round intermediate calculations. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)??  ?Cost per unit??  Variable costing?$   ???? b.?What is the unit product cost for the month under absorption costing? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)??  ?Cost per unit??  Absorption costing?$   ???? c.?Prepare a contribution format income statement for the month using variable costing. (Input all amounts as positive values except losses which should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)?? Variable Costing Income Statement??  ? ?$  ??  Variable expenses:? ? ??       ?$   ? ??       ? ? ?? ????  ? ? ??  Fixed expenses:? ? ??       ? ? ??       ? ? ?? ????  ? ?$  ?? ? ? ???? d.?Prepare an income statement for the month using absorption costing. (Input all amounts as positive values except losses which should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)?? Absorption Costing Income Statement??  ? ?$  ??  ? ? ?? ? ???  ? ? ??  Selling and administrative expenses:? ? ??  ?$  ? ??  ? ? ?? ????  ? ?$  ?? ? ? ???? e.?Reconcile the variable costing and absorption costing net operating incomes for the month. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)?? Reconciliation of Variable Costing and Absorption Costing Net Operating Incomes??  Variable costing net operating income?$  ??  :…

Attachments:

accounting for excellent 495041

Silmon Corporation makes a product with the following standard costs:  Inputs Standard Quantity or Hours Standard Price or Rate  Direct materials 6.0   grams $ 9.00   per gram  Direct labor 0.5   hours $ 16.00   per hour  Variable overhead 0.5   hours $ 3.00   per hour   In June the company produced 5,300 units using 32,530 grams of the direct material and 2,690 direct labor-hours. During the month the company purchased 25,200 grams of the direct material at a price of $8.80 per gram. The actual direct labor rate was $16.

Document Preview:

Silmon Corporation makes a product with the following standard costs:??   Inputs?Standard Quantity?or Hours?Standard Price?or Rate??  Direct materials?6.0  ?grams?$?9.00  ?per gram??  Direct labor?0.5  ?hours?$?16.00  ?per hour??  Variable overhead?0.5  ?hours?$?3.00  ?per hour????  In June the company produced 5,300 units using 32,530 grams of the direct material and 2,690 direct labor-hours. During the month the company purchased 25,200 grams of the direct material at a price of $8.80 per gram. The actual direct labor rate was $16.60 per hour and the actual variable overhead rate was $2.90 per hour. The materials price variance is computed when materials are purchased. Variable overhead is applied on the basis of direct labor-hours.?? Required:??Compute the following variances for raw materials, direct labor, and variable overhead, assuming that the price variance for materials is recognized at point of purchase: (Input all amounts as positive values. Do not round intermediate calculations. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Indicate the effect of each variance by selecting “F” for favorable, “U” for unfavorable, and “None” for no effect (i.e., zero variance). Omit the “$” sign in your response.)??  ? ? ? (Choices: F, U, None)?? a.? Direct materials quantity variance?$  ??? b.? Direct materials price variance?$  ??? c.? Direct labor efficiency variance?$  ??? e.? Direct labor rate variance?$  ??? d.? Variable overhead efficiency variance?$  ??? f.? Variable overhead rate variance?$  ??? 2) Gilde Industries is a division of a major corporation. Last year the division had total sales of $23,826,400, net operating income of $2,835,342, and average operating assets of $9,164,000. The company’s minimum required rate of return is 19%.?? Required:??a.?What is the division’s margin? (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)??   Margin?%  ?? b.?What is the division’s turnover? (Round your answer to…

Attachments:

accounting exercises 495042

Exercise 12-5 Evaluate risk ratios [LO3] The 2012 income statement of Adrian Express reports sales of $16 million, cost of goods sold of $9.6 million, and net income of $1.6 million. Balance sheet information is provided in the following table. All amounts are in thousands.

Document Preview:

Exercise 12-5 Evaluate risk ratios [LO3] The 2012 income statement of Adrian Express reports sales of $16 million, cost of goods sold of $9.6 million, and net income of $1.6 million. Balance sheet information is provided in the following table. All amounts are in thousands.??   ADRIAN EXPRESS?Balance Sheets?December 31, 2012 and 2011??  ($ in 000s)?  2012?  2011??  Assets? ? ? ? ??  Current assets:? ? ? ? ??       Cash?$?600  ?$?760  ??       Accounts receivable? ?1,400  ? ?1,000  ??       Inventory? ?1,800  ? ?1,400  ??  Long-term assets? ?4,800  ? ?4,240  ??  ??????          Total assets?$?8,600  ?$?7,400  ??  ? ? ? ? ??  Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity? ? ? ? ??  Current liabilities?$?2,020  ?$?1,660  ??  Long-term liabilities? ?2,300  ? ?2,400  ??  Common stock? ?2,000  ? ?2,000  ??  Retained earnings? ?2,280  ? ?1,340  ??  ??????          Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity?$?8,600  ?$?7,400  ??  ? ? ? ? ????   Industry averages for the following four risk ratios are as follows:??     ??  Average collection period?25 days  ???  Average days in inventory?60 days  ???  Current ratio?2 to 1  ???  Debt to equity ratio?50%  ??????   Required:?? 1.?Calculate the four risk ratios listed above for Adrian Express in 2012. (Use 365 days in a year. Round your answers to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)??       Risk Ratios??  Average collection period?? days??  Average days in inventory?? days??  Current ratio?? to 1??  Debt to equity ratio?? %????   2.?Do you think the company is more risky or less risky than the industry averages??? ?  ?? ??? The 2012 income statement of Adrian Express reports sales of $16 million, cost of goods sold of $9.6 million, and net income of $1.6 million. Balance sheet information is provided in the following table. All amounts are in thousands.??   ADRIAN EXPRESS?Balance Sheet?December 31, 2012 and 2011??  ($ in 000s)?   2012?   2011??  Assets? ? ? ? ??  Current…

Attachments:

accounting exercises 495043

2012 2011 431000 372350 200000 187550 99000 91050 8350 6850 307350 285450 123650 86900 2012 2011 1 1 0.46403712296983757 1 1 good student April Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 Expenses: Cost of goods sold Net income MARINER DESIGNS, INC. Comparative Income Statement Year Ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 Net sales revenue Selling and general expenses Other expense Total expense 2. Selling and general expense Total expenses Req.

Document Preview:

2012 2011 431000 372350 200000 187550 99000 91050 8350 6850 307350 285450 123650 86900 2012 2011 1 1 0.46403712296983757 1 1 good student April Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 Expenses: Cost of goods sold Net income MARINER DESIGNS, INC. Comparative Income Statement Year Ended December 31, 2012 and 2011 Net sales revenue Selling and general expenses Other expense Total expense 2. Selling and general expense Total expenses Req. 2 E15-16 Preparing common-size income statements LO 3 [10-15 minutes] Consider the data presented in Exercise 15-13. Data from Exercise 15-13 presented here for your convenience. Prepare a comparative common-size income statement for Mariner Designs, Inc., using the 2012 and 2011 data. Round percentages to one-tenth percent (three decimal places). To an investor, how does 2012 compare with 2011? Explain your reasoning. Accounting, 9e ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

accounting extra credit assignment 495045

Due tomorrow.

Document Preview:

ACCT 2101 Financial Accounting Extra Credit Assignment Please read the material provided and answer the required question. Please submit a computer printed hard copy of your work for grading. Do not forget to write your full name on the copy you submit. This assignment will be due in class on Wednesday, December 4, 2013. Late submission will not be accepted. 1* Scanlon Technologies, Inc. Anne Scanlon founded Scanlon Technologies, Inc., in 1993. The company designed and manufactured high-tech products that were used in various industries ranging from semiconductor to aviation. Over the years, Scanlon Technologies reported a compound annual growth rate in revenues of over 20% due to high demand for the company’s products and Anne’s superior management skills. By the end of 1996, it was clear that any further growth would have to come from international expansion. However, establishing manufacturing operations and opening up sales and marketing offices abroad required a significant amount of capital. Anne considered investing more of her own money into the business; however, given that she already had most of her wealth tied up in the company, she decided against the idea. Moreover, she believed that the amount of funds Scanlon Technologies needed to raise for expansion was in the tens of millions. In her mind, there was only one clear solution—go public. In September 1996, Anne hired J.P. Suisse, a top tier investment bank, to take Scanlon Technologies public. On January 1, 1997, the company, which was authorized by the State of Delaware to sell 20 million common stock and 10 million preferred stock, issued one million shares of common stock in an Initial Public Offering (IPO) and began trading on the New York Stock Exchange under the ticker symbol STI. The stock, which had a par value of $1, was sold for $20 per share and climbed to $26 a share by the end of its first trading day. As expected, the…

Attachments:

accounting final attached choose three of four 495046

See attached

Document Preview:

BUS 615 Fall, 2013 Final Exam Answer any three (3) of the following questions. Submit your answer in an Excel file, with a separate, labelled tab for each question chosen. Format your spreadsheets so that they are easy to follow and calculations are readily apparent. Verbal answers should be concise and clearly stated. Each question counts 30 points. XYZ Corporation operates a Marketing Research department. This department compiles information from published sources, and from its own consumer studies, to assist marketing personnel in forecasting product demand and making pricing and promotion decisions. A large marketing research firm has bid $280,000 per year for a three-year contract to perform the same services. For the most recent year, XYZ’s controller determined the cost of operating the Marketing Research department to be $346,000: Salary and fringes: Senior researcher $68,000 Staff researcher 48,000 Clerical staff 70,000 VP Marketing (1) 62,000 Occupancy (2) 31,000 Subscriptions and travel (3) 67,000 Represents 30% of cost of the VP, who is estimated to spend 30% of his time on marketing research issues Occupancy costs are $31/sq ft: depreciation, $14; utilities, $11; maintenance, $6. Utilities are 70% variable; maintenance is an allocation of fixed costs. There are no plans for alternate use of the space. Subscriptions and travel costs would be borne by outside research firm. Required: Determine the cost differential to XYZ of outsourcing versus retaining this function. Discuss the factors that XYZ management should consider in making this decision. Lewiston, Inc. is a manufacturer with a calendar accounting year. A physical inventory is taken on January 1, and any items not in inventory are charged to cost of goods sold. a. In late March, Lewiston signed a $3,600,000 contract with Hawthorn, Inc. for production and installation of custom machinery at Hawthorn’s plant. On December 22, Lewiston shipped Hawthorn the…

Attachments:

accounting final exam questions few answers needed now 495047

Activity-based costing

accumulates overhead in one cost pool, then assigns the overhead to products and services by means of a cost driver.

allocates overhead to multiple activity cost pools, and it then assigns the activity cost pools to products and services by means of cost drivers.

assigns activity cost pools to products and services, then allocates overhead back to the activity cost pools.

allocates overhead directly to products and services based on activity levels.

The break-even point is where

total sales equal total variable costs.

contribution margin equals total fixed costs.

total sales equal total fixed costs.

total variable costs equal total fixed costs.

When a company assigns the costs of direct materials, direct labor, and both variable and fixed manufacturing overhead to products, that company is using

variable costing.

product costing.

operations costing.

absorption costing

Seasons Manufacturing manufactures a product with a unit variable cost of $100 and a unit sales price of $176. Fixed manufacturing costs were $480,000 when 10,000 units were produced and sold. The company has a one-time opportunity to sell an additional 1,000 units at $140 each in a foreign market which would not affect its present sales. If the company has sufficient capacity to produce the additional units, acceptance of the special order would affect net income as follows:

Income would increase by $40,000.

Income would decrease by $8,000.

Income would increase by $8,000.

Income would increase by $140,000.

Carter, Inc. can make 100 units of a necessary component part with the following costs:

Direct Materials

$120,000

Direct Labor

20,000

Variable Overhead

60,000

Fixed Overhead

40,000

If Carter can purchase the component externally for $220,000 and only $10,000 of the fixed costs can be avoided, what is the correct make-or-buy decision?

Make and save $30,000

Buy and save $10,000

Buy and save $30,000

Make and save $10,00

A company has a process that results in 15,000 pounds of Product A that can be sold for $16 per pound. An alternative would be to process Product A further at a cost of $200,000 and then sell it for $28 per pound. Should management sell Product A now or should Product A be processed further and then sold? What is the effect of the action?

Sell now, the company will be better off by $200,000.

Sell now, the company will be better off by $20,000.

Process further, the company will be better off by $180,000.

Process further, the company will be better off by $20,000

Attachments:

accounting amp finance 495048

Competency 319.1.3 Capital Budgeting Analysis – The graduate correctly applies time value of money techniques and techniques that ignore present value for capital investment decisions.
Competency 319.2.1 Technology Tools – The graduate uses information technology tools for specified business purposes.
Competency 319.2.5 Information Management – The graduate selects appropriate technology applications to manage information and make decisions in given situations.
Objectives:
319.1.3-01: Calculate net present value based on a given set of facts.
319.1.3-02: Apply the results of a net present value calculation to a given decision situation.
319.1.3-03: Calculate internal rate of return based on a given set of facts.
319.1.3-04: Apply the results of an internal rate of return calculation to a given decision situation.
319.1.3-05: Calculate the period of time required to recoup the money expended for new equipment in a given situation.
319.1.3-06: Calculate the accounting rate of return based on a given set of facts.
319.1.3-07: Explain the relationship of the accounting rate of return to the internal rate of return for the same capital investment alternative.
319.1.3-08: Calculate net cash flow in a given situation.
319.1.3-09: Explain the impact of depreciation on net cash flow.
319.1.3-10: Explain the role of the weighted average cost of capital in capital budgeting analysis.
319.2.1-04: Produce a computer-based presentation on a business topic.
319.2.5-05: Demonstrate the appropriate use of specified software application in a given situation.
It is imperative that you enter your first initial and last name in the fields designated on the template. Your work and results will be based on an individualized dataset that will auto load in the template when you enter your first initial and last name. Your work will not be correctly graded if you fail to complete these fields.
Introduction:
Entrepreneur D supplements income from a professional practice by investing in start-up and other business opportunities that meet specific investment criteria. Entrepreneur D operates all of these extra business activities as a single limited liability company and utilizes discounted cash flow analysis as a primary tool for evaluating each potential investment. There is an opportunity to purchase the patent for a newly invented gardening tool that Entrepreneur D would manufacture and sell on a wholesale basis. Entrepreneur D has asked you to prepare an analysis of this investment opportunity and make a recommendation regarding the course of action to take.
Given:
Entrepreneur D plans to retire from professional practice and cease all business activities nine years from now. The plan for the garden tool is to produce and sell it for eight years
and then sell the patent and production rights to a national company. Entrepreneur D has negotiated a tentative lease on a building that is well suited for this manufacturing process. The building must be remodeled to meet manufacturing needs, and then it must be restored to its original configuration at the end of the eight-year lease. At that time Entrepreneur D will be able to sell some of the non-specialized equipment (e.g., forklifts) for small salvage values.
Building remodeling and new equipment purchases will require a front-end investment. The remodeling and equipment costs will be capitalized and depreciated over the eight-year period as one depreciation calculation using straight line depreciation. Realizable salvage value from disposing of the equipment at the end of eight years is estimated at approximately $60,000. There is no salvage value for the remodeling improvements.
The remodeling cost is given on the template in your individualized dataset.
Additional working capital will be required for business operations. The working capital required is given on the template in your individualized dataset.
Estimated annual cash receipts from tool sales are forecasted for the eight years of expected operations. The expected cash receipts are given on the template in your individualized dataset.
Estimated cash expenses for materials, salaries, supplies, utilities, and other cash expenses are projected for each of the eight years of expected operations. The expected cash expenses are given on the template in your individualized dataset.
The lease on the building requires that it be restored to its original configuration at the end of the expected eight years of operation. The estimated restoration cost s number is given on the template in your individualized dataset.
The working capital tied up in this project will become available for other types of investments at the end of the eight-year period.
Entrepreneur D has asked you to assume a 12% applicable weighted average cost of capital.
Entrepreneur D has also asked you to assume a combined federal and state income tax rate. The tax rate is given on the template in your indvidualized dataset.
Task:
A. Complete the attached Capital Budgeting Template by doing the following:
1. Calculate the net cash flow that should be used for each year in the discounted cash
flow analysis.
2. Calculate the net present value (NPV) of this project using a discount rate equal to
the company s weighted average cost of capital. Round all dollar amounts to the
nearest whole dollar.
3. Calculate the expected yield on the project using the discounted cash flow internal
rate of return (IRR) method. Round all dollar amounts to the nearest whole dollar.
4. Calculate the accounting rate of return for this project.
5. Calculate the unadjusted payback period. State your answers in years and months.
B. Prepare a computer-based presentation in which you do the following:
1. Identify what the correct net cash flow for the second year would be if all cash
expenses were as described in the scenario but there were no depreciation expense.
a. Explain the impact of depreciation on net cash flow for the second year.
2. Based upon your NPV analysis in part A2, make a recommendation to Entrepreneur D
regarding what decision to make.
a. Explain why this is an appropriate action.
3. Based upon your IRR analysis in part A3, make a recommendation to Entrepreneur D
regarding what decision to make.
a. Explain why this is an appropriate action.
4. Explain why the accounting rate of return on this project is different from the internal
rate of return for the same capital investment.
5. Explain the relative significance of the unadjusted payback period in this decision
situation.
6. Explain how the weighted average cost of capital should be used in capital budgeting
analysis when utilizing the NPV method.
7. Explain how the weighted average cost of capital should be used in capital budgeting
analysis when utilizing the IRR method.

Attachments:

accounting foreign bank accounts 495049

I need to complete income tax returns for Foreign Bank Accounts. Requirement is to complete the tax return with the necessary forms (1040, 1099, W-2 for example)

Document Preview:

FOREIGN BANK ACCOUNS PROBLEM 1 You have a client Mr and Mrs Joe Smith have bank accounts in Germany. In 2002 when they moved from Germany, they had balance of 150, 000 in a local bank in Berlin. They filed their tax returns from 2003 to 2010 and reported interest income from bank account in Germany on their personal tax returns. From 2003 to 2008 interest rate was 6% and from 2009 to 2010 interest rate was 2% But they never reported existence of foreign bank accounts to IRS. They both are School teachers and hired a local CPA firm in Houston to file their tax return. Complete the Income Tax Return with the information given above for each year of 2003-2010. Problem 2 Mr. Zeta Shah and Mrs Xetai Shah had import and export business in Houston. In 2002 one of their customer paid $400,000 and money was deposited directly in India. Shahs forgot to report $400,000 income on their 2002 tax return. Over the years whenever they went to India, they used that money for their pleasure. Assume interest rate of 4% and withdrew 50,000 each year to pay for their trips and shopping. They filed their income tax returns from 2002 to 2010 and reported taxable income of 30,000, 40,000,35,000, 25,000,40,000, 30,000, 50,000, 25,000 and 50,000 respectively. Complete the Income Tax Return with the information given above for each year of 2002-2010.??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting formal report extensive writing and research involved 495050

Everything that the formal report need is in the attached powerpoints and the assignment/letter of authorization is attached also.

Needed parts:

– Cover – Letter of Acceptance

– Title Fly – Operating Agreement

– Title Page – Table of Contents

– Letter of Authorization – Abstract

Introduction:

– Background and Problem

– Scope/Limitations of the Report

– Sources & Methods of Data Collection

– Organization of the Report

Overall:

– Body

– Conclusions

Document Preview:

Letter of Authorization Dear Team, Your team is being asked to perform a detailed analysis of a concept referred to as “Social Media”, and it’s usage in the corporate business environment. This analysis will be in the form of a team formal report due December 2, 2013. The purpose of this assignment is to expose students to emerging business concepts and to create an opportunity for students to utilize professional written business communication skills. Your report should include the following Level One Headings: What is social media, what is a social media information system (SMIS), and what are the three primary SMIS roles? What are the SMIS components, and how do they support and advance an organization’s competitive strategy? How do social networks add value, and increase the strength of social relationships to a business organization? What is the Hyper-Social Organization and what roles do SMIS play in this organization? A conclusion summarizing the main points of the paper. Team recommendations as to whether or not social media plays an important part in today’s corporate environment. Use all available resources for your research. Where appropriate, you should incorporate charts, graphs, or other visual aids to illustrate the facts you present in your report. Respectfully, Professor of Information Systems

accounting assignment the allowance method and notes receivable 495000

Review the transactions and financial position of Outfitters Supply Co. in the Excel Template.

Requirements:

  1. Journalize the transactions, omitting explanations.
Document Preview:

1/20/2010 6/1/2010 6/30/2010 8/15/2010 9/7/2010 12/1/2010 12/19/2010 12/31/2010 12/31/2010 12/31/2010 1 2 Credit Date Accounts Debit Requirements: Post. Ref Journal Outfitters Supply Co. completed the following transactions during the year. Sold Inventory to Henry G., $600, on account. Ignore COGS. Loaned $10,000 cash to Kayaks Inc., receiving a 6 month, 11% note. Wrote off the Henry G. account as uncollectible after repeated efforts to collect from him. Received $200 from Henry G., along with a letter stating his intention to pay within 30 days. Reinstated his account in full Received the balance from Henry G. Collected the maturity value on the Kayaks Inc. note. Received a $3000, 60 day, 12% note on account from Tommy R. Wrote off the following accounts as uncollectible: Jones $700, Smith $300, Kettle $600 Made an adjusting entry to accrue the interest on the Tommy R. note Journalize the transactions, omitting explanations. The December 31 balance of Accounts Receivable is $139,000 and the balance in the Allowance account is Credit $1,800. Post the beginning balance to the allowance for uncollectible accounts T to determine the adjusting entry needed for bad debt expense. Allowance Module 11 Assignment: Based on an aging of accounts receivable, estimated uncollectible accounts is $2900 ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting assignment help 495001

I need these question Solved.

Please check my price than contact me i will pay 5Bucks for each Question.total 15 Bucks .

No negotiation on Price

I need in 12 Hours No more time is allowed.

Solution must be correct and accurate.

I need reliable tutors only

Thank you

Document Preview:

Accounting conventions represent the principles, assumptions, and rules that guide an accountant as he or she analyzes the effects of business events on the accounting cycle and applies them to various cycle procedures. This assignment requires you to identify which of these conventions apply to a given business scenario to enhance your understanding of the foundation of accounting procedures and processes. Instructions For this assignment, use worksheet u01a3 on the BUS3061 Unit 1 Excel Workbook Template (listed in Resources). Identify the applicable accounting convention for each of the following business scenarios. More than one convention may apply to each scenario. Please explain your choices for each scenario. Scenario 1: The Acme Company is undergoing a reorganization to improve its financial structure. As part of this process, the company is considering lowering its expense calculations to improve the bottom line net income. Scenario 2: Regal Enterprises has purchased $45,000 worth new equipment for use in its manufacturing operations and would like to write off the cost of this equipment in just a couple of years, instead of the usual 10 years for this equipment type. The company’s president fears that the economic conditions in its industry will worsen and cause the company to sell the equipment sooner than expected. Scenario 3: Bozrah Industries, a small independent retailer, wants to change its accounting system from cash-based to accrual-based, and is concerned about how this change will affect the recording of sales and expenses. Scenario 4: Randolph, Inc. has experienced major turnover in its accounting department, and the new head of accounting has been going through the current records of transactions. A couple of those transactions appear problematic. The first contains an error of $10,000 that the previous accountant decided was not large enough to adjust before the financial statements were prepared. This error would understate income and…

Attachments:

accounting assignment help urgent 495002

I need these question Solved.

Please check my price than contact me i will pay 5Bucks for each Question.total 15 Bucks .

No negotiation on Price

I need in 12 Hours No more time is allowed.

Solution must be correct and accurate.

I need reliable tutors only

Thank you

Document Preview:

Instructions to Students: Please complete the 3 problems below in Excel Each question is worth 50 points. 1. Roadmaster Tire Co. manufactures automobile tires. Standard costs and actual costs for direct materials, direct labor, and factory overhead incurred for the manufacture of 5,500 tires were as follows: Standard Costs Actual Costs Direct Materials 82,000 lbs. at $5.10 82,600 lbs. at $5.25 Direct Labor 1,650 hrs. at $17.50 1,620 hrs. at $17.40 Factory Overhead Rates per direct labor hr., based on 100% of normal capacity of 1,500 direct labor hrs.: Variable cost, $3.10 $5,000 variable cost Fixed cost, $4.90 $7,350 fixed cost Each tire requires 0.30 hours of direct labor. Determine a) The Direct materials price variance b) The Direct materials quantity variance c) Total direct materials cost variance d) The Direct Labor rate variance e) The Direct Labor time variance f) Total direct labor cost variance g) Variable Factory Overhead Controllable variance h) Fixed Factory Overhead volume variance i) Total Factory Overhead cost variance 2. The budget director of Hi Performance Athletic Co., with the assistance of the controller, treasurer, production manager, and sales manager, has gathered the following data for use in developing the budgeted income statement for January 2012: a. Estimated sales for January: Batting helmet 305 units at $70 per unit Football helmet 630 units at $135 per unit b. Estimated inventories at January 1: Direct Materials: Finished products: Plastic 80 lbs Batting helmet 35 units at $40 per unit Foam lining 60 lbs Football helmet 40 units at $60 per unit c. Desired inventories at January 31: Direct Materials: Finished products: Plastic 90 lbs Batting helmet 30 units at $40 per unit Foam lining 55 lbs Football helmet 50 units at $58 per unit d. Direct materials used in production: In manufacture of batting helmet: Plastic 1.20 lbs. per unit of product Foam lining 0.50 lb. per unit of…

Attachments:

accounting assignment need 90 495003

The case study is the homework. Refer to attachment. Due on Wednesday, Absolute Latest

Document Preview:

3/1/2013 72000 3/1/2013 72000 3/1/2013 4500 3/1/2013 3300 3/1/2013 7800 3/7/2013 900 3/7/2013 900 3/10/2013 2200 3/10/2013 2200 3/14/2013 1500 3/14/2013 1500 3/15/2013 4896 3/15/2013 4896 3/19/2013 450 3/19/2013 450 3/31/2013 5304 3/31/2013 5304 3/31/2013 1000 3/31/2013 1000 4/1/2013 375 4/1/2013 375 4/1/2013 7125 4/1/2013 7125 103550 103550 72000 6100 2200 5304 6100 5304 4500 1500 1000 4500 900 2200 1500 7125 900 900 5304 5304 72000 1000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 General Journal Date Debit Credit Cash (111) Prepaid Insurance (117) Accounts Payable (212) Common Stock (311) Retained Earnings (312) Dividends (313) Insurance Expense (513) Trial Balance a) One month’s insurance has expired. Description(Account Name) Requirement #4: Prepare adjusting entries using the following information in the General Journal Requirement #5: Requirement #6: Adjusted Trial Balance Requirement #7: Income Statement Statement of Retained Earnings Balance Sheet Requirement #8: Trial Balance for your closing entries. Description (Account Name) Requirement #9: Requirement #10: Post-Closing Trial Balance Posting is done poorly or not at all, leading to inaccurate or no trial balance. Posting has several errors leading to a trial balance with several errors. Posting is mostly correct leading to a mostly correct trial balance. Posting is correct leading to an accurate trial balance. One or fewer of four Financial Statements are prepared accurately and mostly in an appropriate format, three or all statements have some errors. Very Poor Poor Good Criteria Post the closing entries to the General Ledger T-accounts and compute ending balances. Just add to the balances that are already listed. Just add to the adjusted balances already listed. Post the adjusting entries to the General Ledger T-accounts and compute adjusted balances. Requirements Sheet in Workbook General Ledger Adjusting Entries Financial Statements Closing…

Attachments:

accounting assignment needed to be done by 11 30 2013 10 00pm 495004

All instrcutions are included in the file please do all rquirements. I think “upstream/downstream sales are involved. You have to do a Carry forward schedule, consolidation worksheet, eliminating entries and the workpapers. Aside the main problem, please do the extra credit too. I have included a file (an example of the format; how we have done the carry forward schedule, consolidation worksheet and 7 eliminating entries in class). I only want an accounting expert for this please.

P.S. This is college work. Please do a good job.

Thanks!

Document Preview:

-90000 -50000 -13220 -1000 2000 40000 20000 6000 2000 24500 8000 -33720 -18000 -24170 -18000 -33720 -18000 10000 4000 -47890 -32000 6400 15000 1500 8200 5000 12000 6000 41000 30000 48340 114240 59200 -6350 -2200 -10000 -4000 -10000 -1000 -40000 -20000 -47890 -32000 -114240 -59200 0 0 Consolidation Working Papers Eliminations Debit Credit INCOME STATEMENT Sales Cost of sales Depreciation exp Other Expenses Net income Add: Net income Dividends BALANCE SHEET Cash Receivables Dividends Rec Inventories TOTAL ASSETS LIAB. & EQUITY Accounts payable Dividend payable Other Debt Capital stock TOTAL LIAB. & EQUITY Turkey with Stuffing Consolidated Group Turkey Stuffing Income from Stuffing Gain on Sale of Plucking Mach Investment in Stuffing Plant/Equipment-net Retained Earnings Retained Earnings 1/1 Retained Earnings 12/31 Db (Cr) Consolidated Loss on Feather Trimming Mach at December 31, 2013 Part 1 THE PROBLEM: (70 Pts)   Thomas, the President of “Thomas’ Turkey Corporation” (Turkey), a fabric material company, gobbled up “The Best Stuffing Company “(Stuffing), a pillow manufacturer, when Turkey paid $33,600 cash for a 70% interest in Stuffing on January 1, 2012, when Stuffing’s stockholders’ equity consisted of $20,000 Capital Stock and $10,000 of Retained Earnings. Stuffing’ s Assets and Liabilities were tailored specifically for this acquisition and had total Fair Market Value differentials as follows at the time of acquisition: Inventory was undervalued by $3,000 and were sold evenly over a three year period starting at the date of acquisition Plant Assets with a 5 yr life were overvalued by $5,000 Trade Marks with a 20 yr life and $6,000 in value were not recorded A mortgage with 10 yrs of remaining payments were overvalued by $1,000 Any remaing difference in Cost vs Book was attributed to Goodwill   Additional information :   1. Turkey sold feathers that cost $6,000 to Stuffing for $8,000 during 2012…

accounting assistance 495005

Document Preview:

Exercises: 12-2, 12-4, 12-8, 13-1, 13-4, 13-8.????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting assistance 495007

Document Preview:

Exercises: 12-2, 12-4, 12-8, 13-1, 13-4, 13-8.????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting breakeven 495008

using this table when necessary for 5-6, 5-7 ang 5-8.

Total

Per Unit

%Sales

Total

Sales (quantity*price)

Less: Variable Cost

Contribution Margin

Less: Fixed Cost

Net Income

^Unit Contribution

Margin

^Contribution

Margin Ratio

Attachments:

accounting business combination 495009

Hi Pls help to correct my answer and teach me as attached question

Australia Accounting

*** here is the lecture note relevant to the topic.

Document Preview:

ADVANCED FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING 260 BUSINESS COMBINATIONS QUIZ QUESTIONS 1. List two indicators which can assist in assessing which entity is the acquirer in a business combination. (2 Marks) Determining the acquirer shall include a consideration of, among other things, which of the combining entities initiated the combination, as well as the relative size of the combining entities 2. Define control. (1 Mark) The power to govern the financial and operating policies of an entity 3. Name two types of business combination which are not covered by the provisions of AASB 3. (2 Marks) Property & plant 4. On 1 April 2012, Lemon Ltd acquired all of the issued shares of Orange Ltd. At this date, the share capital of Orange Ltd consisted of 70 000 ordinary shares issued at $2.60 each. Under the terms of the acquisition Lemon Ltd is to give each shareholder of Orange Ltd two (2) Lemon Ltd shares and $1.50 cash for each 5 Orange Ltd shares held. The fair value of a Lemon Ltd share is $3.20. It will cost Lemon Ltd $ 750 to issue the new shares. Required Calculate the cost of the business combination, show all workings. (2 Marks) Consideration transferred : 70,000 (2*3.2 + 15*5) 973,000 Cost of the business combination 973,000 5. How are directly attributable acquisition related costs accounted for? Why? (1 Mark) 6. In accounting for a business combination assets and liabilities acquired and assets and equity given up are measured at fair value on acquisition date. Does this mean that goodwill is also measured at fair value on that date? (1 Mark) 7. On 1 April 2012, Lemon Ltd acquired all of the issued shares of Orange Ltd. At this date, the share capital of Orange Ltd consisted of 70 000 ordinary shares issued at $2.60 each. Under the terms of the acquisition Lemon Ltd is to give each shareholder of Orange Ltd two (2) Lemon Ltd shares and $1.50 cash for each 5 Orange Ltd shares held. The fair value of a Lemon Ltd…

accounting case study 495011

I need help my tutor has not responded back to me and this was due yesturday on Dec 8th. I have to have this assignment done and turned in today. please this leaves about 51/2 hours to do this please someone help.

Document Preview:

ACCT640 – Managerial Accounting Fall 2013 Case #2 – Performance Drinks: Applying Activity Based Costing Written by: Tim Bergsma, CMA, CFE Assistant Professor – Accounting Background: Performance Drinks, LLC is owned by Dave N. Port. Performance Drinks produces a variety of sports centered drinks. They began operations in 1993 shortly after Mr. Port graduated with his M.B.A. from Davenport University. The company saw early success as sports and fitness nutritional products gained new popularity in the 1990’s. Financially the company is sound and has been wise in controlling their growth over the years. However, within the last 18 months Mr. Port has noticed a drop in overall company profitability. This is especially troubling considering that the company has continued to experience top-line growth. Mr. Port and his management team have been considering developing a new product line. However, those plans have been put on hold until they can figure out why their profits are shrinking. Performance Drinks makes four different kinds of sports drinks. Those drinks are as follows: Basic Hydration Intensity Post-Workout Each of these drinks contains a slightly different nutritional profile and is targeted for different users and uses. The Basic drink has the least nutritional benefit and is targeted for general consumption. The Hydration product targets endurance athletes and specializes in hydration replacement. The Intensity product was designed with energy enhancement in mind. It serves the needs of extreme athletes who need long durations of sustained energy. Lastly, the Post-Workout product is a nutritional replacement product that is generally used following exertion. You are the Controller for Performance Drinks. You feel as though you have a good handle on the financial reporting and the overall company performance. However, admittedly, your accounting information system has been designed to serve the needs of external users from an…

accounting chapter 10 test 495013

I need some help on this Accounting Test

Document Preview:

GLICKMAN – ACC111 End of Chapter 10 Test – (40 points) Name: _______________________________________ Please show all calculations!!! PROBLEM #1 – 4 points Classify each of the following as A – ordinary maintenance and repairs, B – asset improvements, or C – extraordinary repairs. Resurfacing a pool in an apartment building. ___________________ Installing a new air conditioner in an old building. ___________________ Exterior and interior painting. ___________________ Fixing damage due to a car accident. ___________________ PROBLEM #2 – 14 points Equipment acquired at a cost of $126,000 and has a book value of $42,000. Journalize the disposal of equipment under the following independent assumptions. Identify each assumption by letter. (a)?The equipment had no market value and was discarded.??(b)?The equipment is sold for $53,000.??(c)?The equipment is sold for $27,000.??(d)?The equipment is traded-in for a similar asset. The list price of the new equipment is $63,000. The exchange has no commercial substance. ??Journal Date? Description?? Debit? Credit?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? PROBLEM #3 – 22 points An asset was purchased January 1, 20XX and the fiscal year ends December 31st. Calculate depreciation expense, accumulated depreciation, and net book value under the straight-line and the double declining balance methods. Round your answers to the nearest whole dollar. Asset Cost = $200,000 Salvage Value = $25,000 Estimated Life = 8 Years Straight-line method: Year? ?Depreciation Expense? ?Accumulated Depreciation? ?Net Book Value?? ? ? ? ? ? ???20XX? ? ? ? ? ? ??20X1? ? ? ? ? ? ??20X2? ? ? ? ? ? ??20X3? ? ? ? ? ? ??20X4? ? ? ? ? ? ??20X5? ? ? ? ? ? ??20X6? ? ??This document was truncated here because it was created in the Evaluation Mode.

Attachments:

on march 1 of the current year the johnson company negotiated a 12 1 year 100 000 no 495015

On March 1, of the current year the Johnson Company negotiated a, 12%, 1-year, $100,000 note with Low Mountain Savings and Loan. Show the effects on the accounting equation, by account title: 1. At the origination of the loan. Assets = Liabilities + Equity 2. To record year-end interest. Assets = Liabilities + Equity

Document Preview:

GLICKMAN – ACC111 End of Chapter 11 Test – (40 points) Name: _______________________________________ Please show all calculations!!! PROBLEM #1 – 18 points On March 1, of the current year the Johnson Company negotiated a, 12%, 1-year, $100,000 note with Low Mountain Savings and Loan. Show the effects on the accounting equation, by account title: 1. At the origination of the loan. Assets = Liabilities + Equity 2. To record year-end interest. Assets = Liabilities + Equity 3. At the maturity of the note. Assets = Liabilities + Equity PROBLEM #2 – 22 points Presented below are the employee payroll records of the Bronsan Company for the week ending November 15, 20XX: Employee’s Name?YTD Earnings?Curr Week Gross Pay?Fed Inc Tax?Medical Ins Ded.??R. Hawn?$ 25,700?$ 800?$ 155?$ 35??D. Hopkins?930?800?134?35??R. Allen?86,900?1,000?193?42??Ingram?18,400?740?128?42?? Employee’s FICA taxes are withheld at a rate of 6.2% on the first $87,000 earned for Social Security and 1.45% of all wages for Medicare. Assume a state unemployment tax rate of 5.4% and a federal unemployment tax rate of 0.8% on the first $7,000 for each employee. Prepare the payroll register for the pay period and then prepare the necessary journal entries to record the payroll and payroll taxes. (Hint: Remember to prepare both employee payroll taxes and employer payroll taxes.) Payroll Register Employee?Gross Pay?Fed Inc Tax?Soc Sec Tax?Medicare Tax?Insurance?Net Pay?????????????????????????????????????????????????? General Journal Date?Description?Debit?Credit??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting comparison 495017

CPA Exam Comparison Instructions Compare and contrast the exam contents, requirements, and other aspects of the new CPA certication with TWO of the following other accounting certification exams: Certified Management Accountant (CMA), Certified Internal Auditor (CIA), Certified Governmental Financial Manager (CGFM).

Document Preview:

CPA Exam Comparison Instructions Compare and contrast the exam contents, requirements, and other aspects of the new CPA certication with TWO of the following other accounting certification exams: Certified Management Accountant (CMA), Certified Internal Auditor (CIA), Certified Governmental Financial Manager (CGFM). Compare and contrast the exam contents, requirements, and other aspects of the new CPA certication with TWO of the following other accounting certification exams: Certified Management Accountant (CMA), Certified Internal Auditor (CIA), Certified Governmental Financial Manager (CGFM). Click here for ? HYPERLINK “http://www.aicpa.org/BecomeACPA/CPAExam/ExaminationContent/ContentAndSkills/DownloadableDocuments/CSOs-SSOs-Final-Release-Version-effective-01-01-2011.pdf” ?Content and Skill Specification Outline? for the new CPA exam requirements effective 1/1/2011. Content is just one way that exams can differ.

accounting costs 495021

PLeases see attached. Original work only. Please cite all sources using APA format. NO word minimum. Thank you.

Document Preview:

1) Perform an Internet search using the phrase “reducing overhead costs”. Select and read a case study or article from the results of your search. (Make sure that you do not select an instructor’s lecture notes or a class assignment from the results of your search.) Summarize the case study or article, and relate the ideas of the article to what you have learned this week in this course. 2) There are several potential problems that can occur from the improper use of standard costs. Labor quantity standards and efficiency variances assume that production is labor-paced. However, output in many companies is determined by the processing speed of machines. Also, too much emphasis on meeting the standards may overshadow other important objectives. Discuss other potential problems that can occur from the improper use of standard costs. Standard Costs Notes from class A standard is considered a benchmark. This is used for measuring performance. It is a budgeted amount of something we would expect, so we could have a standard price we expect to pay for materials or a standard number of hours we would expect a unit to take or a standard rate we pay our employees. There are several standards that a company can set to help keep production on track and to evaluate how supervisors are doing. When we set standards for different areas, we need to make sure to consider the entire cost. For example, the standard price of materials should include all costs that go into getting that material ready for its intended use. That would include the purchase price plus freight, less any discounts that might be applicable. When we set standards for labor, we should include the entire cost of an employee per hour, so that could include employer taxes and fringe benefits. When we are setting standards for quantity, we might also have to consider an allowance for waste or rejects which would need to be added to the normal material requirements to get an overall standard allowed per…

Attachments:

accounting course work 495023

Will you get Social Security Benefits? I am posting a link to the Director of the Congressional Budget Office’s blog. It has a short writeup on the rising costs of Social Security and healthcare costs the federal government is responsible for. Please post a comment. All I want you to do is say if you think you will get Social Security when you retire. Since I am a “Baby-boomer”, I’m pretty sure I will. How about you? www.cbo.

Document Preview:

Will you get Social Security Benefits? I am posting a link to the Director of the Congressional Budget Office’s blog. It has a short writeup on the rising costs of Social Security and healthcare costs the federal government is responsible for. Please post a comment. All I want you to do is say if you think you will get Social Security when you retire. Since I am a “Baby-boomer”, I’m pretty sure I will. How about you? www.cbo.gov/publication/43648 The good, the bad and the ugly – Partnerships Post one good thing about forming a partnership OR say one bad thing about forming a partnership. Will you get Social Security Benefits? I am posting a link to the Director of the Congressional Budget Office’s blog. It has a short writeup on the rising costs of Social Security and healthcare costs the federal government is responsible for. Please post a comment. All I want you to do is say if you think you will get Social Security when you retire. Since I am a “Baby-boomer”, I’m pretty sure I will. How about you? www.cbo.gov/publication/43648 The good, the bad and the ugly – Partnerships Post one good thing about forming a partnership OR say one bad thing about forming a partnership. ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting coursework 495024

On pages 147-148, there is an All About You Activity. It is Broadening Your Perspectives (BYP 3-7). 1. After reading the scenario and the Instructions, post a response to either situation (a), (b) or (c). 2. In your response, say if you would disclose the information or not in your loan application. 3. Then explain your choice On pages 147-148, there is an All About You Activity. It is Broadening Your Perspectives (BYP 3-7). 1. After reading the scenario and the Instructions, post a response to either situation (a), (b) or (c). 2.

Document Preview:

On pages 147-148, there is an All About You Activity. It is Broadening Your Perspectives (BYP 3-7). 1. After reading the scenario and the Instructions, post a response to either situation (a), (b) or (c). 2. In your response, say if you would disclose the information or not in your loan application. 3. Then explain your choice On pages 147-148, there is an All About You Activity. It is Broadening Your Perspectives (BYP 3-7). 1. After reading the scenario and the Instructions, post a response to either situation (a), (b) or (c). 2. In your response, say if you would disclose the information or not in your loan application. 3. Then explain your choice ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

the accounting cycle 495025

Week Four — DQ 1 due Day 2 (Tuesday)

The Accounting Cycle

  • Describe the required steps in the accounting cycle. Be sure to incorporate the accounting equation and how debits and credits work in your discussion.

Week Four — DQ 2 due Day 4 (Tuesday)

Year-End Closing Entries

  • Describe the nature and purpose of the adjusted trial balance.
  • Explain the purpose of closing entries. Is there any difference in how closing entries are recorded as compared with recording daily transactions and adjusting entries Why or why not?

GIVE ANSWER IN AT LIST 100 – 150 words to each

Document Preview:

c04AccrualAccountingConcepts.qxd 8/3/10 1:50 PM Page 162 chapter 4 ACCRUAL ACCOUNTING CONCEPTS ? the navigator ? ? Scan Study Objectives study objectives ? Read Feature Story After studying this chapter, you should be able to: ? Scan Preview 1 Explain the revenue recognition principle and the expense ? Read Text and Answer Do it! recognition principle. p. 175 p. 180 p. 185 p. 189 2 Differentiate between the cash basis and the accrual basis of ? Work Using the Decision Toolkit accounting. ? Review Summary of Study Objectives 3 Explain why adjusting entries are needed, and identify the major types of adjusting entries. ? Work Comprehensive Do it! p. 197 4 Prepare adjusting entries for deferrals. ? Answer Self-Test Questions 5 Prepare adjusting entries for accruals. ? Complete Assignments 6 Describe the nature and purpose of the adjusted trial balance. ? Go to WileyPLUS for practice and tutorials 7 Explain the purpose of closing entries. ? Read A Look at IFRS p. 224 8 Describe the required steps in the accounting cycle. 9 Understand the causes of differences between net income and cash provided by operating activities. 162c04AccrualAccountingConcepts.qxd 8/3/10 1:50 PM Page 163 feature story The accuracy of the financial reporting system de- most common abuses of financial accounting. Xerox pends on answers to a few fundamental questions. At admitted reporting billions of dollars of lease revenue what point has revenue been earned? At what point in periods earlier than it should have been reported. is the earnings process complete? When have ex- And WorldCom stunned the financial markets with its penses really been incurred? admission that it had boosted net income by billions During the 1990s, the stock prices of dot-com com- of dollars by delaying the recognition of expenses un- panies boomed. Many dot-com companies earned most til later years. of their revenue from selling advertising Unfortunately, revelations such as space on their websites. To boost re-…

Attachments:

accounting discussion questions wk 7 495027

Each DQ 150- words +. Cite work with reference. Post answer an attachment

What do you think is the major purpose of financial statements? Why? Explain what type of information can be derived from financial statements. List references if you use a source other than the text.

Why is budgeting so important? What are the appropriate uses of a budget? How can budgets be mismanaged or misunderstood? What are some criteria you would use to choose between a fixed and a flexible budget? Explain your answers.

Document Preview:

Week Seven Discussion Questions · What do you think is the major purpose of financial statements? Why? Explain what type of information can be derived from financial statements. List references if you use a source other than the text. · Why is budgeting so important? What are the appropriate uses of a budget? How can budgets be mismanaged or misunderstood? What are some criteria you would use to choose between a fixed and a flexible budget? Explain your answers.

Attachments:

accounting 494974

Your Course Project

Financial Statement Analysis Project — A Comparative Analysis of Kohl s Corporation and J.C. Penney Corporation

Below is the link for the financial statements for Kohl s Corporation for the 2010 fiscal year ending January 29, 2011. Under the term Groupings Filter, change the term All Forms to Annual Filings using the drop-down arrow and press Search.

You should then scroll down and select the 10k dated 3/18/2011 and choose to download in Word or PDF format.

http://www.kohlscorporation.com/InvestorRelations/sec-filings.htm

Below is the link for the financial statements for J.C. Penney Corporation for the 2010 fiscal year ending January 29, 2011. Under the term Groupings Filter, change the term All Forms to Annual Filings using the drop-down arrow and press Search.

You should then scroll down and select the 10k dated 3/29/2011 and choose to download in Word format.

http://ir.jcpenney.com/phoenix.zhtml?c=70528&p=irol-sec

A sample project template is available for download in Doc Sharing. The sample project compares the ratio performance of Tootsie Roll and Hershey using the 2009 financial statements of Tootsie Roll and Hershey provided in Appendix A and Appendix B of your textbook.

Description

This course contains a Course Project where you will be required to submit one draft of the project at the end of Week 5 and the final completed project at the end of Week 7. Using the financial statements for Kohl s Corporation and J.C. Penney Corporation, respectively, you will calculate and compare the financial ratios listed further down this documentfor the fiscal year ending 2010 and prepare your comments about the liquidity, solvency, and profitability of the two companies based on your ratio calculations.The entire project will be graded by the instructor at the end of the final submission in Week 7 and one grade will be assigned for the entire project.

Overall Requirements

For the Final Submission:

Your final Excel workbook submission should contain the following. You cannot use any other software but Excel to complete this project.

1. A completed worksheet title page tab, which is really a cover sheet with your name, the course, the date, your instructor s name, and the title for the project.

2. A completed worksheet profiles tab, which contains a-one paragraph description regarding each company with information about their history, what products they sell, where they are located, etc.

3. All 18 ratios for each company with the supporting calculations and commentary on your worksheet ratio tab. Supporting calculations must be shown either as a formula or as text typed into a different cell. The ratios are listed further down this document. Your comments for each ratio should include more than just a definition of the ratio. You should focus on interpreting each ratio number for each company and support your comments with the numbers found in the ratios.

4. The Summary and Conclusions worksheet tab, which is an overall comparison of how each company compares in terms of the major category of ratios (liquidity, profitability, and solvency). A nice way to conclude is to state which company you think is the better investment and why.

5. The Bibliography worksheet tab must contain at least your textbook as a reference. Any other information you use to profile the companies should also be cited as a reference.

Required Ratios for Final Project Submission

1. Earnings per share

  1. Current ratio
  2. Gross profit rate
  3. Profit margin ratio
  4. Inventory turnover ratio
  5. Days in inventory

7. Receivables turnover ratio

8. Average collection period

  1. Asset turnover ratio
  2. Return on assets ratio
  3. Debt to total assets ratio
  4. Times interest earned ratio
  5. Payout ratio
  6. Return on common stockholders equity ratio
  7. Free cash flow
  8. Current cash debt coverage ratio
  9. Cash debt coverage ratio
  10. Price/earnings ratio [For the purpose of this ratio, for both Kohl s and J.C. Penney, use the market price per share on January 31, 2011.]

The Excel files uploaded in the Dropboxes should not include any unnecessary numbers or information (such as previous years’ ratios, ratios that were not specifically asked for in the project, etc.).

Please upload your final submission to the Week 7 Dropbox by Sunday at the end of Week 7.

For the Draft:

Create an Excel spreadsheet or use the project template to show your computations for the first 12 ratios listed above. The more you can complete regarding the other requirements, the closer you will be to completion when Week 7 arrives. Supporting calculations must be shown either as a formula or as text typed into a different cell. If you plan on creating your own spreadsheet, please follow the format provided in the Tootsie Roll and Hershey template file.

Please upload your draft submission to the Week 5 Dropbox by Sunday at the end of Week 5.

Other Helpful information:

If you feel uncomfortable with Excel, you can find many helpful references on Excel by performing a Google search.

The Appendix to Chapter 13 contains ratio calculations and comparison comments related to Kellogg and General Mills, so you will likely find this information helpful.

BigCharts.com provides historical stock quotes.

Either APA or MLA style can be used to complete the references on your Bibliography tab. There is a tutorial for APA and MLA style within the Syllabus.

Grade Information

The entire project will be graded by the instructor at the end of the final submission in Week 7, and one grade will be assigned for the entire project. The project will count for 18% of your overall course grade.

Category

Points

%

Description

Documentation
and Formatting

9

5%

The report will be submitted in the form of an Excel Workbook, with each page (worksheet) of the workbook named appropriately.Please do not use any other software (such as MS Works or Lotus) to complete the project. A quality report will include a title worksheet tab, a worksheet tab for the profile of the two companies, a worksheet tab for the ratio calculations and comments, a worksheet tab for the summary and conclusion, proper citations if applicable, and a Bibliography worksheet tab for the references.

Organization
and Cohesiveness

9

5%

A quality report will include the content described above in the documentation and formatting section. The ratios should be listed in the same order in which they appear in the project information above.

Editing

18

10%

A quality report will be free of any spelling, punctuation, or grammatical errors. Sentences and paragraphs will be clear, concise, and factually correct.Ratios will be expressed as numbers or percentages, depending on what is appropriate, as is shown in the textbook.Note that not all ratios are shown as percentages. Two decimal places is sufficient for each of the ratios.

Content

144

80%

A quality report will have correct ratio calculations and accurate supporting commentary. Any assumptions, if made, should be spelled out clearly. Supporting calculations must be shown either as a formula or as text typed into a different cell.

Total

180

100%

A quality report will meet or exceed all of the above requirements.

Attachments:

accounting 494975

Week Two: Basic Accounting Principles and Concepts Cont.

Details

Objectives

1

1.1 Journalize basic transactions.

1.2 Post transactions from journals to ledgers.

Participation

Respond to weekly discussion questions and participate in class discussion

Individual

Exercise 1

Resource:Ch. 3 of Financial Accounting

Complete Exercises E3-4 & E3-9.

Complete Problems 3-5A & 3-6A.

Submit as either a Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Word document.

Document Preview:

c03TheAccountingInformationSystem.qxd 9/2/10 1:38 PM Page 100 chapter 3 THE ACCOUNTING INFORMATION SYSTEM ? the navigator ? ? Scan Study Objectives ? study objectives Read Feature Story ? Scan Preview After studying this chapter, you should be able to: ? Read Text and Answer Do it! 1 Analyze the effect of business transactions on the basic accounting equation. p. 110 p. 116 p. 119 p. 128 2 Explain what an account is and how it helps in the recording ? Work Using the Decision Toolkit process. ? Review Summary of Study Objectives 3 Define debits and credits and explain how they are used to record business transactions. ? Work Comprehensive Do it! p. 133 4 Identify the basic steps in the recording process. ? Answer Self-Test Questions 5 Explain what a journal is and how it helps in the recording process. ? Complete Assignments 6 Explain what a ledger is and how it helps in the recording ? Go to WileyPLUS for practice and tutorials process. 7 Explain what posting is and how it helps in the recording ? Read A Look at IFRS p. 159 process. 8 Explain the purposes of a trial balance. 9 Classify cash activities as operating, investing, or 100 financing.c03TheAccountingInformationSystem.qxd 9/8/10 1:18 PM Page 101 feature story How organized are you financially? Take a short quiz. sending us some money—now what did we do with Answer yes or no to each question: that?” To ensure the accuracy of your balance and the • Does your wallet contain so many cash machine security of your funds, Fidelity Investments, like all receipts that you’ve been declared a walking fire other companies large and small, relies on a sophisti- hazard? cated accounting information system. That’s not to say • Is your wallet such a mess that it is often faster to that Fidelity or any other company is error-free. In fact, fish for money in the crack of your car if you’ve ever really messed up your seat than to dig around in your wallet? checkbook register, you may take some ACCIDENTS comfort from…

Attachments:

accounting 440 mcq quiz 494977

Accounting 440 MCQ Bank 1. Stuart is the sole owner and a material participant in a business in which he has $50,000 at risk. If the business incurs a loss of $80,000 from operations, Stuart can deduct the full amount. a. True b. False 2. Stan owns a 20% interest in a partnership (not real estate) in which his at-risk amount was $38,000 at the beginning of the year. During the year, the partnership borrows $80,000 on a nonrecourse note and incurs a loss of $50,000 from operations. Stan’s at-risk amount at the end of the year is $44,000. a. True b. False 3.

Document Preview:

Accounting 440 MCQ Bank 1. Stuart is the sole owner and a material participant in a business in which he has $50,000 at risk. If the business incurs a loss of $80,000 from operations, Stuart can deduct the full amount. a. True b. False 2. Stan owns a 20% interest in a partnership (not real estate) in which his at-risk amount was $38,000 at the beginning of the year. During the year, the partnership borrows $80,000 on a nonrecourse note and incurs a loss of $50,000 from operations. Stan’s at-risk amount at the end of the year is $44,000. a. True b. False 3. In the current year, Rich has a $40,000 loss from a business he owns. His at-risk amount at the end of the year, prior to considering the current year loss, is $24,000. He will be allowed to deduct the $40,000 loss this year if he is a material participant in the business. a. True b. False 4. Judy owns a 20% interest in a partnership (not real estate) in which her at-risk amount was $35,000 at the beginning of the year. The partnership borrowed $50,000 on a recourse note and made a $40,000 profit during the year. Her at-risk amount at the end of the year is $43,000. a. True b. False 5. Tonya owns an interest in an activity (not real estate) that converted recourse financing to nonrecourse financing. Recapture of previously allowed losses is required if Tonya’s at-risk amount is reduced below zero as a result of the debt restructuring. a. True b. False 6. Kelly, who earns a yearly salary of $120,000, sold an activity with a suspended passive loss of $44,000.  The activity was sold at a loss and Kelly has no other passive activities.  The suspended loss is not deductible. a. True b. False 7. All of a taxpayer’s tax credits relating to a passive activity can be utilized when the activity is sold at a loss. a. True b. False 8. During the year, Lion Company incurs a $25,000 loss on a passive activity, has active income of $17,000, and portfolio income of $12,000.  If Lion is…

Attachments:

accounting 504 course project 494978

I need help with my accounting course project. It is a comparison between Oracle and Microsoft. I have attached two attachments. One is a template and the other is the actual project.

Document Preview:

0.76 2.85 212201 3.6363807728557966 2046558 1.7435692530510531 58355 1173775 166242 0.31218861794724934 2531892 0.41637564078866096 532505 6080788 43938 8.251190129670144E-2 628962 0.10343429173982056 532505 6080788 365225 5.6883313086004419 3548896 6.0019804240745831 64206 591287.5 365 64.166445341912521 365 60.813260659089472 5.6883313086004419 6.0019804240745831 532505 13.432001917037672 6080788 15.402978874309742 39644.5 394780 365 365 27.173909165172159 365 23.696714965231479 13.432001917037672 15.402978874309742 532505 0.62070211532129049 6080788 1.4003077284091261 857907.5 4342465.5 43938 5.1215311674044112E-2 628962 0.14483983810579495 857907.5 4342465.5 191921 0.2237216968815279 3539551 0.80221925620308598 857856 4412199 61033 504.40495867768595 1055028 11.444930193202651 121 92183 18407 0.41893122126632981 304083 0.48346799965657705 43938 628962 43938 6.5906522177714214E-2 628962 0.69489003998897392 666671.5 905124.5 15632 15632 -47177 -47177 50390 0.86239945233612869 580867 0.46983927979228512 58430 1236310 50390 0.26349641280930369 580867 0.16898730734017953 191236 3437341 12/31/2011 23.67 31.144736842105264 61.78 21.677192982456141 0.76 2.85 As given in the income statement Current ratio Current assets Current liabilities = Profit margin ratio Net income Average Inventory 365 days Inventory turnover days Receivable Turnover Ratio Net credit sales Average Net Receivables Net Income Average Total Assets Net Sales Total Liabilities Total Assets Interest Expense Net Income + Int Expense + Tax Expense Payout ratio Free cash flow Cash debt coverage ratio Current cash debt coverage ratio Cash dividend declared on common stock Net income – Preferred stock dividend Average common stockholders’ equity Cash provided by operations Average current liabilities Average total liabilities Cash provided by operations minus capital expenditures minus cash dividends paid times Tootsie Complete your Title…

accounting 494979

Document Preview:

Discussion Memorandum #1 Net Operating Losses   The Dam Tubing Company has been in business for approximately 15 years operating a tubing business along the Guadalupe River near a local dam.  By 2009, the business had been growing steadily was generating approximately $1,200,000 in sales and $180,000 of taxable income each year.  The pattern changed in 2010 when, due to a two year drought, the company saw its taxable income reduced and then turn into a taxable loss in 2011.  In 2012, because there was more rainfall, the company experienced something of a recovery resulting in taxable income for 2012.  Unfortunately calendar year 2013 was another record dry year and the company experienced a large taxable loss due to the severity of the drought and to incurring certain extra drought-related safety measures the company implemented in that year.  The pattern of taxable income and loss since prior to 2010 is shown below:   Year Taxable Income (Loss) Years Prior to 2010  $180,000 a year 2010  $  90,000 2011 ($150,000)[1] 2012  $100,000 2013 ($294,000)   As company controller, you have already explained to Mr. Rite, the company’s owner and CEO, that the company will likely choose to carryback part of the 2013 loss to prior years to obtain a quick recovery of taxes previously paid the IRS.  Besides any receivable from the IRS that may be recorded, Mr. Rite would like see no allowance recorded on any deferred tax asset that may be recognized related to any unused 2013 net operating loss (NOL) that is carried forward.  He wants to see an improvement in the company’s financial position in preparation for borrowing funds to do additional maintenance on the tubing facilities due to damage caused by the rains in 2012 followed by drought in 2013.  Mr. Rite has informed you that in his opinion it is not only probable but highly likely that the company will return to profitability soon allowing the company to fully use the NOL carryforward, especially since the…

Attachments:

accounting 494980

Week 3 Assignment 1 David Bradley ACC 201 Principles of Financial Accounting Instructor: Phillip Sarakatsannis April 3, 2013 Week 3, Assignment 1 References RUNNING HEAD: 3.

Document Preview:

Week 3 Assignment 1 David Bradley ACC 201 Principles of Financial Accounting Instructor: Phillip Sarakatsannis April 3, 2013 Week 3, Assignment 1 References RUNNING HEAD: 3.1 1 WEEK 3, ASSIGNMENT 1 2????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

accounting 494982

20-1B During the first month of operations ended September 30, 2012, Sungsam Inc. manufactured 3,200 flat panel televisions, of which 3,000 were sold. Operating data for the month are summarized as follows.   Sales………………………………………………………………………………………………..$4,275,000 Manufacturing costs: Direct Materials…………………………………………$1,680,000 Direct Labor………………………………………………….720,000 Variable manufacturing cost……………………… 272,000 Fixed manufacturing cost…………..

Document Preview:

20-1B During the first month of operations ended September 30, 2012, Sungsam Inc. manufactured 3,200 flat panel televisions, of which 3,000 were sold. Operating data for the month are summarized as follows.   Sales………………………………………………………………………………………………..$4,275,000 Manufacturing costs: Direct Materials…………………………………………$1,680,000 Direct Labor………………………………………………….720,000 Variable manufacturing cost……………………… 272,000 Fixed manufacturing cost………………………………. 505,600 $3,177,600 Selling and admin. expenses: Variable……………………………………………………..$ 408,000 Fixed…………………………………………………………… 195,000 603,000   Instructions 1)Prepare an income statement based on absorption costing concept 2)Prepare an income statement based on variable costing concept 3) Explain the reason for the difference in the amount of income from operations reported in (1) and (2) 20-3B 21-3B????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting 494985

HOLMES INSTITUTE FACULTY OF HIGHER EDUCATION HA3032 Auditing Trimester 1 / 2013 ASSIGNMENT 1 You are required to read the following statement issued by ICAA (Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia and provide an essay of between 1,000-1,500 words (being the minimum and maximum). It should be properly referenced and must be primarily of your own work.

Document Preview:

HOLMES INSTITUTE FACULTY OF HIGHER EDUCATION HA3032 Auditing Trimester 1 / 2013 ASSIGNMENT 1 You are required to read the following statement issued by ICAA (Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia and provide an essay of between 1,000-1,500 words (being the minimum and maximum). It should be properly referenced and must be primarily of your own work. Press release: Legislation to improve the quality and transparency of the auditing process has been introduced into the House of Representatives this week by Parliamentary Secretary to the Treasurer David Bradbury. The Corporations Legislation Amendment (Audit Enhancement) Bill 2012 is the result of a Treasury review of audit quality and extensive stakeholder consultation during 2011 on measures that are designed to enhance audit quality and ensure that Australia’s regulatory framework remains in line with international best practice. Measures in the Bill include: Requiring audit firms to publish an annual transparency report if they conduct audits of 10 or more significant entities Empowering ASIC to issue an audit deficiency report in relation to an individual audit firm if it identifies an audit deficiency in the auditor’s quality control system or the conduct of an audit that may be detrimental to the overall quality of the audit Removing duplication of ASIC and Financial Reporting Council (FRC) audit inspection responsibilities so that ASIC continues its audit inspection program and the FRC focuses on providing strategic policy advice and reports on the quality of Australian audits. Allowing ASIC to communicate directly with an audited body. Allowing a two-year extension to the five-year auditor rotation requirement where it will not give rise to a conflict of interest and will prevent the loss of knowledge and experience where rotation could undermine the quality of the audit. ICAA report: Reforms to enhance Audit Quality?Available from: www.chartered…

Attachments:

accounting 494987

hey neel,

this is something that my lecturer has given to us as a base to complete the assignment.

the heading pacific acceptance need to be put on the assignment as well…..

thanks

Document Preview:

Pacific Acceptance Auditors have a duty to use reasonable care and skill. Auditors have a paramounts duty to check and see for themselves. Reliance on independent sour as or the client’s personnel is an aid to a not to sub situate for the auditor procedure. Auditor should audit the whole year. Auditor should closely supervise the work of inexperience audit staff. Auditors should properly document procedures in a written audit program which is amended when condition changes. The scope of an audit can be restricted to the reliance on a satisfactory internal control for appropriate areas of audit activity. Auditors have a duty to warm and inform. They are required to communicate with at appropriate level of management during the course of an audit and to the shareholders at the AGM. In relation to any material matters discovered during the audit process. The discovery of fraud or suspicion of fraud must also be communicated. When the auditor’s suspicion is aroused by the discovery of a large number of reregulation that indicate something is wrong or indicate the possibility of fraud, the auditors expected to take further action. The auditors plans and procedures should be structured so that it a material error or fraud exists the auditor has a reasonable expectation of discovering it. Professional standard and practice must reflect changes in the economic and business environment. Professional standard provide a guide, but the law will assess their reasonableness in specific circumstances and therefor what is reasonable care and skill.????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

accounting 494988

ACCT 201 Spring 2013 Name: Practice Exercise 3 Chapter 10 1. On October 31, 2011 Ronald signed a 2-year installment note in the amount of $50,000 in conjunction with the purchase of equipment. This note is payable in equal monthly installments of $2,354, which include interest computed at an annual rate of 12%. The first monthly payment is made on November 30, 2011. This note is fully amortizing over 24 months. Complete the amortization table for the first two payments by entering the correct dollar amounts in the blank spaces provided. In addition, answer the questions that follow.

Document Preview:

ACCT 201 Spring 2013 Name: Practice Exercise 3 Chapter 10 1. On October 31, 2011 Ronald signed a 2-year installment note in the amount of $50,000 in conjunction with the purchase of equipment. This note is payable in equal monthly installments of $2,354, which include interest computed at an annual rate of 12%. The first monthly payment is made on November 30, 2011. This note is fully amortizing over 24 months. Complete the amortization table for the first two payments by entering the correct dollar amounts in the blank spaces provided. In addition, answer the questions that follow. (a) What is Ronald’s 2011 income statement interest expense? (b) What is Ronald’s 2011 total liability for this note payable on the balance sheet? (c) How much TOTAL cash payments will Ronald make over the 2-year life of the note payable? (d) How much TOTAL interest will Ronald pay over the 2-year life of the note payable? ACCT 201 Spring 2013 Name: 2. On March 1, 2011, five-year bonds are sold for $508,026 that have a face value of $500,000 and an interest rate of 10%. Interest is paid semi-annually on March 1 and September 1. Using the straight-line amortization method, prepare the borrower’s journal entries on: March 1, 2011; September 1, 2011; December 31, 2011; and March 1, 2012.??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting 494989

Document Preview:

BA5001 / BA5001X Business Decision-Making Final coursework: Lamberts Heating Submission date: Friday 20th Apirl 2013 Scenario Lamberts Heating has two main divisions: one manufacturing radiators and the other installation of central heating systems. The manufacturing arm of the company makes radiators for domestic and commercial central heating systems. These radiators are either used by Lamberts installation division or are sold to other central heating installation companies. Lamberts Heating has rather old machinery, presently used to manufacture the radiators, that it wants to replace. The company wants both the new machinery to be in place as soon as possible and to plan the procurement and installation as soon as possible. The company has yet to decide which piece of new machinery to buy and thus does not expect to make an order for this machinery before 3rd June 2013. Lamberts Heatings installation division supplies and fits domestic central heating systems. It uses its own radiators to obtain the materials for this, but buys in boilers and pipes from other companies. This company is keen to increase its profit margin in this division but the business of supplying domestic heating systems is very competitive at present. The company has decided that the best way to increase its profit margin is to reduce the cost of buying the boilers from a number of suppliers. It has conducted some research into the prices charged by three major suppliers: Apex Boilers, Brunswich Heating Supplies and Centrale. Tasks This coursework is in three parts. You should submit all three parts together as one document. The first part of the document will consist of three reports: one for each part of the coursework with three appendices. These appendices will contain all the details for the work you have completed in order to write the reports. All computer input and output should also be in the appendices, as should the details of any other calculations you have…

Attachments:

accounting analysis and report do not round percentages 494990

i have provided what i have started and the corrections that the teacher made. also the attachments to be used as anwser sheets for the work… the work is to be done on years 2009 and 2010. i will provide as much info as i can the rest can be looked up online. this is for the company research in motion…..

it is income statement and consolidated balance sheet for Research in motion, that is the companies name. info can be found online for years 2009 2010. there is also a ratio analysis and analysis for income statement and balance sheet with analysis as well as acid test liquid test and analysis like it shows on anwser sheet it has to be for 2009 and 2010 can find all info online but make sure to include a link of website in which info for these years was collected. please use the official RIM or research in motion website

Document Preview:

Research in Motion Limited Common-Size Comparative Income Statements For Years 2008, 2009, 2010 February 27, 2010 February 28, 2009 March 1, 2008 Analysis: Research in Motion Limited Common-Size Comparative Balance Sheets For the years 2008, 2009, 2010 2010 2009 2008 Analysis: ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting and finance 494991

When hospitals are paid for services, it is through payment structures. Payment structures include health maintenance organizations (HMOs), preferred provider organizations (PPOs), and capitation rates.

In this assignment, you will use the information from M2: Assignment 3 and
M3: Assignment 1 to develop a strategic plan for the hospital to begin managed care contract negotiations. You can use the SMH data file, which you had downloaded from the Doc Sharing area, to create your plan.

Based on your understanding of the costs, you will develop a plan for contract negotiations with a managed care provider. Include in the plan:

    • A strategy for contract negotiation
    • Details on each facility s costs and expected margins
  • Comparisons between the three organizations, indicating which is in a stronger or weaker financial position

Using the SMH data file, you will do the following:

    • Calculate inpatient gross profit for the major payers at the hospital.
    • Calculate GP and GP percentage by payer.
    • Comment on the results of your GP calculations.
    • In this example, we assumed that patients from each payer incurred costs at the same rate. Is this assumption correct? What level of detail in cost identification should the hospital attempt to obtain? Provide your comments.
    • Based on your understanding of your costs, you will develop a plan for contract negotiations with a managed care provider. In your plan, outline a strategy for contract negotiation.
    • Based on your comparative analysis of the SMH, FP, and NFP facilities, is SMH in a better or worse position when it comes to contract negotiations? Provide your comments.
  • Payers always want to move procedures from an inpatient setting to an outpatient setting. Why might this not be the best strategy for your financial situation? Provide your comments.

Attachments:

accounting apa paper 494993

Accounting practices and principles are at the heart of a manager s role. To understand the needs of operating a department, it is necessary to understand the importance of accounting in identifying operational needs.

Review Materia (WEEK 4)l: Annualizing Staffing worksheet (SEE ATTACHMENT) and Chapter 9 (IF NEEDED)

Write a 800- to 950-word paper, identifying the role of the health care manager, comparing productive and nonproductive time. Consider the following:

How are costs tied to staffing?

What is the difference between the annualized method and the scheduled-position method?

Why annualize staffing?

What is the benefit of recording productive and nonproductive time, if at all?

Cite at least two sources other than your text with reference page.

Format your paper consistent with APA guidelines.

NO PLAGIARISM

Post paper as an attachment.

Document Preview:

95 Staffing: The Manager’s Responsibility 9 C H A P T E R STAFFING REQUIREMENTS In most businesses, a position is filled if the employee works five days a week, generally Monday through Friday. But in health care, many positions must be filled, or covered, all seven days of the week. Furthermore, in most businesses, a position is filled for that day if the employee works an eight-hour day—from 9:00 to 5:00, for example. But in health care, many positions must also be filled, or covered, 24 hours a day. The patients need care on Saturday and Sunday, as well as Monday through Friday, and patients need care around the clock, 24 hours a day. Thus, healthcare employees work in shifts. The shifts are often eight-hour shifts, because three such shifts times eight hours apiece equals 24-hour coverage. Some facilities have gone to 12-hour shifts. In their case, two 12-hour shifts equal 24-hour coverage. The manager is responsible for seeing that an employee is present and working for each position and for every shift required for that position. Therefore, it is necessary to understand and use the staffing measurement known as the full-time equivalent (FTE). Two different approaches are used to compute FTEs: the annualizing method and the scheduled-position method. Fulltime equivalent is a measure to express the equivalent of an employee (annualized) or a position (staffed) for the full time required. We examine both methods in this chapter. FTES FOR ANNUALIZING POSITIONS Why Annualize? Annualizing is necessary because each employee that is eligible for benefits (such as vacation days) will not be on duty for the full number of hours paid for by the After completing this chapter, you should be able to 1. Understand the difference between productive time and nonproductive time. 2. Understand computing fulltime equivalents to annualize staff positions. 3. Understand computing fulltime equivalents to fill a scheduled position. 4. Tie cost to staffing. P r o g r e s s N o t e…

accounting assgnt wk eight 494994

PLEASE read entire instructions that are provided

Instructions posted in attachments

Please cite work on worksheet. No plagiarism. Use reference for work cited (APA guidelines)

Chapter 11 provided, if needed

Dr. Smith and Brown supplemental included.

Any questions, ask before submitting please..

Document Preview:

PLEASE READ ALL INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY Doctors Smith and Brown Statement of Net Income and Balance Sheet Use the Axia Material: Ratio Analysis Form to complete the following: #1. Define each of the following ratios: Current ratio Quick ratio Debt service coverage ratio Operating margin Return on total assets #2. Explain the purpose of each ratio. Compute the following ratios from Drs. Smith & Brown’s financial statements located on the student website: Current ratio Quick ratio Debt service coverage ratio Operating margin Return on total assets #3. Explain what these ratios tell you about the status of the organization. Compare to the median hospitals. See the table in the Material: Ratio Analysis Form. Cite your references where indicated consistent with APA guidelines. Post your assignment as an attachment. Resources: Ch. 11 of Health Care Finance,??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

accounting assignment 494996

See Attachments

Complete Parts I, II, III.

Part III: Response should be between 100-150 word count for full credit per professor.

Chapters and Reserve Readings are Attached as resources (if needed)

Document Preview:

CHAPTER Cost Classifications 6 DISTINCTION BETWEEN DIRECT AND Progress Notes INDIRECT COSTS Direct costs can be specifically associated with a particular After completing this chapter, unit or department or patient. The critical distinction for you should be able to the manager is that the cost is directly attributable. What- ever the manager is responsible for—that is, the unit, the 1. Distinguish between direct and department, or the patient—is known as a cost object. indirect costs. The somewhat vague definition of a cost object is any unit for which a separate cost measurement is desired. It 2. Understand why the difference might help the manager to think of a cost object as a cost ob- is important to management. 1 jective instead. The important thing is that direct costs 3. Understand the composition can be traced. Indirect costs, on the other hand, cannot be specifically associated with a particular cost object. and purpose of responsibility The controller’s office is an example of indirect cost. centers. The controller’s office is essential to the overall organi- 4. Distinguish between product zation itself, but its cost is not specifically or directly asso- ciated with providing healthcare services. The critical and period costs. distinction for the manager is that indirect costs usually cannot be traced, but instead must be allocated or ap- 2 portioned in some manner. Figure 6-1 illustrates the direct–indirect cost distinction. To summarize, it is helpful to recognize that direct costs are incurred for the sole benefit of a particular op- erating unit—a department, for example. As a rule of thumb, if the answer to the following question is “yes,” then the cost is a direct cost: “If the operating unit (such as a department) did not exist, would this cost not be in existence?” Indirect costs, in contrast, are incurred for the overall operation and not for any one unit. Because they are shared, indirect costs are sometimes called joint costs or 4950 CHAPTER…

accounting assignment 494997

Discussion Questions

Word Count: 150 minimum each question

Cited with Reference

DQ 1) Provide an example of a direct cost and indirect cost from your workplace or an organization with which you are familiar. What is the difference? Explain your answer. List references if you use a source other than the text.

DQ 2) Understanding the difference between fixed and variable costs, what area of a health care facility or physician practice do you think would have a greater amount of variable costs than fixed? What would you suggest to lower the fixed costs for the same area?

Chapter attached (If Needed)

No Plagiarism

Document Preview:

95 Staffing: The Manager’s Responsibility 9 C H A P T E R STAFFING REQUIREMENTS In most businesses, a position is filled if the employee works five days a week, generally Monday through Friday. But in health care, many positions must be filled, or covered, all seven days of the week. Furthermore, in most businesses, a position is filled for that day if the employee works an eight-hour day—from 9:00 to 5:00, for example. But in health care, many positions must also be filled, or covered, 24 hours a day. The patients need care on Saturday and Sunday, as well as Monday through Friday, and patients need care around the clock, 24 hours a day. Thus, healthcare employees work in shifts. The shifts are often eight-hour shifts, because three such shifts times eight hours apiece equals 24-hour coverage. Some facilities have gone to 12-hour shifts. In their case, two 12-hour shifts equal 24-hour coverage. The manager is responsible for seeing that an employee is present and working for each position and for every shift required for that position. Therefore, it is necessary to understand and use the staffing measurement known as the full-time equivalent (FTE). Two different approaches are used to compute FTEs: the annualizing method and the scheduled-position method. Fulltime equivalent is a measure to express the equivalent of an employee (annualized) or a position (staffed) for the full time required. We examine both methods in this chapter. FTES FOR ANNUALIZING POSITIONS Why Annualize? Annualizing is necessary because each employee that is eligible for benefits (such as vacation days) will not be on duty for the full number of hours paid for by the After completing this chapter, you should be able to 1. Understand the difference between productive time and nonproductive time. 2. Understand computing fulltime equivalents to annualize staff positions. 3. Understand computing fulltime equivalents to fill a scheduled position. 4. Tie cost to staffing. P r o g r e s s N o t e…

Attachments:

accounting assignment 494998

Help me with this one in 3-4 hours maximum. I want all correct answers.

Document Preview:

A company would most likely choose the carryforward option for a net operating loss if the company expected Answer ??higher tax rates in the future compared to the past.????lower tax rates in the future compared to the past.????lower earnings in the future compared to the past.????higher earnings in the future compared to the past.??2 points    Question 2   A deferred tax liability arising from the use of an accelerated method of depreciation for tax purposes and the straight-line method for financial reporting purposes would be classified on the balance sheet as Answer ??a current liability.????a noncurrent liability.????a current liability for the portion of the temporary difference reversing within a year and a noncurrent liability for the remainder.????an offset to the accumulated depreciation reported on the balance sheet.??2 points    Question 3   All of the following can result in a temporary difference between pretax financial income and taxable income except Answer ??payment of premiums for life insurance.????depreciation expense.????contingent liabilities.????product warranty costs.??2 points    Question 4   Alpha had taxable income of $1,500 during 2014. Alpha used accelerated depreciation for tax purposes ($2,000) and straight-line depreciation for financial reporting purposes ($800). On December 30, 2014, Alpha collected the January 2015 rent of $600 on a lot it rents on a month-by-month basis to Zenith. Alpha’s pretax accounting income for 2014 would be Answer ??$900.????$2,100.????$3,300.????$3,700.??2 points    Question 5   An example of a “deductible temporary difference” occurs when Answer ??the installment sales method is used for tax purposes, but the accrual method of recognizing sales revenue is used for financial reporting purposes.????warranty expenses are recognized on the accrual basis for financial reporting purposes but recognized as the warranty conditions are met for tax purposes.????accelerated depreciation is used for tax purposes…

Attachments:

accounting assignment 494999

see attachment4

Document Preview:

Focus of the Final Paper You’ve just been hired onto ABC Company as the corporate controller. ABC Company is a manufacturing firm that specializes in making cedar roofing and siding shingles. The company currently has annual sales of around $1.2 million, a 25% increase from the previous year. The company has an aggressive growth target of reaching $3 million annual sales within the next 3 years. The CEO has been trying to find additional products that can leverage the current ABC employee skillset as well as the manufacturing facilities. As the controller of ABC Company, the CEO has come to you with a new opportunity that he’s been working on. The CEO would like to use the some of the shingle scrap materials to build cedar dollhouses. While this new product line would add additional raw materials and be more time-intensive to manufacture than the cedar shingles, this new product line will be able to leverage ABC’s existing manufacturing facilities as well as the current staff. Although this product line will require added expenses, it will provide additional revenue and gross profit to help reach the growth targets. The CEO is relying on you to help decide how this project can be afforded  Provide details about the estimated product costs, what is needed to break even on the project, and what level of return this product is expected to provide. In order to help out the CEO, you need to prepare a six- to eight-page report that will contain the following information (including exhibits, but excluding your references and title page). Refer to the accompanying Excel spreadsheet (available through your online course) for some specific cost and profit information to complete the calculations. http://vizedhtmlcontent.next.ecollege.com/pub/content/5f14b903-0224-4c7c-b273-91c0325ba942/Final_Paper_Spreadsheet._Student_Copy.WP.2013.xlsxFinal Paper Spreadsheet I. An overall risk profile of the company based on current economic and industry issues that it may be facing.  II….

Attachments:

accounting 494938

    1. Identify, print, and read theStatement of Ethical Professional Practice posted atwww.IMAnet.org. (Search using “ethical professional practice.”)
    2. In a one page memo to me, describe, in your own words, the four overarching ethical principles underlie the IMA’s statement.
    3. Describe the courses of action the IMA recommends in resolving ethical conflicts.
Document Preview:

Chapter 18 Assignment??Instructions? ??Managerial accounting professionals follow a code of ethics. As a member of the Institute of Management Accountants, the managerial accountant must comply with Standards of Ethical Conduct. Required     Identify, print, and read the Statement of Ethical Professional Practice posted at ? HYPERLINK “http://www.imanet.org/” t “_new” ?www.IMAnet.org?. (Search using “ethical professional practice.”)     In a one page memo to me, describe, in your own words, the four overarching ethical principles underlie the IMA’s statement. Describe the courses of action the IMA recommends in resolving ethical conflicts. Your submission must be a Word docment ending in .doc or .docx You will be graded on how well you address the questions. Addressing the questions involves identifying relevant facts, applying the chapter concepts,, and answering each question completely.  Proper APA formatting is expected and required (cited sources, reference page, etc.).  Supplement and synthesize your analysis with outsides scholarly sources.  For assistance with APA citations, please visit the following links: The American Psychological Association Website: ? HYPERLINK “https://owa.broward.edu/owa/redir.aspx?C=1295af913db14024936931f97f259a64&URL=http%3a%2f%2fwww.apastyle.org%2f” t “_blank” ?http://www.apastyle.org/???The APA site has numerous links (see “most popular”), but you may want to view the tutorial if you are completely new to APA:  ? HYPERLINK “https://owa.broward.edu/owa/redir.aspx?C=1295af913db14024936931f97f259a64&URL=http%3a%2f%2fwww.apastyle.org%2flearn%2ftutorials%2fbasics-tutorial.aspx” t “_blank” ?http://www.apastyle.org/learn/tutorials/basics-tutorial.aspx???This assignment will be submitted for plagiarism detection.  Do not copy or paste any part of your submission from any other source, not even your text book.  If you must copy a phrase, or definition, it must be in quotation marks and cited, see APA above.  Failure to do so will…

Attachments:

accounting 2 494940

I need help with accounting questions. I will need to show all calculation, can someoe help me?

Attachments:

accounting 2 494941

P12-30A PrintTYK Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 DEBIT CREDIT Journal DATE ACCOUNTS AND EXPLANATIONS 2. Req. 2 Issuing stock and preparing the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet LO 3 [15-20 minutes] Paid-in capital in excess of par – common Stockholders’ Equity Paid-in capital: Retained earnings Total stockholder’s equity Total paid-in capital P12-30A Lincoln-Priest, Inc., was organized in 2011.

Document Preview:

P12-30A PrintTYK Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 DEBIT CREDIT Journal DATE ACCOUNTS AND EXPLANATIONS 2. Req. 2 Issuing stock and preparing the stockholders’ equity section of the balance sheet LO 3 [15-20 minutes] Paid-in capital in excess of par – common Stockholders’ Equity Paid-in capital: Retained earnings Total stockholder’s equity Total paid-in capital P12-30A Lincoln-Priest, Inc., was organized in 2011. At December 31, 2011, the Lincoln- Priest balance sheet reported the following stockholders’ equity: Paid-in Capital: Preferred stock, 7%, $40 par, 110,000 shares authorized, none issued Common stock, $1 par, 520,000 shares authorized, 61,000 shares issued and outstanding Paid-in capital in excess of par – common Total paid-in capital Total stockholders’ equity December 31, 2011 LINCOLN-PRIEST, INC. During 2012, the company completed the following selected transactions. Journalize each transaction. Explanations are not required. a. Issued for cash 1,300 shares of preferred stock at par value. b. Issued for cash 2,400 shares of common stock at a price of $5 per share. c. Net income for the year was $74,000, and the company declared no dividends. Make the closing entry for net income. Prepare the stockholders’ equity section of the Lincoln-Priest balance sheet at December 31, 2012. a. b. c. *61,000 + 2,400 = 63,400 shares Accounting, 9e $0.00 $61,000.00 41000.00 $102,000.00 29000.00 $131,000.00 LINCOLN-PRIEST, INC. 41000.00 41000.00 41000.00 $41,000.00 Print Test Your Knowledge P12-30A PrintTYK Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 DEBIT CREDIT Journal DATE ACCOUNTS AND…

Attachments:

accounting 2 494942

Journal entries and transaction accounting

Document Preview:

E11-14 PrintTYK Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req. 1 DEBIT CREDIT Journal DATE ACCOUNTS AND EXPLANATIONS Feb 28 What is the balance in Estimated warranty payable? 2. Req. 2 E11-14 Recording mortgage payable entries from an amortization schedule LO 1 [10-15 minutes] Kaiser Company’s partial amortization schedule follows: 2013 totals Loan Date Payment Interest Expense (Principal X 6% X 1/12) Principal Mortgage Balance Payment Number Journalize the note issuance and the reclassification of the current portion on January 1, 2013 (explanations are not required). 3. Journalize the second payment on February 28, 2013 (do not round). Jan 1 Jan 31 Req. 3 Accounting, 9e ?1?/?1?/?2013 $500,000.00 1.00 ?1?/?31?/?2013 3597.30 $2,500.00 0.06 1.00 12.00 2.00 $1,097.30 $498,902.70 2.00 ?2?/?28?/?2013 3597.30 $2,494.51 0.06 1.00 12.00 $1,102.79 $497,799.91 3.00 ?3?/?31?/?2013 3597.30 $2,489.00 $1,108.30 $496,691.61 4.00 ?4?/?30?/?2013 3597.30 $2,483.46 $1,113.84 $495,577.77 5.00 ?5?/?31?/?2013 3597.30 $2,477.89 $1,119.41 $494,458.36 6.00 ?6?/?30?/?2013 3597.30 $2,472.29 $1,125.01 $493,333.35 7.00 ?7?/?31?/?2013 3597.30 $2,466.67 $1,130.63 $492,202.72 8.00 ?8?/?31?/?2013 3597.30 $2,461.01 $1,136.29 $491,066.43 9.00 ?9?/?30?/?2013 3597.30 $2,455.33 $1,141.97 $489,924.46 10.00 ?10?/?31?/?2013 3597.30 $2,449.62 $1,147.68 $488,776.78 11.00 ?11?/?30?/?2013 3597.30 $2,443.88 $1,153.42 $487,623.36 12.00 ?12?/?31?/?2013 3597.30 $2,438.12 $1,159.18 $486,464.18 43167.60 $29,631.78 $13,535.82 2013.00 2013.00 2013.00 Print Test Your Knowledge E11-14 PrintTYK Test Your Knowledge Student Name Course Name Student ID: Date: Requirements 1. Students please fill-in areas that are shaded Req….

accounting 2 payroll 494949

5-14A 5-4A 5-2A Excel Instructions OASDI HI Tax FICA FUTA SUTA Earnings Name: 5-2A Total payroll Earnings subject to FUTA and SUTA Net FUTA tax Taxable x Rate = Net SUTA tax Total unemployment taxes Less: Wages paid in excess of $7,000 An asterisk (*) will appear to the right of an incorrect answer. Enter the appropriate numbers/formulas in the shaded (gray) cells. 5-4A 5-14A (6.2%) (1.45%) V. Hoffman A. Drugan G. Beiter S. Egan B. Lin M. Grady P.

Document Preview:

It is required that you utilize the templates to complete each Assignment: Make sure to read Excel instructions. Formulas must be included in each answer box NOT just the answer. Use Tax Tables if needed it is the last attachment Complete the following problems: Practical Problem 4-5A (pg. 4-40) Practical Problem 4-8A (pg. 4-41) Practical Problem 4-10A (pg. 4-43) •Practical Problem 5-2A (pg. 5-31) Practical Problem 5-4A (pg. 5-31) •Practical Problem 5-14A (pg. 5-33) MORE Next Page: Assignment Guidelines: You will complete parts “a” & “b” only Complete April 1st – April 29th entries You will be required to figure FICA You will not need to file any tax return information •Practical Problem 6-16A (pg. 6-44) Brookins Company were analyzed, journalized, and posted for the third quarter of the fiscal year. In this problem, you are to record the payroll transactions for the last quarter of the firm’s fiscal year. The last quarter begins on April 1. a. Analyze and journalize the transactions described in the following narrative. Use the two-column journal Omit the writing of explanations in the journal entries. b. Post the journal entries to the general ledger accounts •Practical Problem 6-2A •Practical Problem 6-7A

accounting 20 494950

An  http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw-hill.com/accountant has debited an account for $4,000 and credited a liability account for $2,100. Which of the following would be an incorrect way to complete the recording of this transaction? Credit another asset account for $1,900. Credit another liability account for $1,900. Credit an  http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw-hill.com/expense account for $1,900. Debit another asset account for $1,900. Credit the owner’s capital account for $1,900. Alex Company has 10  http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw-hill.

Document Preview:

An  http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw-hill.com/accountant has debited an account for $4,000 and credited a liability account for $2,100. Which of the following would be an incorrect way to complete the recording of this transaction? Credit another asset account for $1,900. Credit another liability account for $1,900. Credit an  http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw-hill.com/expense account for $1,900. Debit another asset account for $1,900. Credit the owner’s capital account for $1,900. Alex Company has 10  http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw-hill.com/employees, who earn a total of $2,650 in salaries each working day. They are paid on Monday for the five-day workweek ending on the previous Friday. Assume that year ended December 31, is a Wednesday and all employees will be paid salaries for five full days on the following Monday. The adjusting entry needed on December 31 is: Debit Salaries Expense, $7,950; credit Salaries Payable, $7,950. Debit Salaries Expense, $5,300; credit Salaries Payable, $5,300. Debit Salaries Expense, $13,250; credit Salaries Payable, $13,250. Debit Salaries Payable, $7,950; credit Salaries Expense, $7,950. Debit Salaries Expense, $7,950;  http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw-hill.com/credit Cash, $7,950. The following transactions occurred during July:     1.  Received $1,030 cash for services provided to a customer during July. 2.  Received $3,500 cash  http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw-hill.com/investment from Barbara Hanson, the owner of the business. 3.  Received $880 from a customer in partial  http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw-hill.com/payment of his account receivable which arose from sales in June. 4.  Provided services to a customer on credit, $440. 5.  Borrowed $7,300 from the bank by signing a promissory note. 6.  Received $1,380 cash from a customer for services to be rendered  http://ezto.mhecloud.mcgraw-hill.com/next year.   What was the amount of revenue for July? $14,090. $1,030. $2,850. $1,470. $3,730. An adjusting entry was…

Attachments:

accounting 494952

Check the attachement and confirm if your 100% sure

Document Preview:

1 2??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting 494953

425 3 126 554 270 154 52 476 78 3.9 Belinda Santos P 4 – 4 Revenues and gains: Net sales Interest Other income Total revenues and gains Expenses: Cost of goods sold Selling and administrative Income Taxes Total expenses Net Income Earnings per Share Alexian Systems, Incl Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31,2013 ($ in millions, except earnings per share) 2.  Included in other income is an extraordinary loss of $90 million. The remaining amount is a gain on the sale of operating assets. 1.  Administrative expenses include $40,000.

Document Preview:

425 3 126 554 270 154 52 476 78 3.9 Belinda Santos P 4 – 4 Revenues and gains: Net sales Interest Other income Total revenues and gains Expenses: Cost of goods sold Selling and administrative Income Taxes Total expenses Net Income Earnings per Share Alexian Systems, Incl Income Statement For the Year Ended December 31,2013 ($ in millions, except earnings per share) 2.  Included in other income is an extraordinary loss of $90 million. The remaining amount is a gain on the sale of operating assets. 1.  Administrative expenses include $40,000. in restructuring costs.  It also includes impairment of long-lived assets of 10,000.* Both are considered infrequent but NOT unusual. 3. Cost of goods sold was increased by $5 million to correct an error in the calculation of 2012’s ending inventory. The amount is mutual. Prepare a revised income statement. Income tax rate is 40%. There were 20,000 shares of common stock outstanding throughout the year. ????????????

Attachments:

accounting 494954

i need this done in 3-4 hours from posting this question.

it is 10 simple multiple choice questions in accounting. i want all questions 100% correct. not a single question should be wrong.

respond only if you are confident.

Document Preview:

Question 1   An entity that reports a discontinued operation or an extraordinary item shall present basic and diluted earnings per share amounts for those line items Answer ??either on the face of the income statement or in the notes to the financial statements.????only in the notes to the financial statements.????only on the face of the income statement.????only if management chooses to do so as these amounts are not required to be disclosed either in the financial statements or the notes thereto.??2 points    Question 2   At December 31, 2014 and 2013, Rollins Corp. had 200,000 shares of common stock and 20,000 shares of 5 percent, $100 par value cumulative preferred stock outstanding. No dividends were declared on either the preferred or common stock in 2013 or 2014. Net income for 2014 was $1,000,000. For 2014, basic earnings per common share amounted to Answer ??$5.00.????$4.75.????$4.50.????$4.00.??2 points    Question 3   At December 31, 2014, the Carboneer Company had 150,000 shares of common stock issued and outstanding. On April 1, 2015, an additional 30,000 shares of common stock were issued. Carboneer’s net income for the year ended December 31, 2015, was $517,500. During 2015, Carboneer declared and paid $300,000 in cash dividends on its nonconvertible preferred stock. The basic earnings per common share, rounded to the nearest penny, for the year ended December 31, 2015, should be Answer ??$3.00.????$2.00.????$1.45.????$1.26.??2 points    Question 4   Basic earnings per share represents the amount of earnings attributable to Answer ??all common stock and dilutive securities.????common stock, preferred stock, and all dilutive securities.????each share of common stock, and options or warrants which convert to common stock.????each share of common stock outstanding, and any non-conditional conversions and exercises.??2 points    Question 5   Earnings per share disclosures are required only for Answer ??companies with complex capital…

Attachments:

accounting 494957

Problem 13-3A The stockholders’ equity accounts of Ashley Corporation on January 1, 2012, were as follows. Preferred Stock (8%, $49 par, cumulative, 10,200 shares authorized) $  387,100 Common Stock ($1 stated value, 1,937,100 shares authorized) 1,408,700 Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par—Preferred Stock 123,200 Paid-in Capital in Excess of Stated Value—Common Stock 1,496,800 Retained Earnings 1,814,400 Treasury Stock (10,300 common shares) 51,500 During 2012, the corporation had the following transactions and events pertaining to its stockholders’ equity. Feb.

Document Preview:

Problem 13-3A????The stockholders’ equity accounts of Ashley Corporation on January 1, 2012, were as follows. Preferred Stock (8%, $49 par, cumulative, 10,200 shares authorized)??$  387,100??Common Stock ($1 stated value, 1,937,100 shares authorized)??1,408,700??Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par—Preferred Stock??123,200??Paid-in Capital in Excess of Stated Value—Common Stock??1,496,800??Retained Earnings??1,814,400??Treasury Stock (10,300 common shares)??51,500???During 2012, the corporation had the following transactions and events pertaining to its stockholders’ equity. Feb. 1??Issued 24,100 shares of common stock for $123,900.??Apr. 14??Sold 6,000 shares of treasury stock—common for $33,800.??Sept. 3??Issued 5,100 shares of common stock for a patent valued at $35,700.??Nov. 10??Purchased 1,100 shares of common stock for the treasury at a cost of $5,700.??Dec. 31??Determined that net income for the year was $456,600.???No dividends were declared during the year. ????????? ?? ?? HYPERLINK “javascript:void(0)” ? ? (a)????Journalize the transactions and the closing entry for net income. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.) Date?Account Titles and Explanation?Debit?Credit??Feb. 1???????????????Apr. 14???????????????Sept. 3???????????????Nov. 10??????????Dec. 31??????????Click if you would like to Show Work for this question:?? HYPERLINK “javascript:void();” ?Open Show Work??? ??? ? HYPERLINK “javascript:xlinkobject(‘weygandt9780470534793c13-sec-0003′,’res_EAT_1288009649515_0_43312014009984234’);” ?LINK TO TEXT? ? HYPERLINK “javascript:xlinkobject(‘weygandt9780470534793c13-sec-0044′,’res_EAT_1288009649515_0_43312014009984234’);” ?LINK TO TEXT? ? HYPERLINK “javascript:xlinkobject(‘weygandt9780470534793c13-sec-0040′,’res_EAT_1288009649515_0_43312014009984234’);” ?LINK TO TEXT? ? HYPERLINK “javascript:xlinkobject(‘weygandt9780470534793c13-sec-0027′,’res_EAT_1288009649515_0_43312014009984234’);” ?LINK TO…

Attachments:

accounting 494958

American Guitar Company manufactures two different high quality acoustic guitars for retailers: beginner model and professional model. The company has two service departments: the maintenance department and the power department, and two manufacturing departments: the construction department and the finishing department. American Guitar chooses the reciprocal method to allocate service department costs. It uses operation costing to assign direct materials and conversion costs to its products, and absorption costing with normal costs for external reporting purposes.

In the Construction Department, the wooden guitars are built by highly skilled craftsmen and coated with several layers of lacquer. Then the units are transferred to the Finishing Department, where the bridge of the guitar is attached and the strings are installed. The guitars also are tuned and inspected in the Finishing Department[1]. American Guitar estimates to have an annual practical capacity of 6000 guitars (1500 units of professional model and 4500 units of beginner model). The budgeted sales for 2013 are 1300 units professional model and 4300 units of beginner model. The diagram below depicts the manufacturing process.

The following historical information has been collected from American Guitar’s accounting information systems:

2009

2010

2011

2012

Annual sales

4146(B) & 1611(P)

4456(B) & 1256(P)

4668(B) & 1322(P)

4075(B) & 1300(P)

July sales

393(B) & 183(P)

398(B) & 163(P)

405(B) & 168(P)

372(B) & 155(P)

2012

Total Overhead ($)

Total DLH of the two manufacturing departments[2]

January

134,000

2,210

February

137,000

2,280

March

148,000

2,510

April

155,000

2,790

May

157,000

2,980

June

165,000

3,590

July

169,000

3,490

August

168,000

3,030

September

163,000

3,040

October

157,000

3,380

November

139,000

2,420

December

133,000

2,100

Total

1,825,000

33,820

American Guitar s direct[3] and indirect MOH costs for the two service and two manufacturing departments in 2012:

Power Department[4]

Maintenance Department[5]

Construction Department

Finishing

Department

Total Amount

Labor-hours

2022

2032

18950

14870

37,874

Kilowatt-hours

2,000

7,000

40,800

30,200

80,000

Maintenance hours

140

60

800

1,000

2,000

Direct fixed costs

$60,000

$36,000

$480,000

$432,000

$1,008,000

Direct variable costs

$58,000

$40,000

$346,800

$358,200

$803,000

Indirect fixed costs

$9,600

Indirect variable costs

$4,400

American Guitar does not expect significant changes in its manufacturing costs in 2013.

At the end of June 2013, the balance in American Guitar s Materials Inventory account, which included 150 pounds of grade A veneered wood, was $2,640; the balance in the finished-goods inventory, which was valuated using the last-in, first-out (LIFO) method, consisted of 2 models, was $16,600.

Quantity and Unit Cost

Beginner model

20 units @ $430 each

Professional model

10 units @ $800 each

The following pertains to the month of July.

  1. There were no beginning inventories in both manufacturing departments.
  2. American Guitar’s work-in-process inventory on July 31 consisted of two jobs: B0642 and P0642. The ending WIP inventories at the finishing department for B0642 and P0642 have 10 EU and 6 EU respectively.
  3. Additions to and requisitions from the materials inventory during the month of July included the following.

Raw Materials

Purchased Parts

Additions

550 pounds of grade A veneered wood for $9,680

3300 pounds of grade B veneered wood for $41,580

100 set of premium bridges and strings for $1,840

400 set of regular bridges and strings for $6,560

Requisitions

Job B0639 (120 beginner units)

936 pounds of grade B wood

125 regular sets

Job B0640 (100 beginner units)

790 pounds of grade B wood

103 regular sets

Job B0641 (150 beginner units)

1170 pounds of grade B wood

153 regular sets

Job B0642 (15 beginner units)

118 pounds of grade B wood

10 regular sets

Job P0640 (30 professional units)

240 pounds of grade A wood

31 premium sets

Job P0641 (35 professional units)

273 pounds of grade A wood

32 premium sets

Job P0642 (10 professional units)

82 pounds of grade A wood

6 premium sets

  1. The average hourly rate for the construction and finishing departments in July was $15 and $14 respectively. The total payroll taxes and fringe benefits rate for American Guitar was 40% of wages paid. The July labor hours consisted of the following:

Account

Construction Department

Finishing Department

Job B0639 (120 beginner units)

350

264

Job B0640 (100 beginner units)

302

200

Job B0641 (150 beginner units)

448

285

Job B0642 (15 beginner units)

40

17

Job P0640 (30 professional units)

150

144

Job P0641 (35 professional units)

173

176

Job P0642 (10 professional units)

52

22

  1. 372 beginner models & 70 professional models were sold on account for $600 (beginner model) & $960 (professional model) each. The finished-goods inventory is valuated using LIFO method.
  2. The actual direct fixed costs for power department and maintenance department were $4,050 and $4,000 respectively. The actual direct variable costs for power department and maintenance department were $17,084 and $9,280 respectively.
  3. The actual direct fixed costs for construction department and finishing department were $40,100 and $35,800 respectively. The actual direct variable for construction department and finishing department were $33,084.60 and $34,038.40 respectively.
  4. Depreciation of the general facility and equipment shared by both manufacturing departments during July amounted to $12,000.
  5. Rent paid in cash for warehouse space used by the manufacturing departments during July was $1,200. Utility costs incurred for the warehouse during July amounted to $600. The invoices for these costs were received, but the bills were not paid in July.
  6. July property taxes on the general facility were paid in cash, $2,400.
  7. The insurance cost covering factory operations for the month of July was $3,100. The insurance policy had been prepaid.
  8. The costs of salaries and fringe benefits for sales and administrative personnel paid in cash during July amounted to $8,000.
  9. Depreciation on administrative office equipment and space amounted to $4,000.
  10. Other selling and administrative expenses paid in cash during July amounted to $35,000.
  11. The July 1 balances in selected accounts are as follows:

Cash

$138,000

Accounts Receivable

21,000

Prepaid Insurance

5,000

Accumulated Depreciation: Facility & Equipment

102,000

Accounts Payable

13,000

Required:

Part 1

Submit a hard copy of your work and email an Excel workbook to support your calculations on or before the due date for questions 1 7.

  1. What is the predetermined manufacturing overhead rate for external reporting purpose? Is it the most appropriate rate for managerial accounting? Why?
  2. Prepare the journal entries to record the transactions in July using normal costing.
  3. Calculate the overapplied or underapplied overhead for July. Use the proration method to prepare a journal entry to close this balance.
  4. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured for July.
  5. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods sold for July.
  6. Prepare an income statement for July.
  7. From the perspective of long-run product pricing, do you recommend American Guitar to keep its absorption costing with normal costs for pricing decision and performance evaluation? Why?

Part 2

Submit a hard copy of your work and email an Excel workbook to support your calculations on or before the due date for questions 1 11.

Recently, American Guitar has faced intense competition from oversea guitars manufacturers. Her competitors sell similar quality guitars averaged 25% less. American Guitar considers implementing the standard costing to improve cost control. After conducting task analysis in the manufacturing departments, American Guitar establishes the following standards:

1) Each finished guitar contains seven pounds of veneered wood. In addition, one pound of wood is typically wasted in the manufacturing process.

2) The veneered wood used in the beginner model has a standard price of $12 per pound and the professional model has a standard price of $18. The other parts needed to complete each beginner guitar (professional guitar), such as the bridge and strings, cost $15 ($18) per guitar.

3) The labor standards[6] for American Guitar’s two manufacturing departments are as follows:

Construction Department

Finishing Department

Beginner model (B)

3 hours of direct labor at $18 per hour

2 hours of direct labor at $20 per hour

Professional model (P)

4 hours of direct labor at $18 per hour

6 hours of direct labor at $20 per hour

  1. Assuming American Guitar implements the standard costing, and calculate the followings:

– Direct material and direct labor variances

– variable manufacturing overhead variances for both manufacturing departments in July.

– fixed manufacturing overhead variances for both manufacturing departments in July.

– standard cost for the beginner model and the professional model.

  1. Prepare the journal entries to record the transactions in July using the standard costing.
  2. Prepare entries to close all the variances using the proration method.
  3. Do you recommend American Guitar to price its products based on its standard costs? Why?

Prepare a presentation to answer the following questions:

  1. Do you recommend American Guitar to keep its current cost-accounting system or to implement the standard costing system? Why?
  2. Explain the interpretation and possible interactions between the variances calculated by the standard costing.
  3. Write a memo to the company evaluating American Guitar s July performance and indicate any appropriate action for management to fine-tune its strategy.

[1]Direct-material is added at the beginning of manufacturing process in construction department. The direct-material and conversion costs are incurred uniformly throughout the process in finishing department.

[2]American Guitar believes that overhead is affected by total monthly DLH of the two manufacturing departments.

[3] For a manufacturing department, direct costs refer only to overhead costs that are directly traceable to the department.

[4]Power department is to provide electricity to maintenance, construction and finishing department. Its service is measured by the kilowatt-hours. The kilowatt-hours provided by the department for 2010 & 2011 were 84,200 & 88,000 respectively.

[5]Maintenance department is to maintain all the equipment in power, construction and finishing department. Its service is measured by the maintenance hours. The maintenance hours provided by the department for 2010 & 2011 were 2,150 and 2,240 respectively.

[6] Direct-labor rates include employee benefits.

Attachments:

accounting 494959

Discussion: 1- “Ethics in Management Accounting versus Financial Accounting” Respond to the following: – From the e-Activity, assess the effectiveness of the current Institute of Management Accountants (IMA) code of professional conduct in promoting ethical behavior and providing guidance for the dilemmas managerial accountants are confronted with today. In your assessment, compare the IMA code of conduct to the AICPA code of professional conduct and its effectiveness.

Document Preview:

Discussion: 1- “Ethics in Management Accounting versus Financial Accounting” Respond to the following: – From the e-Activity, assess the effectiveness of the current Institute of Management Accountants (IMA) code of professional conduct in promoting ethical behavior and providing guidance for the dilemmas managerial accountants are confronted with today. In your assessment, compare the IMA code of conduct to the AICPA code of professional conduct and its effectiveness. – From the e-Activity, assess the aspects of your job that are most likely to be challenged ethically and suggest how you will handle these situations.[200 words] —————————————————————————————————– Discussion: 2 – “Corporate Malfeasance” Respond to the following: – Evaluate the difficulties companies are faced in implementing a control framework against fraud under Sarbanes-Oxley (SOX). In your evaluation, discuss how the external financial audit can assist in determining fraud. – Analyze how the SOX framework can prevent business model fraud in financial accounting and managerial accounting. Contrast the differences in the framework for financial accounting and managerial accounting. [200 words]???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting 494961

Discussion: 1″Labor and Materials Costs”:[250 words] Respond to the following: • From the first e-Activity, recommend how the American labor market can lower the direct labor costs of technology products while remaining competitive with the Asian market. • Evaluate and analyze how the U.S. can manufacture direct materials for technology products in the global marketplace at competitive costs. • As a Chief Financial Officer (CFO), recommend actions you could take regarding the company’s supply chain to reduce manufacturing costs of direct materials.

Document Preview:

Discussion: 1″Labor and Materials Costs”:[250 words] Respond to the following: • From the first e-Activity, recommend how the American labor market can lower the direct labor costs of technology products while remaining competitive with the Asian market. • Evaluate and analyze how the U.S. can manufacture direct materials for technology products in the global marketplace at competitive costs. • As a Chief Financial Officer (CFO), recommend actions you could take regarding the company’s supply chain to reduce manufacturing costs of direct materials. Please make sure you address all of the items listed above. Please refer to the announcements for additional guidance on the Threaded Discussions. [1-2 References] Discussion -2 “Standard Cost in a Process Cost System”: [250 words] Respond to the following: • From the second e-activity, assess the benefits of standard cost in a process cost system. • As a CFO of growing medium-sized company using a process cost system, assess the most important reasons for improving your current standard cost reporting system. • Evaluate the potential impact an upgrade can have on cost identification during the various stages of production. Please make sure you address all of the items listed above. Please refer to the announcements for additional guidance on the Threaded Discussions. [1-2 References]????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting 494962

Attached is all the information i have 38 dollars to put down now.

Document Preview:

50000 70000 120000 180000 350000 280000 400000 300000 -170000 -100000 750000 730000 250000 210000 40000 10000 240000 240000 220000 270000 750000 730000 1200000 800000 250000 70000 30000 100000 14.5 80000 5000 40000 5000 198000 191250 Cash Accounts receivable (net) Merchandise inventory Property plant, & equipment Less: Accumulated depreciation Total assets Income taxes payable Common stock Retained earnings Total liabilities & stock, equity The firm’s accrual-basis income statement revealed the following data: Sales Cost of goods sold selling and administrative expenses Depreciation expense Income taxes (There was no interest expense.) Dividends declared and paid during 19X2 Machine Hours Current Product Fixed Factory Overhead Expansion Product (estimate) Direct Materials $1.30 per unit Variable Selling Expense Based on Chapter 5’s exercise 5 $4.00 per unit $2.80 per unit $0.20 per unit Fixed Selling expenses $5.60 per unit Direct labor dollars needed per product Total Fixed Costs: Variable Factory Overhead $1.00 per Machine Hour Selling Price ? ABC’s Product information ABC Company’s current financial information (before/without expansion) Units produced and expected to be sold Accounts payable ABC purchased $100,000 of equipment for cash on August 14. Dec. 31,20X2 Dec. 31,20X1 ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

accounting 494965

Hello,

This is for my accoutning class. I need help figuring out the Solvency Ratios for debt to total assets and times interest earned. I ned to know if this is a good or bad debt to assets ratio. I also need a horizontal and vertcal analysis for the balance sheet and income statement.

I do know that in order to find the debt to total assets you need to divide the debt by the total assets. I also know that interest earned in calculated by taking net income plus interest expence plus tax exspense. After that I am lost.

accounting 494966

Question 1 Which of the following statements about users of accounting information is incorrect? Answer a. Management is an internal user. b. Taxing authorities are external users. c. Present creditors are external users. d. Regulatory authorities are internal users.

Document Preview:

Question 1 Which of the following statements about users of accounting information is incorrect? Answer a. Management is an internal user. b. Taxing authorities are external users. c. Present creditors are external users. d. Regulatory authorities are internal users.??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting 3 494967

I need this assignment to be done perfectly in excel and it should be professional excel work with links in cells so that teacher could understand how the answer has come.

If confident to give me all correct solutions with professional excel work then contact me.

I need it done by night 9th Oct, 2013. It is about 35 hours fron posting this question.

Document Preview:

11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 1,2,3 Cover Show your work: Determination (show your work) Explanation: 1 – Lease signing date 2 – Record the first payment 1. A lease involves payments of $1,000 per month for two years. The payments are made at the end of each month. The lease also involves a guaranteed residual value of $10,000 to be paid at the end of the 2-year period. The appropriate interest rate is 12% compounded monthly. Compute the present value of the minimum lease payments. 2. The lessor leased equipment to the lessee. The fair value of the equipment is $246,000. Lease payments are $35,000 per year, payable at the end of the year, for 10 years. The interest rate implicit in the lease is 9%. At the end of 10 years, the lessor will repossess the equipment. The lease does not include a bargain purchase option, and the equipment has a total estimated useful life of 15 years. Is the lease an operating lease or a capital lease? Explain. 3. On January 1, the lessee company signed an operating lease contract. The lease contract calls for $3,000 payments at the end of each year for 10 years. The rate implicit in the lease is 10%. Make the journal entries or memorandum necessary on the books of the lessee company (1) on the lease-signing date and (2) to record the first payment. Date Account Description Debit Credit Dr. Cr. To record lease To record first lease payment To record amortization of the leased asset. To accrue interest payable on capital lease at end of year To record the prepaid executory costs The temporary differences are expected to reverse in the following patterns: Year Gross Profit on Collections Bad Debt Write-Offs Total The enacted tax rates for this year and the next four years are as follows Assume that there will be sufficient income in each future year to realize any deductible amounts. For classification purposes, the bad debt write-offs are considered to be associated with a current asset, and the…

Attachments:

accounting 494969

Document Preview:

Question 1 (17 marks) HiSpeed Ltd. plans to manufacture cross-country skiing equipment. Its cash flows are highly dependent on the weather in early winter. HiSpeed operates under ideal conditions of uncertainty. On August 1, 2014, the beginning of its first year in business, HiSpeed acquires equipment to be used in its operations. The equipment will last two years, at which time its salvage value will be zero. The company finances the equipment purchase by issuing common shares. HiSpeed’s annual net cash flows will be $800 if the weather is snowy and $300 if it is not snowy. Assume that cash flows are received at year end. In each year, the objective probability that the weather is snowy is 0.7 and 0.3 that it is not snowy. The interest rate in the economy is 3% in both years. HiSpeed will pay a dividend of $50 at the end of each year of operation. Required (9 marks)??In 2014, the weather is snowy. Prepare a statement of financial position as at July 31, 2015, the end of HiSpeed’s first year of operations, and an income statement for the year.  (2 marks)??What timing of revenue recognition is implicit in the income statement you have prepared in part (a)? When ideal conditions do not hold, is this timing of revenue recognition relevant? Is it reliable? Explain.  (6 marks)  ??Assume that HiSpeed paid the present value you calculated in part (a) for its equipment. Calculate HiSpeed’s net income for the year ended July 31, 2015 on a historical cost basis, assuming that equipment is depreciated on a straight-line basis. Under the more realistic assumption that ideal conditions do not hold, which measure of net income is most relevant? Which is most reliable? Why?           Question 2 (18 marks) Prem has $2,000 that he wishes to invest for one year. He has narrowed his choices down to one of the following two actions: i: Buy bonds of X Ltd., a company that has a very high debt-to-equity ratio. These bonds pay 8% interest, unless X defaults, in which case Prem will…

Attachments:

accounting 494970

see attachment

Document Preview:

Teldar Paper Company manufactures three products (computer paper, newsprint, and specialty paper) in a continuous production process. Senior management has asked the controller to conduct an activity-based costing study. The controller identified the amount of factory overhead required by the critical activities of the organization as follows: The activity bases identified for each activity are as follows: The activity-base usage quantities and units produced for the three products were determined from corporate records and are as follows: Each product requires 0.8 machine hour per unit. Required: If required, round all per unit amounts to the nearest cent. 1.  Determine the activity rate for each activity. Production $ per mh Setup $ per setup Moving $ per move Shipping $ per cust. ord. Product Engineering $ per test run 2.  Determine the total and per-unit activity cost for all three products.   Total Activity Cost Activity Cost Per Unit Computer Paper $ $ Newsprint $ $ Specialty Paper $ $ ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting 494971

see attachment

Document Preview:

Just-in-Time Accounting Grand Prix Displays Inc. manufactures and assembles automobile instrument panels for both Yokohama Motors and Detroit Motors. The process consists of a just-in-time product cell for each customer’s instrument assembly. The data that follow concern only the Yokohama just-in-time cell. For the year, Grand Prix Displays Inc. budgeted the following costs for the Yokohama production cell: Grand Prix Displays Inc. plans 2,400 hours of production for the Yokohama cell for the year. The materials cost is $100 per instrument assembly. Each assembly requires 20 minutes of cell assembly time. There was no November 1 inventory for either Raw and In Process Inventory or Finished Goods Inventory. The following summary events took place in the Yokohama cell during November: Electronic parts and wiring were purchased to produce 7,300 instrument assemblies in November. Conversion costs were applied for the production of 7,200 units in November. 7,150 units were started, completed, and transferred to finished goods in November. 7,000 units were shipped to customers at a price of $400 per unit. Required: 1.  Determine the budgeted cell conversion cost per hour. $ per hour 2.  Determine the budgeted cell conversion cost per unit. $ per unit http://cvg.cengagenow.com/ilrn/takeAssignment/takeAssignmentMain.do?invoker=assignments&takeAssignmentSessionLocator=assignment-takeHide 3.  Journalize the summary transactions (a) through (d). a. b. c. d. Sale Cost   4.  Determine the ending balance in Raw and In Process Inventory and Finished Goods Inventory. Raw and In Process Inventory $ Finished Goods Inventory $ 5.  JIT accounting is different from traditional accounting because it is more a) complex or b) simplified and uses a)maximum b) minimal control????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

account for depreciable assets lo3 494914

Charlotte Motorcycle Repair Corporation purchased a machine on January 1, 2010, for $8,000 cash. The firm expects to use the machine for four years and thinks it will be worthless at the end of the four-year period. The company will depreciate the machine in equal annual amounts.

Requirements

1. Show the purchase of the machine and the first years depreciation in the accounting equation.

2. Show how the machine will be presented in the asset section of the balance sheet at December 31, 2010, and December 31, 2011, after appropriate adjustments

3. What amount of depreciation expense will be shown on the income statement for the year ended December 31, 2010? What amount will be shown for the year ended December 31, 2011?

4. Calculate the total depreciation expense for all four years of the assets life. What do you notice about the book value of the asset at the end of its useful life?

Document Preview:

Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Data Input Section: Estimated residual value Estimated useful life Depreciation Expense Per Year Helpful Hint: Use the following functions to calculate depreciation =SLN(cost,salvage,life) Output Section: Year ended December 31 Depreciation expense Accumulated depreciation Partial Balance Sheet Machine December 31 Less accumulated depreciation A s s e t s = #1 #2 Cash Accum. Depr. Liabilities + Stockholder’s Equity Problem 3-59A Cost of asset, January 1, 2010 Part 1. Part 2. Part 3. Part 4. Amount Formula 1 Fomula 2 Title Formula 3 Formula 4 Formula 5 Formula 6 Type answer starting here Charlotte Motorcycle Repair Corporation Reimers, Financial Accounting 3e 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00 12.00 13.00 2010.00 2011.00 2012.00 2013.00 14.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00 21.00 22.00 23.00 24.00 2010.00 25.00 26.00 27.00 28.00 29.00 30.00 31.00 211.00 2010.00 32.00 33.00 34.00 35.00 36.00 37.00 38.00 39.00 40.00 Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Data Input Section: Estimated residual value Estimated useful life Depreciation Expense Per Year Helpful Hint: Use the following functions to calculate depreciation =SLN(cost,salvage,life) Output Section: Year ended December 31 Depreciation expense Accumulated depreciation Partial Balance Sheet Machine December 31 Less accumulated depreciation A s s e t s = #1 #2 Cash Accum. Depr. Liabilities + Stockholder’s Equity Problem 3-59A Cost of asset, January 1, 2010 Part 1. Part 2. Part 3. Part 4. Amount Formula 1 Fomula 2 Title Formula 3 Formula 4 Formula 5 Formula 6 Type answer starting here Charlotte Motorcycle Repair Corporation Reimers, Financial Accounting…

Attachments:

account for notes payale with periodic payments of principal and interest 494915

Ultra Power, Inc. engaged in the following transactions related to long term liabilities during 2011:

a. On March 1, the company borrowed $50,000 for a machine. The loan is to be repaid in equal annual payments of $6,793 at the end of each of the next 10 years (beginning February 28, 2012); the interest rate is 6%

b. On October 1, the company borrowed $100,000 from the local credit union at an interst rate of 8%. The loan is for seven yhears, and Ultra power will make annual payments of $19,207 on September 30 of each year.

Requirements

1. For each loan, prepare an amortization schedule for the first four payments. Show the reduction in principal and the interest expense for each payment.

2. What total interest explense related to these two loans would Ultra Power, Inc. Show on its income statement for the year ended December 31, 2011

3. How much interst payable would Ultra Power Inc, show on its balance sheet at December 31, 2011?

Document Preview:

Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Principal Term in years Interest rate Principal balance Reduction in principal Interest expense Annual payment Payment Beginning bal. Machine a. Machine b. Annual payment date, February 28 Annual payment date, September 30 Total interest shown on income statement Total interest payable shown on balance sheet Problem 7-63A Part 1. Part 2. Part 3. Ultra Power, Inc Amount Formula 1 Formula 2 Formula 3 Formula 4 Reimers, Financial Accounting 3e 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00 12.00 Amount 13.00 2012.00 Amount 14.00 2013.00 Amount 15.00 2014.00 Amount 16.00 2015.00 Amount 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00 21.00 22.00 23.00 Amount 24.00 2012.00 Amount 25.00 2013.00 Amount 26.00 2014.00 Amount 27.00 2015.00 Amount 28.00 29.00 30.00 31.00 $0.00 32.00 33.00 34.00 35.00 $0.00 36.00 Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Principal Term in years Interest rate Principal balance Reduction in principal Interest expense Annual payment Payment Beginning bal. Machine a. Machine b. Annual payment date, February 28 Annual payment date, September 30 Total interest shown on income statement Total interest payable shown on balance sheet Problem 7-63A Part 1. Part 2. Part 3. Ultra Power, Inc Amount Formula 1 Formula 2 Formula 3 Formula 4 Reimers, Financial Accounting 3e 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00 12.00 Amount 13.00 2012.00 Amount 14.00 2013.00 Amount 15.00 2014.00 Amount 16.00 2015.00 Amount 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00 21.00 22.00 23.00 Amount 24.00 2012.00 Amount 25.00 2013.00 Amount 26.00 2014.00 Amount 27.00 2015.00 Amount 28.00 29.00 30.00 31.00 $0.00 32.00 33.00 34.00 35.00 $0.00 36.00 ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

for accountguru only 494916

Attached is the syllabus in word per your instructions…..

Document Preview:

Syllabus School of Business XACC/291 Version 1 Principles of Accounting II Copyright © 2011 by University of Phoenix. All rights reserved. Course Description This course introduces accounting concepts in a business environment. Students learn to create and apply accounting documents in making better business decisions. Other topics include plant assets, liabilities, accounting for corporations, investments, statements of cash flows, financial statement analysis, time value of money, payroll accounting, and other significant liabilities. Policies Faculty and students/learners will be held responsible for understanding and adhering to all policies contained within the following two documents: University policies: You must be logged into the student website to view this document. Instructor policies: This document is posted in the Course Materials forum. University policies are subject to change. Be sure to read the policies at the beginning of each class. Policies may be slightly different depending on the modality in which you attend class. If you have recently changed modalities, read the policies governing your current class modality. Course Materials Weygandt, J. J., Kimmel, P. D., & Kieso, D. E. (2010). Financial accounting (7th ed.). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons. All electronic materials are available on the student website. Week One: Principle Assets Details Due Points Objectives Prepare journal entries to account for transactions related to accounts receivable and bad debt using both percentage of sales and the percentage of receivables methods. Distinguish between tangible and intangible assets. Course Preparation Read the course description and objectives. Read the instructor’s biography and post your own. Reading Read Ch. 8 of Financial Accounting. Reading Read Ch. 9 of Financial Accounting. Reading Review Ch. 1 of Financial Accounting. Reading Review Ch. 2 of Financial…

Attachments:

accountin 205 494917

Profit Margin

Year Ending December 2012

Year Ending December 2011

Year Ending December 2010

Revenues

40,000 (.05%)

35,000

33,000

Operating Expenses

Salaries

15,000

10,000

9,000

Maintenance and Repairs

6,000

9,000

10,000

Rental Expense

2,500

2,500

2,500

Depreciation

2,000

2,000

2,000

Fuel

4,000

3,500

2,500

Total Operating Expenses

29,500

27,000

26,000

Operating Income

10,500

8,000

7,000

Sales and Administrative Expenses

6,000

4,000

3,000

Interest Expense

2,500

2,000

1,000

Net Income

2,000

2,000

3,000

Above is a comparative income statement for Cecil, Inc. for the years 2010, 2011, and 2012. Calculate the profit margin for each of these years. Comment on the profit margin trend.

Document Preview:

Profit Margin?? ?Year Ending December 2012?Year Ending December 2011?Year Ending December 2010??Revenues?40,000 (.05%)?35,000?33,000??Operating Expenses?????Salaries?15,000?10,000?9,000??Maintenance and Repairs?6,000?9,000?10,000??Rental Expense?2,500?2,500?2,500??Depreciation?2,000?2,000?2,000??Fuel?4,000?3,500?2,500??Total Operating Expenses?29,500?27,000?26,000??Operating Income?10,500?8,000?7,000??Sales and Administrative Expenses?6,000?4,000?3,000??Interest Expense?2,500?2,000?1,000??Net Income?2,000?2,000?3,000????Above is a comparative income statement for Cecil, Inc. for the years 2010, 2011, and 2012. Calculate the profit margin for each of these years. Comment on the profit margin trend.

Attachments:

accountin spreadsheet project 494918

Afternoon, I have a very short deadline for this project.can anyone help? Deadline today 5:30.

Document Preview:

EXCEL SPREADSHEET ASSIGNMENT Assignment Due Date is August 12th Attached are the December 31, 2012 Balance Sheet and Income Statement for ABC Company. Use this information as your basis for projections. You are to create an Excel spreadsheet that projects the balance sheet and income statement on a monthly basis for six consecutive months. The following assumptions are to be used on the assignment: Sales increase 5% per period Selling expenses are 10% of sales Administrative expenses are 15% of sales Tax rate is 34% Half the sales are for cash. The other half are collected 70% in month of sale and the balance in the month following the month of sale. All merchandise purchases are on account. 70% are paid in the month of sale and 30% in the month following the month of purchase. Merchandise purchased each month is 70% of that month’s sales. Ending inventory is 25% of the following month’s sales. On February 1, the company purchased a building for $750,000 and financed the entire amount over twenty years with monthly payments beginning on March 1. You must prepare an amortization schedule to amortize the loan, and link the payments to the balance sheet and income statement. Use an interest rate of 6 percent. The building has a 40-year useful life. Use straight line depreciation. The equipment has a remaining useful life of 120 months. Use straight line depreciation. Selling expenses are paid 80% in the month incurred and 20% in the following month. Administrative expenses are paid 90% in the month incurred and 10% in the following month. Prepare projected monthly income statements through the month of June 2012 and prepare a projected balance sheet at the end of each month. Note: The spreadsheet must be prepared for “what if” situations. That is, if any variable changes, the cell formulas must take that change into consideration and flow it through the statements. For example, if projected sales change, the spreadsheet must make…

accounting 1 assignment 494919

I have 2 assignments I would like completed. One is a case study, The other is an extra credit assignment due by the 1st. Attached are the assigment guidelines.

Document Preview:

ACCT 2101 Financial Accounting Case Assignment Please read the material provided and answer the required questions. Please submit a computer printed hard copy of your work for grading. Do not forget to write your full name on the copy you submit. You may briefly discuss the case with other students, but because this is not a group assignment, you are required to write up your solutions independently and submit your individual work for grading. A duplicate of others’ work will not be acceptable. This assignment will be due in class on Monday December 2, 2013. Late submission will not be accepted. 1Please read the following material and answer the questions. Once upon a time, there lived a feudal landlord in a small province of Western Europe. The landlord, Baron Coburg, lived in a castle high on a hill. He was responsible for the well-being of many peasants who occupied the lands surrounding his castle. Each spring, as the snow began to melt, Baron would decide how to provide for all his peasants during the coming year. One spring, Baron was thinking about the wheat crop of the coming growing season. “I believe that 30 acres of my land, being worth 5 bushels of wheat per acre, will produce enough wheat for next winter,” he mused, “but who should do the farming? I believe I’ll give Ivan and Frederick the responsibility of growing the wheat.” Then, Ivan and Frederick were summoned for an audience with Baron Coburg. “Ivan, you will farm on the 20-acre plot of ground and Frederick will farm the 10-acre plot,” Baron began, “I will give Ivan 20 bushels of wheat for seed and 20 pounds of fertilizers. (20 pounds of fertilizers are worth 2 bushels of wheat.) Frederick will get 10 bushels of wheat for seed and 10 pounds of fertilizers. I will give each of you an ox to pull a plow, but you will have to make arrangement with Feyador the Plowmaker for a plow. The oxen, incidentally, are only…

Attachments:

accounting 1 assignment 494920

Need the following assignment to be done today

Document Preview:

1 ACCT 2101 Financial Accounting Case Assignment Please read the material provided and answer the required questions. Please submit a computer printed hard copy of your work for grading. Do not forget to write your full name on the copy you submit. You may briefly discuss the case with other students, but because this is not a group assignment, you are required to write up your solutions independently and submit your individual work for grading. A duplicate of others’ work will not be acceptable. This assignment will be due in class on Monday December 2, 2013. Late submission will not be accepted. 2 Please read the following material and answer the questions. Once upon a time, there lived a feudal landlord in a small province of Western Europe. The landlord, Baron Coburg, lived in a castle high on a hill. He was responsible for the well-being of many peasants who occupied the lands surrounding his castle. Each spring, as the snow began to melt, Baron would decide how to provide for all his peasants during the coming year. One spring, Baron was thinking about the wheat crop of the coming growing season. “I believe that 30 acres of my land, being worth 5 bushels of wheat per acre, will produce enough wheat for next winter,” he mused, “but who should do the farming? I believe I’ll give Ivan and Frederick the responsibility of growing the wheat.” Then, Ivan and Frederick were summoned for an audience with Baron Coburg. “Ivan, you will farm on the 20-acre plot of ground and Frederick will farm the 10-acre plot,” Baron began, “I will give Ivan 20 bushels of wheat for seed and 20 pounds of fertilizers. (20 pounds of fertilizers are worth 2 bushels of wheat.) Frederick will get 10 bushels of wheat for seed and 10 pounds of fertilizers. I will give each of you an ox to pull a plow, but you will have to make arrangement with Feyador the Plowmaker for a plow. The oxen, incidentally, are only three years old and have never been used for farming, so they should have a good 10…

Attachments:

accounting 1 assignment 494921

due today. i uploaded the answers which another expert found for me. Unfortunately they are wrong. Please help

Document Preview:

Fredrick – balance sheet – beginning Assetsbushels Capital & liabilities bushels Seeds 10 Fertilizer 1 Ox 40 Land 50 Owner’s equity 101 Total 101 Total 101 Ivan- balance sheet beginning Assets bushels Assets bushels Seeds 20 Fertilizer 2 Ox 40 Land 100 Owner’s equity 162 Totals 162 Totals 162 Ivan – income statement bushels bushels wheat 243 Production expenses seed 20 fertilizer 2 Ox usage 4 Plow usage 3 Owner withdrawal 20 ( 47) Owners share 196 Fredrick – income statement Bushels bushels wheat 138 Production expenses seed 10 fertilizer 1 Ox usage 4 Plow usage 1 Owner withdrawal 30 ( 46) Owners share 92 The best peasant was Fredrick who produced a high harvest though he had minimum resources. No,1?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

accounting 1 assignment 494922

acct 1 h.w. due today. please help. can negotiate price

Document Preview:

1 ACCT 2101 Financial Accounting Case Assignment Please read the material provided and answer the required questions. Please submit a computer printed hard copy of your work for grading. Do not forget to write your full name on the copy you submit. You may briefly discuss the case with other students, but because this is not a group assignment, you are required to write up your solutions independently and submit your individual work for grading. A duplicate of others’ work will not be acceptable. This assignment will be due in class on Monday December 2, 2013. Late submission will not be accepted. 2 Please read the following material and answer the questions. Once upon a time, there lived a feudal landlord in a small province of Western Europe. The landlord, Baron Coburg, lived in a castle high on a hill. He was responsible for the well-being of many peasants who occupied the lands surrounding his castle. Each spring, as the snow began to melt, Baron would decide how to provide for all his peasants during the coming year. One spring, Baron was thinking about the wheat crop of the coming growing season. “I believe that 30 acres of my land, being worth 5 bushels of wheat per acre, will produce enough wheat for next winter,” he mused, “but who should do the farming? I believe I’ll give Ivan and Frederick the responsibility of growing the wheat.” Then, Ivan and Frederick were summoned for an audience with Baron Coburg. “Ivan, you will farm on the 20-acre plot of ground and Frederick will farm the 10-acre plot,” Baron began, “I will give Ivan 20 bushels of wheat for seed and 20 pounds of fertilizers. (20 pounds of fertilizers are worth 2 bushels of wheat.) Frederick will get 10 bushels of wheat for seed and 10 pounds of fertilizers. I will give each of you an ox to pull a plow, but you will have to make arrangement with Feyador the Plowmaker for a plow. The oxen, incidentally, are only three years old and have never been used for farming, so they should have a good 10…

Attachments:

accounting 1 assignment 494923

Document Preview:

1 ACCT 2101 Financial Accounting Case Assignment Please read the material provided and answer the required questions. Please submit a computer printed hard copy of your work for grading. Do not forget to write your full name on the copy you submit. You may briefly discuss the case with other students, but because this is not a group assignment, you are required to write up your solutions independently and submit your individual work for grading. A duplicate of others’ work will not be acceptable. This assignment will be due in class on Monday December 2, 2013. Late submission will not be accepted. 2 Please read the following material and answer the questions. Once upon a time, there lived a feudal landlord in a small province of Western Europe. The landlord, Baron Coburg, lived in a castle high on a hill. He was responsible for the well-being of many peasants who occupied the lands surrounding his castle. Each spring, as the snow began to melt, Baron would decide how to provide for all his peasants during the coming year. One spring, Baron was thinking about the wheat crop of the coming growing season. “I believe that 30 acres of my land, being worth 5 bushels of wheat per acre, will produce enough wheat for next winter,” he mused, “but who should do the farming? I believe I’ll give Ivan and Frederick the responsibility of growing the wheat.” Then, Ivan and Frederick were summoned for an audience with Baron Coburg. “Ivan, you will farm on the 20-acre plot of ground and Frederick will farm the 10-acre plot,” Baron began, “I will give Ivan 20 bushels of wheat for seed and 20 pounds of fertilizers. (20 pounds of fertilizers are worth 2 bushels of wheat.) Frederick will get 10 bushels of wheat for seed and 10 pounds of fertilizers. I will give each of you an ox to pull a plow, but you will have to make arrangement with Feyador the Plowmaker for a plow. The oxen, incidentally, are only three years old and have never been used for farming, so they should have a good 10…

Attachments:

accounting 1 payroll 494924

I HAVE DONE MOST OF THE WORK PLEASE READ EVERYTHING CAREFULLY ATTACHMENTS BELOW

Document Preview:

Continuing Problem-A Excel Instructions OASDI HI FICA FIT SIT CIT DEDUCTIONS PAYROLL REGISTER MARITAL STATUS NO. OF W/H ALLOW. TOTAL EARNINGS Totals FUTA SUTA Name: FOR PERIOD ENDING Enter the appropriate numbers/formulas in the shaded (gray) cells. An asterisk (*) will appear to the right of an incorrect answer. 20– DESCRIPTION DATE DEBIT CREDIT JOURNAL EMPLOYEE 11 Carson, Fran M. 12 Wilson, William A. 13 Utley, Harry T. 21 Fife, Lawrence R. 22 Smith, Lucy K. 31 Fay, Gretchen R. 32 Robey, Glenda B. 33 Schork, Thomas K. 51 Hardy, Barbara T. 99 Kipley, Carson C. REGULAR EARNINGS HOURS WORKED RATE PER HOUR AMOUNT KIPLEY COMPANY, INC. January 8, 20 – – OVERTIME EARNINGS SIMPLE INSURANCE HEALTH GROUP NET PAY CHECK NO. TAXABLE EARNINGS Wages and Salaries FICA Taxes Payable – OASDI FICA Taxes Payable – HI Employees FIT Payable Employees SIT Payable Employees SUTA Payable Employees CIT Payable SIMPLE Deductions Payable Group Insurance Premiums Collected Health Insurance Premiums Collected Salaries Payable Jan. 14 Salaries Payable Cash Payroll Taxes FUTA Taxes Payable SUTA Taxes Payable Jan. 12 Jan. 12 Continuing Payroll Problem-A Net Taxable Earnings Rate Net FUTA FUTA Tax SUTA Tax Earnings Excel Instructions using Excel 2010: 1. Enter the appropriate numbers/formulas in the shaded (gray) cells. An asterisk (*) will appear to the right of an incorrect answer. 2. A formula begins with an equals sign (=) and can consist of any of the following elements: Operators such as + (for addition), – (for subtraction), * (for multiplication), and / (for division). Cell references, including cell addresses such as B52, as well as named cells and ranges Values and text Worksheet functions (such as SUM) 3. You can enter a formula into a cell manually (typing it in) or by pointing to the cells. To enter a formula manually, follow…

accounting 494926

If it’s possible, show work so I can redo the problems step by step. Thanks

Document Preview:

The contribution margin ratio is 25% for Grain Company and the break-even point in sales is $196,800. To obtain a target net operating income of $78,000, sales would have to be: (Do not round intermediate calculations.) $285,000 $508,800 $274,800 $217,200 Rothe Company manufactures and sells a single product that it sells for $80 per unit and has a contribution margin ratio of 40%. The company’s fixed expenses are $46,400. If Rothe desires a monthly target net operating income equal to 20% of sales, the amount of sales in units will have to be: (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places and final answer to the nearest whole number.) 1,786 units 2,900 units 1,340 units 3,767 units Darth Company sells three products. Sales and contribution margin ratios for the three products follow:   Product X Product Y Product Z  Sales in dollars $26,000 $46,000 $106,000  Contribution margin ratio 51%   46%   21%     Given these data, the contribution margin ratio for the company as a whole would be: (Round your intermediate calculations to 2 decimal places. Round your answer to whole percentage.) 32% 49% 39% it is impossible to determine from the data given. Cindy, Inc. sells a product for $10 per unit. The variable expenses are $5 per unit, and the fixed expenses total $30,100 per period. By how much will net operating income change if sales are expected to increase by $43,000? $21,500 increase $40,850 increase $8,600 decrease $12,900 increase Pool Company’s variable expenses are 27% of sales. Pool is contemplating an advertising campaign that will cost $19,100. If sales increase by $79,100, the company’s net operating income should increase by: (Do not round intermediate calculations.) $38,643 $71,686 $21,357 $10,123 Data concerning Runnells Corporation’s single product appear below:   Per Unit Percent of Sales  Selling price $170 100%  Variable expenses 85 50%  Contribution margin $…

Attachments:

accounting 494927

1. The following information was made available from the

income statement and balance sheet of Lauren Company.

Item 12/31/10 12/31/09

Accounts Receivable $53,400 58,600

Accounts Payable 35,600 32,700

Merchandise Inventory 85,000 79,000

Sales (2010) 243,000

Interest Revenue (2010) 5,600

Dividend Revenue (2010) 1,200

Tax Expense (2010) 12,300

Salaries Expense (2010) 28,000

COGS (2010) 65,000

Interest Expense (2010) 3,600

Operating Expenses 28,500

Complete the cash flow from operating activities section for

Lauren Company using the direct method for the year ended

December 31, 2010.

2. Given the following balance sheet, complete a horizontal

analysis. Compute the percentage to the nearest tenth of a

percent.

2

Jill s Bikes

Comparative Balance Sheet

For Years Ended December 31, 2011 and 2010

(in thousands) 2011 2010 Difference Percentage

Assets

Current Assets

Cash and Equivalents $72 $94

Accounts Receivable, net 122 104

Inventory 288 232

Total Current Assets 482 430

Property, Plant and Equipment 638 358

Total Assets $1,120 $788

Liabilities

Current Liabilities

Accounts Payable $242 $148

Accrued Liabilities 48 66

Total Current Liabilities 290 214

Long-Term Liabilities 346 208

Total Liabilities 636 422

Stockholders Equity

Common Stock 70 60

Retained Earnings 414 306

Total Stockholders Equity 484 366

Total Liabilities and

Stockholders Equity $1,120 $788

Part B: Answer each of the following questions. Each answer is

worth 4 points.

1. Record the following transactions using the accounting

equation.

Example:

Assets = Liabilities + Equity

XXXX(cash) XXXX(accounts payable)

A. Amanda invests $17,000 cash into her merchandising

business.

B. She buys $6,500 of office equipment and $3,000 of office

supplies with cash from Office Depot.

C. Additional purchases were supplies for $35,000 on

account from various suppliers.

2. Journalize the following transactions and omit the explanations.

A. ABC Corporation purchased $15,000 of office furniture by

putting $7,000 down in cash and the rest on account on

April 8.

B. The corporation paid $60,000 for a two-year lease on

April 19.

C. The corporation had sales of $45,000, of which $35,000

were on account on April 20.

D. The corporation borrowed $25,000 by signing a note

payable on April 22.

E. The corporation paid $1,250 on one of its accounts

payable on April 26.

3. Prepare a trial balance from the following information for

Learn a New Language, Inc. for December 31, 2012.

Accounts payable $5,012

Common stock $9,692

Cash $3,928

Notes payable $1,439

Wages expense $777

Marketing expense $493

Equipment $8,345

Accounts receivable $1,142

Inventory $8,074

Sales $6,616

4. Compute the missing information from this post-closing trial

balance.

Cash $34,689

Accounts Receivable 9,467

Prepaid Rent 5,000

Prepaid Insurance (A)

Supplies 944

Accounts Payable $5,389

Wages Payable (B)

Common Stock 37,049

Retained Earnings 8,234

_______ _______

Total $52,356 $52,356

5. Journalize the following transactions using the perpetual

inventory method.

Aug. 6 Purchased $830 of inventory on account from

Johnston with terms of 2/10, n/30.

Aug. 8 Purchased $2,611 of inventory for cash from

Pillner Company.

Aug.15 Paid for August 6 purchase from Johnston.

Aug. 17 Purchased $1,743 of merchandise on account

from Luis Company with Terms of 3/15, n/45.

6. Given the following information, prepare a balance sheet for

Isaiah s Tool Shed for the year ending December 31, 2012.

Cash $65,750 Retained Earnings $179,319

Common Stock $35,000 Equipment $27,500

Accounts Receivable $11,478 Accounts Payable $29,450

Land $30,000 Inventory $78,311

Prepaid Supplies $7,357 Income Taxes Payable $4,209

Office Computers $11,345 Other PPE $31,446

Accum. Depr. (all) $23,459 Prepaid Insurance $8,250

7. Rick Company s beginning inventory and purchases during

the fiscal year ended December 31, 2012, were as follows:

(Note: The company uses a perpetual system of inventory.)

Units Unit Price Total Cost

January 1 Beginning inventory 18 $24 $432

March 12 Sold 13

April 11 Purchase 45 $29 $1,305

June 20 Sold 33

Aug 16 Purchase 35 $27 $945

Sept 11 Sold 29

Total Cost of Inventory

Ending inventory is 23 units. $2,682

What is the cost of goods sold for Rick Company for 2012

using LIFO?

8. Assume that in Year 1, the ending merchandise inventory is

overstated by $30,000. If this is the only error in Years 1

and 2, fill in the items below, indicating which items will be

understated, overstated, or correctly stated for Years 1 and

2.

Item Year 1 Year 2

Ending inventory ___________ _____________

Beginning inventory ___________ _____________

Cost of goods sold ___________ _____________

9. Below is a list of treatments of accounting topics. Place GAAP

on the line if the treatment is GAAP-based and place IFRS on

the line if the treatment is IFRS-based.

A. Interest and dividend income are reported in the

investing section of the cash flow statement.__________

B. Interest expense is reported in the financing section of

the cash flow statement. ___________

C. The use of LIFO is prohibited. ___________

Units Unit Price Total Cost

January 1 Beginning inventory 18 $24 $432

March 12 Sold 13

April 11 Purchase 45 $29 $1,305

June 20 Sold 33

Aug 16 Purchase 35 $27 $945

Sept 11 Sold 29

Total Cost of Inventory

Ending inventory is 23 units. $2,682

10. Record the necessary journal entries from the following bank

reconciliation information for July 31, 2011:

Bank Balance, July 31, 2011 $36,739

Checkbook Balance, July 31, 2011 36,444

Bank collection of note receivable 1,200 + 165

interest

Bank service charge 35

Deposits in transit 2,400

Outstanding checks 1,245

NSF check from customer 330

Correction of book error (check #456 written for $160,

recorded at $610) gas expense

11. Journalize the following transactions for Tammy Company:

Sept. 1 Sold $3,500 of merchandise to Jim on account

Oct. 1 Exchanged Jim s account receivable for a fourmonth,

8% note for $3,500

Dec. 31 Recorded accrued interest on Jim s note

Feb. 1 Jim paid off his note with interest (round to

nearest dollar)

12. A truck was purchased on January 2 at a cost of $60,000.

It s expected to be used for five years and to have a residual

value of $5,000 after 120,000 miles of service. The truck

was driven for 23,000 miles the first year and 25,000 miles

the second year. Calculate the depreciation expense to the

nearest dollar for the first and second years.

Method Year 1 Year 2

Straight-line ________ ________

Double-declining-balance ________ ________

Units-of-production ________ ________

13. Prepare the general journal entries for the following

transactions:

Jan. 2, 2011 Purchased land with a building on it for

$750,000. The land is worth $300,000.

Paid $150,000 cash down and signed a

mortgage payable for the balance.

Dec. 31, 2011 Depreciation is computed using the

straight-line method. The estimated

salvage value of the building is $75,000

and has an estimated life of 20 years.

July 1, 2012 The building and land are sold for $825,000

cash.

14. Journalize the following treasury stock transactions:

June 3 Reacquired 350 shares of $12 par common stock

at $10 per share.

June 7 Sold 180 shares of treasury stock for $16 per

share.

June 8 Sold 150 shares of treasury stock for $9 per

share.

15. Lowry Landscapes had net income of $50,000 for 2010.

Land was sold for $40,000, of which $3,000 was a gain.

The beginning cash balance was $53,000, and the ending

cash balance was $151,000. Depreciation expenses were

$11,000. Prepare a statement of cash flows for the year

ended December 31, 2010, for Lowry Landscapes using the

indirect method.

Attachments:

accounting 494928

1 5 2 5000 28000 285000 12000 90000 24000 195000 41000 28000 80000 60000 120000 80000 55000 81000 8000 161000 161000 6400 12180 50000 26580 1.18 5 5 3 5 5 4 10 0.06 500 20000 5000 0.08 0 1000 47000 20 1000 100000 46800 12 0.06 80000 24000 10 0.09 100 5 1000 12 0.1 5 6 32 2.5 1.18 5 5 7 0 -125000 0 -300000 1 58000 1 150000 2 75000 2 160000 3 67000 3 120000 4 50000 4 95000 5 5 8 245000 326000 0.08 0.18 0.

Document Preview:

1 5 2 5000 28000 285000 12000 90000 24000 195000 41000 28000 80000 60000 120000 80000 55000 81000 8000 161000 161000 6400 12180 50000 26580 1.18 5 5 3 5 5 4 10 0.06 500 20000 5000 0.08 0 1000 47000 20 1000 100000 46800 12 0.06 80000 24000 10 0.09 100 5 1000 12 0.1 5 6 32 2.5 1.18 5 5 7 0 -125000 0 -300000 1 58000 1 150000 2 75000 2 160000 3 67000 3 120000 4 50000 4 95000 5 5 8 245000 326000 0.08 0.18 0.33 10 9 5 10 2012 2011 42000 44000 43000 35000 34000 34500 26000 30000 28000 500000 350000 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 10 Cash Accounts Receivable Inventory Total Current Assets Plant & Property Total Assets Accounts Payable Long term debt Equity Sales Cost of sales Gross Profit Salaries & Benefits Operating Expenses EBIDT Depreciation Interest Taxes NIAT Assets Liabilities & Equity Income Statement Calculate: Working Capital Debt to equity Ratio Referring to the Balance Sheet and Income Statement in Question 2. Shares outstanding Beta PV You are considering purchasing the bond described below: Face Value YTM Coupon Rate Coupon Payments Semi-annually You are looking for an annual reutrn of 14%. Today’s price Dividends Paid quarterly Year Investment/Income Your company is trying to decide between the following investments. It’s required return is 18% Debt A Company has the following debt/equity structure: Cost of Debt Cost of Equity Tax Rate Calculate the firms WACC (Weighted Average Cost of Capital) Name DO NOT COPY FROM OR PARAPHASE YOUR TEXTBOOK. ANSWER “IN YOUR OWN WORDS” AND GIVE AN EXAMPLE(S) WHENEVER APPROPIATE per quarter Years Risk Free return is 6% and your market risk premium is 10% NPV IRR Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of corporate debt. here is some information about ABC company Average Net Sales Cost of Goods Sold Calculate the company’s operating and cash cyles (show your work) A/R turnover A/P turnover A/R…

Attachments:

accounting 494929

There are 2 parts to this discussion, please answer each with at least 150 words and any references used. Part 1. Centralized or Decentralized? In a centralized company, top management, versus a decentralized company, makes all major planning and operating decisions where managers of separate divisions or units are delegated operating responsibility. Characterize businesses that you have previously worked for or currently work for as either centralized or decentralized.

Document Preview:

There are 2 parts to this discussion, please answer each with at least 150 words and any references used. Part 1. Centralized or Decentralized? In a centralized company, top management, versus a decentralized company, makes all major planning and operating decisions where managers of separate divisions or units are delegated operating responsibility. Characterize businesses that you have previously worked for or currently work for as either centralized or decentralized. How did you make this determination? Part 2 Differential Analysis and Product Pricing Identify decisions from your personal experiences that fit under each of the categories of differential analysis presented in the text, including lease or sell, discontinue an unprofitable segment, manufacture or purchase (make or buy), replace fixed asset, process further or sell, and accept additional business at a special price. For example, a decision to cook dinner or order a pizza is essentially a “make or buy” decision. Deciding whether to go to work or go on to graduate school after finishing a baccalaureate degree is a “sell or process further” decision.???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting 494930

Homework and discussion is attached.

Document Preview:

ACCT301 Week 2 Homework In two to three paragraphs, describe the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and why it is important to the accounting profession. (15 points) Name and briefly describe the five components of COSO’s internal control framework. (10 points) Describe the relationship between the Sarbanes-Oxley Act and COSO. (10 points) Tom Jackson is a CPA who really likes to go to Las Vegas, play poker, and bet on football games. Tom knows that the accounting profession disapproves of gambling, but because he spends a lot of time studying sports facts and how to win at poker, he feels that he is simply making educated decisions based on facts. He says that this is no different from using accounting information to buy stocks. Use the fraud triangle as a basis to comment on Tom’s gambling activities. (15 points) DISCUSSION ?’S Describe what you think is the most important control activity that a company can implement. Why do you think that the one you chose is the most important? Lets start by defining Internal Controls.  What are they and what is their purpose? Describe one of the three elements that are present when fraud occurs. Of the three elements, which do you think is present first in an ethical situation? Lets start this week by discussing each of the three elements of the Fraud Triangle.  Pick one of them, give a definition and describe how it interrelates with internal controls.?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting 494931

E10-6 According to the accountant of Ulner Inc., its payroll taxes for the week were as follows: $198.40 for FICA taxes, $19.84 for federal unemployment taxes, and $133.92 for state unemployment taxes. Instructions: Journalize the entry to record the accrual of the payroll taxes. In a microsft word, or excel and in apa standards E10-8 Jim Thome has prepared the following list of statements about bonds. 1. Bonds are a form of interest-bearing notes payable. 2.

Document Preview:

E10-6 According to the accountant of Ulner Inc., its payroll taxes for the week were as follows: $198.40 for FICA taxes, $19.84 for federal unemployment taxes, and $133.92 for state unemployment taxes. Instructions: Journalize the entry to record the accrual of the payroll taxes. In a microsft word, or excel and in apa standards E10-8 Jim Thome has prepared the following list of statements about bonds. 1. Bonds are a form of interest-bearing notes payable. 2. When seeking long-term financing, an advantage of issuing bonds over issuing common stock is that stockholder control is not affected. 3. When seeking long-term financing, an advantage of issuing common stock over issuing bonds is that tax savings result. 4. Secured bonds have specific assets of the issuer pledged as collateral for the bonds. 5. Secured bonds are also known as debenture bonds. 6. Bonds that mature in installments are called term bonds. 7. A conversion feature may be added to bonds to make them more attractive to bond buyers. 8. The rate used to determine the amount of cash interest the borrower pays is called the stated rate. 9. Bond prices are usually quoted as a percentage of the face value of the bond. 10. The present value of a bond is the value at which it should sell in the marketplace. Instructions Identify each statement above as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement. E10-18 *E10-18 Hrabik Corporation issued $600,000, 9%, 10-year bonds on January 1, 2011, for $562,613.This price resulted in an effective-interest rate of 10% on the bonds. Interest is payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1. Hrabik uses the effective-interest method to amortize bond premium or discount P10-3A On May 1, 2011, Newby Corp. issued $600,000, 9%, 5-year bonds at face value. The bonds were dated May 1, 2011, and pay interest semiannually on May 1 and November 1. Financial statements are prepared annually on December 31. Instructions (a) Prepare the…

Attachments:

accounting 494933

This is paper instructions per teacher: You have been given the personal financial information for a client and are expected to render advice using the information they have provided. All of the information you will need can be found on the client data sheet. This is a real-life scenario, and therefore you will be dealing with real-life issues that a financial advisor would face. The client is likely to provide information you will not need to answer the questions, so review the information closely. Also, the client is not very organized with their records, so you must organize the data. You will have 2 files to upload a word document answering all of the questions below, and an excel spread sheet showing how you arrived at your answers (questions requiring an excel sheet are indicated with *). Each answer should be detailed and thorough, with calculations and references supporting your answer. I will count off for grammatical errors, and any answer that is not complete. As the project is a large component of your grade for this course, I recommend spending some time on this and using the book to justify your answer where necessary. I will give as much partial credit on missed answers as I can. However, if you show no work on how you arrived at your answer, it is not possible for me to give partial credit. Make sure to upload your word and excel documents in a format that is easily printable and put your name on each of them. There is to be no group work and I will not accept any late assignments.

Document Preview:

Final Case Study Summer 2013 Sam and Linda Fleming are asking you for a comprehensive retirement plan. Since Sam just turned 50 years old he thinks it is time to start taking a more serious look at his finances. Sam has a free spirit and likes to make more radical shifts in his asset allocation. His wife Linda is also 50 years old. She grew up with a very conservative background and she is adamant that their funds be placed in all bonds and CDs. Because of their disagreement, they recently decided to sell all of their holdings and are sitting entirely in cash. Linda works part-time as a nurse assistant and brings home $20,000 annually. Sam works as a sole practitioner of his own consulting company, Sam Advice, LLC. Sam only made $45,000 last year, all of which he categorized as wages. Katie and John are the two children, ages 14 and 12. Last year, Sam and Linda bought a brand new house valued at $280,000. They were able to put 20% down and financed the remainder for a 30 year note at 4.75%. Since they recently bought a home, their itemized deductions are somewhat higher at $21,000. Since Sam quit his job 2 years ago, he has not bought any new life insurance to replace that at his old job. Last year their portfolio did well and made $950 in interest, they realized capital gains of $27,000 and Sam will have to pay $1500 in self-employment tax. Other things you should know: They are currently living on $52,000 per year. In retirement they expect to only spend $45,000. Credit Card balance due is $280 payable by the end of 2013 Sam just bought a motorcycle – he financed the $18,000 bike at 8.9% for 3 years Sam has an IRA rollover valued at $198,000 Linda has a Roth IRA valued at $18,000 Sam has a Roth IRA valued at $46,000 They have $20,000 in checking/savings accounts They want to plan to live to age 100 (just to be on the safe side) Inflation is expected to be 3% Nominal Rate of return based on your recommendations will be 8% Social…

Attachments:

accounting 494934

Need help with chapters 22-25, see attachment.

Document Preview:

Accounting Homework Help Cengage Login : mailto:Loriet41@yahoo.comLoriet41@yahoo.com Password: Myplaces2 Help with Chapter Homework 22-25 $15.00 dollars per chapter???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting 494935

Hi Need help with 4 WileyPlus problems.

Document Preview:

????????Question 1 The common stock of Warner Inc. is currently selling at $117 per share. The directors wish to reduce the share price and increase share volume prior to a new issue. The per share par value is $8; book value is $73 per share. 6.01 million shares are issued and outstanding.??Prepare the necessary journal entries assuming the following. (If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.) (a)??The board votes a 2-for-1 stock split.?? (b)?? The board votes a 100% stock dividend.?? No.?Account Titles and Explanation?Debit?Credit??(a)??????????(b)???????????(To record the declaration.)???????????????(To record the distribution.)???? ????Question 2 On January 5, 2012, Phelps Corporation received a charter granting the right to issue 5,400 shares of $103 par value, 6% cumulative and nonparticipating preferred stock, and 52,700 shares of $10 par value common stock. It then completed these transactions. Jan. 11??Issued 21,720 shares of common stock at $18 per share.??Feb. 1??Issued to Sanchez Corp. 4,500 shares of preferred stock for the following assets: equipment with a fair value of $59,390; a factory building with a fair value of $172,900; and land with an appraised value of $326,300.??July 29??Purchased 1,850 shares of common stock at $19 per share. (Use cost method.)??Aug. 10??Sold the 1,850 treasury shares at $14 per share.??Dec. 31??Declared a $0.30 per share cash dividend on the common stock and declared the preferred dividend.??Dec. 31??Closed the Income Summary account. There was a $183,440 net income.??? (a) Record the journal entries for the transactions listed above. (Round answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125. If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts. Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually….

Attachments:

account classmate response 494912

Hi I need help writing a reply to a classmate response in accounting class. it is due TODAY NOV 18, BY 10PM EASTERN TIME no less than 200 words with references and citations please. Plagarism free work please this will be sent through turnitin. Thank you

T wrote to dq 1

There appears to be some disagreement about the relevancy and usefulness of Activity Based Costing (ABC) among business leaders and accounting types. In fact, research conducted by Stratton, Desroches, Lawson & Hatch (2009) found that among both ABC users and non-users there were several major common concerns regarding the use and applicability of ABC. Specifically, their research revealed that concerns about how costs are allocated, ensuring that the allocations reflect the actual use of resources, a lack of timely information and difficultly with revising or updating the ABC system were commonly reported (p.35). However, the same researchers also found that these two groups (i.e. ABC users and non-users) most commonly reported that they perceived the benefits of ABC to include; better information upon which to base product decisions, an enhanced ability to conduct profitability analysis for individual products or services, and better information for assessing and making operational improvements and performance evaluations (p.33).

These results seem to imply a couple of key things. First, that it takes real work and commitment to implement and continue to administer an ABC program within an organization. Second, that if one successfully accomplishes the first challenge, the information gained can be very useful and worth the effort for the company.

In order to achieve success on the first item above, it appears that there are at least a couple of critical considerations. The initial implementation of an ABC program within a company needs to have the full support of management and the project team must include those key individuals necessary to correctly design and carryout the program (Agbejule, 2006, p. 68). Ensuring that project leaders and all staff involved in this phase have a good understanding and basic education about ABC is also important to ensuring the necessary organization commitment over time (Agbejule, 2006, p. 68).

Another consideration appears to be important to the overall long-term success of any ABC implementation. Specifically, companies need to understand that the program will likely need to be periodically revised and updated. Adopting an ABC program and then just leaving it alone may not result in the desirable outcomes and benefits suggested above. It appears that the project team will need to consistently evaluate the program to identify those things that are working well, and those that are not. In fact, Ray and Gupta (1992) point out that if ABC is to achieve its maximum effectiveness, it should be closely monitored (p. 46). They go on to opine that internal auditing of the ABC program should include specifically looking at the identified cost drivers, how common costs are being assigned and how new products or lines will be incorporated into the ABC program (p.46). Finally, the overall usefulness of the ABC program in comparison to the cost and effort of implementation should be frequently evaluated (Ray & Gupta, 1992, p.46).

Resources

Agbejule, A. (2006). Motivation for activity-based costing implementation. Journal of Accounting & Organizational Change,2(1), 42-73. doi:http://dx.doi.org/10.1108/18325910610654126

Ray, M. R., & Gupta, P. P. (1992). Activity-based costing. The Internal Auditor, 49(6), 45. Retrieved from http://search.proquest.com.proxy.davenport.edu/docview/202731031?accountid=40195

Stratton, W. O., Desroches, D., Lawson, R. A., & Hatch, T. (2009). Activity-based costing: Is it still relevant? Management Accounting Quarterly, 10(3), 31-40. Retrieved fromhttp://search.proquest.com.proxy.davenport.edu/docview/222805126?accountid=40195

Attachments:

acc205 complete course 494890

I am looking for tutorials on the ACC205 complete course. This is all 5 weeks; discssion questions and assignments. Please specify if you are including the final assignment or not.

Document Preview:

Week Two Exercise Assignment Revenue and Expenses 1. Recognition of concepts. Jim Armstrong operates a small company that books entertainers for theaters, parties, conventions, and so forth. The company’s fiscal year ends on June 30. Consider the following items and classify each as either (1) prepaid expense, (2) unearned revenue, (3) accrued expense, (4) accrued revenue, or (5) none of the foregoing. a Interest owed on the company’s bank loan, to be paid in early July b Professional fees earned but not billed as of June 30 c Office supplies on hand at year-end d An advance payment from a client for a performance next month at a convention e The payment in part (d) from the client’s point of view f Amounts paid on June 30 for a 1-year insurance policy g The bank loan payable in part (a) h Repairs to the firm’s copy machine, incurred and paid in June 2. Understanding the closing process. Examine the following list of accounts: Note Payable Accumulated Depreciation: Building Alex Kenzy, Drawing Accounts Payable Product Revenue Cash Accounts Receivable Supplies Expense Utility Expense Which of the preceding accounts a. appear on a post-closing trial balance? b. are commonly known as temporary, or nominal, accounts? c. generate a debit to Income Summary in the closing process? d. are closed to the capital account in the closing process? 3. Adjusting entries and financial statements. The following information pertains to Sally Corporation: The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one half of this amount had been earned. Sally Corporation provided $1,500 of services to Artech Corporation; no billing had been made by December 31. Salaries owed to employees at year-end amounted to $1,000. The Supplies account revealed a balance of $8,800, yet only $3,300 of supplies were actually on hand at the end of the period. The company paid $18,000…

acc206 week 3 assignment help 494891

ACC 206 Week 3 Assignment: Chapter 4 and 5 Problems Please complete the following 7 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Chapter 4 Exercise 7 7. Overhead application: Working backward The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours.

Document Preview:

ACC 206 Week 3 Assignment: Chapter 4 and 5 Problems Please complete the following 7 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Chapter 4 Exercise 7 7. Overhead application: Working backward The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review: Division A Division B Actual machine hours 22,500 ? Estimated machine hours 20,000 ? Overhead application rate $4.50 $5.00 Actual overhead $110,000 ? Estimated overhead ? $90,000 Applied overhead ? $86,000 Over- (under-) applied overhead ? $6,500 Find the unknowns for each of the divisions. Chapter 4 Problem 2 2. Computations using a job order system General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger; Work in process $ 35,200 Finished goods 86,900 Cost of goods sold 128,700 Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows: Direct Materials Direct Labor Job No. Amount Job No. Amount 101 $5,000 101 $7,800 115 19,500 103 20,800 116 36,200 115 42,000 Other 35,800 116 18,000 $96,500 Other 25,900 $114,500 Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively. General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are…

Attachments:

acc225 week 9 final project comprehensive problem perpetual 494893

ACC225 Week 9 Final Project Comprehensive Problem-Perpetual

Document Preview:

8785 83 6100 4100 16 8786 84 3990 1890 22 8787 85 6850 4990 26 8788 86 14210 8230 31 31150 19210 78 37729 37072 83 574 10 79 4074 4074 11 80 8800 8800 17 81 13650 13650 24 82 9030 8120 280 630 25 83 3080 3080 31 76363 70722 363 5278 81 4459 91 4550 9 82 350 350 11 83 5978 122 6100 15 84 59220 59220 38200 30 85 6713 137 6850 31 86 66052 66052 42500 31 142772 350 17500 125272 350 80700 3410 76 2968 2968 742 742 8 3411 77 6174 126 6300 15 3412 78 5320 5320 3150 3150 19 3413 79 8624 176 8800 23 3414 80 13377 273 13650 26 3415 81 1283 1283 29 3416 82 7000 7000 30 3417 83 5320 5320 3150 3150 57108 575 28933 28750 65 175 175 3 66 798 798 12 67 854 854 68 553 553 31 69 669 669 31 70 289 289 31 71 567 567 31 72 329 329 73 124775 350 175 99910 329 567 6300 10640 553 742 2968 289 669 1283 31 74 156422 156422 31 75 31647 31647 31 76 7000 7000 101 50247 142772 193019 31 57108 135911 106 4725 175 4550 31 31150 35700 31 17500 18200 119 220080 798 219282 31 575 218707 31 70722 289429 31 80700 208729 31 19210 189519 124 430 363 793 31 289 504 125 2447 574 3021 9 350 2671 24 630 3301 31 669 2632 128 3318 553 2765 163 22470 4074 26544 12 854 25690 164 9898 329 10227 165 38920 166 17556 567 18123 201 7098 798 6300 12 854 5446 31 76363 81809 31 28750 53059 301 308085 31647 339732 31 7000 332732 302 7000 7000 31 7000 0 413 31150 31150 31 125272 156422 31 156422 0 414 175 175 31 175 0 415 350 350 31 350 0 502 19210 19210 31 80700 99910 31 99910 0 612 329 329 31 329 0 613 567 567 31 567 0 620 3150 3150 30 3150 6300 31 6300 0 621 5320 5320 30 5320 10640 31 10640 0 637 553 553 31 553 0 641 742 742 31 742 0 642 2968 2968 31 2968 0 650 289 289 31 289 0 651 669 669 31 669 0 …

Attachments:

acc230 fri 8am f2013 ch 3 hw 494894

Assignment: CHAPTER 3 HW 1. Multiple Choice 3-1 A factor that causes or leads to a change in a cost or activity is a(n) a. slope. b. intercept. c. driver. d. variable term. e. cost object. 2. Multiple Choice 3-4 The following cost formula was developed by using monthly data for a hospital. Total Cost = $128,000,000 + ($12,000 x Number of Patient Days) In the cost formula, the term $128,000,000 a. is the total variable cost. b. is the dependent variable. c. is the variable rate. d. is the total fixed cost. e. cannot be determined from the above formula. 3.

Document Preview:

Assignment: CHAPTER 3 HW??1. Multiple Choice 3-1 A factor that causes or leads to a change in a cost or activity is a(n) a. slope.?????b. intercept.?????c. driver.?????d. variable term.?????e. cost object.????? 2. Multiple Choice 3-4 The following cost formula was developed by using monthly data for a hospital. Total Cost = $128,000,000 + ($12,000 x Number of Patient Days) In the cost formula, the term $128,000,000 a. is the total variable cost.?????b. is the dependent variable.?????c. is the variable rate.?????d. is the total fixed cost.?????e. cannot be determined from the above formula.????? 3. Multiple Choice 3-5 The following cost formula was developed by using monthly data for a hospital. Total Cost = $128,000,000 + ($12,000 x Number of Patient Days) In the cost formula, the term $12,000 a. is the variable rate.?????b. is the dependent variable.?????c. is the independent variable.?????d. is the intercept.?????e. cannot be determined from the above formula.????? 4. Multiple Choice 3-6 The following cost formula was developed by using monthly data for a hospital. Total Cost = $128,000,000 + ($12,000 x Number of Patient Days) In the cost formula, the term “Number of patient days” a. is the variable rate.?????b. is the intercept.?????c. is the dependent variable.?????d. is the independent variable.?????e. cannot be determined from the above formula.????? 5. Multiple Choice 3-7 The following cost formula was developed by using monthly data for a hospital. Total Cost = $128,000,000 + ($12,000 x Number of Patient Days) In the cost formula, the term “Total cost” a. is the variable rate.?????b. is the intercept.?????c. is the dependent variable.?????d. is the independent variable.?????e. cannot be determined from the above formula.????? 6. Multiple Choice 3-8 The following cost formula for total purchasing cost in a factory was developed using monthly data. Total Cost = $235,000 + ($75 x Number of Purchase Orders) Next month, 8,000 purchase orders are predicted. The…

Attachments:

acc560 mcqs 494896

Week 6 – Chapter 7 Pre- Quiz Study 15 QUESTIONS Question 1 Which of the following stages of the management decision-making process is improperly sequenced? Evaluate possible courses of action ? Make decision. Assign responsibility for the decision ? Identify the problem. Identify the problem ? Determine possible courses of action. Assign responsibility for decision ? Determine possible courses of action.

Document Preview:

Week 6 – Chapter 7 Pre- Quiz Study 15 QUESTIONS Question 1 Which of the following stages of the management decision-making process is improperly sequenced? Evaluate possible courses of action ? Make decision. Assign responsibility for the decision ? Identify the problem. Identify the problem ? Determine possible courses of action. Assign responsibility for decision ? Determine possible courses of action. Question 2 A segment has the following data: Sales $700,000 Variable expenses 300,000 Fixed expenses 550,000 What will be the incremental effect on net income if this segment is eliminated, assuming the fixed expenses will be allocated to profitable segments? $400,000 decrease cannot be determined from the data provided $5,000 decrease $400,000 increase Question 3 New Age Makeup produces face cream. Each bottle of face cream costs $10 to produce and can be sold for $13. The bottles can be sold as is, or processed further into sunscreen at a cost of $14 each. New Age Makeup could sell the sunscreen bottles for $23 each. Face cream must be processed further because its profit is $9 each. Face cream must not be processed further because costs increase more than revenue. Face cream must not be processed further because it decreases profit by $1 each. Face cream must be processed further because it increases profit by $3 each. Question 4 A company decided to replace an old machine with a new machine. Which of the following is considered a relevant cost? The book value of the old equipment Depreciation expense of the old equipment The current disposal price of the old equipment The loss on disposal of the old equipment Question 5 Incremental analysis would not be appropriate for: analysis of manufacturing variances. elimination of an unprofitable segment. an allocation of limited resource decision. a make or buy decision. Question 6 Sandusky Inc. has the following costs when producing 100,000 units: Variable…

Attachments:

acc561 week 1 quiz 494897

University of Phoenix, Northern Virginia Campus ACC 561 Accounting Course Quiz 1 (Chapters 1, 5, 6) Facilitator: Randolph A. Stanley Student Name:___________________________ Grade:__________________________________ Instructions: Please answer all questions. Each question worth 1point for a total of 25points. You must only select one answer for each question. 1. _____ refers to accounting information developed for managers within an organization. a. Internal auditing b. Managerial accounting c. Financial accounting Tax accounting 2.

Document Preview:

University of Phoenix, Northern Virginia Campus ACC 561 Accounting Course Quiz 1 (Chapters 1, 5, 6) Facilitator: Randolph A. Stanley Student Name:___________________________ Grade:__________________________________ Instructions: Please answer all questions. Each question worth 1point for a total of 25points. You must only select one answer for each question. 1. _____ refers to accounting information developed for managers within an organization. a. Internal auditing b. Managerial accounting c. Financial accounting Tax accounting 2. The primary users of management accounting information are _____. a. bankers b. governmental regulatory authorities c. internal decision makers suppliers 3. The Hola Company held a Christmas party. The company expected attendance of 100 persons and prepared the following budget: Hotel room rental $500 Food 500 Entertainment 800 Decorations 400 Totals $2,200 After all bills for the party were paid, the total came to $2,315. Details are: $575 for hotel room rental; $640 for food; $750 for entertainment; and $350 for decorations. One hundred persons attended the party. What is the total budget variance? a. $115 unfavorable is the total budget variance. b. $115 favorable is the total budget variance. c. $25 favorable is the total budget variance. d. $140 unfavorable is the total budget variance. 4. The Hola Company held a Christmas party. The company expected attendance of 100 persons and prepared the following budget: Hotel room rental $600 Food 500 Entertainment 800 Decorations 300 Totals $2,200 After all bills for the party were paid, the total came to $2,315. Details are: $575 for hotel room rental; $640 for food; $750 for entertainment; and $350 for decorations. One hundred persons attended the party. What is the main reason for the unfavorable total budget variance? a. Hotel room rent is the main…

acc 561 wiley plus week 4 week 5 and week 6 assignments 494898

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Question 1W4?? ?? ?Duggan Company applies manufacturing overhead to jobs on the basis of machine hours used. Overhead costs are expected to total $300,960 for the year, and machine usage is estimated at 125,400 hours.??For the year, $322,290 of overhead costs are incurred and 131,900 hours are used. ????  ????? ?? ? ????Compute the manufacturing overhead rate for the year. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25.) Manufacturing overhead rate? ?$? per machine hour??????  ????? ?? ? ????What is the amount of under- or overapplied overhead at December 31? Manufacturing Overhead? ?$ ??????  ????? ?? ? ????Prepare the adjusting entry to assign the under- or overapplied overhead for the year to cost of goods sold. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.) Account Titles and Explanation?Debit?Credit??????????????  ????? ?????????? ?????????       ?Question 2W4?? ?? ?The ledger of Custer Company has the following work in process account. Work in Process—Painting??5/1 ?Balance ?4,230 ? 5/31?Transferred out????5/31 ?Materials ?6,820 ? ? ? ??5/31 ?Labor ?3,950 ? ? ? ??5/31 ?Overhead ?2,100 ? ? ? ??5/31 ?Balance ??? ? ? ???Production records show that there were 550 units in the beginning inventory, 30% complete, 1,450 units started, and 1,510 units transferred out. The beginning work in process had materials cost of $2,520 and conversion costs of $1,710. The units in ending inventory were 40% complete. Materials are entered at the beginning of the painting process. ????  ????? ?? ? ????(a) How many units are in process at May 31? Work in process, May 31? ?? units???(b) What is the unit materials cost for May? (Round unit costs to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.25.) The unit materials cost for May? ?$???(c) What is the unit conversion cost for May? (Round unit costs to 2 decimal places, e.g. 2.25.) The unit conversion cost for May? ?$??????  ????? ?? ? ????(d) What is the total cost of units transferred out in May?…

Attachments:

acc 561 wiley plus week 6 494899

Exercise 20-3
Exercise 22-1
Brief Exercise 23-3
Brief Exercise 23-4
Brief Exercise 23-6

Document Preview:

??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

acc 561 wileyplus week 4 assignment exercise 15 5 exercise 494901

ACC/561
WileyPlus, Week 4 Assignment

Exercise 15-5
Exercise 16-3
Exercise 17-1

Document Preview:

Exercise 15-5??????Duggan Company applies manufacturing overhead to jobs on the basis of machine hours used. Overhead costs are expected to total $353,920 for the year, and machine usage is estimated at 126,400 hours.?For the year, $368,283 of overhead costs are incurred and 130,100 hours are used. (a)??????Compute the manufacturing overhead rate for the year. (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25.) ? Manufacturing overhead rate??$ ??????????_________per machine hour?? (b) What is the amount of under or over-applied overhead at December 31? (c) Prepare the adjusting entry to assign the under or over-applied overhead for the year to cost of goods sold. Exercise 16-3 The ledger of Custer Company has the following work in process account. Work in Process—Painting 5/1 Balance 4,170 5/31 Materials 7,190 5/31 Labor 3,510 5/31 Overhead 2,210 ?5/31 Transferred out ???5/31 Balance ? ??? Production records show that there were 500 units in the beginning inventory, 30% complete, 1,460 units started, and 1,450 units transferred out. The beginning work in process had materials cost of $2,480 and conversion costs of $1,690. The units in ending inventory were 40% complete. Materials are entered at the beginning of the painting process. Instructions (a) How many units are in process at May 31? (a) (b) What is the unit materials cost for May? (c) What is the unit conversion cost for May? (b) & (c) (d) What is the total cost of units transferred out in May? (e) What is the cost of the May 31 inventory? Exercise 17-1 Wilkins Inc. has two types of handbags: standard and custom. The controller has decided to use a plantwide overhead rate based on direct labor costs. The president has heard of…

Attachments:

acc 561 wileyplus week 4 assignment exercise 15 5 exercise 16 3 exercise 17 1 494902

ACC/561 WileyPlus, Week 4 Assignment Exercise 15-5 Exercise

Exercise 15-5

Duggan Company applies manufacturing overhead to jobs on the basis of machine hours used. Overhead costs are expected to total $353,920 for the year, and machine usage is estimated at 126,400 hours.
For the year, $368,283 of overhead costs are incurred and 130,100 hours are used.

(a)

Compute the manufacturing overhead rate for the year.(Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 1.25.)

Manufacturing overhead rate

$

_________per machine hour

(b) What is the amount of under or over-applied overhead at December 31?

(c) Prepare the adjusting entry to assign the under or over-applied overhead for the year to cost of goods sold.

Exercise 16-3

The ledger of Custer Company has the following work in process account.

Work in Process Painting

5/1 Balance 4,170

5/31 Materials 7,190

5/31 Labor 3,510

5/31 Overhead 2,210

5/31 Transferred out

5/31 Balance

Production records show that there were 500 units in the beginning inventory, 30% complete, 1,460 units started, and 1,450 units transferred out. The beginning work in process had materials cost of $2,480 and conversion costs of $1,690. The units in ending inventory were 40% complete. Materials are entered at the beginning of the painting process.

Instructions

(a) How many units are in process at May 31?

(a)

(b) What is the unit materials cost for May?

(c) What is the unit conversion cost for May?

(b) & (c)

(d) What is the total cost of units transferred out in May?

(e) What is the cost of the May 31 inventory?

Exercise 17-1

Wilkins Inc. has two types of handbags: standard and custom. The controller has decided to use a plantwide overhead rate based on direct labor costs. The president has heard of activity-based costing and wants to see how the results would differ if this system were used. Two activity cost pools were developed: machining and machine setup. Presented below is information related to the company s operations.

Standard Custom

Direct labor costs $43,700 $102,000

Machine hours 1,500 1,380

Setup hours 96 440

Total estimated overhead costs are $298,400. Overhead cost allocated to the machining activity cost pool is $195,100, and $103,300 is allocated to the machine setup activity cost pool.

Instructions

(a) Compute the overhead rate using the traditional (plant-wide) approach.

(b) Compute the overhead rates using the activity-based costing approach.

(c) Determine the difference in allocation between the two approaches.

Attachments:

accc 494903

Document Preview:

1.       Problem 6-14 Conservative versus aggressive financing [LO5] Collins Systems, Inc., is trying to develop an asset-financing plan. The firm has $520,000 in temporary current assets and $420,000 in permanent current assets. Collins also has $620,000 in fixed assets.   (a) Construct two alternative financing plans for the firm. One of the plans should be conservative, with 60 percent of assets financed by long-term sources and the rest financed by short-term sources. The other plan should be aggressive, with only 20 percent of assets financed by long-term sources and the remaining assets financed by short-term sources. The current interest rate is 13 percent on long-term funds and 8 percent on short-term financing. Compute the annual interest payments under each plan.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)     Total interest  Conservative $     Aggressive $      (b) Given that Collins’s earnings before interest and taxes are $400,000, calculate earnings after taxes for each of your alternatives. Assume a tax rate of 25 percent. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)     Earning after taxes  Conservative $     Aggressive $    3.       Problem 6-8 Short-term versus longer-term borrowing [LO3] Biochemical Corp. requires $690,000 in financing over the next three years. The firm can borrow the funds for three years at 9.25 percent interest per year. The CEO decides to do a forecast and predicts that if she utilizes short-term financing instead, she will pay 7.50 percent interest in the first year, 12.15 percent interest in the second year, and 8.25 percent interest in the third year.   (a) Determine the total interest cost under each plan. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)   Interest cost  Fixed cost financing $     Variable short-term financing $      (b) Which plan is less costly?       Fixed cost plan Short-term plan 4.       Problem 6-12 Matching asset mix and financing plans [LO3] Winfrey Diet Food Corp….

Attachments:

acciunting 494904

Document Preview:

15 Dual Assessment of Data Quality in Customer Databases ADIR EVEN Ben-Gurion University of the Negev and G. SHANKARANARAYANAN Babson College Quantitative assessment of data quality is critical for identifying the presence of data defects and the extent of the damage due to these defects. Quantitative assessment can help define realistic quality improvement targets, track progress, evaluate the impacts of different solutions, and prioritize improvement efforts accordingly. This study describes a methodology for quantitatively assessing both impartial and contextual data quality in large datasets. Impartial assessmentmeasures the extent to which a dataset is defective, independent of the context in which that dataset is used. Contextual assessment, as defined in this study, measures the extent to which the presence of defects reduces a dataset’s utility, the benefits gained by using that dataset in a specific context. The dual assessment methodology is demonstrated in the context of Customer Relationship Management (CRM), using large data samples from real-world datasets. The results from comparing the two assessments offer important insights for directing quality maintenance efforts and prioritizing quality improvement solutions for this dataset. The study describes the steps and the computation involved in the dual-assessment methodology and discusses the implications for applying the methodology in other business contexts and data environments. Categories and Subject Descriptors: E.m [Data]: Miscellaneous General Terms: Economics, Management, Measurement Additional Key Words and Phrases: Data quality, databases, total data quality management, information value, customer relationship management, CRM ACM Reference Format: Even, A. and Shankaranarayanan, G. 2009. Dual assessment of data quality in customer databases. ACM J. Data Inform. Quality 1, 3, Article 15 (December 2009), 29 pages. DOI = 10.1145/1659225.1659228. http://doi.acm.org/10.1145/1659225.1659228….

Attachments:

acciunting 494905

Document Preview:

Technical Paper: Database Administrator for Department Store Due Week 10 and worth 150 points The Strayer Oracle Server may be used to test and compile the SQL Queries developed for this assignment. Your instructor will provide you with login credentials to a Strayer University maintained Oracle server. Imagine that you have been hired as the database administrator for a local department store. The department store has recently expanded by opening five (5) stores within your local region. They have also launched a series of marketing campaigns to attract new customers and increase sales. For your hired role, you will be responsible for creating and maintaining an enterprise-wide database system that will hold the sales and inventory data for the organization. The designed database will help operations in supporting its new business marketing strategy. Using the concepts presented throughout the course, you will develop a plan to create this database and establish a design that aligns with the product sales initiatives of the organization. Write a twelve to fifteen (12-15) page paper in which you: Identify the potential sales and department store transactions that can be stored within the database. Design a database solution and the potential business rules that could be used to house the sales transactions of the department store.  Evaluate all relationships of each entity within your database solution using the Crow’s Foot notation. Include all data elements, entities, relationships (such as 1:M, 1:1, M:N), and cardinalities for the department store database in your diagram. Note: The graphically depicted solution is not included in the required page length. Research the Internet for best practices of how retail stores use databases for retaining customers and increasing sales and complete the following: Justify how Big Data tools could be used for forecasting sales and inventory of the department store. Propose two (2) SQL Stored Procedures that use SQL…

Attachments:

acco 1095 management accounting activity based costing 494906

Activity Based Costing:

CHALLENGES AND BENEFITS OF ACTIVITY BASED COSTING

APPLICATION OF ACTIVITY BASED COSTING IN AMERICA (TEXAS GENERAL SERVICES COMMISSION)

THE UTILIZATION OF ACTIVITY BASED COSTING MODEL IN CZECH REPUBLIC

ACTIVITY BASED COSTING IN CHINA: A CASE STUDY OF XU JI ELECTRIC CO. LTD

APPLICATION OF ACTIVITY-BASED COSTING SYSTEM ON THE AIR LINE COMPANIES

Essay:
You are required to write an extended essay of no longer than 2,000 words on the following:

1) ABC is still relevant for companies in all geographical locations critically discuss
Hints: Students should analyse the academic journals, professional (CIMA & ACCA) literature and other sources such as the economist and good quality newspapers to support your discussion.
Students should NOT: simply as assume the title of this essay is a fact, it is NOT, this is a statement. The critical analysis is KEY to this essay.
You must use the following article within your work as well as others which you have found throughout your own research, failure to do so will severely reduce your grade. We expect a minimum of five academic journal( CIMA & ACCA literature do not count as academic journals) articles to be used plus other sources mentioned above, the other articles should not be simply ones you have taken from this article:
Stratton, W., Desroches, D., Lawson, R. & Hatch, T. (2009) Activity-Based Costing: Is it still relevant? Management Accounting Quarterly. Spring, pp31-40

Note you are required to find four research studies which have examined companies within four different countries, use should try and find countries which are different in terms of culture. China, America, Tunisia and Portugal would be considered as having very different cultures, please note this is just an example.
This article must be cited in your essay and referenced in your bibliography.
ACCO 1095, Management Accounting 2012-13 14
You should use the library search tool to find this journal. This is located on the students portal under IT and library . The university has full access to this article you do NOT have to pay for it.

IMPORTANT POINTS
The essay should be properly referenced throughout using the Harvard style and have the list of references cited in the essay presented at the end of the assignment in the form of a bibliography. Students MUST use academic sources for their research. Failing to reference your work will result in a plagiarism enquiry.
1. This is an individual coursework – any collaboration beyond, perhaps, sharing information on relevant material is entirely unacceptable. This will also result in a plagiarism enquiry.
2. Sources such as Wikipedia are not acceptable as valid research sites.

Attachments:

accointing report and analysis 494907

need to read all the attachments carefully, the information used needs to be from 2008, 2009, 2010. the actuall report is not to be written in essay form instead please use bulletins as much as possible for the information. All of the required info for the company is listed in the attachments…. Please use anwser sheets provided for the correct parts

PLEASE let me know if you need any other info…

Document Preview:

Annual Report Project Grading Sheet: Students name: Business people like to find information in a report easily. Business reports typically organize the information in a structured format using paragraph headings, topic headings, bullets, etc. I recommend that you use the individual grading sections included here as paragraph headings or topic headings for your report and bullet the information for example in the Introduction Summary or other areas where it makes sense. Possible Pts Pts Awarded Introduction Summary – Identify your company 10 pts _____ Name and location of home office CEO Last Fiscal Year Principle Products Main geographic area Name If independent auditors Most recent price of company stock and Dividend per share Industry Situation and Company Plans 10 pts _____ Describe the industry and its outlook Summarize the company’s plans Accounting Policies 10 pts _____ What are the significant accounting policies relating to revenue recognition Cash, short-term investments, merchandise inventoried, and property and equipment. Research something interesting to research about the company. 100 pts _____ Conclusion/Recap 20 pts _____ References cited 10 pts _____ Paper format 15 pts _____ Financial Analysis (Turn in separate from the report.) 100 pts _____ This is the homework for Chapter 13 Assignment Total Points 275 Pts _____ elating to revenue recognition Cash, short-term investments, merchandise inventoried, and property and equipment. Research something interesting to research about the company. 100 pts _____ Conclusion/Recap 20 pts _____ References cited 10 pts _____ Paper format 15 pts _____ Financial…

account 3 payroll 494909

Document Preview:

As promised, I am providing payroll register check figures for the five full payrolls (through December 18th) based on my calculations. I have not included the two special payrolls due to the dismissal and the death of two employees.  The six parts consist of the five full payrolls and one special payroll (for the employee who is killed in an automobile accident in December) that are graded for the FPP. The grading for the other special payroll where the employee is dismissed is included with its full payroll. Here are the check figures: October 23rd: 1. Gross Earnings = $14,484.69 (matches classroom check figure) 2. OASDI = $898.05 3. HI = $210.03 4. FIT = $1048.00 5. SIT = $444.68 6. SUTA = $11.59 7. CIT = $558.79 8. Grp. Ins. = $165.90 9. Union Dues = $16.00 10. Net Earnings = $11,131.65 (2 cents difference from the classroom check figure). November 6th: 1. Gross Earnings = $14,130.48 (matches classroom check figure) 2. OASDI = $876.09 3. HI = $204.89 4. FIT = $1146.00 5. SIT = $433.81 6. SUTA = $11.30 7. CIT = $545.13 8. Grp. Ins. = $0 9. Union Dues = $16.00 10. Net Earnings = $10,897.26 (3 cents difference from the classroom check figure). Figures are not provided for the fired employee. November 20th: 1. Gross Earnings = $12,640.23 (matches classroom check figure) 2. OASDI = $783.69 3. HI = $183.28 4. FIT = $729.00 5. SIT = $388.06 6. SUTA = $10.11 7. CIT = $487.63 8. Grp. Ins. = $151.50 9. Union Dues = $16.00 10. (New) SIMPLE = $1650 11. Net Earnings = $8,240.95 (4 cents difference from the classroom check figure). December 4th: 1. Gross Earnings = $14,431.09 (matches classroom check figure) 2. OASDI = $894.73 3. HI = $209.25 4. FIT = $927.00 5. SIT = $443.03 6. SUTA = $11.54 7. CIT = $556.72 8. Grp. Ins. = $0 9. Union Dues = $16.00 10. SIMPLE = $1650 11. Net Earnings = $9,722.81 (4 cents difference from the classroom check figure). Check figures are not provided for the employee who was killed in a car accident. December 18th. 1. Gross Earnings = $74,922.49…

account 494910

accounting assingment on SAP (ERP)

Document Preview:

DEPARTMENT OF ACCOUNTING, FINANCE & ECONOMICS 7150AFE Business Information Systems SAP PROJECT 2 This project requires you to demonstrate your knowledge of the SAP ERP System. It covers the General Ledger, Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable PREPARATION Review SAP lectures and workshop materials (weeks 4 – 8) and complete any outstanding workshop activities prior to commencing with this project. Also review all supplementary SAP readings and/or documents (these documents are available in the Course Activity Centre). ASSIGNMENT PART 1 Task Details 1 In SAP, create a company code G### where ### is your number given to you Menu Path: Tools > Customising > IMG > Execute Project When window opens, click: SAP Reference IMG Select:Enterprise Structure > Definition > Financial Accounting Now execute by double-clicking on Edit, Copy, Delete, Check Company Code Execute by double-clicking Copy, delete, check company code Now select Organizational object > Copy org. Object When dialogue box appears, enter the following From Company code: GU01 To Company code: G### (### is your no.) Press ENTER When dialogue boxes appear, click the following responses Copy G/L account company code data: Yes Change local currency: No Disregard warning messages Press ENTER [Confirm any error messages and continue] Press ENTER [Confirm any error messages and continue] Click BACK Change the definitions of your company code G###: Menu Path: IMG > Enterprise Structure > Definition > Financial Accounting > Edit, copy, delete, check company code Select Edit company code data Use Position to locate G### Double-click on your company code G### When window opens, change the following fields: Company name: Griffith ### Ltd Check the following fields are correct: City: Brisbane Country: Australia Currency: Australian dollar Language: English Click SAVE 2 Create a new GL master record for Special Equity (71###) for company code G### using a reference…

Attachments:

account 494911

just question and answer, to ans question 2, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, and its sub units and exclude question 1, 3, 4, and 9 , but if you can help out with some sub units of the excluded questions please do. no word count, just a brief and straight to the point ans and easy to understand

Document Preview:

Sample Exam Questions NOTE: THE STYLE OF QUESTIONS APEARING IN YOUR EXAMINATION WILL BE SIMILAR TO THOSE GIVEN BELOW. THIS, HOWEVER, DOES NOT IMPLY THAT THESE QUESTIONS ARE IN THE EXAMINATION. 1. Introduction to AIS 1.1 Define a management information system. (2) 1.2 Do you agree with the statement “Not every company needs an AIS system.”? Please explain. (2) 1.3 Why is it important for accounting students to gain knowledge about Accounting Information Systems? (2) 2. Enterprise Systems, Transaction Processing and Systems Documentation 2.1 Define enterprise resource planning (ERP) systems and give two examples of common ERP add-on modules. (3) 2.2 Describe five advantages of an enterprise system. (2.5) i. ii. iii. iv. v. 2.3 Lexington Company sells a broad range of fashion products to end users. The company is considering taking customer’s orders on their Web site. (6) What information should Lexington collect from the customer during this process? What information would need to come from Lexington’s system to complete the order? 3. System Documentation 3.1 Why should you develop both logical and physical DFDs for systems? What is the advantage of drawing a logical DFD before a physical DFD for a new information system? (4) 3.2 EspressoCoffee customers place an online order. EspressoCoffee processes the customer order by sending a request to the credit card company to verify the customer’s good credit standing. The items are verified for availability. The shipment is processed and sent to the warehouse. An invoice is generated from the sales information and emailed to the customers. The corresponding database tables are updated. Draw the related logical level 0 DFD. (8) 4. General Ledger and Reporting System 4.1 “Defining the codes for a chart of accounts is no big deal –nothing is permanent –I can change it at any time in the future.” Why do you agree (or disagree) with this statement? (3) 4.2 Explain the functions of the general ledger…

Attachments:

acc 561 week 6 wiley plus problems screenshots 494868

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

acc 640 case study week 2 performance drinks 494870

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

125000 120000 74250 93000 412250 40000 50000 31000 33000 154000 25000 20000 10000 18000 73000 11250 9000 4500 8100 32850 43750 35000 17500 31500 127750 120000 114000 63000 90600 387600 5000 6000 11250 2400 24650 0.04 0.05 0.15151515151515152 2.5806451612903226E-2 5.9793814432989693E-2 100000 80000 45000 60000 285000 1.25 1.5 1.65 1.55 1.4464912280701754 1.2 1.425 1.4 1.51 1.36 55000 24750 5000 10000 10000 23000 127750 REVENUE COSTS Direct Materials Direct Labor Fringe Benefits on Direct Labor TOTAL COST GROSS MARGIN Manufacturing Overhead Annual Volume: Basic Hydration Intensity Post Workout Sales Total GROSS MARGIN RATIO Unit Price: Unit Cost: PERFORMANCE DRINKS – MONTHLY PROFIT REPORT Indirect Labor Fringe Benefits on Indirect Labor Utilities Processing Equipment – Depreciation Preventative Maintenance Information Technology Monthly Charge PERFORMANCE DRINKS – MONTHLY MFG OHD COST REPORT ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????

acc 494871

Document Preview:

10. value:?3.00 points   Problem 4-19 Schedule of cash receipts [LO2] Watt’s Lighting Stores made the following sales projections for the next six months. All sales are credit sales.??   ??  March?$?48,000  ?    June?$ 52,000  ??  April? ?54,000  ?    July?60,000  ??  May? ?43,000  ?    August?62,000  ????  Sales in January and February were $51,000 and $50,000, respectively.?      Experience has shown that of total sales, 10 percent are uncollectible, 35 percent are collected in the month of sale, 45 percent are collected in the following month, and 10 percent are collected two months after sale.??  (a)?Prepare a monthly cash receipts schedule for the firm for March through August. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)??  WATT’S LIGHTING STORES?Cash Receipts Schedule?? ?January?February?March?April?May?June?July?August??  Sales?$   ?$   ?$   ?$   ?$   ?$   ?$   ?$   ??  Collections of current sales? ? ?  ?  ?  ?  ?  ?  ??  Collections of prior month’s sales? ? ?  ?  ?  ?  ?  ?  ??  Collections of sales 2 months   earlier? ? ?  ?  ?  ?  ?  ?  ?? ? ? ????????  Total cash receipts? ? ?$   ?$   ?$   ?$   ?$   ?$   ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ????    (b)?Of the sales expected to be made during the six months from March through August, how much will still be uncollected at the end of August? How much of this is expected to be collected later? (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)??   ?Amount??  Uncollected?$   ??  Expected to be collected?$   ???? 11. value:?4.00 points   Problem 4-23 Schedule of cash payments [LO2] The Volt Battery Company has forecast its sales in units as follows:??     ? ? ? ? ??  January?2,300? ?May?2,850  ??  February?2,150? ?June?3,000  ??  March?2,100? ?July?2,700  ??  April?2,600? ? ? ????    Volt Battery always keeps an ending inventory equal to 130% of the next month’s expected sales. The ending inventory for December (January’s beginning inventory) is 2,990 units, which is consistent with this policy.??   ??      Materials cost $12 per unit…

Attachments:

acc for accountsguru 494872

HMWK problem Rich Company’s experience shows that 20% of its sales are for cash and 80% are on credit. An analysis of credit sales shows that 50% are collected in the month following the sale, 45% are collected in the second month, and 5% prove to be uncollectible.

Document Preview:

HMWK problem Rich Company’s experience shows that 20% of its sales are for cash and 80% are on credit. An analysis of credit sales shows that 50% are collected in the month following the sale, 45% are collected in the second month, and 5% prove to be uncollectible. Calculate items (1) through (10) below: (if you click on the graph twice, you can type into it)      (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Receipts from cash sales Collections from August credit sales Collections from September credit sales Collections from October credit sales Total cash collections during the month (1) ________ (2) ________ (3) ________ (4) ________ (5) ________ (6) ________ (7) ________ (8) ________ (10) _______ (9) ________ OCTOBER NOVEMBER ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

acc ch 11 problems 494873

ch11 Student: 1.If 1 British pound can be exchanged for 180 cents of U.S. currency, what fraction should be used to compute the indirect quotation of the exchange rate expressed in British pounds? A. 1/180 B. 1/.56 C. 1.8/1 D. 1/1.8 2.Suppose the direct foreign exchange rates in U.S. dollars are: 1 Singapore dollar = $.7025 1 Cyprus pound = $2.5132 Based on the information given above, the indirect exchange rates for the Singapore dollar and the Cyprus Pound (from a U.S. perspective) are: A. 1.7655 Singapore dollars and 1.4235 Cyprus pounds respectively. B. 0.

Document Preview:

ch11 Student: 1. If 1 British pound can be exchanged for 180 cents of U.S. currency, what fraction should be used to compute the indirect quotation of the exchange rate expressed in British pounds? A. 1/180 B. 1/.56 C. 1.8/1 D. 1/1.8 2. Suppose the direct foreign exchange rates in U.S. dollars are: 1 Singapore dollar = $.7025 1 Cyprus pound = $2.5132 Based on the information given above, the indirect exchange rates for the Singapore dollar and the Cyprus Pound (from a U.S. perspective) are: A. 1.7655 Singapore dollars and 1.4235 Cyprus pounds respectively. B. 0.2975 Singapore dollars and 1.5132 Cyprus pounds respectively. C. 2.1622 Singapore dollars and 0.4625 Cyprus pounds respectively. D. 1.4235 Singapore dollars and 0.3979 Cyprus pounds respectively. 3. Suppose the direct foreign exchange rates in U.S. dollars are: 1 Singapore dollar = $.7025 1 Cyprus pound = $2.5132 Based on the information given above, how many U.S. dollars must be paid for a purchase of citrus fruits costing 10,000 Cyprus pounds? A. $25,132 B. $15,132 C. $3,979 D. $35,775 4. Suppose the direct foreign exchange rates in U.S. dollars are: 1 Singapore dollar = $.7025 1 Cyprus pound = $2.5132 Based on the information given above, how many Singapore dollars are required to purchase goods costing 10,000 US dollars? A. 7,025 B. 14,235 C. 17,655 D. 2,975 5. Upon arrival in Chile, Karen exchanged $1,000 of U.S. currency into 480,000 Chilean Pesos. While returning after her two month visit, she exchanged her remaining 50,000 Pesos into $100 of U.S. currency. What amount of gain or a loss did Karen experience on the 50,000 pesos she held during her visit and converted to U.S. dollars at the departure date? A. Loss of $4. B. Gain of $4. C. Loss of $6. D. No gain or loss. Created with an evaluation copy of Aspose.Words. To discover the full versions of our APIs please visit: https://products.aspose.com/words/ 6. Chicago based Corporation X has a number of importing…

Attachments:

acc help 494874

Retained earning is Always equal to the amount of cash that the corporation has generated from operations. A part of the paid-in capital of the corporation. A part of the stockholders’ claim on the total assets of the corporation. Closed at the end of each accounting period. When stock is issued for legal services, the transaction is recorded by debiting Organization Expense for the stated value of the stock. par value of the stock. market value of the stock. book value of the stock. If Vickers Company issues 4,000 shares of $5 par value common stock for $140,000, a.

Document Preview:

Retained earning is Always equal to the amount of cash that the corporation has generated from operations. A part of the paid-in capital of the corporation. A part of the stockholders’ claim on the total assets of the corporation. Closed at the end of each accounting period. When stock is issued for legal services, the transaction is recorded by debiting Organization Expense for the stated value of the stock. par value of the stock. market value of the stock. book value of the stock. If Vickers Company issues 4,000 shares of $5 par value common stock for $140,000, a. Common Stock will be credited for $140,000. b. Paid-In Capital in Excess of Par will be credited for $20,000. c. Paid-In Capital in Excess of Par will be credited for $120,000. d. Cash will be debited for $120,000. If common stock is issued for an amount greater than par value, the excess should be credited to a. Cash. b. Retained Earnings. c. Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par. d. Legal Capital. If stock is issued for a noncash asset, the asset should be recorded on the books of the corporation at a. fair value. b. cost. c. zero. d. a nominal amount If stock is issued for less than par value, the account a. Paid-In Capital in Excess of Par is credited. b. Paid-In Capital in Excess of Par is debited if a debit balance exists in the account. c. Paid-In Capital in Excess of Par is debited if a credit balance exists in the account. d. Retained Earnings is credited. Which of the following represents the largest number of common shares? a. Treasury shares b. Issued shares c. Outstanding shares d. Authorized shares New Corp. issues 2,000 shares of $10 par value common stock at $14 per share. When the transaction is recorded, credits are made to a. Common Stock $20,000 and Paid-in Capital in Excess of Stated Value $8,000. b. Common Stock $28,000. c. Common Stock $20,000 and Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par $8,000. d. Common Stock $20,000 and Retained Earnings…

Attachments:

acc hmwk for accountsguru 494877

1. On April 1 of the current year, a company paid $150,000 cash to purchase 7%, 10-year bonds that had a par value of $150,000 and paid interest semiannually each April 1 and October 1. The company intends to hold these bonds until they mature. Prepare the journal entry to record the bond purchase, the receipt of the first semiannual interest payment on October 1 of the current year, and the accrual of interest for the year-end December 31. 2. BC Company uses a job order cost accounting system.

Document Preview:

1. On April 1 of the current year, a company paid $150,000 cash to purchase 7%, 10-year bonds that had a par value of $150,000 and paid interest semiannually each April 1 and October 1. The company intends to hold these bonds until they mature. Prepare the journal entry to record the bond purchase, the receipt of the first semiannual interest payment on October 1 of the current year, and the accrual of interest for the year-end December 31. 2. BC Company uses a job order cost accounting system. During the month of April, the following events occurred: (a) Purchased raw materials on credit, $32,000. (b) Raw materials requisitioned: $25,800 as direct materials and $10,500 indirect materials. (c) Paid factory payroll for the month totaling $37,700 which includes $8,200 indirect labor. (d) Assigned the factory payroll to jobs and overhead. Make the necessary journal entries to record the above transactions and events. 3. Based on the following income statement and balance sheet for Rashid Corporation, determine the cash flows from operating activities using the indirect method. Rashid Corporation Income Statement For Year Ended December 31, 2007 Sales…………………………………………………………………………………..$504,000 Cost of goods sold………………………………$327,600 Depreciation expense………………………… 42,000 Other operating expenses………………….. 125,500 (495,100) Other gains (losses): Gain on sale of equipment………………………………………………….. 7,200 Income before taxes…………………………………………………………….$ 16,100 Income tax expense……………………………………………………………..(4,800) Net income………………………………………………………………………….$ 11,300 Rashid Corporation Balance Sheet At December 31 Assets: 2007 2006 Cash $ 64,650 $ 55,800 Accts. Receivable 21,000 29,000 Inventory 58,000 52,100 Equipment 240,000 222,000 Accum. Depreciation (106,000) ( 96,000) Total assets $277,650 $262,900 Liabilities: Accts. Payable $ 28,400 $ 23,700 Income taxes payable 1,050 1,200 Total liabilities $ 29,450 $ …

Attachments:

acc homework 494878

AC202 Homework Problem #1 Comparative statements for Kool Corporation are shown below:    Calculate trend percentages for all income statement amounts shown. Use 2010 as the base year. Problem #2 . Express the following income statement information in common-size percents (round to nearest whole percent).

Document Preview:

AC202 Homework Problem #1 Comparative statements for Kool Corporation are shown below:?    Calculate trend percentages for all income statement amounts shown. Use 2010 as the base year. Problem #2 . Express the following income statement information in common-size percents (round to nearest whole percent). ?    Problem #3 Shown below are selected data from the balance sheet of Certain Value Hardware, a small retail store (dollar amounts are in thousands): Cash $ 40 Accounts receivable 200 Inventory 390 Total assets 900 Current liabilities 300 Non-current liabilities 240 From this information, compute the acid test ratio the current ratio the working capital (in thousands) Shown below are selected data from the financial statements of Beck Intelligent Systems (dollar amounts are in millions, except for the per-share data). Income statement data: Net sales $4,000 Cost of goods sold 1,800 Operating expenses 1,400 Net income 600 Balance sheet data: Average total equity 3,000 Average total assets 5,000 Per share data (these amounts stated in actual dollars, not millions): Beck Intelligent Systems reported earnings per share for the year of $2 and paid cash dividends of $1 per share. At year-end, the Wall Street Journal listed Beck Intelligent Systems’ capital stock as trading at $100 per share. From this information, compute the: Gross margin ratio Return on total assets Return on equity Price/earnings ratio at year end Given below are comparative balance sheets and an income statement for Ringer Corporation Ringer Corporation Balance Sheets – 2011 Dec. 31 Jan. 1 ??Ringer Corporation Income Statement for 2011???Cash?$ 15,000?$ 14,000??Sales?$205,000??Accounts receivable?45,000?37,000??Cost of goods sold?(117,250)??Inventory?32,000?35,000??Gross profit on sales?$ 87,750??Equipment (net)?55,000?65,000??Operating expenses?(57,950)???? =SUM(ABOVE) ?$147,000???…

Attachments:

acc homework 494879

Homework Problem Prepare journal entries to record the following production activities for Sherman Manufacturing. a. Dec. 28 Incurred overhead costs of $79,000 (paid in cash). b. Dec 29 Applied overhead at 110% of direct labor costs which are $93,900. c. Dec 30 Transferred completed products with a cost of $258,200 to finished goods inventory. d. Dec 31 Sold $602,000 of product on credit. Cost is $271,000.

Document Preview:

Homework Problem Prepare journal entries to record the following production activities for Sherman Manufacturing. a. Dec. 28 Incurred overhead costs of $79,000 (paid in cash). b. Dec 29 Applied overhead at 110% of direct labor costs which are $93,900. c. Dec 30 Transferred completed products with a cost of $258,200 to finished goods inventory. d. Dec 31 Sold $602,000 of product on credit. Cost is $271,000. ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

acc homework 494880

Problem 1:

The 2012 accounting records of Liz Ten Transport reveal the following transactions and events. Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section using the direct method. (Not all of the items will be used.)

Payment of interest

$10,000

Collection of accounts receivable

$182,000

Cash sales

48,000

Payment of salaries and wages

53,000

Receipt of dividend revenue

18,000

Depreciation expense

16,000

Payment of income taxes

12,000

Proceeds from sale of vehicles

12,000

Net income

38,000

Purchase of equipment for cash

22,000

Payment of accounts payable for merchandising

115,000

Payment of dividends

14,000

Payment for land

74,000

Payment of operating expenses

28,000

Problem 2:

An inexperienced accountant for Nerys Corporation showed the following in the income statement: income before income taxes and extraordinary item $400,000, and extraordinary loss from flood (before taxes) $70,000. The extraordinary loss and taxable income are both subject to a 30% tax rate. Prepare a correct income statement.

***USE ATTACHED WORKSHEET FOR SOLUTION***

Attachments:

acc homework for accountsguru 494881

Acc Homework Problem # 1 processing costing (10 Points) Cromer Manufacturing Company produces a product in two departments: (1) Production and (2) Assembly. The company uses a process cost accounting system. a. Aug 3 Purchased raw materials for $51,000 on account. b. Aug 5 Raw materials requisitioned for production were: Direct materials Production department $30,000 Assembly department 14,000 c. Aug 8 Incurred labor costs of $57,000. d. Aug 12 Factory labor used: Production department $32,000 Assembly department 25,000 e.

Document Preview:

Acc Homework Problem # 1 processing costing (10 Points) Cromer Manufacturing Company produces a product in two departments: (1) Production and (2) Assembly. The company uses a process cost accounting system. a. Aug 3 Purchased raw materials for $51,000 on account. b. Aug 5 Raw materials requisitioned for production were: Direct materials Production department $30,000 Assembly department 14,000 c. Aug 8 Incurred labor costs of $57,000. d. Aug 12 Factory labor used: Production department $32,000 Assembly department 25,000 e. Aug 15 Manufacturing overhead is applied to the product based on machine hours used in each department: Production department—250 machine hours at $30 per machine hour. Assembly department—500 machine hours at $20 per machine hour. f. Aug 20 Units costing $58,000 were completed in the Production Department and were transferred to the Assembly Department. g. Aug 25 Units costing $50,000 were completed in the Assembly Department and were transferred to finished goods. h. Aug 30Finished goods costing $20,000 were sold on account for $45,000. Instructions Prepare the journal entries to record the preceding transactions for Cromer Manufacturing Company. Although the book doesn’t explain this well, when you use process accounting and move items from one department to another, you must identify the department with the work in process. Problem #2 (10 points) Malone, Inc. uses a job order cost accounting system and keeps perpetual inventory records. Prepare journal entries to record the following transactions during the month of July. July 2 Purchased raw materials for $18,000 on account 9 Raw materials requisitioned by production: Direct materials $14,000 Indirect materials 2,000 14 Paid factory utilities, $2,300 and repairs for factory equipment, $4,000 21 Incurred $45,000 of factory labor 26 Time tickets indicated the following: Direct Labor (3,000 hrs × $12 per hr) = $36,000 Indirect Labor (1,000 hrs × $9 per…

Attachments:

acc mcq 494882

It appears you answered 100 questions for someone a few months ago and I must have the same class because they are the same as what I am working on. The link/address below is where I found it – not the first 15 ques, but lower down – the 100 further down. I feel pretty good on about 80% of them, but double-checking my answers v yours would be great. I’ll be done with all the questions this weekend and would then send to you. Can you assist with these 100 questions

1) Which of the following legal forms of organization is characterized by limitedliability?

a. Professional partnership

b. Sole proprietorship

c. Corporation

d. Partnership

2) The financial manager may be responsible for any of the following EXCEPT

a. keeping track of quarterly tax payments.

b. analyzing quarterly budget and performance reports.

c. analyzing the effects of more debt on the firm s capital structure.

d. determining whether to accept or reject a capital asset acquisition.

3) The financial manager s financing decisions determine

a. both the mix and the type of assets found on the firm s balance sheet.

b. both the mix and the type of assets and liabilities found on the firm s balance

sheet.

c. the most appropriate mix of short-term and long-term financing.

d. the proportion of the firm s earnings to be paid as dividend.

4) Wealth maximization as the goal of the firm implies enhancing the wealth of

a. the firm s stockholders.

b. the Board of Directors.

c. the firm s employees.

d. the federal government.

5) The amount earned during the accounting period on each outstanding shareof common stock is called

a. common stock dividend.

b. net profits after taxes.

c. earnings per share.

d. net income.

6) Cash flow and risk are the key determinants in share price. Increased cashflow results in ________, other things remaining the same.

a. an unchanged share price

b. a lower share price

c. an undetermined share price

d. a higher share price

7) A more recent issue that is causing major problems in the business communityis

a. short-term versus long-term financial goals of management.

b. the privatization of ownership.

c. ethical problems.

d. environmental concerns.

8) The implementation of a pro-active ethics program is expected to result in

a. a positive corporate image and increased respect, but is not expected to affect

cash flows.

b. a positive corporate image and increased respect, but is not expected to affect

share price.

c. an increased share price resulting from a decrease in risk, but is not expectedto affect cash flows.

d. a positive corporate image and increased respect, a reduction in risk, and enhancedcash flow resulting in an increase in share price.

9) The Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 was passed in response to

a. the decline in technology stocks.

b. insider trading activities.

c. false disclosures in financial reporting.

d. all of the above

10) The key participants in financial transactions are individuals, businesses,and governments. Individuals are net ________ of funds, and businesses arenet ________ of funds.

a. demanders; suppliers

b. purchasers; sellers

c. suppliers; demanders

d. users; providers

11) The over-the-counter (OTC) market is

Obviously, the amount the system lets me enter is not enough. I would pay what is fair for the 100 ques

Attachments:

acc problems help 494883

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20) 21) 22) 23) 24) 25)26) 27) 28)????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Document Preview:

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20) 21) 22) 23) 24) 25)26) 27) 28)???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

acc205 ashford university full course 494884

ACC205: Principles of Accounting

Week 1

Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.

  1. Accounting Equation

    As you have learned in this week s readings the Accounting Equation is Assets = Liabilities + Owners Equity. Is the accounting equation true in all instances Provide sample transactions from your own experiences to demonstrate the validity of the Accounting Equation.

    Guided Response:
    Review several of your peers posts and identify some core components that you feel should be included in every transaction. Respond to at least two of your peers and provide recommendations to extend their thinking. Challenge your peers by asking a question that may cause them to reevaluate or add components to their transactions.

  2. Accounts

    What does the term account mean What are the different classifications of accounts How do the rules for debits and credits impact accounts Please provide an example of how debits and credits impact accounts.

    Guided Response:
    Analyze several of your peers posts. Let at least two of your peers know if this knowledge could be used in their everyday lives. Is so, how If not, why not?


Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.

Basic Accounting Equations

Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.

Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.

  1. Accounting Cycle

    Financial statements are a product of the accounting cycle. Think about two different companies: a manufacturing company, and a retail company. Why would different companies have different accounting cycles Would you expect the steps of the accounting cycle to be the same for each company Why or why not?

    Guided Response:
    Review several of your peers posts and identify what steps of the accounting cycle that you feel are the most critical. Respond to at least two of your peers and provide recommendations to extend their thinking. Challenge your peers by asking a question that may cause them to reevaluate their position on the accounting cycle.

  2. Bank Reconciliation

    What is the purpose of a bank reconciliation What are the reasons for differences between the cash reported in the accounting records and the cash balance in the bank statements?

    Analyze several of your peers posts. Let at least two of your peers know what happens to the discrepancies between the book balance and the bank balance. Could these differences just be written off?

    Guided Response:
    A bank reconciliation reconciles the bank account balance per the books to the actual bank balance. Outstanding checks, deposits in transit, and bank errors are reasons there are differences between the cash reported in the accounting records and the cash balance in the bank statements.


Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.

Revenue and Expenses

Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.

Week 3

Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.

  1. LIFO vs. FIFO

    The controller of Sagehen Enterprises believes that the company should switch from the LIFO method to the FIFO method. The controller s bonus is based on the next income. It is the controller s belief that the switch in inventory methods would increase the net income of the company. What are the differences between the LIFO and FIFO methods

    Guided Response:
    Analyze several of your peers posts. Let at least two of your peers know if a company is better off it switches from a LIFO method to a FIFO method Explain your reasoning.

  2. Depreciation

    A variety of depreciation methods are used to allocate the cost of an asset to all of the accounting periods benefited by the use of the asset. Your client has just purchased a piece of equipment for $100,000. Explain the concept of depreciation. Which of the following depreciation methods would you recommend: straight-line depreciation, double declining balance method, or an alternative method?

    Guided Response:
    Let at least two of your peers know if a company would use an accelerated depreciation method for their financial statements or their tax returns. Why do you believe this would be the case?


Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.

Inventory

Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.

Ashford 5: – Week 4

Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.

  1. Current Liability

    What is a current liability From the perspective of a user of financial statements, why do you believe current liabilities are separated from long-term liabilities Based on your current experience as well as and any additional research you may have done provide two examples of situations where businesses collect monies from customers and employees and report these amounts as a current liability.

    Guided Response:
    Review several of your peers posts and identify the core components of a current liability. Respond to at least two of your peers and provide recommendations to extend their thinking. Challenge your peers by asking a question that may cause them to reevaluate if their example is a current liability.

  2. Client Recommendations

    A client comes to you thinking about starting a consulting business. Your client is specifically interested in what type of entity should be created for this new business. Based on your readings or any additional research you may have done, discuss the advantages and disadvantages of the following: sole proprietorship, partnership, and corporation. Based on these advantages and disadvantages provide a clear recommendation to your client.

    Let at least two of your peers posts know if an alternative choice of entity would be possible. What would be the benefits of this new entity choice Would there be any disadvantages associated with this new entity selection.

    Guided Response:
    Let at least two of your peers know if an alternative choice of entity would be possible What would be the benefits of this new entity choice Would there be any disadvantages associated with this new entity selection?


Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.

Liability

Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.

Ashford 6: – Week 5

Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.

  1. Ratios

    Ratios provide the users of financial statements with a great deal of information about the entity. Do ratios tell the whole story How could liquidity ratios be used by investors to determine whether or not to invest in a company

    Guided Response:
    Let at least two of your peers know how debt service ratios can be used by a lender in determining whether or not to lend money to a company.

  2. Profit Margin

Year Ending December 2012

Year Ending December 2011

Year Ending December 2010

Revenues

40,000

35,000

33,000

Operating Expenses

Salaries

15,000

10,000

9,000

Maintenance and Repairs

6,000

9,000

10,000

Rental Expense

2,500

2,500

2,500

Depreciation

2,000

2,000

2,000

Fuel

4,000

3,500

2,500

Total Operating Expenses

29,500

27,000

26,000

Operating Income

10,500

8,000

7,000

Sales and Administrative Expenses

6,000

4,000

3,000

Interest Expense

2,500

2,000

1,000

Net Income

2,000

2,000

3,000

Above is a comparative income statement for Cecil, Inc. for the years 2010, 2011, and 2012. Calculate the profit margin for each of these years. Comment on the profit margin trend.

Guided Response:
Let at least two of your peers posts know what you changes you would recommend to improve the net margin of the company.


Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.

Financial Ratios

Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.

Week Five Exercise Assignment

Carefully review the Grading Rubric for the criteria that will be used to evaluate your assignment.


Final Paper
To complete the following final paper, go to this week’s Final Paper link in the left navigation.

Final Paper

Focus of the Final Paper

Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.

Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:

Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?

Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet
Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.

Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.

Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.

Writing the Final Paper

1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:

a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted

3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

acc205 ashford university week 1 494885

ACC205: Principles of Accounting

Week 1

Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.

  1. Accounting Equation

    As you have learned in this week s readings the Accounting Equation is Assets = Liabilities + Owners Equity. Is the accounting equation true in all instances Provide sample transactions from your own experiences to demonstrate the validity of the Accounting Equation.

    Guided Response:
    Review several of your peers posts and identify some core components that you feel should be included in every transaction. Respond to at least two of your peers and provide recommendations to extend their thinking. Challenge your peers by asking a question that may cause them to reevaluate or add components to their transactions.

  2. Accounts

    What does the term account mean What are the different classifications of accounts How do the rules for debits and credits impact accounts Please provide an example of how debits and credits impact accounts.

    Guided Response:
    Analyze several of your peers posts. Let at least two of your peers know if this knowledge could be used in their everyday lives. Is so, how If not, why not?


Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.

Basic Accounting Equations

Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.

Attachments:

acc205 ashford university week 2 494886

Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.

  1. Accounting Cycle

    Financial statements are a product of the accounting cycle. Think about two different companies: a manufacturing company, and a retail company. Why would different companies have different accounting cycles Would you expect the steps of the accounting cycle to be the same for each company Why or why not?

    Guided Response:
    Review several of your peers posts and identify what steps of the accounting cycle that you feel are the most critical. Respond to at least two of your peers and provide recommendations to extend their thinking. Challenge your peers by asking a question that may cause them to reevaluate their position on the accounting cycle.

  2. Bank Reconciliation

    What is the purpose of a bank reconciliation What are the reasons for differences between the cash reported in the accounting records and the cash balance in the bank statements?

    Analyze several of your peers posts. Let at least two of your peers know what happens to the discrepancies between the book balance and the bank balance. Could these differences just be written off?

    Guided Response:
    A bank reconciliation reconciles the bank account balance per the books to the actual bank balance. Outstanding checks, deposits in transit, and bank errors are reasons there are differences between the cash reported in the accounting records and the cash balance in the bank statements.


Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.

Revenue and Expenses

Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.

Attachments:

acc205 ashford university week 3 494887

Week 3

Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.

  1. LIFO vs. FIFO

    The controller of Sagehen Enterprises believes that the company should switch from the LIFO method to the FIFO method. The controller s bonus is based on the next income. It is the controller s belief that the switch in inventory methods would increase the net income of the company. What are the differences between the LIFO and FIFO methods

    Guided Response:
    Analyze several of your peers posts. Let at least two of your peers know if a company is better off it switches from a LIFO method to a FIFO method Explain your reasoning.

  2. Depreciation

    A variety of depreciation methods are used to allocate the cost of an asset to all of the accounting periods benefited by the use of the asset. Your client has just purchased a piece of equipment for $100,000. Explain the concept of depreciation. Which of the following depreciation methods would you recommend: straight-line depreciation, double declining balance method, or an alternative method?

    Guided Response:
    Let at least two of your peers know if a company would use an accelerated depreciation method for their financial statements or their tax returns. Why do you believe this would be the case?


Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.

Inventory

Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.

Attachments:

acc205 ashford university week 4 494888

Ashford 5: – Week 4

Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.

  1. Current Liability

    What is a current liability From the perspective of a user of financial statements, why do you believe current liabilities are separated from long-term liabilities Based on your current experience as well as and any additional research you may have done provide two examples of situations where businesses collect monies from customers and employees and report these amounts as a current liability.

    Guided Response:
    Review several of your peers posts and identify the core components of a current liability. Respond to at least two of your peers and provide recommendations to extend their thinking. Challenge your peers by asking a question that may cause them to reevaluate if their example is a current liability.

  2. Client Recommendations

    A client comes to you thinking about starting a consulting business. Your client is specifically interested in what type of entity should be created for this new business. Based on your readings or any additional research you may have done, discuss the advantages and disadvantages of the following: sole proprietorship, partnership, and corporation. Based on these advantages and disadvantages provide a clear recommendation to your client.

    Let at least two of your peers posts know if an alternative choice of entity would be possible. What would be the benefits of this new entity choice Would there be any disadvantages associated with this new entity selection.

    Guided Response:
    Let at least two of your peers know if an alternative choice of entity would be possible What would be the benefits of this new entity choice Would there be any disadvantages associated with this new entity selection?


Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.

Liability

Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.

Attachments:

acc205 ashford university week 5 494889

Ashford 6: – Week 5

Discussions
To participate in the following discussions, go to this week’s Discussion link in the left navigation.

  1. Ratios

    Ratios provide the users of financial statements with a great deal of information about the entity. Do ratios tell the whole story How could liquidity ratios be used by investors to determine whether or not to invest in a company

    Guided Response:
    Let at least two of your peers know how debt service ratios can be used by a lender in determining whether or not to lend money to a company.

  2. Profit Margin

Year Ending December 2012

Year Ending December 2011

Year Ending December 2010

Revenues

40,000

35,000

33,000

Operating Expenses

Salaries

15,000

10,000

9,000

Maintenance and Repairs

6,000

9,000

10,000

Rental Expense

2,500

2,500

2,500

Depreciation

2,000

2,000

2,000

Fuel

4,000

3,500

2,500

Total Operating Expenses

29,500

27,000

26,000

Operating Income

10,500

8,000

7,000

Sales and Administrative Expenses

6,000

4,000

3,000

Interest Expense

2,500

2,000

1,000

Net Income

2,000

2,000

3,000

Above is a comparative income statement for Cecil, Inc. for the years 2010, 2011, and 2012. Calculate the profit margin for each of these years. Comment on the profit margin trend.

Guided Response:
Let at least two of your peers posts know what you changes you would recommend to improve the net margin of the company.


Exercise Assignment
To complete the following assignment, go to this week’s Assignment link in the left navigation.

Financial Ratios

Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.

Week Five Exercise Assignment

Carefully review the Grading Rubric for the criteria that will be used to evaluate your assignment.


Final Paper
To complete the following final paper, go to this week’s Final Paper link in the left navigation.

Final Paper

Focus of the Final Paper

Write a five-to seven-page financial statement analysis of a public company, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. In this analysis you will discuss the financial health of this company with the ultimate goal of making a recommendation to other investors. Your paper should consist of the following sections: introduction, company overview, horizontal analysis, ratio analysis, final recommendation, and conclusions. Your paper needs to include a minimum of two scholarly resources in addition to the textbook as references.

Here is a breakdown of the sections within the body of the assignment:

Company Overview
Provide a brief overview of your company (one to two paragraphs at most). What industry is it in What are its main products or services Who are its competitors?

Horizontal Analysis of Income Statement and Balance Sheet
Prepare a three-year horizontal analysis of the income statement and balance sheet of your selected company. Discuss the importance and meaning of horizontal analysis. Discuss both the positive and negative trends presented in your company.

Ratio Analysis
Calculate the current ratio, quick ratio, cash to current liabilities ratio, over a two-year period. Discuss and interpret the ratios that you calculated. Discuss potential liquidity issues based on your calculations of the current and quick ratios. Are there any factors that could be erroneously influencing the results of the ratios Discuss liquidity issues of competitive companies within the same industry.

Recommendation
Based on your analysis would you recommend an individual invest in this company What strengths do you see What risks do you see It is perfectly acceptable to state that you would recommend avoiding this company as long as you provide support for your position.

Writing the Final Paper

1. Must be five to seven double-spaced pages in length, and formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
2. Must include a title page with the following:

a. Title of paper
b. Student s name
c. Course name and number
d. Instructor s name
e. Date submitted

3. Must begin with an introductory paragraph that has a succinct thesis statement.
4. Must address the topic of the paper with critical thought.
5. Must end with a conclusion that reaffirms your thesis.
6. Must document all sources in APA style, as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.
7. Must include a separate reference page, formatted according to APA style as outlined in the Ashford Writing Center.

Attachments:

acc 206 week 2 ashford university 494843

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

ACC 206 Week 2 Assignment: Chapter Two and Three Problems Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Chapter 2 Exercise 3 1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X6. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 20X6 and 20X5 follow: 20X6 20X5 Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10% $580,000 $500,000 Common stock, $10 par value 2,350,000 1,750,000 Paid-in capital in excess of par value Preferred 24,000 — Common 4,620,000 3,600,000 Retained earnings 8,470,000 6,920,000 Total stockholders’ equity $16,044,000 $12,770,000 Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X6. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X6. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 20X6? Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X6? By what amount? Chapter 2 Problem 1 2. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization Southlake Corporation issued $900,000 of 8% bonds on March 1, 20X1. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow. Case A—The bonds are issued at 100. Case B—The bonds are issued at 96. Case C—The bonds are issued at 105. Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization. Instructions: Complete the following table: Case A Case B Case C Cash inflow on the issuance date _______ _______ _______ Total cash outflow through maturity _______ _______ _______ Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue _______ _______ _______ Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X1…

Attachments:

acc 206 week 3 assignments 494844

ACC 206 Week 3 assignments

Document Preview:

ACC 206 Week Three Assignment Please complete the following five exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Overhead application: Working backward The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review: Division A Division B Actual machine hours 22,500 ? Estimated machine hours 20,000 ? Overhead application rate $4.50 $5.00 Actual overhead $110,000 ? Estimated overhead ? $90,000 Applied overhead ? $86,000 Over- (under-) applied overhead ? $6,500 Find the unknowns for each of the divisions. Computations using a job order system General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger; Work in process $ 35,200 Finished goods 86,900 Cost of goods sold 128,700 Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows: Direct Materials Direct Labor Job No. Amount Job No. Amount 101 $5,000 101 $7,800 115 19,500 103 20,800 116 36,200 115 42,000 Other 35,800 116 18,000 $96,500 Other 25,900 $114,500 Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively. General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May…

Attachments:

acc 206 week 3 solutions 494845

ACC 206 Week Three Assignment Please complete the following five exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Overhead application: Working backward The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours.

Document Preview:

ACC 206 Week Three Assignment Please complete the following five exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Overhead application: Working backward The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review: ?Division A?Division B??Actual machine hours ?22,500?? ??Estimated machine hours ?20,000?? ??Overhead application rate ?$4.50 ?$5.00 ??Actual overhead ?$110,000 ?? ??Estimated overhead ?? ?$90,000 ??Applied overhead ?? ?$86,000 ??Over- (under-) applied overhead ?? ?$6,500 ??Find the unknowns for each of the divisions. Computations using a job order system General Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger; Work in process $ 35,200 Finished goods 86,900 Cost of goods sold 128,700 Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($20,400) and no. 103 ($14,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $114,500. These figures are subdivided as follows: Direct Materials??Direct Labor??Job No.? ?Amount??Job No.??Amount??101??$5,000 ??101??$7,800 ??115??19,500??103??20,800??116??36,200??115??42,000??Other??35,800??116??18,000????$96,500 ??Other ??25,900????????$114,500 ?????????????????????????????????????????????????? Job no. 115 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $21,000 and $17,400, respectively. General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The…

Attachments:

acc 206 week 4 494846

ACC 206 Week 4 Assignment: Chapter 6 and 7 Problems Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Chapter 6 Problem 3 1. Comprehensive budgeting The balance sheet of Watson Company as of December 31, 20X1, follows.

Document Preview:

ACC 206 Week 4 Assignment: Chapter 6 and 7 Problems Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Chapter 6 Problem 3 1. Comprehensive budgeting The balance sheet of Watson Company as of December 31, 20X1, follows. WATSON COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 12X1 Assets Cash $4,595 Accounts receivable 10,000 Finished goods (575 units x $7.00) 4,025 Direct materials (2,760 units x $0.50) 1,380 Plant & equipment $50,000 Less: Accumulated depreciation 10,000 40,000 Total assets $60,000 Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity Accounts payable to suppliers $14,000 Common stock $25,000 Retained earnings 21,000 46,000 Total liabilities &. stockholders’ equity $60,000 The following information has been extracted from the firm’s accounting records: All sales are made on account at $20 per unit. Sixty percent of the sales are collected in the month of sale; the remaining 40% are collected in the following month. Forecasted sales for the first five months of 20X2 are: January, 1,500 units,- February, 1,600 units; March, 1,800 units; April, 2,000 units; May, 2,100 units. Management wants to maintain the finished goods inventory at 30% of the following month’s sales. Watson uses four units of direct material in each finished unit. The direct material price has been stable and is expected to remain so over the next six months. Management wants to maintain the ending direct materials inventory at 60% of the following month’s production needs. Seventy percent of all purchases are paid in the month of purchase; the remaining 30% are paid in the subsequent month. Watson’s product requires 30 minutes of direct labor time. Each hour of direct labor costs…

Attachments:

acc 206 week 4 494847

ACC 206 Week 4 Assignment Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Comprehensive budgeting The balance sheet of Watson Company as of December 31, 20X1, follows. WATSON COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 12X1 Assets Cash $4,595 Accounts receivable 10,000 Finished goods (575 units x $7.

Document Preview:

ACC 206 Week 4 Assignment Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Comprehensive budgeting The balance sheet of Watson Company as of December 31, 20X1, follows. WATSON COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 12X1 Assets Cash $4,595 Accounts receivable 10,000 Finished goods (575 units x $7.00) 4,025 Direct materials (2,760 units x $0.50) 1,380 Plant & equipment $50,000 Less: Accumulated depreciation 10,000 40,000 Total assets $60,000 Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity Accounts payable to suppliers $14,000 Common stock $25,000 Retained earnings 21,000 46,000 Total liabilities &. stockholders’ equity $60,000 The following information has been extracted from the firm’s accounting records: All sales are made on account at $20 per unit. Sixty percent of the sales are collected in the month of sale; the remaining 40% are collected in the following month. Forecasted sales for the first five months of 20X2 are: January, 1,500 units,- February, 1,600 units; March, 1,800 units; April, 2,000 units; May, 2,100 units. Management wants to maintain the finished goods inventory at 30% of the following month’s sales. Watson uses four units of direct material in each finished unit. The direct material price has been stable and is expected to remain so over the next six months. Management wants to maintain the ending direct materials inventory at 60% of the following month’s production needs. Seventy percent of all purchases are paid in the month of purchase; the remaining 30% are paid in the subsequent month. Watson’s product requires 30 minutes of direct labor time. Each hour of direct labor costs $7. Instructions: Rounding computations to the nearest…

Attachments:

acc 206 week 4 assignments 494848

ACC 206 week 4 assignments

Document Preview:

ACC 206 Week 4 Assignment Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Comprehensive budgeting The balance sheet of Watson Company as of December 31, 20X1, follows. WATSON COMPANY ??Balance Sheet ??December 31, 12X1 ??Assets ????Cash ??$4,595 ??Accounts receivable ??10,000??Finished goods (575 units x $7.00) ??4,025??Direct materials (2,760 units x $0.50) ??1,380??Plant & equipment ?$50,000 ???Less: Accumulated depreciation ?10,000?40,000??Total assets ??$60,000 ??Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity ????Accounts payable to suppliers ??$14,000 ??Common stock ?$25,000 ???Retained earnings ?21,000?46,000??Total liabilities &. stockholders’ equity ??$60,000 ?? The following information has been extracted from the firm’s accounting records: All sales are made on account at $20 per unit. Sixty percent of the sales are collected in the month of sale; the remaining 40% are collected in the following month. Forecasted sales for the first five months of 20X2 are: January, 1,500 units,- February, 1,600 units; March, 1,800 units; April, 2,000 units; May, 2,100 units. Management wants to maintain the finished goods inventory at 30% of the following month’s sales. Watson uses four units of direct material in each finished unit. The direct material price has been stable and is expected to remain so over the next six months. Management wants to maintain the ending direct materials inventory at 60% of the following month’s production needs. Seventy percent of all purchases are paid in the month of purchase; the remaining 30% are paid in the subsequent month. Watson’s product requires 30 minutes of direct labor time. Each hour of direct labor costs $7. Instructions: Rounding computations to the nearest dollar,…

Attachments:

acc 206 week 5 assignment 5 chapter 8 problems 494849

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Chapter Eight Problems Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Chapter 8 Exercise 1: 1. Basic present value calculations Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar: A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at a 12% rate of return. An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at a 14% rate of return. A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 10% rate of return. An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has a 16% rate of return. Chapter 8 Exercise 4: 4. Cash flow calculations and net present value On January 2, 20X1, Bruce Greene invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.60 per share in 20X1 and 20X2; the dividend was raised to $3.10 per share in 20X3. On December 31, 20X3, Greene sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,000. Greene uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments. Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note: Greene is entitled to the 20X3 dividend. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar. Given the results of part (b), should Greene have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain. Chapter 8 exercise 5: 5. Straightforward net present value and internal rate of return The City of Bedford is studying a 600-acre site on Route 356 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows: Purchase cost: $450 per acre…

Attachments:

acc 206 week 5 final paper 494850

Final Paper Focus of the Final Paper You’ve just been hired onto ABC Company as the corporate controller. ABC Company is a manufacturing firm that specializes in making cedar roofing and siding shingles. The company currently has annual sales of around $1.2 million, a 25% increase from the previous year. The company has an aggressive growth target of reaching $3 million annual sales within the next 3 years. The CEO has been trying to find additional products that can leverage the current ABC employee skillset as well as the manufacturing facilities.

Document Preview:

Final Paper??Focus of the Final Paper??You’ve just been hired onto ABC Company as the corporate controller. ABC Company is a manufacturing firm that specializes in making cedar roofing and siding shingles. The company currently has annual sales of around $1.2 million, a 25% increase from the previous year. The company has an aggressive growth target of reaching $3 million annual sales within the next 3 years. The CEO has been trying to find additional products that can leverage the current ABC employee skillset as well as the manufacturing facilities.    ??As the controller of ABC Company, the CEO has come to you with a new opportunity that he’s been working on. The CEO would like to use the some of the shingle scrap materials to build cedar dollhouses. While this new product line would add additional raw materials and be more time-intensive to manufacture than the cedar shingles, this new product line will be able to leverage ABC’s existing manufacturing facilities as well as the current staff. Although this product line will require added expenses, it will provide additional revenue and gross profit to help reach the growth targets. The CEO is relying on you to help decide how this project can be afforded  Provide details about the estimated product costs, what is needed to break even on the project, and what level of return this product is expected to provide.??In order to help out the CEO, you need to prepare a six- to eight-page report that will contain the following information (including exhibits, but excluding your references and title page). Refer to the accompanying Excel spreadsheet (available through your online course) for some specific cost and profit information to complete the calculations.??? HYPERLINK “http://vizedhtmlcontent.next.ecollege.com/pub/content/5f14b903-0224-4c7c-b273-91c0325ba942/Final_Paper_Spreadsheet._Student_Copy.WP.2013.xlsx” t “_new” ?Final Paper Spreadsheet???I. An overall risk profile of the company based on current economic…

Attachments:

acc 221 mid term 494851

Question 1 Samson Company had the following transactions. 1. Issued 5,000 shares of $100 par preferred stock at $107 for cash. 2. Issued 8,000 share of common stock with a par value of $10 for $120,000. 3. Purchased 500 shares of treasury common stock for $12,000. Prepare the journal entries to record the above stock transactions. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when the amount is entered. Do not indent manually. If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts.) No. Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit 1. 2.

Document Preview:

Question 1 Samson Company had the following transactions. 1. Issued 5,000 shares of $100 par preferred stock at $107 for cash. 2. Issued 8,000 share of common stock with a par value of $10 for $120,000. 3. Purchased 500 shares of treasury common stock for $12,000. Prepare the journal entries to record the above stock transactions. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when the amount is entered. Do not indent manually. If no entry is required, select “No Entry” for the account titles and enter 0 for the amounts.) No. Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit 1. 2. 3. Question 2 The Sorrento Skies Corporation issues 16,000 shares of $100 par value preferred stock for cash at $120 per share. The entry to record the transaction will consist of a debit to Cash for $1,920,000 and a credit or credits to Paid-in Capital from Preferred Stock for 1,920,000. Preferred Stock for 1,600,000. and Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par—Preferred Stock for $320,000. Preferred Stock for 1,600,000.and Retained Earnings for $320,000. Preferred Stock for 1,920,000. Question 3 Treasury stock should be reported in the financial statements of a corporation as a(n) deduction from total paid-in capital and retained earnings. investment. liability. deduction from total paid-in capital. Question 4 Which of the following represents the largest number of common shares? issued shares authorized shares treasury shares outstanding shares Question 5 If a corporation has only one class of stock, it is referred to as classless stock. common stock. solitary stock. preferred stock. Question 6 On January 1, 2014, Mather Corporation had Retained Earnings of $625,000. During the year, Mather had the following selected transactions: 1. Declared stock dividends of $40,000. 2. Declared cash dividends of $50,000. 3. A 2 for 1 stock split involving the issue of 200,000 shares of $5 par value common stock for 100,000 shares of $10 par value common…

Attachments:

acc 281 494852

Discussion Question One – Basic Accounting Equation What are the implications of the basic accounting equation? Discussion Question Two – Why is accounting needed? — How would healthcare companies operate without accounting? Why do we need financial and managerial accounting and what are the fundamental differences between the two? Discussion Question Three – Health Care Spending Review the information provided at the following website: http://www.govspot.com/features/healthcare.htmhttp://www.govspot.com/features/healthcare.htm.

Document Preview:

Discussion Question One – Basic Accounting Equation What are the implications of the basic accounting equation? Discussion Question Two – Why is accounting needed? — How would healthcare companies operate without accounting? Why do we need financial and managerial accounting and what are the fundamental differences between the two? Discussion Question Three – Health Care Spending Review the information provided at the following website: http://www.govspot.com/features/healthcare.htmhttp://www.govspot.com/features/healthcare.htm. Discuss the major financial challenges of Health Care reform. ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

acc 281 494854

Needing assistance with two dq’s please

Document Preview:

Enron – Week 3 Discussion-1 Read and respond to ATC 7-7 on page 285. This situation is similar to the Enron scandal from several years ago. Use the Ashford Online Library to research Enron accounting procedures. In your post, discuss how these accounting procedures affected the company and stockholders. Corporations and Partnerships – Week 3 Discussion -2 Read and respond to ATC 8-6 on page 319. In your post, describe the advantages and disadvantages of organization forms. Include why most large public health care organizations use the corporate form. Methods of Analysis- Written Assignment In a 2 to 3 page paper, evaluate the three methods of analysis: horizontal, vertical, and ratio as explained in Chapter 9 of your textbook. Summarize each method, and discuss how the financial information is used to make a particular decision. Provide a scenario in a health care situation in which a given method of analysis might be used.??????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

acc 290 week 3 individual assignment week three problems and exercises 494855

ACC 290 Week 3 Individual Assignment Week Three Problems and Exercises

Document Preview:

Week Three Problems and Exercises ACC/290 University of Phoenix BE4-1 cash net income A. B. C. D. E. F. -100 0 0 +800 -2,500 0 0 -20 +1,300 0 0 -600 P4-2A Date Accounts Debit Credit 1. June 30 Accounts Rec. 3,900 3,900 2. 30 Unearned Service Rev. 4,100 4,100 3. 30 Insur. Exp. 240 240 4. 30 Utility Exp. 180 180 5. 30 Salary Exp. 1,250 1,250 6. 30 Depreciation Exp. 250 250 7. 30 Supply Exp. 1,280 1,280 Cash 6/30 … 6,850  Accounts Receivable 6/30 … 7,000  6/30 3,900  6/30 … 10,900  N/A Supplies 6/30 … 2,000   6/30 1,280 6/30 … 720  Prepaid Insurance 6/30 … 2,880   6/30 240 6/30 … 2,640  Equipment 6/30 … 15,000  Accounts Pay.  6/30 … 4,230  6/30 180  6/30 4,410 Salary Pay.  6/30 1,250  6/30 … 1,250 Unearned Service Rev. 6/30 4,100   6/30 … 5,200  6/30 … 1,100 Common Stock  6/30 … 22,000 Salary Exp. 6/30 … 4,000  6/30 1,250  6/30 … 5,250  Rent Exp. 6/30 … 2,000  Insur. Exp. 6/30 240  6/30 Bal. 240  Utilities Exp. 6/30 180  6/30 … 180  Supply Exp. 6/30 1,280  6/30 … 1,280  Accumulated Depreciation  6/30 250  6/30 … 250 Depreciation Exp. 6/30 250  6/30 … 250  Service Rev.  6/30 … 8,300  6/30 4,100  6/30 3,900  6/30 … 16,300 Vogel Consult. Adjusted Trial Balance Debit Credit Accounts Rec. Cash Prepaid Insur. Supplies Equipment Accumulated Depreciation Accounts Pay. Salary Pay. Unearned Serv. Rev. Common Stock Service Rev. Salary Exp. Rent Exp. Depreciation Exp. Insur. Exp. Utilities Exp. Supply Exp. 10,900 6,850 2,640 720 15,000 5,250 2,000 250 240 180 …

Attachments:

acc 302 final project 494856

ACC 302 Final Project

Project Orientation and Overview

Every year at the state fair your parents have run a pretzel booth. Over the years you have experimented with new pretzel

recipes, and many have been successfully incorporated into the selection of pretzels now offered each year at the state

fair.

Your parents are ready to retire and turn the business over in your name. You want to capitalize on your parents success

and expand by offering pretzels at a store location. In order to expand, you will need to secure a bank loan to cover

expansion costs and overhead. To consider your proposal, the banker will want to see a business plan, specifically a

master budget.

Your task for this final project is to prepare and present all the necessary documents so that you can ask for that loan.

This task is broken down into four parts:

Part 1: Mission Statement and Partial Business Plan, due at the end of Week Five

Part 2: Budgets, Financial Statements, and Analysis, due at the end of Week Six

Part 3: Complete Business Plan and Cover Letter, due at the end of Week Seven

Part 3: Business Plan Presentation, due on Day 1 of Week Eight

Part 1 Mission Statement and Partial Business Plan, due Week Five

Review the following chapters:

o Chapter 18: The Changing Business Environment: A Manager s Perspective

o Chapter 19: Cost Concepts and Cost Allocation

o Chapter 23: Cost Behavior Analysis

Complete the Mission Statement Template Handout to record information about your pretzel company, its mission,

and its featured product.

Use the tables and information in Exhibit 1 on the next page to calculate the costs of running your business and to

complete the short answer section of the Mission Statement Template Handout.

o Calculate total variable costs per dozen pretzels.

o Calculate sales price per dozen pretzels using 120% markup on variable costs.

o Calculate contribution margin per dozen pretzels.

o Calculate breakeven point for the quarter (three months) in dollars and units.

Submit the completed Mission Statement Template Handout to My Assignments in My West.

Exhibit 1:

Cost of Goods

If your pretzel recipe has ingredients that are not included here, simply consider them part of your overhead expenses.

Direct Materials Unit Unit Cost

Flour (any kind) per cup $ 0.15

Sugar (any kind) per cup $ 0.15

Dry Yeast per cup $ 0.50

1 Stick of Butter, Shortening, Oil per 1/2 cup $ 1.00

Egg per cup $ 0.10

Salt per 1/2 cup $ 0.75

Specialty Ingredients (any kind, e.g., chocolate chips, cinnamon,

cheese, pepperoni, etc.)

per cup $ 2.00

Direct Labor

Information regarding direct labor cost is not maintained because your facility is highly automated. Direct labor is included

as part of manufacturing overhead.

Manufacturing Overhead and Operating Expenses

Manufacturing Overhead Variable

(per dozen)

Fixed

(per month)

Utilities $ 0.50

Other Indirect Materials and Labor $ 0.75

Maintenance $ 500.00

Depreciation $ 2,000.00

Supervision $ 2,500.00

Totals $ 1.25 $ 5,000.00

Operating Expenses Variable

(per dozen)

Fixed

(per month)

Sales Commission $ 0.50

Shipping Costs $ 1.00

Salaries $ 5,000.00

Depreciation $ 200.00

Other $ 1,800.00

Totals $ 1.50 $ 7,000.00 ACC 302 Final Project 3 01/30/12

Part 2 Budgets, Financial Statements, and Analysis, due Week Six

Review Chapter 24: The Budgeting Process.

Use the tables and information presented in Exhibit 2 on the next page to determine production and financial budget

data.

Create a spreadsheet that provides the following budgets:

o Sales budget/cash collections budget

o Direct materials purchases budget/cash disbursements budget

o Manufacturing overhead budget

o Operating expenses budget

Create documents that show your projected income and your cash needs. More specifically, use the budgets and

other documentation that you have created for this project to create the following documents:

o Proforma (projected) variable income statement

o Proforma absorption income statement

o Proforma balance sheet

o Cash budget

Respond to the following short answer questions using a word processing program:

Discuss the importance of beginning the master budget process with an accurate sales budget.

o What are some important factors that a manager should consider when developing a sales budget? State why

each is important.

o Distinguish between operating expenses and disbursements for operating expenses.

o What is the main difference between the variable and absorption income statements?

o What are the major benefits of budgeting?

Submit the budgets, financial documents, and short answer questions to My Assignments in My West. ACC 302 Final Project 4 01/30/12

Exhibit 2:

Production Budget Information

It is a few months before your store is opening. You expect to open the doors of your pretzel company as of January 1.

You are starting fresh with no raw materials, no accounts receivable, and no accounts payable. You were able to secure

several contracts with local businesses (i.e., sales associates that are paid on commission); based off these contracts,

you were able to make projects for the first four months of the year.

Because your pretzels are made fresh daily, there is no work-in-process or finished goods inventory.

You plan to maintain a raw direct material inventory of 10% of the next month production.

Payment for raw direct materials is 25% in the month of purchase and 75% in the following months.

Your monthly sales projections are based off your last name, and sales are sold per dozen.

Collections on Sales

Cash sales collected in the current month: 40%

Credit sales are collected in the following month: 60%

Financial Budget Information

Your initial investment in your business is $50,000, and you are looking to secure a bank loan for $50,000 with

additional line of credit. However, you must always have a minimum cash end-of-month balance of $10,000.

If there is any cash over $10,000 available at the end of the month, you must repay your outstanding balance in

$1,000 increments.

If the end-of-month cash balance falls below $10,000, you must make additional borrowing from the line of credit.

These borrowings are also in increments of $1,000.

Your bank loan and line of credit has an annual interest rate of 12% which is paid monthly on the total outstanding

borrowings at the end of the prior month.

Additional Information:

Fixed asset acquisition in January is $90,000.

Your income taxes are paid each quarter on net income at a rate of 25%.

A-F G-L M-S T-Z

January 3750 2750 2000 1750

February 3750 3250 3500 3750

March 3750 4000 4500 3500

April 3750 5000 5000 6000ACC 302 Final Project 5 01/30/12

Part 3 Complete Business Plan and Cover Letter, due Week Seven

Write a cover letter to a banker explaining why the banker should approve your loan.

Compile and complete your business plan, including all supporting documentation created for this project.

Submit your complete business plan as one document to My Assignments via My West.

Part 4 Business Plan Presentation, due in-class, Week Eight

Create a 5 15 slide Microsoft PowerPoint presentation of your business plan. The slides will be evaluated for:

o Content

o Relevance

o Layout

o Readability

Present your business plan in person (on campus) or via Adobe

Acrobat

ConnectTM during the online class

meeting. Your presentation must be 10 15 minutes long (including Q & A) and will be evaluated on:

o Delivery of the content

o Answers to follow-up questions from the class and instructor

For online students: If you are to be absent from class, your slides must include detailed speaker notes containing the

content that would have been delivered in the live session.

Note to instructor: Time devoted to final presentations may need to be adjusted to account for large class sizes. These

adjustments are at the discretion of the instructor.

acc 421 final exam 23 questions answered 494858

ACC 421 FINAL EXAM 23 QUESTIONS ANSWERED

Document Preview:

ACC 421—- FINAL EXAM….23 QUESTIONS ANSWERED The Financial Accounting Standards Board employs a “due process” system which (Points: 5) has all CPAs in the United States vote on a new Statement. enables interested parties to express their views on issues under consideration. identifies the accounting issues that are the most important. requires that all accountants receive a copy of financial standards. 2. (TCO A) The IASB: (Points: 5) governs accounting standards in the U.S. is working on a convergence project with the FASB. sets the accounting standards for only European countries. plays only a minor part in accounting rule making throughout the world. 3. (TCO A) International GAAP, or i-GAAP: (Points: 5) has different standards than under U.S. GAAP. has some commonality with U.S. GAAP in many areas. is accepted by many countries throughout the world all of the above are true. 4. (TCO A) Information is neutral if it: (Points: 5) provides benefits which are at least equal to the costs of its preparation. can be compared with similar information about an enterprise at other points in time. would have no impact on a decision maker. is free from bias toward a predetermined result. 5. (TCO A) Which of the following elements of financial statements is not a component of comprehensive income? (Points: 5) Revenues Distributions to owners Losses Expenses 6. (TCO A) Issuance of common stock for cash affects which basic element of financial statements? (Points: 5) Revenues Losses Liabilities Equity 7. (TCO A) Which basic element of financial statements arise from peripheral or incidental transactions? (Points: 5) Assets Liabilities Gains Expenses 8. (TCO A) Which basic assumption may not be followed when a firm in bankruptcy reports financial results? (Points: 5) Economic entity assumption Going concern assumption Periodicity assumption Monetary unit assumption 9. (TCO A) What is the quality of information that enables users to better…

Attachments:

acc 422 35 questions 494859

I have attached a copy of all of the questions that I need answered. I think i have the correct answer for the first one and I have partially completed another one. Thank you in advance!!!

Document Preview:

Question 1 ???? ???Your answer has been saved and sent for grading. See Gradebook for score details. ?? ? ??Kraft Enterprises owns the following assets at December 31, 2012.  ?Cash in bank–savings account ?67,755? ?Checking account balance?19,521?? ?Cash on hand?9,899? ?Postdated checks?889?? ?Cash refund due from IRS?32,089? ?Certificates of deposit (180-day)?93,014??What amount should be reported as cash? $ IS THIS CORRECT? Question 2 ????Presented below is information related to Rembrandt Inc.’s inventory.  ?(per unit)?Skis?Boots?Parkas?? ?Historical cost?$255.17? ?$142.36? ?$71.18? ?? ?Selling price?291.43? ?194.74? ?99.05? ?? ?Cost to distribute?25.52? ?10.74? ?3.36? ?? ?Current replacement cost?272.63? ?141.02? ?68.49? ?? ?Normal profit margin?42.98? ?38.95? ?28.54? ??Determine the following: (a)?the two limits to market value (e.g., the ceiling and the floor) that should be used in the lower of cost or market computation for skis; (Round answers to 2 decimal places, e.g. 20.25.)?? ??Ceiling?$??Floor?$?? (b)?the cost amount that should be used in the lower of cost or market comparison of boots; (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 20.25.)?? ??Cost amount?$?? (c)?the market amount that should be used to value parkas on the basis of the lower of cost or market. (Round answer to 2 decimal places, e.g. 20.25.)?? ??Market amount?$?? Question 3 ????Matlock Company uses a perpetual inventory system. Its beginning inventory consists of 66 units that cost $40 each. During June, the company purchased 199 units at $40 each, returned 8 units for credit, and sold 166 units at $66 each. Journalize the June transactions. Description/Account?Debit?Credit??? ? ??         ? ? ??(To record inventory purchased.)? ? ??? ? ??          ? ? ??(To record inventory returned.)? ? ??? ? ??         ? ? ??(To record inventory sold.)? ? ??? ? ??        ? ? ??(To record cost of goods sold.)? ? ???? Question 4 ????Amsterdam Company uses a periodic inventory system. For April,…

Attachments:

acc 422 week 4 dqs 494860

WEEK 4 DQS

ACC/422 Week 4 DQ 1

What are the criteria for classifying an item as a current liability?

What are some examples of current liabilities?

.

Why is it important to classify a portion of long-term debt on a yearly basis as a current liability?

What is the implication of misclassification a liability as current or long-term?

ACC/422 Week 4 DQ 2

What is a contingency?

Why are contingencies important to users of financial statements?

What are the criteria for recording contingencies?

Should companies record a liability for threatened litigation? Explain why or why not.

ACC/422 Week 4 DQ 3

ACC/422 Week 4 DQ 4

GAAP need loss contingencies to be accrued in the period the contingency becomes known. However, GAAP specifically disallows booking gain contingencies until the gain is realized. Do you agree or disagree? Why?

ACC/422 Week 4 DQ 5

What is a bond?

What are some features of a bond?

How do you value bonds?

What factors can affect that value?

Attachments:

acc 422 week 5 dqs 494861

WEEK 5 DQS

ACC/422 Week 5 DQ 1

Leases can be entered into by companies or individuals. Are there reasons other than financial reasons that companies or individuals choose to lease versus buying an asset?

ACC/422 Week 5 DQ 2

What are the advantages and disadvantages of leasing versus buying or leasing versus selling?

ACC/422 Week 5 DQ 3

Does the lessor have to make the same decisions as a lessee when classifying a lease as operating or capital? Why or why not?

Attachments:

acc 510 494864

Foundations of Accounting I Accounting Project Karen Pitsch Alli Co. is a merchandising business. The account balances for Alli Co.

Document Preview:

Foundations of Accounting I Accounting Project Karen Pitsch Alli Co. is a merchandising business. The account balances for Alli Co. as of November 30, 2012 (unless otherwise indicated), are as follows: 110 Cash $ 73,920 112 Accounts Receivable 37,875 113 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 3,500 115 Merchandise Inventory 133,900 116 Prepaid Insurance 3,750 117 Store Supplies 2,850 123 Store Equipment 100,800 124 Accumulated Depreciation-Store Equipment 20,160 210 Accounts Payable 21,450 211 Salaries Payable 0 218 Interest Payable 0 220 Note Payable (Due 2017) 10,000 310 P. Williams, Capital (January 1, 2012) 89,510 311 P. Williams, Drawing 40,000 312 Income Summary 0 410 Sales 853,040 411 Sales Returns and Allowances 20,600 412 Sales Discounts 13,200 510 Cost of Merchandise Sold 414,575 520 Sales Salaries Expense 74,400 521 Advertising Expense 18,000 522 Depreciation Expense 0 523 Store Supplies Expense 0 529 Miscellaneous Selling Expense 2,800 530 Office Salaries Expense 40,500 531 Rent Expense 18,600 532 Insurance Expense 0 533 Bad Debt Expense 0 539 Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 1,650 550 Interest Expense 240 Alli Co. uses the perpetual inventory system and the last-in, first-out costing method. Transportation-in and purchase discounts should be added to the Inventory Control Sheet, but since this will complicate the computation of the Last-in, first-out costing method, please ignore this step in the process. They also use the Allowance Method for bad debt. The Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary Ledgers along with the Inventory Control Sheet should be updated as each transaction affects them (daily). …

acc 557 financial accounting assignment 2 494866

ACC 557 Financial Accounting Assignment # 2

Document Preview:

Assignment 2: You Are an Entrepreneur! Due Week 6 and worth 280 points Student life does not generally afford a great deal of free time to pursue your personal interests; however, at one point, you may have considered turning a personal interest or hobby into an official enterprise. Today, you have finally decided to turn that hobby into a business but have realized that you need start-up capital from a lender or investor. To obtain funding, you need to convince a lender / investor that your business is more than a hobby. You need to demonstrate that you have a firm grasp of your business, the accounting practices that impact your business, the controls needed to safeguard assets, and which accounting system will produce accurate and relevant financial information. Write a six to eight (6-8) page business plan in which you: 1. Describe the type of business you have created including: a. The product or service, and general staffing plan. Provide a rationale for your plan. b. The form of your business and the benefits it offers your particular business, c. A chart of accounts specific to your business, including a rationale as to the selection of each account. (Note: The chart of accounts is a blueprint of your business for the lender/investor. It should report the expected resources that you will consume in your business (assets), the sources of those resources (liabilities and equity), the sources of revenue, and expenditures that you expect to incur to earn those revenues. You may build a detailed chart that includes business units, divisions, product lines, etc.) 2. Based on the form of your business, analyze whether or not you will be required to use Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) or International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) accounting methods and how the IFRS / GAAP convergence will impact your business. Suggest how you will incorporate any changes into your books and records. (Note: You need to demonstrate to the…

Attachments:

acc 560 managerial accounting 494867

Homework Chapter 01  Exercise 1-5 Ikerd Company is a manufacturer of personal computers. Various costs and expenses associated with its operations are as follows. The company intends to classify these costs and expenses into the following categories: (a) direct materials, (b) direct labor, (c) manufacturing overhead, and (d) period costs. For each item, indicate the cost category to which it belongs. Item Category 1-Property taxes on the factory building.

Document Preview:

Homework Chapter 01  Exercise 1-5 Ikerd Company is a manufacturer of personal computers. Various costs and expenses associated with its operations are as follows. The company intends to classify these costs and expenses into the following categories: (a) direct materials, (b) direct labor, (c) manufacturing overhead, and (d) period costs. For each item, indicate the cost category to which it belongs. Item Category 1-Property taxes on the factory building. 2-Production superintendents’ salaries. 3-Memory boards and chips used in assembling computers. 4-Depreciation on the factory equipment. 5-Salaries for assembly-line quality control inspectors. 6-Sales commissions paid to sell personal computers.- 7-Electrical components used in assembling computers 8-Wages of workers assembling personal computers. 9-Soldering materials used on factory assembly lines. 10-Salaries for the night security guards for the factory building. Exercise 1-8 (Part Level Submission) Lopez Corporation incurred the following costs while manufacturing its product. Materials used in product $120,000 Advertising expense $45,000 Depreciation on plant 60,000 Property taxes on plant 14,000 Property taxes on store 7,500 Delivery expense 21,000 Labor costs of assembly-line workers 110,000 Sales commissions 35,000 Factory supplies used 23,000 Salaries paid to sales clerks 50,000 Work in process inventory was $12,000 at January 1 and $15,500 at December 31. Finished goods inventory was $60,000 at January 1 and $45,600 at December 31. Compute cost of goods manufactured. Exercise 1-8 (Part Level Submission) Lopez Corporation incurred the following costs while manufacturing its product. Materials used in product $120,000 Advertising expense $45,000 Depreciation on plant 60,000 Property taxes on plant 14,000 Property taxes on store 7,500 Delivery expense…

Attachments:

for abhishek jain 494820

This is Task 4

SUBDOMAIN 309.3 – QUANTITATIVE ANALYSIS

Competency 309.3.2: PERT/CPM Techniques – The graduate correctly applies

PERT/CPM techniques to project management tasks.

Objectives:

309.3.2-01: Determine the critical path identified by a given PERT/CPM analysis.

309.3.2-02: Utilize PERT analysis to determine the probability that a given project will

meet a specified deadline for completion.

309.3.2-03: Determine slack time for a given project activity.

309.3.2-04: Determine scheduled start time for a given project activity.

309.3.2-05: Determine scheduled completion time for a given project activity.

309.3.2-06: Use time-cost trade-offs to appropriately crash a project network.

Introduction:

This task requires candidates to prepare a program evaluation and review technique (PERT)

chart and apply critical path method (CPM) techniques.

Given:

Company A is installing a Web-based customer-feedback system to meet customer needs

for quick response when rolling out new products. A new product line is rolling out in 34

weeks and the customer-feedback system must be installed and running in time for the new

product launch.

Table 1.1 in the attached worksheet PERT/CPM Tables shows three estimates of the time it

will take Company A to complete each of the activities and project tasks in the customerfeedback

system project (optimistic, probable, pessimistic).

Company B is installing a similar feedback system to accompany a new product line and

originally had the same time line as Company A. Company B just announced that its new

product line is ahead of schedule and will be launched in 30 weeks instead of the initially

projected 34 weeks. Because the Web-based customer feedback system must be installed

and running in time for the revised date of the product launch, something must be done to

shorten implementation time required for the customer-feedback system project. Refer to

Table 1.2 in the attached worksheet PERT/CPM Tables that lists the expected time it will

take to complete the activities if shortened as much as possible (crash time), the cost to

complete the activity using normal resources (normal cost), and the cost of completing the

activity on an accelerated basis (crash cost).

Task:

A. Use the estimates for Company A in Table 1.1 to do each of the following:

1. Determine the expected completion time for each of the ten project activities,

showing all your work.

a. Determine the variance for each project activity, showing all your work.

2. Prepare a PERT chart (network diagram) to identify the critical path for project

completion.

Note: If you don t have software to build a PERT chart, use text boxes with lines or

arrows in a word processing program.

3. Determine each of the following, showing all of your work or reasoning:

a. Expected duration of the entire project

b. Slack for project task A

c. Slack for project task H

d. The week project task F is scheduled to start

e. The week project task I is scheduled to finish

4. Determine the probability of completing this project in time for the product launch in

34 weeks, showing all your work.

B. Assume that Company B has the same expected completion times for project activities

as Company A. Use your results from part A1 and the data in Table 1.2 to determine the

following, showing all your work:

1. Maximum reduction in time

2. Crash cost per week

C. Identify the following by using your results from part B:

1. Activities to be crashed in order to complete the project within 30 weeks

2. Number of weeks each of these activities should be crashed to meet the deadline

with the lowest possible increase in cost

3. Additional crashing cost of the activities identified in part C1.

D. When you use sources, include all in-text citations and references in APA format.

Note: Please save word-processing documents as *.rtf (Rich Text Format) files.

Note: For definitions of terms commonly used in the rubric, see the attached Rubric Terms.

Note: When using sources to support ideas and elements in a paper or project, the

submission MUST include APA formatted in-text citations with a corresponding reference list

for any direct quotes or paraphrasing. It is not necessary to list sources that were consulted

if they have not been quoted or paraphrased in the text of the paper or project.

Note: No more than a combined total of 30% of a submission can be directly quoted or

closely paraphrased from sources, even if cited correctly. For tips on using APA style, please

refer to the APA Handout web link included in the General Instructions section.

See attached

Attachments:

ac 310 week 7 problem 3 494821

David, Matt, and Chris are forming The Doctor Partnership. David is transferring $30,000 of personal cash and equipment worth $25,000 to the partnership. Matt owns land worth $18,000 and a small building worth $75,000, which he transfers to the partnership. There is a long-term mortgage of $20,000 on the land and building, which the partnership assumes. Chris transfers cash of $7,000, accounts receivable of $36,000, supplies worth $3,000, and equipment worth $22,000 to the partnership. The partnership expects to collect $32,000 of the accounts receivable. Prepare a classified balance sheet for the partnership after the partners investments on December 31, 2012.

Document Preview:

15000 10000 25000 7000 5000 12000 22000 15000 37000 -4500 -4500 -9000 18500 10500 28000 12/31/2012 85000 50000 35000 50000 50000 20000 11000 31000 81000 45000 126000 Total paid-in capital & retained earnings Total stockholder’s equity Less treasury stock ( Division of Net Income Lill Dil Total 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. The Doctor Paretnership Balance Sheet Assets Liabilities and Owner’s Equity Account Titles Debit Credit Stockholders’ equity Prob 4 Prob. 5 Prob. 3 Prob. 2 Prob. 1 Salary allowance Interest allowance Total salaries and interest Total interest Remaining deficiency (9000) Total remainder Total Division A partnership is an association of two or more persons… Mutual Agency is a disadvantage of the partnership form… The net income of a partnership is not taxed as a… The legal requiremnets for forming a partnership is easy When a partnership is dissolved, each partner has a claim on total… Land Paid-in capital in Excess of Par – Common Stock Common Stock Paid-in capital Capital stock Common stock, $10 par, 5000 shares issued Total capital stock Additional paid-in capital In excess of par- common stock From treasury stock Total additional pain-in capital Total paid-in capital Reatained Earnings ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

ac 315 2 problems 494822

Problem 1:

Blue Lagoon Corporation is projecting a cash balance of $31,000 in its December 31, 2012, balance sheet. Blue Lagoon s schedule of expected collections from customers for the first quarter of 2012 show total collections of $180,000. The schedule of expected payments for direct materials for the first quarter of 2012 shows total payments of $41,000. Other information gathered for the first quarter of 2012 is: sale equipment $3,500, direct labor $70,000, manufacturing overhead $35,000, selling and administrative expenses $45,000, and purchase of securities $12,000. Blue Lagoon wants to maintain a balance of at least $25,000 cash at the end of each quarter.

Prepare a cash budget for the first quarter.

Problem 2:

Russell Company uses flexible budgets to control its selling expenses. Monthly sales are expected to range from $170,000 to $200,000. Variable costs and their percentage relationship to sales are: Sales Commissions 5%, Advertising 4%, Traveling 3%, and Delivery 2%. Fixed selling expenses will consist of Sales Salaries $34,000, Depreciation on Delivery Equipment $7,000, and Insurance on Delivery Equipment $1,000.

Prepare a monthly flexible budget for each $10,000, increment of sales within the relevant range for the year ending December 31, 2012.

***PLEASE USE ATTACHED WORKSHEET FOR ANSWERS

Attachments:

ac homework 494824

Problem 1:

Mathias Company manufactures a number of specialized machine parts. Part Bunkka-22 uses $35 of direct materials and $15 of direct labor per unit.

Mathias estimates manufacturing overhead is as follows:

Materials handling

$100,000

Machining

200,000

Factory supervision

150,000

Total

$450,000

Overhead is applied based on direct labor costs, which were estimated at $200,000.

Mathias is considering adopting activity-based costing. The cost drivers are estimated at:

Activity

Cost Driver

Expected Use

Materials Handling

Weight of materials

50,000 pounds

Machining

Machine hours

20,000 hours

Factory supervision

Direct labor hours

12,000 hours

  1. Compute the cost of 1,000 units of Bunkka-22 using the current traditional costing system.
  2. Compute the cost of 1,000 units of Bunkka-22 using the proposed activity-based costing system. Assume the 1,000 units use 2,500 pounds of materials, 500 machine hours, and 1,000 direct labor hours.

Problem 2:

In the month of March, New Day Spa services 570 clients at an average price of $120. During the month, fixed costs were $21,000 and variable costs were 65% of sales.

  1. Determine the contribution margin in dollars, per unit, and as a ratio.
  2. Using the contribution margin technique, compute the break-even point in dollars and in units.

Attachments:

ac310 problem 5 494825

Problem 5:

Vivi Corporation has the following accounts at December 31: Common Stock, $10 par, 5,000 shares issued, $50,000; Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Common Stock $20,000; Retained Earnings $45,000; and Treasury Stock, 500 shares, $11,000. Prepare the stockholders equity section of the balance sheet.

I need my worked checked and the problem completed. I thought I was on the right track but I am lost at the end. Please help!

Document Preview:

15000 10000 25000 7000 5000 12000 22000 15000 37000 -4500 -4500 -9000 18500 10500 28000 12/31/2012 37000 32000 3000 72000 47000 18000 75000 140000 212000 20000 20000 20000 55000 73000 64000 192000 212000 85000 50000 35000 50000 50000 20000 11000 31000 81000 45000 126000 Total paid-in capital & retained earnings Total stockholder’s equity Less treasury stock ( Division of Net Income Lill Dil Total 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. The Doctor Paretnership Balance Sheet Assets Liabilities and Owner’s Equity Account Titles Debit Credit Stockholders’ equity Prob 4 Prob. 5 Prob. 3 Prob. 2 Prob. 1 Salary allowance Interest allowance Total salaries and interest Total interest Remaining deficiency (9000) Total remainder Total Division A partnership is an association of two or more persons… Mutual Agency is a disadvantage of the partnership form… The net income of a partnership is not taxed as a… The legal requiremnets for forming a partnership is easy When a partnership is dissolved, each partner has a claim on total… Land Paid-in capital in Excess of Par – Common Stock Common Stock Paid-in capital Capital stock Common stock, $10 par, 5000 shares issued Total capital stock Additional paid-in capital In excess of par- common stock From treasury stock Total additional pain-in capital Total paid-in capital Reatained Earnings Current Assets Cash Accounts receivable Supplies Equipment Land Building Total Assets Long term Mortgage Total Liabilties David’s Capital Matt’s Capital Chirs ‘s Capital Total Captal Accpunts Total Liabilties and Total Captal Accpunts ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

acc 01 week 11 chapter 9 p9 3 p9 4 p9 5 494826

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

PROBLEM 9-5The following selected transactions are from VP Company:Dec Accepted a , 90-day, note dated this day granting Aaron Burr a time extension on his account receivable.Made an adjusting entry to record the accrued interest on the Burr note.JanAccepted a , 90-day, note dated this day granting George Clinton a time extension on his past-due account receivable.FebReceived payment of principal plus interest from Burr for the note of December 1.AprClinton dishonored his note when presented for payment.JunAccepted a , 60-day, note dated this day in granting Elbridge Gerry a time extension on his past due account.AugGerry refuses to pay the note that was due Aug 9. Prepare the journal entry to charge the dishonored note plus accrued interest to Gerry’s account receivable.SepReceived payment from Gerry for the maturity value of his dishonored note plus interest for the 50 days past the maturity of the noteNovAccepted a , 120-day, note dated this day from Daniel Tompkins granting a time extension on his account.DecWrote off the Clinton account against Allowance for Doubtful Accounts.DecMade an adjusting entry to record accrued interest on the Tompkins note.Required1. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions and events.Check Feb 29, Cr. Interest RevenueAug 14, Cr. Interest Revenue 6.00%200$ 320$ 6.00%22,000$ 5.00%32,000$ 6.00%9.00%312010201120,000$ 36,000$ 1162916313111281410???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

acc 494827

14 28 Q30????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Document Preview:

14 28 Q30???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

acc 102 take home budget test 494828

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

ACC 102 – Take-home budget test Near the end of 2011, the management of a merchandising company prepared the following estimated balance sheet for December 31, 2011. To prepare a master budget for January, February, and March of 2012, management gathers the following information. Their single product is purchased for $10 per unit and resold for $24 per unit. The expected inventory level of 18,000 units on December 31, 2011, is more than management’s desired level for 2012, which is 40% of the next month’s expected sales (in units). Expected sales are: January, 30,000 units; February, 24,000 units; March, 40,000 units; and April, 50,000 units. Cash sales and credit sales represent 40% and 60%, respectively, of total sales. Of the credit sales, 70% is collected in the first month after the month of sale and 30% in the second month after the month of sale. For the $400,000 accounts receivable balance at December 31, 2011, $280,000 is collected in January 2012 and the remaining $120,000 is collected in February 2012. Merchandise purchases are paid for as follows: 80% in the first month after the month of purchase and 20% in the second month after the month of purchase. For the $300,000 accounts payable balance at December 31, 2011, $240,000 is paid in January 2012 and the remaining $60,000 is paid in February 2012. Sales commissions equal to 10% of sales are paid each month. Sales salaries (excluding commissions) are $288,000 per year. General and administrative salaries are $336,000 per year. Maintenance expense equals $6,000 per month and is paid in cash. Equipment reported in the December 31, 2011, balance sheet was purchased in January 2011. It is being depreciated over 10 years under the straight-line method with no salvage value. The following amounts for new equipment purchases are planned in the coming quarter: January, $240,000; February, $120,000; and March, $96,000. This equipment will be depreciated using the straight-line method over 10 years with…

Attachments:

acc 494829

Problem 2: 10 points Nemani Corporation Cash Budget For the Quarter Ending March 31, 2013 Problem 3: 10 points Elias Corporation Cost of Goods Manufactured Schedule For the Month Ended June 30, 2013 Manufacturing overhead: Problem 6: 5 points Date Account Description Debit Credit??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Document Preview:

Problem 2: 10 points Nemani Corporation Cash Budget For the Quarter Ending March 31, 2013 Problem 3: 10 points Elias Corporation Cost of Goods Manufactured Schedule For the Month Ended June 30, 2013 Manufacturing overhead: Problem 6: 5 points Date Account Description Debit Credit?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

acc 494830

Week Three Assignment

Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.

1. Overhead application: Working backward

The Towson Manufacturing Corporation applies overhead on the basis of machine hours. The following divisional information is presented for your review:

Division A

Division B

Actual machine hours

26,500

?

Estimated machine hours

20,000

?

Overhead application rate

$5.00

$6.00

Actual overhead

$120,000

?

Estimated overhead

?

$90,000

Applied overhead

?

$87,000

Over- (under-) applied overhead

?

$8,500

Find the unknowns for each of the divisions.

2. Computationsusing a job order system

Spencer Corporation employs a job order cost system. On May 1 the following balances were extracted from the general ledger;

Work in process $ 36,200

Finished goods 86,900

Cost of goods sold 130,700

Work in Process consisted of two jobs, no. 101 ($22,400) and no. 103 ($13,800). During May, direct materials requisitioned from the storeroom amounted to $96,500, and direct labor incurred totaled $116,500. These figures are subdivided as follows:

Direct Materials

Direct Labor

Job No.

Amount

Job No.

Amount

101

$6,000

101

$7,800

117

18,500

103

20,800

116

34,200

117

44,000

Other

36,800

116

18,000

$95,500

Other

25,900

$116,500

Job no. 117 was the only job in process at the end of the month. Job no. 101 and three “other” jobs were sold during May at a profit of 20% of cost. The “other” jobs contained material and labor charges of $23,000 and $17,400, respectively.

General applies overhead daily at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost as labor summaries are posted to job orders. The firm’s fiscal year ends on May 31.

Instructions:

a. Compute the total overhead applied to production during May.

b. Compute the cost of the ending work in process inventory.

c. Compute the cost of jobs completed during May.

d. Compute the cost of goods sold for the year ended May 31.

3. High-low method
The following cost data pertain to 20X8 operations of Houston Products:

Quarter 1

Quarter 2

Quarter 3

Quarter 4

Shipping costs

$56,200

$58,620

$61,000

$59,400

Orders shipped

120

135

170

145

The company uses the high-low method to analyze costs.

a. Determine the variable cost per order shipped.

b. Determine the fixed shipping costs per quarter.

c. If present cost behavior patterns continue, determine total shipping costs for 20X9 if activity amounts to 570 orders.

4. Break-even and other CVP relationships

Pine Hospital has average revenue of $190 per patient day. Variable costs are $50 per patient day; fixed costs total $4,620,000 per year.

a. How many patient days does the hospital need to break even?

b. What level of revenue is needed to earn a target income of $560,000?

c. If variable costs drop to $36 per patient day, what increase in fixed costs can be tolerated without changing the break-even point as determined in part (a)?

5. Direct and absorption costing

The information that follows pertains to XYZ Products for the year ended December 31, 20X8.

Inventory, 1/1/X8

26,000 units

Units manufactured

80,000

Units sold

83,000

Inventory, 12/31/X8

? units

Manufacturing costs:

Direct materials

$4 per unit

Direct labor

$5 per unit

Variable factory overhead

$9 per unit

Fixed factory overhead

$300,000

Selling & administrative expenses:

Variable

$2 per unit

Fixed

$136,000

The unit selling price is $26. Assume that costs have been stable in recent years.

Instructions:

a. Compute the number of units in the ending inventory.

b. Calculate the cost of a unit assuming use of:

1. Direct costing.

2. Absorption costing.

c. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X8, by using direct costing.

d. Prepare an income statement for the year ended December 31, 20X8, by using absorption costing.

Attachments:

acc 494831

Week Four Assignment Please complete the following 3 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Comprehensive budgeting The balance sheet of Williams Company as of December 31, 20X8, follows. WILLIAMS COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 12X8 Assets Cash $4,595 Accounts receivable 10,000 Finished goods (575 units x $7.

Document Preview:

Week Four Assignment Please complete the following 3 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Comprehensive budgeting The balance sheet of Williams Company as of December 31, 20X8, follows. WILLIAMS COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 12X8 Assets Cash $4,595 Accounts receivable 10,000 Finished goods (575 units x $7.00) 4,025 Direct materials (2,760 units x $0.50) 1,380 Plant & equipment $50,000 Less: Accumulated depreciation 10,000 40,000 Total assets $60,000 Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity Accounts payable to suppliers $14,000 Common stock $25,000 Retained earnings 21,000 46,000 Total liabilities &. stockholders’ equity $60,000 The following information has been extracted from the firm’s accounting records: All sales are made on account at $20 per unit. Sixty percent of the sales are collected in the month of sale; the remaining 40% are collected in the following month. Forecasted sales for the first five months of 20X9 are: January, 1,600 units,- February, 1,700 units; March, 1,900 units; April, 2,100 units; May, 2,200 units. Management wants to maintain the finished goods inventory at 30% of the following month’s sales. Williams uses four units of direct material in each finished unit. The direct material price has been stable and is expected to remain so over the next six months. Management wants to maintain the ending direct materials inventory at 60% of the following month’s production needs. Seventy percent of all purchases are paid in the month of purchase; the remaining 30% are paid in the subsequent month. Williams’ product requires 30 minutes of direct labor time. Each hour of direct labor costs $9. Instructions: Rounding computations to the…

Attachments:

acc 494832

Accounting 131 – Homework Handout – Corporations Name ________________________ Stockholder Equity Transactions Record the following transactions in general journal form. Feb. 1 Issued for cash 2,000 shares of Preferred Stock at $50 per share, par value. ? Date?Account Titles?Debit?Credit?? ? Feb. 1????? ? ????? Feb. 6 Issued for cash 50,000 shares of $10 par value Common Stock at $12 per share. ? Date?Account Titles?Debit?Credit?? ? Feb. 6????? ? ????? ? ????? Feb. 15 Issued 2,000 shares of $10 par value Common Stock in exchange for $28,000 cash.

Document Preview:

Accounting 131 – Homework Handout – Corporations Name ________________________ Stockholder Equity Transactions Record the following transactions in general journal form. Feb. 1 Issued for cash 2,000 shares of Preferred Stock at $50 per share, par value. ? Date?Account Titles?Debit?Credit?? ? Feb. 1????? ? ????? Feb. 6 Issued for cash 50,000 shares of $10 par value Common Stock at $12 per share. ? Date?Account Titles?Debit?Credit?? ? Feb. 6????? ? ????? ? ????? Feb. 15 Issued 2,000 shares of $10 par value Common Stock in exchange for $28,000 cash. ? Date?Account Titles?Debit?Credit?? ? Feb. 15????? ? ????? ? ????? Stockholder’s Equity Section Using the following information; a. Determine the Retained Earnings balance at 12/31/2009. Dividends for the year were $30,000 and the corporation’s net income was $172,000 for the year. b. Determine the Total Stockholder’s Equity amount reported on the Balance Sheet, 12/31/2009, from the information provided below. Additional Paid-in capital $148,000 Preferred stock, 12%, $100 par value 800,000 Common Stock, $5 stated value 450,000 Retained earnings, 1/1/2009 481,800 Investments – short term 50,000 Organizational costs 1,500 Treasury Stock – common (600 shares) 3,600 Accounts receivable 125,000 Mortgages payable 75,000 Dividends payable 15,000 Dividends 30,000 a. _______________________________ b. ________________________________ ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

acc 205 financial statement analysis of ge 494833

I am new here, searching to see if there is already a completed report for the “Financial Analysis of GE”

Document Preview:

Week 5 – Assignment Financial Ratios Please complete each of the exercises below in a word document. Save the document, and submit to in week using the Assignment Submission button.  http://vizedhtmlcontent.next.ecollege.com/pub/content/f43dbe39-2059-4a00-9fea-369a8541e3f6/Week_Five_Exercise_Assignment.docxWeek Five Exercise Assignment  Carefully review the  http://ashford.waypointoutcomes.com/assessment/2868/previewGrading Rubric for the criteria that will be used to evaluate your assignment. Week Five Exercise Assignment Financial Ratios Liquidity ratios. Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10: Edison Stagg Thornton Cash $4,000 $2,500 $1,000 Short-term investments 3,000 2,500 2,000 Accounts receivable 2,000 2,500 3,000 Inventory 1,000 2,500 4,000 Prepaid expenses 800 800 800 Accounts payable 200 200 200 Notes payable: short-term 3,100 3,100 3,100 Accrued payables 300 300 300 Long-term liabilities 3,800 3,800 3,800 Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why? Computation and evaluation of activity ratios. The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc: 20X5 20X4 Net credit sales $832,000 $760,000 Cost of goods sold 440,000 350,000 Cash, Dec. 31 125,000 110,000 Average Accounts receivable 180,000 140,000 Average Inventory 70,000 50,000 Accounts payable, Dec. 31 115,000 108,000 Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 20X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity. Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The company reported the following information for 20X7: Net sales $1,500,000 Interest expense $120,000 Income tax expense $80,000 Preferred dividends $25,000 Net income $130,000 Average assets $1,100,000 Average…

Attachments:

acc 205 week 2 exercise assignment 2013 updated version 494834

Week 2 Exercise

Revenue and Expense Exercises

Document Preview:

Week Two Exercise Assignment Revenue and Expenses 1. Recognition of concepts. Ron Carroll operates a small company that books enter?tainers for theaters, parties, conventions, and so forth. The company’s fiscal year ends on June 30. Consider the following items and classify each as either (1) pre?paid expense, (2) unearned revenue, (3) accrued expense, (4) accrued revenue, or (5) none of the foregoing. a. Amounts paid on June 30 for a 1-year insurance policy b. Professional fees earned but not billed as of June 30 c. Repairs to the firm’s copy machine, incurred and paid in June d. An advance payment from a client for a performance next month at a convention e. The payment in part (d) from the client’s point of view f. Interest owed on the company’s bank loan, to be paid in early July g. The bank loan payable in part (f) h. Office supplies on hand at year-end 2. Analysis of prepaid account balance. The following information relates to Action Sign Company for 20X2: Insurance expense ?$4,350 ??Prepaid insurance, December 31, 20X2 ?1,900 ??Cash outlays for insurance during 20X2 ?6,200 ??Compute the balance in the Prepaid Insurance account on January 1, 20X2. 3. Understanding the closing process. Examine the following list of accounts: Interest Payable ?Accumulated Depreciation: Equipment ??Alex Kenzy, Drawing ?Accounts Payable ??Service Revenue ?Cash ??Accounts Receivable ?Supplies Expense ??Interest Expense ?? Which of the preceding accounts a. appear on a post-closing trial balance? b. are commonly known as temporary, or nominal, accounts? c. generate a debit to Income Summary in the closing process? d. are closed to the capital account in the closing process? 4. Adjusting entries and financial statements. The following information pertains to Fixation Enterprises: The company previously collected $1,500 as an advance payment for services to be rendered in the future. By the end of December, one third of this amount had been earned. Fixation…

Attachments:

acc 205 week five exercise assignment financial ratios 494836

Week Five Exercise Assignment

Financial Ratios

Document Preview:

Week Five Exercise Assignment Financial Ratios Liquidity ratios. Edison, Stagg, and Thornton have the following financial information at the close of business on July 10: Edison Stagg Thornton Cash $4,000 $2,500 $1,000 Short-term investments 3,000 2,500 2,000 Accounts receivable 2,000 2,500 3,000 Inventory 1,000 2,500 4,000 Prepaid expenses 800 800 800 Accounts payable 200 200 200 Notes payable: short-term 3,100 3,100 3,100 Accrued payables 300 300 300 Long-term liabilities 3,800 3,800 3,800 Compute the current and quick ratios for each of the three companies. (Round calculations to two decimal places.) Which firm is the most liquid? Why? Computation and evaluation of activity ratios. The following data relate to Alaska Products, Inc: 19X5 19X4 Net credit sales $832,000 $760,000 Cost of goods sold 440,000 350,000 Cash, Dec. 31 125,000 110,000 Average Accounts receivable 180,000 140,000 Average Inventory 70,000 50,000 Accounts payable, Dec. 31 115,000 108,000 Compute the accounts receivable and inventory turnover ratios for 19X5. Alaska rounds all calculations to two decimal places. Profitability ratios, trading on the equity. Digital Relay has both preferred and common stock outstanding. The company reported the following information for 19X7: Net sales $1,500,000 Interest expense 120,000 Income tax expense 80,000 Preferred dividends 25,000 Net income 130,000 Average assets 1,100,000 Average common stockholders’ equity 400,000 Compute the gross profit margin ratio, the return on equity and the return on assets, rounding calculations to two decimal places. Does the firm have positive or negative financial leverage? Briefly explain. Horizontal analysis. Mary Lynn Corporation has been operating for several years. Selected data from the 20X1 and 20X2 financial statements follow. 20X2 20X1 Current Assets $ 76,000 $ 80,000 Property, Plant, and Equipment (net) 99,000 90,000…

Attachments:

acc 206 494837

Potential investments to accelerate profit: ABC company has the option to purchase additional equipment that will cost about $42,000, and this new equipment will produce the following savings in factory overhead costs over the next five years:

Year 1, $15,000

Year 2, $13,000

Year 3, $10,000

Year 4, $10,000

Year 5, $6,000

ABC Company uses the net-present-value method to analyze investments and desires a minimum rate of return of 12% on the equipment.

a. What is the net present value of the proposed investment ignore income taxes and depreciation?

b. Assuming a 5-year straight-line depreciation, how will this impact the factory s fixed costs for each of the 5 years (and the implied product costs)? What about cash flow?

Considering the cash flow impact of the equipment as well as the time-value of money, would you recommend that ABC Company purchases the equipment? Why or why not?

Attachments:

acc 206 494838

ACC 206 Week 1 Assignment: Chapter One Problems Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button.

Document Preview:

ACC 206 Week 1 Assignment: Chapter One Problems Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Ch 1 Critical Thinking Question 5: Answer the following questions: Why are noncash transactions, such as the exchange of common stock for a building for example, included on a statement of cash flows? How are these noncash transactions disclosed? Chapter 1 Exercise 1: 1. Classification of activities Classify each of the following transactions as arising from an operating (O), investing (I), financing (F), or noncash investing/financing (N) activity. ________ Received $80,000 from the sale of land. ________ Received $3,200 from cash sales. ________ Paid a $5,000 dividend. ________ Purchased $8,800 of merchandise for cash. ________ Received $100,000 from the issuance of common stock. ________ Paid $1,200 of interest on a note payable. ________ Acquired a new laser printer by paying $650. ________ Acquired a $400,000 building by signing a $400,000 mortgage note. Chapter 1 Exercise 4: 4. Overview of direct and indirect methods Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why. Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities. Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used. One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported. The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed. The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash…

Attachments:

acc 206 494839

Institute of Management Accounting

While there are many instances of overlap between financial accounting and management accounting, each group s primary focus is different. Review the Institute of Management Accounting s (IMA) website, specifically the About IMA and the Resources and Publications sections of the website. Are you surprised by the topics that management accountants are focusing on? Why or why not? What interests you more, financial accounting or management accounting?

Carefully review the Grading Rubric for the criteria that will be used to evaluate your journal entry.

Document Preview:

ACC 206 Week 2 Assignment: Chapter Two and Three Problems Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Chapter 2 Exercise 3 1. Analysis of stockholders’ equity Star Corporation issued both common and preferred stock during 20X6. The stockholders’ equity sections of the company’s balance sheets at the end of 20X6 and 20X5 follow: 20X6 20X5 Preferred stock, $100 par value, 10% $580,000 $500,000 Common stock, $10 par value 2,350,000 1,750,000 Paid-in capital in excess of par value Preferred 24,000 — Common 4,620,000 3,600,000 Retained earnings 8,470,000 6,920,000 Total stockholders’ equity $16,044,000 $12,770,000 Compute the number of preferred shares that were issued during 20X6. Calculate the average issue price of the common stock sold in 20X6. By what amount did the company’s paid-in capital increase during 20X6? Did Star’s total legal capital increase or decrease during 20X6? By what amount? Chapter 2 Problem 1 2. Bond computations: Straight-line amortization Southlake Corporation issued $900,000 of 8% bonds on March 1, 20X1. The bonds pay interest on March 1 and September 1 and mature in 10 years. Assume the independent cases that follow. Case A—The bonds are issued at 100. Case B—The bonds are issued at 96. Case C—The bonds are issued at 105. Southlake uses the straight-line method of amortization. Instructions: Complete the following table: Case A Case B Case C Cash inflow on the issuance date _______ _______ _______ Total cash outflow through maturity _______ _______ _______ Total borrowing cost over the life of the bond issue _______ _______ _______ Interest expense for the year ended December 31, 20X1…

Attachments:

acc 206 ashford university week 1 assignment 494840

Need Help With Acc 206 Ashford University Week 1 Assignment. Please see Attachment for work

Document Preview:

ACC 206 Week 1 Assignment: Chapter One Problems Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Ch 1 Critical Thinking Question 5: Answer the following questions: Why are noncash transactions, such as the exchange of common stock for a building for example, included on a statement of cash flows? How are these noncash transactions disclosed? Chapter 1 Exercise 1: 1. Classification of activities Classify each of the following transactions as arising from an operating (O), investing (I), financing (F), or noncash investing/financing (N) activity. ________ Received $80,000 from the sale of land. ________ Received $3,200 from cash sales. ________ Paid a $5,000 dividend. ________ Purchased $8,800 of merchandise for cash. ________ Received $100,000 from the issuance of common stock. ________ Paid $1,200 of interest on a note payable. ________ Acquired a new laser printer by paying $650. ________ Acquired a $400,000 building by signing a $400,000 mortgage note. Chapter 1 Exercise 4: 4. Overview of direct and indirect methods Evaluate the comments that follow as being True or False. If the comment is false, briefly explain why. Both the direct and indirect methods will produce the same cash flow from operating activities. Depreciation expense is added back to net income when the indirect method is used. One of the advantages of using the direct method rather than the indirect method is that larger cash flows from financing activities will be reported. The cash paid to suppliers is normally disclosed on the statement of cash flows when the indirect method of statement preparation is employed. The dollar change in the Merchandise Inventory account appears on the statement of cash…

Attachments:

acc 206 ashford university week 4 assigment 494841

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

ACC 206 Week 4 Assignment: Chapter 6 and 7 Problems Please complete the following exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. Chapter 6 Problem 3 1. Comprehensive budgeting The balance sheet of Watson Company as of December 31, 20X1, follows. WATSON COMPANY Balance Sheet December 31, 12X1 Assets Cash $4,595 Accounts receivable 10,000 Finished goods (575 units x $7.00) 4,025 Direct materials (2,760 units x $0.50) 1,380 Plant & equipment $50,000 Less: Accumulated depreciation 10,000 40,000 Total assets $60,000 Liabilities & Stockholders’ Equity Accounts payable to suppliers $14,000 Common stock $25,000 Retained earnings 21,000 46,000 Total liabilities &. stockholders’ equity $60,000 The following information has been extracted from the firm’s accounting records: All sales are made on account at $20 per unit. Sixty percent of the sales are collected in the month of sale; the remaining 40% are collected in the following month. Forecasted sales for the first five months of 20X2 are: January, 1,500 units,- February, 1,600 units; March, 1,800 units; April, 2,000 units; May, 2,100 units. Management wants to maintain the finished goods inventory at 30% of the following month’s sales. Watson uses four units of direct material in each finished unit. The direct material price has been stable and is expected to remain so over the next six months. Management wants to maintain the ending direct materials inventory at 60% of the following month’s production needs. Seventy percent of all purchases are paid in the month of purchase; the remaining 30% are paid in the subsequent month. Watson’s product requires 30 minutes of direct labor time. Each hour of direct labor costs…

Attachments:

2013 fall 2013 acct 202 final exam fixed 494794

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

12/7/13 Assignment Print View Problem 10-2A Asset cost allocation; straight-line depreciation L.O. C1, P1 [The following information applies to the questions displayed below.] In January 2011, Keona Co. pays $2,800,000 for a tract of land with two buildings on it. It plans to demolish Building 1 and build a new store in its place. Building 2 will be a company office; it is appraised at $641,300, with a useful life of 20 years and an $80,000 salvage value. A lighted parking lot near Building 1 has improvements (Land Improvements 1) valued at $408,100 that are expected to last another 14 years with no salvage value. Without the buildings and improvements, the tract of land is valued at $1,865,600. The company also incurs the following additional costs: Cost to demolish Building 1 $ 422,600 Cost of additional land grading 167,200 Cost to construct new building (Building 3), having a useful life of 25 years and a $390,100 salvage value 2,019,000 Cost of new land improvements (Land Improvements 2) near Building 2 having a 20-year useful life and no salvage value 158,000 Total costs $ 5,566,800 Problem 10-2A Asset cost allocation; straight-line Section Break depreciation L.O. C1, P1 aw ard: 9.00 points 1. Problem 10-2A Part 1 Required: 1. Allocate the costs incurred by Keona to the appropriate columns and total each column. (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) Land Land Land Building 2 Building 3 improvements 1 improvements 2 Purchase price $ $ $ $ $ Demolition Land grading New building New improvements Totals $ $ $ $ $ Worksheet Problem 10-2A Part 1 aw ard: 9.00 points 2. Problem 10-2A Part 2 2. Prepare a single journal entry to record all the incurred costs assuming they are paid in cash on January 1, 2011. (Omit the “$”…

Attachments:

206 week 5 494795

Week Five Assignment Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Basic present value calculations Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar: A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at an 11% rate of return.

Document Preview:

Week Five Assignment Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Basic present value calculations Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar: A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at an 11% rate of return. An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at an 11% rate of return. A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 12% rate of return. An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has an 11% rate of return. 2. Cash flow calculations and net present value On January 2, 20X7, Brian Rein invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.70 per share in 20X7 and 20X8; the dividend was raised to $3.30 per share in 20X9. On December 31, 20X9, Rein sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,100. Rein uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments. Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note: Rein is entitled to the 20X9 dividend. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar. Given the results of part (b), should Rein have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain. 3. Net present value The City of Brighton is studying a 550-acre site on Route 401 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows: Purchase cost: $400 per acre Site preparation: $180,000 The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Brighton, which…

Attachments:

3 accounting questions 494799

12-16, 12-17, 13-23.

Document Preview:

12-16, 12-17, 13-23. 1) 2) 3)??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

3 accounting questions 494800

1. (TCO 7) Elliot’s Escargots sells commercial and home snail extraction tools and serving pieces. Currently, the snail extraction line of products takes up approximately 50 percent of the company’s retail floor space. The CEO of Elliot’s wants to decide if the company should continue offering snail extraction tools or focus only on serving pieces. If the snail extraction tools are dropped, salaries and other direct fixed costs can be avoided and serving piece sales would increase by 13 percent. Allocated fixed costs are assigned based on relative sales.

Document Preview:

1. (TCO 7) Elliot’s Escargots sells commercial and home snail extraction tools and serving pieces. Currently, the snail extraction line of products takes up approximately 50 percent of the company’s retail floor space. The CEO of Elliot’s wants to decide if the company should continue offering snail extraction tools or focus only on serving pieces. If the snail extraction tools are dropped, salaries and other direct fixed costs can be avoided and serving piece sales would increase by 13 percent. Allocated fixed costs are assigned based on relative sales.   Snail Extraction Serving     Tools Pieces Total Sales $1,200,000 $800,000 $2,000,000 Less cost of goods sold 700,000 500,000 1,200,000 Contribution margin 500,000 300,000 800,000 Less direct fixed costs:    Salaries 175,000 175,000 350,000  Other 60,000 60,000 120,000 Less allocated fixed costs:    Rent 14,118 9,882 24,000  Insurance 3,529 2,471 6,000  Cleaning 4,117 2,883 7,000  Executive salary 76,470 53,530 130,000  Other 7,058 4,942 12,000 Total costs 340,292 308,708 649,000 Net income $159,708  ($ 8,708)  $151,000 Prepare an incremental analysis in good form to determine the incremental effect on profit of discontinuing the snail extraction tool line. Paschal’s Parasailing Enterprises has estimated that fixed costs per month are $115,600 and variable cost per dollar of sales is $0.35 (6 points).   What is the break-even point per month in sales? What level of sales is needed for a monthly profit of $70,000? For the month of August, Paschal’s anticipates sales of $600,000. What is the expected level of profit? 3. (TCO 6) Princess Cruise Lines has the following service departments; concierge, valet, and maintenance.  Expense for these departments are allocated to Mediterranean and Trans Atlantic cruises.  Expenses for the departments are totaled (both variable and components are combined) and as follows:  …

Attachments:

3 accounting questions 494801

Document Preview:

Question 4 and 5: Suggested time 30 minutes: 15% points: Shake Shack Burger, a US based company, establishes an operation in the UK in January 1, 2012, when the exchange rate is USD $1.50 per GBP (pound). During Year 1, the UK branch generates GBP 5,000,000 of pretax income. On October 15, 2012, GBP 2,000,000 is repatriated to Shake Shack Burger and converted to USD. Assume the effective income tax in the UK is 30 percent. Taxes were paid in the UK on December 31, 2012. Relevant exchange rates for 2012 year are provided here (USD per GBP) January 1 …………1.50 Average 30 ……….1.45 October 15………..1.35 December 31……..1.30 Assume a US tax rate of 35 percent. Instructions Assuming that Shake Shack’s operation in the UK is registered with the UK government as branch, determine the amount of US taxable income, US foreign tax credit and net US tax liability related to the UK branch (all in US dollars). Assuming that Shake Shacks’s operation in the UK is incorporated as a subsidiary, determine the amount of US taxable income, US foreign tax credit and net US tax liability related to the UK branch (all in US dollars). Question 2: Suggested time 20 minutes: 10% points: Cinchcast Company begins its operations on January 1, 2012. The company’s unadjusted financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2012 are as follows: Balance Sheet January 1, 2012 December 31, 2012 Cash and receivables $20,000 $35,000 Fixed assets, net $50,000 $45,000 TOTAL $70,000 $80,000 Payables $15,000 $15,000 Capital $55,000 $55,000 Retained earnings $0 $10,000 TOTAL $70,000 $80,000 Income Statement December 31, 2012 Revenues $50,000 Depreciation $5,000 Other expenses $35,000 Income $10,000 Revenues and expenses occur evenly throughout the year, revenues and other expenses are realized in terms of monetary assets (cash and receivables). General price indexes for 2012 are as follows: January 1, 2012 …………….100 Average (year) 2012…

Attachments:

3 accounting questions 494802

Document Preview:

Question 4 and 5: Suggested time 30 minutes: 15% points: Shake Shack Burger, a US based company, establishes an operation in the UK in January 1, 2012, when the exchange rate is USD $1.50 per GBP (pound). During Year 1, the UK branch generates GBP 5,000,000 of pretax income. On October 15, 2012, GBP 2,000,000 is repatriated to Shake Shack Burger and converted to USD. Assume the effective income tax in the UK is 30 percent. Taxes were paid in the UK on December 31, 2012. Relevant exchange rates for 2012 year are provided here (USD per GBP) January 1 …………1.50 Average 30 ……….1.45 October 15………..1.35 December 31……..1.30 Assume a US tax rate of 35 percent. Instructions Assuming that Shake Shack’s operation in the UK is registered with the UK government as branch, determine the amount of US taxable income, US foreign tax credit and net US tax liability related to the UK branch (all in US dollars). Assuming that Shake Shacks’s operation in the UK is incorporated as a subsidiary, determine the amount of US taxable income, US foreign tax credit and net US tax liability related to the UK branch (all in US dollars). Question 2: Suggested time 20 minutes: 10% points: Cinchcast Company begins its operations on January 1, 2012. The company’s unadjusted financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2012 are as follows: Balance Sheet January 1, 2012 December 31, 2012 Cash and receivables $20,000 $35,000 Fixed assets, net $50,000 $45,000 TOTAL $70,000 $80,000 Payables $15,000 $15,000 Capital $55,000 $55,000 Retained earnings $0 $10,000 TOTAL $70,000 $80,000 Income Statement December 31, 2012 Revenues $50,000 Depreciation $5,000 Other expenses $35,000 Income $10,000 Revenues and expenses occur evenly throughout the year, revenues and other expenses are realized in terms of monetary assets (cash and receivables). General price indexes for 2012 are as follows: January 1, 2012 …………….100 Average (year) 2012…

Attachments:

3 eight week online courses 494803

Intro to Macroeconomics

Financial Accounting 1

Intro to Psych: Mind and Body

Document Preview:

BA211 Financial Accounting I, Online SYLLABUS Course Description Financial Accounting I covers the complete accounting cycle for service and merchandising firms including recording transactions, adjustments, financial statements, worksheets, closing entries, cash and accounts receivable, notes and interest, and accounting for inventories. This course is designed for students enrolled in the Accounting program or students transferring to four-year institutions. Performance Based Learner Outcomes:  Upon successful completion of this course you should be able to: Apply theory and procedures used in the processing of financial data for a service firm and a merchandising firm. Describe the accounting cycle, for a service firm and a merchandising firm. Prepare and analyze financial statements and reports. Prerequisites:  None Materials Required:  1. Accounting, Horngren/Harrison/Oliver, 9th Edition, Pearson, bundled with MyAccountingLab, 2. MS Excel and MS Word softwares. 3. MyAccountingLab access. Use the code provided with your textbook. Grading:  A total of 650 points are available in this course. Points can be earned as follows: MyAccountingLab homework and assignments as follows for 420 points: MyAccountingLab Demo Docs: 8 @ 5 points = 40 points MyAccountingLab Assignments: 8 @ 5 points = 40 points MyAccountingLab Homework: 10 @ 30 points = 270 points MyAccountingLab Continuing Problems: 8 @ 5 points = 40 points Introduction: 10 Orientation Quiz: 10 Group Discussions: 2 @ 10 points= 20 points Comprehensive Problem = 50 Chapter Test: 3 @ 50 points each = 150 points Chapter 5 Test = 20 Please note that there is no final exam in this summer course. Your course grade is based on a percentage of points earned out of the total available. A = 90% – 100%      (650-585 points) B = 80% – 89%        (584-520 points) C = 70% – 79%        (519-455 points) D = 60% – 69%        (454-390 points) F = less than 60%      (less than 390 points) Course Procedures, Homework and…

3 mcqs accounting help urgent 494804

Chapter 4 homework ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Document Preview:

Chapter 4 homework ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

3 questions 494805

Please see attached for the three discussion questions. No word minimum. Please cite all sources using APA format. Original work only.

Document Preview:

A company that provides training, certification and consulting services to commercial, government, and non-profit organizations in applying best practices in balanced scorecard (BSC), strategic performance management and measurement, and transformation and change management has a customer success story on its website at http://www.balancedscorecard.org/Home/tabid/36/Default.aspx. Click on the Award for Excellence link (on the right-side of the page) and read the story about Mecklenburg County, which successfully transformed the county government and positioned it for tough times. Summarize the success story and explain how it relates to what you have learned in this course this week. Discussion Questions 1) To transform an organization like that can take a very long time; it’s surprising.  A major shift like that in any organization is time consuming.  Luckily, once they are reached that point, they shouldn’t have to do that again.  What steps can the county take to keep things continually balanced going forward? 2) I liked how you stated that the change Mecklenburg County had to undergo required them to not “cut their own throats” while trying to save money on a depleted budget. Do you think our government could benefit from a balanced scorecard? Do you think we already have one in place? Answer The Mecklenburg County case study proves the importance as well as effectiveness of balanced scorecard in providing a comprehensive and consistent approach in decision making in an organization driven by data and in sync with its vision, goals and strategies. In the beginning of the 21st century, faced by some financial crunch in the state of North Carolina, the funding given to the county was cut down significantly. This led to the challenge of managing the budget effectively without having significant impact on the county services. This is where the balance scorecard, a long term mission and vision came into play for the county. The county established a 15 year…

Attachments:

3nquestions 494807

Document Preview:

Question 4 and 5: Suggested time 30 minutes: 15% points: Shake Shack Burger, a US based company, establishes an operation in the UK in January 1, 2012, when the exchange rate is USD $1.50 per GBP (pound). During Year 1, the UK branch generates GBP 5,000,000 of pretax income. On October 15, 2012, GBP 2,000,000 is repatriated to Shake Shack Burger and converted to USD. Assume the effective income tax in the UK is 30 percent. Taxes were paid in the UK on December 31, 2012. Relevant exchange rates for 2012 year are provided here (USD per GBP) January 1 …………1.50 Average 30 ……….1.45 October 15………..1.35 December 31……..1.30 Assume a US tax rate of 35 percent. Instructions Assuming that Shake Shack’s operation in the UK is registered with the UK government as branch, determine the amount of US taxable income, US foreign tax credit and net US tax liability related to the UK branch (all in US dollars). Assuming that Shake Shacks’s operation in the UK is incorporated as a subsidiary, determine the amount of US taxable income, US foreign tax credit and net US tax liability related to the UK branch (all in US dollars). Question 2: Suggested time 20 minutes: 10% points: Cinchcast Company begins its operations on January 1, 2012. The company’s unadjusted financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2012 are as follows: Balance Sheet January 1, 2012 December 31, 2012 Cash and receivables $20,000 $35,000 Fixed assets, net $50,000 $45,000 TOTAL $70,000 $80,000 Payables $15,000 $15,000 Capital $55,000 $55,000 Retained earnings $0 $10,000 TOTAL $70,000 $80,000 Income Statement December 31, 2012 Revenues $50,000 Depreciation $5,000 Other expenses $35,000 Income $10,000 Revenues and expenses occur evenly throughout the year, revenues and other expenses are realized in terms of monetary assets (cash and receivables). General price indexes for 2012 are as follows: January 1, 2012 …………….100 Average (year) 2012…

Attachments:

4 questions operations management 494809

Document Preview:

for the law firm. The desired service level is 95%. The corresponding Z =1.64. NOTE: Show all steps. Solve problems using EXCEL. Date: 7-19-2013 Time: 5pm to 9pm. is 2 days. The daily demand for clean towels at the hotel is normally distributed with a mean of is a constant at 10000 pages to be copied. The mean lead time for the contractor is 4 days with a standard deviation of 1.25 days for delivering copies. Find the re-order point ordering cost is $60 per order. The holding cost is $4 per unit per year. The lead time for this item is 3 days. Assume 250 working days per year. Find: b) What is the optimal number of orders per year. c) What is the annual cost of ordering and holding inventory. d) What is the re-order point. 2. ABC Co. manufactures a subcomponent at the rate of 400 per day when required. Its annual demand for this item is 50000 units. Assume 250 working days per year. Holding cost is $10 per unit per year. Set-up cost is $150 per set-up. Find: 800 and a standard deviation of 150. Management has set the service level 95%. For this service level, Z = 1.64 a) The Reorder point. 4. A printing company has a contract with a legal firm to copy their court documents. Daily demand MGSC 303 Exam 2 SUM II 2013 1. ABC Co. purchases an item. The annual demand for this item is 75000 units. The 3. Hotel ABC has contracted out its towel laundering work. The lead time for the contractor Find: b) Safety stock. d) What percentage of time during the year will this item be produced. a) Economic production quantity. b)How many production runs will be made per year. c)What will be the maximum inventory level. e) What is the annual cost for ordering and holding inventory. a) Economic order quantity, EOQ. ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

40 accounting mcqs 494810

1. The measurement focus and basis of accounting that are most unlike those used by business entities are those used by  (Points : 2)    Governmental funds.    Fiduciary funds.    Proprietary funds.    Contribution funds. 2. Under the dual-track accounting approach used in the text, which of the following transactions or events would be recorded in the general journal for governmental activities at the government-wide level?  (Points : 2)    Recording the annual budget, property tax levy, and payroll.

Document Preview:

1. The measurement focus and basis of accounting that are most unlike those used by business entities are those used by  (Points : 2)    Governmental funds.    Fiduciary funds.    Proprietary funds.    Contribution funds. 2. Under the dual-track accounting approach used in the text, which of the following transactions or events would be recorded in the general journal for governmental activities at the government-wide level?  (Points : 2)    Recording the annual budget, property tax levy, and payroll.    Recording the property tax levy, issuance of tax anticipation notes, and accrual of interest on long-term debt at year-end.    Recording the property tax levy, payroll, and encumbrances for purchase orders.    Recording the property tax levy, encumbrances for purchase orders, and payment of interest on long-term debt. 3. Which of the following would result in the amortization of a bond discount or premium?  (Points : 2)    Bonds are issued: No; Bonds are held as investments: No    Bonds are issued: No; Bonds are held as investments: Yes    Bonds are issued: Yes; Bonds are held as investments: No    Bonds are issued: Yes; Bonds are held as investments: Yes 4. Which of the following funds are governmental funds?  (Points : 2)    General Fund, special revenue funds, capital projects funds, debt service funds, and private-purpose trust funds.    General Fund, special revenue funds, private-purpose trust funds.    General Fund, special revenue funds, debt service funds, capital projects funds, and permanent funds.    General Fund, special revenue funds, capital projects funds, debt service funds, and internal service funds.  5. When the budget of a government is adopted and Estimated Revenues exceed Appropriations, the excess is  (Points : 2)    Credited to Budgetary Fund Balance.    Debited to Budgetary Fund Balance.    Debited to Reserve for Encumbrances.    Credited to Reserve for Encumbrances.  6. The Financial Accounting Standards Board has the…

Attachments:

50 multiple choice comprehensive accounting problems 494811

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

1. On April 1, a company paid the $1,998 premium on a three-year insurance policy with benefits beginning on that date. What will be the insurance expense on the annual income statement for the year ended December 31? (Round your answer to 1 decimal places.) $1,998.00. $666.00. $1,498.50. $499.50. $55.50. 2. On September 30, the Cash account of Value Company had a normal balance of $6,700. During September, the account was debited for a total of $13,900 and credited for a total of $13,200. What was the balance in the Cash account at the beginning of September? A $6,000 credit balance. A $7,400 credit balance. A $6,000 debit balance. A $0 balance. A $7,400 debit balance. 3. At the beginning of January of the current year, Thomas Law Center’s ledger reflected a normal balance of $53,400 for accounts receivable. During January, the company collected $16,200 from customers on account and provided additional services to customers on account totaling $13,200. Additionally, during January one customer paid Thomas $5,700 for services to be provided in the future. At the end of January, the balance in the accounts receivable account should be: $50,400. $3,000. $56,100. $50,700. $56,400. 4. A $55 credit to Sales was posted as a $160 credit. By what amount is Sales in error? $55 understated. $160 overstated. $105 overstated. $105 understated. $160 understated. 5. A company purchased a new truck at a cost of $38,500 on July 1. The truck is estimated to have a useful life of 5 years and a salvage value of $4,000. The company uses the straight-line method of depreciation. How much depreciation expense will be recorded for the truck during the first year ended December 31? $3,450. $3,850. $4,200. $6,900. $7,700. 6. A company had no office supplies available at the beginning of the year. During the year, the company purchased $430 worth of office supplies. On December 31, $165 worth of office supplies remained. How much should the company report as office supplies expense for the…

Attachments:

6 accounting questions 494813

1. 12-2 Jeelani Construction Company is composed of two divisions: (1) Home Construction and (2) Commercial Construction. The Home Construction Division is in the process of building 12 houses and the Commercial Construction Division is working on 3 projects. Cost items of the company follow.

Document Preview:

1. 12-2 Jeelani Construction Company is composed of two divisions: (1) Home Construction and (2) Commercial Construction. The Home Construction Division is in the process of building 12 houses and the Commercial Construction Division is working on 3 projects. Cost items of the company follow. Company president’s salary Depreciation on crane used in commercial construction Depreciation on home office building Salary of corporate office manager Wages of workers assigned to a specific construction project Supplies used by the Commercial Construction Division Labor on a particular house Salary of the supervisor of commercial construction projects Supplies, such as glue and nails, used by the Home Construction Division Cost of building permits Materials used in commercial construction projects Depreciation on home building equipment (small tools such as hammers or saws) Required a. Identify each cost as being a direct or indirect cost assuming the cost objects are the individual products (houses or projects). b. Identify each cost as being a direct or indirect cost, assuming the cost objects are the two divisions. c. Identify each cost as being a direct or indirect cost assuming the cost object is Jeelani Construction Company as a whole. 2) 12-4 Nevin Company makes three products in its factory: plastic cups, plastic tablecloths, and plastic bottles. The expected overhead costs for the next fiscal year include the following. Required a. Allocate the budgeted overhead costs to the products. b. Provide a possible explanation as to why Nevin chose machine hours, instead of labor hours, as the allocation base. 3) 12-8 Stevens Air is a large airline company that pays a customer relations representative $4,000 per month. The representative, who processed 1,000 customer complaints in January and 1,300 com- plaints in February, is expected to process 12,000 customer complaints during 2012. Required a. Determine the total cost of processing customer…

Attachments:

6 questions 494814

6 questions

Document Preview:

Writing Style: APA All questions done in excel For this assignment, you will be submitting an Excel worksheet with solutions (and corresponding work) for the problems detailed below. The purpose of this assignment is for you to apply tax planning principles to relevant scenarios. These problems should be submitted in an Excel worksheet, with each problem on a separate tab. Please label the tabs accordingly. You must show your work for each problem. Correct solutions without corresponding work will not be accepted. The Excel document should be labeled as follows: lastname_problems2.xls.  As this is not a formal writing assignment, APA format is not required. Furthermore, there is no need to submit a title page or research page. Just include your full name at the top of first sheet. Problems:  1. Julia currently is considering the purchase of some land to be held as an investment. She and the seller have agreed on a contract under which Julia would pay $1,000 per month for 60 months, or $60,000 total. The seller, not in the real estate business, acquired the land several years ago by paying $10,000 in cash. Two alternative interpretations of this transaction are (1) a price of $51,726 with 6 percent interest and (2) a price of $39,380 with 18 percent interest. Which interpretation would you expect each party to prefer? Why?  2. Assume that a taxpayer can choose when he is to receive $10,000 of fully taxable income. If the taxpayer receives the income at the end of Year 1, he will receive exactly $10,000. If he delays receipt of the income until the end of Year 2, the amount will grow to $11,000. If the taxpayer takes the money at the end of Year 1, he can invest the proceeds and earn a pre- tax return of 10 percent over the next year.  a. If the taxpayer faces a marginal tax rate of 31 percent in both Year 1 and Year 2, when should he elect to receive the income?  b. At what pre- tax rate of return, will the taxpayer be indifferent to taking the money in Year 1 and…

Attachments:

7 12 homework astrologer only 494815

http://bcs.wiley.com/he-bcs/Books?action=resource&bcsId=7509&itemId=1118162285&resourceId=29248

I need chapters 7-12 done Asap

Document Preview:

Date Debit Credit . Balance Account= * Financial Journal Form Accounts Ledger Account Forms Trial Balance Form Statement Form Period or date = Entity name = Statement name = Income Statement Statement name = Retained Earnings Statement name = Balance Sheet ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

1 page 494772

Number of Pages: 1 (Double Spaced) Writing Style: APA Number of sources: 1 Answer the following questions:  ? What is the difference between accrual and cash accounting?  ? When might an accountant use cash basis accounting without violating generally accepted accounting principles? Format your paragraph consistent with APA guidelines. Reference: Kimmel, P. D., Weygandt, J. J., & Kieso, D. E. (2011). Financial accounting: Tools for business decision making (6th ed.). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.

Document Preview:

Number of Pages: 1 (Double Spaced) Writing Style: APA Number of sources: 1 Answer the following questions:  ? What is the difference between accrual and cash accounting?  ? When might an accountant use cash basis accounting without violating generally accepted accounting principles? Format your paragraph consistent with APA guidelines. Reference: Kimmel, P. D., Weygandt, J. J., & Kieso, D. E. (2011). Financial accounting: Tools for business decision making (6th ed.). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley & Sons.????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

1 page asap 494773

Number of Pages: 1 (Double Spaced) Writing Style: APA Number of sources: 2 Search the Internet and locate an annual financial report for a public U.S. company. Read the Notes to the Financial Statements to determine the criteria for cash equivalents and how cash and cash equivalents are handled. Discuss your findings. Find information about the internal control policy of the company and summarize this policy in your post.

Document Preview:

Number of Pages: 1 (Double Spaced) Writing Style: APA Number of sources: 2 Search the Internet and locate an annual financial report for a public U.S. company. Read the Notes to the Financial Statements to determine the criteria for cash equivalents and how cash and cash equivalents are handled. Discuss your findings. Find information about the internal control policy of the company and summarize this policy in your post. Is it in compliance with SOX? What are some references to SOX mentioned in the annual report? Your answer should demonstrate understanding of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, and be a minimum of 135 words in length. Respond to at least two of your classmates? posts Question 2) Consider the following scenario: Your friend (who is also in school) just emailed you to express frustration with his accounting class. In the email, he said, ?Why do I need to take accounting? What will I ever need to know about reporting and analyzing long-lived assets? I am a management major.? Write a 140 word response to your friend, in?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

1 what are the missing numbers for the below income statement revenues 100 cost of g 494774

1. What are the missing numbers for the below income statement? Revenues 100 Cost of Goods Sold ? Gross Margin 60 SG&A Expense ? Pre-tax Income 20 Tax Expense (40% of Pre-tax Income) ? Net Income ? 2. What is the missing number from the below cash flow statement? Beginning Balance Operating Cash Flow Investing Cash Flow Financing Cash Flow Ending Balance 60 – 20 ? 100 80 3. What are the missing numbers for the below balance sheet? Assets Cash 15 Accounts Receivable ? Inventory 60 Total Current Assets 97 Property, Plant, and Equipment, net ? Intangible Assets 20 Total Assets 257 Liabilities Accounts Payable 40 Accrued Operating Expenses 50 Total Current Liabilities ? Notes Payable ? Total Liabilities 190 Owners Equity Stock 20 Retained Earnings ? Total Liabilities and Owners Equity ? 1 4. Given the following data, what is net income? (Note: Not all items shown below will be included in income.) Cost of Goods Sold 8 Accounts Payable 22 Taxes Payable 6 Tax Expense 8 Revenues 40 SG&A Expense 2 Interest Payable 14 Accumulated Depreciation 11 Depreciation Expense 6 Interest Expense 4 Dividends 3 5. What is the missing number in the below Retained Earnings account. (Provide both the amount and the name.) Beginning Balance Net Income (Loss) ? Ending Balance 100 21 ? 98 6. What is the correct journal entry for the purchase of office supplies for $10 cash, if the supplies are capitalized? Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 7. What are the effects on current income and on future income, if a firm incorrectly capitalizes an expenditure that it should have expensed? State your answer for both current income and future income as overstated or understated . Overstated or Understated? Current Income Future Income 8. What is the correct journal entry for the following transaction. A firm sells a car for $40 cash. The cost of the car is $30. The firm is a car dealer, and the car is therefore classified as inventory. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 2 9. Refer to the above. If the firm had not been a car dealer and had classified the car as property, plant, and equipment (PP&E), rather than inventory, which of the below would be correct?. (Circle your answer.) a. Net Income would be unaffected. b. A gain would be reported instead of revenues and COGS. c. PP&E would be reduced, instead of Inventory. d. All of the above. e. None of the above. 10. Provide the closing entry, given the following temporary accounts, with amounts in parentheses: Revenues (80), COGS (25), SG&A Expense (15), Interest Expense (10), and Tax Expense (8). Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 11. Indicate by check mark ( 9 ) or X which accounts are found on the income statement and which accounts are found on the balance sheet. Account Name Income Statement Balance Sheet Allowance for Bad Debt Bad Debt Expense Prepaid Expense Unearned Revenue Revenue 12. What is insurance expense for the year 2012, given the following set of facts? The firm prepays two years of insurance premiums on 7/1/12. The amount paid is $24. The firm’s fiscal yearend (FYE) is 12/31. 13. What are the journal entries to recognize the following two, related transactions? a. On January 1, 2010, the firm sells a gift card for $100. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 3 b. On March 15, 2010, the gift card is used by a customer to buy merchandise for $80. The cost of the merchandise sold was $60. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 14. What are the journal entries to recognize the following two, related transactions? a. A firm prepays $7 in insurance premiums. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ b. A firm expenses $6 of previously prepaid insurance premiums. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 15. What, if any, is the journal entry to recognize a possible contingent liability (for example, resulting from a lawsuit) of $20. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 16. What, if any, is the proper journal entry for a firm to recognize the increase in the value of its own stock from $40 to $50? Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 17. What is the formula for the ratio that would answer the following questions: Question Formula for Ratio to Answer Question How long does it take a firm to pay its bills (on average)? How long does it take a firm to sell its inventory (on average)? 4 18. What was the amount of cash a firm collected from its customers, given the following fact set? The firm’s balance sheets at the beginning and end of the year show gross accounts receivable of $32 and $28, respectively. Also, the firm’s beginning and ending allowance for uncollectible accounts are -$4 and -$5, respectively. Bad debt expense was $4, which was 2% of credit sales. The firm makes all sales on account. 19. What is bad debt expense, using the aging method (also called the percentage of receivables method), given the following set of facts? x A firm has $80 of gross accounts receivable. x The firm estimates that for $20 of the receivables, 10% are expected to be uncollectible. x The firm estimates that for the remaining $60 of the receivables, 50% are expected to be uncollectible. x The opening balance in the allowance account was $45 and write-offs for the period were $20. Thus, the amount in the allowance account, after write-offs, but before bad debt expense was $25. 20. Given the below information, what are the values for COGS and ending inventory for each costing method below? Number of Units Price per Unit Beginning inventory 10 2 Purchases 20 3 Sales 15 Ending inventory 15 Goods Available for Sale COGS Ending Inventory FIFO 20 + 60 = 80 LIFO 20 + 60 = 80 21. Given the below information, what is the dollar amount that the LIFO liquidation added to gross margin? Number of Units Price per Unit Beginning inventory 10 1 Purchases 12 3 Sales 15 Ending inventory 7 5 22. What inventory costing method gives the lowest inventory valuation in inflationary periods? a. FIFO b. LIFO c. Average d. LILO e. FILO 23. What inventory costing method gives the lowest net income in inflationary periods? a. FIFO b. LIFO c. Average d. LILO e. FILO 24. What is the effect on net income if inventory is overstated? a. Net income will also be overstated. b. Net income will be understated. c. Net income will be unaffected. d. It depends on whether the firm is using LIFO for FIFO. e. None of the above. 25. What are the journal entries to recognize each of the below events. a. The firm records bad debt expense of 5% of credit sales, which were $300. The firm uses the Percentage of Credit Sales Method. Journalize bad debt expense. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ b. The firm subsequently writes-off $10 of receivables. Record the write-off. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 26. Given the following set of facts, what is the net amount of cash received by the seller? The seller records a credit sale for $1,000. Shortly after the sale, the buyer returns $250 and the seller credits the receivable by this amount. The seller also grants a further allowance to the buyer for $100. Finally, the buyer pays within the discount period to take advantage of a 2% discount. 6 27. Refer to the data in the above problem. With respect to the above purchase, what is the amount that the buyer will show as inventory on its balance sheet after all returns, discounts, and allowances? 28. What is the proper journal entry for a firm that factors a $100 receivable at a bank, which charges a 1% fee. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 29. With respect to factoring, what is the difference between with recourse and without recourse a. With recourse means that the bank ultimately bears the credit risk. b. Without recourse means that the bank ultimately bears the credit risk. c. With recourse means that the firm that factored the receivable ultimately bears the credit risk. d. Without recourse means that the firm that factored the receivable ultimately bears the credit risk. e. Both b and c. 30. What is the name of the accounting method that is used when the level of ownership in an equity investment rises to the level of significant influence? a. fair value method b. mark-to-market method c. control method d. equity method e. cost method 31. What is the main attribute of an intangible asset that is used to determine whether or not it will be amortized? 32. What is the main attribute of a repair or maintenance expenditure that determines whether or not it will be capitalized? 33. Given the below facts, what is the total income effect for the year for an investor for its passive-level, trading investment? (Note: the investment is not sold during the year.) Type of Investment: Passive Ownership, Trading Cost of Investment $80 Fair value of investment at end of the year $60 Dividends received from investment over the year $10 Total income effect for the year 7 34. Given the below facts, what is the total income effect for the year for an investor for its passive-level, available-for- sale security? (Note: the investment is not sold during the year.) Type of Investment: Passive Ownership, Available for Sale Cost of Investment $80 Fair value of investment at end of the year $60 Dividends received from investment over the year $10 Total income effect for the year 35. Given the below facts, what is the total income effect for the year for an investor for its equity-method investment? Type of Investment: Equity Method Cost of Investment $80 Fair value of investment at end of the year $90 Total dividends received from investment over the year $10 Total Net income of investee over the year $200 Percentage of voting shares of investee owned by investor 20% Income for the year 36. What is depreciation expense for an asset s first year, using the double declining balance method, given the following information? The cost of the asset is $800, the expected useful life is 5 years, and the salvage value is estimated to be $160. 37. What is the journal entry to record the sale of a depreciable asset (PP&E) that costs $100 and has accumulated depreciation of $40, assuming a selling price of $40. Assume that the PP&E is sold for cash. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 38. What is the journal entry to record a $1,000 (cash) expenditure on ordinary repairs and maintenance? Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 8 39. What is the amount of a) interest capitalized and b) interest expensed, given the following information? The firm spends $100 to self-construct a building for its own use. The firm has debt of $500 that has an interest rate of 6%. 40. What is the journal entry, if any, given the following set of facts? A firm has equipment with a book value (cost minus accumulated depreciation) of $380. However, the fair value of the equipment is only $200 and is not likely to recover. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 41. What is the amount of goodwill recognized where an acquirer buys 100% of the below target firm by paying $50 of cash to the target firm s shareholders. Note: all items below are at market value. Balance Sheet Items of Target Firm Cash $10 Inventory 20 Property, Plant, and Equipment 30 Total Assets $60 Liabilities 20 42. What is the main purpose of the closing entry? 43. What is one perceived deficiency of the fundamental equation of accounting (Assets = Liabilities + Owners Equity)? 44. Which of the below cash flows is classified as an operating cash flow? a. Cash paid to investors as a dividend. b. Cash received in a loan from a bank c. Cash paid to suppliers for inventory d. Cash paid to suppliers for property, plant, and equipment e. None of the above 9 45. Which of the below is a temporary account? a. Selling, General, and Administrative Expenses b. Prepaid Expenses c. Retained Earnings d. Unearned Revenues e. Stock 46. What is the main distinction between a revenue and a gain? a. Gains are from a firm s central and ongoing operations b. Revenues are from a firm s peripheral activities c. Gains are always realized, but revenues are not d. Gains result from a sale of inventory e. None of the above. 47. What does NCI stand for and when is this account used in a firm s financial statements? 48. How much cash did the following firm pay its vendors, given the below information about its accounts payable account (amounts are in parentheses): Beginning balance of accounts payable ($16); credit purchases of inventory ($20); ending balance of accounts payable ($6). 49. What is the amount of compensation expense recognized for stock options for each year of the vesting period, given the following information? x A firm awards stock options at-the-money when the stock is trading at $18 per share. x The Black-Scholes value of the options is $6. x The vesting period is two years. x Upon vesting, the stock is trading at $20 per share. 10 50. What are the missing amounts for the below amortization table, given the following information? x A firm borrows $100,000 from a bank. x The terms of the loan require the firm to make equal, yearly payments, at the end of each year, over the next five years. x The bank charges 4% interest. Cash Interest Principal Adjustment Principal Balance 4% 100,000 4,000 18,463 81,537 2,493 19,969 42,367 1,695 20,768 21,599 864 21,599 0 51. Refer to the previous question. What is the journal entry, from the borrower s perspective, to recognize the second payment to the bank. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 52. Refer to the previous question. Under U.S. GAAP, how much of the cash payment is classified as operating cash flow? 53. Given the below, partial bond accretion table, what was the market rate of interest when the bond was issued? Cash Interest Principal Adjustment Principal Balance 803.637 60.000 807.928 54. Refer to the above problem. What is the proper journal entry to recognize the first coupon payment? Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 11 55. A firm (a lessee) leases equipment from a lessor. The lease is an operating lease. The yearly lease payment is $1,000. Journalize the first lease payment. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 56. A firm (a lessee) leases equipment from a lessor. The lease is a capital lease. The yearly (end of year) lease payment is $1,000 and the appropriate interest rate is 10%. The lease’s duration is 2 years. Journalize the first lease payment. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 57. How many shares of stock would be classified as issued and outstanding, given the following fact set? x The board authorized 1,000 shares. x The firm sold 400 shares in its IPO x The firm subsequently repurchased 100 shares. 58. How much of a dividend would be allocated to a firm s preferred shareholders and to its common shareholders, given the following set of facts? x The firm declares a $10,000 dividend. x The firm has 100,000 shares of 6%, $1 par value preferred stock issued and outstanding. x The firm also has 200,000 shares of $1 par value common stock issued and outstanding. x The firm has 2,000 shares of common stock in treasury. Class of Stock Total Amount of Dividend Preferred Common 59. What is the cash flow category for a firm s initial sale of its own stock (Operating, Investing, Financing)? a. Operating b. Investing c. Financing d. Both b and c. 60. What is the cash flow category for a firm s repurchase of its own stock (Operating, Investing, Financing)? a. Operating b. Investing c. Financing d. Both a and b. 12 61. What is the cash flow category for a firm s payment of a dividend to its investors (Operating, Investing, Financing)? a. Operating b. Investing c. Financing d. Both a and c. 62. What are the journal entries for the following two transactions? a. A firm buys back two shares of its own stock for $40 per share. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ b. The firm sells one of the above treasury shares for $50 per share. Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 63. What is the formula for calculating operating cash flows using the indirect method? a. Net Income + Gains Losses + Changes in Operating Assets Changes in Operating Liabilities b. Net Income Gains + Losses + Changes in Operating Assets Changes in Operating Liabilities c. Net Income + Gains Losses Changes in Operating Assets + Changes in Operating Liabilities d. Net Income Gains + Losses Changes in Operating Assets + Changes in Operating Liabilities 64. True / False: Cash paid for equipment that is purchased by a firm would be classified as an investing cash flow if the equipment is classified as PP&E, but operating cash flow if the equipment is classified as inventory. 65. True / False: Under U.S. GAAP, the payment of interest is classified as a financing cash flow, but the receipt of interest is classified as an investing cash flow. 66. True / False: Under U.S. GAAP, the receipt of a cash dividend is classified as an investing cash flows, but the payment of a dividend is classified as a financing cash flow. 67. True / False: Under U.S. GAAP, both the cash paid to purchase PP&E and cash received from the sale of PP&E are classified as investing cash flows. 68. How much cash did a firm pay for purchases of PP&E given the following fact set (and assuming that the firm pays cash for all capex )? x The beginning and ending balances in the PP&E account are $100 and $80, respectively. x The beginning and ending balances in accumulated depreciation are 50 and 20, respectively. x Depreciation expense for the period is $10. x The firm also sold PP&E with a cost of $60 and a book value of $20. x Finally, the firm also recognized an impairment of PP&E of $40. 13 69. How much cash did a firm collect from its customers, given the following fact set? Beginning and ending accounts receivable were $50 and $60, respectively. Beginning and ending allowance for doubtful accounts were $8 and $10, respectively. The firm had credit sales of $100. The firm also estimated bad debt expense to be $5. Finally, the firm wrote-off $3 of receivables as uncollectible. 70. Assume a lessee signs a lease agreement to lease property for 15 years. The lease is a capital lease. Assume the appropriate interest rate is 10% and the yearly lease payment is $1,000. The lessee has no other debt on its balance sheet and it has total Owners’ Equity of $10,000. What is the lessee s debt to capital ratio? a. 0% b. 10% c. 25% d. 43% e. 62% 71. A firm has $1,000,000 in its bank account. The interest earned on the account is 5% per year. The firm needs to withdraw $100,000 per year over the next five years, at the end of each year. At the end of the fifth year, how much will the firm have in its bank account? a. 750,000 b. 723,718 c. 500,689 d. 489,268 72. What is the issue price of a bond with the following terms: x The bond matures in 10 years. x The stated rate of interest on the bond is 6%. x The market rate of interest is 4%. x The bond pays interest every year (on a yearly basis). x The par value of the bond is $1,000. 14 Consider the following consecutive balance sheets and income statement for a firm. In the space provided, derive the statement of cash flows, using the indirect method for operating cash flows. Note: The loss refers to the sale of the long term investment. Note: You must calculate the dividends (which are assumed to be paid). 2012 Sales 250 COGS -100 Depreciation Expense -10 Interest Expense -10 Loss -5 Pre-tax Income 125 Income Tax Expense -50 Net Income 75 Dividends Paid ? 2012 2011 Change Cash 105 86 19 Accounts Receivable 28 32 -4 Inventory 34 35 -1 Long term Investment 8 20 -12 PP&E 140 130 10 A/D -60 -50 -10 Total Assets 255 253 2 Accounts Payable 32 30 2 Interest Payable 2 4 -2 Income Tax Payable 1 4 -3 Notes Payable 110 140 -30 Stock 40 40 0 Treasury Stock -5 -5 0 Retained Earnings 75 40 35 Total Liabilities & O.E. 255 253 2 15 76. Given the below information, provide the journal entry to recognize tax expense. Assume taxes are paid immediately (with cash). Note: the statutory rate is assumed to be 40%. Assume the interest income is permanently non-taxable. You will have to decide whether there is any deferred tax position, given these facts. Income Statement Tax Return Difference: Permanent Revenues 400 400 Cost of Goods Sold – 150 – 150 SG&A Expense – 50 – 50 Depreciation Expense – 20 – 20 Interest Income 20 0 20 Pre-Tax Income 200 Taxable Income 180 Statutory Rate 40% 40% Tax Expense ? Taxes Paid (Cash) ? Deferred Tax? ? Tax Expense: Assets Liabilities Owners’ Equity Debit Credit $ $ 77. Refer to the previous problem. Calculate the effective tax rate: 78. Given the below information, calculate the amount of tax expense. Assume taxes are paid immediately (with cash). Note: the statutory rate is assumed to be 35%. You will have to decide whether there is any deferred tax position, given these facts. Income Statement Tax Return Difference: Temporary Revenues 500 500 Expenses – 100 – 100 Depreciation Expense – 40 – 100 60 Pre-tax Income 360 Taxable Income 300 Statutory Tax Rate 35% 35% Tax Expense ? Taxes Paid (Cash) ? Deferred Tax ? 16 79. What is the amount of tax expense? 80. Describe the controversy with respect to the recognition of deferred tax liabilities. 17

10 accounting excel assignment 2 charts 494775

Assignment is in Microft Excel Format & is attached. $10 for both charts completed. Thank You!

Document Preview:

380 140 450 110 4400 3200 2950 2100 120 170 1 1 DL XL Estimated inventory in units November 1 Desired Inventory in units November 30 Expected sales volume in units: North region South region Unit sales price True Note Audio Company Sales Budget For the month ending November Product and region Unit sales volume Unit selling price Total Sales Production Budget Units Prepare a sales budget. Prepare a production budget. Requirements: Module 10 Assignment: True Note Audio Company manufactures two models of speakers, DL and XL. True Note posted the following production and sales data for the month of November. ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

10 the directors report of financial condition and operating results requires next s 494776

It is a financial reporting homework and i am disprite i can’t do it any more. please i need help.

Document Preview:

Financial Reporting on the Internet (Case study: Next Plc) The internet is a good place to get information that is useful to you in your study of accounting. For example, you can find information about current events, professional accounting organizations, and specific companies that may support your study. The NEXT retail chain was launched in February 1982 and the first store opened with an exclusive coordinated collection of stylish clothes, shoes and accessories for women. Collections for men, children and the home quickly followed. NEXT clothes are styled by its in-house design team to offer great style, quality and value for http://www.nextplc.co.uk/about-next/business-overview.aspxmoney with a contemporary fashion edge. Today NEXT trades from more than 500 stores in the UK and Eire and almost 200 stores in more than 30 countries overseas. Over the last few years several larger format fashion and home stores have opened across the UK and, in August 2011, NEXT opened its first combined fashion, home and garden store at Shoreham-by-Sea. Access the Next home web page at: www.next.co.uk. From Next’s home page and then “The Company”, click on “FINANCIAL INFORMATION”, followed by “Reports and results”, then select the year 2012 to display and download the “Annual report and accounts” January 2012 on Form PDF. Note: the financial statements of Next plc are available at: http://www.nextplc.co.uk/~/media/Files/N/Next-PLC/pdfs/latestnews/2012/ar2012.pdf Instructions Use the annual report and accounts of 2011/2012 to answer the following questions: As you learned in Unit 1, Session 3, the major environmental factors impacting on an organization can be grouped under four headings: political/legal, economic, social/demographic and technological (PEST analysis). Giving examples from the annual report, discuss the impact of each of the elements in the PEST analysis on Next Plc. [Marks (Words): 16(500)] Refer to Next’s Annual Report. Identify which basis or…

Attachments:

100 level excel assignment 494778

Tutorial 8, Case Problem 4, pgs 482 485

You will submit the following documents from the Alia s Senior Living workbook: Documentation sheet, Invoice and Product Pricing and Shipping sheet.

In step 4o, the best solution for the shipping cost is an IF Function with a nested vlookup (the IF checks if the subtotal is >=200 and thevlookup references the shipping cost table).

Below is a link to the book…

https://www.dropbox.com/s/2eyf12hgbv3jmx5/New%20Perspectives%20on%20Microsoft%20Excel%202010%20Comprehensive.pdf

2. Complete Tutorial 10, Case Problem 4 (through Step 4 only) on pages 611 612. There are no data files for this assignment – you will complete this worksheet from scratch. The following instructions will help you complete this assignment.

3. Save the workbook as: xx NewGen Robotics (replace xx with your first and last initials).

4. When creating the income statement for Step 2 in the textbook, use the categories (row labels) listed in Figure 10-5 on page 558, but not the data. Use the data (numbers) shown in step 2 on page 611. Create formulas for: Total Revenue, Total Material Cost, Total Manufacturing Cost, Total Variable Expenses, Total Fixed Expenses, Total Revenue, Total Expenses and Net Income.

5. Create a formula in the Income Statement for Units Produced that assumes that the company produces enough cleaning robots to have a 1 percent surplus over Units Sold.

6. Format the income statement professionally and name the sheet tab Income Statement. Create a copy of the Income Statement sheet and name the copied sheet tab Goal Seek.

7. In the Goal Seek sheet you created above, use the Goal Seek feature to complete Step 3 in the text.

8. To complete Step 4 in the text, create the one-variable data table on the Income Statement sheet. Name the data table Cost-Volume-Profit Analysis. Do not complete the CVP chart.

9. Make sure each sheet in the workbook will print on one page. Save and print the finished workbook. You will submit the xx NewGen Robotics workbook to the Week 10


This assignment is not in your textbook. Complete the steps listed below:

Problem: Ellen Felton is events coordinator at Kirk Harbor Inn, which is located on Cape Cod. She schedules weddings, conferences, engagements, and so forth at this water-front Victorian inn. She constantly is sending quotes to potential clients and asks you to assist her in linking the workbook she developed to the letter she sends to potential clients.

Complete the following:

1. Open the NewQuote_2010 workbook located in the Appendix C misc folder and then save it as xx Harbor Quote (replace xx with your first and last initials).

2. In the Documentation sheet, enter the date and your name, and then switch to the Quote worksheet.

3. Open the Event document located in the Appendix C misc folder and then save the document as xx Event Planner.

4. Return to the Harbor Quote workbook, and then copy the range C2:G19 in the Quote worksheet.

5. Return to the Event Planner document, and then paste the selected range as a link below the sentence Here are the details.

6. Ellen s client requests two changes: move the wedding to the Salon room and change the number of guests to 160. Make these changes in the Harbor Quote workbook, and then verify that the Event Planner document is updated.

7. Create a pie chart of expenses in the Harbor Quote document: select the ranges F13:G14 and F16:G18 (do not

select the Subtotal or Grand Total) and insert a 3-D Pie chart.

8. Add a Chart Title above the chart that reads: Wedding Expenses.

9. Copy the chart and embed it in the Event Planner Word document. Place it directly after the Excel worksheet (before the sentence that reads: We look forward to working with you in helping to make this special event a memorable one for you. )

Attachments:

12 pages financial analysis research paper a grade research paper needed 494779

**********PLEASE READ ALL THE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY!

NO PLAGIARISM. I WILL USE A PLAGIARISM CHECK SOFTWARE TO CHECK THE COMPLETED WORK

This is a 12-a page (or more) RESEARCH (NOT ESSAY) paper and MUST BE formatted according to APA style .

1.) Research Paper- INSTRCUTIONS

The objectives/purpose of the research paper project are to enable you to do a comprehensive financial analysis of a publicly traded corporation; and provide you with substantial information for you to make recommendations regarding investing in this corporation.

Your financial analysis report will be driven by a rigorous ratio analysis, and aggressively supplemented with your written analysis, interpretation, and evaluation of the data.

Your research should be strategically driven by two probing questions:

-Would you invest your financial capital in the selected firm as a shareholder?

-Would you invest your human and intellectual capital in the firm as an employee?

Steps in preparation of financial analysis report:

1.) Select a publicly held company

2.) Select a benchmark firm to compare your company against. The benchmark firm is typically the largest competitor.

3.) Obtain the firm s balance sheet, income statement, and statement of cash flows for

the past 5 years. Download or read the firm s annual report.

4.) Go to: http://www.sec.gov/edgar/searchedgar/webusers.htm

Research EDGAR s database for additional SEC report filings: 8-k, 10-Q.

4.) The following table is the type of Excel or Word table that should be used to gather and report your ratio and financial performance data. Note the 5 financial diagnostic categories that should be used in your analysis.

Financial diagnostic categories

Chosen company vs.

Benchmark competitor

1.) Liquidity of short-term assets

-Current ratio

-Cash ratio

-Quick ratio

-Current ratio

-Cash ratio

-Quick ratio

2.) Long-term debt-paying ability

-Debt ratio

-Debt-equity ratio

-Times interest earned

-Debt ratio

-Debt-equity ratio

-Times interest earned

3.) Profitability

-Net income/sales (profit margin)

-Net income/assets (ROA)

-Net income/shareholder equity (ROE)

-Net income/sales (profit margin)

-Net income/assets (ROA)

-Net income/shareholder equity (ROE)

4.) Asset utilization/ management efficiency

-Total asset turnover

-Inventory turnover measures

-Accounts receivable turnover

-Total asset turnover

-Inventory turnover measures

-Accounts receivable turnover

5.) Market measures

-Price/earnings ratio

-Earnings per common share

-Dividend payout

-Price/earnings ratio

-Earnings per common share

-Dividend payout

Use 2-3 ratios per diagnostic category. Place your ratio calculations in the table for your selected companies primary company and benchmark competitor. Using 5 diagnostic categories, and 3 ratios to assess each category, results in 15 ratio measures per company that will be compared side by side.

6.) To validate your research, 5 years of data should be analyzed.

7.) The financial analysis report must be written properly. They must include a title page, a table of contents, and a reference page. For both midterm and final report, information sources from the web, etc. must be cited properly, using APA style.

This means that every table that you cut and pasted or typed from the web must have a source at the bottom of the table AND that citing must also be included in a reference page at the end of the report.

Your project should include:

a. An overview of the corporation.

i. Provide general information regarding the type of business, products and/or services, location of headquarters, name of CEO, number of employees, and countries of operation, etc.

b. The latest financial statements

i. Get the income statement, balance sheet, cash flow statement, and the statement of owners equity for the past fiscal year. Create Turnitin-friendly versions of the financial statements; do not just cut and paste them in your report. Do not forget to cite the source under each statement.

ii. If you cannot cut and paste them, you may have to type in the information in a table in your report.

c. A summary of each financial statement

i. Take each statement and state the key parts in words. Tell a story from each of the financial statements. For example, for the income statement, the story starts like, Total Revenues in 2010 were $10 billion, while Cost of Goods Sold were $8 billion, leaving a gross profit margin of $2 billion, or 20 percent of total revenues .After taking out interest and taxes from EBIT, the net income was $0.5 billion, or 5 percent of total revenues.

d. Ratio calculation (include 5 major types of ratios. Refer to chapter 3, Analysis of Financial Statements)

i. Organization of this section is based on the FIVE types of ratios listed in the text book. Calculate the ratios from the financial statements in part c above using Excel or your calculator and present them in a table.

ii. Find industry financial ratios online (eg. Yahoo.com) and compare your corporation s ratios to these industry ratios.

iii. Present your results following the five types of ratios discussed in part d.

iv. A table with both corporation and industry ratios is required;

v.

e. Discussion of key statistics provided by sources like Yahoo finance.

i. There are many different other statistics available for your corporation. These include market value, beta, and diluted EPS, etc. Discuss some of the key statistics that you think can assist you to determine if this corporation is a good buy or sell.

f. For you to decide if a corporation s stock is a good buy or sell, you must forecast several key variables, including the stock price.

i. Use historical prices (5 years of monthly data recommended) and forecast the stock price for the next year. Use regression analysis, and/or moving average, etc. to create your forecast.

ii. Create a graph from the historical data and show your forecast on the same graph. You can add a trend line to the graph to help you with a forecast. Include the graph in your report.

iii. You need to say specifically what the forecasted value of the stock price is.

iv. You must address the question, Is this forecast reasonable Must you amend your analysis to get a more reasonable forecast

g. Other information pertinent to the corporation that could affect its future performance and stock price.

i. This could include dividend policy, capital structure, bond ratings, expert opinions on TV, new projects, litigation, regulation, etc. Search for information on the web regarding this corporation. Look at company complaint blogs, etc.

h. Recommendation regarding the future of this corporation.

i. Is the stock a good buy, average buy, or a poor buy (implying a good sell)

ii. Include a justification of your recommendation based on your analysis and research.

Attachments:

15 494781

Week Four Exercise Assignment 1. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing: Social Security taxes: 6% on the first $55,000 earned per employee Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned per employee Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500 State income taxes: 5% of gross earnings Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned per employee Federal unemployment taxes: 0.

Document Preview:

Week Four Exercise Assignment 1. Payroll accounting. Assume that the following tax rates and payroll information pertain to Brookhaven Publishing: Social Security taxes: 6% on the first $55,000 earned per employee Medicare taxes: 1.5% on the first $130,000 earned per employee Federal income taxes withheld from wages: $7,500 State income taxes: 5% of gross earnings Insurance withholdings: 1% of gross earnings State unemployment taxes: 5.4% on the first $7,000 earned per employee Federal unemployment taxes: 0.8% on the first $7,000 earned per employee The company incurred a salary expense of $50,000 during February. All employees had earned less than $5,000 by month-end. a. Prepare the necessary entry to record Brookhaven’s February payroll. The entry will include deductions for the following: Social Security taxes Medicare taxes Federal income taxes withheld State income taxes Insurance withholdings b. Prepare the journal entry to record Brookhaven’s payroll tax expense. The entry will include the following: Matching Social Security taxes Matching Medicare taxes State unemployment taxes Federal unemployment taxes 2. Current liabilities: entries and disclosure. A review of selected financial activities of Visconti’s during 20XX disclosed the following: 12/1 Borrowed $20,000 from the First City Bank by signing a 3- month, 15% note payable. Interest and principal are due at maturity. 12/10 Established a warranty liability for the XY-80, a new product. Sales are expected to total 1,000 units during the month. Past experience with similar products indicates that 2% of the units will require repair, with warranty costs averaging $27 per unit (parts only). 12/22 Purchased $16,000 of merchandise on account from Oregon Company, terms 2/10, n/30. 12/26 Borrowed $5,000 from First City Bank; signed a 15% note payable due in 60 days. (Assume 360 days for daily interest calculation) 12/31 Repaired six XY-80s during the month at a total…

Attachments:

18 22 and 20 38 cost management 494783

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

0 0 0 0 40 25 35 100 60000 0 0 0 60000 60000 0 0 0 60000 60000 0 0 0 60000 BRIEF Problem 18-22 QUESTION: SOLUTION: Net Revenue Variable Costs Controllable Fixed Costs Noncontrollable Fixed Cost Untraceable Costs 18-22 Phelps Glass Inc. has reported the following financial data: net revenues of $1 0 million, variable costs of $5 million, controllable fixed costs of $2 million, noncontrollable fixed costs of $1 million, and untraceable costs of $500,000. The accounting manager has supplied you with this data and asked you to come up with the controllable margin, total contribution, CPC, and operating income. For guidance, review Exhibit 18. on page 815 in the text. Contribution Margin Controllable Margin Total CPC Operating Income Hint: Enter values in this color cell. service to the hotel’s guests, maintaining an 80 percent occupancy rate, improving the average rate received per room to $88 from the current $85, and achieving a savings of 5 percent on all hotel costs. The hotel’s owner, a partnership of seven people who own several hotels in the region, want to structure Ramon’s future compensation to objectively reward him for achieving these goals. In the past, he has been paid an annual salary of $72,000 with no incentive pay. The incentive plan the partners developed has each of the goals weighted as follows: Measure Operating within 95 percent of expense budget Average room rate If Ramon achieves all of these goals, the partners determined that his performance should merit a bonus of $23,000. The partners also agreed that his salary would be reduced to $60,000 because of the addition of the bonus. The goal measures used to compensate Ramon are as follows: Compensation: 40 percent weight x $23,000 target reward = $9,200 Compensation: 25 percent weight x $23,000 target reward = $5,750 Compensation: 35 percent weight x $23,000 target reward = $8,050 Ramon’s new compensation plan will thus pay him a $60,000 salary…

Attachments:

for 1accoountsmanagement only 494784

Hi

I need help with financial statment analysis project. For more details check the aatached files.

(The company to analyise is Autozone)

Thanks.

Document Preview:

FINANCIAL STATEMENT ANALYSIS ASSIGNMENT ACTG 201: RUSS SPRING 2013 Due May 8, 2013 Project Overview Your assignment is to select a domestic corporation that is predominantly in a retail industry whose stock is publicly traded and pretend that you are a financial analyst scoping out a potential investment. You should focus on the general financial health of the company and pretend you are doing a very simple initial analysis of the company. A domestic corporation is one that is based in the United States. I want you to use a U.S. company because they will be applying U.S. GAAP (generally accepted accounting principles) to their financial statements. These are the accounting rules you are learning this semester. Foreign accounting rules may differ from U.S. GAAP, complicating your task. Foreign companies that are trading on US stock exchanges have converted to US GAAP, but the conversion is not 100% transparent for inexperienced financial statement users. Therefore, make sure your company is based in the U.S. I want all students to choose a retailer to promote comparability in classroom discussions of your financial analysis project. A retailer is a company that purchases merchandise to resell to consumers. You may choose a company that manufactures its product as long as reselling is a major part of its business operations. Companies are categorized according to four-digit SIC (Standard Industry Classification) codes. The main retailing SIC codes start with 59 as the first two digits. Check your company’s  description  or  its  SIC  code  to   make sure it is a retailer. A publicly traded company is one whose stock is traded on an organized exchange (NYSE, AMEX, etc.). A broad spectrum of shareholders own the company. Publicly traded companies are regulated by the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) to protect the investing public. The SEC requires these companies to follow explicit accounting rules and to provide…

Attachments:

for 1accoountsmanagement only 494785

hello i have the qustions on the file ,, please attach the file

Document Preview:

The TMA Questions PART A Financial Reporting on the Internet (Tyco Electronics Ltd.) TE Connectivity Ltd. is a global company that designs and manufactures approximately 500,000 products that connect and protect the flow of power and data inside millions of products used by consumers and industries. We partner with customers in a broad array of industries from consumer electronics, energy, and healthcare to automotive, aerospace, and communication networks. Tyco Electronics Ltd. was incorporated in Bermuda in fiscal 2000 as a wholly-owned subsidiary of then Bermuda-based Tyco International Ltd. (‘‘Tyco International’’). Effective June 29, 2007, Tyco International distributed all of our shares to its common shareholders (referred to in this report as the ‘‘separation’’). Tyco became an independent, publicly traded company owning the former electronics businesses of Tyco International. Access the Tyco Electronics Ltd. web page at: www.te.com. From Tyco’s home page, choose Investors, and then “Annual Reports”, followed by clicking on “2012 Annual Report” to download the annual report on Form 10-K (PDF). Instructions: Use the annual report to answer the following questions: Is it a service, merchandising, or manufacturing company? How can you tell? What is its primary product or service? [8 Mark Discuss how the decisions you would make might differ if you were a supplier, customer, or a member of Tyco Electronics’ management team. [9 Marks] Indicate which costing approach is used by Tyco Electronics in preparing its income statement, and briefly explain the usefulness of the other approach. [10 Marks] Using the Consolidated Statements of Operations, what does Gross Margin represent? Calculate Gross Margin percentage for the most three recent years (2012, 2011, and 2010). What do you observe? How does Gross Margin differ from Operating Income?…

Attachments:

1q 494786

Answer1????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Document Preview:

Answer1???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

2 page paper 494788

Number of Pages: 2(Double Spaced) Writing Style: APA Number of sources: 3 Choose a public company in the food industry. Analyze the financial statements and assess whether the financial performance has improved or declined year-over-year.

Document Preview:

Number of Pages: 2(Double Spaced) Writing Style: APA Number of sources: 3 Choose a public company in the food industry. Analyze the financial statements and assess whether the financial performance has improved or declined year-over-year. Analysis techniques include the following: Comparative financial statements Trend analysis Ratio analysis Percentage analysis  The paper should include:  An analysis of the performance of the firm based on the analysis tools used A summary of the company’s financial performance and assessment of whether it has improved or declined year-over-year in terms of profitability, asset utilization, and liquidity  Background on Course Research Requirements: In the business world, it is important to use research to strengthen points made in presentations and projects. Learning to use the search functions in databases for research is a crucial critical thinking skill that complements other research techniques. There are two main types of databases. You must stay away from inferior Web sites with anonymous writers; articles found on consultant Web sites, and materials on Web sites that are not reputable. Dictionaries and encyclopedias most often repeat the information from textbooks. Acceptable Internet resources include, among others, government sites (especially for statistics). Wikipedia or any open source Web sites are not permitted.????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

2 papers accounting 494789

Please see attached before attempting to handshake. This is for 2 separate papers with regards to accounting – 8-9 pages each paper. Attached are the instructions and the topics that need to be written about. Topics are in bold.

Original work only as this is going to go through plagiarism checks! This must be done on 10/3, no later.

Document Preview:

Research Paper Instructions Write a 8-9 page, double-spaced research paper that uses APA format for the following topic: Auditing Procedures and Practices with ethical and moral implications and the effect on businesses. Must use 6 different scholarly articles including professional accounting and business journals that pertain to this topic. Write a 8-9 page, double-spaced research paper that uses APA format for the following topic: Management Accounting and the various legal and ethical issues that arise from gross mismanagement within accounting and the business world. Must use 6 different scholarly articles including professional accounting and business journals that pertain to this topic.???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

2 prepare the december 31 2011 post closing trial balance for showers company the i 494790

(2) Prepare the December 31, 2011, post-closing trial balance for Showers Company. (The items in the Trial Balance should be grouped as follows: Assets, Liabilities and Equity. Be sure to list the asset in order of liquidity. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) SHOWERS COMPANY Post-Closing Trial Balance December 31, 2011 Debit Credit $ $ Totals $ $

Attachments:

2 seperate questions 494791

2 SEPARATE ASSIGNMENTS Write a 350- to 500-word summary explaining the differences between revenue expenditures and capital expenditures during a useful life and identifying any similarities. Briefly explain the entries of revenue expenditures and capital expenditures.   Format your summary consistent with APA guidelines.DUE Wednesday __________________________________________________ Exercises and Problems – Week Two Resource: Ch. 9 of Financial Accounting Complete Exercises E9-1, E9-7, & E9-12. Complete Problem P9-7B.

Document Preview:

2 SEPARATE ASSIGNMENTS Write a 350- to 500-word summary explaining the differences between revenue expenditures and capital expenditures during a useful life and identifying any similarities. Briefly explain the entries of revenue expenditures and capital expenditures.   Format your summary consistent with APA guidelines.DUE Wednesday __________________________________________________ Exercises and Problems – Week Two Resource: Ch. 9 of Financial Accounting Complete Exercises E9-1, E9-7, & E9-12. Complete Problem P9-7B. Submit as a Microsoft® Excel® or Word document FORMAT TO APA GUIDELINES DUE FRIDAY E9-1 E9-1 The following expenditures relating to plant assets were made by Spaulding Company during the first 2 months of 2011. 1. Paid $5,000 of accrued taxes at time plant site was acquired. 2. Paid $200 insurance to cover possible accident loss on new factory machinery while the ma- chinery was in transit. 3. Paid $850 sales taxes on new delivery truck. 4. Paid $17,500 for parking lots and driveways on new plant site. 5. Paid $250 to have company name and advertising slogan painted on new delivery truck. 6. Paid $8,000 for installation of new factory machinery. 7. Paid $900 for one-year accident insurance policy on new delivery truck. 8. Paid $75 motor vehicle license fee on the new truck. Instructions (a) Explain the application of the cost principle in determining the acquisition cost of plant assets. (b)List the numbers of the foregoing transactions,and opposite each indicate the account title to which each expenditure should be debited. acquisitions. E9-7 E9-7 Brainiac Company purchased a delivery truck for $30,000 on January 1,2011.The truck has an expected salvage value of $2,000,and is expected to be driven 100,000 miles over its esti- mated useful life of 8 years.Actual miles driven were 15,000 in 2011 and 12,000 in 2012. Instructions (a)Compute depreciation expense for 2011 and 2012 using (1) the…

Attachments:

2 tasks for business applications for finance 494792

Here is the 2nd task.

Another teacher worked on this assignments, but can’t understand how to do it correctly. You do not have to do the entire tasks, as some of the areas of both tasks have been passed off already. I am attaching the original assignment instructions, the rubrics, the jobs that were done by the previous teacher & the evaluation summaries. Please help!!! I needed this last week, and I am stressing out. I will send the tasks separate, because there are a lot of attachments.

Thanks!

Attachments:

1- the actual assignment instructions

2- the grading rubric (must be followed)

3- the written part of the assignment submitted by the previous teacher (PDF)

4- the same submission by previous teacher (ODS-for your convenience)

5- the most recent task evaluation

Document Preview:

FNT1 Task 2 319.1.3-01-10, 2.1-04, 2.5-05 Capital Budgeting Student Template Revised May 8, 2011 Student Name: A Morgan Initial Investment Work Cap Cash 1 Cash 2 Cash 3 Cash 4 Exp 1 Exp 2 Exp 3 Exp 4 Tax Rate Restoration 2,700,000 X 3,000,000 210,000 3,200,000 3,600,000 3,800,000 3,700,000 2,500,000 2,800,000 3,200,000 2,900,000 30% 120,000 2,800,000 Enter your first initial and last name in the fields above. A 3,250,000 220,000 3,100,000 3,400,000 3,600,000 3,240,000 2,400,000 2,600,000 2,700,000 2,500,000 25% 140,000 2,580,000 B 3,000,000 200,000 3,000,000 3,200,000 3,400,000 3,800,000 2,400,000 2,650,000 2,800,000 28% 120,000 2,480,000 Your Task 2 Data C 2,940,000 250,000 3,400,000 3,500,000 3,700,000 3,470,000 2,800,000 2,850,000 2,900,000 2,500,000 22% 140,000 2,500,000 Years 1 & 2 Years 3 & 4 Years 5 & 6 Years 7 & 8 D 2,900,000 180,000 2,940,000 3,160,000 3,240,000 3,600,000 2,200,000 2,500,000 2,600,000 30% 160,000 2,700,000 Estimated Cash Receipts from tool sales each year. 3,100,000 3,400,000 3,600,000 3,240,000 E 2,850,000 200,000 3,200,000 3,600,000 3,800,000 3,600,000 2,500,000 2,800,000 3,400,000 2,600,000 25% 130,000 2,600,000 Estimated Cash Expenses for operations each year 2,400,000 2,600,000 2,700,000 2,500,000 F 2,900,000 300,000 3,170,000 3,240,000 3,470,000 3,930,000 2,400,000 2,500,000 2,750,000 3,300,000 32% 150,000 2,570,000 Initial Investment for equipment, etc. 3,250,000 G 2,800,000 180,000 3,000,000 3,200,000 3,600,000 3,470,000 2,300,000 2,600,000 2,800,000 2,500,000 32% 160,000 2,570,000 Marginal Tax Rate 25% H 2,820,000 180,000 3,000,000 3,200,000 3,600,000 3,800,000 2,300,000 2,600,000 2,800,000 32% 160,000 2,140,000 Restoration at the end of 8…

intermediate accounting acc 381 494747

To find the answers for these questions it has to be logged in to this web site

http://aaahq.org/ascLogin.cfm

User ID: AAA51460

Password: ub5PAik

Then click FASB

then Assets-Inventory

Document Preview:

Research Case 2 – 25 points Spring 2013 This assignment is due on Tuesday, April 16, 2012 9:00 a.m. to the D2L drop box. A late assignment will not be graded. In other words, a late assignment is worth 0/25 points. You must also bring a paper copy of your assignment to class on Tuesday, April 16. You must use Microsoft Word to complete your assignment. Put a heading and your name on the document so that when I open it for grading I don’t have to guess who or what. Submit your file saved with the following file name: lastname_firstname_case2. For example, my file name would be portz_kris_case2 When asked to cite the FASB Codification database, make sure you reference the database correctly, using a four number reference. For example: 835 – 20 – 30 – 2 (topic – subtopic – section – paragraph). While you are expected to cite the Codification in this assignment, you may use other resources to help you answer the questions. TOPIC: What is the meaning of cost as it applies to the initial measurement of inventory? Copy and paste the appropriate paragraph(s) from the Codification and provide the reference. What is the major objective of accounting for inventory? Copy and paste the appropriate paragraph(s) from the Codification and provide the reference. Brilliant Drilling is a manufacturer of drill bits for large oil rigs that operate around the world. A major component in the manufacturing of the drill bits is diamonds. As a result of an increase in oil drilling due to the increase in oil prices, Brilliant Drilling has received, and is expected to receive, an increase in orders for new and replacement drill bits. With such a potential demand, Brilliant Drilling has purchased a large quantity of diamonds. Since diamonds are considered a precious metal, Brilliant Drilling is contemplating the proper valuation of its inventory, which is currently above cost. Management has concluded that precious metals with a fixed monetary value and without…

Attachments:

in drafting the memo a you should explain the circumstances the company finds itself 494748

In drafting the memo:

(a) You should explain the circumstances the company finds itself in.

(b) Address the requirements under GAAP for the discount rate and expected rate of return on plan assets based on the FASB’s Accounting Standards Codification. When discussing the GAAP requirements, you should cite the relevant subsections of the FASB Accounting Standards Codification by section/paragraph number. Make sure you locate the paragraphs of the codification (not just the definitions) that address the discount rate and the expected long-term rate of return on plan assets. Your primary guidance should be from the recognition and measurement sections (25-35) although you can cite the implementation guidance (section 55) to support the other guidance.

(c) Address whether in the current economic environment, using any of the assumptions suggested other than the 5% discount rate–8% expected rate of return assumption is feasible. Address whether it would be ethical to follow the golfing buddy’s suggestion and back into interest rates that the company can live with, i.e., that give the desired results. In this regard, you should discuss how much flexibility you think there might be in selecting these discount/return rate assumptions for the purposes of determining the PBO and pension expense and still remaining in compliance with GAAP

Document Preview:

Discussion Memorandum #2 Requirements Pension Expense/Obligation In 2013, Cowboyz Rustic Furniture Inc, a manufacturer of rustic furniture, has had its profits severely affected by a recession that commenced in 2013. The recession was accompanied by a significant fall in the stock market and plummeting interest rates as the U.S. Federal Reserve attempted to stabilize the economy. The company’s CEO, Mr. Wrangler, finds himself battling reduced profitability from the core business because of a dramatic decline in new furniture purchases as the housing market has slowed down. Given the fall in value of plan assets and the dramatic decline in interest rates to 5% related to the Fed’s actions, the company’s CEO, Mr. Wrangler is extremely concerned about the effect of these changes on the size of the company’s pension plan obligation after being alerted to the issue by yourself, the company controller. The CEO is worried that the current economic conditions could make the pension plan virtually unaffordable because of having to record a sizable adjustment to the pension obligation making the company more leveraged and increased pension expense reducing its profitability. Because the company has always funded an amount equal to the service cost he is concerned that there the company may have to provide added cash to the plan if the service cost goes up. Mr. Wrangler indicated that he had been talking to a fellow CEO, a golfing buddy, who suggested that the company do what his buddy’s company has done after talking with a consultant. The consultant suggested that a way to reduce the impact on earnings and reduce the potential increase in the obligation without laying off people or reducing or eliminating pension benefits would be to get the board of directors to allow the company to use discount/settlement rates that are as high as possible in determining the present value of the pension obligation and the expected rate of return on plan assets. The CEO was…

Attachments:

iskandar 494749

Iskender Corporation is a Turkish conglomerate with operations located throughout Europe and the Middle East. The company recently adopted International Financial Reporting Standards and has prepared disclosures to comply with IFRS 8, Operating Segments. Information related to revenues. Operating Segments Total Revenues Countries Sales to External Customers Automotive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23,093 Turkey 28876 Food . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22,875 Germany 18765 Retail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,987 Bulgaria 12076 Finance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,895 Russia 9897 Consumer durable . . . . . . . . 7,182 Italy 7654 Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6642 Iraq 6757 Real estate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,400 Uzbekistan 3049 Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87,074 87074 Based upon this information, Iskender prepares the following note to comply with IFRS 8 Note 30: Segment Reporting (amounts in millions of Turkish Lira) Operating Segments Automotive Food Retail other External sales . . . . . . . ………. 21,678 19,781 13,987 22,397 Profit (loss). . . . . . . . . ………. 4,076 2,007 3,467 5,563 Depreciation . . . . . ………… 222 135 142 456 Total assets . . . . . . . . ………. 18,874 20,765 9,654 20,765 Capital expenditures . ………. 367 228 195 513 Equity method investments . . . . . . 398 0- 0 678 Geographic Areas Turkey Germany Bulgaria Other External sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28,876 8,765 12,076 27,357 Property, plant, and equipment . . . 7,078 2,508 3,097 5,478 Required: Evaluate whether Note 30 Segment Reporting is in compliance with IFRS 8 based upon the information provided.

Document Preview:

Iskender Corporation is a Turkish conglomerate with operations located throughout Europe and the Middle East. The company recently adopted International Financial Reporting Standards and has prepared disclosures to comply with IFRS 8, Operating Segments. Information related to revenues. Operating Segments Total Revenues Countries Sales to External Customers Automotive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23,093 Turkey 28876 Food . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22,875 Germany 18765 Retail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,987 Bulgaria 12076 Finance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,895 Russia 9897 Consumer durable . . . . . . . . 7,182 Italy 7654 Energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6642 Iraq 6757 Real estate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,400 Uzbekistan 3049 Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87,074 87074 Based upon this information, Iskender prepares the following note to comply with IFRS 8 Note 30: Segment Reporting (amounts in millions of Turkish Lira) Operating Segments Automotive Food Retail other External sales . . . . . . . ………. 21,678 19,781 13,987 22,397 Profit (loss). . . . . . . . . ………. 4,076 2,007 3,467 5,563 Depreciation . . . . . ………… 222 135 142 456 Total assets . . . . . . . . ………. 18,874 20,765 9,654 20,765 Capital expenditures . ………. 367 228 195 513 Equity method investments . . . . . . 398 0- 0 678 Geographic…

Attachments:

it for business 494751

HC1041 IT for Business Individual Assignment Worth 30 marks due Friday Week 10 1500 words Scenario You have been asked to explore three database alternatives for a merchant who provides shoes to retail stores. The merchant needs the database to keep the financial records, employee records, inventory records and general use records for the business. Answer the questions below in your report. 1. Identify three database systems and discuss the purpose for choosing these three options 2.

Document Preview:

HC1041 IT for Business Individual Assignment Worth 30 marks due Friday Week 10 1500 words Scenario You have been asked to explore three database alternatives for a merchant who provides shoes to retail stores. The merchant needs the database to keep the financial records, employee records, inventory records and general use records for the business. Answer the questions below in your report. 1. Identify three database systems and discuss the purpose for choosing these three options 2.Pick only ONE of the above database systems and discuss the Hardware and software components required to run it 3. Discuss the costs involved in implementing the database 4. Discuss other factors which the business should consider before implementing the database 5. Provide sufficient citations throughout and matching Individual Assignment Create a report. 1500 words. Look at Week 08 lecture on organising data for more assistance. Justify all assumptions. SafeAssign Using the SafeAssign link in Blackboard to submit your report. Download and print out the FULL report and attach to the appendix at the back of your report. Assignments without the full SafeAssign report will NOT be marked. Hard Copy To be placed into assignment drop area on campus, including SafeAssign report, by 5pm Friday of week 10. References/citations You are expected to provide citations for every piece of information you include in your report. Any pictures used, other than ones you created, should be cited. Any information on computer systems, hardware etc, should be cited. You will lose marks for not providing citations. ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

its uploaded on the file wizarf of a 039 z 494752

This the explanation select the company from this list News papar OR 1-May bank 2-DRB resources 3-IOI plantation 4-country Height 5-proton 6-cahaya mata sarawork 7-KPJ Healthcare 8-QSR Bata Kawan 9-CIMB 10-public bank Based on their recent annual repoort from 2000 to 2010 choice just one year…..the document you look in the report 1-statment on corporate goverment 2-chairment statement 3-Managing directors review 4-auditors report 5-Management commttee members 6-Risk management This is the guideline 1-combined code 2- listing requirment by security commission 3- sarbanes oxley.. apply this is the guideline base on information you get in report……you can select 2 or apply all….

Document Preview:

Module Code: BM55-3.5-2 ECG INDIVIDUAL ASSIGNMENT (30% weightage) Learning Outcomes 1. Explain how corporate social responsibility and corporate governance relate to ethics. 2. Highlight the main ethical issues relating to the natural environment. 3. Convey an enhanced awareness of the role of business and professional ethics in financial reporting; Assignment Description This assignment comprises 30% of your total marks for this module. You are required to write a 2,500 word essay on the topic below: Select a listed company in Kuala Lumpur Stock Exchange (KLSE). Based on their recent annual report, critically discuss about the corporate governance issues of the company from the perspective of compliance, independency and shareholders’ wealth. Specification of Assignment: You are required to choose an appropriate essay format for the topic chosen. (Essay formats such as argumentative, discussion and etc) You should have sufficient references to substantiate your research and essay writing. You are REQUIRED to use Harvard referencing methods for this assignment. The essay should be well-structured and the use of proper paragraphs for topic separation is encouraged. The essay must adhere to standard academic documentation standards: Font Type: Times New Roman Font Size: 12 pts Line Spacing: 1.5-line spacing Marking Criteria Your essay will be marked based on the following criteria:- Content & Facts – systematic & analytical ability 40 marks Development & Discussion of relevant issue 40 marks Application of relevant theory 10 marks Referencing and Citation 5 marks Overall effectiveness 5 marks TOTAL 100 marks BM55-3.5-2 Ethics & Corporate Governance Individual Assignment Page 1 of 2 APU Level 2 Asia Pacific University of Technology &…

Attachments:

for jan v accounting assignment 494753

Assignment 1-3

Due Sunday night at 10pm eastern

Document Preview:

Assignment 04 BU330 Accounting for Managers Directions: Be sure to make an electronic copy of your answer before submitting it to Ashworth College for grading.  Unless otherwise stated, answer in complete sentences, and be sure to use correct English spelling and grammar.  Sources must be cited in APA format.  Your response should be a minimum of one (1) single-spaced page to a maximum of two (2) pages in length; refer to the “Assignment Format” page for specific format requirements. Return on Investment and Residual Income Portia Carter is the president of a company that owns six multiplex movie theaters. Carter has delegated decision-making authority to the theater managers for all decisions except those relating to capital expenditures and film selection. The theater managers’ compensation depends on the profitability of their theaters. Max Burgman, the manager of the Park Theater, had the following master budget and actual results for the month. ?Master?Actual???Budget?Results??Tickets sold?120,000?480,000???Revenue–tickets?$ 840,000?$ 880,000???Revenue–concessions?480,000?330,000??Total revenue?$1,320,000?$1,210,000??Controllable variable costs?????Concessions?120,000?99,000???Direct labor?420,000?330,000???Variable overhead?540,000?550,000??Contribution margin?$ 240,000?$ 231,000??Controllable fixed costs?????Rent?55,000?55,000???Other administrative expenses?45,000?50,000??Theater operating income?$ 140,000?$ 126,000?? 1. Assuming that the theaters are profit centers, prepare a performance report for the Park Theater using the chart below. Include a flexible budget. Determine the variances between actual results, the flexible budget, and the master budget. (25 points) ?Actual??Flexible??Master???Results?Variance?Budget?Variance?Budget??Tickets sold?110,000?????( )?120,000???Revenue–tickets?$ 880,000??( )???( )?$ 840,000???Revenue–concessions?330,000??( )???( )?480,000??Total revenue?$1,210,000?????( …

Attachments:

to jan v pdf part 3 review 494754

Hi,

I have attached the pdf. presentation (Whole Foods Market) Part 3 for review!

please do it asap, so that I can post it, otherwise if another

student gets to review it, I won’t be able to review the presentation.

Thanks!

Document Preview:

Boston Beer Company – by Michael J. Motes, CPA Boston Beer Co. Table 1 Horizontal Trend Analysis 2011 2010 2009 2008 2007 Net Sales 150 136 121 117 100 Cost of Goods Sold 150 136 132 141 100 Total Operating Expenses 119 115 105 111 100 Income form Operations 281 220 147 38 100 Other Revenue(Expenses) (3) (1) 2 37 100 Income Taxes 195 162 121 40 100 Net Income 294 223 138 36 100 Current Assets 93 82 83 51 100 Plant, Property & Equipment (net) 311 309 318 320 100 Other Assets 14 18 12 13 100 Intangible Assets 100 100 100 100 100 Total Assets 139 132 134 112 100 Current Liabilities 115 124 127 116 100 Long Term Liabilities 492 493 380 301 100 Stockholders’ Equity 138 124 130 105 100 Total Liabilities & Equity 139 132 134 112 100 (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 3) (Note 3) Note 1: 2011 Annual Report, 23, 36, 37, 39 & 47 Note 2: 2009 Annual Report, 39, 40& 51 Note 3: 2008 Annual Report, 37, 38& 49 Boston Beer Co. Table 2 Vertical Trend Analysis 2011 2010 2009 2008 2007 Net Sales 100 100 100 100 100 Cost of Goods Sold 45 45 48 54 45 Total Operating Expenses 35 38 38 43 45 Income form Operations 20 18 13 4 11 Other Revenue(Expenses) (0) (0) 0 0 1 Income Taxes 7 7 6 2 6 Net Income 13 11 7 2 7 Current Assets 46 43 43 31 69 Plant, Property & Equipment (net) 53 55 56 67 24 Other Assets 1 1 1 1 6 Intangible Assets 1 1 1 1 1 Total Assets 100 100 100 100 100 Current Liabilities 25 28 28 31 30 Long Term Liabilities 8 8 6 6 2 Stockholders’ Equity 68 64 66 64 68 Total Liabilities & Equity 100 100 100 100 100 (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 3) (Note 3) Note 1: 2011 Annual Report, 23, 36, 37, 39 & 47 Note 2: 2009 Annual Report, 39, 40& 51 Note 3: 2008 Annual Report, 37, 38& 49 Significant Event: From 2007 to 2008 Net Income significantly decreased by 5%percentage points (Table 2). The following observations are provided: Observations: · Sales increased an average of 12.5%per year from 2007 base dollars (Table 1) · Sales from 2007 to 2008 increased 17%based on 2007 dollars (Table…

to jan v ppt part 2 amp 3 to jan v 494755

Hi,

i am sending instructions for parts 2 and 3 ppt. or pdf. presentation.

Part 3 will only be done after i have posted part 2, after that another student’s presentation will be available for review.

I will send you a new handshake for Part 3. 🙂

thanks!

——————————————————————————

I Have attached the illustrations! thanks.

Document Preview:

Boston Beer Company – by Michael J. Motes, CPA Boston Beer Co. Table 1 Horizontal Trend Analysis 2011 2010 2009 2008 2007 Net Sales 150 136 121 117 100 Cost of Goods Sold 150 136 132 141 100 Total Operating Expenses 119 115 105 111 100 Income form Operations 281 220 147 38 100 Other Revenue(Expenses) (3) (1) 2 37 100 Income Taxes 195 162 121 40 100 Net Income 294 223 138 36 100 Current Assets 93 82 83 51 100 Plant, Property & Equipment (net) 311 309 318 320 100 Other Assets 14 18 12 13 100 Intangible Assets 100 100 100 100 100 Total Assets 139 132 134 112 100 Current Liabilities 115 124 127 116 100 Long Term Liabilities 492 493 380 301 100 Stockholders’ Equity 138 124 130 105 100 Total Liabilities & Equity 139 132 134 112 100 (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 3) (Note 3) Note 1: 2011 Annual Report, 23, 36, 37, 39 & 47 Note 2: 2009 Annual Report, 39, 40& 51 Note 3: 2008 Annual Report, 37, 38& 49 Boston Beer Co. Table 2 Vertical Trend Analysis 2011 2010 2009 2008 2007 Net Sales 100 100 100 100 100 Cost of Goods Sold 45 45 48 54 45 Total Operating Expenses 35 38 38 43 45 Income form Operations 20 18 13 4 11 Other Revenue(Expenses) (0) (0) 0 0 1 Income Taxes 7 7 6 2 6 Net Income 13 11 7 2 7 Current Assets 46 43 43 31 69 Plant, Property & Equipment (net) 53 55 56 67 24 Other Assets 1 1 1 1 6 Intangible Assets 1 1 1 1 1 Total Assets 100 100 100 100 100 Current Liabilities 25 28 28 31 30 Long Term Liabilities 8 8 6 6 2 Stockholders’ Equity 68 64 66 64 68 Total Liabilities & Equity 100 100 100 100 100 (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 3) (Note 3) Note 1: 2011 Annual Report, 23, 36, 37, 39 & 47 Note 2: 2009 Annual Report, 39, 40& 51 Note 3: 2008 Annual Report, 37, 38& 49 Significant Event: From 2007 to 2008 Net Income significantly decreased by 5%percentage points (Table 2). The following observations are provided: Observations: · Sales increased an average of 12.5%per year from 2007 base dollars (Table 1) · Sales from 2007 to 2008 increased 17%based on 2007 dollars (Table…

jim 039 s landscaping banner inc photos inc grater inc three divisions xyz w solutio 494756

1. Jim s Landscaping is in a business of maintaining and improving yards in the surrounding areas. The company bases its overhead cost budgets on the following data:

Variable overhead costs:

Supplies $4 per yard

Machine maintenance $2 per yard

Chemicals $6 per yard

Fixed Overhead:

Salaries and wages $2,300 per month

Depreciation $800 per month

Utilities $400 per month

Rent $1,100 per month

In June the following actual costs were incurred for 83 yards:

Supplies $320

Machine maintenance $180

Chemicals $500

Salaries and wages $2,500

Depreciation $800

Utilities $450

Rent $1,100

Construct a flexible budget performance report using the data provided: Show computations

2. Banner Inc bases its variable overhead performance report on the actual direct labor hours of the period. Data concerning the most recent year that ended on December 31 are as follows:

Budgeted direct labor hours 12,000

Actual direct labor hours 13,500

Standard direct labor hours allowed 13,000

Cost formula (per direct labor hours):

Indirect labor $0.85

Supplies $0.30

Electricity $0.15

Actual costs incurred:

Indirect labor $11,600

Supplies $4,000

Electricity $2,050

Management would like to compute both the spending and the efficiency variances for the variable overhead in the company s variable overhead performance report. Prepare a variable overhead performance report with both the variable overhead spending and the efficiency variances. Show computations and details.

3. Photos Inc has a standard cost system in which it applies overhead to products based on the standard direct labor hours allowed for the actual output of the period. Data concerning the most recent year appears below:

Total budgeted fixed overhead cost for the year $250,000

Actual fixed overhead cost for the year $265,000

Budgeted standard direct labor hours 40,000

Actual direct labor hours 41,000

Standard direct labor hours allowed for the actual output 40,800

a. Compute the fixed portion of the predetermined overhead rate for the year. Show computations

b. Compute the fixed overhead budget and volume variances. Show computations

4. Grater Inc sells product A and product B. Revenue and cost information relating to the products follow:

Product A Product B

Selling Price per unit $48.00 $65.00

Variable expenses per unit $24.50 $29.20

Traceable fixed expenses per year $144,000 $101,500

Common fixed expenses in the company total $390,000 annually. Last year the company produced and sold 10,000 of Product A and 15,000 of Product B.

Prepare a contribution format income statement for the year segmented by product lines. Show details clearly.

5. Selected sales and operating data for three divisions of three different companies are given below:

Division X Division Y Division Z

Sales $900,000 $750,000 $600,000

Average operating assets $600,000 $150,000 $200,000

Net operating income $54,000 $30,000 $10,000

Minimum required rate of return 10% 16% 8%

a. Compute the return on investment (ROI) for each division using the formula stated in terms of margin and turnover. Show computations

b. Compute the residual income for each division. Show computations

c. Under which of these methods would they accept an opportunity with a 15% return. Show computations and details

Attachments:

john deere research paper 494758

Document Preview:

FINANCIAL RESEARCH PROJECT (@ 20% of the final course grade) Due date is stated in the course schedule. Students must complete an financial research project. The purpose of this assignment is to grade students’ ability to research, analyze and present financial information. Students will be required to research key financial data, analyze the information, apply the appropriate financial concepts and formulas and prepare a credible management level financial report. This project is to be conducted by the student over the entire semester. I SITUATION: OBJECTIVE The specific objective of this graded written research exercise is to prepare an “executive level financial report” to the Chief Financial Officer (CFO) of a mythical company in which you are employed as a financial analyst. This report will pertain to the financial evaluation of a real, publicly-traded, company. It will require independent research (web-based or library), careful financial analysis, and the proper application of key financial theories and formulas. The company that is to be analyzed for this project is John Deere. Alternatively, you can request me to approve another publicly traded company. This request must be submitted before the end of the first week of the course. The request must include a. identification of the company by ticker symbol and name b. a reasonable and appropriate explanation of why you want to examine the alternative company c. the source of the analyst’s report that will be used in the analysis (which must be submitted to me) d. acknowledgement by you that all of the specific elements of the assignment (see below) will be prepared by you and included in the final research project report SITUATION You are a financial analyst with the mythical High Technology Corporation (“HTC”). HTC is an established manufacturer of a line of electronic components for industrial-use machinery, which services an international market. A competitive technical and…

Attachments:

just for sabx just for sabx just for sabx 494759

Here is the attachment

Document Preview:

Assume you are a CPA with a small local practice in a major metropolitan area. You have three professional employees, all relatively new CPAs (recent graduates from UMUC), and an experienced office manager. In the past, your practice consists primarily of tax and write-up work, but you want to expand the practice. Based upon your desires to expand the practice, you have found a new client, a growing homeowners’ association consisting of 150 homeowners, who is in the process of merging with four other homeowner associations within the next 6 months (which will increase the number of homeowners to 650). A part of the merger deal, your client will also oversee & manage the additional 500 homeowners; therefore, you must be prepared to handle this as part of your deal with the new client. See below for services. In term of scope, for this specific opportunity, you are only required to automate the billing and collections services; however, the client is very interested in having automation in other areas. If you decide to automate additional areas (such as payments & reporting), you must be able to demonstrate the benefits for doing this; however, if you decide not to, you must clearly describe the process for handling these areas from a manual perspective. You will assume that the tax preparation will be done via a PC-based tax program that your firm already has in place. 12+ pages. Executive Summary – 1-2 page summary Introduction -A narrative r4egarding the current business problem and how automation may or may not address the problem. 1-2 pages Proposed System Requirements Billing (Example) – Each quarter you have to send each homeowner an itemized bill. Dues are $50 per month ($150 per quarter). Late fees are 1 percent per month of the unpaid balance. The bills are mailed the first day of the last month of the quarter. Payment is due by the end of the quarter. Input Requirements We will collect data regarding the property to bill the…

Attachments:

lemonade stand game data analysis 494764

Play the lemonade stand game again using the coding methodology adopted by YOUR TEAM in week 2.

Look at the pricing for lemons, ice, cups, and sugar.

Remember that a pitcher will serve 12 cups if there is no ice, and about 20 cups if there are 3 ice cubes per cup.

Then, write a summary to reflect on your experience (250 word minimum).

Address the Following in your Paper:

Follow the following 5 step process. SHOW YOUR WORK.

1. Calculate the number of cups/pitcher you can serve. ROUND UP to the nearest whole number.

2. Calculate the number of lemons, cups of sugar, and cups you ll need to buy.

3. Look at the quantity pricing for each item and add up the cost to purchase your supplies.

4. Look at your costs. For every $1.00 of cost, how much is Cups? Sugar? Lemons? Ice?

5. Calculate your cost and revenue per cup (revenue should be price per cup). How did changing ingredients/quantity purchases affect your unit costs?

Put the summary data you want to focus on (i.e., what is your hypothesis regarding which variable affects net revenue) and put this information into a table

Discuss what your table reveals

Graph your cost and revenue data in a bar chart.

Graph your daily net revenue (revenue cost).

Discuss/describe what your graphs reveal.

Attachments:

lewis university exam 1 accounting 1 494765

Lewis University

Exam #1

Accounting #1

Sept 7, 2013

1

Trial Balance

a.

Explain the purpose of the trial balance.

b.

If the trial balance balances, does that indicate all of journal entries have been posted correctly and in the proper month Please explain

2

Create a transaction that will decrease an asset and decrease equity.

3

Customer Over There owes the Wood Company $16,000 on August 31, 2013. On Sept 7, 2013. Over There sent a check for 50%,to Wood Company, of the amount due. Please explain how the Sept 7 transaction affect s the income statement for Wood Company.

4

The Shore Company has sent you a puzzle to solve. They heard you love puzzles. The pieces for the puzzle are:

a.

Assets on Aug 1, 2013 $ 732,000

b.

Assets in Aug 31, 2013 1,005,000

c.

Liabilities on Aug 1, 2013 442,000

d.

Liabilities on Aug 31, 2013 685,000

e.

During the month of August 2013, the owners invested an additional $85,000 into the company.

f.

During the month of August 2013, the owners withdrew $40,000 from the company.

Required — calculate the net income for the company during the month of August. Show your work.

5. The Woody Shore Company opened their doors to the business on August 31, 2013. The company incurred the following transactions during August 2013.

August 1 The owners deposited $87,000 into the business

August 2 Purchased supplies on credit, total $800.

August 2 Company purchased a 12 month insurance policy for their business $3,600

August 3 Paid rent for tLewis University

Exam #1

Accounting #1

Sept 7, 2013

1

Trial Balance

a.

Explain the purpose of the trial balance.

b.

If the trial balance balances, does that indicate all of journal entries have been posted correctly and in the proper month Please explain

2

Create a transaction that will decrease an asset and decrease equity.

3

Customer Over There owes the Wood Company $16,000 on August 31, 2013. On Sept 7, 2013. Over There sent a check for 50%,to Wood Company, of the amount due. Please explain how the Sept 7 transaction affect s the income statement for Wood Company.

4

The Shore Company has sent you a puzzle to solve. They heard you love puzzles. The pieces for the puzzle are:

a.

Assets on Aug 1, 2013 $ 732,000

b.

Assets in Aug 31, 2013 1,005,000

c.

Liabilities on Aug 1, 2013 442,000

d.

Liabilities on Aug 31, 2013 685,000

e.

During the month of August 2013, the owners invested an additional $85,000 into the company.

f.

During the month of August 2013, the owners withdrew $40,000 from the company.

Required — calculate the net income for the company during the month of August. Show your work.

5. The Woody Shore Company opened their doors to the business on August 31, 2013. The company incurred the following transactions during August 2013.

August 1 The owners deposited $87,000 into the business

August 2 Purchased supplies on credit, total $800.

August 2 Company purchased a 12 month insurance policy for their business $3,600

August 3 Paid rent for t

Attachments:

lily flour company manufactures flour by a series of three processes beginning with 494766

Lily Flour Company manufactures flour by a series of three processes, beginning with wheat grain being introduced in the Milling Department. From the Milling Department, the materials pass through the Sifting and Packaging departments, emerging as packaged refined flour.

The balance in the account Work in Process Sifting Department was as follows on July 1, 2014:

The following costs were charged to Work in Process Sifting Department during July:

During July, 12,000 units of flour were completed. Work in Process Sifting Department on July 31 was 1,000 units, 4 5 completed.

Required:

Hide

1. Prepare a cost of production report for the Sifting Department for July. If an amount is zero, enter “0”. If required, round your cost per equivalent unit answers to the nearest cent.

Document Preview:

Lily Flour Company manufactures flour by a series of three processes, beginning with wheat grain being introduced in the Milling Department. From the Milling Department, the materials pass through the Sifting and Packaging departments, emerging as packaged refined flour. The balance in the account Work in Process—Sifting Department was as follows on July 1, 2014:?? The following costs were charged to Work in Process—Sifting Department during July: ?? During July, 12,000 units of flour were completed. Work in Process—Sifting Department on July 31 was 1,000 units, 4/5 completed. Required: ? ?? HYPERLINK “http://cvg.cengagenow.com/ilrn/takeAssignment/takeAssignmentMain.do?invoker=assignments&takeAssignmentSessionLocator=assignment-take” o “Hide” ?Hide?????1.  Prepare a cost of production report for the Sifting Department for July. If an amount is zero, enter “0”. If required, round your cost per equivalent unit answers to the nearest cent. Lily Flour Company ????Cost of Production Report-Sifting Department ????For the Month Ended July 31, 2014 ????Unit Information ??Units charged to production:??Inventory in process, July 1 ???????Received from Milling Department ???????Total units accounted for by the Sifting Department ???????????Units to be assigned costs:????Equivalent Units ?????Whole Units ???Direct Materials ???Conversion ????Inventory in process, July 1 ?????????????Started and completed in July ?????????????Transferred to Packaging Department in July ?????????????Inventory in process, July 31 ?????????????Total units to be assigned costs ???????????????Cost Information ??Costs per equivalent unit:???Direct Materials ???Conversion ????Total costs for July in Sifting Department ???$ ???$ ????Total equivalent units ??????????Cost per equivalent unit ???$ ???$ ????????Costs charged to production:???Direct Materials ???Conversion ???Total ????Inventory in process, July 1 ?????$ ????Costs incurred in July ?????????Total costs accounted for by the Sifting…

Attachments:

performance reports and budgeting 494768

Assignment 2: Discussion Performance Reports and Budgeting

Review Decision Case 1 (Donna Tse) located on page 1127in you textbook. Answer the case question in the Requirements section of the case. Your memo should be at least two paragraphs in length.

Document Preview:

Assignment 2: Discussion— Performance Reports and Budgeting Review Decision Case 1 (Donna Tse) located on page 1127in you textbook. Answer the case question in the Requirements section of the case. Your memo should be at least two paragraphs in length.

Attachments:

understanding accounting and financial statements 494769

Understanding Accounting and Financial Statements . Accounting can be an involved process, but none the less is essential for the manager to understand. The purpose of this module is four-fold:

  1. To provide assistance in understanding some of the basic accounting principles and practices.
  2. Provide hands on practice.
  3. Provide real life examples

INSTRUCTIONS:

Watchthree entertaining and informative video clips (3:30 minutes each) from The Center for Audit Quality (CAQ):

  • Fight Fraud – Accounting Ethics Provides an explanation why businesses sometimes commit fraudulent accounting acts and the importance of ethics and leadership.
  • System of Investor Protection : Understanding financial reporting and the team members in charge of ensuring reporting accuracy.
  • Sarbanes Oxley – The Audit Committee : Understanding the significance of the Sarbanes Oxley Act of 2002 and audit committee responsibilities. (Video credit: CAQorg.com)

Watch the video clip (1:07 minutes) entitled Goodbye Training Wheels . This is an example of a term called Innovation Transfer which means The transfer of a new idea or method for solving a problem from one group or individual to another, typically from a process improvement consulting group to a client business. Innovation transfer is an important part of Six Sigma and other best practice deployment approaches. In this case, I am using this example of the young boy in the video learning to ride his bicycle as an analogy of you learning accounting principles: sometimes you just need a little practice and for someone to steady the bike and before long you are peddling on your own!!

(You can read more about innovation transfer at Business Dictionary.com. Training Wheel Video credit: Andrea Dorfman. Music: Iron and Wine)

Complete the Excel workbook entitled Chpt 15 Critical Thinking Exercise Accounting. This workbook consists of two problems (each worth up to 50 points each totaling the possible 100 points you can earn). The two problems are:

  1. Wheatley International Preparing a Financial Statement
  2. Acme Incorporated Calculating Financial Ratios

Both problems are in the same Excel workbook and are listed in six (6) tabs at the bottom of the spreadsheet when you open the file. Complete the work in the gray answer boxes for each assignment

Attachments:

1 compute the annual breakeven number of meals and sales revenue for the restaurant 494770

1. Compute the annual breakeven number of meals and sales revenue for the restaurant. 2. Compute the number of meals and the amount of sales revenue needed to earn operating income of $75,600 for the year. Average revenue, include beverages and desserts .$ 45 per meal Average cost of food .$ 15 per meal Chef s and dishwasher s salaries .$ 61,200 per year Rent (premises, equipment) ..$ 4,000 per month Cleaning (linen and premises) ..$ 800 per month Replacement of dishes, cutlery, glasses .$ 300 per month Utilities, advertising, telephone ..$ 2,300 per month

Document Preview:

Compute the annual breakeven number of meals and sales revenue for the restaurant. Compute the number of meals and the amount of sales revenue needed to earn operating income of $75,600 for the year. Average revenue, include beverages and desserts………………….$ 45 per meal Average cost of food……………………………………………………………….$ 15 per meal Chef’s and dishwasher’s salaries…………………………………………….$ 61,200 per year Rent (premises, equipment)…………………………………………………..$ 4,000 per month Cleaning (linen and premises)………………………………………………..$ 800 per month Replacement of dishes, cutlery, glasses………………………………….$ 300 per month Utilities, advertising, telephone……………………………………………..$ 2,300 per month?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

1 compute the profitability ratios including the a and b components dupont methods o 494771

1. Compute the profitability ratios, including the a and b components (DuPont Methods) of ratios 2 and 3 as shown in the textbook. The profitability ratios should be shown for all three years.
2. Write a brief one-paragraph description of any trends that appear to have taken place over the three-year time period.
3. In examining the income statement in Figure 1, note that there was an extraordinary loss of $170,000 in 2006. This might have represented uninsured losses from a fire, a lawsuit settlement, etc. It probably does not represent a recurring event or affect the earnings capability of the firm. For that reason, the astute financial analyst might add back in the extraordinary loss to gauge the true operating earnings of the firm. Since it was a tax-deductible item, we must first multiply by (1-tax rate) before adding it back in.* The tax rate was 35 percent for the year.*
$170,000 Extraordinary loss
.65 (1-tax rate)
$110,500 Aftertax addition to profits from eliminating
the extraordinary loss from net income
The more representative net income number for 2003 would now be:
Initially reported (Figure 1) $200,318
Adjustment for extraordinary loss being eliminated +110,500
Adjusted net income $310,818

Based on the adjusted net income figure of $310,818, re compute the profitability ratios for 2006 (include part a and b for ratios 2 and 3).

4. Now with the adjusted net income numbers as part of the ratios for 2006, write a brief one-paragraph description of trends that appear to have taken place over the three-year time period (refer back to the data in Question 1 for 2004 and 2005).

5. Once again, using the revised profitability ratios for 2006 that you
developed in Question 3, write a complete one paragraph analysis of the
company s profitability ratios compared to the industry ratios (figure 3).
Make sure to include asset turnover and debt to total assets as supplemental
material in your analysis.
6. Harrod s has a superior sales to total assets ratio compared to the industry.
For 2006, compute ratios 4, 6 and 7 as described in the text and compare
them to industry data to see why this is so. Write a brief one-paragraph
description of the results. Note: for ratio 4, only half the sales are on credit
terms.
7. Conclusion: Based on your analysis in answering Questions 4 and 5, do you
hink that Becky Harrod has a legitimate complaint about being charged 2
percent over prime instead of one percent over prime? There is no absolute
right answer to this question, but use your best judgment

Attachments:

homework 494715

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

For all problems, to receive full scores, you have to show your complete and accurate work. Problem 1: Periodic Review System Spark Industries uses a monthly periodic system to maintain the inventory of batteries it sells. Below is the sales data for the last 6 months. Month Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Units Sold 124 162 145 111 81 133 What is the company’s average monthly demand for batteries? Assume the standard deviation of demand is 28.1 batteries and Spark Industries wants to be in stock at least 95% of the time. What is the appropriate restocking level? If there are currently 115 batteries on hand when the order is placed for July, how many batteries should be ordered? Problem 2: Economic Order Quantity A chemical plant orders Chemical X that is used at the rate of 800 barrels per year. Each order that is placed with the supplier costs $45 to process and the annual cost to hold inventory is $80 per barrel. Delivery lead time of the barrels has averaged 6 days and the plant manager has set a safety stock level of 16 barrels. What is the economic order quantity? What is the total holding cost for the year? What is the total ordering cost for the year? How many orders will be placed each year? The next order should be placed when inventory drops to what amount? (assume 365 days in one year for converting annual demand to daily demand) Problem 3: Quantity Discounts A bookstore orders pennants out of a catalog from a supplier. The demand for these pennants is 12,000 per year. There is a $25 charge for placing an order and a $10 cost per pennant to hold it in inventory for the year. What is the economic order quantity? For part b) assume prices for the pennants are based on the quantity purchased, so if less than 100 are ordered, the unit price is $2.50, if 100 to 299 are ordered, the unit price is $2.40, if 300 to 499 are ordered, the unit price is $2.30, and if 500 or more are ordered, the unit price is $2.20. What order…

Attachments:

homework 494716

Homework Discussion: 1 Time-Driven Activity-Based Costing (ABC) Respond to the following: -Analyze the benefits and weaknesses of traditional ABC in determining accurate overhead costs over a time-driven ABC system. -Evaluate how a business can achieve a competitive advantage in the marketplace through the use of ABC and how you would convince senior management that a system should be implemented.

Document Preview:

Homework Discussion: 1 Time-Driven Activity-Based Costing (ABC) Respond to the following: -Analyze the benefits and weaknesses of traditional ABC in determining accurate overhead costs over a time-driven ABC system. -Evaluate how a business can achieve a competitive advantage in the marketplace through the use of ABC and how you would convince senior management that a system should be implemented. [250 words][1-2 References] Discussion: 2 Performance-focused ABC Respond to the following: -From the e-Activity, identify a local medium-sized service business in your community. -Evaluate how you would implement a performance-focused ABC system in the company as described in the e-Activity. -Evaluate the reasons for the selection of the cost drivers in the discussion above and the potential impact the cost drivers will have on accurately reflecting costs and overall performance of the business. [250 words] [1-2 References]??????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

homework 494717

Homework Cost-Volume Profit Analysis Respond to the following: -When conducting a cost-volume profit analysis, determine where the most challenges for accountants occur. Recommend action to overcome the challenge(s). -Create a brief scenario in which an accountant would be asked to conduct a cost-volume profit analysis and provide a supporting rationale.

Document Preview:

Homework Cost-Volume Profit Analysis Respond to the following: -When conducting a cost-volume profit analysis, determine where the most challenges for accountants occur. Recommend action to overcome the challenge(s). -Create a brief scenario in which an accountant would be asked to conduct a cost-volume profit analysis and provide a supporting rationale. [250 words] [1-2 references] The Cost of Complexity Respond to the following: -In a globalized economy with many business complexities, assess how a business may be impacted by these complexities and how consequences can be minimized. -From the previous discussion, recommend how an accountant could measure the types of complexity you identified for a specific business or industry and how the measure will provide insight to business performance. [250 words] [1-2 references]??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

homework 494718

Analyst Report – 125 points (This assignment is to be completed individually) Part 1: Executive Summary – 10 points GOAL: For this section of the assignment you will have to succinctly summarize important information included in the annual report to provide the reader with a quick overview of the contents. Look at key findings from your report including financial information as well as industry information.

Document Preview:

Analyst Report – 125 points (This assignment is to be completed individually) Part 1: Executive Summary – 10 points GOAL: For this section of the assignment you will have to succinctly summarize important information included in the annual report to provide the reader with a quick overview of the contents. Look at key findings from your report including financial information as well as industry information. Things that can be included – (these are just ideas include others if relevant): current financial information depicting health of organization, new products or markets, future growth opportunities. It is worth noting that an executive summary in business usually does not exceed one page, be clear and concise. Part 2: Company Profile – 10 points GOAL: For this section of the assignment you will have to locate pertinent company information contained in the annual report or on financial websites (example is finance.yahoo.com). Bullet pointing this information is appropriate for your report. You will have to identify the following items that are specific to your company: *Ticker symbol *Mission Statement as it is printed in the Annual Report *Corporate headquarters location *Date of Incorporation *Public Auditor *Name of CEO *Name of CFO *Stock classifications (common, preferred, both?) *Exchange (e.g.: NYSE, Nasdaq) *Dividends (have they been issued and for how much) Part 3: Industry Profile – 30 points GOAL: For this section of the assignment you will have to locate pertinent company information contained on financial websites (ONE example is finance.yahoo.com). Identify the market sector to which your company belongs. Describe what a market sector is and list three industry leaders and three industry laggards in the sector Identify and define the industry to which your company belongs. Research and describe what specific characteristics must a company have to be in that industry Attach your company’s…

Attachments:

to homework help1234 494721

University of Maryland University College Final Examination Acct220: Principles of Accounting I For this exam, omit all general journal entry explanations. Question 1: Suggested time 20 minutes: 15% points: The account balances appearing on the trial balance (below) were taken from the general ledger of Flip’s Copy Shop at June 30, 2012. Additional information for the month of June which has not yet been recorded in the accounts is as follows: (a) A physical count of supplies indicates $300 on hand at June 30.

Document Preview:

University of Maryland University College Final Examination Acct220: Principles of Accounting I For this exam, omit all general journal entry explanations. Question 1: Suggested time 20 minutes: 15% points: The account balances appearing on the trial balance (below) were taken from the general ledger of Flip’s Copy Shop at June 30, 2012. Additional information for the month of June which has not yet been recorded in the accounts is as follows: (a) A physical count of supplies indicates $300 on hand at June 30. (b) The amount of insurance that expired in the month of June was $200. (c) Depreciation on equipment for June was $400. (d) Rent owed on the copy shop for the month of June was $600 but will not be paid until July. Flip’s Copy Shop Trial Balance For the Month Ended June 30, 2012??Account Titles?Debit?Credit??Cash?$1,000???Supplies?1,100???Prepaid Insurance?2,200???Equipment?24,000???Accum. Depreciation— Equipment??$4,500??Accounts Payable??2,400??Notes Payable??4,000??Flip’s Capital??15,300??Flip’s Drawings?2,400???Service Revenue??4,900??Utilities Expense? 400? ??Totals?$31,100?$31,100??Instructions: Prepare in journal form, without explanations, the end of month adjusting entries & closing entries for Flip’s Copy Shop for the month of June. Acct220a Page 1 of 9 Question 2: Suggested time 15 minutes: 15% points: The following items were taken from the post adjusted trial balance of Flip Company. (All balances are normal.) Mortgage payable $ 1,443 Accumulated depreciation 3,655 Prepaid expenses 880 Accounts payable 1,444 Equipment 11,000 Notes payable after 2015 1,200 Long-term investments 1,100 Flip’s capital 13,480 Short-term investments 3,690 Accounts receivable 1,696 Notes payable in 2014 1,000 Inventories 1,756 Cash 2,100 Instructions: Prepare a classified balance sheet in good form as of December 31, 2013. Question 3: Suggested time 15 minutes: 15% points: The following information is available for Flip…

Attachments:

homework questions for acct505 494723

I need help with 2 homework questions. I have attached the details.

Document Preview:

Here are the 2 homework questions. The second one should be a strong paragraph with a cited reference. EXERCISE 3–10 Applying Overhead; Computing Unit Product Cost [LO2, LO3] A company assigns overhead cost to completed jobs on the basis of 120% of direct labor cost. The job cost sheet for Job 413 shows that $12,000 in direct materials has been used on the job and that $8,000 in direct labor cost has been incurred. A total of 200 units were produced in Job 413. Required: What is the total manufacturing cost assigned to Job 413? What is the unit product cost for Job 413? (check figure unit production cost 148) Why do companies use a predetermined overhead rate rather than actual overhead costs to apply overhead to jobs???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

how much will it cost to get the project done 494728

Week 3

Assignment:The Group Project assignment is to answer questions 1, 2, and 4 from the Case Requirements section located on page 8 of your article.

Excel Spreadsheet:The spreadsheet will provide a complete operating budget of the revenues and expenses for Extended Family, Inc. Be sure to complete all three existing programs listed in the spreadsheet.

Paper: The paper will provide an analysis of the Extended Family, Inc., case study and will identify proposed consolidated operating budget based off your output from the Excel Spreadsheet. In addition, the paper will include a brief budget summary to the Board of Directors assessing specific moments and documentation regarding the effects the agency expansion and the programmatic concerns have on the proposed budget. Be sure to include an introduction and a conclusion in your paper, and follow APA format.

hsm 260 week 2 checkpoint 494729

Answer the following questions in 200 to 300 words:

Nonprofit organizations are required to produce financial statements based on the accrual method of accounting. How is this different from the cash basis of accounting? Why is accrual accounting important?

In an accrual system, does revenue equal cash?

What is the importance of the statement of cash flow in the financial management of an organization?

Attachments:

hw 494731

Two articles about relevant, current chapter 19 content: FOR EACH ANSWER THE FOLLOWING QUESTIONS IN PARAGRAPH FORM. One paragraph is plenty, just be sure to relate the answers back to what we discussed from chapter 19. Billionaire investor Icahn wants a larger Apple buyback of stock http://www.philly.com/philly/business/20131025_Billionaire_investor_Icahn_wants_a_larger_Apple_buyback_of_stock.htmlhttp://www.philly.com/philly/business/20131025_Billionaire_investor_Icahn_wants_a_larger_Apple_buyback_of_stock.html#77Co0FutcDItlRUH.

Document Preview:

Two articles about relevant, current chapter 19 content: FOR EACH ANSWER THE FOLLOWING QUESTIONS IN PARAGRAPH FORM. One paragraph is plenty, just be sure to relate the answers back to what we discussed from chapter 19. Billionaire investor Icahn wants a larger Apple buyback of stock http://www.philly.com/philly/business/20131025_Billionaire_investor_Icahn_wants_a_larger_Apple_buyback_of_stock.htmlhttp://www.philly.com/philly/business/20131025_Billionaire_investor_Icahn_wants_a_larger_Apple_buyback_of_stock.html#77Co0FutcDItlRUH.03 APPLE: What benefit would Apple gain from buying back shares of their stock? What detriment is it for Apple to buy back shares of stock? What would happen to the share price if Apple buys back some of its stock? Do you think Apple should listen to what Carl Icahn says? And Twitter seeks up to $1.4 billion in IPO http://www.philly.com/philly/business/technology/20131025_Twitter_seeks_up_to__1_4_billion_in_IPO.htmlhttp://www.philly.com/philly/business/technology/20131025_Twitter_seeks_up_to__1_4_billion_in_IPO.html#lg6zkiSFajJk6jmG.03 TWITTER: Name two advantages for Twitter going IPO in November Name two disadvantages for Twitter going IPO in November WHY is Twitter going IPO in the first place? What is another solution for Twitter to get some cash???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

hw 494732

that only foraccountsexpert

Document Preview:

Two articles about relevant, current chapter 19 content: FOR EACH ANSWER THE FOLLOWING QUESTIONS IN PARAGRAPH FORM. One paragraph is plenty, just be sure to relate the answers back to what we discussed from chapter 19. Billionaire investor Icahn wants a larger Apple buyback of stock http://www.philly.com/philly/business/20131025_Billionaire_investor_Icahn_wants_a_larger_Apple_buyback_of_stock.htmlhttp://www.philly.com/philly/business/20131025_Billionaire_investor_Icahn_wants_a_larger_Apple_buyback_of_stock.html#77Co0FutcDItlRUH.03 APPLE: What benefit would Apple gain from buying back shares of their stock? What detriment is it for Apple to buy back shares of stock? What would happen to the share price if Apple buys back some of its stock? Do you think Apple should listen to what Carl Icahn says? And Twitter seeks up to $1.4 billion in IPO http://www.philly.com/philly/business/technology/20131025_Twitter_seeks_up_to__1_4_billion_in_IPO.htmlhttp://www.philly.com/philly/business/technology/20131025_Twitter_seeks_up_to__1_4_billion_in_IPO.html#lg6zkiSFajJk6jmG.03 TWITTER: Name two advantages for Twitter going IPO in November Name two disadvantages for Twitter going IPO in November WHY is Twitter going IPO in the first place? What is another solution for Twitter to get some cash???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

hypothetical business plan for my business capstone 494733

Need a hyppthetical business plan for my business capstone, I would like for it to be based on a resturant named Ali Baba Cafe. I am including instructions and some of the work that I started on it.

Document Preview:

Mission statement To provide our customer in the city of Plainfield and surrounding areas a opportunity to sit down or take out from our delicious authentic Mediterranean meal served in a relaxed and friendly atmosphere at Ali Baba’s Cafe. Company Background. Provide a description of the Company history if any: Ali Baba’s Grill is a new business venture. The need for a neighborhood restaurant that serves authentic Mediterranean meal was identified in this location and after further research a decision was made to purse this venture. Describe the goals and objectives of the Company In the next 12 months the company intends to open for business and to implement a targeted advertising campaign. The company anticipates 10 percent annual sales growth and at the end of five years the company anticipates gross sales of 100,000 annually. Describe the ownership structure of the Company: Ali Baba Cafe is owned by XX XX as a sole proprietorship. This business model was selected for tax reason and because of limited risk of liability. For the foreseeable future the company will remain a sole proprietorship. Describe the Company management structure: Ali Baba Cafe is managed by XX XX who is also the sole owner. Describe the experience & training of each of the Company owners & principals: XX XX is the founding owner of Ali Baba’s Cafe. Helena will use her stay in the West Bank and family-in-law background and with cooking experiences in the preparation of the popular Gyro,Chicken and Beef Shawarma sandwiches. She has also completed a Bachelor in Business Management. Describe the organizational time line: A remodeling plan for a previous sandwich grill chosen location will be complete by January 1. Funds need to be in place before this time to begin remodeling. All remodeling will be completed by March 1. Ali Baba’s Cafe will open for business on March 15. Describe the Company Assets: Ali Baba’s Cafe has purchased furnishing equipment and store fixtures with a…

i have 7 accounting problems i need answer to please 494734

Problem1

E8-4

At the end of 2011, Delong Co. has accounts receivable of $700,000 and an allowance

for doubtful accounts of $54,000. On January 24, 2012, the company learns that its receivable

from Ristau Inc. is not collectible, and management authorizes a write-off of $5,400.

(a)Prepare the journal entry to record the write-off.

(b)What is the cash realizable value of the accounts receivable (1) before the write-off and

(2) after the write-off?

Problem2

E9-4

Chris Rock has prepared the following list of statements about depreciation.

1.Depreciation is a process of asset valuation, not cost allocation.

2.Depreciation provides for the proper matching of expenses with revenues.

3.The book value of a plant asset should approximate its market value.

4.Depreciation applies to three classes of plant assets: land, buildings, and equipment.

5.Depreciation does not apply to a building because its usefulness and revenue-producing

ability generally remain intact over time.

6.The revenue-producing ability of a depreciable asset will decline due to wear and tear and to

obsolescence.

7.Recognizing depreciation on an asset results in an accumulation of cash for replacement of

the asset.

8.The balance in accumulated depreciation represents the total cost that has been charged to

expense.

9.Depreciation expense and accumulated depreciation are reported on the income statement.

10.Four factors affect the computation of depreciation: cost, useful life, salvage value, and residual

value.

Instructions

Identify each statement on page 430 as true or false. If false, indicate how to correct the statement.

Problem3

E10-4

Guyer Company publishes a monthly sports magazine,Fishing Preview. Subscriptions

to the magazine cost $20 per year. During November 2011, Guyer sells 12,000 subscriptions

beginning with the December issue. Guyer prepares financial statements quarterly and recognizes

subscription revenue earned at the end of the quarter. The company uses the accounts

Unearned Subscriptions and Subscription Revenue.

Instructions

(a)Prepare the entry in November for the receipt of the subscriptions.

(b)Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2011, to record subscription revenue earned in

December 2011.

(c)Prepare the adjusting entry at March 31, 2012, to record subscription revenue earned in the

first quarter of 2012.

Problem4

E11-4

Grossman Corporation issued 1,000 shares of stock.

Instructions

Prepare the entry for the issuance under the following assumptions.

(a)The stock had a par value of $5 per share and was issued for a total of $52,000.

(b)The stock had a stated value of $5 per share and was issued for a total of $52,000.

(c)The stock had no par or stated value and was issued for a total of $52,000.

(d)The stock had a par value of $5 per share and was issued to attorneys for services during

incorporation valued at $52,000.

(e)The stock had a par value of $5 per share and was issued for land worth $52,000.

Problem5

E12-4

Dossett Company had the following transactions pertaining to stock investments.

Feb. 1 Purchased 600 shares of Goetz common stock (2%) for $6,000 cash, plus brokerage

fees of $200.

July 1 Received cash dividends of $1 per share on Goetz common stock.

Sept. 1 Sold 300 shares of Goetz common stock for $4,400, less brokerage fees of $100.

Dec. 1 Received cash dividends of $1 per share on Goetz common stock.

Instructions

(a)Journalize the transactions.

(b)Explain how dividend revenue and the gain (loss) on sale should be reported in the income

statement.

Problem6

E13-4

Villa Company reported net income of $195,000 for 2011.Villa also reported depreciation

expense of $45,000 and a loss of $5,000 on the sale of equipment.The comparative balance

sheet shows a decrease in accounts receivable of $15,000 for the year, a $17,000 increase in

accounts payable, and a $4,000 decrease in prepaid expenses.

Instructions

Prepare the operating activities section of the statement of cash flows for 2011. Use the indirect

method.

Problem 7

E14-4

The comparative condensed income statements of Hendi Corporation are shown below.

HENDI CORPORATION

Comparative Condensed Income Statements

For the Years Ended December 31

2012 2011

Net sales $600,000 $500,000

Cost of goods sold 483,000 420,000

Gross profit 117,000 80,000

Operating expenses 57,200 44,000

Net income $ 59,800 $ 36,000

Instructions

(a)Prepare a horizontal analysis of the income statement data for Hendi Corporation using

2011 as a base.

(b)Prepare a vertical analysis of the income statement data for Hendi Corporation in columnar

form for both years.

Attachments:

i have completed this assignment when you do the work can you do the steps too id li 494736

there are 8 questions

Document Preview:

WIT Financial Accounting Test Chapters 5 and 6 1. From the adjusted trial balance for Worker Products Company given below, prepare a multiple-step income statement in good form.??   Worker Products Company Adjusted Trial Balance December 31???Debit?Credit??Cash?$ 9,400???Accounts receivable?25,000???Merchandise inventory?36,000???Office supplies?900???Store equipment?75,000???Accumulated depreciation – store equipment??$ 22,000??Office equipment?60,000???Accumulated depreciation -office equipment??15,000??Accounts payable??42,000??Notes payable??10,000??F. Worker, Capital??110,700??F. Worker, Withdrawals?48,000???Sales??325,000??Sales discounts?6,000???Sales returns and allowances?16,500???Cost of goods sold?195,000???Sales salaries expense?32,500???Depreciation expense – store equipment?11,000???Depreciation expense – office equipment?7,500???Office supplies expense?1,300???Interest expense?600???Totals ?$524,700?$524,700?????? 2. From the adjusted trial balance for Worker Products Company given below, prepare the necessary closing entries. ?  Worker Products Company Adjusted Trial Balance December 31???Debit?Credit??Cash?$ 9,400???Accounts receivable?25,000???Merchandise inventory?36,000???Office supplies?900???Store equipment?75,000???Accumulated depreciation – store equipment??$ 22,000??Office equipment?60,000???Accumulated depreciation -office equipment??15,000??Accounts payable??42,000??Notes payable??10,000??F. Worker, Capital??110,700??F. Worker, Withdrawals?48,000???Sales??325,000??Sales discounts?6,000???Sales returns and allowances?16,500???Cost of goods sold?195,000???Sales salaries expense?32,500???Depreciation expense – store equipment?11,000???Depreciation expense – office equipment?7,500???Office supplies expense?1,300???Interest expense?600???Totals ?$524,700?$524,700??????  ???????????????????????????????????This document was truncated here because it was created in the Evaluation Mode.

Attachments:

i need my whole accounting assignment done 494741

Document Preview:

MAA103 & MAAP103 -Accounting for Decision Making ASSIGNMENT – TRIMESTER ONE, 2013 (Relates to Topic 4) Represents 20% of the assessment for this unit DUE DATE: ASSIGNMENT PLANNER VIA MIBT PORTAL AND HARDCOPY: TUESDAY 9 April, 2013 BY 5.00pm FINAL ASSIGNMENT VIA MIBT PORTAL AND HARDCOPY: TUESDAY 7 May, 2013 BY 5.00pm NOTE the following general submission points: 1. Assignment MUST be completed in groups of no more than THREE students. Students CAN NOT complete assignment with students from other lecturers classes. 2. All students MUST submit an electronic copy of the assignment planner and the final assignment through MOODLE (using the ‘Assignment Submission Link’) on the MIBT PORTAL. All group members’ names must be clearly stated on the cover page of the assignment for all electronic and hard copy lodgments. Please refer to instructions file uploaded on the portal (under ‘MOODLE’ – ‘Week 1’) on how to submit MAA103/MAAP103 assignment planner and final assignment electronically through MOODLE. Online submission should be in one file. That is, all parts of the assignment must be combined into one word processing file. Save and name file as your student MIBT ID. NUMBER. MAA103 – Accounting for Decision Making Trimester 1, 2013 Page 2 NOTE the following general submission points continued: 3. Only ONE HARDCOPY of assignment planner and final assignment per group is to be submitted. You MUST include an ASSIGNMENT COVER SHEET only for your hard copy version of your final assignment with all names included. Each student must submit a separate Assignment Cover Sheet with the HARDCOPY of their final assignment. If an assignment cover sheet is not attached NO MARKS will be given. Additionally, ONE copy of the Assignment Mark Sheet (attached on page 9 of this assignment) must also be submitted with your assignment. Do NOT submit assignment in a plastic folder or plastic pocket. 4. This assignment consists of TWO components -an assignment planner AND final assignment: both…

Attachments:

identifying financial statement relations 494742

Required

Determine the amount of each of the following items.

a.Dividends declared and paid during Year 1

b.Depreciation expense for Year 1 assuming that Watson Corporation neither sold nor retired depreciable assets during Year 1

c.Inventories at the end of Year 2

d.Interest expense on borrowing during Year 2, with an interest rate of 7 percent

e.Other current liabilities at the end of Year 2

f.Property, plant, and equipment at the end of Year 3 assuming that Watson Corporation neither sold nor retired depreciable assets during Year 3

g.Retained earnings at the end of Year 3

h.Long-term debt at the end of Year 3

i.The income tax rate for Year 4

j.Purchases of inventories during Year 4

Document Preview:

10.15 IDENTIFYING FINANCIAL STATEMENT RELATIONS. Partial forecasts of financial statements for Watson Corporation appear in Exhibit 10.8 (income statement), Exhibit 10.9 (balance sheet), and Exhibit 10.10 (statement of cash flows). Selected amounts have been omitted, as have all totals (indicated by XXXX). Required Determine the amount of each of the following items. a. Dividends declared and paid during Year 1 b. Depreciation expense for Year 1 assuming that Watson Corporation neither sold nor retired depreciable assets during Year 1 c. Inventories at the end of Year 2 d. Interest expense on borrowing during Year 2, with an interest rate of 7 percent e. Other current liabilities at the end of Year 2 f. Property, plant, and equipment at the end of Year 3 assuming that Watson Corporation neither sold nor retired depreciable assets during Year 3 g. Retained earnings at the end of Year 3 h. Long-term debt at the end of Year 3 i. The income tax rate for Year 4 j. Purchases of inventories during Year 4

Attachments:

income statements and balance sheet ratios 494744

Using the 2007 & 2008 Income Statement and Balance Sheet provided, calculate the following

Liquidity ratios
Current ratio
Acid-test, or quick, ratio
Receivables turnover
Inventory turnover

Profitability ratios
Asset turnover
Profit margin
Return on assets
Return on common stockholders equity

Solvency ratios
Debt to total assets
Times interest earned

Please be sure to also do the following

1. Show your calculations for each ratio
2. Create a horizontal and vertical analysis for the balance sheet and the income statement
3. Write a 350- to 700-word memo to the CEO of your selected organization (Berry s Bug Busters) in which you discuss your findings from your ratio calculations and your horizontal and vertical analysis. In your memo, address the following questions:

a) What do the liquidity, profitability, and solvency ratios reveal about the financial position of the company?
b) Which users may be interested in each type of ratio?
c) What does the collected data reveal about the performance and position of the company

Document Preview:

Income Statement 2008 & 2007 1/1/2008-12/31/2008 Revenue $3,249,580.53 Direct Expenses Salaries & Wages $487,437.08 Vehicle Maintenance $64,991.61 Fuel $20,449.80 Traps & Chemicals $1,378,203.63 $1,951,082.12 Indirect Expenses Rent $39,338.17 Licenses $2,480.00 Insurance $103,613.43 Administrative Salaries $150,250.00 Commissions $16,991.61 Payroll Taxes $72,014.66 Legal Expenses $12,000.00 Accounting Fees $7,000.00 Office Supplies $7,800.00 Utilities $10,806.40 Advertising Expenses $116,000.00 Bad Debts $122,138.64 Depreciation Expense $94,925.75 Misc. Expense $50,000.00 $805,358.66 Total Expenses $2,756,440.78 Net Income $493,139.75 1/1/2007-12/31/2007 Revenue $3,893,027.78 Direct Expenses Salaries& Wages $583,954.17 Traps & Chemicals $1,651,100.81 Fuel $19,177.32 Vehicle Maintenance $77,860.56 $2,332,092.85 Indirect Expenses Rent $38,192.40 Licenses $2,480.00 Interest Expense $0.00 Insurance $103,613.43 Admin. Salaries $133,500.00 Commissions $52,860.49 Payroll Taxes $84,734.61 Legal Expenses $12,000.00 Accounting Fees $7,000.00 Office Supplies $7,800.00 Utilities $9,824.00 Advertising Expenses $81,510.00 Bad Debts $103,493.45 Depreciation Expense $94,925.75 Misc. Expenses $60,000.00 $791,934.13 $3,124,026.98 Net Income $769,000.80 Balance Sheet 2008 & 2007 12/31/2008 Current Assets Cash $818,440.68 Accounts Receivable $812,395.13 Inventory $205,934.30 Total Current Assets $1,836,770.12 Fixed Assets Vehicles $268,750.00 Tools $110,953.00 Less Accumulated Depreciation ($284,431.95) Total Fixed Assets $95,271.05 Total Assets $1,932,041.17 Liabilities Current Liabilities Accrued Payroll Taxes $36,007.33 Accounts Payable $270,798.38 Total Current Liabilities…

Attachments:

intermediate accounting 494746

I have a quiz that is due in about 12 hours. Before offering me a handshake, please review the attachment and be sure that it is something that you know how to do.

Document Preview:

The following information pertains to Mountain High Campers. reported accounts receivable and allowance for uncollectible accounts balances of 486,000 and 220 (cr) respectively, at Dec. 31, 2012. During 2013, Mountain High’s credit sales and collections were 415,000 and 519,000 respectively, and 3,200 in bad accounts were written off. or use T accounts to support your answer). is_________. December 31, 2012, of 120 (dr). estimates bad debts to be 3000. Using the relevant data from Part A, answer the same 4 questions. High had used the direct write-off method of accounting for uncollectible accounts. A. Mountain High Campers estimates bad debt expense at 3/5% of credit sales. The company 1. Prepare the adjusting entry to record bad debt expense for 2013 (show supporting calculations 2 . Mountain High’s accounts receivable at December 31, 2013, are________________. 3. Mountain High’s adjusted allowance for uncollectible accounts at December 31, 2013, 4. How would the amount in A1 differ if the allowance account had an ending balance on C. Prepare a summary journal entry (all bad accounts written off in a single entry) if Mountain B. Mountain High estimates bad debts on an analysis of receivables. An aging schedule I only need calculations where it asks for it, on the others, only the answer is required. ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

have a prb with accounting 494690

I need help with one problem on acounting it keeps coming back wrong not sure what I am doing wrong can someone help please this is due now

Frog Minnow Worm Total %
Sales $ 200,000 $ 280,000 $ 240,000 $ 720,000 100.00%
Variable Cost 120,000 160,000 150,000 430,000 59.72%
Contribution Margin $ 80,000 $ 120,000 $ 90,000 $ 290,000 40.2778%
Fixed Cost 282,000
Net Operating Margin $ 8,000
1 Fixed Cost $ 282,000
/ Contribution Margin Ratio 40.2778%
Breakeven (Dollars) $ 700,138

Attachments:

have a second homework assignment required in very short order 494691

Have a 20 question accounting homework assignment that requires submittal by mid-week.

Document Preview:

1. Draw a diagram of the first three steps in the accounting cycle. Then, explain to me the meaning of the three steps, and why they are important? 2. Selected accounts from the general ledger of the Express Lawnmower Service follow. Analyze the following transactions and indicate by number what accounts should be debited and credited for each transaction. Cash Accounts Receivable Supplies 131 Equipment 202 Accounts Payable Thomas Jefferson, Capital 401 Fees Income 511 Rent Expense 514 Salaries Expense Utilities Expense Transactions: 1. Issued a check for $1,700 to pay the monthly rent. 2. Purchased supplies for $1,000 on credit. 3. Collected $4,800 from credit customers. 4. Collected services for $3,900 in cash. 5. Performed services for $3,900 in cash. 6. Issued a check for $1,500 to pay a creditor on account. 7. Purchased new equipment for $2,150 and paid for it immediately by check. 8. Provided services for $5,600 on credit. 9. Sent a check for $600 to the utility company to pay the monthly bill. 10. Gave a cash refund of $180 to a customer because of a lost package (customer had previously paid in cash.) Attach additional paper if necessary to the examination for completion of problem. 3. Tell me why it is important to record transactions in the general ledger, and to prepare compound journal entries? 4. Tell me why it is important to post journal entries to general ledger accounts, and to correct errors made in the journal or ledger? 5. What are three situations you might encounter in which you need to “follow” the audit trail? 6. Tell me why it is important to complete a trail balance on a worksheet, and why it is important to prepare adjustments for unrecorded business transactions? Tell me why if you skip the adjustment process, how will this affect the financial statements? 8. Determine the necessary end-of-June adjustments for Black and…

Attachments:

help 494695

Part 1 100-200 words Please respond to this Discussion question using the information from the personal budget you calculate using the http://threadcontent.next.ecollege.com/CurrentCourse/expense_dq.

Document Preview:

Part 1 100-200 words Please respond to this Discussion question using the information from the personal budget you calculate using the http://threadcontent.next.ecollege.com/CurrentCourse/expense_dq.xlsxcriteria providedQuestions: What surprised you, if anything, in the budget(s) that you prepared? What changes, if any, would you make in the personal activities that are under your control, based on the budget(s) that you prepared? Do you think it is more important for a business to have a budget than it is for an individual to have a budget? Why or why not? Monthly Income: Income total (monthly) from all household members: Any Interest that can defray monthly expenses: Monthly loan/grant living expenses: Pension Income (if pertinent): All other sources of monthly income: Total Monthly Income 0 Monthly Fixed Expenses: Housing: Food: Transportation: (Car payments, car insurance, gas, average monthly maintenance) Education: Childcare/Daycare: Medical expenses: Additional: Total fixed expenses: 0 Monthly Extra Expenses: Entertainment: (average) Movies, events, etc. Vacations: Credit Cards: Childcare: Total monthly extra expenses: 0 Money Remaining 0 Part 2 Performance Evaluation Using Variances from Standard Costs Performance Evaluation Using Variances from Standard Costs Students’ scores on exams may be equated to financial measures used to evaluate employee performance in a business. Should college professors limit their evaluation of students to these “financial” measures? Do you see any potential benefits or disadvantages of including other measures of student performance in assigning course grades? (SITE References) ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

help for accounting 494696

There a excel sheet attached it’s about accouting….It’s needs to be done

You will know when you open the excel sheet

Document Preview:

10 0 30 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 32000 36000 0 10000 0 5000 0 12000 0 25000 0 500 0 250 10000 0 8000 0 4000 0 26000 0 2500 0 1200 0 7500 0 6000 0 7500 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14000 2.29 0 0.12 0 2.29 0 3000 0 3500 0.5 1000 0 400 0 7.0000000000000007E-2 500 0 0 5.2700000000000005 8400 7.77 0 0 0 67575 31800 15900 115275 27030 12720 6360 46110 13515 6360 3180 23055 27030 12720 6360 46110 5000 5000 5000 15000 5700 2850 2850 11400 5000 2500 2500 10000 11330 2370 -3990 9710 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2.29 4.58 2.25 9 0.56999999999999995 5.1100000000000003 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.01 0.01 0.01 1 1 1 60 15 0.99009900990099009 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 6.0000000000000005E-2 7.0000000000000007E-2 0.08 0.09 9.9999999999999992E-2 0.10999999999999999 0.11999999999999998 0.12999999999999998 0.13999999999999999 0.15 1 0.99009900990099009 0.98039215686274506 0.970873786407767 0.96153846153846145 0.95238095238095233 0.94339622641509424 0.93457943925233644 0.92592592592592582 0.9174311926605504 0.90909090909090906 0.90090090090090102 0.8928571428571429 0.88495575221238942 0.87719298245614041 0.86956521739130443 2 0.98029604940692083 0.96116878123798544 0.94259590913375435 0.92455621301775137 0.90702947845804982 0.88999644001423983 0.87343872827321156 0.85733882030178321 0.84167999326655996 0.82644628099173545 0.81162243324405503 0.79719387755102056 0.78314668337379612 0.76946752847029865 0.7561436672967865 3 0.97059014792764453 0.94232233454704462 0.91514165935315961 0.88899635867091487 0.86383759853147601 0.8396192830323016 0.81629787689085187 0.79383224102016958 0.77218348006106419 0.75131480090157754 0.73119138130095052 0.71178024…

Attachments:

help with accounting case study 494697

I need help with this excel template case study. I keep getting different answers from everybody using older version of the case study. I need this asap, or at least by today. I have attached my recent answer and the case study details.

Document Preview:

ACCT504 Case Study 3 on Cash Budgeting The cash budget was covered during Week 4 when we covered TCO D and you read Chapter 7. There is also a practice case study to work on. Your professor will provide the solution to the practice case study at the end of Week 5. This case study should be uploaded by 11:59 p.m. mountain time on Sunday at the end of Week 6 to the Week 6 Assignment Dropbox. You are encouraged to use the Excel template file provided in Doc Sharing. The LBJ Company has budgeted sales revenues as follows. April May June Credit sales $94,000 $89,500 $75,000 Cash sales 48,000 75,000 57,000 Total sales $142,000 $164,500 $132,000 Past experience indicates that 30% of the credit sales will be collected in the month of sale and the remaining 70% will be collected in the following month. Purchases of inventory are all on credit and 40% is paid in the month of purchase and 60% in the month following purchase. Budgeted inventory purchases are $195,000 in April, $135,000 in May, and $63,000 in June. Other budgeted cash receipts: (a) sale of plant assets for $33,000 in May, and (b) sale of new common stock for $50,000 in June. Other budgeted cash disbursements: (a) operating expenses of $15,000 each month, (b) selling and administrative expenses of $10,150 each month, (c) purchase of equipment for $35,000 cash in May, and (d) dividends of $20,000 will be paid in June. The company has a cash balance of $20,000 at the beginning of May and wishes to maintain a minimum cash balance of $20,000 at the end of each month. An open line of credit is available at the bank and carries an annual interest rate of 10%. Assume that all borrowing is done on the first day of the month in which financing is needed and that all repayments are made on the last day of the month in which excess cash is available. Also assume that there is no outstanding financing as of May 1. Requirements: 1. Use this information to prepare a cash budget for the months of May and…

help in accounting math 494698

need this assignment in microsoft excel spreadsheet please see attachment. I will also need a 1050 paper

Document Preview:

University of Phoenix Material Capital Budgeting Case Your company is thinking about acquiring another corporation. You have two choices—the cost of each choice is $250,000. You cannot spend more than that, so acquiring both corporations is not an option. The following are your critical data: Corporation A Revenues = $100,000 in year one, increasing by 10% each year Expenses = $20,000 in year one, increasing by 15% each year Depreciation expense = $5,000 each year Tax rate = 25% Discount rate = 10% Corporation B Revenues = $150,000 in year one, increasing by 8% each year Expenses = $60,000 in year one, increasing by 10% each year Depreciation expense = $10,000 each year Tax rate = 25% Discount rate = 11% Compute and analyze items (a) through (d) using a Microsoft® Excel® spreadsheet. Make sure all calculations can be seen in the background of the applicable spreadsheet cells. In other words, leave an audit trail so others can see how you arrived at your calculations and analysis. Items (a) through (d) should be submitted in Microsoft® Excel®; indicate your recommendation (e) in the Microsoft® Excel® spreadsheet; the paper stated in item (f) should be submitted consistent with APA guidelines. A 5-year projected income statement A 5-year projected cash flow Net present value (NPV) Internal rate of return (IRR) Based on items (a) through (d), which company would you recommend acquiring? Write a paper of no more 1,050 words that defines, analyzes, and interprets the answers to items (c) and (d). Present the rationale behind each item and why it supports your decision stated in item (e). Also, attempt to describe the relationship between NPV and IRR. (Hint. The key factor is the discount rate used.) In addition to the paper, a Micosoft® Excel® spreadsheet showing your projections and calculations must be shown and attached. Capital Budgeting Case QRB/501 Version 4 1 Copyright © 2013, 2011,…

Attachments:

help asap 494699

Marathon Inc. (a C corporation) reported $1,000,000 of taxable income in the current year. During the year, it distributed $100,000 as dividends to its shareholders as follows:

$5,000 to Guy, a 5 percent individual shareholder.
$15,000 to Little Rock Corp. a 15 percent shareholder (C corporation).
$80,000 to other shareholders.

1. award:

10 out of

10.00 points

a.

How much of the dividend payment did Marathon deduct in determining its taxable income (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Amount deductible $ 0
b.

Assuming Guy s marginal ordinary tax rate is 35 percent, how much tax will he pay on the $5,000 dividend he received from Marathon Inc. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Amount deductible $ 750
c.

Assuming Little Rock Corp. s marginal tax rate is 34 percent, what amount of tax will it pay on the $15,000 dividend it received from Marathon Inc. (70 percent dividends received deduction) (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Amount deductible $ 1,530

Document Preview:

Form 1120 (2011) Page 2 Schedule C (a) Dividends (c) Special deductions Dividends and Special Deductions (see instructions) (b) % received (a) × (b) 1 Dividends from less-than-20%-owned domestic corporations (other than debt-financed stock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Dividends from 20%-or-more-owned domestic corporations (other than debt-financed stock) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Dividends on debt-financed stock of domestic and foreign corporations . . . . . 4 Dividends on certain preferred stock of less-than-20%-owned public utilities . . . 5 Dividends on certain preferred stock of 20%-or-more-owned public utilities . . . . 6 Dividends from less-than-20%-owned foreign corporations and certain FSCs . . . 7 Dividends from 20%-or-more-owned foreign corporations and certain FSCs . . . 8 Dividends from wholly owned foreign subsidiaries . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Total. Add lines 1 through 8. See instructions for limitation . . . . . . . . 10 Dividends from domestic corporations received by a small business investment company operating under the Small Business Investment Act of 1958 . . . . . 11 Dividends from affiliated group members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Dividends from certain FSCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Dividends from foreign corporations not included on lines 3, 6, 7, 8, 11, or 12 . . . 14 Income from controlled foreign corporations under subpart F (attach Form(s) 5471) . 15 Foreign dividend gross-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 IC-DISC and former DISC dividends not included on lines 1, 2, or 3 . . . . . . 17 Other dividends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Deduction for dividends paid on certain preferred stock of public utilities . . . . ? 19 Total dividends. Add lines 1 through 17. Enter here and on page 1, line 4 . . . ? Total special deductions. Add lines 9, 10, 11, 12, and 18. Enter here and on page 1, line 29b . . . . . . . 20 Form 1120 (2011)

Attachments:

help fast 494700

31. A credit balance in Cash Over and Short is reported as a(n) (Points : 3) asset.
liability.
miscellaneous expense.
miscellaneous revenue.

Question 32. 32. A petty cash fund of $100 is replenished when the fund contains $4 in cash and receipts for $94. The entry to replenish the fund would (Points : 3)

credit Cash Over and Short for $2.
credit Miscellaneous Revenue for $2.
debit Cash Over and Short for $2.
debit Miscellaneous Expense for $2.

Question 33. 33. The size of the petty cash fund is dependent on (Points : 3)

the wishes of the custodian of the fund.
anticipated disbursements for the year.
anticipated disbursements for a three- to four-week period.
the size of the regular cash account.

Question 34. 34. A note payable is in the form of (Points : 3)

a contingency that is reasonably likely to occur.
a written promissory note.
an oral agreement.
a standing agreement.

Question 35. 35. If a corporation issued $3,000,000 in bonds which pay 10% annual interest, what is the annual net cash cost of this borrowing if the income tax rate is 30%? (Points : 3)

$3,000,000
$90,000
$300,000
$210,000

Document Preview:

2. Mott Company uses the units-of-activity method in computing depreciation. A new plant asset is purchased for $36,000 that will produce an estimated 100,000 units over its useful life. Estimated salvage value at the end of its useful life is $3,000. What is the depreciation cost per unit? (Points : 3) ??       $3.30?       $3.60?       $.33?       $.36 5. In most companies, current liabilities are paid within (Points : 3) ??       one year through the creation of other current liabilities.?       the operating cycle through the creation of other current liabilities.?       one year or the operating cycle out of current assets.?       the operating cycle out of current assets.??? Question 6. 6. Cash receipts from interest and dividends are classified as (Points : 3) ??       financing activities.?       investing activities.?       operating activities.?       either financing or investing activities.??? Question 7. 7. From the standpoint of the issuing company, a disadvantage of using bonds as a means of long-term financing is that (Points : 3) ??       bond interest is deductible for tax purposes.?       interest must be paid on a periodic basis regardless of earnings.?       income to stockholders may increase as a result of trading on the equity.?       the bondholders do not have voting rights.??9. If a company has both an inflow and outflow of cash related to property, plant, and equipment, the (Points : 3) ??       two cash effects can be netted and presented as one item in the investing activities section.?       cash inflow and cash outflow should be reported separately in the investing activities section.?       two cash effects can be netted and presented as one item in the financing activities section.?       cash inflow and cash outflow should be reported separately in the financing activities section.??? Question 10. 10. With an interest-bearing note, the amount of assets received upon issuance of the note is generally (Points : 3) ??       equal…

Attachments:

help me with business law homework 494702

as attached

Document Preview:

1. Which of the following offers terminates earliest? Assume that there is no time limitation on the offer unless the offer says otherwise. ?A. An offer for the sale of land.?B. An offer to purchase stock on a stock exchange.?C. An offer that says that it will stay open for one week.?D. An offer with a valid five-day option attached to it. 2. In determining whether the consideration requirement has been satisfied to form a contract, the courts will be required to decide whether the consideration ?A. was bargained for.?B. was fair and adequate.?C. has sufficient economic value.?D. conforms to the subjective intent of the parties. 3. Beal offered in writing to sell Crane a piece of land for $150,000. If Beal dies, the offer will ?A. automatically terminate prior to Crane’s acceptance.?B. automatically terminate despite Crane’s prior acceptance.?C. terminate prior to Crane’s acceptance only if Crane received notice of Beal’s death.?D. remain open for a reasonable period of time after Beal’s death.  4. Article 2 of the UCC does not apply to a sale of: ?A. ball bearings.?B. wheat that has been harvested.?C. corporate stock.?D. a new car.   5. The primary distinction between an action based on innocent misrepresentation and an action based on common law fraud is that, in the former, a party need not allege and prove ?A. that there has been a false representation.?B. the materiality of the misrepresentation.?C. reasonable reliance on the misrepresentation.?D. that the party making the misrepresentation had actual or constructive knowledge that it was false.  6. Westlake Online, an Internet services provider, includes in its “clickwrap” contract a clause stating that California courts have “exclusive jurisdiction” over subscribers’ disputes with Westlake Online. This clause will most likely be: ?A. unenforceable because it was not the result of bargaining.?B. enforceable if it is considered reasonable by a court.?C. unenforceable against a subscriber in another…

Attachments:

help me fill this 494703

Income statement and balance sheet data for Virtual Gaming Systems are provided below.

Document Preview:

Income statement and balance sheet data for Virtual Gaming Systems are provided below.?? VIRTUAL GAMING SYSTEMS?Income Statement?For the year ended December 31?? ?   2013?   2012??  Sales revenue?$3,510,000  ?$3,036,000  ??  Cost of goods sold?2,480,000  ?1,950,000  ?? ????       Gross profit?1,030,000  ?1,086,000  ??  Expenses:? ? ??      Operating expenses?955,000  ?858,000  ??      Depreciation expense?30,000  ?27,000  ??      Loss on sale of land?0  ?8,000  ??      Interest expense?18,000  ?15,000  ??      Income tax expense?8,000  ?48,000  ?? ????        Total expenses?1,011,000  ?956,000  ?? ????  Net income?$    19,000  ?$   130,000  ?? ? ? ????  VIRTUAL GAMING SYSTEMS?Balance Sheet?December 31?? ?   2013?   2012?   2011??  Assets? ? ? ??  Current assets:? ? ? ??      Cash?$  201,000   ?$186,000   ?$144,000   ??      Accounts receivable?75,000   ?81,000   ?60,000   ??      Inventory?125,000   ?105,000   ?135,000   ??      Prepaid rent?14,000   ?12,000   ?6,000   ??  Long-term assets:? ? ? ??        Investment in bonds?105,000   ?105,000   ?0   ??        Land?300,000   ?210,000   ?240,000   ??        Equipment?300,000   ?270,000   ?210,000   ??        Less: Accumulated depreciation?(99,000)  ?(69,000)  ?(42,000)  ?? ?????          Total assets?$1,021,000   ?$900,000   ?$753,000   ?? ? ? ? ??  Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity? ? ? ??  Current liabilities:? ? ? ??      Accounts payable?$    78,000   ?$ 66,000   ?$ 81,000   ??      Interest payable?9,000   ?6,000   ?3,000   ??      Income tax payable?12,000   ?15,000   ?14,000   ?? Long-term liabilities:? ? ? ??      Notes payable?400,000   ?285,000   ?225,000   ??  Stockholders’ equity:? ? ? ??      Common stock?300,000   ?300,000   ?300,000   ??      Retained earnings?222,000   ?228,000   ?130,000   ?? ?????         Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity?$1,021,000   ?$900,000   ?$753,000   ?? ? ? ? ????? ?  1. value:?5.00 points     Required:??1.?Calculate the following risk ratios for 2012 and…

Attachments:

help me fill in 494704

Short-term Investments, Cost Method, Handout for Appendix D Name ______________________________________________________ Prepare the necessary general journal entries for the information provided below concerning the short-term investments for the Hotel Corporation. Record answers in the space provided. Jan 2 Purchased 10,000 shares of Greene Corporation’s common stock at $21 per share plus a $3,150 fee. Date Account Titles Debit Credit Jan.2 Aug 6 Greene Corporation paid a $1.10 per share dividend.

Document Preview:

Short-term Investments, Cost Method, Handout for Appendix D Name ______________________________________________________ Prepare the necessary general journal entries for the information provided below concerning the short-term investments for the Hotel Corporation. Record answers in the space provided. Jan 2 Purchased 10,000 shares of Greene Corporation’s common stock at $21 per share plus a $3,150 fee. Date Account Titles Debit Credit Jan.2 Aug 6 Greene Corporation paid a $1.10 per share dividend. Date Account Titles Debit Credit Aug. 6 Dec 3 Sold 5,000 shares of the short term investment in Greene Corporation stock for $24 per share less a $600 fee. Date Account Titles Debit Credit Dec. 3????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

help me fill these in 494705

I would like these later this afternoon, thank you

Document Preview:

Exercise 12-5 Evaluate risk ratios [LO3] The 2012 income statement of Adrian Express reports sales of $16 million, cost of goods sold of $9.6 million, and net income of $1.6 million. Balance sheet information is provided in the following table. All amounts are in thousands. ADRIAN EXPRESS Balance Sheets December 31, 2012 and 2011  ($ in 000s)  2012  2011   Assets          Current assets:          Cash $ 600   $ 760    Accounts receivable   1,400     1,000    Inventory   1,800     1,400    Long-term assets   4,800     4,240      Total assets $ 8,600   $ 7,400      Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity          Current liabilities $ 2,020   $ 1,660    Long-term liabilities   2,300     2,400    Common stock   2,000     2,000    Retained earnings   2,280     1,340      Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $ 8,600   $ 7,400     Industry averages for the following four risk ratios are as follows:    Average collection period 25 days    Average days in inventory 60 days    Current ratio 2 to 1    Debt to equity ratio 50%   Required: 1. Calculate the four risk ratios listed above for Adrian Express in 2012. (Use 365 days in a year. Round your answers to 1 decimal place. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)  Risk Ratios  Average collection period  days  Average days in inventory  days  Current ratio  to 1  Debt to equity ratio  % 2. Do you think the company is more risky or less risky than the industry averages?       The 2012 income statement of Adrian Express reports sales of $16 million, cost of goods sold of $9.6 million, and net income of $1.6 million. Balance sheet information is provided in the following table. All amounts are in thousands.   ADRIAN EXPRESS Balance Sheet December 31, 2012 and 2011  ($ in 000s)  2012  2011  Assets          Current assets:          Cash $ 600   $ 760    Accounts receivable   1,400…

Attachments:

helpwithaccting 494706

i need help with journal entries exercises…

Document Preview:

Exercise 13-4 Jake Corporation issued 2,600 shares of stock. Prepare the entry for the issuance under the following assumptions. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.) (a) The stock had a par value of $8 per share and was issued for a total of $54,200. (b) The stock had a stated value of $8 per share and was issued for a total of $54,200. (c) The stock had no par or stated value and was issued for a total of $54,200. (d) The stock had a par value of $8 per share and was issued to attorneys for services during incorporation valued at $54,200. (e) The stock had a par value of $8 per share and was issued for land worth $54,200. No. Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Exercise 13-5 Laci Co. had the following transactions during the current period. Mar. 2 Issued 5,200 shares of $6 par value common stock to attorneys in payment of a bill for $35,600 for services provided in helping the company to incorporate. June 12 Issued 55,400 shares of $6 par value common stock for cash of $402,500. July 11 Issued 2,200 shares of $110 par value preferred stock for cash at $130 per share. Nov. 28 Purchased 2,300 shares of treasury stock for $77,800. Journalize the transactions. (Credit account titles are automatically indented when amount is entered. Do not indent manually.) Date Account Titles and Explanation Debit Credit Mar. 2 June 12 July 11 Nov. 28 Exercise 13-7 On January 1, 2012, the stockholders’ equity section of Joshua Corporation shows: Common stock ($5 par value) $1,500,000; paid-in capital in excess of par $1,066,200; and retained earnings $1,191,500. During the year, the following treasury stock transactions occurred. Mar. 1 Purchased 47,000 shares for cash at $15 per share. July 1 Sold 10,400 treasury shares for cash at $17 per share. Sept. 1 Sold 9,310 treasury shares for cash at $14 per share. (a) Journalize the treasury stock…

Attachments:

hi need for testing 494707

hi this project is for prominent_teacher…

Document Preview:

??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

homework 494708

Homework Incremental Costs Analysis and Opportunity Costs Respond to the following: – From the first e-Activity, evaluate the opportunity costs for Damien Chrysler for failure to accept a proposal from within to manufacture a vehicle for the Indian market and suggest ways that opportunity cost can be minimized. – Analyze how excess capacity and incremental cost analysis can benefit management decisions to accept or reject projects and how this process can impact the financial performance of the business.

Document Preview:

Homework Incremental Costs Analysis and Opportunity Costs Respond to the following: – From the first e-Activity, evaluate the opportunity costs for Damien Chrysler for failure to accept a proposal from within to manufacture a vehicle for the Indian market and suggest ways that opportunity cost can be minimized. – Analyze how excess capacity and incremental cost analysis can benefit management decisions to accept or reject projects and how this process can impact the financial performance of the business. [250 words] [1-2 references] Transfer Pricing Respond to the following: -From the second e-Activity, assess the potential problems a multinational firm could encounter using negotiated transfer pricing instead of market-based transfer pricing and make a recommendation to the firm on how to avoid these problems. -Evaluate the accounting ethics of creating, initiating, or adjusting transactions to repatriate excess cash for multinational firms in transfer pricing decisions and suggest a way that this practice may be implemented. [250 words] [1-2 references]???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

homework 494710

Homework Assignment Johnson Controls Capital Investments {Original and fresh paper} [[Visit the Website of Johnson Controls Inc., located at [http://www.jonsoncontrols.com], and review its 2012 financial forecasts. According to the forecasts, Johnson Controls will increase capital investments to approximately $1.7 billion. More than 70% of the company’s capital expenditures in 2012 are associated with growth and margin expansion opportunities.

Document Preview:

Homework Assignment Johnson Controls Capital Investments {Original and fresh paper} [[Visit the Website of Johnson Controls Inc., located at [http://www.jonsoncontrols.com], and review its 2012 financial forecasts. According to the forecasts, Johnson Controls will increase capital investments to approximately $1.7 billion. More than 70% of the company’s capital expenditures in 2012 are associated with growth and margin expansion opportunities.]] Write a six to seven (6-7) page paper in which you: Suggest a methodology to supplement the traditional methods for evaluating the capital investments of Johnson Controls in the emerging markets to reduce risk providing a rationale of how risk will be reduced. Assess the potential impact of inflation on planned capital investments in China and examine approaches for an accurate evaluation of the investments. Suggest how this knowledge may impact management’s decisions. Contrast the modifications you would make in evaluating the projects to increase internal capacity in North America to evaluating expansion projects in the global market and how this information will impact the decisions made related to expansion. Examine the benefits of using sensitivity analysis in evaluating the projects for Johnson Controls and how this approach can provide a competitive advantage for the company. Use at least four (4) quality academic resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not quality as academic resources. The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are: Plan and evaluate capital investments. Use technology and information resources to research issues in managerial accounting. Write clearly and concisely about managerial accounting using proper writing mechanics.????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

homework 494711

Consider this code using the ArrayBag of Section 5.2 and the Location class from Chapter 2. What is the output? Location i = new Location(0, 3); Location j = new Location(0, 3); b.add(i); b.add(j); System.out.println(b.countOccurrences(i)); A. 0 B. 1 C. 2 D. 3 Suppose that b and c are Integer objects. A typical use of the clone method looks like this: b = (Integer) c.clone( ); Write a short clear explanation of why the (Integer) type cast is required in this typical example. A. obj = s; B. s = obj; C. s = (String) obj; D.

Document Preview:

Consider this code using the ArrayBag of Section 5.2 and the Location class from Chapter 2. What is the output? Location i = new Location(0, 3); Location j = new Location(0, 3); b.add(i); b.add(j); System.out.println(b.countOccurrences(i)); A. 0 B. 1 C. 2 D. 3 Suppose that b and c are Integer objects. A typical use of the clone method looks like this: b = (Integer) c.clone( ); Write a short clear explanation of why the (Integer) type cast is required in this typical example. A. obj = s; B. s = obj; C. s = (String) obj; D. Two or more answers are correct. Suppose that obj is an Object variable and s is a String variable. Which of the following statements is a correctly-compiling widening conversion? Don’t worry about possible run-time exceptions A. obj = s; B. s = obj; C. s = (String) obj; D. Two or more answers are correct. Suppose that x and y are reference variables and a program activates x.equals(y). What occurs if x is the null reference? A. A NullPointerException occurs B. It always returns true. C. It always returns false. D. It returns true if y is also a null reference; otherwise it returns false. Consider the implementation of the Stack using a partially-filled array. What goes wrong if we try to store the top of the Stack at location [0] and the bottom of the Stack at the last used position of the array? A. Both peek and pop would require linear time. B. Both push and pop would require linear time. C. The Stack could not be used to check balanced parentheses. D. The Stack could not be used to evaluate postfix expressions. Write some lines of code that declares an Integer object, using the Integer wrapper class. Assign the value 42 to this object, then copy this value from the Integer object to an ordinary int variable. Consider the usual algorithm for determining whether a sequence of parentheses is balanced. What is the maximum number of…

Attachments:

homework 494712

Homework Liquidity Ratios Respond to the following: – From the first e-Activity, evaluate the impact of not considering the current portion of long-term liabilities in the current ratio and working capital, and how this may impact day- to-day business decisions. – Determine the implications of a significant positive change in the ratio. Provide a rationale with your response.

Document Preview:

Homework Liquidity Ratios Respond to the following: – From the first e-Activity, evaluate the impact of not considering the current portion of long-term liabilities in the current ratio and working capital, and how this may impact day- to-day business decisions. – Determine the implications of a significant positive change in the ratio. Provide a rationale with your response. [250 words][1-2 references] 2-Comprehensive Income Respond to the following: – From the second e-Activity, elaborate on the potential consequences of eliminating the option to present other comprehensive income within the statement of changes in equity on financial statement users and companies. – Evaluate the effect of the increased prominence of other comprehensive income on financial statement users and companies. [250 words][1-2 references] Operating Activities Respond to the following: –From the e-Activity, evaluate the logic of reflecting key person life insurance in the operating activities of the cash flow statement and determine if this presentation is misleading to users of the financial statements. — Currently, Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) has not provided guidance on the appropriate section for reflecting key person life insurance. As a member of FASB, determine the guidance you would provide for key person insurance in the cash flow statement. Provide your rationale. [250 words][1-2 references] 4- Free Cash Flow Respond to the following: — Analyze the impact of erroneous classifications in the operating activities section of the cash flow statement on free cash flow and how this distortion can impact the decisions made by financial statement users. — Assess the importance of free cash flow in a growth company. Provide a brief scenario of a specific type of business that would benefit from free cash flow. [250 words][1-2 references]??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

homework 494713

Homework ACC 560 – Managerial Accounting Required Resources [Weygandt, J. J., Kimmel, P.D., & Kieso, D. E. (2012). Managerial accounting: Tools for business decision making (6th ed.). Hoboken, NJ: John Wiley and Sons] COURSE LEARNING OUTCOMES: . Determine the difference between managerial and financial accounting, and their Interrelationship. 2. Analyze the concepts of job order costing, process costing, and activity-based costing. 3. Conduct cost-volume profit analysis, incremental analysis, and analyze pricing issues. 4.

Document Preview:

1.value: 5.00 points What is the payback period for the following set of cash flows? (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. (e.g., 32.16)) Year Cash Flow 0 –$ 5,700 1 1,350 2 1,550 3 1,950 4 1,450 Payback period years 2.value: 5.00 points An investment project provides cash inflows of $720 per year for eight years. What is the project payback period if the initial cost is $1,925? What if the initial cost is $3,750? What if it is $5,800? What is the project payback period if the initial cost is $1,925? (Enter 0 if the project never pays back. Round your answer to 2 decimal places. (e.g., 32.16)) Payback period years What is the project payback period if the initial cost is $3,750? (Enter 0 if the project never pays back. Round your answer to 2 decimal places. (e.g., 32.16)) Payback period years What is the project payback period if the initial cost is $5,800? (Enter 0 if the project never pays back. Round your answer to 2 decimal places. (e.g., 32.16)) Payback period years 3.value: 5.00 points Buy Coastal, Inc., imposes a payback cutoff of three years for its international investment projects. Year Cash Flow (A) Cash Flow (B) 0 –$ 68,000 –$ 78,000 1 27,000 19,000 2 36,000 22,000 3 25,000 34,000 4 12,000 238,000 What is the payback period for both projects? (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. (e.g., 32.16)) Payback period Project A years Project B years Which project should the company accept? ?Project A???Project B?? 4.value: 5.00 points An investment project has annual cash inflows of $3,800, $4,700, $5,900, and $5,100, and a discount rate of 14 percent. What is the discounted payback period for these cash flows if the initial cost is $6,500? (Do not round intermediate calculations and round your final answer to 2 decimal places. (e.g., 32.16)) Discounted payback period years What is the…

Attachments:

homework 494714

Advanced Auditing

Document Preview:

Discussions ACC – Advanced Auditing Unbiased Reporting Please respond to the following: – Analyze the need for unbiased financial reporting. Based on your analysis, determine at least two (2) drivers that may cause financial reporting to be biased. Provide a rationale to support your response. – Analyze the audit opinion formulation process and suggest at least one (1) improvement to the process to strengthen audit opinions. Provide a rationale to support your suggestion. [250 words][1-2 references] Topic of Discussion Please respond to the following: – Analyze the changes made to corporate governance rules since the implementation of the Sarbanes–Oxley Act of 2002. Based on your analysis, formulate an opinion on whether or not these changes are sufficient in preventing financial fraud. Provide a rationale for your response. – Debate it! Audit committees are an effective tool for detecting and preventing fraud. Provide a rationale for your response. [250 words][1-2 references] Application of Ethical Framework Please respond to the following: – From the case study, use the ethical framework to propose a course of action that you would take concerning the audit. Provide a rationale for your response. – Imagine that you work for an audit firm and the firm selected you to assess its auditor independence and the potential threats to the firm. Determine at least two (2) potential threats to auditor independence and recommend one (1) strategy for the firm to eliminate or mitigate those threats you determined. [250 words][1-2 references]

Attachments:

explain the promise and risk of exporting or importing and identify the information 494668

Explain the promise and risk of exporting or importing, and identify the information sources and government programs to help exporters or importers.

Document Preview:

Forum Explain the promise and risk of exporting or importing, and identify the information sources and government programs to help exporters or importers. 300 Words due by Tuesday Mid-term quiz due by Saturday night????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

foundations of accounting i accounting project acct proj wp f2013 494669

Foundations of Accounting I

Accounting Project

Written by: Karen Pitsch

David s Entertainment is a merchandising business. Their account balances as of November 30, 2012 (unless otherwise indicated), are as follows:

110 Cash $ 73,920

112 Accounts Receivable 34,250

113 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 11,000

115 Merchandise Inventory 123,900

116 Prepaid Insurance 3,750

117 Store Supplies 2,850

123 Store Equipment 100,800

124 Accumulated Depreciation-Store Equipment 20,160

210 Accounts Payable 21,450

211 Salaries Payable 0

218 Interest Payable 0

220 Note Payable (Due 2017) 15,000

310 D. Williams, Capital (January 1, 2012) 73,260

311 D. Williams, Drawing 50,000

312 Income Summary 0

410 Sales 853,445

411 Sales Returns and Allowances 20,020

412 Sales Discounts 13,200

510 Cost of Merchandise Sold 414,575

520 Sales Salaries Expense 74,400

521 Advertising Expense 18,000

522 Depreciation Expense 0

523 Store Supplies Expense 0

529 Miscellaneous Selling Expense 2,800

530 Office Salaries Expense 40,500

531 Rent Expense 18,600

532 Insurance Expense 0

533 Bad Debt Expense 0

539 Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 1,650

550 Interest Expense 1,100

David s Entertainment uses the perpetual inventory system and the First-in, First-out costing method. Transportation-in and purchase discounts should be added to the Inventory Control Sheet, but since this will complicate the computation of the First-in, First-out costing method, please ignore this step in the process. They also use the Allowance Method for bad debt.

The Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary Ledgers along with the Inventory Control Sheet should be updated as each transaction affects them (daily).

David s Entertainment sells four types of television entertainment units.

The sale prices of each are:

TV A: $3,500

TV B: $5,250

TV C: $6,125

PS D: $9,000

During December, the last month of the accounting year, the following transactions were completed:

Dec. 1. Issued check number 2632 for the December rent, $2,600.

3. Purchased three TV C units on account from Prince Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $11,100.

4. Issued check number 2633 to pay the transportation changes on purchase of December 3, $400. (NOTE: Do not include shipping and purchase discounts to the Inventory Control sheet for this project.)

6. Sold four TV A and four TV B on account to Albert Co., invoice 891, terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point.

10. Sold two projector systems for cash.

11. Purchased store supplies on account from Matt Co., terms n/30, $580.

13. Issued check to Prince Co. number 2634 for the full amount due, less discount allowed.

14. Issued credit memo for one TV A unit returned on sale of December 6.

15. Issued check number 2635 for advertising expense for last half of December, $1,500.

16. Received cash from Albert Co. for the full amount due (less return of December 14 and discount).

19. Issued check number 2636 to buy two TV C units, $7,600.

19. Issued check number 2637 for $6,100 to Joseph Co. on account.

20. Sold five TV C units on account to Cameron Co., invoice number

892, terms 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point.

20. For the convenience of the customer, issued check number 2638 for shipping charges on sale of December 20, $700.

21. Received $12,250 cash from McKenzie Co. on account, no discount.

21. Purchased three projector systems on account from Elisha Co., terms 1/10, n/30, FOB destination, $15,600.

24. Received notification that Marie Co. has been granted bankruptcy with no

amount of recovery. We are to write-off her amount due. (Note: See page

402 for entry required.)

25. Issued a debit memo for return of $5,200 because of a damaged projection

system purchased on December 21, receiving credit from the seller.

26.Issued check number 2639 for refund of cash on sales made for cash, $600. (Customer was going to return goods until an allowance was arranged.)

27. Issued check number 2640 for sales salaries of $1,750 and office

salaries of $950.

28.Purchased store equipment on account from Matt Co., terms n/30, FOB

destination, $1,200.

29.Issued check number 2641 for store supplies, $470.

30.Sold four TV C units on account to Randall Co., invoice number 893,

terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point.

30.Received cash from sale of December 20, less discount, plus transportation

paid on December 20. (Round calculations to the nearest dollar.)

30.Issued check number 2642 for purchase of December 21, less return

of December 25 and discount.

30.Issued a debit memo for $300 of the purchase returned from

December 28.

Instructions:

1. Enter the balances of each of the accounts in the appropriate balance column of a four-column account (General Ledger). Write Balance in the item section, and place a check mark (x) in the Post Reference column.

2. Journalize the transactions in a sales journal, purchases journal, cash receipts journal, cash payments journal, or general journal as illustrated in chapter 7. Also post to the Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary ledgers and Inventory Control Sheet as needed.

3. Total each column on the special journals and prove the journal.

4. Post the totals of the account named columns and individually post the other columns as well to the General Ledger.

5. Prepare the Schedule of Accounts Receivable and the Schedule of Accounts Payable (their total amount must equal the amount in their controlling general ledger account).

6. Prepare the unadjusted trial balance on the worksheet.

7. Complete the worksheet for the year ended December 31, 2012, using the following adjustment data:

a. Merchandise inventory on December 31 $90,800

b. Insurance expired during the year 1,250

c. Store supplies on hand on December 31 975

d. Depreciation for the current year needs to be calculated. The business uses

the Straight-line method, the store equipment has a useful life of 10 years

with no salvage value. (NOTE: the purchase and return will not be included

as the dates of the transactions were after the 15th of the month).

e. Accrued salaries on December 31:

Sales salaries $1,400

Office salaries 760 2,160

f. The note payable terms are at 8%, payment is not being made until Jan. 3, 2013. Interest must be recognized for one month.

g. Net realizable value of Accounts Receivable is determined to be $27,950.

8. Prepare a multiple-step income statement, a statement of owner s equity, and a

classified balance sheet in good form. (Recommend review of Current Liabilities on pages 166 & 167 and Current Maturities of Long-term Debt on page 480.)

9. Journalize and post the adjusting entries.

10. Journalize and post the closing entries. Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line

in both balance columns opposite the closing entry.

11. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

Check Figures for Accounting Project:

Cash Receipts Journal; Cash Column: 97,939

Unadjusted Trial Balance Total: 1,080,620

Net Income: 264,350

Post Closing Trial Balance: 347,490

foundations of accounting i accounting project karen pitsch alli co is a merchandisi 494670

Foundations of Accounting I

Accounting Project

Karen Pitsch

Alli Co. is a merchandising business. The account balances for Alli Co. as of November 30, 2012 (unless otherwise indicated), are as follows:

110 Cash $ 73,920

112 Accounts Receivable 37,875

113 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 3,500

115 Merchandise Inventory 133,900

116 Prepaid Insurance 3,750

117 Store Supplies 2,850

123 Store Equipment 100,800

124 Accumulated Depreciation-Store Equipment 20,160

210 Accounts Payable 21,450

211 Salaries Payable 0

218 Interest Payable 0

220 Note Payable (Due 2017) 10,000

310 P. Williams, Capital (January 1, 2012) 89,510

311 P. Williams, Drawing 40,000

312 Income Summary 0

410 Sales 853,040

411 Sales Returns and Allowances 20,600

412 Sales Discounts 13,200

510 Cost of Merchandise Sold 414,575

520 Sales Salaries Expense 74,400

521 Advertising Expense 18,000

522 Depreciation Expense 0

523 Store Supplies Expense 0

529 Miscellaneous Selling Expense 2,800

530 Office Salaries Expense 40,500

531 Rent Expense 18,600

532 Insurance Expense 0

533 Bad Debt Expense 0

539 Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 1,650

550 Interest Expense 240

Alli Co. uses the perpetual inventory system and the last-in, first-out costing method. Transportation-in and purchase discounts should be added to the Inventory Control Sheet, but since this will complicate the computation of the Last-in, first-out costing method, please ignore this step in the process. They also use the Allowance Method for bad debt.

The Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary Ledgers along with the Inventory Control Sheet should be updated as each transaction affects them (daily).

Alli Co. sells four types of television entertainment units.

The sale prices of each are:

TV A: $3,500

TV B: $5,250

TV C: $6,125

PS D: $9,000

During December, the last month of the accounting year, the following transactions were completed:

Dec. 1. Issued check number 2632 for the December rent, $2,200.

3.

Purchased four TV C units on account from Prince Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $14,800.

4.

Issued check number 2633 to pay the transportation changes on purchase of December 3, $400. (NOTE: Do not include shipping and purchase discounts to the Inventory Control sheet for this project.)

6.

Sold four TV A and four TV B on account to Albert Co., invoice 891, terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point.

10.

Sold two project systems for cash.

11.

Purchased store supplies on account from Matt Co., terms n/30, $620.

13.

Issued check to Prince Co. number 2634 for full amount due (November s balance plus December 3rd transaction), less discount allowed.

14.

Issued credit memo for one TV A unit returned on sale of December 6.

15.

Issued check number 2635 for advertising expense for last half of December, $1,500.

16.

Received cash from Albert Co. for full amount due (less return of December 14 and discount).

19. Issued check number 2636 to buy two TV C units, $7,600.

19. Issued check number 2637 for $6,100 to Joseph Co. on account.

20.

Sold three TV C units on account to Cameron Co., invoice number

892, terms 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point.

20.

For the convenience of the customer, issued check number 2638 for shipping charges on sale of December 20, $600.

21.

Received $12,250 cash from McKenzie Co. on account, no discount.

21.

Purchased three projector systems on account from Elisha Co., terms 1/10, n/30, FOB destination, $15,600.

25. Received notification that Marie Co. has been granted bankruptcy with no

amount of recovery. We are to write-off her amount due. (Note: See page

402 for entry required.)

24.

Issued a debit memo for return of $5,200 because of a damaged projection system purchased on December 21, receiving credit from the seller.

26.

Issued check number 2639 for refund of cash on sales made for cash, $1,000. (Customer was going to return goods until an allowance was arranged.)

27. Issued check number 2640 for sales salaries of $1,750 and office

salaries of $950.

28.

Purchased store equipment on account from Matt Co., terms n/30, FOB

destination, $800.

29.

Issued check number 2641 for store supplies, $550.

30.

Sold four TV C units on account to Randall Co., invoice number 893,

terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point.

30.

Received cash from sale of December 20, less discount, plus transportation

paid on December 20. (Round calculations to the nearest dollar.)

30.

Issued check number 2642 for purchase of December 21, less return

of December 24 and discount.

30.

Issued a debit memo for $200 of the purchase returned from

December 28.

Instructions:

1.

Enter the balances of each of the accounts in the appropriate balance column of a four-column account (General Ledger). Write Balance in the item section, and place a check mark ( ) in the Post Reference column.

2.

Journalize the transactions in a sales journal, purchases journal, cash receipts journal, cash payments journal, or general journal as illustrated in chapter 7. Also post to the Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary ledgers and when needed the Inventory Control Sheet.

3.

Total each column on the special journals and prove the journal.

4.

Post the totals of the account named columns and individually post the other columns as well to the General Ledger.

5.

Prepare the Schedule of Accounts Receivable and the Schedule of Accounts Payable (their total amount must equal the amount in their controlling general ledger account).

6.

Prepare the unadjusted trial balance on the worksheet.

7.

Complete the worksheet for the year ended December 31, 2012, using the following adjustment data:

a. Merchandise inventory on December 31 $110,200

b. Insurance expired during the year 1,250

c. Store supplies on hand on December 31 975

d. Depreciation for the current year needs to be calculated. Alli Co. uses the

Straight-line method, the store equipment has a useful life of 10 years with no salvage value. (NOTE: the purchase and return will not be included as the dates of the transactions were after the 15th of the month).

e. Accrued salaries on December 31:

Sales salaries $480

Office salaries 260 530

f. The note payable terms are at 8%, payment is not being made until Jan. 3, 2013. Interest must be recognized for one month (round answer to the nearest dollar amount).

g. Net realizable value of Accounts Receivable is determined to be $30,000.

8. Prepare a multiple-step income statement, a statement of owner s equity, and a

classified balance sheet in good form.

9. Journalize and post the adjusting entries.

10.

Journalize and post the closing entries. Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line

in both balance columns opposite the closing entry.

11.

Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

gb 519 unit 3 homework 494671

Document Preview:

0 1 2 3 1/31/2011 2200 11500 4800 2300 41900 15000 9000 5000 27000 2000 104000 1000 2000 37400 0 31000 0 14000 0 9900 160000 160000 1650 1500 1400 11100 63200 98750 2250 0 0 31 0 31 0 31 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 7/31/2011 0 3065 3069 0 0 0 0 0 Student Name: Class: Ratios Unadjusted Trial Balance Cash Merchandise inventory General Journal Store supplies Prepaid insurance Store equipment Accounts payable Trans. Date Account Titles no. Debit Credit Adjusting Entries: Sales Store Supplies Expense Sales discounts Store Supplies Sales returns and allowances Insurance Expense Cost of goods sold Prepaid Insurance Depreciation Expense, Store Equipment Salaries expense Accumulated Depreciation, Store Equipment Insurance expense Cost of Goods Sold Rent expense Merchandise Inventory Store supplies expense Advertising expense Totals Store supplies on hand at year-end Expired insurance for year Depreciation expense for year Ending inventory Income Statement Net sales Insurance expense Store supplies expense Advertising expense Net income Current assets: Cash Merchandise inventory Store supplies Prepaid insurance Total current assets Current liabilities Current ratio Acid-test ratio Accumulated depreciation-Store equipment Depreciation expense-Store equipment Jan. 31 Gross profit Depreciation expense, Store equipment Gross margin Gross margin ratio Current ratio: Acid-test ratio: Gross margin ratio: Check figures: (2) Gross profit (3) Total expenses Net income Less: Sales discounts Sales returns and allowances Selling expenses Expenses: General and administrative expenses Sales salaries expense Rent expense-Selling space Total selling expenses Office salaries expense Rent expense-Office space Total general and administrative expenses Total expenses Expenses Quick assets: Cash REX COMPANY Additional…

Attachments:

genaral accounting p4 494672

I need help with 5 quesions, NOTE: please open attachments for questions details.

Q-1- On March 4, of the current year, BB, Inc. reacquired 5,000 shares of its common stock at $89 per share. On August 7, BB sold 3,500 of the reacquired shares at $100 per share. The remaining 1,500 shares were sold at $88 per share on November 29.

Journalize the transactions of March 4, August 7, and November 29.

Q2- On February 1, MA Company reacquired 7,500 shares of its common stock at $30 per share. On March 15, Marine sold 4,500 of the reacquired shares at $34 per share. On June 2, MA sold the remaining shares at $28 per share.

Journalize the transactions of February 1, March 15, and June 2.

Q-3 On January 1, 2010, YG Company obtained an $88,000, seven year 5% installment note from FF Bank. The note requires annual payments of $15,208, with the first payment occurring on the last day of the fiscal year. The first payment consists of $4,400 interest and principal repayment of $10,808.

Journalize the following entries:

Q-4 Prepare the journal entries for the following transactions for BC company.

A) BC company. purchased 1,200 shares of the total of 100,000 outstanding shares of MT Corp. stock for $20.75 per share plus a $70 commission.

Q-5 MG, Inc. reported net income for the year ending December 31, 2012 of $483,500. Dividends paid during the year totaled $42,900. The company holds available-for-sale securities with an original cost of $162,000 and a fair value of $171,000 at the end of the year. They also hold trading securities with an original cost of $150,000 and a fair value of $147,000. Retained Earnings on January 1, 2012 was $736,400 and Accumulated Other Comprehensive Income on January 1, 2012 was $16,200.

Document Preview:

Q-1- On March 4, of the current year, BB, Inc. reacquired 5,000 shares of its common stock at $89 per share. On August 7, BB sold 3,500 of the reacquired shares at $100 per share. The remaining 1,500 shares were sold at $88 per share on November 29. Journalize the transactions of March 4, August 7, and November 29. Mar-4, =?? =?? Aug-7, =?? =?? =?? Nov-29, =?? =?? =?? What is the balance in Paid-in Capital from Sale of Treasury Stock on December 31, of the current year? =?? (credit) Q2- On February 1, MA Company reacquired 7,500 shares of its common stock at $30 per share. On March 15, Marine sold 4,500 of the reacquired shares at $34 per share. On June 2, MA sold the remaining shares at $28 per share. Journalize the transactions of February 1, March 15, and June 2. Feb-1 =?? =?? Mar-15 =?? =?? =?? June-2 =?? =?? =?? Q-3 On January 1, 2010, YG Company obtained an $88,000, seven year 5% installment note from FF Bank. The note requires annual payments of $15,208, with the first payment occurring on the last day of the fiscal year. The first payment consists of $4,400 interest and principal repayment of $10,808. Journalize the following entries: A) Issued the installment notes for cash on January 1, 2010. =?? =?? B) Paid the first annual payment on the note. =?? =?? =?? C) Determine the amount of interest expense on the note for the first year. =$ Q-4 Prepare the journal entries for the following transactions for BC company. A) BC company. purchased 1,200 shares of the total of 100,000 outstanding shares of MT Corp. stock for $20.75 per share plus a $70 commission. =?? =?? B) MT total earnings for the period are $84,000. =?? =?? C) MT paid a total of $40,000 in cash dividends to shareholders of record. =?? =?? Q-5 MG, Inc. reported net income for the year ending December 31, 2012 of $483,500. Dividends paid during the year totaled $42,900. The company holds available-for-sale securities with an original cost of $162,000 and a fair value of…

Attachments:

general accounting p5 494673

I need help with 3 accounting problems, document attached.

Q1- AB Company purchased as a long-term investment $500,000 of BC Corporation 10-year, 9% bonds. Present entries to record the following selected transactions:

Q2- Present entries to record the following selected transactions of MT Co

Q3- On May 1, 2011, Stan Company purchased $50,000 of HR Company’s 12% bonds at 100 plus accrued interest of $2,000. On June 30, 2011, Stan received its first semiannual interest. On February 1, 2012, Stan sold $40,000 of the bonds at 103 plus accrued interest.

NOTE: please open attachament for questions full details. thank you

Document Preview:

Q-1 AB Company purchased as a long-term investment $500,000 of BC Corporation 10-year, 9% bonds. Present entries to record the following selected transactions: A) Purchased bonds for $475,000. =?? =?? Sold half the bonds at 98 plus accrued interest of $4,000. The broker deducted $200 for brokerage fees and taxes, remitting the balance. The bonds were carried at $489,000 at the time of the sale. =?? =?? =?? =?? Q-2 Present entries to record the following selected transactions of MT Co. A) Purchased 600 shares of the 100,000 shares outstanding $10 par common shares of Dank Corporation for $5,100. =?? =?? B) Purchased 3,500 shares of the 10,000 shares no par common shares of RM Co. for $45,700. The investment was accounted for by the equity method. =?? =?? C) Received a cash dividend of $1 per share on the Dank Corporation stock acquired in (A) =?? =?? (D) Received a cash dividend of $2 per share on the RM Co. stock acquired in (B). =?? =?? (E) Sold 100 shares of the Dank Corporation shares acquired in (A) for $2,100. =?? =?? =?? (F) Dank Corporation reported net income of $30,000 and RM Company’s reported net income was $50,000. =?? =?? Q3-On May 1, 2011, Stan Company purchased $50,000 of HR Company’s 12% bonds at 100 plus accrued interest of $2,000. On June 30, 2011, Stan received its first semiannual interest. On February 1, 2012, Stan sold $40,000 of the bonds at 103 plus accrued interest. The journal entry Stan will record on June 30, 2011, will include: A) a credit to Interest Receivable for $1,000. B) a credit to Interest Revenue for $2,000. C) a debit to Cash for $2,000. D) a debit to Cash for $3,000. 2,100. =?? =?? =?? (F) Dank Corporation reported net income of $30,000 and RM Company’s reported net income was $50,000. =?? =?? Q3-On May 1, 2011, Stan Company purchased $50,000 of HR Company’s 12% bonds at 100 plus accrued interest of $2,000. On June 30, 2011, Stan received its first semiannual interest. On February 1,…

Attachments:

general mills in a group project and i need help with the following 4 questions all 494674

I have been assigned General Mills in a group project and I need help with the following 4 questions. All questions are focused around General Mills. Please show work.

Q1. Forecasting
List of Specific Assumptions used in forecasts
Forecasts for a 5 year time horizon

Need explanation for time and specific assumption used in forecast. Must be done on word doc. Need to show references.

Q2. Valuation
Components of the WACC (with sources referenced)
DCF Model – Optimistic, Pessimistic & Expected
DAE Model – Optimistic, Pessimistic & Expected
DAROE Model – Optimistic, Pessimistic & Expected

I will need a written explanation to why the company is Optimistic, Pessimistic & Expected for each of the models and the WACC analysis. Must be done on word doc. Need to show references.

Q3. Assessment of Solvency
Calculation of Altman’s Z
Estimate of Bond Rating based on ratios
Actual Bond Rating (if applicable)

Will need explanation for each item. Must be done on the word doc. Need to show references.

Q4. Spreadsheets

Buffet spreadsheet

Must substitute Nike with General Mills answer the questions highlighted in yellow. Instructions are in the first 3 spreadsheets and the fourth is the actual spreadsheet to complete.

FYI: year 1 is last year and year 8 is 8 years ago. Government bond is based on long term.

Valuation spreadsheet (DCF&EVA)
This assignment has 2 parts. First Spreadsheet FCFF valuation, second spreadsheet feeds off the first spreadsheet, please check to make sure that second spreadsheet is reflecting the answers from the first spreadsheet.

genesis capital plan report 494675

The Genesis operations management team, nearing completion of its agreement with Sensible Essentials, was asked by senior management to present a capital plan for the operating expansion. The capital plan was not to be a wish list but an analysis of the necessary expenditures to successfully establish a fully equipped operating facility overseas.

In addition, senior management requested meaningful financial and operating metrics to ensure that the performance objectives for the facility were being met. The operations management team was given five days to accomplish the following:

  1. Calculate the firm s WACC.
  2. Prepare and analyze each planned capital expenditure.
  3. Evaluate, rank, and recommend the capital expenditures according to beneficial value to the organization, using evaluation tools NPV, payback, and IRR. Evaluation, ranking, and recommendations should be by category of expenditures. For example, facility, equipment 1, 2, and 3, and inspection.
  4. Using the selected choices in part three, calculate the full cost of establishing a fully equipped facility. This would include the facility, equipment 1, 2, and 3, and inspection. In addition, calculate the payback, NPV, and IRR for the completed facility.
  5. Construct and recommend between three and five metrics to measure the performance of the organization. At least one metric should be dividend decision-making driven.
  6. Prepare an executive summary along with a separate document showing the calculations.

Following the example of the operations management team, do the following:

  1. Download the Capital Budgeting spreadsheet, and compute the WACC for Genesis.
  2. Using the information provided in the spreadsheet, analyze Genesis s project options.
    Using the information provided, calculate the periodic and cumulative net cash flows for each potential project and its associated options. Please note that there are 5 projects (facility, equipment pieces 1, 2, and 3, and internal inspection) and that each project offers multiple configuration options (facility size, equipment type, etc.).
  3. Evaluate, rank, and recommend a specific option for each capital project according to beneficial value to the organization, using evaluation tools NPV, payback, and IRR.
  4. Construct and recommend between three and five metrics to measure the performance of the new operating strategy. At least one metric should reflect dividend policy as it relates to rewarding shareholders.
  5. Prepare an executive summary describing your recommendations for each project and the overall cost, net cash flows, and expected returns of the operating configuration that you recommend. Be sure to justify your recommendations in terms of the investment criteria applied in Step 3 above. Be sure to report the full cost of the facility as it is configured per your recommendations. Present and justify your operating strategy performance metrics.

Your complete report should include all of your calculations as appendices (5 pages, or 1 page for each project).

Write a 5 6-page report in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources

**Attached Excel Sheet For Genesis**

Attachments:

genesis cash budget report 494677

LASA 1 Genesis Cash Budget Report

The Genesis operations management team is now preparing to implement the operating expansion plan. Previously the firm s cash position did not pose a challenge. However, the planned foreign expansion requires Genesis to have a reliable source of funds for both short-term and long-term needs.

One of Genesis s potential lenders tells the team that in order to be considered as a viable customer, Genesis must prepare and submit a monthly cash budget for the current year and a quarterly budget for the subsequent year. The lender will review the cash budget and determine whether or not Genesis can meet the loan repayment terms. Genesis s ability to repay the loan depends not only on sales and expenses but also on how quickly the company can collect payment from customers and how well it manages its supplier terms and other operating expenses. The Genesis team members agreed that being fully prepared with factual data would allow them to maximize their position as well as negotiate favorable financing terms.

The Genesis management team held a brainstorming session to chart a plan of action, which is detailed here.

  • Evaluate historical data and prepare assumptions that will drive the planning process.
  • Produce a detailed cash budget that summarizes cash inflow, outflow, and financing needs.
  • Identify and compare interest rates, both short-term and long-term, using debt and equity.
  • Analyze the financing mix (short/long) and the cost associated with the recommendation.

Since this expansion is critical to Genesis Corporation expanding into new overseas markets, the operations management team has been asked to prepare an executive summary with supporting details for Genesis s senior executives.

Working over a weekend, the management team developed realistic assumptions to construct a working capital budget.

  1. Sales: The marketing expert and the newly created customer service personnel developed sales projections based on historical data and forecast research.
  2. Other cash receipt: Rental income $15,000 per month.
  3. Production material: The production manager forecasted material cost based on cost quotes from reliable vendors, the average of which is 50 percent of sales.
  4. Other production cost: Based on historical cost data, this cost on an average is 30 percent of the material cost and occurs in the month after material purchase.
  5. Selling and marketing expense: Five percent of sales
  6. General and administrative expense: Twenty percent of sales
  7. Interest payments: Payable in December $75, 000
  8. Tax payments: Quarterly due 15th of April, July, October, and January $15,000
  9. Minimum cash balance desired: $ 25,000 per month
  10. Cash balance start of month (December):$15,000
  11. Available short-term annual interest rate is 8 percent, long-term debt rate is 9 percent, and long-term equity is 10 percent. All funds would be available the first month when the firm encounters a deficit.
  12. Dividend payment: None

Based on this information, do the following:

  • Using the Cash Budget spreadsheet, calculate detailed company cash budgets for the forthcoming and subsequent years. Summarize the sources and uses of cash, and identify the external financing needs for both the forthcoming and subsequent years.

Cash Budget

Download this Excel spreadsheet to view the company s cash budget. You will calculate the company s monthly cash budget for the forthcoming year and quarterly budget for the subsequent year using this information.

  • In an executive-level report, summarize the company’s financing needs for the forecast period and provide your recommendations for financing the planned activities. Be sure to comment on the following:

    a) Your recommended financing solution and cost to the firm: If Genesis needs operating cash, how should it fund this need? Are there internal policy changes with regard to collections or payables management you would recommend? What types of external financing are available?

    b) Your concerns associated with the firm’s cash budget. Is this a sign of weak sales performance or poor cost control? Why or why not?

Write a 7-page paper in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M3_A2.doc.

Attachments:

genmet income computation 494678

Income Computation for a Manufacturing Firm: The following data relate to GenMet, a U.S. based consumer goods manufacturing firm, for the fiscal year ending October 31, 2013. Reported amounts are in millions of U.S. dollars ($). GenMet incurred manufacturing costs (direct material, direct labor, manufacturing overhead) during fiscal 2013 totaling $2,752.0. Sales revenue was $6,700.2, selling and administrative expenses were $2,903.7, and interest expense was $151.9. The income tax rate is 35%.  Compute GenMet’s net income for fiscal year 2013.

Document Preview:

Income Computation for a Manufacturing Firm:??The following data relate to GenMet, a U.S. based consumer goods manufacturing firm, for the fiscal year ending October 31, 2013. Reported amounts are in millions of U.S. dollars ($).?? GenMet incurred manufacturing costs (direct material, direct labor, manufacturing overhead) during fiscal 2013 totaling $2,752.0. Sales revenue was $6,700.2, selling and administrative expenses were $2,903.7, and interest expense was $151.9. The income tax rate is 35%. ??Compute GenMet’s net income for fiscal year 2013. Round your calculations and answer to one decimal place. Enter the amount in millions.

Attachments:

global organization 494679

Option 1:Cross-Cultural Perspectives

Research a global organization and a cultural issue that affects this organization s interactions outside the United States.

Define the cultural issue within the global organization.

Prepare an analysis of the ethical and social responsibility issues that your selected organization must deal with as result of being a global organization.

Write a 1,050- to 1,400-word paper summarizing the results of the analysis. Include the following:

Identify ethical perspectives in the global organization.

Compare these ethical perspectives across cultures involved in the global organization.

Format your paper consistent with APA guidelines.

Attachments:

goes with previous post 494680

Document Preview:

14000 155000 5700 39400 20400 200000 72000 127000 1700 142000 91800 434500 434500 Howie Stars produces starts for elementary teachers to reward their students. Howie Stars’ trial balance on June 1 follows: HOWIE STARS Trial Balance June 1, 2012 Account Title Balance Debit Credit Cash Accounts receivable Inventories: Materials Work in process Finished goods Plant assets Accumulated depreciation Accounts payable Wages payable Common stock Retained earnings Sales revenue Cost of goods sold Manufacturing overhead Marketing and general expenses Total — June 1 balances in the subsidiary ledgers were as follows: – Materials subledger: Paper, $4,700; indirect materials, $1,000 June transactions are summarized as follows: a. Collections on account, $152,000. b. Marketing and general expenses incurred and paid, $28,000. d. Materials purchases on credit: Paper, $22,900; indirect materials, $3,800. e. Materials used in production (requisitioned): – Job 120: paper , $850 – Job 121: paper, $7,650 – Indirect materials, $1,000 – Finished goods subledger: Large Stars, $9,400; Small Stars, $11,000 f. Wages incurred and assigned during June, $35,000. Labor time records for the month: Job 120, $3,500; Job 121, $16,600; indirect labor, $14,900. g. Wages paid in June include the balance in the Wages payable account at May 31 and $32,200 of wages incurred during June. i. Manufacturing overhead was allocated at the predetermined rate of 50% of direct labor cost. j. Jobs completed during the month: Job 120, 300,000 Large Stars at total cost of $45,500. k. Credit sales on account: all of Job 120 for $111,000. l. Closed the Manufacturing overhead account to Cost of goods sold. Requirements: 1. Journalize the transactions for the company. Howie uses a perpetual inventory system. 2. Open T-accounts for the general ledger, the Materials ledger, the Work in process ledger, and the Finished goods ledger. Insert each account balance as given, and use the reference…

Attachments:

gonzales company 494681

At the beginning of the year, Gonzales Company had total assets of $882,000 and total liabilities of $500,000. Answer the following independent questions.

Document Preview:

At the beginning of the year, Gonzales Company had total assets of $882,000 and total liabilities of $500,000. Answer the following independent questions. ??(a) If total assets increased $150,000 during the year and total liabilities decreased $80,000, what is the amount of owner’s equity at the end of the year? $ ???(b) During the year, total liabilities increased $100,000 and owner’s equity decreased $70,000 What is the amount of total assets at the end of the year? $ ???(c) If total assets decreased $80,000 and owner’s equity increased $120,000 during the year, what is the amount of total liabilities at the end of the year? $ ??

Attachments:

good report 494682

Company to write on is Nike SEC 10-K Paper: 4 – 6 pages in length, single spaced, with double spacing between paragraphs. One inch margins on all sides. APA Style for in text citations and a works cited list. SEC 10-K Power Point Presentation: 6 slides plus a cover slide and a works cited slide. This presentation will be based on your SEC 10-K paper and will allow students to see highlights of your paper. Remember a good Power Point presentation does not include paragraphs of information. Graphics, tables, and analysis may be presented.

Document Preview:

Company to write on is Nike SEC 10-K Paper: 4 – 6 pages in length, single spaced, with double spacing between paragraphs. One inch margins on all sides. APA Style for in text citations and a works cited list. SEC 10-K Power Point Presentation: 6 slides plus a cover slide and a works cited slide. This presentation will be based on your SEC 10-K paper and will allow students to see highlights of your paper. Remember a good Power Point presentation does not include paragraphs of information. Graphics, tables, and analysis may be presented.????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

governmental activity 3 494684

Please show all work on an excel or word document.

Document Preview:

Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 3) A/R Customers 9/30/15 Collected Amounts 9/30/15 Water Sewer Revenues Billed 9/30/15 A/R Beginning 9/30/14 5) Total P-P-E 9/30/15 Land 9/30/14 Buliding 9/30/14 Water Plant9/30/14 Sewer Plant 9/30/14 Water Line 9/30/14 Sewer Line 9/30/14 Machinery and Equipment 9/30/14 6) Total P-P-E 9/30/15 Acummulated Depreciation 9/30/14 Actual Depreciation Expense 9/30/15 Net Book Value P-P-E 9/30/15 12) 17) Capitol Assets 9/30/15 Fund Balance For Gov Funds 9/30/15 Net Position For Gov Activities 9/30/15 Accounts payable 9/30/15 Bonds Payable 9/30/15 Taxes Recievable 9/30/15 Billings 10/1/15 Billings 10/15/15 Billings 11/1/15 (176,550/33) *20 days Billings 11/15/15 (143,000/33) * 6 days Investment Income for 9/30/15 Johnny James ACG 3501 Section 2 Beginning (9/30/14) Revenues( 9/30/15) #3 #5 #6 450000.00 6000000.00 -5800000.00 650000.00 500000.00 1500000.00 5000000.00 8000000.00 15000000.00 20000000.00 700000.00 52700000.00 52700000.00 -15000000.00 -1700000.00 36000000.00 6000000.00 -400000.00 155200.00 140500.00 107000.00 26000.00 6028700.00 2000000.00 250000.00 100000.00 90000.00 -4750000.00 -25000.00 -2335000.00 Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 3) A/R Customers 9/30/15 Collected Amounts 9/30/15 Water Sewer Revenues Billed 9/30/15 A/R Beginning 9/30/14 5) Total P-P-E 9/30/15 Land 9/30/14 Buliding 9/30/14 Water Plant9/30/14 Sewer Plant 9/30/14 Water Line 9/30/14 Sewer Line 9/30/14 Machinery and Equipment 9/30/14 6) Total P-P-E 9/30/15 Acummulated Depreciation 9/30/14 Actual Depreciation Expense 9/30/15 Net Book Value P-P-E 9/30/15 12) 17) Capitol Assets 9/30/15 Fund Balance For Gov Funds 9/30/15 Net Position For Gov Activities 9/30/15 Accounts payable 9/30/15 Bonds Payable 9/30/15 Taxes Recievable 9/30/15 Billings 10/1/15 Billings 10/15/15 Billings 11/1/15 (176,550/33) *20 days Billings 11/15/15 (143,000/33) * 6 days Investment Income for 9/30/15 Johnny…

group project budgeting universal electronics is a small rapidly growing wholesaler 494687

Group Project – Budgeting Universal Electronics is a small, rapidly growing wholesaler of consumer electronic products. The firm s main product lines are small kitchen appliances and power tools. Malinda Alexander, Universal s general manager of marketing, recently completed a sales forecast. She believes the company s sales during the first quarter of 20×1 will increase by 15% each month over the previous month s sales. Then Alexander expects sales to remain constant for several months. Universal s projected balance sheet as of December, 31, 20X0, is as follows: Cash $ 45,000 Accounts receivable .. 270,000 Marketable securities .. 15,000 Inventory .. 154,000 Net Buildings & Equipment .. 626,000 Total Assets ..$1,110,000 Accounts Payable . 176,400 Bond interest payable .. 18,750 Property Taxes payable .. 3600 Bonds Payable (15% due in 20X6) . 300,000 Common Stock . . 500,000 Retained Earnings .. 111,250 Total liabilities & equity ..$1,110,000 Shawn Garrity, the assistant controller, is now preparing a monthly budget for the first quarter of 20X1. In the process, the following information has been accumulated: 1. Projected sales for December 20X0 are $400,000. Credit sales typically are 75% of total sales. Universal s credit experience indicates 10% of the credit sales is collected during the month of sale, and the remainder is collected during the following month. 2. Universal s cost of goods sold generally is 70% of sales. Inventory is purchased on account and 40% of each month s purchases are paid during the month of purchase. The remainder is paid during the following month. To have adequate stocks of inventory on hand, the firm attempts to have inventory at the end of each month equal to half of the next month s projected cost of goods sold. 3. Garrity has estimated that the company s other monthly expenses follow: a. Sales salaries .$20,000 b. Advertising and promotion . 17,500 c. Administrative salaries .. 21,500 d. Depreciation . 25,000 e. Interest on bonds 3,750 f. Property tax .. 900 In addition, sales commissions run at the rate of 1% of sales. 4. Universal s president, Carrie Howland, has indicated the firm should invest $125,000 in an automated inventory handling system to control the movement of inventory in the firm s warehouse just after the new year begins. This equipment purchase will be financed primarily from the firm s cash and marketable securities. However, Howland believes Universal needs to keep a minimum cash balance of $25,000. If necessary, the remainder of the equipment purchases will be financed using short term credit from a local bank. The minimum period for such a loan is three months. Garrit believes that short term interest rates will be 10% per year at the time of the equipment purchases. If a loan is necessary, Howland has decided it should be paid off by the end of the first quarter if possible. 5. The board of directors has indicated its intention to declare and pay dividends of $50,000 on the last day of each quarter. 6. The interest on any short term borrowing will be paid when the loan is repaid. Interest on Budget s bonds is paid semiannually on January 31 and July 31 for the preceding six month period. 7. Property taxes are paid semiannually on February 28 and August 31 for the preceding six month period. REQUIRED: Work with your group (no more than 4 people) to prepare Universal s master budget for the first quarter of 20X1 by completing the following schedules and statements in an excel spreadsheet. You will need to name your workbook and then provide the analysis for a-i by utilizing excel formulas and references. See Blackboard for schedule formats. Given formats MUST be used. Points will be deducted for other formats used. a. Sales Budget b. Cash Receipts Budget c. Purchases Budget d. Cash Disbursements Budget e. Summary Cash Budget* f. Analysis of short-term financing needs g. Budgeted Income Statement for the first quarter of 20X1 h. Budgeted Statement of Retained Earnings for the first quarter of 20X1 i. Budgeted Balance Sheet as of 3/31/20X1 *Complete the first three lines of the summary cash budget. Then do the analysis of short-term financing needs in requirement f. Next, finish the summary cash budget. NOTE: If you must contact the instructor for assistance on this project, there will be a consulting fee for the shared intellectual capital. A simple question and answer will result in a 1 point deduction per question from the final project. A question that results in computations will result in a 5 point deduction per question from the final project. Utilize your available resources (textbook, google, etc.). DUE DATE: April 11th. Submit your excel workbook to by the deadline by using UMKC Dropbox (https://dropbox.umkc.edu/). Don t forget to identify your group within the workbook, I suggest a cover worksheet with group member information. In addition to project submission, each group member will need to complete a group evaluation form which can be found on Blackboard. These will be considered when assigning individual grades. GRADING: The project is worth a total of 200 points. 195 points are assigned to the project directly based upon the correct mathematical answers, format, and usage of excel formulas/references. To ensure you earn the additional 5 points, the group evaluation form must be completed by each student and submitted via UMKC Dropbox by the above mentioned due date. Evaluations are taken very seriously and will be considered when determining final grade for project on a per student basis.

Some Hints:

1) In order to ensure you are clear with respect to the production budget, the desired ending inventory is given in the balance sheet above (referring to the project worksheet), so use the $154k for December’s desired ending inventory. For the months going forward you’ll use the 50% of the following month’s COGS to determine desired ending inventory. Ergo the desired ending inventory is NOT $161k. And, as always, the ending inventory for one month becomes the beginning inventory for the following month. Here’s a check figure: Required purchases for December 2000 are $294,000.

That should keep you on the right track!

Ok, here’s another clarification tid-bit: When the problem talks about a minimum cash balance requirement, this is only to be taken into consideration when computing the short-term financing needs. This does not apply to the rest of the problem and here’s why. So at 1/1/XX (whatever year it is), the president says, “We’re buying a machine. And since we’ve yet to receive money from sales or pay any bills let’s make sure we keep at LEAST $25,000 in the bank to cover bills and such.” We (the accountants) say, Ok sure. So we go back to our desk and crunch the numbers in order to determine our short-term financing needs. And we say, alright on 12/31 we had a cash balance of $45K, we have to maintain a cash balance of $25K so we’ve only got $20K to put towards this purchase and we’re gonna need a WHOLE lot more than that to buy this machine. So we rangle up some more money by selling stocks and then decide to take out a loan for the rest.

2) The cash minimum is only for the very first part of January, before cash receipts come and and cash disbursements go out. So please don’t freak out if your cash balance as of 3/31/XX is less than $25K. That’s OK!

Attachments:

haupt consulting uploaded version 494688

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

12/18/2010 8100 1700 300 2000 3600 3900 10000 2500 500 200 16400 16400 12/31/2010 7700 1500 100 2000 33 3600 60 3600 700 600 10000 1600 3200 500 200 700 33 60 200 18193 18193 6 6 7 Haupt Consulting Balance Debit Credit Account Tide Cash Account receivable Supplies Equipment Accumulated depreciation-eqiup Furniture Accumulated depreciation-furniture Account payable Salary payable Unearned service revenue Carl haupt Capital Carl Haupt Withdrawal Service Revenue Rent expense Utlilities expense Salary Expense Depreciation expense-equip Depreciation expense-furniture Supplies expense total T accounts Adjusted Trial Balance Trial Balance 1 completed the accounting work sheet at dec 31 2 Journalize and post the closing entries at Dec 31 Denote each closing amount as CLO and an account balance as BAL 3. Prepare a classified balance sheet at dec 31. Complete accounting worksheet at 12/31 Journalize and post closing entries at 12/31 Prepare classified balance sheet Accuracy and timeliness ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

have a homework assignment in accounting 494689

This is requirement for Accounting 212. There are highlighted areas that require extra attention.

Note says “to remember to expand your answer on the explanation questions….I want to see what you know and not just what the textbook is stating”. Applies specifically to questions 12 & 13 and/or any others that may require it.

File to be in Word, .doc or .docx format.

Document Preview:

1. Explain why it is important to record credit sales in a sales journal? And, explain why it is important to then post from the sales journal to the general ledger accounts? 2. Explain why the following objectives are important to the accounts receivable process: A. Post from the sales journal to the customers’ accounts in the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger. B. Record sales returns and allowances in the general journal. C. Post sales returns and allowances. D. Prepare a schedule of accounts receivable. 3. Explain why the following objectives are important in handling special topics in merchandising: A. Computation of trade discounts. B. Record credit card sales in appropriate journals. C. Prepare the state sales tax return. 4. Tell me what are some possible consequences of out-of-date accounts receivable records? 5. Explain completely and compute the following, showing your work and how you arrived at the answer: A. What are the four types of credit sales? B. What account is used to record sales tax owed by a business to a city or state? C. What is the difference between list price and net price? D. If a wholesale business offers a trade discount of 30 percent on a sale of $6,325, what is the amount of the discount? E. An organization that purchases $4,500 of goods from a wholesaler offering trade discounts of 25 and 15 percent will pay what amount for the goods? F. Imagine you own a business, and you are thinking about extending credit to customers to increase sales. What factors would you consider in deciding whether or not to extend credit to a customer? 6. Compute the following, showing all work to arrive at your answer: Sales Journal Date Sales Slip # Customer’s Account Debited Accounts Receivable Debit Sales Tax Payable Credit Sales Credit 4/25/2003 4100 Sara Siddle $ 321.00 $ 21.00 $…

Attachments:

finance 494645

7/22/2012 2010 17.25 1.1499999999999999 48.75 3 11663.98 2009 15 1.06 52.3 2.9 8785.7000000000007 2008 16.5 1 48.75 2.75 8679.98 2007 10.75 0.95 57.25 2.5 6434.03 2006 11.375 0.9 60 2.25 5602.28 2005 7.625 0.85 55.75 2 4705.97 2010 2009 2008 2007 2006 2010 0 0 0 2009 0 0 0 2008 0 0 0 2007 0 0 0 2006 0 0 0 0.05 6.0400000000000002E-2 6.0400000000000002E-2 0.05 0.1104 0.25 0.76900000000000002 0.15 0.98499999999999999 0.4 1.2230000000000001 0.

Document Preview:

7/22/2012 2010 17.25 1.1499999999999999 48.75 3 11663.98 2009 15 1.06 52.3 2.9 8785.7000000000007 2008 16.5 1 48.75 2.75 8679.98 2007 10.75 0.95 57.25 2.5 6434.03 2006 11.375 0.9 60 2.25 5602.28 2005 7.625 0.85 55.75 2 4705.97 2010 2009 2008 2007 2006 2010 0 0 0 2009 0 0 0 2008 0 0 0 2007 0 0 0 2006 0 0 0 0.05 6.0400000000000002E-2 6.0400000000000002E-2 0.05 0.1104 0.25 0.76900000000000002 0.15 0.98499999999999999 0.4 1.2230000000000001 0.2 1 7/22/2012 Standard deviation of returns Risk-free rate = = Beta Market Risk Premium * Risk-free rate + Portfolio Weight Stock C Stock A Stock B Portfolio Beta = Year Stock Price Dividend Index Reynolds Incorporated Includes Divs. Data as given in the problem are shown below: Reynolds Bartman Industries Average Bartman Coefficient of Variation Bartman’s beta = Reynolds’ beta = Bartman: Reynolds: Required return The beta of a portfolio is simply a weighted average of the betas of the stocks in the portfolio, so this portfolio’s beta would be: Portfolio beta = * Beta Required return on portfolio: Expected return on market = Risk-free rate Market risk premium + Use the function wizard to calculate the standard deviations. Market Index We now calculate the rates of return for the two companies and the index: c. Now calculate the coefficients of variation Bartman, Reynolds, and the Market Index. Note: To get the average, you could get the column sum and divide by 5, but you could also use the function wizard, fx. Click fx, then statistical, then Average, and then use the mouse to select the proper range. Do this for Bartman and then copy the cell for the other items. b. Calculate the standard deviation of the returns for Bartman, Reynolds, and the Market Index. (Hint: Use the sample standard deviation formula given in the chapter, which corresponds to the STDEV function in Excel.) It is easiest to make scatter diagrams with a data set that has the X-axis…

Attachments:

finance 494646

find both company’s financial pages at:http://www.google.com/finance/stockscreener. Add the criteria of long-term debt to assets to ensure the company has debt. Add the criteria of dividends per share. Find both copany’s financial pages at:http://www.sec.gov/edgar.shtml. Look at the long term debt on the balance sheet. Determine the coupon price, the length until maturity and the yield to maturity. Calculate today’s price of bond.

1. List the pertinent information on the bond you chose and then calculate the price of one bond from both companies.

2. Which bond is receiving the higher price? Explain your answer.

3. From a time value of money frame of mind what does each rate say about the viewpoint on the time value of money?

4. Which company has a better credit rating? Explain your answer.

5. Based on the credit rating which company do you believe the bank feels more secure will pay back the loan? Explain your answer.

6. Why does the bank charge more interest for one company than the another?

7. What does the credit rating say to investor?

8. Which bond looks is more finanically attractive? Explain why do you chose the answer you did.

700 – 1,000 words cities and References

Part II: Understanding how to properly find the value of a stock using the dividend growth rate is a fundamental building block in valuation. Using the same two companies, evaluate each stock using a constant dividend growth model

1. Calculate the future growth rate for both companies.

2. Which stock has better growth rate? Do you agree with this assessment? Explain. Support your answer with either a description of a new product growth or from past growth performance.

3. Calculate the future stock price for both companies.

4. From a time value of money point of view stand point what does the calculated stock price say about the market’s view on the time value of money for each stock?

5. Compare the calculated stock price with the current stock price for both companies.

6. Is either stock underpriced or overpriced? Explain.

7. Should an investor purchase either of those stocks?

8. Should one stock out perform the other?

9. Based on the ratings found in Phase 4, does one stock seem more finally healthy? Explain.

10. Does this financial health make a stronger case to invest in the stock? Explain.

700 – 1,000 words Cities and References and please elaborate on the answers to the questions that are given that the correction from my professor.

finance for jan v 494647

This assignment is in regards to finance and financial management:

Document Preview:

Assignment 1 ?Assignment 1 is due after you complete Lessons 1 to 4. It is worth 20% of your final grade.??Prepare your responses to these assignment problems in a word processing file; put financial data in a spreadsheet file. As you complete the assignment problems for each lesson, add your responses to these files. Do not submit your answers for grading until you have completed all parts of Assignment 1. ??Note: In assignments, show all calculations to 4 decimal places.  Lesson 1: Assignment Problems 1.1?Households make four kinds of economic decisions (textbook, pp. 4–5). Suppose you have two households with the same income. Household A has one income earner and Household B has two income earners. ?How would the four types of economic decisions differ between these two otherwise identical households? (8 marks)??1.2?Three friends have just graduated, each with a B.Mgt. degree. One wants to start a restaurant and another wants to work as a subcontractor in a building trade. The third friend wants to put together a firm with a couple of other graduates to provide several kinds of complementary financial services including insurance, financial planning, and bookkeeping.??What form of business organization (textbook, pp. 8–9) would you suggest each of the three friends should use, and why? (12 marks)???Do not submit these questions for grading until you have completed all parts of Assignment 1, due after Lesson 4. ?? Lesson 2: Assignment Problems 2.1?Adam Smith is often called the father of economics. His famous book, The Wealth of Nations,talks about an “invisible hand” which automatically allocates goods to the persons most able to put them to good use. The invisible hand operates through the price mechanism for goods and services, so that individuals who trade on the market, while seeking only their own good, are actually efficiently allocating society’s resources.??His ideas, if applied to modern capital markets, imply that these markets would efficiently…

Attachments:

financial accounting 494648

i need this with in 8 hours can anybody do it?

Document Preview:

Bus Adm-201 Fall 2013 EXTRA CREDIT TWO Due in DS week of November 18 GRADING: Worth 15 points. Partially completed problems will not be accepted. If you complete all items requested, you will earn at least 5 points. The remaining points are dependent on accuracy of your answers! Green Bay Konkers Corporation prepares quarterly financial statements. The balance sheet at 12/31/13 is presented below. Balance Sheet 12/31/2013 Cash $ 26,500 Accounts payable $ 36,200 Accounts receivable 22,300 Common stock 130,000 Allowance for doubtful accounts (2,000) Retained earnings 50,600 Equipment 35,000 Accumulated depreciation – equipment (25,000) Land 40,000 Building 160,000 Accumulated depreciation – building (40,000) $ 216,800 $216,800 During the first quarter of 2014, the following transactions occurred: 1. Green Bay Konkers performed services during the first quarter for $162,000 on account. 2. On 2/1/14, Green Bay Konkers collected fees of $18,000 in advance for $1,500 of services to be performed each month from 2/1/14 to 1/30/15. 3. On 2/1/14, Green Bay Konkers purchased computer equipment for $15,000 plus sales taxes of $750. $5,000 cash was paid with the rest on account. Check #455 was used. 4. Green Bay Konkers collected $151,000 on 3/5/14 from customers on account. 5. Green Bay Konkers paid $42,300 on accounts payable. Check #456 was used. 6. Paid other operating expenses of $105,230. Check #457 was used. 7. Acquired a patent with a 10-year life for $12,000 cash on 3/1/14. Check #458 was used. 8. Wrote off a customer receivable of $500 who went bankrupt. 9. On 3/31/14, Green Bay Konkers sold for $2,780 cash equipment which originally cost $16,000. It had an estimated life of 5 years and salvage of $1,000. Accumulated depreciation as of 12/31/13 was $13,500 using the straight line method. Record depreciation on the equipment sold, then record the sale. 10. AJE 3/31/14: Record revenue earned from item 2…

Attachments:

financial accounting 494649

Week 4 Assignment — due Day 7 (Sunday)

Individual

Exercise 2

Resource: Ch. 4 of Financial Accounting

Complete Exercise BE4-1.

Complete Problems 4-2A & 4-3A.

Submit as either a Microsoft Excel (this is preferred — use multiple tabs) or Microsoft Word document place your work in only one file.

Attachments:

financial accounting assignment 494650

Pretty Simple assignment, just time consuming.

Document Preview:

0 0 2 4 0 2 4 4 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8 5 9 6 10 7 11 8 12 9 13 10 14 11 1 12 2 13 3 14 4 1 2 2 4 1 3 2 4 2 4 8 4 3 5 9 4 4 6 2 5 5 7 3 5 6 8 3 5 7 9 8 10 9 11 10 12 11 13 12 14 13 1 14 2 3 5 4 6 4 6 5 6 5 6 5 1 6 7 6 7 6 7 6 7 7 8 7 8 7 8 8 8 8 9 8 9 9 3 3 3 9 3 0 4 1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8 5 9 6 10 7 11 8 12 9 13 10 14 11 1 12 2 13 3 14 4 0 2 1 3 10 20 2 4 80 160 1 40 3 5 30 60 40 4 6 200 400 5 7 40 80 6 8 90 180 7 1 20 40 8 2 70 140 0 2 140 0 140 0 3 20 20 4 160 160 5 60 60 6 400 400 7 80 80 8 180 180 0 0 0 2 20 40 40 20 30 60 60 240 200 400 400 50 15 30 30 40 65 130 130 100 120 240 240 60 30 60 60 20 80 160 160 60 15 30 30 10 20 120 240 65 130 25 50 20 40 50 100 0 -1 30 60 10 20 -1 30 60 -1 -1 -1 -4 -1 120 240 15 30 10 20 20 40 -1 10 20 -1 55 110 -1 65 130 -3 50 100 65 130 -30 -60 85 170 -1 -1 15 30 -1 30 60 -1 25 50 -1 80 160 -5 200 400 350 700 -1 -1 20 40 -1 30 60 -1 30 60 -4 120 240 200 400 -1 65 130 -3 85 170 -4 150 300 -8 350 700 0 4 1 5 30 120 2 6 50 200 1 160 3 7 40 160 160 4 8 25 100 5 9 35 140 6 1 40 160 2 40 7 2 10 40 40 8 3 60 240 9 4 20 80 3 240 240 4 80 80 5 120 120 6 200 200 7 160 160 8 100 100 9 140 140 0 4 120 200 80 30 50 20 120 200 80 80 180 40 20 45 10 80 180 40 10 5 10 40 20 40 800 720 480 200 180 120 800 720 480 400 612 96 100 153 24 400 612 96 1000 800 400 250 200 100 1000 800 400 0.5 0.85 0.2 0.5 0.85 0.2 0.04 2.5000000000000001E-2 0.1 0.04 2.5000000000000001E-2 0.1 0 4 1 1 1000 4000 2 2 900 3600 1 4000 3 3 100 400 4000 4 4 5000 20000 5 5 10 40 6 6 300 1200 2 3600 7 7 500 2000 3600 8 8 6000 24000 9 9 100 400 10 10 300 1200 3 400 11 11 400 1600 400 4 20000 20000 5 40 …

Attachments:

financial accounting excel project 494651

PROJECT:The project is completion of a step by step spreadsheet following the accounting cycle. The spreadsheet and steps are provided to the students. Students may also obtain consultation/guidance from the instructor throughout the semester in regards to their progress on the project. The project should take 8-10 hours in total.

Document Preview:

Post Closing Trial Balance Closing Entries Financial Statements Adjusted Trial Balance Adjusting Entries Trial Balance General Ledger Journal Entries REQUIREMENT #1: completed the following transactions: July 1 Began business by making a deposit in a company bank account of $24,000, in exchange Paid the premium on a one-year insurance policy, $2,400. Paid the current month’s rent, $2,080. July 3 placed on account. Payments will be $400.00 per month for nineteen months. The first payment is due 8/1. July 8 July 12 Paid utility bill for July, $308. July 16 July 19 July 31 Declared and paid cash dividend of $1,600. Prepare journal entries to record the July transactions in the General Journal below. General Journal Date Description(Account Name) Debit Credit Cash Common Stock Prepaid Insurance Rent Expense Landscaping Equipment Accounts Payable Landscaping Supplies Utility Expense Landscaping Revenue for 4,800 shares of $5 par value common stock. Note: Use Accounts Payable for the Balance Due. Received cash for landscaping revenue for the first half of July, $2,724. Received cash for landscaping revenue for the last half of July, $2,620. Use the following account names for journal entries. Chart of Accounts: Account Title (Normal Balance) Assets Cash (Debit) Prepaid Insurance (Debit) Landscaping Supplies (Debit) Landscaping Equipment (Debit) Accum Depr -Equipment (Credit) Liabilities Accounts Payable (Credit) Income Tax Payable (Credit) Stockholders Equity Common Stock (Credit) Retained Earnings (Credit) Dividends (Debit) Revenue Landscaping Revenue (Credit) Expenses Rent Expense (Debit) Utility Expense (Debit) Insurance Expense (Debit) Supplies Expense (Debit) Depreciation Expense (Debit) Income Tax Expense (Debit) Note: Remember that Debits must equal Credits – All of your Journal Entries should balance. During its first month of operation, the IDEAL Landscaping Corporation, which specializes in…

Attachments:

financial accounting excel project 494652

Financial Accounting Excel project

PROJECT:The project is completion of a step by step spreadsheet following the accounting cycle. The spreadsheet and steps are provided to the students. Students may also obtain consultation/guidance from the instructor throughout the semester in regards to their progress on the project.

Attachments:

financial analysis 494654

In this task you will use the Competition Bikes Inc. Storyline case study to prepare a summary report based on your evaluation of the company s operations.

Task:

Note: Be sure to submit a copy of your Excel workbook when submitting your JET2 Task 1 work. The evaluator will need a copy of your data to ensure correct evaluation.

A. Prepare a summary report in which you do the following:

1. Evaluate the company s operational strengths and weaknesses based on the following:

a. Horizontal analysis results

b. Vertical analysis results

c. Trend analysis results

d. Ratio analysis results

2. Analyze the working capital of Competition Bikes Inc. Consider the following in your analysis:

Ways to improve the working capital

Ways to use excess working capital to generate an increase in profits

3. Evaluate the internal controls for the Competition Bikes Inc. purchasing system.

a. Recommend corrective actions for any weaknesses.

b. Identify the risks to the company.

i. Discuss how to mitigate the risks arising from internal control weaknesses.

4. Analyze compliance with Sarbanes Oxley requirements.

a. Recommend corrective actions for noncompliant areas.

B. If you use sources, include all in-text citations and references in APA format

Unsatisfactory

Needs Revision

Satisfactory

Score/Level

Articulation of Response (clarity, organization, mechanics)

The candidate provides unsatisfactory articulation of response.

The candidate provides weak articulation of response.

The candidate provides adequate articulation of response.

A1a. Horizontal Analysis

The candidate does not provide a logical evaluation of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the horizontal analysis results.

The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with insufficient support, of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the horizontal analysis results.

The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with sufficient support, of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the horizontal analysis results.

A1b. Vertical Analysis

The candidate does not provide a logical evaluation of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the vertical analysis results.

The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with insufficient support, of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the vertical analysis results.

The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with sufficient support, of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the vertical analysis results.

A1c. Trend Analysis

The candidate does not provide a logical evaluation of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the trend analysis results.

The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with insufficient support, of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the trend analysis results.

The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with sufficient support, of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the trend analysis results.

A1d. Ratio Analysis

The candidate does not provide a logical evaluation of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the ratio analysis results.

The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with insufficient support, of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the ratio analysis results.

The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with sufficient support, of the company s strengths and weaknesses based on the ratio analysis results.

A2. Working Capital

The candidate does not provide a plausible analysis of the working capital of Competition Bikes Inc.

The candidate provides a plausible analysis, with insufficient support, of the working capital of Competition Bikes Inc.

The candidate provides a plausible analysis, with sufficient support, of the working capital of Competition Bikes Inc.

A3. Internal Controls

The candidate does not provide a logical evaluation of the internal controls for the Competition Bikes Inc. purchasing system.

The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with insufficient detail, of the internal controls for the Competition Bikes Inc. purchasing system.

The candidate provides a logical evaluation, with sufficient detail, of the internal controls for the Competition Bikes Inc. purchasing system.

A3a. Weakness Corrective Actions

The candidate does not provide an appropriate recommendation of corrective actions for any weaknesses.

The candidate provides an appropriate recommendation, with insufficient detail, of corrective actions for any weaknesses.

The candidate provides an appropriate recommendation, with sufficient detail, of corrective actions for any weaknesses.

A3b. Risks

The candidate does not identify the risks to the company.

Not applicable.

The candidate identifies the risks to the company.

A3bi. Risk Mitigation

The candidate does not provide a logical discussion of how to mitigate the risks arising from internal control weaknesses.

The candidate provides a logical discussion, with insufficient support, of how to mitigate the risks arising from internal control weaknesses.

The candidate provides a logical discussion, with sufficient support, of how to mitigate the risks arising from internal control weaknesses.

A4. Compliance

The candidate does not provide a plausible analysis of compliance with Sarbanes Oxley requirements.

The candidate provides a plausible analysis, with insufficient support, of compliance with Sarbanes Oxley requirements.

The candidate provides a plausible analysis, with sufficient support, of compliance with Sarbanes Oxley requirements.

A4a. Noncompliance Corrective Actions

The candidate does not provide an appropriate recommendation of corrective actions for noncompliant areas.

The candidate provides an appropriate recommendation, with insufficient detail, of corrective actions for noncompliant areas.

The candidate provides an appropriate recommendation, with sufficient detail, of corrective actions for noncompliant areas.

B. Sources

If the candidate uses sources, the candidate does not provide in-text citations and/or references for each source used.

If the candidate uses sources, the candidate provides appropriate in-text citations and/or references with major deviations from APA style.

If the candidate uses sources, the candidate provides appropriate in-text citations and/or references accurately or with only minor deviations from APA style, OR the candidate does not use sources.

financial analysis data problem assignement for smith comp 494655

To get started:

  • Review the attached PPT and WORD files on analysis of financial data.
  • Open the attached Excel document. Rename and save the document to your computer.

The Balance Sheet and Income Statement for Wal-Mart, Inc. are provided in the Walmart excel file, along with the worksheet you will complete.

On the Ratio Analysis worksheet, complete a ratio analysis of Walmartbased on the five categories of analysis discussed in the PPT lesson.

In EXCEL format, calculate at least two ratios from each category of Liquidity, Activity, Debt, Profitability, and Market, using the figures in the Jan 2011 and Jan 2012 columns.

This is a ratio calculation assignment- no written analysis.

For the Market/Book and Price/Book Ratios, you will need to find the current stock price for WalMart online.

If you do not have MS Excel, this assignment can be done in OpenOffice.

Document Preview:

1/31/2012 1/31/2011 1/31/2010 1/31/2009 1/31/2008 1/31/2007 443854 418952 405046 401244 374526 344992 -335127 -315287 -304657 -306158 -286515 -264152 108727 103665 100389 95086 88011 80840 3096 2897 3168 4363 4273 3658 -85265 -81020 -79607 -76651 -70288 -64001 26558 25542 23950 22798 21996 20497 -2322 -2205 -2065 -2184 -2103 -1809 162 201 181 284 305 280 -2160 -2004 -1884 -1900 -1798 -1529 24398 23538 22066 20898 20198 18968 -7944 -7579 -7139 -7145 -6908 -6365 16454 15959 14927 13753 13290 12603 -67 1034 -79 146 -153 -894 16387 16993 14848 13899 13137 11709 -688 -604 -513 -499 -406 -425 15699 16389 14335 13400 12731 11284 1/31/2012 1/31/2011 1/31/2010 1/31/2009 1/31/2008 1/31/2007 6550 7395 7907 7275 5569 7373 5937 5089 4144 3905 3654 2840 40714 36318 33160 34511 35180 33685 1685 2960 2980 3063 3182 2690 89 131 140 195 54975 51893 48331 48949 47585 46588 109603 105098 99544 92856 93875 85390 2721 2780 2763 2797 3142 3050 112324 107878 102307 95653 97017 88440 20651 16763 16126 15260 16071 13759 5456 4129 3942 3567 2841 2406 138431 128770 122375 114480 115929 104605 193406 180663 170706 163429 163514 151193 1/31/2012 1/31/2011 1/31/2010 1/31/2009 1/31/2008 1/31/2007 4047 1031 523 1506 5040 2570 36608 33557 30451 28849 30370 28090 5089 5895 5986 5577 5247 5347 3638 3447 3224 3108 2907 2954 9427 9359 9524 9427 7645 6374 18154 18701 18734 18112 15799 14675 1164 157 1365 677 1016 706 1975 4655 4050 5848 5913 5428 326 336 346 315 316 285 26 47 92 83 62300 58484 55561 55390 58454 51754 44070 40692 33231 31349 29799 27222 3009 3150 3170 3200 3603 3513 7862 6682 5508 6014 5111 4971 54941 50524 41909 40563 38513 35706 117241 109008 97470 95953 96967 87460 404 408 307 397 342 352 378 393 397 413 3692 3577 3803 3920 3028 2834 68691 63967 66638 63660 57319 55818 -1410 646 -70 -2688 3864 2508 71315 68542 70749 65285 64608 61573 4446 2705 2180 1794 1939 2160 75761 71247 72…

financial investments 494656

Exercise 1

As auditor for Banquo & Associates, you have been assigned to check Duncan Corporation s computation of earnings per share for the current year. The controller, Mac Beth, has supplied you with the following computations.

Net income $3,374,960
Common shares issued and outstanding:

Beginning of year

1,285,000

End of year

1,200,000

Average

1,242,500
Earnings per share:
$3,374,960 = $2.72 per share
1,242,500

You have developed the following additional information.

  1. There are no other equity securities in addition to the common shares.
  2. There are no options or warrants outstanding to purchase common shares.
  3. There are no convertible debt securities.
  4. Activity in common shares during the year was as follows.
Outstanding, Jan. 1 1,285,000
Treasury shares acquired, Oct. 1 (250,000)
1,035,000
Shares reissued, Dec. 1 165,000
Outstanding, Dec. 31 1,200,000

Questions:

  1. On the basis of the information above, do you agree with the controller s computation of earnings per share for the year? If you disagree, prepare a revised computation of earnings per share.
  2. Assume the same facts as those presented above, except that options had been issued to purchase 140,000 shares of common stock at $10 per share. These options were outstanding at the beginning of the year, and none had been exercised or canceled during the year. The average market price of the common shares during the year was $25, and the ending market price was $35. What earnings per share amounts will be reported?

Exercise 2

Powerpuff Corp. carries an account in its general ledger called investments, which contained the following debits for investment purchases and no credits.

Feb. 1, 2012 Blossom Company common stock, $100 par, 200 shares $ 37,400
April 1 U.S. Government bonds, 11%, due April 1, 2012, interest payable April 1 and October 1, 100 bonds of $1,000 par each 100,000
July 1 Buttercup Company 12% bonds, par $50,000, dated March 1, 2012, purchased at par plus accrued interest, interest payable annually on March 1, due March 1, 2032 52,000

Questions:

  1. Assuming that all the investments are classified as available-for-sale, use the spreadsheet Journal Entries to prepare the journal entries necessary to classify the amounts into the proper accounts.
  2. Prepare the entry to record the accrued interest on December 31, 2012.
  3. The fair values of the investments on December 31, 2012, were:
  • Blossom Company common stock $ 33,800 (1% interest)
  • U.S. Government bonds 124,700
  • Buttercup Company bonds 58,600

Use the spreadsheet
Available for Sale to prepare a schedule indicating any fair value adjustment needed at December 31, 2012. 4. Now assume Powerpuff s investment in Blossom Company represents 30% of Blossom s shares. In 2012, Blossom declared and paid dividends of $9,000 (on September 30) and reported net income of $30,000. Prepare a brief memorandum explaining how the accounting for the Blossom investment will change, and discuss the impact on the financial statements of Powerpuff Corp.

Attachments:

financial management assignment 494657

needs help doing an assignment due next monday

Document Preview:

Assignment 2: The Weighted Average Cost of Capital By Wednesday, September 25, 2013, complete the following assignment: Coogly Company is attempting to identify its weighted average cost of capital for the coming year and has hired you to answer some questions they have about the process. They have asked you to present this information in a PowerPoint presentation to the company’s management team.  The company would like for you to keep your presentation to approximately 10 slides and use the notes section in PowerPoint to clarify your point. Your presentation should address the following questions and offer a final recommendation to Coogly. Make sure you support your answers and clearly explain the advantages and disadvantages of utilizing the weighted average cost of capital methodology. Include at least one graph or chart in your presentation. Company Information The capital structure for the firm will be maintained and is now 10% preferred stock, 30% debt, and 60% new common stock.  No retained earnings are available.   The marginal tax rate for the firm is 40%. Coogly has outstanding preferred stock that pays a dividend of $4 per share and sells for $82 per share, with a floatation cost of $6 per share. What is the component cost for Coogly’s preferred stock? What are the advantages and disadvantages of using preferred stock in the capital structure? If the company issues new common stock, it will sell for $50 per share with a floatation cost of $9 per share. The last dividend paid was $3.80 and this dividend is expected to grow at a rate of 7% for the foreseeable future. What is the cost of new equity to the firm? What are the advantages and disadvantages of issuing new equity in the capital structure? The company will use new bonds for any capital project, according to the capital structure. These bonds will have a market and par value of $1000, with a coupon rate of 6% and a floatation cost of 7%. The bonds will mature in 20 years and no other debt…

Attachments:

financial amp managerial accting mba 560 unit 6 494658

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

56000 140000 31000 31000 1.8064516129032258 4.5161290322580649 21 10.5 21 10.5 180000 90000 90000 1 90000 90000 1 90000 Student Name: Class: Problem 11-27 JUSTIN ZINDER, VENTURE CAPITALIST Requirement a. Company Name Ensley Kelley Contribution Margin Divided by Net Income Operating Leverage Requirement b. Variable Cost Per Unit Sales Revenue Variable Cost Fixed Cost Net Income Percentage Change Requirement c. Requirement d. Problem 12-14 SINGH MANUFACTURING COMPANY Requirement a: Cost Assignment Cost Assignment Categories Dept. M Dept. N Indirect Salary of V. P. of Production Division Salary of Supervisor Department M Salary of Supervisor Department N Direct Materials Cost Department M Direct Materials Cost Department N Direct Labor Cost Department M Direct Labor Cost Department N Direct Utilities Cost Department M Direct Utilities Cost Department N General Factory wide Utilities Production Supplies Fringe Benefits Depreciation Total Costs Requirement b: Total Estimated Cost of Products Allocation Cost Base Rate Salary of VP No. of depts. General utilities Direct utility Production supplies Direct materials Fringe benefits Direct labor Machine hours Weight Allocated Costs of Base to Dept. M to Dept. N Salary of Vice President General Utilities Total Indirect Cost Requirement c: Price per Unit Department M N Total Direct Cost Total Production Costs Number of Units Cost per Unit Price Enter appropriate data in yellow cells. Your final answers for each column will be verified. Enter your memo in these cells. Enter appropriate data in yellow cells. Your answers for “Total Costs” will be verified. Enter appropriate data in yellow cells. Your answers for “Total Indirect Cost” will be verified. Enter appropriate data in yellow cells. Your answers for “Price” will be verified. ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

financial amp managerial accting mba 560 week 5 494659

Problem 9-22

Required
Use the financial statements for Bernard Company from Problem 9-22 to calculate the following for 2012 and 2011.
a. Working capital
b. Current ratio
c. Quick ratio
d. Accounts receivable turnover (beginning receivables at January 1, 2011, were $47,000)
e. Average number of days to collect accounts receivable
f. Inventory turnover (beginning inventory at January 1, 2011, was $140,000)
g. Average number of days to sell inventory
h. Debt to assets ratio
i. Debt to equity ratio
j. Times interest earned
k. Plant assets to long-term debt
l. Net margin
m. Asset turnover
n. Return on investment
o. Return on equity
p. Earnings per share
q. Book value per share of common stock
r. Price-earnings ratio (market price per share: 2011, $11.75; 2012, $12.50)
s. Dividend yield on common stock

Attachments:

financial statement analysis 494660

Financial Statement Analysis provides information that indicates how a company is performing. By comparing financial statements of different years, a manager can make informed decisions about investments, expenditures, and activities that impact revenues.

Directions: Read the chapter in the text titled Financial Statement Analysis. Using the comparative financial statements for Baby Cakes International Inc. (see BabyCakes_Financial_Project_Data.xls linked in the lesson activities) , complete the following tasks.

Note: The market price of BabyCakes Int l, Inc. common stock was $20 on December 31, 2008.

Part A:

Complete the 19 ratios listed below.

Determine the following measures for 2008:

1.

Working Capital

2.

Current ratio

3.

Quick ratio

4.

Accounts receivable turnover

5.

Number of days sales in receivables

6.

Inventory turnover

7.

Number of days sales in inventory

8.

Ratio of fixed assets to long-term liabilities

9.

Ratio of liabilities to stockholders equity

10.

Number of times interest charges earned

11.

Number of times preferred dividends earned

12.

Ratio of net sales to assets

13.

Rate earned on total assets

14.

Rate earned on stockholders equity

15.

Rate earned on common stockholder s equity

16.

Earnings per share on common stock

17.

Price-earnings ratio

18.

Dividends per share of common stock

19.

Dividend yield

Part B:

Explain what the results of each ratio indicate about the company.

Part C:

Complete a horizontal analysis for the Income Statement, and explain your findings.

Part D:

Complete a vertical analysis for the Income Statement, and explain your findings.

Attachments:

financial statements 494662

Financial Statements

We are going to be looking at the Balance Sheet (BS), the Profit and Loss Statement (P&L), and the Cash Flow Statement (CF). Obviously, all three are important but the P&L and Balance Sheet can reveal much about the current and dynamic state of the financial of the organization. This knowledge, while mundane for Accountants and Financial Managers, is sometimes not well understood even by high level managers of other departments. Marketing, Operations, Human Resources, Purchasing, Quality Assurance, and Sales departments need to deal with basic financial statements on a routine basis.

To some non-financial managers, the terminology and statements of the Finance Department can be as perplexing as a foreign language or a coded message. As a young manager, I attended an American Marketing Association course called “Finance for the Non-Financial Manager”. I thought it might be a waste of my time, but it really helped me advance in the organization. After the course, when I attended management meetings and the financial group presented their data using accounting jargon, I knew just what they were saying and felt comfortable interacting with them. I also gained respect from them for knowing how they presented information.

Just as important to your future is this: if you are going to rise up through the management hierarchy and eventually become a Vice President or President/CEO, you will certainly need to be able to understand and comment on the monthly financials. And when you present information to your Board of Directors, you will need to explain and answer questions on financial information. These financial statements are important.

  1. For this assignment, you will examine the financial statements found on pages 549 and 550. We will use the only P&L and the Balance Sheet for this exercise. Looking at the statements from a managerial point of view, I want you to decide the five (5) most important numbers, areas, etc. that you would initially look at for each statement. While doing so, comment on each one you have chosen and explain why you have singled them out as key indicators to you. Here are a few considerations to help you make your decision:
    • Which statement would you go to first? Why this one? Would you do this if you were the manager of a different department within the organization?
    • If you identify areas on the statement(s) that are of concern, where might you go next to dig deeper and verify your thoughts or allay your concerns?
    • Think about receiving an annual report for a stock you own. You will notice that it is thick but the statements we are looking at are but a few pages. Why is this? What is important about the rest of the report? (You can find annual reports online at the company website).
    • How are these statements interrelated? Do you see any common elements on both? How would you relate the two statements to come to a conclusion on the financial health of the organization?

Attachments:

financial statements simple answers 494663

Financial Statements

We are going to be looking at the Balance Sheet (BS), the Profit and Loss Statement (P&L), and the Cash Flow Statement (CF). Obviously, all three are important but the P&L and Balance Sheet can reveal much about the current and dynamic state of the financial of the organization. This knowledge, while mundane for Accountants and Financial Managers, is sometimes not well understood even by high level managers of other departments. Marketing, Operations, Human Resources, Purchasing, Quality Assurance, and Sales departments need to deal with basic financial statements on a routine basis.

To some non-financial managers, the terminology and statements of the Finance Department can be as perplexing as a foreign language or a coded message. As a young manager, I attended an American Marketing Association course called “Finance for the Non-Financial Manager”. I thought it might be a waste of my time, but it really helped me advance in the organization. After the course, when I attended management meetings and the financial group presented their data using accounting jargon, I knew just what they were saying and felt comfortable interacting with them. I also gained respect from them for knowing how they presented information.

Just as important to your future is this: if you are going to rise up through the management hierarchy and eventually become a Vice President or President/CEO, you will certainly need to be able to understand and comment on the monthly financials. And when you present information to your Board of Directors, you will need to explain and answer questions on financial information. These financial statements are important.

  1. For this assignment, you will examine the financial statements found on pages 549 and 550. We will use the only P&L and the Balance Sheet for this exercise. Looking at the statements from a managerial point of view, I want you to decide the five (5) most important numbers, areas, etc. that you would initially look at for each statement. While doing so, comment on each one you have chosen and explain why you have singled them out as key indicators to you. Here are a few considerations to help you make your decision:
    • Which statement would you go to first? Why this one? Would you do this if you were the manager of a different department within the organization?
    • If you identify areas on the statement(s) that are of concern, where might you go next to dig deeper and verify your thoughts or allay your concerns?
    • Think about receiving an annual report for a stock you own. You will notice that it is thick but the statements we are looking at are but a few pages. Why is this? What is important about the rest of the report? (You can find annual reports online at the company website).
    • How are these statements interrelated? Do you see any common elements on both? How would you relate the two statements to come to a conclusion on the financial health of the organization?

Attachments:

fin bus 494664

Forum due Tuesday Discuss the concept of risk and how it might be measured.

Document Preview:

Forum due Tuesday Discuss the concept of risk and how it might be measured. How can this concept be incorporated into the capital budgeting process? Quiz Week 5 due Saturday???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

the following unadjusted trial balance is for adams construction co as of the end of 494666

Question is attached !!

Document Preview:

The following unadjusted trial balance is for Adams Construction Co. as of the end of its 2011 fiscal year. The June 30, 2010, credit balance of the owner’s capital account was $52,660, and the owner invested $25,000 cash in the company during the 2011 fiscal year.  ? ? ?ADAMS CONSTRUCTION CO.? ? ? ?? ? ? ?Unadjusted Trial Balance? ? ? ?? ? ? ?30-Jun-11? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ?Unadjusted Trial? ?? ? ? ? ? ? ?Balance? ??No.?Account Title? ? ? ?Dr.?Cr.? ??101?Cash? ? ? ? ?$17,500 ? ? ??126?Supplies? ? ? ? ?8,900? ? ??128?Prepaid Insurance ? ? ? ?6,200? ? ??167?Equipment? ? ? ?131,000? ? ??168?Accumulated depreciation—-Equipment? ? ?$25,250 ? ??201?Accounts payable? ? ? ? ?5,800? ??203?Interest payable? ? ? ? ?0? ?? ?Utilities expense Payable? ? ? ? ? ??208?Rent payable? ? ? ? ?0? ??210?Wages payable? ? ? ? ?0? ??213?Property taxes payable? ? ? ?0? ??251?Long-Term notes payable? ? ? ?24,000? ??301?S. Adams, Capital? ? ? ? ?77,660? ??302?S. Adams, Withdrawals? ? ?30,000? ? ??401?Construction Fees earned? ? ? ?134,000? ??612?Depreciation expenses—-Equipment? ?0? ? ??623?Wages expense? ? ? ?45,860? ? ??633?Interest expense? ? ? ?2,640? ? ??637?Insurance expense? ? ? ?0??This document was truncated here because it was created in the Evaluation Mode.

Attachments:

exam 3 accounting mcqs 494616

Paid in capital-excess of par 46,000,000 ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Document Preview:

Paid in capital-excess of par 46,000,000 ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

example 494618

Document Preview:

2011 2010 53875 76625 -22750 496250 65000 49625 15375 -250000 273750 252500 21250 246250 5375 6250 -875 159500 110000 49500 18750 -34625 -44000 9375 136500 522875 451000 71875 -155250 91000 88125 116625 -28500 -5125 10000 6250 3750 85875 93750 53750 40000 -12125 168750 156250 12500 73750 32500 0 32500 129750 118125 11625 522875 451000 71875 480875 496250 -299750 -15375 -135625 480875 -12125 -447500 33375 250000 21250 11625 28500 -35000 299750 -23375 136500 3000 -875 -40500 0 47000 135625 -51900 -42400 -32400 76625 44225 0 -9650 12125 73750 0 18750 0 875 12125 5125 -15375 -21250 -28500 -40375 33375 Statement of Cash Flows 480875 496250 -299750 -15375 -135625 480875 -12125 -447500 33375 250000 21250 13625 28500 -25000 299750 -11375 136500 3750 -875 -31375 0 45000 135625 -62125 -44750 -22750 76625 53875 12125 73750 18750 875 12125 5125 -15375 -21250 -28500 -40375 33375 Statement of Cash Flows Cash received from customers Cash provided by/used for operating activities Investing Activities Cash paid for merchandise Net Cash provided by/used for Investing Activities Financing Activities Cash paid for operating expenses Net Cash provided by/used for Financing Activities Net Cash Decrease Beginning Cash Balance Ending Cash Balance Cash paid for interest Net Income Cash paid for income taxes Net Cash provided by Operating Activities Cash Received from Customers Sales Subtract Increase in AR Cash Paid for Merchandise Cost of Goods Sold Add increase in Merchandise Inventory Add decrease in Accounts Payable Cash Paid for Operating Expenses Operating Expenses Subtract decrease in Prepaid Expenses Income Tax Expense Cash Paid for Income Taxes Add Depreciation Add Decrease in Prepaid Expenses Add Losses Subtract Increase in Accounts Receivable Subtract Increase in Inventory Subtract Decrease in Accounts Payable Sold…

Attachments:

excel case study 494619

You work for the Farmers Wholesale Cooperative and help the financial director prepare and analyze revenue and expenses. He has asked you to create two PivotTables and corresponding PivotCharts from the annual sales worksheet for the Farmers Wholesale Cooperative. One PivotTable and PivotChart summarize the sales by farm and the other PivotTable and PivotChart summarize the dairy sales by month for the top dairy producer. Instructions: 1.

Document Preview:

You work for the Farmers Wholesale Cooperative and help the financial director prepare and analyze revenue and expenses. He has asked you to create two PivotTables and corresponding PivotCharts from the annual sales worksheet for the Farmers Wholesale Cooperative. One PivotTable and PivotChart summarize the sales by farm and the other PivotTable and PivotChart summarize the dairy sales by month for the top dairy producer. Instructions: 1. Create the workbook Farmers Wholesale use the data from the table below, name the worksheet tab Annual Sales and save the workbook using the file name, Unit 9 Project_Your Name. worksheet Sales by Farm. See below for ex Change cell A4 to Farms and cell B3 to Stores. Apply the Pivot Style Light 16 style to the PivotTable. Format the values as Currency values with a dollar sign and no decimal places. Apply the Style 19 to the PivotChart. Create a second PivotTable and associated PivotChart to determine the dairy sales by month in a separate worksheet in the workbook. Name the worksheet Dairy Sales by Month. See below for example: Change cell A4 to Month an d cell B 3 to Farm. Apply the Pivot Style Light 16 style to the PivotTable. Format the values as Currency values with a dollar sign and no decimal places. Turn off the legend for the chart. Filter the product type by Dairy. Filter the farm to Red Earth. Change the chart type to Line and then add a linear Trendline that forecasts the trend for two more months. Save the workbook. Using the concepts and techniques learned in the unit chapter’s readings, create the PivotTable and associated PivotChart to determine the sales by farm. Name the Change cell A4 to Month an d cell B 3 to Farm. Apply the Pivot Style Light 16 style to the PivotTable. Format the values as Currency values with a dollar sign and no decimal places. Turn off the legend for the chart. Filter the product type by Dairy. Filter the farm to Red Earth. Change the…

to excellentassignments 494625

The exam is based on Chapters 8, 9 and 10. Part 1 is a 40-question multiple choice exam located on Wileyplus. It is worth 80 points. It is timed, with 180 minutes to complete. Part 2 is a multi-part exam with journal entries and calculations from Chapters 8-10. Part 2 is worth 40 points. You have until the end of Wednesday, July 24 to complete the Exams. Accounting homework on wilyeplus: HW7-Ch11&12.Sum 2013  Statistics Homework #4 The exam is based on Chapters 8, 9 and 10. Part 1 is a 40-question multiple choice exam located on Wileyplus. It is worth 80 points.

Document Preview:

The exam is based on Chapters 8, 9 and 10. Part 1 is a 40-question multiple choice exam located on Wileyplus. It is worth 80 points. It is timed, with 180 minutes to complete. Part 2 is a multi-part exam with journal entries and calculations from Chapters 8-10. Part 2 is worth 40 points. You have until the end of Wednesday, July 24 to complete the Exams. Accounting homework on wilyeplus: HW7-Ch11&12.Sum 2013  Statistics Homework #4 The exam is based on Chapters 8, 9 and 10. Part 1 is a 40-question multiple choice exam located on Wileyplus. It is worth 80 points. It is timed, with 180 minutes to complete. Part 2 is a multi-part exam with journal entries and calculations from Chapters 8-10. Part 2 is worth 40 points. You have until the end of Wednesday, July 24 to complete the Exams. Accounting homework on wilyeplus: HW7-Ch11&12.Sum 2013  Statistics Homework #4 ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

excellentassignments only 494626

EXCELLENTASSIGNMENTS ONLY!

Document Preview:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 ACCOUNTING 101A SECTION 10915 FALL SEMESTER 2013 1. 3 PTS. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 4 PTS. 10. 6 PTS. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. a. b. c. What are the two “timing differences” which occur when preparing a bank reconciliation? from $15,000 to $18,000. In the other income secion of the income statement was a gain on the sale of land in the amount of $30,000. A company shows a net income for 2012 of $100,000. Included in its operating expenses is depreciation on equipment in the 5 PTS. FINAL EXAMINATION-CHAPTERS 7-13 amount of $8,000. During the year its accounts receivable balance went from $25,000 to $30,000. Its accounts payable balance went its credit sales for 2012? $_____________________________________________________ Indicate how each of the following situations would be handled when preparing a bank reconcilation? ______ An NSF check from a customer ______ A check written for $4,500 which has not yet been paid by the bank ______ A deposit in transit in the amount of $2,000 It takes a company on average 45 days to collect its accounts receivable. Based on this what would be the company’s accounts receivable turnover? Which depreciation method presented in Chapter 9 is not based on the “passage of time?” Name two types of payroll taxes which employers’ must pay and treat as expenses? d. e. f. g. h. i. j. Indicate what each of the following financial analyis ratios/calculations measures? On 1-1-12 a company issued $500,000 of bonds at a price of 97. The bonds pay interest semiannually on 1-1 and 7-1 and will mature on 12-31-2022. A company sold $250,000 of merchandise to customers on account in 2012. It began the year with $20,000 in accounts receivable and it ended the Price Earnings Ratio equals _______________________________ divided by EPS was placed in service on 7-1-12 and has a $5,000 salvage value…

Attachments:

exercises and problems week six xacc 291 494627

Resources: Ch. 11 & 12 of Financial Accounting

Complete Exercises E11-15, E12-1, & E12-2.

Complete Problem 11-6A.

Submit as a Microsoft Excel or Word document.

Document Preview:

568 Chapter Investments After studying this chapter, you should be able to: 1 Discuss why corporations invest in debt and stock securities. 2 Explain the accounting for debt investments. 3 Explain the accounting for stock investments. 4 Describe the use of consolidated financial statements. 5 Indicate how debt and stock investments are reported in financial statements. 6 Distinguish between short-term and long-term investments. S T U D Y O B J E C T I V E S Feature Story ?The Navigator 12“IS THERE ANYTHING ELSE WE CAN BUY?” In a rapidly changing world you must change rapidly or suffer the consequences. In business, change requires investment. A case in point is found in the entertainment industry. Technology is bringing about innovations so quickly that it is nearly impossible to guess which technologies will last and which will soon fade away. For example, will both satellite TV and cable TV survive, or will just one succeed, or will both be replaced by something else? Or consider the publishing industry. Will paper newspapers and magazines be replaced by online news via the World Wide Web? If you are a publisher, you have to make your best guess about what the future holds and invest accordingly. Time Warner, Inc. (www.timewarner.com) lives at the center of this arena. It is not an environment for the timid, and Time Warner’s philosophy is anything Scan Study Objectives ¦ Read Feature Story ¦ Read Preview ¦ Read text and answer p. 573 ¦ p. 578 ¦ p. 581 ¦ p. 584 ¦ Work Comprehensive p. 587 ¦ Review Summary of Study Objectives ¦ Answer Self-Study Questions ¦ Complete Assignments ¦ ?The Navigator Do it! Do it! JWCL165_c12_568-611.qxd 8/12/09 8:29 AM Page 568 569 but that. It might be characterized as, “If we can’t beat you, we will buy you.” Its mantra is “invest, invest, invest.” A list of Time Warner’s holdings gives an idea of its reach. Magazines: People, Time, Life, Sports Illustrated, and Fortune. Book publishers: Time-Life Books, Bookof-the-Month Club,…

exercises and problems week 1 accounting 494628

PLEASE SEE ATTACHED….

COMPLETE EXERCISES

E9-1

E9-7

E9-12

COMPLETE PROBLEM

P9-7B

Need by 6/9/2013

Document Preview:

JWCL165_c09_396-443.qxd 8/4/09 9:39 PM Page 396 Chapter 9 Plant Assets, Natural Resources, and Intangible Assets STUDY OBJECTIVES The Navigator ? After studying this chapter, you should be Scan Study Objectives ¦ able to: Read Feature Story ¦ 1 Describe how the cost principle applies Read Preview ¦ to plant assets. Read text and answer Do it! 2 Explain the concept of depreciation. p. 402 ¦ p. 409 ¦ p. 412 ¦ p. 417 ¦ 3 Compute periodic depreciation using Work Comprehensive Do it! p. 421 ¦ different methods. p. 422 ¦ 4 Describe the procedure for revising periodic depreciation. Review Summary of Study Objectives ¦ 5 Distinguish between revenue and Answer Self-Study Questions ¦ capital expenditures, and explain the Complete Assignments ¦ entries for each. 6 Explain how to account for the disposal of a plant asset. 7 Compute periodic depletion of natural resources. 8 Explain the basic issues related to accounting for intangible assets. 9 Indicate how plant assets, natural resources, and intangible assets are reported. The Navigator ? Feature Story HOW MUCH FOR A RIDE TO THE BEACH? It’s spring break. Your plane has landed, you’ve finally found your bags, and you’re dying to hit the beach—but first you need a “vehicular unit” to get 396JWCL165_c09_396-443.qxd 7/31/09 4:20 PM Page 397 you there. As you turn away from baggage claim you see a long row of rental agency booths. Many are names you are familiar with—Hertz, Avis, and Budget. But a booth at the far end catches your eye—Rent-A-Wreck (www.rent-a-wreck.com). Now there’s a company making a clear statement! Any company that relies on equipment to generate revenues must make decisions about what kind of equipment to buy, how long to keep it, and how vigorously to maintain it. Rent-A-Wreck has decided to rent used rather than new cars and trucks. It rents these vehicles across the United States, Europe, and Asia. While the big-name agencies push vehicles with that “new car smell,” Rent-A-Wreck…

Attachments:

exlusive for homework help 1234 494629

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

HA2032 CORPORATE ACCOUNTING ASSIGNMENT This is an individual assignment. It is required to be submitted in both soft and hard-copy by the Friday of Week 6. Total marks applied to this assessment are 20%. Please ensure that you attach an assignment submission sheet to your hard copy only. Late submissions draw a penalty of 5% per day (this includes weekends) of the value of the assessment (1 mark in this case) up to a maximum of fourteen (14) days. After that date, your assessment may not be accepted unless prior and special consideration has been granted. This is NOT a report but it is expected that your submission will be in an appropriate format. There is no word limit applied but you should ensure that each question is appropriately answered. Where references are used, ensure they are recognised (refer to student handbook or your lecturer if unsure) ASSIGNMENT Part A: (12 marks) The last few years have been difficult economically but the owners of Johnsons P/L, a medium-sized manufacturer of quality dining furniture is keen to grow the business. They have seen an increase in demand for their products from overseas and feel that they will need to increase their operation in order to continue to meet this demand. They are currently looking at a number of options to finance this expansion such as through debt and through equity raising (meaning they will need to “go public”). They have determined that they need to raise $60 million. Giving consideration to the various options, you have been requested to advise the owners of Johnsons what the various options are, outlining the positives and negatives of each. Required: write a report (should be extensive) to the owners detailing ALL the different options and considerations that you feel the owners should consider raising the $60 million. Part B (8 marks) Regardless of the advice you have given (Part A), the owners have decided to go “public” and issue an ‘IPO” They issue 30 million shares ($2.00), of…

Attachments:

exporting american fashion to eastern europe due in 24hours 494630

Topic:Exporting American
fashion to Eastern Europe

I am looking to do a paper on American fashion (clothing) to be distributed and sold in
Eastern Europe mainly in Poland. Examine how to
create a business proposal format or a business plan.

Also, below you will find 4 individual assignments which I will need ASAP. Except, the last
one #4 which is due 10-13-13. They are to be used in The Final Paper.

Main Elements and
Format

The final paper (not including the title page or bibliography) should be 8-10 pages
double spaced.

Document Preview:

Assignment for Chapter EDTA 1. Calculate the pPb2+ at each of the following points in the titration of 20.00 mL of 0.0200M Pb2+ by 0.010 M EDTA at pH 3.0 (log Kf for Pb-EDTA = 18.04): (a) 0 mL, (b) Ve, (c) 10.0 mL, (d) 50.0 mL 2. A 50 mL solution containing 0.10 M 1-Naphtoic acid (pKa = 3.70) and 0.15 M arsenic acid (pKa1 = 2.24; pKa2 = 6.96) is titrated with 0.20 M KOH. How many end points will be observed? What is the pH of the solution before adding any KOH? Calculate the volume of KOH required to reach the first equivalence point. Calculate the pH after the addition of 100 mL of KOH (assume that the OH-contribution from water autoprotolysis is negligible). 3. Masking of Cu2+ can be achieved by reduction to Cu+. A 25.00 mL aliquot of a solution containing Cu2+ and Ni2+ was treated with ascorbic acid at pH 3.0 to reduce the Cu2+ ions. The pH was adjusted to 10.0 and 27.32 mL of 0.0565 M EDTA was required to reach a murexide end point. In a parallel titration, 40.45 mL of 0.0565 M EDTA was required to reach the murexide end point in a 25.00 mL aliquot that was not treated with ascorbic acid. What amounts of copper and nickel in ppt (mass/vol.) were in the original solution? 1 red to reach the murexide end point in a 25.00 mL aliquot that was not treated with ascorbic acid. What amounts of copper and nickel in ppt (mass/vol.) were in the original solution? 1 , (d) 50.0 mL 2. A 50 mL solution containing 0.10 M 1-Naphtoic acid (pKa = 3.70) and 0.15 M arsenic acid (pKa1 = 2.24; pKa2 = 6.96) is titrated with 0.20 M KOH. How many end points will be observed? What is the pH of the solution before adding any KOH? Calculate the volume of KOH required to reach the first equivalence point. Calculate the pH after the addition of 100 mL of KOH (assume that the OH-contribution from water autoprotolysis is negligible). 3. Masking of Cu2+ can be achieved by…

Attachments:

extra credit need help bus5502 494631

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Extra Credit Chapter 17 Budgetary Control Hunter-gatherer Ltd produces Widgets. The table below shows the budget and actual units sold together with standard costs and actual costs for materials and labour used in the manufacture of Widgets. Data for July 2008: Budget Actual Units of finished Widgets sold 5000 4500 Standard material required (kg per Widget) 1.5 1.7 Actual materials used (kg per Widget) Standard material costs per kg £12.50 £13.00 Actual material cost per kg Standard labour hours required (hours per Widget) 1.2 1.3 Actual labour hours used (hours per Widget) Standard labour costs per hour £14.00 £13.90 Actual labour cost per hour Assume that the quantity of materials purchased and the quantity used are identical. Produce a report that compares the original budget with actual costs for materials and labour in July. Produce a budget versus actual variance report using a flexible budget and calculate the variances on that basis. Calculate both usage and price variances for each of materials and labour. Explain why variance analysis using a flexible budget may be helpful for management control.?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

fcs 3450 homework 4 494633

1. Thomas Franklin arrived at the following tax information:

Gross salary, $46,660

Interest earnings, $225

Dividend income, $80

One personal exemption, $3,400

Itemized deductions, $7,820

Adjustments to income, $1,150

What amount would Thomas report as taxable income?

2. If Lola Harper had the following itemized deductions, should she use Schedule A or the standard deduction? The standard deduction for her tax situation is $5,450.

Donations to church and other charities, $1,980

Medical and dental expenses that exceed 7.5 percent of adjusted gross income, $430

State income tax, $690

Job-related expenses that exceed 2 percent of adjusted gross income, $1,610

3. What would be the average tax rate for a person who paid taxes of $4,864.14 on a taxable income of $39,870?

4. Based on the following data, would Ann and Carl Wilton receive a refund or owe additional taxes?

Adjusted gross income, $46,186

Itemized deductions, $11,420

Child care tax credit, $80

Federal income tax withheld, $4,784

Amount for personal exemptions, $6,800

Average tax rate on taxable income, 15%

5. Would you prefer a fully taxable investment earning 10.7 percent or a tax-exempt investment earning 8.1 percent? Why? (Assume a 28 percent tax rate.)

6. On December 30, you decide to make a $1,000 charitable donation. If you are in a 28 percent tax bracket, how much would you save in taxes for the current year? If that tax savings was deposited in a savings account for the next five years at 6 percent, what would be the future value of that account?

Document Preview:

FCS 3450 HOMEWORK #4 1. Thomas Franklin arrived at the following tax information: Gross salary, $46,660 Interest earnings, $225 Dividend income, $80 One personal exemption, $3,400 Itemized deductions, $7,820 Adjustments to income, $1,150 What amount would Thomas report as taxable income? 2. If Lola Harper had the following itemized deductions, should she use Schedule A or the standard deduction? The standard deduction for her tax situation is $5,450. Donations to church and other charities, $1,980 Medical and dental expenses that exceed 7.5 percent of adjusted gross income, $430 State income tax, $690 Job-related expenses that exceed 2 percent of adjusted gross income, $1,610 3. What would be the average tax rate for a person who paid taxes of $4,864.14 on a taxable income of $39,870? 4. Based on the following data, would Ann and Carl Wilton receive a refund or owe additional taxes? Adjusted gross income, $46,186 Itemized deductions, $11,420 Child care tax credit, $80 Federal income tax withheld, $4,784 Amount for personal exemptions, $6,800 Average tax rate on taxable income, 15% Would you prefer a fully taxable investment earning 10.7 percent or a tax-exempt investment earning 8.1 percent? Why? (Assume a 28 percent tax rate.) On December 30, you decide to make a $1,000 charitable donation. If you are in a 28 percent tax bracket, how much would you save in taxes for the current year? If that tax savings was deposited in a savings account for the next five years at 6 percent, what would be the future value of that account?

Attachments:

fdp homesecurity 494634

FDP Company produces a variety of home security products. Gary Price, the company’s president, is concerned with the fourth quarter market demand for the company’s products. Unless something is done in the last two months of the year, the company is likely to miss its earnings expectation of Wall Street analysts. Price still remembers when FDP’s earnings were below analysts’ expectation by two cents a share three years ago and the company’s share price fell 19% the day earnings were announced. In a recent meeting, Price told his top management that something must be done quickly. One proposal by the marketing vice president was to give a deep discount to the company’s major customers to increase the company’s sales in the fourth quarter. The company controller pointed out that while the discount could increase sales, it may not help the bottom line; to the contrary, it could lower income. The controller said, Since we have enough storage capacity, we might simply increase our production in the fourth quarter to increase our reported profit.

You will be using Chapter 6 Ethics Challenge p 236 AND the IMA Code of Ethical Practice (found in doc sharing Week 2) as the basis for this written project. You will be required to review the case in the text and provide solutions to the situation along with any ethical concerns based on the IMA Code. This will be done in the form of a memo to Gary Price explaining your answer and why this is or is not ethical based on the IMA Code.

Grading Rubric:

Category

Grade

Comments

Student Name:

Scale of 5-0 where

5=Requirements met

0=Requirements not met

Format / Citations -20%

o

Format:Proper Memo format used

o

Memo uses, 1 margins, 12 pt font in Times New Roman style and pages are numbered

*Remember if sources are not noted it is considered plagiarism

o

Citations: Sources used in the paper are cited in APA format (author name, date, page number if needed for direct quotes).

o

Sources are listed on a separate references page in APA format (alphabetical order by author, if there is one, with all needed information).

Content / Quality -80%

o

Content: There is a clear concise opening segment including the purpose of the memo, the context and the specific task

o

There is a clear context section this is the event, circumstance, or background of the problem you are solving

o

There is a clear task statement where you should describe what you are doing to explain the problem

o

There is a clear summary statement that provides a brief statement of the key recommendations you have reached.

o

There is a clear discussion segment that includes all the details and research that support your ideas

o

There is a clear closing segment summarizing your key points for the reader.

o

There is a smooth transition between paragraphs.

o

The information presented including exhibits is accurate and terms are used correctly.

o

Concepts covered in class are incorporated into the paper.

o

No more than 20% of the paper was taken from outside sources.

Paper is not less than 1 1/2 and not more than 2 pages of text (not including exhibits and reference page).

o

Quality: used the IMA Code and textbook to explain the problem and to tie in any ethical concerns in this case

o

Used proper grammar, spelling, and punctuation; did not use slang or other forms of casual language.

o

Submitted paper on or before the date due.

o

Extra credit if the report from the
OWL is submitted and corrections are made.

Total

federal accounting omn one is online 494635

part 1

David, a CPA for a large accounting firm, works 10- to 12-hour days. As a requirement for his position, he must attend social events to recruit new clients. In addition to his job with the accounting firm, he also has private clients in his unincorporated professional practice. David purchased exercise equipment for $3,000. He works out on the equipment to maintain his stamina and good health that enable him to carry such a heavy workload. What tax issues should David consider? Please cite IRC code at least once.

part 2 I need a question or observation to say ask or tell to a fellow student who posted the answer below to the same question. It only needs to be 2 or 3 sentences long.

Betty said:

David should consider the substantiation of the expenses that he incurs when he must attend social events for his employer.01 Section 162(a) allows a deduction for all ordinary and necessary expenses paid or incurred during the taxable year in carrying on any trade or business, including certain expenses for meals and entertainment.If you are an employee and have ordinary and necessary business-related expenses for travel away from home, local transportation, entertainment, and gifts, you may be able to deduct these expenses. Generally, you must file Form 2106 or Form 2106-EZ to claim these expenses.

IRC Section 274(d) and Treas. Regs. Section 1.274-5 also provide for full disallowance of meals, entertainment and lodging expenses unless the taxpayer can substantiate the business purpose of the expenditure. The following details must be documented for each lodging and other expenditures in excess of $75:1) the amount of expense 2) the time and place of the meal, entertainment, etc. 3) the business purpose of the expenditure and 4) the business relationships of those in attendance. In regards to his own business he needs to keep separate records from his regular job. He may consider taking the in home office deduction on Form8829.

To be tax deductible, an office in the home, unless it is in a separate structure, must be used as either the principle place of business or as a place of business used to meet customers, clients, or patients in the normal course of business. In all cases, the office in the home must be used exclusively for business and on a regular basis for these purposes. An employee can only qualify if the business use is for the convenience of the employer. Section 280A.

In regards to the $3,000 treadmill David cannot take it as a medical expense unless he gets a doctor s note indicating that he needs the treadmill for a medical reason such as obesity or a heart problem. He would record it on Schedule A subjectto a 10% ceiling of AGI (2013).

part 3

Wayne and Maria file a joint tax return on which they itemize their deductions and report AGI of $50,000. During the year, they incurred $1,500 of medical expenses when Maria broke her leg. Furthermore, their dentist informed them that their daughter, Alicia, needs $3,000 of orthodontic work to correct her overbite. Wayne also needs a new pair of eyeglasses that will cost $300. What tax issues should Wayne and Maria consider?

Attachments:

felasco nurseries inc cash budget 494637

Basic Cash Budget

P 3. Felasco Nurseries Inc. has been in business for six years and has four divisions. Ethan Poulis, the corporation s controller, has been asked to prepare a cash budget for the Southern Division for the first quarter. Projected data supporting this budget follow.

Sales (60% on credit) Purchases

November

$160,000

December

$ 86,800

December

200,000

January

124,700

January

120,000

February

99,440

February

160,000

March

104,800

March

140,000

Collection records of accounts receivable have shown that 30 percent of all credit sales are collected in the month of sale, 60 percent in the month following the sale, and 8 percent in the second month following the sale; 2 percent of the sales are uncollectible. All purchases are paid for in the month after the purchase. Sala ries and wages are projected to be $25,200 in January, $33,200 in February, and $21,200 in March. Estimated monthly costs are utilities, $4,220; collection fees, $1,700; rent, $5,300; equipment depreciation, $5,440; supplies, $2,480; small tools, $3,140; and miscellaneous, $1,900.

Each of the corporation’s divisions maintains a $6,000 minimum cash bal ance. As of December 31, the Southern Division had a cash balance of $9,600.

Required

1. Prepare a monthly cash budget for Felasco Nurseries’ Southern Divisiontor the first quarter.

2. Should Felasco Nurseries anticipate taking out a loan for the Southern Divi sion during the quarter? If so, how much should it borrow, and when?

Attachments:

final assignment 494639

Week Five Assignment Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Basic present value calculations Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar: A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at an 11% rate of return.

Document Preview:

Week Five Assignment Please complete the following 5 exercises below in either Excel or a word document (but must be single document). You must show your work where appropriate (leaving the calculations within Excel cells is acceptable). Save the document, and submit it in the appropriate week using the Assignment Submission button. 1. Basic present value calculations Calculate the present value of the following cash flows, rounding to the nearest dollar: A single cash inflow of $12,000 in five years, discounted at an 11% rate of return. An annual receipt of $16,000 over the next 12 years, discounted at an 11% rate of return. A single receipt of $15,000 at the end of Year 1 followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 3. The company has a 12% rate of return. An annual receipt of $8,000 for three years followed by a single receipt of $10,000 at the end of Year 4. The company has an 11% rate of return. 2. Cash flow calculations and net present value On January 2, 20X7, Brian Rein invested $10,000 in the stock market and purchased 500 shares of Heartland Development, Inc. Heartland paid cash dividends of $2.70 per share in 20X7 and 20X8; the dividend was raised to $3.30 per share in 20X9. On December 31, 20X9, Rein sold his holdings and generated proceeds of $13,100. Rein uses the net-present- value method and desires a 16% return on investments. Prepare a chronological list of the investment’s cash flows. Note: Rein is entitled to the 20X9 dividend. Compute the investment’s net present value, rounding calculations to the nearest dollar. Given the results of part (b), should Rein have acquired the Heartland stock? Briefly explain. 3. Net present value The City of Brighton is studying a 550-acre site on Route 401 for a new landfill. The startup cost has been calculated as follows: Purchase cost: $400 per acre Site preparation: $180,000 The site can be used for 20 years before it reaches capacity. Brighton, which…

Attachments:

final exam 494640

help with

my final exam

thanks!

Document Preview:

Name: 1. Suggested time 15 minutes: 12% points a. ????Item???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????b. ?? 2. Suggested time 10 minutes: 12% points Date?Account/Description?Debit?Credit??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? 3. Suggested time 15 minutes: 15% points ????????????????????????????????This document was truncated here because it was created in the Evaluation Mode.

final exam summer 2013 494641

DIRECTIONS: Exam consists of 35 QUESTIONS. Questions 1-20 are multiple choice and worth 2 pts each. Questions 21-35 are essay and/or calculation problems. These are worth 4 points each. Total exam is worth 100 point. Please answer on the exam itself. You may also submit an Excel spreadsheet as backup if you wish. Wrong answers may receive partial credit if work is shown.

Document Preview:

DIRECTIONS: Exam consists of 35 QUESTIONS. Questions 1-20 are multiple choice and worth 2 pts each. Questions 21-35 are essay and/or calculation problems. These are worth 4 points each. Total exam is worth 100 point. Please answer on the exam itself. You may also submit an Excel spreadsheet as backup if you wish. Wrong answers may receive partial credit if work is shown. Please submit your exam in your homework folder by 12noon Eastern Time, Saturday, Aug 17, 2013 1) Which of the following is NOT an example of an agency cost? A) Paying an accounting firm to audit your financial statements B) Paying an insurance company to assure that building codes have been met for new construction C) Paying a landscaping firm to maintain your firm’s grounds D) All of the above are agency costs. 2) Which of the statements below is FALSE? A) Officers of a company or others who have a fiduciary responsibility to the owners can trade on their acquired private information about the company prior to the information being made public. B) One potential problem in the world of finance can arise when some owners or potential owners have access to more information about a company than do others. C) Regulation Fair Disclosure (or Reg FD) requires companies to release all material information to all investors at the same time. D) The 10-K must be filed within sixty days after the end of the company’s fiscal year. 3) Dan Preston made $18,000 in the first movie he ever starred in. Dan soon made more and more movies and more and more money. At a 46.18% rate of salary increase per movie, how many movies did Dan make in order to earn $5,350,000 in a single movie? A) 84 movies B) 34 movies C) 22 movies D) 15 movies 4) A wealthy woman just died and left her pet cats the following estate: $50,000 per year for the next 15 years with the first cash flow today. At a discount rate of 3.2%, what is the feline estate worth in today’s dollars? A) $588,352.84 B) $607,180.14 C) $750,000.00 D)…

Attachments:

final paper 494643

Document Preview:

Focus of the Final Paper You’ve just been hired onto ABC Company as the corporate controller. ABC Company is a manufacturing firm that specializes in making cedar roofing and siding shingles. The company currently has annual sales of around $1.2 million, a 25% increase from the previous year. The company has an aggressive growth target of reaching $3 million annual sales within the next 3 years. The CEO has been trying to find additional products that can leverage the current ABC employee skillset as well as the manufacturing facilities. As the controller of ABC Company, the CEO has come to you with a new opportunity that he’s been working on. The CEO would like to use the some of the shingle scrap materials to build cedar dollhouses. While this new product line would add additional raw materials and be more time-intensive to manufacture than the cedar shingles, this new product line will be able to leverage ABC’s existing manufacturing facilities as well as the current staff. Although this product line will require added expenses, it will provide additional revenue and gross profit to help reach the growth targets. The CEO is relying on you to help decide how this project can be afforded  Provide details about the estimated product costs, what is needed to break even on the project, and what level of return this product is expected to provide. In order to help out the CEO, you need to prepare a six- to eight-page report that will contain the following information (including exhibits, but excluding your references and title page). Refer to the accompanying Excel spreadsheet (available through your online course) for some specific cost and profit information to complete the calculations. http://vizedhtmlcontent.next.ecollege.com/pub/content/5f14b903-0224-4c7c-b273-91c0325ba942/Final_Paper_Spreadsheet._Student_Copy.WP.2013.xlsxFinal Paper Spreadsheet I. An overall risk profile of the company based on current economic and industry issues that it may be facing.  II….

Attachments:

final paper spreadsheet 494644

I. An overall risk profile of the company based on current economic and industry issues that it may be facing.

II. Current company cash flow
a. You need to complete a cash flow statement for the company using the direct method.
b. Once you ve completed the cash flow statement, answer the following questions:
i. What does this statement of cash flow tell you about the sources and uses of the company?
ii. Is there anything ABC Company can do to improve the cash flow?
iii. Can this project be financed with current cash flow from the company? Why or why not?
iv. If the company needs additional financing beyond what ABC Company can provide internally (either now or sometime throughout the life of the project), how would you suggest the company obtain the additional financing, equity or corporate debt, and why?
III. Product cost: ABC Company believes that it has an additional 5,000 machine hours available in the current facility before it would need to expand. ABC Company uses machine hours to allocate the fixed factory overhead, and units sold to allocate the fixed sales expenses. ABC Company expects that it will take twice as long to produce the expansion product as it currently takes to produce its existing product.
a. What is the product cost for the expansion product?
b. By adding this new expansion product, it helps to absorb the fixed factory and sales expenses. How much cheaper does this expansion make the existing product?
c. Assuming ABC Company wants a 40% gross margin for the new product, what selling price should it set for the expansion product
d. Assuming the same sales mix of these two products, what are the contribution margins and break-even points by product?
IV. Potential investments to accelerate profit: ABC company has the option to purchase additional equipment that will cost about $42,000, and this new equipment will produce the following savings in factory overhead costs over the next five years:

Year 1, $15,000
Year 2, $13,000
Year 3, $10,000
Year 4, $10,000
Year 5, $6,000

ABC Company uses the net-present-value method to analyze investments and desires a minimum rate of return of 12% on the equipment.
a. What is the net present value of the proposed investment ignore income taxes and depreciation?
b. Assuming a 5-year straight-line depreciation, how will this impact the factory s fixed costs for each of the 5 years (and the implied product costs)? What about cash flow?
c. Considering the cash flow impact of the equipment as well as the time-value of money, would you recommend that ABC Company purchases the equipment? Why or why not

ABC’s Product information
Current Product Expansion Product (estimate)
Selling Price $12.00 ?
Units produced and expected to be sold 80,000 5,000
Machine Hours 40,000 5,000
Direct Materials $1.30 per unit $5.60 per unit
Direct labor dollars needed per product $2.80 per unit $4.00 per unit
Variable Factory Overhead $1.00 per Machine Hour $1.00 per Machine Hour
Variable Selling Expense $0.20 per unit $0.20 per unit

Total Fixed Costs:
Fixed Factory Overhead $ 198,000
Fixed Selling expenses $ 191,250

Additional Requirements

Attachments:

done asap 494590

Jennifer’s Stuffed Animals reported the following: Revenues $2,000 Variable manufacturing costs $ 600 Variable nonmanufacturing costs $ 460 Fixed manufacturing costs $ 300 Fixed nonmanufacturing costs $ 280 Required: a. Compute contribution margin. b. Compute gross margin. c. Compute operating income. Explain the difference between a static budget and a flexible budget. Explain what is meant by a static budget variance and a flexible budget variance. The textbook discusses a five-step decision process. Briefly explain each of the five steps.

Document Preview:

Jennifer’s Stuffed Animals reported the following: Revenues $2,000 Variable manufacturing costs $ 600 Variable nonmanufacturing costs $ 460 Fixed manufacturing costs $ 300 Fixed nonmanufacturing costs $ 280 Required: a. Compute contribution margin. b. Compute gross margin. c. Compute operating income. Explain the difference between a static budget and a flexible budget. Explain what is meant by a static budget variance and a flexible budget variance. The textbook discusses a five-step decision process. Briefly explain each of the five steps. Jerry’s TV and Appliance Store is a small company that has hired you to perform some management advisory services. The following information pertains to 2011 operations. Sales (1,000 televisions) $ 900,000 Cost of goods sold 400,000 Store manager’s salary per year 70,000 Operating costs per year 157,000 Advertising and promotion per year 15,000 Commissions (4% of sales) 36,000 What was the variable cost per unit sold for 2011? Bicker, Inc., is in the process of evaluating a new product using the following information: · A new transformer has two production runs each year, each with $10,000 in setup costs. · The new transformer incurred $30,000 in development costs and is expected to be produced over the next three years. · Direct costs of producing the transformers are $40,000 per run of 5,000 transformers each. · Indirect manufacturing costs charged to each run are $45,000. · Destination charges for each transformer average $1.00. · Customer service expenses average $0.20 per transformer. · The transformers are selling for $25 the first year and will increase by $3 each year thereafter. · Sales units equal production units each year. What are estimated life-cycle revenues?

Attachments:

done asap 494591

Technology Project (parts 1 and 2)

Part 1 of this project will be a written analysis of the requirements needed to automate a firm’s accounting information system (5-7 pages)

Part 2 of this project will be an executive summary of part 1, done in Microsoft PowerPoint. (10-20 slides)

Project Description

Assume you are a CPA with a small local practice. You have three professional employees, all relatively new CPAs, and an office manager. Your practice consists primarily of tax and write-up work. You have a new client a homeowners’ association consisting of 150 homeowners and you have contracted to perform the following services:

  1. billing: Each quarter, you will send each homeowner an itemized bill. Dues are $50 per month ($150 per quarter). Late fees are one percent per month of the unpaid balance. The bills will be mailed the first day of the last month of the quarter. Payment is due by the end of the quarter.
  1. collection: You rent a post office box and will receive the checks there. You are responsible for depositing the checks (you have opened a checking account for the association).
  1. payment: You will write about five checks a month. Besides your own monthly fee, there are monthly checks to a lawn maintenance company and a refuse removal company. There are also checks written for taxes, postage, supplies, and the like.
  1. reporting: You will be responsible for reporting on all collections, all checks written, outstanding homeowners’ balances, and quarterly financial statements.
  1. tax payment: You will be responsible for preparing the association’s federal and state tax returns.
  1. advising: You will be responsible for advising the board on an as-needed basis, especially in the areas of budgeting, purchasing, and investment.

You are hoping to expand this new area of your practice. You want to computerize the main functions of this system, concentrating especially on the billing and reporting aspects. Assume that the tax preparation, financial statements, and checking account will not be computerized initially; only the billing and collections portions will be computerized for now.

Required: Using the methodology developed in this course, document and illustrate the system (describe inputs, outputs, controls, and so on); don’t overlook manual functions. Consider what reports will be necessary; what kinds of documents/forms will be needed (such as invoices and receipts); and what the reports, documents, and forms will look like. Design at least three documents (reports and/or forms), and provide them as appendices. Include a discussion about problem areas that could arise, assuming that you will eventually have many more clients and several more employees.

Attachments:

don 039 t pvt message me unless you read everything 1st 494594

I have about ten hours for this project. I am familiar with it, so I know that it takes about 2-3 hours and it is about looking up information.

1) Make sure you have the time tonight before bidding.

2) Provide me a price quote over private message

3) Make sure you read Individual Learning Project Instructions (1st)

4) Make sure you read the questions.

-Note, some of the questions do not require complete sentences, but some do.

-Some responses require EXCEL documents.

5) I don’t have a problem cleaning up questions 53-55, if you just provide a summary of a few sentences.

Document Preview:

Individual Learning Project Instructions This project will allow you the opportunity to explore a company’s annual report and become familiar with the items that become familiar with the items it contains. Choose a company whose company name begins with the same letter as your last name from Standard & Poor’s Net Advantage. Locate the most recent annual report, either from the Liberty University library’s access to http://www.netadvantage.standardandpoors.com/login/NASApp/NetAdvantage/NET/login/login.jspStandard & Poor’s website, the EDGAR database (www.sec.gov), or the company’s website. Once located, open Individual Learning Project 55 Question Form document and add your answer underneath each question; don’t delete the questions. Questions 1–49 must be answered within Microsoft Word. Your answers for these do not need to be in complete sentences. Questions 50–52 must be answered in Microsoft Excel and your answers must include formulas. Questions 53–55 must be answered with complete sentences and justification within the Word document. Both documents (Word and Excel) must be uploaded into the Assignment link. To access the Liberty University Library online resources from off campus: From the Blackboard log-in page, right-hand side “Quicklinks” pull-down menu — choose “Library.” Click log-in button. Off-site access cannot be gained unless the user successfully completes the log-in. This must take you to the “Library Research Portal”; if not, click on “Portal.” Click on the “databases” tab. Click on the “Databases by Letter,” and select the letter “S.” Scroll down until you see “Standard & Poor’s NetAdvantage.” Click on the link and then you may begin your search. ACCT 212???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

due in 3 hours 494596

University of Maryland University College Final Examination Acct425: International Accounting Question 1: Suggested time 40 minutes: 20% points: Corcovado Company was created as a wholly owned subsidiary of Campinhas Corporation on January 1, 2012. On that date Campinhas invested $42,000 in Corcovado’s capital stock. Given the exchange rate on that date of $0.84 per cruzeiro, the initial investment of $42,000 was converted into 50,000 cruzeiros (Cz). Other than the capital investment in January 1, there were no transactions involving stockholder’s equity for 2012.

Document Preview:

University of Maryland University College Final Examination Acct425: International Accounting Question 1: Suggested time 40 minutes: 20% points: Corcovado Company was created as a wholly owned subsidiary of Campinhas Corporation on January 1, 2012. On that date Campinhas invested $42,000 in Corcovado’s capital stock. Given the exchange rate on that date of $0.84 per cruzeiro, the initial investment of $42,000 was converted into 50,000 cruzeiros (Cz). Other than the capital investment in January 1, there were no transactions involving stockholder’s equity for 2012. Corcovado’s Cz denominated financial statements for December 31, 2013 are as follows: Income Statement For the year ended December 31, 2013 (in Cz) Sales 540,000 COGS 310,000 Gross Profit 230,000 Operating expenses 108,000 Income before tax 122,000 Income taxes 40,000 Net Income 82,000 Statement of Retained Earnings December 31, 2013 (in Cz) Retained earnings, January 1, 2013 154,000 Net Income 82,000 Dividends paid, December 1, 2013 20,000 Retained earnings, December 31, 2013 216,000 Balance Sheet December 31, 2013 (in Cz) Cash 50,000 Receivables 100,000 Inventory 72,000 Plant and equipment, net 300,000 Accumulated Depreciation 70,000 TOTAL ASSETS 452,000 Liabilities 186,000 Capital stock 50,000 Retained earnings, December 31, 2013 216,000 TOTAL LIABILITIES AND EQUITY 452,000 The Cz is the primary currency that Corcovado uses in its day to day operations. The Cz has steadily fallen in value against the USD since Campinhas made the investment Corcovado on January 1, 2012. Relevant exchange rates for 2012 and 2013 are as follows: January 1, 2012 $0.84 Average for 2012 (year) $0.80 December 31, 2012 $0.75 Average for 2013 (year) $0.72 December 1, 2013 $0.71 December 31, 2013 $0.70 Instructions Translate Corcovado’s Year 2013 financial statements into dollars. Compute the translation adjustments for Year 2012 and Year 2013 and reconcile these…

Attachments:

due in 9 hours 494597

income statemet and cash flow chart

Document Preview:

3250 2000 0 2000 4000 100 30 30 1500 1000 590 7250 -6000 Assuming that the sales go up having at least 10 customers a day spending $100, the montley income would be $30,000. It could also be higher depending on the month. For example during Holiday season, November and December sales would go up . Assumin up. Assuming that the sales increase by $30,000 for November and December. $40,000 by promoting and Marketing and also during summertime. A decrease after the Holidays, around January, February could decrease the sales to $15,000. There will be more merchandise in there store therefore there will be more sale, as of right now I’ve got a negative number for the net income which means the business cannot survive. Budget Template Gross Sales Cost of Sales Gross Margin = Gross Sales – Cost of Sales Gross Margin % = Gross Margin/Gross Sales X 100 Operating Expenses Quarter 1 Quarter 2 Quarter 3 Quarter 4 Annual Business name: Income Web site Store location Cost of sales Shipping Inventory Subtotal: G&A Expenses Retail lease Utilities Phone Internet Marketing Supplies Total net income (income – cost of sales – expenses) xx January February March April May June July August September October November December Net Income = Gross Margin – Operating Expenses By using the figures from the Budget 2008 template use this template to calculate your quarterly and yearly cash flow for the 1st year. Income Statement Summary for the 1st Year of Operation When estimating the figures, list your assumptions on bottom of the page. Assumptions: You may add line items to any of the income or expense categories. When budgeting, include all the expenses of setting up the store and ordering merchandise. Due to the considerable expenditure assume the 1st 3-6 months of operation have a negative net income. Add more items if applicable When calculating the Total net income use the following equation = Income – cost of sales – expenses…

Attachments:

due tuesday by midnight 494599

MY MIDTERM IS DUE ALSO BY TUESDAY, THE 21ST OF MAY.

The Unit 3 Assignment includes the following textbook problems:

Exercise 9-35 found on page 350 in your textbook

Problem 10-43 found on page 407 in your textbook

Submit your assignment using a single Excel workbook. Place each exercise/problem on a separate tab (sheet). Format the Excel spreadsheet to make all computations. The computations must be included in the assignment solutions. Be sure that you highlight or otherwise distinguish the answers.

When you have completed the assignment, upload your completed Excel document to the Unit 3 Assignment Dropbox before Tuesday, 11:59 PM (ET) of Unit 3. Name your assignment filename using this format: LastName_FirstName_Unit#_AssignmentName. For example, the Unit 3 assignment would be named:

Smith_John_Unit03_Assignment

Assignments submitted late will be subject to the Late Policy described in your Syllabus.

ID: GB519-03-09-A

Document Preview:

Cost Management5 a s t r a t e g i c e m p h a s i s Fifth Edition Blocher | Stout | Cokins Cost Management A Strategic Emphasis Cost Management A Strategic Emphasis Fifth Edition Edward J. Blocher University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill Kenan-Flagler Business School David E. Stout Youngstown State University Williamson College of Business Administration Gary Cokins Strategist, Performance Management Solutions SAS/Worldwide Strategy COST MANAGEMENT: A STRATEGIC EMPHASIS Published by McGraw-Hill/Irwin, a business unit of The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc., 1221 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY, 10020. Copyright © 2010, 2008, 2005, 2002, 1999 by The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without the prior written consent of The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc., including, but not limited to, in any network or other electronic storage or transmission, or broadcast for distance learning. Some ancillaries, including electronic and print components, may not be available to customers outside the United States. This book is printed on acid-free paper. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 DOW/DOW 0 9 ISBN 978-0-07-352694-2 MHID 0-07-352694-0 Vice president and editor-in-chief: Brent Gordon Editorial director: Stewart Mattson Executive editor: Richard T. Hercher, Jr. Editorial coordinator: Rebecca Mann Marketing manager: Kathleen Klehr Senior project manager: Bruce Gin Production supervisor: Michael McCormick Designer: Matt Diamond Senior media project manager: Greg Bates Cover design: Jenny El-Shamy Interior design: Matt Diamond Typeface: 10/12 Times Roman Compositor: Laserwords Private Limited Printer: R. R. Donnelley Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Blocher, Edward. Cost management : a strategic emphasis /Edward J. Blocher, David E. Stout, Gary Cokins.—5th ed. p. cm. Includes index. ISBN-13: 978-0-07-352694-2 (alk. paper)…

Attachments:

due on tuesday by midnight 494600

  1. Individual Research Paper
    In Unit 1, you are to choose a topic that you will do your individual research paper on. Once a topic has been identified you will answer questions found in the PDF below. This Assignment should take be a minimum of 1-page in length. Save the document as Part1_Research Paper.doc. When you are ready, submit your paper to the Unit 1 Research Paper (Individual) Dropbox.
  2. Case Analysis Assignment
    Read the Harvard Business Case Study for Unit 1: Sind, M., & Yoffie, D.B. (February, 2008)Apple, inc.(Case Study) Retrieved from the Harvard Business Online website. Prepare a Case Analysis on the topic of Strategic Management and why is it critical to the success of an organization in meeting its goals and mission. Submit your paper to the Case Analysis Dropbox.

View the PDF below for the full details on both assignments.

Attachments:

what would the fill rate be c suppose green mountain orders 380 pairs of boots 494601

Green Mountain Sports sells a full line of outdoor clothing and accessories, including waterproof hiking boots. Due to competition, Green mountain can sell these hiking boots for only $54 but must pay suppliers $40 per pair. One order is placed per season; excess inventory is sold at a 50% price discount at the end of the season. At $54, estimated demand over the season is 400 pairs of boots with standard deviation of 300. a. Given the prices and costs, how many waterproof hiking boots should Green Mountain order given its demand estimate? b. Suppose Green Mountain orders 380 pairs of boots? What would the fill rate be? c. Suppose Green Mountain orders 380 pairs of boots? What would the expected profit be? d. Suppose marketing is unhappy with the order quantity in part a? They argue that Green Mountain should maintain a high service level and insist that enough boots be ordered to have at least a 98% fill rate. What order size corresponds to a 98% fill rate for these boots?

Document Preview:

MGMT 6010 Problem Set 3|Newsvendor and Revenue Management 1 Newsvendor Model 1.1 Green Mountain Sports Green Mountain Sports sells a full line of outdoor clothing and accessories, including waterproof hiking boots. Due to competition, Green mountain can sell these hiking boots for only $54 but must pay suppliers $40 per pair. One order is placed per season; excess inventory is sold at a 50% price discount at the end of the season. At $54, estimated demand over the season is 400 pairs of boots with standard deviation of 300. a. Given the prices and costs, how many waterproof hiking boots should Green Mountain order given its demand estimate? b. Suppose Green Mountain orders 380 pairs of boots? What would the ll rate be? c. Suppose Green Mountain orders 380 pairs of boots? What would the expected pro t be? d. Suppose marketing is unhappy with the order quantity in part a? They argue that Green Mountain should maintain a high service level and insist that enough boots be ordered to have at least a 98% ll rate. What order size corresponds to a 98% ll rate for these boots? e. What is Green Mountain’s expected pro t if it orders the amount calculated in part d? f. The supplier has o?ered Green Mountain a 10% discount if it orders at least 800 pairs of boots. If the objective is to maximize pro t, how many boots should Green Mountain order in light of this new information? g. Billy Bragg, marketing analyst, has decided to use A/F ratios for ordering decisions. Billy is trying to determine the order size for a di?erent product, the standard hiking boot. A pair of standard boot sells for $55 and, due to a competitive supplier market, can be purchased for $30. The boots do not go out of style, but do cost $2.50 to hold a pair over from one season to the next. Green Mountain anticipates that the $55 price and $30 cost will remain the same for the next season. Bragg collected data from 20 items that he felt had market behavior similar to the standard boot. His forecast…

Attachments:

earrnings unlimited case 9 30 494602

  http://vizedhtmlcontent.next.ecollege.com/(NEXT(a8a07076bf))/Main/CourseMode/VizedHtmlView/RenderVizedHtmlView.ed?courseItemSubId=173248528&courseItemType=CourseContentItem& CASE 9–30 Master Budget with Supporting Schedules [LO2, LO4, LO8, LO9, LO10] You have just been hired as a new management trainee by Earrings Unlimited, a distributor of earrings to various retail outlets located in shopping malls across the country. In the past, the company has done very little in the way of budgeting and at certain times of the year has experienced a shortage of cash.

Document Preview:

??? ?? HYPERLINK “http://vizedhtmlcontent.next.ecollege.com/(NEXT(a8a07076bf))/Main/CourseMode/VizedHtmlView/RenderVizedHtmlView.ed?courseItemSubId=173248528&courseItemType=CourseContentItem&” l “top” ?????CASE 9–30 Master Budget with Supporting Schedules [LO2, LO4, LO8, LO9, LO10] You have just been hired as a new management trainee by Earrings Unlimited, a distributor of earrings to various retail outlets located in shopping malls across the country. In the past, the company has done very little in the way of budgeting and at certain times of the year has experienced a shortage of cash. Since you are well trained in budgeting, you have decided to prepare comprehensive budgets for the upcoming second quarter in order to show management the benefits that can be gained from an integrated budgeting program. To this end, you have worked with accounting and other areas to gather the information assembled below. The company sells many styles of earrings, but all are sold for the same price—$10 per pair. Actual sales of earrings for the last three months and budgeted sales for the next six months follow (in pairs of earrings): The concentration of sales before and during May is due to Mother’s Day. Sufficient inventory should be on hand at the end of each month to supply 40% of the earrings sold in the following month. Suppliers are paid $4 for a pair of earrings. One-half of a month’s purchases is paid for in the month of purchase; the other half is paid for in the following month. All sales are on credit, with no discount, and payable within 15 days. The company has found, however, that only 20% of a month’s sales are collected in the month of sale. An additional 70% is collected in the following month, and the remaining 10% is collected in the second month following sale. Bad debts have been negligible. Monthly operating expenses for the company are given below: Insurance is paid on an annual basis, in November of each year. The company plans to purchase $16,000…

Attachments:

easy finance 2 494605

Instructions on first page of excel sheet. I need tabs 2, 3, and 4 completed. The areas needed are highlighted at the bottom. This is my first finance class so they should be really easy, the military just does not give me enough time to do all of it. This is the second of four homeworks I will have that I cant figure out.

Document Preview:

1 0.5 0.4 4000 1500 800 7000 10000 7000 8000 9000 10000 , , Page of Page(s), 1 0.5 0.4 4000 1500 800 8700 4000 4300 1500 3200 800 9000 8500 , , Page of Page(s), 360000 90000 126000 60000 90000 30000 54000 24000 72000 18000 18000 222000 360000 27000 36000 27000 7500 10360 5000 6400 2470 4000 2000 5700 1500 1640 3000 , , Page of Page(s), Instructions for the Microsoft Excel Templates by Rex A Schildhouse Be advised, the template workbooks and worksheets are not protected. Overtyping any data may remove it. Extensive detail and information is contained within the help function of Microsoft Excel and in the provided text. You should enter your name, date, instructor’s name, and course into the cells at the top of the page. This information will be printed on the top of each page if the template requires more than one page. If more than one page is required by the template, manual page breaks have been set to provide consistent presentation. All of the cells have been correctly formatted for presentation and should not require any adjustment. For example, if the text requires one, two, or three significant digits in a presentation, the template has been set for that presentation in the appropriate cells. In general, the yellow highlighted cells are the cells which work and effort should be presented. These entries may include date(s), account title(s), values, memorandum appropriate to the entry, or text answers to questions. And information or data which may be required by the solution will be entered in cells with borders to help identify them. Where a yellow highlighted cell shows “Date” enter the appropriate date for that step of the challenge. This may be any date format that Microsoft Excel accepts. Some of these formats include “1/1/12”, “01/01/12”, and “01/01/2012.” All of these will return January 01, 2010, in the format set in the template. Where a yellow…

Attachments:

easy finance 4 494607

Instructions on first page of excel sheet. I need tabs 2, 3, and 4 completed. The areas needed are highlighted at the bottom. This is my first finance class so they should be really easy, the military just does not give me enough time to do all of it. This is the fourth of four homeworks I will have that I cant figure out.

Attachments:

at the end of each module you will apply the module s concepts by completing compreh 494609

At the end of each module, you will apply the module s concepts by completing comprehensive assignments from the textbook.

Complete problems P16A-17B (p. 898), P16A-19B (p. 899), P18-26A (p. 980) in your textbook.

Present your analysis of the assigned problems in Excel format. Enter non-numerical responses in the same worksheet using textboxes.

Assignment 3 Grading Criteria Maximum Points
P16A-17B
Drew time line for assembly department 2
Computed the equivalent units 3
Assigned total costs in the assembling department 3
Prepared T-account for WIP inventory 3
P16A-19B
Drew time line for preparation department 3
Computed the equivalent units 3
Compute total costs 3
Prepared journal entry to record costs of sheets 3
Posted journal entries to WIP inventory and calculated ending balance 3
P18-24A
Computed revenue and VC for each show 2
Computed number of shows BP must perform to break even 3
Computed number of shows needed to earn $3,825,000 profit 3
Prepared BP s contribution margin income statement 3
P18-26A
Computed Big Time s break even revenue in dollars 3
Computed dollar revenues needed to earn OI of $11,200 3
Graphed Big Time s CVP relationships 4
Computed new BEP if average revenues increased to $900 per trade 3
Total:

eng 221 week 5 final uop forums manual 494610

ENG 221 Week 5 ;Final UOP Forums Manual

Document Preview:

University of Phoenix Forums Manual ENG 221, Name of Team Members Janet Chappell November 1, 2010 Contents Introduction 3 Forum Navigation 3 Main Forum 3 Chat room 4 Course Materials 4 Learning Teams 5 Individual Forum 6 My Items 6 Discussion Forum Window 7 Posting New Threads 8 Reviewing Threads and Messages 10 Replying to Threads and Messages 12 Forum Information and Preferences 13 Class Members 13 Preferences 14 Tips/ FAQ’s 16 Useful Links 16 Reference and Citation Generator 17 Grammar and Writing Guidelines 17 Center for Writing Excellence 17 Learning Team Toolkit 17 References 18 Welcome to the University of Phoenix. As an online UOP student you will be spending a lot of time navigating the forums and using it to communicate with your instructor and fellow classmates. This manual is for incoming students who need to get familiar with the UOP forums, and it concentrates on the forums and the links within the forum page. Online learning is a new experience for many incoming students and we wish to make the transition as smooth as possible, so this manual will give detailed descriptions of everything within the forums and serve as a reference guide. This guide breaks down the forum into four sections, the forum navigation section, the discussion forum window, the forum information and preferences, and the useful links. Once again we welcome you to University of Phoenix and wish you success in all your endeavors. Forums Navigation The forum navigation pane (Fig. 1.1) is where faculty and students can access all the student website content. Using the navigation pane Users can navigate from the Main Forum, Chat Room, Course Materials, Learning Teams, Individual forums and My Items. Fig. 1.1 – Forums Navigation Main Forum To access the Main forum window (Fig 1.2) select the Main forum link located at the top of the Forums navigation pane. In the Main forum users can see the name of threads and interact with other students and…

Attachments:

entire course acc 226 494611

ACC 226 APPENDIX E WEEK 5.xls

ACC 226 ASSIGNMENT 16 1A WEEK 6.xls

ACC 226 ASSIGNMENT WEEK 8.doc

ACC 226 BTN 10 1 KRISPY CREAM WEEK 2.doc

ACC 226 BTN 13 KRISPY KREME WEEK 4.doc

ACC 226 BTN 16 1 KRISPY KREME WEEK 6.doc

ACC 226 CHECKPOINT 1 WEEK 8.doc

ACC 226 CHECKPOINT 2 WEEK 8.doc

ACC 226 Checkpoint Week 1.xls

ACC 226 CHECKPOINT WEEK 2.doc

ACC 226 CHECKPOINT WEEK 3.xls

ACC 226 CHECKPOINT WEEK 5.xls

ACC 226 CHECKPOINT WEEK 6.doc

ACC 226 CHECKPOINT WEEK 7.xls

ACC 226 EXERCISES WEEK 2.xls

ACC 226 RANDY COMPANY WEEK 8.doc

ACC 226 WEEK 1 CHK 1 WEEK 4.xls

ACC 226 WEEK 1 CHK 2 WEEK 4.xls

ACC 226 WEEK 1 DQ 1.doc

ACC 226 WEEK 1 DQ 2.doc

ACC 226 WEEK 3 DQ 2.doc

ACC 226 WEEK 5 DQ 1.doc

ACC 226 WEEK 5 DQ 2.doc

ACC 226 WEEK 7 DQ 1.doc

ACC 226 WEEK 7 DQ 2.doc

ACC 226 APPENDIX C WEEK 2.xls

ACC 226 APPENDIX D WEEK 4.xls

ACC 226 APPENDIX D WEEK 4.zip

Document Preview:

ACC 226 APPENDIX E WEEK 5.xls? Given P14-07a P14-07a Given P14-06a P14-06a Given P14-03a P14-03a Given P14-02a P14-02a Student Name: Class: Bonds issued, face value Annual interest Maturity in years Issuance price Issue price for Part 6 General Journal Part 1. Trans. Date Account Titles no. Debit Credit Jan 1 Cash Discount on Bonds Payable Bonds Payable Part 2. Cash payment Straight-line discount amortization Bond interest expense Part 3. Par value at maturity Total repaid Less amount borrowed Total bond interest expense or: Plus discount Part 4. Bond Carrying Discount Value Part 5. Jun 30 Bond Interest Expense Discount on Bonds Payable Cash Dec 31 Less premium Premium Premium on Bonds Payable Semiannual Interest Period Bonds issued, par value Market interest rate Semiannual Interest Unamortized Period Paid Expense Amortization Part 3 June 30 Dec. 31 Part 4 Premium on Bonds Payable Gain on Retirement of Bonds HEATHROW Check figures: (3) (4) 12/31/2005 carrying value Given Data P14-02A: Part 6-1. Part 6-2. Straight-line premium amortization Part 6-3. Thirty payments of $60,000 Part 6-4. Part 6-5. Problem 14-02A SATURN Given Data P14-03A: Check figure: (2) Carrying value Ten payments of $16,250 Period-End 2004 Problem 14-03A PATTON (2) (3) Carrying value Given Data P14-06A: Eight payments of $16,250 Problem 14-06A Given Data P14-07A: McFAD (5) Gain Eight payments of $4,950 Part 5 Part 6: Assume that the market rate on January 1, 2004, is 12% instead of 10%. Without presenting numbers, describe how this change affects amounts reported on McFad’s financial statements. Problem 14-07A ACC226 $90,000.00 0.11 3.00 $92,283.00 0.10 $91,224.00 2635.00 2004.00 27417.00 «- Correct! «- Try again! 27417.00 «- Correct! «- Try again! ?1?/?1?/?2004 92283.00 «- Correct! «- Try again! ?6?/?30?/?2004 91947.15 «- Correct! «- Try…

Attachments:

ethics article summary 494612

Read the article

prpeare a short 3 pages report consisting of:

1 The title and author of the article read (source)

2 a brief summary of the article

3 your oppinion and comments about the article

4 a statement of wheather you think this assigment was of value to you

The report should be double spaced using 1 inch top, bottom and left margains and a 1-1/2 inch right margin

Attachments:

ethics in business 494613

Ethics andprofessional conduct in business

Script: Once you ve read the transcript, respond to the discussion questions below.

How would you interpret this situation? Is Tripp behaving in an ethical and professional manner? Be specific with your answers and back them up with examples. Cite all websites and text references. Also must be at least 100 words

Kelly Tough, president of Tu-Rock Industries Inc., believes that reporting operating cash flow per share on the income statement would be a useful addition to the company s just completed financial statements. Please read a transcript of the discussion which took place between Kelly Tough and Tu-Rock controller, Tripp Kelso, in January, after the close of the fiscal year.

Kelly: I have been reviewing our financial statements for the last year. I am disappointed that our net income per share has dropped by 10% from last year. This is not going to look good to our shareholders. Isn t there anything we can do about this?

Tripp: What do you mean? The past is the past, and the numbers are in. There isn t much that can be done about it. Our financial statements were prepared according to generally accepted accounting principles, and I don t see much leeway for significant change at this point.

Kelly: No, no.I m not suggesting that we cook the books. But look at the cash flow from operating activities on the statement of cash flows.

Kelly: The cash flow from operating activities has increased by 20%. This is very good news and, I might add, useful information. The higher cash flow from operating activities will give our creditors comfort.

Tripp: Well, the cash flow from operating activities is on the statement of cash flows, so I guess users will be able to see the improved cash flow figures there.

Kelly: This is true, but somehow I feel that this information should be given a much higher profile. I don t like this information being buried in the statement of cash flows. You know as well as I do that many users will focus on the income statement. Therefore, I think we ought to include an operating cash flow per share number on the face of the income statement someplace under the earnings per share number. In this way users will get the complete picture of our operating performance. Yes, our earnings per share dropped this year, but our cash flow from operating activities improved! And all the information is in one place where users can see and compare the figures. What do you think?

Tripp:I ve never really thought about it like that before. I guess we could put the operating cash flow per share on the income statement, under the earnings per share. Users would really benefit from this disclosure. Thanks for the idea I ll start working on it.

Kelly: Glad to be of service.

Attachments:

evaluation of correlation data are gathered regarding the length of tenure top execu 494614

Evaluation of Correlation Data are gathered regarding the length of tenure top executives have at a major corporation and whether those executives have been divorced. The Human Resources department is evaluating this data to drive decision-making in regard to their hiring process. The data for eight executives is as follows: Tenure Divorce 1 9.0 No 2 9.5 No 3 11.0 Yes 4 11.5 Yes 5 10.0 Yes 6 9.8 No 7 10.0 No 8 10.3 Yes In a three to five page paper, excluding title page and reference page(s), answer the following questions to analyze the data. Include clearly labeled calculations, if applicable. Calculations conducted in Excel must be copied and pasted into the Word document. This paper should be formatted according to APA guidelines outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. 1. What s the most appropriate procedure for evaluating the relationship between tenure and divorce? 2. What is the correlation and how can it be interpreted in terms of magnitude, direction and practical importance? 3. How much of whether executives have been divorced can be accounted for by their length of tenure with the organization? How much of tenure can be explained by whether there has been a divorce? 4. Make a logical argument for why lengthy tenure may be causing divorce. 5. Make another logical argument for why divorce may be causing lengthy tenure. Make sure to support your arguments with at least two articles from the Ashford Library or other scholarly sources. All calculations conducted in Excel must be copied and pasted into the Word document before submission. Be sure to clearly label all calculations.

Document Preview:

8459633/8459633 (Analysis).xlsx? 1 9 0 2 9.5 0 3 11 1 4 11.5 1 5 10 1 6 9.75 0 7 10 0 8 10.25 1 0 9 1 0 9.5 0.75 1 1 11 1 11.5 1 10 0 9.75 0.5625 0 10 1 10.25 Tenure Divorce 8459633/8459633 (Solution).docx? Evaluation of Correlation Data are gathered regarding the length of tenure top executives have at a major corporation and whether those executives have been divorced.  The Human Resources department is evaluating this data to drive decision-making in regard to their hiring process.  The data for eight executives is as follows:   In a three to five page paper, excluding title page and reference page(s), answer the following questions to analyze the data.  Include clearly labeled calculations, if applicable.  Calculations conducted in Excel must be copied and pasted into the Word document.  This paper should be formatted according to APA guidelines outlined in the Ashford Writing Center. What’s the most appropriate procedure for evaluating the relationship between tenure and divorce? The characteristics of these two variables require a procedure called a point-biserial correlation. The “point” in the title refers to the continuous variable, the length of tenure top executives have at a major corporation. The “biserial” refers to the other variable in the relationship, which can have only two options. In the example they are those executives have been divorced. The point-biserial correlation is a procedure for relating an interval/ratio variable with a nominal variable that has two categories. The dichotomous variable that is “Divorce” is dummy-coded where 1 represent that the executives have been divorced and 0 represent that the executives have not been divorced. What is the correlation and how can it be interpreted in terms of magnitude, direction and practical importance? To complete the point-biserial correlation in Excel, the data can be arranged in columns or rows. For this example, we will use Column A for the…

Attachments:

evaluation decision making scenario using linear profit and cost modeling 494615

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Homework – Accounting Evaluating decision-making scenarios using linear profit and cost modeling Vintage Cellars manufactures a 1,000-bottle wine storage system that maintains optimum temperature (55-57 °F) and humidity (50-80%) for aging wines. The system has a backup battery for power failures and can store red and white wines at different temperatures. The following table depicts how average cost varies with the number of units manufactured and sold (per month): Quantity Average cost $12,000 10,000 8,600 7,700 7,100 7,100 7,350 7,850 8,600 9,600 Required: Prepare a table that computes the total cost and marginal cost for each quantity between 1 and 10 units. What is the relation between average cost and marginal cost? What is the opportunity cost of producing one more unit if the company is currently producing and selling four units? Vintage Cellars sells the units for $9,000 each. This price does not vary with the number of units sold. How many units should Vintage manufacture and sell each month? tunity cost of producing one more unit if the company is currently producing and selling four units? Vintage Cellars sells the units for $9,000 each. This price does not vary with the number of units sold. How many units should Vintage manufacture and sell each month? ttery for power failures and can store red and white wines at different temperatures. The following table depicts how average cost varies with the number of units manufactured and sold (per month): Quantity Average cost $12,000 10,000 8,600 7,700 …

Attachments:

dispute 494586

The score went from a 2.4/ to a 2.5/4 on the 1st task. I think it’s time fo a refund. I will hire someone else. Thanks for trying though. Please see the attached eval. I need a refund immediately. Thanks.

Document Preview:

!” # !#$%&'()*)+,” -%&'()*)+,+’). !”#”$%&$”%”%!’$%%() /!”0101!02!#.!!0″3 !!0!4$$!!!!/$5!!0.2.$!0 22!.3/ *+’,+ -“!”#”$%&$”%”%!) ! ” #$ %$’ !.&$$)1’$!6!$$($(72801$ “!!02!/0! !”!039/0! !”!0$4!/0! !”!09″/)/ $ %$’ !.&$$)1’$!6!$$($(728039 $125!0!$!!02″3″!0/039 $”325$282!0!!”3!0!0 !8″!0/039 $”32.!$8$! !.25/039 $$8$! !.252/)/*)%$’ !.&$$)1’$!6!$$($(7280 $$! !8 !:,”!0$ !$!”;/0 $$! !8 !<+”!0$ !$!”;/! ./0 $$! !8 !”!0$ !$!”;/ ! “” “#$%&'()! )/)0″3!413)!”!! 90$=4!8+//.!!+
!8″!0 2!!2!!0!! 0$$0!/0 $$! 2!0>!8″!0 2!!2!!0!! 0$$0!3!02!0/0 $$! 2!0>!8″!0 2!!2!!0!! 0$$0!3!0:/0 $$! 2!0>!8″!0 2!!2!!0!! 0$$0!3!0/)/)*,!+%$’ !.&$$)1’$!6!$$($(7280 $$!$! 2!0>!8″!0. 0!!0!! 0$$0!/0 $$! 2!0>!8″!0. 0!!0!! 0$$0!3!02!0/0 $$! 2!0>!8″!0. 0!!0!! 0$$0!3!0:/0 $$! 2!0>!8″!0. 0!!0!! 0$$0!3!0/)/%*-%$’ !.&$$)1’$!6!$$($(7280 $$!1$ 7!”:,”!0!$!$30!0!0!!$$ !!!0#39#!” !8 $!/0 $$!1$ 7!”<+”!0!$!$30!0!0!!$$ !!!0#39#!” !8 $!/! ./0 $$!1$ 7!””!0!$!$30!0!0!!$$ !!!0#39#!” !8 $!/)/)0″3$ !413 ! 1.!1+ 022$!!1$ $ !”!!0#39#!” !8/8= 1.+ 022$!!$$!0!/)!”!!!!+ 022$!!$$!0!/ (0+ 022$!!$$!0!/ !+ !!0/ &*. ! “” “#$%&'()! %$’ !.&$$)1’$!6!$$($(7280 $$!1$!5!” !”!0$!” !”:,”!0!$!$!!0#39#!” !8 $!/0 $$!1$!5!” !”!0$!” !”<+”!0!$!$!!0#39#!” !8 $!/! ./0 $$!1$!5!” !”!0$!” !””!0!$!$!!0#39#!” !8 $!/)/)022$!1$7!”!0″3!8= 1.)!”!!!!(0910022$!!1$!$8″ ! 1.!1/%$$!#! !8.1$!0!!0$.!!21/ !!$!!05!” !.$!0 02$”6 !$6 !/ ‘*-)%$’ !.&$$)1’$!6!$$($(7280 $$!$!1! 28!$!$!!$!$”!002 !$!8/0 $$!1$ 1!” 28!$!$!1.!$!$”!002 !$!8/0 $$!1$ 1!” 28!$!$!1.!$!$”!002 !$!8/0 $$!1$ $.$3+!$1!” 28!$!$!1.!$!$”!002 !$!8/)/)0.2$!”” !8$$!0 !/ 0″!0!#$ !30!0 0!”.1.3!01$$$!84!!0$0!/ *%$’ !.&$$)1’$!6!$$($(728%”!0 $$! #!0 $$!$!1$+!7! !!$” ” 0 $/%”!0 $$! #!0 $$!1$!+!7! !!$” 3!025$1!”2!8/%”!0 $$! #!0 $$!1$!+!7! !!$” 3!02$1!”2!8/%”!0 $$! #!0 $$!1$!+!7! !!$” 3!0$8$! !.$1!”2!8#?)!0 $$!$! /)/,%$’ !.&$$)1’$!6!$$($(728′ !.$)1!6!$$(728 ! “” “#$%&'()! )/)$1/ ! “” “#$%&'()!?????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

do the accounting activities in the attachments 494588

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Answer eye openers Which of the following qualities are characteristic of fixed assets? (a) tangible, (b) capable of repeated use in the operations of the business, (c) held for sale in the normal course of business, (d) used rarely in the operations of the business,(e) long-lived. 2. Mancini Office Supplies has a fleet of automobiles and trucks for use by salespersons and for delivery of office supplies and equipment. East Village Auto Sales Co. has automobiles and trucks for sale. Under what caption would the automobiles and trucks be reported in the balance sheet of (a) Mancini Office Supplies, (b) East Village Auto Sales Co.? 3. Just Animals Co. acquired an adjacent vacant lot with the hope of selling it in the future at a gain. The lot is not intended to be used in Just Animals’ business operations. Where should such real estate be listed in the balance sheet? 4. My Mother’s Closet Company solicited bids from several contractors to construct an addition to its office building. The lowest bid received was for $375,000. My Mother’s Closet Company decided to construct the addition itself at a cost of $298,500. What amount should be recorded in the building account? 5. Distinguish between the accounting for capital expenditures and revenue expenditures. 6. Immediately after a used truck is acquired, a new motor is installed at a total cost of $3,175. Is this a capital expenditure or a revenue expenditure? 7. How does the accounting for a capital lease differ from the accounting for an operating lease? 8. Are the amounts at which fixed assets are reported in the balance sheet their approximate market values as of the balance sheet date? Discuss. 9. a. Does the recognition of depreciation in the accounts provide a special cash fund for the replacement of fixed assets? Explain. b. Describe the nature of depreciation as the term is used in accounting. 10. Pac Vac Company purchased a machine that has a manufacturer’s suggested life of 15 years. The company…

computerized accounting with quickbooks 2013 chapter 6 494560

i NEED DONE CHAPTER 6 CASE 1, AND CASE 2

Document Preview:

Cha r Review an ssment Procedure Check 1. Your company will be selling a new product. Describe the steps that must be taken to add the new item to the system. 2. Explain the difference between using Enter Bills or Receive Items and Enter Bills from the Vendors pull-down menu. 3. Which QuickBooks report(s) would you use to view the sales and pur- chases of specific inventory items? 4. At year-end, you wish to confirm the quantity on hand for each inven- tory item. How would you use QuickBooks reports to determine the quantity and value of the ending inventory? 5. Your company wishes to view the profitability of each inventory item. How could you use QuickBooks to develop this information? 6. Discuss the advantages of using a computerized accounting system to maintain a perpetual inventory system. Case Problems Case Problem 1 On April 1, 2014, Lynn Garcia began her business, called Lynn’s Music Studio. In the first month of business, Lynn set up the music studio, pro- vided guitar and piano lessons, and recorded month-end activity. In May, the second month of business, Lynn decides to purchase and sell inventory items of guitars, keyboards, music stands, and sheet music. For customers that purchase merchandise inventory, the terms of payment are 2110, Net 30 Days. For illustration purposes, assume a 7% sales tax is charged on the sale of all inventory items. The company file includes the information for Lynn’s Music Studio as of May 1, 2014. 1. Open the company file CH5 Lynn’s Music Studio.QBW. 2. Make a backup copy of the company file LMS5 [‘YourName] Lynn’s Music Studio. 3. Restore the backup copy of the company file. I~~both the Open Backup Copy and Save Company File as windows use the file name LMS5 [Your Name] Lynn’s Music Studio. 4. Change the Company Name to LMS5 [Your Name] Lynn’s Music Studio. 5. Add the following inventory items to the Item List: Type: Inventory Part Item Name/Number: Keyboards Description on Purchase/Sales Transactions: Keyboards Cost:…

Attachments:

cost accounting 494562

1) At the Todd Company, the cost of the personnel department has always been charged to production departments based upon number of employees. Recently, opinions gathered from the department managers indicate that the number of new hires might be a better predictor of personnel costs. Total personnel department costs are $320,000.

Document Preview:

1) At the Todd Company, the cost of the personnel department has always been charged to production departments based upon number of employees. Recently, opinions gathered from the department managers indicate that the number of new hires might be a better predictor of personnel costs. Total personnel department costs are $320,000. Department A B C Number of employees 30 270 100 The number of new hires 8 12 5 a) If the number of employees is considered the cost driver, what amount of personnel costs will be allocated to Department A? b) If the number of new hires is considered the cost driver, what amount of personnel costs will be allocated to Department A? 2) Franscioso Company sells several products. Information of average revenue and costs is as follows: Selling price per unit $28.50 Variable costs per unit: Direct material $5.25 Direct manufacturing labor $1.15 Manufacturing overhead $0.25 Selling costs $1.85 Annual fixed costs $110,000 The number of units that Franscioso must sell each year to break even is: 3) For each report listed below, identify whether the major purpose of the report is for (1) routine internal reporting, (2) nonroutine internal reporting, or for (3) external reporting to investors and other outside parties. Item: a. study detailing sale information of the top-ten selling products b. weekly report of total sales generated by each store in the metropolitan area c. annual Report sent to shareholders d. monthly report comparing budgeted sales by store to actual sales 4) The East Company manufactures several different products. Unit costs associated with Product ORD203 are as follows: Direct materials $50 Direct manufacturing labor 8 Variable manufacturing overhead 10 Fixed manufacturing overhead 23 Sales commissions (2% of sales) 5 Administrative salaries 9 Total $105 What are the inventoriable costs per unit associated with Product ORD203?

Attachments:

cost accounting done asap 494563

Student Name: (10 points) Donald’s Engine Company manufactures part TE456 used in several of its engine models. Monthly production costs for 1,000 units are as follows: Direct materials $ 20,000 Direct labor 5,000 Variable overhead costs 15,000 Fixed overhead costs 10,000 Total costs $50,000 It is estimated that 10% of the fixed overhead costs assigned to TE456 will no longer be incurred if the company purchases TE456 from the outside supplier. Donald’s Engine Company has the option of purchasing the part from an outside supplier at $42.50 per unit.

Document Preview:

Student Name: (10 points) Donald’s Engine Company manufactures part TE456 used in several of its engine models. Monthly production costs for 1,000 units are as follows: Direct materials $ 20,000 Direct labor 5,000 Variable overhead costs 15,000 Fixed overhead costs 10,000 Total costs $50,000 It is estimated that 10% of the fixed overhead costs assigned to TE456 will no longer be incurred if the company purchases TE456 from the outside supplier. Donald’s Engine Company has the option of purchasing the part from an outside supplier at $42.50 per unit. If Donald’s Engine Company accepts the offer from the outside supplier, the monthly avoidable costs (costs that will no longer be incurred) total: If Donald’s Engine Company purchases 1,000 TE456 parts from the outside supplier per month, then its monthly operating income will: The maximum price that Donald’s Engine Company should be willing to pay the outside supplier is: (10 points) Willis Corporation manufactures industrial-sized gas furnaces and uses budgeted machine-hours to allocate variable manufacturing overhead. The following information pertains to the company’s manufacturing overhead data: Budgeted output units 30,000 units Budgeted machine-hours 10,000 hours Budgeted variable manufacturing overhead costs for 15,000 units $322,500 Actual output units produced 44,000 units Actual machine-hours used 14,400 hours Actual variable manufacturing overhead costs $484,000 What is the budgeted variable overhead cost rate per output unit? (10 points) Meale Company makes a household appliance with model number X500. The goal for 2012 is to reduce direct materials usage per unit. No defective units are currently produced. Manufacturing conversion costs depend on production capacity defined in terms of X500 units that can be produced. The industry market size for appliances increased 10% from 2011 to 2012. The following additional data are available for 2011 and 2012: 2011 2012 Units…

Attachments:

cost management problem 494566

I attached the problem with the required.

Document Preview:

Mina’s Tricks ‘N Treats Mina’s Tricks ‘N Treats sells premium dog treats and cute dog accessories for the most fashion forward dogs around. Your mission, should you choose to accept it, is to provide the owner of Mina’s Tricks ‘N Treats with some helpful cost analysis. See, Mina’s Tricks ‘N Treats isn’t doing so hot in comparison to its competitors and the owner wants to know why. All the information to produce Mina’s famous dog biscuits has been gathered and is presented for your analysis below. Mina’s Tricks ‘N Treats requires two types of direct labor to make dog biscuits: Production and Inspection. Production employees are paid $10.00 per hour. Inspection employees are paid $20.00 per hour and inspections are performed in batches of 300 biscuits. Standards have been established for one biscuit. Production…………………………………………………………. 1 min per biscuit Inspection………………………………………………………….. 2 hours per batch During the current month Mina’s Tricks ‘N Treats produced 300,000 biscuits and incurred the following direct labor costs: Production……………………………….. 4,900 hours…………………………. $52,150 Inspection………………………………… 2,200 hours…………………………. $43,000 Mina’s Tricks ‘N Treats requires two types of direct materials to make dog biscuits: Peanut Butter and Bacon. Standards have been established based on one biscuit. Peanut Butter……………………………………………………. .6 unit at $0.30 per unit Bacon………………………………………………………………… .4 unit at $0.60 per unit Also during the current month, Mina’s Tricks ‘N Treats noted direct material costs to be as follows: Materials purchased: Peanut Butter…………………………………………………… 200,000 units at $0.28 per unit Bacon……………………………………………………………….. 120,000 units at $0.65 per unit Of the materials purchased, the following were used: Peanut Butter…………………………………………………… 198,000 units Bacon……………………………………………………………….. 113,000 units Mina’s Tricks ‘N Treats has the following standard overhead rates: Standard variable overhead rate………………………. $6.00 per direct-labor…

could someone do this for me 494567

Document Preview:

Tax Return Project ACCT407 Fall 2013 (Due at 10:45am Dec. 2nd) Required: ? Use the following information to complete Phillip and Claire Dunphy’s 2013 federal income tax return. If information is missing, use reasonable assumptions to fill in the gaps. Ignore the alternative minimum tax for this problem. ? Any required forms, schedules, and instructions can be found at the IRS Web site (www.irs.gov). The instructions can be helpful in completing the forms. ? You need to staple and hand in the forms in the proper order with a printed cover sheet (8% of the grade will be based on the document organization and clearance). The forms will include 1040, Schedule C, D, SE, 4562, 8949 (do not need to prepare form 4797) ? This project is time consuming. Please do not wait until the last minutes. Your solutions must be the result of your own work, not a copy of another student’s solutions. ? The number of Form 1040 line 14 is $81,687. The numbers on Schedule D lines 11 and 19 are $197,882 and $126,033 respectively. ? Check numbers: ? Schedule C Line 31: $69,749 Facts: 1. Phillip and Claire are married and file a joint return. Phillip is self-employed as a real estate agent, and Claire is a flight attendant. Phillip and Claire have three dependent children. All three children live at home with Phillip and Claire for the entire year. The Dunphys provide you with the following additional information: ? The Dunphys do not want to contribute to the presidential election campaign. ? The Dunphys live at 3701 Brighton Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90018. ? Phillip’s birthday is 11/5/1966 and his Social Security number is 321-44-5766. ? Claire’s birthday is 5/12/1969 and her Social Security number is 567-77-1258. ? Haley’s birthday is 11/6/2000 and her Social Security number is 621-18-7592. ? Alex’s birthday is 2/1/2002 and her Social Security number is 621-92-8751. ? Luke’s birthday is 12/12/2006 and his Social Security number is 621-99-9926. ? The Dunphys do not have any foreign bank…

Attachments:

country vista company statement of cash flows 494568

Country Vista Company_Statement of cash flows

Download and review the income statement for the Country Vista Company. You will use the income statement to help you complete Part 1 and Part 2 below.

Country Vista Income Statement

Country Vista Company

Income Statement

For the Year Ended December 31, 2011

Sales

$2,48,000

Cost of Goods Sold

$1,16,000

Gross Profit

$1,32,000

Operating Expenses

Wages and Salaries Expense

$44,000

Rent Expense

$16,000

Depreciation Expense

$30,000

Other Operating Expenses

$18,000

$1,08,000

Income from Operations

$24,000

Gain on Sale of Equipment

$26,000

Income before Income Taxes

$50,000

Income Tax Expense

$17,500

Net Income

$32,500

Part 1: Indirect Method

Using Excel, prepare the Statement of Cash Flows Indirect Method. Your SOCF should be based upon the income statement and the additional information below:

Additional Information:

Increase in Accounts Receivables=$4,000

Increase in Accounts Payables=$16,000

Increase in Income Taxes Payable=$300

Decrease in Prepaid Expenses=$10,000

Decrease in Merchandise Inventory=$14,000

Decrease in Long Term Notes Payable=$20,000

Cash Paid to Purchase Land=$50,000

Cash Paid to Purchase Equipment=$15,000

Cash Paid to Retire Bonds=$25,000

Cash Paid to for Dividends=$10,000

Cash Received from the Sale of common stock=$50,000

Cash at the start of the year=$24,000

Part 2: Direct Method

Using Excel and the below information please prepare the complete statement of cash flows using the direct method.

Additional Information:

Cash Received from Customers=$80,000

Cash Payments for Merchandise=$10,000

Cash Payments for Operating Expenses=$5,000

Cash payments for Interest=$6,000

Cash Payments for Income Taxes=$3,000

Attachments:

course project draft financial statement analysis project a comparative analysis of 494569

Your Course Project

Financial Statement Analysis Project — A Comparative Analysis of Kohl s Corporation and J.C. Penney Corporation

Below is the link for the financial statements for Kohl s Corporation for the 2010 fiscal year ending January 29, 2011. Under the term Groupings Filter, change the term All Forms to Annual Filings using the drop-down arrow and press Search.

You should then scroll down and select the 10k dated 3/18/2011 and choose to download in Word or PDF format.

http://www.kohlscorporation.com/InvestorRelations/sec-filings.htm

Below is the link for the financial statements for J.C. Penney Corporation for the 2010 fiscal year ending January 29, 2011. Under the term Groupings Filter, change the term All Forms to Annual Filings using the drop-down arrow and press Search.

You should then scroll down and select the 10k dated 3/29/2011 and choose to download in Word format.

http://ir.jcpenney.com/phoenix.zhtml?c=70528&p=irol-sec

A sample project template is available for download in Doc Sharing. The sample project compares the ratio performance of Tootsie Roll and Hershey using the 2009 financial statements of Tootsie Roll and Hershey provided in Appendix A and Appendix B of your textbook.

Description

This course contains a Course Project where you will be required to submit one draft of the project at the end of Week 5 and the final completed project at the end of Week 7. Using the financial statements for Kohl s Corporation and J.C. Penney Corporation, respectively, you will calculate and compare the financial ratios listed further down this documentfor the fiscal year ending 2010 and prepare your comments about the liquidity, solvency, and profitability of the two companies based on your ratio calculations.The entire project will be graded by the instructor at the end of the final submission in Week 7 and one grade will be assigned for the entire project.

Overall Requirements

For the Final Submission:

Your final Excel workbook submission should contain the following. You cannot use any other software but Excel to complete this project.

1. A completed worksheet title page tab, which is really a cover sheet with your name, the course, the date, your instructor s name, and the title for the project.

2. A completed worksheet profiles tab, which contains a-one paragraph description regarding each company with information about their history, what products they sell, where they are located, etc.

3. All 18 ratios for each company with the supporting calculations and commentary on your worksheet ratio tab. Supporting calculations must be shown either as a formula or as text typed into a different cell. The ratios are listed further down this document. Your comments for each ratio should include more than just a definition of the ratio. You should focus on interpreting each ratio number for each company and support your comments with the numbers found in the ratios.

4. The Summary and Conclusions worksheet tab, which is an overall comparison of how each company compares in terms of the major category of ratios (liquidity, profitability, and solvency). A nice way to conclude is to state which company you think is the better investment and why.

5. The Bibliography worksheet tab must contain at least your textbook as a reference. Any other information you use to profile the companies should also be cited as a reference.

Required Ratios for Final Project Submission

1. Earnings per share

  1. Current ratio
  2. Gross profit rate
  3. Profit margin ratio
  4. Inventory turnover ratio
  5. Days in inventory

7. Receivables turnover ratio

8. Average collection period

  1. Asset turnover ratio
  2. Return on assets ratio
  3. Debt to total assets ratio
  4. Times interest earned ratio
  5. Payout ratio
  6. Return on common stockholders equity ratio
  7. Free cash flow
  8. Current cash debt coverage ratio
  9. Cash debt coverage ratio
  10. Price/earnings ratio [For the purpose of this ratio, for both Kohl s and J.C. Penney, use the market price per share on January 31, 2011.]

The Excel files uploaded in the Dropboxes should not include any unnecessary numbers or information (such as previous years’ ratios, ratios that were not specifically asked for in the project, etc.).

Please upload your final submission to the Week 7 Dropbox by Sunday at the end of Week 7.

For the Draft:

Create an Excel spreadsheet or use the project template to show your computations for the first 12 ratios listed above. The more you can complete regarding the other requirements, the closer you will be to completion when Week 7 arrives. Supporting calculations must be shown either as a formula or as text typed into a different cell. If you plan on creating your own spreadsheet, please follow the format provided in the Tootsie Roll and Hershey template file.

Please upload your draft submission to the Week 5 Dropbox by Sunday at the end of Week 5.

Other Helpful information:

If you feel uncomfortable with Excel, you can find many helpful references on Excel by performing a Google search.

The Appendix to Chapter 13 contains ratio calculations and comparison comments related to Kellogg and General Mills, so you will likely find this information helpful.

BigCharts.com provides historical stock quotes.

Either APA or MLA style can be used to complete the references on your Bibliography tab. There is a tutorial for APA and MLA style within the Syllabus.

Grade Information

The entire project will be graded by the instructor at the end of the final submission in Week 7, and one grade will be assigned for the entire project. The project will count for 18% of your overall course grade.

Category

Points

%

Description

Documentation
and Formatting

9

5%

The report will be submitted in the form of an Excel Workbook, with each page (worksheet) of the workbook named appropriately.Please do not use any other software (such as MS Works or Lotus) to complete the project. A quality report will include a title worksheet tab, a worksheet tab for the profile of the two companies, a worksheet tab for the ratio calculations and comments, a worksheet tab for the summary and conclusion, proper citations if applicable, and a Bibliography worksheet tab for the references.

Organization
and Cohesiveness

9

5%

A quality report will include the content described above in the documentation and formatting section. The ratios should be listed in the same order in which they appear in the project information above.

Editing

18

10%

A quality report will be free of any spelling, punctuation, or grammatical errors. Sentences and paragraphs will be clear, concise, and factually correct.Ratios will be expressed as numbers or percentages, depending on what is appropriate, as is shown in the textbook.Note that not all ratios are shown as percentages. Two decimal places is sufficient for each of the ratios.

Content

144

80%

A quality report will have correct ratio calculations and accurate supporting commentary. Any assumptions, if made, should be spelled out clearly. Supporting calculations must be shown either as a formula or as text typed into a different cell.

Total

180

100%

A quality report will meet or exceed all of the above requirements.

Attachments:

coursework 494570

The good, the bad and the ugly – Partnerships?Post one good thing about forming a partnership OR say one bad thing about forming a partnership. Student’s comment: Two things come to mind when forming a partnership. The first thing is that you and your partner are liable for your business. If your business defaults on a loan or gets sued then you and your partner are held legally and financially accountable. Whereas in a corporation the owner’s or shareholder’s finances aren’t touched if the business defaults on a loan or is sued for some reason.

Document Preview:

The good, the bad and the ugly – Partnerships?Post one good thing about forming a partnership OR say one bad thing about forming a partnership. Student’s comment: Two things come to mind when forming a partnership. The first thing is that you and your partner are liable for your business. If your business defaults on a loan or gets sued then you and your partner are held legally and financially accountable. Whereas in a corporation the owner’s or shareholder’s finances aren’t touched if the business defaults on a loan or is sued for some reason. Another thought that comes to mind when discussing partnerships is that you really have to trust your partner to be committed to the business and to you. If your partner backs out when business isn’t doing well then both of you could be in trouble. The good, the bad and the ugly – Partnerships?Post one good thing about forming a partnership OR say one bad thing about forming a partnership. Student’s comment: Two things come to mind when forming a partnership. The first thing is that you and your partner are liable for your business. If your business defaults on a loan or gets sued then you and your partner are held legally and financially accountable. Whereas in a corporation the owner’s or shareholder’s finances aren’t touched if the business defaults on a loan or is sued for some reason. Another thought that comes to mind when discussing partnerships is that you really have to trust your partner to be committed to the business and to you. If your partner backs out when business isn’t doing well then both of you could be in trouble. ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

court case brief 1 494571

U.S. Supreme Court COMMISSIONER v. DUBERSTEIN., 363 U.S. 278 (1960) 363 U.S. 278 COMMISSIONER OF INTERNAL REVENUE v. DUBERSTEIN ET UX. CERTIORARI TO THE UNITED STATES COURT OF APPEALS FOR THE SIXTH CIRCUIT. No. 376. Argued March 23, 1960. Decided June 13, 1960. * 1.

Document Preview:

U.S. Supreme Court COMMISSIONER v. DUBERSTEIN., 363 U.S. 278 (1960) 363 U.S. 278 COMMISSIONER OF INTERNAL REVENUE v. DUBERSTEIN ET UX. CERTIORARI TO THE UNITED STATES COURT OF APPEALS FOR THE SIXTH CIRCUIT. No. 376. Argued March 23, 1960. Decided June 13, 1960. * 1. This Court rejects the Government’s suggestion that it promulgate a new “test” to serve as a standard to be applied by the lower courts and by the Tax Court in dealing with numerous cases involving the question what is a “gift” excludable from income under the Internal Revenue Code, since the governing principles are necessarily general and have already been spelled out in the opinions of this Court. Pp. 284- 286. 2. The conclusion whether a transfer amounts to a “gift” is one that must be reached on consideration of all the factors. While the principles urged by the Government may, in nonabsolute from as crystallizations of experience, prove persuasive to the trier of facts in a particular case, they cannot be laid down as a matter of law. Pp. 287-289. 3. Determination in each individual case as to whether the transaction in question was a “gift” must be based ultimately on the application of the fact-finding tribunal’s experience with the mainsprings of human conduct to the totality of the facts in the case; and appellate review of the conclusion reached by the fact-finding tribunal must be quite restricted. Pp. 289-291. 4. In No. 376, Duberstein, an individual taxpayer, gave to a business corporation, upon request, the names of potential customers. The information proved valuable, and the corporation reciprocated by giving Duberstein a Cadillac automobile, charging the cost thereof as a business expense on its own corporate income tax return. The Tax Court concluded that the car was not a “gift” excludable from income under 22 (b) (3) of the Internal Revenue Code of 1939. Held: On the record in this case, it cannot be said [363 U.S. 278, 279] that the Tax Court’s conclusion was “clearly erroneous,”…

Attachments:

cuny sps bus 333 corporate finance assignment 2 494572

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

CUNY SPS – BUS 333 – Corporate Finance Fall 2013 – Assignment 2 Cash Flows and Financial Statements at SeaHornet Boards, Inc. SeaHornet Boards is a small company that manufactures and sells surfboards in Malibu. Tad Marks, the founder of the company, is in charge of the design and sale of the surfboards, but his background is in surfing, not business. As a result, the company’s financial records are not well maintained. The initial investment in SeaHornet Boards was provided by Tad and his friends and family. Because the initial investment was relatively small, and the company has made surfboards only for its own store, the investors haven’t required detailed financial statements from Tad. But thanks to word of mouth among professional surfers, sales have picked up recently, and Tad is considering a major expansion. His plans include opening another surfboard store in Hawaii, as well as supplying his “sticks” (surfer lingo for boards) to other sellers. Tad’s expansion plans require a significant investment, which he plans to finance with a combination of additional funds from outsiders plus some money borrowed from banks. Naturally, the new investors and creditors require more organized and detailed financial statements than Tad has previously prepared. At the urging of his investors, Tad has hired a financial analyst to evaluate the performance of the company over the past year. After rooting through old bank statements, sales receipts, tax returns, and other records, the financial analyst has assembled the following information: SeaHornet Boards currently pays out 50 percent of net income as dividends to Tad and the other original investors, and it has a 20 percent tax rate. REQUIREMENTS: As the financial analyst for SeaHornet Boards, your job is to prepare the six financial statements listed below. Then, based on the statements you prepared, answer the two questions listed below. Financial Statements 1. Income statement for…

Attachments:

data analysis using t test attachment 494573

Obs # Gender Q3: Hypothesis 3 tests the statement that women are more likely to report not sleeping well than men.
1 2 4 H30: Women are more likely to report not sleeping well than men.
2 1 2 H3a: Women are not more likely to report not sleeping well than men.
3 1 2
4 1 3 1= Males
5 1 4 2= Females
6 2 4
7 2 5 I need this data analyzed using the t-test if appropriate for the two variables, men and women.
8 2 4 Show a scatterplot, bar graph, or frequency table
9 1 2
10 1 1 Please show me the steps to arriving at the answer, so I may learn. Thank you.
11 2 4
12 1 1 Pts Answer
13 2 3 1 Strongly Agree
14 2 2 2 Agree
15 1 3 3 Neutral
16 1 3 4 Disagree
17 1 2 5 Strongly Disagree
18 1 2
19 2 5
20 2 4
21 2 4
22 2 2
23 1 1
24 1 2
25 2 2
26 2 5
27 2 4
28 2 4
29 2 4
30 1 2
31 1 2
32 2 3
33 2 4
34 1 2
35 1 2
36 2 2
37 1 4
38 1 3
39 1 1
40 2 4
41 1 2
42 1 2

Attachments:

decion analysis 494574

Introduction:

For this task, you will use the Shuzworld case study (see Web Links section below). You will need to read the entire case study to be able to complete this task correctly.

Scenario:

As the operations consultant for Shuzworld, you have been asked to provide recommendations after analyzing the following problems and applying the appropriate decision analysis tool to help you with your recommendation.

By utilizing excel om or pom software.
You have been asked to look at the data used to determine the various costs of building a new stand-alone store, building one in a strip mall, or not building one at all.

In addition, there is a store already under construction that must be built in time for the planned grand opening. It is currently behind schedule. It would be better to run over costs than to be late in finishing.

For this task, you will prepare a report to present your analysis and recommend solutions to the problems presented in the following tasks. Senior management will be interested in understanding why you chose the decision analysis tool you did to develop your recommendations.

Task:

Create a report

A. Recommend whether Shuzworld should build the proposed stand-alone store, the strip mall store, or not proceed with construction, utilizing the appropriate decision analysis tool.

1. Submit a copy of the output from your decision analysis tool of choice.

a. Explain why you chose the decision analysis tool you used.

2. Discuss two important factors that Shuzworld should consider while evaluating location alternatives for a new store.

B. Recommend project techniques that can be used with the construction project plan for the store being built.

1. Present a network diagram indicating the critical path.

C. Evaluate the trade-offs of allocating production line workers to minimize production costs.

1. Recommend a production mix that maximizes profits for Shuzworld s Shanghai plant, utilizing the appropriate decision analysis tool.

a. Submit a copy of the output from your decision analysis tool of choice.

i. Explain why you chose the decision analysis tool you used.

D. Evaluate Shuzworld s reordering practices at the Baltimore store,utilizing a Monte Carlo simulation to evaluate variables that exhibit random (probabilistic) behavior as inputs to a 20-day inventory simulation.

E. Discuss ways to give Shuzworld a competitive advantage by doing the following:

1. Recommend a human resources strategy to improve employee efficiency and effectiveness in the operations segments of Shuzworld.

2. Discuss applicable operations management philosophies that focus on reducing waste and increasing efficiency in Shuzworld s production processes.

design studio assessment 494575

111 113 115 117 145 146 212 213 214 311 312 313 411 511 512 514 517 519 2011 8/1/2012 8/1/2012 8/1/2012 8/2/2012 8/7/2012 8/8/2012 8/12/2012 8/13/2012 2011 8/15/2012 8/16/2012 8/19/2012 8/20/2012 8/21/2012 8/22/2012 8/23/2012 8/26/2012 8/30/2012 2011 7/31/2012 2800 22480 8/1/2012 8/2/2012 8/7/2012 8/12/2012 8/13/2012 8/15/2012 8/16/2012 8/19/2012 8/21/2012 8/22/2012 8/23/2012 8/26/2012 8/30/2012 2011 7/31/2012 400 5000 8/1/2012 8/16/2012 8/20/2012 8/31/2012 2011 7/31/2012 3660

Document Preview:

111 113 115 117 145 146 212 213 214 311 312 313 411 511 512 514 517 519 2011 8/1/2012 8/1/2012 8/1/2012 8/2/2012 8/7/2012 8/8/2012 8/12/2012 8/13/2012 2011 8/15/2012 8/16/2012 8/19/2012 8/20/2012 8/21/2012 8/22/2012 8/23/2012 8/26/2012 8/30/2012 2011 7/31/2012 2800 22480 8/1/2012 8/2/2012 8/7/2012 8/12/2012 8/13/2012 8/15/2012 8/16/2012 8/19/2012 8/21/2012 8/22/2012 8/23/2012 8/26/2012 8/30/2012 2011 7/31/2012 400 5000 8/1/2012 8/16/2012 8/20/2012 8/31/2012 2011 7/31/2012 3660 8/7/2012 8/31/2012 2011 7/31/2012 1600 1600 8/26/2012 8/31/2012 2011 7/31/2012 16320 16320 8/2/2012 2011 7/31/2012 300 300 8/31/2012 2011 7/31/2012 6280 8/12/2012 8/19/2012 2011 7/31/2012 800 600 8/8/2013 8/13/2012 8/31/2012 1100 2011 7/31/2012 720 720 8/1/2012 8/31/2012 2011 7/31/2012 41160 8/1/2012 8/31/2012 8/31/2012 2011 8/30/2012 8/31/2012 2011 8/31/2012 8/31/2012 8/31/2012 2011 8/1/2012 8/8/2012 8/15/2012 8/20/2012 8/21/2012 8/31/2012 8/31/2012 8/31/2012 2011 8/1/2012 8/23/2012 8/31/2012 8/31/2012 2011 8/22/2012 8/31/2012 2011 8/31/2012 8/31/2012 2011 8/31/2012 8/31/2012 2011 8/31/2012 8/31/2012 2011 8/31/2012 8/31/2012 8/31/2012 8/31/2012 8/31/2012 8/31/2012 2011 8/31/2012 8/31/2012 8/31/2012 8/31/2012 8/31/2011 Date Description Debit Credit Name: Course: Date: Chapter 4, Comprehensive Problem General Journal Page 5 1. Reversing entries Post Ref Cash Accounts Receivable Office Supplies Prepaid Rent Office Equipment Accumulated Depreciation—Office Equipment Accounts Payable Unearned Design Revenue Wages Payable J. Miller, Capital J. Miller, Withdrawals Income Summary Design Revenue Wages Expense Utilities Expense Office Supplies Expense Rent Expense Depreciation Expense—Office Equipment 2. To reverse the adjusting entry…

Attachments:

ferguson son manufacturing company s budgetary control system 494576

Very simple assignment that has already been done for the most part just missing a very good powerpoint presentation

In M6: Assignment 2, you analyzed Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company’s budgetary control system, explained how the use of an activity-based costing system could change the results of the budget and improve ROI, and made recommendations for goal alignment. This assignment was also the LASA 2.

In this assignment, you will develop an executive summary of your findings in a Microsoft PowerPoint presentation format.

Include the following in your presentation:

  • Include a statement of the problem or topic of LASA 2, a concise analysis of the findings, and a recapitulation of any main conclusions or recommendations.
  • Be sure to incorporate specific details from LASA 2 to highlight or support the summary.
  • Using your knowledge of capital budgeting techniques, explain how principles of capital budgeting, such as the payback method, IRR, and NPV, can be used to assess changes in performance and make decisions for the future based on decisions made within the organization.
Document Preview:

Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Budget Analysis Ferguson & Son Manufacturing Company budgetary control system does a series of evaluations throughout each department on a monthly basis as opposed to in the past the main focus was about craftsmanship and the quality of work being done. The evaluations are done on a monthly basis for comparisons to be made between all the departments’ actual and budgeted costs. Some of the company’s problems are all of the setup and machine adjustment time, the interruptions during the larger projects to work on a smaller rushed orders as well as not having functioning equipment to produce efficiently. While another issue that the company has is that the employees at times feel that they are being rushed to do quality work and stay with in the company’s estimated budget as well to be within the time frame that is required. With the employees feeling like they have no options like in some of the other departments that are allowed to delegate what projects to do and what to report as an expense. With what the company is expecting from the employees, they might feel as if they are being set up for failure because the manager often stresses the importance of continued progress to attain the budget he also lets it be known that he keeps files of all the performance reports that are done. Goal alignment allows a quicker execution of the company’s strategy to prevent the employees from feeling like they are being set up for failure, with this method it allows everyone to work together towards the same objectives, the company can execute its strategy faster, with more flexibility, efficiency and adaptability. Essentially the goal alignment strengthens the leadership within the company and creates organizational agility. Clearly communicating the organizations goals will ensure that valuable time is not wasted on a nonrelated task. Some improvements that could benefit the company are to communicate all expectations,…

Attachments:

develop a 6 8 slide presentation in powerpoint format 494577

Assignment 2: Designing Value-Based Service As the rate of innovation increases, companies face expanding product/service lines, shorter product and service lifecycles, and more frequent product/service transitions. All of these can bring tremendous value but also pose enormous challenges and risks. The article The Art of Managing New Product Transitions by Erhun, Gonclave, and Hopman (2007) from the readings for this module includes a matrix titled Product Drivers and Risk Factors, which focuses on Intel, a company that manufactures high-tech products (p. 76). Based on your readings and research, address the following issues: Redesign the product risk factor matrix so that the factors are appropriate for a services firm that delivers traditional tax accounting and audit services. For example, among the supply risks, assume that the company relies on individuals with specific knowledge of the tax law in the jurisdictions where its clients operate, be it state, federal, or foreign. Now, assume that the firm wants to develop a management consultancy practice. (Alternatively, you may choose to add a legal services line instead.). Create a separate new matrix that summarizes the additional risk factors for this firm launching a management consultancy or legal services line. What additional risk factors are you adding to your matrix? Explain how the business risks differ between traditional tax and audit services and management consulting services. In your opinion, what are the three biggest risks the firm faces if it diversifies into the new service line? Recommend whether the firm should organically grow into a consultancy service or acquire a third party to achieve new goals. Justify your recommendations. Develop a 6 8-slide presentation in PowerPoint format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M2_A2.ppt. Be sure to include the following in your presentation: A title slide An agenda slide A reference slide Headings for each section Speaker notes to support the content in each slide By Sunday, July 28, 2013, deliver your assignment to the M2: Assignment 2 Dropbox. Erhun, F., Gon alves, P., & Hopman, J. (2007). The art of managing new product transitions. MIT Sloan Management Review, 48(3), 73. (ProQuest Document ID:224964759) http://search.proquest.com.libproxy.edmc.edu/docview/224964759?accountid=34899 Assignment 2 Grading Criteria Maximum Points Redesigned the product risk factor matrix for a services firm that has traditionally provided tax and audit services and now wants to develop into a management consultancy. 20 Created a new matrix that summarizes the additional risk factors for this firm launching a management consultancy or legal services line. Identified additional risk factors to add to the matrix. 20 Explained how the business risks differ between these two types of services. Listed and ranked the three biggest risks if the firm diversifies into the new service line. 40 Recommended with appropriate justification on whether the firm should organically grow itself into a consultancy or acquire a third party to achieve its goals 10 Wrote using ethical scholarship, visual aesthetics, proper grammar, and mechanics. 10 Total: 100

Attachments:

devidas entertainment solution for 40 494578

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Foundations of Accounting I Accounting Project Written by: Karen Pitsch David’s Entertainment is a merchandising business. Their account balances as of November 30, 2012 (unless otherwise indicated), are as follows: 110 Cash $ 73,920 112 Accounts Receivable 34,250 113 Allowance for Doubtful Accounts 11,000 115 Merchandise Inventory 123,900 116 Prepaid Insurance 3,750 117 Store Supplies 2,850 123 Store Equipment 100,800 124 Accumulated Depreciation-Store Equipment 20,160 210 Accounts Payable 21,450 211 Salaries Payable 0 218 Interest Payable 0 220 Note Payable (Due 2017) 15,000 310 D. Williams, Capital (January 1, 2012) 73,260 311 D. Williams, Drawing 50,000 312 Income Summary 0 410 Sales 853,445 411 Sales Returns and Allowances 20,020 412 Sales Discounts 13,200 510 Cost of Merchandise Sold 414,575 520 Sales Salaries Expense 74,400 521 Advertising Expense 18,000 522 Depreciation Expense 0 523 Store Supplies Expense 0 529 Miscellaneous Selling Expense 2,800 530 Office Salaries Expense 40,500 531 Rent Expense 18,600 532 Insurance Expense 0 533 Bad Debt Expense 0 539 Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 1,650 550 Interest Expense 1,100 David’s Entertainment uses the perpetual inventory system and the First-in, First-out costing method. Transportation-in and purchase discounts should be added to the Inventory Control Sheet, but since this will complicate the computation of the First-in, First-out costing method, please ignore this step in the process. They also use the Allowance Method for bad debt. The Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary Ledgers along with the Inventory Control Sheet should be updated as each transaction affects them (daily). David’s…

Attachments:

devry proj 587 week 5 case study 494579

The Case Study for PROJ587 will place the student in the role of a senior manager in charge of one of your company s Strategic Business Units (SBU). Your first task in this new position is to develop a project portfolio management process and then use this process to select projects for your SBUs portfolio. The Case Study will involve the application of the tools and techniques of multi-project/program management and will deal with the analysis and establishment of project management systems based on the structure of the project.

The expected outputs from this Case Study will be in the form of a two part written report due week five.

Background

The senior management of your company has already made the strategic decisions to allocate annual funding to each of the Strategic Business Units (SBU) within the company. You have been hired to manage one of the companies SBUs.

Your new company is a mid cap company with revenues of approximately $350 million dollars a year. This company, like many others, is struggling in today s economy. It realizes in order to survive it needs to both expand and control costs at the same time. You are new to this industry. This company s vision is to become the go to support or the provider of choice for the cruise ship industry throughout the world.

This company currently is in the travel and hotel support industry. As such, you supply support services to the travel and hotel industry such as linen services to cruise ships and major hotel chains in the Southeastern United States. Most of your new company s revenues are derived for the cruise ship industry versus the hotel industry. This company is home based in Tampa, Florida, as most of your business is in that geographic area.

You are in charge of the Operations SBU and responsible for the management of a product portfolio in this strategic business unit. The Operations SBU is the SBU that provides all the company s services to its clients. There are a number of projects already in progress, but there has not been a good portfolio management process in place.

The parent company has set the following strategic goals for the entire company:

  • Expansion goals are to grow the company 10% per year, specifically to include the following:
    • Expand into new markets in Alaska and Europe
    • Expand services provided to current customers
    • Increase revenues by 10%
    • Increase customer satisfaction by 15%
  • Cost Control goals include the following
    • Reduce operating costs by 10%
    • Reduce overhead and warehousing costs by 5%

Assignment

Assignment: Due Week 5

This is a two part assignment.

Part 1

First, develop project selection criteria and a high level process for applying the criteria and managing the portfolio. The criteria should be consistent with the business environment for the industry, consistent with your company’s overall mission/strategies, and consistent with the mission and strategies of your strategic business unit. You are proposing a process, not individual projects.

The deliverable for Part 1 is a written proposal for the project selection criteria and a high level description of a proposed portfolio management process. You may also be expected to make an informal presentation of the report in class.

The proposal should be in the form of a memorandum to your Vice President (your instructor) outlining your proposal. The memorandum should be no more than 10 pages, including any figures and tables. It should be double-spaced, 10 or 12 point font with one-inch margins. This is a summary for an executive, so be concise, to the point, and leave out the fluff. If you don’t need 10 pages to document your proposal fully, I am sure that your Vice President will be happy with less as long as it is complete. Using appropriate grammar, spelling, punctuation, and sentence structure will be part of your grade.

The actual proposal should include the following:

1.

A description of the proposed portfolio process. You are explaining it to the executives.

2.

The reasons it was selected (tie to strategies as appropriate.)

3.

A description of the proposed selection criteria. How will the process be applied in your SBU?

4.

The method for applying the selection criteria, and the justification for both. How are you going to score the projects and evaluate the scores?

Hints for a Successful Part 1:

This is not a complete project proposal or even a complete status report. You are making a specific proposal to management of a Project Portfolio Evaluation and Selection Process .

All reports and memos to executives should include an executive summary at the beginning. This one is no exception.

The discussion of the organization should be limited to how the SBU organization supports projects and the PPM process. It is not necessary to discuss the total company.

Pay attention to the specifics requested in the deliverables. Do NOT make your memo a list of questions and answers. That is not the way a business memo is written.
It is easy to select a process that is presented in a reference but you must propose one that works for your SBU.

When you think you are finished put yourself in the role of someone who was not working on the solution and read your presentation. You can assume you know the basics of PPM.

Does your presentation provide a good description of the process and how it will be applied?

Are there obvious questions that it raises that are not answered?

This is not a classroom assignment, it is a business memo. Also it is not a research report and you are not trying to demonstrate your academic expertise and how well you are read.

Part 2

In Part 1 of the project, the new Vice President (your instructor) of your Strategic Business Unit had asked you to create a portfolio management process and project selection criteria for use by the SBU. It is now time to apply this process in selecting this year s projects for your portfolio.

In the annual budget cycle, your SBU was allocated $24 million dollars of funding uniformly spread over the next year for your portfolio. This means you have $6 million dollars to spend any given quarter. You may select any of the below projects to be included in your portfolio, but you cannot spend more than the allotted dollars allocated to your SBU. Your task is to select those projects, using your selection criteria, that most benefit the overall company without exceeding you quarterly budget of $6 million dollars. You must also lay out a plan for what quarter your selected projects will start in.

Below are your possible projects:

Project Call Center

Currently you have no call center to address customer complaints or accept orders. Customers must use the internet to fill out an online form to address their complaints or service needs. These forms are processed by employees in your department. Currently the turnaround time on any given form is between four to eight hours. This creates a number of other customer complaints. Project Call Center is designed to reduce this turnaround time by 75% by creating and staffing a call center in Tampa. Building acquisition, building renovations, building fit out, IT system upgrades, and hiring and training of staff are estimated to cost $8.5 million dollars. This $8.5 million dollars can be paid evenly in any two quarters in the next year. In addition, seven new employees will need to be hired at $40,000 burdened labor costs per year to staff the call center. Management of this project could easily be done with the current in-house staff. Most of the work of this project would be outsourced and will have minimal impact on day-to-operations.

Project Ordering Upgrade

Currently ordering processing is done online. The software and hardware used in this system are about ten years old. As such, order processing is a long, arduous process for the fifteen person staff. Upgrading this process to a state of the art system would cost approximately $2.5 million dollars, and it is a onetime pay in full internal charge to your SBU. It would also result in a reduction in the fifteen person staff by 7 individuals and reduce order processing time by 50%. Each individual in this department is paid $35,000 burdened labor costs a year. Most of the work of this project could be done internally with existing staff. One weekend of operations will be impacted by the project in its entirety.

Project Rocky

The Alaskan cruise ship industry is booming. For some reason, people like to look at icebergs. Unfortunately, our company is servicing no cruise ships in Alaska. Project Rocky is to expand into the Alaskan market. This project will require the acquisition of property in Alaska, renovation of that property, and staffing of the facility. This project is seen as a major money maker for the company and has a NPV of $19 million dollars over five years. Its costs would be $13 million dollars to initially set up the project and $400,000 a year to operate the facility. This initial cost can be spread evenly over each of four quarters of the entire year. These initial costs should be recovered within the first two or three years of operation. Most of the work of this project would be outsourced and management of the project would likely be difficult.

Project Europa

The Mediterranean cruise ship industry is booming. Unfortunately, our company is servicing no cruise ships in the entire European area. Project Europa is to expand into the Mediterranean market. This project will require the acquisition of property in Italy, renovation of that property, and staffing of the facility. The current governmental overspending and austerity issues may impact this project. However, this project is seen as a major money maker for the company and has a NPV of $15 million dollars over seven years. Its costs would be $11 million dollars to initially set up the project and $500,000 a year to operate the facility. This initial cost can be spread evenly over each of the four quarters of the entire year. These initial costs should be recovered within the first three years of operation. Most of the work of this project would be outsourced and management of the project would be extremely difficult.

Project Robot

Our key distribution center is in St. Petersburg, Florida. It has a staff of 100 individuals to process the linens for the Florida cruise industry. Automation would allow us to reduce staff by 35 individuals. The average burdened labor costs of each of these individuals is $45,000 dollars a year. The cost of such automation would be in the neighborhood of $17 million dollars. This initial cost can be spread evenly over the entire year. This project would also likely disrupt the facility for about 3 months while the work is being done. Upon completion, the newly remodeled facility will be 1/3 smaller allowing our need for warehousing space to be reduced by 1/3. This would allow us to sublet this space for an estimated $2 million dollars a year in revenue. Most of the work of this project would be outsourced.

Project Tableware

In order to become the provider of choice for the cruise industry, our company needs to expand to more than just linens. A suggestion was made to expand into supplying tableware to the cruise industry, as much tableware is lost every cruise to breakage. Currently this need is supplied by a number of smaller companies that we could easily compete with. This project would involve creating a Just In Time process to receive and supply the cruise ships. It would also involve the need for a minimal warehouse facility. This project is likely to cost $5.5 million dollars and have a NPV of $1 million dollars over five years. All initial costs can be spread over any two quarters of the upcoming year. It would likely take four years to recover the initial costs of this project. It would further cost approximately $300,000 dollars a year to operate this facility. All of the work of this project would be outsourced.

Your Assignment

Your task is to use your portfolio process to determine which of the above projects best fit into your portfolio and create a time based plan by quarters as to when each project selected should begin and be paid for. Once this is accomplished, you need to write an internal memo to your Vice President denoting the projects selected, the time based plan in quarters, and why you chose as you did.

The document should be double-spaced, 10 or 12 point font with one inch margins. This is a Recommendation Memo for an executive, so be concise and to the point. If you don’t need more than eight pages to document your plan adequately, I am sure that your manager will be happy with it as long as it is complete. The use of appropriate grammar, spelling, punctuation, and sentence structure is part of your grade.

Submit This Document to the Dropbox by the end of Week 5.

Attachments:

diego company 494580

The problem for Foundational 15 is on page 264-265, Diego Company while Ethics Challenge is on page 278-279.

Document Preview:

Ethics Challenge The Foundational 15 Total Contribution margin Net operating income Profit = 1 2 Variable expenses 3 Sales Variable costs per unit Manufacturing: Direct Materials Direct Labor Variable manufacturing overhead Variable selling and administrative Fixed costs per year Fixed manufacturing overhead Fixed selling and administrative expenses 1 – 2 Direct materials Direct labor Variable manufacturing overhead Fixed manufacturing overhead Unit product cost Variable costing Absorption costing 3-4 Variable expenses: Variable cost of goods sold Variable selling and administrative Fixed expenses: Fixed manufacturing overhead Fixed selling and administrative Net operating gain (loss) 5-6 Cost of goods sold Gross margin Selling and administrative expenses 7 Variable costing net operating income Add: fixed manufacturing overhead deferred in inventory under absorption costing Absorption costing net operating income units per unit 8 Unit CM X Q – Fixed expenses 9 10-11 Variable selling and administrative Fixed manufacturing overhead Fixed selling and administrative 12 13 Traceable fixed expenses Region segment margin Common fixed expenses not traceable to regions East West 14 Foregone segment margin in the West region Additional contribution margin in the East region Increase (decrease) in profits if the West region is dropped 15. Additional advertising Additional contribution margin in the West region Increase in profits Desired Inventory, December 31 Expected sales, last quarter Total needs Less inventory, September 30 Required production $24.00 $14.00 $2.00 $4.00 $800,000.00 $496,000.00 Ethics Challenge The Foundational 15 Total Contribution margin Net operating income Profit = 1 2 Variable expenses 3 Sales Variable costs per unit Manufacturing: Direct Materials Direct Labor …

differential analysis 494581

Need homework help. See case attached below. Please show working for each question.
Thanks

Document Preview:

Case Studies se ;UlCeS lS a l er is consid er custo rice shop locatga i :ri ng the pu rcfase er base in tfle ma Ftdil’,:,’,t:]1-L::’ downtown Mlami. of a nevy juicqr to ket. Thb shod is €tx peting With jL{ice c:h l-he cuP’ene g increa lns s s lumb luice tl,lbt offer ustomerls a wiKler tyo ialty j ices ar*ll mixes. e shop is oppn day The ost ffi the new achine i$ $S0,p00. ellin of th n{w j’;ice mixe will be S2.00 lper ndt t per cup is $ 50. Wha n$nber nf juices $er day tl’lat m be sold to acllievehreak even? Upon Yudhheerr iinnVttd$stitgi lation, thq owner lqarns at the neW machinle Acl uires sub$tantial mBinte anc€, whichArill incredse tl1g variablq cost by $.50 p LH#”$”-wo’o thirma{on affecl vour VVliat otiler facto’rs s roultne owner conpider ,V{aring the final deci sion do purchase thd mac r 3. efore ine? ,AN pitfprential Analysis Caqq,$tpdy. Madeira Travel Services provides travel agents access to sophisticated travel informati’oo dild analysis systems over the Web. The company combines these tools with access to benchmarking data, includingl e-mail and wireless communiCations, so that travel agents can instantly evaluate airline fares and hotel rates. $8,050 monthly salary for two information technology s;taff members who work onll c)n e-mail Madeira Travel Services; Pres;ident Joey Madeira is happy with the company’s growth. ‘fo better focus on client service, Madeira is considering outsOurcing some functions. CFO Tom Lee suggests that the company’s e-mail may be the place to start. Madeira asks Lee to identify the costs related to Madeira Travel Senrices’ in-house Microsoft Exchange mail application, winich has 23A0 mailboxes. This information is below /ariable Costs Per mailbox per month $7 $1 $4 $9+,300 Per month $16,L00 per month E-mail license Other variable costs Frixed Costs Reqqifed: . Compute the total cost ;ler mailbox per month of Madeira Travel Services” current e-mail function. . Suppose that a leader provider of Internet-messaging…

Attachments:

direct and indirect cash flows on excel 494582

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Take home quiz for Ch 21–ACG4111 Spring 2013 1. Following are the income statement and some additional information. ?   Required:?Prepare the cash flows from operating activities section of the statement of cash flows using the direct method .   2. The balance sheets for Spiceland Company showed the following information. Additional information concerning transactions and events during 2008 are presented below. Spiceland Company Balance Sheet December 31 2008 2007 Cash $ 30,900 $ 10,200 Accounts receivable (net) 41,000 20,300 Inventory 37,300 42,000 Long-term investments 0 15,000 Property, plant & equipment 236,500 150,000 Accumulated depreciation (37,700) (25,000) $308,000 $212,500 Accounts payable $ 20,000 $ 26,500 Accrued liabilities 18,000 17,000 Long-term notes payable 70,000 50,000 Common stock 130,000 90,000 Retained earnings 70,000 29,000 $308,000 $212,500 Additional data: 1. Net income for the year 2008, $76,000. 2. Depreciation on plant assets for the year, $12,700. 3. Sold the long-term investments for $28,000. 4. Paid dividends of $35,000. 5. Purchased machinery costing $26,500, paid cash. 6. Purchased machinery and gave a $60,000 long-term note payable. 7. Paid a $40,000 long-term note payable by issuing common stock. Required: Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2008 in good form. Note: use indirect method for cash flows from operating activities).  costing $26,500, paid cash. 6. Purchased machinery and gave a $60,000 long-term note payable. 7. Paid a $40,000 long-term note payable by issuing common stock. Required: Prepare a statement of cash flows for 2008 in good form. Note: use indirect method for cash flows from operating activities).  information. Additional information concerning transactions and events during 2008 are presented below. Spiceland Company Balance Sheet …

Attachments:

ch 1 amp ch 2 for 6 8 page paper 494535

Document Preview:

The objective of the first seven chapters is to introduce the strategic approach to cost management and to cover the basic concepts of cost accounting systems. Chapter 1 is an introduction to cost management—how companies plan for success and the management accountant’s role in implementing strategy. The chapter includes coverage of the Institute of Management Accountants newly revised definition of management accounting. It is also an introduction to the current environment of business including contemporary management techniques and professional responsibilities. Chapter 2 focuses on some of the principal means that organizations use to implement strategy. The chapter introduces a strategic management system known as the balanced scorecard (BSC), the strategy map, and the value chain, and shows how these tools can be used to help the organization implement its strategy. These tools are foundational tools that appear throughout the text; this is why they are covered in this early chapter. Chapter 3 defines the key terms that management accountants use to describe product cost systems and cost information for planning, decision making, and control. This terminology is important for both accountants and managers alike. The chapter also introduces the differences in management accounting between service, manufacturing, and merchandising companies. Chapters 4–7 cover costing systems and their role in strategy implementation. Chapter 4 provides an introduction to costing systems by defining the elements of cost and how these elements are combined to determine the cost of a cost object (e.g., product or service). The chapter assumes a volume-based approach for allocating indirect costs to cost objects. There are a number of variations on this basic cost system, each of which is designed to fit a particular manufacturing or service environment. These variations are explained in Chapters 5, 6, and 7. Standard costing is considered primarily a control tool and is included…

ch 21 study guide 20 questions 494536

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Ch 21: Accounting Records Multiple Choice Identify the letter of the choice that best completes the statement or answers the question. ____ 1. Assets are $18,254.00 in cash, $67,099.00 in merchandise, and $15,334.00 in supplies. Liabilities are $35,000.00 owed to the bank and $568.50 owed in taxes. Find the owner’s equity. a.?$66,881.50?c.?$55,781.50??b.?$65,118.50?d.?$42,887.50?? Figure 21.3. Use this table with the question(s) below, as needed. Balance Sheet Zimmerman Appliances July 25??Assets?Liabilities??Cash?$125,500?Notes payable?$30,000??Computer hardware?150,000?Bank loan?110,000??Computer software?32,000?Total liabilities?140,000??Store fixtures?15,000?Owner’s Equity???Capital?$182,500???Total liabilities and??Total assets?322,500?owner’s equity?322,500?? ____ 2. Use Figure 21.3. What are the total liabilities for Zimmerman Appliances? a.?$117,000?c.?$120,000??b.?$210,000?d.?$140,000?? Figure 21.4. Use the following information with the question(s) below, as needed. Matson’s Hair Styling Salon has $22,000 in cash, $9,500 in inventory, $4,000 in supplies, a bank loan for $11,275, and taxes owed of $2,500. ____ 3. Use Figure 21.4. What is Matson’s owner equity? a.?$21,000?c.?$23,985??b.?$21,900?d.?$21,725?? ____ 4. Cellular Services has $9,489 in cash and $15,800 in equipment. The company owes the bank $15,000. What is the owner’s equity? a.?$25,289?c.?$15,000??b.?$10,289?d.?$11,850?? ____ 5. Murphy’s Hardware began the quarter with an inventory valued at $18,950.00. During the quarter, it received 50 buckets that cost $3.59 each, 75 rakes at $22.45 each, and 35 shovels at $14.85 each. The ending inventory was valued at $15,300.00. What was the cost of goods sold? a.?$5,925.00?c.?$6,033.00??b.?$7,455.00?d.?$8,424.00?? ____ 6. Creative Calendars had a beginning inventory of $11,475, receipts of $3,025, and ending inventory of $12,700. Find the cost of goods sold. a.?$1,600?c.?$1,800??b.?$1,780?d.?$1,200?? ____ 7. Allen’s Shoe Shop started…

Attachments:

ch5 balance sheet and statement of cash flows mcqs 494537

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

MULTIPLE CHOICE 1. Which of the following is a limitation of the balance sheet? a. Many items that are of financial value are omitted. b. Judgments and estimates are used. c. Current fair value is not reported. d. All of these 2. The balance sheet is useful for analyzing all of the following except a. liquidity. b. solvency. c. profitability. d. financial flexibility. 3. Balance sheet information is useful for all of the following except to a. compute rates of return b. analyze cash inflows and outflows for the period c. evaluate capital structure d. assess future cash flows 4. Balance sheet information is useful for all of the following except a. assessing a company’s risk b. evaluating a company’s liquidity c. evaluating a company’s financial flexibility d. determining free cash flows. 5. A limitation of the balance sheet that is not also a limitation of the income statement is a. the use of judgments and estimates b. omitted items c. the numbers are affected by the accounting methods employed d. valuation of items at historical cost 6. The balance sheet contributes to financial reporting by providing a basis for all of the following except a. computing rates of return. b. evaluating the capital structure of the enterprise. c. determining the increase in cash due to operations. d. assessing the liquidity and financial flexibility of the enterprise. 7. One criticism not normally aimed at a balance sheet prepared using current accounting and reporting standards is a. failure to reflect current value information. b. the extensive use of separate classifications. c. an extensive use of estimates. d. failure to include items of financial value that cannot be recorded objectively. 8. The amount of time that is expected to elapse until an asset is realized or otherwise converted into cash is referred to as a. solvency. b. financial flexibility. c. liquidity. d. exchangeability. 9. The net assets of a business are equal to a. current assets minus…

Attachments:

chapter 004 the income statement and statement of cash flows 494538

1. Income from continuing operations sometimes includes gains from non-operating activities.

2. Intraperiod tax allocation is the process of associating income tax effects with the income statement components that create those effects.

3. Material restructuring costs are reported as an element of income from continuing operations.

4. Earnings quality refers to the ability of reported earnings (income) to predict future earnings.

5. Gains, but not losses, from discontinued operations must be separately reported in an income statement.

6. An item must meet the subjective criteria of being either unusual or infrequent to be reported as extraordinary.

7. The definition of what constitutes an extraordinary item should be independent of the operating environment.

8. Income statements prepared according to both U.S. GAAP and International Accounting Standards require the separate reporting, as an extraordinary item, of material gains and losses from events that are both unusual and infrequent.

9. A change in depreciation method is accounted for by retrospectively revising prior years’ financial statements.

10. Changes in accounting estimates require disclosure of their effects, if material, on current year net income and EPS but do not require restatement of prior years’ financial statements.

11. The income effect of a change in reporting entity is shown separately in the income statement in the year of the change.

12. EPS disclosure is required only for income from continuing operations.

13. Comprehensive income reports an expanded version of income to include four types of gains and losses not included in traditional income statements.

14. Comprehensive income is the total change in shareholders’ equity that occurred during the period.

15. The direct and indirect methods of reporting the statement of cash flows present different information for investing and financing activities.

Attachments:

chapter 05 mcqs 494539

The United States in the Global Economy Chapter 05   Multiple Choice Questions   1. The physical export of motorcycles from the United States to Mexico best illustrates a:  A. trade flow. B. resource flow. C. financial flow. D. technology flow.   2. The physical import of DVD players to the United States from Japan best illustrates a:  A. resource flow. B. financial flow. C. trade flow. D. technology flow.   3. The spending by Americans while traveling in Europe best illustrates a:  A. trade flow. B. labor flow. C. financial flow. D. technology flow.   4.

Document Preview:

The United States in the Global Economy Chapter 05   Multiple Choice Questions   1. The physical export of motorcycles from the United States to Mexico best illustrates a:  A. trade flow. B. resource flow. C. financial flow. D. technology flow.   2. The physical import of DVD players to the United States from Japan best illustrates a:  A. resource flow. B. financial flow. C. trade flow. D. technology flow.   3. The spending by Americans while traveling in Europe best illustrates a:  A. trade flow. B. labor flow. C. financial flow. D. technology flow.   4. The emigration of software designers from India to the United States best illustrates a(n):  A. trade flow. B. resource flow. C. financial flow. D. information flow.   5. The purchase by an American firm of the right to produce a prescription drug patented in Germany best illustrates a:  A. trade flow. B. capital flow. C. goods and services flow. D. technology flow.   6. The business-to-business (B2B) retrieval of prices of foreign resources via the Internet best illustrates a(n):  A. trade flow. B. capital and labor flow. C. financial flow. D. information flow.   7. The building of a production plant in China by an American firm best illustrates a(n):  A. trade flow. B. resource flow. C. financial flow. D. information flow.   8. Trade flows measure the:  A. movement of resources between nations. B. exports and imports of goods and services. C. transfer of information from one nation to another. D. transfer of money between nations.   9. Foreign currency exchanges and interest payments on foreign debt are examples of:  A. financial flows. B. trade flows. C. capital flows. D. technology flows.   10. The United States’ exports are about what percentage of U.S. GDP?  A. 4 percent B. 25 percent C. 12 percent D. 30 percent   11. Which of the following statements is correct?  A. The United States’ exports and imports are smaller absolutely, but larger as a percentage of GDP, than other nations’….

Attachments:

chapter 5 ch 05 p24 build a model 494541

A 20-year, 8% semiannual coupon bond with a par value of $1,000 may be called in 5 years at a call price of $1,040. The bond sells for $1,100. (Assume that the bond has just been issued.)

a. What is the bond s yield to maturity?
b. What is the bond s current yield?
c. What is the bond s capital gain or loss yield?
d. What is the bond s yield to call?
NOW ANSWER THE FOLLOWING NEW QUESTIONS:
e. How would the price of the bond be affected by changing the going market interest rate? (Hint: Conduct a sensitivity analysis of price to changes in the going market interest rate for the bond. Assume that the bond will be called if and only if the going rate of interest falls below the coupon rate. That is an oversimplification, but assume it anyway for purposes of this problem.)

f. Now assume the date is 10/25/2010. Assume further that a 12%, 10-year bond was issued on 7/1/2010, pays interest semiannually (January 1 and July 1), and sells for $1,100. Use your spreadsheet to find the bond s yield.

Document Preview:

7/22/2012 20 2 0.08 1000 1100 1040 5 0.08 0 0 0 0 0 0 0.02 0 0 0 0.04 0 0 0 0.06 0 0 0 0.08 0 0 0 0.1 0 0 0 0.12 0 0 0 0.14000000000000001 0 0 0 0.16 0 0 0 7/22/2012 a. What is the bond’s yield to maturity? b. What is the bond’s current yield? c. What is the bond’s capital gain or loss yield? / Cap. Gain/loss yield = – d. What is the bond’s yield to call? Years to maturity: Coupon rate: Par value: Periods per year: Current price Periodic payment: Periods to maturity: Call price: Years till callable: Basic Input Data: Current yield = Note that this is an economic loss , not a loss for tax purposes. Here we can again use the Rate function, but with data related to the call. Periods till callable: NOW ANSWER THE FOLLOWING NEW QUESTIONS: Value of bond if it’s not called: Value of bond if it’s called: Value of Bond If: Not called Called statement to determine which value is appropriate: Actual value, considering call likehood: Settlement (today) Maturity Coupon rate Frequency (for semiannual) Basis (360 or 365 day year) Current price (% of par) Yield to Maturity: Basic info: Redemption (% of par value) Nominal market rate, r: Rate, r We can use the two valuation formulas to find values under different r’s, in a 2-output data table, and then use an IF The YTC is lower than the YTM because if the bond is called, the buyer will lose the difference between the call price and the current price in just 4 years, and that loss will offset much of the interest imcome. Note too that the bond is likely to be called and replaced, hence that the YTC will probably be earned. Refer to this chapter’s Tool Kit for information about how to use Excel’s bond valuation functions. The model finds the price of a bond, but the procedures for finding the yield are similar. Begin by setting up the input data as shown below: A 20-year, 8% semiannual coupon bond with a par value of $1,000 may be called in 5 years at a call price of $1,040. The…

Attachments:

chapter 7 long lived nonmonetary assets and their amortization 494542

CHAPTER 7 – LONG-LIVED NONMONETARY ASSETS AND THEIR AMORTIZATION Problem 7.1-7.5

Document Preview:

Chapter 7 LONG-LIVED NONMONETARY ASSETS AND THEIR AMORTIZATION ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

chapter 8 accounting test 494543

I need some help with this Accounting Test.

Document Preview:

GLICKMAN – ACC111 End of Chapter 8 Test – (40 points) Name: _______________________________________ Please show all calculations!!! PROBLEM #1 – 22 points Greenview Food Store developed the following information in recording its bank statement for the month of March 20XX. Balance per books on March 31 $ 829 Balance per bank on March 31 $ 7,030 Checks written in March but still outstanding, $5,200. Checks written in February but still outstanding, $1,200. Deposits of March 30 and 31 not yet recorded by bank, $3,100. NSF check of customer returned by bank, $400. Check #210 for $675 was correctly issued and paid by the bank but incorrectly entered in the cash payments journal as payment on account for $657, for payment to a creditor. Bank service charge for March was $31. A payment on account was incorrectly entered into the cash payments journal and posted to the accounts payable subsidiary ledger for $854 when check #318 was correctly prepared for $584. The check cleared the bank in March. The bank collected a note receivable for the company for $3,000 plus $80 interest. Instructions: Prepare a bank reconciliation for the Greenview Food Store for the month of March 31, 20XX. Journalize the adjusting entries for Greenview Food Store on March 31, 20XX. Bank Reconciliation: Journal Entries: General Journal Date Description Debit Credit PROBLEM #2 – 18 points Jenrob Company completed the following selected transactions during January 20XX. January 1 Established a petty cash fund of $500 15 The cash sales for the day per the register tape were $3,018. The actual cash received from cash sales were $3,011. 31 Petty cash on hand was $123. Replenished the petty cash fund for the following disbursements: Jan 2 Office supplies, $45 10 Postage due on letter, $29 (Miscellaneous Expense) 14 Office supplies, $56. 17 Postage stamps, $42 (Office Supplies). 20 Express charges on merchandise sold, $136 (Delivery…

Attachments:

chapter 9 mcqs 494544

Quiz Questions for Chapter 9 1. A truck was purchased for $25,000. It has a six-year life and a $4,000 salvage value. Under the straight-line method, what is the assets carrying value (book value) after 2 1/2 years? a. $8,750. b. $12,250. c. $14,583. d. $16,250. 2. On January 1, 20X1, Superior Landscaping Company paid $17,000 to buy a stump remover. If the equipment is used to remove 2,500 stumps per year, it would have an estimated useful life of 10 years and a salvage value of $4,500.

Document Preview:

Quiz Questions for Chapter 9 1. A truck was purchased for $25,000. It has a six-year life and a $4,000 salvage value. Under the straight-line method, what is the assets carrying value (book value) after 2 1/2 years? a. $8,750. b. $12,250. c. $14,583. d. $16,250. 2. On January 1, 20X1, Superior Landscaping Company paid $17,000 to buy a stump remover. If the equipment is used to remove 2,500 stumps per year, it would have an estimated useful life of 10 years and a salvage value of $4,500. The amount of depreciation to be recorded for the year 20X1, using the units-of-production method and assuming that 3,500 units were produced, is a. $2,380. b. $1,750. c. $1,700. d. $1,250. 3. The sale of equipment costing $8,000 with accumulated depreciation of $6,700 and a sale price of $2,000 would result in a a. gain of $2,000. b. gain of $700. c. loss of $700. d. loss of $1,300. 4. Underestimating the number of tons of a mineral that can be mined over a mineral deposit’s life will result in a. overstated net income each year. b. overstated total assets each year. c. overstated depletion expense each year. d. no effect on total assets each year. 5. A copyright is obtained for what becomes a very successful book. The publisher expects the book to generate sales for 10 years. The copyright should be amortized over a. 2 to 4 years. b. 10 years. c. 40 years. d. the author’s life plus 50 years. The following information pertains to the next two questions. Z Company purchased an asset that cost $24,000 on January 1, 20X2. The asset was expected to have a four-year life and a $4,000 salvage value. 6. The amount of depreciation expense for 20X4 under the double-declining-balance method would be: a. $2,000. b. $3,000. c. $6,000. d. $12,000. 7. Assume that Z Company uses the straight-line depreciation method. If on January 1, 20X5, Z Company sells the asset for $10,000, the cash flow statement would reflect a: a. $1,000 cash inflow from gain on the sale of the…

Attachments:

chapter help 494545

I have chapter 17,18 and 20. I just need help improving my homework grade in those chapters and its on cengage. The $15 is for all three not per chapter.

Document Preview:

Accounting Homework Help Help with Chapter Homework 17, 18 & 20 $5.00 dollars per chapter Need help improving grade

Attachments:

classified balance sheet has numerous errors 494546

1.

The following Classified Balance Sheet has numerous errors. Indicate the errors in this Balance Sheet by preparing a corrected Classified Balance Sheet with all required information.

Additional Information:
Land has an original cost of $3,000 and inventory cost the company $5,000.

Document Preview:

The following Classified Balance Sheet has numerous errors. Indicate the errors in this Balance Sheet by preparing a corrected Classified Balance Sheet with all required information. Additional Information: Land has an original cost of $3,000 and inventory cost the company $5,000.????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

company accounts 494547

ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS QUESTION 1 A friend who likes to invest in the stock market made the following statements to you recently. “I don’t invest in entities that operate in service or knowledge – based industries because their financial statements don’t really reflect the true value of the entity. This makes it very difficult for me to make informed decisions about whether to invest or not.

Document Preview:

ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS QUESTION 1 A friend who likes to invest in the stock market made the following statements to you recently. “I don’t invest in entities that operate in service or knowledge – based industries because their financial statements don’t really reflect the true value of the entity. This makes it very difficult for me to make informed decisions about whether to invest or not.” REQUIRED: Discuss why an investor may arrive at the conclusion that the financial statements of entities operating in service and knowledgeable based industries are not useful for making investments decisions. (10 marks) Explain the recognition criteria that prevent human capital being recognized as an asset in the financial statements. (10 marks) (Total 20 marks) QUESTION 2 BNM is a knowledge – based business, which relies on key personnel and internally generated intellectual capital to generate revenue. BNM is listed on local exchange. The directors believe that the information provided by the annual financial report fails to provide a complete picture of the activities and economic environment in which BNM operates. They are keen to ensure that current and potential investors are aware of the intellectual property that is a primary resource in the business. The business has cultivated key customer relationship and as a result has secured four large contracts that will run for at least the next three years. The directors of BNM consider themselves to be socially and environmentally aware and have made efforts to improve the entity’s reputation as a good corporate citizen. They are considering including some form of additional narrative disclosure within the next annual report. REQUIRED: Discuss the potential advantages that could be gained by BNM if included voluntary narrative disclosure within the annual report. (6 marks) Discuss the potential drawbacks of voluntary disclosure being included in annual report. (6 marks) (Total 12 marks) QUESTION 3 The…

Attachments:

company financial analysis research paper 494548

**********PLEASE READ ALL THE INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY!

NO PLAGIARISM. I WILL USE A PLAGIARISM CHECK SOFTWARE TO CHECK THE COMPLETED WORK

This is a 12-a page (or more) RESEARCH (NOT ESSAY) paper and MUST BE formatted according to APA style .

1.) Research Paper- INSTRCUTIONS

The objectives/purpose of the research paper project are to enable you to do a comprehensive financial analysis of a publicly traded corporation; and provide you with substantial information for you to make recommendations regarding investing in this corporation.

Your financial analysis report will be driven by a rigorous ratio analysis, and aggressively supplemented with your written analysis, interpretation, and evaluation of the data.

Your research should be strategically driven by two probing questions:

-Would you invest your financial capital in the selected firm as a shareholder?

-Would you invest your human and intellectual capital in the firm as an employee?

Steps in preparation of financial analysis report:

1.) Select a publicly held company

2.) Select a benchmark firm to compare your company against. The benchmark firm is typically the largest competitor.

3.) Obtain the firm s balance sheet, income statement, and statement of cash flows for

the past 5 years. Download or read the firm s annual report.

4.) Go to: http://www.sec.gov/edgar/searchedgar/webusers.htm

Research EDGAR s database for additional SEC report filings: 8-k, 10-Q.

4.) The following table is the type of Excel or Word table that should be used to gather and report your ratio and financial performance data. Note the 5 financial diagnostic categories that should be used in your analysis.

Financial diagnostic categories

Chosen company vs.

Benchmark competitor

1.) Liquidity of short-term assets

-Current ratio

-Cash ratio

-Quick ratio

-Current ratio

-Cash ratio

-Quick ratio

2.) Long-term debt-paying ability

-Debt ratio

-Debt-equity ratio

-Times interest earned

-Debt ratio

-Debt-equity ratio

-Times interest earned

3.) Profitability

-Net income/sales (profit margin)

-Net income/assets (ROA)

-Net income/shareholder equity (ROE)

-Net income/sales (profit margin)

-Net income/assets (ROA)

-Net income/shareholder equity (ROE)

4.) Asset utilization/ management efficiency

-Total asset turnover

-Inventory turnover measures

-Accounts receivable turnover

-Total asset turnover

-Inventory turnover measures

-Accounts receivable turnover

5.) Market measures

-Price/earnings ratio

-Earnings per common share

-Dividend payout

-Price/earnings ratio

-Earnings per common share

-Dividend payout

Use 2-3 ratios per diagnostic category. Place your ratio calculations in the table for your selected companies primary company and benchmark competitor. Using 5 diagnostic categories, and 3 ratios to assess each category, results in 15 ratio measures per company that will be compared side by side.

6.) To validate your research, 5 years of data should be analyzed.

7.) The financial analysis report must be written properly. They must include a title page, a table of contents, and a reference page. For both midterm and final report, information sources from the web, etc. must be cited properly, using APA style.

This means that every table that you cut and pasted or typed from the web must have a source at the bottom of the table AND that citing must also be included in a reference page at the end of the report.

Your project should include:

a. An overview of the corporation.

i. Provide general information regarding the type of business, products and/or services, location of headquarters, name of CEO, number of employees, and countries of operation, etc.

b. The latest financial statements

i. Get the income statement, balance sheet, cash flow statement, and the statement of owners equity for the past fiscal year. Create Turnitin-friendly versions of the financial statements; do not just cut and paste them in your report. Do not forget to cite the source under each statement.

ii. If you cannot cut and paste them, you may have to type in the information in a table in your report.

c. A summary of each financial statement

i. Take each statement and state the key parts in words. Tell a story from each of the financial statements. For example, for the income statement, the story starts like, Total Revenues in 2010 were $10 billion, while Cost of Goods Sold were $8 billion, leaving a gross profit margin of $2 billion, or 20 percent of total revenues .After taking out interest and taxes from EBIT, the net income was $0.5 billion, or 5 percent of total revenues.

d. Ratio calculation (include 5 major types of ratios. Refer to chapter 3, Analysis of Financial Statements)

i. Organization of this section is based on the FIVE types of ratios listed in the text book. Calculate the ratios from the financial statements in part c above using Excel or your calculator and present them in a table.

ii. Find industry financial ratios online (eg. Yahoo.com) and compare your corporation s ratios to these industry ratios.

iii. Present your results following the five types of ratios discussed in part d.

iv. A table with both corporation and industry ratios is required;

v.

e. Discussion of key statistics provided by sources like Yahoo finance.

i. There are many different other statistics available for your corporation. These include market value, beta, and diluted EPS, etc. Discuss some of the key statistics that you think can assist you to determine if this corporation is a good buy or sell.

f. For you to decide if a corporation s stock is a good buy or sell, you must forecast several key variables, including the stock price.

i. Use historical prices (5 years of monthly data recommended) and forecast the stock price for the next year. Use regression analysis, and/or moving average, etc. to create your forecast.

ii. Create a graph from the historical data and show your forecast on the same graph. You can add a trend line to the graph to help you with a forecast. Include the graph in your report.

iii. You need to say specifically what the forecasted value of the stock price is.

iv. You must address the question, Is this forecast reasonable Must you amend your analysis to get a more reasonable forecast

g. Other information pertinent to the corporation that could affect its future performance and stock price.

i. This could include dividend policy, capital structure, bond ratings, expert opinions on TV, new projects, litigation, regulation, etc. Search for information on the web regarding this corporation. Look at company complaint blogs, etc.

h. Recommendation regarding the future of this corporation.

i. Is the stock a good buy, average buy, or a poor buy (implying a good sell)

ii. Include a justification of your recommendation based on your analysis and research.

Attachments:

comparative data worksheet wk 6 494551

Complete the table by answering the following questions. Cite work (ea. question) include references at bottom of worksheet (according to APA style). Post assignment as attachment. Chapter 14 included (If needed).

  • What criterion must be met for true comparability?
  • What elements of consistency should be considered?
  • What is the manager s responsibility in comparing data?
  • What are the four common uses of comparative data?
  • What is meant by standardized data?

Document Preview:

123 The Time Value of Money 12 C H A P T E R PURPOSE The purpose of these computations is to evaluate the use of money. The manager has many options as to where resources of the organization should be spent.1 These calculations provide guides to assist in evaluating the alternatives. UNADJUSTED RATE OF RETURN The unadjusted rate of return is a relatively unsophisticated return-on-investment method, and the answer is only an estimate, containing no precision. The computation of the unadjusted rate of return is as follows: Average Annual Net IncomeRate of Return Original Investment Amount OR Average Annual Net IncomeRate of Return Average Investment Amount The original investment amount is a matter of record. The average investment amount is arrived at by taking the total unrecovered asset cost at the beginning of estimated useful life plus the unrecovered asset cost at the end of estimated useful life and dividing by two. This method has the advantage of accommodating whatever depreciation method has been chosen by the organization. This method is sometimes called the accountant’s method because information necessary for the computation is obtained from the financial statements. After completing this chapter, you should be able to 1. Compute an unadjusted rate of return. 2. Understand how to use a present-value table. 3. Compute an internal rate of return. 4. Understand the payback period theory. P r o g r e s s N o t e s 124 CHAPTER 12 The Time Value of Money PRESENT-VALUE ANALYSIS The concept of present-value analysis is based on the time value of money. Inherent in this concept is the fact that the value of a dollar today is more than the value of a dollar in the future: thus the “present value” terminology. Furthermore, the further in the future the receipt of your dollar occurs, the less it is worth. Think of a dollar bill dwindling in size more and more as its receipt stretches further and further into the future. This is the concept of present-value analysis….

complete accounting activities 494552

attachment below

Document Preview:

Wk3 Assignment 2.docx? Assignment 2 Eye openers 1. Before inventory purchases are recorded, the receiving report should be reconciled to what documents? 2. What security measures may be used by retailers to protect merchandise inventory from customer theft? 3. Which inventory system provides the more effective means of controlling inventories (perpetual or periodic)? Why? 4. Why is it important to periodically take a physical inventory if the perpetual system is used? 5. Do the terms FIFO and LIFO refer to techniques used in determining quantities of the various classes of merchandise on hand? Explain. 6. Does the term last-in in the LIFO method mean that the items in the inventory are assumed to be the most recent (last) acquisitions? Explain. 7. If merchandise inventory is being valued at cost and the price level is decreasing, which of the three methods of costing—FIFO,LIFO, or average cost—will yield (a) the highest inventory cost,(b) the lowest inventory cost,(c) the highest gross profit, and (d) the lowest gross profit? 8. Which of the three methods of inventory costing—FIFO, LIFO, or average cost will in general yield an inventory cost most nearly approximating current replacement cost? 9. If inventory is being valued at cost and the price level is steadily rising, which of the three methods of costing—FIFO, LIFO, or average cost—will yield the lowest annual income tax expense? Explain. 10. Can a company change its method of costing inventory? Explain. 11. Because of imperfections, an item of merchandise cannot be sold at its normal selling price. How should this item be valued for financial statement purposes? 12. How is the method of determining the cost of the inventory and the method of valuing it disclosed in the financial statements? 13. The inventory at the end of the year was understated by $12,750. (a) Did the error cause an overstatement or an understatement of the gross profit for the year? (b) Which items on the balance sheet at…

Attachments:

complete the activities in the attachments 494553

Document Preview:

Assignment 3 Eye openers 1. (a) Why did Congress pass the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002? (b) What is the purpose of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002? 2. Define internal control. 3. (a) Name and describe the five elements of internal control. (b) Is any one element of internal control more important than another? 4. How does a policy of rotating clerical employees from job to job aid in strengthening the control procedures within the control environment? Explain. 5. Why should the responsibility for a sequence of related operations be divided among different persons? Explain. 6. Why should the employee who handles cash receipts not have the responsibility for maintaining the accounts receivable records? Explain. 7. In an attempt to improve operating efficiency, one employee was made responsible for all purchasing, receiving, and storing of supplies. Is this organizational change wise from an internal control standpoint? Explain. 8. The ticket seller at a movie theater doubles as a ticket taker for a few minutes each day while the ticket taker is on a break. Which control procedure of a business’s system of internal control is violated in this situation? 9. Why should the responsibility for maintaining the accounting records be separated from the responsibility for operations? Explain. 10. Assume that Yvonne Dauphin, accounts payable clerk for Bedell Inc., stole $73,250 by paying fictitious invoices for goods that were never received. The clerk set up accounts in the names of the fictitious companies and cashed the checks at a local bank. Describe a control procedure that would have prevented or detected the fraud. 11. Before a voucher for the purchase of merchandise is approved for payment, supporting documents should be compared to verify the accuracy of the liability. Give an example of supporting documents for the purchase of merchandise. 12. The accounting clerk pays all obligations by pre-numbered checks. What are the strengths and weaknesses in the…

complete the activities in the attachments 494554

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Eye Openers 1. Describe the two distinct obligations incurred by a corporation when issuing bonds. 2. Explain the meaning of each of the following terms as they relate to a bond issue: (a) convertible, (b) callable, and (c) debenture. 3. If you asked your broker to purchase for you a 10% bond when the market interest rate for such bonds was 11%, would you expect to pay more or less than the face amount for the bond? Explain. 4. A corporation issues $9,000,000 of 9% bonds to yield interest at the rate of 7%. (a) Was the amount of cash received from the sale of the bonds greater or less than $9,000,000? (b) Identify the following terms related to the bond issue: (1) face amount, (2) market or effective rate of interest, (3) contract rate of interest, and (4) maturity amount. 5. If bonds issued by a corporation are sold at a premium, is the market rate of interest greater or less than the contract rate? 6. The following data relate to a $100,000,000, 12% bond issue for a selected semiannual interest period: Bond carrying amount at beginning of period $112,085,373 Interest paid during period 6,000,000 Interest expense allocable to the period 5,623,113 (a) Were the bonds issued at a discount or at a premium? (b) What is the unamortized amount of the discount or premium account at the beginning of the period? (c) What account was debited to amortize the discount or premium? 7. Assume that Smith Co. amortizes premiums and discounts on bonds payable at the end of the year rather than when interest is paid. What accounts would be debited and credited to record (a) the amortization of a discount on bonds payable and (b) the amortization of a premium on bonds payable? 8. When a corporation issues bonds at a discount, is the discount recorded as income when the bonds are issued? Explain. 9. Assume that two 30-year, 10% bond issues are identical, except that one bond issue is callable at its face amount at the end of five years. Which of the two bond issues do you think will…

Attachments:

complete tax return problem 494555

Required:

  • Use the following information to complete Phillip and Claire Dunphy’s 2012 federal income tax return. If information is missing, use reasonable assumptions to fill in the gaps. Ignore the alternative minimum tax for this problem.
  • Any required forms, schedules, and instructions can be found at the IRS Web site (www.irs.gov). The instructions can be helpful in completing the forms. The following forms are required:

o 1040

o Schedule C

o Schedule D

o Form 4562

o Form 4797

o Form 8949

o Schedule SE

AMT (alternative minimum tax) is NOT part of this Project; You do NOT have to calculate AMT!!!

Also, you do NOT need to depreciate the Artwork

Facts:

  1. Phillip and Claire are married and file a joint return. Phillip is self-employed as a real estate agent, and Claire is a flight attendant. Phillip and Claire have three dependent children. All three children live at home with Phillip and Claire for the entire year.

The Dunphys provide you with the following additional information:

  • The Dunphys do not want to contribute to the presidential election campaign.
  • The Dunphys live at 3701 Brighton Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90018.
  • Phillip’s birthday is 11/5/1965 and his Social Security number is 321-44-5766.
  • Claire’s birthday is 5/12/1968 and her Social Security number is 567-77-1258.
  • Haley’s birthday is 11/6/1999 and his Social Security number is 621-18-7592.
  • Alex’s birthday is 2/1/2001 and her Social Security number is 621-92-8751.
  • Luke’s birthday is 12/12/2005 and his Social Security number is 621-99-9926.
  • The Dunphys do not have any foreign bank accounts or trusts.

Claire is a flight attendant for Western American Airlines (WAA), where she earned $57,000 in salary. WAA withheld federal income tax of $6,375, state income tax of $1,800, Los Angeles city income tax of $675, Social Security tax of $3,600, and Medicare tax of $825. Phillip and Claire received $300 of interest from State Savings Bank on a joint account. They also received a qualified dividend of $395 on jointly owned stock in Xila Corporation. Phillip’s real estate business is named Phillip Dunphy Realty. His business is located at 645 Grove Street, Los Angeles, CA 90018, and his employer identification number is 93-3488888. Phillip’s gross receipts during the year were $730,000. Phillip uses the cash method of accounting for his business. Phillip’s business expenses are as follows:

Advertising

$ 5,000

Professional dues

800

Professional journals

200

Employee wages

48,000

Insurance on office contents

1,120

Accounting services

2,100

Miscellaneous office expense

500

Utilities and telephone

3,360

Payroll taxes

3,600

Depreciation

To be calculated

On March 20, Phillip moved his business out of the old offices at 1103 Allium Lane into a newly constructed and equipped office on Grove Street. Phillip sold the old office building and all its furnishings. Phillip’s expenditures for the new office building are as follows:

Date Acquired

Asset

Cost

3/20

Land

$300,000

3/20

Office building

2,500,000

3/20

Furniture

200,000

4/1

Computer system

350,000

6/1

Artwork

150,000

Phillip computes his cost recovery allowance using MACRS. He would like to use the 179 immediate expensing, but he has elected to not claim any bonus depreciation. Phillip has never claimed 179 or bonus depreciation before. The assets Phillip sold on March 20 are as follows:

Date Acquired

Asset

Sales Price

Original Cost

Accumulated Depreciation as of Beginning of the Year

5/1/05

Office building

$940,000

$900,000

$129,825

5/1/05

Land

200,000

100,000

0

7/1/05

Furniture

50,000

239,000

206,998

8/13/07

Furniture

10,000

324,000

222,782

4/12/08

Office equipment

100,000

120,000

67,524

5/13/10

Computers

$ 30,000

50,000

10,000

Phillip has never sold any assets relating to his business before this transaction.

  1. The Dunphys sold 60 shares of Fizbo Corporation common stock on September 3, for $65 a share (minus a $50 total commission). The Dunphys purchased the stock on November 8, 2010, for $90 a share. They also sold a painting for $13,000 on March 1. Claire purchased the painting for $20,050 on September 1, 2004, as an investment.
  2. The Dunphys filed their 2011 federal, state, and local returns on April 14, 2012. They paid the following additional 2011 taxes with their returns: federal income taxes of $630, state income taxes of $250, and city income taxes of $75.
  3. The Dunphys made timely estimated federal income tax payments of $16,000 each quarter during 2012. They also made estimated state income tax payments of $1,000 each quarter and estimated city income tax payments of $300 each quarter. The Dunphys made all fourth-quarter payments on December 31, 2012. They would like to receive a refund for any overpayments.

Attachments:

completed quick 494556

Page 1 Acct Information Systems ACCT326 – Fall 2013 -7380 M.G. Persh FINAL EXAM You have 3 hours to complete this exam. It is “open book, open notes”, but every student must complete the exam independently. There are 25 questions on the exam. Please record your answers on a separate sheet(s) and submit/upload the sheet(s) into WebTycho (FinalExam tab). Section 1: Multiple Choice 1. When the AIS provides information in a timely and accurate manner, it stands as an example of A) improved decision making. B) improving the quality and reducing the costs of products or services.

Document Preview:

Page 1 Acct Information Systems ACCT326 – Fall 2013 -7380 M.G. Persh FINAL EXAM You have 3 hours to complete this exam. It is “open book, open notes”, but every student must complete the exam independently. There are 25 questions on the exam. Please record your answers on a separate sheet(s) and submit/upload the sheet(s) into WebTycho (FinalExam tab). Section 1: Multiple Choice 1. When the AIS provides information in a timely and accurate manner, it stands as an example of A) improved decision making. B) improving the quality and reducing the costs of products or services. C) improving efficiency. D) all of the above 2. Which of the following is conceptually similar to a journal in a manual AIS? A) database B) master file C) record D) transaction file 3. Business process reengineering means: A. configuring the business processes to conform to the functionality of the IT system. B. configuring the IT system to the business process for best processing speed. C. matching the IT and business processes to achieve the greatest mutual benefit from each. D. configuring both IT and business processes to meet the goals of ERP. Page 2 4. In a city, electric power is provided to consumers by the city power company. Each month the power company mails bills to 70,000 households and then processes payments as they are received. What is the best method for this company to ensure that payment data entry is efficient and accurate? A) Well-designed paper forms B) Source data automation C) Use of turnaround documents D) Sequentially numbered bills 5. The form that specifies the components of a product, including descriptions and quantities of materials and parts needed is the: A. operations list. B. bill of materials. C. engineering. D. capital budgeting. 6. In a payroll processing DFD, the “prepare reports” activity will be represented by ________, the “employee payroll file” will be represented by ________, and the “management” will be represented by ________. A) a circle; two…

Attachments:

comprehensive problem more co is a merchandising business the account balances for m 494557

Comprehensive Problem More Co. is a merchandising business. The account balances for More Co. as of November 30, 2012 (unless otherwise indicated), are as follows: 110 Cash $ 13,920 112 Accounts Receivable 34,220 115 Merchandise Inventory 133,900 116 Prepaid Insurance 3,750 117 Store Supplies 2,550 123 Store Equipment 114,300 124 Accumulated Depreciation-Store Equipment 12,600 210 Accounts Payable 21,450 211 Salaries Payable 0 218 Interest Payable 0 220 Note Payable (Due 2017) 10,000 310 P. Williams, Capital (January 1, 2012) 103,280 311 P. Williams, Drawing 10,000 312 Income Summary 0 410 Sales 715,800 411 Sales Returns and Allowances 20,600 412 Sales Discounts 13,200 510 Cost of Merchandise Sold 360,500 520 Sales Salaries Expense 74,400 521 Advertising Expense 18,000 522 Depreciation Expense 0 523 Store Supplies Expense 0 529 Miscellaneous Selling Expense 2,800 530 Office Salaries Expense 40,500 531 Rent Expense 18,600 532 Insurance Expense 0 539 Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 1,650 550 Interest Expense 240 More Co. uses the perpetual inventory system and the last-in, first-out costing method. Transportation-in and purchase discounts should be added to the Inventory Control Sheet, but since this will complicate the computation of the Last-in, first-out costing method, please ignore this step in the process. More Co. sells four types of television entertainment units. The sales price of each are: TV A: $3,500 TV B: $5,250 TV C: $6,125 PS D: $9,000 During December, the last month of the accounting year, the following transactions were completed: Dec. 1. Issued check number 2632 for the December rent, $1,600. 3. Purchased four TV C units on account from Prince Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, $14,800. 4. Issued check number 2633 to pay the transportation changes on purchase of December 3, $400. (NOTE: Do not include shipping and purchase discounts to the Inventory Control sheet for this project.) 6. Sold four TV A and 4 TV B on account to Albert Co., invoice 891, terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. 7. Received $7,500 cash from Marie Co. on account, no discount. 10. Sold two project systems for cash. 11. Purchased store supplies on account from Matt Co., terms 1/10, n/30, $620. 13. Issued check number 2634 for merchandise purchased on December 3, less discount. 14. Issued credit memo for one TV A unit returned on sale of December 6. 15. Issued check number 2635 for advertising expense for last half of December, $1,500. 16. Received cash from sale of December 6, less return of December 14 and discount. 19. Issued check number 2636 for two TV C units, $7,600. 19. Issued check number 2637 for $6,100 to Joseph Co. on account. 20. Sold three TV C units on account to Cameron Co., invoice number 892, terms 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. 20. For the convenience of the customer, issued check number 2638 for shipping charges on sale of December 20, $600. 21. Received $11,750 cash from McKenzie Co. on account, no discount. 21. Purchased three projector systems on account from Elisha Co., terms 1/10, n/30, FOB destination, $15,600. 24. Issued a debit memo for return of $5,200 because of a damaged projection system purchased on December 21, receiving credit from the seller. 26. Issued check number 2639 for refund of cash on sales made for cash, $1,000. (Customer was going to return goods until partial refund was arranged.) 27. Issued check number 2640 for sales salaries of $1,750 and office salaries of $950. 28. Purchased store equipment on account from Matt Co., terms 2/10, n/30, FOB destination, $800. 29. Issued check number 2641 for store supplies, $550. 30. Sold four TV C units on account to Randall Co., invoice number 893, terms 2/10, n/30, FOB shipping point. 30. Received cash from sale of December 20, less discount, plus transportation paid on December 20. 30. Issued check number 2642 for purchase of December 21, less return of December 24 and discount. 30. Issued a debit memo for $200 of the purchase returned from December 28. Instructions: 1. Enter the balances of each of the accounts in the appropriate balance column of a four-column account (General Ledger). Write Balance in the item section, and place a check mark ( ) in the Post Reference column. 2. Journalize the transactions in a sales journal, purchases journal, cash receipts journal, cash payments journal, or general journal as illustrated in chapter 7. Also post to the Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable Subsidiary ledgers. 3. Total each column on the special journals and prove the journal. 4. Post the totals of the account columns and individually post the other columns as well as the general journal. 5. Prepare the Schedule of Accounts Receivable and the Schedule of Accounts Payable (their total amount must equal the amount in their controlling general ledger account). 6. Prepare the unadjusted trial balance on the worksheet. 7. Complete the worksheet for the year ended December 31, 2012, using the following adjustment data: a. Merchandise inventory on December 31 $111,040 b. Insurance expired during the year 1,250 c. Store supplies on hand on December 31 975 d. Depreciation for the current year needs to be calculated. More Co. uses the Straight-line method, the store equipment has a useful life of 10 years with no salvage value. (NOTE: the purchase and return will not be included as the dates of the transactions were after the 15th of the month). e. Accrued salaries on December 31: Sales salaries $350 Office salaries 180 530 f. The note payable terms are at 8%, payment is not being made until Jan. 3, 2013. Interest must be recognized for one month (round answer to the nearest dollar amount). 8. Prepare a multiple-step income statement, a statement of owner s equity, and a classified balance sheet in good form. 9. Journalize and post the adjusting entries. 10. Journalize and post the closing entries. Indicate closed accounts by inserting a line in both balance columns opposite the closing entry. 11. Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

calculate cash from operating activities using the indirect method for putul only 494511

The following information is from the comparative balance sheets of Discovery Tech Corporation at June 30, 2011 AND 2010

(IN THOUSANDS) AT June 30 2011 2010

Current Assets:

Cash $2,750 $2,115

Accounts Receivable 3,000 2,750

Inventory 1,700 1,025

Prepaid Insurance 270 320

Total Current Assets $7,720 $6,210

Current Liabilitieis

Accounts payable $1,800 $1,750

Salaries Payable $3,750 $3,150

Total Current Liabilities $5,550 $4,900

Net income for the year ended Jan 30, 2011, was $425,000. Depreciation expense of $105,000 was included in the operating expenses for the year.

Requirement

Use the indirect method to prepare the cash from operations section of the statement of cash flows for Discovery Tech Corportation for the year ended June 30, 2011

Document Preview:

Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Cash from operations: Cash from customers Net increase in cash from operations Statement of Cash Flows Cash paid for taxes Cash from investing activities Purchase of equipment Cash from financing activities Payment of dividend Net increase in cash Net income Decrease in supplies Decrease in accounts receivable Decrease in wages and salaries payable Increase in taxes payable Cash from operating activities Add depreciation Cash paid for advertising Cash paid for employees Cash paid for rent Dividends paid Free cash flow equals Amount Formula 1 Formula 2 Formula 3 Formula 4 Formula 5 Type answers starting here Problem 9-49A Cash paid for supplies Craig’s Service Company For the Year Ended December 31, 2011 Part 1. Direct method Part 1. Indirect method Parts 2,3,4 Part 5. Increase in prepaid advertising Reimers, Financial Accounting 3e 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 $94,000.00 11.00 12.00 13.00 14.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00 21.00 22.00 23.00 24.00 25.00 26.00 27.00 28.00 29.00 $5,460.00 30.00 31.00 32.00 33.00 34.00 35.00 36.00 37.00 38.00 39.00 40.00 41.00 42.00 43.00 44.00 45.00 46.00 47.00 48.00 49.00 50.00 CyberCoach: $10,610 Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Cash from operations: Cash from customers Net increase in cash from operations Statement of Cash Flows Cash paid for taxes Cash from investing activities Purchase of equipment Cash from financing activities Payment of dividend Net increase in cash Net income Decrease in supplies Decrease in accounts receivable Decrease in wages and salaries payable Increase in taxes payable Cash from operating activities Add depreciation Cash paid for advertising Cash paid for employees Cash paid for rent Dividends paid Free cash flow equals Amount Formula 1 Formula 2 Formula…

Attachments:

calculate the gross profit ratio and inventory turnover ratio 494512

The following information is from the financial statements of Abby’s International Pasta Corporation

Requirements

1. Calcuate the gross profit ratio for the last two years shown

2. Calcuate the inventory turnover ratio for the last two years shown

3. What information do these comparisons provide?

Document Preview:

Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Data Input Section: For year ended June 30, 2009 Sales (domestic) Cost of sales Inventory Output Section: Part a. June 30, 2008 Gross profit ratio Part b. Inventory turnover ratio Part c. Average inventory (amounts in thousands) Formula 1 Formula 2 Formula 3 Formula 4 Formula 5 Formula 6 Type answer starting here June 30, 2011 June 30, 2010 Problem 5-53A Abby’s International Pasta Corporation Reimers, Financial Accounting 3e 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 $416,049.00 $429,813.00 $445,849.00 10.00 $92,488.00 $98,717.00 $110,632.00 11.00 $17,030.00 $16,341.00 $12,659.00 12.00 13.00 14.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00 21.00 22.00 23.00 24.00 25.00 26.00 27.00 28.00 29.00 30.00 31.00 32.00 33.00 34.00 Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Data Input Section: For year ended June 30, 2009 Sales (domestic) Cost of sales Inventory Output Section: Part a. June 30, 2008 Gross profit ratio Part b. Inventory turnover ratio Part c. Average inventory (amounts in thousands) Formula 1 Formula 2 Formula 3 Formula 4 Formula 5 Formula 6 Type answer starting here June 30, 2011 June 30, 2010 Problem 5-53A Abby’s International Pasta Corporation Reimers, Financial Accounting 3e 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 $416,049.00 $429,813.00 $445,849.00 10.00 $92,488.00 $98,717.00 $110,632.00 11.00 $17,030.00 $16,341.00 $12,659.00 12.00 13.00 14.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00 21.00 22.00 23.00 24.00 25.00 26.00 27.00 28.00 29.00 30.00 31.00 32.00 33.00 34.00 ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

the campbell company 494513

The Campbell Company is considering adding a robotic paint sprayer to its production line. The sprayer’s base price is $960,000, and it would cost another $23,000 to install it. The machine falls into the MACRS 3-year class (the applicable MACRS depreciation rates are 33.33%, 44.45%, 14.81%, and 7.41%), and it would be sold after 3 years for $635,000. The machine would require an increase in net working capital (inventory) of $18,000. The sprayer would not change revenues, b

Attachments:

can you 494515

Note: Unlike some discussion memos, this example did not require any computations of amounts. You should direct your memo to the appropriate parties and not just copy the headings below and be sure to address the specific issues that the discussion memo asks you to address. Also, this example references authoritative guidance in FASB’s Accounting Standard’s Codification (ASC) and nonauthoritative guidance outside the codification. You are required to cite any authoritative ASC guidance on point and are not required to cite any nonauthoritative guidance, but can do so if you choose.

Document Preview:

Note: Unlike some discussion memos, this example did not require any computations of amounts. You should direct your memo to the appropriate parties and not just copy the headings below and be sure to address the specific issues that the discussion memo asks you to address. Also, this example references authoritative guidance in FASB’s Accounting Standard’s Codification (ASC) and nonauthoritative guidance outside the codification. You are required to cite any authoritative ASC guidance on point and are not required to cite any nonauthoritative guidance, but can do so if you choose. If you choose to cite other guidance as well, you must include appropriate footnote citations to such other guidance. March 28, 2012 To: The Board of Directors and Audit Committee From: Mr. Bell, Controller RE: Cash Flows Statement Treatment of Advances from Customers Background The members of the Board of Directors and the Audit Committee have asked me to conduct some research on an accounting issue regarding the presentation of certain cash flows in the statement of cash flows. The question relates to what is the appropriate classification of an advance payment that our company, Business Services, Inc, a management consulting firm, has received from a large customer for services to be purchased in the future under a long-term contract arrangement. We negotiated this advance payment arrangement with our largest customer because the customer is requiring us to devote a large amount of resources to providing future services to them and this would require us to ramp up our hiring to accommodate their service needs. As you are aware, we are considering how to best reflect in the cash flow statement this material customer advance received during the fourth quarter of this year. As we previously have discussed, some concerns have been raised regarding whether such a customer advance for future services should be treated as and operating or a financing cash flow under…

capsim xm help 494516

I need to complete capsim – xm See attachmenets

Document Preview:

BUSINESS SIMULATIONS EXAMINATION USA & Canada 877.477.8787 Outside USA & Canada +1.312.477.7200 WWW.CAPSIM.COMWelcome to Comp-XM Your Registration Number ® Welcome to Comp-XM , an integrated evaluation tool that will allow If your instructor or school did not give you a you to demonstrate your business skills. Comp-XM has two sections: R egistration Number, you will need to register 1. A business simulation similar to the one you just completed and on line using a credit card or checking account. 2. A series of quizzes, called Board Queries, that ask questions related to your simulation environment. The Simulation Board Queries Round 1 You are the CEO of a new company, the Board Queries are web-based quizzes that relate Andrews Corporation. You will make four directly to the results of your simulation. As CEO, you sets of decisions. Your competition, Baldwin, will report to the Board of Directors. The Board Chester and Digby, are run by computers. ?? ???? “? ????????? ?? ??#?$ ? ???? %???? ??& ? ?? %? Round 2 ??????? ?? ?? ????????????? ??????????????? that are based on the results of your previous rounds. all participants go up against a standard ?? ??’?? ??%?????(?? ???????? ?$ ? ???? ???????? ??? set of competitors. As with your previous a break-even analysis on an increase in production simulation, the quality of your decisions automation or calculate the effect additional directly affects the position of your company. Round 3 (? ?!????!?????????????? ??????????? ???? )????? Performance is evaluated using a Balanced questions use standard true-false, multiple choice Scorecard, an analysis technique that gauges and essay formats. results across four areas. All the information needed to answer the queries ???????????? Round 4 appears within the pages of The Comp-XM Inquirer, ? ?????? ????? ??? ?? ??? ® an industry newsletter similar to The Capstone ? ??? ???? ® ?? ?? ?? ??????? ??????? ??? ?? ??”)??????? *+/? ?…

carrie a morgan age 45 is single and lives with her dependent mother at 426 grouse a 494517

Carrie A. Morgan, age 45, is single and lives with her dependent mother at 426 Grouse Avenue, Allentown, PA 18105. Her social security number is 111-11-1111.

1. Carrie is a licensed hairstylist and operates her own business. Located at 480 Laurel Street, Allentown, PA 18105, the business is conducted under the name of Carrie’s Coiffures. Carrie’s business activity code is 812112. In addition to 10 workstations (i.e., stylist chairs) and a small reception area, the shop has display and storage areas for the

products Carrie sells (see item 2 below). During the year, Carrie leased nine of the stations to other hairstylists. As is common practice in similar businesses in the area, the other stylists are considered to be self-employed. In fact, the IRS sanctioned the self-employment classification for the stylists in an audit of one of Carrie’s prior tax returns. Each stylist pays Carrie a fixed rent for the use of a workstation, resulting in

$68,000 of rents received during 2012. From her own station, Carrie earned $44,000

(including tips of $12,000) for the styling services she provided to her own clients.

2. Carrie’s Coiffures is the local distributor for several beauty products (e.g., conditioners,

shampoos) that cannot be purchased anywhere else. Carrie buys these items from the

manufacturers and sells them to regular patrons, walk-in customers, and other

beauticians (including those who lease chairs from her). Carrie’s Coiffures is also

known for the selection and quality of its hairpieces (i.e., wigs, toupees). Through the

shop, Carrie made the following sales during the year:

Hairpieces and wigs $69,000

Beauty products 48,000

3. Although Carrie operates her business on a cash basis, she maintains inventory

accounts for the items she sells as required by law. Relevant information about the

inventories (based on lower of cost or market) is summarized below.

4.

12/31/11 12/31/12

Hairpieces and wigs $10,700 $12,600

Beauty products 11,400 9,900

5. Carrie’s purchases for 2012 were $30,500 of hairpieces and wigs and $26,100 of beauty

products.

6. Carrie’s Coiffures had the following operating expenses for 2012:

Utilities (i.e., gas, electric, telephone) $12,900

Ad valorem property taxes:

On realty (e.g., shop building and land) $4,200

On personalty (e.g., equipment, inventory) 1,800 6,000

Styling supplies (e.g., rinses, dyes, gels, hair spray) 5,700

Fire and casualty insurance 4,100

Liability insurance 4,000

Accounting services 3,800

Janitorial services 2,400

Sewer service, garbage pickup $ 2,300

Water 2,200

Occupation licenses (city and state) 1,500

Waiting room supplies (e.g., magazines, coffee) 1,300

7. As Carrie prefers to avoid employer-employee arrangements and the payroll tax

complexities, she retains outside agencies to handle her accounting and janitorial

needs.

8. In early 2012, Carrie decided to renovate the waiting room. On May 10, she spent

$10,400 for new chairs, a sofa, various lamps, coffee bar, and other furnishings. Carrie

follows a policy of claiming as much depreciation as soon as possible. The old

furnishings were thrown away or given to customers. For tax purposes, the old

furnishings had a zero basis.

9. Carrie’s Coiffures is located in a building Carrie had constructed at 480 Laurel Street in

March 1998. The shop was built for a cost of $300,000 on a lot she purchased earlier

for $35,000. Except for a down payment from savings, the cost was financed by a 20-

year mortgage. For tax purposes, MACRS depreciation is claimed on the building.

During 2012, the following expenses were attributable to the property:

Repainting (both exterior and interior) $8,000

Repairs (plumbing and electrical) 1,900

10. In May (after her accident settlement discussed in item 11 below), Carrie paid the

balance due on the business mortgage. To do so, she incurred a prepayment penalty of

$4,400. Prior to paying it off, she paid regular interest on the mortgage in 2012 of

$6,000.

11. In February 2012, Carrie’s Coiffures was cited by the city for improper disposal of

certain waste chemicals. Carrie questioned the propriety of the proposed fine of $2,000

and retained an attorney to represent her at the hearing. By pleading nolo contendere,

the attorney was able to get the fine reduced to $500. Carrie paid both the fine of $500

and the attorney’s fee of $600 in 2012.

12. In August 2012, Carrie saw an ad in a trade publication that attracted her attention.

The owner of a well-respected styling salon in Reading (PA) had died, and his estate

was offering the business for sale. Carrie traveled to Reading, spent several days

looking over the business (including books and financial results), and met with the

executor. Carried treated the executor to dinner and a music concert. Immediately after

the concert, Carrie made an offer for the business, but the executor rejected it. Her

expenses in connection with this trip were as follows:

Car rental $140

Entertainment of executor 280

Motel (August 6-7) 220

Meals 110

13. In March 2011, Joan Myers, one of Carrie’s best stylists, left town to get away from a

troublesome ex-husband. In order to help Joan establish a business elsewhere, Carrie

loaned her $7,000. Joan signed a note dated March 3, 2011, that was payable in one

year with 6% interest. On December 30, 2012, Carrie learned that Joan had declared

bankruptcy and was awaiting trial on felony theft charges. Carrie never received

payment from Joan, nor did she receive any interest on the loan.

14. At Christmas, Carrie gave each of her 35 best customers a large bottle of body lotion.

Each bottle had a wholesale cost to Carrie of $12 but a retail price of $24. Carrie also

spent $3 to have each bottle gift wrapped. (Note: The lotion was special order

merchandise and was not part of the business’s inventory or purchases for the year see item 2 above.) She also gave each of the nine stylists who leased chairs from her a

basket of fruit that cost $30 (not including $5 delivery cost).

15. In March 2012, the Pennsylvania Department of Revenue audited Carrie’s state income

tax returns for 2009 and 2010. She was assessed additional state income tax of $340

for these years. Surprisingly, no interest was included in the assessment. Carrie paid

the back taxes promptly.

16. On a morning walk in November 2011, Carrie was injured when she was sideswiped by

a delivery truck. Carrie was hospitalized for several days, and the driver of the truck

was ticketed and charged with DUI. The owner of the truck, a national parcel delivery

service, was concerned that further adverse publicity might result if the matter went to

court. Consequently, the owner offered Carrie a settlement if she would sign a release.

Under the settlement, her medical expenses were paid and she would receive a cash

award of $200,000. The award specified that the entire amount was for physical pain

and suffering. Because she suffered no permanent injury as a result of the mishap, she

signed the release in April 2012 and received the $200,000 settlement.

17. In January 2012, Carrie was contacted by the state of Pennsylvania regarding a tract of

land she owned in York County. The state intended to convert the property into a

district headquarters, barracks, and training center for its highway patrol. Carrie had

inherited the property from her father when he died on August 11, 2011. The property

had a value of $140,000 on that date and had been purchased by her father on March

3, 1980, for $30,000. On July 25, 2012, after considerable negotiation and after the

state threatened to initiate condemnation proceedings, she sold the tract to the state

for $158,000. Since Carrie is not comfortable with real estate investments, she does not

plan to reinvest any of the proceeds received in another piece of realty.

18. When her father died in 2011, Carrie did not know that he had an insurance policy on

his life (maturity value of $50,000) in which she was named as the beneficiary. When

her mother told her about the policy in July 2012, Carrie filed a claim with the carrier,

Falcon Life Insurance Company. In August 2012, she received a check from Falcon for

$51,500 (including $1,500 interest).

19. Upon the advice of a client who is a respected broker, Carrie purchased 1,000 shares of

common stock in Grosbeak Exploration for $40,000 on March 4, 2012. In the months

following her purchase, the share value of Grosbeak plummeted. Disgusted with the

unexpected erosion in the value of her investment, Carrie sold the stock for $28,000 on

December 23, 2012.

20. While on her way to work in 2011, Carrie was rear-ended by a hit-and-run driver. The

damage to her Lexus was covered by her insurance company, General Casualty, except

for the $1,000 deductible she was required to pay. In 2012, the insurance company

located the driver who caused the accident and was reimbursed by his insurer.

Consequently, Carrie received a $1,000 refund check from General Casualty in May

2012 to reimburse her for her $1,000 deductible.

21. After her father’s death, Carrie’s mother (Mildred Morgan, Social Security number

12345-6789) moved in with her. Mildred’s persistent back trouble made it difficult for

her to climb the stairs to the second-floor bedrooms in Carrie’s house. So Carrie had an

elevator installed in her personal residence at a cost of $12,000 in January 2012. A

qualified appraiser determined that the elevator increased the value of the personal

residence by $7,000. The appraisal cost $400. The operation of the elevator during

2012 increased Carrie’s electric bill by $300.

22. As a favor to a long-time client who is a drama professor at a local state university,

Carrie spent a weekend as a stylist preparing hairdos for the key actresses in the annual Theater Department fund-raising event. The drama professor supplied all of the

resources that Carrie needed to provide her services. Carrie estimates that she would

have charged $800 for the services she donated to this charitable event.

23. In addition to the items already mentioned, Carrie had the following receipts during

2012:

Interest income

CD at Scranton First National Bank $900

City of Lancaster general purpose bonds 490

Money market account at Allentown State Bank 340 $1,730

Qualified dividends on stock investments

General Motors $470

AT&T common 380 850

Federal income tax refund (for tax year 2011) 791

Pennsylvania state income tax refund (for tax year 2011) 205

24. Expenditures for 2012, not previously noted, are summarized below.

Contribution to pension plan $10,000

Medical

Premiums on medical insurance $4,800

Dental bills 1,400 6,200

Property taxes on personal residence 3,800

Interest on home mortgage 3,200

Professional expenses

Subscriptions to trade journals $ 180

Dues to beautician groups 140 320

25. The $10,000 contribution to the pension plan is to a 401(k) type of plan she

established in 2011. Previously, she had contributed to an H.R. 10 (Keogh) plan but

found that the 401(k) retirement arrangement provides more flexibility and is less

complex. The medical insurance policy covers Carrie and her dependents and was

issued in the name of the business (i.e., Carrie’s Coiffures ). It does not cover dental

work or capital modifications to a residence (see item 16 above).

26. During 2012, Carrie made the following total estimated tax payments with respect to

her 2012 tax returns:

Federal estimated income tax payments $20,800

Pennsylvania estimated income tax payments 2,400

Allentown City estimated income tax payments 800

Requirements

Prepare an income tax return (with appropriate schedules) for Carrie for 2012. In doing this, use the

following guidelines:

1) Make necessary assumptions for information not given in the problem.

2) Carrie has itemized deductions ever since she became a homeowner many years ago.

3) The sales tax option was not chosen in 2011, and Carrie had no major purchases that

qualify for the sales tax deduction in 2012.

4) Carrie has substantiation (e.g., records, receipts) to support the transactions involved.

5) If a refund results, Carrie wants it sent to her.

6) Carrie is preparing her own return (i.e., no preparer is involved).

7) Carrie does not wish to contribute to the Presidential Election Campaign Fund.

Attachments:

cascade inc completed the following inventory transactions during the month of septe 494518

First assignment

  1. Prepare a perpetual inventory record using FIFO.
  2. Prepare a perpetual inventory record using LIFO.
  3. Prepare a perpetual inventory record using average cost

Second assignment

  1. Estimate the August 31 inventory using the gross profit method.
  2. Prepare the August income statement through gross profit for Whitewater Co.
  3. Calculate the Inventory Turnover Ratio for Whitewater for years 2009 and 2010.
  4. Provide a reason why the Inventory Turnover has changed from the previous year
Document Preview:

9/1/2010 25 80 9/4/2010 40 78 9/12/2010 52 9/22/2010 30 77 9/30/2010 22 1 2 3 Date Requirements: Purchases Cost of Goods Sold Inventory on Hand Quantity Unit Cost Total Cost Cascade Inc. completed the following inventory transactions during the month of September: Item Balance Purchase Sale Prepare a perpetual inventory record using FIFO Prepare a perpetual inventory record using LIFO Prepare a perpetual inventory record using average cost Module 8 Assignment: ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

case 3 performance drinks a further study of regression analysis contribution margin 494519

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

http://feeds.feedburner.com/ViperScanner http://www.scanmyessay.com/css/main.css http://ajax.googleapis.com/ajax/libs/jquery/1.7.2/jquery.min.js http://code.jquery.com/ui/1.8.21/jquery-ui.min.js http://www.scanmyessay.com/favicon.ico http://www.scanmyessay.com Plagiarism Checker http://www.scanmyessay.com/feedback/index.phpContact us | http://www.scanmyessay.com/universities.phpUniversities | http://www.scanmyessay.com/viper-background.phpHistory | http://www.scanmyessay.com/testimonies.phpTestimonies | http://www.scanmyessay.com/press/index.phpPress | http://www.scanmyessay.com/about-us.phpAbout us | http://www.scanmyessay.com/sitemap.phpSitemap | http://www.scanmyessay.com/help/index.phpHelp | http://www.ukessays.com/essay-help.phpEssay help | http://www.scanmyessay.com/rss/index.phpRSS | http://www.scanmyessay.com/login/index.phpLog in Plagiarism Report For ‘ACCT640 Case 3 Performance Drinks .docx’ How does Viper work…..? [+] Read more.. …

case 494521

Document Preview:

Asia Sase Researah **ntre THI UI!IVTR$|TY CF }{ONG KONG HKU7O7 tsffiffiN Pst:n H*rY! l{ai Ss{l6s PAUL LEJOT FREDERIK PRETORIUS POLITICS. INSTITUTIONS AND PROJECT FINANCE: THE DABHOL POWER PROJECT ‘In l992,Indian authorities entered into an agfeement with Houston-based Enron Corporation to build a gas-fired p”*.. pi””i i,t lutt ot in”Maharashtra state, India’ This was intended to be the world,s largest independent power project and the largest single foreign investment in India. The plant was .o’n*,*”t”i under’pathbreaking tetms because of the liberalization of “f.”irl”i,V supply in India. But when the first stage of the new plant commenced production’ the price”of eli”t i.lty was perceived to be unaffordable for consumers’ Moreover, there were accusations of corruption in the state government’s association with the project, and the pr”:””, became a pawn in the volatile Iniian political environment. Completion of the project ‘*u* utro suspended for years, at great costs tt all, and the principal project promoter, Enron, collapsed in the interim.’could it f,ave been done differently? In all, the. Dabhol Power Project ofl-ers great insights into the negotiation of complex financial transactions with governments in unstable institutional environments’ lndia After gaining independence from the United Kingdom in 1947, India’s economy was managed with socialist-oriented

Attachments:

case study 494522

Case Study: Database Development  Due Week 8 and worth 90 points Read the following articles available in the ACM Digital Library: Dual Assessment of Data Quality in Customer Databases, Journal of Data and Information Quality (JDIQ), Volume 1 Issue 3, December 2009, Adir Even, G. Shankaranarayanan. Process-centered review of object oriented software development methodologies, ACM Computing Surveys (CSUR), Volume 40 Issue 1, February 2008, Raman Ramsin, and Richard F. Paige. Please follow the steps below to access ACM Digital Library: Login to iCampus at https://icampus.strayer.

Document Preview:

Case Study: Database Development ?Due Week 8 and worth 90 points Read the following articles available in the ACM Digital Library: Dual Assessment of Data Quality in Customer Databases, Journal of Data and Information Quality (JDIQ), Volume 1 Issue 3, December 2009, Adir Even, G. Shankaranarayanan. Process-centered review of object oriented software development methodologies, ACM Computing Surveys (CSUR), Volume 40 Issue 1, February 2008, Raman Ramsin, and Richard F. Paige. Please follow the steps below to access ACM Digital Library: Login to iCampus at ? HYPERLINK “https://icampus.strayer.edu/login” ?https://icampus.strayer.edu/login? From iCampus:  Click STUDENT SERVICES >> Learning Resources Center >> Databases Scroll down to “Information Systems/Computing”  The ACM Digital Library is located below the heading “ Information Systems/Computing”. Write a two to three (2-3) page paper in which you: Recommend at least three (3) specific tasks that could be performed to improve the quality of datasets, using the Software Development Life Cycle (SDLC) methodology. Include a thorough description of each activity per each phase. Recommend the actions that should be performed in order to optimize record selections and to improve database performance from a quantitative data quality assessment. Suggest three (3) maintenance plans and three (3) activities that could be performed in order to improve data quality. From the software development methodologies described in the article titled, “Process-centered Review of Object Oriented Software Development Methodologies,” complete the following. Evaluate which method would be efficient for planning proactive concurrency control methods and lock granularities. Assess how your selected method can be used to minimize the database security risks that may occur within a multiuser environment.  Analyze how the verify method can be used to plan out system effectively and ensure that the number of transactions do not produce…

case study 494524

Need attached assignment completed by Saturday. Please show calculation and answer all questions.

Thanks

Document Preview:

Minicase 5 t–I ll ll Page I of I eos” Sh^”fv iuices is a juice shop locerted in downtown Miami. The owner is considering the purchase of a new juicer to preserve her customer base in the market. The shop is r:xperiencing increased difficulty in competing with juice chains such as lumba Juice that offer customers a wider variety of specialty juices and mixes. The shop is open weekdays only. The cost of the new machine is $50,000. The selling price of the new juice mixes will he $2.00 per cup, and the variable cost per cup is $.50. Required: 1. What is the number of juices per day that must be sold to achieve break even? Z. Upon further investigation, the owner learns that the new machine requires substarltial maintenance, which will increase the variable cost by $.50 per juice. How would this information affect your answer? 3. What other factors shoulrJ the owner consider before making the final decision to purclrase the machine? https://mycourses.mdc.edr.r/Section/Content/Page.aspx?Entr,’Id:F6D7Dl5BA385426lA343lB7CCA5A0C07&c..’ 4/712013????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

case study 494525

POP’S INCORPORATED MANAGERIAL ACCOUNTING AS A STRATEGIC DECISION TOOL Brian Miller Assistant Professor of accounting Cedarville University, Cedarville, Ohio Jon Austin Associate Professor of Marketing Cedarville University, Cedarville, Ohio Kenneth Schappell Finance Group Manager The Procter and Gamble company, Cincinnati, Ohio Background Paulo “Pops” Gigliotti emigrated from Italy and settled in Dayton, Ohio. In Italy, Mr. Gigliotti had earned both a bachelors and masters degree in food chemistry and worked for several food processing companies.

Document Preview:

Case Study ? HYPERLINK “http://vizedhtmlcontent.next.ecollege.com/(NEXT(2ba3926db0))/Main/CourseMode/VizedHtmlView/RenderVizedHtmlView.ed?courseItemSubId=389078871&courseItemType=CourseContentItem&” l “1” ?Introduction? | ? HYPERLINK “http://vizedhtmlcontent.next.ecollege.com/(NEXT(2ba3926db0))/Main/CourseMode/VizedHtmlView/RenderVizedHtmlView.ed?courseItemSubId=389078871&courseItemType=CourseContentItem&” l “2” ?Background? | ? HYPERLINK “http://vizedhtmlcontent.next.ecollege.com/(NEXT(2ba3926db0))/Main/CourseMode/VizedHtmlView/RenderVizedHtmlView.ed?courseItemSubId=389078871&courseItemType=CourseContentItem&” l “3” ?Assignment? ???Introduction???The Case Study for PROJECT MANAGEMENT will place the student in the role of a senior manager in charge of one of your company’s Strategic Business Units (SBU). Your first task in this new position is to develop a project portfolio management process and then use this process to select projects for your SBUs portfolio. The Case Study will involve the application of the tools and techniques of multi-project/program management and will deal with the analysis and establishment of project management systems based on the structure of the project. The expected outputs from this Case Study will be in the form of a two part written report due week five. ???Background???The senior management of your company has already made the strategic decisions to allocate annual funding to each of the Strategic Business Units (SBU) within the company. You have been hired to manage one of the companies SBUs. Your new company is a mid cap company with revenues of approximately $350 million dollars a year.  This company, like many others, is struggling in today’s economy.  It realizes in order to survive it needs to both expand and control costs at the same time.  You are new to this industry.  This company’s vision is to become the “go to” support or the “provider of choice” for the cruise ship industry throughout the world. This company…

Attachments:

case study act5725 494526

CASE STUDY- ACT5725

Refer to financial statements of Campbell Soup company in Appendix A.

Required:

1. How much cash does Campbell soup collect from customers during year 10 ? (CC3)

2. How much is paid in Cash dividends on common stock during Year 11? (CC3)

3. How much is the total cost of good and services produced and otherwise generated in Year 11? Consider all inventories. (CC3)

4. Explain how Campbell Soup Company can have net income of $401.5 million , but generate $805.2 million in cash from operations in Year 11. Illustrate our explanation by reference to the major reconciling items. (CC5)

5. Note 1 to the financial statements discusses the accounting for disposal of property. Where is the adjustment for any gain or loss reported in the statement of cash flows?(CC3)

6.Compute free cash flows for all years shown.(CC3)

Attachments:

see attachments of the case 14 and the questions one page to answer tow questions 494527

See attachments of the case 14 and the questions. one page to answer tow questions.

Document Preview:

Case: C-14: Nate Mower & Son – Submission Due 10/31/2013 Using the above statements, provide specific recommendations that will alleviate Nate’s cash flow problems. Given the history of the company, is it possible for Brett to come on board, earn a living and successfully grow the company? If so, how? In order to answer satisfactorily you need to have a clear understanding of accounting and financial statements and cash management techniques. The answers should not exceed 1 page, single spaced with 1 inch margins and 12 point font.

cash flow statement juras equipment co for december 31 2013 494528

PR 16-1B Statement of cash flows and indirect method

The comparative balance sheet of Juras Equipment Co. for December 31, 2013 and 2012, is as follows:

The following additional information was taken from the records of Juras Equipment:

1.

Equipment and land were acquired for cash.

2.

There were no disposals of equipment during the year.

3.

The investments were sold for $129,600 cash.

4.

The common stock was issued for cash.

5.

There was a $228,960 credit to Retained Earnings for net income.

6.

There was a $144,000 debit to Retained Earnings for cash dividends declared.

Instructions

Prepare a statement of cash flows, using the indirect method of presenting cash flows from operating activities.

Attachments:

cash flows assignment 494529

I have five decently long problems that need to be completed by tonight. If you are good with cash flow statements it should not take more than twenty minutes. I would prefer if you would print out my assignment and then scan your finished work to attach as my answer so that I can see your work. WORK MUST BE SHOWN!

Document Preview:

12. In the space provided below, place one of the following seven letters to indicate the effect of the transaction on the statement of cash flows. A. increase in cash from operating activities B. decrease in cash from operating activities C. increase in cash from investing activities D. decrease in cash from investing activities E. increase in cash from financial activities F. decrease in cash from financial activities G. no effect on cash flows __ (1) Payment of Accounts Payable __ (2) Sales of equipment originally costing $75,000 and having an accumulated depreciation total of $55,000 for cash __ (3) Issue of preferred stock at par. __ (4) Purchase of $2,000 of merchandise on credit (perpetual inventory) __ (5) Cash payment for retirement of bonds at maturity __ (6) Purchase of additional delivery equipment __ (7) Sale of merchandise on credit __ (8) Declared dividends on preferred stock to be paid next year __ (9) Payment of dividends on common stock that had been declared the previous year __ (10) Incurred delivery expenses amounting to $1,000, of which $200 was paid __ (11) Made the adjusting entry for bad debts expense __ (12) Gain on sale of marketable securities __ (13) Amortization of bond discount __ (14) Declared and paid a stock dividend __ (15) the Allowance for Uncollectible account showed a decrease __ (16) Purchase of equipment for preferred stock __(17) Buildings were acquired for $187,500 with the company paying $50,000 cash and issuing a mortgage note payable in 5 years for the balance __ (18) Uncollectible accounts were written off against the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts __ (19) Cash was paid on the purchase of business assets consisting of: Merchandise, Furniture & Fixtures, Land & Buildings, and Goodwill __ (20) Accounts Payable shows a decrease for the period 6. Below is comparative balance sheet information for Southern Company. An examination of the company’s 20X6 income statement and accounting records reveal the following…

Attachments:

cash flw ratios equa tabs 494530

Document Preview:

Equa Ratios Cash Flw Bal Sht Inc Stmt Instructions Page Prepaid Expense Total Current Assets Other Assets Goodwill Property, Plant & Equip. Land Plant & Equip & C-I-P Gross P. P. & E. Less: Accum Depreciation = Days in Period/Inventory Turnover Ratio Current Liabilities Accounts Payable Accrued Liabilities Current Portion L-T-Debt Total Current Liabilities Long-Term Debt Deferred Income Taxes = (Net Income + Interest Expense, Net of Tax)/Avg Tot Assets = (Net Income – Pref Div)/Avg Common Stockholders’ Equity = Net Operating Profit After Tax – (Capital Employed * WACC) = Net Sales/Average Total Assets = Net Sales/Number of Employees Net P. P. & E. Total Assets Incr(Decr) Deferred Tax Incr(Decr) Employee Ben Accrued Employee Benefits Total Liabilities Stockholders’ Equity Incr(Decr) Cur L-T Debt Net (Incr) P.P.&E. (Capital Expenditures) Proceeds, P.P.&E. Sale (Gain)Loss P.P.&E. Sale Incr(Decr) L-T Debt Cash, Financing Activities Net Incr(Decr) in Cash Because P.P.&E. was bought and sold during each year, use the following information concerning Capital Expenditures, Proceeds and (Gain)loss. Liquidity Analysis Working Capital Current Ratio Acid-Test Ratio Days’ Sales in Receivables Inventory Turnover Ratio Days’ Sales in Inventory Cash-to-Cash Operating Cycle Acc Receivable Turnover Ratio Solvency Analysis Debt-to-Equity Ratio Profitability Analysis Gross Margin Profit Margin Asset Turnover Ratio Return on Equity Ratio Weighted Avg Share Oustanding Employees at Year End Return on Assets Ratio The Inc Stmt, Bal Sht, Cash Flw tabs will be used for EOC 11. The Inc Stmt, Bal Sht, Ratios, Equa tabs will be used for EOC 12. Print all of the tabs: Inc Stmt, Bal Sht, Cash Flw, Ratios, Equa Average Market Price Per Share Sales Per Employee Cash, Beginning of Year Cash, End of Year Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows Financial Statement Analysis Net Income Per Employee …

Attachments:

ch 4 of financial accounting problem 4 8a 494533

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

ch 6 principles of accounting homework due tonight 494534

This is an easy one for someone who is good with accounting. Please see attached. Need quickly. Thank you

Document Preview:

0 100 5 200 5 200 6 300 7 150 300 Worksheet instructions: Purchases: May 5 May 16 May 24 units @ Inventory: May 1 Sales: May 14 units May 20 Calculate the requested amounts showing your work below and entering your answers to the right. 1. Using the periodic inventory system determine ending inventory under FIFO 2. Using the periodic inventory system determine cost of goods sold under FIFO 3. Using the periodic inventory system determine ending inventory under LIFO 4. Using the periodic inventory system determine cost of goods sold under LIFO 5. Using the periodic inventory system determine ending inventory under average cost 6. Using the periodic inventory system determine cost of goods sold under average cost 7. Using the perpetual inventory system determine ending inventory under FIFO ANSWERS SHOW YOUR WORK!! 8. Using the perpetual inventory system determine cost of goods sold under FIFO 9. Using the perpetual inventory system determine ending inventory under LIFO 10. Using the perpetual inventory system determine cost of goods sold under LIFO ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

buffalo ny cafr research paper 494483

The deliverable for this assignment is a 7 page paper, font 12, double spaced. This project will detail all information you found or did not find in the budget or the CAFR for the city you have chosen. This includes a cover sheet (1 page) and a reference page (1 page). The objective of this activity is for you to be aware of what is happening in the real world that relates to governmental and not-for-profit accounting and reporting–to make the study of accounting more meaningful, to bridge the gap between theory. It is also intended to provide an opportunity to practice applying what was learned to the real-world.

Body of the order should be 5 pages.

Document Preview:

Buffalo, New York City Niecy Chimerica ACC 434 Government and Nonprofit Accounting National University Katherine McClellan June 8, 2011 The Buffalo City is located at the western part of the state of New York. The total area is 42 square miles and has a population of 292,648 people based on the census conducted in the year 2000. The city is the largest in the New York County and the governance offices of the Erie County are situated there .The city is headed by an elected mayor who serves for four years. The council takes care of public property such as town lights, roads and also cleans up the streets. It also provides police protection and fire brigade services for the people. More than 8,000 employees are served within the medical corridor in the city. The employment mix was noticed to have changed by 33.2%; an increase to the service providing sector and a decrease of 22.3% in the manufacturing sector. The unemployment rate has decreased by 4.7% within the past 10 years. Buffalo has been rated as the 10th best city with a good climate for a family build up. This is however a decline considering that Buffalo was the best city with favorable costs of lining (Roberts, 2010). The Buffalo City is under a stable financial position given that its total assets exceed its total liabilities. There is a surplus of $243,895 which consists of invested capital, specific purpose and $88,399 pounds of unrestricted assets. The city assets however decreased by $17,276 in the current year. This is in inclusion for both government activities and business type activities. The city reported an ending balance of $236,910 and a total of $49,952 of unreserved funds balance. The city had an outstanding bond debt of $121,120 at the end of the financial year. The largest assets of the city’s assets are reflected by investment in the capital assets. The city uses these assets to provide services to the citizens. There are however some outstanding debts on the acquisition of…

Attachments:

buffalo ny cafr research paper 494484

The deliverable for this assignment is a 7 page paper, font 12, double spaced. This project will detail all information you found or did not find in the budget or the CAFR for the city you have chosen. This includes a cover sheet (1 page) and a reference page (1 page). The objective of this activity is for you to be aware of what is happening in the real world that relates to governmental and not-for-profit accounting and reporting–to make the study of accounting more meaningful, to bridge the gap between theory. It is also intended to provide an opportunity to practice applying what was learned to the real-world.

Body of the order should be 5 pages.

Document Preview:

Buffalo, New York City Niecy Chimerica ACC 434 Government and Nonprofit Accounting National University Katherine McClellan June 8, 2011 The Buffalo City is located at the western part of the state of New York. The total area is 42 square miles and has a population of 292,648 people based on the census conducted in the year 2000. The city is the largest in the New York County and the governance offices of the Erie County are situated there .The city is headed by an elected mayor who serves for four years. The council takes care of public property such as town lights, roads and also cleans up the streets. It also provides police protection and fire brigade services for the people. More than 8,000 employees are served within the medical corridor in the city. The employment mix was noticed to have changed by 33.2%; an increase to the service providing sector and a decrease of 22.3% in the manufacturing sector. The unemployment rate has decreased by 4.7% within the past 10 years. Buffalo has been rated as the 10th best city with a good climate for a family build up. This is however a decline considering that Buffalo was the best city with favorable costs of lining (Roberts, 2010). The Buffalo City is under a stable financial position given that its total assets exceed its total liabilities. There is a surplus of $243,895 which consists of invested capital, specific purpose and $88,399 pounds of unrestricted assets. The city assets however decreased by $17,276 in the current year. This is in inclusion for both government activities and business type activities. The city reported an ending balance of $236,910 and a total of $49,952 of unreserved funds balance. The city had an outstanding bond debt of $121,120 at the end of the financial year. The largest assets of the city’s assets are reflected by investment in the capital assets. The city uses these assets to provide services to the citizens. There are however some outstanding debts on the acquisition of…

Attachments:

buffalo ny cafr research paper 494485

The deliverable for this assignment is a 7 page paper, font 12, double spaced. This project will detail all information you found or did not find in the budget or the CAFR for the city you have chosen. This includes a cover sheet (1 page) and a reference page (1 page). The objective of this activity is for you to be aware of what is happening in the real world that relates to governmental and not-for-profit accounting and reporting–to make the study of accounting more meaningful, to bridge the gap between theory. It is also intended to provide an opportunity to practice applying what was learned to the real-world.

Body of the order should be 5 pages.

Document Preview:

Buffalo, New York City Niecy Chimerica ACC 434 Government and Nonprofit Accounting National University Katherine McClellan June 8, 2011 The Buffalo City is located at the western part of the state of New York. The total area is 42 square miles and has a population of 292,648 people based on the census conducted in the year 2000. The city is the largest in the New York County and the governance offices of the Erie County are situated there .The city is headed by an elected mayor who serves for four years. The council takes care of public property such as town lights, roads and also cleans up the streets. It also provides police protection and fire brigade services for the people. More than 8,000 employees are served within the medical corridor in the city. The employment mix was noticed to have changed by 33.2%; an increase to the service providing sector and a decrease of 22.3% in the manufacturing sector. The unemployment rate has decreased by 4.7% within the past 10 years. Buffalo has been rated as the 10th best city with a good climate for a family build up. This is however a decline considering that Buffalo was the best city with favorable costs of lining (Roberts, 2010). The Buffalo City is under a stable financial position given that its total assets exceed its total liabilities. There is a surplus of $243,895 which consists of invested capital, specific purpose and $88,399 pounds of unrestricted assets. The city assets however decreased by $17,276 in the current year. This is in inclusion for both government activities and business type activities. The city reported an ending balance of $236,910 and a total of $49,952 of unreserved funds balance. The city had an outstanding bond debt of $121,120 at the end of the financial year. The largest assets of the city’s assets are reflected by investment in the capital assets. The city uses these assets to provide services to the citizens. There are however some outstanding debts on the acquisition of…

Attachments:

bus 100 week 8 494486

  • Discuss how administrative agencies like the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) or the Commodities Futures Trading Commission (CFTC) take action in order to be effective in preventing high-risk gambles in securities / banking, a foundation of the economy.

  • Determine the elements of a valid contract, and discuss how consumers and banks each have a duty of good faith and fair dealing in the banking relationship
  • Compare and contrast the differences between intentional and negligent tort actions

    • Discuss the tort action of Interference with Contractual Relations and Participating in a Breach of Fiduciary duty and, if the bank you ve chosen were to behave as JP Morgan did, would you be able to prevail in such a tort action.
Document Preview:

Assignment 2: JPMorgan Chase Strayer University LEG 100 Discuss how administrative agencies like the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) or the Commodities Futures Trading Commission (CFTC) take action in order to be effective in preventing high-risk gambles in securities / banking, a foundation of the economy. On January 11, 2012, the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC) voted 3-2 to propose regulations to implement Section 619 of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010 (Dodd-Frank Act), commonly referred to as the “Volcker Rule.” The proposal specifically prohibits a bank or institution that owns a bank from engaging in proprietary trading that is not at the behest of its clients, and from owning or investing in a hedge fund or private equity fund, and also limits the liabilities that the largest banks can hold .Under discussion is the possibility of restrictions on the way market making activities are compensated; traders would be paid on the basis of the spread of the transactions rather than any profit that the trader made for the client. Determine the elements of a valid contract, and discuss how consumers and banks each have a duty of good faith and fair dealing in the banking relationship. A contract may be defined as an agreement made between two or more corporations or persons that the courts will enforce. Contract law differs from many other areas of the law in that the parties need only follow the principles set out in the law to create their own rights and duties that the courts will then enforce. In some respects, the parties create their own “law” that they are obliged to follow. The creation of a binding contract that the courts will enforce requires the contracting parties to meet a number of requirements that are prescribed by the law of contract. While these requirements are not numerous, they must, nevertheless, be met before the agreement creates rights and duties that may be…

Attachments:

bus 3061 southwest business school income statement 494487

As you have learned, generally accepted accounting principles (GAAP) require organizations to prepare both an income statement and a balance sheet. Before the balance sheet can be prepared, the organization’s net income must be determined. This requires the accountant to pull together data from numerous system accounts and other sources of information. In this assignment, you will demonstrate your skill in putting together the necessary account data and preparing an income statement in good form.

Instructions

For this assignment, use the BUS3061 Assignment u02a3 Template (listed under Resources) to prepare an income statement

Document Preview:

BUS3061 Fundamentals of Accounting Southwest Business School Adjusted Trial Balance December 31 20XX???Debit ($)?Credit ($)??Cash ?26,000???Accounts receivable ?7,500???Teaching supplies ?2,600???Prepaid insurance ?12,000???Prepaid rent ?0???Professional library ?30,000???Accumulated depreciation—Professional library ??15,000??Equipment ?70,000???Accumulated depreciation—Equipment ??28,000??Accounts payable ??36,000??Salaries payable ??400??Unearned training fees ??6,600??Common stock ??10,000??Retained earnings ??53,600??Dividends ?40,000???Tuition fees earned ??1,09,500??Training fees earned ??42,400??Depreciation expense—Professional library ?6,000???Depreciation expense—Equipment ?12,000???Salaries expense ?48,400???Insurance expense ?3,000???Rent expense ?24,000???Teaching supplies expense ?7,400???Advertising expense ?7,000???Utilities expense ? 5,600?_______??Totals ?$3,01,500?$3,01,500??Southwest Business School Income Statement For Year Ended December 31, 20XX ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????? This document was truncated here because it was created in the Evaluation Mode. Created with an evaluation copy of Aspose.Words. To discover the full versions of our APIs please visit: https://products.aspose.com/words/ Capella Proprietary and Confidential ShortDoc_Internal.doc Last updated: ? DATE @ “M/d/yyyy h:mm am/pm” ?7/24/2013 10:58 AM? ? PAGE ?2?

Attachments:

bus 402 strategic management amp business policy week 2 ashford university 494492

Please refer to both attachments for work.

Document Preview:

BUS402: Strategic Management & Business Policy Discussions 1&2 Ashford University Discussion 1 Components of External Environment What are the two most relevant externalities from Exhibit 2.6 for a firm with which you are familiar? Have these externalities made the industry in which the firm operates more, or less, attractive to you as consumer? Explain your rationale. Must be 200 words written. Discussion 2 Components of Internal Analysis Using “The Seven-S Framework” from pages 58-59 to examine a firm with which you are familiar and address how the firm stacks up in respect to the “qualities of excellence” list on page 59.  Does alignment with this list help explain why the firm is currently successful or unsuccessful (use any metric you think is appropriate to judge success)? Must be 200 Words Written.???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

busi 320 corporate finance 2013 fall b assignment 2 494493

1.Problem 4-1 Growth and financing [LO4]

Philip Morris is excited because sales for his clothing company are expected to double from $650,000 to $1,300,000 next year. Philip notes that net assets (Assets Liabilities) will remain at 50 percent of Sales. His clothing firm will enjoy a 12 percent return on total sales. He will start the year with $250,000 in the bank and is already bragging about the two Mercedes he will buy and the European vacation he will take.

(a)

Compute his likely cash balance or deficit for the end of the year. Start with beginning cash and subtract the asset buildup (equal to 50 percent of the sales increase) and add in profit. (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Ending cash balance

$

(b)

Does his optimistic outlook for his cash position appear to be correct?

2.Problem 4-3 Growth and financing [LO4]

Galehouse Gas Stations, Inc., expects sales to increase from $1,710,000 to $1,910,000 next year. Mr. Galehouse believes that net assets (Assets Liabilities) will represent 45 percent of sales. His firm has a 8 percent return on sales and pays 20 percent of profits out as dividends.

(a)

What effect will this growth have on funds (Negative amount should be indicated by a minus sign. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

The cash balance will change by $ .

(b)

If the dividend payout is only 15 percent, what effect will this growth have on funds (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

The cash balance will change by $ .

3.Problem 4-4 Sales projections [LO2]

The Alliance Corp. expects to sell the following number of units of copper cables at the prices indicated, under three different scenarios in the economy. The probability of each outcome is indicated.

Outcome

Probability

Units

Price

A

.30

260

$

27

B

.50

440

42

C

.20

650

52


What is the expected value of the total sales projection (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Total expected value

$

4.Problem 4-6 Sales projections [LO2]

Cyber Security Systems had sales of 3,200 units at $60 per unit last year. The marketing manager projects a 15 percent increase in unit volume sales this year with a 40 percent price increase. Returned merchandise will represent 5 percent of total sales.

What is your net dollar sales projection for this year (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Net sales

5.Problem 4-8 Production requirements [LO2]

Sales for Western Boot Stores are expected to be 49,000 units for October. The company likes to maintain 25 percent of unit sales for each month in ending inventory (i.e., the end of October). Beginning inventory for October is 13,000 units.

How many units should Western Boot produce for the coming month?

Units to be produced

6.Problem 4-11 Cost of goods sold-FIFO [LO2]

On December 31 of last year, Wolfson Corporation had in inventory 560 units of its product, which cost $18 per unit to produce. During January, the company produced 960 units at a cost of $21 per unit.

Assuming that Wolfson Corporation sold 1,020 units in January, what was the cost of goods sold (assume FIFO inventory accounting) (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Cost of goods sold

$

7.Problem 4-13 Cost of goods sold-LIFO and FIFO [LO2]

At the end of January, Mineral Labs had an inventory of 925 units, which cost $9 per unit to produce. During February the company produced 1,650 units at a cost of $13 per unit.

(a)

If the firm sold 2,350 units in February, what was the cost of goods sold (Assume LIFO inventory accounting.) (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Cost of goods sold

(b)

If the firm sold 2,350 units in February, what was the cost of goods sold? (Assume FIFO inventory accounting.) (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Cost of goods sold

8.Problem 4-14 Gross profit and ending inventory [LO2]

The Bradley Corporation produces a product with the following costs as of July 1, 2011:

Material

$ 4 per unit

Labor

2 per unit

Overhead

2 per unit


Beginning inventory at these costs on July 1 was 3,650 units. From July 1 to December 1, 2011, Bradley produced 13,300 units. These units had a material cost of $2, labor of $4, and overhead of $2 per unit. Bradley uses FIFO inventory accounting.

(a)

Assuming that Bradley sold 14,300 units during the last six months of the year at $13 each, what would gross profit be (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Gross profit

$

(b)

What is the value of ending inventory (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Ending inventory

$

9.Problem 4-15 Gross profit and ending inventory [LO2]

The Bradley Corporation produces a product with the following costs as of July 1, 2011:

Material

$ 4 per unit

Labor

4 per unit

Overhead

2 per unit


Beginning inventory at these costs on July 1 was 3,750 units. From July 1 to December 1, 2011, Bradley produced 13,500 units. These units had a material cost of $4, labor of $6, and overhead of $3 per unit. Bradley uses LIFO inventory accounting.

(a)

Assuming that Bradley sold 16,000 units during the last six months of the year at $18 each, what would gross profit be (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Gross profit

$

(b)

What is the value of ending inventory (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Ending inventory

$


10.Problem 4-19 Schedule of cash receipts [LO2]

Watt’s Lighting Stores made the following sales projections for the next six months. All sales are credit sales.

March

$

48,000

June

$ 52,000

April

54,000

July

60,000

May

43,000

August

62,000


Sales in January and February were $51,000 and $50,000, respectively.
Experience has shown that of total sales, 10 percent are uncollectible, 35 percent are collected in the month of sale, 45 percent are collected in the following month, and 10 percent are collected two months after sale.

(a)

Prepare a monthly cash receipts schedule for the firm for March through August. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

(b)

Of the sales expected to be made during the six months from March through August, how much will still be uncollected at the end of August? How much of this is expected to be collected later (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Amount

Uncollected

$

Expected to be collected

$


Attachments:

busi 320 corporate finance 2013 fall b assignment 3 494494

1.Problem 6-2 Expected value [LO6]

Sharpe Knife Company expects sales next year to be $1,540,000 if the economy is strong, $820,000 if the economy is steady, and $540,000 if the economy is weak. Mr. Sharpe believes there is a 25 percent probability the economy will be strong, a 60 percent probability of a steady economy, and a 15 percent probability of a weak economy.

What is the expected level of sales for the next year (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Expected level of sales

$

2.Problem 6-4 External financing [LO1]

Antivirus, Inc., expects its sales next year to be $3,600,000. Inventory and accounts receivable will increase by $590,000 to accommodate this sales level. The company has a steady profit margin of 12 percent with a 30 percent dividend payout.

How much external financing will the firm have to seek? Assume there is no increase in liabilities other than that which will occur with the external financing. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

External funds needed

$

3.Problem 6-6 Level versus seasonal production [LO1]

Bambino Sporting Goods makes baseball gloves that are very popular in the spring and early summer season. Units sold are anticipated as follows:

March

3,200

April

7,200

May

11,400

June

9,400


31,200




If seasonal production is used, it is assumed that inventory will directly match sales for each month and there will be no inventory buildup.

The production manager thinks the above assumption is too optimistic and decides to go with level production to avoid being out of merchandise. He will produce the 31,200 units over four months at a level of 7,800 per month.

(a)

What is the ending inventory at the end of each month (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required.)

Ending
inventory

March

April

May

June


(b)

If the inventory costs $17 per unit and will be financed at the bank at a cost of 6 percent, what is the monthly financing cost and the total for the four months? (Use 0.5 percent as the monthly rate.) (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Inventory
financing cost

March

$

April

May

June


Total financing cost

$




rev: 01_07_2013

4.Problem 6-8 Short-term versus longer-term borrowing [LO3]

Biochemical Corp. requires $530,000 in financing over the next three years. The firm can borrow the funds for three years at 11.60 percent interest per year. The CEO decides to do a forecast and predicts that if she utilizes short-term financing instead, she will pay 8.25 percent interest in the first year, 12.75 percent interest in the second year, and 9.50 percent interest in the third year.

(a)

Determine the total interest cost under each plan. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Interest cost

Fixed cost financing

Variable short-term financing


(b)

Which plan is less costly?

5.Problem 6-9 Short-term versus longer-term borrowing [LO3]

Stern Educational TV, Inc., has decided to buy a new computer system with an expected life of three years at a cost of $410,000. The company can borrow $410,000 for three years at 11 percent annual interest or for one year at 9 percent annual interest.

(a)

How much would the firm save in interest over the three-year life of the computer system if the one-year loan is utilized, and the loan is rolled over (reborrowed) each year at the same 9 percent rate? Compare this to the 11 percent three-year loan. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Amount

9 Percent

11 Percent

Interest saving


(b)

What if interest rates on the 9 percent loan go up to 14 percent in the second year and 17 percent in the third year? What would be the total interest cost compared to the 11 percent, three-year loan (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Amount

1st year

2nd year

3rd year

Extra interest cost


6.Problem 6-10 Optimal policy mix [LO5]

Assume that Hogan Surgical Instruments Co. has $3,200,000 in assets. If it goes with a low-liquidity plan for the assets, it can earn a return of 15 percent, but with a high-liquidity plan, the return will be 11 percent. If the firm goes with a short-term financing plan, the financing costs on the $3,200,000 will be 7 percent, and with a long-term financing plan, the financing costs on the $3,200,000 will be 9 percent.

(a)

Compute the anticipated return after financing costs with the most aggressive asset-financing mix.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Anticipated return

(b)

Compute the anticipated return after financing costs with the most conservative asset-financing mix.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Anticipated return

(c)

Compute the anticipated return after financing costs with the two moderate approaches to the asset-financing mix. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Anticipated return

Low liquidity

High liquidity


7.Problem 6-11 Optimal policy mix [LO5]

Assume that Atlas Sporting Goods, Inc., has $990,000 in assets. If it goes with a low-liquidity plan for the assets, it can earn a return of 16 percent, but with a high-liquidity plan the return will be 13 percent. If the firm goes with a short-term financing plan, the financing costs on the $990,000 will be 10 percent, and with a long-term financing plan, the financing costs on the $990,000 will be 12 percent.

(a)

Compute the anticipated return after financing costs with the most aggressive asset-financing mix.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Anticipated return

(b)

Compute the anticipated return after financing costs with the most conservative asset-financing mix.(Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Anticipated return

(c)

Compute the anticipated return after financing costs with the two moderate approaches to the asset-financing mix. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Anticipated
return

Low liquidity

High liquidity


(d)

If the firm used the most aggressive asset-financing mix described in part a and had the anticipated return you computed for part a, what would earnings per share be if the tax rate on the anticipated return was 30 percent and there were 20,000 shares outstanding (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Earnings per share

(e-1)

Now assume the most conservative asset-financing mix described in part b will be utilized. The tax rate will be 30 percent. Also assume there will only be 5,000 shares outstanding. What will earnings per share be (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Earnings per share

(e-2)

Would it be higher or lower than the earnings per share computed for the most aggressive plan computed in part d?

8. Problem 6-12 Matching asset mix and financing plans [LO3]

Winfrey Diet Food Corp. has $4,550,000 in assets.

Temporary current assets

$

1,100,000

Permanent current assets

1,505,000

Fixed assets

1,945,000



Total assets

$

4,550,000






Short-term rates are 7 percent. Long-term rates are 12 percent. Earnings before interest and taxes are $970,000. The tax rate is 20 percent.

If long-term financing is perfectly matched (synchronized) with long-term asset needs, and the same is true of short-term financing, what will earnings after taxes be (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Earnings after taxes

Attachments:

busi 320 dev shell 2012 fall b assignment 1 494496

1.Problem 2-1 Income statement [LO1]

Frantic Fast Foods had earnings after taxes of $1,200,000 in the year 2009 with 322,000 shares outstanding. On January 1, 2010, the firm issued 30,000 new shares. Because of the proceeds from these new shares and other operating improvements, earnings after taxes increased by 24 percent.

(a)

Compute earnings per share for the year 2009. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Earnings per share

(b)

Compute earnings per share for the year 2010. (Round your answer to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Earnings per share

2.Problem 2-3 Gross profit [LO1]

Hillary Swank Clothiers had sales of $428,000 and cost of goods sold of $260,000.

(a)

What is the gross profit margin (ratio of gross profit to sales) (Round your answer to the nearest whole percentage. Omit the “%” sign in your response.)

Gross profit margin

(b)

If the average firm in the clothing industry had a gross profit of 35 percent, how is the firm doing?

The firm is .

3.Problem 2-4 Operating profit [LO1]

A-Rod Fishing Supplies had sales of $2,160,000 and cost of goods sold of $1,550,000. Selling and administrative expenses represented 10 percent of sales. Depreciation was 6 percent of the total assets of $4,450,000.

What was the firm s operating profit (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Operating profit

4.Problem 2-6 Income statement [LO1]

Given the following information, prepare an income statement for the Dental Drilling Company. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Selling and administrative expense

$

72,000

Depreciation expense

71,000

Sales

536,000

Interest expense

45,000

Cost of goods sold

179,000

Taxes

53,000


5.Problem 2-7 Income statement [LO1]

Given the following information, prepare an income statement for Jonas Brothers Cough Drops. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Selling and administrative expense

$

326,000

Depreciation expense

196,000

Sales

1,600,000

Interest expense

124,000

Cost of goods sold

551,000

Taxes

167,000


6.Problem 2-11 Depreciation and earnings [LO1]

Stein Books, Inc., sold 2,300 finance textbooks for $200 each to High Tuition University in 2010. These books cost $170 to produce. Stein Books spent $12,300 (selling expense) to convince the university to buy its books.

Depreciation expense for the year was $15,500. In addition, Stein Books borrowed $102,000 on January 1, 2010, on which the company paid 17 percent interest. Both the interest and principal of the loan were paid on December 31, 2010. The publishing firm s tax rate is 30 percent.

Prepare an income statement for Stein Books. (Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

7.Problem 2-15 Development of balance sheet [LO3]

Arrange the following items in proper balance sheet presentation (Be sure to list the assets in order of their liquidity. Input all amounts as positive values. Omit the “$” sign in your response):

Accumulated depreciation

$

347,000

Retained earnings

46,000

Cash

14,000

Bonds payable

137,000

Accounts receivable

51,000

Plant and equipment original cost

668,000

Accounts payable

38,000

Allowance for bad debts

6,000

Common stock, $1 par, 100,000 shares outstanding

100,000

Inventory

71,000

Preferred stock, $52 par, 1,000 shares outstanding

52,000

Marketable securities

28,000

Investments

24,000

Notes payable

39,000

Capital paid in excess of par (common stock)

91,000


8.Problem 2-16 Earnings per share and retained earnings [LO1, 3]

Okra Snack Delights, Inc., has an operating profit of $241,000. Interest expense for the year was $35,800; preferred dividends paid were $34,100; and common dividends paid were $39,600. The tax was $61,400. The firm has 23,700 shares of common stock outstanding.

(a)

Calculate the earnings per share and the common dividends per share. (Round your answers to 2 decimal places. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Earnings per share

Common dividends per share


(b)

What was the increase in retained earnings for the year (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Increase in retained earnings

Attachments:

business 3061 494497

u01a3 U01a2 u01a1 BUS 3061 – Fundamentals of Accounting Unit 1 Template for all assignments Owner’s Equity 1. Purchased supplies on account 2. Received cash for providing a service 3. Paid expenses in cash 4. Owner invested cash in the business 5. Owner withdraws cash from the business 6. Received cash from a customer who had previously been billed for services provided 7. Paid cash to purchase equipment 8. Paid employee salaries 9. Paid a creditor from whom the business had previously purchased supplies on account 10. The company sells new shares of stock 11.

Document Preview:

u01a3 U01a2 u01a1 BUS 3061 – Fundamentals of Accounting Unit 1 Template for all assignments Owner’s Equity 1. Purchased supplies on account 2. Received cash for providing a service 3. Paid expenses in cash 4. Owner invested cash in the business 5. Owner withdraws cash from the business 6. Received cash from a customer who had previously been billed for services provided 7. Paid cash to purchase equipment 8. Paid employee salaries 9. Paid a creditor from whom the business had previously purchased supplies on account 10. The company sells new shares of stock 11. Paid cash for monthly rent on the office space 12. Paid cash for monthly utility bills 13. Performed services on account 14. Made a payment on a loan received from the bank 15. Purchased for cash merchandise that will be later resold for profit 1. The liabilities of the Smith Company are $120,000 and the owner’s equity is $232,000. What is the the amount of Smith’s total assets? 2. The total assets of Jones Company are $190,000 and its owner’s equity is $91,000. What is the amount of its total liabilities? 3. The total assets of Greene Company are $800,000 and its liabilities are equal to one-half of its total assets. What is the amount of Greens’s owner’s equity? 4. Beginning the new year, Orange Company had total assets of $800,000 and total liabilities of $300,000. If total assets increased $150,000 during the year and total liabiities decreased $80,000, what is the owner’s equity total at the end of the year? 5. Beginning the new year, Orange Company had total assets of $800,000 and total liabilities of $300,000. If during the year Orange Company’s total liabilities increased $100,000, and owner’s equity decreased $70,000, what is the company’s ending amount of total assets? 6. Beginning the new year, Orange Company had total assets of $800,000 and total liabilities of $300,000. If total assets decreased $80,000 and owner’s equity increased $120,000 during the year, what is the…

Attachments:

business essay 494499

Model Essay Link to article: Bernstein, N. (2011): “Getting Tough on Immigrants To Turn a Profit.” New York Times, September 29: A1. http://www.nytimes.com/2011/09/29/world/asia/getting-tough-on-immigrants-to-turn-a-profit.html?scp=1&sq=Getting%20Tough%20on%20Immigrants&st=cse [Note: Please do not include the link to the article on which you base the paper you will submit. It is included here only for your reference.] His gaze leaped impatiently from his Rolex to the window and the grey London cityscape below. Nick Buckles, CEO of G4S, has a busy day ahead.

Document Preview:

Model Essay Link to article: Bernstein, N. (2011): “Getting Tough on Immigrants To Turn a Profit.” New York Times, September 29: A1. http://www.nytimes.com/2011/09/29/world/asia/getting-tough-on-immigrants-to-turn-a-profit.html?scp=1&sq=Getting%20Tough%20on%20Immigrants&st=cse [Note: Please do not include the link to the article on which you base the paper you will submit. It is included here only for your reference.] His gaze leaped impatiently from his Rolex to the window and the grey London cityscape below. Nick Buckles, CEO of G4S, has a busy day ahead. “Ah. Grahame; Debbie – please, come sit” he said to his arriving guests: Grahame Gibson, COO of new markets, and Debbie McGrath, communications director. Nick doesn’t waste any time: “Debbie, let’s hear it.” “Nick, it’s this Victoria contract. I can’t support it. I wouldn’t be able to look my daughter in the eye again – let alone sleep at night – if I did. We have standards, Nick, and right now we’re completely missing the mark. After our last death, the public is increasingly wary of us, as are the courts and legislatures of our largest clients, our brand image is in the toilet, and the international press is circling like a shark in the water. I think we should stop bidding our transport services altogether until we can thoroughly investigate the practice and provide sensitivity training for our guards. We’ve messed up. And now it’s our imperative to do the right thing and prevent this from ever happening again.” Grahame interrupts: “Nick, while I appreciate the tenacity with which Miss McGrath tends to our public perception, she’s left out some key information, not the least of which is the fact that we haven’t killed anybody. We transport hundreds of thousands of people each year; sometimes people just die. In cases where we might have some culpability, we’ve complied with the authorities and we’ve paid their fines; we are operating within their rules. …

business help 494500

Using the sample financial statements, calculate the financial ratios and then interpret those results against historical data and industry benchmarks.

Write a 350- 400 word summary of your analysis.

Showfinancial calculations where appropriate.

Document Preview:

Note-PPE AuditorsReportPg6 AuditorsReportPg5 MAINDOCUMENTS GuideToUseOfWorksheets (Incorporated in Malaysia) REPORTS AND FINANCIAL STATEMENTS CHARTERED ACCOUNTANTS CONTENTS PAGE NO. DIRECTORS’ REPORT 1 – 3 5 – 6 NOTES TO THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS 1 DIRECTORS’ REPORT FOR THE YEAR ENDED PRINCIPAL ACTIVITIES GROUP COMPANY RM Net profit for the year ISSUE OF SHARES DIVIDENDS The directors do not recommend that a dividend be paid for the year. RESERVES AND PROVISIONS DIRECTORS The directors since the last report are as follows: 2 DIRECTORS’ INTERESTS IN SHARES As at – DIRECTORS’ BENEFITS Neither during nor at the end of the financial year, was the Company a party to any arrangement whose object is to enable the directors to acquire benefits by means of the acquisition of shares in or debentures of the Company or any other body corporate. STATUTORY INFORMATION ON THE FINANCIAL STATEMENTS (a) (i) to ascertain that proper action has been taken in relation to the writing off of bad debts and the making of allowance for doubtful debts and have satisfied themselves that all known bad debts have been written off and adequate allowance had been made for doubtful debts; and (ii) (b) As at the date of this report, the directors are not aware of any circumstances: which would render the amount written off for bad debts and allowances made for doubtful debts inadequate to any substantial extent; which would render the values of current assets in the financial statements misleading; (iii) which have arisen which render adherence to the existing method of valuation of assets or liabilities of the Group and of the Company misleading or inappropriate; or 3 (iv) not otherwise dealt with in this report or the financial statements of the Group and of the Company which would render any amount stated in the financial statements misleading. (c) As at the date of this report, there does not exist: any charge…

Attachments:

business homework 494501

Case Study: Should I Stay or Should I Go? This assignment has two parts. The scenario to be used for the case study is shown below. Part I Kristin was enjoying her senior year at Stanford University in 2000. A number of the Fortune 500 firms had called her for interviews. Clearly, they recognized her talents and offered several exciting employment packages for her to consider. Kristin’s future was looking bright as she poured over the offers and decided to accept MBI’s offer for a junior executive management position.

Document Preview:

Case Study: Should I Stay or Should I Go? This assignment has two parts. The scenario to be used for the case study is shown below. Part I Kristin was enjoying her senior year at Stanford University in 2000. A number of the Fortune 500 firms had called her for interviews. Clearly, they recognized her talents and offered several exciting employment packages for her to consider. Kristin’s future was looking bright as she poured over the offers and decided to accept MBI’s offer for a junior executive management position. Kristin worked hard for nearly 10 years and rose quickly in the company. By the summer of 2012, MBI had sent her back to Stanford to earn an MBA, promoted her on 4 separate occasions, including promotion to Senior Vice President status and all of the perks that came with the job. A normal work week found Kristin working an average of 12 hours per day 6 days a week. She had a geographically far-flung area of responsibility that required extensive travel; so, despite living in the Washington, DC, she had little time to enjoy its offerings. She began to tire at about the 7-year mark and had considered resigning her position. A sense of loyalty to MBI kept her from doing so, but she was feeling trapped in her job by the 200 emails she received daily, the long hours, the seemingly never-ending schedule of conference calls, and the fact that her “life” centered around MBI and little else. Still, she felt obligated to MBI. Kristin’s reputation as a manager was stellar, primarily due to her inane ability to develop innovative management approaches that helped MBI win several lucrative government contracts that saved millions of dollars in costs for the government. Competitor companies respected and feared her at the same time. Some of these companies went so far as to approach Kristin with job offers that promised salaries approaching $250,000 plus perks per year. Her experience with MBI caused Kristin to question what she really wanted in…

Attachments:

business plan 494503

need this revised in order of the table of contents and headed

Document Preview:

Business Plan Salexia Timmerman Entertainment Management Company TABLE OF CONTENTS EXECUTIVE SUMMARY 1.2 Business Description 1. 3Business Summary 1. 4 Goals and Objectives for the Business INTRODUCTION ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE 3.1 Personal Background 3.2 Organizational chart MARKETING 4.1 Marketing Research Survey and Analysis 4.2 Sales forecasting 4.3 Advertising 4.4 Competition 4.5 Pricing ACCOUNTING 5.1 Income statement 5.2 Income statement Clarifications 5.3 Balance Sheet 5.4 Balance sheet clarifications FINANCIAL OVERVIEW 6.1 History of financial statements 6.2 Financial Projections 6.3 Sources of Funding CONCLUSION REFERENCES EXECUTIVE SUMMARY Managing entertainers and talent has an attractive outcome and ongoing luxuries but the work is a task in itself. It takes time to develop, build and a following gain and maintains bookings for all talents while keeping clients happy financially after your commission. T.L Management Corporation is a reasonably commission based talent management company that takes on entertainers in music, television, sports, movies and models with the primary focus on their worth per offer. The establishment of T.L Management Corporation will provide people with quality entertainment services and products. The business plan will include; the organizational structure, marketing, accounting, financial analysis and the operational management steps. The management of T.L Management Corporation has come up with various strategies aimed at minimizing the risk of business performance. These entail; minimizing the costs of entertainment hence increasing profitability and revenues through economies of scale. Many people will be employed in the corporation to ensure that superior service has been offered hence increasing the level of satisfaction. Building an enhanced customer base will ensure efficient cash flow in the business. The funding from investors in the business will help to build cover expenses…

Attachments:

business plan and budget project any takers 494504

This project would need to be completed by 8/13.

Document Preview:

3000 3000 3001 3001 3002 3002 Sample 123 Fake Street Sample Ville, 123548 Service Address: Meter Read: Account Summary: Opening Balance Payments Received-Thank you Balance Carried Forward New Charges Total Electricity Charges Incl Discounts Total Amount Due Customer Service 1-866-324-1484 Online Payments: www.fake.com Account No: 300 201 563 Total Amount Due: Due Date: Important Information: Ways to Save: Your Monthly Average Comparison Amount Now Due Your Account Number 0125867-65 Water Customer Class Commercial Water Usage History Please Pay by 02/xx/201x to avoid delinquency All bill inquiries and start/stop services 1-866-532-2111 To make payment arrangement on past due bills For missed pick-up of solid waste Logo of Company Invoice Number: Company Address Company Phone Company Email Company Website Customer Name: Customer Address: Customer Phone: Customer: Email Customer ID Number Quantity Total Price Description Price per Unit Discounts/Credits Payments Applied Amount Outstanding Signature: There should also be an invoice for the internet purchases as well. Purchase Order Customer ID Customer Information Description of Item Quanity Unit Price 01 ” 78 ” 5483 I: 000 ” 258 I: 0458 Company Name Address City, State and Zip PAY TO THE ORDER OF Name of the Bank Bank Address For: $ DOLLARS Pay to: Amount: Memo: Name of the bank Account Number Statement Period Beginning Balance Deposits Checks Withdrawals Ending Balance Deposit Summary Check Summary ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

busn 278 budget amp forecasting final a solution from mba finance 494505

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

1. (TCO 1) Which one of the following is not a benefit of budgeting? (Points : 5)   It facilitates the coordination of activities.   It provides definite objectives for evaluating performance.   It provides assurance that the company will achieve its objectives.   It provides early warning signs of potential threats. Question 2.2. (TCO 2) “Groupthink” is a primary disadvantage of which qualitative forecasting method? (Points : 5)   Executive opinions   Sales force polling   Delphi method   Consumer surveys Question 3.3. (TCO 3) Which of the following statements regarding the t-statistic is true? (Points : 5)   The t-statistic cannot be negative.   The t-statistic measures how many standard errors the coefficient is away from the independent variable.   The higher the t-value, the more confidence we have in the coefficient.   Low t-values indicate high reliability. Question 4.4. (TCO 4) Marketing expenses typically increase in proportion to _____. (Points : 5)   number of customer orders.   advertising dollars.   sales dollars.   salespersons’ salaries. Question 5.5. (TCO 5) Which of the following is true when ranking proposals using zero-base budgeting? (Points : 5)   Nonfunded packages should not be ranked.   Adjustments are not allowed once the ranking is complete.   Due to changing circumstances, a low-priority item may later become a high-priority item.   Decision packages are ranked in order of increasing benefit. Question 6.6. (TCO 6) A disadvantage of the payback period technique is that it _____. (Points : 5)   ignores obsolescence factors   ignores the cost of an investment   is complicated to use   ignores the time value of money Question 7.7. (TCO 6) All of the following statements about the accounting rate of return method are correct except that it _____. (Points : 5)   considers the profitability of a capital expenditure   ignores the salvage value of an investment   does not consider the time value of money   uses income data rather than…

Attachments:

briefly describe thenvp irr accounting rate of return and payback period for this an 494506

Briefly describe theNVP, IRR, accounting rate of return, and payback period for this analysis. Indicate the discount rate you used, and how you arrived at it.
4.1Cashflows
Provide an excel spreadsheet screenshot that shows how you arrive at the net cashflows for each period in your planning horizon and describe its highlights.
4.2NPV Analysis
Provide a screen shot of your Excel NPV Analysis here, and describe its highlights.
4.3Rate of Return
Provide a screen shot of your IRR and Accounting Rate of Return calculations here, and explain the highlights.
4.4Payback Period
Provide a screen shot of your Excel calculation of the payback period for this venture.

Document Preview:

Papa Geo’s Restaurant Budget Proposal For [5 Years] Table of Contents Section?Title?Subsection?Title?Page Number??1.0?Executive summary?????2.0?Sales Forecast???????2.1?Sales Forecast?????2.2?Methods and Assumptions???3.0?Capital Expenditure Budget?????4.0?Investment Analysis???????4.1?Cash flows?????4.2?NPV Analysis?????4.3?Rate of Return Calculations?????4.4?Payback Period Calculations???5.0?Pro Forma Financial Statements ???????5.1?Pro Forma Income Statement?????5.2?Pro-Forma Cash flow Statement?????5.3?Pro-Forma Balance Sheets???6.0?Works Cited?????7.0?Appendices???????7.1?Appendix 1: [description]?????7.2?Appendix 2:?[description] etc??? [Please put page numbers in the last column of the table of contents above, as they apply to your finished assignment. Do this after your project is complete. Also, remove this text and all text that is in italics in this template when finished your project.] [Also, please submit your Excel Spreadsheet which shows your supporting calculations] 1.0 Executive Summary The first paragraph of this executive summary should give a brief description of the business to which this budget applies.Very briefly describe the products and services of this company, the geographical or demographics of the customers it serves, and why people purchase the main product of this business. Much or all of this will be found in the Business Profile provided to you. Please use your own words, and please do not simply copy and paste the explanation in the course materials. Make assumptions if necessary.? Also, provide a second paragraph which describeshow the budget supports the company’s strategy. Finally, provide a third paragraph where you summarize the key points from your budget, including the planning horizon, the amount of up-front investment, the NPV, Payback and IRR of the project, as well as key figures from your income statement, cashflow statement, and balance sheet. Remember, this is not a thesis or introduction of…

busn460 individual financial analysis project 494507

Individual Financial Analysis Report

Start on the Individual Financial Analysis Report, due Week 3. Note that this is not a team assignment. Be sure to include proper citations for all references you use.

Go to the CanGo Intranet and pull the financial statements. (Listed Below) Use these to fill out the table found in Doc Sharing labeled Financial Analysis Project. (Will attach as well)

Assumptions:

  1. At the beginning of 2009, CanGo purchased the online gaming company. This purchase was for cash, paid for through the proceeds of the IPO and results in goodwill.
  2. 90% of the online book sales comes from JIT, the other 10% through the inventory which CanGo possesses. 100% of the CD/DVD/MP3 come through CanGo inventory. The result is that 80% of ALL sales is JIT and 20% is inventory.
  3. There is one warehouse for shipping of books and one plant for manufacturing.
  4. There are three divisions: a CD/DVD/MP3 division, an online gaming division and a books division. All manufacturing takes place in the CD/DVD/MP3 division.
  5. The IPO took place at the beginning of 2009.
  6. The CD/DVDs were customized beginning in 2008. The MP3 players were built beginning in the start of 2009.
  7. The online gaming company was purchased for $30,000,000 and both Elizabeth and Andrew initiated the process.
  8. The company began in 2006, has a VC infusion in 2007 and 2008. It showed a profit in 2008 and 2009. Its only profitable division is the online book sales division.
  9. It has some type of international operations, hence the need for a “translation gain or loss” in owner’s equity.
  10. It has an extraordinary loss from fire and a sale of a segment of its business in 2009.

Balance Sheet

ASSETS

December 31, 2009

Cash

$20,900,000

Marketable Securities

$117,000,000

Accounts Receivable

$33,000,000

Less: Allowance for Bad Debts

$(880,000)

Net Accounts Receivable

$32,120,000

Inventory

Raw Materials

$2,000,000

Work-in-process

$1,000,000

Finished Goods

$5,000,000

Inventory Purchased for Resale

$24,000,000

Total Inventory

$32,000,000

Plant, Property and Equipment

$6,700,000

Less: Accumulated Depreciation

$(320,000)

Net Plant, Property and Equipment

$6,380,000

Prepaid Expenses

$200,000

Goodwill and Other Purchased Intangibles

$28,000,000

Less: Amortization

$(700,000)

Net Goodwill and Other Purchased Intangibles

$27,300,000

Total Assets

$235,900,000

LIABILITIES AND OWNERS’ EQUITY

Accounts Payable

$22,000,000

Accrued Advertising

$11,800,000

Other Liabilities and Accrued Expense

$1,400,000

Current Portion of Long-Term Debt

$2,300,000

Long Term Debt

$57,400,000

Preferred Stock, $100 par value per share,

100,000 authorized, 0 shares issued and outstanding

$0

Common Stock, $1 par value per share,

250,000,000 shares authorized, 13,000,000 shares

issued, 12,900,000 outstanding

$13,000,000

Additional Paid-in-Capital in excess of par value, Common Stock

$117,000,000

Treasury Stock

$(1,000,000)

Retained Earnings (less Cash Dividends Paid)

$12,000,000

$11,000,000

Total Liabilities and Owner’s Equity

$235,900,000


Income Statement

December 31, 2009

December 31, 2008

Sales Revenues

$51,000,000

$10,300,000

Less: Sales Returns

$(1,000,000)

$(300,000)

Net Sales Revenues

$50,000,000

$10,000,000

Less: Cost of Goods Sold

$(9,000,000)

$(4,000,000)

Gross Profit

$41,000,000

$6,000,000

Operating Expenses:

Advertising and Sales

$(26,000,000)

$(3,000,000)

Depreciation

$(160,000)

Salaries and Wages

$(1,700,000)

$(1,400,000)

Product Development

$(4,000,000)

$(1,200,000)

Merger and Acquisition Related Costs, including

Amortization of Goodwill and Other Intangibles

$(700,000)

$0

Total Operating Expenses

$(32,560,000)

Income from Continuing Operations Before Income Taxes

$8,440,000

Less: Income Taxes at 35%

$(2,954,000)

Income from Continuing Operations

$5,486,000

Discontinued Operations:

Income from Operations of Discontinued Division

(less applicable income taxes)

$350,000

Loss on Disposal of Discontinued Division

(less applicable income taxes)

$(150,000)

Total Gain from Discontinued Operations

$200,000

Extraordinary Items:

Loss from fire (less applicable income taxes)

$(200,000)

Net Income

$5,486,000

Divisional Revenues

Books

$15,000,000

$7,000,000

Online gaming

$25,000,000

Customized MP3/CD/DVD

$10,000,000

$3,000,000

Customized MP3/CD/DVD Inventory at end of 2009

$8,000,000

Attachments:

calculate and analyze depreciation under alternative methods 494509

On January 1, 2010, the super fast subs company purchased a delivery automobile for $31,000. The estimated useful life of the vehicle is five years, and the estimated salvage value is 1,000. The company expects the automobile to be driven 200,000 miles during its service life. Actual miles driven were:

Year Miles

2010 35,000

2011 40,000

2012 45,000

2013 39,000

2014 41,000

Requirements

1. Calculate the depreciation expense for each year of the five-year-life of the automobile using the following methods. (Round your answers to the nearest dollar.)

a, Straight-line method

b. Double-declining balance method

c. Activity method

2. How does the choice of depreciation methods affect net income in each of the years? How does the choice of depreciation methods affect the balance sheet in each of the years?

Document Preview:

Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Data Input Section: Estimated residual value Estimated useful life Depreciation Expense Per Year Double Straight Declining Year Line Balance Helpful Hint: Use the following functions to calculate depreciation =SLN(cost,salvage,life) =DDB(cost,salvage,life,period) Activity Method Output Section: Problem 6-70A Super Fast Subs Company Cost of asset, January 1, 2010 Miles driven Total miles driven over life of equipment Cost per mile (cost-residual/units) Part 1. Part 2. Amount Formula 1 Formula 2 Formula 3 Formula 4 Formula 5 Formula 6 Formula 7 Formula 8 Formula 9 Formula 10 Formula 11 Formula 12 Formula 13 Formula 14 Formula 15 Formula 16 Type answer starting here Reimers, Financial Accounting 3e 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00 2010.00 12.00 2011.00 13.00 2012.00 14.00 2013.00 15.00 2014.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00 21.00 22.00 23.00 2010.00 24.00 2011.00 25.00 2012.00 26.00 2013.00 27.00 2014.00 28.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 29.00 30.00 31.00 32.00 33.00 34.00 35.00 36.00 37.00 38.00 39.00 40.00 41.00 42.00 CyberCoach: Enter the following formula: =(H7-H8)/H16 CyberCoach: Enter the following formula: =G11*$H$17 Then copy down CyberCoach: You have to enter this amount manually. Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Data Input Section: Estimated residual value Estimated useful life Depreciation Expense Per Year Double Straight Declining Year Line Balance Helpful Hint: Use the following functions to calculate depreciation =SLN(cost,salvage,life) =DDB(cost,salvage,life,period) Activity Method Output Section: Problem 6-70A Super Fast Subs Company Cost of asset, January 1, 2010 Miles driven Total miles driven over life of equipment Cost per mile (cost-residual/units) Part 1. Part 2. Amount Formula 1 Formula 2 Formula…

Attachments:

calculate and analyze depreciation under alternative methods 494510

Schilig & Gray Industries purchased a new machine at the beginning of 2011 for $9,500. The company expected the machine to last for four years and have a salvage value of $500. The productive life of the machine was estimated to be 180,000 units. Yearly production was as follows: in 2011 it produced 50,000 units; in 2012 it produced 45,000 units; in 2013 it produced 30,000 units, and in 2014 it produced 55,000 units.

Requirements

1. Calculate the depreciation expense for each year of the four-year life of the machine using the following methods. (Round to the nearest dollar.)

a . Straight-line method

b. Double- declining balance method

c. Activity method using units

2. For each method, give the amount of accumulated depreciation that would be shown on the balance sheet at the end of the year.

3. Calculate the book value of the machine at the end of the year for each method.

Document Preview:

Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Data Input Section: Estimated useful life Depreciation Expense Per Year Double Straight Declining Year Line Balance Helpful Hint: Use the following functions to calculate depreciation =SLN(cost,salvage,life) =DDB(cost,salvage,life,period) Cost per unit (cost-residual/units) Activity Method Output Section: Total units produced over life of machine Units produced Estimated salvage value Book Value of the Asset End of Year Straight Line Activity Method Double Declining Balance Problem 6-72A Cost of asset, January 1, 2011 Parts 1,2 Part 3. Amount Formula 1 Formula 2 Formula 3 Formula 4 Formula 5 Formula 6 Formula 7 Formula 8 Formula 9 Formula 10 Formula 11 Formula 12 Formula 13 Formula 14 Formula 15 Formula 16 Formula 17 Schillig & Gray Industries Reimers, Financial Accounting 3e 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00 2011.00 12.00 2012.00 13.00 2013.00 14.00 2014.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00 21.00 22.00 $1.00 2011.00 23.00 $2.00 2012.00 24.00 $3.00 2013.00 25.00 $4.00 2014.00 26.00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 27.00 28.00 29.00 30.00 31.00 32.00 33.00 34.00 35.00 2011.00 36.00 2012.00 37.00 2013.00 38.00 2014.00 39.00 Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Data Input Section: Estimated useful life Depreciation Expense Per Year Double Straight Declining Year Line Balance Helpful Hint: Use the following functions to calculate depreciation =SLN(cost,salvage,life) =DDB(cost,salvage,life,period) Cost per unit (cost-residual/units) Activity Method Output Section: Total units produced over life of machine Units produced Estimated salvage value Book Value of the Asset End of Year Straight Line Activity Method Double Declining Balance Problem 6-72A Cost of asset, January 1, 2011 Parts 1,2 Part 3. Amount Formula 1 Formula…

Attachments:

for assignment expert only 494450

Document Preview:

Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Data Input Section: Estimated residual value Estimated useful life Depreciation Expense Per Year Helpful Hint: Use the following functions to calculate depreciation =SLN(cost,salvage,life) Output Section: Year ended December 31 Depreciation expense Accumulated depreciation Partial Balance Sheet Machine December 31 Less accumulated depreciation A s s e t s = #1 #2 Cash Accum. Depr. Liabilities + Stockholder’s Equity Problem 3-59A Cost of asset, January 1, 2010 Part 1. Part 2. Part 3. Part 4. Amount Formula 1 Fomula 2 Title Formula 3 Formula 4 Formula 5 Formula 6 Type answer starting here Charlotte Motorcycle Repair Corporation Reimers, Financial Accounting 3e 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00 12.00 13.00 2010.00 2011.00 2012.00 2013.00 14.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00 21.00 22.00 23.00 24.00 2010.00 25.00 26.00 27.00 28.00 29.00 30.00 31.00 211.00 2010.00 32.00 33.00 34.00 35.00 36.00 37.00 38.00 39.00 40.00 Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Data Input Section: Estimated residual value Estimated useful life Depreciation Expense Per Year Helpful Hint: Use the following functions to calculate depreciation =SLN(cost,salvage,life) Output Section: Year ended December 31 Depreciation expense Accumulated depreciation Partial Balance Sheet Machine December 31 Less accumulated depreciation A s s e t s = #1 #2 Cash Accum. Depr. Liabilities + Stockholder’s Equity Problem 3-59A Cost of asset, January 1, 2010 Part 1. Part 2. Part 3. Part 4. Amount Formula 1 Fomula 2 Title Formula 3 Formula 4 Formula 5 Formula 6 Type answer starting here Charlotte Motorcycle Repair Corporation Reimers, Financial Accounting…

Attachments:

assingemts 494454

3 assignments

Document Preview:

Question 1 (17 marks) HiSpeed Ltd. plans to manufacture cross-country skiing equipment. Its cash flows are highly dependent on the weather in early winter. HiSpeed operates under ideal conditions of uncertainty. On August 1, 2014, the beginning of its first year in business, HiSpeed acquires equipment to be used in its operations. The equipment will last two years, at which time its salvage value will be zero. The company finances the equipment purchase by issuing common shares. HiSpeed’s annual net cash flows will be $800 if the weather is snowy and $300 if it is not snowy. Assume that cash flows are received at year end. In each year, the objective probability that the weather is snowy is 0.7 and 0.3 that it is not snowy. The interest rate in the economy is 3% in both years. HiSpeed will pay a dividend of $50 at the end of each year of operation. Required (9 marks)??In 2014, the weather is snowy. Prepare a statement of financial position as at July 31, 2015, the end of HiSpeed’s first year of operations, and an income statement for the year.  (2 marks)??What timing of revenue recognition is implicit in the income statement you have prepared in part (a)? When ideal conditions do not hold, is this timing of revenue recognition relevant? Is it reliable? Explain.  (6 marks)  ??Assume that HiSpeed paid the present value you calculated in part (a) for its equipment. Calculate HiSpeed’s net income for the year ended July 31, 2015 on a historical cost basis, assuming that equipment is depreciated on a straight-line basis. Under the more realistic assumption that ideal conditions do not hold, which measure of net income is most relevant? Which is most reliable? Why?           Question 2 (18 marks) Prem has $2,000 that he wishes to invest for one year. He has narrowed his choices down to one of the following two actions: i: Buy bonds of X Ltd., a company that has a very high debt-to-equity ratio. These bonds pay 8% interest, unless X defaults, in which case Prem will…

Attachments:

attn abhishek 494455

Eval summary for task 2

Document Preview:

A4. Accounting Rate of Return (1) Unacceptable (2) Needs Revision (3) Meets Standard (4) Exemplary The candidate does not accurately calculate the accounting rate of return for this project. Not applicable. Not applicable. The candidate accurately calculates the accounting rate of return for this project. Criterion Score:1.00 Comments on this criterion: The ARR calculation of 8.91% is incorrect. A more detailed feedback regarding the formula used can be provided if the calculation would be performed within the Excel template and the Excel file would be submitted instead of a converted PDF file. A5. Payback Period (1) Unacceptable (2) Needs Revision (3) Meets Standard (4) Exemplary The candidate does not accurately calculate the unadjusted payback period in years and months. Not applicable. Not applicable. The candidate accurately calculates the unadjusted payback period in years and months. Criterion Score:1.00 Comments on this criterion: The provided payback period at 5 years and 0.1 month is not accurate. The number of years is correct; please review the calculation of the number of months. Provide the answer in full months. Detailed Results (Rubric used: FNT1-319.1.3-01-10, 2.1-04, 2.5-05) Articulation of Response (clarity, organization, word usage, ease of understandability) (1) Unacceptable (2) Needs Revision (3) Meets Standard (4) Exemplary There is no evidence of response to the prompts. The articulation of the response is weak. The articulation of the response is adequate. The articulation of the response is skillful. Criterion Score:3.00 Accuracy of Mechanics (grammar, punctuation, spelling) (1) Unacceptable (2) Needs Revision (3) Meets Standard (4) Exemplary The work includes several major errors that disrupt the meaning or flow of the response. The work includes a few major errors and/or many minor errors that interfere with the clarity of the response. The work includes a few minor errors but no readily detectable major errors. The work includes no…

auditing 494456

1. Which of the following should you consider when deciding whether to use the client s internal auditors?

a. to whom they report

b. education

c. certification (cpa, cia, or cma)

d. all of the above

2. Which of the following is the use of analytical procedures not required?

a. when planning the audit

b. as a substantive test

c. at the end of the audit as a type of reasonableness test

d. all of the above are required

3. The 10 audit standards :

a. no longer are considered GAAS

b. addresses the nature of the audit

c. refers to the quantity of procedures

d. none of the above are correct

4. Which of the following provides the greatest level of assurance?

a. review

b. projection

c. audit

d. compilation

5. Which of the following would prevent you from accepting an audit engagement?

a. unable to contact previous auditor

b. weaknesses in internal control

c. the presence of related party transactions

d. management prevents you from sending confirmations

6. Which of the following would be addressed to underwriters?

a. management representation letter

b. comfort letter

c. attorney s letter

d. none of the above

7. Which of the following is a procedure you would perform while planning an engagement?

a. tests of control

b. set materiality level for accounts receivable

c. research the integrity of management

d. obtain a management representation letter

8. Which of the following would you not include in an engagement letter?

a. fees

b. responsibilities of management and the auditors

c. an overview of the audit procedures

d. all of the above should be included

9. Which of the following would indicate a possible related party transaction?

a. the corporation sells land in exchange for a zero interest note receivable.

b. selling products to an individual at a volume discount

c. issuing stock in exchange for legal services

d. none of the above would alert you to a related party transaction

10. To whom should internal auditors report to?

a. the board of directors

b. the president of the company

c. the controller

d. the independent auditors

Attachments:

auditing homework 1 494460

Question 1 (100 marks)

Mona s Pharmacy Inc. (MPI) is a new audit client of Sharp and Ming, CGAs. In your first engagement since being promoted to the position of audit senior, you have been assigned to the audit of MPI as part of a team for the year ended December 31, 2012. During several meetings and discussions with the audit manager, you made the following notes:

1. MPI is owned by Mona Mane and her husband, Michael Mane. The business consists of a small retail pharmacy shop and an import and wholesale operation for various pharmaceutical-related products. Recently the store unit next door has become available for lease. Mona and Michael have decided to expand the business by leasing this unit and combining it with the current location. They plan on using the extra square footage for a small grocery section within the store, which would include basic grocery items (bread, milk, and packaged goods). In the past, the business was financed from their personal resources and loans from family members. In order to finance the expansion they are currently seeking approval of a loan from a bank.

2. The bank has outlined the following preliminary conditions for the loan:

o MPI must provide audited financial statements prepared in accordance with Accounting Standards for Private Enterprises to accompany the loan application. Subsequent to the loan being approved, audited financial statements will be required within 90 days of each year end. In previous years, the financial statements of MPI were reviewed by a CGA practising as a sole practitioner, who did not want to expand her business to include audit engagements.

o The net income before taxes and management bonus must remain above $450,000.

o MPI s inventory will be held as collateral for the loan.

3. MPI sells a range of prescription and non-prescription medical products and a variety of beauty products, souvenir items, and so on. The company also imports other pharmaceutical-related products such as first aid and hygiene products. These products are sold wholesale to other local owner-managed pharmacies and convenience stores. MPI provides all of its wholesale customers payment terms of net 30 days.

4. In order to keep prices lower than its competitors, MPI buys in bulk to benefit from supplier discounts, and encourages retail customers to use cash or debit cards as payment by offering a discount. In the past, this worked well with, on average, 60% of its retail sales and services volumes paid by debit cards or cash. In the current year, this has dropped by 10%, with 50% of its retail sales now being paid by debit cards or cash.

5. You have conducted a preliminary survey to gain some knowledge about both the client company and the industry in which it competes. Recently Salmart and Boblaws have both opened large super center retail outlets in the neighbourhood, both containing pharmaceutical departments. As a result, both MPI and many of MPI s wholesale customers have been experiencing increased competitive price pressure.

6. In the current year, MPI has experienced a 15% reduction in sales. Inventory levels have increased by 20%, and there is concern that various high dollar value pharmaceutical items are approaching their expiry dates. The preliminary financial statements indicated a net income before taxes of $357,000 and a net income after taxes of $285,600. Mona and Michael were each awarded a $100,000 bonus.

7. The firm s policy, in the absence of known adverse factors, is to set audit risk at 3%. Your preliminary assessment of inherent risk for the revenue and collections cycle indicates that there is a 55% likelihood of a material misstatement occurring. Your preliminary assessment of control risk indicates a 10% probability that the control systems in place will not prevent or detect such an error. Your firm uses the planning model (audit risk model) to determine detection risk.

8. As part of this assessment of control risk, you reviewed the accounting systems and internal controls over sales transactions. The controller has provided the following description of the company s system of processing sales:

o Orders are received in writing and by telephone from retail stores that sell the company s products. Based on this information, a clerk prepares a two-part pre-numbered sales order. Part #1 of the order is sent to the warehouse, while part #2 is sent to the billing clerk.

o The warehouse fills the orders and ships the goods to the customers. Any items that are not in stock at the time an order is filled are marked back ordered on part #1 of the order form. The shipping clerk prepares a three-part bill of lading. Copy #1 accompanies the goods, while copy #2 is attached to part #1 of the order form and the two documents are sent to the billing clerk. The third copy of the bill of lading is retained at the warehouse in numerical sequence.

o At the beginning of each month, the billing clerk matches the order/bill of lading copies received from the warehouse with part #2 of the order form, and then prepares a three-part pre-numbered sales invoice. The description of items and quantities shipped are taken from part #2 of the order, while the prices are taken from the company s approved standard price list. The terms of all sales are net 30 days.

o The original invoice is sent to the customer. Invoice copy #2, together with the sales order copies and the copy of the bill of lading, are filed by customer in the billing department. The third copy of the invoice is sent to the bookkeeper to serve as the basis for posting to the individual customer accounts and for preparing the monthly sales journal. Statements are prepared by the bookkeeper and sent to customers only when requested.

9. In your discussions with the controller, he mentioned that the following issues have been occurring and he would like to know if you can provide any recommendations:

Many customers have indicated that they have been overcharged.

Customers have called, indicating they have not yet received goods that they ordered weeks ago.

The time to collect accounts receivable balances has increased from 30 days to 45 days, and several customers continue to order goods even though they have not yet paid for previous orders.

Required

Based on the work completed to date, the following items need to be resolved and tasks (among others) need to be completed.

Task 1: Distinguish between an audit, a review, and a compilation engagement (10 marks)

A friend of Mona and Michael told them that there are several different types of assurance that an auditor can provide. They would like you to explain the differences between an audit, a review, and a compilation engagement. They also would like to know the likely reason(s) that the bank has requested an audit. (10 marks)

Task 2: Materiality and audit risk model (25 marks)

a. Identify three factors specific to MPI that could affect the preliminary assessment of inherent risk. For each factor, indicate whether it is at the account level or the financial statement level. For all factors affecting a specific account, indicate the account and assertion affected. (6 marks)

b. Based on MPI s preliminary financial information for December 31, 2012, calculate a preliminary materiality. Describe the users of the financial statements and explain your reasoning for the quantitative measure selected. (5 marks)

c. Based on the preliminary determination of audit risk and your assessment of the risk of material misstatement, calculate the planned detection risk for the audit of the revenue and collections cycle. Show your work. (2 marks)

d. Prepare a short analysis of each of the following independent what-if situations for the audit manager. Consider each situation independently, varying only the factors stated in each situation and holding all other factors constant. When determining the effect of various changes on the detection risk, calculate the new detection risk and explain whether the detection risk varies directly, inversely, or independently of the factor that has changed.

i. After further study of the client s operations, you decide that the inherent risk of a material error is 45%. What effect would this have on the calculated detection risk? (2 marks)

ii. You decide to test key internal controls and find that the control risk is 25%. What effect would this have on the calculated detection risk? (2 marks)

e. What effect does a decrease in the detection risk you are prepared to take have on the nature of the audit work performed? What effect does it have on the extent of audit work performed? What effect does it have on the timing of audit work performed? (3 marks)

f. Assume you decide to decrease the amount of misstatement considered material by $20,000. What effect will this decrease in the amount considered material have on the detection risk? A change in the amount considered material is not an explicit component of the audit risk model. How then (if at all) does a change in the amount considered material result in a change in the detection risk if there is no change in the audit risk and no change in the client s operations or controls? (5 marks)

Task 3: Audit programs and working papers (12 marks)

a. During the course of the audit, you will be performing tests of control audit procedures as well as substantive procedures. Briefly explain the difference between these two types of procedures and describe the two major categories of substantive procedures. (6 marks)

b. The audit work performed must be documented using appropriate working papers. List six purposes of audit working papers. (6 marks)

Task 4: Internal control assessment sales transactions (17 marks)

a. Identify three control weaknesses based on the controller s description of the company s system of processing sales and the current issues that MPI is experiencing. For each weakness identified, describe the implications of the weakness and provide a control recommendation. Use three columns headed Control weakness, Implication, and Recommendation. (9 marks)

b. Identify two control procedures based on the controller s description of the company s system of processing sales. For each procedure, list the key objective it fulfills for internal control over sales transactions. Use two columns headed Control procedure and Control objective. (4 marks)

c. List two examples of control tests that the auditor could perform to ensure the operating effectiveness of the controls identified in Task 4(b). Explain under what circumstances the auditor would perform the tests of controls. (4 marks)

Attachments:

auditing homework 2 494461

Question 1 (7 marks)

The following are independent statements concerning certain auditing issues.

Required

Indicate whether you agree or disagree with each statement, and explain your reasoning.

a. Each of the following changes (considered independently and holding other things constant) can be expected to decrease the level of detection risk associated with the auditor s substantive tests: (1 mark)

1. decreasing materiality

2. increasing inherent risk

3. decreasing audit risk

b. An auditor was appointed to the audit of BID Inc. (BID) subsequent to BID s year-end date. BID is in the business of providing IT consulting services and is also a computer equipment reseller. BID only orders inventory from the manufacturer once a customer has placed an order. This allows for BID to have low levels of inventory. As a result of being appointed to the audit subsequent to year end, the auditor was unable to attend the year-end inventory count and could not obtain sufficient and appropriate audit evidence for the inventory balance. In this circumstance the auditor should issue a qualified opinion due to a scope limitation and the audit report should set out the nature of the qualification in the auditor s responsibility paragraphs. (1 mark)

c. When the auditor s preliminary assessment of control risk is that the control risk is low to medium and the auditor plans to place some reliance on the operating effectiveness of the controls to reduce the amount of substantive testing, the sample size required in testing the effectiveness of the controls should be larger since control risk is lower. (1 mark)

d. Auditors perform analytical procedures on the draft financial statements at the planning stage of the audit looking for relationships that do not make sense, as these may indicate problem areas where there may be material misstatements. (1 mark)

e. In audit and review engagements, an assessment of the CGA s independence from the entity is required, whereas in compilation engagements the assessment is not required. (1 mark)

f. The auditor will decide on the nature, extent, and timing of the audit evidence to be obtained and evaluated. An auditor must obtain the best available evidence with the consideration of cost. (1 mark)

g. The auditor, in an audit using a combined approach, will rely on the client s internal controls. It is the auditor s responsibility to develop and implement effective controls. (1 mark)

Question 2 (7 marks)

The audit risk model has become the commonly used basis for audit planning. The following are independentsituations that could have an effect on various components of the audit risk model.

Required

For each situation, identify the element(s) of the audit risk model (that is, audit risk, inherent risk, control risk, and detection risk) that is (are) most likely to be directly affected and the nature of the change in risk levels (increase or decrease) relative to a typical audit. Explain your reasoning.

a. A company provides all customers with the option to return unused goods within two weeks of the purchase. (1 mark)

b. In the current year, the company began performing credit checks for all new customers. The customers credit ratings were used to determine credit limits for the customers. (1 mark)

c. A client s sales team is primarily compensated on a commission basis. Commissions are determined on a percentage-of-sales basis. (1 mark)

d. All cheques greater than a pre-determined limit require the signature of the controller and the chief financial officer. (1 mark)

e. In order to raise capital, in the current year the owner-manager of a business sold 20% of the common shares to a private-equity investor. The owner will remain actively involved in the business. The private-equity investor will not actively partake in the daily management of the business. (1 mark)

f. An auditor tests a control and observes several compliance deviations. (1 mark)

g. In the past two prior-year audits, the auditor has identified several material overstatements in inventory. (1 mark)

Question 3 (12 marks)

Required

For each of the following independentsituations, state whether the CGA has violated generally accepted auditing standards and/or the CGA-Canada Code of Ethical Principles and Rules of Conductor Independence Standardand explain your reasoning.

a. Emily, CGA, owns a material amount of units in a mutual fund that owns stock in Emily s largest audit client. Reading the mutual fund s most recent financial report, Emily learned that the mutual fund significantly increased its holdings in her client. (2 marks)

b. Martha, CGA, has a practice with two departments. One department performs assurance services and the other performs bookkeeping services. One of her publicly accountable audit clients lost its controller and the bookkeeping department provided controllership services for 30 days while the company searched for a new controller. As this was an emergency, it was necessary for Martha s firm to provide the service because it has an intimate knowledge of the client s system. (2 marks)

c. In an effort to expand his business, Mathew, CGA, places an advertisement in the business section of the local newspaper listing specific services he performs and his rate for performing each type of service, some of which are available for a fixed fee and others for an hourly fee, which was also stated in the advertisement. (2 marks)

d. Howard, CGA, discovered, during the audit of his client Ignoble Enterprises Inc., that the company had failed to include a significant amount of income on last year s corporate income tax return. Howard suggested to the controller that he submit an amended return. When the controller refused, Howard resigned from the engagement. Howard later received a letter from the successor auditor asking if Howard was aware of any circumstances that they should be aware of prior to accepting Ignoble as a client. Howard replied by letter and informed the successor auditor that Ignoble s management failed to adjust income tax returns containing significant material errors. (2 marks)

e. Emma, CGA and auditor for Nestco (a public company), recommends that the company improve its internal controls and accepts a 90-day engagement to design and implement new controls, and to train company staff on them. (2 marks)

f. Harry, a CGA student, is currently employed by a CGA firm in public practice. He accepts a 15% discount on purchases from an audit client. Harry believes that he has not violated the Rules of Conduct because he is not yet a CGA member and the discount is at the same percentage that is available to the client s own staff members. (2 marks)

Question 4 (12 marks)

The purpose of substantive testing is to verify the assertions made by management in the financial statements. Consider the following unrelated audit tests, which a CGA performed for the audit of the financial statements of a client with a fiscal year end of December 31, 2011.

Required

For each of the six audit procedures listed below, identify the primarymanagement assertion being tested and the account balance being verified, name the specific audit procedure being used, and state the quality of the audit evidence obtained (high, moderate, or low), explaining why the evidence is the quality level you specify. Organize your answer with these headings:

Management assertion
and account balance

Audit procedure

Quality of audit
evidence

a. Calculated the ratio for sales commission expense to sales as a test of sales commission. (2 marks)

b. Reviewed the accounts receivable balances with the credit manager to discuss collectability. (2 marks)

c. Obtained a letter from the client s lawyer stating that they are not aware of any existing lawsuits filed against your client. (2 marks)

d. Examined a piece of equipment to make sure that the acquisition of the equipment took place and is operating. (2 marks)

e. Recalculated depreciation for each category of property, plant and equipment as at December 31, 2011. (2 marks)

f. Examined and counted Canadian government bond certificates held as investments as of December 31, 2011. (2 marks)

Question 5 (12 marks)

Julia, CGA, is an audit partner with the CGA firm of Cristi & Jones LLP, based in Toronto. Julia and her audit team recently completed the audit of Falcon Limited (Falcon) and planned to issue an unqualified opinion on the financial statements. The issuance of the opinion would occur in two weeks time, after the board of directors approved the financial statements. Prior to the issuance of the Falcon report, Julia and the same audit team began the audit of Eagle Limited (Eagle). During the fiscal year, Eagle sold a significant amount of property to Falcon. Eagle and Falcon are non-related parties and deal at arm s length. During the audit of Falcon, Julia s team verified the selling price of the property by reviewing the purchase and sale agreement and vouching the payment to the cancelled cheque. Subsequently, while performing the Eagle audit work, the auditors discovered that Eagle had dealt with Falcon unfairly by selling them property that was significantly overpriced.

Required

What are the moral/ethical issues, if any? What should Julia do? Use the relevant steps from the nine-step case analysis approach you studied in Topic 2.5. (You can also find the case analysis approach in Analyze a case under the Resources tab.)

Marks will be allocated as follows:

Identify problems and issues

2 marks

Generate alternatives

2 marks

Select the decision criteria

1 mark

Analyze and evaluate the alternatives

6 marks

Recommend an action for Julia (explain your reasoning)

1 mark

Attachments:

auditing question 494462

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Assignment 1 – Auditing 300 (Trimester 3A, 2013) You have just been employed as a junior auditor at the chartered accountant firm of PMG. Upon joining the firm, the partners request that you review the firm’s audit clients to ensure that the independence requirements of APES 110 are being met. Your review has revealed the following: (a) Paul Smith, the current senior manager on the audit of John Deer (JD) Ltd which specialises in the production in mining equipment, has just entered into a business venture (PJ Motors) with the CFO of JD Ltd, whereby they are both equal partners in a business retailing motor vehicles. Paul has informed you that this is not a problem since the 2 entities (JD Ltd and PJ Motors) are in different non-competing industries. (b) PMG has recently accepted an engagement to provide audit services to Stocky Ltd. Upon discussion with the manager of the Audit Team for Stocky Ltd, you were informed that one of PMG’s partner, Jeff Bates’ daughter currently works at Stocky Ltd. You later found out that Jeff’s daughter is the Financial Accountant at Stocky Ltd. Jeff Bates is not on the Audit Team of Stocky Ltd. (c) PMG’s secretarial services division has a pool of experienced and qualified company secretaries. These qualified company secretaries are either outsourced full time or part time to listed entities in Australia. Due to cost effective quality services, this division has a high growth in the last three years. Treck Manufacturing Ltd and Platinum Fabricators Ltd are two listed companies to whom secretarial services have been outsourced and assurance services provided. (d) Audrey Jones, a senior auditor at PMG, has been on the audit team of Barminco Ltd for a number of years. The account clerk of Barminco resigned 9 months ago, and Barminco has yet to replace him. As a result, Barminco is significantly behind in their bookkeeping. The financial controller of Barminco recently asked one of PMG’s partners to allow Audrey to join Barminco’s…

Attachments:

ba350 principles of finance ch02 p14 build a model cumberland industries and ch03 p1 494464

BA350 Principles of Finance: Ch02 P14 Build A Model (Cumberland Industries)

BA350 Principles of Finance: Ch03 P15 Build A Model (Joshua & White Technologies)

Ch02 P14 Build A Model (Excel Template)a. Cumberland Industries’ most recent sales were $455,000,000; operating costs (excluding depreciation) were equal to 85% of sales; net fixed assets were $67,000,000; depreciation amounted to 10% of net fixed assets; interest expenses were $8,550,000; the state-plus-federal corporate tax rate was 40% and Cumberland paid 25% of its net income out in dividends. Given this information, construct Cumberland’s income statement. Also calculate total dividends and the addition to retained earnings.b. Cumberland Industries’ partial balance sheets are shown below. Cumberland issued $10,000,000 of new common stock in the most recent year. Using this information and the results from part a, fill in the missing values for common stock, retained earnings, total common equity, and total liabilities and equity.c. Construct the statement of cash flows for the most recent year.

Chapter 3. Solution to 3-15 Joshua & White Technologies

Chapter 3. Solution to 3-15

Joshua & White Technologies: December 31 Balance Sheets
(Thousands of Dollars)

Assets 2010 2009
Cash and cash equivalents $21,000 $20,000
Short-term investments 3,759 3,240
Accounts Receivable 52,500 48,000
Inventories 84,000 56,000
Total current assets $161,259 $127,240
Net fixed assets 218,400 200,000
Total assets $379,659 $327,240

Liabilities and equity
Accounts payable $33,600 $32,000
Accruals 12,600 12,000
Notes payable 19,929 6,480
Total current liabilities $66,129 $50,480
Long-term debt 67,662 58,320
Total liabilities $133,791 $108,800
Common stock 183,793 178,440
Retained Earnings 62,075 40,000
Total common equity $245,868 $218,440
Total liabilities and equity $379,659 $327,240

Joshua & White Technologies December 31 Income Statements
(Thousands of Dollars)
2010 2009
Sales $420,000 $400,000
Expenses excluding depr. and amort. 327,600 320,000
EBITDA $92,400 $80,000
Depreciation and Amortization 19,660 18,000
EBIT $72,740 $62,000
Interest Expense 5,740 4,460
EBT $67,000 $57,540
Taxes (40%) 26,800 23,016
Net Income $40,200 $34,524

Common dividends $18,125 $17,262
Addition to retained earnings $22,075 $17,262

Other Data 2010 2009
Year-end Stock Price $90.00 $96.00
# of shares (Thousands) 4,052 4,000
Lease payment (Thousands of Dollars) $20,000 $20,000
Sinking fund payment (Thousands of Dollars) $0 $0

Ratio Analysis 2010 2009 Industry Avg
Liquidity Ratios
Current Ratio 2.58
Quick Ratio 1.53
Asset Management Ratios
Inventory Turnover 7.69
Days Sales Outstanding 47.45
Fixed Assets Turnover 2.04
Total Assets Turnover 1.23
Debt Management Ratios
Debt Ratio 32.1%
Times-interest-earned ratio 15.33
EBITDA coverage ratio 4.18
Profitability Ratios
Profit Margin 8.86%
Basic Earning Power 19.48%
Return on Assets 10.93%
Return on Equity 16.10%
Market Value Ratios
Earnings per share NA
Price-to-earnings ratio 10.65
Cash flow per share NA
Price-to-cash flow ratio 7.11
Book Value per share NA
Market-to-book ratio 1.72

a. Has Joshua & White’s liquidity position improved or worsened? Explain.

b. Has Joshua & White’s ability to manage its assets improved or worsened? Explain.

c. How has Joshua & White’s profitability changed during the last year?

d. Perform an extended Du Pont analysis for Joshua & White for 2008 and 2009.
ROE = PM x TA Turnover x Equity Multiplier
2010
2009

e. Perform a common size analysis. What has happened to the composition
(that is, percentage in each category) of assets and liabilities?

Common Size Balance Sheets
Assets 2010 2009
Cash and cash equivalents
Short-term investments
Accounts Receivable
Inventories
Total current assets
Net fixed assets
Total assets

Liabilities and equity 2010 2009
Accounts payable
Accruals
Notes payable
Total current liabilities
Long-term debt
Total liabilities
Common stock
Retained Earnings
Total common equity
Total liabilities and equity

Common Size Income Statements 2010 2009
Sales
Expenses excluding depr. and amort.
EBITDA
Depreciation and Amortization
EBIT
Interest Expense
EBT
Taxes (40%)
Net Income

f. Perform a percent change analysis. What does this tell you about the change in profitability
and asset utilization?

Percent Change Balance Sheets Base
Assets 2010 2009
Cash and cash equivalents
Short-term investments
Accounts Receivable
Inventories
Total current assets
Net fixed assets
Total assets

Base
Liabilities and equity 2010 2009
Accounts payable
Accruals
Notes payable
Total current liabilities
Long-term debt
Total liabilities
Common stock
Retained Earnings
Total common equity
Total liabilities and equity

Base
Percent Change Income Statements 2010 2009
Sales
Expenses excluding depr. and amort.
EBITDA
Depreciation and Amortization
EBIT
Interest Expense
EBT
Taxes (40%)
Net Income

baber makayla 494465

1000 to 1500 words.

ready in 12 hours.

Due in singapore time 5pm

Email me privately at michelleyu1022@hotmail.com

8 different source of references

Document Preview:

School of Accounting Trimester 3A 2013 Information Sheet Test 2 (15%) -Essay Due Week 9 (5 pm on Friday 3rd January 2014 uploaded through Turnitin on Blackboard) In the March 2001 edition of Australian CPA there was an article by Ian Nash and Adam Awty entitled “Just clowning around?”. The following is a quote from the article: Basically, environmental and social reporting is when the accounting profession eases into its Birkenstock sandals and becomes green, fluffy and friendly. It’s the type of reporting that nobody is the market could possibly take seriously, and even if it’s on the horizon, it’s a long way from becoming a regulatory and legal issue. True or false? With reference to accounting theory critically evaluate the above quotation and provide an opinion on the ‘true or false’ question As outlined in the unit outline page 5, students are required to write an essay and address the following The essay should be no smaller than 1000 words and no greater than 1500 words. (Use the word count in Microsoft office and write the number of words at the end of the essay). Required Format ? Students are required to upload their document through “Turnitin” in Blackboard. By no later than 5pm on Friday 3rd January 2014. ? Essays should be typed using Microsoft Word with a minimum size 11 font and using minimum 1.5 line spacing (no single spaced submissions please). ? Left and right page margins should be at least 3 cm. ? Chicago referencing style is required for in-text and end-text referencing. ? A completed assignment coversheet should be included with the assignment and the declaration signed by the student indicating that the work submitted is his/her own work. University policies and procedures for academic misconduct and plagiarism will be applied. Further information is available at academicintegrity.curtin.edu.au. Unsigned declarations will not be accepted. ? Originality reports can be viewed by students to ensure they have referenced where…

Attachments:

balance sheet and cash flows 494466

I need help doing a balance sheet and cash flow using direct/indirect method.

Document Preview:

A plant manufacturing nails and screws uses a large pool (volume = 10,000 L) to collect and treat its residual waste water before discharging it in a nearby stream. The manufacturing process makes use of a strong acid (HCl) and a weaker one (phosphoric acid, H3PO4; pKa1 = 2.148, pKa2 = 7.20, pKa3 = 12.15), before discharging them in the pool for treatment (neutralization). Once the pool is filled to its maximum capacity, a technician measures the chlorine and phosphorus concentrations in the waste water to be 0.5 M and 1.0 M, respectively. Assume (i) that chlorine and phosphorus come only from HCl and phosphoric acid, respectively, and (ii) that no H+ was consumed (or neutralized) in the manufacturing process. Knowing that the technician has to bring the pH of the waste water back to a minimum of 7.2 before discharging it in the stream, what is the minimum amount (in kg) of NaOH(s) (40 g/mol) that he has to add to the pool before discharging the waste water in the stream? What will be the pH of the waste water following the addition of 200 kg of NaOH? What will then be the number of moles of each phosphorus species (H3PO4, H2PO4-, HPO42- and PO43-) in the pool after the addition of NaOH? What will be the pH of the waste water if the technician adds 10.0 kg of NaOH in excess to what is needed to bring the pH to 7.2????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

basic managment accounting case study 494470

i have attached the document to be completed please reply with qualifications

profit loss accounts

overdraft limits

Analyse the business plan in terms of cost; volume; profit and in relation to its location and the demographics of the area.

Document Preview:

CASE STUDY-Ned Kelly Ned Kelly has decided to start a taxi business in his hometown of Broadstairs . An accountant advises that he needs to budget the first year’s profit or loss, and also the cash flow from trading (the capital budget is being calculated separately) so that he can calculate how much overdraft from the bank will be needed. Ned currently plans to have three taxis and nine drivers, plus £5,000 in the bank on 1 April 2013. Each driver can work five eight-hour shifts per week, and will take four weeks holiday per year including public holidays. At least one taxi will be available for hire 24 hours a day, 365 days per year. No relief drivers will be used and no overtime will be paid. The accountant suggests that each taxi will be used at 60% capacity, spread evenly over the year. The average receipts per taxi hour are expected to be £25 for the first three months, rising to £30 thereafter. It is envisaged that 20% of passengers will pay by credit card, payment in respect of which will be made in the following month, and 30% will be account customers, payment in respect of which will be made in the next but one month. The remainder will pay by cash. The cost of diesel will be 15% of revenue, paid for in the month following the expenditure. Maintenance costs per taxi will be £120 per month, payable one month in arrears, and annual road tax and licence fees per taxi will be £600, payable at the beginning of the first month’s trading. Monthly depreciation on fixed assets will be £1,000. Ned will manage the office, and he and four office staff will take bookings and direct drivers. Drivers will each be paid £24,000 gross pa; the four office staff will be paid £16,000 gross pa each. Social security costs and benefits will add another 10% to each month’s salary bill. All staff costs will be paid in arrears on a monthly basis. Utilities (water, gas and electricity) are expected to cost £1,500 a quarter, payable by direct debit in the first week of…

Attachments:

basically environmental and social reporting is when the accounting profession eases 494471

Chicago referencing

1k-1.5k words

Due in 11 hours time.

Document Preview:

School of Accounting Trimester 3A 2013 Information Sheet Test 2 (15%) -Essay Due Week 9 (5 pm on Friday 3rd January 2014 uploaded through Turnitin on Blackboard) In the March 2001 edition of Australian CPA there was an article by Ian Nash and Adam Awty entitled “Just clowning around?”. The following is a quote from the article: Basically, environmental and social reporting is when the accounting profession eases into its Birkenstock sandals and becomes green, fluffy and friendly. It’s the type of reporting that nobody is the market could possibly take seriously, and even if it’s on the horizon, it’s a long way from becoming a regulatory and legal issue. True or false? With reference to accounting theory critically evaluate the above quotation and provide an opinion on the ‘true or false’ question As outlined in the unit outline page 5, students are required to write an essay and address the following The essay should be no smaller than 1000 words and no greater than 1500 words. (Use the word count in Microsoft office and write the number of words at the end of the essay). Required Format ? Students are required to upload their document through “Turnitin” in Blackboard. By no later than 5pm on Friday 3rd January 2014. ? Essays should be typed using Microsoft Word with a minimum size 11 font and using minimum 1.5 line spacing (no single spaced submissions please). ? Left and right page margins should be at least 3 cm. ? Chicago referencing style is required for in-text and end-text referencing. ? A completed assignment coversheet should be included with the assignment and the declaration signed by the student indicating that the work submitted is his/her own work. University policies and procedures for academic misconduct and plagiarism will be applied. Further information is available at academicintegrity.curtin.edu.au. Unsigned declarations will not be accepted. ? Originality reports can be viewed by students to ensure they have referenced where…

Attachments:

bell company a manufacturer of audio systems started its production in october 2014 494472

Bell Company, a manufacturer of audio systems, started its production in October 2014. For the preceding 3 years, Bell had been a retailer of audio systems. After a thorough survey of audio system markets, Bell decided to turn its retail store into an audio equipment factory.

Raw materials cost for an audio system will total $75 per unit. Workers on the production lines are on average paid $14 per hour. An audio system usually takes 6 hours to complete. In addition, the rent on the equipment used to assemble audio systems amounts to $5,008 per month. Indirect materials cost $6 per system. A supervisor was hired to oversee production; her monthly salary is $3,455.

Factory janitorial costs are $2,164 monthly. Advertising costs for the audio system will be $9,292 per month. The factory building depreciation expense is $6,384 per year. Property taxes on the factory building will be $8,472 per year.

Assuming that Bell manufactures, on average, 1,598 audio systems per month, enter each cost item on your answer sheet, placing the dollar amount per month under the appropriate headings. Total the dollar amounts in each of the columns.

Product Costs

Cost Item

Direct
Materials

Direct
Labor

Manufacturing
Overhead

Period
Costs

Raw materials (1)

$

$

$

$

Wages for workers (2)

Rent on equipment

Indirect materials (3)

Factory supervisor s salary

Janitorial costs

Advertising

Depreciation on factory building (4)

Property taxes on factory building (5)

$

$

$

$

Attachments:

bonds payable accounting 494474

Handout to review material covering Bonds (10 points) 1. Why would bonds ever sell at a premium? a. Stated Rate = Market Rate b. Stated Rate > Market Rate c. Stated Rate < Market Rate 2. Why would bonds ever sell at a discount? a. Stated Rate = Market Rate b. Stated Rate > Market Rate c. Stated Rate < Market Rate 3. At what amount do bonds sell for if the Stated Rate is equal to the Market Rate? a. Bonds sell at a Discount b. Bonds sell at Face Value c. Bonds sell at a Premium 4. $500,000, 10%, 20 year bonds sell at 102.

Document Preview:

Handout to review material covering Bonds (10 points) 1. Why would bonds ever sell at a premium? a. Stated Rate = Market Rate b. Stated Rate > Market Rate c. Stated Rate < Market Rate 2. Why would bonds ever sell at a discount? a. Stated Rate = Market Rate b. Stated Rate > Market Rate c. Stated Rate < Market Rate 3. At what amount do bonds sell for if the Stated Rate is equal to the Market Rate? a. Bonds sell at a Discount b. Bonds sell at Face Value c. Bonds sell at a Premium 4. $500,000, 10%, 20 year bonds sell at 102. These bonds are selling at a a. Discount b. Premium Give the amount of cash received for these bonds when sold. ____________ 5. On the day the bonds were dated, Willow Corp. issued 12% bonds having a face value of $100,000 for $95,233. a. What entry is required to record the sale of the bonds? __________________________________________________ __________________________________________________ b. What amount of interest would be paid to bondholders annually? ____________ c. What amount of interest would be paid to bondholders semi-annually? ____________ ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

bravo baking company acc 346 exercise 494476

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

brief excel homework 494477

I need someone to do the below assignments, they are pretty easy i was

able to do majority of them in anywhere between 10-30 minutes not

having a clue about what i was doing. Attached is a PDF of the book. If

you are able to do these and get a good grade i have 2 more projects

that i would like done if you are willing.

There are data files that go with each of these assignments so a good

chunk of it is already setup for you.

Below is a dropbox link to the book in PDF format…

https://www.dropbox.com/s/2eyf12hgbv3jmx5/New%20Perspectives%20on%20Microsoft%20Excel%202010%20Comprehensive.pdf

Here is a dropbox link to the data files…

https://www.dropbox.com/sh/24hij3u0lff4o0h/HA9YTlylIs

Due the night of November 12th… PST

Tutorial 10, Case Problem 2, pgs 609-610

In step 5, cells B5 and B4 are reversed. B5 should be the row input

cell and B4 should be the column input cell.

DUE NOVEMBER 17TH

Tutorial 11, Sessions 11.1, 11.2 and 11.3, pgs 613-674

Page 637: Steps 1-4 on the bottom of the To connect to an Access data

source section may not work correctly if you are in the classroom or

another networked location. If not, use the following steps instead:

1. Click New Data Source in the Choose Data Source dialog box.

2. Verify that the Use the Query Wizard to create/edit

queries check box is checked, and then click the OK button. The Create

New Data Source dialog box opens.

3. In the Create New Data Source dialog box enter the following:

1) Give a Name = Horizons

2) Select a Driver = Microsoft Access Driver (.mdb, .accdb)

3) Click Connect button

4) Click Select button

4. Navigate to the Horizons database on your USB, and then click

the Horizons.accdb file in the Database Name box and click OK.

5. Click OK three more times.

6. Screen should look like Figure 11-19 on page 638.

7. Continue with Step 1 at the bottom of page 638.

DUE NOVEMBER 24TH

Submit To Be Scored:

Appendix C, Bright Light Case Problem

The Bright Light Case Problem is not in your textbook. Complete this

Case problem using the instructions listed below.

budget part 3 494482

These are the missing numbers to complete budget assignment. The missing numbers were: 20, 21 and 22. See attached below.

Document Preview:

gnrlrcfit Print Mew und your intermediate calculations. it the “$’* sign in your response.! xpense Budget areh 2A12 Genenal and Administmtir,e January, February, and January $i -: ‘.’.,..; ., .’ ” . . .j, :-,..”,.*…_^,……,.,…. *.,.,.-.,.,,._..,.,_.,.”,…_.:l .: i SIMID SPORTS CO, Cash Budget January, February , afid March Febwary March certain to enter “0” whsrever sign in your response,) .=.t]fr:l,lt 21 . SIMID SPORTS CO. Capital Expenditures Budget January, February, and March 201 ,*,il -rt Et-;lCii nter *{}” wherevsr required. lnput ca*r balance and repfiyment af nd your intelwrediate ealculations gn in your respon*,) ,-.F 1$;;: itF li li Prabtem,,2A-5A part 4 I 1916????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

advanced cost accounting devry university week 7 quiz 494421

Attached file

Document Preview:

1. (TCO 8) Which of the following is not a benefit associated with decentralization? (Points : 6)??       Quicker decision making?       Increased motivation of subunit managers?       Increased competition among managers?       Greater responsiveness to local needs??? 2. (TCO 8) The San Jose Manufacturing Company has two divisions in Kansas—the Holton Division and the Derby Division. Currently, Derby buys a part (10,000 units) from Holton for $16 per unit. Holton has purchased new equipment and wants to increase the price to Derby to $18 per unit. The controller of Derby claims that she cannot afford to go that high, as it will decrease the division’s profit to near zero. Derby can buy the part from an outside supplier for $16 per unit. The incremental costs per unit that San Jose incurs to produce each unit are Holton’s variable cost of $12. Fixed costs per unit to Holton with the recent purchase of equipment are $5.?Holton has no alternative uses for its facilities. Should Derby continue to buy from Holton or buy from the external supplier??Company as a whole/Derby Division only (Points : 6)??       Buy from external supplier/ Buy from external supplier?       Buy from external supplier/ Buy from Holton Division?       Buy from Holton Division/ Buy from Holton Division?       Buy from Holton Division/ Buy from external supplier??? 3. (TCO 8) When calculating performance measures, it is best to use (Points : 6)??       steady improvement against targets.?       gross book value asset measurement.?       historical cost asset measurement.?       current cost asset measurement.??? 4. (TCO 8) Information pertaining to the Woodsy Creek Division of MO Corporation for 20XX follows. Revenues?$950,000??Variable costs?575,000??Traceable fixed costs?336,500??Average invested capital?350,000??Imputed interest rate?10%???The return on sales (ROS), a component of the DuPont method of profitability analysis, was (rounded to the nearest percent) (Points :…

Attachments:

analyze and record stock transactions and prepare equity section of balance sheet 494423

The following information pertains to the equity accounts of Bottling Company:

a. Contributed capital on January 1, 2010, consisted of 80,000 issued and outstanding shares of common stock with par value of $1; additional paid-in-capital in excess of par of $480,000; and retained earnings of $560,000.

b. During the first quarter of 2010, Bottling Company issued an additional 5,000 shares of common stock for $7 per share.

C. on july 15, the company declared a 3-for-1 stock split

d. on october 15, the company declared and distributed a 5% stock dividend. The market price of the stock on that date was $8 per share.

e. on November 1, the company declared a dividend of $0.90 per shareto be paid on November 15.

f. Near the end of the year, the company’s CEO decided the comapny should buy 1,000 shares of its own stock. At that time, the stock was trading for $9 per share in the stock market.

g. Net income for 2010 was $75,500

Requirements

show how each of the transactions would affect the accounting equation

prepare the shareholders equity section of the balance sheet at Dec 31, 2010

Document Preview:

Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Retained earnings I Additional paid-in capital (CS) Total Contributed Capital Less: Treasury shares (1,000 shares at cost) Total Shareholders’ Equity Shareholders’ equity section for the Bottling Company Part 2 only Problem 8-57A Amount Common stock, ($.33 par, 267,750 shares issued) Reimers, Financial Accounting 3e 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00 12.00 13.00 $0.00 14.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 $0.00 18.00 19.00 20.00 CyberCoach: Enter as a negative number Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Retained earnings I Additional paid-in capital (CS) Total Contributed Capital Less: Treasury shares (1,000 shares at cost) Total Shareholders’ Equity Shareholders’ equity section for the Bottling Company Part 2 only Problem 8-57A Amount Common stock, ($.33 par, 267,750 shares issued) Reimers, Financial Accounting 3e 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 11.00 12.00 13.00 $0.00 14.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 $0.00 18.00 19.00 20.00 CyberCoach: Enter as a negative number ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

analyze the effects of accounts receivable transactions using the percentage of sale 494424

Evaluate the following scenarios, assuming both companies use the net credit sales as the basis for estimating bad debts expense:

a. At year end, Bonnie Company has accounts receivable of $112,000. The allowance for uncollectible accounts has a balance prior to adjustments of $(400). In other words, there were fewer specific write-offs than estimated., leaving an excess in the allowance account. Net credit sales for the year were $315,000 and 3% is estimated to be uncollectible.

b. At year end, Clyde Company has acounts receivable of $220,000. The allowance for uncollectible accounts has a balance prior to adjustment of $200. In other words, more specific accounts were written off than estimated, so the allowance was short by $200. Net credit sales for the year were $1,525,000 and 1% is estimated to be uncollectible.

Requirements

for each situation compute the following:

1. the bad debts expense for the year

2. the balance in the allowance for uncollectible accounts account at year end

3. the net realizable value of accounts receivable at year end

4. assuming Bonnie company had an accounts receivable (net) balance of $105,000 at the beginning of the year, what is Bonnie accounts receivable turnover ratio for the year

5. Assuming Clyde Company had an accounts receivable (net) balance of $226,000 at the beginning of the year, what is Clyde’s accounts receivable turnover ratio for the year?

Document Preview:

Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Situation a. Accounts receivable Net credit sales Percentage estimated to be uncollectible Bad debt expense for the year Situation b. Balances at year end: Allowance for uncollectible accounts (credit balance) Allowance for uncollectible accounts (debit balance) Allowance for uncollectible accounts balance Net realizable value of accounts receivable Bonnie Company Clyde Company Accounts receivable turnover ratio Average net accounts receivables Problem 4-49A Beginning accounts receivable balance for part 4 Beginning accounts receivable balance for part 5 Formula 1 Formula 2 Formula 3 Formula 4 Formula 5 Formula 6 Formula 8 Formula 7 Formula 9 Formula 10 Reimers, Financial Accounting 3e 5.00 6.00 7.00 $112,000.00 8.00 400.00 9.00 $315,000.00 10.00 0.03 11.00 $105,000.00 12.00 13.00 14.00 15.00 16.00 17.00 18.00 19.00 20.00 $220,000.00 21.00 200.00 22.00 $1,525,000.00 23.00 0.01 24.00 $226,000.00 25.00 26.00 27.00 28.00 29.00 30.00 Sheet3 Sheet2 Sheet1 A B C D E G H Name Section F End of Problem Situation a. Accounts receivable Net credit sales Percentage estimated to be uncollectible Bad debt expense for the year Situation b. Balances at year end: Allowance for uncollectible accounts (credit balance) Allowance for uncollectible accounts (debit balance) Allowance for uncollectible accounts balance Net realizable value of accounts receivable Bonnie Company Clyde Company Accounts receivable turnover ratio Average net accounts receivables Problem 4-49A Beginning accounts receivable balance for part 4 Beginning accounts receivable balance for part 5 Formula 1 Formula 2 Formula 3 Formula 4 Formula 5 Formula 6 Formula 8 Formula 7 Formula 9 Formula 10 Reimers, Financial Accounting…

Attachments:

another great help in business needed 494425

Decide upon an initiative you want to implement that would increase sales over the next five years, (for example, market another product, corporate expansion, and so on).

Usingthe sample finan14cial statements, create pro forma statements of five year projections that are clear, concise, and easy to read. Be sure to double check the calculations in your pro forma statements. Make assumptions that support each line item increase or decrease for your forecasted statements.

Discuss and interpret the financials in relation to the initiative. Make recommendations on potential discretionary financing needs.

Writea 350 – 700 word analysis of the company’s short term and long term financing needs and determine strategies for the company to manage working capital.

Click the Assignment Files tab to submit your assignment

Document Preview:

XYZ Company, INC. Profit and Loss Statement Year Ended December 31, 20XX % Sales 1,750,450 Returns and allowances 2,752 Net Sales 1,747,698 100.0 Cost of Sales Beginning Inventory 50,000 Purchases 610,162 Production Labor 420,108 Ending Inventory 30,000 Total Cost of Sales 1,050,270 60.1 Gross Profit 697,428 39.9 Selling Expense Wages 75,000 Commissions 25,000 Marketing 25,000 Total Selling Expenses 125,000 7.2 Operating Expense Salaries 225,000 Payroll taxes 29,000 Benefits 27,000 Office Supplies 500 Postage 250 Professional Fees 2,000 Telephone 850 Utilities 950 Training & Education 250 Miscellaneous 50 Total Operating Expense 285,850 16.4 Operating Profit—EBITDA 286,578 16.4 Other Income (Expense) Interest (9,650) Depreciation (12,000) Amortization (2,500) Total Other Income (Expense) (24,150) Total Pre-tax Profit 262,428 15.0 Income Tax Allowance 118,093 Net Profit 144,335 8.3?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

answer accounting questions 494427

Chapter 8 Review Questions 1. If your vendor ships more than you ordered on a purchase order (an over shipment), which of the following actions would not be appropriate? A. You could refuse the extra shipment and send it back to the vendor without recording it in QuickBooks B. You could receive the extra shipment using an inventory adjustment transaction C. You could receive the extra shipment into inventory and keep it (and pay for it) D. You could receive the extra shipment into inventory, and then send back and record a bill credit in QuickBooks 2.

Document Preview:

Chapter 8 Review Questions 1. If your vendor ships more than you ordered on a purchase order (an over shipment), which of the following actions would not be appropriate? A. You could refuse the extra shipment and send it back to the vendor without recording it in QuickBooks B. You could receive the extra shipment using an inventory adjustment transaction C. You could receive the extra shipment into inventory and keep it (and pay for it) D. You could receive the extra shipment into inventory, and then send back and record a bill credit in QuickBooks 2. When Setting up a group item, where do you enter the sale price? A. Enter the price in the sales price field B. Enter the price in the item pricing list C. The group item does not include a sale price field D. Enter the price in the set price window 3. To activate QuickBooks inventory: A. Select the file menu and then select preferences B. Select purchases – vendors C. Consult your accountant to determine the proper inventory valuation method D. Select edit menu, then select preferences then click on the items & inventory preference tab. Finally, click on the option that activates inventory 4. The inventory asset account: A. Tracks open purchase order of inventory items B. Decreases when inventory is purchased C. Increases when inventory is sold D. Increases when inventory is purchased 5. In QuickBooks pro and premier, inventory can do all of the following except: A. Provide reports on the status of each item in inventory including how many are on hand and how many are on order B. Use the lifo or fifo method of determining inventory cost C. Calculate gross profit on inventory sold D. Track the open purchase orders for every inventory item Chapter 9 Review Questions 1. In quick Books you are allowed to pass through billable expenses to customers: A. Only if you paid by credit card B. If you paid by check or credit card, but you don’t assign the customer or job to the expense C. If you…

Attachments:

answer accounting questions and exercises 494429

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

WK5 Assignment 3.docx? Eye Openers 1. Why might a business invest in another company’s stock? 2. If a bond is purchased between interest payment periods, how is the accrued interest treated? 3. Why would there be a gain or loss on the sale of a bond investment? 4. When is using the cost method the appropriate accounting for equity investments? 5. How does the accounting for a dividend received differ between the cost method and the equity method? 6. How are brokerage commissions treated under the cost method of accounting for equity investments? 7. How is the income of the investor impacted by equity method investments? 8. If an investor owns more than 50% of an investee, how is this treated on the investor’s financial statements? 9. Google Inc. recently purchased all of the outstanding common stock of YouTube. Which is the parent company, and which is the subsidiary company in this transaction? 10. What is the major difference in the accounting for a portfolio of trading securities and a portfolio of available-for-sale securities? 11. If Valuation Allowance for Trading Investments has a credit balance, how is it treated on the balance sheet? 12. Are held-to-maturity securities (a) equity investments,(b) debt investments, or (c) both? 13. How would a debit balance in Unrealized Gain (Loss) on Available-for-Sale Investments be disclosed in the financial statements? 14. What would cause Unrealized Gain (Loss) on Available-for-Sale Investments to go from a $12,000 debit balance at the beginning of the year to a $1,000 credit balance at the end of the year? 15. What is the evidence of the trend toward fair value accounting? 16. What are some potential disadvantages of fair value accounting? EX 13-19.jpg????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

answer any three 3 of the following questions submit your answer in an excel file wi 494430

Answer any three (3) of the following questions. Submit your answer in an Excel file, with a separate, labelled tab for each question chosen. Format your spreadsheets so that they are easy to follow and calculations are readily apparent. Verbal answers should be concise and clearly stated. Each question counts 30 points.

  1. XYZ Corporation operates a Marketing Research department. This department compiles information from published sources, and from its own consumer studies, to assist marketing personnel in forecasting product demand and making pricing and promotion decisions. A large marketing research firm has bid $280,000 per year for a three-year contract to perform the same services. For the most recent year, XYZ s controller determined the cost of operating the Marketing Research department to be $346,000:

Salary and fringes:

Senior researcher $68,000

Staff researcher 48,000

Clerical staff 70,000

VP Marketing (1) 62,000

Occupancy (2) 31,000

Subscriptions and travel (3) 67,000

(1) Represents 30% of cost of the VP, who is estimated to spend 30% of his time

on marketing research issues

(2) Occupancy costs are $31/sq ft: depreciation, $14; utilities, $11; maintenance, $6.

Utilities are 70% variable; maintenance is an allocation of fixed costs. There are no plans for alternate use of the space.

(3) Subscriptions and travel costs would be borne by outside research firm.

Required:

a. Determine the cost differential to XYZ of outsourcing versus retaining this function.

b. Discuss the factors that XYZ management should consider in making this decision.

2. Lewiston, Inc. is a manufacturer with a calendar accounting year. A physical inventory is taken on January 1, and any items not in inventory are charged to cost of goods sold.
a. In late March, Lewiston signed a $3,600,000 contract with Hawthorn, Inc. for production and installation of custom machinery at Hawthorn s plant. On December 22, Lewiston shipped Hawthorn the completed machinery, and billed Hawthorn $3,600,000, debiting a receivable and crediting revenue. Lewiston also debited COGS and credited inventory for $2,750,000, the cost of producing the machinery. The machinery is of no use to Hawthorn without installation and calibration by Lewiston employees. This work had not begun as of December 31.

b. This year, Lewiston began selling multi-year extended service contracts on some of its products. Lewiston sold $3,800,000 of service contracts, recording the entire amount as revenue. Of that amount, 80% relates to service to be performed in future years.

c. In August, Lewiston signed a lease on an office building to be used for administrative (not manufacturing) purposes. An advance rent payment of $1,000,000 was made and debited to Prepaid Rent. The controller forgot to make the year-end adjusting entry to record the expiration of $450,000 of this prepayment during 2013.

d. In December, Lewiston shipped goods on consignment to a dealer, booking revenue of $350,000 and cost of goods sold of $235,000. None of these goods had actually been sold to customers by year-end.
e. Two years ago, Lewiston acquired another manufacturing company whose operations have been integrated with Lewiston s. The acquisition price included $1,000,000 for customer lists, which has not been amortized. An appraiser with expertise in this industry estimates that the customer lists have lost 40% of their original value due to competitive changes in the industry. Lewiston s management disregarded this appraisal in preparing the financial statements.
For 2013, Lewiston reported operating income (before interest and taxes) of $20,000,000. Compute the correct amount of operating income/loss, showing any necessary calculations and explaining your reasoning.

3. Hinds Industries, Inc. is a manufacturer of soup and condiment products under its own standard and premium labels. The company has been in business for many years, and is a household name . Their Denver soup plant has a capacity of 120,000 cases/month, but has been operating at a normal volume of 75,000 cases/month Hinds has been approached by Mondo Mart, a large discount retailer, about producing a line of soups under a Mondo Mart house label. Mondo would initially place an order for 10,000 cases/month, with the understanding that the order will be expanded if the product is successful. The initial order would be for a reduced line of four relatively simple, standard-label soups, following Hinds normal recipes.

All of these soups have essentially the same production cost of $27 per case, as follows: ingredients and packaging, $14; direct labor, $2; overhead, $11. The overhead is 65% fixed manufacturing costs, 20% variable manufacturing costs, and 15% allocated general corporate overhead. Hinds would incur $2,000/month additional setup costs if the order is accepted. Packaging would cost ten cents/case less because of a cheaper label used by Mondo.
Hinds normally sells these soups for $34/case. Mondo Mart has offered $23/case, arguing that the steep discount is necessary for them to price the product in conformity with their pricing philosophy and customer expectations.
The regional marketing director is inclined to reject the offer, because it is below cost, and therefore Hinds will lose money on the contract. The ultimate decision is up to the regional director of operations. Discuss the factors that the operations director should consider in making the decision.

The factors to be considered are as follows:
a. The relevant cost of the decision. $27 current cost is not relevant as the company is working under capacity, therefore the relevant cost would be as follows:
Direct Material + Direct Labor + 20% variable manufacturing overhead+monthly setup cost-saving in packaging cost = 14+2+2.2+0.2-.1 = 18.3.

b. The benefit per case which is 23-18.3 = $4.7, therefore the project can be accepted as it will increase the monthly profit by $47000,
c. The impact of price reduction on existing customer as they can also ask for reduced selling price.
d. The loss of market share if the b

c. The loss of market share if the buyer is also selling in the same market in which Hinds is selling its product.

Thanks F.Naz for asnwering my question. But I am sorry, Its not correct.

We need to consider un-used capacity also. Plus, we donont have to consider only per unit costs. I think, We need to calcuate this question in little broader prospect.

I would appreciate if Business Tutor could input her review. As I ma already having another solution of F.Naz as well Business Tutor for similar question. But Solution by Business Tutor was little more appealing to me .Thanks

You can see that the unused capacity has been considered therefore the fixed cost has been considered as irrelevant cost. The answer is 100% correct. thanks.

  1. Acme Company manufactures a variety of industrial products which are sold throughout the country. Fred Riley has been manager of the Eastern Branch of Acme Company for the past three years. Starting in year 2, he was able to qualify for a $50,000 annual bonus for meeting a target growth rate of 10% of gross sales. Income statements for Eastern for the three year period are given below. Amounts are in the $ thousands.

Year 1

Year 2

Year 3

Gross sales

20,300

22,400

24,800

Returns and allowances

150

320

480

Net sales

20,150

22,080

24,320

COGS

13,100

15,020

17,170

Gross margin

7,050

7,060

7,150

Operating expense:

Manager salary/bonus

100

150

150

Other branch overhead

840

870

910

Selling expense

840

1,020

1,190

Advertising

530

750

910

General and admin

4,060

4,480

4,960

Total

6370

7270

8120

Branch Income (loss)

680

(210)

(970)

All advertising is local to the branch, and is controlled by the manager. Selling expense is all such expenses other than advertising, such as sales staff compensation and travel. General and administrative expense represents corporate overhead which is allocated at the rate of 20% of gross sales.

Required:

1) Comment on the effectiveness of the bonus plan used by Acme.

2) Because Eastern Branch is showing increasing losses, a senior vice president has suggested that the branch be closed. Comment.

Attachments:

answwer these problems 494432

Problem 1 (20 Points) 1. Short-term obligations can be reported as long-term liabilities if: A. The firm has a long-term line of credit B. The firm has tentative plans to issue long-term bonds C. The firm intends to and has the ability to refinance as long-term D. The firm has the ability to refinance on a long-term basis 2. When Bonds are retired prior to their maturity date: A. GAAP has been violated B. The issuing company probably will report an ordinary gain or loss C. The issuing company probably will report an extraordinary gain or loss D.

Document Preview:

Problem 1 (20 Points) 1. Short-term obligations can be reported as long-term liabilities if: A. The firm has a long-term line of credit B. The firm has tentative plans to issue long-term bonds C. The firm intends to and has the ability to refinance as long-term D. The firm has the ability to refinance on a long-term basis 2. When Bonds are retired prior to their maturity date: A. GAAP has been violated B. The issuing company probably will report an ordinary gain or loss C. The issuing company probably will report an extraordinary gain or loss D. The issuing company will report a non-operating gain or loss 3. Which one of the following contingencies requires financial statement disclosure: A. A lawsuit that the firm’s attorneys believe will be dropped B. A lawsuit that the firm’s attorneys believe will probably be settled for $75,000 C. A reasonably possible loss on a lawsuit that the firm’s attorneys cannot estimate the loss D. A reasonably possible loss on a lawsuit that the firm’s attorneys believe will be settled for $100,000 4. When the total expenses over the life of an operating lease are compared to the total expenses over the life of a capital lease, one will find that: A. The expenses of a capital lease are greater than the expenses of the operating lease B. The expenses of the capital lease and operating lease are equal C. The expenses of an operating lease are greater that the expenses of a capital lease D. No meaningful comparison can be made 5. What is the major reason that firms seek to classify leases as operating rather than capital? A. Operating leases are less costly and improve the company’s profitability throughout the life of the lease B. Operating leases improve the company’s balance sheet C. Operating leases are easier to obtain D. Capital leases hurt cash flow 6. The smoothing of pension expense is A. Unethical and not allowed by GAAP B. Allowed through amortization and deferral to prevent volatility in earnings C. Not allowed by GAPP…

Attachments:

for archmage 494434

Washington-Pacific invests $2 million to buy a tract of land and plant some young pine trees. The trees can be harvested in 14 years, at which time W-P plans to sell the forest at an expected price of $4 million. What is W-P’s expected rate of return? Round your answer to two decimal places.  % You have $45,886.53 in a brokerage account, and you plan to deposit an additional $6,000 at the end of every future year until your account totals $350,000. You expect to earn 8.1% annually on the account. How many years will it take to reach your goal? Round your answer to the nearest whole.

Document Preview:

Washington-Pacific invests $2 million to buy a tract of land and plant some young pine trees. The trees can be harvested in 14 years, at which time W-P plans to sell the forest at an expected price of $4 million. What is W-P’s expected rate of return? Round your answer to two decimal places.  % You have $45,886.53 in a brokerage account, and you plan to deposit an additional $6,000 at the end of every future year until your account totals $350,000. You expect to earn 8.1% annually on the account. How many years will it take to reach your goal? Round your answer to the nearest whole.  years Assume you are given the following relationships for the Clayton Corporation: Sales/total assets 1.7 Return on assets (ROA) 3% Return on equity (ROE) 9% Calculate Clayton’s profit margin. Round your answer to two decimal places.  % Calculate Clayton’s debt ratio. Round your answer to two decimal places.  % The current price of a stock is $35, and the annual risk-free rate is 3%. A call option with a strike price of $30 and 1 year until expiration has a current value of $6.00. What is the value of a put option written on the stock with the same exercise price and expiration date as the call option? Round your answer to the nearest cent. $   Assume that the average firm in your company’s industry is expected to grow at a constant rate of 4% and that its dividend yield is 7%. Your company is about as risky as the average firm in the industry, but it has just successfully completed some R&D work that leads you to expect that its earnings and dividends will grow at a rate of 50% [D1 = D0(1 + g) = D0(1.50)] this year and 25% the following year, after which growth should return to the 4% industry average. If the last dividend paid (D0) was $2, what is the value per share of your firm’s stock? Round your answer to the nearest cent. Do not round your intermediate computations. $   Stock R has a beta of 2.1, Stock S has a beta of 0.60, the expected rate of return on an…

Attachments:

are you willing to help me 494435

This is a large assignment. I hope that someone is willing to help me if your serious about doing the work. If you have any questions please ask me. Needs to be done by 7:30 tomorrow, Central Time.

Document Preview:

Individual Learning Project Instructions This project will allow you the opportunity to explore a company’s annual report and become familiar with the items that become familiar with the items it contains. Choose a company whose company name begins with the same letter as your last name from Standard & Poor’s Net Advantage. Locate the most recent annual report, either from the Liberty University library’s access to ? HYPERLINK “http://www.netadvantage.standardandpoors.com/login/NASApp/NetAdvantage/NET/login/login.jsp” ?Standard & Poor’s? website, the EDGAR database (www.sec.gov), or the company’s website. Once located, open Individual Learning Project 55 Question Form document and add your answer underneath each question; don’t delete the questions. Questions 1–49 must be answered within Microsoft Word. Your answers for these do not need to be in complete sentences. Questions 50–52 must be answered in Microsoft Excel and your answers must include formulas. Questions 53–55 must be answered with complete sentences and justification within the Word document. Both documents (Word and Excel) must be uploaded into the Assignment link. ?To access the Liberty University Library online resources from off campus: From the Blackboard log-in page, right-hand side “Quicklinks” pull-down menu — choose “Library.” Click log-in button. Off-site access cannot be gained unless the user successfully completes the log-in. This must take you to the “Library Research Portal”; if not, click on “Portal.” Click on the “databases” tab. Click on the “Databases by Letter,” and select the letter “S.” Scroll down until you see “Standard & Poor’s NetAdvantage.” Click on the link and then you may begin your search. Since a company name has to be chosen with the same letter as my last name, CHOOSE A COMPANY NAME THAT STARTS WITH THE LETTER B. If you can’t access the Standard & Poor’s website from Liberty University Library, try using some of the other options as stated above. Please work hard…

argentina partners cvp analysis and price changes 494436

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

3-36. CVP Analysis and Price Changes Argentina Partners is concerned about the possible effects of inflation on its operations. Presently, the company sells 60,000 units for $30 per unit. The variable production costs are $15, and fixed costs amount to $700,000. Production engineers have advised management that they expect unit labor costs to rise by 15 percent and unit materials costs to rise by 10 percent in the coming year. Of the $15 variable costs, 50 percent are from labor and 25 percent are from materials. Variable overhead costs are expected to increase by 20 percent. Sales prices cannot increase more than 10 percent. It is also expected that fixed costs will rise by 5 percent as a result of increased taxes and other miscellaneous fixed charges. The company wishes to maintain the same level of profit in real dollar terms. It is expected that to accomplish this objective, profits must increase by 6 percent during the year. Required a. Compute the volume in units and the dollar sales level necessary to maintain the present profit level, assuming that the maximum price increase is implemented. b. Compute the volume of sales and the dollar sales level necessary to provide the 6 percent increase in profits, assuming that the maximum price increase is implemented. c. If the volume of sales were to remain at 60,000 units, what price increase would be required to attain the 6 percent increase in profits? (Lanen, William. Fundamentals of Cost Accounting, 3rd Edition, 3rd Edition. McGraw-Hill Primis Custom Publishing, Apr-10. p. 111).

Attachments:

article paper 400 words for essaywriter 494437

Please share relevant information (newspaper, magazine, website, etc.) found outside of class related to the objectives covered during class.

Students are required to communicate accounting information. Please write at least 400 words and apply concepts and teachings from the weekly readings. Whenever possible, try to relate the article to real-word applications from your work experiences. Please proofread for grammar and spelling and format your comments consistent with APA guidelines.

Please use

– explanatory and descriptive paragraphs and

– business letters and memoranda

Document Preview:

Week 3 Study Guide: Product Costing Readings and Key Terms Ch. 15 of Accounting Cost accounting Job cost sheet Job order cost system Process cost system Hybrid cost system Ch. 16 Process costing Conversion costs Equivalent units Cost reconciliation sheet Weighted average and FIFO methods Ch. 17 Activity Cost pool Cost driver Just-in-time processing Content Overview Cost accounting systems Companies must know the cost of their products to ensure they are pricing their product appropriately to cover costs and be profitable. Product costs have three elements: direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead. In contrast, companies will have other costs that do not relate to production but to sales and administration. These costs are called period costs because they relate more to the fiscal year than to the products. Period costs are fully expensed in a fiscal year while product costs may be capitalized as inventory. To be profitable in the long-run, a company must cover all its costs—both product and period costs. Job order costing This is used by companies that make products or provide services that are individually unique, such as a custom print order, an accounting job, or custom furniture. A job order costing system will accumulate product costs—direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead—by individual job using a job cost sheet. Process costing This is used by companies that manufacture homogenous products such as petroleum, milk, and mass production automobiles. A process costing system will accumulated product costs—direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead—by process or by department. Hybrid costing Hybrid costing also called operations costing is a combination of job order and process costing used by companies that make products that have some customized and individualized features. Activity-based costing Activity-based costing is a modern method…

Attachments:

ashford university acc 206 week 1 problem 5 494439

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

5. Cash flow information: Direct and indirect methods ?The comparative year-end balance sheets of USA Graphics, Inc., revealed the following activity in the company’s current accounts: 20X8 20X7 Increase / Decrease) Current assets Cash $55,400 $35,200 $20,200 Accounts receivable (net) 83,800 88,000 -4,200 Inventory 243,400 233,800 9,600 Prepaid expenses 25,400 24,200 1,200 Current liabilities Accounts payable $123,600 $140,600 ($17,000) Taxes payable 43,600 49,200 -5,600 Interest payable 9,000 6,400 2,600 Accrued liabilities 38,800 60,400 -21,600 Note payable 44,000 — 44,000 The accounts payable were for the purchase of merchandise. Prepaid expenses and accrued liabilities relate to the firm’s selling and administrative expenses. The company’s condensed income statement follows: USA GRAPHICS INC. Income Statement for the Year Ended December 31, 20X8                   Sales $691,800   Less: Cost of goods sold 223,000   Gross profit $468,800       Less: Selling & administrative expenses $177,000   Depreciation expense 18,000   Interest expense 27,000 222,000       Add: gain on sale of land $246,800     18,800   Income before taxes $265,600   Income taxes 38,300   Net income $227,300                     Other data: Long-term investments were purchased for cash at a cost of $64,200. Cash proceeds from the sale of land totaled $74,200. Store equipment of $34,000 was purchased by signing a short-term note payable. Also, a $140,000 telecommunications system was acquired by issuing 3,000 shares of preferred stock. A long-term note of $42,200 was repaid. Twenty thousand shares of common stock were issued at $5.19 per share. The company paid cash dividends amounting to $125,000. Instructions: Prepare the operating activities section of the company’s statement of cash flows, assuming use of: The direct…

Attachments:

assignment 2 discussion abc analysis 494442

Assignment 2: Discussion ABC Analysis

Review the Decision Case 1 (Harris Systems) located on page 942-943 in you textbook. Answer the four case questions in the Requirements section of the case. In addition, address the following in one to two paragraphs:

  • Compare and contrast ABC costing and traditional costing methods, giving examples.
  • In the assigned case, which system provides a more accurate picture of the cost incurred to produce the jobs?
  • Provide examples of manufacturers in your geographic area and explain which system would be best for them.

Respond to each directive or question in 1 2 paragraphs. Apply current APA standards for writing style to your work.

Document Preview:

Assignment 2: Discussion—ABC Analysis Review the Decision Case 1 (Harris Systems) located on page 942-943 in you textbook. Answer the four case questions in the Requirements section of the case. In addition, address the following in one to two paragraphs: Compare and contrast ABC costing and traditional costing methods, giving examples. In the assigned case, which system provides a more accurate picture of the cost incurred to produce the jobs? Provide examples of manufacturers in your geographic area and explain which system would be best for them. Respond to each directive or question in 1–2 paragraphs. Apply current APA standards for writing style to your work.

Attachments:

assignment 2 discussion cvp analysis 494443

Assignment 2: Discussion CVP Analysis

Review Decision Case 1 (Steve and Linda Hom) starting on page 984 of your text. In your initial post, answer the two case questions:

  1. Compute the annual breakeven number of meals and sales revenue for the restaurant.
  2. Compute the number of meals and the amount of sales revenue needed to earn operating income of $75,600 for the year.

In addition, address the following in one to two paragraphs:

  1. Identify and discuss several qualitative factors that should be considered in the decision process in addition to the quantitative data already computed in the case assignment.
  2. What are the potential benefits of applying CVP analysis to business decision making?
  3. Provide an example of another business scenario that could benefit from CVP analysis and explain how you would apply CVP analysis in the decision-making process.
Document Preview:

Assignment 2: Discussion—CVP Analysis Review Decision Case 1 (Steve and Linda Hom) starting on page 984 of your text. In your initial post, answer the two case questions: Compute the annual breakeven number of meals and sales revenue for the restaurant. Compute the number of meals and the amount of sales revenue needed to earn operating income of $75,600 for the year. In addition, address the following in one to two paragraphs: Identify and discuss several qualitative factors that should be considered in the decision process in addition to the quantitative data already computed in the case assignment. What are the potential benefits of applying CVP analysis to business decision making? Provide an example of another business scenario that could benefit from CVP analysis and explain how you would apply CVP analysis in the decision-making process.

Attachments:

assignment 3 culturally diverse individuals are effective workers 494445

Assignment 3: Culturally Diverse Individuals Are Effective Workers

Suppose you work as a human resource (HR) executive at Total Solutions, Inc., a culturally and geographically diverse organization. A recent government study on human statistics indicates that colleagues who share culturally similar backgrounds perform more efficiently and effectively on the job. These study findings, however, appear contrary to the basic research on the value of diverse workforces. John, the vice president of HR has read extensively about this study. He meets with senior management to discuss if the concept can be implemented at Total Solutions, Inc. The senior management reviews the study and decides to execute the process in one office before a policy decision is made.

John decides that the process should be piloted in the new HR office being set up in Atlanta. He receives the board’s permission to apply the concept in the new office. He needs to relocate five employees from the headquarters in New York to the Atlanta office. John obtains the list of employees based in the New York office. The list has a brief profile of the employees. John asks you to help him analyze the profiles and present your recommendations as to who are the best five employees for the Atlanta assignment.

Present your analysis to John in the form of a two- to three page report in Microsoft Word following APA format. Make sure you provide a clear recommendation of which five employees should be selected for the Atlanta assignment and that you apply the basic concepts of diversity in your selection process. Provide rationale for your selection based on your examination of the evidence and references to at least three authoritative sources from the Argosy library or the Internet. Click here to view the list.

Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M1_A3.doc. For example, if your name is John Smith, your document will be named SmithJ_M1_A3. doc

Attachments:

assignment 3 excel problems 494446

Assignment 3: Excel Problems

At the end of each module, you will apply the module s concepts by completing comprehensive assignments from the textbook.

Complete problems P16A-17B (p. 898), P16A-19B (p. 899), P18-24A (p. 979), P18-26A (p. 980) in your textbook.

Present your analysis of the assigned problems in Excel format. Enter non-numerical responses in the same worksheet using textboxes.

assignment done asap 494447

Needs to be done in an hour and a half

Document Preview:

(10 points) For 2010, Jake’s Dog Supply Manufacturing uses machine-hours as the only overhead cost-allocation base. The accounting records contain the following information: Estimated Actual Manufacturing overhead costs $200,000 $240,000 Machine-hours 40,000 50,000 Using job costing, the 2010 budgeted manufacturing overhead rate is: Using normal costing, the amount of manufacturing overhead costs allocated to jobs during 2010 is: (15 points) Kason, Inc., expects to sell 20,000 pool cues for $24.00 each. Direct materials costs are $4.00, direct manufacturing labor is $8.00, and manufacturing overhead is $1.80 per pool cue. The following inventory levels apply to 2011: Beginning inventory Ending inventory Direct materials 24,000 units 24,000 units Work-in-process inventory 0 units 0 units Finished goods inventory 2,000 units 2,500 units On the 2012 budgeted income statement, what amount will be reported for sales? How many pool cues need to be produced in 2012? On the 2012 budgeted income statement, what amount will be reported for cost of goods sold? (15 points) The Morgan Models company manufacturers replica plastic airplane and motorized vehicle models. During October, the firm’s Assembly Department started production of 60,000 models. During the month, the firm completed 66,000 models, and transferred them to the Finishing Department. The firm ended the month with 22,000 models in ending inventory. There were 28,000 models in beginning inventory. All direct materials costs are added at the beginning of the production cycle and conversion costs are added uniformly throughout the production process. The FIFO method of process costing is used by Morgan. Beginning work in process was 25% complete as to conversion costs, while ending work in process was 50% complete as to conversion costs. Beginning inventory: Direct materials costs $39,200 Conversion costs $30,800 Manufacturing costs added during the…

Attachments:

assignment done asap 2 494448

1. award: 1.00 point 2. award: 1.00 point 3. award: 1.00 point 4. award: 1.00 point 5. award: 1.00 point 6. award: 1.00 point 7. award: 1.

Document Preview:

Assignment Print View Page 1 of 16 award: 1.00 point 1. The concept of tax sufficiency: Suggests the need for tax forecasting ??? Suggests that a government should estimate how taxpayers will respond to changes in the current tax structure ??? Suggests that a government should consider the income and substitution effects when changing tax rates ??? All of the above ??? None of these ??? award: 1.00 point 2. The substitution effect: Predicts that taxpayers will work harder to pay for consumer products when tax rates increase ??? Is one of the effects considered in static forecasting ??? Results in the government collecting more aggregate tax revenue than under the income effect ??? Is typically more descriptive for taxpayers with lower disposable income ??? None of these ??? award: 1.00 point 3. Which of the following federal government actions would make sense if a tax system fails to provide sufficient tax revenue? Issue treasury bonds ??? Cut funding to various federal projects ??? Increase federal spending ??? A and B but not C ??? None of these ??? award: 1.00 point 4. Geronimo files his tax return as a head of household for year 2012. If his taxable income is $72,000, what is his average tax rate (rounded)? 17.56% ??? 14.24% ??? 19.48% ??? 25.00% ??? None of these ??? award: 1.00 point 5. Al believes that SUVs have negative social and environmental effects because of their increased carbon monoxide emissions. He proposes eliminating sales taxes on smaller automobiles in favor of higher sales taxes levied on SUVs. Al performs some calculations and comes to the conclusion that based on the current number of SUVs owned in the U.S. exactly the same amount of total sales tax will be collected under his reformed system. Which of the following concepts explains why Al’s idea may not work? The ability to pay principle ??? Horizontal equity ??? Substitution effect ??? Vertical equity ??? None of these ??? award: 1.00 point …

Attachments:

to assignment expert 494449

SEC 10-K Project. Week 7 – Powerpoint Slide Presentation In Week 7, you will need to prepare a Powerpoint presentation and post it to the SEC Conference set up for that purpose. You will also need to comment on at least one classmate’s presentation. The Powerpoint slides are worth 24 points, and the comment on a classmate’s presentation will be worth 6 points (30 points, 3% of grade) Your Powerpoint Slide Presentation should have a minimum of 6 slides, and not more than 10 slides. The slides should include the following items. Title slide.

Document Preview:

SEC 10-K Project. Week 7 – Powerpoint Slide Presentation In Week 7, you will need to prepare a Powerpoint presentation and post it to the SEC Conference set up for that purpose. You will also need to comment on at least one classmate’s presentation. The Powerpoint slides are worth 24 points, and the comment on a classmate’s presentation will be worth 6 points (30 points, 3% of grade) Your Powerpoint Slide Presentation should have a minimum of 6 slides, and not more than 10 slides. The slides should include the following items. Title slide. Course Name and Number, Instructor’s Name, Assignment Name (Including Name of your Assigned Company), Date, Your Name Introduce your company. Show at least 3 bullets, telling things like company history, type of business, founder. You can also include demographic information, like the geographic markets served in the U.S., number of stores, other countries the company operates in, who the target market is (kids, senior, tweens, male, female). You could also mention if the company has a large online retail presence. Slide 4: Information from the Financial Reports – Income Statement. Tell what total revenues (Sales) were, largest expense (most likely to be Cost of Goods Sold, or Cost of Sales), and Net income. Calculate Profit Margin. That is Net Income/Revenues. This is expressed as a percentage. For instance, NI of $12 million and Revenues of $200 million gives a profit margin of .06, or 6%. Slide 5: Information from the Balance Sheet. Tell what total Assets were. Tell what total Owners’ Equity was. Using the Accounting Equation, Assets = Liabilities + Owners’ Equity, determine what Total Liabilities were. Slide 6: Tell three factual things about your company that you learned that you did not know before you started on the SEC Project. Do not use financial results. Slide 7: Concluding Slide. Tell if you think your company has a bright future or not, and explain why. References Slide. This should be a link to your…

acct help exercise 494396

Please help!

~Accounting~

Document Preview:

1. Magic Manufacturing’s sales slumped badly in 2012. For the first time in its history, it operated at a loss.??The company’s income statement showed the following results from selling 600,000 units of product:?Net sales $2,400,000; total costs and expenses $2,525,800; and net loss $125,800.??Costs and expenses consisted of the amounts shown below:?    Total Variable Fixed Cost of Goods Sold 2,085,300 1,465,600 619,700 Selling Expenses 243,500 74,200 169,300 Administrative Expense 197,000 44,200 152,800    2,525,800 1,584,000 941,800 a) Compute the contribution margin ration.??The Contribution Margin Ratio: _____%???b) Compute the break-even point in dollars for 2012.??The break-even point in dollars: $ _____ —————————————————————————————————————————————– 2. Change the compensation of salespersons from fixed annual salaries totaling $153,200 to total salaries of $59,100 plus a 3% commission on net sales. Compute the contribution margin ratio.  pute the contribution margin ratio.  d badly in 2012. For the first time in its history, it operated at a loss.??The company’s income statement showed the following results from selling 600,000 units of product:?Net sales $2,400,000; total costs and expenses $2,525,800; and net loss $125,800.??Costs and expenses consisted of the amounts shown below:?    Total Variable Fixed Cost of Goods Sold 2,085,300 1,465,600 619,700 Selling Expenses 243,500 74,200 169,300 Administrative Expense 197,000 44,200 152,800    2,525,800 1,584,000 941,800 a) Compute the contribution margin ration.??The Contribution Margin Ratio: _____%???b) Compute the break-even point in dollars for 2012.??The break-even point in dollars: $ _____ —————————————————————————————————————————————– 2. Change the compensation of salespersons from fixed…

Attachments:

acct powerpoint discuss2 494399

please discuss on these presentations.

just a paragraph for each.

thanks.

Document Preview:

Illustration 18-24 Ratio Analysis 11. Payout Ratio Measures the percentage of earnings distributed in the form of cash dividends. Profitability Ratios SO 5 SO 5 Identify and compute ratios used in analyzing a firm’s liquidity, profitability, and solvency. Solvency Ratios Solvency ratios measure the ability of a company to survive over a long period of time. Debt to Total Assets and Times Interest Earned are two ratios that provide information about debt-paying ability. Ratio Analysis Illustration 18-25 Ratio Analysis 12. Debt to Total Assets Ratio Measures the percentage of the total assets that creditors provide. SO 5 Solvency Ratios Illustration 18-26 Ratio Analysis 13. Times Interest Earned Provides an indication of the company’s ability to meet interest payments as they come due. SO 5 Solvency Ratios Illustration 18-27 Ratio Analysis SO 5 Summary of Ratios Illustration 18-27 Summary of Ratios SO 5 SO 6 Understand the concept of earning power, and how irregular items are presented. Earning power means the normal level of income to be obtained in the future. “Irregular” items are separately identified on the income statement. Two types are: Discontinued operations. Extraordinary items. “Irregular” items are reported net of income taxes. Earning Power and Irregular Items Disposal of a significant component of a business. Report the income (loss) from discontinued operations in two parts: income (loss) from operations (net of tax) and gain (loss) on disposal (net of tax). SO 6 Understand the concept of earning power, and how irregular items are presented. Earning Power and Irregular Items Discontinued Operations Illustration: During 2012 BD Inc. has income before income taxes of $79,000,000. During 2012, BD discontinued and sold its unprofitable chemical division. The loss in 2012 from chemical operations (net of $135,000 taxes) was $315,000. The loss on disposal of the chemical division (net of $81,000 taxes) was $189,000. Assuming a 30% tax rate on…

acct powerpoint project 494400

help with this project.

please read instructions carefully.

i will need the same tutor to

complete the remaining parts.

thanks.

Document Preview:

Boston Beer Company – by Michael J. Motes, CPA The following are the six years of selected data that will be used in reviewing Boston Beer Company trends: Boston Beer Co. Selected Financial Data Dollars in thousands 2011 2010 2009 2008 2007 2006 Net Sales $513,000 $463,798 $415,053 $398,400 $341,647 $285,431 Cost of Goods Sold 228,433 207,471 201,235 214,513 152,288 121,155 Operating Expenses: Advertising & Selling Expenses $157,261 $135,737 $121,560 $132,901 $124,457 $113,669 General & Admin Expenses 43,485 39,112 36,938 34,988 24,574 22,657 Other (19,834) 300 1,049 1,936 3,443 0 Total Operating Expenses 180,912 175,149 159,547 169,825 152,474 136,326 Income form Operations $103,655 $81,178 $54,271 $14,062 $36,885 $27,950 Other Revenue(Expenses) (155) (70) 96 1,778 4,759 3,816 Income Taxes 37,441 30,966 23,249 7,752 19,153 13,574 Net Income $66,059 $50,142 $31,118 $8,088 $22,491 $18,192 (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 3) (Note 3) Note 1: 2011 Annual Report, 23, 36, 37, 39 & 47 Note 2: 2009 Annual Report, 39, 40 & 51 Note 3: 2007 Annual Report, 37, 38 & 48 Boston Beer Company – by Michael J. Motes, CPA Boston Beer Co. Selected Financial Data Dollars in thousands 2011 2010 2009 2008 2007 2006 Current Assets: $125,723 $112,004 $113,030 $68,854 $135,793 $120,562 Plant, Property & Equipment (net) 143,586 142,889 147,021 147,920 46,198 30,699 Other Assets 1,802 2,260 1,508 1,606 12,487 1,837 Intangible Assets 1,377 1,377 1,377 1,377 1,377 1,377 Total Assets $272,488 $258,530 $262,936 $219,757 $195,855 $154,475 Current Liabilities $67,049 $72,199 $73,786 $67,057 $58,057 $40,870 Long Term Liabilities 20,694 20,743 15,995 12,672 4,210 5,016 Total Liabilities $87,743 $92,942 $89,781 $79,729 $62,267 $45,886 Stockholders’ Equity 184,745 165,588 173,155 140,028 133,588 108,589 Total Liabilities & Equity $272,488 $258,530 $262,936 $219,757 $195,855 $154,475 (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 2) (Note 3) (Note 3) Note 1: 2011 Annual Report, 23, 36, 37, 39 & 47 Note 2:…

acct wk6 discussions 494403

please reply to these posts.

do you agree, disagree, why or why not?

1 or 2 short paragraphs for each.

thanks!

Document Preview:

Student’s discussions: First post:  Budgeting in a sense is a way of maximizing profits or income.  It also allows a company to properly distribute it’s resources to optimize efficiency in the work place no matter what department it involves.  As simple as it may seem, there are many varibles that can greatly affect the profitable outcome, such as R&D, Staff size, business location, or whether or not it’s a manufacturing company, service enterprise etc.   Second post: Ever since watching the Southwest Airlines video in our chapter resources, it really amazed me how profitable Southwest remained even after the board decided to keep the free bags policy.  This approach may have been thought out to be risky, but in retrospect, it has been known that consumers go after the best deal possible anyway. As a frequent flyer myself, would love to see free bags (besides taking a military hop).  This brings up another airline company that I am really familiar with in which we;ve been using a lot during our travels here in Germany. Have you ever heard of RYAN AIR? It’s probably the best CHEAPEST airline company in the world.  With proper sacrifices, such as limiting your baggage size and not caring about driving a little ways away from a MAIN airport.  The flights are so cheap, for example. A flight from Munich to Rome round trip, cost 60 Euro.  Can you believe that?   Like Southwest, Ryan Air has found a way to maximize profits while maintaing a full plane, and charging the bare minimum.  In terms of why retailers pay more for cargo, it’s simple.  Without this resource, they would be dead in the water. Especially if their products and/or materials are coming from overseas.   On top of that, it’s up to the retailer to have solid advertising and acreative budget that makes the shipping process worthwhile to keep the cycle of manufacturing and selling at peak efficiency. ls here in Germany. Have you ever heard of RYAN AIR? It’s probably the best CHEAPEST…

Attachments:

acct wk7 conf posts 494404

please post your thoughts on these discussions

just 1 short paragraph for each.

thanks!

🙂

Document Preview:

Accounting Conference – Flexible budgets/Total materials variance —————————————————————————————————————————————— Student’s posts: First post: The great thing about budgetary control, especially in a high profile business, is that it allows them to maximize their profits and allow their staff to maximize their resources.  Although the use static budget reports may suffice in most small businesses that only utilize only one level of activity, flexible budget reports are much more applicatble to real world business senarios that consist of multiple sources of revenue and have many levels of costs.  As most businesses utilize several different levels of activity (lighting, cooks, maid services, doormen etc.) the usefullness of this report allows us to better understand the overall performance of the management staff and their capabilities as well as their inabilities which are represented in a mathematical manner.   Second post:  Whether static or flexible budget reports are used, the importance of using these tools to seek out the strengths and weaknesses of department management are essentiall to providing consumers with what they want while maximizing revenue.  In addition to budget reports, Managment by exception is the link between actual and planned objectives, and simply put, sifts out any potential problem areas.  Like many business there is always that slight chance of mis-reporting revenues to make your sales look more appealing to stock holders.  In turn, Responsibility Accounting takes into incorporates all accumulating and reporting costs and ensures the managers performance is up to par based on budget data produced.  Based on personnal experience in the matter, a successfull management team relies significantly on their employees to ensure proper order and quality control is being implimented in every stage of production.  Without this, the amount of…

Attachments:

acct wk8 conf 494405

i need help with this

acct exericse.

please see attached.

thanks!

Document Preview:

Class, The following demo problems will be used to go over the learning objectives for the Time Value of Money & effective interest method for amortization of bond premium. You will need to have tables found in Appendix D of the textbook. (D4 & D6) In the video I mention pages 691 & 692. Those tables only go up to 10 periods and these demo problems need a 20 period set of tables. Please enjoy the attached video. Thanks, Michael J.   Demo #1: Calculate market price of a bond.   Determine the market price of a $200,000, ten-year, 10% (pays interest semiannually) bond issue sold to yield an effective rate of 12%.     Demo #2: Calculate market price of a bond. On January 1, 2007 Company A issued five-year bonds with a face value of $400,000 and a stated interest rate of 12% payable semiannually on July 1 and January 1. The bonds were sold to yield 10%. Calculate the issue price of the bonds.     Demo #3: Bond issue price and premium amortization.   On January 1, 2007, Company B issued ten-year bonds with a face value of $1,000,000 and a stated interest rate of 10%, payable semiannually on June 30 and December 31. The bonds were sold to yield 12%.   Instructions (a) Calculate the issue price of the bonds. (b) Assume that the issue price was $884,000. Prepare the amortization table for 2007, assuming that amortization is recorded on interest payment dates. h a face value of $1,000,000 and a stated interest rate of 10%, payable semiannually on June 30 and December 31. The bonds were sold to yield 12%.   Instructions (a) Calculate the issue price of the bonds. (b) Assume that the issue price was $884,000. Prepare the amortization table for 2007, assuming that amortization is recorded on interest payment dates. riod set of tables. Please enjoy the attached video. Thanks, Michael J.   Demo #1: Calculate market price of a bond.   Determine the market price of a $200,000, ten-year, 10% (pays interest semiannually)…

acg2071 final exam part 1 494407

ACG2071 Final Exam Part 1

Document Preview:

Problem 1. CrystalCompanymanufacturestwomodelsofmicrocassetterecorders,VCH andMTV.Based onthe followingproductiondataforAprilofthecurrentyear,prepareaproductionbudgetforApril. VCH2,800 6,900 MTV4,200 5,250 Estimatedinventory(units),April1Desiredinventory(units),April30Expectedsalesvolume (units):Easternzone MidwestzoneWesternzone 12,960 19,800 9,840 12,500 19,000 14,500 2. TheSvelteJeansCompanyproducestwodifferenttypesofjeans.Oneiscalledthe”SimpleLife”andtheotheriscalledthe”FancyLife”.Thecompanysalesbudgetestimatesthat350,000oftheSimpleLifeJeansand200,000oftheFancyLifewillbe sold during20xx.TheProductionBudgetrequires353,500unitsofSimpleLifejeansand196,000FancyLifejeansbemanufactured.The SimpleLifejeansrequire3yardsofdenimmaterial,azipper,and25yardsofthread.TheFancyLifejeansrequire4.5yardsofdenimmaterial,azipper,and40yardsofthread.Eachyardofdenimmaterialcosts$3.25,thezippercosts $.75each,andthethreadis$.01peryard.Thereisenoughmaterialtomake2,000jeansofeachtypeatthebeginningoftheyear. Thedesiredamountofmaterialsleftinendinginventoryistohaveenoughtomanufacture3,500jeansofeachtype.PrepareaDirectMaterialsPurchasesBudget. 3. The treasurer of Systems Company has accumulated thefollowingbudgetinformationforthefirsttwo months ofthecomingyear: March $450,000290,000 41,400 250,000 April $520,000350,000 46,400 Sales.Manufacturingcosts SellingandadministrativeexpensesCapitaladditions The companyexpectstosellabout35%ofitsmerchandiseforcash.Ofsalesonaccount,80%areexpectedtobecollectedinfull inthemonthofthesaleandtheremainderinthemonthfollowingthesale.One-fourthofthemanufacturingcostsareexpectedtobepaidinthemonthinwhichtheyareincurredandtheother three-fourthsinthefollowingmonth.Depreciation,insurance,andproperty taxesrepresent$6,400oftheprobable monthlysellingandadministrativeexpenses.InsuranceispaidinFebruaryanda$40,000installmentonincometaxesisexpectedtobepaidinApril.Ofthe remainderofthesellingandadministrativeexpenses,one-half…

Attachments:

the acme company is undergoing a reorganization to improve its financial structure a 494408

Identify the applicable accounting convention for each of the following business scenarios. More than one convention may apply to each scenario. Please explain your choices for each scenario.

Scenario 1: The Acme Company is undergoing a reorganization to improve its financial structure. As part of this process, the company is considering lowering its expense calculations to improve the bottom line net income.

Scenario 2: Regal Enterprises has purchased $45,000 worth new equipment for use in its manufacturing operations and would like to write off the cost of this equipment in just a couple of years, instead of the usual 10 years for this equipment type. The company’s president fears that the economic conditions in its industry will worsen and cause the company to sell the equipment sooner than expected.

Scenario 3: Bozrah Industries, a small independent retailer, wants to change its accounting system from cash-based to accrual-based, and is concerned about how this change will affect the recording of sales and expenses.

Scenario 4: Randolph, Inc., has experienced major turnover in its accounting department, and the new head of accounting has been going through the current records of transactions. A couple of those transactions appear problematic. The first contains an error of $10,000 that the previous accountant decided was not large enough to adjust before the financial statements were prepared. This error would understate income and make the company look more profitable than it actually is.

Scenario 5: The Morrison Company receives much of its revenue from those customers who buy or rent furniture and appliances on the installment plan. Because the company uses an accrual-based accounting system, revenue is recognized at the point of sale, even though cash comes in on a monthly basis from customers. Lately, the company’s accountant is questioning the use of the accrual basis for recognizing revenue, because several customers have defaulted on their contracts, causing problems in the accounting system.

Scenario 6: Charter Communications has recently found itself at the wrong end of multiple lawsuits for failure to provide necessary services according to their contractual obligations. Senior management does not want to disclose the potential liability of these lawsuits on its financial statements.

Attachments:

act300 portfolio project kelly consulting practice set 494410

ACT300Portfolio Project:KellyConsultingPracticeSet

You are given thefollowinginformation:

Post closing trialbalancefor April 30, 2008

Transactions for themonthofMay2008and adjustingentriesforMay2008

The followingcan be download fromtheModule8 Assignment pageortheCourse Information page

1.Journal page tocopyanduse

2.Ledger pagetocopy and use

3.Portfolio Project ExcelSpreadsheet templatewith accountspre-entered

See Attachment

activity based costing help 494411

Please see attached for description. Original and quality work only. No word minimum.

Document Preview:

1) A consulting company that provides software and services relating to business intelligence and analytics has a library of customer success stories on its website at ? HYPERLINK “http://www.sas.com/success/indexByTopic.html/” ?http://www.sas.com/success/indexByTopic.html#1000.1001.0000?. Select and read one of the success stories relating to Activity-Based Management. Summarize the success story, and relate the ideas of the article to what you have learned this week in this course. 2) The State of Rhode Island publishes its budget and the supporting information at ? HYPERLINK “http://www.budget.state.ri.us/index.htm” ?www.budget.state.ri.us/index.htm?. Access the budget and answer the following: What are the duties of the budget office? (Hint: Use the Primer link.) What are the six governmental functions listed in the budget? What are the major sources of Rhode Island’s revenues? What is the accounting basis used in the preparation of the budget? (Hint: Use the Primer link and scroll down until you see the Budget Basis section.) The budget mentions four categories of program performance measures. List them, and briefly describe how they are used in Rhode Island. (Hint: Use the Primer link and scroll down until you see the Program Performance Measures section.) What did you learn from reviewing the most recent budget of the State of Rhode Island? What do you think the biggest challenges are when it comes to preparing their budget? Summary of notes from readings “activity based costing” Traditional cost accounting methods suffer from several defects that can result in distorted costs for decision-making purposes. All manufacturing costs—even those that are not caused by any specific product—are allocated to products. Nonmanufacturing costs that are caused by products are not assigned to products. And finally, traditional methods tend to place too much reliance on unit-level allocation bases such as direct labor and machine-hours. This results in overcosting…

Attachments:

activity amp spending variance kgv blood bank securidoor corporation toque cooking a 494412

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

4. value: 2.00 points The KGV Blood Bank, a private charity partly supported by government grants, is located on the Caribbean island of St. Lucia. The blood bank has just finished its operations for September, which was a particularly busy month due to a powerful hurricane that hit neighboring islands causing many injuries. The hurricane largely bypassed St. Lucia, but residents of St. Lucia willingly donated their blood to help people on other islands. As a consequence, the blood bank collected and processed 30% more blood than had been originally planned for the month. A report prepared by a government official comparing actual costs to budgeted costs for the blood bank is given below. (The currency on St. Lucia is the East Caribbean dollar.) Continued support from the government depends on the blood bank’s ability to demonstrate control over its costs. KGV Blood Bank Cost Control Report For the Month Ended September 30 Planning Budget Actual Results Variances Liters of blood collected 600 780 Medical supplies $ 7,110 $ 9,252 $ 2,142 U Lab tests 8,610 10,782 2,172 U Equipment depreciation 1,900 2,100 200 U Rent 1,500 1,500 0 Utilities 300 324 24 U Administration 14,310 14,575 265 U Total expense $ 33,730 $ 38,533 $ 4,803 U The managing director of the blood bank was very unhappy with this report, claiming that his costs were higher than expected due to the emergency on the neighboring islands. He also pointed out that the additional costs had been fully covered by payments from grateful recipients on the other islands. The government official who prepared the report countered that all of the figures had been submitted by the blood bank to the government; he was just pointing out that actual costs were a lot higher than promised in the budget. The following cost formulas were used to construct the planning budget: Medical supplies $11.85q Lab tests $14.35q Equipment…

additional materials for mother 494414

Here are the additional materials.

Document Preview:

PRINTED BY: mrmcbride1@gmail.com. Printing is for personal, private use only. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted without publisher’s prior permission. Violators will be prosecuted. ? Uniform Commercial Code ? United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods ? American Arbitration Association standards ? ISO 9000 quality standards ? State, local, and federal laws ? Market or industry standards 8. Examine alternatives: Prepare in advance your alternatives to the important negotiation issues or objectives. Successful negotiators know their best-case, most-likely, and worst-case (walk-away) alternatives for all major objectives. (See Appendix A Form 9.) 9. Select your strategy, tactics, and countertactics: Negotiation strategies provide the overall framework that will guide how you conduct your negotiation. Negotiation strategies can be divided into two types: win-lose and win-win. Figure 9-3 Importance of Ts and Cs The win-lose negotiation strategy is about winning today, despite the potential long-term effect tomorrow and beyond. Common characteristics of the win-lose strategy include concealing one’s own position and interests, discovering the other party’s position and interests, weakening the other party’s resolve, and causing the other party to modify its position or accept your position on all key issues. Although the win-lose negotiation strategy is not a politically correct approach, it is a commonly used negotiation strategy worldwide. The win-win negotiation strategy is about creative joint problem solving, which develops long-term successful business relationships. The win-win negotiation strategy, however, may sometimes be difficult to accomplish. Among the obstacles to developing the win-win business environment are previous adverse buyer-seller relations, lack of training in joint problem solving and conflict resolution, and complex and highly regulated contracting procedures in some organizations, especially…

Attachments:

additional template mission statement for neel 494415

This is part of the Business Plan and Budget project that needs to be included. Have a handshake to NEEL.

Document Preview:

Mission Statement Student Name ACC 302: Section Number Instructor’s Name Due Date Mission Statement Name of the company: _____________________ Vision: Enter your Company’s Vision using bullet points. Core Competencies: Enter your Company’s Core Competencies using bullet points. Pretzel Recipe: (Recipe for one-dozen featured pretzels) Description of Primary Customers: Identify and describe your primary customers using bullet points. Short Answer Questions: Exhibit 1 on the ACC 302 Final Project Handout presents your expenses in the categories of raw materials, manufacturing overhead, and operating expenses. What factors make each of the categories different? Also, list the types of cost that your company will classify as overhead. Exhibit 1 on the ACC 302 Final Project Handout also indicates which costs are fixed and which costs are variable. For each expense listed, indicate why it would be categorized as fixed or variable. What is sensitivity analysis? How does the use of spreadsheets aid in the application of sensitivity analysis? ACC 302 Mission Statement 2 04/13/11 ACC 302 Mission Statement 1 04/13/11?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

adminstrative mangement homework lt lt 494418

i want to be done in 3 hours ,, anyone has free time to do it

Document Preview:

Worksheets 4 No.1 Full name: Assembly line No. 38 Standard number of full time workers: 10 (Factory utilization rate is 75%) Maximum number of full time workers: 12 (Factory utilization rate is 90%) Maximum number of part-time (seasonal) workers: 10 Wage ratio: A full time/A part time = 1/5 (This means cost of labor of a full time employee will be equal to the costs of 5 part timers) Highest demand (June to August) Lowest demand (October to March) Preparation demand for the season (April to May) Forecast of the number of employees needed each month Month Full time Part time Notes Jan Feb Mar Apr May June July Aug Sept Oct Nov Dec Worksheets 4 No.2 Full name: Employee Requisition Blank for the Job Application Blank (Seven-Eleven) 1: Qualification (Required Info for the application) 2: Items for written tests Worksheets 4 No.3     This position calls for people who are adept at both assisting and leading. In the role of assistant, you’ll support the Store Manager in all aspects of the store’s operation – a responsibility you’ll prepare for through a training sequence that teaches you 7-Eleven’s Retailer Initiative strategy, Retail Information System, inventory management and ordering technology. The leadership part of the job begins after this training – when you will forecast, order, stock and merchandise product; reconcile store paperwork; set the tone for courteous customer service; and share management of the store staff.  What Will You Do? Forecast, order, stock and merchandise product Ensure prompt reconciliation of store paperwork Ensure prompt, efficient and courteous customer service  Maintain a clean, customer friendly environment Assist with management of store staff Getting There We believe great training is the foundation for exceptional performance. The Assistant Store Manager training program teaches you the retail business using our state-of-the-art Retail Information System and Career Path training…

Attachments:

adminstrative mangement homework 494419

anyone have free time do this assighment ,, i nees it in 13 hours

Document Preview:

Worksheets 4 No.1 Full name: Assembly line No. 38 Standard number of full time workers: 10 (Factory utilization rate is 75%) Maximum number of full time workers: 12 (Factory utilization rate is 90%) Maximum number of part-time (seasonal) workers: 10 Wage ratio: A full time/A part time = 1/5 (This means cost of labor of a full time employee will be equal to the costs of 5 part timers) Highest demand (June to August) Lowest demand (October to March) Preparation demand for the season (April to May) Forecast of the number of employees needed each month Month Full time Part time Notes Jan Feb Mar Apr May June July Aug Sept Oct Nov Dec Worksheets 4 No.2 Full name: Employee Requisition Blank for the Job Application Blank (Seven-Eleven) 1: Qualification (Required Info for the application) 2: Items for written tests Worksheets 4 No.3     This position calls for people who are adept at both assisting and leading. In the role of assistant, you’ll support the Store Manager in all aspects of the store’s operation – a responsibility you’ll prepare for through a training sequence that teaches you 7-Eleven’s Retailer Initiative strategy, Retail Information System, inventory management and ordering technology. The leadership part of the job begins after this training – when you will forecast, order, stock and merchandise product; reconcile store paperwork; set the tone for courteous customer service; and share management of the store staff.  What Will You Do? Forecast, order, stock and merchandise product Ensure prompt reconciliation of store paperwork Ensure prompt, efficient and courteous customer service  Maintain a clean, customer friendly environment Assist with management of store staff Getting There We believe great training is the foundation for exceptional performance. The Assistant Store Manager training program teaches you the retail business using our state-of-the-art Retail Information System and Career Path training…

Attachments:

advanced accounting homework and take home exam packets due monday 6pm 494420

There is one exam from Session I that I need completed ASAP. There is a lot of writing on it and graphing that needs to be done. Then, there is one exam from Session II which has some writing on it to help with how the problems should be set up. Along with that there is one question on my homework circled as Situation 9 which I started but need to complete. I also have a packet listed as Homework from Session II which has tons of writing on it. If you could put together what I have started and complete it that would be a miracle for me.The only ones that need to be done are the ones which are circled. Lastly, theres my Session III stuff. There’s one test and one homework packet. Everything needs to be completed by Monday 6pm.

Attachments:

acct help 494372

please help!!! and use the format style asked at the bottom!!!

the accounting records of Helen’s Clock Shop reflected following balances as of January 1, 2011.

cash $50,800
beginning inventory 56,000 (200 units @ $280)
common stock 43,000
Retained earnings 63,800

the following five transactions occurred in 2011:

1. first purchase (cash) 120 units @ $300
2. second purchase (cash) 140 units @ $330
3. sales (all cash) 400 units @ $450
4. paid $ 30,000 cash for salaries expense.
5. paid cash for income tax at the rate of 25 percent of income before taxes.

1. fifo cost flow, 2. lifo cost flow, 3. weighted average

2.and to prepare the 2012 income statement, balance sheet and statement of cash flows under FIFO, LIFO, and Weighted average

Attachments:

acct help 494373

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Cash balance Borrowings Repayments Credit Sales SCHEDULE FOR EXPECTED PAYMENTS FOR PURCHASE OF INVENTORY Inventory purchases Total Cash Collections Total Payments for Inventory Purchases Cash Budget Add: Receipts Total receipts Total Available Cash Less: Disbursements Total disbursements Excess (deficiency of available cash over disbursements) Financing Ending cash balance Collections from customers Sale of plant assets Sale of new common stock Cash sales Operating expenses Selling and administrative expenses Dividends Equipmen

Document Preview:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Cash balance Borrowings Repayments Credit Sales SCHEDULE FOR EXPECTED PAYMENTS FOR PURCHASE OF INVENTORY Inventory purchases Total Cash Collections Total Payments for Inventory Purchases Cash Budget Add: Receipts Total receipts Total Available Cash Less: Disbursements Total disbursements Excess (deficiency of available cash over disbursements) Financing Ending cash balance Collections from customers Sale of plant assets Sale of new common stock Cash sales Operating expenses Selling and administrative expenses Dividends Equipment purchase Purchases of inventory 1) 2) 3) What are the five basic principles of cash management that a company can follow in order to improve its chances of having adequate cash? May June April For the Two Months of May and June LBJ Company CASE STUDY 3—Cash Budget Template SCHEDULE OF EXPECTED CASH COLLECTIONS FROM CUSTOMERS Please answer the three qualitative questions on the next tab called Qualitative Questions. What are the three sections of a cash budget, and what is included in each section? Why is a cash budget so vital to a company? ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

acct hw 494374

#9 #8 #6 & 7 #4 & 5 #3 #1 & 2 Answers Ratio a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m.

Document Preview:

#9 #8 #6 & 7 #4 & 5 #3 #1 & 2 Answers Ratio a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. Current Ratio Acid-test (quick ratio) Receivables Turnover Inventory Turnover Profit Margin Asset Turnover Return on Assets Return on Common Stockholders’ Equity Price-Earnings Ratio Payout Ratio Debt to Total Assets Ratio Times Interest Earned Ratio Problem #1 Problem #2 Problem #4 Date Accounts Debit Credit (a) Year Total Preferred Common (b) Noncash Investing and Financing Activities (if any) Problem #5 (b) Debit Credit Earnings per Share Statement of Cash Flows Cash Flows from (for) Operating Activities Net Cash from (for) Operating Activities Cash Flows from (for) Investing Activities Net Cash from (for) Investing Activities Cash Flows from (for) Financing Activities Accounts Note: Market Calculation for #6 (b) Net Cash from (for) Financing Activities Computations $ x.xx xx.xxx% xx.xxx% xx.xxx% xx.xxx xx.xxx Sample Formatting Problem #6 (a) Problem #6 (b) Problem #7 Momma Corporation xx.xxx Cost Shares Problem #5 (a) Totals Choose from the account titles below (not all accounts will be used) Cash Dividends Payable Bonds Payable Cash Common Stock Common Stock Dividends Distributable Discount on Bonds Payable Cash Dividends Dividend Revenue Gain on Retirement of Bonds Gain on Sale of Stock Investments Interest Expense Interest Payable Land Loss on Retirement of Bonds Loss on Sale of Stock Investments Market Adjustment – Available for Sale Market Adjustment – Trading Organization Expense Paid-in Capital from Treasury Stock Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value Premium on Bonds Payable Retained Earnings Stock Investment Revenue Stock Dividends Stock Investments Treasury Stock Unrealized Gain – Income Unrealized Gain – Equity Unrealized Loss – Income Unrealized Loss – Equity For the Year Ended December 31,…

acct hw already got help 494375

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 ACCOUNTING 101A SECTION 10915 FALL SEMESTER 2013 1. 3 PTS. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 4 PTS. 10. 6 PTS. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. a. b. c. What are the two “timing differences” which occur when preparing a bank reconciliation? from $15,000 to $18,000. In the other income secion of the income statement was a gain on the sale of land in the amount of $30,000. A company shows a net income for 2012 of $100,000.

Document Preview:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 ACCOUNTING 101A SECTION 10915 FALL SEMESTER 2013 1. 3 PTS. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 4 PTS. 10. 6 PTS. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. a. b. c. What are the two “timing differences” which occur when preparing a bank reconciliation? from $15,000 to $18,000. In the other income secion of the income statement was a gain on the sale of land in the amount of $30,000. A company shows a net income for 2012 of $100,000. Included in its operating expenses is depreciation on equipment in the 5 PTS. FINAL EXAMINATION-CHAPTERS 7-13 amount of $8,000. During the year its accounts receivable balance went from $25,000 to $30,000. Its accounts payable balance went its credit sales for 2012? $_____________________________________________________ Indicate how each of the following situations would be handled when preparing a bank reconcilation? ______ An NSF check from a customer ______ A check written for $4,500 which has not yet been paid by the bank ______ A deposit in transit in the amount of $2,000 It takes a company on average 45 days to collect its accounts receivable. Based on this what would be the company’s accounts receivable turnover? Which depreciation method presented in Chapter 9 is not based on the “passage of time?” Name two types of payroll taxes which employers’ must pay and treat as expenses? d. e. f. g. h. i. j. Indicate what each of the following financial analyis ratios/calculations measures? On 1-1-12 a company issued $500,000 of bonds at a price of 97. The bonds pay interest semiannually on 1-1 and 7-1 and will mature on 12-31-2022. A company sold $250,000 of merchandise to customers on account in 2012. It began the year with $20,000 in accounts receivable and it ended the Price Earnings Ratio equals _______________________________ divided by EPS was placed in service on 7-1-12 and has a $5,000 salvage value…

Attachments:

acct hw need calculations shown and proper journal entries 494376

need all calculations shown and proper journal entries

Document Preview:

Chapter 11 Quick Study 11-16 (10 minutes) Total stockholders’ equity Less equity attributable to preferred shares: Call price (10,000 shares x $30) Equity applicable to common shares Book value of common shares ($620,000/75,000 shares) PROBLEM SET A Problem 11-1A (30 minutes) Part 1 a. To record sale of 5,000 shares of $25 par value common stock for $30 per share. b. To record issuance of 2,500 shares of $25 par value common stock to the company’s promoters for their efforts in organizing the company when the market value is $30 per share. c. To record acquisition of assets and liabilities by issuing 1,000 shares of $25 par value common stock at $40 per share. d. To record sale of 1,500 shares of $25 par value common stock for $40 per share. Part 2 Number of outstanding shares Issued in (a) Issued in (b) Issued in (c) Issued in (d) Total Part 3 Minimum legal capital = Part 4 Total contributed capital from common stockholders From transaction (a) From transaction (b) From transaction (c) From transaction (d) Total contributed capital Part 5 Book value per common share Total stockholders’ equity (given) Outstanding shares (from Part 2) Book value per common share Calculations: Problem 11-2A (60 minutes) Part 1 You can place your calculations in the description line Jan. 1 Treasury Stock, Common Cash Jan. 5 Retained Earnings Common Dividend Payable Feb. 28 Common Dividend Payable Cash July 6 Cash* Treasury Stock, Common** Aug. 22 Cash* Paid-In Capital, Treasury Stock Retained Earnings Treasury Stock, Common** Sept. 5 Retained Earnings Common Dividend Payable Oct. 28 Common Dividend Payable Cash Dec. 31 Income Summary Retained…

acct multiple choice 494377

Multiple Choice Question 119 Ann Ellis’s regular rate of pay is $15 per hour with one and one-half times her regular rate for any hours which exceed 40 hours per week. She worked 48 hours last week. Therefore, her gross wages were $780. $720. $1,080. $600. Multiple Choice Question 134 The following totals for the month of June were taken from the payroll register of Ford Company.

Document Preview:

Multiple Choice Question 119????Ann Ellis’s regular rate of pay is $15 per hour with one and one-half times her regular rate for any hours which exceed 40 hours per week. She worked 48 hours last week. Therefore, her gross wages were? ?$780.?? ?$720.?? ?$1,080.?? ?$600.?? ?? Multiple Choice Question 134????The following totals for the month of June were taken from the payroll register of Ford Company. Salaries and wages??$40,000??FICA taxes withheld??3,066??Income taxes withheld??8,800??Medical insurance deductions??1,600??Federal unemployment taxes??320??State unemployment taxes??2,000???The journal entry to record the monthly payroll on June 30 would include a? ?debit to Salaries and Wages Payable for $40,000.?? ?debit to Salaries and Wages Expense for $40,000.?? ?debit to Salaries Expense for $26,534.?? ?credit to Salaries and Wages Payable for $40,000.?? ?? Multiple Choice Question 140????Which of the following payroll taxes are usually filed and remitted annually?? ?State unemployment taxes?? ?Federal and state unemployment taxes?? ?Federal unemployment taxes?? ?FICA taxes?? ?? Multiple Choice Question 155????Nick Dent, an employee of Spottswood Company, has gross earnings for the month of October of $4,000. FICA taxes are 8% of gross earnings, federal income taxes amount to $635 for the month, state income taxes are 2% of gross earnings, and Nick authorizes voluntary deductions of $10 per month to the United Fund. What is the net pay for Nick Dent?? ?$2,955?? ?$2,965?? ?$2,968?? ?$2,961?? ?? Multiple Choice Question 41????The individual assets invested by a partner in a partnership ?are jointly owned by all partners.?? ?revert back to that partner if the partnership liquidates.?? ?determine the scope of authority of that partner.?? ?determine that partner’s share of net income or loss for the year.???? Multiple Choice Question 45????The partnership agreement should include each of the following except the ?date of the partnership inception.?? ?principal…

Attachments:

acct project fall 2013 494378

SECOND (GROUP) PROJECT REQUIRED: This project is worth 20 points. It is an opportunity to put together some of the things you have learned in different parts of this course. Read the case and answer the requirements below. For this project you may work together in groups of up to 3 people. Group members may come from any of professor Milbrath’s or Professor Li’ sections of Acct. 2332. The names, usernames and Peoplesoft numbers of the group members must be written clearly below. If there is only one member in the group you should leave the rows for the second and third member below blank.

Document Preview:

SECOND (GROUP) PROJECT REQUIRED: This project is worth 20 points. It is an opportunity to put together some of the things you have learned in different parts of this course. Read the case and answer the requirements below. For this project you may work together in groups of up to 3 people. Group members may come from any of professor Milbrath’s or Professor Li’ sections of Acct. 2332. The names, usernames and Peoplesoft numbers of the group members must be written clearly below. If there is only one member in the group you should leave the rows for the second and third member below blank. If there are two members you should leave just the third row blank. To receive credit you must write full answers, using the templates provided for each requirement We must ask you to handwrite your answers and show any calculations you feel are needed. Hand your project in to the accounting lab 133MH during lab hours on or before Thursday November 21 at 7 PM. 1) GROUP MEMBERS: NAME Blackboard Username Peoplesoft Number YOUR RECEIPT NUMBER _______________(lab assistants will give you this) PROJECT FACTS Manny Fold owns a factory that specializes in making titanium valves for high performance engines on a just in time basis. Thus, Manny produces what he sells in a particular month. There are no inventories of finished goods or work in process. However, Manny does require that an inventory of direct raw materials equal to 16% of next month’s production requirement be available at the end of each month. To build his business and gain new customers Manny has extended generous credit terms to his customers. While Manny is confident about the fundamentals of his business, he is concerned about the possible income and cash flow implications. The variable costs of producing a valve are budgeted at $6.60 per valve (3/4 pound of titanium alloy costing $8.80 per pound for materials), $2.50 per valve for direct labor, and $5.90 per valve…

Attachments:

acct quiz help 494379

i need help with two quizzes in accounting..

Part 1 is in paper

PART 2 IS ON WILEYPLUS.

thanks!

Document Preview:

Name: Acct 221.ol3.mj Quiz 1 Part 1 Online WebTycho Part 1 = Stop: Part 2 = Start: Total = Time: Include new pages for your solution to part 1 of quiz 1. Number each additional page. Name: Acct 221.ol3.mj Quiz 1 Part 1 Online WebTycho Part 1 = Stop: Part 2 = Start: Total = Time: Include new pages for your solution to part 1 of quiz 1. Number each additional page. ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

acct tax case 494380

Document Preview:

Example Case: Ozzie and Sherrie Johnson lived in Bishop, California. The Johnson’s 15 year old son, Jack, suffered from illegal drug addiction and experienced both physical problems associated with the addiction and also behavioral problems. In 2012, without the consultation of a psychiatrist or psychologist, the Johnson’s sent Jack to a therapeutic boarding school, the Lonely Bridge School, in Idaho. Lonely Bridge was well known as a school where celebrities and the wealthy could send their “troubled” teens for 365 days a year for therapy and a high school education and had a strong reputation nationally. The Johnson’s paid tuition of $48,000 in 2012, incurred $12,000 in travel costs (airfare, rental cars, and lodging) to attend required parent therapy sessions at the school. They also deposited and spent $3,000 in a “personal account” used to cover expenses associated with therapy and was required to maintain matriculation at Lonely Bridge. Jack spent most of 2012 and 2013 at Lonely Bridge before running away in late 2013. Although no longer suffering physical addiction, his behavioral issues remain today. In 2014, it was discovered that some of the staff at Lonely Bridge, although therapists, were not credentialed as had been previously thought and that the school was not accredited as parents had been led to believe. In addition, a number of high profile “incidents” at the school that alleged unusual therapy methods and abuse forced Lonely Bridge to close in 2014. Prepare a tax research memo for your files regarding whether the Johnson’s can deduct the tuition, travel costs and personal account expenses for tax purposes as a medical deduction (in excess of the floor)? To: Files From: Student Date: Today’s date Subject Deduction for Tuition and Travel for Special Boarding School Facts: Ozzie and Sherrie Johnson enrolled their son Jack in Lonely Bridge, a special school for troubled teens where therapy is provided. In 2012, the Johnson’s paid tuition of $48,000….

acct1 494381

2013 2012 1000000 1200000 450000 600000 550000 600000 600000 450000 -50000 150000 2013 2012 380000 376000 -20000 -16000 360000 360000 480000 440000 3400000 3080000 1600000 1440000 780000 680000 Problem 1 Problem 2 Sales Cost of goods sold Gross margin Operating expenses Net income % Sales Comments Accounts receivable Inventory Allowance for doubtful accounts Net accounts receivable Required: Compute (1) accounts receivable turnover for 2013, (2) the inventory turnover for 2013, and (3) the net margin for 2012.

Document Preview:

2013 2012 1000000 1200000 450000 600000 550000 600000 600000 450000 -50000 150000 2013 2012 380000 376000 -20000 -16000 360000 360000 480000 440000 3400000 3080000 1600000 1440000 780000 680000 Problem 1 Problem 2 Sales Cost of goods sold Gross margin Operating expenses Net income % Sales Comments Accounts receivable Inventory Allowance for doubtful accounts Net accounts receivable Required: Compute (1) accounts receivable turnover for 2013, (2) the inventory turnover for 2013, and (3) the net margin for 2012. Balance sheet items Income statement items Required: Express each income statement component as a percentage of sales, and comment on the trends in each line from 2012 to 2013. ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

acct2 494382

120000 148000 124000 24000 310000 -46000 306000 0 0 0 0 0 Problem 1 Problem 2 (25 points) Beginning inventory, raw materials Purchases of raw materials Plus: Purchases of raw materials Raw materials available for use Less: Ending raw materials inventory Cost of direct raw materials used Manufacturing overhead Total manufacturing costs Total work in process Cost of goods manufactured Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured Break-even point in units Fixed Costs Break-even point in dollars Break-even point in units * selling price Required: JZ is a musician who is conside

Document Preview:

120000 148000 124000 24000 310000 -46000 306000 0 0 0 0 0 Problem 1 Problem 2 (25 points) Beginning inventory, raw materials Purchases of raw materials Plus: Purchases of raw materials Raw materials available for use Less: Ending raw materials inventory Cost of direct raw materials used Manufacturing overhead Total manufacturing costs Total work in process Cost of goods manufactured Schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured Break-even point in units Fixed Costs Break-even point in dollars Break-even point in units * selling price Required: JZ is a musician who is considering whether to independently produce and sell a CD. JZ estimates fixed costs of $10,000 and variable costs of $4.00 per unit. The expected selling price is $12 per CD. What is JZ’s break-even point in units and dollars? Required: Use the following information to complete the below schedule of cost of goods manufactured. Ending work-in-process inventory Direct labor Plus: Beginning work-in-process inventory Less: Ending work-in-process inventory Contribution margin per unit ???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

acct3 494383

100000 -50000 50000 25000 30000 5000 8000 11000 9000 4500 4 4 36000 18000 Problem 1 Problem 2 Direct or Indirect? Salary of manufacturing supervisor Wages of manufacturing worker Telephone costs Rent Material used in production Old Machine Original cost Accumulated depreciation Market value (now) Book value Salvage value (in 5 years) Annual depreciation expense Times number of years New machine Required: GH Company is trying to decide whether to replace a current piece of machinery with a new machine.

Document Preview:

100000 -50000 50000 25000 30000 5000 8000 11000 9000 4500 4 4 36000 18000 Problem 1 Problem 2 Direct or Indirect? Salary of manufacturing supervisor Wages of manufacturing worker Telephone costs Rent Material used in production Old Machine Original cost Accumulated depreciation Market value (now) Book value Salvage value (in 5 years) Annual depreciation expense Times number of years New machine Required: GH Company is trying to decide whether to replace a current piece of machinery with a new machine. Using the below data, determine the relevant costs of the old machine and the new machine. Should GH Company purchase the new machine? Total operating expenses Per year Operating expenses Required: Identify each of the following as either a direct or indirect cost. ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

acct5 494384

245000 125000 350000 1200000 775000 1500000 Problem 1 Problem 2 Division A Division B Division C (10 points) Required: In the space below, describe the advantages of budgeting. Operating income Operating assets Required: Compute the ROI for each division below to two decimal places.

Document Preview:

245000 125000 350000 1200000 775000 1500000 Problem 1 Problem 2 Division A Division B Division C (10 points) Required: In the space below, describe the advantages of budgeting. Operating income Operating assets Required: Compute the ROI for each division below to two decimal places. Which division has the best performance? ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

acct504 case study 3 on cash budgeting 494385

ACCT504 Case Study 3 on Cash Budgeting

The cash budget was covered during Week 4 when we covered TCO D and you read Chapter 7. There is also a practice case study to work on. Your professor will provide the solution to the practice case study at the end of Week 5. This case study should be uploaded by 11:59 p.m. mountain time on Sunday at the end of Week 6 to the Week 6 Assignment Dropbox. You are encouraged to use the Excel template file provided in Doc Sharing.

The LBJ Company has budgeted sales revenues as follows.

April May June

Credit sales $94,000 $89,500 $75,000

Cash sales 48,000 75,000 57,000

Total sales $142,000 $164,500 $132,000

Past experience indicates that 30% of the credit sales will be collected in the month of sale and the remaining 70% will be collected in the following month.

Purchases of inventory are all on credit and 40% is paid in the month of purchase and 60% in the month following purchase. Budgeted inventory purchases are $195,000 in April, $135,000 in May, and $63,000 in June.

Other budgeted cash receipts: (a) sale of plant assets for $33,000 in May, and (b) sale of new common stock for $50,000 in June. Other budgeted cash disbursements: (a) operating expenses of $15,000 each month, (b) selling and administrative expenses of $10,150 each month, (c) purchase of equipment for $35,000 cash in May, and (d) dividends of $20,000 will be paid in June.

The company has a cash balance of $20,000 at the beginning of May and wishes to maintain a minimum cash balance of $20,000 at the end of each month. An open line of credit is available at the bank and carries an annual interest rate of 10%. Assume that all borrowing is done on the first day of the month in which financing is needed and that all repayments are made on the last day of the month in which excess cash is available. Also assume that there is no outstanding financing as of May 1.

Requirements:

1. Use this information to prepare a cash budget for the months of May and June, using the template provided in Doc Sharing.

2. What are the three sections of a cash budget, and what is included in each section?

3. Why is a cash budget so vital to a company?

4. What are the five basic principles of cash management that a company can follow in order to improve its chances of having adequate cash?

Grading Rubric for Cash Budget Case Study

Category

Points

%

Description

Documentation
and Formatting

6

10%

Case Study worksheet will be done in Excel and will contain formulas to receive maximum credit.

Organization
and Cohesiveness

6

10%

A quality solution will include the content properly organized in accordance with the instructions provided. The cash budgets will be complete and the analysis will be consistent with the cash budgets presented.

Editing

6

10%

Quality work will be free of any mathematical, spelling, punctuation, or grammatical errors. Sentences and paragraphs (where appropriate) will be clear, concise, and factually correct.

Content

42

70%

A quality project will have all required work completed and will be correct.

Total

60

100%

A quality project will meet or exceed all of the requirements.

acct504 case study managerial accoutning and analysis 494386

Hello. I need someone to look over my case study to make sure it is correct and to put the calculations in it as well. I have attached the case study details and the excel sheet I have completed. My tutor on here will not answer messages and I am running out of time.

Document Preview:

65800 26850 62649.999999999993 22500 92650 85150 117000 54000 81000 25200 171000 106200 20000 24500 92650 85150 33000 50000 75000 57000 200650 192150 220650 216650 171000 106200 15000 15000 10150 10150 19000 20000 196150 170350 24500 46300 24500 46300 Cash balance Borrowings Repayments SCHEDULE OF EXPECTED CASH COLLECTIONS FROM CUSTOMERS: Credit Sales SCHEDULE FOR EXPECTED PAYMENTS FOR PURCHASE OF INVENTORY Inventory purchases Total Cash Collections Total Payments for Inventory Purchases Cash Budget Add: Receipts Total receipts Total Available Cash Less: Disbursements Total disbursements Excess (deficiency of available cash over disbursements) Financing Ending cash balance Collections from customers Sale of plant assets Sale of new common stock Cash sales Operating expenses Selling and administrative expenses Dividends CASE STUDY 3 – Cash Budget Template Equipment purchase Purchases of inventory What are the three sections of a Cash Budget, and what is included in each section? 1) 2) 3) Why is a Cash Budget so vital to a company? What are the five basic principles of cash management that a company can follow in order to improve its chances of having adequate cash? May June April For the Two Months of May and June LBJ Company Please answer the 3 qualitative questions on the next tab called Qualitative Questions. Cash is a vital life line for many businesses and therefore contributes to more effective cash management. A cash budget shows anticipated cash flows, usually over a one or-year period. It can show when a company will need additional financing, well before the actual need arises. On the hand, it can indicate when the company will have excess cash available for investments or other purposes. The alternative to a cash budget is one that is based on the availability of credit, or money that will have to be repaid down the line with interest. A cash budget therefor places limits on your purchasing and…

acct504 practice case study 3 on cash budgeting 494390

ACCT504 Practice Case Study 3 on Cash Budgeting

This is a practice case study to help you become familiar with how to create a comprehensive cash budget. The cash budget relates to TCO D and is discussed in Chapter 7. Your professor will provide the solution by the end of Week 5 in Doc Sharing.

The actual case study assignmentshould be uploadedby 11:59 p.m.mountain time on Sunday at the end of Week 6 to the Week 6 AssignmentDropbox. You are encouraged to use the Excel template file provided in Doc Sharing.

The Cambridge Company has budgeted sales revenues as follows.

Jan Feb Mar

Credit sales $45,000 $36,000 $27,000

Cash sales 27,000 76,500 58,500

Total sales $72,000 $112,500 $85,500

Past experience indicates that 60% of the credit sales will be collected in the month of sale and the remaining 40% will be collected in the following month.

Purchases of inventory are all on credit and 40% is paid in the month of purchase and 60% in the month following purchase. Budgeted inventory purchases are $97,500 in January, $67,500 in February, and $31,500 in March.

Other budgeted cash receipts: (a) sale of plant assets for $18,525 in February, and (b) sale of new common stock for $25,275 in March. Other budgeted cash disbursements: (a) operating expenses of $10,125 each month, (b) selling and administrative expenses of $18,750 each month, (c) dividends of $28,500 will be paid in February, and (d) purchase of equipment for $9,000 cash in March.

The company has a cash balance of $15,000 at the beginning of February and wishes to maintain a minimum cash balance of $15,000 at the end of each month. An open line of credit is available at the bank and carries an annual interest rate of 12%. Assume that all borrowing is done on the first day of the month in which financing is needed and that all repayments are made on the last day of the month in which excess cash is available.Also assume that there is no outstanding financing as of February 1.

Requirements:

1. Use this information to prepare a cash budget for the months of February and March, using the template provided in DocSharing.

Please note: This is not a graded assignment, but your instructor will share the solution for this practice exercise by the end of Week 5. It is highly recommended that you try to build the cash budget on your own first.

Attachments:

acct505 494391

COURSE PROJECT A INSTRUCTIONS

You have just been hired as a new management trainee by Earrings Unlimited, a distributor of earrings to various retail outlets located in shopping malls across the country. In the past, the company has done very little in the way of budgeting and at certain times of the year has experienced a shortage of cash.

Since you are well trained in budgeting, you have decided to prepare comprehensive budgets for the upcoming second quarter in order to show management the benefits that can be gained from an integrated budgeting program. To this end, you have worked with accounting and other areas to gather the information assembled below.

The company sells many styles of earrings, but all are sold for the same price $10 per pair. Actual sales of earrings for the last three months and budgeted sales for the next six months follow (in pairs of earrings):

The concentration of sales before and during May is due to Mother’s Day. Sufficient inventory should be on hand at the end of each month to supply 40% of the earrings sold in the following month.

Suppliers are paid $4 for a pair of earrings. One-half of a month’s purchases is paid for in the month of purchase; the other half is paid for in the following month. All sales are on credit, with no discount, and payable within 15 days. The company has found, however, that only 20% of a month’s sales are collected in the month of sale. An additional 70% is collected in the following month, and the remaining 10% is collected in the second month following sale. Bad debts have been negligible.

Monthly operating expenses for the company are given below:

Insurance is paid on an annual basis, in November of each year.

The company plans to purchase $16,000 in new equipment during May and $40,000 in new equipment during June; both purchases will be for cash. The company declares dividends of $15,000 each quarter, payable in the first month of the following quarter.

A listing of the company’s ledger accounts as of March 31 is given below:

The company maintains a minimum cash balance of $50,000. All borrowing is done at the beginning of a month; any repayments are made at the end of a month.

The company has an agreement with a bank that allows the company to borrow in increments of $1,000 at the beginning of each month. The interest rate on these loans is 1% per month and for simplicity we will assume that interest is not compounded. At the end of the quarter, the company would pay the bank all of the accumulated interest on the loan and as much of the loan as possible (in increments of $1,000), while still retaining at least $50,000 in cash.

Required:

Prepare a master budget for the three-month period ending June 30. Include the following detailed budgets:

1.

o

a. A sales budget, by month and in total.

o

b. A schedule of expected cash collections from sales, by month and in total.

o

c. A merchandise purchases budget in units and in dollars. Show the budget by month and in total.

o

d. A schedule of expected cash disbursements for merchandise purchases, by month and in total.

2. A cash budget. Show the budget by month and in total. Determine any borrowing that would be needed to maintain the minimum cash balance of $50,000.

3. A budgeted income statement for the three-month period ending June 30. Use the contribution approach.

4. A budgeted balance sheet as of June 30.

Attachments:

acct6 494392

Document Preview:

Problem 1 Required: In the space below, describe the net present value method of capital budgeting. The net present value method of capital budgeting is the present value of the cash inflows minus the present value of the cash outflows by using a minimum acceptable rate of return on a capital investment project known as the hurdle rate . In layman terms this means common way of expressing this is to say that the net present value (NPV) is the present value of the benefits (PVB) minus the present value of the costs (PV). Since, net present value uses discounted cash flows in the analysis which makes net present value the most correct of any of the capital budgeting method as it considers both the risk and time variables ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

acct6 494393

2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 6000 2000 4000 2000 1000 12000 Problem 1 Problem 2 Cost of new machine Required: In the space below, describe the net present value method of capital budgeting. Incremental revenue Required: Compute the average annual cash inflows. Compute the payback period using the accumulation method.

Document Preview:

2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 6000 2000 4000 2000 1000 12000 Problem 1 Problem 2 Cost of new machine Required: In the space below, describe the net present value method of capital budgeting. Incremental revenue Required: Compute the average annual cash inflows. Compute the payback period using the accumulation method. ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

acct conference 494394

i need help with these!

please discuss on each topic.

about 75 words each.

Document Preview:

1. Chapters 15 & 16 Concepts & Skills Class, The following are concepts & skills that are essential for the study of chapters 15 & 16. As you work through the chapter study resources & chapter study activities keep these concepts & skills in mind. Then at the end of the review these concepts & skills to determine if you have a good grasp of these chapters. Thanks, Michael J. Concepts: ?         equity method ?         cost method and recording of investments and treasury stock ?         investments ?         effective interest method ?         long-term liability ?         record long-term liability ?         bond discount and bond premium   Skills: ?         technology/computer skill ?         math skill ?         distinguishing terminology ?         communication skill ?         memorization skill ?         journal entries ?         organization skill ?         T accounts ?         problem-solving skill ?         critical thinking skill ?         identifying source information underlying business transactions 2. New Twist to Teaching Ethics Class, The attached NY Times article brings a new twist to teaching ethics and the legal professional. Over the last decade we have seen many ethical issues related to corporate management, investing & auditor actions. I added this article to chapter 15 for our consideration and to strike up discussion.   http://www.nytimes.com/2011/06/04/us/04dean.html?pagewanted=all&_r=0 3. Chapter Resources & Study Activities Class, In our WileyPlus classroom there are Chapter Resources provided as assignment activities. These are a series of study resources for the chapters being covered. They are identified as Chapter 15 Resources & Chapter 16 Resources. Chapter Resources are self study activities and are not awarded course grade credit. Complete them so that you learn and are prepared for follow on assessments. These resources are provided for your study…

Attachments:

accoutning homework 494348

Arab Open University
B292: TMA 2nd Semester 2012-2013
Cut-Off Date: 27thof April 2013

About TMA:
The TMA covers the financial accounting concepts and practices in the businesses. It is marked out of 100 and is worth 20% of the overall assessment component. It is intended to assess students understanding of some of the learning points within Books9, 11, 12,and13. This TMA requires you to apply the course concepts.

The TMA is intended to:
Increase the students knowledge about the reality of the accounting as a profession.
Assess students understanding of key learning points within the books.
Develop the ability to understand and interact with the nature of the financial statements in reality.
Develop students communication skills, such as memo writing, essay writing, analysis and presentation of material.
Develop basic ICT skills such as using the internet.

The TMA:
This TMA is based around two cases of Compass Group and Relevant Information and Opportunity Costs. Marks will be awarded for blending the context of each case and with relevant theory by means of your own interpretation. In addition to this, some researchis required.
The TMA requires you to:
1-Review various study Books (1, 2, 3, and 4) of Management Accounting .
2-Conduct a simple information search using the internet.
3-Present your findings in not more than 2,000 words (220 words for part A, 680 for Part B, and 1,100 for part C).
4-You should use a Microsoft Office Word and Times New Roman Font of 12 points.
5-You should read and follow the instructions below carefully. Each part of the process will carry marks for the assignment.

Criteria for Grade Distribution:
Criteria
Content
Referencing&e-library
Structure and Presentation of ideas
Total marks

Part A
Part B
Part C

Marks
32
25
43
(10)
(10)
100

The TMA Questions
Part A
Breakeven Analysis
Harrison Research manufactures and sells specialized titanium rods used in medical equipment. The product is manufactured and sold in 0.25 meter long “sticks.’ The product is generally produced and sold to match customer demand, and there is not a significantamount of finished goods inventory at any point in time. Summary information for 2012 is as follows:
Sales were $5,000,000, consisting of 200,000 sticks.
Total variable costs were $3,500,000.
Total fixed costs were $1,250,000.
Net income was $250,000.

Due to deteriorating general economic conditions there is some concern about a reduction in sales volume.
Required:
a- What is the company’s break-even point in ‘sticks?’ Can the company sustain a 30% reduction in total volume, and remain profitable?
b- The company’s sole shareholder, Chem Harrison, relies on the dividends paid by the company. The company typically declares and pays a dividend equal to 25% of net income. If Chem needs to receive $150,000 in dividends for normal living expenses, what totalrevenues must Harrison Research produce in 2013?
c- If total volume is expected to decrease by 20%, and the company wishes to continue to produce a $250,000 net income by raising the per unit selling price, what revised per stick price must be imposed? Will this pricing strategy work in the market place?
d- If the company expects a drop in raw material prices to reduce total variable costs to $15 per stick, but all other revenue and cost factors to be unaffected, what will be the revised break-even point in sales and units?
[Marks (Words): 4×8 = 32 (220)]

Part B
Case study: Activity Based Costing

Orange Ltd manufactures micro-chips products for the computer industry. Orange s management accountant has produced a profit report showing the profitability of each of its three main Products for last year (Table 1).
Table l: Orange products profit report:

A

B

C

D

Total

Sales
5,000,000
5,000,000
5,000,000
5,000,000
20,000,000
Cost of materials
1,200,000
1,800,000
1,500,000
2,500,000
7,000,000
Cost of labour
700,000
800,000
800,000
200,000
2,500,000
Gross profit
3,100,000
2,400,000
2,700,000
2,300,000
10,500,000
Corporate overheads (allocated as 30 % of sales):

6,000,0000
Operating profit

4,500,000
The company wishes to keep producing only three products, it plans to discontinue production of the least profitable product.

Calculation of predetermined overhead rate:
Manufacturing overhead budget:
Machine setup
2,000,000
Machinery
1,400,000
Inspection
800,000
Material handling
1,800,000
Total
6,000,000

The cost drivers are as follow:
Activity Cost pool
Cost Driver
Product

A
B
C
D
Machine setup
Number of setups
10,000
3,000
5,000
2,000
Machinery
Machine hours
10,000
2,000
7,000
1,000
Inspection
Number of inspections
1,000
1,000
1,000
1,000
Material handling
Raw-material costs

Required:
From the case, provide a recommendation concerning which product to discontinue using the ABC costing method and describe the state of the current accounting system. (Hint: you need to compare the profitability under each method)

[Marks (Words) =25(700)]

PART C
Budgeting
(Case study: Planning a budget)
Davis Service Group is a large public limited company employing around 17,000 people. Its shares are quoted on the London Stock Exchange. The business is based on service contracts to source, clean and maintain industrial textiles, such as protective clothingand linens. This is across four key sectors: work wear, healthcare, hotels and restaurants, and general facilities, such as washroom linen. Access the Davis case study on www.thetimes100.co.uk.From home page click on Case studies and then in Finance choose budgeting , and then choose Davis, Planning a Budget.
Instructions
Use the case study to answer the following questions:

1. Outline the purpose of budgets within organisations.
[Marks (Words) = 7(250)]
2.Explain the relationship between an objectives budget and operational budgets and give an example.
[Marks (Words) = 7(70)]
3.Analyse the factors that managers might have to take into consideration when preparing budgets.
[Marks (Words) = 9(230)]
4.Critically evaluate how budgeting can contribute to the success of a business’s strategy
[Marks (Words) = 20(550)]
[Total Marks: 32 +25 + 43 + 20marks of deduction for general presentation and references]

In your answer, you should explain each point or inquire separately. Use the following headings (below) to make up the different sections of your work:

The PT3 form (Available on LMS)

Title and contents page
Part A
Breakeven Analysis
Part B
Case study : Activity Based Costing
Part C
Case study : Budgeting (Planning a budget)

References (Recorded according to the Harvard style – Available on LMS)

Good Luck!
Mr. Jacques Hendieh

Attachments:

accoutning homework help 494349

Please see attched. I need help with all required answers. Didn’t leave myself time due to busy work schedule. Thanks.

Document Preview:

6550 Fall 2013 Exercise #1 The following is the post-closing trial balance for the Patrick’s Manufacturing Corporation as of December 31, 20X0. The following transactions occurred during January 20X1: Jan. 1    Sold merchandise for cash, $3,500. The cost of the merchandise was $2,000. The company uses the perpetual inventory system. 2    Purchased equipment on account for $5,500 from the Strong Company. 4    Received a bill of $150 from the local newspaper for an advertisement that appeared in the paper on January 2. 8    Sold merchandise on account for $5,000. The cost of the merchandise was $2,800. 10    Purchased merchandise on account for $9,500. 13    Purchased equipment for cash, $800. 16    Paid the entire amount due to the Strong Company. 18    Received $4,000 from customers on account. 20    Paid $800 to the owner of the building for January’s rent. 30    Paid employees $3,000 for salaries for the month of January. 31    Paid a cash dividend of $1,000 to shareholders. Required: Use the horizontal model to record the transactions Prepare general Journal entries to record each transaction. Prepare an income Statement Prepare a balance sheet. Resources 4031980000869394 8/16??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accoutning need it asap 2 494350

Document Preview:

Arab Open University BE211: TMA – 2nd Semester 2012-2013 Cut-Off Date: 27th of April 2013 About TMA: The TMA covers the management accounting concepts and practices in the businesses. It is marked out of 100 and is worth 20% of the overall assessment component. It is intended to assess students’ understanding of some of the learning points within chapters 15, 18, and 19. This TMA requires you to apply the course concepts. The TMA is intended to: Assess students’ understanding of key learning points within chapters 15, 18, and 19. Increase the students’ knowledge about the reality of the management accounting as a profession. Develop students’ communication skills, such as report writing, essay writing, analysis and presentation of material. Develop the ability to understand and interact with the nature of the managerial accounting tools in reality. Develop basic ICT skills such as using your e-library, searching, selecting, managing and presenting information on the internet. The TMA: The TMA requires you to: Review various study chapters of ‘Financial and Managerial Accounting’ Book and apply some of the concepts within it. Conduct a simple information search using the internet. Present your findings in not more than 1,200 words (300 words for Part A and 900 words for Part B). The word count excludes headings, references, title page, and diagrams. You should use a Microsoft Office Word and Times New Roman Font of 14 points. You should read and follow the instructions below carefully. Each part of the process will carry marks for the assignment. Criteria for Grade Distribution: Criteria Content Referencing Structure and Presentation of ideas Total marks Part A Part B Marks 60 30 5 5 100 The TMA Questions PART A Financial Reporting on the Internet (Tyco Electronics Ltd.) TE Connectivity Ltd. is a global company that designs and manufactures approximately 500,000 products that connect and protect the flow of…

Attachments:

accoutning need it asap today 494351

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Arab Open University BE210: TMA – 2nd Semester 2012-2013 Cut-Off Date: 25th of April 2013 About TMA: The TMA covers the financial accounting concepts and practices in the businesses. It is marked out of 100 and is worth 20% of the overall assessment component. It is intended to assess students’ understanding of some of the learning points within chapters 1 to 4. This TMA requires you to apply the course concepts. The TMA is intended to: Increase the students’ knowledge about the reality of the accounting as a profession. Assess students’ understanding of key learning points within chapters 1 to 4. Develop the ability to understand and interact with the nature of the financial statements in reality. Develop students’ communication skills, such as memo writing, essay writing, analysis and presentation of material. Develop basic ICT skills such as using the internet. The TMA: The TMA requires you to: Review various study chapters (from Chapter 1 to 4) of ‘Financial and Managerial Accounting’ Book and apply some of the concepts within it. Conduct a simple information search using the internet. Present your findings in not more than 1,200 words. The word count excludes headings, references, title page, and diagrams. You should use a Microsoft Office Word and Times New Roman Font of 14 points. You should read and follow the instructions below carefully. Each part of the process will carry marks for the assignment. Criteria for Grade Distribution: Criteria Content Referencing Structure and Presentation of ideas Total marks Financial Reporting on the Internet (Tyco Electronics Ltd.) Marks 95 3 2 100 The TMA Questions Financial Reporting on the Internet (Tyco Electronics Ltd.) TE Connectivity Ltd. is a global company that designs and manufactures approximately 500,000 products that connect and protect the flow of power and data inside millions of products used by consumers and industries. We partner with customers in a broad…

Attachments:

acct 102 19 20 22 24 494353

Document Preview:

ACCT 102-19,20,22,24 A job order cost accounting system would best fit the needs of a company that makes:    A.  Shoes and apparel. B.  Paint. C.  Cement. D.  Custom machinery. E.  Pencils and erasers.   2. Dell Builders manufactures each house to customer specifications. It most likely would use:    A.  Capital process costing. B.  A periodic inventory system. C.  Unique costing. D.  Job order costing. E.  Activity-based costing.   3. A document in a job order cost accounting system that is used to record the costs of producing a job is a(n):    A.  Job cost sheet. B.  Job lot. C.  Finished goods summary. D.  Process cost system. E.  Units-of-production sheet.   4. The job order cost sheets used by Garza Company revealed the following:   Job No. 125 was completed during May and Jobs No. 124 and 125 were shipped to customers in May. What were the company’s cost of goods sold for May and the goods in process inventory on May 31?    A.  $3,200; $ 900. B.  $2,900; $1,200. C.  $1,200; $2,900. D.  $1,700; $1,200. E.  $4,100; $ 0.   5. The Goods in Process Inventory account of a manufacturing company that uses an overhead rate based on direct labor cost has a $4,400 debit balance after all posting is completed. The cost sheet of the one job still in process shows direct material cost of $2,000 and direct labor cost of $800. Therefore, the company’s overhead application rate is:    A.  40%. B.  50%. C.  80%. D.  200%. E.  220%.   6. A source document that production managers use to request materials for production and that is used to assign materials costs to specific jobs or to overhead is a:    A.  Job cost sheet. B.  Production order. C.  Materials requisition. D.  Materials purchase order. E.  Receiving report.   7. A source document that an employee uses to record the number of hours at work and that is used to determine the total labor cost for each pay period is a:    A.  Job cost…

Attachments:

acct 221 494357

THE EXCEL SHEET IS THE ANSWER SHEET.

YOU CAN GIVE ME A PRICE.

9 PROBLEMS

Document Preview:

Due Date: Sunday, April 7 @ 11 p.m. ET submit via WebTycho Assignment Folder Chapters 13 & 14 1. Becker Company is a publicly held corporation whose $1 par value stock is actively traded at $20 per share. The company issued 2,000 shares of stock to acquire land recently advertised at $50,000. When recording this transaction, Becker Company will a. debit Land for $50,000. b. credit Common Stock for $40,000. c. credit Paid-In Capital in Excess of Par Value for $48,000. d. debit Land for $40,000. 2. The acquisition of treasury stock by a corporation a. decreases its total assets and total stockholders’ equity. b. has no e?ect on total assets and total stockholders’ equity. c. requires that a gain or loss be recognized on the income statement. d. increases its total assets and total stockholders’ equity. 3. Dividends in arrears on cumulative preferred stock a. are considered to be a non-current liability. b. are considered to be a current liability. c. should be disclosed in the notes to the ?nancial statements. d. only occur when preferred dividends have been declared. 4. On January 2, 2010, Riley Corporation issued 20,000 shares of 6% cumulative preferred stock at $100 par value. On December 31, 2013, Riley Corporation declared and paid its ?rst dividend. What dividends are the preferred stockholders entitled to receive in the current year before any distribution is made to common stockholders? a. $0 b. $120,000 c. $360,000 d. $480,000 5. Stock dividends and stock splits have the following e?ects on retained earnings: Stock Splits Stock Dividends a. Increase No change b. Decrease Decrease c. No change No change d. No change Decrease 6. Indicate the respective e?ects of the declaration of a cash dividend on the following balance sheet sections: Total Assets Total Liabilities Total Stockholders’ Equity a. Increase Decrease No change b. No change …

acct 221 exam 494358

Please finish exam and place answers on designated answer sheet

Document Preview:

#9 – Essay #7 & 8 #4 to 6 #2 & 3 Multiple Choice & #1 Question Answer Number Incorrect Statement of Cash Flows Cash Budget Cost of Goods Manufactured Schedule Problem #2 Date Problem #4 Make Buy Problem #6 Problem #5 Problem #7 units Make or Buy Answer => Retain Replace Retain or Replace Answer => Problem #1 Problem #3 Drake Company For the Year Ended December 31, 2014 Redding Company Delvin Corporation Cost of Goods Sold calculation Answer Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Accounts Debit Credit Problem #8 1.00 2.00 3.00 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 0.00 #9 – Essay #7 & 8 #4 to 6 #2 & 3 Multiple Choice & #1 Question Answer Number Incorrect Statement of Cash Flows Cash Budget Cost of Goods Manufactured Schedule Problem #2 Date Problem #4 Make Buy Problem #6 Problem #5 Problem #7 units Make or Buy Answer => Retain Replace Retain or Replace Answer => Problem #1 Problem #3 Drake Company For the Year Ended December 31, 2014 Redding Company Delvin Corporation Cost of Goods Sold calculation Answer Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Accounts Debit Credit Problem #8 1.00 2.00 3.00 1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 8.00 9.00 10.00 0.00 ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

acct 241 fall project perfect answer 494360

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

ACCT 241: Principles of Managerial Accounting Fall 2013 Semester Project: Earrings Unlimited Budget Project Objectives: Students will prepare a Comprehensive Master Budget and Budgeted Financial Statements for Earrings Unlimited for the three-month period ending June 30. This includes: Sales Budget, Cash Receipts Budget, Merchandise Purchases Budget, Cash Disbursements Budget, Cash Budget, Budgeted Income Statement using the Contribution Format, and a Budgeted Balance Sheet. Students will also perform CVP analysis to determine the break-even point and complete a sensitivity analysis to a sales price change and a change in the price of purchases. Project Requirements: I. (70 points) Complete the Earrings Unlimited Case on an individual basis using the Excel template found on Blackboard under Course Documents, Project. Enter your answer on the Worksheet labeled “Part I Answer.” Use formulas in the cells for calculations (i.e., do not type in a total that you have determined with your calculator.) II. (10 points) Use CVP Analysis to determine the break-even point in units and sales dollars for Earrings Unlimited for the Quarter Ended June 30. You must show all calculations. Enter your response on the Project Excel file in the Worksheet labeled “Part II Answer.” III. (20 points) Determine Sales Revenue & Net Income for the 3-month period ending June 30, and the ending Cash Balance as of June 30 assuming the unit Sales Price is expected to increase (effective April 1) to $12, and the unit Purchase Price is expected to increase (effective April 1) to $5. Reconcile the changes. To solve this, use the Worksheets provided in the Project Excel file (i.e., the worksheets titled “If SP = $12,” “If Purch Pr = $5,” “If SP=$12; and Purch Pr = $5” ). In each Worksheet, start with the Base Case data (what you entered as “Part I Answer”) and then change the budget and/or financial statement data affected by the…

Attachments:

acct 291 494361

1) I need this within the next eight hours.

2) I need the answers in EXCEL, with each question clearly labeled.

3) I need ALL work shown. ALL.

4) The question is: I need the Current Ratio and also the Acid Test Ratio.

5) The data for use figuring out the Current Ratio and the Acid Test Ratio are attached.

Document Preview:

?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

acct 301 week 4 describe the net present value method of capital budgeting 494363

2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 6000 2000 4000 2000 1000 12000 Problem 1 Problem 2 (10 points) (40 points total) Cost of new machine Required: In the space below, describe the net present value method of capital budgeting. Required: Compute the average annual cash inflows. (20 points) Compute the payback period using the accumulation method.

Document Preview:

2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 6000 2000 4000 2000 1000 12000 Problem 1 Problem 2 (10 points) (40 points total) Cost of new machine Required: In the space below, describe the net present value method of capital budgeting. Required: Compute the average annual cash inflows. (20 points) Compute the payback period using the accumulation method. (20 points) Incremental revenue ?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

acct 346 course project bravo baking company 494364

Course Project

Details

This course has a six-part project with deliverables due in six of the eight weeks.

The course project takes a new company through hypothetical scenarios to reinforce the TCOs. By using a single entity, in a variety of business situations, you will see the practical application of a number of managerial accounting concepts taught in this course.

You will have access to an interactive Excel Template in Doc Sharing to complete your work in proper format. Each week’s Assignment page will tell you which portion of the template you need to complete for that week.

You will have Dropbox deliverables in Weeks 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, and 7. Point values do vary in that Week 1 is worth 10 points, Week 2 is worth 30 points, and the remaining Weeks (3, 5, 6, and 7) are 40 points apiece.

Document Preview:

10 0 30 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 20 200 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20000 32000 0 36000 0 10000 0 5000 0 12000 0 25000 0 500 250 0 10000 0 8000 0 4000 0 26000 0 2500 0 1200 0 7500 0 6000 0 7500 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14000 2.2857142857142856 0 0.11904761904761928 0 2.2857142857142856 0 3000 0 3500 0.5 1000 0 400 0 7.1428571428571425E-2 500 0 0 5.26 8400 7.89 0 0 67575 31800 15900 115275 27030 12720 6360 46110 13515 6360 3180 23055 27030 12720 6360 46110 5000 5000 5000 15000 5700 2850 2850 11400 5000 2500 2500 10000 11330 2370 -3990 9710 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2.29 4.58 2.25 9 0.56999999999999995 5.1100000000000003 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 20 0 1 4 Factory Supervisor Salaries Rent for Executive Offices Sales Commissions Utilities used in the factory Flour used in baking bread Advertising costs Delivery truck costs Paper wrappers for bread Depreciation on bake ovens Bakers wages Eggs, salt, water used for baking Interest on bank loan The company has experienced a good market demand for its high protein, low carbohydrate product called “Hi-Lo” Hi-Lo’s success has required that Bravo continue to make only this one product, however, Bravo’s customers, the local retailers, have been asking for more specialty breads from the company. The decision to expand will be made in the coming weeks. Bravo Baking Company began operations in May of 2010 with the production and sales of speciality breads. Table A Table B Table C Beginning Inventory Materials Beginning Work in Process Ending Inventory Materials Inventory Purchases Ending Work in Process Materials used in baking bread Other Overhead costs Cost of Goods Manufactured Schedule Beginning Work In Process Materials Plus: Purchases Materials…

Attachments:

acct 494365

accountexrt4u

Document Preview:

10.7 According to a recent study, when shopping online for luxury goods, men spend a mean of $2,401, whereas women spend a mean of $1,527 (data extracted from R. A. Smith, “Fashion Online: Retailers Tackle the Gender Gap,” The wall Street Journal, March 13, 2008, pp. D1, D10). Suppose that the study was based on a sample of 600 men and 700 females, and the standard deviation of the amount spent was $1,200 for men and $1,000 for women. State the null and alternative hypothesis if you want to determine whether the mean amount spent is higher for men than for women. In the context of this study, what is the meaning of the Type I error? In the context of this study, what is the meaning of the Type II error? At the 0.01 level of significance, is there evidence that the mean amount spent is higher for men than for women? 10.11 Digital cameras have taken over the majority of the point-and-shoot camera market. One of the important features of a camera is the battery life, as measured by the number of shots taken unit the battery needs to be recharged. The file DigitalCameras contains the battery life of 29 sub-compact cameras and 16 compact cameras (data extracted from “Digital Cameras,” Consumer Reports, July 2009, pp. 28-29). Assuming that the population variances from both types of digital cameras are equal is there evidence of a difference in the mean battery life between the two types of digital cameras ()? Determine the p-value in (a) and interpret its meaning. Assuming that the population variances from both types of digital cameras are equal, construct and interpret a 95% confidence interval estimate of the difference between the population mean battery life of the two types of digital cameras. 10.45 A professor in the accounting department of a business school claims that there is more variability in the final exam scores of students taking the introductory accounting course who are not majoring in accounting than for students taking the course who are…

Attachments:

acct 494366

this is the assignment

Document Preview:

Page 1 of 9 Name: __________________________ Date: _____________ You must complete both Part 1 (Wiley Plus) & Part 2 of Quiz 2 20 Questions: 12 MC Questions; 7 Problems; 1 essay Ch 5 – 6 -7 … Timed Exam: 3 hours UMUC – ACCT 220 Due April 24, 2013 This exam is to be completed without the assistance of any other person. You may use only the resources provided by your instructor for this class. ** Save this file and include your name in the file name: Steve_Harvey_Quiz_2 You may create an Excel and /or Word File for your work. Please verify that each page prints out formatted with your name and page number on the page. Excel files should show gridlines. Excel ‘page format’ has options for grid lines (sheet) and headers/footers. At a minimum, use print preview so you can see how the work will print out. I pledge on my honor that I have not given or received any unauthorized assistance on this examination. In addition, I pledge that I will not disclose to, or discuss the contents of this examination with, students who have not taken it. _________________________________________________________________________ Signed 12 MC (place answer on the line); 1 essays , 7 problem presentation questions (may require JEs or financial statement presentations) NOTE: some problems have several ‘calculation’ presentations or tasks 100 total points; 100 points = 100% For all questions, assume no other transactions or activities have taken place during the period except as noted Page 2 of 9 Prepare and present calculations for partial credits for questions with calculations and presentations. Name: __________________________ Date: _____________ 1. The IASB and FASB are working on a converged statement of financial position using the headings of A) assets, liabilities, and owner’s equity. Answer: ________ B) revenues and expenses. C) assets, liabilities, revenues, expenses and owner’s equity. D) operating, investing, and financing. 2. The only acceptable cost flow assumptions under IFRS…

Attachments:

acct 505 final 494367

1)

Nic Saybin Enterprises Accounting Department collects all pertinent monthly operating data. Selected data are presented below for the current month. From the data provided, please provide Saybin Enterprises Management with a flexible budget analysis to see how costs were controlled.
Actual Costs Incurred Static Budget
Activity level (in units) 754,009 746,500
Variable Costs:
Indirect materials $328,897 $325,640
Utilities $174,332 $171,890
Fixed Costs:
General and administrative $237,985 $244,908
Rent $135,500 $135,000

2)

(TCO D) McMullen Co. manufactures automatic door openers. The company uses 15,000 electronic hinges per year as a component in the assembly of the openers. You have been engaged by McMullen to assist with an evaluation of whether the company should continue producing the hinges or purchase them from an outside vendor.

The Accounting Department provided the following detail regarding the annual cost to produce electronic hinges:

Direct materials $54,000
Direct labor 60,000
Variable manufacturing overhead 36,000
Fixed manufacturing overhead 90,000
Total costs $240,000

The Procurement Department provided the following supplier pricing:
Supplier A price per hinge $11.00
Supplier B price per hinge $10.75
Supplier C price per hinge $10.50

The supplier pricing was obtained in response to a formal request for proposal (RFP). Procurement has determined these suppliers meet McMullen’s technical specifications and quality requirements.

If McMullen stops producing the part internally, 10% of the fixed manufacturing overhead would be eliminated.

Required: Prepare a make-or-buy analysis showing the annual advantage or disadvantage of accepting an outside supplier’s offer.

3)

(TCO E) Topple Company produces a single product. Operating data for the company and its absorption costing income statement for the last year are presented below:

Units in beginning inventory 2,000
Units produced 9,000
Units sold 10,000
Sales $100,000

Less cost of goods sold:

Beginning inventory 12,000
Add cost of goods manufactured 54,000
Goods available for sale 66,000
Less ending inventory 6,000
Cost of goods sold 60,000
Gross margin 40,000
Less selling and admin. expenses 28,000
Net operating income $12,000

Variable manufacturing costs are $4 per unit. Fixed factory overhead totals $18,000 for the year. This overhead was applied at a rate of $2 per unit. Variable selling and administrative expenses were $1 per unit sold.

Required: Prepare a new income statement for the year using variable costing. Comment on the differences between the absorption costing and the variable costing income statements.

4)

TCO A) The following data (in thousands of dollars) have been taken from the accounting records of the Maroon Corporation for the just-completed year.

Sales 1,200
Raw materials inventory, beginning 25
Raw materials inventory, ending 50
Purchases of raw materials 180
Direct labor 230
Manufacturing overhead 250
Administrative expenses 400
Selling expenses 200
Work-in-process inventory, beginning 150
Work-in-process inventory, ending 120
Finished goods inventory, beginning 100
Finished goods inventory, ending 110

Use the above data to prepare (in thousands of dollars) a schedule of Cost of Goods Manufactured and a Schedule of Cost of Goods Sold for the year. In addition, what is the impact on the financial statements if the ending finished goods inventory is overstated or understated?

5)

Carter Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. Data concerning the first processing department for the most recent month are listed below.

Work in process, beginning:
Units in beginning work-in-process inventory 400
Materials costs $6,900
Conversion costs $2,500
Percentage complete for materials 80%
Percentage complete for conversion 15%
Units started into production during the month 6,000
Units transferred to the next department during the month 5,800
Materials costs added during the month $112,500
Conversion costs added during the month $210,300

Ending work in process:

Units in ending work-in-process inventory 1,400
Percentage complete for materials 70%
Percentage complete for conversion 40%

Required: Calculate the equivalent units for materials (using the weighted-average method) for the month in the first processing department.

6)
(TCO G) (Ignore income taxes in this problem.) Five years ago, the City of Paranoya spent $30,000 to purchase a computerized radar system called W.A.S.T.E. (Watching Aliens Sent To Earth). Recently, a sales rep from W.A.S.T.E. Radar Company told the city manager about a new and improved radar system that can be purchased for $50,000. The rep also told the manager that the company would give the city $10,000 in trade on the old system. The new system will last 10 years. The old system will also last that long but only if a $4,000 upgrade is done in 5 years. The manager assembled the following information to use in the decision regarding which system is more desirable:

Old System New System
Cost of radar system $30,000 $50,000
Current salvage value $10,000 –
Salvage value in 10 years $5,000 $8,000
Annual operating costs $34,000 $29,000
Upgrade required in 5 years $4,000 –
Discount rate 14% 14%

Required:
(a) What is the City of Paranoya’s net present value for the decision described above? Use the total cost approach.
(b) Should the City of Paranoya purchase the new system or keep the old system?

7)

TCO B) Madlem, Inc., produces and sells a single product whose selling price is $240.00 per unit and whose variable expense is $86.40 per unit. The company’s fixed expense is $720,384 per month.

Required:

Determine the monthly break-even in either unit or total dollar sales. Show your work!

Attachments:

acct 525 managerial accounting average product cost per bookcase solution 494368

ACCT 525 Managerial Accounting

Heritage Company manufactures a beautiful bookcase that enjoys widespread popularity. The company has a backlog of orders that is large enough to keep production going indefinitely at the plant’s full capacity of 4,200 bookcases per year. Annual cost data at full capacity follow

Required:

Enter the dollar amount of each cost item under the appropriate headings. Note that each cost item is classified in two ways: first, as either variable or fixed with respect to the number of units produced and sold; and second, as either a selling and administrative cost or a product cost. (If the item is a product cost, it should also be classified as either direct or indirect.) (Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Direct materials used (wood and glass)

$ 432,000

Administrative office salaries

$ 108,000

Factory supervision

$ 70,000

Sales commissions

$ 63,000

Depreciation, factory building

$ 108,000

Depreciation, administrative office equipment

$ 2,000

Indirect materials, factory

$ 16,000

Factory labor (cutting and assembly)

$ 88,000

Advertising

$ 96,000

Insurance, factory

$ 7,000

Administrative office supplies (billing)

$ 5,000

Property taxes, factory

$ 22,000

Utilities, factory

$ 49,000

Cost Item Variable Fixed (Selling or admin costs ) direct indirect

Direct materials used (wood, glass)

Administrative office salaries

Factory supervision

Sales commissions

Depreciation, factory building

Depreciation, admin. Office equipment

Indirect materials, factory

Factory labor (cutting and assembly)

Advertising

Insurance, factory

Administrative office supplies (billing)

Property taxes, factory

Utilities, factory

Total costs

2.

Compute the average product cost per bookcase. (Round your answer to the nearest dollar amount. Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

Average product cost $ per bookcase ?

Attachments:

acct 640 case 3 performance drinks 494369

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

125000 120000 74250 93000 412250 40000 50000 31000 33000 154000 25000 20000 10000 18000 73000 11250 9000 4500 8100 32850 43750 35000 17500 31500 127750 120000 114000 63000 90600 387600 5000 6000 11250 2400 24650 0.04 0.05 0.15151515151515152 2.5806451612903226E-2 5.9793814432989693E-2 4500 5000 1500 11000 7000 3000 1500 1000 12500 23500 1150 2.7895694360218315E-3 100000 80000 45000 60000 285000 1.25 1.5 1.65 1.55 1.4464912280701754 1.2 1.425 1.4 1.51 1.36 55000 24750 5000 10000 10000 23000 127750 2011 101147 20200 121347 235000 14000 2011 115035 20099.999999999996 135135 238000 15000 2011 104787 19600 124387 240000 14400 2011 118541 19500 138041 265000 15680 2011 120031 20000 140031 266000 17000 2011 125487 20400 145887 274500 19500 2011 124555 20500 145055 275000 20000 2011 130412 20350 150762 285000 20100 2011 145030 20050 165080 287000 24000 2011 128115 19950 148065 278000 19801 2011 127150 20600 147750 275000 19999 2011 126225 20620 146845 271250 19850 2012 99450 20500 119950 232000 15000 2012 111999 20280 132279 234000 15500 2012 112568 20560 133128 233000 15500 2012 108787 20560 129347 231000 14850 2012 118050 20158 138208 266000 16500 2012 124532 20176 144708 269000 19500 2012 131254 20192 151446 284000 19999 2012 130555 20490 151045 286000 20000 2012 149001 20532 169533 290000 25000 2012 125633 20574 146207 274500 19850 2012 124131 20490 144621 273250 19787 2012 124665 20562 145227 271450 19899 REVENUE COSTS Direct Materials Direct Labor Fringe Benefits on Direct Labor TOTAL COST GROSS MARGIN Manufacturing Overhead Basic Hydration Intensity Post Workout Sales Total GROSS MARGIN RATIO Unit Price: Unit Cost: PERFORMANCE DRINKS – MONTHLY PROFIT REPORT Indirect Labor Fringe Benefits on Indirect Labor Utilities Processing Equipment – Depreciation Preventative Maintenance Information Technology Monthly Charge PERFORMANCE DRINKS – MONTHLY MFG OHD COST…

acct exercise 494370

Responding to a Classmate. This week, you should post a response to a classmate’s SEC post. Find another company that a classmate used(studentsppt file). Find the profit margin your classmate reported for his or her company. Compare to your profit margin(carmax, inc.file) and tell which company is more profitable (the higher the percentage, the more profitable the company is). For the one that was the most profitable, tell why you think their results were the highest of the two. Responding to a Classmate. This week, you should post a response to a classmate’s SEC post.

Document Preview:

Responding to a Classmate. This week, you should post a response to a classmate’s SEC post. Find another company that a classmate used(studentsppt file). Find the profit margin your classmate reported for his or her company. Compare to your profit margin(carmax, inc.file) and tell which company is more profitable (the higher the percentage, the more profitable the company is). For the one that was the most profitable, tell why you think their results were the highest of the two. Responding to a Classmate. This week, you should post a response to a classmate’s SEC post. Find another company that a classmate used(studentsppt file). Find the profit margin your classmate reported for his or her company. Compare to your profit margin(carmax, inc.file) and tell which company is more profitable (the higher the percentage, the more profitable the company is). For the one that was the most profitable, tell why you think their results were the highest of the two. ??????????????????????

Attachments:

acct exercises 494371

help with 2 exercises, please.

Document Preview:

Ch. 9 – Uncollectible accounts – Accounts Receivable and Notes Receivable After you read the articles re-printed below, please post an answer to one of the questions, or you can post a comment related to this topic. Even if you are not a consumer whose account is being written off, you will be impacted as a consumer. Bank of America Writeoffs May Rise 10%, Analyst Says David Mildenberg July 6 (Bloomberg) — Bank of America Corp., the biggest U.S. lender, may report a 10 percent jump in uncollectible loans to $7.6 billion when second-quarter earnings are released this month, Credit Suisse said in a report. Bad debts included $1.9 billion tied to home equity, and about 10.4 percent of credit-card loans will be written off, analyst Moshe Orenbuch wrote today in the report. The Charlotte, North Carolina-based bank charged off $6.9 billion in the first quarter, he said. Bank of America, the biggest U.S. lender by assets and deposits, probably had a 32-cent-a-share profit for the quarter, including a $5.2 billion pretax gain from the sale of China Construction Bank Corp. shares, Orenbuch said. Excluding the gain and a $750 million assessment to replenish the Federal Deposit Insurance Corp.’s reserve fund, the bank probably lost 15 cents a share, he wrote. Chief Executive Officer Kenneth Lewis is under pressure from investors to show losses are under control when the bank reports results on July 17. U.S. stress tests in May predicted the company could face $136 billion in loan losses through 2010 in an extended recession. The bank completed a campaign in June to close the $33.9 billion capital gap identified in the stress tests, the most among 19 lenders examined. Loan-Loss Levels Bank of America expects charge-offs to increase for the second and third quarters, though at a lower rate than cited in the stress tests, Chief Financial Officer Joe Price said on a May 7 conference call. The tests assumed charge-offs will average $11.4 billion per quarter…

for accountsguru 494323

some more accounting rubbish

Document Preview:

Week 5 Assignment 2 David Bradley ACC 201 Principles of Financial Accounting Instructor: Phillip Sarakatsannis April 17, 2013 Stock Options Paper In recent months there have been many news stories in the press about executive compensation with stock options.  This type of compensation occurs when an executive is granted the “option” to purchase the company’s stock at a certain price sometime in the future.  The theory is if the executive is effective his management skills will lead to a higher stock price.  As a reward the executive can purchase the stock at the earlier, lower price and lock in an automatic gain in his shares.  However, certain companies have been falsifying the actual date when the stock options are granted to their executives.  Research this situation on the internet or through the university library.  Write a 400-word paper describing the situation and the implications of the practice including any legal or ethical ramifications. References Edmonds, T., Olds, P., McNair, F., & Tsay, B. (2012).  Survey of Accounting (3rd ed.).  New York: McGraw-Hill Irwin. , ISBN: 9780077490836, retrieved from: http://online.vitalsource.com RUNNING HEAD: 5.2 1 WEEK 5, ASSIGNMENT 2 2???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

for accountsguru 494325

11-55 Aunt Molly’s Old Fashioned Cookies bakes cookies for retail stores. The company’s best-selling cookie is chocolate nut supreme, which is marketed as a gourmet cookie and regularly sells for $8.00 per pound. The standard cost per pound of chocolate nut supreme, based on Aunt Molly’s normal monthly production of 400,000 pounds, is as follows: Cost Item Quantity Standard unit cost Total Cost Direct materials Cookie mix 10oz $ .

Document Preview:

11-55 Aunt Molly’s Old Fashioned Cookies bakes cookies for retail stores. The company’s best-selling cookie is chocolate nut supreme, which is marketed as a gourmet cookie and regularly sells for $8.00 per pound. The standard cost per pound of chocolate nut supreme, based on Aunt Molly’s normal monthly production of 400,000 pounds, is as follows: Cost Item Quantity Standard unit cost Total Cost Direct materials Cookie mix 10oz $ .02 per oz $ .20 Milk chocolate 5oz .15 per oz .75 Almonds 1oz .50 per oz .50 $ 1.45 Direct Labor Mixing 1 min 14.40 per hr $ .24 Baking 2 min 18.00 per hr .60 $ .84 Variable Overhead 3 min 32.40 per hr $ 1.62 Total Standard cost per pound $ 3.91 Aunt Molly’s management accountant, Karen Blair, prepares monthly budget reports based on these standard costs. April’s contribution report, which compares budgeted and actual performance, is shown in the…

Attachments:

for accountsguru 494326

16-58 Pensacola Cablevision Company provides television cable service to two counties in the Florida pan-handle. The firm’s management is considering the construction of a new satellite dish in December of 20×0. The new antenna would improve reception and the service provided to customers. The dish antenna and associated equipment will cost $200,000 to purchase and install. The company’s old equipment, which is fully depreciated, can be sold now for $20,000.

Document Preview:

16-58 Pensacola Cablevision Company provides television cable service to two counties in the Florida pan-handle. The firm’s management is considering the construction of a new satellite dish in December of 20×0. The new antenna would improve reception and the service provided to customers. The dish antenna and associated equipment will cost $200,000 to purchase and install. The company’s old equipment, which is fully depreciated, can be sold now for $20,000. The company’s president expects the firm’s improved capabilities to result in additional revenue of $80,000 per year during the dish’s useful life of seven years. The incremental operating expenses associated with the new equipment are projected to be $10,000 per year. These incremental revenues and expenses are in real dollars. The new satellite dish will be depreciated under the MACRS depreciation schedule for the 5 year property class. The company’s tax rate is 40%. Pensacola Cablevision’s president expects the real rate of interest in the economy to remain stable at 10%. She expects the inflation rate, currently running at 20%, to remain unchanged. Compute the price index for each year from 20×1 through 20×7, using 1.000 as the index for 20×0. Prepare a schedule of after tax cash flows measured in real dollars. Compute the next present value of the proposed new satellite dish using cash flows measurd in real dollars. Use a real discount rate equal to the real interest rate. Note: Time 0 cash outflow; (188,000)??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

for accountsguru 494327

Exercise 3 Economic Order Quantity For each of the following independent cases, use the equation method to compute the economic order quantity. Case A Case B Case C Annual requirement (in units) 13,230 1,681 560 Cost per order $250 $40 $10 Annual holding cost per unit 6 20 7 Exercise 4 Lead Time and Safety Stock Andrew and Fulton, Inc.

Document Preview:

Exercise 3 Economic Order Quantity For each of the following independent cases, use the equation method to compute the economic order quantity. Case A Case B Case C Annual requirement (in units) 13,230 1,681 560 Cost per order $250 $40 $10 Annual holding cost per unit 6 20 7 Exercise 4 Lead Time and Safety Stock Andrew and Fulton, Inc. uses 780 tons of a chemical bonding agent each year. Monthly demand fluctuates between 50 and 80 tons. The lead time for each order is one month, and the economic order quantity is 130 tons. Determine the safety stock appropriate for the chemical bonding agent. At what order point, in terms of tons remaining in inventory, should Andrew and Fulton, Inc. order the bonding agent? Exercise 5 Economic Order Quantity Equation Approach; JIT Purchasing Fiber Technology, Inc. manufactures glass fibers used in the communications industry. The company’s materials and parts manager is currently revising the inventory policy for XL-20, one of the chemicals used in the production process. The chemical is purchased in 10 pound canisters for $95 each. The firm uses 4,800 canisters per year. The controller estimates that it costs $150 to place and receive a typical order of XL-20. The annual cost of storing XL-20 is $4 per canister. Write the formula for the total annual cost of ordering and storing XL-20. Use the EOQ formula to determine the optimal order quantity. What is the total annual cost of ordering and storing XL-20 at the economic order quantity? How many orders will be placed per year? Fiber Technology’s controller Jay Turnbull, recently attended a seminar on JIT purchasing. Afterward he analyzed the cost of storing XL-20 including the cost of wasted space and…

Attachments:

accountsguru 494328

Please complete by using corresponding excel template

Document Preview:

Problem 8-4 Name General Journal Date Account Titles and Explanation PR Debit Credit Part 1 Bank statement balance Add: Deduct: Adjusted bank balance Book balance Adjusted book balance Problem 8-4 Problem 8-4 Name General Journal Date Account Titles and Explanation PR Debit Credit Part 1 Bank statement balance Add: Deduct: Adjusted bank balance Book balance Adjusted book balance Problem 8-4 ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

for accountsguru only 494329

Post Closing Trial Balance Closing Entries Financial Statements Adjusted Trial Balance Adjusting Entries Trial Balance General Ledger Journal Entries REQUIREMENT #1: completed the following transactions: July 1 Began business by making a deposit in a company bank account of $24,000, in exchange Paid the premium on a one-year insurance policy, $2,400. Paid the current month’s rent, $2,080. July 3 placed on account. Payments will be $400.00 per month for nineteen months. The first payment is due 8/1. July 8 July 12 Paid utility bill for July, $308.

Document Preview:

Post Closing Trial Balance Closing Entries Financial Statements Adjusted Trial Balance Adjusting Entries Trial Balance General Ledger Journal Entries REQUIREMENT #1: completed the following transactions: July 1 Began business by making a deposit in a company bank account of $24,000, in exchange Paid the premium on a one-year insurance policy, $2,400. Paid the current month’s rent, $2,080. July 3 placed on account. Payments will be $400.00 per month for nineteen months. The first payment is due 8/1. July 8 July 12 Paid utility bill for July, $308. July 16 July 19 July 31 Declared and paid cash dividend of $1,600. Prepare journal entries to record the July transactions in the General Journal below. General Journal Date Description(Account Name) Debit Credit Cash Common Stock Prepaid Insurance Rent Expense Landscaping Equipment Accounts Payable Landscaping Supplies Utility Expense Landscaping Revenue for 4,800 shares of $5 par value common stock. Note: Use Accounts Payable for the Balance Due. Received cash for landscaping revenue for the first half of July, $2,724. Received cash for landscaping revenue for the last half of July, $2,620. Use the following account names for journal entries. Chart of Accounts: Account Title (Normal Balance) Assets Cash (Debit) Prepaid Insurance (Debit) Landscaping Supplies (Debit) Landscaping Equipment (Debit) Accum Depr -Equipment (Credit) Liabilities Accounts Payable (Credit) Income Tax Payable (Credit) Stockholders Equity Common Stock (Credit) Retained Earnings (Credit) Dividends (Debit) Revenue Landscaping Revenue (Credit) Expenses Rent Expense (Debit) Utility Expense (Debit) Insurance Expense (Debit) Supplies Expense (Debit) Depreciation Expense (Debit) Income Tax Expense (Debit) Note: Remember that Debits must equal Credits – All of your Journal Entries should balance. During its first month of operation, the IDEAL Landscaping Corporation, which specializes in…

Attachments:

for accountsguru only 494330

Describe a difference between traditional cost systems and ABC cost systems.

Document Preview:

Describe a difference between traditional cost systems and ABC cost systems. Match the activities to the appropriate level they are grouped in: processing purchase orders design new products hire a new employee process a unit in the manufacturing process organization sustaining unit level product level batch level Apex’s ABC activity information is as follows: total cost total activity activity rate customer orders 315,000 1000 orders product design 257,000 200 designs order size 380,000 20000 machine hours customer relations 367,500 100 customers other 490,500 n/a Compute the activity rate for all applicable activities above. Apex manufactures 2 models of sailboats, the standard and the deluxe. standard boat activity rate activity ABC cost allocation customer order 2 orders product design 0 designs order size 200 machine hours customer relations n/a deluxe boat activity customer order 1 orders product design 1 designs order size 100 machine hours customer relations n/a Use the activity rate from above in #4 in the activity rate column. Compute the ABC cost allocation above. What are 2 advantages of budgeting? Why is self-imposed budgeting better than budgets that are just imposed from top management down? The _________________ budget should always be prepared first. List 3 different types of budgets. True or False – managers should be punished for missing a budget target. Why is it important to identify only the relevant costs when making decisions? Sherri is going to Chicago to see her friend Ryan. She is trying to decide which is cheaper, driving or riding the train. Following is a list of costs that Sherri has compiled in relation to the trip. Identify which costs are relevant (R). _________…

Attachments:

for accountsguru only resources ch 11 amp 12 of financial accounting complete exerc 494331

The book is attached.

Document Preview:

JWCL165_c11_506-567.qxd 8/12/09 7:54 AM Page 506 Chapter 11 Corporations: Organization, Stock Transactions, Dividends, and Retained Earnings STUDY OBJECTIVES The Navigator ! Understand Concepts for Review ” After studying this chapter, you should be able to: Read Feature Story ” 1 Identify the major characteristics of a Scan Study Objectives ” corporation. Read Preview ” 2 Record the issuance of common stock. Read text and answer Do it! 3 Explain the accounting for treasury stock. p. 515 ” p. 517 ” p. 520 ” p. 523 ” 4 Differentiate preferred stock from p. 529 ” p. 533 ” p. 536 ” p. 539 ” common stock. Work Comprehensive Do it! p. 541 ” 5 Prepare the entries for cash dividends and stock dividends. Review Summary of Study Objectives ” 6 Identify the items that are reported in a Answer Self-Study Questions ” retained earnings statement. Complete Assignments ” 7 Prepare and analyze a comprehensive The Navigator stockholders’ equity section.! Feature Story “HAVE YOU DRIVEN A FORD LATELY?” A company that has produced such renowned successes as the Model T and the Mustang, and such a dismal failure as the Edsel, would have some interesting tales to tell. Henry Ford was a defiant visionary from the day 506JWCL165_c11_506-567.qxd 8/8/09 7:57 PM Page 507 Ford Motor Company (www.ford.com) was formed in 1903. His goal from day one was to design a car he could mass-produce and sell at a price that was affordable to the masses. In short order he accomplished this goal. By 1920, 60% of all vehicles on U.S. roads were Fords. Henry Ford was intolerant of anything that stood between him and success. In the early years Ford had issued shares to the public in order to finance the company’s exponential growth. In 1916 he decided not to pay a dividend in order to increase the funds available to expand the company. The shareholders sued. Henry Ford’s reaction was swift and direct: If the shareholders didn’t see things his way, he would get rid of them. In 1919 the…

for accountsquru 30 00 494334

see attached and below;

HMWK 9-45

We really need to get this new material-handling equipment in operation just after the new-year begins. I hope we can finance it largely with cash and marketable securities, but if necessary we can get a short-term loan down at MetroBank. This statement by Beth Davies-Lowry, president of Intercoastal is a small, Company, concluded a meeting she had called with the firm s top management. Intercoastal is a small, rapidly growing wholesaler of consumer electronics products. The firm s main product lines are small kitchen appliances and power tools. Marcia Wilcox, Intercoastal s General Manager of Marketing, has recently completed a sales forcast. She believes the company s sales during the first quarter of 20×1 will increase by 10 percent each month over the previous month s sales. Then Wilcox expects sales to remain constant for several months. Intercoastal s projected balance sheet as of December 31, 20×0, is as follows:

CASH $35,000

ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE 270,000

MARKETABLE SECURITIES 15,000

INVENTORY 154,000

BLDG S AND EQUIPMENT 626,000

TOTAL ASSETS $1,100,000

ACCOUNTS PAYABLE $176,000

BOND INTEREST PAYABLE 12,500

PROPERTY TAX PAYABLE 3,600

BONDS PAYABLE (10% due 20×6) 300,000

COMMON STOCK 500,000

RETAINED EARNINGS 107,500

TOTAL LIABILITIES/STOCKHOLDERS EQUITY $1,100,000

Jack Hanson, the assistant controller, is now preparing a monthly budget for the first quarter of 20×1. In the process, the following information has been accumulated:

1. Projected sales for December of 20×0 are $400,000. Credit sales typically are 75 percent of the total sales. Intercoastal s credit experience indicates that 10% of the credit sales are collected during the month of sale, and the remainder collected during the following month.

2. Intercoastal s cost of goods sold generally runs at 70% of sales. Inventory is purchased on account and 40% of each month s purchases are paid during the month of purchase. The remainder is paid during the following month. In order to have adequate stocks of inventory on hand, the firm attempts to have inventory at the end of each month equal to half of the next month s projected cost of goods sold.

3. Hanson has estimated the Intercoastal s other monthly expenses will be as follows:

SALES SALARIES $21,000

ADVERTISING/PROMOTOIONS 16,000

ADMINISTRATIVE SALARIES 21,000

DEPRECIATION 25,000

INTEREST ON BONDS 2,500

PROPERTY TAXES 900

In addition, sales commission runs at 1% of sales.

4. Intercoastal s president, Davies-Lowry, has indicated that the firm should invest $125,000 in an automated inventory-handling system to control the movement of inventory in the firms warehouse just after the new year begins. These equipment purchases will be financed primarily from the firm s cash and marketable securities. However, Davies-Lawry believes that Intercoastal needs to keep a minimum cash balance of $25,000. If necessary, the remainder of the equipment purchases will be financed using short term credit from a local bank. The minimum period for such a loan is 3 months. Hanson believes short term interest rates will be 10% per year at the time of the equipment purchases. If a loan is necessary, Davies-Lowry has decided it should be paid off by the end of the first quarter if possible.

5. Intercoastal s board of directors has indicated an intention to declare and pay dividends of $50,000 on the last day of each quarter.

6. The interest on any short term borrowing will be paid when the loan is repaid. Interest on Intercoastals bonds is paid semiannually on January 31, and July 31 for the preceding 6 month period.

7. Property taxes are paid semiannully on February 28 and August 31 for the preceding 6 month period.

Prepare Intercoastal Electronic Company s master budget for the first quarter of 20×1 by completing the following schedules and statements.

1. SALES BUDGET:

20×0 20×1 December January February March 1st Qtr

Total Sales

Cash Sales

Sales on account

2. Cash Receipts Budget:

20×1

January February March 1st Qtr

Cash Sales

Cash Collections from Credit sales (current Month)

Cash Collections from Credit Sales (preceding month)

Total cash receipts

3. Purchasee Budget:

20×0 20×1

January January February March 1st Qtr

Budgeted Cost of Goods Sold

Add: Desired ending inventory

Total goods needed

Less: Expected beginning Inventory

Purchases

4. Cash Disbursment Budget:

20×1

January February March 1st Qtr

Inventory purchases:

Cash payments for purchases(current month)

(preceding month)

Total cash payments for inventory purchase

Other expenses:

Sales Salaries

Advertising and promotion

Administrative salaries

Interest on bonds

Property Taxes

Sales Commissions

Total cash payments for other expenses

Total cash disbursements

5. Complete the 1st three lines of the summary cash budget. Then do the analysis of short term financing needs in requirement (6). Then finish requirement (5).

Summar Cash Budget:

20×1

January February March 1st Qtr

Cash receipts (from schedule 2)

Less: Cash Disbursements(from schedule 4)

Change in cash balance during period due to operations

Sale of marketable securities(1/2/x1)

Poceeds from bank loan(1/2/x1)

Purchase of equipment

Repayment of bank loan(3/31/x1)

Interest on bank loan

Payment on dividends

Change in cash balance during

1st quarter

Cash balance(1/1/x1)

Cash balance(3/31/x1)

6. Analysis of short term financing needs:

Projected cash balances as of December 31, 20×0 $

Less: Minimum cash balance _________

Cash available for equipment purchases $

Projected proceeds from sale of marketing securities _________

Cash available $

Less: Cost of investment in equipment _________

Required short term borrowing $

7. Prepare Intercoastal s Electronics budgeted statement for the 1st quarter of 20×1. (ignore income taxes)

8. Prepare Intercoastal s Electronics budgeted statement of retained earnings for the 1st quarter of 20×1.

9. Prepare Intercoastal s Electronics budgeted balance sheet as of March 31, 20×1. (Hint; On March 31, 20×1, Bond Interest Payable is $5,000 and Property Taxes Payable is $900.)

Attachments:

accouting homework 494338

Give an example of one of the four adjusting entries for an actual company. My introductory post, below will give an example of each type to get you started. Then I want you to think of just one for any of the 4 types. To get things started, here is one example of each of the four types of Adjusting Journal Entries. 1. Prepaid Expenses: Larry’s Fun House bought $600 in Food and Beverages in July. In August, the business used up $250 of those supplies. Here is the adjusting journal entry: DR  Food and Beverages Expense $250        CR   Food and Beverages                 $250 2.

Document Preview:

Give an example of one of the four adjusting entries for an actual company. My introductory post, below will give an example of each type to get you started. Then I want you to think of just one for any of the 4 types. To get things started, here is one example of each of the four types of Adjusting Journal Entries. 1. Prepaid Expenses: Larry’s Fun House bought $600 in Food and Beverages in July. In August, the business used up $250 of those supplies. Here is the adjusting journal entry: DR  Food and Beverages Expense $250        CR   Food and Beverages                 $250 2. Unearned Revenues: Allstate Insurance customers paid for car insurance for 6 months. The local office recorded $720,000 in premiums paid for July 1 through December 31. Here is the adjustment for the month of October: DR    Unearned Revenue    $120,000         Revenues                                   $120,000   3. Accrued Revenues: The City of Greensboro bills customers once per month. Dr. Mereba, a customer of the Water Company received her bill for $35. The adjusting JE for the City of Greensboro Water Company is: DR Accounts Receivable        $35       CR Service Revenues                $35 4.  Accrued Expenses: Elaine’s Spa pays her employees weekly. Payday is every Friday. At the end of October, the business owes $4,000 to its employees, but payday is not until Friday, November 4. The adjustment to accrue wages is: DR       Wages Expense         $4,000            CR          Wages Payable          $4,000 Now, all you have to do is think of an adjusting journal entry to show, for any one of the 4 types. Here are some businesses that record adjustments regularly. Any business where customers prepay them for things like insurance, rent. If the customer is a business, it also makes an adjustment as the asset turns into an expense Any business that has depreciable assets Any business that buys supplies for several months at a time A business that bills its customers once…

Attachments:

accouting hw 2 494339

HW 2 (Corrections of a Balance Sheet) The bookkeeper for Garfield Company has prepared the following balance sheet as of July 31, 2012. GARFIELD COMPANY Balance Sheet As of July 31, 2012 Cash $71,370 Notes and accounts payable $46,580 Accounts receivable (net) 43,080 Long-term liabilities 77,370 Inventories 62,370 Stockholders’ equity 157,870 Equipment (net) 84,000 $281,820 Patents 21,000 $281,820 The following additional information is provided. Cash includes $1,200 in a petty cash fund and $12,290 in a bond sinking fund.

Document Preview:

HW 2 (Corrections of a Balance Sheet) The bookkeeper for Garfield Company has prepared the following balance sheet as of July 31, 2012. GARFIELD COMPANY??Balance Sheet??As of July 31, 2012??Cash?$71,370??Notes and accounts payable?$46,580??Accounts receivable (net)?43,080??Long-term liabilities?77,370??Inventories?62,370??Stockholders’ equity?157,870??Equipment (net)?84,000???$281,820??Patents?21,000??????$281,820?????The following additional information is provided. Cash includes $1,200 in a petty cash fund and $12,290 in a bond sinking fund. The net accounts receivable balance is comprised of the following two items: (a) accounts receivable–debit balances $46,580; (b) allowance for doubtful accounts $3,500. Merchandise inventory costing $5,740 was shipped out on consignment on July 31, 2012. The ending inventory balance does not include the consigned goods. Receivables in the amount of $5,740 were recognized on these consigned goods. Equipment had a cost of $112,000 and an accumulated depreciation balance of $28,000. Taxes payable of $9,020 were accrued on July 31. Garfield Company, however, had set up a cash fund to meet this obligation. This cash fund was not included in the cash balance, but was offset against the taxes payable amount. Prepare a corrected classified balance sheet as of July 31, 2012, from the available information, adjusting the account balances using the additional information. (List current liabilities from largest to smallest amounts, e.g. 10, 5, 2.) GARFIELD COMPANY??Balance Sheet??July 31, 2012??Assets??Current assets??????$???$???Less: ????????Total current assets????????Long-term investments????????????Property, plant, and equipment????????Less: ????????Intangible assets????????Total assets??$??????Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity???????$???????Total current liabilities??$??????Long-term liabilities????Total liabilities????????Stockholders’ equity????Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity??$??(Current Assets Section of the…

Attachments:

accouting hw questionwp4 494340

WP4.1 (Analysis of Amortization Schedule and Interest Entries) The following amortization and interest schedule reflects the issuance of 10-year bonds by Capulet Corporation on January 1, 2006, and the subsequent interest payments and charges. The company’s year-end is December 31, and financial statements are prepared once yearly.

Document Preview:

WP4.1 (Analysis of Amortization Schedule and Interest Entries) The following amortization and interest schedule reflects the issuance of 10-year bonds by Capulet Corporation on January 1, 2006, and the subsequent interest payments and charges. The company’s year-end is December 31, and financial statements are prepared once yearly. ?Amortization Schedule???Year?Cash?Interest?Amount?Unamortized?Book Value???1/1/2006?$16,280????$8,362??$139,638????2006?16,280??$16,757??7,885??140,115????2007?16,280??16,814??7,351??140,649????2008?16,280??16,878??6,753??141,247????2009?16,280??16,950??6,083??141,917????2010?16,280??17,030??5,333??142,667????2011?16,280??17,120??4,493??143,507????2012?16,280??17,221??3,552??144,448????2013?16,280??17,334??2,498??145,502????2014?16,280??17,460??1,318??146,682????2015?16,280??17,598????148,000??????????????? ?? ?Indicate whether the bonds were issued at a premium or a discount? ?????????? ?? ?Is the amortization schedule based on the straight-line method or the effective interest method? ?????????? ?? ?Determine the stated interest rate and the effective interest rate. Stated Rate?%??Effective Rate?%???????????? ?? ?On the basis of the schedule above, prepare the journal entry to record the issuance of the bonds on January 1, 2006. (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.) Date?Description/Account?Debit?Credit??01/01/06????????????????????????? ?? ?On the basis of the schedule above, prepare the journal entry or entries to reflect the bond transactions and accruals for 2006. (Interest is paid January 1.) (List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.) Date?Description/Account?????This document was truncated here because it was created in the Evaluation Mode.

Attachments:

accouting hw1 1 494341

(Transaction Analysis–Service Company) Christine Ewing is a licensed CPA. During the first month of operations of her business (a sole proprietorship), the following events and transactions occurred. April 2 Invested $35,197 cash and equipment valued at $18,933 in the business. 2 Hired a secretary-receptionist at a salary of $290 per week payable monthly. 3 Purchased supplies on account $712. (Debit an asset account.) 7 Paid office rent of $684 for the month. 11 Completed a tax assignment and billed client $1,555 for services rendered. (Use Service Revenue account.

Document Preview:

(Transaction Analysis–Service Company) Christine Ewing is a licensed CPA. During the first month of operations of her business (a sole proprietorship), the following events and transactions occurred. April 2??Invested $35,197 cash and equipment valued at $18,933 in the business.??2??Hired a secretary-receptionist at a salary of $290 per week payable monthly.??3??Purchased supplies on account $712. (Debit an asset account.)??7??Paid office rent of $684 for the month.??11??Completed a tax assignment and billed client $1,555 for services rendered. (Use Service Revenue account.)??12??Received $3,483 advance on a management consulting engagement. ??17??Received cash of $3,043 for services completed for Ferengi Co.??21??Paid insurance expense $171.??30??Paid secretary-receptionist $1,668 for the month.??30??A count of supplies indicated that $209 of supplies had been used.??30??Purchased a new computer for $6,135 with personal funds. (The computer will be used exclusively for business purposes.)??Journalize the transactions in the general journal. (If no entry is required, enter No entry as the account and 0 for the amount. List multiple debit/credit entries from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.) Date?Description/Account?Debit?Credit??Apr. 2 ???????????????Apr. 2??????????Apr. 3??????????Apr. 7??????????Apr. 11??????????Apr. 12 ??????????Apr. 17??????????Apr. 21 ??????????Apr. 30??????????Apr. 30??????????Apr. 30?????????? (Corrected Trial Balance) The trial balance of Geronimo Company does not balance. Your review of the ledger reveals the following: (a) Each account had a normal balance. (b) The debit footings in Prepaid Insurance, Accounts Payable, and Property Tax Expense were each understated $1,000. (c) A transposition error was made in Accounts Receivable and Service Revenue; the correct balances for Accounts Receivable and Service Revenue are $2,750 and $6,690, respectively. (d) A debit posting to Advertising Expense of $300 was omitted. (e) A…

Attachments:

accouting problem 494343

Accounting 291 Comprehensive Problem Fall Semester 2013 The Baker Company is a merchandising enterprise that uses the perpetual inventory system.

Document Preview:

Accounting 291 Comprehensive Problem Fall Semester 2013 The Baker Company is a merchandising enterprise that uses the perpetual inventory system. Account balances for the company as of September 30, 2013, the last day of the fiscal year, are as follows: Cash $ 31,165 Accounts Receivable 126,100 Merchandise Inventory 435,000 Prepaid Insurance 10,600 Store Supplies 3,750 Office Supplies 1,700 Store Equipment 225,000 Accumulated Depreciation -Store Equipment 40,300 Office Equipment 72,000 Accumulated Depreciation -Office Equipment 17,200 Accounts Payable 66,700 Salaries Payable 0 Unearned Rent 1,200 Notes Payable: Due within 12 months 35,000 Due beyond 12 months 160,000 Bertha Baker, Capital 332,100 Bertha Baker, Drawing 50,000 Sales 1,147,500 Sales Returns & Allowances 15,500 Sales Discounts 6,000 Cost of Merchandise Sold 601,200 Sales Salaries Expense 86,400 Advertising Expense 29,450 Depreciation Expense – Store Equipment 0 Store Supplies Expense 0 Miscellaneous Selling Expense 1,885 Office Salaries Expense 60,000 Rent Expense 30,000 Insurance Expense 0 Depreciation Expense – Office Equipment 0 Office Supplies Expense 0 Miscellaneous Administrative Expense 1,650 Rent Income 0 Interest Expense 12,600 2 Data needed for year-end adjustments follow: Physical merchandise inventory on September 30 $418,500 Insurance expired during the year 6,000 Supplies on hand on September 30: Store Supplies 1,500 Office Supplies 700 Depreciation for the year: Store Equipment 8,500 Office Equipment 4,500 Salaries Payable as of September 30: Sales Salaries 3,450 Office Salaries 2,550 Unearned Rent as of September 30 400 Instructions: a. Prepare a work sheet for the fiscal year ended September 30, 2013. (Form 10W) [Example: page 176B] b. Prepare a multiple-step income statement for the fiscal year ended September 30, 2013. (Form 3C) [Example: page 256) c. Prepare a statement of owner’s equity for the fiscal year ended September 30, 2013, assuming no additional investments by the owner…

Attachments:

accouting project mostly financial statement analysis part 2 494344

Please use the outline format in attachment. All sections must be completed accordingly.

Document Preview:

I. Introduction Objective of paper The objective of this paper is to analyze HCA Holdings’ financial statements and other supporting documents in order to identify the company’s strengths and weaknesses. In doing so, this paper will also assess how the company’s overall performance affects its credit worthiness and investment potential. Summary of findings Chapter Web Case Solutions Chapter 1 Required 1. Briefly summarize the business description HCA Holdings is a holding company for HCA (Hospital Corporation of America). HCA owns, manages and/or operates hospitals, surgery centers, diagnostic and imaging centers, radiation and oncology therapy centers, rehabilitation and physical therapy centers, and other facilities across the nation and England. HCA’s general and acute care hospitals provide medical and surgical services, which include inpatient care, intensive care, cardiac care, diagnostic services and emergency services. 2. What is the industry? HCA Holdings is involved in the healthcare industry. 3. What is the primary sector? Secondary sectors? 4. Select a number of analysts’ ratings. What is your opinion of those ratings? Are they too high or too low? 5. Review and comment on the three most recent news headlines. 6. List the peer companies. 7. For your company and each peer company, list the current sales. 8. For current sales, select the peer weight for your company. 9. For current sales, select the peer aggregate. 10. For current sales, select the peer mean. 11. For current sales, select the peer median. 12. Comment on how dominant your company appears to be in relation to the peer set of companies. 13. Who are the external auditors? What is the date and opinion on the last statement? Chapter 2 Required Review directors for name, principal occupation, or employment/other business affiliation, age, and director service. 1. Comment on the composition of the directors. 2. List the Board Committees. 3. For each Board…

Attachments:

accoutning 1 494345

Arab Open University BE210: TMA – 2nd Semester 2012-2013 Cut-Off Date: 25th of April 2013 About TMA: The TMA covers the financial accounting concepts and practices in the businesses. It is marked out of 100 and is worth 20% of the overall assessment component. It is intended to assess students’ understanding of some of the learning points within chapters 1 to 4. This TMA requires you to apply the course concepts. The TMA is intended to: Increase the students’ knowledge about the reality of the accounting as a profession.

Document Preview:

Arab Open University BE210: TMA – 2nd Semester 2012-2013 Cut-Off Date: 25th of April 2013 About TMA: The TMA covers the financial accounting concepts and practices in the businesses. It is marked out of 100 and is worth 20% of the overall assessment component. It is intended to assess students’ understanding of some of the learning points within chapters 1 to 4. This TMA requires you to apply the course concepts. The TMA is intended to: Increase the students’ knowledge about the reality of the accounting as a profession. Assess students’ understanding of key learning points within chapters 1 to 4. Develop the ability to understand and interact with the nature of the financial statements in reality. Develop students’ communication skills, such as memo writing, essay writing, analysis and presentation of material. Develop basic ICT skills such as using the internet. The TMA: The TMA requires you to: Review various study chapters (from Chapter 1 to 4) of ‘Financial and Managerial Accounting’ Book and apply some of the concepts within it. Conduct a simple information search using the internet. Present your findings in not more than 1,200 words. The word count excludes headings, references, title page, and diagrams. You should use a Microsoft Office Word and Times New Roman Font of 14 points. You should read and follow the instructions below carefully. Each part of the process will carry marks for the assignment. Criteria for Grade Distribution: Criteria Content Referencing Structure and Presentation of ideas Total marks Financial Reporting on the Internet (Tyco Electronics Ltd.) Marks 95 3 2 100 The TMA Questions Financial Reporting on the Internet (Tyco Electronics Ltd.) TE Connectivity Ltd. is a global company that designs and manufactures approximately 500,000 products that connect and protect the flow of power and data inside millions of products used by consumers and industries. We partner with customers in a broad…

Attachments:

accoutning 2 494346

Arab Open University BE211: TMA – 2nd Semester 2012-2013 Cut-Off Date: 27th of April 2013 About TMA: The TMA covers the management accounting concepts and practices in the businesses. It is marked out of 100 and is worth 20% of the overall assessment component. It is intended to assess students’ understanding of some of the learning points within chapters 15, 18, and 19. This TMA requires you to apply the course concepts. The TMA is intended to: Assess students’ understanding of key learning points within chapters 15, 18, and 19.

Document Preview:

Arab Open University BE211: TMA – 2nd Semester 2012-2013 Cut-Off Date: 27th of April 2013 About TMA: The TMA covers the management accounting concepts and practices in the businesses. It is marked out of 100 and is worth 20% of the overall assessment component. It is intended to assess students’ understanding of some of the learning points within chapters 15, 18, and 19. This TMA requires you to apply the course concepts. The TMA is intended to: Assess students’ understanding of key learning points within chapters 15, 18, and 19. Increase the students’ knowledge about the reality of the management accounting as a profession. Develop students’ communication skills, such as report writing, essay writing, analysis and presentation of material. Develop the ability to understand and interact with the nature of the managerial accounting tools in reality. Develop basic ICT skills such as using your e-library, searching, selecting, managing and presenting information on the internet. The TMA: The TMA requires you to: Review various study chapters of ‘Financial and Managerial Accounting’ Book and apply some of the concepts within it. Conduct a simple information search using the internet. Present your findings in not more than 1,200 words (300 words for Part A and 900 words for Part B). The word count excludes headings, references, title page, and diagrams. You should use a Microsoft Office Word and Times New Roman Font of 14 points. You should read and follow the instructions below carefully. Each part of the process will carry marks for the assignment. Criteria for Grade Distribution: Criteria Content Referencing Structure and Presentation of ideas Total marks Part A Part B Marks 60 30 5 5 100 The TMA Questions PART A Financial Reporting on the Internet (Tyco Electronics Ltd.) TE Connectivity Ltd. is a global company that designs and manufactures approximately 500,000 products that connect and protect the flow of…

Attachments:

accounting theory 494296

Document Preview:

Question 1 (17 marks) HiSpeed Ltd. plans to manufacture cross-country skiing equipment. Its cash flows are highly dependent on the weather in early winter. HiSpeed operates under ideal conditions of uncertainty. On August 1, 2014, the beginning of its first year in business, HiSpeed acquires equipment to be used in its operations. The equipment will last two years, at which time its salvage value will be zero. The company finances the equipment purchase by issuing common shares. HiSpeed’s annual net cash flows will be $800 if the weather is snowy and $300 if it is not snowy. Assume that cash flows are received at year end. In each year, the objective probability that the weather is snowy is 0.7 and 0.3 that it is not snowy. The interest rate in the economy is 3% in both years. HiSpeed will pay a dividend of $50 at the end of each year of operation. Required (9 marks) In 2014, the weather is snowy. Prepare a statement of financial position as at July 31, 2015, the end of HiSpeed’s first year of operations, and an income statement for the year.  (2 marks) What timing of revenue recognition is implicit in the income statement you have prepared in part (a)? When ideal conditions do not hold, is this timing of revenue recognition relevant? Is it reliable? Explain.  (6 marks)   Assume that HiSpeed paid the present value you calculated in part (a) for its equipment. Calculate HiSpeed’s net income for the year ended July 31, 2015 on a historical cost basis, assuming that equipment is depreciated on a straight-line basis. Under the more realistic assumption that ideal conditions do not hold, which measure of net income is most relevant? Which is most reliable? Why? Question 2 (18 marks) Prem has $2,000 that he wishes to invest for one year. He has narrowed his choices down to one of the following two actions: i: Buy bonds of X Ltd., a company that has a very high debt-to-equity ratio. These bonds pay 8% interest, unless X defaults, in which case Prem will receive…

Attachments:

accounting theory exam 494297

This assignment is already given to Speccy- The Professor

Document Preview:

ABSTRACT. Double-entry accounting, with its method for the objective calculation of profits and system of capital accounting, is often seen as closely linked with our modern-day system of capitalism. Questions regarding the role of profits are at the center of many debates on “business ethics.” Luca Pacioli, a 15th century Franciscan friar, is recognized as the “father of accounting” because he published the first description of the double-entry system. However, Pacioli’s “ethical” views have not been as broadly recognized. The main purpose of this paper is to present and discuss Pacioli’s views on the conduct of business enterprise and the pursuit of business profits. Two years after Columbus first arrived in the Americas, and almost 50 years before Copernicus’ theory that the earth revolves around the sun was first published, a Franciscan friar by the name of Luca Pacioli published his Summa de Arithmetica, Geometrica, Proportioni et Proportionalita. While Pacioli’s Summa was primarily a treatise on mathematics, it also included a section describing the “Venetian” – or, what is now commonly known as the “double-entry” – method of bookkeeping. The double-entry system, the description of which was first published by Pacioli, continues to this day to serve as the foundation of modern accounting systems. Based on his articulation of the double-entry method of bookkeeping in his Summa, Pacioli is sometimes described as “the father of accounting” (Hatfield, 1924; Taylor, 1942; Langer, 1958; Nakanishi, 1979; Stevelinck, 1986, 1994; McMickle and Vangermersch, 1987; Weis and Tinius, 1991a, b) and “the father of the balance sheet” (Journal of Accountancy, 1977). However, some accounting theorists argue that Pacioli’s most important contribution to the world of modern business, through his published description of the double-entry system, lies in documenting the method for rendering the “profits” of a business enterprise to be objectively calculable. Thus, perhaps, Pacioli…

accounting theory graham et al 494299

Please make one-page summary and discussion for your opinions on the current practice after reading the article written by Graham et al.

Document Preview:

Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Value Destruction and Financial Reporting Decisions John R Graham; Campbell R Harvey; Shiva Rajgopal Financial Analysts Journal; Nov/Dec 2006; 62, 6; ABI/INFORM Global pg. 27 Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission. Reproduced with permission of the copyright owner. Further reproduction prohibited without permission.?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting theory paper 494300

Please read the article attached, and answer the following questions. YOU SHOULD REFER THE ARTICLE TO ANSWER THE QUESTIONS.

1. Discuss the FASB’s standard setting process. You should summarize what the article discussed for the process, and then should provide your opinions.

2. What is XBRL? Please discuss for the SEC’s position on the adoption of XBRL.

3. Please discuss the roles of DCF in SEC

Document Preview:

14 JULY 2013 /THE CPA JOURNAL In Focus Updates from FASB and the SEC Leslie F. Seidman ? Paul A. Beswick ? Standards Setting, Outreach, and Convergence Projects eslie F. Seidman presided as FASB chair from December 2010 to June 2013 and served two terms as a FASB board member since July 2003. Prior to her appointment as chair, Seidman first served as a FASB industry fellow, later as a project manager, and then as assistant director of research and technical activities. Before joining FASB, she set accounting policies for J. P. Morgan & Co. (now JPMorgan Chase) and worked as a member of Ernst & Young’s audit staff. Paul A. Beswick is the SEC’s chief accountant. The Office of the Chief Accountant (OCA) is responsible for establishing accounting and auditing policy at the SEC. Beswick oversees the SEC’s work with private-sector accounting organizations, such as FASB; he also serves as an observer to FASB’s Emerging Issues Task Force (EITF). Prior to joining the SEC, Beswick was a partner at Ernst & Young. On May 2, 2013, Seidman and Beswick presented the opening remarks at Baruch College’s 12th Annual Financial Reporting Conference, discussing recent developments at FASB and the SEC, respectively. The following is an edited transcript of their remarks delivered at the conference. L LESLIE F. SEIDMAN FASB Chair This spring, FASB is celebrating its 40th anniversary, and we are here to stay. FASB was created in response to calls for greater independence and accountability in the development of accounting standards. We’ve had six chairmen over those 40 years, and although each of us has clearly introduced new ideas about processes and priorities, two things have remained constant: 1) our commitment to developing standards that benefit investors by providing a clear window into the financial condition and performance of the companies in which they are invested or they seek to invest in, and 2) our commitment to a transparent, collaborative process that involves all of our…

Attachments:

accounting week 4 assignment 494302

Do the following:

Write a 500 word essay discussing the attached WellCare of Kentucky Managed Care Contract while

answering the following questions:

What is the function of the contract

What are the terms of the contract

Why is it important to specify the terms of the contract

Who monitors and evaluates the contracts

What is the process for monitoring and evaluating the contracts

Use MS Word or WordPad to complete your assignment

Document Preview:

Medicaid Managed Care Contract WellCare of Kentucky, Inc.Table of Contents 1. Preamble 2. Definitions 3. Abbreviations and Acronyms 4. Contractor Terms 4.1 Contractor Representations and Warranties 4.2 Organization and Valid Authorization 4.3 Licensure of the Contractor – To Be Supplemented 4.4 Fiscal Solvency 4.5 Licensure of Providers 4.6 Ownership or Controlling Interest/Fraud and Abuse 4.7 Pending or Threatened Litigation 5. Contractor Functions 5.1 Performance Standards 5.2 Administration and Management 5.3 Delegations of Authority 5.4 Contractor Conformance with Applicable Law, Policies and Procedures 6. Department Policies and Procedures 6.1 Commonwealth and Federal Law 6.2 Nondiscrimination and Affirmative Action 6.3 Employment Practices 6.4 Governance 6.5 Access to Premises 7. Subcontracts 7.1 Subcontractor Indemnity 7.2 Requirements 7.3 Disclosure of Subcontractor 7.4 Remedies 8. Contract Term 8.1 Term 8.2 Effective Date for Payment 8.3 Social Security 8.4 Contractor Attestation 9. Readiness Review 10. Organization 10.1 Administration/Staffing 111. Capitation Payment Information 11.1 Monthly Payment 11.2 Payment in Full 11.3 Payment Adjustments 11.4 Contractor Recoupment from Member for Fraud, Waste and Abuse 12. Rate Component 12.1 Calculation of Rates 12.2 Rate Adjustments 12.3 Risk Adjustments 12.4 Rate Proposals 12.5 Physician Compensation Plans 12.6 Contractor Provider Payments 13. Service Area 14. Contractor’s Financial Security Obligations 14.1 Solvency Requirements and Protections 14.2 Contractor Indemnity 14.3 Insurance 14.4 Advances, Distributions and Loans 14.5 Accumulated Fund Deficit 14.6 Provider Risks 15. Third Party Resources 15.1 Coordination of Benefits (COB) 15.2 Third Party Liability 16. Management Information System 16.1 Contractor MIS Requirements 16.2 Member Subsystem 16.3 Third Party Liability (TPL) Subsystem…

Attachments:

accounting wk 5 break even calculations 494303

Hello,

I have attached an excel spreedsheet with three questions to the problem. Please let me know if you can assit me in finding the solution as a lesson.

Document Preview:

Capital Intensive Method Labor Intensive Method Show your work with the appropriate calculations in the cells a) Calculate the estimated break-even point in annual unit sales of the new product if the Sanchez Company uses the: b) Determine annual unit sales volume at which the Sanchez Company would be indifferent between the two manufacturing methods c) Explain the circumstance under which the Sanchez Company should employ each of the two manufacturing methods The Sanchez Company has decided to introduce a new product. The new product can be manufactured by either a capital-intensive method or a labor-intensive method. The manufacturing method will not affect the quality of the product. The estimated manufacturing costs by the two methods are as follows: Capital-Intensive Direct Materials 5$ per unit Direct Labor 6$ per unit Variable Overhead $3 per unit Fixed Manufacturing Costs $2,508,000 Labor Intensive Direct Materials 5.5$ per unit Direct Labor 8$ per unit Variable Overhead $4.5 per unit Fixed Manufacturing Costs $1,538,000 The Martinez Company’s market research department has recommended an introductory unit sales price of $30. The incremental selling expenses are estimated to be $502,000 annually plus $2 for each unit sold, regardless of manufacturing method ??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting work 494304

There are 6 total questions for accounting……..You will see it when you open attached document that is attached. It a word document six different questions that needs to be solved

Document Preview:

1. (TCO 7) Elliot’s Escargots sells commercial and home snail extraction tools and serving pieces. Currently, the snail extraction line of products takes up approximately 50 percent of the company’s retail floor space. The CEO of Elliot’s wants to decide if the company should continue offering snail extraction tools or focus only on serving pieces. If the snail extraction tools are dropped, salaries and other direct fixed costs can be avoided and serving piece sales would increase by 13 percent. Allocated fixed costs are assigned based on relative sales.   Snail Extraction Serving     Tools Pieces Total Sales $1,200,000 $800,000 $2,000,000 Less cost of goods sold 700,000 500,000 1,200,000 Contribution margin 500,000 300,000 800,000 Less direct fixed costs:    Salaries 175,000 175,000 350,000  Other 60,000 60,000 120,000 Less allocated fixed costs:    Rent 14,118 9,882 24,000  Insurance 3,529 2,471 6,000  Cleaning 4,117 2,883 7,000  Executive salary 76,470 53,530 130,000  Other 7,058 4,942 12,000 Total costs 340,292 308,708 649,000 Net income $159,708  ($ 8,708)  $151,000 Prepare an incremental analysis in good form to determine the incremental effect on profit of discontinuing the snail extraction tool line. Paschal’s Parasailing Enterprises has estimated that fixed costs per month are $115,600 and variable cost per dollar of sales is $0.35 (6 points).   What is the break-even point per month in sales? What level of sales is needed for a monthly profit of $70,000? For the month of August, Paschal’s anticipates sales of $600,000. What is the expected level of profit? 3. (TCO 6) Princess Cruise Lines has the following service departments; concierge, valet, and maintenance.  Expense for these departments are allocated to Mediterranean and Trans Atlantic cruises.  Expenses for the departments are totaled (both variable and components are combined) and as follows:  …

Attachments:

accounting worksheet 494305

Course: Healthcare for Financial Accounting

Review Exhibit 9-2 in Ch. 9 of Health Care Finance, regarding annualizing calculations and positions.

Complete the Axia Material: Annualizing Staffing worksheet by determining the physician practice staffing needs

Calculate the staffing factor.

Post your assignment as an attachment.

Worsheet and Chapters Attached (IF NEEDED) Week 4

No Plagiarism

Document Preview:

Associate Level Material Annualizing Staff Consult Ch. 9 of Health Care Finance and other outside sources to complete the worksheet. Part I: Taking information for the following scenario, complete the table accordingly by listing the number of days next to each category. Remember, a business year is divided into quarters. Therefore, when calculating a business year, you must divide the year into 52 weeks, which creates 13 months of 28 days, or 4 weeks. This translates into 4 quarters of 91 days, as there are 364 days in a business year. You are the office manager for a site the physician group owns. You are working on the budget for next year. Your boss has asked you to annualize staff at both sites, because the second site’s office manager is on family leave. You agree to do both sites. To annualize the staffing, you must convert the staff’s net paid days worked to a factor. Both offices are open and staffed 7 days a week, per the agreement with two managed care plans. The physicians’ group offers the following paid days for each full-time employee after 3 years of service: 8 holidays, 5 sick days, 15 vacation days, 3 personal holidays, and 3 education days. For FTEs over 1 year of service but less than 3 years, the physician group offers the following paid days: 8 holidays, 5 sick days, 7 vacation days, 2 personal holidays, and 1 education day. Site 1: All employees have been employed for more than 3 years. Site 2: All employees have been employed for less than 3 years, but more than 1 year. Compute net paid days worked for a full-time employee in the physicians’ group. CATEGORY OF DAYS?NUMBER OF DAYS: Site 1?NUMBER OF DAYS: Site 2??Total days: business year????Less 2 days off per week????Number of paid days per year????Less paid days not worked: ?? Holidays???? Personal holidays???? Sick days???? Education days???? Vacation days????Total nonproductive days????Net productive days???? Part II: Convert net paid days worked to a factor to…

accounting worksheet assignment 494307

Assignment: Computing Book Depreciation

Complete the table by defining the five methods of computing book depreciation.

Write an explanation for why it is important for a health care facility or physician practice to pay attention to depreciation more than a computer software business (150 words or better).

Post assignment as an attachment. No Plagiarism.

Document Preview:

Associate Level Material Assignment Form Use the following form to address the five methods of computing book depreciation for health care organizations: QUESTION?ANSWER – Do not forget to list references at the bottom of the paper. Write a minimum of 30 words for each area listed.??Straight Line Depreciation: No salvage Salvage? ??Accelerated Book Depreciation: Sum of Years’ Digits Method???Accelerated Book Depreciation: Double Declining Balance Method???Accelerated Book Depreciation: 150% Declining Balance Method???Accelerated Book Depreciation: Units of Production Method???Why is it important for a hospital to pay attention to depreciation more than a computer software company? ??? References

Attachments:

accounting please help 494312

Week One Exercise Assignment Basic Accounting Equations 1. Recognition of normal balances The following items appeared in the accounting records of Triguero’s, a retail music store that also sponsors concerts. Classify each of the items as an asset, liability; revenue; or expense from the company’s viewpoint. Also indicate the normal account balance of each item. a. Amounts paid to a mall for rent. b. Amounts to be paid in 10 days to suppliers. c. A new fax machine purchased for office use. d. Land held as an investment. e. Amounts due from customers. f.

Document Preview:

Week One Exercise Assignment Basic Accounting Equations 1. Recognition of normal balances The following items appeared in the accounting records of Triguero’s, a retail music store that also sponsors concerts. Classify each of the items as an asset, liability; revenue; or expense from the company’s viewpoint. Also indicate the normal account balance of each item. a. Amounts paid to a mall for rent. b. Amounts to be paid in 10 days to suppliers. c. A new fax machine purchased for office use. d. Land held as an investment. e. Amounts due from customers. f. Daily sales of merchandise sold. g. Promotional costs to publicize a concert. h. A long-term loan owed to Citizens Bank. i. The albums, tapes, and CDs held for sale to customers. 2. Basic journal entries The following transactions pertain to the Jennifer Royall Company: May 1 Jennifer Royall invested cash of $25,000 and land valued at $15,000 into the business. 5 Provided $1,000 of services to Jason Ratchford, a client, on account. 9 Paid $1,250 of salaries to an employee. 14 Acquired a new computer for $4,200, on account. 20 Collected $800 from Jason Ratchford for services provided on May 5. 24 Borrowed $2,500 from BestBanc by securing a six-month loan. Prepare journal entries (and explanations) to record the preceding transactions and events. 3. Balance sheet preparation. The following data relate to Preston Company as of December 31, 20XX: Building $40,000 Accounts receivable $24,000 Cash 21,000 Loan payable 30,000 J. Preston, Capital 65,000 Land 21,000 Accounts payable ? Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 20XX. (See Exhibit 1.1 and 1.4) 4. Basic transaction processing. On November 1 of the current year, Richard Simmons established a sole proprietorship. The following transactions occurred during the month: 1: Simmons invested $32,000 into the business for $32,000 in common stock. 2: Paid $5,000 to acquire a used minivan. 3: Purchased $1,800 of office furniture…

Attachments:

accounts 494314

3. Complete the following balance sheet for the Davenport Limited using the following information: Debt to Assets = 50 percent Quick Ratio = 1.2 Asset Turnover = 5x Fixed Asset Turnover = 12.037x Current Ratio = 2 Average Collection Period = 16.837 days CSoash   Current Liabilities   Receivables   Bonds Payable   Inventory   Total Liabilities   Total Current Assets   Net Worth   Plant and Equipment     Total Assets 348,000 Total Liabilities & Net Worth   7. Stuandlu, Corp have financing needs for $385,000 in Assets for the new dog treat company they started.

Document Preview:

3. Complete the following balance sheet for the Davenport Limited using the following information: Debt to Assets = 50 percent Quick Ratio = 1.2 Asset Turnover = 5x Fixed Asset Turnover = 12.037x Current Ratio = 2 Average Collection Period = 16.837 days CSoash   Current Liabilities   Receivables   Bonds Payable   Inventory   Total Liabilities   Total Current Assets   Net Worth   Plant and Equipment     Total Assets 348,000 Total Liabilities & Net Worth   7. Stuandlu, Corp have financing needs for $385,000 in Assets for the new dog treat company they started. The low liquidity return on assets is likely to be 16% and the high liquidity return is likely to be 9%. Their financing options are short-term for 4% and long-term for 7%. They pay 38% in tax. What is the NI projected for the conservative, aggressive and low liquidity hybrid plan? 8. The Accidental Petroleum Company is trying to determine its weighted average cost of capital for use in making a number of investment decisions. The firm’s bonds were issued 6 years ago and have 14 years left until maturity. They carried an 8% coupon rate, and are currently selling for $910.00. The firm’s preferred stock carries a $3.10 dividend and is currently selling at $42.50 per share. Accidental’s investment banker has stated that issue costs for new preferred will be 50 cents per share. The firm has significant retained earnings, but will also need to sell new common stock to finance the projects it is now considering. Accidental Petroleum common stock is expected to pay a $1.75 per share dividend next year, and is expected to maintain an 8% growth rate for the foreseeable future. The stock is currently priced at $50 per share, but new common stock will have flotation costs of 70 cents per share. Calculate the costs of the various components of Accidental Petroleum’s capital (Kd, Kp, Ke, Kn). The firm’s tax rate is 30%.  9. The CPA practice of Knape, Knape & Knape is considering investing in…

Attachments:

accounts 205 ashford week 1 assignmnet 494315

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Week One Exercise Assignment Basic Accounting Equations 1. Recognition of normal balances The following items appeared in the accounting records of Triguero’s, a retail music store that also sponsors concerts. Classify each of the items as an asset, liability, revenue, or expense from the company’s viewpoint. Also indicate the normal account balance of each item. The albums, tapes, and CDs held for sale to customers. A long-term loan owed to Citizens Bank. Promotional costs to publicize a concert. Daily sales of merchandise sold, Amounts due from customers, Land held as an investment, A new fax machine purchased for office use. Amounts to be paid in 10 days to suppliers, Amounts paid to a mall for rent. 2. Basic journal entries The following April transactions pertain to the Jennifer Royall Company: Apr. 1 Jennifer Royall invested cash of $15,000 and land valued at $10,000 into the business. Apr. 5 Provided $1,200 of services to Jason Ratchford, a client, on account. Apr. 9 Paid $250 of salaries to an employee. Apr. 14 Acquired a new computer for $3,200, on account. Apr. 20 Collected $800 from Jason Ratchford for services provided on April 5. Apr. 24 Borrowed $7,500 from BestBanc by securing a six-month loan. Prepare journal entries (and explanations) to record the preceding transactions and events. 3. Balance sheet preparation. The following data relate to Preston Company as of December 31, 20XX: Building $44,000 Accounts receivable $24,000 Cash 17,000 Loan payable 30,000 J. Preston, Capital 65,000 Land 21,000 Accounts payable ? Prepare a balance sheet as of December 31, 20XX. (See Exhibit 1.1 and 1.4) 4. Basic transaction processing. On November 1 of the current year, Richard Parker established a sole proprietorship. The following transactions occurred during the month: 1: Parker invested $19,000 into the business for $19,000 in common stock. 2: Paid $9,000 to acquire a used minivan. 3: Purchased $1,800 of office…

Attachments:

accounts help 494317

I need following 3 problems completed –

1. Post your answers to BE4-12 on p. 176 of Financial Accounting in a word doc.

2. Complete E4-4 on p. 177 of Financial Accounting. Use the

templates in Appendix F and complete all three tabs.

Post the completed Appendix F as an attachment.

3.Complete the Comprehensive Problem on pp. 189 and 190 of

Financial Accounting.

Use the templates in Appendix G to complete the problem; complete

all six tabs.

Post the completed Appendix G as an attachment.

Document Preview:

c) Post Closing Trial Balance b) T Accounts a) Closing Entries DATE ACCOUNT TITLE AND EXPLANATION DEBIT CREDIT Service Revenue Totals Income Summary Retained Earnings Interest expense Depreciation expense Rent expense Salaries expense Retained earnings Dividends  Apr 30 Goode Company Post-Closing Trial Balance GOODE COMPANY Closing Entries at April 30, 2008 T ACCOUNTS Cash Accounts Receivable Prepaid Rent Equipment Accumulated Depreciation Notes Payable Accounts Payable Interest Payable Common Stock Adjusting Entries, Posting, and Preparing an Adjusted Trial Balance Closing Entries and a Post-closing Trial Balance Use this template to journalize the closing entries for Goode Company at April 30, 2008. Journalize Closing Entries Appendix F For Goode Company, use these T account templates to post the closing entries to Income Summary and Retained Earnings. Post Closing Entries Prepare a Post-Closing Trial Balance Prepare a post-closing trial balance at April 30, 2008 for Goode Company.You can place summation formulas to compute totals at the end of debit and credit columns. Otherwise, you can compute totals using a calculator, then enter totals directly. Income Summary Associate Level Material ?4?/?30?/?2008 30.00 30.00 30.00 c) Post Closing Trial Balance b) T Accounts a) Closing Entries DATE ACCOUNT TITLE AND EXPLANATION DEBIT CREDIT Service Revenue Totals Income Summary Retained Earnings Interest expense Depreciation expense Rent expense Salaries expense Retained earnings Dividends  Apr 30 Goode Company Post-Closing Trial Balance GOODE COMPANY Closing Entries at April 30, 2008 T ACCOUNTS Cash Accounts Receivable Prepaid Rent Equipment Accumulated Depreciation Notes Payable Accounts Payable Interest Payable Common Stock Adjusting Entries, Posting, and Preparing an Adjusted Trial Balance Closing Entries and a Post-closing Trial Balance Use…

for accountsguru 494318

Week 4 Assignment 2 David Bradley ACC 201 Principles of Financial Accounting Instructor: Phillip Sarakatsannis April 3, 2013 Week 4, Assignment 2 Read ATC 8-4 in Chapter 8 and write a memo describing the advantages and disadvantages of organizational forms. You may research other sources regarding accounting internal controls. The paper should be at least 400 words and should include your personal observations and conclusions. References RUNNING HEAD: 4.

Document Preview:

Week 4 Assignment 2 David Bradley ACC 201 Principles of Financial Accounting Instructor: Phillip Sarakatsannis April 3, 2013 Week 4, Assignment 2 Read ATC 8-4 in Chapter 8 and write a memo describing the advantages and disadvantages of organizational forms. You may research other sources regarding accounting internal controls. The paper should be at least 400 words and should include your personal observations and conclusions. References RUNNING HEAD: 4.2 1 WEEK 4, ASSIGNMENT 2 2??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

the brand toy inc makes a line of doll dress sewing kit the demand for doll is incre 492899

management of this company need assistance to determined the best sale and production mix for the company yr here is the data/ product marcy- next yr unit=26k selling price per unit=35k direct material 3.50 cents direct laboe= 4.60 cents/ product tina- next yr 42k per unit selling price= 24k direct material = 2.30 cents direct labor 3.00/ cari product 40k selling price = 22k direct material4.50 cents; direct labor= 8.40 cents/ lenny product- 45k selling price 18k direct material 3.10 direct labor 6.99/ sewing kit 450k selling price per unit 14k direct material 1.50 cents direct labor 2.49cents/ the company plant has a capacity of 150k direct labor hrd per yr on a single shift bases. this company present staff and equipment can produce all 5 product. the direct labor rate of 12.00 per hr is expect to remain our chain during the coming yr. fix cost total 356k per yr variable cost are 4.00 direct labor hr. all of this company non manufacture cost are fixed. the company finish goods inventory can be ignored. question I ned to determined the contribution margin per direct labor hr expend on each product.. I need to prepare a schedule showing the total direct labor hrs that will be require to produce the unit estimate to be sold during the coming yr. I need to examine the data/ how would u allocate the 150k direct labor hrs of capicaity to this company different product.. what is the highest price in term of rate per hr that this company should be willing to pay for additional capacity 4 added direct labor time. I need to explain in ways that this company might be able to obtain additional output so it would not have to leave some demand for its product unsatisy can u assit me with the asnswer jac dumb

incremental analysis accepting a special order 493062

Please see attached.

Document Preview:

Sutherland manufactures and sells 110,000 laser printers each month. A principal component part in each printer is its paper feed drive. Sutherland’s plant currently has the monthly capacity to produce 150,000 drives. The unit costs of manufacturing these drives (up to 150,000 per month) are as follows:??     ? ? ??  Variable costs per unit:? ? ??      Direct materials?$?45  ??      Direct labor? ?25  ??      Variable manufacturing overhead? ?5  ??  Fixed costs per month:? ? ??      Fixed manufacturing overhead?$?1,430,000  ????   Desk-Mate Printers has offered to buy 20,000 paper feed drives from Sutherland to be used in its own printers.??   a.?Compute the average unit cost of manufacturing each paper feed drive assuming that Sutherland manufactures only enough drives for its own laser printers. Show your work on how you came up with answer.??     Average per-unit manufacturing cost?$  ??   b.?Compute the incremental unit cost of producing an additional paper feed drive. Show your work on how you came up with answer.??     Incremental unit cost?$  ??   c.?Compute the per-unit sales price that Sutherland should charge Desk-Mate to earn $500,000 in monthly pretax profit on the sale of drives to Desk-Mate. Show your work on how you came up with answer.??     Unit sales price?$  ??

Attachments:

issuance of common stock 493699

On April 21, Killarny Enterprises acquired a large tract of land from McSwain Corporation. Killarny issued 1,400 shares of its $1 par value common stock to McSwain in exchange for the land.

(a) Prepare the journal entry to record this transaction by Killarny Enterprises, if the company’s stock is not publicly traded and the land has an appraised value of $110,000.

(b) Assume that on April 20, the Killarny stock traded on the New York Stock Exchange for $75 per share. The land has an appraised value of $110,000. Prepare the appropriate journal entry to record this exchange transaction by Killarny Enterprises.

(c) Suppose, instead, that Killarny sold 1,400 shares of stock on April 20 for $80 cash per share. The company then acquired the land from McSwain Corporation on April 21 for its appraised value. Prepare the journal entries for these two transactions by Killarny Enterprises.

(d) Determine the differences between the financial statement results in parts (a), (b), and (c). Explain why these differences occured.

Accounting for Cash Dividends

Lupinski Distributors has 1,000,000 shares of common stock outstanding. On January 11 of the current year, Lupinski declared a cash dividend of $0.20 per share, payable on March 9 to stockholders of record on February 12.

(a) When did this dividend become a liability to Lupinski?

(b) Prepare any journal entries required in Lupinski’s accounting records relating to this cash dividend on the following dates in the current year:

(1) January 11

(2) February 12

(3) March 9

(4) December 31

(c) What group of individuals authorized the declaration of this dividend?

(d) What general types of information must public companies regulated by the SEC disclose in their annual reports regarding their dividend policies? Why is this information important to potential investors?

accounting questions 494273

Accounting Questions
Question Detail:

This is due this Saturday at 10 am

See attached word document

ACT 5744

Fall 2013

Pick the best answer.

1. Carlton executed and delivered to Raymond a $1,000 negotiable note payable to Raymond or bearer. Raymond then negotiated it to Fred and endorsed it on the back by merely signing his name. Which of the following is a true statement?

a. The instrument is bearer paper, and Fred can convert it to order paper by writing pay to the order of Fred above Raymond s signature.

b. Raymond s endorsement was a special endorsement.

c. The instrument was initially bearer paper and cannot be converted to order paper.

d. Raymond s endorsement was necessary to Fred s qualification as a holder.

2. Under the Secured Transactions Article of the UCC, which of the following remedies is available to a secured creditor when a debtor fails to make a payment when due?

Proceed Obtain a General

against the Judgment against

Collateral__ the Debtor_

a. Yes Yes

b. Yes No

c. No No

d. No Yes

3. On July 27, 2011 Summerson sent Fallson a letter offering to sell Fallson a vacation home for $150,000. On August 2, 2011 Fallson replied by mail agreeing to buy the home for $145,000. Summerson did not reply to Fallson. Do Summerson and Fallson have a binding contract?

a. Yes, because Summerson s silence is an implied acceptance of Fallson s letter.

b. No, because Fallson failed to sign the letter that was sent by Fallson.

c. No, because Fallson s letter was a counteroffer.

d. Yes, because Summerson s offer was validly accepted.

4. Cindy, Odsen Corp. s agent, needs a written agency agreement to

a. Hire an attorney to collect a business debt owed Odsen.

b. Purchased an interest in undeveloped land for Odsen.

c. Retain an independent general contractor to renovate Odsen s office building.

d. Enter into a series of sales contracts on Odsen s behalf.

5. A party who filed a financing statement covering inventory on April 1, 2010 would have a superior interest to which of the following parties?

a. A holder of a mechanic s lien whose lien was filed on March 15, 2010.

b. A judgment lien creditor who filed its judgment on April 15, 2010.

c. A holder of a purchase money security interest in after-acquired inventory filed on March 20, 2010.

d. A purchaser in the ordinary course of business who purchased on April 10, 2010.

6. In determining whether the consideration requirement to form a contract has been satisfied, the consideration exchanged by the parties to the contract must be

a. Fair and reasonable under the circumstances.

b. Legally sufficient.

c. Exchanged simultaneously by the parties.

d. Of approximately equal value.

7. Pavers Roadway, Inc., contracts with Best Building Corporation to repave Best Building Corporation’s parking lot. The elements of a contract do not include

a. consideration.

b. contractual capacity.

c. legality.

d. practicality.

8. Holly writes a check on her account at Investment Bank to Jerry to pay a debt. Jerry negotiates the check by indorsement to Kelly, who negotiates the check by indorsement to Lisa, who presents it for payment to Interstate Bank. Holly is

not liable for payment under any circumstances.

primarily liable.

secondarily liable.

simultaneously liable.

9. Holly writes a check on her account at Investment Bank to Jerry to pay a debt. Jerry negotiates the check by indorsement to Kelly, who negotiates the check by indorsement to Lisa, who presents it for payment to Interstate Bank. If Investment Bank dishonors the check, Lisa can obtain payment from Jerry

if Lisa timely notifies Jerry.

only if Holly refuses to pay the check.

only if Holly and Kelly refuse to pay the check.

under no circumstances.

10. Nora enters into a contract with Owen’s Transport Company for the delivery of a shipment of fresh produce. If ambiguities appear in the contract, they will be construed against

a. the party who drafted the contract.

b. the party with the greater bargaining power.

c. the promisor.

d. the promisee.

11. On November 1, 2013, Ted sent by overnight mail a letter to Zena in which Ted offered to sell a rare vase. The offer requested that Zena s respond by telegram and that the response be sent on or before 5:00 p.m. on November 2, 2013. On November 2, 2013 at 3:00 p.m., Zena sent an acceptance by overnight mail. It did not reach Ted until November 5, 2013. Ted refused to complete the sale to Zena. Is there an enforceable contract?

a. No, because Zena did not accept by telegram.

b. No, because the offer required receipt of the acceptance within the time specified.

c. Yes, because the acceptance was effective when sent.

d. Yes, because the acceptance was made within the time specified.

12. Mary promises to pay her assistant Ned $10,000 in consideration of the services he provided over the years. Mary never pays Ned. Mary is

a. liable for payment of the $10,000.

b. liable only if Ned still works for Mary.

c. not liable, because the consideration is in the past.

d. not liable, because the consideration was unintentional.

13. Collection of EZ Sales Company’s debt to First Storage Corporation is barred by a statute of limitations. A new promise by EZ to pay the debt

a. may become enforceable if payments are made.

b. must be in writing.

c. requires consideration.

d. will not revive the obligation.

14. Auto Body Repair Shop (ABRS) promises to pay Ben $1,000 a week to work for ABRS. Ben accepts and quits his job with Car Care Service. ABRS fails to provide a job for Ben. Ben has a cause of action based on

a. an illusory promise.

b. a release.

c. past consideration.

d. promissory estoppel.

15. Pat, a world famous musician and composer, agrees to give ten piano lessons to Quinn in exchange for $1,000. Pat’s attempt to delegate his contract to Ruth, an inexperienced pianist, will probably be

a. permitted because contracts may be freely delegated.

b. permitted because the contract is concerned with music lessons.

c. prohibited because contracts may not be freely delegated.

d. prohibited because Pat and Ruth have very different skill levels.

16. Jill and Karl contract for the sale of Jill’s horse for $1,000. Unknown to either party, the horse has died. Karl is

a. entitled to another horse of equivalent value.

b. not required to pay due to the mutual mistake.

c. not required to pay due to the unilateral mistake.

d. required to pay because he assumed the risk the horse might die.

17. Alpha Company offers to sell Beta, Inc., 1,000 computers for a $1 million, states that the offer will be open for six days, and asks for a response by fax. On the fourth day, Beta sends an acceptance to Alpha via the mail, which is received on the sixth day. In this deal

a. a contract is formed.

b. no contract is formed, because Alpha asked for a response by fax.

c. no contract is formed, because Alpha received the acceptance late.

d. no contract is formed, because Beta sent the acceptance late.

18. Holly writes a check on her account at Investment Bank to Jerry to pay a debt. Jerry negotiates the check by indorsement to Kelly, who negotiates the check by indorsement to Lisa, who presents it for payment to Interstate Bank. If Investment Bank dishonors the check, Lisa can obtain payment from Kelly

if Lisa timely notifies Kelly.

only if Holly refuses to pay the check.

only if Holly and Jerry refuse to pay the check.

under no circumstances.

19. Furnishings, Inc., agrees to lease a desk to Better Resources, Inc. (BRI), which requests that the desk be left outside City Warehouse for BRI to pick up. Before BRI retrieves the desk, it is stolen. The loss is suffered by

a. A-1 Furnishings and BRI, but not City Warehouse.

b. A-1 Furnishings, BRI, and City Warehouse.

c. A-1 Furnishings only.

d. BRI only.

20. John, the secured party, perfects its security interest by filing a financing statement. What is the effect of perfection of John s security interest?

a. The secured party has priority in the collateral over most creditors who acquire a security interest in the same collateral after the filing.

b. The security interest becomes enforceable against the debtor.

c. The debtor is protected against all other parties who acquire an interest in the collateral after the filing.

d. None of the above.

21. Ample Country Stables contracts to buy 1,000 horseshoes from Blacksmith, Inc., for $1 per shoe. When the market price decreases to 50 cents per shoe, Ample refuses to go through with the deal. Blacksmith can recover

a. $1,500.

b. $1,000.

c. $500.

d. 0.

22. Farm Equipment, Inc., makes farming machinery. Gail discovers that her Farm Equipment tractor is defective and sues the maker for product liability based on negligence. To win, Gail must show that

a. Farm Equipment sold the tractor to Gail.

b. Gail knew and appreciated the risk caused by the defect.

c. Gail suffered an injury caused by the defect.

d. the “defect” was a commonly known danger.

23. Ida signs a check payable to Jane and gives it to her. Jane indorses the back, and transfers the check to Kyle. To negotiate the check to Leo, Kyle must

a. indorse “Kyle” on the back and deliver the check to Leo.

b. indorse “pay to the order of Leo [signed] Kyle” on the back and deliver the check to Leo.

c. only deliver the check to Leo.

d. transfer the check through the drawee bank.

24. Local Appliance Store, the secured party, sells a refrigerator to John, a consumer, for the use of John s family. John signs a sales agreement, a loan note, and a security agreement. Local Appliance Store fails to file either the security agreement or a financing statement with the secretary of state. Which of the following statements is accurate?

a. The secured party has priority in the collateral over most creditors who subsequently acquire a security interest in the same collateral.

b. The security interest is not enforceable against the debtor.

c. The security interest is not enforceable against subsequent creditors.

d. The assets subject to the security interest cannot become part of the bankruptcy estate in the event the creditor files an involuntary petition against the debtor.

25. Ruth, a minor, charges groceries at Sam’s Mini-Mart. Two days later, Ruth disaffirms the purchase. Ruth owes Sam’s Mini Mart

the reasonable value of the groceries.

the retail value of the groceries.

the wholesale value of the groceries.

26. With regard to a prior perfected security interest in goods for which a financing statement has been filed, which of the following parties is most likely to have a superior interest in the same collateral?

a. The trustee in bankruptcy of the debtor.

b. Lien creditors of the debtor.

c. A buyer of goods in the ordinary course of business.

d. A subsequent buyer of consumer goods who purchased the goods from another consumer.

27. Beth is convicted of arson for burning down her warehouse.. On an application for insurance from Cover-All Insurance Company on a new building, in answer to a question about prior convictions, Beth does not disclose her conviction. This makes the contract

binding because the omission is immaterial to Cover-All’s decision to issue coverage.

binding due to Cover-All’s failure to discover Beth’s conviction.

voidable by Beth because the omission is immaterial to Cover-All’s decision to issue coverage.

voidable by Cover-All because the omission is material to its decision to issue coverage.

Fact Pattern for Question 28

Fred enters into a contract under Gene’s threats. Later, Fred refuses to perform, claiming that he acted under duress.

28. Refer to Fact Pattern B. Gene sues to enforce the contract. In order for Fred to establish duress, Gene must have threatened

a. a civil suit.

b. a lost opportunity.

c. a social snubbing.

d. a wrongful act.

e. none of the above.

29. Century Properties. Inc., and Dandy Capital Corporation enter into a contract for a sale of land. To be enforceable, the contract must be in writing

Only if the land is valued at $50 or more.

Only if the land is valued at $500 or more.

Only if the land is valued at $5,000 or more.

In any case.

30. Timber Trees, Inc., and Land Corporation enter into an oral contract for Timber Trees, Inc. to sell its lumber mill to Land Corporation . Before Land Corporation takes possession, this contract is enforceable by

either party.

neither party.

Timber Trees only.

Land Corporation only because only the buyer can get specific performance.

31. Lola agrees to pay Mira’s debt to New Sales Corporation if Mira does not pay it. Lola does not get any personal benefit for or from the agreement. To be enforceable against Lola, the promise must be in writing

if the debt is paid by Mira.

if the debt is for at least $50.

if the debt is for at least $500.

in any case.

Fact Pattern for Question 32

Macro Marketing, Inc. (Macro), and National Food Corporation (NFC) discuss the terms of a contract under which NFC is to provide personal services to Macro. The next day, Macro faxes NFC a memo on Macro’s letterhead that summarizes the items on which they agreed, including a two-year term. NFC immediately begins to perform, but Macro refuses to pay. NFC promptly institutes a law suit seeking damages.

32. Refer to Fact Pattern for question 32. The contract between Macro and NFC is

subject to the Statute of Frauds collateral-promise provision, and is probably unenforceable.

subject to the Statute of Frauds services rule, and is probably enforceable.

barred by the statute of limitations, and is therefore probably unenforceable.

subject to the Statute of Frauds one-year rule, and is probably unenforceable.

Fact Pattern for Question 33

Jeff and Kris sign a written contract for the sale of Jeff’s Koffee Kiosk to Kris. The parties intend their written contract to be a final statement of the terms of their agreement.

33. Refer to Fact Pattern for question 33. Kris later disputes some of the provisions of the deal with Jeff. The dispute results in litigation, and the court finds the terms of the agreement are ambiguous. The court will most likely

exclude evidence that buttresses the written terms.

exclude evidence that contradicts the written terms.

allow evidence that explains the terms.

dismiss the action because there was a lack of mutual asset and no contract was formed.

34. Tom dies owning stock as joint tenant with right of survivorship with his son, having bank accounts in his name in trust for his daughter, and owning real estate as tenants by the entirety with his wife. The trustee of Tom s revocable trust holds title the rest of his assets. Under the terms of the revocable trust, all assets of the trust will be distributed to Tom s son and daughter on Tom s death. Tom s wife, son and daughter survive him. Under the terms of Tom s will, Tom leaves all of his property to his mother, who also survived him. Tom died

a. intestate.

b. without any probate assets.

c. with a last will that will controls the disposition of his assets.

d. None of the above.

35. Manny, as buyer, wants to transfer his rights under a written real estate contract with Nila, as seller, to Opie. To ensure that the transfer of rights is valid, Manny must

have this right expressly stated in the contract.

file a notice of assignment in the public records.

have the contract recorded in the public records.

none of the choices.

36. Rural Development Corporation (RDC) and Sid enter into a contract for the clear-cutting of RDC’s fifty-acre tract for which RDC agrees to pay Sid. Sid is the owner of Timber Logging Company. Sid transfers his duty to log the tract under the contract to Timber Logging Company. Timber Logging Company is

a delegatee and is subject to the terms of the agreement between RDC and Sid.

a delagetee and is not entitled to collect under the contract from RDC for services provided by Timber.

an obligee and is not required to perform under the contract.

a prohibitee.

37. Mke, a physician, renders aid to Nancy, who is injured and unconscious after an avalanche. Mike can recover the cost of the aid from Nancy

even if Nancy was not aware of the aid when it was given.

only if Nancy recovers because of the aid.

only if Noel was aware of the aid at the time it was given.

under no circumstances.

38. Pat, a world famous musician, agrees to give ten piano lessons to Quinn in exchange for $1,000. Pat’s attempt to transfer his contract duties to Ruth, an inexperienced pianist, will probably be

permitted because contracts may be freely delegated.

prohibited in this case unless the contract expressly permits delegation.

permitted if the contract is silent on the issue.

prohibited in any case.

39. Chaz and Dolly enter into a five year contract under which Chaz agrees to provide maintenance services for Dolly’s Ski Resort. Chaz transfers his rights and obligations under the contract to Mark. Mark

performs

under the contract, and Dolly is aware of the Mark s performance of the contract. However, Dolly refuses to pay Mark. Assuming Mark s services are properly performed and Mark sues Dolly, Mark

a. will be successful in enforcing the contract if performance depends on the personal skills or talents of the obligor.

b. will probably not be able to recover under the express terms of the contract.

.

c. may be able to recover the value of his services.

d. may not recover.

40. On August 1, 2010 Delia and Edwin entered into an agreement for Edwin to lease Delia s country home for two months during the following summer for $1000 per month. Delia promised to vacate the property for Edwin by July 1, 2011 with the lease to begin on July 1, 2011. If these promises are not in writing, they are most likely

none of the above.

41. To avoid liability for intentional injuries, Power Corporation includes in its contracts an exculpatory clause. This is

enforceable if the other parties are protected from liability.

enforceable if the other parties sign the contract.

enforceable if the other parties have equal bargaining power.

not enforceable.

42. MicroCorp hires Nick to work for one month at a weekly salary of $400. A MicroCorp representative orally agrees two weeks later to double Nick’s salary. This agreement is

enforceable because an employment contract is an adhesion contract.

enforceable because the parties have executed an accord and satisfaction.

unenforceable because Nick has incurred no additional detriment in exchange for MicroCorp’s promise.

unenforceable because Nick’s performance is uncertain.

43. Karen writes on a piece of paper, “I owe you $600,” signs it, and gives it to Lou. This instrument is

nonnegotiable, because it does not recite any consideration.

nonnegotiable, because it does not state any conditions to payment.

d. none of the above.

44. Pam signs an instrument payable to the order of Quick Credit, Inc., that allows a holder to demand payment of the entire amount due, with interest, if Pam fails to make a payment. This instrument is

nonnegotiable, because a holder can move up the payment date.

nonnegotiable, because moving up the payment date is conditional.

nonnegotiable, because the exact payment date cannot be determined from the face of the instrument.

45. Wyatt inherits a promissory note from Xena, his aunt. Wyatt has no notice that the note has been dishonored or is overdue. Wyatt has the rights of

a holder and an HDC.

a holder only.

an HDC only.

neither a holder nor an HDC.

46. Kettlecorn Investment Bank, Inc., and Lone Bank are secured parties with security interests in property owned by Metal Fabrication Corporation. Priority between these security interests is generally determined by

the amount of the claim.

the custom in the trade.

the time of perfection.

the date of the loan.

47. General Leasing Company (GLC) buys equipment for use as inventory, borrowing $1,000,000 from Helpful Finance Corporation (Helpful), with Helpful taking back a security interest in the equipment. The next day, GLC borrows $500,000 from Interstate Bank (Interstate), which loan is also secured by a security interest in the equipment. GLC defaults on both loans. Suppose that two weeks after GLC takes possession of the equipment, Helpful and Interstate file financing statements, with Interstate filing first. In that circumstance, the party with priority to the equipment is

Helpful and Interstate proportionately.

Helpful only.

Interstate Bank only

48. Which is not allowed as a federal exemption under the Federal Bankruptcy Code?

  1. A specified amount of equity in one motor vehicle.
  2. Unemployment compensation.
  3. A specified amount of value in books and tools of one s trade.
  4. All of the above are allowed.

49. Under the liquidation provisions of Chapter 7 of the Federal Bankruptcy Code, a debtor will be denied a discharge in bankruptcy if the debtor

  1. Fails to list a creditor.
  2. Owes alimony or child support.
  3. Cannot pay administration expenses.
  4. Refuses to satisfactorily explain a loss of assets.

50. Which of the following transfers by a debtor, within 90 days prior to the filing for bankruptcy, could be set aside as a preferential payment?

  1. Making a gift to charity.
  2. Paying a business utility bill.
  3. Borrowing money from a bank secured by a mortgage on the debtor s business property.
  4. Prepaying an installment loan on inventory.

Attachments:

accounting questions 494274

1. (TCO 7) Elliot’s Escargots sells commercial and home snail extraction tools and serving pieces. Currently, the snail extraction line of products takes up approximately 50 percent of the company’s retail floor space. The CEO of Elliot’s wants to decide if the company should continue offering snail extraction tools or focus only on serving pieces. If the snail extraction tools are dropped, salaries and other direct fixed costs can be avoided and serving piece sales would increase by 13 percent. Allocated fixed costs are assigned based on relative sales.

Document Preview:

1. (TCO 7) Elliot’s Escargots sells commercial and home snail extraction tools and serving pieces. Currently, the snail extraction line of products takes up approximately 50 percent of the company’s retail floor space. The CEO of Elliot’s wants to decide if the company should continue offering snail extraction tools or focus only on serving pieces. If the snail extraction tools are dropped, salaries and other direct fixed costs can be avoided and serving piece sales would increase by 13 percent. Allocated fixed costs are assigned based on relative sales.   Snail Extraction Serving     Tools Pieces Total Sales $1,200,000 $800,000 $2,000,000 Less cost of goods sold 700,000 500,000 1,200,000 Contribution margin 500,000 300,000 800,000 Less direct fixed costs:    Salaries 175,000 175,000 350,000  Other 60,000 60,000 120,000 Less allocated fixed costs:    Rent 14,118 9,882 24,000  Insurance 3,529 2,471 6,000  Cleaning 4,117 2,883 7,000  Executive salary 76,470 53,530 130,000  Other 7,058 4,942 12,000 Total costs 340,292 308,708 649,000 Net income $159,708  ($ 8,708)  $151,000 Prepare an incremental analysis in good form to determine the incremental effect on profit of discontinuing the snail extraction tool line. Paschal’s Parasailing Enterprises has estimated that fixed costs per month are $115,600 and variable cost per dollar of sales is $0.35 (6 points).   What is the break-even point per month in sales? What level of sales is needed for a monthly profit of $70,000? For the month of August, Paschal’s anticipates sales of $600,000. What is the expected level of profit? 3. (TCO 6) Princess Cruise Lines has the following service departments; concierge, valet, and maintenance.  Expense for these departments are allocated to Mediterranean and Trans Atlantic cruises.  Expenses for the departments are totaled (both variable and components are combined) and as follows:  …

what distinguishes a merchandising business from a service business 494275

1. What distinguishes a merchandising business from a service business?

2. Can a business earn a gross profit but incur a net loss? Explain.

3. In computing the cost of merchandise sold, does each of the following items increase or decrease that cost? (a) freight, (b) beginning merchandise inventory,

(c) purchase discounts, (d) ending merchandise inventory

4. Describe how the periodic system differs from the perpetual system of accounting for merchandise inventory.

5. Differentiate between the multiple-step and the single-step forms of the income statement.

6. What are the major advantages and disadvantages of the single-step form of income statement compared to the multiple-step statement?

7. What type of revenue is reported in the Other income section of the multiple-step income statement?

8. Name at least three accounts that would normally appear in the chart of accounts

of a merchandising business but would not appear in the chart of accounts of a service business.

9. How are sales to customers using MasterCard and VISA recorded?

10. The credit period during which the buyer of merchandise is allowed to pay usually begins with what date?

11. What is the meaning of (a) 1/15, n/60; (b) n/30; (c) n/eom?

12. What is the nature of (a) a credit memo issued by the seller of merchandise, (b) a debit memo issued by the buyer of merchandise?

13. Who bears the freight when the terms of sale are (a) FOB shipping point, (b) FOB destination?

14. Business Outfitters Inc., which uses a perpetual inventory system, experienced a normal inventory shrinkage of $9,175. What accounts would be debited and credited to record the adjustment for the inventory shrinkage at the end of the accounting period?

15. Assume that Business Outfitters Inc. in Eye Opener 14 experienced an abnormal inventory shrinkage of $80,750. Business Outfitters Inc. has decided to record the abnormal inventory shrinkage so that it would be separately disclosed on the income statement. What account would be debited for the abnormal inventory shrinkage?

Attachments:

accounting questions 494276

Document Preview:

Assignment 2 Eye openers 1. Before inventory purchases are recorded, the receiving report should be reconciled to what documents? 2. What security measures may be used by retailers to protect merchandise inventory from customer theft? 3. Which inventory system provides the more effective means of controlling inventories (perpetual or periodic)? Why? 4. Why is it important to periodically take a physical inventory if the perpetual system is used? 5. Do the terms FIFO and LIFO refer to techniques used in determining quantities of the various classes of merchandise on hand? Explain. 6. Does the term last-in in the LIFO method mean that the items in the inventory are assumed to be the most recent (last) acquisitions? Explain. 7. If merchandise inventory is being valued at cost and the price level is decreasing, which of the three methods of costing—FIFO,LIFO, or average cost—will yield (a) the highest inventory cost,(b) the lowest inventory cost,(c) the highest gross profit, and (d) the lowest gross profit? 8. Which of the three methods of inventory costing—FIFO, LIFO, or average cost will in general yield an inventory cost most nearly approximating current replacement cost? 9. If inventory is being valued at cost and the price level is steadily rising, which of the three methods of costing—FIFO, LIFO, or average cost—will yield the lowest annual income tax expense? Explain. 10. Can a company change its method of costing inventory? Explain. 11. Because of imperfections, an item of merchandise cannot be sold at its normal selling price. How should this item be valued for financial statement purposes? 12. How is the method of determining the cost of the inventory and the method of valuing it disclosed in the financial statements? 13. The inventory at the end of the year was understated by $12,750. (a) Did the error cause an overstatement or an understatement of the gross profit for the year? (b) Which items on the balance sheet at the end of the year were…

accounting questions and exercises 494277

Please see attachment

Document Preview:

Answer eye openers 1. Does a discounted note payable provide credit without interest? Discuss. 2. Employees are subject to taxes withheld from their paychecks. a. List the federal taxes withheld from most employee paychecks. b. Give the title of the accounts credited by amounts withheld. 3. For each of the following payroll-related taxes, indicate whether there is a ceiling on the annual earnings subject to the tax: (a) federal income tax, (b) Medicare tax,(c) social security tax, (d) federal unemployment compensation tax. 4. Why are deductions from employees’ earnings classified as liabilities for the employer? 5. Taylor Company, with 20employees, is expanding operations. It is trying to decide whether to hire one full-time employee for $25,000 or two part-time employees for a total of $25,000. Would any of the employer’s payroll taxes discussed in this chapter have a bearing on this decision? Explain. 6. For each of the following payroll-related taxes, indicate whether they generally apply to (a) employees only, (b) employers only, or (c) both employees and employers: 1. Federal income tax 2. Medicare tax 3. Social security tax 4. Federal unemployment compensation tax 5. State unemployment compensation tax 7. What are the principal reasons for using a special payroll checking account? 8. In a payroll system, what types of input data are referred to as (a) constants and (b) variables? 9. Explain how a payroll system that is properly designed and operated tends to ensure that (a) wages paid are based on hours actually worked and (b) payroll checks are not issued to fictitious employees. 10. To match revenues and expenses properly, should the expense for employee vacation pay be recorded in the period during which the vacation privilege is earned or during the period in which the vacation is taken? Discuss. 11. Identify several factors that influence the future pension obligation of an employer under a defined benefit pension plan. 12. When…

accounting questions problems 494279

Exercise 10-11 Prepare a statement of stockholders’ equity [LO7] Power Drive Corporation designs and produces a line of golf equipment and golf apparel. Power Drive has 100,000 shares of common stock outstanding as of the beginning of 2012. Power Drive has the following transactions affecting stockholders’ equity in 2012. March 1    Issues 55,000 additional shares of $1 par value common stock for $52 per share. May 10    Repurchases 5,000 shares of treasury stock for $55 per share. June 1    Declares a cash dividend of $1.50 per share to all stockholders of record on June 15.

Document Preview:

Exercise 10-11 Prepare a statement of stockholders’ equity [LO7] Power Drive Corporation designs and produces a line of golf equipment and golf apparel. Power Drive has 100,000 shares of common stock outstanding as of the beginning of 2012. Power Drive has the following transactions affecting stockholders’ equity in 2012. March 1    Issues 55,000 additional shares of $1 par value common stock for $52 per share. May 10    Repurchases 5,000 shares of treasury stock for $55 per share. June 1    Declares a cash dividend of $1.50 per share to all stockholders of record on June 15.  (Hint: Dividends are not paid on treasury stock.) July 1    Pays the cash dividend declared on June 1. October 21    Reissues 2,500 shares of treasury stock purchased on May 10 for $60 per share. Power Drive Corporation has the following beginning balances in its stockholders’ equity accounts on January 1, 2012: common stock, $100,000; paid-in capital, $4,500,000; and retained earnings, $2,000,000. Net income for the year ended December 31, 2012, is $600,000. Required: Prepare the statement of stockholders’ equity for Power Drive Corporation for the year ended December 31, 2012. (Amounts to be deducted should be indicated with a minus sign. Leave no cells blank – be certain to enter “0” wherever required. Omit the “$” sign in your response.) POWER DRIVE CORPORATION Statement of Stockholders’ Equity For the year ended December 31, 2012   Common Stock Additional Paid-in Capital Retained Earnings Treasury Stock Total Stockholders’ Equity  Balance, January 1 $  100,000 $  4,500,000 $  2,000,000 $       0 $ 6,600,000    Issued common stock    Repurchased treasury stock    Cash dividends    Sold treasury stock    Net income      Balance, December 31 $ $ $ $ $     javascript:;check my…

Attachments:

accounting quiz 494281

Week 6 – Chapter 7 Pre- Quiz Study 15 QUESTIONS Question 1 Which of the following stages of the management decision-making process is improperly sequenced? Evaluate possible courses of action ? Make decision. Assign responsibility for the decision ? Identify the problem. Identify the problem ? Determine possible courses of action. Assign responsibility for decision ? Determine possible courses of action.

Document Preview:

Week 6 – Chapter 7 Pre- Quiz Study 15 QUESTIONS Question 1 Which of the following stages of the management decision-making process is improperly sequenced? Evaluate possible courses of action ? Make decision. Assign responsibility for the decision ? Identify the problem. Identify the problem ? Determine possible courses of action. Assign responsibility for decision ? Determine possible courses of action. Question 2 A segment has the following data: Sales $700,000 Variable expenses 300,000 Fixed expenses 550,000 What will be the incremental effect on net income if this segment is eliminated, assuming the fixed expenses will be allocated to profitable segments? $400,000 decrease cannot be determined from the data provided $5,000 decrease $400,000 increase Question 3 New Age Makeup produces face cream. Each bottle of face cream costs $10 to produce and can be sold for $13. The bottles can be sold as is, or processed further into sunscreen at a cost of $14 each. New Age Makeup could sell the sunscreen bottles for $23 each. Face cream must be processed further because its profit is $9 each. Face cream must not be processed further because costs increase more than revenue. Face cream must not be processed further because it decreases profit by $1 each. Face cream must be processed further because it increases profit by $3 each. Question 4 A company decided to replace an old machine with a new machine. Which of the following is considered a relevant cost? The book value of the old equipment Depreciation expense of the old equipment The current disposal price of the old equipment The loss on disposal of the old equipment Question 5 Incremental analysis would not be appropriate for: analysis of manufacturing variances. elimination of an unprofitable segment. an allocation of limited resource decision. a make or buy decision. Question 6 Sandusky Inc. has the following costs when producing 100,000 units: Variable…

Attachments:

accounting quiz and test 494282

I need help on an accounting quiz and test

Document Preview:

GLICKMAN – ACC111 End of Chapter 6 Test – (40 points) Name: _______________________________________ Please show all calculations!!! Morton Company uses the periodic inventory method for the year 20XX and had the following information. Units Cost Total Cost Jan 1 Beginning Inventory 100 $4.00 $ 400 Feb 15 Purchase 400 $5.00 $ 2,000 Jun 20 Purchase 200 $7.00 $ 1,400 Nov15 Purchase 300 $8.00 $ 2,400 Cost of Goods Available for Sale A physical count of inventory on December 31 revealed that there were 350 units on hand. Determine the cost of the 350 units in the inventory and the cost of goods sold by each of the following methods, presenting details of your computations AND prepare an Income Statement assuming Sales were $10,000 and Operating Expenses were $2,000. Don’t forget titles! A. FIFO Ending Inventory Computation Income Statement Cost of Goods Sold Computation B. LIFO Ending Inventory Computation Income Statement Cost of Goods Sold Computation C. Average Cost Ending Inventory Computation Income Statement Cost of Goods Sold Computation D. Which method gives the highest net income? _________________________???????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

Attachments:

accounting rate of return 494283

Exercise 14-27
Accounting Rate of Return

You may use the attached spreadsheet to help you complete this activity, but you are not required to do so. You will find the spreadsheet by clicking on the link in the drop-down menu above.

Each of the following scenarios is independent. Assume that all cash flows are after-tax cash flows.

a. Cobre Company is considering the purchase of new equipment that will speed up the process for extracting copper. The equipment will cost $3,600,000 and have a life of five years with no expected salvage value. The expected cash flows associated with the project are as follows:

b. Emily Hansen is considering investing in one of the following two projects. Either project will require an investment of $75,000. The expected cash revenues minus cash expenses for the two projects follow. Assume each project is depreciable.

c. Suppose that a project has an ARR of 30 percent (based on initial investment) and that the average net income of the project is $120,000.

d. Suppose that a project has an ARR of 50 percent and that the investment is $150,000.

1. Compute the ARR on the new equipment that Cobre Company is considering. Round your answer to one decimal place.
_________________ %

2. Conceptual Connection: Which project should Emily Hansen choose based on the ARR? Notice that the payback period is the same for both investments (thus equally preferred).

_________________

Unlike the payback period, explain why ARR correctly signals that one project should be preferred over the other.

The input in the box below will not be graded, but may be reviewed and considered by your instructor.

_________________

3. How much did the company in Scenario c invest in the project? If required, round your answer to the nearest dollar.
$ _________________

4. What is the average net income earned by the project in Scenario d? If required, round your answer to the nearest dollar.
$ _________________

Attachments:

accounting response 494284

One comprehensive forum topic response is assigned weekly. Students are required to select and research one of the forum topics listed below using a minimum of 3 reference sources in addition to the textbook and then write a 1,000-word or more response to the forum topic. (Will be submitted using “Turn It In”).

Chapter 1: An Overview of Financial Management and the Financial Environment

-Types of Company Ownership

-The Primary Objective of the Corporation

-The Process of Securitization and its Results

-Financial Institutions

-Financial Markets

-The Global Economic Crisis

-Derivatives (Web Extension 1A)

accounting roi help 494285

Please see attached for description. No word minimum. PLease use APA when citing sources. Original work only.

Document Preview:

1) A company that provides training, certification and consulting services to commercial, government, and non-profit organizations in applying best practices in balanced scorecard (BSC), strategic performance management and measurement, and transformation and change management has a customer success story on its website at ? HYPERLINK “http://www.balancedscorecard.org/Home/tabid/36/Default.aspx/” ?http://www.balancedscorecard.org/Home/tabid/36/Default.aspx?. Click on the Award for Excellence link (on the right-side of the page) and read the story about Mecklenburg County, which successfully transformed the county government and positioned it for tough times. Summarize the success story and explain how it relates to what you have learned in this course this week. 2) Your uncle is working in a company managing their investment center. You approach him with the sales of a large piece of equipment that can help the company save money in the end. Your uncle explains to you that they can’t purchase the equipment because they don’t want their ROI to decrease in value. What will be your persuasive argument to help them see more possibilities? Notes from readings Return on Investment (ROI) and Residual Income????Costs and segment reporting can be important areas to measure management performance with, but this is not enough to evaluate the investment manager’s performance. There are a couple of methods to do this effectively, and they include the return on investment (ROI) formula and residual income. These are covered below: Return on investment = Net operating income / Average operating assets Net operating income is income before taxes and interest. Average operating assets include cash, accounts receivable, inventory and property, plant and equipment, as well as other assets used in operations. We can expand the ROI formula out to give us more pieces and the ability to identify problem areas we can improve. That formula is: ROI = (Net operating income / Sales) x…

Attachments:

accounting short response 494286

One comprehensive forum topic response is assigned weekly. Students are required to select and research one of the forum topics listed below using a minimum of 3 reference sources in addition to the textbook and then write a 1,000-word or more response to the forum topic. (Will be submitted using “Turn It In”).

Chapter 1: An Overview of Financial Management and the Financial Environment

-Types of Company Ownership

-The Primary Objective of the Corporation

-The Process of Securitization and its Results

-Financial Institutions

-Financial Markets

-The Global Economic Crisis

-Derivatives (Web Extension 1A)

accounting slideshow assignment 494287

1. Please READ INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY for this slideshow assignment.

2. Will include Instructions as an attachment. Chapters 16, 19, 20 &29 (mini case study-4 in Ch 29) is also attached, if needed (CHAPTERS provided are not required)

3. Post assignment ONLY as slideshow attachment

4. Cite work. No plagiarism.

5. First slide- Use as a Title Page.

6. Last slide- Use as areference page (APA guidelines).

7. Use footnotes at bottom of each slide, when possible.

8. Pictures and color sheme is NOT REQUIRED.

9. Any questions please email me before posting completed work.

Document Preview:

INSTRUCTIONS- PLEASE READ CAREFULLY Post assignment as slideshow ONLY. Chapters (included if needed). No plagiarism. *** Cite work, ***First slide- Title Page. ***Last slide- Reference page from work cited. *** Use foot notes in each slide as much as possible. Information technology has enhanced operational activities throughout the health care industry. Much has been discussed in financial analysis, price, and acquisition discrepancies. The decision to acquire and implement technology, and justify the cost has perplexed physicians and health care facilities. Assignment Scenario: Assume you are an office manager in a physician’s group practice. As the office manager, you have been asked to review and explain the financial implications of implementing electronic medical records (EMR). You will address potential areas of financial concern and provide your recommendation to the physician’s group on whether or not to implement EMR. Create a 12- to 15-slide Microsoft® PowerPoint® in which you outline the following areas of financial concern and conclude with your decision on whether you would recommend EMRs to the stakeholders. Format presentation consistent with APA guidelines: Title slide Introductory or overview slide Slides presenting the information required for the assignment Detailed speaker notes with in-text citations Recommendation or summary slide Reference slide Post project as an Attachment Include detailed speaker notes. Cite at least three outside sources and your textbook. Discuss the following areas with the focus on the financial aspects: #1 Implementation process; This should be your introductory slide. Why implement? What is involved? #2. Financing technology; Choose at least five. Capital expenditures Opportunity costs Budgeting, cash flow Depreciation Present value Payback Projected revenue Overall costs #3. Costs not considered in the implementation process; Choose at least two. Threat of litigation Layout of…

accounting systems solution with working 494288

Non- current asset

Internal Reporting

External Reporting

Document Preview:

The production budget shows expected unit sales are 10,000. The required production units are 10,400. What are the beginning and desired ending finished goods units, respectively? Beginning Units Ending Units a. 1,000 600 b. 600 1,000 c. 400 1,000 d. 1,000 400 The following credit sales are budgeted by Evens Trading Company: January $340,000 February $550,000 March $600,000 April $680,000 The company’s past experience indicates that 50% of the accounts receivable are collected in the month of sale, 30% in the month following the sale, and 18% in the second month following the sale. The anticipated cash inflow for the month of April is: $520,000 $581,200 $619,000 $680,000 A $100 petty cash fund has cash of $18 and receipts of $80. The journal entry to replenish the account would include a credit to Cash for $82 Petty Cash for $82 Cash Over and Short for $2 Cash for $80 The following information relates to ABC Ltd. Accounts receivable balance as at 1/1/2010 and 31/12/2010 amounted to $550,000 and $340,000 respectively. Collections from debtors (accounts receivable) amounted to $ 480,000. Assuming ABC Ltd sells only on credit, the amount of credit sales for the year is: $ 200,000 $ 210,000 $ 270,000 $ 480,000 When preparing the financial statements of Omega Ltd., the accountant found the following information. Opening balance of Retained Earnings $5,000; Interim dividends paid $1,000; Profit earned $16,000; Dividends declared $2,000. The closing balance of Retained Earnings for Omega Ltd., is $24,000 $20,000 $18,000 $16,000 A company requires $1 million in sales to meet its target net profit. Its variable costs are 75% of selling price and the fixed costs are $150,000. What is the target net profit? $600,000 $200,000 $100,000 $50,000 Dulcet Ltd is planning to sell 400,000 hammers for $ 1.50 per unit. The contribution margin ratio is 20%. If Dulcet Ltd will break even at this level of sales, what are the fixed…

Attachments:

prepare a tax research memo that resolves the issue of deducting louella s work clot 494289

Louella was born into a low-income family and lives in a poverty-stricken neighborhood. She recently landed a job as wardrobe consultant at High Fashions Ltd., a retailer of expensive women’s clothing at an Elm Grove shopping mall. The employee manual at High Fashions makes it clear that employees should wear not only fashions of the type available in the store but “careful attention should be paid to wearing the latest cutting-edge fashions whether they have met with commercial success or not.” In addition, under the theory that certain colors are more flattering than others, Louella has been instructed to wear clothes that are primarily shades of black or grey each day. Louella takes her job seriously and wears the latest in black or grey haute couture whether she likes the clothes or not. In fact, due to her modest upbringing, Louella only wears her work clothes while at the store and commuting to and from work. Besides, Louella believes that wearing the same color of clothes each day outside of work would be odd and it’s not “her color.” Can Louella deduct the cost and upkeep of her expensive outfits under §162 as a business expense deduction on her Federal income tax return?

Your responsibility:

Prepare a tax research memo that resolves the issue of deducting Louella’s work clothes. You will need to support your conclusion using primary sources of tax law. Your textbook is NOT primary authority.

You
must use proper citation form in your memo (see Chapter 2 for help with citation form). The form for this communication should be professional and in the form of a tax research memo (example posted on Blackboard and a similar example in your text on p. 2-27). Do yourself a favor and look at the grading rubric
before you submit.

This memo should be whatever length you feel is appropriate to resolve the issues. We do NOT use a bibliography or list of references in a tax research memo. You will see that citations are within the text of the document in the example. Once a court case has been cited in full, it can be referred to using simply the name in
italics.

You are required to individually prepare this document (no assistance from your classmates). Please
upload your memo into Turnitin in Blackboard by the due date at 11:30pm.

The grading rubric is posted in Blackboard. For this assignment, points are distributed as follows:

Content – Facts 5
Content – Analysis 10
Content – Conclusion 5
Organization 5
Audience 5
Style 5
Mechanics 10
Referencing 5
Total 50

accounting theory 494293

Question 1 (17 marks)

HiSpeed Ltd. plans to manufacture cross-country skiing equipment. Its cash flows are highly dependent on the weather in early winter. HiSpeed operates under ideal conditions of uncertainty. On August 1, 2014, the beginning of its first year in business, HiSpeed acquires equipment to be used in its operations. The equipment will last two years, at which time its salvage value will be zero. The company finances the equipment purchase by issuing common shares.

HiSpeed s annual net cash flows will be $800 if the weather is snowy and $300 if it is not snowy. Assume that cash flows are received at year end. In each year, the objective probability that the weather is snowy is 0.7 and 0.3 that it is not snowy. The interest rate in the economy is 3% in both years.

HiSpeed will pay a dividend of $50 at the end of each year of operation.

Required

a. (9 marks)

In 2014, the weather is snowy. Prepare a statement of financial position as at July 31, 2015, the end of HiSpeed s first year of operations, and an income statement for the year.

b. (2 marks)

What timing of revenue recognition is implicit in the income statement you have prepared in part (a)? When ideal conditions do not hold, is this timing of revenue recognition relevant? Is it reliable? Explain.

c. (6 marks)

Assume that HiSpeed paid the present value you calculated in part (a) for its equipment. Calculate HiSpeed s net income for the year ended July 31, 2015 on a historical cost basis, assuming that equipment is depreciated on a straight-line basis. Under the more realistic assumption that ideal conditions do not hold, which measure of net income is most relevant? Which is most reliable? Why?

Question 2 (18 marks)

Prem has $2,000 that he wishes to invest for one year. He has narrowed his choices down to one of the following two actions:

i: Buy bonds of X Ltd., a company that has a very high debt-to-equity ratio. These bonds pay 8% interest, unless X defaults, in which case Prem will receive no interest but will recover his principal. (a1)

ii: Buy Canada Savings Bonds, paying 3% interest. (a2)

Prem assesses the prior probability of X Ltd. defaulting as 0.40. His utility for money is given by the square root of the amount of his net payoff. That is, if he buys the Canada Savings Bonds, his net payoff is $60, yielding utility of 60 = 7.75, and so on. Prem is a rational decision maker.

Required

a. (4 marks)

Based on his prior probability calculations, which action should Prem take? Show your calculations.

b. (9 marks)

Before making a final decision, Prem decides he needs more information. He obtains X Ltd. s current financial statements and examines its times-interest-earned ratio. This ratio can be either high or low. Upon calculating the ratio, Prem observes that it is low. On the basis of his prior experience in bond investments, Prem knows the following conditional probabilities:

Debt-to-Equity Ratio

Future State

Low

High

ND (no default)

0.50

0.50

D (default)

0.05

0.95

Which action should Prem take based on this new information? Show your calculations; take each step to two decimal places.

c. (5 marks)

An accounting standard (IAS 16) allows X Ltd. to value its property, plant, and equipment at fair value. The company plans to adopt this option, since it will reduce its debt-to-equity ratio.

Evaluate (in words no calculations required) the likely impact of this adoption on the main diagonal probabilities of the information system in part (b).

Question 3 (15 marks)

Efficient securities market theory has long been under attack from behavioural finance, which draws on behavioural theories of investor behaviour to explain why security prices do not always behave as the economic theories of rational investing and market efficiency predict. These attacks have increased since the 2007-2008 security market meltdowns.

Required

a. (4 marks)

Explain why prospect theory predicts that security prices will differ from their prices under efficient security markets theory.

b. (4 marks)

Describe two accounting-related efficient securities market anomalies and, for each, explain why it is an anomaly.

c. (3 marks)

The efficient securities market anomalies suggest that investors underreact to the full information content of financial statements. Choose one behavioural theory that predicts this underreaction and explain why it predicts underreaction.

d. (4 marks)

Should accountants be concerned that the importance of financial reporting may decline if behaviourally biased investors do not use all the information in the financial statements? Explain.

Assignment 2 Session 2 (Winter)

This assignment is based on Modules1through7and is due at the end of Module7. It is worth10%of your final course grade.

Refer to the general instructions in Assignment 1.

Question 1 (20 marks)

Empirical tests of the three hypotheses of positive accounting theory (PAT) are often based on the amount of discretionary accruals contained in net income.

Required

a. (4 marks)

What are discretionary accruals? Why are they useful in testing the three PAT hypotheses?

b. (5 marks)

The methodology designed by Jones (1991) (called the Jones Model) is usually used to estimate discretionary accruals. Outline in words how the Jones Model measures discretionary accruals.

c. (4 marks)

For good corporate governance, contracts should be designed efficiently. A researcher finds, for a sample of firms, that the covenant slack in debt contracts (the difference between the critical value of a debt covenant ratio as specified in a debt contract and the value of that ratio on the borrower s books on the date of the contract) is greater on average with greater variability over time of the debt covenant ratios. Is this finding evidence of efficient or opportunistic contracting? Explain your answer.

d. (7 marks)

Discretionary accruals can be used opportunistically or efficiently. Conservative accounting can be regarded as a form of discretionary accruals because the firm chooses to report (that is, accrue) lower asset values and/or higher liability values. A researcher finds that firms with income escalator clauses in their debt contracts (an escalator clause increases the covenant level of net worth the firm is required to maintain under the contract by a percentage of reported net income) tend to use more conservative accounting than similar firms with no escalator clauses in their debt contracts. Is this finding consistent with efficient or opportunistic contracting? Explain your answer.

Question 2 (20 marks)

Several accounting standards include ceiling tests (also called impairment tests).

Required

a. (6 marks)

What is a ceiling test? Identify two IASB accounting standards that contain a ceiling test and describe the test.

b. (6 marks)

Ceiling tests are usually regarded in this course as one-sided examples of the measurement approach. However, they can also be regarded as examples of conservative accounting, as assets are written down but not written up. Ceiling tests are an example of conservative accounting. Why do bondholders favour ceiling tests? How do bondholders reward the firm for conservative accounting such as ceiling tests?

c. (4 marks)

Explain briefly why auditors favour ceiling tests.

d. (4 marks)

Outline the accounting for research and development (R&D) under IASB standards. Is this accounting conservative? Why? Explain why accountants account for R&D as they do.

Question 3 (22 marks)

New Century Financial Corp., formed in 1995, was a large mortgage lender in the United States. Many of these mortgages were securitized and transferred to investors. New Century accounted for the proceeds of these securitizations as sales. However, New Century committed to buy back mortgages that became troubled within up to a year after transfer.

New Century would retain some mortgages for itself (called retained interests), from which it would receive future cash flows. Also, the transfer agreements included the right to service the mortgages, for which New Century charged a fee. New Century valued these retained interests and servicing rights at current value, based on their discounted expected future cash flows. Thus, revenue from retained interests was recognized at the time of retention, and servicing revenue was recognized at the time of mortgage transfer. These policies required numerous estimates, and contrasted with a more conservative policy of recognizing revenues as cash flows from retained interests were received and servicing responsibilities rendered.

The company s share price increased dramatically, to a high of US$64 in 2004. Its reported net income reached $1.4 billion in 2005.

However, New Century seriously underestimated the extent of its mortgage buybacks and resulting credit losses. Of $40 billion of mortgages granted in the first three quarters of 2006, it provided only $13.9 million for buybacks. Investor concerns about increasing buybacks rose in 2006 as the 2007-2008 market meltdowns approached. These buyback concerns added to concerns about early revenue recognition from retained interests and servicing. Also, the company failed to write down its retained interests as the current value of the underlying mortgages decreased.

New Century was soon unable to borrow money to finance mortgage buybacks. Its shares lost 90% of their value, and the company was delisted from the New York Stock Exchange. In April 2007, it filed for bankruptcy protection.

New Century s auditor (KPMG) was drawn into the lawsuits that followed. KPMG denied liability, claiming that the provisions for buybacks were deemed adequate at the time, and blaming New Century s failure on the market meltdowns of 2007-2008. In December 2009, the SEC filed civil fraud charges against three former executives of New Century, seeking damages and return of bonuses. Several other lawsuits followed. In November 2010, financial media reported final settlement of a class action lawsuit that included a payment of over $65 million by former company officers and directors, and a payment of $44.75 million by auditor KPMG.

Required

a. (4 marks)

Use the concept of relevance to defend New Century s policy of recognizing revenue as it securitized and sold mortgages. What was the policy s major weakness?

b. (4 marks)

Outline a more conservative accounting policy for New Century s mortgage sale transactions. Consider both statement of financial position and net income effects of your policy.

Hint: Read Theory in Practice 8.3, text page 314.

c. (6 marks)

Use two characteristics of investor behaviour based on psychology to explain the rapid rise in New Century s share price. Be sure to identify the specific behavioural characteristics you draw on in your answer.

d. (4 marks)

Despite your answer in part (c), is the rapid rise in New Century s share price necessarily inconsistent with (semi-strong) securities market efficiency? Explain.

e. (4 marks)

Note that retained interests meet the definition of a financial instrument. How would these financial instruments be accounted for under IAS 39?

Question 4 (18 marks)

Paul owns and operates a small, fast-growing business. He decides to hire a full-time manager. He will then take a year off to travel, and on his return will concentrate on the technical aspects of the business.

Martha applies for the job. During her interview, Paul finds that Martha is risk averse, with utility for money equal to the square root of the dollar compensation received. She has reservation utility of 6 and is effort averse, with disutility of effort of 2 if she works hard (a1), and 1 if she does not work hard (a2).

Paul s business has, in previous years, earned net income before manager compensation of $800 75% of the time, and income of $0 25% of the time. Paul has taken courses in accounting and has always prepared the financial statements himself. Paul has always worked hard, and reckons that if he did not work hard net income would have been $800 only 20% of the time and $0 80% of the time. He expects this earnings pattern to continue into the future with a new manager. Paul realizes that he must motivate Martha to work hard, and offers her a one-year contract, with compensation based on a proportion of net income before manager compensation.

Note: Take all calculations to two decimal places.

Required

a. (6 marks)

What proportion of net income must Paul offer Martha so that she will accept the position and work hard? Show calculations.

b. (8 marks)

Assuming that Martha accepts Paul s offer from part (a), show calculations that verify she will in fact be motivated to work hard.

c. (4 marks)

Paul realizes that he cannot observe his firm s unmanaged net income he can only observe the net income Martha reports. He is concerned that Martha will opportunistically manage earnings while he is away to report net income of $800 while not working hard. Suggest to Paul how he can reduce the likelihood that Martha will do this in a one-year contract.

Question 5 (20 marks)

Most firms hedge at least some of their risks. Hedging can take two basic forms, namely natural hedging and hedging by means of derivative instruments. The use of derivatives as hedges has expanded greatly in recent years.

Generally, under accounting standards (IAS 39 and related U.S. standards), derivative instruments are fair valued with any unrealized gain or loss included in net income. However, hedge accounting provides some exceptions to this rule.

Required

a. (4 marks)

A firm has a large amount of long-term debt (valued on a cost basis), and decides to set up a natural hedge of this debt. However, a natural hedge can lead to excess net income volatility, that is, net income volatility greater than the actual volatility of the firm s operations. Explain how this can happen.

b. (6 marks)

Suggest two ways that the excess net income volatility arising in part (a) can be prevented.

c. (6 marks)

IAS 39 identifies two basic types of hedge. Describe each type. For each type, explain how IAS 39 controls excess net income volatility arising from entering into the hedge.

d. (4 marks)

Use the bonus plan hypothesis of positive accounting theory to explain why a firm manager dislikes excess net income volatility. Are the policies to control excess net income volatility you described in parts (a) and (b) unethical? Explain why or why not.

Assignment 3 Session 2 (Winter)

This assignment is based on Modules1through9and is due at the end of Module9. It is worth5%of your final course grade.

Refer to the general instructions in Assignment 1.

Question 1 (14 marks)

In July 2011, financial media reported that Glencore International, plc, a large, Swiss-based multinational producer of metals, energy, and agricultural commodities, had decided to stop reporting quarterly financial results from the second quarter of 2011. Glencore s first-quarter 2011 sales and earnings were sharply higher than they were for the same quarter of the previous year, but it appeared that earnings for the first quarter still fell short of market expectations.

Required

a. (4 marks)

Outline two possible reasons why Glencore reduced its information production in this manner.

b. (4 marks)

How do you predict that the stock market will react to this decision by Glencore? Explain.

c. (6 marks)

The covenants in Glencore s debt contract required the company to report quarterly. To overcome the rigidity inherent in debt contracts, Glencore offered to make a cash payment to consenting bondholders of 0.25% of their holdings, up to a maximum of $2.4 million, if they agreed to drop the covenant. If you were a Glencore bondholder, would you accept Glencore s offer or not? Explain your reasons.

Question 2 (18 marks)

Income smoothing is a common earnings management pattern. Many managers feel that their reputations, and their firms share prices, are enhanced by a smooth, steadily growing sequence of reported earnings.

Required

a. (4 marks)

A behaviourally biased investor observes a firm s earnings increasing steadily over time. The investor decides that this firm is a growth firm. Identify the specific behavioural bias that may underlie this investor behaviour and explain why it leads to identifying the firm as a growth firm. Is the investor necessarily correct in this identification as a growth firm? Explain why or why not.

b. (4 marks)

Some firms have used low-persistence accruals to smooth net income to a level that the firm s managers felt would persist. Is this type of earnings management good or bad in terms of usefulness to equity investors?

Does such smoothing benefit the manager whose compensation depends on reported net income? Explain why or why not.

c. (5 marks)

A researcher finds that firms that are growing rapidly have, on average, a lower proportion of manager compensation based on net income, relative to share-based compensation, than firms that are not growing rapidly. Explain why. Use concepts of recognition lag, sensitivity, and precision in your answer.

d. (5 marks)

A firm that has smoothed earnings for many years needs to manage its earnings upwards this year to maintain the pattern of smooth, steady earnings that it has been reporting. The firm anticipates a period of lower earnings next year. Would the firm manager be wise to smooth earnings this year? Explain why or why not.

Question 3 (18 marks)

In January 2011, the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) adopted a requirement that companies give shareholders a say on pay of senior management. This requirement is part of the implementation of the 2010 Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act, passed by the U.S. congress in response to the 2007-2008 market meltdowns, including widespread concerns that senior managers were overpaid. Shareholders will be asked to vote on executive compensation packages at least once every three years. The result of the vote is non-binding on the company. Results of the shareholder vote must be publicly disclosed.

In Canada, the Ontario Securities Commission is considering similar requirements.

Required

a. (2 marks)

With what theory of executive compensation is say on pay most consistent? Explain.

b. (6 marks)

The SEC is proposing that the compensation committee of the board of directors must consist of members independent of management. Also, the committee will have full authority to retain consultants, lawyers, and other advisors. Would such proposals, if implemented, eliminate the need for giving shareholders a say on pay? Explain.

c. (4 marks)

The expected utility of compensation to a manager can be much less than the sum of dollar compensation, share, and option awards. Explain why.

d. (6 marks)

Do you think the say on pay requirements and implementation of the SEC proposals on compensation committee member independence and freedom to hire advisors will be effective in increasing the efficiency of executive compensation contracts? Explain. Define a (second-best) efficient compensation contract as part of your answer.

Attachments:

accounting theory 1 pg paper 494294

  1. After reading the article of Apple Tree, please summarize the key issues and your opinion on each valuation approach.
  2. How can you estimate firm’s cost of equity (minimum rate of return that investors require in the market) from PE (price/earnings ratio)? What does it mean? How is it related to valuation process?

Attachments:

acc301 wayne terrago controller for robbin industries was reviewing production cost 492732

Wayne Terrago, controller for Robbin Industries, was reviewing production cost reports for the year. One amount in these reports continued to bother him-advertising. During the year, the company had instituted an expensive advertising campaign to sell some of its slower-moving products. It was still too early to tell whether the advertising campaign was successful.

There had been much internal debate as how to report advertising cost. The vice president of finance argued that advertising costs should be reported as a cost of production, just like direct materials and direct labor. He therefore recommended that this cost be identified as manufacturing overhead and reported as part of inventory costs until sold. Others disagreed. Terrago believed that this cost should be reported as an expense of the current period, based on the conservatism principle. Others argued that it should be reported as Prepaid Advertising and reported as a current asset.

The president finally had to decide the issue. He argued that these costs should be reported as inventory. His arguments were practical ones. He noted that the company was experiencing financial difficulty and expensing this amount in the current period might jeopardize a planned bond offering. Also, by reporting the advertising costs as inventory rather than as prepaid advertising, less attention would be directed to it by the financial community.

Instructions

1. Who are the stakeholders in this situation?

2. What are the ethical issues involved in this situation?

3. What would you do if you were Wayne Terrago?

acc301 raney company uses a flexible budget for manufacturing overhead based on dire 492734

Raney Company uses a flexible budget for manufacturing overhead based on direct labor hours. Variable manufacturing overhead costs per direct labor hour are as follows:

Indirect labor

1.00

Indirect materials

0.50

Utilities

0.40

Fixed overhead costs per moth are:

Supervision

4,000

Depreciation

1,500

Property taxes

800

The company believes it will normally operate in a range of 7,000 to 10,000 direct labor hours per month.

Instructions:

Prepare a monthly flexible manufacturing overhead budget for 2010 for the expected range of activity, using increments of 1,000 direct labor hours.

acc301 the coca cola company hardly needs an introduction a line taken from the cove 492735

The Coca-cola Company hardly needs an introduction. A line taken from the cover of a recent annual report says it all: if you measured time in servings of Coca-Cola, “a billion Coca-cola’s ago was yesterday morning.” On average, everyU.S.citizen dinks 363 8-ounce servings of Coca-cola products each year. Coca-Cola’s primary line of business is the making and selling of syrup to bottlers. These bottlers then sell the finished bottles and cans of Coca-Cola to the consumer. In the annual repot of Coca-Cola, the following information was provided.

THE COCA-COLA COMPANY

Management Discussion

Our gross margin declined to 61 percent this year from 62 percent in the prior yearr, primarily due to costs for materials such as sweeteners and packaging.

The increases [in selling expenses] in the last two years were primarily due to higher marketing expenditures in support of our Company’s volume growth.

We measure our sales volume in two ways: (1) gallon shipment of concentrates and syrups and (2) cases of finished product (bottles and cans of Code sold by bottlers).

Instructions

Answer the following questions.

a. Are sweeteners and packaging a variable cost or a fixed cost? What is the impact on the contribution margin of an increase in the per unit cost of sweeteners or packaging? What are the implications for profitability?

b. in your opinion, are marketing expenditures a fixed cost, variable cost, or mixed cost

c. Which of the two measures cited for measuring volume represents the activity index as defined in this chapter? Why might Coca-Cola use two different measures?

bluma co uses a perpetual inventory system and both an accounts receivable and an ac 492736

Bluma Co. uses a perpetual inventory system and both an accounts receivable and an accounts payable subsidiary ledger. Balances related to both the general ledger and the subsidiary ledger for Bluma are indicated in the working papers. Presented on the next page are a series of transactions for Bluma Co. for the month of January. Credit sales terms are 2/10, n/30. The cost of all merchandise sold was 55% of the sales price.

Jan. 3 Sell merchandise on account to B. Richey $3,100, invoice no. 510, and to J. Forbes $1,800, invoice no. 511.

5 Purchase merchandise fromS. Vogel$5,000 and D. Lynch $2,200, terms n/30.

7 Receive checks fromS. LaDew$4,000 and B. Garcia $2,000 after discount period has lapsed.

8 Pay freight on merchandise purchased $235.

9 Send checks to S. Hoyt for $9,000 less 2% cash discount, and to D. Omara for $11,000 less 1% cash discount.

9 Issue credit of $300 to J. Forbes for merchandise returned.

10 Summary daily cash sales total $15,500.

11 Sell merchandise on account to R. Dvorak $1,600, invoice no. 512, and to S. LaDew $900, invoice no. 513.

12 Pay rent of $1,000 for January.

13 Receive payment in full from B. Richey and J. Forbes less cash discounts.

15 Withdraw $800 cash by M. Bluma for personal use.

15 Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers.

16 Purchase merchandise from D. Omara $18,000, terms 1/10, n/30;S. Hoyt$14,200, terms 2/10, n/30; and S. Vogel $1,500, terms n/30.

17 Pay $400 cash for office supplies.

18 Return $200 of merchandise toS. Hoytand receive credit.

20 Summary daily cash sales total $20,100.

21 Issue $15,000 note, maturing in 90 days, to R. Moses in payment of balance due.

21 Receive payment in full fromS. LaDewless cash discount.

22 Sell merchandise on account to B. Richey $2,700, invoice no. 514, and to R. Dvorak $1,300, invoice no. 515.

22 Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers.

23 Send checks to D. Omara and S. Hoyt in full payment less cash discounts.

25 Sell merchandise on account to B. Garcia $3,500, invoice no. 516, and to J. Forbes $6,100, invoice no. 517.

27 Purchase merchandise from D. Omara $14,500, terms 1/10, n/30; D. Lynch $1,200, terms n/30; and S. Vogel $5,400, terms n/30.

27 Post all entries to the subsidiary ledgers.

28 Pay $200 cash for office supplies.

31 Summary daily cash sales total $21,300.

31 Pay sales salaries $4,300 and office salaries $3,800, for a total salaries of $8,100.

Instructions:

a. Record the January transactions in a sales journal, a single-column purchases journal, a cash receipts journal, a cash payments journal, and a two-column general journal.

b. Post the journals as necessary.

c. Prepare a trial balance at January 31, 2012, in the trial balance columns of the worksheet. Complete the worksheet using the following additional information.

1. Office supplies at January 31 total $900.

2. Insurance coverage expires on October 31, 2012.

3. Annual depreciation on the equipment is $1,500.

4. Interest of $50 has accrued on the note payable.

d. Prepare a multiple-step income statement and an owner’s equity statement for January and a classified balance sheet at the end of January.

e. Prepare and post adjusting and closing entries.

f. Prepare a post-closing trial balance, and determine whether the subsidiary ledgers agree with the control accounts in the general ledger.

pinkerton corporation s trial balance at december 31 2011 is presented below 492737

Pinkerton Corporation’s trial balance at December 31, 2011, is presented below. All 2011 transactions have been recorded except for the items described after the trial balance.

Debit

Credit

Cash

$ 28,000

Accounts Receivable

36,800

Notes Receivable

10,000

Interest Receivable

–0–

Merchandise Inventory

36,200

Prepaid Insurance

3,600

Land

20,000

Building

150,000

Equipment

60,000

Patent

9,000

Allowance for Doubtful Accounts

$ 500

Accumulated Depreciation—Building

50,000

Accumulated Depreciation—Equipment

24,000

Accounts Payable

27,300

Salaries Payable

–0–

Unearned Rent

6,000

Notes Payable (short-term)

11,000

Interest Payable

–0–

Notes Payable (long-term)

35,000

Common Stock

50,000

Retained Earnings

63,600

Dividends

12,000

Sales

900,000

Interest Revenue

–0–

Rent Revenue

–0–

Gain on Disposal

–0–

Bad Debts Expense

–0–

Cost of Goods Sold

630,000

Depreciation Expense—Buildings

–0–

Depreciation Expense—Equipment

–0–

Insurance Expense

–0–

Interest Expense

–0–

Other Operating Expenses

61,800

Amortization Expense—Patents

–0–

Salaries Expense

110,000

Total

$1,167,400

$1,167,400

Unrecorded transactions

1. On May 1, 2011, Pinkerton purchased equipment for $16,000 plus sales taxes of $800 (all paid in cash).

2. On July 1, 2011, Pinkerton sold for $3,500 equipment which originally cost $5,000. Accumulated depreciation on this equipment at January 1, 2011, was $1,800; 2011 depreciation prior to the sale of equipment was $450.

3. On December 31, 2011, Pinkerton sold for $5,000 on account inventory that cost $3,500.

4. Pinkerton estimates that uncollectible accounts receivable at year-end are $4,000.

5. The note receivable is a one-year, 8% note dated April 1, 2011. No interest has been recorded.

6. The balance in prepaid insurance represents payment of a $3,600, 6-month premium on September 1, 2011.

7. The building is being depreciated using the straight-line method over 30 years. The salvage value is $30,000.

8. The equipment owned prior to this year is being depreciated using the straight-line method over 5 years. The salvage value is 10% of cost.

9. The equipment purchased on May 1, 2011, is being depreciated using the straight-line method over 5 years, with a salvage value of $1,800.

10. The patent was acquired on January 1, 2011, and has a useful life of 9 years from that date.

11. Unpaid salaries at December 31, 2011, total $2,200.

12. The unearned rent of $6,000 was received on December 1, 2011, for 3 months’ rent.

13. Both the short-term and long-term notes payable are dated January 1, 2011, and carry a 10% interest rate. All interest is payable in the next 12 months.

14. Income tax expense was $15,000. It was unpaid at December 31.

Instructions
a. Prepare journal entries for the transactions listed above.

b. Prepare an updated December 31, 2011, trial balance.
c. Prepare a 2011 income statement and a 2011 retained earnings statement.
d. Prepare a December 31, 2011, balance sheet.

on august 15 2006 willis inc purchased all of the outstanding common stock of bork i 492739

(TCO 2) On August 15, 2006, Willis Inc. purchased all of the outstanding common stock of Bork Inc. paying $7,400,000 cash. The book values and fair values of Willis’ assets and liabilities are listed below:

Book Value Fair Value

Account Receivable

$1,080,000

$975,000

Inventories

$1,620,000

$2,400,000

Property Plant and equipment

$5,400,000

$6,975,000

Account Payable

$1,800,000

$1,800,000

Bond Payable

$2,700,000

$2,475,000

Required:

Prepare the journal entry to record the acquisition by Willis Inc.

gold mountain s business strategy is to offer the ultimate ski experience 492780

GOLD MOUNTAIN SKI RESORT
You work for a venture firm and have been asked to analyze a proposal from a group of investors interested in building a new ski area in Colorado. The demand for skiing is growing and existing resorts have raised prices and reported record profits for the last two seasons.
Gold Mountain’s business strategy is to offer the ultimate ski experience; short lift lines, uncongested ski slopes, and spectacular scenery. With a 2,500 foot vertical drop, 10 trails, and one triple (three person) ski lift, it can provide a very uncongested ski resort. The planned triple-person lift delivers a chair every 20 seconds, 180 chairs per hour (3 chairs per minute, 60 minutes per hour), or 540 skiers per hour (180 chairs per hour, 3 skiers per chair). This puts an average of only 54 skiers per hour on each of the 10 trails. Some trails will be more popular than others, but this average number of skiers per trail per hour is still below the industry average.
The cost to build the ski runs, parking lots, and buildings and to erect the chair lift is $52M. To raise this amount of capital requires an annual financing cost (debt service & dividends) of $8.3M. The annual fixed operating cost (land lease, utilities, labor, taxes, and insurance) of the ski resort is projected to be $4.1M. For each 100 skiers per day, additional employees must be hired to staff the ticket office, ski patrol, parking lots, etc. The daily cost of the additional labor is $200 per 100 skiers per day.
The typical skier makes two ski runs per day (uses the lift twice). Ski resorts operate their lifts 8 hours per day, 120 days per year. Gold Mountain plans to sell one day lift tickets for $60 per skier, no half day or season passes will be offered.
Required:
Part A: Write a memo to the venture partner in charge of this account recommending one of three actions: aggressively pursue this investment; gather more information; or reject the project. Justify your recommendation with a concise, well-reasoned, fact based analysis. In addition to the memo, you should attached an easy to understand spreadsheet that shows your full analysis of the numbers. In the spreadsheet, you should design an input area for further “what-if analysis” that allows for changes to be made in the base numbers. This input area should flow to the calculations in your spreadsheet.
Part B: After completing your analysis in Part A, but before you submit the memo to your boss, Gold Mountain informs you that they are considering a change from the triple-person lift to a four-person chair lift. The new chair lift will add an additional $75,000 per year to the annual financing cost, bringing the annual financing cost to $8.375M. This lift will be able to carry 720 skiers per hour, as the triple would only carry 540 per hour. How do these changes alter your conclusion from Part A? Add this new analysis and discussion of the possible change to your memo.
Part C: In addition to the information you have been given, consider alternatives to the existing plan that you might recommend to make the venture more successful. If your ideas increase revenues and/or expenses, be sure to incorporate those estimates into your analysis to show the effect.

Attachments:

honeybutter inc manufactures a product that goes through two departments prior to co 492802

Honey butter, Inc. Manufactures a product that goes through two departments prior to completion-the Mixing Department followed by the Packaging Department. The following information is available about work in the first department. The Mixing Department, during June.

Percent Completed

Units

Materials

Conversions

Work in Process, beginning

70,000

70%

40%

Started into production

460,000

Completed and Transferred out

450,000

Work in Process, ending

80,000

75%

25%

Materials

Conversions

Work in Process, beginning

36550

13500

Cost added during June

391850

287300

1) Determine the equivalent units for June for the Mixing Department

2) Compute the costs per equivalent unit for June for the Mixing Department.

3) Determine the total cost of ending work in process inventory and the total cost of units transferred to the packing Department.

4) Prepare a cost reconciliation report for the Mixing Department for June.

accounting choose one character trait among the following 492817

ssignment (Character Traits Paper)

Complete the Character Traits Paper.

  • Choose one character trait among the following:

a. Professional judgment

b. Values

c. Competence

d. Objectivity

e. Integrity

f. Confidentiality

g. Independence

h. Discipline

  • Define in your own words the character trait that you selected and what it means to you in terms of appropriate business and professional conduct.
  • Research your state’s professional code of conduct for the definition and expectations of your selected character trait.
  • Research the AICPA professional code of conduct to determine their definitions and expectations of the trait that you selected.
  • Search the Internet, Business Journal, or other periodicals for current news about corporate ethics. Select a current (later than 2008) news article related to business ethics that illustrates your character trait and its application (or non-application).
  • Write a one to two page summary of your research findings.
Category Points % Description
Documentation & formatting 5 12.5 A quality paper will include a proper title page and references (as noted above).
Organization & cohesiveness 10 25 A quality paper will include an introduction stating the purpose/intent of the paper (5%). The body of the paper will be derived from the assignment itself, and it will be properly subdivided into sections based upon what the paper must address (5%). In a quality paper, the conclusion will summarize the previously presented content (5%).
Editing 5 12.5 A quality paper will be free of any spelling, punctuation, or grammatical errors. Sentences and paragraphs will be clear, concise, and factually correct.
Content 20 50 A quality paper will have significant scope and depth of analysis/research to support any statements. Relevant illustration or examples are encouraged. A quality paper will employ sound use of reasoning and logic to reinforce conclusions, and opinions must be supported.
Total 40 100 A quality paper (and presentation) will meet or exceed all of the above requirements.

Attachments:

financial problems to solve in excel 492887

the file “Sample.xlsx” cointains questions, with answers using Excel functions and also using Excel to do the calculation using normal formulas. “Todo.xls” contains 8 more questions, these need to be solved just like the questions in “Sample.xlsx”, showing detailed calculations to get same answer as Excel function. PLEASE MAKE SURE THAT THIS IS DONE JUST LIKE THE WORK IN “Sample.xlsx”.

Document Preview:

29985.069406566497 15000 1200 16200 16200 1296 17496 17496 1399.68 18895.68 18895.68 1511.6544000000001 20407.3344 20407.3344 1632.5867519999999 22039.921151999999 22039.921151999999 1763.19369216 23803.114844159998 23803.114844159998 1904.2491875327999 25707.364031692799 25707.364031692799 2056.5891225354239 27763.953154228224 27763.953154228224 2221.1162523382582 29985.069406566483 29985.069406566483 8162.9787689085197 3 10000 7.0000000000000007E-2 0.81629787689085187 8162.9787689085188 8162.9787689085188 344097.63655695791 20 30000 0.06 0.68819527311391571 11.469921218565263 344097.63655695791 344097.63655695791 9.0064683420005878 9 1288.3718952291338 240000 4.1666666666666666E-3 360 0.2238265956413508 0.77617340435864923 5.3682162301213815E-3 1288.3718952291315 6 9.4222391070304917E-2 500000 250 2000 360 2.7777777777777779E-3 1.0213380873783042 2.1338087378304227E-2 2.1338087378304227E-2 7 7.8E-2 1200000 525000 2.2857142857142856 9.0909090909090912E-2 1.078048645928869 7.8048645928868954E-2 7.8048645928868954E-2 7.8048645928868954E-2 8 94257 500000 25000 525000 525000 26250 551250 551250 27562.5 578812.5 578812.5 28940.625 607753.125 607753.125 30387.65625 638140.78125 638140.78125 31907.0390625 670047.8203125 670047.8203125 33502.391015624999 703550.21132812498 703550.21132812498 35177.51056640625 738727.72189453128 738727.72189453128 36936.386094726564 775664.1079892579 775664.1079892579 38783.205399462895 814447.31338872085 814447.31338872085 2000000 1185552.6866112791 1185552.6866112791 0.05 10 1.6288946267774416 -0.62889462677744157 -7.9504574965456681E-2 94256.862448185013 Answer: Problem Assignment: Time Value of Money If you deposit $15,000 today and earn 8% annual interest, how much will you have in 9 years? 1 2 Tiffany will receive a graduation gift of $10,000 from her parents in 3 years. If the discount rate is 7%, what is this gift worth today? 3 What…

Attachments:

problem 7 19 abilene meat processining inc is a major processor of beef and other me 492891

the company has a large amount of t- bone steak on hand and it is trying to decide the t- bone steak as is or to process them futher into filet and mignon and new York cut steak. management believe that a 1 pound t- bone steak would yield the following profit. wholesale selling price=2.25 cent per pound; less joint costs incurred up to the split point where t bone steak can be identified as separate product.=1.70 cents. profit per pound= 0.55. as mention above instead of being sold as is/ t bone steak could be process into filet mignon and new York cut steak. cutting one side of a t bone provide the filet mignon and cutting the other side provide the new York cut. one 16 ounce t bone steak cut in this way will yield one 6 ounce filet mignon and one 8 ounce new York cut.; the remain ounce are waste.. the cost of processing the t bone steak into these cut is 0. 20 pound. the filet mignon can be sold for 3. 60 per pound and the new York cut can be sold wholesale for 2.90 per pound.. I need to determine the profit per pound from processing the t bone steak further into filet mignon and new York cut steaks.2. would you recommend that the t bone steak be sold as is or processing futher and why/ can u assi me with these question jac dumb

shutting a plant or continue to operate question halas inc manufacture a fas bond gl 492894

. this company produce and and sell 40;000 gallon of glue each month.. this glue is call mj-7 is used in the wood industry to manfactury plywood. the selling price of mj-7 is 35 dollar gallon; variable cost=21 dollar per gallon; fixed manfacture overhead cost in the plant total 230,000, per month/ because of strike in the mill that purchase the bulk of the mj-7 glue have cuse this company sale todrop to only 11,000 gallon per month. this company think the strike will last only 2 months..after strike the sale should pick up. due to the current low level of sale this company is thinking of closing this plant.. if this company do close plant; fixture manufacture overhead cost can be reduce by 60,000 per month and fix selling cost can bereduce by 10 percent.Start up cost at the end of the shutdown period would total 14 .000. because of this there are no inventory on hand,. question assume that the strike continue for 2 months would u recommend that this company close the plant. and give the reason

bronson inc makes a variety of pen 492895

/ thiscompany has just revieve a offer from a outside supplier to provide the ink cartridge for this company. at a price of 0.48 per dozen. Bronson inc is interested in this offer because its own production of cartridege is at at capacity. this company estimate that if that if thesupplier offer were accepted; the direct labor and variable manfacture overhead cost of the zippo pen line would reduce by 10 percent and the direct material cost would be reduce by 20 pecent. under present operation this company manufacture all of it own pen from start to finish. the zippo pen are sold thru wholesale at 4 dollar per box. each box contain one dozen pen. fixed manufacture overhead cost charge to the the zippo pen line total 50k per yr. the same equipment and facilties are used to produce serval pen line. the present cost of producing one dozen zippo 1. direct material=1.50 cents direct labor= 1.00 manufacture overhead=0.80 cents total cost = 3.30 cents question 1. should this company accept the outside supplier and why/2. what is the max price that this company should be willing to pay outside supllyier per dozen cartridge and why/ 3.Due to bankruptcy from other compant. Bronson inc expect to sell 150;000 boxes of zippo pen next year. as stated earlier this company has enough to only produce the cartridge 4 only 100,000 box of zippo pen annually.. By adding 30k in fix cost each yr this company could expand its production of cartiage to satisy the demand of zippo pen. the variable cost per unit to produce the additional cartiage should be purchase from the outside supplier and how many should be made by this company. 4. what factor should Bronson inc consider in determined whether it should be make or buy the ink cartiage ; give reason

prolem dropping or retain a product 492897

tracy douglas is the owner and manager heritage garden furniture llc; a afica company that makes quality outdoor furtinure. she needs advice corcern the elinattion the model c3 lawn chair. these chair are not making money.a absorption cost income statement for this company and 4 model c3 lawnchaire for the quarter ending in june 30 below/ sale- all product=2,900.000 model c3=300.000./ cost of goods direct material-759.00 model c3 122.000 direct labor 680k model c3 72,000 fringe benefit 20 percent of direct labor 136k model c3 = 14,400 variable manufacture overhead=28k model c3 = 3,600/ blding rent and mainatainc 30k model c3 4,000 depreciation = 75k model c3 = 19,1000/ total cost of goods sold= 1,708.000 model c3 235,1000/ gross margin= 1,192.000 model c3 = 64.900 selling and adm exp product managers salaries= 75k model c3 10k sale commission 5 percent of sale- 145k model c3= 15k fringe benfit 20 percent of salary and commission= 44k modelc3= 5,000 shipping 120k model c3 10k general adm exp=464k model c3= 48k/ total selling and admin exp=848k model c3= 88k net operating income= 344k model c3 = 23.1000. the following additional data have been supplies by the company/ a, direct labor is a variable cost. b.. all of the company product are manufacturer in the same faculty and use the same equipment. bldging rent and maintain and deperication are allocated to prduct using various base. the equipment do not wear. c. there is a ample capacity to fill out orders. d. dropping the model c3 lawchair would have no effect on sale of other product line. e. work in process and finish goods inventory are insignicant. f. shipping cost are trace directly to the products. general adm exp are allocated to product on the base of sale. there would be no effect on the total general adm expeneses if the model c3 lawnchair were drop. if the c3 model were drop the anager would be laid off. question 1. given the current level of sale would u recommend that the model c3 lawchair be drop and why give reason. question 2- what would sale of the model c3 lawchair have to be in order to retian the product. can u assit assit me with these question please jacdumv

below is a list of control goals followed by a list of short scenarios describing sy 492724

Below is a list of control goals followed by a list of short scenarios describing system failures (i.e. control goals not met) and/or instances of successful control plans (i.e. plans that helped to achieve control goals).

Required:

On the blank line to the left of each numbered scenario, place the capital letter of the control goal that best matches the situation described. HINT: Some letters may be used more than once. Conversely, some letters may not apply at all.

Control Goals

A. Ensure effectiveness of operations

B. Ensure efficient employment of resources

C. Ensure security of resources

D. Ensure input validity

E. Ensure input accuracy

F. Ensure input completeness

G. Ensure update accuracy

H. Ensure update completeness

Scenarios

1. A batch of documents sent by the mail room to the accounts receivable department were lost in the intercompany mail and never recorded.

2. A flow in the processing logic of a computer program results in cash received from customers being added to their accounts receivable balances rather than subtracted.

3. A mail room clerk fabricated a phony document for a friend to make it look like the friend had paid his accounts receivable balance. The phony document got recorded.

4. An accounts receivable clerk made a copy of the company’s accounts receivable master data and sold this customer information to a competing company.

5. Customer checks received in the mail room are batched and set to the cashier several times a day so that they can be deposited as fast as possible.

6. In a manual bookkeeping system, an accounts receivable clerk failed to post an entire page of transactions from the cash receipts journal to the accounts receivable subsidiary ledger.

7. In a manual bookkeeping system, cash receipts recorded correctly in the cash receipts journal but some were inadvertently posted to the wrong customer accounts.

8. In keying remittance advices into his computer terminal, an accounts receivable clerk entered a receipt of $200 as $2,000.

9. The cost of the people and computers needed to process incoming checks in less than the benefit obtained from the incoming funds.

10. The company’s accounts receivable system was infiltrated by a hacker.

for each of the following indicate whether is is a characteristic of a 492725

For each of the following, indicate whether is is a characteristic of a:

A. physical data flow diagram

B. logical data flow diagram

C. systems flowchart

1. A graphical representation of a system showing the system’s processes, data stores and the flow of data into and out of the processes and data stores.

2. Used by auditors and managers to understand a system and to analyze a system’s controls.

3. Depicts a system’s infrastructure.

4. Depicts the sequence of activities performed as the business events flow through the process

5. Includes the operations process and management context for a system.

6. Labels on flows of data describe the nature of the data but not how the data are transmitted.

7. Presents a logical and physical rendering of the who, how and where of information and operations processes.

8. Processes are labeled with nouns.

9. Processes are labelled with verbs.

10. Provides a complete picture of a system by combining the physical and logical aspects of the system.

11. Represents what activities the system is performing, but not how, where or by whom.

12. Specifies where, how and by whom a system’s processes are accomplished.

acc301 sy telc has recently started the manufacture of recrobo a three wheeled robot 492726

SY Telc has recently started the manufacture of RecRobo, a three-wheeled robot that can scan a home for fires and gas leaks and then transmit this information to a mobile phone. The cost structure to manufacture 20,000 RecRobo’s is as follows.

Cost

Direct materials ($40 per robot)

$ 800,000

Direct labor ($30 per robot)

600,000

Variable overhead ($6 per robot)

120,000

Allocated fixed overhead ($25 per robot)

500,000

Total

$2,020,000

SY Telc is approached by Chen Inc. which offers to make RecRobo for $90 per unit or $1,800,000.

Instructions

(a) Using incremental analysis, determine whether SY Telc should accept this offer under each of the following independent assumptions.

(1) Assume that $300,000 of the fixed overhead cost can be reduced (avoided).

(2) Assume that none of the fixed overhead can be reduced (avoided). However, if the robots are purchased from Chen Inc., SY Telc can use the released productive resources to generate additional income of $300,000.

(b) Describe the qualitative factors that might affect the decision to purchase the robots from an outside supplier.

acc301 twyla enterprises uses a computer to handle its sales invoices lately busines 492727

Twyla Enterprises uses a computer to handle its sales invoices. Lately, business has been so good that it takes an extra 3 hours per night, plus every third Saturday, to keep up with the volume of sales invoices. Management is considering updating its computer with a faster model that would eliminate all of the overtime processing.

Current Machine

New Machine

Original purchase cost

$15,000

$25,000

Accumulated depreciation

$6,000

Estimated annual operating costs

$24,000

$18,000

Useful life

5 year

5 year

If sold now, the current machine would have a salvage value of $5,000. If operated for the remainder of its useful life, the current machine would have zero salvage value. The new machine is expected to have zero salvage value after five years.

Instructions
Should the current machine be replaced?

acc301 pro sports inc manufactures basketballs for the national basketball associati 492728

Pro Sports Inc. manufactures basketballs for the National Basketball Association (NBA). For the first 6 months of 2008, the company reported the following operating results while operating at 90% of plant capacity and producing 112,500 units.

Amount

Sales

$4,500,000

Cost of goods sold

3,600,000

Selling and administrative expenses

450,000

Net income

$450,000

Fixed costs for the period were: cost of goods sold $1,080,000, and selling and administrative expenses $225,000.
In July, normally a slack manufacturing month, Pro Sports receives a special order for 10,000 basketballs at $28 each from the Italian Basketball Association (IBA). Acceptance of the order would increase variable selling and administrative expenses $0.50 per unit because of shipping costs but would not increase fixed costs and expenses.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an incremental analysis for the special order.

(b) Should Pro Sports Inc. accept the special order? Explain your answer.

(c) What is the minimum selling price on the special order to produce net income of $4.10 per ball?

(d) What nonfinancial factors should management consider in making its decision?

acc301 lewis manufacturing company has four operating divisions during the first qua 492729

Lewis Manufacturing Company has four operating divisions. During the first quarter of 2008, the company reported aggregate income from operations of $176,000 and the following divisional results.

Division

I

II

III

IV

Sales

$250,000

$200,000

$500,000

$400,000

Cost of goods sold

200,000

189,000

300,000

250,000

Selling and administrative expenses

65,000

60,000

60,000

50,000

Income (loss) from operations

$(15,000)

$(49,000)

$140,000

$100,000

Analysis reveals the following percentages of variable costs in each division.

I

II

III

IV

Cost of goods sold

70%

90%

80%

75%

Selling and administrative expenses

40

70

50

60

Discontinuance of any division would save 50% of the fixed costs and expenses for that division.

Top management is very concerned about the unprofitable divisions (I and II). Consensus is that one or both of the divisions should be discontinued.

Instructions

(a) Compute the contribution margin for Divisions I and II. (b) Prepare an incremental analysis concerning the possible discontinuance of (1) Division I and (2) Division II. What course of action do you recommend for each division?

(c) Prepare a columnar condensed income statement for Lewis Manufacturing, assuming Division II is eliminated. Use the CVP format. Division II’s unavoidable fixed costs are allocated equally to the continuing divisions.

(d) Reconcile the total income from operations ($176,000) with the total income from operations without Division II.

acc225 for each of the following entries enter the letter of the explanation that mo 492660

For each of the following entries, enter the letter of the explanation that most closely describes it in the space beside each entry. (You can use letters more than once.)

A. To record receipt of unearned revenue.

B. To record this period’s earning of prior unearned revenue.

C. To record payment of an accrued expense.

D. To record receipt of an accrued revenue.

E. To record an accrued expense.

F. To record an accrued revenue.

G. To record this period’s use of a prepaid expense.

H. To record payment of a prepaid expense.

I. To record this period’s depreciation expense.

1. Rent Expense

2,000

Prepaid Rent

2,000

2. Interest Expense

1,000

Interest Payable

1,000

3. Depreciation Expense

4,000

Accumulated Depreciation

4,000

4. Unearned Professional Fees

3,00

Professional Fees Earned

3,000

5. Insurance Expense

4,200

Prepaid Insurance

4,200

6. Salaries Payable

1,400

Cash

1,400

7. Prepaid Rent

4,500

Cash

4,500

8. Salaries Expense

6,000

Salaries Payable

6,000

9. Interest Receivable

5,000

Interest Revenue

5,000

10. Cash

9,000

Accounts Receivable (from consulting)

9,000

11. Cash

7,500

Unearned Professional Fees

7,500

12. Cash

2,000

Interest Receivable

2,000

acc225 custom computers is a company started by two engineering students to assemble 492661

Account Analysis

Custom Computers is a company started by two engineering students to assemble and market personal computers to faculty and students. The company operates out of the garage of one of the students’ homes.

From the following costs of a recent month, compute the total cost function and total cost for the month:

Telephone

$50, fixed

Utilities

200: fixed, 40% attributable to the garage, 60% to the house

Advertising

85, fixed

Insurance

65, fixed

Materials

18,000, variable, for 12 computers

Labor

2,060: $1,100 fixed plus $960 for horly help for assembling five computers

acc225 ingles company has accounts receivable of 93 100 at march 31 an analysis of t 492664

Ingles Company has accounts receivable of $93,100 at March 31. An analysis of the accounts shows the following.

Month of SaleBalance, March 31

March

60,000

February

17,600

January

8,500

Prior to January

7,000

93,100

Credit terms are 2/10, n/30. At March 31, Allowance for Doubtful Accounts has a credit balance of $1,200 prior to adjustment. The company uses the percentage-of-receivables basis for estimating uncollectible accounts. The company’s estimate of bad debts is as follows.

Age of Accounts

Estimated Percentage Uncollectible

1-30 days

2%

31-60 days

5%

61-90 days

30%

Over 90 days

50%

Instructions:

a. Determine the total estimated uncollectibles.

b. Prepare the adjusting entry at March 31 to record bad debts expense.

acc349 coats galore inc uses activity based costing as the basis for information to 492706

Coats Galore, Inc. uses activity-based costing as the basis for information to set prices for its six lines of seasonal coats. Compute the activity-based overhead rates using the following budgeted data for each of the activity cost pools.

Activity Cost Pools Estimated Expected Overhead Cost Use of Drivers per Activity

Designing

450,000

12,000 designer hours

Sizing and cutting

4,000,000

160,000 machine hours

Stitching and trimming

1,440,000

80,000 labor hours

Wrapping and packing

336,000

32,000 finished units

acc349 mallory luongo inc manufactures five models of kitchen appliances at itsmesap 492707

Mallory Luongo, Inc, manufactures five models of kitchen appliances at itsMesaplant. The company is installing activity-based costing and has identified the following activities performed at itsMesaplant. Having analyzed itsMesaplant operations for purposes of installing activity-based costing, Mallory Luongo, Inc. identified its activity cost centers. It now needs to identify relevant activity cost drivers in order to assign overhead costs to its products. Using the activities listed below, identify for each activity one or more cost drivers that might be used to assign overhead to Mallory Luongo’s five products.

Instructions

Using the activities listed above, identify for each activity one or more cost drivers that might be used to assign overhead to Mallory Luongo’s five products.

acc349 sorce instrument inc manufactures two products missile range instruments and 492708

Sorce Instrument, Inc. manufactures two products: missile range instruments and space pressure gauges. During April, 50 range instruments and 300 pressure gauges were produced, and overhead costs of $89,500 were estimated. An analysis of estimated overhead costs reveals the following activities.

Activities

Cost Drivers

($) Total Cost

1. Materials Handing

Number of requisition

35,000

2. Machine setups

Number of setups

27,500

3. Quality inspections

Number of inspections

27,000

$89,500

The cost driver volume for each product was as follows:

Cost Drivers Instruments

Gauges

Total

Number of requisition

400

600

1,000

Number of setups

200

300

500

Number of inspections

200

400

600

Instructions:

(a) Determine the overhead rate for each activity.

(b) Assign the manufacturing overhead costs for April to the two products using activity based costing.

acc349 skaros stairs co of moore designs and builds factory made premium wooden stai 492709

Skaros Stairs Co. of Moore designs and builds factory-made premium wooden stairways for homes. The manufactured stairway components (spindles, risers, hangers, hand rails) permit installation of stairways of varying lengths and widths. All are of white oak wood. Budgeted manufacturing overhead costs for the year 2011 are as follows.

Overhead Cost Pools Amount

Overhead cost pools

Amounts

Purchasing

57,000

Handing materials

82,000

Production (cutting, milling, finishing)

210,000

Setting upt machines

85,000

Inspecting

90,000

Inventory control (raw materials and finished goods)

126,000

Utilities

180,000

Total budget overhead costs

830,000

Activity cost pools

Cost Drivers

Expected Use of Cost Drivers

Purchasing

Number of orders

600

Handing materials

Number of moves

8,000

Production (Cutting, milling, finishing)

Direct labor hours

100,000

Setting up machines

Number of setupt

1,250

Inspecting

Number of inspections

6,000

Inventory control (raw materials and finished goods)

Number of components

168,000

Utilities

Square feet occupied

90,000

David Hannon, sales manager, has received an order for 280 stairs from Community Builders, Inc., a large housing development contractor. At David’s request, Neal prepares cost estimates for producing components for 280 stairs so David can submit a contract price per stair to Community Builders. He accumulates the following data for the production of 280 stairways.

Direct materials

103,600

Direct labor

112,000

Machine hours

14,500

Number of purchase orders

60

Number of material moves

800

Number of machine setups

100

Number of inspections

450

Number of components

16,000

Number of square feet occupied

8,000

Requirement:

a. Compute the predetermined overhead rate using traditional costing with machine hours as the basis.

b. What is the manufacturing cost per stairway under traditional costing?

c. What is the manufacturing cost per stairway under the proposed activity-based costing?

acc349 polzin corporation produces two grades of wine from grapes that it buys fromc 492710

Polzin Corporation produces two grades of wine from grapes that it buys fromCaliforniagrowers. It produces and sells roughly 3,000,000 liters per year of a low-cost, high-volume product called CoolDay. It sells this in 600,000 5-liter jugs. Polzin also produces and sells roughly 300,000 liters per year of a low-volume, high-cost product called LiteMist. LiteMist is sold in 1-liter bottles.

CoolDay

LiteMist

Direct materials per liter

0.40

1.20

Direct labor cost per liter

0.25

0.50

Direct labor hours per liter

0.05

0.09

Total labor hours

150,000

27,000

Expected Use of Cost Drivers per Product

Activity Cost Pool

Cost Driver

Estimated overhead

Expected Use of Cost

Drivers CoolDay

LiteMist

Grape processing

Cart of grapes

145,860

6,600

6,000

600

Aging

Total months

396,000

6,600,000

3,000,000

3,600,000

Botting and corking

Number of bottles

270,000

900,000

600,000

300,000

Maintain and inspect equipment

Number of inspections

240,800

800

350

450

Total estimated overhead

$1,241,600

Requirement:

1. Under traditional product costing using direct labor hours, compute the total manufacturing cost per liter of both products.

2. Under ABC, prepare a schedule showing the computation of the activity-based overhead rates (per cost driver).

3. Prepare a schedule assigning each activity’s overhead cost pool to each product, based on the use of cost drivers. What is the overhead cost per liter?

4. Compute the total manufacturing cost per liter for both products under ABC.

acc349 the following direct materials and direct labor data pertain to the operation 492711

The following direct materials and direct labor data pertain to the operations of Batista Manufacturing Company for the month of August.

Costs

Actual labor rate

13

Per hour

Actual materials price

128

Per ton

Standard labor rate

12

Per hour

Standard materials price

130

Per ton

Quantities

Actual hours incurred and used

4,250 hours

Actual quantity of materials purchased and used

1,250 tons

Standard hours used

4,300 hours

Standard quantity of materials used

1,200 tons

Instructions

a. Compute the total, price, and quantity variances for materials and labor.

b. Provide two possible explanations for each of the unfavorable variances calculated above, and suggest where responsibility for the unfavorable result might be placed.

acc349 mega electronix sells television sets and dvd players the business is divided 492712

Mega Electronix sells television sets and DVD players. The business is divided into two divisions along product lines. CVP income statements for a recent quarter’s activity are presented below.

TV Division

DVD Division

Total

Sales

600,000

400,000

1,000,000

Variable costs

450,000

240,000

690,000

Contribution margin

150,000

160,000

310,000

Fixed costs

124,000

Net Income

186,000

Instructions

(a) Determine sales mix percentage and contribution margin ratio for each division.

(b) Calculate the company’s weighted-average contribution margin ratio.

(c) Calculate the company’s break-even point in dollars.

(d) Determine the sales level in dollars for each division at the break-even point.

acc349 determine missing amounts in cost of goods manufactured schedule an incomplet 492713

Determine missing amounts in cost of goods manufactured schedule. An incomplete cost of goods manufactured schedule is presented below.

MADLOCK MANUFACTURING COMPANY

Cost of Goods Manufactured Schedule

For the Year Ended December 31, 2005

Work in process (1/1)

210,000

Direct materials:

Raw materials inventory (1/1)

?

Add: Raw materials purchases

158,000

Total raw materials available for use

?

Less: Raw materials inventory (12/31)

7,500

Direct materials used

190,000

Direct labor

?

Manufacturing overhead:

Indirect labor

18,000

Factory depreciation

36,000

Factory utilities

68,000

Total overhead

122,000

Total manufacturing costs

?

Total cost of work in process

?

Less: Work in process (12/31)

81,000

Cost of goods manufactured

530,000

Instructions:

Complete the cost of goods manufactured schedule for Madlock Manufacturing Company.

acc349 a job cost sheet of battle company is given below 492715

A job cost sheet of Battle Company is given below.

Job Cost Sheet

Job No.469

Quantity: 2,000

Item: White Lion Cages

Date Requesteed: 7/2

For: Tesla Company

Date Completed: 7/31

Date

Direct Materials

Direct labor

Manufacturing Overhead

7/10

828

7/12

900

7/15

440

528

7/22

380

456

7/27

1,600

7/27

1,500

7/31

540

648

Instructions

(a) Answer the following questions.

(1) What are the source documents for direct materials, direct labor, and manufacturing overhead costs assigned to this job?

(2) What is the predetermined manufacturing overhead rate?

(3) What are the total cost and the unit cost of the completed job?

(b) Prepare the entry to record the completion of the job.

acc349 jessica pothier opened funflatables on june 1 2011 the company rents out moon 492716

Analyzing the Efffects of Transaction Using T-Accounts and Preparing an Unadjusted Trial Balance

Jessica Pothier opened FunFlatables on June 1, 2011. The company rents out moon walks and inflatable slides for parties and corporate events. The business also has obtained the use of an abandoned ice rink located in a local shopping mall, where its rental products are displayed andavailable for casual hourly rental by mall patrons. The following transactions occurred during thefirst month of operations.

a. Received $50,000 cash contributions from Jessica to establish the sole proprietorship.

b. Purchased inflatable rides and inflation equipment, paying $20,000 cash.

c. Received $5,000 cash from casual hourly rentals at the mall.

d. Rented rides and equipment to customers for $10,000. Received cash of $2,000; the rest is due from customers.

e. Received $2,500 from a large corporate customer as a deposit on a party booking for July 4.

f. Began to prepare for the July 4 party by purchasing various party supplies on account for $600.

g. Paid $12,000 in cash for renting the mall space in June, July, and August.

h. Received $1,000 from customers on accounts receivable.

i. Paid $4,000 in wages to employees for work done during the month.

j. Paid $1,000 for running a television ad this month.

k. Jessica Pothier withdrew $6,000 cash from the business.

Required:

1. Set up appropriate T-accounts for Cash; Accounts Receivable; Supplies; Prepaid Rent;Equipment; Accounts Payable; Unearned Rent Revenue; J. Pothier, Capital; J. Pothier,Drawing; Rent Revenue; Wages Expense; and Advertising Expense. All accounts begin with zero balances.

2. Record in the T-accounts the effects of each transaction for FunFlatables in June, referencing each transaction in the accounts with the transaction letter. Show the unadjusted ending balances in the T-accounts.

3. Prepare an unadjusted trial balance for the end of June 2011.

acc349 doris stewart started her practice as a design consultant on september 1 2012 492717

Journalizing transactions, posting to T-accounts, and preparing a trial balance

Doris Stewart started her practice as a design consultant on September 1, 2012. During the first month of operations, the business completed the following transactions:

Sep. 1 Received $42,000 cash and issued common stock.

4. Purchased supplies, $700, and furniture, $1,900, on account.

6. Performed services for a law firm and received $1,400 cash.

7. Paid $24,000 cash to acquire land for a future office site.

10. Performed service for a hotel and received its promise to pay the $1,000 within one week.

14. Paid for the furniture purchased September 4 on account.

15. Paid secretary’s bi-monthly salary, $490.

17. Received cash on account, $400.

20. Prepared a design for a school on account, $700.

28. Received $2,100 cash for consulting with Plummer & Gorden.

30. Paid secretary’s bi-monthly salary, $490.

30. Paid rent expense, $650.

30. Paid cash dividends of $3,000.

Requirements

1. Open the following T-accounts: Cash, Accounts receivable, Supplies, Furniture, Land, Accounts payable, Common stock, Dividends, Service revenue, Salary expense, and Rent expense.

2. Record each transaction in the journal, using the account titles given. Key each transaction by date. Explanations are not required.

3. Post the transactions to the T-accounts, using transaction dates as posting references in the ledger accounts. Label the balance of each account Bal, as shown in the chapter.

4. Prepare the trial balance of Doris Stewart, Designer, P.C., at September 30, 2012.

acc349 caren smith opened a medical practice during july the first month of operatio 492718

Using the accounting equation to analyze transactions

Caren Smith opened a medical practice. During July, the first month of operation, the business, titled Caren Smith, M.D., P.C. (Professional Corporation), experienced the following events:

July 6 Smith invested $55,000 in the business by opening a bank account in the name of C. Smith, M.D., P.C. The corporation issued common stock to Smith.

9 Paid $46,000 cash for land.

12 Purchased medical supplies for $1,800 on account.

15 Officially opened for business.

15-31 During the rest of the month, Smith treated patients and earned service revenue of $8,000, receiving cash.

29 Paid cash expenses: employees’ salaries, $1,600; office rent, $900; utilities, $100.

30 Returned supplies purchased on the 12th for the cost of those supplies, $700.

31 Paid $1,100 on account.

Requirement

1. Analyze the effects of these events on the accounting equation of the medical practice of Caren Smith, M.D., P.C. Use a format similar to that of Exhibit 1-6, with headings for Cash, Medical supplies, Land, Accounts payable, Common stock, and Retained earnings.

acc349 aardee industries manufactures pharmaceutical products in two departments mix 492719

Aardee Industries manufactures pharmaceutical products in two departments: Mixing and Tablet-Making. Additional information on the two departments follows. Each tablet contains 0.5 gram of direct materials.

The Mixing Department makes 200,000 grams of direct materials mixture (enough to make 400,000 tablets) because the Tablet-Making Department has only enough capacity to process 400,000 tablets. All direct material costs are incurred in the Mixing Department. Aardee incurs $156,000 in direct material costs.

The Tablet-Making Department manufactures only 390,000 tablets from the 200,000 grams of mixture processed; 2.5% of the direct materials mixture is lost in the tablet-making process. Each tablet sells for $1. All costs other than direct material costs are fixed costs. The following requirements refer only to the preceding data. There is no connection between the requirements.

Required

1. An outside contractor makes the following offer: If Aardee will supply the contractor with 10,000 grams of mixture, the contractor will manufacture 19,500 tablets for Aardee (allowing for the normal 2.5% loss of the mixture during the tablet-making process) at $0.12 per tablet. Should Aardee accept the contractor’s offer? Show your calculations.

2. Another company offers to prepare 20,000 grams of mixture a month from direct materials Aardee supplies. The company will charge $0.07 per gram of mixture. Should Aardee accept the company’s offer? Show your calculations.

3. Aardee’s engineers have devised a method that would improve quality in the Tablet-Making Department. They estimate that the 10,000 tablets currently being lost would be saved. The modification would cost $7,000 a month. Should Aardee implement the new method? Show your calculations.

4. Suppose that Aardee also loses 10,000 grams of mixture in its Mixing Department. These losses can be reduced to zero if the company is willing to spend $9,000 per month in quality-improvement methods. Should Aardee adopt the quality-improvement method? Show your calculations.

5. What are the benefits of improving quality in the Mixing Department compared with improving quality in the Tablet-Making Department?

acc349 the vest school of vocational technology has organized the school training pr 492720

Selecting an appropriate cost driver (What is the base?)

The Vest School of Vocational Technology has organized the school training programs into three departments. Each department provides training in a different area as follows: nursing assistant, dental hygiene, and office technology. The school’s owner, Wilma Vest, wants to know how much it cost to operate each of the three departments. To accumulate the total cost for each department, the accountant has identified several indirect cost that must be allocated to each. These costs are $10,080 of telephone expenses, $2,016 of supplies expense, $720,000 of office rent, $144,000 of janitorial services, and $150,000 of salary paid to the dean of students. To provide a reasonably accurate allocation of costs, the accountant has identified several possible cost drivers. These drivers and their association with each department follow.

Cost Driver

Dept. 1

Dept. 2

Dept. 3

Number of telephones

28

32

52

Number of faculty Members

20

16

12

Square footage of office space

28,000

16,8000

12,000

Number of secretaries

2

2

2

Requirements:

a. Identify the appropriate cost objectives

b. Identify the appropriate cost driver for each indirect cost and compute the allocation rate for assigning each indirect cost to the cost objectives.

c. Determine the amount of telephone expense that should be allocated to each of the three departments.

d. Determine the amount of supplies expense that should be allocated to Department 3.

e. Determine the amount of office rent that should be allocated to Department 2.

f. Determine the amount of janitorial services cost that should be allocated to Department 1.

g. Identify two cost drivers not listed here that could be used to allocate the cost of the dean’s salary to the three departments.

acc349 comparative balance sheets for 2011 and 2010 and a statement of income for 20 492721

Statement of cash flows; direct method

Comparative balance sheets for 2011 and 2010 and a statement of income for 2011 are given below for Metagrobolize Industries. Additional information from the accounting records of Metagrobolize also is provided

Additional information from the accounting records:

a.During 2011, equipment with a cost of $300,000 (90% depreciated) was sold.

b.The statement of shareholders’ equity reveals reductions of $225,000 and $450,000 for stock dividends and cash dividends, respectively.

Required:

Prepare the statement of cash flows of Metagrobolize for the year ended December 31, 2011. Present cash flows from operating activities by the direct method. (You may omit the schedule to reconcile net income to cash flows from operating activities.)

acc349 the comparative balance sheets for 2011 and 2010 and the statement of income 492722

Statement of cash flows; direct method

The comparative balance sheets for 2011 and 2010 and the statement of income for 2011 are given below for Wright Company. Additional information from Wright’s accounting records is provided also.

Additional information from the accounting records:

· a.Land that originally cost $10,000 was sold for $7,000.

· b.The common stock of Microsoft Corporation was purchased for $25,000 as a short-term investment not classified as a cash equivalent.

· c.New equipment was purchased for $150,000 cash.

· d.A $30,000 note was paid at maturity on January 1.

· e.On January 1, 2011, $60,000 of bonds were sold at face value.

· f.Common stock ($50,000 par) was sold for $76,000.

· g.Net income was $80,000 and cash dividends of $35,000 were paid to shareholders.

Required:

Prepare the statement of cash flows of Wright Company for the year ended December 31, 2011. Present cash flows from operating activities by the direct method. (You may omit the schedule to reconcile net income to cash flows from operating activities.)

acc349 the blending department of ceja company has the following cost and production 492723

Determine equivalent units, unit cost, and assignment of cost

The blending Department of Ceja Company has the following cost and production data for the month of May.

Work in process May 1

Direct materials: 100% complete

100,000

Conversion costs: 20% complete

75,000

Cost of work in process, May 1

175,000

Costs incurred during production in May

Direct materials

800,000

Conversion costs

350,000

Cost incurred in May

1,150,000

Units transferred out totaled 8,000. Ending work in process was 2,000 units that are 100% complete as to materials and 25% complete as to conversion costs.

Instructions

a. Computer the equivalent units of production for (1) materials and (2) conversion cost for the month of May.

b. Compute the unit costs for the month.

c. Determine the cost to be assigned to the units transferred out and in ending work in process.

ba225 impact on breakeven point if sale price variable costs and fixed costs change 492621

Impact on breakeven point if sale price, variable costs, and fixed costs change

Dependable Drivers Driving School charges $250 per student to prepare and administer written and driving tests. Variable costs of $100 per student include trainers’ wages, study materials, and gasoline. Annual fixed costs of $75,000 include the training facility and fleet of cars.

Requirements

1. For each of the following independent situations, calculate the contribution margin per unit and the breakeven point in units by first referring to the original data provided:

a. Breakeven point with no change in information.

b. Decrease sales price to $220 per student.

c. Decrease variable costs to $50 per student.

d. Decrease fixed costs to $60,000.

2. Compare the impact of changes in the sales price, variable costs, and fixed costs on the contribution margin per unit and the breakeven point in units.

ba225 kincaid company sells flags with team logos kincaid has fixed costs of 583 200 492622

Analyzing CVP relationships

Kincaid Company sells flags with team logos. Kincaid has fixed costs of $583,200 per year plus variable costs of $4.80 per flag. Each flag sells for $12.00.

Requirements

1. Use the income statement equation approach to compute the number of flags Kincaid must sell each year to break even.

2. Use the contribution margin ratio CVP formula to compute the dollar sales Kincaid needs to earn $33,000 in operating income for 2012. (Round the contribution margin to two decimal places.)

3. Prepare Kincaid’s contribution margin income statement for the year ended December 31, 2012, for sales of 72,000 flags. Cost of goods sold is 70% of variable costs. Operating costs make up the rest of variable costs and all of fixed costs. (Round your final answers to the nearest whole number.)

4. The company is considering an expansion that will increase fixed costs by 21% and variable costs by $0.60 per flag. Compute the new breakeven point in units and in dollars. Should Kincaid undertake the expansion? Give your reasoning. Round your final answers to the nearest whole number.

ba225 each year ace engines surveys 7 600 former and prospective customers regarding 492626

Each year, ACE Engines surveys 7,600 former and prospective customers regarding satisfaction and brand awareness. For the current year, the company is considering outsourcing the survey to RBG Associates, who have offered to conduct the survey and summarize results for $50,000. Robert Ace, the president of ACE Engines, believes that RBG will do a higher-quality job than his company has been doing, but is unwilling to spend more than $12,000 above current costs. The head of bookkeeping for ACE has prepared the following summary of costs related to the survey in the prior year.

Mailing

$27,000

Printing (done by Lester Print shop)

9,000

Salary of Pat Fisher, part-time employee who stuffed envelopes and summarized data when surveys were returned (130 x $16)

2,080

Share of electricity/phone/etc. based on square feet of space occupied by Pat Fisher vs. entire company

600

Total

$39,800

Prepare an incremental analysis in good form to determine the impact on profit of going outside versus conducting the survey as in the past. Will ACE accept the RBG offer? Why or why not?

acc346 the following information is available for sappy s surgical shears for the fi 492630

The following information is available for Sappy’s Surgical Shears for the fiscal year ending December 31, 20XX.

Beginning balance in Finished Goods

$17,000

Ending balance in Finished Goods

15,200

Beginning balance in work in process

2,500

Ending balance in work in process

1,836

Selling expenses

123,000

General and administrative expenses

89,000

Direct material cost

54,500

Direct labor cost

66,000

Manufacturing overhead

21,400

Sales

385,000

Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured.

acc346 match each of the following six terms with the phrase that most closely descr 492631

Match each of the following six terms with the phrase that most closely describes it. Each answer below may be used only once.

_____ 1. activity-based costing

_____ 2. cost of goods available for sale

_____ 3. period costs

_____ 4. process costing system

_____ 5. just-in-time system

_____ 6. work in process

(A) Costs assigned to the goods produced; also known as manufacturing costs

(B) Materials costs that are not traced directly to products produced

(C) System that seeks to minimize Raw Materials Inventory and Work in Process Inventory

(D) Cost of items that are completed and transferred from Work in Process Inventory to Finished Goods Inventory

(E) Costs that are identified with accounting periods rather than with goods produced

(F) Actual overhead is greater than overhead that has been applied to products

(G) Method of assigning overhead costs that uses multiple allocation bases

(H) System that uses job-order sheets to collect costs for each individual job

(I) Cost of all materials and parts that are directly traced to the items produced

(J) Beginning balance in the Finished Goods Inventory plus cost of goods manufactured

(K) Overhead applied to products is greater than the actual overhead costs incurred

(L) Used by companies that produce large quantities of identical items

(M) Cost of all manufacturing activities other than direct material and direct labor

(N) Inventory account that contains the cost of goods that are only partially completed

acc346 tco b imperial company s income statement for the most recent year appears be 492632

(TCO B) Imperial Company’s income statement for the most recent year appears below.

Sales (45,000 units)

$1,350,000

Less: variable expenses

750,000

Contribution margin

600,000

Less: fixed expenses

375,000

Net operating income

$225,000

Required:

a. Calculate the unit contribution margin.

b. Calculate the break-even point in dollars.

c. If the company desires a net operating income of $290,000, how many units must it sell?

acc346 tco 4 legal docs inc is a legal services firm that files incorporation papers 492633

(TCO 4) Legal Docs Inc is a legal services firm that files incorporation papers for small businesses. They charge $1,000 per application. This year’s income statement shows the following:

Sales

$1,295,000

Variable Expenses

$1,023,000

Contribution margin

$272,000

Fixed costs

$250,000

Profit

$22,000

Required:

(a) Compute the break-even point in units.

(b) Compute the contribution margin ratio.

(c) Compute the current margin of safety.

(d) How many applications must the company sell to make a profit of $350,000?

acc346 tco 6 pacific airlines has three service departments ticketing baggage handli 492634

(TCO 6) Pacific Airlines has three service departments; ticketing, baggage handling, and aircraft maintenance. Costs of these departments are allocated to two revenue producing departments, domestic and international flights. Costs for the service departments are not separated into fixed and variable and the totals are as follows:

Ticketing

$4,000,000

Baggage handing

$2,000,000

Aircraft maintance

$6,000,000

Air miles are as follows:

Domistic

5,000,000

International

20,000,000

(a) Allocate the service department costs based on air miles.

(b) Evaluate Pacific Airlines use of air miles as a basis for allocation. Do you think the cause-and-effect relationship is strong?

(c) Suggest alternative methods to allocate the service department costs.

acc346 for nearly 20 years custom coatings has provided painting and galvanizing ser 492635

For nearly 20 years Custom Coatings has provided painting and galvanizing services for manufacturers in its region. Manufacturers of various metal products have relied on the quality and quick turnaround time provided by Custom Coatings and its 20 skilled employees. During the last year, as a result of a sharp upturn in the economy, the company’s sales have increased by 30% relative to the previous year. The company has not been able to increase its capacity fast enough, so Custom Coatings has had to turn work away because it cannot keep up with customer requests.

Top management is considering the purchase of a sophisticated robotic painting booth. The booth would represent a considerable move in the direction of automation versus manual labor. If Custom Coatings purchases the booth, it would most likely lay off 15 of its skilled painters. To analyze the decision, the company compiled production information from the most recent year and then prepared a parallel compilation assuming that the company would purchase the new equipment and lay off the workers. Those data are shown below. As you can see, the company projects that during the last year it would have been far more profitable if it had used the automated approach.

Current Approach

Automated Approach

Sales

2,000,000

2,000,000

Variable costs

1,200,000

400,000

Contribution margin

800,000

1,600,000

Fixed costs

200,000

600,000

Net Income

600,000

1,000,000

Instructions

a. Compute and interpret the contribution margin ratio under each approach.

b. Compute the break-even point in sales dollars under each approach. Discuss the implications of your findings.

c. Using the current level of sales, compute the margin of safety ratio under each approach and interpret your findings.

d. Determine the degree of operating leverage for each approach at current sales levels. How much would the company’s net income decline under each approach with a 10% decline in sales?

e. At what level of sales would the company’s net income be the same under either approach?

f. Discuss the issues that the company must consider in making this decision.

acc346 pickle motorcycles inc pmi manufactures three motorcycle models a cruising bi 492637

Choosing an Activity-Based Costing System

Pickle Motorcycles, Inc. (PMI), manufactures three motorcycle models: a cruising bike (Route 66), a street bike (Main Street), and a starter model (Alley Cat). Because of the different materials used, production processes for each model differ significantly in terms of machine types and time requirements. Once parts are produced, however, assembly time per unit required for each type of bike is similar. For this reason, PMI allocates overhead on the basis of machine-hours. Last year the company shipped 1,000 Route 66s, 4,000 Main Streets, and 10,000 Alley Cats and had the following revenues and expenses:

PICKLE MOTORCYCLES, INC.

Income Statement

Route66

Main Street

Alley Cat

Total

Sales

$7,600,000

$11,200,000

$9,500,000

$28,300,000

Direct costs

Direct materials

3,000,000

4,80,000

4,000,000

11,800,000

Direct labor

288,000

480,000

1,080,000

1,848,000

Variable overhead

Machine setup

468,000

Order processing

1,152,000

Warehousing costs

1,674,000

Energy to run machines

756,000

Shipping

648,000

Contribution margin

9,954,000

Fixed overhead

Plant administration

1,76,000

Other fixed overhead

2,800,000

Gross profit

$5,394,000

PMI’s chief financial officer (CFO) hired a consultant to recommend cost allocation bases. The consultant recommended the following:

Activity Level

Activity

Cost Driver

Route66

Main Street

Alley Cat

Setting up machines

Number of production runs

22

34

44

Processing orders

Number of sales orders received

400

600

600

Warehousing

Number of units held in inventory

200

200

400

Using energy

Machine-house

10,000

16,000

24,000

Shipping

Number of units shipped

1,000

4,000

10,000

The consultant found no basis for allocating the plant administration and other fixed overhead costs and recommended that these not be applied to products.

Required

a. Using machine-hours to allocate production overhead, complete the income statement for Pickle Motorcycles. (See the “using energy” activity for machine-hours.) Do not attempt to allocate plant administration or other fixed overhead.

b. Complete the income statement using the bases recommended by the consultant.

c. How might activity-based costing result in better decisions by Pickle Motorcycles’s management?

d. After hearing the consultant’s recommendations, the CFO decides to adopt activity-based costing but expresses concern about not allocating some of the overhead to the products (plant administration and other fixed overhead). In the CFO’s view, “Products have to bear a fair share of all overhead or we won’t be covering all of our costs.” How would you respond to this comment?

acc346 huron furniture is considering updating its cost system to an activity based 492638

Activity-Based Costing, Cost Flow Diagram, and Predetermined Overhead Rates

Huron Furniture is considering updating its cost system to an activity-based costing system and is interested in understanding the effects. The company’s cost accountant has identified three overhead cost pools along with appropriate cost drivers for each pool.

Cost Pools

Costs

Activity

Drivers

Utilities

450,000

60,000

Machine-hours

Schedulding and setup

450,000

600

Setup

Material handing

1,200,000

1,600,000

Pound of material

The company manufactures three models of tables (oval, round, and square). The plans for production for the next year and the budgeted direct costs and activity by product line are as follows:

Products

Oval

Round

Square

Total direct costs (material and labor)

$80,000

$80,000

$80,000

Total machine-hours

30,000

10,000

20,000

Total number of setup

80

300

200

Total pounds of material

500,000

300,000

800,000

Total direct labor-hours

3,200

1,800

5,000

Number of units produced

4,000

2,000

6,000

Required

a. The current cost accounting system charges overhead to products based on direct labor-hours. What unit product costs will be reported for the three products if the current cost system continues to be used?

b. A consulting firm has recommended using an activity-based costing system, with the activities based on the cost pools identified by the cost accountant. Prepare a cost flow diagram of the proposed ABC system.

c. What are the cost driver rates for the three cost pools identi? ed by the cost accountant?

d. What unit product costs will be reported for the three products if the ABC system suggested by the cost accountant’s classi? cation of cost pools is used?

e. If management should decide to implement an activity-based costing system, what benefits should it expect?

acc346 on october 1 2011 santana rey launched a computer services company called bus 492639

On October 1, 2011, Santana Rey launched a computer services company called Business Solutions, which provides consulting services, computer system installations, and custom program development. Rey adopts the calendar year for reporting purposes and expects to prepare the company’s first set of financial statements on December 31, 2011. The company’s initial chart of accounts follows.

Account No.

Account No.

Cash

101

S.Rey, Capital

301

Account Receivable

106

S.Rey, withdrawals

302

Computer Supplies

126

Computer Services Revenue

403

Prepaid Insurance

128

Wages Expense

623

Prepaid Rent

131

Advertising Expense

655

Office Equipment

163

Mileage Expense

676

Computer Equpment

167

Miscellaneous Expenses

677

Account Payable

201

Rapairs Expense-Computer

684

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record each of the following transactions for Business Solutions.

Oct. 1 S. Rey invested $45,000 cash, a $20,000 computer system, and $8,000 of office equipment in the company.

2 The company paid $3,300 cash for four months’ rent. (Hint: Debit Prepaid Rent for $3,300.)

3 The company purchased $1,420 of computer supplies on credit from Harris Office Products.

5 The company paid $2,220 cash for one year’s premium on a property and liability insurance policy. (Hint: Debit Prepaid Insurance for $2,220.)

6 The company billed Easy Leasing $4,800 for services performed in installing a new Web server.

8 The company paid $1,420 cash for the computer supplies purchased from Harris Office Products on October 3.

10 The company hired Lyn Addie as a part-time assistant for $125 per day, as needed.

12 The company billed Easy Leasing another $1,400 for services performed.

15 The company received $4,800 cash from Easy Leasing as partial payment on its account.

17 The company paid $805 cash to repair computer equipment that was damaged when moving it.

20 The company paid $1,728 cash for advertisements published in the local newspaper.

22 The company received $1,400 cash from Easy Leasing on its account.

28 The company billed IFM Company $5,208 for services performed.

31 The company paid $875 cash for Lyn Addie’s wages for seven days’ work.

31 S. Rey withdrew $3,600 cash from the company for personal use.

Nov. 1 The company reimbursed S. Rey in cash for business automobile mileage allowance (Rey logged 1,000 miles at $0.32 per mile).

2 The company received $4,633 cash from Liu Corporation for computer services performed.

5 The company purchased computer supplies for $1,125 cash from Harris Office Products.

8 The company billed Gomez Co. $5,668 for services performed.

13 The company received notification from Alex’s Engineering Co. that Business Solutions’ bid of $3,950 for an upcoming project is accepted.

18 The company received $2,208 cash from IFM Company as partial payment of the October 28 bill.

22 The company donated $250 cash to theUnited Wayin the company’s name.

24 The company completed work for Alex’s Engineering Co. and sent it a bill for $3,950.

25 The company sent another bill to IFM Company for the past-due amount of $3,000.

28 The company reimbursed S. Rey in cash for business automobile mileage (1,200 miles at $0.32 per mile).

30 The company paid $1,750 cash for Lyn Addie’s wages for 14 days’ work.

30 S. Rey withdrew $2,000 cash from the company for personal use.

2. Open ledger accounts (in balance column format) and post the journal entries from part 1 to them.

3. Prepare a trial balance as of the end of November.

acc346 you have been hired as a new management trainees by earrings unlimited a dist 492640

Master Budget with Supporting Schedules

You have been hired as a new management trainees by Earrings Unlimited, a distributor of earrings to various retail outlets located in shopping malls across the country. In the past, the company has done very little in the way of budgeting and at certain times of the year has experience a shortage of cash.

Sine you are well trained in budgeting, you have decided to prepare comprehensive budgets for the upcoming second quarter in order to show management the benefits that can be gained from an integrated budgeting program. To this end, you have worked with accounting and other areas to gather the information assembled below.

The company sells many styles of earrings, but all are sold for the same price-$10.00 per pair. Actual sales of earrings for the last three months and budgeted sales for the next six month follow (in pairs of earrings):

January (actual) 20,000 Febuary (actual) 26,000

March (actual) 40,000 April (budget) 65,000

May (budget) 100,000 June (budget) 50,000

July (budget) 30,000 August (budget) 28,000

September (budget) 25,000

The concentration of sales before and during May is due to Mother’s Day. Sufficient inventory should be on hand at the end of each month to supply 40% of the earrings sold in the following month. Suppliers are paid $4.00 for a pair of earrings. One-half of a month’s purchases in paid for in the month of the purchase; the other half is paid for in the following month. All sales are on credit, with no discount, and payable within 15 days. The company has found, however, that only 20 percent of a month’s sales are collected in the month of sale. An additional 70 percent is collected in the following month, and the remaining 10 percent in the second month following sale. Bad debts have been negligible.

Monthly operation expenses for the company are given below:

Variable:

Sales Commission 4% of sales

Fixed:

Advertising 200,000

Rent 18,000

Salaries 106,000

Utilities 7,000

Insurance 3,000

Depreciation 14,000

Insurance is paid on an annual basis, in November of each year. The company plans to purchase 16,000 in new equipment during May and $40,000 in new equipment during June; both purchases will be for cash. The company declares dividends of $15,000 each quarter payable in the first month of the following quarter.

A listing of the company’s ledger accounts as of March 3 is given below:

Assets

Cash 74,000

Accounts receivalbe ($26,000 febuary sales;$320,00 March sale 346,000

Inventory 104,000

Prepaid Insurance 21,000

Property and equipment (net) 950,000

Total Assets 1,495,000

Liabilities and Stockholders Equity

Accounts payable 100,000

Dividends payable 15,000

capital stock 800,000

retained earnings 580,000

Total liabilities and Stockholders Equity 1,495,000

The company maintains a minimum cash balance of 50,000. All borrowing is done at the beginning of a month, and repayments are made at the end of a month. The annual interest rate is 12 percent. Interest is computed and paid at the end of each quarter on all loans outstanding during the quarter.

Required:

Prepare a master budget for the three-month period ending June 30. Include the following detailed budgets;

1. a. A sales budget, by month and in total

b. A schedule of expected cash collections from sales, by month and in total

c. A merchandise purchaser budget in units and in dollars. Show the budget by month and in total.

d. A schedule of expected cash disbursements for merchandise purchases, by month and in total.

2. A cash budget. Show the budget by the month and in total. Determine any borrowing that would be needed to maintain the minimum cash balance of $50,000

3. A budgeted income statement for the three months period ending June 30. Use the contribution approach.

4. A budgeted balance sheet as of June 30.

acc346 the production department has been investigating possible ways to trim total 492641

Clark Paints: The production department has been investigating possible ways to trim total production costs. One possibility currently being examined is to make the paint cans instead of purchasing them. The equipment needed would cost $200,000, with a disposal value of $40,000, and it would be able to produce 5,500,000 cans over the life of the machinery. The production department estimates that approximately 1,100,000 cans would be needed for each of the next five years.

Required:

1. Based on the above information and using Excel, calculate the following items for this proposed equipment purchase:

· Annual cash flows over the expected life of the equipment o Payback period

  • Annual rate of return
  • Net present value
  • Internal rate of return

2. Would you recommend the acceptance of this proposal? Why or why not?

acc346 tco d the oxford company has budgeted sales revenues as follows 492642

(TCO D) The Oxford Company has budgeted sales revenues as follows.

Oct.

Nov.

Dec

Credit sales

120,000

96,000

72,000

Cash sales

72,000

204,000

156,000

Total sales

192,000

300,000

228,000

Past experience indicates that 60% of the credit sales will be collected in the month of sale and the remaining 40% will be collected in the following month.

Purchases of inventory are all on credit, with 60% paid in the month of purchase and 40% in the month following purchase. Budgeted inventory purchases are $260,000 in October, $180,000 in November, and $84,000 in December.

Other budgeted cash receipts include (a) the sale of plant assets for $49,400 in November and (b) the sale of new common stock for $67,400 in December.

Other budgeted cash disbursements include (a) operating expenses of $27,000 each month, (b) selling and administrative expenses of $50,000 each month, (c) dividends of $76,000 to be paid in November, and (d) purchase of equipment for $24,000 cash in December

The company has a cash balance of $40,000 at the beginning of December and wishes to maintain a minimum cash balance of $40,000 at the end of each month. An open line of credit is available at the bank and carries an annual interest rate of 12%. Assume that all borrowing is done on the first day of the month in which financing is needed and that all repayments are made on the last day of the month in which excess cash is available. Also assume that $14,000 of financing was obtained on November 1.

Requirements:

Use this information to prepare a schedule of expected cash payments for purchases of inventory for the months of November and December only

acc346 selected transactions for loving home an interior decorator corporation in it 492643

Selected transactions for Loving Home, an interior decorator corporation, in its first month of business, are as follows.

1. Issued stock to investors for $18,319 in cash.

2. Purchased used car for $9,902 cash for use in business.

3. Purchased supplies on account for $367.

4. Billed customers $5,017 for services performed.

5. Paid $254 cash for advertising start of the business.

6. Received $1,280 cash from customers billed in transaction (4).

7. Paid creditor $380 cash on account.

8. Paid dividends of $488 cash to stockholders.

Instructions:

a. For each transaction indicate (a) the basic type of account debited and credited (asset, liability, stockholders’ equity); (b) the specific account debited and credited (Cash, Rent Expense, Service Revenue, etc.); (c) whether the specific account is increased or decreased; and (d) the normal balance of the specific account. Use the folllowing format, in which transaction1 is given as an example.

b. Journalize the transactions. Do not provide explanations.

the following information was made available from the income statement and balance s 492655

1. The following information was made available from the income statement and balance sheet of Lauren Company:

Complete the cash flow from operating activities section for Lauren Company using the direct method for the year ended December 31, 2010.

2. Given the following balance sheet, complete a horizontal analysis. Compute the percentage to the nearest tenth of a percent.

Jill’s Bikes

Comparative Balance Sheet

For Years Ended December 31, 2011 and 2010

(in thousands

2011

2010

Difference

Percentage

Assets

Current Assets

Cash and Equivalents

$72

$94

Accounts Receivable, net

122

104

Inventory

288

232

Total Current Assets

482

430

Property, plant and Equipment

638

358

Total Assets

$1,120

$ 788

Liabilities

Current Liabilities

Accounts Payable

242

148

Accrued Liabilities

48

66

Total Current Liabilities

290

214

Long-Term Liabilities

346

208

Total Liabilities

636

422

Stockholders’ Equity

Common Stock

70

60

Retained Earnings

414

306

Total Stockholders’ Equity

484

366

Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

$1,120

$788

acc225 at the start of 2012 santana rey is considering adding a partner to her busin 492656

At the start of 2012, Santana Rey is considering adding a partner to her business. She envisions the new partner taking the lead in generating sales of both services and merchandise for Business Solutions. S. Rey’s equity in Business Solutions as of January 1, 2012, is reflected in the following capital balance.
S. Rey, Capital $80,360

Required
1. S. Rey is evaluating whether the prospective partner should be an equal partner with respect to capital investment and profit sharing (1:1) or whether the agreement should be 4:1 with Rey retaining four-fifths interest with rights to four-fifths of the net income or loss. What factors should she consider in deciding which partnership agreement to offer?
2. Prepare the January 1, 2012, journal entry(ies) necessary to admit a new partner to Business Solutions through the purchase of a partnership interest for each of the following two separate cases:

(a) 1:1

Sharing agreement

(b) 4:1

Sharing agreement

3. Prepare the January 1, 2012, journal entry(ies) required to admit a new partner if the new partner invests cash of $20,090.

4. After posting the entry in part 3, what would be the new partner’s equity percentage?

acc225 bishop company completes these transactions and events during march of the cu 492658

Bishop Company completes these transactions and events during March of the current year (terms for all its credit sales are 2/10, n/30):

Required

1. Open the following general ledger accounts: Cash; Accounts Receivable; Inventory (March 1 beg. bal. is $300,000); Office Supplies; Store Supplies; Office Equipment; Accounts Payable; Long-Term Notes Payable; M. Bishop, Capital (March 1 beg. bal. is $300,000); Sales; Sales Discounts; Cost of Goods Sold; and Sales Salaries Expense. Open the following accounts receivable subsidiary ledger accounts: Taylor Few, Min Cho, and Lance Snow. Open the following accounts payable subsidiary ledger accounts: Stacy Company, Soy Industries, Tells Supply, and JW Company.

2. Enter these transactions in a sales journal like Exhibit 7.5, a purchases journal like Exhibit 7.9, a cash receipts journal like Exhibit 7.7, a cash disbursements journal like Exhibit 7.11, or a general journal. Number all journal pages as page 2.

3. Prepare a trial balance of the general ledger and prove the accuracy of the subsidiary ledgers by preparing schedules of both accounts receivable and accounts payable.

4. Prepare the sales journal, purchase journal, cash reciepts journal, cash disbursement journal, general journal, general ledger, accounts recievable ledger, accounts payable, trial blance, schedule of accounts recievable, schedule of accounts payable.

acc225 date description name or date no terms amount 492659

Inv. No. Check

Date Description Name or Date No. Terms Amount

Dec. 16 Merchandise sold (cost $4,600) Hanna Seppa 916 2/10, n/30 $7,700

17 Received credit memo on returned merch. Funk Company Dec. 15 1,040

17 Purchased office supplies KK’s Supply Company Dec. 16 n/10 EOM 615

18 Received credit memo on returned merch. KK’s Supply Company Dec. 17 40

20 Issued credit memo on returned merch. Bo Brown Dec. 15 500

21 Purchased store equipment KK’s Supply Company Dec. 21 n/10 EOM 6,700

22 Received payment less discount Hanna Seppa Dec. 12

23 Paid invoice less discount Crossland Company Dec. 15 623

24 Sold merchandise on credit (cost $600) Shilo Jones 917 1,200

24 Paid inv. less discount and return Funk Company Dec. 15 624

25 Received payment less discount and return Bo Brown Dec. 15

26 Purchased merchandise and invoice Crossland Company Dec. 25 2/10, n/60 8,100

29 Sold office supplies for cash at cost 50

30 Issued check to owner for personal use Ken Choi 625 3,500

31 Check issued for sales salaries Jamie Inman 626 2,020

31 Issued check for electric bill Access Electric Company 627 710

31 Cash sales for last half of month (cost $11,200) 29,600

Requirements:

Prepare Special Journals, Post to Ledgers, Accounts Receivable Ledger, Accounts Payable Ledger, Trial Balance

on january 1 2011 kloppenberg company had accounts receivable 139 000 notes receivab 492590

On January 1, 2011, Kloppenberg Company had Accounts Receivable $139,000, Notes Receivable $25,000, and Allowance for Doubtful Accounts $13,200. The note receivable is from Sara Rogers Company. It is a 4-month, 12% note dated December 31, 2010. Kloppenberg Company prepares financial statements annually. During the year the following selected transactions occurred.

Jan. 5 Sold $20,000 of merchandise to Dedonder Company, terms n/15.

Jan. 20 Accepted Dedonder Company’s $20,000, 3-month, 9% note for balance due.

Feb. 18 Sold $8,000 of merchandise to Ludwig Company and accepted Ludwig’s $8,000, 6-month, 9% note for the amount due.

Apr. 20 Collected Dedonder Company note in full.

Apr. 30 Received payment in full from Sara Rogers Company on the amount due.

May 25 Accepted Jenks Inc.’s $4,000, 3-month, 7% note in settlement of a past-due balance on account.

Aug. 18 Received payment in full from Ludwig Company on note due.

Aug. 25 The Jenks Inc. note was dishonored. Jenks Inc. is not bankrupt; future payment is anticipated.

Sept. 1 Sold $12,000 of merchandise to Lena Torme Company and accepted a $12,000, 6-month, 10% note for the amount due.

Instructions:

Journalize the transactions.

use the following partial financial statement information below to calculate the liq 492592

(TCO A) Use the following partial financial statement information below to calculate the liquidity and profitability ratios. This information can be used to correctly solve each of the ratios below.

Average common shares outstanding

15,000

Current liabilities

$25,000

Capital expenditures

$10,000

Net income

$30,000

Cash provided by operations

$56,000

Net sales

$90,000

Common stock dividends paid

$30,000

Total liabilities

$50,000

Current assets

$35,000

Total assets

$62,500

Instructions:

Compute the following.

a) Current ratio

b) Working capital

c) Earnings per share

d) Debt-to-total-assets ratio

e) Free cash flow

To earn full credit, you must show the formula you are using, show your computations, and explain the meaning of each of your ratio results.

the following items are taken from the financial statements of calidor company for 2 492593

(TCOs B, E) The following items are taken from the financial statements of Calidor Company for 2010.

Accounts payable

$45,000

Accounts receivable

55,000

Accumulated depreciation

9,600

Bonds payable

38,000

Cash

74,000

Common stock

135,000

Cost of goods sold

34,000

Depreciation expense

4,800

Dividends

7,000

Equipment

50,000

Interest expense

4,500

Patents

19,500

Retained earnings, January 1

40,000

Salaries expense

20,200

Sales revenue

75,500

Supplies

2,000

Instructions:
Prepare a multiple-level income statementt for Calidor Company.

elliot s escargots sells commercial and home snail extraction tools and serving piec 492594

Budgeting and Standard Costing – Quiz

1. (TCO 7) Elliot’s Escargots sells commercial and home snail extraction tools and serving pieces. Currently, the snail extraction line of products takes up approximately 50 percent of the company’s retail floor space. The CEO of Elliot’s wants to decide if the company should continue offering snail extraction tools or focus only on serving pieces. If the snail extraction tools are dropped, salaries and other direct fixed costs can be avoided and serving piece sales would increase by 13 percent. Allocated fixed costs are assigned based on relative sales.

Snail Extraction

Serving

Tools

Pieces

Total

Sales

$1,200,000

$800,000

$2,000,000

Less cost of goods sold

700,000

500,000

1,200,000

Contribution margin

500,000

300,000

800,000

Less direct fixed costs:

Salaries

175,000

175,000

350,000

Other

60,000

60,000

120,000

Less allocated fixed costs:

Rent

14,118

9,882

24,000

Insurance

3,529

2,471

6,000

Cleaning

4,117

2,883

7,000

Executive salary

76,470

53,530

130,000

Other

7,058

4,942

12,000

Total costs

340,292

308,708

649,000

Net income

$159,708

($ 8,708)

$151,000

Prepare an incremental analysis in good form to determine the incremental effect on profit of discontinuing the snail extraction tool line.

lorenz company closes its books on july 31 on june 30 the notes receivable account b 492596

Lorenz Company closes its books on July 31. On June 30 the Notes Receivable account balance is $23,800. Notes Receivable include the following.

Date

Maker

Face Value

Team

Maturity Date

Interest Rate

May 21

Alger Inc.

$6,000

60 days

July 20

8%

May 25

Girard Co.

$7,800

60 days

July 24

10%

June 30

LSU Corp.

$10,000

6 months

December 31

9%

During July the following transactions were completed.

July 5 Made sales of $5,100 on Lorenz credit cards.

July 14 Made sales of $600 on Visa credit cards. The credit card service charge is 3%.

July 20 Received payment in full from Agler Inc. on the amount due.

July 24 Received payment in full from Girard Co. on the amount due.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the July transactions and the July 31 adjusting entry for accrued interest receivable. (Interest is computed using 360 days.)

(b) Enter the balances at July 1 in the receivable accounts and post the entries to all of the receivable accounts. (Use T accounts.)

(c) Show the balance sheet presentation of the receivable accounts at July 31.

acct344 on june 1 eckersley service co was started with an initial investment in the 492597

On June 1 Eckersley Service Co. was started with an initial investment in the company of $26,200 cash. Here are the assets and liabilities of the company at June 30, and the revenues and expenses for the month of June, its first month of operations:

Cash

4,600

Notes payable

12,000

Accounts receivable

4,000

Accounts payable

500

Revenue

7,000

Supplies expense

1,000

Supplies

2,400

Gas and oil expense

600

Advertising expense

400

Utilities expense

300

Equipment

29,000

Wage expense

1,400

In June, the company issued no additional stock, but paid dividends of $2,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the month of June and a balance sheet at June 30, 2010.

(b) Briefly discuss whether the company’s first month of operations was a success.

(c) Discuss the company’s decision to distribute a dividend.

lancer audio produces a high end dvd player that sells for 1 300 total operating exp 492598

Lancer Audio produces a high-end DVD player that sells for $1,300. Total operating expenses for July were as follows:

Units produced and sold

145

Component costs

68,000

Supplies

2,500

Assembly labor

24,650

Supervisor salary

5,600

Electricity

350

Telephone

280

Gas

300

Shipping

2,000

Advertising

2,600

Administrative costs

15,000

Total

$123,580

Required

a. Use account analysis to determine fixed cost per month and variable cost per DVD player.

b. Project total cost for August assuming production and sales of 165 units.

c. What is the contribution margin per DVD player?

d. Estimate total profit assuming production and sales of 165 units.

e. Lancer Audio is considering an order for 120 DVD players, to be produced in the next 10 months, from a customer in Canada. The selling price will be $950 per unit (well under the normal selling price). However, the Lancer Audio brand name will not be attached to the product. What will be the impact on company profit associated with this order?

emerson ventures is considering producing a new line of hang gliders the company est 492600

Cost-Plus Pricing

Emerson Ventures is considering producing a new line of hang gliders. The company estimates that variable costs will be $400 per unit and fixed costs will be $400,000 per year.

Required

a. Emerson has a pricing policy that dictates that a product’s price must be equal to full cost plus 50 percent. To calculate full cost, Emerson must estimate the number of units it will produce and sell in a year. At the beginning of the year, Emerson estimates that it will sell 2,000 gliders and sets its price according to that sales and production volume. What is the price?

b. Right after the beginning of the year, the economy takes a dive and Emerson finds that demand for their gliders has fallen drastically. Emerson revises its sales and production estimate to just 1,600 gliders for the year. According to company policy, what price must now be set?

c. What is likely to happen to the number of gliders sold if Emerson follows company policy and raises the glider price to that calculated in part b?

d. Why is setting price by marking up cost inherently circular for a manufacturing firm?

roverplus a pet product superstore is considering pricing a new roverplus labeled do 492601

Determining the Profit-Maximizing Price

RoverPlus, a pet product superstore, is considering pricing a new RoverPlus-labeled dog food. The company will buy the premium dog food from a company in Indiana that packs the product with a RoverPlus label. Rover pays $7 for a 50-pound bag delivered to its store.

The company also sells Royal Dog Food (under the Royal Dog Food label), which it purchases for $10 per 50-pound bag and sells for $17.99. The company currently sells 26,000 bags of Royal Dog Food per month, but that is expected to change when the RoverPlus brand is introduced.

The company will continue to price the Royal Dog Food brand at $17.99. The quantity of RoverPlus and the quantity of Royal Dog Food that will be sold at various prices for Royal are estimated as:

Price RoverPlus

Quantity RoverPlus

Quantity Royal

7.99

36,000

12,000

8.99

35,500

12,300

9.99

35,000

12,500

10.99

34,000

13,000

11.99

31,000

14,000

12.99

26,000

15,000

13.99

16,000

16,000

14.99

11,000

20,000

15.99

6,000

22,000

For example, if RoverPlus is priced at $7.99, the company will sell 36,000 bags of RoverPlus and 12,000 bags of Royal at $17.99. If the company prices RoverPlus at $15.99, it will sell 6,000 bags of RoverPlus and 22,000 bags of Royal at $17.99. This is 4,000 fewer bags of Royal than is currently being sold.

Required

a. Calculate the profit-maximizing price for the RoverPlus brand, taking into account the effect of the sales of RoverPlus on sales of the Royal Dog Food brand.

b. At the price calculated in part a, what is the incremental profit over the profit earned before the introduction of the RoverPlus-branded dog food?

the following information is available for satterfield s custom glass for the fiscal 492602

Cost of Goods Manufactured, Cost of Goods Sold, and Income

The following information is available for Satterfield’s Custom Glass for the fiscal year ending December 31, 2011.

Beginning balance in Work in Process

200,000

Ending balance in Work in Process

300,000

Beginning balance in Finished Goods

500,000

Direct material cost

2,000,000

Direct labor cost

2,400,000

Manufacturing overhead

1,700,000

Selling expenses

250,000

General and administrative expenses

450,000

Sales

8,00,000

Required

a. Prepare a schedule of cost of goods manufactured.

b. Prepare an income statement for fiscal 2011. Ignore income taxes.

finney inc has conducted an analysis of overhead costs related to one of its product 492606

Finney Inc. has conducted an analysis of overhead costs related to one of its product lines using a traditional costing system (volume-based) and an activity-based costing system. Here are its results.

Traditional Costing

ABC

Sales revenue

600,000

600,000

Overhead costs:

Product Rx3

34,000

50,000

Product Y12

36,000

20,000

$70,000

$70,000

Explain how a difference in the overhead costs between the two systems may have occurred.

wilmington inc manufactures five models of kitchen appliances at its mesa plant the 492607

Wilmington Inc. manufactures five models of kitchen appliances at its Mesa plant. The company is installing activity based costing and has identified the following activities performed at it Mesa plant.

1. Designing new models

2. Purchasing raw materials and parts

3. Storing and managing inventory

4. Receiving and inspecting raw materials and parts

5. Interviewing and hiring new personnel

6. Machine forming sheet steel into appliance parts

7. Manually assembling parts into appliances

8. Training all employees of the company

9. Insuring all tangible fixed assets

10. Supervising production

11. Maintaining and repairing machinery and equipment

12. Painting and packaging finished appliances

Having analyzed its Mesa pant operations for purposes of installing activity-based costing, Wilmington Inc. identified its activity cost centers. It now needs to identify relevant acidity cost drivers in order to assign overhead to Wilmington’s five products

Instructions:

Using the activities listed above, identify for each activity one or more cost drivers that might be used to assign overhead to Wilmington’s five products.

ortega has prepared the following list of statements about decision making and incre 492609

Ortega has prepared the following list of statements about decision- making and incremental analysis.

1. The first step in management’s decision -making process is, ” Determine and evaluate possible courses of action”.

2. The final step in management’s decision-making process is to actually make the decision.

3. Accounting’s contribution to management’s decision-making process occurs primarily in evaluating possible courses of action and reviewing the results.

4. In making business decisions, management ordinarily considers only financial information because it is objectively determines.

5. Decisions involve in a choice among alternative courses of action.

6. The process used to identify the financial data that change under alternative courses of action is called incremental analysis.

7. Costs that are the same under all alternative courses of action sometimes affect the decision.

8. When using incremental analysis, some costs will always change under alternative courses of action, but revenues will not.

9. Variable cost will change under alternative course of action, but fixed cost will not.

Instructions

Identify each statement as True or False. If false indicate how to correct statement.

the michigan company manufactures a product that goes through three processing depar 492610

(TCO F) The Michigan Company manufactures a product that goes through three processing departments. Information relating to activity in the first department during June is given below:

Percent completed

Units

Materials

Conversion

Work in process, June 1

40,000

65%

45%

Work in process, June 30

35,000

75%

65%

The department started 175,000 units into production during the month and transferred 180,000 completed units to the next department.

REQUIRED:

Compute the equivalent units of production for the first department for June, assuming that the company uses the weighted-average method of accounting for units and costs.

edison entrepreneur services inc is a legal services firm that files the paperwork t 492611

Break-Even Analysis, Margin of Safety, Increase in Profit

Edison Entrepreneur Services, Inc., is a legal services firm that files the paperwork to incorporate a business. Edison charges $1,200 for the incorporation application package and plans to file 1,500 applications next year. The company’s projected income statement for the coming year is:

Sales

1,800,000

Less variable expenses

1,10,000

Contribution margin

690,000

Less fixed expenses

300,000

Operating income

$390,000

Required

a. Compute the contribution margin per application and calculate the break-even point in number of applications. (Round to the nearest whole unit, since it is not possible to file a partial application.) Calculate the contribution margin ratio (round to 4 decimal places) and the break-even sales revenue (round to the nearest dollar).

b. What is the current margin of safety in terms of the number of units? What is the current margin of safety in terms of sales dollars?

c. If Edison wants to have operating income of $450,000 next year, how many applications must it process? (Round to the nearest whole unit.) What dollar level of sales is required to achieve operating income of $450,000? (Round to the nearest dollar.)

d. The office manager for Edison has proposed that Edison increase advertising (a fixed cost) for the upcoming year by $80,000; she feels that this increase in advertising will lead to an increase in sales of $324,000. Prepare a new projected income statement for this proposal. Should Edison increase its advertising to this new level?

ba225 santana rey owner of business solutions realizes that she needs to begin accou 492617

Santana Rey, owner of Business Solutions, realizes that she needs to begin accounting for bad debts expense. Assume that Business Solutions has total revenues of $44,000 during the first three months of 2012, and that the Accounts Receivable balance on March 31, 2012, is $22,867.

Required

1. Prepare the adjusting entry needed for Business Solutions to recognize bad debts expense on March 31, 2012, under each of the following independent assumptions (assume a zero unadjusted balance in the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts at March 31).

a. Bad debts are estimated to be 1% of total revenues. (Round amounts to the dollar.)

b. Bad debts are estimated to be 2% of accounts receivable. (Round amounts to the dollar.)

2. Assume that Business Solutions’ Accounts Receivable balance at June 30, 2012, is $20,250 and that one account of $100 has been written off against the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts since March 31, 2012. IfS. Reyuses the method prescribed in Part 1b, what adjusting journal entry must be made to recognize bad debts expense on June 30, 2012?

3. Should S. Rey consider adopting the direct write-off method of accounting for bad debts expense rather than one of the allowance methods considered in part 1? Explain.

ba225 santana rey receives the march bank statement for business solutions on april 492618

Santana Rey receives the March bank statement for Business Solutions on April 11, 2012. The March 31 bank statement shows an ending cash balance of $67,566. A comparison of the bank statement with the general ledger Cash account, No. 101, reveals the following.

a. S. Rey notices that the bank erroneously cleared a $500 check against her account in March that she did not issue. The check documentation included with the bank statement shows that this check was actually issued by a company named Business Systems.

b. On March 25, the bank issued a $50 debit memorandum for the safety deposit box that Business Solutions agreed to rent from the bank beginning March 25.

c. On March 26, the bank issued a $102 debit memorandum for printed checks that Business Solutions ordered from the bank.

d. On March 31, the bank issued a credit memorandum for $33 interest earned on Business Solutions’ checking account for the month of March.

e. S. Rey notices that the check she issued for $128 on March 31, 2012, has not yet cleared the bank.

f. S. Rey verifies that all deposits made in March do appear on the March bank statement.

g. The general ledger Cash account, No. 101, shows an ending cash balance per books of $68,057 as of March 31 (prior to any reconciliation).

Required

1. Prepare a bank reconciliation for Business Solutions for the month ended March 31, 2012.

2. Prepare any necessary adjusting entries. Use Miscellaneous Expenses, No. 677, for any bank charges. Use Interest Revenue, No. 404, for any interest earned on the checking account for the month of March.

ba225 santana rey of business solutions is evaluating her inventory to determine whe 492619

Santana Rey of Business Solutions is evaluating her inventory to determine whether it must be adjusted based on lower of cost or market rules. Business Solutions has three different types of software in its inventory and the following information is available for each.

Items

Inventory Units

Cost per Unit

Market Price per Unit

Office productivity

3

76

74

Desktop publishing

2

103

100

Accouting

3

90

96

Required:

1. Compute the lower of cost or market for ending inventory assuming Rey applies the lower of cost or market rule to inventory as a whole. Must Rey adjust the reported inventory value? Explain.

2. Assume that Rey had instead applied the lower of cost or market rule to each product in inventory. Under this assumption, must Rey adjust the reported inventory value? Explain.

ba225 santana rey created business solutions on october 1 2011 the company has been 492620

Santana Rey created Business Solutions on October 1, 2011. The company has been successful, and its list of customers has grown. To accommodate the growth, the accounting system is modified to set up separate accounts for each customer. The following chart of accounts includes the account number used for each account and any balance as of December 31, 2011. Santana Rey decided to add a fourth digit with a decimal point to the 106 account number that had been used for the single Accounts Receivable account. This change allows the company to continue using the existing chart of accounts.

In response to requests from customers, S. Rey will begin selling computer software. The company will extend credit terms of 1/10, n/30, FOB shipping point, to all customers who purchase this merchandise.However, no cash discount is available on consulting fees. Additional accounts (Nos. 119, 413, 414, 415, and 502) are added to its general ledger to accommodate the company’s new merchandising activities.

Also, Business Solutions does not use reversing entries and, therefore, all revenue and expense accounts have zero beginning balances as of January 1, 2012. Its transactions for January through March follow:

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record each of the January through March transactions.

2. Post the journal entries in part 1 to the accounts in the company’s general ledger. (Note: Begin with the ledger’s post -closing adjusted balances as of December 31, 2011.)

3. Prepare a partial work sheet consisting of the first six columns (similar to the one shown in Exhibit 5B.1) that includes the unadjusted trial balance, the March 31 adjustments (a) through (g), and the adjusted trial balance. Do not prepare closing entries and do not journalize the adjustments or post them to the ledger.

4. Prepare an income statement (from the adjusted trial balance in part 3) for the three months ended March31, 2012. Use a single-step format. List all expenses without differentiating between selling expenses andgeneral and administrative expenses.

5. Prepare a statement of owner’s equity (from the adjusted trial balance in part 3) for the three months ended March 31, 2012.

6. Prepare a classified balance sheet (from the adjusted trial balance) as of March 31, 2012

after creative design s first month of operations your friend delivers to you a stac 492548

After Creative Design’s first month of operations your friend delivers to you a stack of invoices, check stubs, receipts and her first VISA-Business bill. You must decipher these in order to enter them into the accounts.

After sorting through the source documents you make a list of transactions for the first month, April:

1.Jessi invested her life savings in the company $10,000.

2.Jessi purchased from Best Buy a computer and printer/ fax/ copier and monitor and software for $3500. She got a 12 month no interest credit arrangement and will make monthly payments to Best Buy. You decide this will all be equipment.

3.Jessi set up a credit account with an office supply store for supplies, and purchased supplies including printer paper, CDs, and ink for the printer for $200. Jessi gave you the bill but she does not have to make a payment until month end.

4.Jessi purchased a comfortable desk chair from a department store for $250. You decide this will be equipment.

7.Jessi’s CPA gave her some tax advice so she decided to develop a logo and other advertising materials for her car and customers. She had them printed and had her car painted with the new logo. This cost Jessi $500. You decide this will be expensed.

8.Jessi negotiated a business transaction with a local Mexican Restaurant just opening. She will work on a logo, menu, and flyers. The restaurant owner paid $200 down to be used against the first month’s bill. Jessi will bill the customer monthly based on her hours worked on the account.

9.Jessi designed a flyer for a local bakery and was paid cash of $150.

12.Jessi designed a CD cover for a friend who is a drummer in a local band. She was paid $400 for her work.

14.Jessi designed some POS material for a local coop market. She billed them for $500 for her work.

22.Jessi set up accounts to purchase stock photos for artwork and subscriptions $200. This is a prepaid asset until Jessi uses the photos.

23.Jessi designed and set up a website, email account, etc for herself. She paid $240 to register everything and will expense $20 per month against this amount.

24.Jessi wrote a check to herself to cover her rent and car insurance. $1,200.

Enter the above transactions into the journal and post them to the T accounts. Prepare an adjusted trial balance.

jessi is anxious to find out if she has earned any profits the first month of her op 492549

Jessi is anxious to find out if she has earned any profits the first month of her operations. You have to adjust the accoutns to bring them up to date before you can prepare the financial statements. Enter the following adjusting entries into a general journal. Post the adjustments to the T accounts and prepare an adjusted trial balance.

1. The depreciation on the equipment is $104.

2. The supplies on hand at the end of the month are $150.

3. The balance in the subscriptions web site is $175.

4. The monthly amount for the web site and email account must be expensed.

5. Jessi determined she performed $1,000 worth of work for the Mexican restaurant.

6. Jessi made her first monthly payment on the computer to Best Buy, $292.

7. Jessi made a payment for supplies to staples of $75.

8. Jessi received a check from the local coop market of $250.

9. Jessi worked on a business card and logo for a local quilting shop. She did not finished the work and there will be more work for this company so she billed them for 15 hours at $75 per hour.

leekee shipyards has a new barnacle removing product for ocean going vessels the com 492551

Budgeting and Standard Costing – Quiz

Leekee Shipyards has a new barnacle removing product for ocean going vessels. The company invests $1,200,000 in operating assets and plans to produce and sell 400,000 units per year. Leekee wants to make a return on investment of 20% each year. Leekee needs to know what price to charge for this product.

Use the absorption costing approach to determine the markup necessary to make the desired return on investment based on the following information:

Per unit

Total

Direct Materials

$2.00

Direct labor

$1.50

Variable Manufacturing Overhead

$1.00

Fixed Manufacturing Overhead

$100,000

Variable Selling and Administriative Expenses

$0.10

Fixed Selling and Administrative Expenses

$100,000

the following information relates to vice versa ventures for calendar year 20xx the 492552

Budgeting and Standard Costing – Quiz

(TCO 5) The following information relates to Vice Versa Ventures for calendar year 20XX, the company’s first year of operations:

Units produced

20,000

Units sold

17,000

Selling price per unit

$35

Direct material per unit

$5

Direct labor per unit

$5

Variable manufacturing overhead per unit

$2

Variable selling cost per unit

$3

Annual fixed manufacturing overhead

$160,000

Annual fixed selling and administrative expenses

$80,000

(a) Prepare an income statement using full costing.

(b) Prepare an income statement using variable costing.

thurman munster the owner of adams family rvs is considering the addition of a servi 492553

Budgeting and Standard Costing – Quiz Thurman Munster, the owner of Adams Family RVs, is considering the addition of a service center his lot. The building and equipment are estimated to cost $1,100,000 and both the building and equipment will be depreciated over 10 years using the straight-line method. The building and equipment have zero estimated residual value at the end of 10 years. Munster’s required rate of return for this project is 12 percent. Net income related to each year of the investment is as follows:

Revenue

450,000

Less: Materials cost

60,000

Labor

100,000

Depreciation

110,000

Other

10,000

280,000

Income before taxs

170,000

Taxes at 40%

68,000

Net Income

$102,000

(a) Determine the net present value of the investment in the service center. Should Munster invest in the service center?

(b) Calculate the internal rate of return of the investment to the nearest ½ percent.

(c) Calculate the payback period of the investment.

(d) Calculate the accounting rate of return.

elliot s escargots sells commercial and home snail extraction tools and serving piec 492555

Budgeting and Standard Costing – Quiz

(TCO 7) Elliot’s Escargots sells commercial and home snail extraction tools and serving pieces. Currently, the snail extraction line of products takes up approximately 50 percent of the company’s retail floor space. The CEO of Elliot’s wants to decide if the company should continue offering snail extraction tools or focus only on serving pieces. If the snail extraction tools are dropped, salaries and other direct fixed costs can be avoided and serving piece sales would increase by 13 percent. Allocated fixed costs are assigned based on relative sales.

Snail Extraction

Serving

Tools

Pieces

Total

Sales

$1,200,000

$800,000

$2,000,000

Less cost of goods sold

700,000

500,000

1,200,000

Contribution margin

500,000

300,000

800,000

Less direct fixed costs:

Salaries

175,000

175,000

350,000

Other

60,000

60,000

120,000

Less allocated fixed costs:

Rent

14,118

9,882

24,000

Insurance

3,529

2,471

6,000

Cleaning

4,117

2,883

7,000

Executive salary

76,470

53,530

130,000

Other

7,058

4,942

12,000

Total costs

340,292

308,708

649,000

Net income

$159,708

($ 8,708)

$151,000

golf world sold merchandise to mulligans for 10 000 offering terms of 1115 n130 mull 492556

Golf World sold merchandise to Mulligans for $10,000, offering terms of 1115, n130. Mulligans paid for the merchandise within the discount period. Both companies use perpetual inventory systems.

Instructions:

a. Prepare journal entries in the accounting records of Golf World to account for this sale and the subsequent collection. Assume the original cost of the merchandise to Golf World had been $6,500.

b. Prepare journal entries in the accounting records of Mulligans to account for the purchase and subsequent payment Mulligans records purchases of merchandise at net cost.

c. Assume that because of a change in personnel, Mulligans failed to pay for this merchandise within the discount period. Prepare the journal entry in the accounting records of Mulligans to record payment after the discount period.

d j fletcher a trusted employee of bluestem products found himself in personal finan 492557

D. J. Fletcher, a trusted employee of Bluestem Products, found himself in personal financial difficulties and decided to “borrow” $3,000 from the company and to conceal his theft.

As a first step, Fletcher removed $3,000 in currency from the cash register. This amount represented the bulk of the cash received in over-the-counter sales during the three business days since the last bank deposit. Fletcher then removed a $3,000 check from the day’s incoming mail; this check had been mailed in by a customer, Michael Adams, in full payment of his account. Fletcher made no journal entry to record the $3,000 collection from Adams, but deposited the check in Bluestem Products’ bank account in place of the $3,000 over-the-counter cash receipts he had stolen.

In order to keep Adams from protesting when his month-end statement reached him, Fletcher made a journal entry debiting Sales Returns and Allowances and crediting Accounts Receivable-Michael Adams. Fletcher posted this entry to the two general ledger accounts affected and to Adams’s account in the subsidiary ledger for accounts receivable.

Instructions:

a. Did these actions by Fletcher cause the general ledger to be out of balance or the subsidiary ledger to disagree with the control account? Explain.

b. Assume that Bluestem Products prepares financial statements at the end of the month without discovering the theft. Would any items in the balance sheet or the income statement be in error? Explain.

c. Several weaknesses in internal control apparently exist in Bluestem Products. Indicate three specific changes needed to strengthen internal control over cash receipts.

shown below is the information needed to prepare a bank reconciliation for warren el 492558

Shown below is the information needed to prepare a bank reconciliation for Warren Electric December 31:

1. At December 31, cash per the bank statement was $15,200; cash per the company’s records was $17,500.

2. Two debit memoranda accompanied the bank statement: service charges for December of $25 and a $775 check drawn by Jane Jones marked “NSF.”

3. Cash receipts of $10,000 on December 31 were not deposited until January 4.

4. The following checks had been issued in December but were not included among the paid checks returned by the bank: no. 620 for $1,000, no. 630 for $3,000, and no. 641 for $4,500.

Instructions:

a. Prepare a bank reconciliation at December 31.

b. Prepare the necessary journal entry or entries to update the accounting records.

c. Assume that the company normally is not required to pay a bank service charge if it maintains a minimum average daily balance of $1,000 throughout the month. If the company’s average daily balance for December had been $8,000, why did it have to pay a $25 service charge?

when laura rapp arrived at her store on the morning of january 29 she found empty sh 492559

When Laura Rapp arrived at her store on the morning of January 29, she found empty shelves and display racks; thieves had broken in during the night and stolen the entire inventory. Rapp’s accounting records showed that she had inventory costing $50,000 on January l. From January 1 to January 29, she had made net sales of $70,000, and net purchases of $80,000. The gross profit during the past several years had consistently averaged 45 percent of net sales. Rapp wishes to file an insurance claim for the theft loss.

Instructions:

a. Using the gross profit method, estimate the cost of Rapp’s inventory at the time of the theft.

b. Does Rapp use the periodic inventory method or does she account for inventory using the perpetual method? Defend your answer.

eastern supply sells a variety of merchandise to retail stores on open account but i 492560

Eastern Supply sells a variety of merchandise to retail stores on open account, but it insists that any customer who fails to pay an invoice when due must replace it with an interest-bearing note. The company adjusts and closes its accounts at December 31. Among the transactions relating to notes receivable were the following:

Sept. 1 Received from a customer (Party Plus) a nine-month, 10 percent note for $75,000 in settlement of an account receivable due today.

June 1 Collected in full the nine-month, 10 percent note receivable from Party Plus, including interest.

Instructions

a. Prepare journal entries (in general journal form) to record:

(1) the receipt of the note on September 1

(2) the adjustment for interest on December 31

(3) collection of principal and interest on June 1.

(To better illustrate the allocation of interest revenue between accounting periods, we will assume Eastern Supply makes adjusting entries only at year-end.)

b. Assume that instead of paying the note on June 1, the customer (Party Plus) had defaulted. Give the journal entry by Eastern Supply to record the default. Assume that Party Plus had sufficient resources that the note eventually will be collected.

c. Explain why the company insist that any customer who fails to pay an invoice when due must replace it with an interest-bearing note.

lamprino appliance uses a perpetual inventory system the following are three recent 492561

Lamprino Appliance uses a perpetual inventory system. The following are three recent merchandising transactions:

June 10 Purchased 10 televisions from Mitsu Industries on account. Invoice price, $300 per unit, for a total of $3,000. The terms of purchase were 2110, n/30.

June 15 Sold one of these televisions for $450 cash.

June 20 Paid the account payable to Mitsu Industries within the discount period.

Instructions

a. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions assuming that Lamprino records purchases of merchandise at:

1. Net cost

2. Gross invoice price

b. Assume that Lamprino did not pay Mitsu Industries within the discount period but instead paid the full invoice price on July 10. Prepare journal entries to record this payment assuming that the original liability had been recorded at: 1. Net cost and 2. Gross invoice price

c. Assume that you are evaluating the efficiency of Lamprino’s bill-paying procedures. Which accounting method–net cost or gross invoice price–provides you with the most useful information? Explain.

acc212 copper queen hotel is interested in estimating fixed and variable costs so th 492573

(TCO 4) Copper Queen Hotel is interested in estimating fixed and variable costs so the hotel can make more accurate projections of costs, break-even and profits. The hotel is in a resort area and busy from November through March. In July and August, the hotel has only a 50 percent occupancy rate.

Classify each of the following costs as fixed, variable or mixed.

A. Depreciation of the building

B. Salaries of restaurant staff

C. Salaries of hotel manager, desk manager, accounting clerks

D. Soap, shampoo and other toiletries in the bathrooms

E. Laundry costs (cost of bed linens, table cloths, cleaning products, depreciation on cleaning equipment.

F. Food and beverage costs

G. Grounds Maintenance

acc212 speed world cycles sells high performance motorcycles and motocross racers 492575

Speed World Cycles sells high-performance motorcycles and motocross racers. One of Speed World’s most popular models is the Kazomma 900 dirt bike. During the current year, Speed World purchased eight of these cycles at the following costs:

Purchase date

Units

Purchased

Unit cost

Total cost

July

1

2

4,950

9,900

July

22

3

5,000

15,000

Aug.

3

3

5,100

40,200

On July 28, Speed World sold four Kazomma 900 dirt bikes to the Vince Wilson racing team. The remaining four bikes remained in inventory at September 30, the end of Speed World’s fiscal year.

Assume that Speed World uses a perpetual inventory system.

a (1) Compute the cost of goods sold relating to the sale on July 28 and the ending inventory of Kazomma 900 dirt bikes at September 30, using average cost method. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

a (2) Compute the cost of goods sold relating to the sale on July 28 and the ending inventory of Kazomma 900 dirt bikes at September 30, using FIFO method. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

a (3) Compute the cost of goods sold relating to the sale on July 28 and the ending inventory of Kazomma 900 dirt bikes at September 30, using LIFO method. (Omit the “$” sign in your response.)

b(1) Which of the three cost flow assumptions will result in Speed World Cycles reporting the highest net income for the current year?

b(2) Which of the three cost flow assumptions will minimize the income taxes owed by Speed World Cycles for the year?

b(3) May Speed World Cycles use the cost flow assumption that results in the highest net income for the current year in its financial statements, but use the cost flow assumption that minimizes taxable income for the current year in its income tax return?

acc212 neer department store uses the retail inventory method to estimate its monthl 492582

Neer Department Store uses the retail inventory method to estimate its monthly ending inventories.The following information is available for two of its departments at August 31, 2008.

Sporting Goods

Jewellery and Cosmetics

Cost

Retail

Cost

Retail

Net sales

1,078,300

1,156,300

Purchases

672,800

1,124,700

757,700

1,153,500

Purchase returns

(26,120)

(40,630)

(11,670)

(19,620)

Purchase discounts

(12,150)

(2,220)

Freight-in

10,000

15,580

Beginning inventory

45,120

72,830

37,550

61,310

At December 31, Neer Department Store takes a physical inventory at retail. The actual retail values of the inventories in each department are Sporting Goods $94,350, and Jewelry and Cosmetics $43,760.

a. Determine the estimated cost of the ending inventory for each department on August 31, 2008, using the retail inventory method. (Round cost-to-retail ratio to 2 decimal places , e.g. 10.50 in computations. Round final answers to 0 decimal places, e.g. 125.)

b. Compute the ending inventory at cost for each department at December 31, assuming the cost-to-retail ratios are 60% for Sporting Goods and 63% for Jewelry and Cosmetics.

acc212 els company most recently reconciled it s bank statement and book balances of 492583

Els Company most recently reconciled it’s bank statement and book balances of cash on August 31 and it reported two checks outstanding, No. 5888 for $1,038.05 and No. 5893 for $484.25. the following information is available for it’s Septemenber 30, 2011, reconciliation.

From the September 30 bank statement:

Previous balance

16m,800.45

Total Checkes and Debits

9,620.05

Total Deposits and Credits

11,182.85

Current Balance

18,363.25

Checks and Debits

Daily Balance

Date

Check

Amount

Date

Amount

3-Sept.

5888

1,038.05

Aug-31

16,800.45

4-Sept.

5902

731.90

Sept.-3

15,030.50

7-Sept.

5901

1,824.25

Sept.-5

16,134.25

17-Sep

NSF

588.25

Sep-5

16,134.25

20-Sep

5905

937.00

Jan-1

14,310.00

22-Sep

5903

399.10

Jan-0

16,536.90

22-Sep

5904

2,080.00

Sep-17

16,948.65

28-Sep

5907

213.85

Sep-20

15,011.65

29-Sep

5909

1,807.65

Sep-21

19,104.65

22-Sep

1,625.55

25-Sep

18,977.25

Sep-28

18,763.40

Sep-29

16,955.75

Sep-20

18,363.25

laird corporation incurred the following transactions 492584

Laird Corporation incurred the following transactions.

1. Purchased raw materials on account $46,300.

2. Raw Materials of $36,000 were requisitioned to the factory. An analysis of the materials requisition slips indicated that $8,800 was classified as indirect materials.

3. Factory labor costs incurred were $53,900, of which $49,000 pertained to factory wages payable and $4,900 pertained to employer payroll taxes payable.

4. Time tickets indicated that $50,000 was direct labor and $3,900 was indirect labor.

5. Overhead costs incurred on account were $80,500.

6. Manufacturing overhead was applied at the rate of 150% of direct labor cost.

7. Goods costing $88,000 were completed and transferred to finished goods.

8. Finished goods costing $75,000 to manufacture were sold on account for $103,000.

Instructions:

Prepare entries for manufacturing costs. Journalize the following transactions.

olaf distributing company completed the following merchandising transactions in the 492585

Olaf Distributing Company completed the following merchandising transactions in the month of April. At the beginning of April, the ledger of Olaf showed Cash of $9,000 and Common Stock of $9,000.

Apr. 2 Purchased merchandise on account from Dakota Supply Co. $6,900, terms 1/10, n/30.

4 Sold merchandise on account $5,500, FOB destination, terms 1/10, n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $4,100.

5 Paid $240 freight on April 4 sale.

6 Received credit from Dakota Supply Co. for merchandise returned $500.

11 Paid Dakota Supply Co. in full, less discount.

13 Received collections in full, less discounts, from customers billed on April 4.

14 Purchased merchandise for cash $3,800.

16 Received refund from supplier for returned goods on cash purchase of April 14, $500.

18 Purchased merchandise from Skywalker Distributors $4,500, FOB shipping point, terms 2/10, n/30.

20 Paid freight on April 18 purchase $100.

23 Sold merchandise for cash $6,400. The merchandise sold had a cost of $5,120.

26 Purchased merchandise for cash $2,300.

27 Paid Skywalker Distributors in full, less discount.

29 Made refunds to cash customers for defective merchandise $90. The returned merchandise had a scrap value of $30.

30 Sold merchandise on account $3,700, terms n/30. The cost of the merchandise sold was $2,800.

Olaf Company’s chart of accounts includes the following: No. 101 Cash, No. 112 Accounts Receivable, No. 120 Merchandise Inventory, No. 201 Accounts Payable, No. 311 Common Stock, No. 401 Sales, No. 412 Sales Returns and Allowances, No. 414 Sales Discounts, No. 505 Cost of Goods Sold, and No. 644 Freight-out.

Instructions

(a) Journalize the transactions using a perpetual inventory system.

(b) Enter the beginning cash and common stock balances, and post the transactions. (Use J1 for the journal reference.)

(c) Prepare the income statement through gross profit for the month of April 2008. (c) Gross profit $3,465

recall that in units 2 and 3 you completed the accounting cycle for dustin larkin of 492586

GAAP Applications-Internal Control Assignment

Recall that in Units 2 and 3 you completed the accounting cycle for Dustin Larkin of Quixote Consulting. Quixote Consulting is a part-time consulting business that recently moved from Dustin’s home into rented quarters.

Assume that you are the internal auditor for the business and you have to evaluate the internal control procedures that have been implemented in the business.

There are three objectives of internal control: (1) assets are safeguarded and used for business purposes, (2) business information is accurate, and (3) employees comply with laws and regulations.

The five elements of internal control are (1) the control environment, (2) risk assessment, (3) control procedures, (4) monitoring, and (5) information and communication.

If you owned a business, you would expect your employees to:
1. Work to achieve the business goals and objectives you establish
2.Use business assets (such as machinery or automobiles) only for legitimate business purposes and avoid wasting business resources
3. Record accurate data regarding business transactions so you could accurately judge how well your business is doing
4. Refrain from stealing your cash, supplies, inventory, or property, plant, and equipment

In theory, you should be able to expect these things. In practice, however, you must establish an internal control framework to make sure your business objectives are achieved, assets are protected from theft and misuse, and financial data are recorded accurately.

The following procedures were recently installed by Quixote Consulting:

a. The bank reconciliation is prepared by the cashier, who works under the supervision of the treasurer.

b. All mail is opened by the mail clerk, who forwards all cash remittances to the cashier. The cashier prepares a listing of the cash receipts and forwards a copy of the list to the accounts receivable clerk for recording in the accounts.

c. At the end of the day, cash register clerks are required to use their own funds to make up any cash shortages in their registers.

d. At the end of each day, all cash receipts are placed in the bank’s night depository.

e. At the end of each day, an accounting clerk compares the duplicate copy of the daily cash deposit slip with the deposit receipt obtained from the bank.
f. The accounts payable clerk prepares a voucher for each disbursement. The voucher along with the supporting documentation is forwarded to the treasurer’s office for approval.
g. After necessary approvals have been obtained for the payment of a voucher, treasurer signs and mails the check. The treasurer then stamps the voucher and supporting documentation as paid and returns the voucher and
supporting documentation to the accounts payable clerk for filing.
h. Along with petty cash expense receipts for postage, office supplies, etc., several post-dated employee checks are in the petty cash fund.

Instructions
Indicate whether each of the procedures of internal control represents: (1) a strength or (2) a weakness. For each weakness, indicate why it exists and what procedures should be put into place to alleviate the risk. For each letter A through H you should have at least a one paragraph answer.

job 827 was recently completed the following data have been recorded on its job cost 492589

Job 827 was recently completed. The following data have been recorded on its job cost sheet:

Direct materials

61,050

Direct labor hours

1,332 labor hours

Direct labor wage rate

1,332 labor hours

Machine Hours

1,480 machine hours

Number of units completed

3,700 units

The company applies manufacturing overhead on the basis of machine-hours. The predetermined overhead rate is $13 per machine-hour.

Compute the unit product cost that would appear on the job cost sheet for this job.

presented below are a number of transactions determine whether each transaction affe 492519

Presented below are a number of transactions. Determine whether each transaction affects:

Common stock

Dividends

Revenue

Expense

Does not affect stockholders’ equity

Provide titles for the revenues and expenses. (The first one is completed for you as an example.)

Transaction

(a) Costs incurred for advertising.

(b) Assets received for services performed.

(c) Costs incurred for insurance.

(d) Amounts paid to employees.

(e) Cash distributed to stockholders.

(f) Assets received in exchange for the use of the company’s building.

(g) Costs incurred for utilities used.

(h) Cash purchase of equipment.

(i) Issued common stock for cash.

this information relates to abc co for the year 2010 492520

This information relates to ABC Co. for the year 2010.

Retained earnings, January 1, 2010 $64,000

Advertising expense

1,800

Dividends paid during 2010

6,000

Rent expense

10,400

Service revenue

53,000

Utilities expense

2,400

Salaries expense

30,000

After analyzing the data, complete the following Income Statement and Retained Earnings Statement for the year ended December 31, 2010. (List expenses from largest to smallest amount, e.g. 10, 5, 2.)

in each case using the drop down list in the yellow highlighted cells select what fo 492522

Presented below are five independent situations.

In each case, using the drop down list in the yellow-highlighted cells, select what form of organization the business is likely to take – sole proprietorship, partnership, or corporation.

1. Three physics professors at MIT have formed a business to improve the speed of information transfer over the Internet for stock exchange transactions. Each has contributed an equal amount of cash and knowledge to the venture. Although their approach looks promising, they are concerned about the legal liabilities that their business might confront.

2. Daniel Remington, a college student looking for summer employment, opened a bait shop in a small shed at a local marina.

3. Terry Hill and Bill Mayo each owned separate shoe manufacturing businesses. They have decided to combine their businesses. They expect that within the coming year they will need significant funds to expand their operations.

4. Alexis, Danny, and Robert recently graduated with marketing degrees. They have been friends since childhood. They have decided to start a consulting business focused on marketing sporting goods over the Internet.

Stan McGlone wants to rent CD players and CDs in airports across the country. His idea is that customers will be able to rent equipment and CDs at one airport, listen to the CDs on their flights, and return the equipment and CDs at their destination airport. Of course, this will require a substantial investment in equipment and CDs, as well as employees and locations in each airport. Stan has no savings or personal assets. He wants to maintain control over the business.

condensed balance sheet and income statement data for lark corporation are presented 492524

Condensed balance sheet and income statement data for Lark Corporation are presented here.

LARK CORPORATION

Balance Sheets

December 31

Assets

2010

2009

Cash

$25,000

$20,000

Receivables (net)

70,000

62,000

Other current assets

80,000

73,000

Long-term investments

75,000

60,000

Plant and equipment (net)

510,000

470,000

Total assets

$760,000

$685,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Current liabilities

$75,000

$70,000

Long-term debt

80,000

90,000

Common stock

330,000

300,000

Retained earnings

275,000

225,000

Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity

$760,000

$685,000

LARK CORPORATION

Income Statement

For the Years Ended December 31

2010

2009

Sales

$750,000

$670,000

Cost of goods sold

440,000

400,000

Operating expenses (including income taxes)

240,000

220,000

Net income

$70,000

$50,000

Additional information:

Cash from operating activities

$87,000

$60,000

Cash used for capital expenditures

$45,000

$38,000

Dividends paid

$20,000

$15,000

Average number of shares outstanding

33,000

30,000

Compute the following five values and ratios for 2009 and 2010. (Round all ratios to two decimal places, e.g. 17.54 or 6.25 : 1)

Put your answers in the yellow highlighted cells.

Earnings per share.

Working capital

Current ratio

Debt to total assets ratio

Free cash flow

bob and beth ford retired from the food services industry and began catering wedding 492525

Accounting for a Job-Order Cost System

Bob and Beth Ford retired from the food services industry and began catering wedding receptions on a limited basis.

The major costs in setting up their business included: linens, $1,200; two complete silver services, $1,000; glass plates and cups, $1,400; and cake-decorating tools and accessories, $600. It is expected that all of these items will last 10 years with no salvage value. Bob and Beth do all their food preparation in their apartment and have found that, in an average month, their utility bill is $100 higher than when they did not cater. All baking and cooking supplies are treated as “direct materials,” and the only other cost incurred is liability insurance at $1,400 per year. All direct materials are purchased at a local grocery for cash, and Bob and Beth pay themselves an hourly wage of $30 per hour. During the month of June, Bob and Beth catered five weddings.

Materials

Labor

Hours

Redfern wedding

400

25

Miller wedding

800

40

Walker wedding

500

20

Desilva wedding

1,700

90

Estes wedding

600

30

The overhead allocation base is labor hours with an estimated 1,000 hours per year, and billings are at 120 percent of job cost. Overhead allocations and markups are rounded to the nearest dollar.

Required

a. Prepare job cost sheets for each of the five catering jobs.

b. Calculate income for the month of June.

vulcan molding produces molded rubber components at the start of the year the compan 492526

Recording Inventory Costs

Vulcan Molding produces molded rubber components. At the start of the year, the company estimated that it would incur $3,400,000 of direct labor cost and $8,500,000 of manufacturing overhead. Overhead is allocated to production on the basis of direct labor cost. Actual materials used during the year were $5,500,000, actual direct labor cost was $3,500,000, and actual overhead was $9,000,000.

Required

a. Calculate the overhead rate for the current year.

b. Prepare the journal entry to record use of direct material.

c. Prepare the journal entry to record direct labor.

d. Prepare the journal entry to record manufacturing overhead applied to production.

e. Prepare the journal entry to close the balance in manufacturing overhead to cost of goods sold.

southwest community hospital uses a job order costing system to track charges for ea 492527

Service Company Use of Predetermined Overhead Rate

Southwest Community Hospital uses a job-order costing system to track charges for each patient. The following charges relate to Candice O’Dea, who had laparoscopic knee surgery:

Pharmacy

250

Sterile supply

1,000

Supplies, other

4,000

Operating room service (nursing staff)

4,000

Anesthesia

1,000

Anethesiologist

3,000

Southwest charges patients for the use of the operating room based on a predetermined overhead rate. The estimated overhead costs of the operating room are $5,000,000, and the activity base is available hours of 2,000.

Required

a. Calculate the predetermined overhead rate for the operating room, and determine the charge to Candice. Assume that her surgery took 3 hours in the operating room.

b. Calculate the total cost for the knee surgery.

matthew gabon the sales manager office furniture solutions prepared the following bu 492528

Budgets in Managerial Accounting

Matthew Gabon, the sales manager Office Furniture Solutions, prepared the following budget for 2011:

Sales Department

Budgeted Costs, 2011

(Assuming Sales of $10,000,000)

Salaries (fixed)

400,000

Commissions (variable)

150,000

Charge for Office Space (fixed)

3,000

Office supplied & Forms (variable)

2,000

Total

$360,000

After he submitted his budget, the president of Office Furniture Solutions reviewed it and recommended that advertising be increased to $100,000. Further she wanted Matthew to assume a sales level of $11,000,000. The level of sales is to be achieved without adding to the sales force.

Matthew’s sales group occupies approximately 250 square feet of office space out of total administrative office space of 20,000 square feet. The $3,000 space charge in Matthew’s budget is his share (allocated based on relative square feet) of the company’s total cost of rent, utilities, and janitorial costs for the administrative office building.

Required:

Provide a revised budget consistent with the president’s recommendation.

comparative financial statement data for bedene corporation and groneman corporation 492529

Comparative financial statement data for Bedene Corporation and Groneman Corporation, two competitors, appear below. All balance sheet data are as of December 31, 2010.

Bedene Corporation

Groneman Corporation

2010

2010

Net sales

$1,900,000

$620,000

Cost of goods sold

1,175,000

340,000

Operating expenses

303,000

98,000

Interest expense

9,000

3,800

Income tax expense

85,000

36,000

Current assets

407,200

190,336

Plant assets (net)

532,000

139,728

Current liabilities

66,325

40,348

Long-term liabilities

108,500

29,620

Cash from operating activities

138,000

36,000

Capital expenditures

90,000

20,000

Dividends paid

36,000

15,000

Average number of shares outstanding

100,000

50,000

Instructions

(a) Comment on the relative profitability of the companies by computing the net income and earnings per share for each company for 2010.

(b) Comment on the relative liquidity of the companies by computing working capital and the current ratios for each company for 2010.

(c) Comment on the relative solvency of the companies by computing the debt to total assets ratio and the free cash flow for each company for 2010.

dyer inc completed its first year of operations on december 31 2010 because this is 492530

Reporting an Adjusted Income Statement

Dyer, Inc. completed its first year of operations on December 31, 2010. Because this is the end of he annual accounting period, the company bookkeeper prepared the following preliminary income statement.

Income Statement 2010

Rental Revenue

114,000

Expenses:

Salaries and Wages Expense

28,500

Maintenance Expense

12,000

Rent Expense

9,000

Utilities Expense

4,000

Gas and Oil Expense

3,000

Other expenses

1,000

Total Expenses

57,500

Income

$56,500

You are an independent CPA hired by the company to audit the firm’s accounting systems and financial statements. In your audit, you developed additional data as follows:

a. Wages for the last three days of December amounting to $310 were not recorded or paid.

b. The $400 telephone bill for December 2010 has not been recorded or paid.

c. Depreciation on rental autos, amounting to $23,000 for 2010, was not recorded.

d. Interest of $500 was not recorded on the note payable by Dyer, Inc.

e. The Rental Revenue account includes $4,000 of revenue to be earned in January 2011.

f. Maintenance supplies costing $600 were used during 2010, but this has not yet been recorded.

g. The income tax expense for 2010 is $7,000, but it won’t actually be paid until 2011.

Required:

1. What adjusting journal entry for each item (a) through (g) should be recorded at December 31, 2010? If none is required, explain why.

2. Prepare, in proper form, an adjusted income statement for 2010.

3. Did the adjustments have a significant overall effect on the company’s net income?

on september 30 2008 srp company filed a petition for reorganization with a bankrupt 492531

Reorganization Entries and Balance Sheet

On September 30, 2008, SRP Company filed a petition for reorganization with a bankruptcy court. The plan was approved by the court and all parties of interest on January 2, 2009, when SRP Company’s balance sheet was as follows:

SRP Company Balance Sheet January 2, 2009

Cash

$32,000

Accounts receivable

$71,450

Less: allowance for uncollectibles

16,750

Inventories

126,600

Plant & Equipment

322,000

Less: Accumulated depreciation

180,700

141,300

Land

20,800

Patents

92,000

Total Assets

467,600

Current liabilities

Accounts payable-unsecured

12% Notes payable-unsecured

57,000

Accrued Wages-with priority

11,900

Accured Interest payable

38,400

Total current liabilities

250,000

10% note payable-unsecured

54,400

9% mortgage note payable-secured by equipment

80,000

Stockholders’ Equity

Common stock $ .50 par value, 2,500,000

Shares Authorized, $480,000 shares issued and Outstanding 240,000

Retained Earnings (deficit) (156,800)

Total Equities 467,600

The terms of the organization plan are as follows:

1. Creditors represented by $69,000 of the unsecured accounts payable agree to accepts the accounts receivable of SRP Company in full settlements of their claims. The fair value of the receivables is $51,000.

2. Creditors represented by $54,000 of the unsecured accounts payable agree to accept a patent with a book value of $42,000 and a fair value of $50,000 in full settlement of their claims.

3. Creditors of the remaining unsecured accounts payable agree to accept $.60 on the dollar. Cash is paid to these creditors and to the creditors with priority.

4. The creditors holding the 12%, $57,000 note (on which there is $11,900) accrued interest ) agreed to extend the due date for two years from January 3,2009, and to reduce the interest rate to 6% on the current carrying value of the debt ($63,000), payable annually.

5. the holder of the 10%, $54,400 unsecured note (on which these is $11,900 accured interest ) agreed to cancel the accrued interest and $14,400 of the principal; interest on the new note at 10% is due annually, with the principal due on January 3,2012.

6. the holder of the 9%, $80,000 mortgage note (on which there is $20,500 accrued interest) agreed to accept 100,000 shares of the common stock in exchange for full satisfaction of the debt. The common stock had a fair value of $.59 per share.

7. the par value of the common stock is reduced to $.10 per share and any remaining accumulated deficit is eliminated.

Required:

A. Prepare a journal entries to give effect to the reorganization.

B. Prepare a post-reorganization balance sheet dated January 2, 2009

C. Prepare journal entries to accrue interest on December 31, 2009, and to record the payment of interest on January 2, 2010

o shea enterprises started the 2002 accounting period with 30 000 of assets all cash 492532

Interrelationships among Financial Statements

O’Shea Enterprises started the 2002 accounting period with $30,000 of assets (all cash), $18,000 of liabilities, and $4,000 of common stock. During the year, O’Shea earned cash revenues of $48,000, paid cash expenses of $32,000, and paid a cash dividend to stockholders of $2,000. O’Shea also acquired $10,000 of additional cash from the sale of common stock and paid $6,000 cash to reduce the liability owed to a bank.

Required

1. Prepare an income statement, statement of changes in stockholders’ equity, period-end balance sheet, and statement of cash flows for the 2002 accounting period. (Hint: Determine the amount of beginning retained earnings before considering the effects of the current period events. It also might help to record all events under an accounting equation before preparing the statements.)

2. Determine the percentage of total assets that were provided by creditors, investors, and earnings.

below is the adjusted trial balance for computer services as of december 31 2011 492534

Trial Balance

Below is the adjusted trial balance for Computer Services as of December 31, 2011.

Adjusted

Trial Balance

Dr.

Cr.

Cash

8,405

Accounts Receivable

5,147

Supplies

2,575

Prepaid Insurance

1,580

Equipment

6,000

Accumulated Depreciation – Equip

600

Accounts Payable

3,489

Salaries Payable

1,155

Unearned Rent Revenue

575

Jack Smith, Capital

10,000

Jack Smith, Drawing

4,500

Service Revenue

33,017

Rental Revenue

1,050

Depreciation Expense

600

Insurance Expense

680

Rent Expense

3,500

Salaries Expense

12,854

Supplies Expense

2,587

Utilities Expense

1,458

Totals

49,886

49,886

Instructions

A. Prepare the necessary closing entries as of December 31, 2011

B. Post the closing entries to the selected ledger accounts.

C. Prepare a Post Closing Trial Balance.

top switch inc designs and manufactures switches used in telecommunications serious 492535

Top Switch Inc. designs and manufactures switches used in telecommunications. Serious flooding throughout the state of Tennessee affected Top Switch’s facilities. Inventory was completely ruined, and the company’s computer system, including all accounting records, was destroyed. Before the unfortunate incident, recovery specialists cleaned the buildings. The company controller is very nervous and anxious to recover whatever records he can to support the insurance claim for the destroyed inventory.

After consulting with the cost accountant, they decide to retrieve the previous year’s annual report for the beginning inventory numbers. In addition, they also agreed that they need first quarter cost data. The cost accountant was working on the first quarter results before the storm hit, and to his surprise, the report was still in his desk drawer. After reviewing the data, the information shows the following information:

Material purchases were $ 325,000; Direct Labor was $ 220,000.

Further discussions between the controller and the cost accountant revealed that sales were $ 1,350,000 and the gross margin was 30% of sales.

The cost accountant also discovered, while sifting through the information, that cost of goods available for sale was $ 1,020,000 at cost.

While assessing the damage, the controller determined that the prime costs were $ 545,000 up to the time of the damage and that manufacturing overhead is 65% of conversion cost.

The cost accountant is not sure about all of this, but he decides to see what he can do with the information.

The beginning inventory numbers are as follows:

Raw Materials

41,000

Work in Process

56,000

Finished Goods

35,000

Required:

Determine the amount of cost in the Raw Materials, Work in Process, and Finished Goods Inventory as of the date of the storm. (Hint: You may wish to reconstruct the various schedules and statements that would have been affected by the company’s accounts during the period.)

crs products inc uses a job order cost system selected transactions dealing with fac 492536

General journal entries for factory overhead

CRS Products Inc. uses a job order cost system. Selected transactions dealing with factory items for the month follow:

a. Requisitioned indirect materials from storeroom, $3,200.

b. Purchased, on account, factory supplies for future needs, $4,400.

c. Purchased parts, on account, for repairing a machine, $1,400.

d. Requisitioned factory supplies from storeroom, $900.

e. Returned other defective factory supplies to vendors, $700.

f. Factory rent accrued for the month, $2,400.

g. Returned previously requisitioned factory supplies to store room, $350.

h. Depreciation of machinery and equipment, $2,800.

i. Payroll taxes liability for month, $3,200.

j. Heat, light and power charges payable for the month, $6,400.

k. Expired insurance on inventories, $1,350.

l. Factory overhead applied to production, $34,600.

m. Indirect labor for the month, $2,600.

n. Goods completed and transferred to finished goods: materials, $14,400; labor $40,400, factory overhead, $30,400.

Required:

Record the previous transactions. Assume that the records include a control account and a subsidiary ledger for factory overhead, to which the entries will be posted at some later date.

the following information taken from the books of theodore co represents the operati 492537

Determining overhead rate, using direct labor cost, direct labor hour and machine hours methods

The following information, taken from the books of Theodore Co., represents the operations for January:

Bronzing

Costing

Finishing

Materials used

8,000

5,000

9,000

Direct labor cost

1,000

500

1,620

Direct labor hours

4,000

5,000

2,025

Factory overhead

20,000

10,000

16,200

The job cost system is used, and the February cost sheet for Job M45 shows the following:

Bronzing

Casting

Finishing

Materials

20

40

20

Direct labor

64

60

54

Direct labor hours

8

6

6

Machine hours

2

3

1

Bronzing

Casting

Finishing

Direct labor hours

15,000

9,800

20,000

Factory overhead

350,000

220,000

325,000

Required:

1. Using the January data, ascertain the factory overhead application rates to be used during February based on the following:

a. Direct labor cost

b. Direct labor hours

c. Factory overhead

2. Prepare a schedule showing the total production cost of Job M45 under each method of applying factory overhead.

3. Prepare the entries to record the following for February operations:

a. The liability for total factory overhead.

b. Distribution of factory overhead to the departments.

c. Application of factory overhead to the work in process, using direct labor hours. (Use the predetermined rate calculated in 1, and separate applied overhead accounts for each department).

d. Closing of the applied factory overhead accounts.

e. Recording under- and overapplied factory overhead and closing the actual factory overhead accounts.

classify each of the following items of factory overhead as either a fixed or a vari 492538

Classify each of the following items of factory overhead as either a fixed or a variable cost. (Include any costs that you consider to be semi-variable within the variable category. Remember that variable costs change in total volume of production changes.)

Fixed or Variable Cost?

a. Indirect labor

b. Indirect Materials

c. Insurance on building

d. Overtime Premium Pay

e. Depreciation on building (straight-line)

f. Polishing compounds

g. Depreciation on machinery (based on machine hours used)

h. Employer’s payroll taxes

i. Property taxes

j. Machine lubricants

k. Employees hospital insurance (paid by employer)

l. Labor for machine repairs

m. Vacation pay

n. Janitor’s wages

o. Rent

p. Small tools

q. Plant manager’s salary

r. Factory electricity

s. Product inspector’s wages

listed below are the budgeted factory overhead costs for 2011 for valpo manufacturin 492539

Budgeted factory overhead costs

Listed below are the budgeted factory overhead costs for 2011 for Valpo Manufacturing Inc. at a projected level of 2,000 units.

Expenses:

Indirect materials

10,000

Indirect labor

20,000

Power

15,000

Straight-line depreciation

30,000

Factory property tax

28,000

Factory insurance

22,000

Total

$125,000

Required:

Prepare flexible budgets for factory overhead at the 1,000, 2000, and 4,000 units level. (Hint: You must first decide which of the listed costs should be considered variable and which should be fixed).

arnold corporation has been authorized to issue 40 000 shares of 100 par value 8 non 492543

Arnold Corporation has been authorized to issue 40,000 shares of $100 par value, 8%, noncumulative preferred stock and 2,000,000 shares of no-par common stock. The corporation assigned a $5 stated value to the common stock. At December 31, 2011, the ledger contained the following balances pertaining to stockholders’ equity. Preferred Stock $ 240,000 Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value—Preferred 56,000 Common Stock 2,000,000 Paid-in Capital in Excess of Stated Value—Common 5,700,000 Treasury Stock—Common (1,000 shares) 22,000 Paid-in Capital from Treasury Stock 3,000 Retained Earnings 560,000 The preferred stock was issued for land having a fair market value of $296,000.All common stock issued was for cash. In November, 1,500 shares of common stock were purchased for the treasury at a per share cost of $22. In December, 500 shares of treasury stock were sold for $28 per share. No dividends were declared in 2011.

Instructions

(a) Prepare the journal entries for the:

(1) Issuance of preferred stock for land.

(2) Issuance of common stock for cash.

(3) Purchase of common treasury stock for cash.

(4) Sale of treasury stock for cash.

(b) Prepare the stockholders’ equity section at December 31, 2011

the following expenditures relating to plant assets were made by spaulding company d 492545

The following expenditures relating to plant assets were made by Spaulding Company during the first 2 months of 2011.

1. Paid $5,000 of accrued taxes at time plant site was acquired.

2. Paid $200 insurance to cover possible accident loss on new factory machinery while the machinery was in transit.

3. Paid $850 sales taxes on new delivery truck.

4. Paid $17,500 for parking lots and driveways on new plant site.

5. Paid $250 to have company name and advertising slogan painted on new delivery truck.

6. Paid $8,000 for installation of new factory machinery.

7. Paid $900 for one-year accident insurance policy on new delivery truck.

8. Paid $75 motor vehicle license fee on the new truck.

Instructions

(a) Explain the application of the cost principle in determining the acquisition cost of plant assets.

(b) List the numbers of the foregoing transactions, and opposite each indicate the account title to which each expenditure should be debited.

acct344 picture pretty manufactures picture frames sales for august are expected to 492458

Picture Pretty manufactures picture frames. Sales for August are expected to be 10,000 units of various sizes. Historically, the average frame requires four feet of framing, one square foot of glass, and two square feet of backing. Beginning inventory includes 1,500 feet of framing, 500 square feet of glass, and 500 square feet of backing. Prices are $0.30 per foot of framing, $6.00 per square foot of glass, and $2.25 per square foot of backing. Ending inventory should be 150% of beginning inventory. Purchases are paid for in the month acquired.

Question 1: Determine the quantity of framing, glass, and backing that is to be purchased during August.

Question 2: Determine the total costs of direct materials for August purchases.

scientists at anschultz laboratories inc have just perfected dentalite a liquid subs 492459

Work in Process Inventory Accounts: Total Unit Cost

Scientists at Anschultz Laboratories, Inc., have just perfected Dentalite, a liquid substance that dissolves tooth decay. The substance, which is generated by a complex process involving five departments, is very expensive. Cost and equivalent unit data for the latest week are as follows (units are in ounces):

Direct Materials

Dept.

Dollars

Equivalent Units

Dollars

Equivalent Unit

A

12,000

1,000

33,825

2,050

B

21,835

1,985

13,065

1,005

C

23,896

1,030

20,972

2,140

D

22,086

2,045

E

15,171

1,945

From these data, compute the unit cost for each department and the total unit cost of producing 1 ounce of Dentalite. If an amount box does not require an entry, leave it blank, or enter zero (“0”). Round your answers to two decimal places.

many of the products made by wireless plastics company are standard telephone replac 492460

Process Costing: Average Costing Method

Many of the products made by Wireless Plastics Company are standard telephone replacement parts that require long production runs and are produced continuously. A unit for Wireless Plastics is a box of parts. During April, direct materials for 25,250 units were put into production. Total cost of direct materials used during April was $2,273,000. Direct labor costs totaled $1,135,000, and overhead was $2,043,000. The beginning work in process inventory contained 1,600 units, which were 100 percent complete for direct materials costs and 60 percent complete for conversion costs. Costs attached to the units in beginning inventory totaled $232,515, which included $143,500 of direct materials costs. At the end of the month, 1,250 units were in ending inventory; all direct materials had been added, and the units were 70 percent complete for conversion costs.

Required

1. Using the average costing method and assuming no loss due to spoilage, prepare a process cost report for April. If an amount box does not require an entry, enter “0”. Round your answers to the nearest dollar, except for per unit amounts. For per unit amounts, round to two decimal places. For the percentages, do not enter the percent sign. For example, 60% would be entered as 60.

2. From the information in the process cost report, identify the amount that should be transferred out of the Work in Process Inventory account. State where those dollars should be transferred.

the building maintenance department for jones manufacturing company budgets annual c 492476

(TCO 6) The building maintenance department for Jones Manufacturing Company budgets annual costs of $4,200,000 based on the expected operating level for the coming year. The costs are allocated to two production departments. The following data relate to the potential allocation bases:

Square footage

Production Detpt. 1

Production Dept. 2

Direct labor hours

15,000

45,000

Direct labor hours

25,000

50,000

If Jones assigns costs to departments based on square footage, how much total costs will be allocated to Production Department 1?

anna bellatorre inc manufactures five models of kitchen appliances at its mesa plant 492477

Anna Bellatorre, Inc. manufactures five models of kitchen appliances at its Mesa plant. The company is installing activity-based costing and has identified the following activities performed at its Mesa plant. Having analyzed its Mesa plant operations for purposes of installing activity-based costing, Anna Bellatorre, Inc. identified its activity cost centers. It now needs to identify relevant activity cost drivers in order to assign overhead costs to its products.

Instructions

Using the activities listed above, identify for each activity one or more cost drivers that might be used to assign overhead to Anna Bellatorre’s five products.

1. Designing new models.

2. Purchasing raw materials and parts.

3. Storing and managing inventory.

4. Receiving and inspecting raw materials and parts.

5. Interviewing and hiring new personnel.

6. Machine forming sheet steel into appliance parts.

7. Manually assembling parts into appliances.

8. Training all employees of the company.

9. Insuring all tangible fixed assets.

10. Supervising production.

11. Maintaining and repairing machinery and equipment.

12. Painting and packaging finished appliances.

murtos manufacturing company uses a job order cost system in each of its three manuf 492478

Murtos Manufacturing Company uses a job order cost system in each of its three manufacturing departments. Manufacturing overhead is applied to jobs on the basis of direct labor cost in Department D, direct labor hours in Department E, and machine hours in Department K.
In establishing the predetermined overhead rates for 2011 the following estimates were made for the year.

Department

D

E

K

Manufacturing overhead

1,050,000

1,500,000

840,000

Direct labor costs

1,500,000

1,250,000

450,000

Direct labor hours

100,000

125,000

40,000

Machine hours

400,000

500,000

120,000

During January, the job cost sheets showed the following costs and production data.

Department

D

E

K

Direct materials used

140,000

126,000

78,000

Direct labor costs

120,000

110,000

37,500

Manufacturing overhead incurrect

89,000

124,000

74,000

Direct labor hours

8,000

11,000

3,500

Machine hours

34,000

45,000

10,400

Instructions

a. Compute the predetermined overhead rate for each department.

Department A overhead is applied on direct labor cost

Department B overhead is applied on direct labor hours

Department C overhead is applied on machine hours

b. Compute the total manufacturing costs assigned to jobs in January in each department.

c. Compute the under- or overapplied overhead for each department at January 31.

qwik repairs has over 200 auto maintenance service outlets nationwide 492479

Qwik Repairs has over 200 auto-maintenance service outlets nationwide. It provides primarily two lines of service: oil changes and brake repair: oil change-related services represent 65% of its sales and provide a contribution margin ratio of 20%. Brake repair represents 35% of its sales and provides a 60% contribution margin ratio. The company’s fixed costs are $16,000,000 (that is $80,000 per service outlet).

Instruction:

(a) Calculate the dollar amount of each type of service that the company must provide in order to break even.

(b) The company has a desired net income of $60,000 per service outlet. What is the dollar amount of each type of service that must be provided by each service outlet to meet its target net income per outlet?

tolla company is estimating the following sales for the first six months of next yea 492496

Tolla Company is estimating the following sales for the first six months of next year:

January

350,000

February

300,000

March

320,000

April

140,000

May

450,000

June

47,000

Sales at Tolla are normally collected as 70 percent in the month of sale, 25 percent in the month following the sale, and the remaining 5 percent being uncollectible. Also, customers paying in the month of sale are given a 2 percent discount. Based on this information, how much cash should Tolla expect to collect during the month of April?

trauscht corporation has provided the following data from its activity based costing 492497

Trauscht Corporation has provided the following data from its activity-based costing system:

Activity Cost Pool

Total Cost

Total Activity

Assembly

704,880

44,000 machine-hours

Processing orders

91,428

1,900 orders

Inspection

117,546

1,950 inspection-hours

The company makes 360 units of product P23F a year, requiring a total of 725 machine-hours, 85 orders, and 45 inspection-hours per year. The product’s direct materials cost is $42.30 per unit and its direct labor cost is $14.55 per unit. The product sells for $132.10 per unit. According to the activity-based costing system, what is the product margin for product P23F?

the management of sharrar corporation would like to investigate the possibility of b 492503

The management of Sharrar Corporation would like to investigate the possibility of basing its predetermined overhead rate on activity at capacity rather than on the estimated amount of activity for the year. The company’s controller has provided an example to illustrate how this new system would work. In this example, the allocation base is machine-hours and the estimated amount of the allocation base for the upcoming year is 45,000 machine hours. In addition, capacity is 52,000 machine-hours and the actual activity for the year is 47,100 machine-hours. All of the manufacturing overhead is fixed and is $1,029,600 per year. For simplicity, it’s assumed that this is the estimated manufacturing overhead for the year as well as the manufacturing overhead capacity and the actual amount of manufacturing overhead for the year.

Required:

A. Determine the predetermined overhead rate if the predetermined overhead rate is based on the estimated amount of the allocation base.

B. Determine the underapplied or overapplied overhead for the year if the predetermined overhead rate is based on the estimated amount of the allocation base.

C. Determine the predetermined overhead rate if the predetermined overhead rate is based on the amount of the allocation base at capacity.

D. Determine the underapplied or overapplied overhead for the year if the predetermined overhead rate is based on the amount of the allocation base at capacity.

fryer corporation uses the weighted average method in its process costing system 492504

Fryer Corporation uses the weighted-average method in its process costing system. This month, the beginning inventory in the first processing department consisted of 700 units. The costs and percentage completion of these units in beginning inventory were:

Cost

Percent Complete

Material cost

12,600

75%

Conversion costs

8,900

60%

A total of 7,300 units were started and 6,200 units were transferred to the second processing department during the month. The following costs were incurred in the first processing department during the month:

Cost

Material Costs

132,200

Conversion costs

177,500

The ending inventory was 80% complete with respect to materials and 45% complete with respect to conversion costs.

Required:

The total cost transferred from the first processing department to the next processing department during the month is closest to what amount?

porter company has provided the following data for the second quarter of the most re 492505

Porter Company has provided the following data for the second quarter of the most recent year:

Sales

300,000

Fixed manufacturing overhead

55,000

Direct labor

72,500

Fixed selling expense

46,250

Variable manufacturing overhead

41,000

Variable administrative expense

48,000

Fixed administrative expense

44,500

Variable selling expense

49,750

Assume that direct labor is a variable cost and that there were no beginning or ending inventories. What is the total contribution margin of Porter Company for the second quarter?

superior industries sales budget shows quarterly sales for the next year as follows 492507

Superior Industries’ sales budget shows quarterly sales for the next year as follows:

Quarter

Sales (units)

First

10,000

Second

8,000

Third

12,000

Fourth

14,000

Company policy is to have a finished goods inventory at the end of each quarter equal to 20% of the next quarter’s sales. How much should the budgeted production for the second quarter be?

acc225 quaint construction inc is a home builder in arizona quaint uses a job order 492508

Accounting for construction transactions

Quaint Construction, Inc., is a home builder in Arizona. Quaint uses a job order costing system in which each house is a job. Because it constructs house, the company uses an account titled Construction overhead. The company applies overhead based on estimated direct labor costs. For the year, it estimated construction overhead of $1,100,000 and total direct labor cost of $2,750,000. The following events occurred during August:

A. Purchased materials on account, $400,000.

B. Requisitioned direct materials and used direct labor in construction. Record the materials requisitioned.

Direct Materials

Direct Labor

House 402

54,000

42,000

House 403

68,000

35,000

House 404

63,000

57,000

House 405

85,000

53,000

C. The company incurred total wages of $200,000. Use the data from item b to assign the wages.

D. Depreciation of construction equipment, $6,200.

E. Other overhead costs incurred on houses 402 through 405:

Indirect labor

13,000

Equipment rentals paid in cash

37,000

Worker liability insurance expired

3,300

F. Allocated overhead to jobs.

G. Houses completed: 402,404

H. Houses sold: 404 for $250,000.

Requirements:

1. Calculate Quaint’s construction overhead application rate for the year.

2. Prepare journal entries to record the events in the general journal.

3. Open T- accounts for work in process inventory and Finished goods inventory . Post the appropriate entries to these accounts, identifying each entry by letter. Determine the ending account balances, assuming that the beginning balances were zero.

4. Add the costs of the unfinished houses, and show this total amount equals the ending balance in the work in process inventory account.

5. Add the cost of the completed house that has not yet been sold, and show that this equals the ending balance in Finished goods inventory.

6. Compute gross profit on the house that was sold. What costs must gross profit cover for Quaint Construction?

acc225 while reviewing the march 31 2012 balance sheet of business solutions santana 492509

While reviewing the March 31, 2012, balance sheet of Business Solutions, Santana Rey notes that the business has built a large cash balance of $68,057. Its most recent bank money market statement shows that the funds are earning an annualized return of 0.75%. S. Rey decides to make several investments with the desire to earn a higher return on the idle cash balance. Accordingly, in April 2012, Business Solutions makes the following investments in trading securities:

April 16 Purchases 400 shares of Johnson & Johnson stock at $50 per share plus $300 commission.

April 30 Purchases 200 shares of Starbucks Corporation at $22 per share plus $250 commission.

On June 30, 2012, the per share market price (fair value) of the Johnson & Johnson shares is $55 and the Starbucks shares is $19.

Required

1. Prepare journal entries to record the April purchases of trading securities by Business Solutions.

2. On June 30, 2012, prepare the adjusting entry to record any necessary fair value adjustment to its portfolio of trading securities.

acct434 craners company budgets on an annual basis for its fiscal year the following 492510

Craners Company budgets on an annual basis for its fiscal year. The following beginning and ending inventory levels (in units) are planned for the fiscal year of July 1, 20×2, through June 30, 20×3.

July 1, 20×2

30, 20×3

Raw material (note) June 30,

40,000

10,000

Work in process

8,000

8,000

Finished goods

30,000

5,000

(note) Three units of raw material are needed to produce each unit of finished product.

If 450,000 finished units were to be manufactured during the 20×2-20×3 fiscal year by Craners Company, the units of raw material needed to be purchased would be

acct434 information pertaining to john corporation s sales revenue is presented in t 492511

Information pertaining to John Corporation’s sales revenue is presented in the following table:

February

March

April

Cash

Sales

$160,000

$150,000

$120,000

Credit

Sales

300,000

400,000

280,000

Total

Sales

$460,000

$550,000

$400,000

Management estimates that 5% of credit sales are not collectible. Of the credit sales that are collectible, 60% are collected in the month of sale and the remainder in the month following the sale. Cost of purchases of inventory each month are 70% of the next month’s projected total sales. ll purchases of inventory are on account; 25% are paid in the month of purchase, and the remainder is paid in the month following the purchase.

John’s budgeted total cash receipts in April are

dole corp s accounts payable at december 31 2012 totaled 650 000 before any necessar 492513

Dole Corp.’s accounts payable at December 31, 2012, totaled $650,000 before any necessary year-end adjustments relating to the following transactions:

– On December 27, 2012, Dole wrote and recorded checks to creditors totaling $350,000 causing an overdraft of $100,000 in Dole’s bank account at December 31, 2012. The checks were mailed out on January 10, 2013.

– On December 28, 2012, Dole purchased and received goods for $150,000, terms 2/10, n/30. Dole records purchases and accounts payable at net amounts. The invoice was recorded and paid January 3, 2013.

– Goods shipped f.o.b. destination on December 20, 2012 from a vendor to Dole were received January 2, 2013. The invoice cost was $65,000.

At December 31, 2012, what amount should Dole report as total accounts payable?

mary smith is the controller of arnold corporation and is responsible for the prepar 492516

(Current Liabilities)

Mary Smith is the controller of Arnold Corporation and is responsible for the preparation of the year-end financial statements. The following transactions occurred during the year.

a. On December 20, 2012, an employee filed a legal action againstArnoldfor $100,000 for wrongful dismissal. Management believes the action to be frivolous and without merit. The likelihood of payment to the employee is remote.

b. Bonuses to key employees based on net income for 2012 are estimated to be $150,000.

c. On December 1, 2012, the company borrowed $900,000 at 8% per year. Interest is paid quarterly.

d. Credit sales for the year amounted to $10,000,000.Arnold’s expense provision for doubtful accounts is estimated to be 2% of credit sales.

e. On December 15, 2012, the company declared a $2.00 per share dividend on the 40,000 shares of common stock outstanding, to be paid on January 5, 2013.

f. During the year, customer advances of $160,000 were received; $50,000 of this amount was earned by December 31, 2012.

For each item above, indicate the dollar amount to be reported as a current liability. If a liability is not reported, enter 0.

pascal corporation is preparing its december 31 2012 balance sheet 492517

(Current vs. Long-term Liabilities)

Pascal Corporation is preparing its December 31, 2012 balance sheet. The following items may be reported as either a current or long-term liability.

1. On December 15, 2012, Pascal declared a cash dividend of $2.00 per share to stockholders of record on December 31. The dividend is payable on January 15, 2013. Pascal has issued 1,000,000 shares of common stock, of which 50,000 shares are held in treasury.

2. At December 31, bonds payable of $100,000,000 are outstanding. The bonds pay 10% interest every September 30 and mature in installments of $25,000,000 every September 30, beginning September 30, 2013.

3. At December 31, 2011, customer advances were $12,000,000. During 2012, Pascal collected $30,000,000 of customer advances, and advances of $25,000,000 were earned.

For each item above indicate the dollar amounts to be reported as a current liability and as a long-term liability. (For item #2, list the bonds payable with the smallest amount first.)

the following accounts are maintained by the riverside manufacturing company in its 492432

The following accounts are maintained by the Riverside Manufacturing Company in its general ledger: Materials, Work in Process, Factory Overhead, and Accounts Payable. The materials account had a debit balance of $40,000 on November 1.

A summary of material transactions for November shows the following transactions:

(1) Materials acquired on account, $62,000

(2) Direct materials issued, $58,500

(3) Direct materials returned to storeroom, $1,200

(4) Indirect materials issued, $3,600

(5) Indirect materials returned to storeroom, $550

(6) Materials on hand were $200 less than the company’s ledger balance.

Requirements:

a. Prepare journal entries to record these transactions.

b. Post the journal entries to T-accounts.

c. Determine the balance of the materials account on November 30.

selected work sheet data for nicholson company are presented below 492433

Selected work sheet data for Nicholson Company are presented below.

(a) Fill in the missing amounts. (If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.)

Account Titles

Trial Balance

Adjusted Trial Balance

Dr.

Cr.

Dr.

Cr.

Accounts Receivable

34,000

Prepaid Insurance

26,000

20,000

Supplies

7,000

Accumulated Depreciation

12,000

Salaries Payable

5,000

Service Revenue

88,000

97,000

Insurance Expense

Depreciation Expense

10,000

Supplies Expense

5,000

Salaries Expense

49,000

(b) Prepare the adjusting entries that were made.

oregon lumber processes timber into four products during january the joint costs of 492434

Oregon Lumber processes timber into four products. During January, the joint costs of processing were $280,000. There was no inventory at the beginning of the month. Production and sales value information for the month is as follows:

Product

Board feet

Sales Value at Split off Point

Ending Inventory

2 x 4’s

6,000,000

0.30 per board foot

500,000 bdft.

2 x 6’s

3,000,000

0.40 per board foot

250,000 bdft.

4 x 4’s

2,000,000

0.45 per board foot

100,000 bdft.

Slabs

1,000,000

0.10 per board foot

50,000 bdft.

Question: Determine the value of ending inventory if the sales value at splitoff method is used for product costing. Round to three decimal places when necessary.

zenon chemical inc processes pine rosin into three products turpentine paint thinner 492435

Zenon Chemical, Inc. processes pine rosin into three products: turpentine, paint thinner, and spot remover. During May, the joint costs of processing were $240,000. Production and sales value information for the month is as follows:

Product

Units Produced

Sales Value at Splitoff Point

Turpentine

6,000 liters

60,000

Paint thinner

6,000 liters

50,000

Spot remover

3,000 liters

25,000

Question: Determine the amount of joint cost allocated to each product if the physical-measure method is used.

the following information pertains to sampson company 492438

The following information pertains to Sampson Company. Assume that all balance sheet amounts represent both average and ending balance figures. Assume that all sales were on credit.

Assets

Cash and short-term investments

$ 45,000

Accounts receivable (net)

35,000

Inventory

20,000

Property, plant and equipment

210,000

Total Assets

$310,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

Current liabilities

$ 60,000

Long-term liabilities

90,000

Stockholders’ equity—common

160,000

Total Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

$310,000

Income Statement

Sales

$105,000

Cost of goods sold

66,000

Gross profit

39,000

Operating expenses

30,000

Net income

$9,000

Number of shares of common stock

6,000

Market price of common stock

$20

Dividends per share

.50

What is the receivables turnover for Sampson?

3.0 times

12.9 times

1.5 times

1.1 times

the following exhibit is for kmart bonds 492439

The following exhibit is for Kmart bonds.

Bonds

Close

Yield

Volume

Net Change

Kmart 8 3/8 17

100¼

8.4

35

+7/8

The contractual interest rate of the Kmart bonds is not determinable.

equal to the market interest rate.

greater than the market interest rate.

less than the market interest rate.

jmb photography reported net income of 100 000 for 2011 included in the income state 492441

JMB Photography reported net income of $100,000 for 2011. Included in the income statement were depreciation expense of $6,000, patent amortization expense of $2,000, and a gain on sale of equipment of $3,600. JMB’s comparative balance sheets show the following balances.

December 31, 2010

December 31, 2011

Accounts receivable

27,000

21,000

Accounts payable

6,000

9,200

Calculate net cash provided by operating activities for JMB Photography. (List amounts from largest positive to smallest positive followed by most negative to least negative, with depreciation expense listed first, e.g. 15, 14, 10, -17, -5, -1. If amount decreases cash flow, use either a negative sign preceding the number e.g. -45 or parentheses e.g. (45).)

cake products inc is divided into five departments mixing blending finishing factory 492442

Distribution of service department costs to production departments

Cake Products Inc, is divided into five departments, mixing, blending, finishing, factory office and building maintenance. The first three departments are engaged in production work. Factory Office and Building Maintenance are service departments. During the month of June, the following factory overhead was incurred for the various departments:

Mixing

21,000

Factory

Office

9,000

Blending

18,000

Building

Maintenance

6,400

Finishing

25,000

The bases for distributing service department expenses to the other departments follow:

Building maintenance – on the basis of floor space occupied by the other departments as follows: mixing 10,000 sq ft, blending $4,500 sq ft, finishing 10,500 sq ft and factory office 7,000 sq ft.
Factory office – on the basis of number of employees as follows : mixing 30, blending 20 and finishing 50

Required:
Prepare schedules showing the distribution of the service departments expenses for the following:
1. The direct distribution method

2. The sequential distribution method in the order of number of other departments served.

soprano construction company uses the job order cost system in recording payroll tra 492444

Summary of Payroll Procedures

Soprano Construction Company uses the job order cost system. In recording payroll transactions, the following accounts are used:

Cash

Administrative Salaries

Wages Payable

Miscellaneous Administrative Expense

FICA Tax Payable

Sales Salaries

Federal Unemployment Tax Payable

Miscellaneous Selling Expense

State Unemployment Tax Payable

Factory Overhead

Employees Income Tax Payable

Work In Process

Payroll

Factory employees are paid weekly, while all other employees are paid semimonthly on the 15th and the last day of each month. All salaries and wages are subject to all taxes. Following is a narrative of transactions completed during the month of January:

Jan.7 Recorded total earnings of factory employees, amounting to $68,200, less deductions for employees’ income taxes and FICA taxes.

7th Issued check for payment of the payroll

14th Recorded total earnings of factory employees amounting to $66,300, less deductions for employees’ income taxes and FICA taxes.

14th Issued check for payment of the payroll

15th Recorded administrative salaries, $9,000, and sales Salaries, $17,000, less deductions for employees’ income taxes and FICA taxes.

15th Issued check for payment of the salaries.

21st Recorded total earnings of factory employees amounting to $72,500, less deductions for the employees’ income taxes and FICA taxes.

21st Issued check for payment of payroll.

28th Recorded total earnings of factory employees amounting to $74,200, less deductions for employees’ income taxes and FICA taxes.

28th Issued check for payment of payroll

31st Recorded administrative salaries, $9,000, and sales salaries, $17,000, less deductions for employees’ income taxes and FICA taxes.

31st Issued check for payment of the salaries

31st The following wages and salaries were earned or accrued during January:.

Direct Labor

302,500

Indirect Labor

22,500

Administrative Salaries

18,000

Sales Salaries

34,000

Total

377,000

Soprano Construction Company used the following form to compute the amount of payroll taxes incurred:

Items Taxable Earnings FICA Tax Federal Unemployment Tax State Unemployment

Tax Total Payroll Taxes

Factory wages

Administrative Wages

Sales salaries

Total

Required:

1. Complete the previous form to show the payroll taxes imposed on the employer for the month of January.

2. Prepare the journal entries to record the foregoing transactions, including the distribution of payroll costs and payroll taxes, assuming that the payroll taxes imposed on the employer for factory wages are to be charged to Factory Overhead, the taxes for Administrative salaries are to be charged to Miscellaneous Administrative expense, and the taxes for sales salaries are to be charged to Miscellaneous Selling Expense.

3. Assume that the factory employees worked on January 29, 30, and 31. What was the amount of accrued wages on January 31?

francona inc manufactures electrical equipment from specifications received from cus 492445

Spoiled goods and defective work

Francona Inc. manufactures electrical equipment from specifications received from customers. Job X10 was for 1,000 motors to be used in a specially designed electrical complex. The following costs were determined for each motor:

Materials

117

Labor

100

Total

300

At final inspection, Francona discovered that 33 motors did not meet the exacting specifications established by the customer. An examination indicated that 15 motors were beyond repair and should be sold as spoiled goods for $75 each. The remaining 18 motors, although defective, could be reconditioned as first-quality units by the addition of $1,650 for materials, $1,500 for labor, and $1,200 for factory overhead.

Required:

Prepare the journal entries to record the following:

1. The scrapping of the 15 units, with the income from spoiled goods treated as a reduction in the manufacturing cost of the specific job.

2. The correction of the 18 defective units, with the additional cost charged to the specific job.

3. The additional cost of replacing the 15 spoiled motors with new motors.

4. The sale of the spoiled motors for $75 each.

prepare a performance report for the dining room of rosita s mexican restaurant for 492447

Prepare a performance report for the dining room of Rosita’s Mexican Restaurant for the month of February 2008, using the following data:

Budgeted Data:

January

February

Dining room wages

4,300

4,150

Laundry and housekeeping

1,650

1,500

Utilities

2,200

2,050

Depreciation

1,500

1,500

Actual Data:

January February

Dining room wages

4,700

4,400

Laundry and housekeeping

1,600

1,400

Utilities

2,350

2,100

Depreciation

1,500

1,500

marconi manufacturing produces two items in its trumbull plant tuff stuff and ruff s 492449

Marconi Manufacturing produces two items in its Trumbull Plant: Tuff Stuff and Ruff Stuff. Since inception, Marconi has used only one manufacturing-overhead cost pool to accumulate costs.

Overhead has been allocated to products based on direct-abor hours. Until recently, Marconi was the sole producer of Ruff Suff and was able to dictate the selling price.

However, last year Marvella Proucts began marketing a comparable product at a price below the cost assigned by Marconi. Market share has declined rapidly, and Marconi must now decide whether to meet the competitive price or to disontinue the product line.

Recognizing that discountinuing the product line wold place an additonal burden on its remaining product, Tuff Stuff, management is using activity-based costing to determine if it would show a different cost structure for the two products.

The two major indirect costs for manufacturing the products are power usage and setup costs. Most of the power is used in fabricating, while most of the setup costs are requiredin assembly. The setup costs are predominately related to Tuff Stuff product line.

A decision was made to separate the Manufacturing Department costs into two activity cost pools as follows:

Fabricating: machines hours will be the cost driver.

Assembly: number of setups will be the cost driver.

The controlller has gathered the following information.

Manufacturing Department

Annual budget before separation of overhead

Product Line

Total

Tuff Stuff

Ruff Stuff

Number of units

20,000

20,000

Direct labor hours

2 hrs per unit

3 hours per unit

Total direct-labor cost

800,000

Direct material

5.00 per unit

3.00 per unit

Budgeted overhead:

Indirect labor

24,000

Fringe benefits

5,000

Indirect material

31,000

Power

180,000

Setup

75,000

Quality assurance

10,000

Other utilities

10,000

Depreciation

15,000

Manufacturing Department

Cost Structure after Separation of Overhead into Activity Cost Pools

Fabrication Assembly

Assembly

Direct labor cost

75%

25%

Direct material (no change)

100%

0%

Indirect labor

75%

25%

Fringe benefits

80%

20%

Indirect material

20,000

11,000

Power

160,000

20,000

Setup

5,000

70,000

Quality utilities

50%

50%

Depreciation

80%

80%

Cost driver

Product Line

Tuff Stuff

Ruff Stuff

Machine hrs per unit

4.00

6.00

Setups

1,000

272

1. Assigning overhead based on direct-labor hours, calculate the following:

a. Total budgeted cost of the Manufacturing Department.

b. Unit cost of Tuff Stuff and Ruff Stuff.

2. After separation of overhead into activity cost pools, compute the total budgeted cost of each department: fabricating and assembly.

3. Using activity-based costing, calculate the unit costs for each product. ( In computing the pool rates for th efabricating and assembly activity cost pools, round to the nearest cent. Then, in computing unit product cost, round to the nearest cent).

4. Discuss how a decision regarding theproduction and pricing of Ruff Stuff will be affected by the results of your calculations in the preceding requirements.

in january 2012 the management of sarah company concludes that it has sufficient cas 492450

In January 2012, the management of Sarah Company concludes that it has sufficient cash to purchase some short-term investments in debt and stock securities. During the year, the following transactions occurred.

Feb. 1 Purchased 1,200 shares of NJF common stock for $50,600 plus brokerage fees of $1,000.

Mar. 1 Purchased 500 shares of SEK common stock for $18,000 plus brokerage fees of $500.

Apr. 1 Purchased 70 $1,000, 8% CRT bonds for $70,000 plus $1,200 brokerage fees. Interest is payable semiannually on April 1 and October 1.

July 1 Received a cash dividend of $0.80 per share on the NJF common stock.

Aug. 1 Sold 200 shares of NJF common stock at $42 per share less brokerage fees of $350.

Sept. 1 Received $2 per share cash dividend on the SEK common stock.

Oct. 1 Received the semiannual interest on the CRT bonds.

Oct. 1 Sold the CRT bonds for $77,000 less $1,300 brokerage fees.

At December 31, the fair values of the NJF and SEK common stocks were $39 and $30 per share, respectively.

Instructions

1. Journalize the transactions and post to the accounts Debt Investments and Stock Investments. (Use the T account form.)

2. Prepare the adjusting entry at December 31, 2012, to report the investments at fair value. All securities are considered to be trading securities.

3. Show the balance sheet presentation of investment securities at December 31, 2012.

4. Identify the income statement accounts and give the statement classification of each account.

at reyes company checks are not prenumbered because both the purchasing agent and th 492451

At Reyes Company, checks are not prenumbered because both the purchasing agent and the treasurer are authorized to issue checks. Each signer has access to unissued checks kept in an unlocked file cabinet. The purchasing agent pays all bills pertaining to goods purchased for resale. Prior to payment, the purchasing agent determines that the goods have been received and verifies the mathematical accuracy of the vendor’s invoice. After payment, the invoice is filed by vendor and the purchasing agent records the payment in the cash disbursements journal. The treasurer pays all other bills following approval by authorized employees. After payment, the treasurer stamps all bills “paid,” files them by payment date, and records the checks in the cash disbursements journal. Reyes Company maintains one checking account that is reconciled by the treasurer.

Instructions

1. List the weaknesses in internal control over cash disbursements.

2. Identify improvements for correcting these weaknesses.

acc200 use the standard price and cost data supplied in problem above assume that to 492452

Determining and interpreting flexible budget variances
Use the standard price and cost data supplied in Problem above. Assume that Todhunter actually produced and sold 31,000 books. The actual sales price and costs incurred follow.

Actual price and variable costs:

$35.00

Sales price

9.20

Materials

4.40

Labor

6.35

Overhead

7.00

General, seling, and administrative Cost:

Planned fixed

$120,000

General, selling, and administrative

60,000

Required
a. Determine the flexible budget variances.

b. Indicate whether each variance is favorable (F) or (U).

c. Identify the management position responsible for each variance. Explain what could have caused the variance

acc200 sam yu the president of centech computer services needs your help he wonders 492453

Centech Computer Services (Flexible Budget Planning)

Sam Yu, the president of Centech Computer Services, needs your help. He wonders about the potential effects on the firm’s net income if he changes the service rate that the firm charges its customers. The following basic data pertain to fiscal year 2009.

Standard rate and variable costs:

Service rate per hour

$83.00

Labor

40.00

Ovhearhead

7.10

General, selling and administrative

4.40

Expected fixed costs:

Facility repair

$500,000.00

General, selling and administrative

130,00.00

Required:
a. Prepare the pro forma income statement that would appear in the master budget if the firm expects to provide 27,000 hours of services in 2009.

b. A marketing consultant suggests to Mr. Yu that the service rate may affect the number of service hours that the firm can achieve. According to the consultant’s analysis, if Centech charges customers $78 per hour, the firm can achieve 33,000 hours of services. Prepare a flexible budget using the consultant’s assumption.
c. The same consultant also suggests that if the firm raises its rate to $88 per hour, the number of service hours will decline to 22,000. Prepare a flexible budget using the new assumption.
d. Evaluate the three possible outcomes you determined in Requirements a, b, and c and recommend a pricing strategy.

acc200 mcbride medical clinic has budgeted the following cash flows 492454

Preparing a Cash Budget

McBride Medical Clinic has budgeted the following cash flows.

January

February

March

Cash receipts

101,000

108,000

125,000

Cash payments:

For inventory purchases

92,000

72,000

83,000

For S&A expreses

30,000

32,000

26,000

McBride Medical had a cash balance of $7,000 on January 1. The company desires to maintain a cash cushion of $5,000. Funds are assumed to be borrowed, in increments of $1,000 and repaid on the last day of each month; the interest rate is 1 percent per month. McBride pays its vendor on the last day of the month also. The company had a $30,000 beginning balance in its line of credit liability account.

Required:

Prepare a cash budget. (Round all computations to the nearest whole dollar).

adams peters and blake share profits and losses for their apb partnership in a ratio 492455

Cash Distribution Plan

Adams, Peters, and Blake share profits and losses for their APB Partnership in a ratio of 2:3:5. When they decide to liquidate, the balance sheet is as follows:

Assets

Liabilities and Equities

Cash

40,000

Liabilites

50,000

Adams, Loan

10,000

Peters, Capital

75,000

Blake, Capital

70,000

Total Assets

250,000

Total Liabilities and Equities

250,000

Liquidation expenses are expected to be negligible. No interest accrues on loans with partners after termination of the business.

Required

Prepare a cash distribution plan for the APB Partnership.

exacto company reported the following net income and dividends for the years indicat 492456

Parent Company and Consolidated Balances

Exacto Company reported the following net income and dividends for the years indicated:

Year

Net Income

Dividends

20X5

35,000

12,000

20X6

45,000

20,000

20X7

30,000

14,000

True Corporation acquired 75 percent of Exacto’s common stock on January 1, 20X5. On that date, the fair value of Exacto’s net assets was equal to the book value. True uses the equity method in accounting for its ownership in Exacto and reported a balance of $259,800 in its investment account on December 31, 20X7.

Required

a. What amount did True pay when it purchased Exacto’s shares?

b. What was the fair value of Exacto’s net assets on January 1, 20X5?

c. What amount was assigned to the NCI shareholders on January 1, 20X5?

d. What amount will be assigned to the NCI shareholders in the consolidated balance sheet prepared at December 31, 20X7?

acct344 tylon s hardware uses a flexible budget to develop planning information for 492457

Tylon’s Hardware uses a flexible budget to develop planning information for its warehouse operations. For 20X2, the company anticipated that it would have 96,000 sales units for 664 customer shipments. Average storage bin usage for various inventories was estimated to be 200 per day. The costs and cost drivers were determined to be as follows:

Item

Fixed Variable

Cost driver

Product handling

10,000

1.25 per 100 units

Storage

3.00 per storages bin

Utilities

1,000

1.50 per 100 units

Shipping clerks

1,000

1.00 per shipment

Supplies

0.50 per shipment

During the year, the warehouse processed 90,000 units for 600 customer shipments. The workers used 225 storage bins on average each day to sort, store, and process goods for shipment. The actual costs for 20X2 were:

Item

Actual costs

Product handing

10,900

Storage

465

Utilities

2,020

Shipping Clerks

1,400

Supplies

340

Question 1: Determine the 20X2 static budget variances

Question 2: Determine the 20X2 flexible budget variances.

glide tire company s budgeted unit sales for the year 2008 were 492409

Glide Tire Company’s budgeted unit sales for the year 2008 were:

Passenger car tires

120,000

Truck tires

25,000

The budgeted selling price for truck tires was $200 per tire and for passenger car tires was $65 per tire. He beginning finished goods inventories was expected to be 2,000 truck tires and 5,000 passenger tires, for a total cost of $326,478, with desired ending inventories at 2,500 and 6,000, respectively, with a total cost of $400,510. There was no anticipated beginning or ending work in process inventory for either type of tire.

The standard materials quantities for each type of fire were as follows:

Truck

Passenger

Car Rubber

30lbs

10lbs

Steel belts

4lbs

1.5lbs

The purchase prices of rubber and steel were $2 and $3 per pound, respectively. The desired ending inventories for rubber and steel were 75,000 and 7,500 pounds respectively. The estimated beginning inventories for rubber and steel were 60,000 and 6,000 pounds, respectively.

The direct labor hours required for each type of tire were as follows:

Molding Department Finishing Department

Truck Tire

0.25

0.15

Passenger car tire

0.10

0.05

The direct labor rate for each department is as follows:

Molding department

$15 per hour

Finishing department

$13 per hour

Budgeted factory overhead costs for 2008 were as follows:

Indirect materials

198,500

Indirect labor

213,200

Depreciation of building and equipment

157,500

Power and light

122,900

Total

962,100

Required:

Prepare each of the following budgets for Glide for the year ended 2008:

1. Sales budget

2. Production budget

3. Direct material budget

4. Direct labor budget

5. Factory overhead budget

6. Cost of goods sold budget

poole corporation has collected the following information after its first year of sa 492410

Poole Corporation has collected the following information after its first year of sales. Net sales were $1,600,000 on 100,000 units; selling expenses $240,000 (40% variable and 60% fixed); direct materials $511,000; direct labor $285,000; administrative expenses $280,000 (20% variable and 80% fixed); manufacturing overhead $360,000 (70% variable and 30% fixed).

Top management has asked you to do a CVP analysis so that it can make plans for the coming year. It has projected that unit sales will increase by 10% next year.

Instructions:

a) Compute (1) the contribution margin for the current year and the projected year, and (2) the fixed costs for the current year. (Assume that fixed costs will remain the same in the projected year.)

b) Compute the break-even point in units and sales dollars for the current year.

c) The company has a target net income of $310,000. What is the required sales in dollars for the company to meet its target?

d) If the company meets its target net income number, by what percentage could its sales fall before it is operating at a loss? That is, what is its margin of safety ratio?

e) The company is considering a purchase of equipment that would reduce its direct labor costs by $104,000 and would change its manufacturing overhead costs to 30% variable and 70% fixed (assume total manufacturing overhead cost is $360,000, as above). It is also considering switching to a pure commission basis for its sales staff. This would change selling expenses to 90% variable and 10% fixed (assume total selling expense is $240,000, as above). Assuming that net sales remain at first-year levels, compute (1) the contribution margin and (2) the contribution margin ratio, and recompute (3) the break-even point in sales dollars

heath limited is trying to determine the value of its ending inventory at february 2 492411

Heath Limited is trying to determine the value of its ending inventory at February 29, 2008, the company’s year end. The accountant counted everything that was in the warehouse as of February 29, which resulted in an ending inventory valuation of $48,000. However, she didn’t know how to treat the following transactions so she didn’t record them.

a. On February 26, Heath shipped to a customer goods costing $800. The goods were shipped FOB shipping point, and the receiving report indicates that the customer received the goods on March 2.

b. On February 26, Seller Inc. shipped goods to Heath FOB destination. The invoice price was $350. The receiving report indicates that the goods were received by Heath on March 2.

c. Heath had $500 of inventory at a customer’s warehouse “on approval.” The customer was going to let Heath know whether it wanted the merchandise by the end of the week, March 4.

d. Heath also had $400 of inventory on consignment at a Jasper craft shop.

e. On February 26, Heath ordered goods costing $750. The goods were shipped FOB shipping point on February 27. Heath received the goods on March 1.

f. On February 29, Heath packaged goods and had them ready for shipping to a customer FOB destination. The invoice price was $350; the cost of the items was $250. The receiving report indicates that the goods were received by the customer on March 2.

g. Heath had damaged goods set aside in the warehouse because they are no longer saleable. These goods originally cost $400 and, originally, Heath expected to sell these items for $600.

Instructions

For each of the above transactions, specify whether the item in question should be included in ending inventory, and if so, at what amount. (If the item should not be included in ending inventory, put 0 for the amount.)

disney amusement park inc has a fiscal year ending on september 30 selected data fro 492412

Disney Amusement Park, Inc. has a fiscal year ending on September 30. Selected data from the September 30 worksheet are presented below.

Instructions:

(a) Prepare a complete worksheet using trial balance.?(Adjustments Dr. & Cr; Adjusted Trial Balance Dr. & Cr; Income Statement Dr. & Cr; Balance Sheet Dr. & Cr)

(b) Prepare a classified balance sheet. (Note: $10,000 of the mortgage note payable is due for payment in the next fiscal year.) (List assets in order of liquidity and liabilities from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2, with notes first.)

(c) Journalize the adjusting entries using the worksheet as a basis.

(d) Journalize the closing entries using the worksheet as a basis.

(e) Prepare a post-closing trial balance.

in 2007 beth botsford construction corp began construction work under a 3 year contr 492415

(Analysis of Percentage-of-Completion Financial Statements)

In 2007, Beth Botsford Construction Corp. began construction work under a 3-year contract. The contract price was $1,000,000. Beth Botsford uses the percentage-of-completion method for inancial accounting purposes. The income to be recognized each year is based on the proportion of ost incurred to total estimated costs for completing the contract. The financial statement presentations relating to this contract at December 31, 2007, follow.

Balance Sheet

Accounts receivable-construction contract billings

21,500

Construction in progress

65,000

Less: contract billings

61,500

Cost of uncompleted contract in excess of billings

3,500

Income statement

Income (before tax) on the contract recognized in 2007

18,200

Instructions

(a) How much cash was collected in 2007 on this contract?

(b) What was the initial estimated total income before tax on this contract?

in 2007 landers construction corp began construction work under a 5 year contract 492416

Analysis of Percentage-of-Completion Financial Statements

In 2007, Landers Construction Corp. began construction work under a 5-year contract. The contract price was $25,000,000. Landers uses the percentage-of-completion method for financial accounting purposes. The income to be recognized each year is based on the proportion of cost incurred to total estimated costs for completing the contract. The financial statement presentations relating to this contract at December 31, 2007, follow.

Balance Sheet

Accounts receivable-construction contract billings

150,500

Construction in progress

650,000

Less: Contract billings

260,000

Cost of uncompleted contract in excess of billings

Income statement

Income (before tax) on the contract recognized in 2007

130,000

Instructions

(a) How much cash was collected in 2007 on this contract?

(b) What was the initial estimated total income before tax on this contract?

on january 1 2009 the sato company adopted the dollars value lifo method of inventor 492417

On January 1, 2009, the Sato Company adopted the dollars value LIFO method of inventory costing the company ending inventory records appears as follows:

Year

Current

Index cost

2009

40,000

100

2010

56,100

120

2011

58,500

130

2012

70,000

140

Required:

Compute the ending inventory for the years 2009, 2010, 2011, and 2012 using the dollar value LIFO methods

eugene products co produces a latex paint and uses the process cost system 492419

Eugene Products Co. produces a latex paint and uses the process cost system. Materials, labor, and overhead are added evenly throughout the process. The following information was obtained from the company’s accounts at the end of February.

Production Costs

Costs Incurred during month:

Materials

30,000

Labor

20,000

Factory overhead

40,000

90,000

Production Report

Units

Finished and transferred to stockroom during month

56,000

Work in process, end of period, one-fourth completed

16,000

Required:

Prepare a cost of production summary for February. (round unit costs to the three decimal places.)

harmon corporation uses a process cost system the records for the month of may show 492420

Cost of production summary, two departments; beginning inventory.

Harmon Corporation uses a process cost system. The records for the month of May show the following information:

Production Report

Cutting

Grinding

Units in process, May 1

5,000

10,000

Started during the month

20,000

Received from prior department

15,000

Finished and transferred

15,000

10,000

Finished and on hand

5,000

Units in process, May 31

5,000

15,000

Stage of completion

1/5

1/3

Production Costs

Work in process, May 1:

Costs in Cutting

50,000

Materials

5,000

Labor

6,450

Factory overhead

3,550

Costs in Grinding

Materials

5,000

Labor

5,500

Factory overhead

3,500

Costs incurred during the month

Materials

37,000

40,000

Labor

45,000

44,000

Factory overhead

50,000

37,000

Total

147,000

185,000

Required:

Prepare a cost of production summary for each department.

cost of production summary three departments change in unit cost from prior departme 492421

Cost of production summary, three departments, change in unit cost from prior department, departmental cost work sheet, journal entries, manufacturing statement

Taguchi manufacturing Co. uses the process cost system. The following information for the month of December was obtained from the company’s books and from the production reports submitted by the department heads:

Production Report

Mixing

Blending

Bottling

Units in Process, beginning of period

2500

1500

3000

Started in process during month

12500

Received from prior department

13000

10000

Finished and transferred

13000

10000

11000

Finished and on hand

500

Units in Process, end of period

2000

4000

2000

Stage of completion

1/4

4/5

½

Production Costs

Works in process, beginning of period

Works in process, beginning of period

Cost in Mixing

3075

6150

Materials

1470

Labor

650

Factory Overhead

565

Cost in Blending

3660

Materials

240

Labor

905

Factory Oberhead

750

Cost in Bottling

Materials

900

Labor

3100

Factory Overhead

3080

Costs incurred during the month

Materials

15000

2500

1500

Labor

4750

8000

6500

Factory Overhead

5240

6100

7000

Total

27675

21570

31890

Required:

1. Prepare cost of production summaries for the Mixing, Blending, and Bottling departments

2. Prepare a departmental cost work sheet

3. Draft the journal entries required to record the month’s operations

4. Prepare a statement of cost of goods manufactures for December.

acc202 discuss the differentiation between product versus general selling and admini 492422

Discuss the differentiation between product versus general, selling, and administrative cost by setting up financial statements from the transactions.

The following transactions pertain to 2012, the first year of operations of Hall Company. All inventory was started and completed during 2012. Assume all transactions are cash transactions.

1. Acquired $4,000 cash by issuing common stock

2. Paid $720 for materials used to produce inventory.

3. Paid $1,800 to production workers

4. Paid $540 rental fee for production equipment

5. Paid $180 administrative employees.

6. Paid $144 rental fee for administrative office equipment

7. Produced 300 units of inventory of which 200 were sold at 12 each.

Required

Prepare an income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows.

acc202 ernest jones is reviewing his company s investments in a cement plant the com 492423

Post audit evaluation

Ernest Jones is reviewing his company’s investments in a cement plant. The company paid $15,000,000 five years ago to acquire the plant. Now top management is considering an opportunity to sell it. The president wants to know whether the plant has met original expectations before he decides its fate. The company’s discounts rate for present value computations is 8 percent. Expected and actual cash flow as follows:

Year 1

Year 2

Expected

3,30,000

4,920,000

Actual

2,700,000

3,060,000

Required:

A. Compute the net present value of the expected cash flows as of the beginning of the investment

B. Compute the net present value of the actual cash flows as of the beginning of the investment

C. What do you conclude from this post audit.

acc202 soto corporation s balance sheet indicates that the company has 300 000 inves 492424

Return on Investment

Soto Corporation ‘s balance sheet indicates that the company has $300,000 invested in operating assets. During 20111, Soto earned operating income of $45,000 on $600,000 of sales.

Required:

A.Compute Soto’s profit margin for 2011

B.Compute Soto’s turnover for 2011

C.Compute Soto’s return on investment for 2011

D.Recompute Soto’s ROI under each of the following independent assumptions.

(1) Sales increase from $600,000 to $750,000, thereby resulting in an increase in operating income from $45,000 to $60,000.

(2) Sales remain constant, but reduces expenses resulting in an increase in operating income from $45,000 to $48,000.

(3) Soto is able to reduce its invested capital from $300,000 to $240,000 without affecting operating income.

acc202 the following transactions pertain to 2009 the first year operations of leppe 492425

Product versus general, selling, and administrative costs

The following transactions pertain to 2009, the first year operations of Lepper Company. All inventory was started and completed during 2009. Assume that all transactions are cash transactions.

1. Acquired $2,360 cash by issuing common stock.

2. Paid $720 for materials used to produce inventory.

3. Paid $1,800 to production workers.

4. Paid $540 rental fee for production equipment.

5. Paid $180 to administrative employees.

6. Paid $144 rental fee for administrative office equipment.

7. Produced 300 units of inventory of which 200 units were sold at a price of $12 each

Required
Prepare an income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows.

acc202 mazzel company began operations on january 1 2008 by issuing common stock for 492426

Mazzel Company began operations on January 1, 2008, by issuing common stock for $33,000 cash. During 2008, Mazzel received $39,000 cash from revenue and incurred costs that required $66,000 of cash payments.

Required:
Prepare an income statement, balance sheet, and statement of cash flows for Mazzel for 2008, under each of the following independent scenarios.

a. Mazzel is a promoter of rock concerts. The $66,000 was paid to provide a rock concert that produced the revenue.

b. Mazzel is in the car rental business. The $66,000 was paid to purchase automobiles. The automobiles were purchased on January 1, 2008, had four-year useful lives and no expected salvage value. Mazzel uses straight-line depreciation. The revenue was generated by leasing the automobiles.

c. Mazzel is a manufacturing company. The $66,000 was paid to purchase the following items.

d. Refer to Requirement C. Could Mazzel determine the actual cost of making the 500th units of product? How likely is it that the actual costs of the 500th unit of product was exactly the same cost as the cost of producing the 501st units of product? Explain why management would be more interested in average cost than in actual cost.

acc202 spring manufacturing company makes tents that it sells directly to camping en 492427

Cost allocation in a manufacturing company

Spring Manufacturing Company makes tents that it sells directly to camping enthusiasts through a mail-order marketing program. The company pays a quality control expert $108,000 per year to inspect completed tents before they are shipped to customers. Assume that the company completed 1,600 tents in January and 1,200 tents in February. For the entire year, the company expects to produce 15,000 tents.

Required:
a. Explain how changes in the cost driver (number of tents inspected) affect the total amount of fixed inspection cost.

b. Explain how changes in the cost driver(number of tent inspected) affect the amount of fixed inspection cost per unit.

c. If the cost objective is to determine the cost per tent, is the expert’s salary a direct or an indirect cost?

d. How much of the expert’s salary should be allocated to tents produced in January and February

acc202 top executive officers of leach company a merchandising firm are preparing th 492428

Preparing pro forma income statements with different assumptions

Top executive officers of Leach Company, a merchandising firm, are preparing the next year’s budget. The controller has provided everyone with the current year’s projected income statement.

Current Year

Sales revenue

2,600,000

Cost of goods sold

1,690,000

Gross profit

910,000

Selling and admin expenses

325,000

Net income

$585,000

Cost of goods sold is usually 65 percent of sales revenue, and selling and administrative expenses, are usually 10 percent of sales plus a fixed cost of $65,000. The president has announced that the company’s goal is to increase net income by 15 percent.

Required:

The following items are independent of each other.

a. What percentage increase in sales would enable the company to reach its goal? Support your answer with a pro forma income statement.

b. The market may become stagnant next year, and the company does not expect an increase in sales revenue. The production manager believes that an improved production procedure can cut costs of goods sold by 2 percent. What else can the company do to reach its goal? Prepare a pro forma income statement illustrating your proposal.

c. The company decides to escalate its advertising campaign to boost consumer recognition, which will increase selling and administrative expenses to $405,000. With the increased advertising, the company expects sales revenue to increase by 15 percent. Assume that cost of goods sold remains a constant proportion of sales. Can the company reach its goal?

acc202 adk delivery is a small company that transports business packages between san 492429

Using Present Value Techniques to Evaluate Alternative Investment Opportunities

ADK Delivery is a small company that transports business packages between San Francisco and Los Angeles. It operates a fleet of small vans that moves packages to and from a central depot within each city and uses a common carrier to deliver the packages between the depots in the two cities. ADK recently acquired approximately 3 million of cash capital from its owners and its president , Frank Hobb is trying to identify the most profitable way to invest these funds. Travis Lard, the company’s operations manager, believes that the money should be used to expand the fleet of city vans at a cost of 540,000. He argues that more vans would enable the company to expand its services into new markets, thereby increasing the revenue base. More specifically, he expects cash inflows to increase by 210,000 per year. The additional vans are expected to have an average useful life of four years and a combined salvage value of 75000. Operating the vans will require additional working capital of 30,000, which will be recovered at the end of the fourth year.

In contrast, Katy Osmond, the company’s chief accountant, believes that the funds should be used to purchase large trucks to deliver the packages between the depots in the two cities. The conversion process would produce continuing improvement in operating savings with reductions in cash outflows as the following:

Year 1: 120,000; year 2: 240,000: year 3: 300,000: year 4: 330,000

The large trucks are expected to cost 600,000 and to have a four year useful life and a 60,000 salvage value. In addition to the purchase price of the trucks, up front training costs are expected to amount to 12000. ADK delivery’s management has established a 16 percent desired rate of return.

Required:
a.) Determine the net present value of the two investment alternatives.

b.) Calculate the present value index for each alternative.

c.) Indicate which investment alternative you would recommend. Explain your choice.

acc202 quentin giordano owns a small retail ice cream parlor he is considering expan 492430

Using the payback period and unadjusted rate of return to evaluate alternative investment opportunities

Quentin Giordano owns a small retail ice cream parlor. He is considering expanding the business and has identified two attractive alternatives.

One involves purchasing a machine that would enable Mr. Giordano to offer frozen yogurt to customers. The maching would cost $4,050 and has an expected usfeul life of three years with no salvage value. Additional annual cash revenues and cash operating expenses associated with selling yogurt are expected to be $2,970 and $450, respectively.

Alternatively, Mr Giordano could purchase for $5,040 the equipment necessary to serve cappuccino. That equipment has an expected useful life of four years and no salvage value. Additional annual cash revenues and cash operating expenses associated with selling cappuccino are expected to be $4,140 and $1,215, respectively. Income before taxes earned by the ice cream parlor is taxed at an effective rate of 20 percent.

Required:

a. Determine the payback period and unadjusted rate of return (use average investment) for each alternative.

b. Indicate which investment alternative you would recommend. Explain your choice.

acc202 holligan publications established the following standard price and costs for 492431

Determining sales and variable cost volume variances
Holligan Publications established the following standard price and costs for a hardcover picture book that the company produces.

Standard price and variable costs:

Sales price

$37.00

Materials

$8.70

Labor

$4.30

Overhead

$6.10

General, selling and administrative

$6.50

Planned fixed costs:

Manufacturing

128,000

General, selling and administrative

49,000

Holligan planned to make and sell 30,000 copies of the book.

Required:
a. Prepare the pro forma income statement that would appear in the master budget.
b. Prepare the flexible budget income statements, assuming volumes of 29,000 and 31,000 units.
c. Determine the sales and variable cost volume variances, assuming volume is actually 31,000 units.
d. Indicate whether the variances are favorable (F) or unfavorable (U).

e. Comment on how Holligan could use the variances to evaluate performance.

acc280 pedro morales and associates a c p a firm uses job order costing to capture t 492387

Pedro Morales and Associates, a C.P.A. firm, uses job order costing to capture the costs of its audit jobs. There were no audit jobs in process at the beginning of November. Listed below are data concerning the three audit jobs conducted during November.

Gonzalez

Navarro

Rojas

Direct materials

600

400

200

Auditor labor costs

5,400

6,600

3,375

Auditor hours

72

88

45

Overhead costs are applied to jobs on the basis of auditor hours, and the predetermined overhead rate is $55 per auditor hour.

The Gonzalez job is the only incomplete job at the end of November. Actual overhead for the month was $12,000.

Instructions:
a. Determine the cost of each job.

b. Indicate the balance of the Work in Process account at the end of November.

c. Calculate the ending balance of the Manufacturing Overhead account for November.

northwest paperboard company a paper and allied products manufacturer was seeking to 492388

Equity method

Northwest Paperboard Company , a paper and allied products manufacturer, was seeking to gain a foothold in Canada. Toward that end, the company bought 40% of the outstanding common shares of Vancouver Timber and Milling, Inc., on January 2, 2011, for $400 million. At the date of purchase, the book value of Vancouver’s net assets was $775 million. The book values and fair values for all balance sheet items were the same except for inventory and plant facilities. The fair value exceeded book value by $5 million for the inventory and by $20 million for the plant facilities. The estimated useful life of the plant facilities is 16 years. All inventory acquired was sold during 2011.Vancouver reported net income of $140 million for the year ended December 31, 2011. Vancouver paid a cash dividend of $30 million.

Required:

1. Prepare all appropriate journal entries related to the investment during 2011.

2. What amount should Northwest report as its income from its investment in Vancouver for the year ended December 31, 2011?

3. What amount should Northwest report in its balance sheet as its investment in Vancouver?

4.What should Northwest report in its statement of cash flows regarding its investment in Vancouver?

garza company expects to have a cash balance of 46 000 on january 1 2010 492389

Garza Company expects to have a cash balance of $46,000 on January 1, 2010. Relevant monthly budget data for the first 2 months of 2010 are as follows. Collections from customers: January $85,000, February $150,000. Payments for direct materials: January $50,000, February $70,000.

Direct labor: January $30,000, February $45,000. Wages are paid in the month they are incurred. Manufacturing overhead: January $21,000, February $25,000. These costs include depreciation of $1,000 per month. All other overhead costs are paid as incurred. Selling and administrative expenses: January $15,000, February $20,000. These costs are exclusive of depreciation. They are paid as incurred. Sales of marketable securities in January are expected to realize $10,000 in cash. Garza Company has a line of credit at a local bank that enables it to borrow up to $25,000. The company wants to maintain a minimum monthly cash balance of $20,000.

Instructions

Complete the cash budget for January and February. (List amounts from largest to smallest eg 10, 5, 3, 2. If answer is zero, please enter 0. Do not leave any fields blank.)

digital tunes inc is in the business of developing promoting and selling musical tal 492390

Digital Tunes Inc. is in the business of developing, promoting, and selling musical talent on compact disc (CD). The company signed a new group, called Smashing Britney, on January 1, 2010. For the first six months of 2010, the company spent $4,000,000 on a media campaign for Smashing Britney and $1,200,000 in legal costs. The CD production began on February 1, 2010.

Digital Tunes uses a job order cost system to accumulate costs associated with a CD title. The unit direct materials cost for the CD is:

Blank CD $1.80

Jewel Case $0.60

Song lyric insert $0.60

The production process is straightforward. First, the blank CDs are brought to a production area where the digital soundtrack is copied onto the CD. The copying machine requires one hour per 2,400 CDs. After the CDs are copied, they are brought to an assembly area where an employee packs the CD with a jewel case and song lyric insert. The direct labor cost is $0.25 per unit. The CDs are sold to record stores. Each record store is given promotional materials, such as posters and aisle displays. Promotional materials cost $40 per record store. In addition, shipping costs average $0.25 per CD.

Total completed production was 1,000,000 units during the year. Other information is as follows:

Number of customers (record stores) 42,500

Number of CDs sold 850,000

Wholesaler price (to record store) per CD $16

Factory overhead cost is applied to jobs at the rate of $1,200 per copy machine hour. There were an additional 25,000 copied CDs, packages, and inserts waiting to be assembled on December 31, 2010.

Instructions:

1. Prepare an annual income statement for the Smashing Britney CD, including supporting calculations. Enter all amounts as positive numbers.

2. Determine the balances in the work in process and finished goods inventory for the Smashing Britney CD on December 31, 2010.

acc301 an analysis of the accounts of chamberlin manufacturing reveals the following 492391

An analysis of the accounts of Chamberlin Manufacturing reveals the following manufacturing cost data for the month ended June 30, 2008.

Inventories

Beginning

Ending

Raw materials

9,000

13,100

Work in process

5,000

7,000

Finished goods

9,000

6,000

Costs incurred: Raw materials purchases $54,000, direct labor $57,000, manufacturing overhead $19,900.
The specific overhead costs were: indirect labor $5,500, factory insurance $4,000, machinery depreciation $4,000, machinery repairs $1,800, factory utilities $3,100, miscellaneous factory costs $1,500. Assume that all raw materials used were direct materials.

Instructions
(a) Prepare the cost of goods manufactured schedule for the month ended June 30, 2008.
(b) Show the presentation of the ending inventories on the June 30, 2008, balance sheet.

acc301 bjerg company specializes in manufacturing a unique model of bicycle helmet 492392

Bjerg Company specializes in manufacturing a unique model of bicycle helmet. The model is well accepted by consumers, and the company has enough orders to keep the factory production at 10,000 helmets per month (80% of its full capacity). Bjerg’s monthly manufacturing cost and other expense data are as follows.

Rent on factory equipment

7,000

Insurance on factory building

1,500

Raw materials (plastics, polystyrene, etc.)

75,000

Utility costs for factory

900

Supplies for general office

300

Wages for assembly line workers

43,000

Depreciation on office equipment

800

Miscellaneous materials (glue, thread, etc.)

1,100

Factory manager’s salary

5,700

Property taxes on factory building

400

Advertising for helmets

14,000

Sales commissions

7,000

Depreciation on factory building

1,500

Instructions
(a) Prepare an answer sheet with the following column headings. Enter each cost item on your answer sheet, placing the dollar amount under the appropriate headings. Total the dollar amounts in each of the columns.

(b) Compute the cost to produce one helmet

acc301 utech company bottles and distributes livit a diet soft drink the beverage is 492394

Utech Company bottles and distributes Livit, a diet soft drink. The beverage is sold for 50 cents per 16-ounce bottle to retailers, who charge customers 75 cents per bottle. For the year 2010, management estimates the following revenues and costs.

Net sales

1,800,000

Selling expenses-variable

70,000

Direct materials

430,000

Selling expenses-fixed

65,000

Direct labor

352,000

Administrative expenses-variable

20,000

Manufacturing overhead-variable

316,000

Administrative expenses-fixed

60,000

Manufacturing overhead-fixed

283,000

Instructions:
a) Prepare a CVP income statement for 2008 based on management’s estimates.

b) Compute the break-even point in (1) units and (2) dollars.

c) Compute the contribution margin ratio and the margin of safety ratio.

d) Determine the sales dollars required to earn net income of $238,000.

acc301 the bookkeeper for biggio corporation made these errors in journalizing and p 492395

The bookkeeper for Biggio Corporation made these errors in journalizing and posting.

1. A credit posting of $400 to Accounts Receivable was omitted.

2. A debit posting of $750 for Prepaid Insurance was debited to Insurance Expense.

3. A collection on account of $100 was journalized and posted as a debit to Cash $100 and a credit to Accounts Payable $100.

4. A credit posting of $300 to Property Taxes Payable was made twice.

5. A cash purchase of supplies for $250 was journalized and posted as a debit to Supplies $25 and a credit to Cash $25.

6. A debit of $395 to Advertising Expense was posted as $359.

For each error, indicate (a) whether the trial balance will balance; if the trial balance will not balance, indicate (b) the amount of the difference, and (c) the trial balance column that will have the larger total. Consider each error separately. Use the following form, in which error 1 is given as an example.

acc301 on april1 flint hills travel agency inc was established these transactions we 492396

On April1 Flint Hills Travel Agency Inc. was established. These transactions were completed during the month.

Analyze transactions and compute net income.

1. Stockholders invested $25,000 cash in the company in exchange for common stock.

2. Paid $900 cash for April office rent.

3. Purchased office equipment for $2,800 cash.

4. Purchased $200 of advertising in the Chicago Tribune, on account.

5. Paid $500 cash for office supplies.

6. Earned $10,000 for services provided: Cash of $1,000 is received from customers, and the balance of $9,000 is billed to customers on account.

7. Paid $400 cash dividends.

8. Paid Chicago Tribune amount due in transaction (4).

9. Paid employees’ salaries $1,200.

10. Received $9,000 in cash from customers billed previously in transaction (6).

Instructions:

(a) Prepare a tabular analysis of the transactions using these column headings: Cash, Accounts Receivable, Supplies, Office Equipment, Accounts Payable, Common Stock, and Retained Earnings (with separate columns for Revenues, Expenses, and Dividends). Include margin explanations for any changes in Retained Earnings.

(b) From an analysis of the Retained Earnings columns, compute the net income or net loss for April.

acc301 the following control procedures are used in falk company for over the counte 492397

The following control procedures are used in Falk Company for over-the-counter cash receipts.

1. Cashiers are experienced; thus, they are not bonded.

2. All over-the-counter receipts are registered by three clerks who share a cash register with a single cash drawer.

3. To minimize the risk of robbery, cash in excess of $100 is stored in an unlocked attaché case in the stock room until it is deposited in the bank.

4. At the end of each day the total receipts are counted by the cashier on duty and reconciled to the cash register total.

5. The company accountant makes the bank deposit and then records the day’s receipts.

Instructions

a. For each procedure, explain the weakness in internal control and identify the control principle that is violated.

b. For each weakness, suggest a change in the procedure that will result in good internal control.

acc301 on july 31 2010 fenton company had a cash balance per books of 6 140 the stat 492398

On July 31, 2010, Fenton Company had a cash balance per books of $6,140. The statement from Jackson State Bank on that date showed a balance of $7,695.80. A comparison of the bank statement with the cash account revealed the following facts.

1. The bank service charge for July was $25.

2. The bank collected a note receivable of $1,500 for Fenton Company on July 15, plus $30 of interest. The bank made a $10 charge for the collection. Fenton has not accrued any interest on the note.

3. The July 31 receipts of $1,193.30 were not included in the bank deposits for July. These receipts were deposited by the company in a night deposit vault on July 31.

4. Company check No. 2480 issued to H. Coby, a creditor, for $384 that cleared the bank in July was incorrectly entered in the cash payments journal on July 10 for $348.

5. Checks outstanding on July 31 totaled $1,980.10.

6. On July 31 the bank statement showed an NSF charge of $690 for a check received by the company from P. Figura, a customer, on account.

Instructions

a. Prepare the bank reconciliation as of July 31.

b. Prepare the necessary adjusting entries at July 31.

acc301 on june 1 eckersley service co was started with an initial investment in the 492399

On June 1 Eckersley Service Co. was started with an initial investment in the company of $26,200 cash. Here are the assets and liabilities of the company at June 30, and the revenues and expenses for the month of June, its first month of operations:

Cash

4,660

Notes payable

12,000

Accounts receivable

4,000

Accounts payable

500

Revenue

7,000

Supplies expense

1,000

Supplies

2,400

Gas and oil expense

600

Advertising expense

400

Utilities expense

300

Equipment

29,000

Wage expense

1,400

In June, the company issued no additional stock, but paid dividends of $2,000.

Instructions

(a) Prepare an income statement and a retained earnings statement for the month of June and a balance sheet at June 30, 2010.

(b) Briefly discuss whether the company’s first month of operations was a success.

(c) Discuss the company’s decision to distribute a dividend.

decker company has five products in its inventory information about the december 31 492402

Decker Company has five products in its inventory. Information about the December 31, 2011, inventory follows.

Product

Quantity

Unit Cost

Unit Replacement Cost

Unit Selling price

A

1,000

10

12

16

B

800

15

11

18

c

600

3

2

8

D

200

7

4

6

E

600

14

12

13

The selling cost for each product consists of a 15 percent sales commission. The normal profit percentage for each product is 40 percent of the selling price.

Required:
1. Determine the balance sheet inventory carrying value at December 31, 2011, assuming the LCM rule is applied to individual products.

2. Determine the balance sheet inventory carrying value at December 31, 2011, assuming the LCM rule is applied to the entire inventory. Also, assuming that Decker recognizes an inventory write-down as a separate income statement item, determine the amount of the loss.

par carts inc produces special order golf carts so par carts uses a job order costin 492403

Job Order Costing: T Account Analysis
Par Carts, Inc., produces special-order golf carts, so Par Carts uses a job order costing system. Overhead is applied at the rate of 90 percent of direct labor cost. The following is a list of transactions for January:

Jan 1. Purchased direct materials on account, $215,400.

Jan 2. Purchased indirect materials on account, $49,500.

Jan 4. Requested direct materials costing $193,200 (all used on Job X) and indirect materials costing $38,100 for production.

Jan 10. Paid the following overhead costs: utilities $4,400; manufacturing rent $3,800; and maintenance charges, $3,900.

Jan 15. Recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees: direct labor, $120,000 (all for Job X); indirect labor $60,620.

Jan 15. Applied overhead to production.

Jan 19. Purchased indirect materials costing $27,550 and direct materials costing $190,450 on account.

Jan 21. Requested direct materials costing $214,750 (Job X $178,170; Job Y $18,170 and Job Z $18,410) and indirect materials costing $31,400 for production.

Jan 31. Recorded the following gross wages and salaries for employees: direct labor $132,000 (Job X $118,500; Job Y $7,000; Job Z $6,500); indirect labor $62,240. Jan 31. Applied overhead to production.

Jan 31. Completed and transferred Job X (375 carts) and Job Y (10 carts) to finished goods inventory; total costs was $855,900.

Jan 31. Shipped Job X to the customer, total production cost was $824,520 and sales price was $996,800.
Jan 31. Recorded these overhead costs (adjusting entries); prepaid insurance expired $3,700; property taxes (payable at year end) $3,400 and depreciation-machinery $15,500.

Required:
1. Record the entries for all transactions in January using T accounts below. Enter the transactions in chronological order. Assume no beginning inventory balances. Use job order cost cards for Job X, Job Y, and Job Z to determine the following costs. If required, round the total costs to the nearest dollar. When computing the product unit cost for Job X and Job Y, round to two decimal places. Also assume that when the payroll was recorded, entries were made to the Payroll Payable account.

2. Compute the amount of underapplied or overapplied overhead as of January 31 and transfer it to the Cost of Goods Sold account. (Use rounded amounts in your computation.)
3. Why should the Overhead account’s underapplied or overapplied overhead be transferred to the Cost of Goods Sold account?

at december 31 2011 ethan company reports the following results for it s calendar ye 492404

At December 31, 2011, Ethan Company reports the following results for it’s calendar year.

Cash Sales

1,803,750

Credit Sales

3,534,000

In addition, its unadjusted trial balance includes the following items.

Accounts receivable (debit)

1,070,100

Allowance for doubtful accounts (debit)

15,750

Requirements:

1. Prepare the adjusting entry for this company to recognize bad debts under each of the following independent assumptions

a. Bad debts are estimated to be 2% of credit sales

b. Bad debts are estimated to be 1% of total sales

c. An aging analysis estimates that 5% of year end accounts receivable are uncollectible.

2. Show how accounts receivable and the allowance for doubtful accounts appear on its’ December 31, 2011, balance sheet given the facts in part 1a

3. Show how accounts receivable and the allowance for doubtful accounts appear on its December 31, 2011, balance sheet given the facts in part 1c

atlas co allows select customers to make purchases on credit it s other customers ca 492405

Atlas Co. allows select customers to make purchases on credit. It’s other customers can use either of two credit cards: Zisa or Access. Zisa deducts a 3% service charge for sales on its credit card and credits the bank account of Atlas immediately when credit card receipts are deposited. Atlas deposits the Zisa credit card receipts each business day. When customers use Access credit cards. Atlas accumulates the receipts for several days before submitting them to Access for payment. Access deducts a 2% service charge and usually pays within one week of being billed. Atlas completes the following transactions in June. (the terms of all credit sales are 2/15, n/30, and all sales are recorded at the gross price.)

June 4. Sold $750 of merchandise (that had cost $500) on credit to Anne Cianci.

June 5 Sold $5,900 of merchandise (that had cost $3,200) to customers who used their Zisa cards.

June 6 Sold $4,800 of merchandise (that had cost $2,800) to customers who used their Access cards.

June 8 Sold $3,200 of merchandise (that had cost $1,900) to customers who used their Access cards.

June 10 Submitted Access card receipts accumulated since June 6 to credit card company for payment.

June 13 Wrote off the account of Nakia Well against the allowance for Doubtful Accounts. The $329 balance in Well’s account stemmed from a credit sale in October of last year.

June 17 Received the amount due from Access.

June 18 Received Cianci’s check in full payment for the purchase of June 4.

Required:

Prepare journal entries to record the preceding transactions and events. (the company uses the perpetual inventory system. round amounts to the nearest dollar).

walters audio visual inc offers a stock option plan to its regional managers on janu 492406

Walters Audio Visual, Inc., offers a stock option plan to its regional managers. On January 1, 2011, options were granted for 40 million $1 par common shares. The exercise price is the market price on the grant date, $8 per share. Options cannot be exercised prior to January 1, 2013, and expire December 31, 2017. The fair value of the options, estimated by an appropriate option pricing model, is $2 per option. Because the plan does not qualify as an incentive plan, Walters will receive a tax deduction upon exercise of the options equal to the excess of the market price at exercise over the exercise price. The income tax rate is 40%.

Required:

1. Determine the total compensation cost pertaining to the stock option plan.

2. Prepare the appropriate journal entries to record compensation expense and its tax effect on December 31, 2011.

3. Prepare the appropriate journal entries to record compensation expense and its tax effect on December 31, 2012.

4. Record the exercise of the options and their tax effect if all of the options are exercised on March 20, 2016, when the market price is $12 per share.

5. Assume the option plan qualifies as an incentive plan. Prepare the appropriate journal entries to record compensation expense and its tax effect on December 31, 2011.

6. Assuming the option plan qualifies as an incentive plan, record the exercise of the options and their tax effect if all of the options are exercised on March 20, 2016, when the market price is $11 per share.

panada manufacturing pm is a division of worldwide communications inc pm produces pa 492407

Panada Manufacturing (PM) is a division of Worldwide Communications, Inc. PM produces pagers and other personal communication devices. These devices are sold to other Worldwide divisions, as well as to other communication companies. PM was recently approached by the manager of the Personal Communications Division regarding a request to make a special pager designed to receive signals from anywhere in the world. The Personal Communications Division has requested that PM produce 10,000 units of this special pager. The following facts are available regarding the Panda Manufacturing Division:
Selling price of standard pager 95

Variable cost of standard pager 50

Additional variable cost of special pager 35

Instructions
For each of the following independent situations, calculate the minimum transfer price, and discuss whether the internal transfer should take place or whether the Personal Communications Division should purchase the pager externally. Show your work.
(a) The Personal Communications Division has offered to pay the PM Division $105 per pager. The PM Division has no available capacity. The PM Division would have to forego sales of 10,000 pagers to existing customers in order to meet the request of the Personal Communications Division.
(b) The Personal Communications Division has offered to pay the PM Division $160 per pager. The PM Division has no available capacity. The PM Division would have to forego sales of 14,000 pagers to existing customers in order to meet the request of the Personal Communications Division.
(c) The Personal Communications Division has offered to pay the PM Division $105 per pager. The PM Division has available capacity.